JP2023119031A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: There is provided displacement means displaceable to a first position in which game balls can enter second ball entry means and a second position in which game balls cannot easily enter the second ball entry means. The displacement means is displaced from the second position to the first position on the basis of satisfaction of a first condition in a specific game state occurring on the basis that a result of determination by determination means is a specific determination result, and the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position on the basis of satisfaction of a second condition in a situation in which the displacement means is positioned in the first position by first displacement control. When game balls enter first ball entry means, a predetermined game value is granted to a player. A first mode based on execution of determination, a second mode based on occurrence of a specific game state, and a third mode based on predetermined entry of game balls into the second ball entry means can at least occur. Accordingly, an interest in a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the interest of the player in the game by suggesting to the player that the lottery result is winning according to the contents of the variable performance that is executed. be.

JP-A-2006-345901

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises shooting means capable of shooting a game ball into a game area, first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means, and Acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means is established, and the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means can be stored. storage means, and determination means capable of performing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied, and the result of the determination by the determination means is A means capable of generating a specific game state based on a specific determination result, and a game ball fired by the shooting means can be entered, and is different from the first ball entering means. A second ball entering means, a first position for allowing a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means from the first position. a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position; a second displacement control that displaces the displacement means to the second position, and a displacement control means that can execute at least the displacement control means, the displacement control means is the first that can be established in the specific game state The first displacement control is executed based on the satisfaction of a condition, and based on the satisfaction of a second condition that can be satisfied in a situation where the displacement means is positioned at the first position by the first displacement control. The gaming machine is configured to execute the second displacement control at least when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, a predetermined value is given to the player. A first mode based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific game state, and a predetermined entry into the second ball entry means It is configured so that at least the third aspect based on spheres can occur.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the shooting means capable of shooting the game ball to the game area, the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means, and the first ball entering means Acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the entry of a game ball is established; Storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means; determination means capable of performing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied, and the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. Means capable of generating a specific game state based on what happened, and second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, wherein the game ball launched by the launching means can be entered. a first position that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entering means; and a second position that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the first position. a displacement means capable of being displaced between two positions; a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position; and the displacement means positioned at the first position. to the second position, and a displacement control means capable of executing at least a second displacement control means, and the displacement control means has established a first condition that can be established in the specific game state. and executing the first displacement control based on the first displacement control, and the second displacement based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation where the displacement means is positioned at the first position by the first displacement control The game machine is configured to give a predetermined value to the player when a game ball enters at least the first ball entering means. , a first mode based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific game state, and a third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means and at least can occur.

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the ending of the jackpot game in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during probability variation in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the second special symbol is not changed after the first special symbol hit variation starts in the first embodiment, and (b) is the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special design is a small hit during RUSH in a form. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is fluctuating after the start of the winning fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special design stops variation during the hit variation of the 1st special design in a form. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a jackpot A during RUSH in the first embodiment, and (b) is a RUSH in the first embodiment Inside, it is the figure which shows one example of the state where the result of the fluctuation display of the 1st special design becomes big hit C or big hit D. (a) is a diagram showing a card-forgotten warning screen in the first embodiment, and (b) to (d) are timing charts showing the timing of displaying the card-forgotten warning screen in the first embodiment. be. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first per random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small per random number table, (c), It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd hit random number table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table; It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normals typically. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the table for time saving and probability variation, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the table for latency / certainty. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 3A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an additional effect selection table. 2 is a block diagram of the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface E. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing which is executed by MPU in main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process that is executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviating stop processing that is executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows small hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control device. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing stop type command reception processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart illustrating status command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp controller; FIG. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the hit-related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot-related processing performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flow chart showing remaining number update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing temporary stop-related processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing variable restart processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for special figures 1 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing for special figures 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device. 4 is a flow chart showing various counter updating processes executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rush entry command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing additional effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game when the jackpot C is won in the variable probability state in the second embodiment. It is a relationship diagram of the game content of the special figure 1 game after the variable probability state in the second embodiment is set and the grant privilege. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is fluctuating when the winning symbol of the first special symbol is stopped in the second embodiment, and (b) is a second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special design stops during the design stop of the 1st special design in a form. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 2 table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the outlier type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 2 tables for time saving and probability variation. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol fixed period setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during fixed time which is performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol movement stop processing 2 that is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol fixed period setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviating stop processing 2 that is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing a remaining count update process 2 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing temporary stop-related processing 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing restart processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the design decision related processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing various counter update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; It is a relationship diagram of the game content of the special figure 1 game after the variable probability state in the third embodiment and the grant privilege. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the first variation after the jackpot. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third variation after the big win in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the fourth variation after the big win. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third variation after the jackpot when the third variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment is a jackpot, and (b) is between the 1st and 3rd variations after the jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the second variation after the big hit when winning the special figure 1 small per. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a third embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first per random number 3 table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small per random number 3 table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the big hit type selection 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table, (c), It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of probability variation A table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variable probability B table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variable probability C table, and (c) is the variable probability D table. is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a 3-table for confirmation; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a third embodiment; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a third embodiment; 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable probability effect selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation stop processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; 14 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 3 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the jackpot completion performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for probability variations performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when winning the special figure 1 jackpot during the variable probability state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows the flow when the time reduction is digested during the variable probability state It is a timing chart shown. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of RUSH rush by reaching the number of times of time reduction in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a RUSH during special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation in the fourth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content alert|reported. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when winning the drop lottery during the latent state in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a special figure during the latent state in the fourth embodiment It is the figure which showed the display screen at the time of winning big hit by 2. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in super RUSH in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically about the counter etc. which are provided in RAM203 of the main controller 110 in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a fourth embodiment; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a fourth embodiment; 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a falling lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a probability mode selection table, and (c) is a falling It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the information selection table typically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 4 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing state command processing 4 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing latent mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a fall effect setting process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit related process 4 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 4 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing fall notification processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 for special figures 1 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device for small hits. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device for small winning. It is the operation figure which looked at the variable prize winning device for small hitting from the back side. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the variable probability state in the fifth embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of time reduction digestion during probability variation state in 5th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display content when a small hit is made in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content during a small hit game. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball passes through a falling gate during a small winning game in the fifth embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the content of a display when it does not pass. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the end of the small hit, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the latent certainty state (invincible mode). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 5th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection 5 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation scenario storage area. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifth embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows small hit entrance passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing fall gate passage processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing state command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 5 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing ball passage-related processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a big hit state flag, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a small hit state flag. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing fluctuation condition determination processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an electric accessary product opening/closing process 6 executed by an MPU in a main control device in a sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing round execution processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big-hit interruption processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing ending execution processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is an enlarged view of a channel unit in the seventh embodiment; (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the closed state (buried state) in the seventh embodiment; ) is a perspective view schematically showing the flow of spheres. (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the open state (protruding state) in the seventh embodiment; ) is a perspective view schematically showing the flow of spheres. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content at the time of hitting the second symbol in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, (b) is the second entrance in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball enters the . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is out during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment 2 is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the ball is flowing down the delay passage during the special figure 2 fluctuation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the ball is flowing down the normal passage during the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, (b) is the seventh embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of V passing during the small hit game in a form. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when V does not pass during the small winning game during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a time saving state in the seventh embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the content of a display when the time saving state A is set. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment, (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first per random number 7 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol 2 random number table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first hit type selection 7 table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second random number 7 table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning classification selection 7 table. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the variation pattern 7 table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first time-saving variation pattern table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second time-saving variation pattern table. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an open scenario 7 table; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of small hit V passage in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a seventh embodiment; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents of a delay passage state flag; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit in a seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving number of times update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing V passage processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an electric accessary product opening/closing process 7 executed by an MPU in a main control device in a seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start processing performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed time saving production related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of completion|finish per normal figure performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing ball passing monitoring processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. (a) is a plan view schematically showing a case where the opening/closing door 3650f of the second attacker 3650 in the eighth embodiment is in an open state, and (b) is the second attacker 3650 in the eighth embodiment. is a plan view schematically showing a case where an opening/closing door 3650f of is in a closed state. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the eighth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the ball to the second attacker. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the eighth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the ball to the second ball entrance. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a ball during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment. is a diagram showing an example of display content when the ball enters the second ball entrance. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, (b) is after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment It is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the special figure 2 in-game screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when winning the special figure 2 small hit in the normal state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a special figure 2 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when winning a prize. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the special figure 2 game during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment, (b) is the final special figure fluctuation end during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of display contents at time; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main controller in an eighth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a first per random number 8 table in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st winning classification selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an operation scenario 8 table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario type in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd per random number 8 table in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection 8 table in the eighth embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 8 tables for normal / latent certainty in the eighth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the 8 tables for time saving / certain variation in the eighth embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to an eighth embodiment; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to an eighth embodiment; 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation start process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 8 executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eighth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 8 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the pending|holding ball number related process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a decreasing process performed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 8 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main-control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing game state update processing 9 executed by an MPU in a main control device in a ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the stop screen of the jackpot symbol in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is an example of the display content during the symbol confirmation period of the jackpot C in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure showing. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd winning random number 10 table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 10 table. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a specific winning motion pattern table; FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation processing 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing specific ball entry processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content in a modified example of the seventh embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram showing a high-probability second winning random number table 202ja in a modification of the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a low-probability second winning random number table 202ja in a modification of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a random number 11 table 202jb; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 11 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a modified example of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 11 executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modified example of the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when winning a special figure 2 small hit in the latent state in the modification of the fourth embodiment, (b) is a modification of the fourth embodiment It is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the special figure 2 is elected in the latent state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot content suggesting effect in a modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the effect result of the jackpot content suggesting effect in a modification of the fourth embodiment. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a modification of the fourth embodiment; (b) is a schematic view of the audio ramp control device according to a modification of the fourth embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of RAM typically. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a suggested mode selection table in a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents of a suggestive effect selection table in a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 11 executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot related processing 11 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit related processing 11 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modification of a 4th embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing suggestion effect setting processing executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 11 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing suggestion mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the liquid crystal production|presentation execution management process 11 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. (a) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the variable probability state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure, and (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd design display apparatus 81 in probability variable state before river breakthrough production|presentation is performed in 11th Embodiment, and a time saving state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough production in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a river breakthrough production in the eleventh embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the river is successfully broken through in and the continuation of the chance zone is notified. (a) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment when the river is successfully broken through in the river breaking effect and the shift to the latent state (RUSH) is notified. (b) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment when the river breakthrough effect fails to break through the river and the transition to the normal state is notified. It is a diagram showing. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the transition of the game state and the effect mode when the chance zone is set after the end of the jackpot in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the small winning effect of the second special symbol is executed, which suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol is likely to be a big win. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table in the eleventh embodiment, (b) schematically shows the contents of the small winning random number table in the eleventh embodiment It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 11th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time-saving/probability table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the latency table in the eleventh embodiment It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the eleventh embodiment; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the eleventh embodiment; 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the winning sound selection table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing game state update processing 12 executed by an MPU in a main control device in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a second prize winning process 12 executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing state command processing 12 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows small hit related processing 12 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 12 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing during time reduction performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 12 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 12th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is the probability variation number in the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd design display device 81 when it progresses and it transfers to a normal state. (a) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the preparation state from the transition to the consecutive villa mode to the state in which the prize ball can actually be obtained in the twelfth embodiment. (b) is a diagram showing, in the twelfth embodiment, the game ball enters the second ball entrance in the preparation state, and the second special symbol lottery in the case of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3 pattern display apparatus 81. FIG. (a) shows that, in the twelfth embodiment, when the normal mode is shifted to the continuous mode, the held ball of the first special symbol is released, and the second special symbol is drawn twice in succession during the preparation mode. It is a diagram showing the change over time of the production mode in the case of a small win in the third lottery of the second special symbol, and (a) shows the change over time from the normal mode to the consecutive mode in the twelfth embodiment. It is a diagram showing the change over time of the effect mode when the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition to is the lottery result corresponding to "big hit D12". (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the twelfth embodiment, (b) schematically shows the contents of the first winning random number table in the twelfth embodiment It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table in the twelfth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in the twelfth embodiment It is a diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variable probability/latent probability start time table in the twelfth embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for the time of a time saving start in 12th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a table for normal start in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a table for RUSH in the twelfth embodiment. It is a diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a twelfth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 deviation stop processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 13 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing ceiling effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing normal effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 13 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing preparation state setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically showing the contents of a second winning random number table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 13th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variable probability/latent probability start time table in the thirteenth embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 13th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 14 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a flow-down path of a game ball in a state in which an electric accessory is closed in a modification of the thirteenth embodiment; It is the figure which showed the flow-down course of the game ball in the state where the object was released. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 14th Embodiment. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario table in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the A table for probability variation in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the B table for probability variation in 14th Embodiment. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 14th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 15th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the downflow path of the game ball during the time saving state in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the downflow path of the game ball during the latent certainty state in the fifteenth embodiment It is a diagram. In the fifteenth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the transition of the game state and the effect mode when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the variable probability state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of variation per special figure 1 in the probability changing state in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a fifteenth embodiment 3, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the number of times of working hours has passed during the variation of the jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd winning random number table in 15th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time-saving/probability variable table in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the latency table in the fifteenth embodiment It is a schematic diagram. (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd design display when the river breakthrough production|presentation in the modification of 11th Embodiment is started. FIG. 21 is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a sixteenth embodiment; It is a transition diagram schematically showing the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in the sixteenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing game contents and effects modes of a series of effects in the sixteenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the game content and the effect mode of the final variable effect in the 16th embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display content displayed on the third pattern display device in the sixteenth embodiment, (b) is displayed on the third pattern display device in the sixteenth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of normal figure fluctuation production|presentation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in which the normal figure fluctuation effect is executed in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram in the sixteenth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the screen per normal figure displayed on a 3rd design display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of special 2 winning during special 1 fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the 16th embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the production|presentation (challenge game) during special 2 fluctuation|variation displayed on a 3rd pattern display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode when a small hit is won in the special 2 variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode in the 16th embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode at the time of winning a big win during the small win displayed on a 3rd design display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of special 2 winning during special 1 non-fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode at the time of winning small hit by special 2 fluctuation|variation displayed on the 3rd pattern display apparatus in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of one second elapsed from the start of the game per normal pattern displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode in the 16th embodiment It is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the ball does not enter the second winning hole during the normal figure winning game displayed on the third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of 3 seconds from the start of the small winning game displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode in the 16th embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect when a ball|ball does not win a prize in V winning a prize mouth during the small hit game displayed on a 3rd design display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is an effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the sixteenth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram of the third symbol display device in the sixteenth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the time saving final fluctuation|variation displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode of the first half production of the time saving final variation displayed on the third pattern display device in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is the third pattern in the sixteenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the latter half production|presentation of the time saving final variation displayed on a display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode showing the effect result of the second half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the sixteenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time-saving final fluctuation production|presentation displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode at the time of the special 2 hit after the end of the time saving displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixteenth embodiment, (b) is the second in the sixteenth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time-saving final fluctuation|variation production|presentation displayed on a 3 design display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect which shows the completion|finish of a time saving state displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the sixteenth embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a ROM of a main controller in a sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a part of the contents of a RAM of a main controller in a sixteenth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first random number 16 table in the 16th embodiment, (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 16 table in the 16th embodiment (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol 2 random number 16 table in the 16th embodiment, (d) schematically shows a random number 16 table per normal symbol It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table in the sixteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the per normal pattern type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment, (b) is the release of the electric accessory based on the per normal pattern type and the game state It is the figure which showed the content of operation|movement. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a small per type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 small per type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 small per type selection 16 table in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table in 16th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern 16 table in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal variation pattern 16 table in the sixteenth embodiment. be. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a time saving variation pattern 16 table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the sixteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth embodiment. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the time saving final variation pattern selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 16 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 16 performed by MPU in the main controller in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation start process 16 performed by MPU in the main controller in 16th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 16 performed by MPU in the main controller in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 16 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing 16 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal design variation process 16 performed by MPU in the main controller in 16th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the normal map prefetching process performed by MPU in the main controller in 16th Embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing V passage processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit in a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 16 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing 16 performed by MPU in the main controller in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 16 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 16 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning state determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing 16 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing 16 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related command process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a small hit-related command process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth embodiment, (b) is by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth embodiment It is a flow chart showing a normal small winning process to be executed. It is a flowchart which shows the series small hit process for production|presentation performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 16 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 16 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing variation effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting processing for normal figure which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing for time reduction performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing a winning variation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 16 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a series of effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing update processing during game per normal figure executed by MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 16th embodiment, (b) is a flowchart in the audio ramp control device in the 16th embodiment It is a flow chart which shows update processing during a small hit game performed by MPU. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing final variation effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a seventeenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the final variation of time reduction in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) is an effect during the support time displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventeenth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a ROM of a main controller in a seventeenth embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the type selection 17 table per normal pattern in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) is an electric role based on the type and game state per normal pattern in the seventeenth embodiment It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of opening operation|movement of an object. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal variation pattern 17 table in the seventeenth embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal figure fluctuation pattern table in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) schematically shows the normal figure fluctuation pattern table for time saving A in the seventeenth embodiment It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving B in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal design variation process 17 performed by MPU in the main controller in 17th Embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a normal figure effect setting process 17 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in an eighteenth embodiment. It is the enlarged view which expanded the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment typically. It is the enlarged view which expanded the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment typically. (a) and (b) are timing charts schematically showing the flow of presentation of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the eighteenth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed a part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern 18 table in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal variation pattern 18 table in the eighteenth embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 18 table in 18th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 18 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 18 executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device in an eighteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing set effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure set production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 18 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighteenth embodiment; It is the figure which showed the setting method of the series production|presentation in 18th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the nineteenth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the nineteenth embodiment. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure scenario table in 19th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow in which scenario 2 per normal figure is set as a series of production|presentation scenarios in 19th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow which scenario 4 per normal figure is set as a series production|presentation scenario in 19th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 19 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a series of effect determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing 19 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows per-universal figure per related command processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 19th embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process 19 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing constant monitoring effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process 19 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a series of performance prediction setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the ROM content of the audio ramp control device in the twentieth embodiment, and (b) is the content of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the twentieth embodiment. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a final variation effect table in the twentieth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning final table in the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a final table for misalignment in the twentieth embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a final effect variable setting table in a twentieth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning setting table in a twentieth embodiment. . FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a setting table for misalignment in the twentieth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 20 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twentieth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 20 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twentieth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing final winning processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twentieth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing 20 for time reduction performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing final variation effect update processing 20 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twentieth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a twenty-first embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a right-handed notification screen in the first notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-first embodiment, and (b) is a third It is the figure which showed an example of the right hitting information screen in the 2nd information mode displayed on a pattern display apparatus. FIG. 22 is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a twenty-second embodiment; It is the figure which showed typically the flow of the production|presentation of the pachinko machine in 22nd Embodiment. FIG. 23 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a twenty-third embodiment; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display area of the third pattern display device in the twenty-third embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a back mode with a low degree of expectation of a variable probability state among the back modes displayed by the third pattern display device in the twenty-third embodiment, and (b) is It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the back mode with high expectation of probability variation state among the back modes displayed by the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. Of the back modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the twenty-third embodiment, an example of the display mode of the back mode in which at least the continuation of the probability variable state is confirmed until all the held balls at the start of fluctuation are digested is shown. It is a diagram. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the start of the variable probability continuation suggestion production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a low-expectation attack pattern in the variable probability continuation suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third embodiment; In the variable probability continuation suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a high-expectation attack pattern. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the transition of the state after the end of the variable probability jackpot in the twenty-third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of a press stop effect displayed on a third symbol display device according to a twenty-third embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol according to a twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the player performs the first operation (pressing) on the PUSH button during execution of the press stop effect displayed on the display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of a chance charge fan effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display in the twenty-third embodiment In the symbol display device, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the chance charge effect which is executed after the stop of the chance charge symbol. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the twenty-third embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a spirit gauge is consumed, which is displayed on the display device; (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing the change over time of the effect mode during execution of the variable display effect in which the press stop effect is set in the twenty-third embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of an interrupt continuous hit effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third embodiment. 12(a) is a diagram schematically showing an output mode of sound while a PUSH button is repeatedly hit during execution of an interrupting repeated hit effect in the twenty-third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram of the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between execution timings of repeated hitting operations and monster subtraction numbers during execution of repeated interrupt effects in the mode. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time of the presentation mode of the variable display presentation in which the continuous interrupt presentation is set in the twenty-third embodiment. (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the pending|holding batch change production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when the player presses the PUSH button during execution of the pending batch change effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third embodiment. be. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the twenty-third embodiment; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a twenty-third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a twenty-third embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the normal winning random number 23 table in the 23rd embodiment. and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the falling lottery table in the twenty-third embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the twenty-third embodiment, and (b) is for the special figure 1 jackpot 23 in the twenty-third embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table, (c) is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 23 table for special figure 2 jackpots in 23rd Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 23rd embodiment, (b) is the variation pattern selection 23 table in the 23rd embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for normals to comprise. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the probability variation / time reduction table that constitutes the variation pattern selection 23 table in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method in the twenty-third embodiment; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the twenty-third embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the twenty-third embodiment; be. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the back mode lottery table in the twenty-third embodiment; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the hold change lottery table in the twenty-third embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the change point calculation table in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the batch change lottery table in the twenty-third embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the chance charge lottery table in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a continuation-suggestion effect selection table in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of an interrupt consecutive hitting lottery table in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of an audio output device in a twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the twenty-third embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 23 performed by MPU in the main controller in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 23 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing 23 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a twenty-third embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-third embodiment. 23 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit in a twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a twenty-third embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 23 performed by MPU in the main controller in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation|movement setting process 23 performed by MPU in the main controller in 23rd Embodiment. 19 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 23 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a twenty-third embodiment; 19 is a flow chart showing a winning process 23 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing 23 executed by an MPU in a main control device in a twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 23rd embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 23 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing a press stop effect process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing interrupt repeated hit effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing batch change effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; 23 is a flow chart showing charge consumption processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing press detection processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing stop operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing repeated hitting operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing change operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; 23 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 23 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; 23 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 23 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a pending advance notice lottery process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing 23 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 23 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process 23 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 23rd embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a continuation suggestion effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing rear mode lottery processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing effect mode selection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-third embodiment; (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-third embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing repeated hitting sound command processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing interruption command processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing audio setting processing executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the long press production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 24th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a sound mode and a display mode when a long press is continuously performed during a long press effect in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a sound mode and a display mode when pressing is interrupted in the middle of a long-press effect in the twenty-fourth embodiment; (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the transition of the number of gauges and the elapsed time during the long press effect in the twenty-fourth embodiment. (a) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, is a diagram schematically showing the corresponding relationship between the voice mode and the display mode during execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, (b) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the voice mode and the display mode when the hold becomes 0 during execution of the continuous suggestive effect; In the twenty-fourth embodiment, it is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the sound mode and the display mode when winning a jackpot during execution of the variable probability continuation suggestive effect. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the twenty-fourth embodiment, (b) is in the ROM of the main controller in the twenty-fourth embodiment FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a set suggestion rendering table; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the twenty-fourth embodiment; (b) is a reproduction speed selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the twenty-fourth embodiment; It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 24 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing long-press effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing processing during long press execution executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing long press start processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing pseudo fluctuation setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 24 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process 24 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a winning process during suggestion effect executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing interruption command processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the voice mode and the display mode when the suspension becomes 0 during execution of the continuous suggestive effect in the modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a repeated hitting standby period displayed by the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a repeated hitting period displayed by . (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the internal value displayed on the third symbol display device according to the twenty-fifth embodiment reaches the upper limit, and (b) is a third symbol according to the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the difference between the display value displayed on the display device and the internal value is 3 or more; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode after the repetition period progress displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 25th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of repeated hit effects in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 120 is a diagram schematically showing an effect pattern when scenario 1 is set during the continuous hit effect in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 32B is a diagram schematically showing another pattern of the effect pattern when scenario 1 is set during the repeated hit effect in the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a diagram schematically showing another pattern of the effect pattern at the time of scenario 2 set during the continuous hit effect in the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of an internal scenario table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the audio ramp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a pressing lottery table set in a ROM of . (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of an upper limit value selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; (b) is a diagram showing the sound ramp control in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a difference upper limit value selection table set in the ROM of the apparatus; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the continuous hitting effect setting flag set in the RAM of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 25 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing repeated hit effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a second consecutive hit effect process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a third consecutive hit effect process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing press detection processing 25 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing repeated hitting operation detection processing 25 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect mode selection processing 25 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing basic presentation mode selection processing 25 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the first operation effective period is set as a jackpot middle effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth embodiment, b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a valid period for the second operation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth embodiment is set. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the first operation effective period is set as a jackpot middle effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth embodiment, b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a valid period for the second operation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth embodiment is set. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the production|presentation during a big-hit performed during the big-hit game in 26th Embodiment. FIG. 32A is a diagram schematically showing an effect pattern when scenario 1 is set during the continuous hit effect in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a transition timer start timing table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment; (b) is a diagram showing the sound ramp in the twenty-sixth embodiment; It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the number-of-effects selection table set to ROM of the control apparatus. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 26 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing repeated hit effect processing 26 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a third consecutive hit effect process 26 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing repeated hitting operation detection processing 26 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing 26 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a winning effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing round effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a winning effect end setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode when the effect is variable in the continuous hit effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode after the variable invalid period in the continuous hit production|presentation displayed with a 3rd design display device. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the contents of various effects executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the continuous hit effect in which the operation effective period is set in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; (b) is a button display mode selection set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; It is the figure which showed the specification content of the table typically. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 27 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing timer processing during rendering executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing repeated hitting operation detection processing 27 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing normal operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing operation processing during presentation executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a twenty-eighth embodiment; (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode during variation of the latent state special figure 1 small hit displayed by the third symbol display device in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the invincible mode in the twenty-eighth embodiment and during the special figure 2 disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode after the special figure fluctuation|variation frequency of the latent certainty state displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 28th Embodiment exceeds 50 times. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the twenty-eighth embodiment, (b) is the first random number 28 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the twenty-eighth embodiment (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit random number 28 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 28th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the jackpot classification selection 28 table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the small hitting classification selection 28 table set to ROM of the main controller in 28th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 28 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 28th embodiment, (b) is the variation pattern selection 28 table in the 28th embodiment FIG. 12C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first concealment use table that constitutes, and (c) schematically shows the defined contents of the second concealment use table that constitutes the variation pattern selection 28 table in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process 28 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation|variation process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in 28th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 deviation stop processing 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in 28th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 28 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 28 for special figures 1 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 28 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 during latent certainty processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 28 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing various counter update processing 28 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process 28 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. FIG. 29 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a twenty-ninth embodiment; (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 29 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 29th embodiment, (b) is the variation pattern selection 29 table in the 29th embodiment FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first concealment 29 table that constitutes; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a twenty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing main processing 29 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 29 for special figures 1 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 29th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing winning opening determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-ninth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode during the time-saving final variation displayed on the third pattern display device in the thirtieth embodiment, (b) is the third in the thirtieth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of consuming all the stocks during the time-saving final fluctuation|variation displayed with a pattern display apparatus. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the stock is not used during the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the special stock is consumed during the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirtieth embodiment. FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode in the second half of the time saving final variation displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a third figure in the thirtieth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the revival jackpot in the latter half of the time saving final fluctuation|variation displayed with a pattern display apparatus. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the production|presentation performed by the special figure 2 final fluctuation|variation in the time saving state in 30th embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the thirtieth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the thirtieth embodiment; be. FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a character selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the thirtieth embodiment; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a character selection table set in the ROM of the voice ramp control device in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a view showing the voice ramp control device in the thirtieth embodiment FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a display icon selection table set in a ROM of . 29 is a flowchart showing final variation effect update processing 30 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirtieth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing first period effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirtieth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing second period effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirtieth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing third period effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirtieth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 30 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirtieth embodiment; It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the production|presentation performed in the time-saving final variation in 31st Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the 31st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a notification period selection 31 table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the thirty-first embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing final variation effect update processing 31 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirty-first embodiment;

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16a is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. The opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the exit 66, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 ( (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first ball-entering hole 64, the second ball-entering hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of 13 .

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

A first pattern display device 37 (37A, 37A, 37B) are provided. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. will be In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) determines whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (upper first ball entrance 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2), It is configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 or not. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, an upper first ball entrance 64b1 and a lower first ball entrance 64b2 are provided as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In the following description, when referring to both the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2, the term "first ball entrance 64" will simply be used.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state, the time saving state, or the normal state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable state. , indicating by the lighting state whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, a missing pattern, or a small winning pattern, or indicating the number of pending balls by the lighting state. , 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and error display. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, a 15R short-time jackpot, and a 2R short-time jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, "15R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a probability variable state, which is a high probability state of special patterns and a high probability state of normal patterns after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. There is, and "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to (sets) a probability variable state in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpot. In addition, "15R time saving jackpot" is a time saving state, which is a low probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times ) It is a jackpot to be set, and “2R time saving jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is set for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot of two rounds. .

In addition, the "special symbol high probability state" is a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, in other words, it is a game state that easily shifts to a special game state. The "normal symbol high probability state" is a state in which the probability of winning a normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a game state in which the electric accessory 64a is easily released.

In addition, the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the "high probability state of normal design" is set not only increases the probability of winning the normal design (second design), but also lower first entrance 64b2. As the time during which the electric accessary 64a associated with is released, a longer time is set than in the game state (potential state, normal state) in which the "normal symbol low probability state" is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 compared to when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to win prizes. Therefore, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the ball is likely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 during the variable probability state or the time saving state, or in addition to changing the opening time, once A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessary 64a is opened in the hit than during the normal state. In addition, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened and the electric accessory is hit once. At least one of the number of times 64a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with that in the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the entry of the ball into either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is used as a trigger (opportunity) to display the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern (decorative pattern) while synchronizing with the variable display, and a ball to the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided which is composed of an LED that variably displays a normal symbol (second symbol) with passage as a trigger.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

In this way, the decorative third pattern is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first pattern (special pattern) displayed on the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, and the dynamic display of the third pattern is performed. By configuring the display mode to be notified to the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified ( For example, even if the processing load of the main controller 110 is reduced by a blinking display mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated in units of 0.1 seconds, the third symbol set by the sound lamp control device 113 For example, by variably setting the target display mode based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), a dynamic display mode (the second Production mode using 3 symbols) can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 .

The second pattern display device alternately lights up the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as normal symbols (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is It is configured to be in an activated state (activated to an open state) only for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter in the normal symbol high probability state (variable probability state, time saving state) than in the case of the low probability state (normal state, latent probability state) of the normal symbol as the game state. is set to be As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the high probability state of the normal symbols, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than in the low probability state of the normal symbols. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

Therefore, during the variable probability state and during the time saving state, it can be set as a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability state is set as the gaming state and when the time saving state is set, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The same display mode is set as the background mode to be displayed on the screen to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of guessing the current game situation.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of game states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same. is configured to set the display mode of Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the current game state by the operation state of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

In addition, during the variable probability state or the time reduction state, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is set shorter than during the normal state during the variable probability state or during the time saving state, the probability may be constant regardless of the game state. Also, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessary 64a for one hit may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board in the right area (right area) of the variable display device unit 80 . The through gate 67 is configured to allow passage of a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols and high probability state of normal symbols), time saving state (special There are four game states: a low probability state of symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols) and a latent state (high probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols). And it is configured so that the latent state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

In other words, when the latent state is set, the variation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, and another game state is set. By defining the period to be shorter than when it is set, the lottery advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently.

In the first embodiment, in order to make the lottery of the second special symbol more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first variable The first specific prize winning opening 65a of the prize winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds x 1 time, 0.2 seconds x 6 times, or 0.06 seconds x 8 times). Therefore, in the lottery for the second special symbol, even if the player does not win the jackpot, the player is given many chances to enter the ball into the first specific winning port 65a to win the prize ball. Better than lottery. Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, the result of the losing lottery in which the first specific prize winning opening 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small win".

In the lottery of the second special pattern, the first specific prize winning port 65a is opened even in the case of a small win in addition to the big win, so that the prize ball can be obtained in a latent state in which the fluctuation time of the second special pattern is short. can continue to increase. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of a latent definite state. In a general game machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, the variable probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide novel game characteristics.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous using the variable method). As a result, even when the variable display of one special pattern is being executed, the variable display of the other special pattern can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special patterns can be executed more efficiently. can. Also, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating simultaneously, if one of them stops fluctuating with a big hit or a small hit stop pattern, the other fluctuating display will show the remaining fluctuating time or lottery. Regardless of the result, it will be stopped with a stop symbol that is out. As a result, during execution of a big win or a small win, the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a win or a small win, and it is possible to prevent the problem that the big win or the small win is started redundantly.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2, the various configurations provided in the game area and the flow of balls shot toward the game area in the first embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of this embodiment is configured so that the game area is divided into a left area and a right area by a variable display device unit 80 arranged in the center of the game area. .

In this embodiment, the shot ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operating handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (rotated clockwise) from the initial position (the state in which the player does not rotate). A ball is fired with a moderate firing intensity. Therefore, the shot ball finally flows backward through the shooting channel formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 to become a foul ball. The foul ball flowing backwards passes through the start position of the launch path (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (not shown) flows down and is circulated to the top plate 17 . With this configuration, even if a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot the ball with a desired launch intensity, the foul ball remains in the launch path and the game is played. can be suppressed from interfering with

Next, when the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state in which the player does not rotate), the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that makes it flow down the left side area described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (from 81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum amount of rotation of the operating handle 51), the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that makes it flow down the right side area.

In other words, the present embodiment is configured such that it is possible to change the region where the ball flows down based on the amount of operation of the operating handle 51, that is, based on the player's operation. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set as the game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is adjusted so that the ball flows down the left side area. A game performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right side area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is performed instead of a game performed by adjustment (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game). It is configured as follows. With this configuration, while the game state advantageous to the player is set, the player can keep the operating handle 51 rotated to the upper limit (rotated 120 degrees). Therefore, the player can easily play an appropriate game.

Next, the left area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, the game state is a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability (normal) state), a short time state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability (short time ) state), probability state (special pattern high probability (probability) state: normal pattern high probability (short time) state), latent probability state (special pattern high probability (probability) state: normal pattern low probability (normal) state) is configured to set In addition, a big win game state executed when the lottery result of the special symbols wins a big win and a small win game state executed when the lottery result of the special symbols wins a small win are set. It is configured.

Among them, when the normal state, the time-saving state, and the variable probability state are set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 is caused to perform a left-handed game in which the ball flows down to the left region of the game board 13. A game method is guided to the player by using the display screen of the provided third pattern display device 81, and when the latent state is set, a right-handed game in which the ball is made to flow down to the left area of the game board 13. , the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player on the game method. In addition, during the big win game state or the small win game state, the player's game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is guided according to the game state before winning the winning.

As a guidance method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, a game method suitable for the current game state is always displayed, or only when the game method is switched, after switching It may be configured to display the game method. In addition, of the left-handed game and the right-handed game, the game method (left-handed game in this embodiment) that is easily set for a long period of time is set as the normal game, and when a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured such that the game method is always displayed as guidance, and the guidance display is not performed when the left-handed game is to be played.

As in the present embodiment, when there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player, the other game method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one of the game methods. In other words, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether or not one display mode is displayed. In this embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player on the game method, but the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, the game method may be notified to the player by not displaying a specific display mode, or may be notified to the player using sound or a lamp.

A through gate 67 and a general prize winning opening 63 are arranged in the left area of the game board 13 . An upper first ball entrance 64b1 is provided at a lower position of the variable display device unit 80 so that a ball flowing down the left side area can be entered. A lower first ball entrance 64b2 to which an electric accessory 64a is attached is provided below the upper first ball entrance 64b1. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 when the electric accessory 64a wins the normal pattern (second pattern) lottery. It is configured to variably operate from a closed state (first state) in which it is difficult (impossible) to hit the ball, to an open state (second state) in which it is easy (possible) to hit the ball into the lower first ball inlet 64b2. ing.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the state where the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the variation of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the jackpot game and the small hit game are executed When the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in the state where it is not done), the lottery of special figure 1 is executed. That is, the entry of a ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 serves as a trigger for executing the lottery for the first special symbol.

Also, in a state where the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery cannot be newly executed (a state in which the variation of the special figure 1 has already been executed, or a jackpot game or a small hit game is being executed) When a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, there is storage means for storing the right of entry of the ball up to a predetermined number (4). ing.

Therefore, since the player can continue to play the game even while the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed, the operation of the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, it is provided only in the storage means for storing the right to which the ball enters and the first special symbol.

80% of the balls that flow down the left side area due to the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% of the balls (8 out of 100 balls) that are shot enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by structures such as a plurality of nails and windmills so as to form a sphere. Also, when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state, the ball entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is about 0%, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first ball entrance A ball channel is formed so that about 25% of the balls enter 64b2. That is, the ball is difficult to enter in the order of the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (electric accessory 64a open state), the upper first ball entrance 64b1, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (electric accessory 64a closed state). It is configured to be

As described above, the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are configured to give the player the privilege of paying out prize balls in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery for the first special symbol. It is constructed so that four prize balls are paid out to the player each time one ball enters. In this embodiment, the same number (four) of prize balls is given when a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and when a ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. However, without being limited to this, a different number of prize balls may be set for each.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided in the right area of the game board 13 . The second ball entrance 640 is configured so that a lottery for the second special symbol is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. A spherical channel is formed by a nail. Here, balls that do not enter the second ball entrance 640 flow down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right side area.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (fluctuation time) from the execution of the second special symbol lottery to the display of the lottery result is long. A variable time of time (10 minutes) is set, and when the latent state is set, a short variable time (1 second) is set.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the right-handed game is performed rather than entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 in order to perform the left-handed game and execute the lottery of the first special symbol. It is easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, but since a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is low. it gets really bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player performs a left-handed game and executes the lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, since the second ball entrance 640 is set with one prize ball, a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set, and about 50% of the balls are fired in a right-handed game. is entered into the second ball entrance 640, the number of balls does not increase.

Furthermore, when the time-saving state and the variable probability state are set as the game state, the state is a high-probability state of normal symbols, and the electric accessory 64a is easily opened. However, since the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of normal symbols for opening the electric accessary 64a, is provided only in the left area, the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 more easily than in the normal state. It is configured to make the player play a left-handed game in order to enter the ball into the ball.

On the other hand, when the latent state is set as the game state, the normal symbol is in a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to open, and as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the fluctuation time (1 second) is set, it is an appropriate game to perform a right-handed game and execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to win a small prize (winning probability of about 1/2). When winning a small prize, the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small prize game, and 10 points are awarded for each ball that enters the first variable prize winning device 65. It is configured so that individual prize balls are awarded.

That is, when the latent certainty state is set as the game state, the player continues to execute the right-handed game to draw a second special symbol aiming at winning a small win, and a small win game, can be executed consecutively.

As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the bottom of the game area. The second variable prize winning device 650 operates to open the second specific prize winning port 650a so as to open the second specific prize winning port 650a so that the ball can win a prize by operating the rotating door 650f to the front side when a big win is won by the lottery of the special symbols. It is what is done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured so that the ball that has flowed down in the left area due to the left-handed game and the ball that has flowed down in the right-side area due to the right-handed game can equally enter the ball. Therefore, when a jackpot game in which the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened is executed, the game method before the jackpot game is executed may be continued, and the game method is given to the player. can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

When the ball enters the above-described first ball entrance 64 (upper first ball entrance 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2), a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is activated. ) is turned on, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) draws a jackpot due to the turn-on of the first entrance switch, and a display corresponding to the drawing result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A. be

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. Then, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) draws a large winning lottery, and the first symbol display device 37B displays the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second ball entrance 640 receives one ball when a ball enters. It is one of the winning openings for paying out prize balls. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1. are the same (four for both), and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (1) is different, but the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1. The number of prize balls to be paid out in the case of the lower first ball entrance 64b2 may be different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

In this case, for example, the number of prize balls in the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is set to 4, and the number of prize balls in the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 2, thereby setting a normal state in which balls are difficult to enter. When the ball is in the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the privilege for the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is increased, and the ball is easier to enter when a specific game state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set. Even if balls enter the first ball entrance 64b2 frequently, the player may not receive an excessive number of prize balls. The number of prize balls in the ball entrance 64b2 may be set to 5, and when a specific game state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set, a large privilege may be given to the player.

Also, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are the same number (for example, both are 5). individual).

An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (restricted state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol (lottery of normal symbols) triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 64a is in an open state (allowed state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

As described above, during the variable probability state and during the time saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the variable display of the second symbol. , the symbol "○" is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (permissible state) increases. Furthermore, during the variable probability state or during the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a is opened is also longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the variable probability state or during the time saving state, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 than during the normal state.

In addition, as described above, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, that is, the ball entrance accompanied by the electric accessory 64a is in a state (first state) in which the ball is likely to enter according to the set game state, A state (second state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball can be set. In other words, from the viewpoint of ease of ball entry, the first state is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the first state). becomes.

Here, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (when the first special symbol lottery is executed) and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (the second special symbol lottery is executed), the probability of winning the jackpot is the same, and when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the lottery of winning the jackpot with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280) is executed. , When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery is executed with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to win than the low probability state. However, the type of jackpot selected (set) when the jackpot is won is set to be different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball (game method) of "left-handed (left-handed game)" and "right-handed" according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. It can be changed to "beating (right-handed game)". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the winning holes (entering ball holes) 63, 64b1, 64b2, 65a, 640, 650a pass through the out hole 66 and are shown in the figure. It is guided to the ball ejection path that does not. The out port 66 is arranged below the first lower ball entrance 64b2. In addition, although it is set as the structure which has one out port 66 in the game area|region in the 1st Embodiment of this invention, you may use the structures other than this and you may provide two or more plural out ports 66. FIG.

By providing a plurality of out ports 66 in this way, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally concentrating the balls shot into the game area at one location (the location where the out ports 66 are arranged). Since it is eliminated, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging various devices that constitute the game area. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an out port dedicated to the ball that has flowed down the left side area and an out port dedicated to the ball that has flowed down the right side area. Further, when a plurality of outlets are provided, it is preferable to provide notification means for notifying the player that the ball entrance is the outlet. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a situation in which no privilege is granted even though the ball enters the ball entrance (actually the exit opening) provided in the game area. be able to.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern (decorative pattern dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display of the first pattern) is composed of nine types of main patterns numbered from "1" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of rear patterns imitating various animals with numbers "1" to "9" attached thereto. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is attached to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is attached to the rear design imitating a lion. In this way, by making the third symbol a display mode in which the backward symbol and the numbers are associated and synthesized, the player can see the backward symbol display mode ( The type of the third pattern is roughly grasped by color, outline, size, etc.), and when the third pattern is stopped and displayed, the type of the third pattern is surely identified by identifying the number attached to the rear pattern. can be grasped.

In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear design and the number forming the third design is not changed, but the combination of the rear design, the display mode, and the number may be changed. good. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed. It is possible to provide a game that does not get tired of. Further, by setting the combination pattern of the rear design and numbers as the third design to be regularly varied according to, for example, the lottery result of the special design and the set game state, the third design can be obtained. It is possible to improve the accuracy of predicting the game content based on the display mode (combination of backward symbols and numbers) to be stopped and displayed, and to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is completed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbols is configured so as to win a small hit, and when the lottery result of the special symbols is a small hit, the main symbols are in a specific combination (for example, "341"). is displayed. In this embodiment, the combination of the main symbols to be stop-displayed is made different according to the result of the lottery of the special symbols so that the player can easily understand the result of the lottery. Instead, for example, the same main symbol may be stop-displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win and when it is a small win.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side of the .

The main display area Dm displays upper, middle, and lower three pattern rows L1, L2, and L3. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each symbol row L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled in the left-right direction (usually from right to left) and displayed in a variable manner. is done. In particular, the upper symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a downward-sloping line and an upward-sloping line in the main display area Dm are set as valid lines V4 and V5, respectively. During each game, the third symbols are stop-displayed (determined display) on the activated lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1→lower symbol row L3→middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when a combination of big winning patterns (combination of the same main patterns in this embodiment) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third pattern is stopped, a big winning moving image (opening performance) is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, then after one second stop display (confirmed display), a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the held ball is displayed. is started. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special symbols is stopped (confirmed) for 1 second while there is no held ball, the stopped display of the third symbol continues. . This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed (determined display), a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. .

A situation in which no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is rare. In most cases, when the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new ball is entered. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 . In this embodiment, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of ball entries is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls whose variable display is currently reserved. In this embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be reserved, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. Therefore, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, in the display screen shown using FIG. 4A, the sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the third pattern is dynamically displayed (variable display) in the main display area Dm. is executed, and the display of the notice effect, the character, the number of pending balls, etc. is executed in the sub display area Ds, but in all game states, the There is no need to form each area shown in , for example, when making the player pay attention to the effect for suggesting whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds It may be configured to perform a powerful presentation by reducing (erasing) and enlarging the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol or the game guidance explaining the future game content is emphasized in the sub display area Ds, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced and the sub By enlarging the display area of the display area Ds, an effect that is easy for the player to understand may be executed.

Furthermore, depending on the set game state and the effect mode being executed, an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols and an area for executing the notice effect may be formed in the main display area Dm. A region for executing the variable display of the third pattern may be provided in the display region Ds.

Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbols and three parts of the sub symbols are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbols in the normal state. Furthermore, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm. In this small area Dm1, three third symbols in a simple manner, each consisting of only one of the numerals "1" to "9", are varied and displayed. Also in this small area Dm1, a big win is started by stop-displaying three third symbols composed of the same number. It should be noted that the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is basically in the normal state and the variable state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed at the beginning of the game, and there is almost no opportunity for the lottery for the second special symbol to be executed.

Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol that is mainly executed is displayed in a larger display area, the game result is displayed more clearly. In the following description, the variation display of the special symbol that is mainly executed in each game state (in the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol corresponds) is called the main variation, and in each game state The variable display of the special symbol that is hardly executed when the regular game method is performed (in the normal state or the probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponds) is called a secondary variation.

Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state where the variable probability state is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a long period of time (up to 10 minutes) The variable display (dynamic display) is executed, and the game state is changed from the probability variable state to the latent probability state at the timing when the variable display is started. Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (the period from the execution of the variation display to become a big hit to the end of the variation display and the start of the jackpot game), the second special symbol lottery It is configured to execute a game aiming for a small hit. Therefore, when the potential state is set as the gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the secondary variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the reserved symbols imitating a bird's face are displayed in the same number as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the respective reserved balls, the reserved symbols enter the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the held ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that a reserved symbol performs a special action or another character appears.

In this embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, it may be configured such that the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be suspended. Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the areas divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the content of the variable display effect executed corresponding to the variable state of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. ) and can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

Then, in the state in which the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol jackpot is executed, the high probability state of normal symbols shifts to the low probability state, and the game state shifts from the variable probability state to the latent probability state. While this latent definite state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so that many lotteries of the second special symbol can be executed. It will be a period that can be done (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

In this embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, during the period when the latent certainty state is set as the game state, the small win A game state (special figure 2 advantageous state) advantageous to a player who can obtain a lot of prize balls by frequently executing a small winning game executed when winning a game is established.

As described above, the period in which the latent state is set in this embodiment (special figure 2 variable advantageous period) is the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that was elected to the jackpot in the variable state Since it is (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the big hit game will be executed. In this way, since a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) are continuously set, it is possible to continuously give various benefits to the player. can be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol (special figure 2) wins a small hit and a small winning game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period is interrupted), and when the small winning game ends, the interrupted measurement of the variable display period is restarted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, so regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period It is possible to provide the player with a constant special figure 2 variable advantageous period.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) during fluctuation is displayed in a stop display mode indicating the loss. It is configured to forcibly stop at By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small winning game is executed during a big winning game.

As described above, in this embodiment, depending on the lottery result of one special symbol, the contents of control with respect to the variation of the other special symbol are varied. Specifically, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big win (lottery result that can give the first privilege to the player), the change of the other special symbol indicates that the lottery result is out. When the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a small win (a lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. is stopped until the giving of the second privilege is finished (until the small winning game is finished), and restarted after the giving of the second privilege is finished. In addition, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is out, it is configured to execute the variation of the other special symbol as it is.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to vary the contents of the lottery for the other special symbol (the result of the lottery and the period until the result of the lottery is displayed) based on the result of the lottery for one of the special symbols. A variety of playability can be provided.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the content of control for the other special symbol variation is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, if the lottery result is to give the player the most advantageous privilege (jackpot game), the lottery result corresponding to the variation of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result to give the privilege. Even if it is, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, the excessive privilege is suppressed from being given to the player, and the lottery result (small win) that gives less privilege than the jackpot game. In the case of , without changing the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol during execution, in order to prevent the grant of benefits based on the lottery of the other special symbol during the small winning game, the variable display is performed. Only the measurement of the period can be interrupted.

Therefore, in a state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2) are fluctuating at the same time, a privilege that is not the most advantageous is given to the player, so that the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given. It is possible to suppress the situation in which the game is not played, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that makes the player feel uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2), It is configured so that small winning games can be executed frequently. Then, the conditions for setting the latent certainty state as the gaming state are the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the variable probability state is set, and the condition for ending the latent certainty state is the first special symbol. is stopped in a display mode indicating a big win, and the big win game is executed. Therefore, the big win game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period, which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small win game. A second game period is set. Therefore, the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period, which are advantageous to the player, can be continuously set, so that the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

Next, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each game state of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot game state is set as the game state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays, as the content of the jackpot game, for example, the round of the jackpot game currently being executed. The number of rounds display mode for showing the number, the winning amount display mode for showing the number of acquired balls, the type for suggesting the type of the jackpot game being executed (the number of rounds, the game state set after the jackpot game ends) Suggestion display mode, the number of jackpots won during the period in which the normal state is not set as the game state and the non-normal state (probability variable state, latent probability state, time saving state) is set (so-called consecutive chance number) ) and the like are displayed.

Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5(a)), if the jackpot type this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) that sets the probability variable state as the game state after the jackpot game ends, FIG. As shown in 6(a), an effect mode (chance zone mode) aiming at setting a latent state advantageous to the player is displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6(a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 6(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6(a), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment "entering the chance zone!!" indicating that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, a character 811 that is displayed during the period in which the variable probability state or the latent probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (not be displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set. A game state advantageous to the player (a game state more advantageous than the normal state) is set.

With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set game state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the game can be easily understood. can provide.

Also, a comment "Aim for RUSH!!" is displayed in the main display area Dm to aim for setting the potential state. Furthermore, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, characters of "left-handed" are displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to play a left-handed game. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the left side game aiming at the left side area is performed when the variable probability state is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the second variable winning device 650, which is opened during the jackpot game, can be used for both the ball fired by the left-handed game (the ball flowing down the left area) and the ball fired by the right-handed game. , are arranged at a position where a prize can be won (downstream position of the game area (see FIG. 2)), and the characters ("left shot", "right shot") displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game, that is, , the game method to be guided during the big win game is configured to be varied according to the game state before the big win game is executed.

Specifically, the game state when winning the jackpot is determined, and if it is determined that the game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variable state) in which the left-handed game is guided, it is displayed as a guidance display during the jackpot. "Left-handed" is displayed, and when it is determined that the player is in a game state (latent state) in which a right-handed game is guided, "Right-handed" is displayed as a guidance display during the big win. As a result, when a big winning game is executed, it is possible to save the player from having to change the game method.

Also, in the main display area Dm, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the special figure 2 display area for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6(a), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, "777" is displayed as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (ending screen displayed). is displayed. In addition, "-" is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner.

In the present embodiment, when the special symbols are not variably displayed even once after the power is turned on, the above-described non-variable display mode is displayed. By displaying this non-variation display mode, it becomes possible for the player to predict the past game history (variation history of special symbols).

Although the present embodiment is configured to display the above-described non-variable display mode, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating deviation. Also, if it is determined that the elapsed period since the last variable display is executed exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the special figure 1 display area Dm1, the display displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 It may be configured to display by changing the mode to the initial display mode or the non-variable display mode.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. In the state where the variable probability state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5(b)), the game state is such that the first special symbol lottery can be easily executed by the left-handed game. In other words, the variable probability state is a state in which the electric accessory 64a is easily opened since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the ball is easily entered into the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during this variable probability state will be described with reference to FIG. 6(b). FIG. 6(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the variable probability state. As shown in FIG. 6(b), the comment "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is the variable probability state is displayed in the sub-display area Ds so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left). be.

In the main display area Dm, an effect is displayed in which the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right). Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3, and in-variation display indicating that the first special symbol is in the process of being varied is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. It should be noted that, even at this time point, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. , Non-varying display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of operation display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the variable probability state, and the lottery result of the first special symbol in the variable probability state (result of judgment) Accordingly, the action display pattern of the character 811 is set differently. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win a big win during the variable probability state.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 6(b) is displayed, when the variable display for indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the jackpot is executed, the display shown in FIG. 7(a) is executed. A screen appears. FIG. 7(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variable display of winning the jackpot is started in the variable probability state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state shifts from the variable probability state to the latent probability state at the timing when the variable display indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot during the variable probability state is started. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol starts, the game state shifts to an advantageous state (latent state) for the player, so the variation of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen In the state where the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect symbol 813 (the display mode of "333") for indicating to the player that the game state has changed is displayed in a stopped state. be done. As a result, the player can be made to think that the game state has shifted from the variable definite state to the latent definite state due to the stopped display of the effect symbol 813 . In addition, in the present embodiment, since the same display mode as the display mode of the third pattern is used as the performance symbol display mode, the statically displayed performance symbol display mode is a display for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be thought of as a mode.

This embodiment is configured so that it is possible to execute a large number of small winning games by frequently executing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period in which the latent certainty state is set. Therefore, at least during the period in which the potential state is set, "Right-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to indicate the right-handed game to the player. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Rush into RUSH!! Hit right" is displayed to indicate that the latent state is set as the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbols displayed in the main display area Dm are stopped and displayed without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol that has won the big hit. Since it is configured as above, the player can be made to think that the game state has changed according to the lottery result of the performance symbols.

Then, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state in which the right-handed game is continuously executed (during the variation of the big hit of the first special symbol), it is shown in FIG. 7(b). As you can see, an effect mode is displayed to indicate that a small win has been won. Here, with reference to FIG. 7B, the display contents when the latent state is set will be described. FIG. 7(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the latent state.

According to FIG. 7(b), in the state where the latent state is set (during RUSH), when the second special symbol lottery is won in the small hit, the first special symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. A variable display mode for suggesting that is fluctuating (during big hit fluctuation) is displayed, and a display mode "341" indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. .

Then, a treasure box 812 displayed as an effect mode during RUSH is opened, and a "V" for indicating a small win is displayed as an effect symbol 813 for indicating a game result from inside. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that a small hit is won with the second special symbol during the latent state (during RUSH) and that the small hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, the first variable prize winning device 65 that rotates when a small win is won is provided in the right region, and the same game method (right hitting) as in the latent state can be played. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, even if the small winning game is frequently executed during the latent certainty state, the player only has to continue the right-handed game, so that the player can be provided with a game that is easy to understand. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first special symbol jackpot variation is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot variation, and the latent probability state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time when the latent certainty state is set (based on the fact that the latent certainty state is set), the player is notified of the period during which the latent certainty state is set (Fig. 7 (a ))reference.

However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol, in a state where the variable probability state is set, the first special symbol is also the second Both of the special symbols may also fluctuate.

In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent certainty state (RUSH) has been set is displayed (see FIG. 7A) at the timing when the latent certainty state has been set, the currently changing second A lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed during the latent definite state until the special symbol stops fluctuating, and a problem arises that the small winning game is not executed for a long time even during the RUSH state. There was fear.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is established (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the variable state), the second special symbol variation situation (whether or not there is a variation, fluctuation remaining period) is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing of announcing that the RUSH state has been set is varied.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 8, when the conditions for transition to the latent state are satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the variable probability state), the second special symbol ( I will explain the content of the production when the special figure 2) is fluctuating. As shown in FIG. 5, when the second special symbol is fluctuating at the time when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability variation state is set (see (c) of FIG. 5), the probability variation Rather than the "chance zone" for indicating the state, a "super chance zone" with a higher degree of expectation that the RUSH state will be set is displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8(a), the display contents of the display screen during the "super chance zone" will be described. FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing a case where a variation in which a jackpot is won with the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol variation in the variable probability state. In other words, this "super chance zone" is a state in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, but the variable display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is This is a display mode showing a state that has not ended.

When the "super chance zone" is set, a comment indicating "in the super chance zone" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a manner of moving faster than in FIG.

Then, in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a "variation display mode" for showing that the first special symbol is fluctuating is displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a latent state is set. "Variable display mode" which is in the process of changing from a time before is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The display screen of the "super chance zone" shown in FIG. 8 (a) is displayed until the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation executed across the timing of shifting the game state from the probability variable state to the latent probability state ends, When the special figure 2 variation ends (see FIG. 5(d)), a "RUSH" entry screen is displayed to inform the player that the game has entered "RUSH" (see FIG. 8(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 8(b), the contents of the screen entered into "RUSH" via the "super chance zone" will be described. FIG. 8(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that enters "RUSH" via "super chance zone". As shown in FIG. 8(b), in the main display area Dm, a display pattern 813 is displayed from a treasure box 812 to inform the player that the game has entered "RUSH". Then, "Right shot" for guiding the game method during the rush game is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. At this time, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is fluctuating (during the jackpot variation), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows the deviation. The display mode "346" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. During the rush game (during RUSH), that is, during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, a game of frequently performing the lottery of the second special symbol in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set by performing a right-handed game. is executed. In addition, although detailed explanation will be given later, in the present embodiment, in a state in which one special symbol has won a jackpot (including during the jackpot fluctuation), it is possible to win a jackpot in the lottery of the other special symbol. It is configured so that it does not exist. Therefore, in the lottery for the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either a small win or a loss. And, in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (approximately 1/2).

Therefore, during the rush game, the small win is won with a probability of 1/2, and the game of acquiring the prize ball by the small win game continues until the big win variation of the first special symbol ends. In other words, even if the lottery for the second special pattern is executed frequently during the rush game, the jackpot variation period for the first special pattern is fully used because the lottery for the second special pattern does not win the jackpot. A rush game can be provided.

Then, when the jackpot variation in the first special symbol ends (see FIG. 5(f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9(a) and (b)). Here, the display screen when the rush game ends (when the special figure 1 jackpot variation stops) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b).

FIG. 9(a) is a diagram schematically showing display contents when a jackpot (jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a))) that is advantageous to the player is set, and FIG. 9(b). [Fig. 16] Fig. 16 is a diagram schematically showing display contents when a player wins a jackpot (jackpot D (see Fig. 16(a))) that is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), at the timing when the third symbol ("777") for indicating that the jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a)) was won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a performance pattern 813 (“super V”) indicating that the player has won a big win advantageous to the player from the treasure box 812 is displayed, and a comment “Congratulations” is displayed in the secondary display area Ds. In this case, the guidance display area Dm3 displays the characters "right-handed", which is the same game method as in the latent state.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9(b), at the timing when the third symbol ("666") for indicating that the jackpot D (see FIG. 16(a)) has been won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a performance pattern 813 (“Finished?”) indicating that the player has won a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a comment “Please return to left-handed hitting” is displayed in the secondary display area Ds. be done. In this case, in order to suggest to the player that the rush game has ended, the guidance display area Dm3 displays characters of "left-handed", which is the same game method as during the normal state.

9(b) shows the display screen when the jackpot D (see FIG. 16(a)) is won, but when the jackpot C (see FIG. 16(a)) is won, that is, the jackpot D However, when the game state set after the end of the big win is more advantageous to the player than the big win D, the same display screen is displayed, and when the big win game ends, the game is revived. It is constructed so as to execute an effect for performing a right-handed game as an effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the card forgetting warning screen displayed to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (valuable medium) into a card unit installed accompanying the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow balls to be used in a game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player wins a lot of prize balls through a game, the player may forget to insert the card into the card unit and forget to remove the card at the end of the game. I had something to do.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10(a)) is configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, during a jackpot game in which prize balls can be won). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player forgets to take the card. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a big winning game in which it is easy to obtain a winning ball and a big winning game in which it is difficult to win a winning ball, and furthermore, it is possible to set a game state in which a small winning game can be frequently executed in a short period of time. It is possible to set the timing of displaying the card forgetting warning screen according to the game result (accumulation of the number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

Here, with reference to FIG. 10(a), the display contents of the card forgetting warning screen will be described. FIG. 10(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the card forgetting warning screen. In this way, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is used to display the operation of taking out the card from the card unit, and the comment "Please be careful not to forget to take out the card" is displayed. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10(b) to 10(d), the display timing of the card forgetting warning screen will be described. FIG. 10(b) shows that the first big win is "jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a))", that is, the case where the player wins a big win that can give a lot of prize balls to the player in one big win game. FIG. 10(c) and FIG. 10(d) are timing charts showing display timings of card display (card forgetting warning display), and FIG. 10(c) and FIG. That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting warning display) when the player wins a jackpot capable of awarding a large number of prize balls to the player in one jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), if the first jackpot (jackpot won when the normal state is set as the game state) is the jackpot A, a sufficient number of prize balls will be played during the jackpot. Since it will be granted, the card display is executed during the ending period (ED) of the jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10(c) and 10(d), when the first big win is the big win C, a sufficient number of prize balls cannot be given during the big win, and the player cannot win. Since there is a possibility that the ball will be borrowed using the card again, the card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first big win (jackpot C).

In such a state, in this embodiment, the period from the first big win until the normal state is set again is set as an advantageous continuous period, and the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous continuous period is accumulated, and the accumulated result is It is configured to execute card display under the card display execution condition that a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) has been reached.

In other words, after the end of the big win C, the small win game occurs continuously, and when the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the small win game. (See FIG. 10(c)) When the number of winning balls during the advantageous continuous period exceeds a predetermined amount due to repeated execution of the jackpot C, a card is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (see FIG. 10(d)).

<Regarding Transition of Game State in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing how to shift from one game state to another game state with respect to four types of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

First, a description will be given of how to transition to the game state when staying in the normal state. As described above, in the normal state, the frequency of drawing special symbols tends to be higher when playing the game with the left hand than when playing the game with the right hand, so the left hand is more advantageous for the player. This is because when the ball is hit left-handed, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1. In addition, as described above, in the lottery for the first special symbol that is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a small win is not drawn. It becomes a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state only when a big win is achieved. In addition, four types of jackpots A to D are provided as jackpot types that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, in the normal state ST1, when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, when the jackpots A and C are determined at a rate of 65% in total, after the jackpot ends, the center of FIG. It shifts to the definite variable state ST2 shown in . In addition, when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, when the jackpot D determined at a rate of 10% is reached, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to the time saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. . On the other hand, if a jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state is set again as the game state after the jackpot (normal state is looped). do).

In the normal state, the game is normally played aiming at the upper first ball entry hole 64b1 by hitting left, but the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second ball entry hole 640. Or, as a result of some of the left-handed balls entering the second ball entrance 640, there is a possibility that the lottery for the second special symbol will result in a big win. In the present embodiment, there are three kinds of jackpot types (jackets E to G) as jackpot types set when the jackpot is won with the second special pattern, and the jackpot with the second special pattern is won in the normal state. When the jackpots E and F determined at a rate of 65% in total in the case are reached, the state shifts to the variable probability state ST2 after the jackpot is completed, and when the jackpot G is determined at a rate of 35%, the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot is completed. is set again (loop normal state).

In this way, when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (jackpot D). When the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big hit in the normal state, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed. In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state, since it is configured to set a variation pattern having a long time (10 minutes) variation time, when the game efficiency is left-handed game Therefore, it is possible to further increase the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery for the second special symbol by hitting the right hand in the normal state.

Next, a description will be given of a game state transition method when staying in the variable probability state. As described above, in the variable probability state, as in the normal state, playing the game with the left hand tends to increase the lottery frequency of special symbols rather than playing the game with the right hand, so the left hand is more advantageous for the player. becomes. In addition, in the definite variable state, the probability of a special symbol jackpot is increased compared to the normal state, so it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent definite state. When the definite variable state ST2 is set, it shifts to the definite state SP1 with the winning of the jackpot of the first special symbol (the special figure 1 jackpot variation starts).

In addition, in the variable probability state, while aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 by hitting to the left as in the normal state, the game is aimed at the lower first ball entrance 64b2 provided below the upper first ball entrance 64b1. will do. That is, during the variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, the game state becomes easier to execute the lottery for the first special symbol than in the normal state.

In the variable probability state configured in this manner, a left-handed game is normally performed and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. There is also the possibility of winning a lottery. In this case, when the jackpots E and F are determined at a rate of 65% in total when winning the jackpot with the second special symbol, the probability variable state ST2 is set again after the jackpot is completed, and is determined at a rate of 35%. When the big win G is reached, the time saving state is set as the game state after the big win is finished.

In other words, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state, it is possible to shift to the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player, whereas the second special symbol lottery is executed. If you do, the possibility of transitioning to the latent state is zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting the right hand in the probability variable state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed.

Next, a description will be given of a game state transition method when staying in the latent state. As described above, in the latent probability state, unlike the normal state and the probability variable state, the variation time of the second special symbol is short, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed by playing the game with the right hand. . Therefore, a right-handed hit is more advantageous for the player than a left-handed hit.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the variable probability state is set (first transition condition), and when the jackpot C is won in the state where the variable probability state and the time saving state are set. (Second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the stage before the start of the jackpot game, that is, during the jackpot variation of special symbols, the latent definite state is established. When it is set and the second transition condition is established, the latent certainty state is set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the game state (potential state) most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can enjoy various games. can provide sexuality.

Furthermore, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent definite state is set becomes the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation period, so the period in which the latent definite state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, an effect to be executed during the latent certainty state can be easily created in advance (at the time of setting the latent certainty state) in accordance with the period in which the latent certainty state is set.

In addition, when the jackpot C is won by lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the variable probability state is set, the probability state can be set both before and after the jackpot game, so that the player can It is possible to provide unexpected playability.

Next, referring to FIG. 12, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing to the right side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory are connected as a shaft. Send control signals.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420 , 530 , 630 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21. FIG. First, the details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main control unit 110 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results in the second symbol display device (not shown). to run. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device. used.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). A first winning type counter C2 used for , a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 are used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In addition, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and each counter for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which a value is stored is provided. In this embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 is provided with up to four retained balls. Therefore, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a special symbol lottery period, such as when the special symbols are not being variably displayed or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is changed. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic Various settings and control processing for displaying the image are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

On the other hand, during a period in which the first special symbol lottery is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the first ball entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. be done. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), the prize balls (4 in this embodiment) are not obtained without acquiring each counter value. prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player. Also, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a period in which the second special symbol is not drawn, such as during the variable display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, each counter value and the like are not acquired, and only prize balls (two prize balls in this embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of held balls is set to four with respect to the first ball entrance 64, but the number is not limited to this, and may be less than four (for example, three), More than 4 (eg, 8) may be used. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not suspended, but it is possible to hold and store the same as the first ball entrance 64. may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 479. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first winning random number counter C1 If the value coincides with the value of the random number for the big win defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is specified in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15(a). The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the game state is a low probability state of special symbols (normal state, time saving state), in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Then, it is determined whether the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 is "7 or 8".

In addition, when the game state is a high probability state (variable probability state, latent probability state) of special symbols, the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 5", and if it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that it is a big win. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, out of the total number of 480 random number counters, in the low probability state of the special symbol, two values are defined as the values for determining the jackpot, so the low probability state of the special symbol The probability of winning a jackpot at this time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability is 1/80 when the special symbols are in a high probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG.15(b), small hit random number table 202b is demonstrated. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined as a small hit is set in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(b), in the lottery for the first special symbol, the random number value for the small win is not specified. That is, the lottery for the first special symbol does not result in a small hit. On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, regardless of the game state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432". If it is within, it is determined to be a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a small winning, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is that at the time of the small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, the second The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 479. As shown in FIG. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol. It is stored in the random number table 202a. Among the total number of random number values of 480, the total number of random number numbers that result in a big win is 2, so the probability of a big win in the special symbol is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of random number numbers that result in a big win is 6, so the probability of a big win of a special symbol is "1/80".

Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes a small winning in the lottery of the second special symbols, and the random numbers "212 to 432" are stored in the small winning random number table 202b. ing. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of small winning random numbers is 221, so the probability of winning a special symbol is "221/480" (approximately 46%).

Returning to FIG. 13, the description continues. The value of the first win type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol results in a big win, the big win type is selected based on the value of the first win type counter C2 and the big win type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)). becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a small hit, based on the value of this small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)), the small hit type (small hit A to C) are selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the set variation pattern selection table 202f by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 52), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) storing a random number for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19). In this variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables are set according to the game state, and variation pattern selection tables are set for each result of win/fail determination. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that becomes a win for the normal symbol is defined in the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 15(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the value of the winning random number defined in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 15(c).

FIG. 15(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. In this second winning random number table 202c, there are 11 random numbers that are normal symbols in a low probability state (normal state, latent probability state) as a game state, and the range is "0 to 10". ”. Among the 233 possible random numbers of the second winning random number counter C4, the total number of winning random numbers is 11, so the probability of winning the normal symbol is "11/233".

On the other hand, in the high-probability state of normal symbols (probability variable state, time-saving state), there are 232 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of winning random numbers is 232 out of 233 possible random numbers of the second winning random number counter C4, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "232/233". In this way, in the present embodiment, the random number value for winning the normal symbol is set to have a difference of about 20 times between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. there is In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 in the case of winning the normal symbols are also higher than the low probability state of the normal symbols. It is configured such that the probability state is more advantageous (it is easier for the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2).

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol variable display is performed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device. Then, in the low-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Afterwards, the "o" symbol is illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined to be a winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Afterwards, the "o" symbol is illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially added by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, based on the value of this normal symbol variation type counter CS2, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 20) for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern ) are defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 . The details of this normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device can be executed.

Next, contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 20. FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above-described first winning random number table 202a, small winning random number table 202b, and second winning random number table 202c, a large winning type selection table 202d, a small winning type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection At least a table 202f and a normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g are provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 16(a), details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the first hit A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 16 (a), for the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", "jackpot A" is associated. are stipulated. This "jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and a jackpot game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values are the "jackpot A", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot A" is determined. ratio is 25% (25/100).

Then, when the "jackpot A" is selected, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and the number of time reduction times of 10000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). In other words, after the "jackpot A" ends, the variable probability state is set until the next jackpot is won.

Since "jackpot A" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Also, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the probability of winning the normal symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state is such that a more advantageous game can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to give advantageous benefits to the player in the latent definite state than in the definite state, and among the plurality of game states, It becomes a game state that is advantageous to

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "25 to 49" in association with "jackpot B". In this "jackpot B", the same jackpot game as the above-described "jackpot A" is executed, the number of rounds is 15, and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is released. Game is set. After the end of the "jackpot B", the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF, and a different value is set to the time saving counter 203f according to the game state at the time of winning.

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the time saving counter 203f is set to a value of "0", and when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state or the variable probability state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "100" is set. In other words, if "jackpot B" is won while the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends, whereas if "jackpot B" is won during the time-saving state , A time saving state (100 times) is set after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values are the "jackpot B", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot B" is determined. ratio is 25% (25/100).

"Jack B" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds like "Jack A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but the high probability state of special symbols is not set after the jackpot. , a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than “jackpot A”.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 89" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" has two rounds, and is set to a jackpot game in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is released. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened even in the small winning game executed when the small winning is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is structured in such a manner that the player cannot distinguish between the case of winning the "big win C" and the case of winning the "small win".

By configuring in this way, when a winning game in which the first attacker is released is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand whether a big winning game or a small winning game is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, it is configured to be in a latent state (RUSH state) in which small hit games can be executed frequently. The game is played while expecting that the winning game in which one attacker is released is a small winning game. In other words, by providing a game period in which the player does not want the situation in which the player's most desired jackpot game is normally executed, novel game characteristics can be provided.

After the end of the "jackpot C", the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON, and the time saving counter 203f is set to a different value depending on the game state at the time of winning. When the game state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal state, the value of "10000" is set to the time saving counter 203f, and when the game state at the time of jackpot winning is the time saving state and the probability variable state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "0" is set. In other words, if you win the "jackpot C" in the state where the normal state is set, the probability variable state is set after the jackpot ends, while the "jackpot C" is won during the probability variable state or the time saving state. If you do, the latent definite state is set after the end of the jackpot.

In this way, in the game state when the big win is won, even if the same kind of big win is made, the game state set after the big win is different, so that the player can simply aim to win the big win. Not only that, but also the game state that has been set can be made to pay attention, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the latent certainty state is set as the gaming state, it is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player. There are two setting conditions: the first setting condition that the special pattern jackpot fluctuation is started in the state where are doing. That is, the degree of expectation (probability) at which the probability state is set is made different according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won. By constructing in this manner, the player is made to gradually increase the degree of expectation that a game state that is advantageous to the player is set according to the progress of the game (according to the set game state). It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 counter values are the "jackpot C", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot C" is determined. ratio is 40% (40/100). The "jackpot C" is one of the jackpot types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "jackpot A" and "jackpot B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. However, depending on the game state when the jackpot is won, it is the only jackpot type that can set the potential state that is most advantageous to the player as the game state that is set after the jackpot ends, so it is set after the jackpot. In terms of the game state, this type of jackpot is more advantageous than "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "jackpot D". This "jackpot D" has two rounds, and a jackpot game (same as the "jackpot C") that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

After the end of the "jackpot D", the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF, and the value of "0" is set to the time reduction counter 203f. In other words, when the "jackpot C" is won, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends. Since this "jackpot D" has the same jackpot game contents as the above-described "jackpot C", the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small win game. ing.

After the end of "jackpot D", since it is configured to set the normal state as described above, the variation display (jackpot variation) won in "jackpot D" in the state where the probability variable state is set When executed, the big winning game is executed after frequently performing the small winning game during the big winning variation, and then the normal state is set.

In other words, in the latent state (RUSH state) when the "jackpot D" is won in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state after the "jackpot D" in which the same release operation as the small hit game is set is completed. is set, the player can be made to think that the latent definite state in which the jackpot game is executed has ended.

Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot D", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot D" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). "Jack D" is one of the jackpot types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "jack A" and "jack B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. becomes. Since the normal state is set after the end of the big win regardless of the game state when the big win is won, the game state to be set after the big win is also disadvantageous. That is, it becomes the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four jackpot types (“jackpot A” to “jackpot D”) as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special pattern 1). there is Among them, in the two jackpot types (“jackpot A” and “jackpot B”), a jackpot game is executed with the second attacker (second variable winning device 650), which is opened only during the jackpot game, as the release target, In the other two jackpot types (“jackpot C” and “jackpot D”), a jackpot game is executed with the same first attacker (first variable winning device 65) as the unlock target for the jackpot game.

That is, in the first embodiment, as special symbol jackpots, main jackpot games (“jackpot A” and “jackpot B”) for the purpose of allowing the player to win prize balls and game states are varied. A sub-jackpot game (“jackpot C”, "jackpot D"), and so on.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since it is a game property that allows the player to win prize balls not by the jackpot game but by the small win game, it is set so that it is difficult to win a large amount of prize balls during the jackpot game. (Even if a jackpot game in which only a small amount of prize balls can be obtained is executed depending on the jackpot type), a jackpot game aimed at varying the game state while suppressing discomfort to the player. can be set.

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbols, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" is defined in association with "jackpot E". This "jackpot E" has 15 rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is released. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, the counter value that becomes the "jackpot E" is five, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot E" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100).

Then, when the "jackpot E" is selected, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and the number of time reduction times of 10000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of the "jackpot E", the variable probability state is set until the next jackpot is won.

Since "jackpot E" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Also, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the probability of winning the normal symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state is such that a more advantageous game can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to give advantageous benefits to the player in the latent definite state than in the definite state, and among the plurality of game states, It becomes a game state that is advantageous to

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 64" in association with "jackpot F". The number of rounds of this "jackpot F" is two rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the first attacker (first variable prize winning device 65) is released. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 counter values become the "jackpot F". ratio is 60% (60/100).

Then, when the "jackpot F" is selected, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and the time saving number of times of 10000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). In other words, after the "jackpot F" ends, the variable probability state is set until the next jackpot is won.

Since "jackpot F" is one of the jackpot types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Also, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the probability of winning the normal symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state is such that a more advantageous game can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to give advantageous benefits to the player in the latent definite state than in the definite state, and among the plurality of game states, It becomes a game state that is advantageous to

"Big win G" is associated with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99". This "jackpot G" has two rounds, and is set to a jackpot game in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is released. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 counter values are the "jackpot G", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot G" is determined. ratio is 35% (35/100).

Then, when the "jackpot G" is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the jackpot (probability variation flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, and the number of time reduction times of 0 is set. It is set (a value of 0 is set to the time saving counter 203f).

Since "jackpot G" is one of the jackpot types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the game state set after the big win is the normal state, it is also disadvantageous in terms of the game state set after the big win. That is, it becomes the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) And, the ratio of setting the variable probability flag 203g to ON after the end of the jackpot is 65% (65/100), but the ratio of setting 15 rounds as a jackpot game (50% for special figure 1 , special figure 2 is 5%), the ratio of the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is selected as the release target (special figure 1 is 50%, special figure 2 is 5%), game state at the time of jackpot winning is a time saving state, a probability variable state (that is, a high probability state of normal symbols) ratio of setting a value of 10000 to the time saving counter 203f after the end of the jackpot (special figure 1 is 25%, special figure 2 is 65%) are configured differently.

In this way, by varying the contents of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot in accordance with the type of the special symbols won in the jackpot, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of game characteristics, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Interest can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the contents described above are configured to be different according to the type of the special symbol. Good, other than the contents described above, for example, by setting the number of rounds of the jackpot game (for example, 7 rounds) that can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to special figure 1, the number of rounds to be set is changed , You may comprise so that the ratio which sets the probability variation flag 203g to ON may be changed.

Also, on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area (for example, an area through which the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot ends. In the gaming machine configured as above, the probability of the ball passing through the specific area may be made different between the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 2. Also, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for indicating the lottery result in each game state set after the end of the big win may be configured to be different according to the type of the big win.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16(a), in this embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win in one round game. Although the upper limit is set to "10", the upper limit may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit of the opening action in the round game may be varied according to the type of the winning jackpot (or the type of special symbol winning the jackpot).

Next, with reference to FIG.16(b), the detail of the small hitting classification selection table 202e is demonstrated. This small hit type selection table 202e is a data table referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). In this small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 93" in association with "small hit A". This "small win A" is a small win type that sets the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) to an open state only once for 1.5 seconds during a small win game.

Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, the number of random numbers that become "small winning A" is 94, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small winning, "small winning A". is determined 94% (94/100).

In addition, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "94 to 98" in association with "small hit B". This "small hit B" is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.2 seconds x 6 times during a small hit game. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small hit type counter C5, there are 5 random numbers that become "small hit B", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit B". is determined at a rate of 5% (5/100).

Furthermore, the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit C". This "small hit C" is a small hit type that sets an open state of 0.06 seconds x 8 times during a small hit game. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, there is one random number that becomes the ``small winning C'', so when a special symbol lottery results in a small winning, the ``small winning C'' is obtained. The proportion is 1% (1/100).

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. FIG. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f defines a random number that determines the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table 202f1 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in the normal state, a time saving/probability variation for determining the variation pattern in the time saving state and the probability variation state At least a table 202f2 and a latency table 202f3 for determining a variation pattern in the latency state are included. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. In each table shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the variation time is expressed in units of milliseconds, but in the following description, the variation time is expressed in units of seconds in order to facilitate understanding.

First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. This normal table 202f1 is a table referred to when the game state is the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 is a random number (variation type counter value of the counter CS1) is defined.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated, Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 100", Super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101 to 150", Super reach is associated with the range of "151 to 198" C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost and this normal table 202f1 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) Correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern varies accordingly. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is long in the range of "0 to 70". A deviation pattern (12 seconds) is associated, and a deviation normal reach (20 seconds) in the range of "71 to 150" is associated. In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "151 to 170" is associated with super reach A (30 seconds), and the range of "171 to 198" is associated with super reach B (30 seconds). It is

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2 or 3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to a short deviation (8 seconds) variation pattern in the range of "0 to 70". As the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern of long outliers (12 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 130", and the normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "131 to 170". ing. In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "171 to 185" is associated with super reach A (30 seconds), and the range of "186 to 198" is associated with super reach B (30 seconds). It is

The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 of FIG. 35) is more than the process of subtracting the reserved balls of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 33). is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

Thus, when the number of held balls is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of held balls is large (2 or 3). By configuring in this way, when the number of held balls is small, it is possible to secure the time for accumulating the held balls and make it difficult for the fluctuation display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is large, the variation time becomes short and it becomes difficult to accumulate the held balls. can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he or she has lost.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, the out long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thus, when right-handed hitting is performed in the normal state and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the variation time is set to 600 seconds each time, so the game efficiency is extremely worse than left-handed hitting. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right normally.

Next, with reference to Drawing 19 (a), the details of table 202f2 for time saving and probability variation are explained. This time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is a table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a high probability state of normal symbols (that is, time saving state or probability variation state) is set as a game state.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), this time reduction/probability variation table 202f2 is for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and the type of stop of the special symbol (result of judgment). A random value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1) is defined. In addition, unlike the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18, the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 is configured so that different variation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. are doing.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the game is performed aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 while performing the left-handed game, so it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol, There is a possibility that a period during which the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol is not changed) may occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game because the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time in the normal state.

On the other hand, the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19(a) performs a left-handed game and is in a time saving state or a probability variable state in which a game is performed in which a ball is entered into the lower first ball entrance 64b2. A referenced data table. Since the electric accessory 64a is frequently opened during this time-saving state and variable probability state, it becomes a game state in which the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily accumulated.

In this way, when the game state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored is set, it fluctuates when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, similar to the normal table 202f1 described above. If a configuration is added that makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a long time, the game is rested and the first special symbol (special figure 1) variation is executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced. change time becomes long, and it becomes difficult to efficiently play the game during the time-saving state and the probability-variable state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which it is possible to easily accumulate the reserved ball of the first special symbol, that is, the variation pattern table (time saving, Probable variation table 202f2) is changed so that the variation pattern selected by the number of retained balls of the first special symbol does not differ (when the number of retained balls of the first special symbol is small, the variation pattern with a long variation time is not selected) ). As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute the game in the time-saving state and the variable probability state.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in a state where the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state is changed to the latent state at the timing when the jackpot variation starts. It is configured to move to Specifically, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed while the probability variation state is set, and when the lottery result (whether determination result) is a big hit, the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 When the winning special variation (600 seconds) is selected, the game state becomes a latent state while the winning special variation (600 seconds) is being executed, and when the winning special variation ends, special figure 1 is displayed. The special figure 1 is stop-displayed in a combination indicating that the lottery result is a big win, and a big win game is started.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to execute the lottery and the variable display at the same time, while the latent state is set (special variation of the special figure 1 is being executed), a lottery for the second special symbol can be made. In addition, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display period (fluctuation time) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as a short period (1 second) only in the latent state, and only the second special symbol It is configured to win a small prize. By configuring in this way, while the latent state is set (while the hit special variation of the special figure 1 is being executed), the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently performed, so that the player can can win many prizes.

As described above in FIG. 19(a), in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 jackpot is won in a state where the probability variation state is set, depending on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, 60 seconds to 600 It is configured so that the fluctuation time in seconds is set, and this fluctuation time directly becomes the continuation period of the latent state. Therefore, as a lottery result of the special symbol, not only the result of whether or not the jackpot was won (whether or not determination result) but also the selected variation pattern (variation time) can be made to attract the player's attention. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (1 minute) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, a long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and the second When the lottery result of the 2 special symbols is a small hit, a small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the out long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, in the time-saving state and the probability variable state, right-handed hitting is performed, and when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the variation time is set to 60 seconds each time, so the game efficiency is extremely higher than left-handed hitting. Getting worse. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right during the time saving state and the probability variable state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, the details of the latency table 202f3 will be described. This latent probability table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), this table for concealment 202f3 is random for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and stop type of special symbol (result of determination). A numerical value (counter value of the variation type counter CS1) is defined. It should be noted that the table 202f3 for latent certainty is configured so that different variation patterns are not selected according to the number of held balls of the first special symbol, similarly to the table 202f2 for time saving/probability variation described above.

This latent confirmation table 202f3 is used when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the period when the special figure 1 jackpot variation is executed during the probability variation state, and during the time saving state and the probability variation state At the time of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) to be executed after winning the jackpot which is the jackpot type of "jackpot C" and finishing the jackpot game Referenced.

This latent surety table 202f3 is selected when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit against the contents specified in the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. 19(a). The difference is that the value of the variation type counter CS1 specified for each variation pattern is different, and the variation time of each variation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol is different, Other than that, they are identical. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit is normal variation (60 seconds) are associated, the range of "40 to 119" is associated with the super fluctuation (180 seconds), and the range of "120 to 198" is associated with the special fluctuation (600 seconds).

On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery is lost and this confirmation table 202f3 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d ), and, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-intermediate variation (30 seconds) is associated.

When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and the concealment table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take is associated with the hit short variation (1 second). When the lottery result of the 2 special symbols is a small hit, the small hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the out short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. As a result, many lotteries (fluctuations) of the second special symbol can be executed during the latent certainty state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the details of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 202g is a table referred to for selecting a normal pattern variation pattern when the normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, in this normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g, the range of values of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for each game state at the time when the normal pattern lottery is executed and are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the game state is a normal state, a latent state, that is, a low probability state of normal symbols, the whole range of possible values of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 ( 0 to 198) is associated with a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds. Similarly, when the game state is a probability variable state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the normal figure variation type counter CS2 can take.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time-saving state, a probability variable state, that is, a high probability state of normal symbols, the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 varies in the range of "0 to 198" with a variation time of 3 seconds. A pattern is associated.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the configuration is such that a plurality of variation patterns are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state and the probability variable state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal pattern may have variations, and when the normal pattern lottery is executed in the latent probability state, the variation time is 1 second or 3 seconds. Any one of the types may be set, and the variable time is not limited to two types, and more variable times may be configured to be selectable. The more variations are given to the variation time, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the variation time, so that the player can be made to continuously hit right-handed balls more reliably during the latent definite state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal design is set based on the game state and the acquired value of the normal design variation type counter CS2, but in addition to that, based on the number of reserved balls of the normal design It is also possible to use a configuration that changes the variation time based on the number of times of lottery of special symbols, or a configuration that sets the variation time of normal symbols by a method combining the above-described various configurations. Specifically, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the game state shifts to the latent state, and after that (for example , 51 times to 100 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time.

In this way, by measuring the number of special symbol fluctuations (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the end of the previous jackpot, and selecting and executing the variation time corresponding to the measurement result. , During the period in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set, it is possible to play the game while giving the player a sense of expectation so that more advantageous variation time (for example, short variation time) is often executed. can.

In addition, during the period when the even-numbered special symbol lottery is being executed after the game state shifts to the latent definite state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol variation time, and otherwise (odd-numbered times), It may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol. In this way, by changing the variation time of the normal symbols based on the number of times the lottery of the special symbols is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time. You can continuously hit right. In this case, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer (longer than when the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol is changed. It is preferable to configure such that the variation time of the normal symbol becomes longer as the number of pending memories of the lottery is smaller.

Further, when setting the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of retained balls of the normal symbol, it is preferable that the larger the number of retained balls of the normal symbol, the longer the variation time is likely to be selected. By constructing in this way, the pachinko machine 10 adjusted to make it difficult for the number of reserved balls of normal patterns to accumulate and the pachinko machine 10 adjusted to easily accumulate the number of reserved balls of normal patterns to increase the number of balls per unit time. Normal pattern lottery frequency can be made uniform.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved ball. Number counter 203e, time saving counter 203f, probability variable flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 2 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 variation time counter 203m, special figure 2 variation Time counter 203n, jackpot middle flag 203o, small hit middle flag 203p, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v, and at least other memory area 203z ing.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). The area stores the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the small per type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (reservation first area ~ Among the vacant areas of the reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 203b, like the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery. In this second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is detected is stored.

Like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area (normal symbol reserved ball execution area) and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when the winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is set in the execution area. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 that is shifted (moved) to the execution area and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. A shift process is performed to pack the winning data into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display of special symbols (first symbol display device 37, It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. is incremented by 1 (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, FIG. 47 S1705). The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the variable display of the variable display withheld by the main controller 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is suspended from the actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number of pitches, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of pending pitches command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203e counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of variable display is held in normal symbols) is initially set to zero, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 to increase the number of variable display reserved balls. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1903 of FIG. 49: No reference).

The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. After the end of the big win, a value corresponding to the winning big win type is set in the time saving counter 203f. Then, the time saving counter 203f is decremented by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 36). If the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more when the lottery for the normal pattern is performed, it is determined that the time saving state for the normal pattern is selected, and the judgment for the normal pattern is executed by referring to the table for the high probability time. . On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the symbol is normal, and the normal symbol determination is performed with reference to the table for low probability.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of special symbols is set, and indicates that the special symbols are in a high probability state when set to ON. That is, when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, as the gaming state, probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), or latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, Normal pattern: low probability state) is set.

This variable probability flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot that sets a variable probability state or a latent probability state after the end of the jackpot (S2402 in FIG. 54: Yes) (Fig. 54, S2403). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF (see S806 in FIG. 38).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special design is set based on the special design jackpot winning, and the special design high probability state is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, as a special symbol high probability end condition for ending the special symbol high probability state, special symbols from the special symbol high probability state (special symbol high probability state) are set When the number of fluctuations (number of special figure fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), it may be configured to set the probability variation flag 203g to OFF. In this case, in order to plan the timing to set the probability variation flag 203g to OFF, the storage means for pre-storing the number of special figure fluctuations as the special figure high probability end condition, and the special figure high probability state after being set Measuring means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations, and end discrimination for determining whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations (special figure high probability end condition) stored in the storage means It is sufficient to provide means and .

In addition, a plurality of special figure high probability end conditions are prepared, for example, special figure 1 high probability end condition that can be established only based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special figure high probability state, fluctuation of the second special symbol Special figure 2 high probability end condition that can be established only based on the number of times, lottery end condition that can be established when the lottery result of the special pattern is a predetermined lottery result (for example, lottery result that wins a small hit). It may be configured to facilitate the special figure high probability end condition and set the probability variation flag 203g to off when any special figure high probability end condition is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on entering the first ball opening 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. (see S407 in FIG. 34). This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 in FIG. 38).

With this special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the design is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on entering the second ball opening 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. (see S1007 in FIG. 40). This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

With this special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol in the design is executed (see S1004 in FIG. 40). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off), the normal state "00H" is stored as information indicating On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variable state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more and the probability variable flag 203g is on), the winning state storage area 203j shows the probability variable state. "01H" is stored as information. Also, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the variable probability flag 203g is on), the latent state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. "02H" is stored as the information to indicate.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is retained until the end of the big win, and is referred to when setting the game state after the end of the big win (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). This small win flag 203k is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small win (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends while the small hit flag 203k is on, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the counter that measures the variation time of the special symbol is (see S1603 in FIG. 46). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big win is made in the lottery of the first special symbol while the small winning of the second special symbol is being executed, and the big winning is started during the small winning. can.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n are counters for timing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and the first special symbol and the second special When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined according to the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n.

The jackpot flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot is in progress. When this jackpot middle flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in jackpot, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON when the start of jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF during the jackpot ending process executed at the end of the jackpot.

The flag 203p during a small hit is a flag which shows whether it is during a small hit. If the small hit flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in the middle of a small hit. This small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON when the start of the small hit is set (see S1606 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 55).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol wins a small win, and when a small win wins (when the small win middle flag 203p is set to ON), the second It is configured to interrupt the variable display of 1 special symbol. That is, among a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), one special symbol (second special symbol) is selected by lottery to win a small hit, and the flag 203p during the small hit is set to ON. In this state, the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) never ends, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the small winning game and play the game. In addition, during the small winning game, it is possible to prevent the end of the variable display of the other special symbol and the start of the big winning game.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating that it is a period between when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) by the stop symbol of the jackpot and when the jackpot is started. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON, even if there is a new entry to the second entrance 640, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. (See S901: Yes in FIG. 39). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the second special symbol is forced to stop in the off design (see S802 in FIG. 38), avoiding the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set to OFF (S902 in FIG. 39).

The normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal pattern (second pattern) was a short fluctuation (fluctuation for 3 seconds). It indicates that a short variation of symbol) has been executed. This normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t determines that the timing for setting the normal pattern fluctuation time in the normal pattern fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is during the time saving state (during time saving) (S1811 in FIG. 48: Yes ), it is set to ON when the variation time (short variation) of 3 seconds is set (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has passed (S1816 in FIG. 48: Yes), when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S1818 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is referred to (S1819 in FIG. 48).

Here, if it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is determined whether the current is in the time saving state (in time saving) (S1821 in FIG. 48 ), when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (during time saving) (S1821 in FIG. 48: Yes), the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (Fig. 48 S1822). In addition, the normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t is set to OFF after it is determined that it is set to ON in the normal pattern fluctuation process (S106 in FIG. 48) (S1820 in FIG. 48).

In this way, the game state at the start of the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when setting the variation time), and the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a after the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has passed Since it is configured to set the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both the game state and the time saving state are set, a plurality of game states (normal state and time saving state), it is possible to reliably prevent the electric accessory 64a from being released for a long time by the variation (lottery) of the normal symbol executed across the time reduction state), and a privilege advantageous to the player (long electric accessory 64a It is possible to suppress excessively providing the player with the release).

The prize winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won a prize (ball entered) into the first specific prize winning port 65a in the round of the small winning game. When the value of the prize winning counter 203u reaches the upper limit of 10, it is determined that the end conditions for the round are met, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). It should be noted that even if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10 in each round of the jackpot, the round is terminated when the round period set for the round is reached. The value of this prize winning counter 203u is incremented by 1 each time a ball entering the first specific prize winning port 65a is detected during the small winning round validity period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

Although detailed description is omitted, the winning counter 203u described above counts not only the small winning game but also the number of balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a in each round during the big winning game. It is also used for

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period for opening the first specific prize winning port 65a is set to 1.5 seconds as the game contents of the small winning game, and the end condition of the round established by the number of winning prizes is set to 10. are doing. That is, until 10 balls are won in the first specific winning hole 65a during the small winning game (until the round end condition for the winning number is satisfied), the effective period of the round game (1.5 seconds) elapses. It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small winning game can be made constant, the production that spans the small winning game (the period from the start of the fluctuation of one special symbol to the end of the fluctuation of the other special symbol via the small winning game It is possible to predetermine the performance period of a series of performances to be executed. Therefore, the variation timing of the special symbols and the performance execution timing can be easily synchronized, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period to stop the update (subtraction) of the variation time of special figure 1, and stops the update (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit (S1602 in FIG. 46), special symbol variation processing ( 32) (S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of referencing, when it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special figure 1 is executed in the same manner as during fluctuation (S203 in FIG. 32). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device 37 is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. becomes. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see FIG. 37) (S701 in FIG. 37: Yes), it is set to OFF (S703 in FIG. 37).

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that the small winning can be won, so the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small winning is the first special symbol. Although it is only the pattern, if it is configured so that the lottery of the first special pattern can also win a small hit, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special pattern. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a jackpot, based on the fact that one of the special symbols has stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot (based on the execution of the jackpot game ), the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol by being out, and when the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, the combination indicating the small hit stops the one special symbol. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small winning game ends).

That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of one of the special symbols becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, a big win) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other (lottery result is a small win) is stop-displayed and the big win is erased by the small win.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transitions shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the details of the electrical configuration of audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 22(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine the details of the variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19(a), when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol in a state where the probability variation state is set, the variation time is 60 seconds per normal variation, variation The main controller 110 outputs a variation pattern command corresponding to either a winning super variation with a time of 180 seconds or a special variation with a variation time of 600 seconds. (Information indicating ) will be set.

Here, as a variable effect corresponding to the special change (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds is the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy), and the second stage is performed in the period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A staged production mode (for example, a production for defeating the second enemy) is executed, and a variable production for executing a third stage production mode (production for defeating the third enemy) is set for a period of 180 to 600 seconds. As a variable production corresponding to the fluctuation (180 seconds), the first stage production mode (for example, the production of defeating the first enemy) is executed for the first 60 seconds, and the second stage production mode is performed in the period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. (For example, the effect of being defeated by the second enemy) is set, and as a variable effect corresponding to the normal variation (60 seconds), the first 60 seconds are the first stage effect mode (for example, the first enemy A variable production is set to execute the production to be knocked down.

In this way, by setting the performance mode so as to put a break in the variable performance to be executed corresponding to the stage of the variable time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol, the variation pattern set this time for the player. It is possible to entertain the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while predicting which type is, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the case of executing the above-mentioned variable production, the remaining time display mode for letting the player grasp the remaining time for the production period set as each stage (for example, the timing at which the production mode can shift to the next stage It may be configured to display an effect mode in which the remaining time is counted down). As a result, the player can grasp in advance at least the period in which the variable effect is continuously executed (the period in which the latent state is continuously set), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.

In addition, there are multiple types of enemies that appear during the variable production, and depending on the type of enemy that has appeared, the degree of expectation that the variable production will move to the next stage (the rate at which the production mode that wins over the enemy is selected), , it is preferable to be able to suggest the content of the jackpot game to be executed after the end of the current variation display and the game state to be set after the jackpot game is finished.

In addition, in this case, for example, when enemy A is displayed as the type of enemy, if the variation pattern set this time is a winning super variation (180 seconds), the type of jackpot that is most advantageous to the player is If the variation pattern is a winning special variation (600 seconds), it may be configured to indicate that a type other than the jackpot type most advantageous to the player has been selected. By configuring in this way, the effect mode (type of enemy) of the variable effect can be determined by combining a plurality of elements for determining whether or not to give a privilege advantageous to the player. The effect can be further enhanced.

In the stop display mode selection table 222b, the latent state is set as the game state, and a period (hereinafter referred to as a rush period) in which a small winning game can be executed frequently by lottery of the second special symbol is set. 7 is a data table referred to when selecting a stop display mode (see FIGS. 7(a) and 8(b)) of a performance symbol for informing the player. This stop display mode selection table 222b is configured such that different stop display modes are selected according to the jackpot type won in the first special symbol lottery and the length of the rush period to be executed.

Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the stop display mode selection table 222b allows the player to predict the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (the number of rounds, the game state set after the jackpot game), and the length of the rush period. It is stipulated that the stop display mode of the production pattern is set so that it can be done.

Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), the "jackpot A", which is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period is If the information stored in the area for storing the information indicating is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is within the range of "0 to 39". , the stop display mode "111" is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range "80 to 99" .

In addition, when the "jackpot A" is won, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. If it is within 300 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "111" is defined, and in the range of "40 to 79", the stop display mode is "333". ” is defined, the stop display mode “333” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "From 301 seconds", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "777" is defined, and "40 to 79 ", the stop display mode "777" is defined, and the stop display mode "VVV" is defined in the range "80 to 99".

Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the "jackpot B", which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (stores information indicating the length of the rush period). area) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "222" is defined, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range "40-79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range "80-99".

In addition, the "jackpot B" is won, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. If it is within 300 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "444" is defined, and in the range of "40 to 79", the stop display mode is "666". ” is defined, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "From 301 seconds", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "111" is defined, and "40 to 79 , and the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second most advantageous jackpot type "jackpot C" or the most disadvantageous jackpot type "jackpot D" is elected, and the remaining If the information stored in the time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the obtained effect counter 223h In the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "444" is defined, in the range of "40 to 79", the stop display mode "666" is defined, In the range of "80 to 99", A stop display mode "444" is defined.

Also, "jackpot C" and "jackpot D" are won, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, , If the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined, and in the range of "40 to 79", The stop display mode "111" is defined, and the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99" and stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period). If the information is "from 301 seconds", that is, if the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "333" is defined. , and the stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "40 to 99".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the rush period, and the length of the rush period, and It is configured to suggest the content of the jackpot to be executed (jackpot type) to the player. As a result, the player can predict future game contents by grasping the stop display mode of the performance symbols.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is stipulated that the stop display mode of the production pattern has a predetermined rule. "777" and "VVV" are stipulated so that the number of benefits granted to the player increases (the rush period lengthens and the jackpot type becomes more advantageous) in that order. In this way, by giving a predetermined rule to the stop display mode of the performance symbols, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, since the stop display mode of the performance symbols is selected by combining the jackpot type and the length of the rush period, for example, the stop display mode "111" of the performance symbols is most advantageous to the player. Only when the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, it is specified that it is selected even if the rush period is within 60 seconds, so when "111" is displayed, the player For the novel game property that the rush period is desired to end in 60 seconds, that is, the game property that normally desires a longer rush period, the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game feature in which a game result (a short rush period) opposite to the normal one is desired.

In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the production pattern, it indicates that both the type of jackpot and the length of the rush period are most advantageous to the player, so that the player can You can play games with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, the timing for selecting the stop display mode of the production pattern (timing for stopping the production pattern on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is determined by referring to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the game state. configured to be different. Specifically, at the time when the latent state is set (at the time when the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation starts when the probability variable state is set), whether the second special symbol is fluctuating If it is determined that the second special symbol has not changed, that is, if the second special symbol lottery can be executed immediately after the latent state is set, the first special symbol jackpot variation It is configured to stop and display the production pattern based on the start.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation starts when the probability variable state is set), That is, unless the variation display of the second special symbol currently being executed is completed, if the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed in the state where the latent state is set, the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is performed. The production pattern is stopped and displayed based on the timing when the is finished.

By constructing in this manner, the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed in a state in which the latent definite state is set immediately after the effect symbol is stopped and the rush period is started, so that the player feels a sense of incongruity. A game can be played during the latent state without giving.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set (at the time when the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation starts when the probability variable state is set), the second special symbol is fluctuating When it is determined, the length of the rush period from the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is completed is determined, and when the determined result is within a predetermined time, the performance symbol is stopped and displayed. (Production indicating that the rush period has started) is configured not to be executed. As a result, the performance pattern is stopped and displayed, and although the start of the rush period (start of the rush game) is notified, the rush period ends if the small winning game is executed. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fact that the rush period (rush game) has started is configured to be displayed in a performance symbol similar to the third symbol. It is possible to make it seem as if a rush game was executed based on the stopped display of the symbols. Further, even when the length of the rush period is within the predetermined time and the performance symbols are not stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a great sense of discomfort.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, as the timing to stop and display the effect symbol, the timing when the first special symbol jackpot variation is started, or the second special being executed at the timing when the latent state is set Although the timing at which the variable display of the symbol is stopped is used, the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at a timing other than this, for example, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Analyze the winning information command indicating the winning information, and if it is determined in advance that the big hit change will be executed in the next change, immediately before the big hit change is executed (before the big hit change, the third symbol is stop-displayed), the production pattern may be stop-displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol immediately after the latent certainty state is set.

Thus, in the case of using the configuration in which the performance symbols are stopped and displayed before the execution of the big hit variation and the start of the rush game is notified, the second input is started from the timing when the performance symbols are stopped and displayed. When a game aiming at the ball mouth 640 (right-handed game) is performed, it is preferable to configure so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the next big hit variation is started. As a result, as a result of performing a right-handed game based on the fact that the production pattern is stopped and displayed, the second It is possible to prevent a situation in which a lottery for special symbols is executed and a period during which a rush game is executed is shortened.

The additional effect selection table 222c is used when selecting the effect mode (additional effect mode) when restarting the variable display of the first special symbol temporarily stopped by winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. The data table to be referred to is configured such that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7(b))) is selected according to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol after restart. Here, the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 23(b).

FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23(b), in the additional effect selection table 222c, different additional effect types are selected based on the period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. The data contents are defined as follows, and the player predicts the remaining variation time (remaining period of the rush period) of the first special symbol by executing the additional performance mode corresponding to the selected additional performance type. configured to obtain

Specifically, when the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99 ", the additional effect type "none" is defined, and the range "100 to 198" defines "additional effect A". Further, when the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect A" is defined in the range of , and the "additional effect B" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". Then, when the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is in the range of "0 to 99". , the additional effect type "additional effect B" is defined, and "additional effect C" is defined in the range of "100 to 198".

Here, when "additional effect A" is set, the display mode of the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7(b)) displayed during the rush period is changed to a ragged display mode. By grasping the tattered display mode, the player can predict that the rush period is short. Also, when "additional effect B" is set, the treasure chest 812 (see FIG. 7(b)) is displayed in the normal display mode, and when "additional effect C" is set, the treasure box 812 is displayed in the normal display mode. A gorgeous display mode is also set. Further, when "none" is selected, an effect is set in which the treasure box 812 is not displayed during the remaining rush period.

Note that the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23(b)) shown in the present embodiment shows an example in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated, but this is not the case. For example, when it is period B, "additional effect C" is set, and when it is period C, "additional effect A" or "none" is set with a small probability. Also good. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the complex game information combining the rush period and the jackpot type is played in the stop display mode of the effect symbols displayed at the timing when the rush game is started when the latent state is reached. game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period is provided to the player by an additional effect during the rush period. As a result, the player comprehensively discriminates between the stop display mode of the performance pattern executed as the composite game information and the performance mode of the additional performance, thereby making it possible to predict more detailed game contents.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 22(b). FIG. 22(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, production counter 223h, additional production counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining time short number of times area 223k, special figure 1 variable time counter 223m, special figure 2 variable time counter 223n, remaining variable time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification completion flag 223q, card notification possible flag 223s, rush display completion flag 223t, award ball counter 223u, power supply At least a disconnection flag 223y and another memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the starting winning for the first ball entrance 64, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the first winning type counter C2 are obtained according to the starting winning. From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variation type counter CS1, various information obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a big hit, variation pattern) The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of winning information commands.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variable effect (variable display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is suspended in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is being held up to 4 times at maximum for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and the number of reserved balls is counted as a special symbol by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. are managed by type.

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or in main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is obtained from the reserved ball number command. , stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and stores the first special symbol reserved after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. Image drawing is controlled so that the number of balls pattern is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 . As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e receive the first special symbol variation pattern command and the second special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 respectively. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60), and turned off when the variable display is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g receive the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 , respectively (see S4301 in FIG. 61), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. be done.

The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This additional effect counter 223i is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated within the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented Updated.

The state setting area 223j is a storage area in which information corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. This state setting area 223j stores information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command every time a state command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S4405 in FIG. 62). . More specifically, the state setting area 223j is assigned a 2-bit storage area, and whether it is a high probability state of a special design or not, whether it is a high probability state of a normal design, in order from the upper bit. A value indicating whether or not is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is "11B", it means that it is a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols and high probability state of normal symbols), and if it is "10B", latent It means that it is a certain state (high probability state of special symbols and low probability state of normal symbols). On the other hand, if it is "00H", it means that it is in a normal state (a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol low probability state).

By updating the state setting area 223j according to the state command output from the main controller 110, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113.

The remaining short time count area 223k is a storage area for storing the remaining count of the high probability state of the normal symbol. This remaining short time number area 223k is updated to the number of times notified by the remaining short time number command output each time the value of the time saving counter 203f is updated in the main controller 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). Thereby, in synchronization with the value of the time saving counter 203f of the main control device 110, since it is possible to update the value stored in the remaining time saving number area 223k, the remaining time saving number grasped by the audio lamp control device 113, It can be matched with the actual number of time reductions updated by the main controller 110 .

Special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n show the corresponding fluctuation time when each fluctuation display is set (executed) in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69) Values are set, and 1 is subtracted from each value each time various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). In addition, after receiving the special figure 1 temporary stop command from the main control device 110, the period until receiving the special figure 1 resume command is when various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed. Also, it is configured so as not to subtract 1 from the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m.

Then, in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67) that is executed when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 60), when calculating the remaining variation time Reference is made (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

The remaining variation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the first special symbol jackpot variation. In the remaining variation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set, and the temporarily stopped first special The stored remaining period information is referred to when setting an additional effect for resuming the variable display of symbols.

The card notification completion flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the forgotten card warning screen (see FIG. 10A) has been displayed (notified), and is turned on when the forgotten card warning screen is displayed. set.

The card notification flag 223s is a flag for indicating whether or not it is possible to display (notify) the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10(a)), and the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed. is set to ON when the following conditions are met.

The rush display completion flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the rush game has started in the state where the latent state is set, and is a rush entry screen (FIG. 7) indicating that the rush game has started. (a), see FIG. 8(b)) is set to ON.

The number of prize balls counter 223u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls after the start of the jackpot game, and the number of prize balls during a period in which a game state advantageous to the player is continuously set. Configured so that the numbers are cumulative. Specifically, in the hit-related process (S4216 in FIG. 63), when it is determined that the prize command has been received (S4505 in FIG. 63: Yes), the value corresponding to the received prize command is added ( S4506 in FIG. 63).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained in the small winning game as well as in the big winning game. It is configured to be able to execute the card forgetting warning display after the end of the winning game or after the end of the big winning game in which a small number of rounds is set.

The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 and is set to ON before the power-off process is executed (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has passed. Therefore, in the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58), if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then This is when the audio lamp controller 113 wakes up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not deleted, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the deletion of only part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 24, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM 233 configured by a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 30) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time with the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b1 is opened. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball is detected to have entered the ball entrance 64b2.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 25 . FIG. 25 shows the power on display displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to perform the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 25(c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, there is a power-on variation image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" as shown in FIG. 25(c). A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", display the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of the ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is detected. 25B and 25C, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. While the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when a ball is detected in the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third The pattern display device 81 can be made to display immediately.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 26A and 26B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 26(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage," "river stage," and "empty stage," respectively, with respect to back face A corresponding to "town stage." . Also, FIG. 27 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 26, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the respective back images A to D, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured so that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back surface type based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between the position a and the position a' of the corresponding rear image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the images from the position a to the position c can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the rear image on the rear surface E shows the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . It is displayed on the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, the color tone of an image of the sky spread over the mountains changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 27(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 27(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 27(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the back image shown in FIG. 27(a) is displayed again, and the back images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 26(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. In addition, the back side E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27(a) and the image data corresponding to the back side images between FIGS. is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process.

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 27(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back faces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and scroll display or color tone change with the passage of time. It can be displayed while In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to turn the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

27(a) to 27(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. 27(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27(b)-(c) and FIGS. ) to (b) are set. As a result, while the images of FIGS. 27(a) and (b) are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. Since the data can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 27(b) to (c) and FIGS. 27(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image obtained. be able to.

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 in the rear-side images B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-side images provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 24). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and has at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. be done.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A to E is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 29) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address "02F0H" in which the "End" information is described is made to correspond to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table. The content of the drawing is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect images become more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 29).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the case of the display data table. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 85(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 30) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 75(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 30), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as the pattern 1). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 75(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 81(a)). ) of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily identified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b) , S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82). It is set to OFF when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S6805 in FIG. 78B, FIG. 79, S6905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 31 to 57. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (in this embodiment 479, 99, 232, 99) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C4 and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed as well as the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process (S105), the process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and the process accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 are performed. A symbol variation process is executed (S106). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201), and if it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit (S201: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202). In the processing of this S202, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is interrupted because one special figure is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win. In the process of S202, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. Then (S203), that is, the processing for continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special symbols for which subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this processing ends. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is greater than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuates (S204), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and then, the process proceeds to S209 for executing the variation processing regarding the special figure 2. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S205) is executed. This first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) executes the process during special figure 1 variation, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

After finishing the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S206: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, in the processing of S206, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the variable time (S206: No), the processing of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

In the processing of S209-S213, the same processing as S204-S207 executed for special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S209 is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is greater than 0 (ie, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) is determined (S209), special figure 2 fluctuation When it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S209: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process is terminated. The details of this second special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is greater than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S211) is executed. This second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211) executes the process during special figure 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is 0) (S212), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S212: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S212, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the variable time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation start process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S208).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value (N1 ) is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 is subtracted (S303), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). .

The pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the process of S304 is finished, next, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of S305 is completed, then, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Based on, based on the game state that is set, it is a process for executing the jackpot determination whether or not the jackpot.

When the process of S306 is finished, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) includes the determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is finished, next, the game state update process is executed (S308). Although this game state update process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described in detail later, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the state of the variable probability flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f. This is a process for updating the When the process of S308 ends, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 34, regarding the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 33, S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 explain. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the period during which the variation display (jackpot variation) indicating that one of the special symbols has won a big win is being executed, whether or not the other special symbol lottery has won a big win is displayed. It is configured not to judge.

In other words, in a state in which it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period of time (after the fluctuation time has passed) by one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, and multiple times in a short period of time. It is constructed so as to suppress giving a privilege excessively due to winning a jackpot.

In this way, by performing the process of acquiring various counter values in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, skipping the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process, and setting the outlier symbol, the other It is possible to quickly respond to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbols are in a high probability state (variable probability state, latent probability state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is ON (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the random value that becomes the jackpot defined in the first per random number table 202a for high probability time and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer match, and the determination result (lottery result) is obtained (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first per random number table 202a for low probability It is determined whether or not the specified random value for the big win matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 202i is on (S405). If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406), and if the lottery result is a big hit ( S406: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special pattern (S407), and the lottery result of the first special pattern is set to jackpot (S408). Then, based on the value of the obtained win type counter, the first special symbol jackpot symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and the value corresponding to the current game status is stored in the winning status storage area. 203j (S410), 1 is set to the time saving counter 203f (S411), and this process is finished.

Here, by setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34) in the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) The high probability state of normal symbols can be shifted to the low probability state in the game state update process (S308) executed later. Thus, when a big win is won by lottery of the first special symbols, it is possible to set a low probability state of normal symbols at the timing when the big win variation is started. Therefore, it is possible to shift the probability variable state to the latent probability state by winning the jackpot in the first special symbol in the state where the probability variable state is set.

In addition, by performing the processing of setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 1 in the processing of S411, the processing of shifting the high probability state of the normal design to the low probability state on the condition that the jackpot is won, and the special design. A process of shifting from a high probability state of normal symbols to a low probability state on the condition that the number of times of variation has reached a predetermined number of times can be executed using the game state update process (S308). As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main controller 110 from becoming complicated even when a plurality of conditions for terminating the high-probability state of the normal symbol are provided.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is on (S405: Yes), or if it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S406 (S406: No), set the missing symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S412), and then terminate this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, that is, the first It is determined whether or not a jackpot of 1 special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not the big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is on. This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the processing of S407 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), the first Based on the value of the per type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S503.

In the processing of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the game state is read out (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The game state is determined based on the state of the variable probability flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f. In the process of S505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set ( S506).

When the processing of S506 is finished, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S507), then the first special symbol variation start is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the processing of S505 A value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in is set to the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m (S509), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 36, the game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this game state update process (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the state of the variable probability flag 203g which is the condition for setting the game state and the value of the time saving counter 203f, only the value of the time saving counter 203f is updated at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. In addition, in the game state update process (see FIG. 36) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33), it is configured to execute the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f.

Then, the variable probability flag 203g, which is set to ON, which will be described in detail later, is set to OFF when the jackpot variation is finished and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

That is, two conditional elements referred to when setting the gaming state (the state of the variable probability flag 203g, the value of the time-saving counter 203f), one conditional element is updated at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the other conditional elements can be updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the game state set by combining the two conditional elements can be easily diversified. In addition, since it is possible to set a specific game state (for example, a latent state) only during the period from the start of the special symbol variation to the end, it is advantageous to the player only during the predetermined period. It is possible to set the game state.

When the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S602), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S604), and if it is determined to be 0 (S604: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605) ). Here, when it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S605: Yes), it is a variable probability state (that is, a latent probability state) in which the time saving game is not given, so the latent probability state is indicated. A status command is set (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S605, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), since it is in the normal state, the state command indicating the normal state is set (S607), and this processing exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously until the next special symbol jackpot is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot). However, in addition to this, for example, a probability variation counter is provided instead of the probability variation flag 203g, and the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted each time the variation of the special symbol is executed, and the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0. In some cases, the high probability state of the special symbol may be changed to the low probability state.

When such a configuration is used, the game state update process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. By providing a game state update process at the time of special figure fluctuation stop for updating the value of the probability variation counter, a process for determining whether or not to end the high probability state of the special symbol and whether to end the high probability state of the normal symbol It is possible to execute the process of determining whether or not at a different timing.

Next, referring to FIG. 37, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 31) executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 give an explanation. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205). In this first special symbol variation executing process (S205), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a hit (small hit) while the special figure 1 is fluctuating. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203o is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON) special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) is executed, it is in the midst of a jackpot in the process of S201. Therefore, the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined that the jackpot (or small hit) is not in progress in the processing of S201, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) is executed in the state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON is the jackpot (or small hit) game It is configured to be the timing of restarting the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 37, the description continues. In the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), then set the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command (S702), special figure 1 temporary The stop flag 203v is set to OFF (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S701: No), the processes of S702 and S703 are skipped and S704 to process.

In the process of S704, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is updated by subtracting 1 (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S207).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (S207), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S802), and the special figure Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s has been turned on (S803). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S804).

When the processing of S804 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h, probability variation flag 203g and time saving counter 203f are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S801: No), the process of S802 to S807 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S808.

In the process of S808, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of fixing and stopping the first special symbol is set (S808). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S809), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), the process (S802 to S809) of stopping the variable display in the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Also, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S801: Yes), a process (S803, S804) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.

In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being changed is forcibly stopped-displayed as a deviating symbol. is not limited to For example, it may be configured such that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a more natural presentation than when the game is forcibly stopped due to a failure. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S805 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34). For example, using the opening period of the jackpot game, the jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S805 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34). You may make it

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) performed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) performed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210). In this second special symbol variation start process (S210), a process for starting the variation of the special figure 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the processing related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the target of variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Detailed descriptions of the elements are omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S210), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to OFF (S902), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag that is set to ON while stopping and displaying the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the big hit variation of the first special symbol ends. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is ON, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is ON in the process of S901, without executing each process of S902 to S907 for setting the start of fluctuation, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b data (various counter values) are acquired (S903). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S903, it is determined whether there is acquired data (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S903, when it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the second special symbol jackpot determination is performed based on each counter value stored. Execute (S905). The details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S905 is completed, then, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S903, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is executed (S906). . Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S906 ends, the game state update process (see FIG. 36) described above is executed (S907), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 explain. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) and The explanation will focus on the differences between the two.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). Then, the processing of S1002 to S1004 for acquiring the lottery result as to whether or not it is a big hit is executed based on each acquired counter value and the state of the variable probability flag 203g. Each of these processes differs only in that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. control is executed.

When the processing of S1003 or S1004 ends, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1006), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S1006: Yes), executes the processing of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol to the jackpot, and ends this processing. In each of these S1007 to S1010 processes, the same processes as those of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) are executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S1005, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1005: Yes), or in the process of S1006, if the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a jackpot When it is determined (S1006: No), special figure 2 loss variation processing for setting a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or loss of the second special symbol is executed (S1011), and this process is terminated. The details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011).

In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S1003 or S1004 in FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), and the lottery result When it is determined that it is (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1103). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and the process is finished.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is lost in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and then, End this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set. (S1202). Here, whether or not the big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is turned on for the second special symbol. This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S1007 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40).

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40), the jackpot from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) The type is determined (S1204).

When the process of S1204 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1205), and then, based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set. (S1206). Then, the process proceeds to S1208.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S1202: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207) is executed, and the process of S1208 is performed. Transition.

In the processing of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (S1208). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S1209), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the process of S1205 is set to the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n ( S1210), the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1207).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is ON (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1302). Then, based on the obtained value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)), the small hit type is selected (S1303).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and from the read variation pattern selection table, the small per variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S1305). After that, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern (S1306), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S1301: No), the variation pattern selection table (Fig. 17 and FIG. 19) is read (S1307), and from the read variation pattern selection table, an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S1308). Then, based on the variation pattern of the selected deviation, to set the special Figure 2 variation pattern command (S1309), to end this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211) which is one process in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 Explain the content. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211). In this second special symbol variation executing process (S211), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation executing process (S211) is executed, first, the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is updated by subtracting 1 (S1401), and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. is updated (S1402), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (S213). This 2nd special design fluctuation stop processing (S213) executes the processing when stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2.

When the second special symbol variation stop processing (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1501), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON. When it is determined (S1501: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S1503). Next, when the processing of S1503 is completed, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, probability variation flag 203g and time saving counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the processing of S1509, to set the special figure 2 decision command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is decided and stopped (S1509). Thereafter, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1510), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1501, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 out stop processing is executed (S1508), S1509 and S1510 described above , and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, special figure 2 deviation stop processing (S1508), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S213 in FIG. 45), will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (S1508). In this special figure 2 out stop processing (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, out), the special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the process for temporarily stopping the special figure 1 fluctuation under execution is executed.

In the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (S1508), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set (S1603).

After completing the processing of S1603, a small winning scenario based on the selected small winning type is set (S1604). After that, the small hit flag 203k is set to OFF (S1605), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON (S1606).

When the processing of S1606 ends, a special figure 2 decision command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). After that, the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, stops variably as a small hit symbol (S1608), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. Set a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing that to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1609). After that, the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, is stopped by the symbol (S1610), and the process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously varied. can be displayed. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol indicating a big win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display disappears. It is possible to grasp that the player is not in the game, and the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the starting winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 47), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winning) the first ball entrance (first starting opening) 64, and if the ball has entered (winning), the process is suspended. Up to the upper limit number (up to 4 in the first entrance 64), each counter value obtained is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a , a process of predicting the result of determination of suitability, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. is executed in advance. The start winning process (S105) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) the first ball entrance 64, which is the first starting opening (S1701). Here, determination is made using the detection result of a first ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 . When it is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 (there was a starting prize) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702 ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (that is, whether the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1704). A reserved pitch number command for notifying the reserved number to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1705). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1706).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the variation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, the winning information command including the predicted result of determination of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (S1708), and this process is finished.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port (first ball entrance) 64 and is newly stored on hold, based on the information stored on hold, the winning/failure determination result is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the audio ramp controller 113 . As a result, based on the hold-stored hit/fail judgment result, the display mode of the hold ball is changed (for example, the color of the hold ball is changed to a different color than usual) and displayed, or before the start of variation It is possible to execute an effect to suggest the result of winning/failing judgment to the player by displaying the notice pattern or the like.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the lower first entrance 64b2 It is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with .

In the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S1801). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2. Including while being done. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal design (second design) is hit (S1801: Yes), it is in a state where it is not possible to start (execute) a new normal design variation (lottery). End this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1801: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (normal symbol fluctuating). When it is determined (S1802) that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not fluctuating (normal symbol fluctuating) (S1802: No), that is, even if the normal symbol is hit at present, the normal symbol fluctuates. Among them, if it is determined that there is no state, that is, it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery), data (second hit random number The value of the counter C4) is stored (S1804), and if the data is not stored (S1804: No), the normal symbol lottery cannot be executed, so this process is terminated as it is. .

On the other hand, in the process of S1804, if it is determined that data is stored in the execution area (S1804: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1807). Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S1807 and the normal symbol (second) winning random number table 202c, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal design is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 10", it is determined that the hit is the normal design, and the normal design is determined. When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that it is a winning of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "232", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern.

Next, the lottery result of the normal design acquired by the process of S1808 determines whether it is a hit of the normal design (S1809), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design (S1809: Yes), hit time is set (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S1809: No), the display mode when out is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1812, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S1811.

When the processing of S1810 or S1812 ends, in the processing of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols state) (S1811: Yes), the normal pattern fluctuation time in the second pattern display device is set to 3 seconds (S1813), then the normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1814), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a normal symbol high probability state (time saving state) (normal symbol low probability state) (S1811: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time in the second symbol display device is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and the process ends.

It should be noted that the normal short fluctuation flag 203t set to ON in the process of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the game state at the timing when the lottery of normal symbols is executed, and the fluctuation of the normal symbols is stopped. It is referred to when setting the opening operation of the displayed electric accessory 64a. Thereby, the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a can be varied depending on which game state the variation (lottery) start timing of the normal symbol and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 64a are.

In this embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of normal pattern variation (lottery) is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is winning, the game state when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is stored in the game condition storage means capable of always storing the currently set game condition. A storage area may be provided for temporary storage. Further, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing when the lottery of the normal symbols is performed. By doing so, it may be configured so that the game state at the timing when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed can be determined. In other words, it is only necessary to provide a storage means capable of storing the currently set game state and a storage means capable of storing at least the game state set at a predetermined timing in the past.

On the other hand, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1816). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S1810 or the process of S1812 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the process of S1813, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1816, if it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S1816: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the processing of S1817, if the lottery of normal symbols is won and the display mode is set by the processing of S1810, the “○” symbol as the second symbol is displayed stopped (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S1812, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set to The period during which the second symbol is statically displayed is longer than the period during which one portion of the blinking display (alternating display of "○" and "X") indicating that the second symbol is being changed is illuminated. It is configured to be (determined display). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the second symbol has been stop-displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, when the second symbol display update process (S2208 in FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1810 or the process of S1812.

When the process of S1817 is finished, next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (S106) However, it is determined whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol (S1818). When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S1818: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a winning pattern (S1818: Yes), it is then determined whether the normal pattern short variation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819).

In the processing of S1819, when it is determined that the normal short fluctuation flag 203t is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, the game state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal symbol is started If it is determined that the state is normal (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1819, if it is determined that the normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, the game state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal pattern is started It is determined that the game state is the time saving state If so (S1819: Yes), set the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t to OFF (S1820), then determine whether the current game state is the time saving state (in time saving) (S1821).

In the processing of S1821, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal symbol is started is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 1 time is set (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state (S1821: Yes), the timing of starting the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal symbol, and the current game state (opening operation of the electric accessory 64a ) are both in a time-saving state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 times (electric accessory 64a is set (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the normal symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set, which is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, Only when both are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening action that is advantageous to the player. Variation) is executed and winning is won, and even if the time saving state is set until the variation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol ends, long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. there is nothing In addition, similarly, in the variation (lottery) of the normal pattern executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the winning is won, and the normal state is set as the game state until the variation of the normal pattern stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous benefit (long release of the electric accessory 64a).

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the long opening of the electric accessory 64a in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the lottery of special symbols (second special symbols) advantageous to the player is likely to be executed. The duration can be limited during the time saving state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of normal symbols is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are determined, and the game state set at each timing is determined. Although the configuration described above is used as the configuration for setting the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a based on the above, other configurations may be used.

For example, only when the timing at which the lottery (fluctuation) of normal symbols is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are in the normal state, the opening operation is disadvantageous to the player (S1824 in FIG. 48). 48) is set (short opening is set), and long opening (opening operation set in S1822 of FIG. 48) is set in other states. By configuring in this way, a privilege (long open) advantageous to the player is provided even for the normal symbol fluctuation executed in the period before and after the time saving state which is the game state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, the time-saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

Thus, while the time-saving state is set as the game state, compared with the case where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is very short from "10 seconds to 3 seconds", and further. , the opening period of the lower first ball entrance 64b2 becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. Become. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is terminated, so that the normal state is set during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small winning game is executed, it is configured so that the time saving state is set continuously unless the time saving end condition is satisfied. During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small winning game, and the electric accessory 64a is opened for a long period, and a plurality of winning ports (first specific winning port 65a, lower first ball entrance 64b2) becomes a specific period during which it becomes easier to enter the ball.

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. It is preferable that the balls enter two winning holes (the specific winning hole 65a and the lower first ball entering hole 64b2) during the small winning game. can be increased, and it becomes possible to provide more advantageous benefits to the player.

Returning to FIG. 48, the description continues. In the process of S1820, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set (S1823), and the process ends. When the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set by the processing of S1823, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S2206) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. Control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1824 or the processing of S1822 are completed.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) to determine whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 when there is.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of variable display is reserved in normal symbols) is obtained. (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1903).

Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), normal 1 is added to the value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S1904).

When the processing of S1904 is completed, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to the fourth reserved area) (S1905), and the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S1905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous game state compared to the normal game state. .

By indicating the timing at which such a game state is provided based on the pre-determined result of the normal game, the player can play the game without overlooking the game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. It should be noted that, when the performance is performed using the preliminary determination result of such a general pattern, not only the production based on the result of the determination of the success or failure of the general pattern, but also the electric accessory 64a is opened when the general pattern is determined to be winning. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing of By doing so, in the normal game state, a game is played aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (the ball entrance accompanied by the electric accessory 64a) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side of the game board 13, it is possible to switch to a game (so-called right hitting) aiming at the right side of the game board 13 before the electric accessary 64a performs the opening operation, and the normal game state. Even so, there is an effect that the possibility of a ball entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 can be increased.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2001), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S2102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2104), and if it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process proceeds to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105). S2105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S2110.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2110). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S2111, S2112).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall opens, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S2111, S2112).

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S2113.

On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, and the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S2108). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2113). After that, the state of the variable probability flag 203g and each value of the time saving counter 203f are read (S2114), and the state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). After the process of S2115 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) is executed (S2201).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 .

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203). A jackpot control process is executed (S2204). Details of this jackpot control process (S2204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second variable prize winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit control process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small winning control process (S2205) will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, an electric accessary product opening/closing process is executed (S2206). In this electric accessary product opening/closing process (S2206), the opening/closing process of the electric accessary product 64a is executed. After that, display update processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

Next, display update processing of the second pattern (for example, the pattern of "o" or "x") by the second pattern display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of the passage, and the second pattern display device A variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (normal symbol) is in a winning state, the electric accessory 64a is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2210). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2210: Yes), the process proceeds to S2201, and the above-described processes after S2201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S2210: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211, S2212).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2202 (S2212).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and displayed as a variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S2209, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 50 has been executed, so the power-off process after S2213 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S2213), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S2214). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S2215), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S2209 is performed at the end of the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2201 to S2208, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S2101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S2201. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control processing (S2204) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 52). This is a process for opening or closing the opening (large open opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S2301: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that a jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is time to start opening the jackpot scenario (S2303). . More specifically, in the process of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) is the opening start of the jackpot scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to

In the processing of S2303, if it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (start of the jackpot) (S2303: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2304), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

In the processing of S2305, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), a jackpot action setting process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot is executed ( S2306), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2305 that it is not the time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the round currently being executed has been met ( S2307). Here, in this embodiment, while the first specific prize winning port 65a or the second specific prize winning port 650a is open, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) in total win, or when the first When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has passed a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the processing of S2308 sets the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a that is currently open to be closed, End this process. Incidentally, the determination processing from S2305 to S2307 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big win set in the big win scenario.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2307, if it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S2309), and the ending effect is determined. If it is the start timing of (S2309: Yes), the ending command for big hits is set (S2310), and this process is completed. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S2309, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S2311, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (S2311: Yes), a big win end process for setting the game state after the big win is completed is executed (S2312), and this process is ended. The details of this jackpot ending process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot ending process (S2312), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. This jackpot end process (S2312) is, as described above, a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (S2312).

In the jackpot ending process (S2312), first, based on the winning state storage area 203j, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the current big win is a variable probability big win (a big win type in which the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON after the end of the big win game) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, determination is made based on the type of jackpot set this time. In the processing of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S2402: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the processing of S2402, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not a variable probability jackpot (S2402: No), the processing of S2403 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2404. As a result, a special symbol low probability state is set as the game state after the big win.

Next, the game state at the time of winning read out by the process of S2401 and the value corresponding to the jackpot type are set in the time saving counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to "10000" in order to continue the high probability state of the normal pattern until the next jackpot, and "jackpot B" is set. is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to "100" in order to continue the high-probability state of the normal symbol until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 times.

When the process of S2404 is completed, the flag 203o during the jackpot is set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). After that, a state command corresponding to the set game state is set (S2406), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game ends, the jackpot type won this time and the game state at the time of winning are determined, and two conditional elements for setting the game state after the jackpot game ends. (Probability variation flag 203g, time saving counter 203f) are configured to be set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the small hit control process (S2205), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning control process (S2205).

In the small winning control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether or not a small winning scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 deviating stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed, and it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set. In the process of S2501, if the small winning scenario is not set (S2501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if the small winning scenario is set (S2501: Yes), the small winning scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small winning scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the processing of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2503, the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown) is a small winning scenario It is determined whether the value corresponds to the opening start of .

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2503: Yes), the small winning opening command is set (S2504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the opening of the small winning scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing for starting the round of the small winning scenario (S2505).

In the processing of S2505, when it is determined that it is time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505: Yes), small winning operation setting processing is executed (S2506), and this processing ends. Details of the small winning operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the round currently being executed is met (S2507). Here, in this embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined period of time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is met.

In the processing of S2507, when it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the processing of S2508 sets the specific winning opening 65a to be closed, and this processing is performed. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S2509).

In the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the small winning ending command is set (S2510), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed.

In the process of S2511, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the flag 203p during the small hit is set to OFF (S2512), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process ends. Details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the small winning operation setting process (S2506), which is one process in the small winning control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning operation setting process (S2506).

In the small winning operation setting process (S2506), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of small winning rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is terminated.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game will end in the middle. Defects can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the second winning process (S2513), which is one process in the small winning control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 55), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2701). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of S2701, if it is not the round valid period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current round valid period (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and to the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S2703: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if winning for the specific winning hole 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), the value of the winning counter 203u is updated by adding 1 (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or greater than the upper limit (5 in this embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or less than the upper limit (5 in this embodiment) S2705: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the prize winning counter 203u is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (S2705: Yes), the specific winning port 65a (the opening/closing plate 65f1 associated therewith) is set to be closed (S2706). Next, the small winning scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 72. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 58, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4117 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), it executes power-off processing in S4117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4117. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). In other words, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off processing of S4117 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The status setting area 223j is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If the time has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed because S4102 to S4111 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4112, and S4113. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the process of S4110, various counter update processes are executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. The details of this various counter update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, a command determination process (S4112) for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4113. The details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4113, in order to display the variable display effects on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process for setting transmission to the , is executed (S4113). The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed. It is determined whether or not the 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202) and this process ends. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201: No), whether the state command is received from the main controller 110 is determined (S4203). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4203: Yes), status command processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. Details of this state command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. state) in the state setting area 223j.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the state command is not received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206) and received The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4207), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in the variation display setting process described later (see FIG. 69) , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (set the variable pattern command for the display of the first special symbol used).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S4205: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S4208). In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM223 is set to ON (S4209), and the received special The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4210), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for the display of the second special symbol used).

In the processing of S4208, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (that is, the first The number of reserved balls of variable display of special symbols) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value ( S4212), the process ends. In addition, since this embodiment does not have a configuration for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), in the process of S4212, the value of the first special symbol (special figure 1) reserved ball number counter 223c Only updates are performed.

Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), so each time there is a starting winning, the process of S4212 , the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start When the reserved ball number command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol reserved ball number of the main controller 110 is corrected. It can be matched with the value of the counter 203d.

Also, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4213). In the process of S4213, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4213: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (special symbol lottery propriety, hit type, and variation pattern) is converted to winning information corresponding to The data is set in the storage area 223b (S4214), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether or not the win-related command has been received from the main controller (S4215). In the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S4215: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4216), and this process ends. The details of the hit-related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63. As a result of the lottery of the special symbols, the effect corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big hit or the small hit is won. It performs processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform display.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4215, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4217). In the process of S4217, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining number update process (S4218) is executed. Details of this remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. A process for setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

In the process of S4217, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4219). In the process of S4219, if it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4220), and this process ends. Details of the temporary stop related processing (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received, the process of setting the production (additional production) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4219 that the temporary stop-related command has not been received (S4219: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S4221), and this process ends. In the process of S4221, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. is transmitted to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 60) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, the processing for determining whether a state command has been received (see S4203 in FIG. 60) is performed. , It is configured before the processing (see S4205, S4208 in FIG. 60) for determining whether the variation pattern command of each special symbol is received.

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from the main controller 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start process of the main controller 110 (see S208 in FIG. 33) Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) is performed. Even if the state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, in the state where the variable probability state is set, the special figure 1 jackpot is won, and when the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, it is said that the latent probability state is set. It is possible to easily set a variation effect (see FIG. 7(a)) corresponding to the variation pattern command that becomes a big hit variation in the determined state.

It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when configured to execute processing corresponding to the variation pattern command prior to the determination processing of the state command, from the variation pattern command corresponding to the above-described jackpot variation, probability variation Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display corresponding to the received contents is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the variation display indicating that the latent definite state has been set at the same time as the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started. Due to the delay in the variable display indicating that the latent state has been set in this way, the timing of notifying the player of the right-handed game is delayed, and the player feels uncomfortable. The problem arises that I will give

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main control device 110 side, the process of varying the game state after determining whether the big hit is successful (see S306 in FIG. 33) and setting the variation pattern (S307 in FIG. 33) While executing (game state update processing (S308 in FIG. 33)), on the sound lamp control device 113 side, the processing for determining the current game state is first executed (S4204 in FIG. 60), and then It is configured to set a variable display corresponding to the variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous game state from being set and executed even though the potential state is set.

In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to define the receiving order of various commands output from the main control device 110, it is necessary to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this stop type command reception process (S4202). This stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described below.

In the stop class command reception process (S4202), first, in response to the received command, when the special figure 1 stop class command is received, the special figure 1 stop class selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (jackpot A to jackpot G, small hit A to small hit C, off, reach off, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4302), and this End the process.

The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to fluctuate at the same time, it becomes possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute appropriate fluctuation display. can be done.

Next, referring to FIG. 62, the state command processing (S4204) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this state command processing (S4204). This state command processing (S4204) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the state command processing (S4204) will be described below.

In this state command process (S4204), based on the state command output from the main controller 110, the current game state is set in the state setting area 223j. In addition, processing for setting an effect (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6(b))) for notifying the player that the latent state is set, and processing for setting the game state to the normal state In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used for displaying the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the state command process (S4204), first, the game state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the game state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402). If it is determined that the game state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403). In the processing of S4403, if the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent certain state (S4403: Yes), the latent certainty notification effect for notifying entry into the latent certainty state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

On the other hand, in the process of 4402, if it is determined that the game state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), the processes of S4403 and S4404 are skipped, and the process of S4405 is executed. The process proceeds to S4406. Also, in the process of S4403, if the received command is not a state command indicating transition to the latent certain state (S4403: No), the processes of S4404 and S4405 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4406.

Next, it is determined whether or not the received command is a state command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not a state command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406: No), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the processing of S4411 described later is executed, and this processing ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a state command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). If it is determined that the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the prize ball number counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), and the card notified flag 223q and the card notified possible flag are cleared. 223s, the rush display complete flag 223t is set to off (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining variable time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), the value corresponding to the game state notified by the other state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to OFF (S4407: No), the processes of S4408 and S4409 are skipped, and the processes of S4410 and S4411 are executed. End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the hit-related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S4216). In this win-related processing, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a big win game or a small win game to be executed when a big win or a small win is won as a result of a special symbol lottery. When a big win or a small win is won, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed.

In addition, when receiving a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls won during a winning game (big win game, small win game), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated Based on the result, a process for displaying a card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10(a)) is executed.

In the hit related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 60) is a jackpot related command (S4501). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4501: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S4502), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot related processing (S4502), which is one of the winning related processing (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4502). In the jackpot-related processing, processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands sent from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S4502), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the hit-related processing (S4216) has received the jackpot start command (S4601). When a jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4602), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4603). If the round number command has been received (S4603: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S4604), and this process ends. In this embodiment, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data to be transmitted from the control device 110, when information for indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device The RAM 223 of 113 is provided with a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the number-of-rounds command for display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4603 that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), an ending command for display that does not include card notification is set (S4608). That is, a process for not displaying the display mode of FIG. 10(a) on the third pattern display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4607, if it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4607: No), the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. (S4609). When it is determined that the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), an ending command for display including card notification is set (S4610), and card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, a process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10(a) on the third pattern display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current big win type is neither big win A nor big win B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4613), the processing of S4610 to S4611 described above is executed, and this End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4612 that the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the process of S4608 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the jackpot related process (S4502 in FIG. 64), game information (opening, In addition to the process of setting the display contents (ending, the number of rounds), the process of whether or not to display the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10(a)) is executed.

This card forgetting warning screen is displayed when the player wins a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls in a winning game (jackpot game, small winning game). This is a notification mode for calling attention so as not to forget the valuable medium used at the time. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned card is used when the condition that the number of winning balls obtained in the period (continuous advantageous period) from the normal state to the jackpot and the transition to the normal state again (continuous advantageous period) reaches a predetermined amount is satisfied. It is configured to display a forgetting alert screen.

Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, in the jackpot (first hit) won in the normal state, the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot A, When the jackpot B) is won, a card notification is executed to display a card forgetting warning screen at the end of the jackpot game, and when the other jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D) are won, the card notification is executed. It is configured not to.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the card forgetting warning screen is displayed to the player who has not acquired the predetermined amount of prize balls, and the player can continue playing while borrowing balls. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the jackpot game, since it is possible to set a game state (potential state) in which it is easy to frequently execute the small winning game, by repeating the small winning game, the player can A predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls may be won. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the advantageous continuous period (the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and when the accumulated result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), execution is performed at that time. It is configured to display a card forgetting warning screen on the ending screen of the middle big winning game or the small winning game. As a result, it is possible to display the card forgetting warning screen to the player at an appropriate timing.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured such that the card forgetting warning screen is notified only once during one advantageous continuation period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to frequent display of the card forgetting warning screen. The method of displaying the forgetting card warning screen is not limited to the contents of this embodiment. exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgetting warning screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgetting alert screen is displayed once (because the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting alert screen are already met), during the special symbol fluctuation period (for example, during the advantageous continuous period (when a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds or longer is selected), it is preferable to display a forgetting card warning screen.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by utilizing the player's fixed concept that the card forgetting warning screen is displayed after the jackpot game ends. In addition, as a method of achieving the same effect, the jackpot game may display the card forgetting alert screen using the opening period of the small hit game.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description is continued. In the process of S4501, when it is determined that the received command is not a big hit related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command is a small hit related command (S4503). When it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4503: Yes), a small hit related process (S4504) is executed and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the small hit related process (S4504) which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S4504). In the small winning related processing, processing is performed for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small winning game executed when the small winning is won. , processes corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 are executed.

In the small hit related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether the hit related command received by the hit related process (S4216) received the small hit start command (S4701). When the small hit start command is received (S4701: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4701, when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S4703: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4705). . If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), an ending command for display that does not include card notification is set (S4706), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4705 that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: No), it is determined whether the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4708), and a display ending command including card notification is set ( S4709), the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the process of S4706 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even in a small winning game that does not satisfy the display condition for displaying the card forgetting caution screen in one game, after winning a big win in the normal state, When the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the game period (advantageous duration) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display condition (for example, the number of won prize balls reaches 250), a small win It is configured to display the card forgetting warning screen even after the end of the game. As a result, it is possible to display the card forgetting warning screen to the player at an appropriate timing.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description is continued. In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not a prize command has been received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not the prize ball command (S4505: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the received command is determined to be a winning ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the winning ball number counter 223u (S4506), and then the card It is determined whether the notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507). When it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize ball counter 223u added in the process of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). When it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter 223u after the addition is 250 or more (S4508: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4509), and the display prize ball number command is set. (S4510), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4507, if it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or in the process of S4508, it is determined that the number-of-balls counter 223u after addition is less than 250. If so (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined by the state command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) that the normal state has been set, and the value of the number-of-balls counter 223u is cleared. The number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls command received during the period (advantageous continuation period) is accumulated by the number of prize balls counter 223u. At the end of the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) (at the timing of displaying the ending screen), a card forgetting warning screen is displayed according to the value of the winning ball counter 223u.

As a result, for example, when the jackpot (first hit) that triggers the setting of the advantageous continuation period is the jackpot C (a jackpot that makes it difficult to win a predetermined amount (250 shots) of prize balls in one jackpot game). When winning a small win game during the advantageous continuation period, or winning a big win C again, etc., a card forgetting warning screen can be displayed.

Next, the remaining count update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the content of this remaining count update process (S4218). This remaining number update process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. is received, a process of updating the contents set in the remaining time reduction number area 223k, the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining time reduction number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4801). When it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has not been received (S4801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4801, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display time reduction command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 67, the content of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220). In this temporary stop related process (S4220), when the processing for determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time in the case of receiving the special figure 1 temporary stop command, and the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command, the third symbol display device A process for setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed at 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop related process (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (S4901), and if it is determined that it is not received (S4901: No), the variable restart process (S4902) is executed. Details of the variable restart processing (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S4901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (S4901: Yes), the remaining variation time of the currently set variation pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time calculated in the processing of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904). A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or longer) (S4904: No), then the remaining variation period is 2 seconds or longer and is longer than 15 seconds. It is determined whether it is less (S4906), and if it is determined that it is 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), the period B indicating normal remaining variation time is stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o. is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4906, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeding 15 seconds) (S4906: No), the remaining variation time information storage area 223o indicates that the remaining variation time is long. A period C is set (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special figure fluctuation is resumed is calculated at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), and corresponds to that period By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute the production (additional production) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o corresponding to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special figure fluctuation resumes However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is for the period A to be selected, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is for the period C to be selected. The ratio may be configured to vary according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided into intervals of a predetermined period (eg, 30 seconds), and periods A to C may be allocated in order for each division. can be configured.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the remaining variation time. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the variable time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the content of the variable restart processing (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the details of the variable restart processing (S4902). This fluctuation restart process (S4902) executes the process of setting the additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received.

When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001), and if it is determined that it is not received (S5001: No), this process is terminated. . On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command has been received (S5001: Yes), then read the remaining fluctuation time information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o (S5002 ), the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read remaining fluctuation time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, an additional effect command for display corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o is cleared (S5005), and this process is terminated.

As described above, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted in the present embodiment, after the normal production (the production display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) ends, the special figure fluctuation resumes. During the period until the third pattern is displayed in a swinging manner, when the special figure fluctuation is resumed, an additional performance corresponding to the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after the restart is performed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period discriminating means for discriminating a normal effect period during which a normal effect is executed is provided, and when the effect period discriminating means determines that the normal effect period has ended, the additional effect is executed. good too. By configuring in this way, the normal effect and the additional effect can be executed continuously, so it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display to the player. Also, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but during the error period, the additional effect is continuously executed. Alternatively, a shaking performance may be executed to display the third symbol in a swinging manner. Further, an error period discriminating means for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating means discriminates that the error period is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as

Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, in the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on this, the process of setting the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot G), the process of setting the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process of S5107 Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the latent state (S5103). If the current gaming state is determined to be the latent state (S5103: Yes), the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, details of the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104). In this special figure 1 variation display setting (S5104), when the current gaming state is the latent state, based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the display of the first special symbol A process of setting a probability variation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation display setting process (S5104), first, the reading of the fluctuation time corresponding to the extracted fluctuation pattern is executed (S5201), and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time read in the process of S5201 is sub special figure 1 The variable time counter 223m is set (S5202). Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is a value greater than 0 (S5203). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), the display rush entry command is set (S5204), and the rush display completed flag 223t is set to ON (S5205 ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation counter is greater than 0 (S5203: Yes), skip the above-described processes of S5204 and S5205, and proceed to the process of S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the display latent probability variation pattern command for the first special symbol is set (S5206), and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description is continued. In the process of S5103, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a latent state (S5103: No), the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60) extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command A variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S5105). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol variation pattern command. Specifically, if the high-order 2 bits of the high-order byte of the variable pattern command for display of 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special design, and if it is "01", the second special design It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

S5104 or the first special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (see FIG. 59) of the main process (see FIG. 59) S4102) transmits to the display control device 114. FIG. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol The data corresponding to the first special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S5106).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). And, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110 Therefore, the process of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, the processing of the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting processing (S5109) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described. Figure 71 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 fluctuation display setting processing (S5109).

In the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the fluctuation time corresponding to the extracted fluctuation pattern is read (S5301), and the read fluctuation A value corresponding to time is set to the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the latent state (S5303). If it is determined that the state is latent (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush display completion flag 223t is on (S5304). If it is determined that the rush display completion flag 223t is not ON (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5308.

On the other hand, in the process of S5306, if it is determined that the read remaining time is 1 second or more (S5306: No), the display rush entry command is set (S5307), and the rush display completion flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the display potential variation pattern command for the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5303 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S5304 that the rush display completion flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), skip the processing of S5305 to S5308 described above, execute the processing of S5309, and end this processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, when setting the variable display of the first special symbol, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation period is the latent state When setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is fluctuating, and when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not fluctuating is configured to set a rush entry command as an effect mode of variable display. That is, it is configured to display a screen (see FIG. 7(a)) for informing the player that the rush has entered the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the target special figure 1 variation is executed. are doing.

On the other hand, in the case of setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation that becomes the latent state during the jackpot variation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is fluctuating, and the special figure If it is determined that 2 is fluctuating, a screen (see FIG. 6 (b)) indicating that the state is in the latent state is displayed without setting the display rush rush command as the effect mode of the fluctuating display. configured to display.

As a result, when the display rush entry command is set, and a screen (see FIG. 7(a)) for informing the player that the rush has entered is displayed, when a right-handed game is played, immediately A lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in the latent definite state, and a game without discomfort can be provided to the player.

In addition, when setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation, which is in the latent state during the jackpot variation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special figure 2 is determined. When it is determined that is in fluctuation, the special figure 2 fluctuation in fluctuation is forcibly terminated, and a new special figure 2 fluctuation may be configured to be executed.

In addition, the setting timing of the display rush entry command when the game state shifts to the latent state during the special figure 2 fluctuation is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment, and provides a game that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. It is good if there is a configuration that allows For example, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation in the fluctuation has ended at the timing when the latent state is set, it may be possible to set the display rush rush command, and the timing when the latent state is set Fluctuation It may be configured to determine the remaining time until the special figure 2 fluctuation in the end, and set the rush rush command for display when the determination result becomes a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, the predetermined time to be set is required from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 to start the right-handed game until the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the second ball entrance 640. Any time shorter than the period may be used, and the time may be appropriately set according to the configuration of the game board 13 .

Returning to FIG. 69, the description continues. The second special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted to the control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S5110).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5111: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), when the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off (S5112).

In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process ends. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. In addition, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, set the display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the stop type to the display control device 114 . In addition, the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit, even if the determination result is out. be done. If the determination result is out, the out symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

Next, various counter updating processes (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this various counter update processing (S4111). This various counter update processing (S4111 in FIG. 72) is one processing of the main processing (see FIG. This is the process of executing the update.

In various counter update processing (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S5401: No), the process of S5402 is skipped, and S5403 to process. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is greater than 0 (S5403). If it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is greater than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S5404).

Next, the value of the sub special figure 1 variable time counter 223m and the reading of the sub special figure 2 variable time counter 223n are executed (S5405), and from the value of the sub special figure 1 variable time counter 223m the sub special figure 2 variable time counter 223n is subtracted to calculate the remaining time (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the values of other various counters are decremented by 1 (S5408), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, if it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S5403: No), S5404 to S5407 described above are skipped. , S5408 are executed, and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and then transferred to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) can be simplified so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third pattern display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 29, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any one of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, reach out, complete out, etc.) Stop type table corresponding to is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S6603) and returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the command is displayed. If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command processing (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display rush entry command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and display If there is a rush entry command (S6414: Yes), rush entry command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the rush entry command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 80(a). FIG. 80(a) is a flow chart showing rush entry command processing. This rush entry command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the rush rush command processing, first, the rush rush display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush rush effect indicated by the display rush rush command is determined, and the determined rush rush display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the rush entry display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the rush entry command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display rush entry command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an additional effect command in the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the additional effect If there is a command (S6416: Yes), an additional effect command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the additional effect command process (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing. In this additional effect command processing, a process corresponding to the display additional effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the additional effect command process, first, the additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the display additional effect command is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the additional effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no additional effect command for display (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420). Otherwise (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6421) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is " As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), the pointer 233f is updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. means that

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. (S7210), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt process.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag 233z is ON (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag 233y is ON (S7216). If the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After the elapse, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set the drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag 233y is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is performed as it is. End and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). FIG. 85B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 30) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information. do. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination top address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 75(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, irrespective of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state where one variable display is being performed, other variable displays may be configured to be unexecutable. Then, when there is a reserved ball, it may be configured such that the variable display is executed in order from the reserved ball with the oldest starting prize in terms of time. By configuring in this way, the control can be simplified, so the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, normal state (low probability state of special symbols, and normal state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, and high probability of normal symbols state), time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols and high-probability state of normal symbols) and latent state (high-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) are provided. there is And it is configured so that the latent state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

In other words, when the latent state is set, the variation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, and another game state is set. By defining the period to be shorter than when it is set, the lottery advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with novel playability that makes the player expect that the potential state will be set.

Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big win, the first specific winning port 65a is opened even when the small win is achieved, thereby shortening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. In the state, the winning balls can continue to increase. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of a latent definite state. In a general game machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, the variable probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide novel game characteristics.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous using the variable method). As a result, even when the variable display of one special pattern is being executed, the variable display of the other special pattern can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special patterns can be executed more efficiently. can. Also, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating simultaneously, if one of them stops fluctuating with a big hit or a small hit stop pattern, the other fluctuating display will show the remaining fluctuating time or lottery. Regardless of the result, it will be stopped with a stop symbol that is out. As a result, during execution of a big win or a small win, the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a win or a small win, and it is possible to prevent the problem that the big win or the small win is started redundantly.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed in a state in which the probability variable state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set , The high probability state of the normal pattern shifts to the low probability state, and the game state shifts from the probability variable state to the latent probability state. While this latent definite state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so that many lotteries of the second special symbol can be executed. It will be a period that can be done (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

In this embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, during the period when the latent certainty state is set as the game state, the small win A game state (special figure 2 advantageous state) advantageous to a player who can obtain a lot of prize balls by frequently executing a small winning game executed when winning a game is established.

As described above, the period in which the latent state is set in this embodiment (special figure 2 variable advantageous period) is the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that was elected to the jackpot in the variable state Since it is (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the big hit game will be executed. In this way, since a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) are continuously set, it is possible to continuously give various benefits to the player. can be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol (special figure 2) wins a small hit and a small winning game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period is interrupted), and when the small winning game ends, the interrupted measurement of the variable display period is restarted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, so regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period It is possible to provide the player with a constant special figure 2 variable advantageous period.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) during fluctuation is displayed in a stop display mode indicating the loss. It is configured to forcibly stop at By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small winning game is executed during a big winning game.

As described above, in this embodiment, depending on the lottery result of one special symbol, the contents of control with respect to the variation of the other special symbol are varied. Specifically, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big win (lottery result that can give the first privilege to the player), the change of the other special symbol indicates that the lottery result is out. When the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a small win (a lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. is stopped until the giving of the second privilege is finished (until the small winning game is finished), and restarted after the giving of the second privilege is finished. In addition, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is out, it is configured to execute the variation of the other special symbol as it is.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to vary the contents of the lottery for the other special symbol (the result of the lottery and the period until the result of the lottery is displayed) based on the result of the lottery for one of the special symbols. A variety of playability can be provided.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the content of control for the other special symbol variation is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, if the lottery result is to give the player the most advantageous privilege (jackpot game), the lottery result corresponding to the variation of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result to give the privilege. Even if it is, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, the excessive privilege is suppressed from being given to the player, and the lottery result (small win) that gives less privilege than the jackpot game. In the case of , without changing the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol during execution, in order to prevent the grant of benefits based on the lottery of the other special symbol during the small winning game, the variable display is performed. Only the measurement of the period can be interrupted.

Therefore, in a state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2) are fluctuating at the same time, a privilege that is not the most advantageous is given to the player, so that the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given. It is possible to suppress the situation in which the game is not played, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that makes the player feel uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2), It is configured so that small winning games can be executed frequently. Then, the conditions for setting the latent certainty state as the gaming state are the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the variable probability state is set, and the condition for ending the latent certainty state is the first special symbol. is stopped in a display mode indicating a big win, and the big win game is executed. Therefore, the big win game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period, which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small win game. A second game period is set. Therefore, the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period, which are advantageous to the player, can be continuously set, so that the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first special symbol jackpot variation is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot variation, and the latent probability state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time when the latent certainty state is set (based on the fact that the latent certainty state is set), the player is notified of the period during which the latent certainty state is set (Fig. 7 (a ))reference.

However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol, in a state where the variable probability state is set, the first special symbol is also the second Both of the special symbols may also fluctuate.

In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent certainty state (RUSH) has been set is displayed (see FIG. 7A) at the timing when the latent certainty state has been set, the currently changing second A lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed during the latent definite state until the special symbol stops fluctuating, and a problem arises that the small winning game is not executed for a long time even during the RUSH state. There was fear.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is established (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the variable state), the second special symbol variation situation (whether or not there is a variation, fluctuation remaining period) is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing of announcing that the RUSH state has been set is varied.

Specifically, when the transition condition to the latent state is established, so as to notify that the RUSH state is set when it is determined that the variation of the new second special symbol is executable. Configure. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a new second special symbol is not started to fluctuate and a small winning game is not executed even though it is notified that the RUSH state has been set.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent definite state is established, the period from when the change of the new second special symbol can be executed until the latent definite state ends is determined. If the determined period is less than the predetermined period, the fact that the RUSH state has been set is not notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the big winning game from being started without executing the small winning game despite the fact that the RUSH state has been set.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the variable probability state, the game state is changed from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the time when the big hit variation starts. A latent definite state is set, and when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the high probability state of the normal pattern is not shifted to the low probability state at the time when the big win variation is started. , It is configured to continue the definite variable state even during the big hit variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide different playability according to the type of special symbol.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal pattern is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. Alternatively, only when a specific jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types, it is normal at the time when the jackpot variation starts. It may be configured to set the latent probability state as the game state by shifting the high probability state of the pattern to the low probability state.

Further, the number of winning jackpots is counted during the advantageous continuation period, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number of times, the normal pattern high probability state is shifted to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot variation starts. It may be configured to set the latent state as the game state by.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the variable probability state, the latent state is set during the period from the time when the variation of the jackpot starts to the end of the variation of the jackpot. However, without being limited to this, for example, based on the prediction of winning the jackpot in the start winning process (see FIG. 47), the period until the jackpot variation corresponding to the predicted winning information ends ( It may be configured to set a latent definite state (multiple fluctuation periods).

In this embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the state where the latent state is set, regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol during the latent state setting, always a constant variation pattern table (See FIG. 19(b)) is used, but not limited to this, for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the latent state is set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) A determination means may be provided for determining whether or not the change has occurred, and the data table for selecting the variation pattern may be changed based on the determination result of the determination means.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), the average of the fluctuation time is about 2 seconds. If the number of times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to a data table in which the average variation time is about 1 second. As a result, when a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set as the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is selected, more small winning games can be provided to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the latent probability state is set during the big hit fluctuation in the probability variable state, but besides this, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific deviation or a small hit. It may be configured so that the latent probability state is set during the variable display in the case, and during the probability variable state, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific deviation or a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times. It may be configured such that the potential state is set when the

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 111. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, in a state in which the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) In addition, the game state in which the big win is fluctuating is set as a latent certainty state, and when the latent certainty state is set, the small winning game is easily executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the game state is variable during the symbol determination period (the period in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) during which the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. It is configured to allow In other words, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability variation state is set, the start timing of the symbol confirmation period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed), the latent state is set as the game state.

Furthermore, the second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a different symbol fixing period is set based on the special symbol lottery result. By configuring in this way, the length of the period in which the latent definite state that is advantageous to the player is set can be varied according to the length of the set symbol definite period. Also, as in the above-described first embodiment, compared to the configuration in which the latent state is set in correspondence with the special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol is fluctuated), the special symbol design confirmation period (special Since it uses a configuration that sets the latent state corresponding to the period in which the design is stopped), it is possible to simplify the display mode corresponding to the special design in the state where the latent state is set. , the control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, once the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, but in the second embodiment, the special symbol jackpot Even if it is not elected, the definite variable state is terminated when the predetermined end condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations after the definite variable state is set reaches a predetermined number (50 times)) is met. It is different in that it is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to make the transition to the latent probability state during the period in which the variable probability state is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the game flow in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of a game flow when a specific jackpot (jackpot C) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in a state where the variable probability state is set. . As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won in a state in which the variable probability state is set, the jackpot game starts from the timing when the jackpot variation stops (see FIG. 88(c)). A latent state is set in the period (design confirmation period) until the game is executed.

Then, in the state in which the latent certainty state is set, a game for drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. In addition, when winning the special figure 2 during the special figure 1 pattern confirmation period, the measurement (subtraction) of the special figure 1 pattern confirmation period is interrupted during the period when the small winning game is executed. ing. In addition, in the second embodiment, even if the special symbol lottery result is a loss or a small hit, different symbol fixing periods are set according to the lottery result. As a result, the player desires that a long period be set as the pattern fixing period as the lottery result of the special figure 1 (lottery result of winning the jackpot) corresponding to the period in which the latent state is set, In the state in which the latent certainty state is set, it is desired that a short period is set as the symbol fixing period in order to execute the lottery of the special figure 2 more often.

In other words, in the second embodiment in which the pattern fixing period is changed according to the lottery result, depending on the game state and the type of special pattern, a long pattern fixing period is desired and a short pattern fixing period is desired. can be provided to the player. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, different symbol fixing periods are set for the same variation pattern in which the same variation display can be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the pattern fixing period in advance depending on the variable display contents of the special patterns, and which pattern fixing period is set for this special pattern lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed. In addition, since it has the above-described configuration, for the variation production executed corresponding to one fluctuation time (variation pattern) (production mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) Since it is configured to set multiple types of design confirmation periods, the time required for one special design lottery (after the special design lottery is performed, the next special design lottery can be performed Even if the time until) is set in a complicated manner, it is possible to unify the variable performance.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 88, the state in which the variable probability state is set, that is, when the number of times of short remaining time is 47 times, the flow of the game when winning the special figure 1 jackpot is shown. It is configured so that the latent definite state is set from the time when the big hit fluctuation stops. In addition to this, when the special figure 1 jackpot is won at the timing (for example, the 50th special figure lottery after the probability variation state is set) when the probability variation state ends (the value of the probability variation counter 203aa becomes 0) is configured to set a latent certainty state from the timing when the big win variation is started.

By configuring in this way, in the state in which the variable probability state is set, advantageous periods of different lengths are set based on the timing of winning the special figure 1 jackpot. Therefore, the player can play the game while desiring to win the jackpot at the timing when the long advantageous period is set, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the game state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed when the variable probability state is set will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the contents of the special figure 1 game after the variable probability state is set and the given score.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the game state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the variable probability state is set, and the number of lotteries (the number of times of special figure fluctuation). It is configured to Specifically, in the second embodiment, the number of times of lottery (number of fluctuations) of special symbols continues until it reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times) without winning a big hit, so that the variable state is set. Among them, if the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) of the special pattern is 1 to 49 times and the jackpot is won, the special pattern indicating the probability variable state and the jackpot is stopped and displayed during the jackpot fluctuation. A latent state is set during the confirmation period. As a result, the player is provided with special benefits such as a latent state game (RUSH game) during the pattern fixing period and a jackpot game after the end of the latent state.

Next, when the jackpot is won in the 50th lottery frequency (fluctuation frequency) of the special symbols, the latent state is set during the jackpot fluctuation and during the symbol fixation period. As a result, the player is provided with a privilege of a latent state game (RUSH game) from the big hit variation to the end of the pattern fixing period and a big hit game after the end of the latent state. That is, in the second embodiment, in the state where the variable probability state is set, the condition for transition to the probability state (jackpot winning) in the state where the specific condition (specific lottery number of times (50th)) is satisfied When established, a privilege more advantageous to the player than when the conditions for shifting to the latent definite state are established in a state where the specific conditions are not established is provided.

Then, when the number of lotteries of the special symbols exceeds 50 times, the number of probability variation reaches a predetermined number, and the normal state is set as the game state. When a big win is won during this normal state, the normal state continues during the fluctuation of the special symbols and during the symbol fixation period, and the big win game is executed.

On the other hand, the lottery number of special symbols (number of fluctuations), if it is off in the 1st to 49th time after the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state is during the fluctuation of the special symbol and during the design confirmation period. If it continues and is out at the 50th time, during the fluctuation of the special design, and because the latent state is set during the design confirmation period, the latent state from the special figure fluctuation to the end of the design confirmation period A game (RUSH game) becomes executable.

In addition, although detailed description will be described later, in the second embodiment, regarding the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the variable probability state and the symbol confirmation period, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, other than the big hit (off , small hit), it is configured so that a longer time can be easily selected. ” is selected, and the design determination period of “5 seconds to 150 seconds” is selected as the design determination period. A variation time of "0.5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the variation time, and a design determination period of "0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol determination period.

By configuring in this way, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set to a maximum of 330 seconds (when a jackpot is won at the 50th special symbol fluctuation frequency) and a minimum of 330 seconds according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of times of lottery. 5 seconds (when a jackpot is won at the 1st to 49th special figure fluctuation times), it is possible to provide the player with a range. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting how long the current latent state will continue.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the special symbol lottery result, when the number of special symbol lotteries (number of fluctuations) after the probability variation state is set is the 50th, during the variation of the special symbol, and , Since the latent state is set during the symbol fixing period, even if the jackpot is not won during the variable probability state, the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed for the player. can provide. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game) than the configuration of the first embodiment in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is provided only when the jackpot is won. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot experience the latent state game (RUSH game) even though the game has been played for a long time, and the player becomes bored with the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, a longer probability state is set when the probability state is set based on winning the jackpot during the variable probability state than when the probability state is set without winning the jackpot. It is designed to be easy. As a result, the longer the period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed, the easier it is to execute the jackpot game after the latent state game (RUSH game) ends. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player who is in the latent state game (RUSH game) to play while anticipating that the big win game will be executed.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment described above, in part of the case where the probability state is set without winning the jackpot, it is equivalent to the case where the probability state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won. Or, set the fluctuation time and the design confirmation period corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern other than the big hit (miss, small hit) so that the latent definite state game (RUSH game) of longer length is executed. Also good. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a situation in which it is advantageous not to win a big prize in the lottery of special symbols, and to provide a game with unexpectedness.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when a jackpot is won during the variable probability state, a long latency state is easily set. It may be configured such that when a state is set, a long latent state is set. In this case, for example, the number of times of probability variation (the number of times of lottery (number of fluctuations) of special symbols in which the probability variation state is set continuously) is 50 times, and the probability of winning in the high probability state of the probability variation state, that is, the special symbol is 1/20. , and when the result of the lottery for the special symbols is 50 times in a row (about 7%), a long latent definite state is set.

Next, among the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the display contents different from those of the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the latent state is set during the design determination period, so the special figure 1 for the production content displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is different from that of the above-described first embodiment. FIG. 90(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 90(a), in the second embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period in which the first special symbol is displayed (fixed display), the latent state is set. The display of the production mode (super chance zone display) showing the state where the variation of the second special symbol is executed across the timing, and the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment (see FIG. 8(a)) in that it is executed while the second symbol for displaying is stopped (fixed display). Since other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 90(a), the display mode of the third symbol ("777") for indicating that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has won the jackpot is stopped and displayed. It shows that the latent definite state is set based on winning the jackpot with the first special symbol during the definite variable state. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), since the special figure 1 display area Dm1 in which the third symbol is displayed in a display mode visible to the player is formed, the player can see the special figure 1 display area By grasping the display mode of the third symbol displayed on Dm1 and the effect mode indicating that the latent state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set, it is possible to determine the flow of the game in the future. A game can be played in a state in which information (information as to whether or not a jackpot game is executed after the end of the latent state game) is acquired in advance.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, a fall lottery (special symbol lottery for shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state) is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to grasp whether the current latent state is an advantageous latent state that is advantageous for the player, You can play the game with peace of mind.

In the second embodiment, the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the special symbol lottery result. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify, the display area may be reduced, or the display screen other than the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (for example, a light-emitting body attached to the game board 13 or a display provided outside the third pattern display device 81 may be used). A liquid crystal display device or the like) may be used for display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggered the setting of the latent state, so that the jackpot game is executed after the latent state game (RUSH game) is completed. A game can be played while predicting whether or not a falling lottery is being executed during a latent state game (RUSH game).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol is changed until the final display period (symbol finalization period) elapses after the third symbol is displayed (confirmed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Although it is configured to stop completely without being changed, it is not limited to this, as long as it informs the player that the special symbol is currently being displayed during the fixed display period (symbol fixed period). Although the variable display of the third symbol is stopped during the fixed display period, the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third symbol may be displayed to such an extent that the player cannot distinguish it. The design may be configured to swing.

In addition, a new lottery (variable ) is not being executed, it may be configured to set a display mode for allowing the player to identify, for example, "confirmed display" or "waiting" in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 ' command, or the display mode (color, design) of the third pattern may be changed between 'confirmed display' and 'waiting'. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress erroneous recognition that a new lottery is not started in spite of the state of having the pending memory during the fixed display period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90(b), the display contents when entering the potential state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when entering the latent state game (RUSH game). As shown in FIG. 90(b), in the present embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the latent state game (RUSH game) A performance mode indicating rushing is executed during a period in which a second symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment (see FIG. 8B) in this point. Since other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. FIG. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 are changed from the first embodiment described above. The difference is that Other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa, instead of the small hit type selection table 202e, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a deviation type selection table 202ad is provided.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above. , definite time counters 203ad, 203ae) are changed, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, with reference to FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa defines the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) of the first embodiment described above. The values of the time-saving counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are defined for each jackpot type.

Specifically, the jackpot types (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) in which the same jackpot operation contents as the jackpot A in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above are executed, when selected (jackpot winning When the game state is the normal state or the latent probability state, the value of "100" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "50" is set in the case of the time saving state and the variable probability state. It is defined that a value of "50" is set to the variable probability counter 203aa.

Furthermore, as the pattern confirmation period of the special pattern, the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined when the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and the jackpot A3 is defined in the range of "24". That is, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackpots A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, and 80% of them (20/ 25) is defined to be a jackpot D, 16% (4/25) to be a jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) to be a jackpot A3.

In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the player wins the jackpot in which the most advantageous jackpot game is executed, a short symbol confirmation period is set as a period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result to the player. If selected, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the presence or absence of the winning of the jackpot but also to the length of the period for which the symbols are fixed in the lottery of the special symbols, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a configuration is used in which the pattern confirmation period is defined in association with the jackpot type, but without being limited to this, a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jackpot type), A lottery for selecting the symbol fixing period may be executed independently. In this case, since it is possible to combine a plurality of symbol fixing periods for a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide game characteristics that are difficult for the player to predict.

Then, similarly to the above-described jackpots A1 to A3, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined respectively.

Specifically, in the jackpot types (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot B in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed, when selected (win the jackpot When the game state is the normal state or the latent probability state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "100" is set in the case of the time saving state and the variable probability state. It is defined that the value of "0" is set to the variable probability counter 203aa. Further, as the symbol fixing period of the special symbols, the jackpot B1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot B2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot B3 is set to "150 seconds".

Next, with reference to FIG. 93(a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be described. FIG. 93(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93(a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab is for each small hit type (small It is different in that the hit A to the small hit C) are further subdivided and defined. Other than that, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)). A detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

Specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 9" as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (open operation) corresponding to the small hit A of the first embodiment described above is executed. , "small hit A1" with a pattern fixed time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "10 to 89", and "small hit A2" with a pattern fixed time of "0.5 seconds" is "90 to 93 ”, a “small hit A3” with a pattern fixing time of “1.5 seconds” is defined.

Then, as the small winning operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small winning B of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small winning type counter C5 is in the range of "94 to 95", and the design is confirmed. "Small hit B1" with a time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "96 to 97", and "small hit B2" with a design determination time of "0.5 seconds" is in the value of "98" A “small win B3” with a fixed time of “1.5 seconds” is defined. Furthermore, as the small winning type in which the small winning operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small winning C of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small winning type counter C5 is "99" and the symbol determination time is "1. 5 seconds” small hit operation (open operation) is defined.

Next, the contents of the exclusion type selection table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. 93(b). This loss type selection table 202ad is referred to in order to select the loss type when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, and different symbols are made to correspond to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. A set time is specified.

In this embodiment, the same counter value (the value of the small hit type counter C5 ) to select the type. Thereby, the number of counters that main controller 110 has can be reduced. In addition, without being limited to the configuration described above, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which different counters are used depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a loss.

FIG. 93(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the exclusion type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93(b), the pattern type (outlier type) with a pattern fixed time of 0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds corresponding to the lottery result of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is a small hit. It is defined in correspondence with the value of the type counter C5.

As described above, in the second embodiment, it is possible to set a lottery result of a big hit, a small hit, and a loss as a lottery result of a special symbol, and furthermore, a different design confirmation time can be set for each lottery result. It consists of Thereby, even if the lottery results of the special symbols are the same, different symbol determination times can be set.

Here, for example, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big hit and the latent state is set during the pattern fixing period, a long time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the pattern fixing time. , the period in which the latent state is set can be lengthened, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery results are out, the longer the symbol fixing time is selected, the less the number of games played per unit time (the number of special symbol lotteries), which is disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the case where the latent state is set during the period in which the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit is stopped and displayed During the latent state game (RUSH game) for executing the lottery, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small win or a loss, a long pattern fixing time is selected, so that a predetermined latent state is established. Since the number of special figure 2 lotteries that can be executed during the period (symbol determination period of special figure 1) is reduced, it is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, the degree of advantage of the set symbol fixing period can be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can be provided with novel game characteristics.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, by varying the symbol fixing period of the special symbols, it is possible to vary the period in which the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set, and is executed during the latent state. By varying the number of special symbol lotteries, the degree of advantage provided to the player is varied, but other configurations may be used, for example, a special symbol lottery may result in a big win. Only when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol indicating the winning is longer than a predetermined period, the player may be provided with the privilege of displaying a favorable image, or the music reproduced during the jackpot game may be provided. The selection operation may be configured to be executable during the symbol fixing period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the contents of the time saving/probability variation 2 table 202ac2 will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving/probability variation 2 table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time saving/probability variation 2 table 202ac2 is for the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19(a)) of the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 They are different in that they have different lengths. Other than that is the same as the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19(a)). A detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

That is, in the present embodiment, during the special symbol lottery (lottery of special figure 1) during the probability variation state, the latent state is set during the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol when the jackpot is won. Since it is configured, it is configured so that the variable display period of special figure 1 during the probability variation state is shorter than the first embodiment.

Next, referring to FIG. 95, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 95, the second embodiment is provided with a probability variation counter 203aa instead of the probability variation flag 203g for the above-described first embodiment, and a special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab, special figure 2 The difference is that the flag 203ac during design determination, the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 determination time counter 203ae are added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The probability variation counter 203aa is a counter for continuing the number of special symbol lotteries executed in a special symbol high probability state (latent probability state, probability variation state), and is a period during which the special symbol lottery is executed with a high probability. It is intended to indicate

This probability variation counter 203aa is defined corresponding to the jackpot type won at the timing of setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON in the jackpot end processing (see S2312 in FIG. 54) of the first embodiment described above (Fig. 92) is set, the value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and the jackpot lottery according to the value set in the variable probability counter 203aa is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). It is also referred to when executing the lottery for the second special symbol in the same way (see S953 in FIG. 102).

Then, the value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the special pattern (special pattern 1, special pattern 2) pattern fixing period has passed, and the value is reset to 0 at the timing when the pattern fixing period for the special pattern that wins the jackpot has passed. .

The flag 203ab during special figure 1 symbol determination is a flag for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to ON, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the design confirmation period). This special figure 1 symbol during determination flag 203ab is set to ON in the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) (see S2802 in FIG. 100), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99 (see S257 of ). Then, when it is determined that the symbol fixing period has passed (S853 of FIG. 99: Yes), the setting is turned off.

The flag 203ac during special figure 2 symbol determination is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to ON, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the design confirmation period). This special figure 2 design flag 203ac is different from the above-mentioned special figure 1 design decision flag 203ab, the type of the target special design is selected from the first special design (special design 1) to the second special design (special design 2), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are counters for measuring the design fixed period of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design (special design 2). , When the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, the corresponding counter is set to a value indicating the current symbol fixing period. Then, during the fixed time process (see S860 in FIG. 101), which is periodically executed, the value of the counter is subtracted, and the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae has become 0. In the case, the process of ending the special symbol design confirmation period is executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, different symbol fixing periods are set according to the types for indicating the lottery results of the special symbols (see FIGS. 92 and 93). Then, it is constructed so that the latent definite state is set as the game state during the symbol definite period.

Next, information stored in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the RAM223 of the second embodiment, in addition to the electrical configuration of the first embodiment described above, special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab, remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac and a flag 223ad during determination are added.

The special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the first special symbol, and the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) from the main controller 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating is received, a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1 is set.

The value set to this special figure 1 decision counter 223aa is periodically subtracted by various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 111) which is executed every 1 millisecond. In the second embodiment, the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the design determination period of the special symbol (first special symbol). By managing the value of the 1 confirmation counter 223aa, it is possible to set remaining period information indicating the remaining period during which the latent certainty state continues to be set.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, during the special figure 1 symbol confirmation period (during the latent state game), if the small hit of the second special symbol is won, the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa during the small winning game is configured to interrupt the process of subtracting Therefore, since the pattern fixing period of the special figure 1 is not subtracted while the small winning game is being executed, the lottery of the second special pattern can be appropriately executed during the pattern fixing period.

Incidentally, in addition to the configuration of the second embodiment described above, it is possible to provide a process of accumulating the period during which the subtraction process of the special figure 1 decision counter 223aa is interrupted. Specifically, a small winning game counter for measuring the period during which the small winning game is executed is provided, and the small winning game counter is used during the small winning game during the latent state that is continuously set. It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period of, and an interrupting counter for measuring the period during which the flag for interrupting the subtraction process of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is set to ON is provided, and the interruption It may be configured to calculate the accumulation period during the small hit game in the latency state continuously set using the medium counter.

In this way, by calculating the accumulated interruption information that accumulates the period during which the subtraction process of the pattern confirmation period of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the player is notified of the result of the latent certainty state game (RUSH game) this time. can be done. Furthermore, as detailed game results of the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative acquired number of balls acquired during the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of small wins won, and the above-mentioned interruption accumulation Based on the information, a game result indicating whether or not there are more benefits obtained than the design value (or more than the past history), and whether or not the number of obtained balls is large with respect to the number of small wins won. The player may be notified of the game result shown and the game result showing whether or not the accumulated interruption information is long with respect to the number of small wins won. In addition, it is also possible to simply notify the cumulative acquired number of balls, the cumulative number of small hits, and the cumulative interruption information.

The special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab is a counter for measuring the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the second special symbol, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) from the main control device 110 during the symbol confirmation period. When a confirmation command including information for indicating is received, a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of special figure 2 is set. The specific contents are the same as the above-described special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa except that the measurement target is the special figure 2 symbol confirmation period instead of the special figure 1 symbol confirmation period. Description is omitted.

The remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac stores the remaining time (remaining fixed time) of the design fixed period at the time when the subtraction process of the design fixed period of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is interrupted (temporary stop of special pattern 1). This is a data area for storing remaining fixed time information shown. In the second embodiment, based on the remaining fixed time information stored in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac, the effect mode when restarting the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period is set. As a result, it is possible to predict the period until the end of the latent certainty state by grasping the performance mode executed when the small winning game is finished and the subtraction process of the pattern fixing period is restarted.

If it is determined that a temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219 in FIG. 106: Yes) in the command determination process 2 of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4162 in FIG. 106), the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac stores The determined remaining time information (period A to period C) set in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) is stored (see S4956, S4958 and S4959 in FIG. 108). Then, in the restart processing (see S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related processing 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108), the read (See S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109), and referred to when determining the additional effect type (See S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

Since information for indicating the remaining period of the latent guaranteed state game is notified when various notification conditions are satisfied in this way, the remaining period of the pattern fixed period, that is, the latent guaranteed state game is announced. It is possible to acquire information indicating the remaining period of time that can be executed by grasping the effect modes of various effects that are executed during the latent certainty state. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the remaining period in which the latent state game can be executed is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided range is sent to the player. , the player can roughly grasp the remaining period of the latent state game, and is configured to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the specific remaining period. However, without being limited to this, for example, a specific remaining period may be notified to the player in units of seconds.

The fixed flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that it is during the special symbol stop display period (symbol confirmation period), and is set to ON during the special symbol stop display period (symbol confirmation period). be. This fixed flag 223ad is configured to be set to ON even if any special pattern of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) and the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is during the pattern fixing period. there is

In the determination flag 223ad, the command determination process 2 of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4162 in FIG. 106) determines that the symbol determination related command has been received (S4254 in FIG. 106: Yes). It is set to ON in related processing (see S4255 in FIG. 110) (see S5077 in FIG. 110). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) (see S4951 in FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is during the design confirmation period. (see S4953 in FIG. 108). Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 resume command is received in the restart process (S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) (S5001 in FIG. 109: Yes) , It is referred to determine whether or not the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is during the design confirmation period (see S5051 in FIG. 109).

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the small winning is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (when the small winning game is executed), or at the time when the small winning game ends It is determined whether the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is during the variation display period or during the design confirmation period, and based on the determination result, the special figure 1 is temporarily stopped (variation display period, It is configured to set the processing at the time of interrupting the subtraction of the design fixing period) and the effect mode at the time of restarting the special figure 1 (resuming the subtraction of the variable display period and the design fixing period).

By configuring in this way, at the timing when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the process is appropriately executed regardless of the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1). can do.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. FIG. The control processing of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment is the special symbol variation processing 2 instead of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) with respect to the control processing of the main controller 110 in the above-described first embodiment. (see FIG. 97), instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98), instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) First special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 99), second special symbol big hit determination processing 2 (see FIG. 102) instead of second special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 40), second special symbol variation stop processing (Refer to FIG. 45) 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (Refer to FIG. 103), instead of special figure 2 deviation stop processing (Refer to FIG. 46) Special figure 2 deviation stop processing 2 (Refer to FIG. 105) is executed. The difference is that the first special symbol fixing period setting process (see FIG. 100) and the second special symbol fixing period setting process (see FIG. 104) are newly added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the contents of the control processing executed by the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, points that are significantly different from the above-described first embodiment will be briefly described. In the above-described first embodiment, the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set during the variable display period of one of the special symbols (special figure 1). More specifically, in a state in which the probability variable state is set, the probability state is set during the variable display period of the special symbol that wins the jackpot, and the probability state game (RUSH game) is performed until the variable display period ends. Then, the jackpot game is executed immediately after the variable display period ends. As a result, the player can continuously execute two different privilege games (a game that frequently generates small wins in the latent state and a big win game), and the player can receive a lot of rewards in a short period of time. It was possible to grant the privilege of

Furthermore, since the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed in the state before the big win game is executed, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed without anxiety. In other words, even if the game result in the first half is not good by setting the jackpot game in which the bonus given to the player is generally larger than that of the small win game in the latter half of the two consecutive bonus games. , the player can be motivated to obtain a privilege in the game (jackpot game) executed in the second half.

In addition, since the latent state game (RUSH game) is configured to be performed during the execution of the jackpot variation, it is possible to set in advance the period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long time and an excessive privilege is given to the player.

In addition, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed varies according to the variation pattern selected when the jackpot is won. In other words, by one lottery of special symbols, the presence or absence of the execution of the jackpot game and the length of the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) are determined, so the latent state game ( RUSH game), the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced compared to the case of executing a process using a dedicated selection table in order to preset the length of the game period.

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, since the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols, the latent state game In order to prepare a plurality of game periods of (RUSH game), it is necessary to prepare a plurality of variation patterns (variation times) in advance, and there is a possibility that the data area for storing the variation patterns will be compressed.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the period during which the special symbols are stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period) is also a period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. In addition, the length of the symbol fixing period is varied according to the symbol type based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

By configuring in this way, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set by adding (combining) the special symbol fluctuation time and the symbol fixed period, so that the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set. A game period of a game (RUSH game) can be set in a plurality of patterns with a small amount of data.

Furthermore, even in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the latent state game (RUSH game), it is configured so that a different symbol confirmation period is set according to the lottery result. Depending on the design determination period, the number of lotteries of the special figure 2 executed during a predetermined latency state game (RUSH game) period (variation display time of the special figure 1) can be varied.

In other words, in the lottery of the first special symbol that sets the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game), it is desired that a longer symbol fixing period is set, and the latent state game (RUSH game) In the lottery of the second special pattern that is repeatedly executed during the game, it is a game property that a shorter design fixing period is desired to be set, and a novelty that a different lottery result is desired depending on the special pattern type to be the lottery object. A certain playability can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the processing for shifting the high probability state of the normal design to the low probability state (subtraction processing of the time saving counter 203f) is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the special design, and the high probability state of the special design to a low probability state (subtraction processing of the probability variation counter 203aa) is configured to be executed at the end of the special symbol design confirmation period, and in a state where the special symbol high probability state is set When the number of fluctuations (the number of lotteries) of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number (50 times), the high probability state of the special pattern is shifted to the low probability state, and the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. When the number of fluctuations in the pattern (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (50 times), the high probability state of the normal pattern can be shifted to the low probability state.

In other words, in a state in which the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, when the number of fluctuations in special symbols (number of lotteries) reaches 50 times, the fluctuation (50th fluctuation ) is started, the game state shifts to a latent state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and timing when the variation (50th variation) ends (symbol confirmation period ends At the time), the game state is configured to be able to shift to the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).

By constructing in this way, even if the jackpot is not won, the latent state can be set only for a predetermined specific period (the 50th fluctuation period (including the symbol fixing period)). , it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game).

First, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154). The special symbol variation process 2 (S154) adds the processes of S251 and S252 to the special symbol variation process (S104) in the above-described first embodiment, and replaces the first special symbol variation stop process (S207). , the second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S263) is executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) and the second special symbol variation stop processing (S213).

In the special symbol variation process 2 (S154), when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the flag 203ab during special figure 1 symbol determination is turned on. It is determined whether it is set (S251). When it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. Details of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the flag 203ab during special figure 1 symbol determination is set to OFF (S251: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and S209 Go to processing.

If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not 0 (greater than 0) in the process of S206 described above (S206: No), or when the processes of S208 and S257 are executed, It is determined whether the value of the variable time counter 203n in FIG. 2 is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S209: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 design flag 203ac is set to ON (S252).

In the process of S252, when it is determined that the flag 203ac during special figure 2 design determination is not set to ON (S252: No), that is, by the processes of S209 and S252, the current is the second special symbol (special figure 2) If it is determined that it is neither during the fluctuation display nor during the symbol confirmation period, the second special symbol variation start processing is executed to newly start the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S210), After that, this End the process. In addition, since the processing contents of the second special symbol variation start processing (S210) are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, if it is determined that the flag 203ac during special figure 2 design determination is set to ON (S252: Yes), that is, the current second special symbol (special figure 2) during the design determination period If so, the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 98, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) replaces the process of S402 with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above, and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0. The difference is that a process (S451) for determining whether the

That is, in the above-described first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the jackpot of the special symbol is won. Although the probability variable flag 203g for indicating the high probability state was used, in the second embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the special symbol jackpot winning (first end condition) In addition, it has a second end condition that is established when the number of fluctuations (the number of lotteries) of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). Therefore, the probability variation counter 203aa is used in order to measure the number of variations of the special symbols (the number of lotteries) during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbols is continuously set. This variable probability counter 203aa is for measuring the number of fluctuations in the special symbol (the number of lotteries) until the above-described second end condition is established, and the value is updated based on the execution of the lottery in the special symbol. configured to be

In addition, even if the configuration other than the present embodiment, it may be configured to determine whether or not the second end condition is satisfied. For example, the probability variation flag 203g used in the first embodiment The probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be used, and a variation number counter that always measures the number of variations of the special symbol (the number of lotteries) regardless of the game state is provided, and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g. It may be configured to determine the number of variations of the special symbol during the probability variation state based on the update number of the variation number counter.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the number of variations of the special symbol, that is, the number of variations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of variations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) Although the end condition (second end condition) for ending the probability variable state is set, but not limited to this, the first special symbol (special figure 1) The number of fluctuations (the number of lotteries) is measured only. A figure 1 variation number counter and a special figure 2 variation number counter that measures only the number of variations (number of lotteries) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are provided, and the number of variations (number of lotteries) of each special symbol It is also possible to configure so as to set end conditions (end conditions for ending the variable probability state) respectively.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in addition to the first end condition based on the special symbol jackpot winning as the end condition for ending the special symbol high probability state (for example, probability variable state), the number of special symbol fluctuations Although the second end condition is provided based on (the number of lotteries), other end conditions may be provided. A third termination condition may be provided that is satisfied when the number of times that the condition has occurred reaches a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, this third end condition may be set for the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol.

In addition, a timing counter for timing the time when the high probability state of special symbols is set is provided, and a fourth end condition that is satisfied when the timing counter clocks a predetermined time and a high probability state of special symbols are set. It is also possible to provide a fifth end condition that can be established based on the lottery results of the normal symbols executed in the state of being executed or the number of lotteries.

In addition, when any of the plurality of termination conditions described above is satisfied, the timing of shifting from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is also set other than the timing used in the second embodiment. Also good, for example, just before starting the special design lottery, immediately after the special design lottery is executed, timing to start the special design fluctuation, and a predetermined time after the special design fluctuation is started (for example, 5 seconds), the timing at which the special symbol has stopped changing, the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has passed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and the special symbol stop display period (symbol confirmed period) may be configured to be shifted at any timing of the end timing.

Thus, by providing a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the high probability state of the special symbols and the timing of terminating the high probability state of the special symbols when the termination conditions are satisfied, Since it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the high probability state of the pattern will continue and at what timing (at the start of fluctuation of the special pattern, at the stop of fluctuation, at the end of the fixed period of the pattern), it makes the player nervous. A game can be played while giving a feeling.

Other processes of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) are the same as those of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 99, a first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) which is one process in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. will be explained. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257). The first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) is the processing (S851 to S858 , S860) is added, and the contents of the reset process when stopping and displaying the first special symbol (special figure 1) won in the jackpot are different. Since other processing is the same as the first special symbol variation stop processing (S207), detailed description will be omitted.

Here, returning to FIG. 97, the conditions for executing the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) will be described. In this first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99), the process of stopping the variation of the special symbol, the process of setting the period (symbol confirmation period) during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the set symbol confirmation It is configured such that a process of measuring the period and various execution processes corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol after the elapse of the symbol fixing period are executed.

Therefore, in the process of S206 in FIG. 97, that is, in the process of determining whether it is the timing to end the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the timing to stop the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (The value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0) If it is determined (S206 in FIG. 97: Yes), and the process of S251, that is, the current is the first special symbol (special figure 1) When it is determined that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed (the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON) in the process of determining whether it is in the stopped display mode (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes).

Returning to FIG. 99, the description continues. In the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S851). Here, when the variation time of the special figure 1 has passed and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is executed to stop and display the special figure 1, that is, in the process of S206 in FIG. When the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) is executed by determining that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0, the flag 203ab during special figure 1 symbol determination is set to ON. Therefore, in the process of S851, it is determined that the flag 203ab during special figure 1 symbol determination is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S851: No), and the first special symbol determination period setting process is executed. (S852).

In the first special symbol fixing period setting process (S852), a process is executed to set a period (symbol fixing period) during which special symbols are stopped and displayed. Here, referring to FIG. 100, the first special symbol fixing period setting process which is one process in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment (S852) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol fixing period setting process (S852). In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), the determination time (symbol determination period) is set, the process of setting the command to be transmitted to the first symbol display device 37, and the first special symbol (special symbol When the lottery result of 1) is a jackpot, a process for shifting the high probability state of normal symbols to the low probability state is executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as a condition (time saving end condition) to shift the high probability state of the normal pattern to a low probability state, when winning a special symbol jackpot (first time saving end condition) and normal design When the number of fluctuations of special symbols (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) in a state where the high probability state is set continuously (second time saving end condition) and two time saving ends It has a condition, and when the above-described first time saving end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the start timing of the symbol confirmation period), and the second When the 2 o'clock short end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started (the timing when the lottery of the special symbol is executed). .

In this way, multiple conditions (time saving end conditions) that trigger the transition of the high probability state of the normal pattern to the low probability state are provided, and the transition timing to the low probability state is changed according to the established time saving end conditions. By configuring to, at which timing the low probability state of the normal design is set for the player who is playing in the game state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which the high probability state of the normal design is set Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict whether the player will shift to a game state (normal state, latent certainty state), it is possible to make the player always pay attention to the game contents and to provide a game that never gets bored.

In the second embodiment, it is configured to shift the state of the normal symbol with the contents described above, but other configurations may be used. Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing to start the variation of the special symbols, the timing after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the variation of the special symbols has started, the timing when the variation of the special symbols has stopped, etc. , a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has passed after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, or a timing when the stop display period of the special symbols (symbol confirmation period) ends. can be

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), first, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad (S2801). In the second embodiment, various tables used in the lottery of special symbols (big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, off type selection table 202ad) are selected in correspondence to the fixed time Since (symbol confirmation period) is defined, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period) corresponding to the type to be stopped and displayed this time is set to the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a jackpot and the jackpot type selected using the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is a jackpot A3, it is confirmed. Since 150 seconds are defined as time (symbol confirmation period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set to the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

Next, the flag 203ab during special figure 1 design determination is set to ON (S2802), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803). If it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, this time, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol that sets the fixed time (symbol fixed time) is a big hit. If so, the value of the time saving counter 203f is reset in order to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (S2804). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the process of S2804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2805. Thus, only when the lottery result of the special symbols is a big hit, the low probability state of the normal symbols can be set at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbols.

It should be noted that, for example, when the special design jackpot is won (first time-saving end condition), and in the state where the high probability state of the normal design is continuously set, the number of fluctuations of the special design (the number of lotteries) is a predetermined number of times ( For example, when 50 times) is reached (second time-saving end condition), and when two time-saving end conditions are met based on the same special symbol lottery, determine whether the first time-saving end condition is met Since the process of determining whether or not the second time-saving end condition is satisfied is preferentially executed rather than the process of doing so, the special symbol jackpot is won in the case of setting the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol. Even in this case, the processing of S2804 is skipped.

After executing the process of S2803 or S2804, in the process of S2805, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S2805). When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S2805: Yes), a state command indicating the probability state is set (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), the state command indicating the normal state is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to S2808. After executing the processing of S2806 or S2807, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S2808). Next, the variation of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 99, the description continues. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag 203ab during special figure 1 design determination is set to ON in the processing of S851 (S851: Yes), that is, the current is the first special symbol (special figure 1) during the design determination period If it is determined that there is, the process of S852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S853. In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97), it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes), and the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (See S257 in FIG. 99) is executed, it is determined that the flag 203ab during special figure 1 design determination is set to ON in the process of S851.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether the present is the timing when the design confirmation period of the first special design (special design 1) has passed. Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more), that is, it is determined that the current is the first special symbol (special figure 1) during the design confirmation period If so (S853: No), the fixed time process (S860) is executed, and this process ends. During this fixed time process (S860), the process of updating the elapsed time of the pattern fixed period is executed, or the elapsed time of the temporarily stopped pattern fixed period is updated based on the execution of the small winning game. It executes processing for resuming the processing, and the detailed content thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 .

On the other hand, in the process of S853, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the fixed time (symbol fixed period) , Set the flag 203ab during special figure 1 design determination to OFF (S854). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855). When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S856). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is 0 (S855: No), the process of S856 is skipped and the process proceeds to S857. In the processing of S857, a state command is set according to the values of the time reduction counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa (S857).

By executing the process of S856 described above, in the present embodiment, after the stop display period of the special design has passed (after the design confirmation period has passed), the process of subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is executed, and the subtraction When the value of the subsequent probability variation counter 203aa becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. As a result, the probability variation end condition (the condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state) is established when the number of fluctuations (the number of lotteries) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). In that case, the special symbol low probability state is set after the stop display period of the special symbol has passed, so during the variable display period of the target special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period, the special symbol is high It can be a stochastic state. Therefore, for example, even if the probability variation end condition described above is satisfied by the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol, during the variation display period of the first special symbol, during the symbol confirmation period, the special symbol is in a high probability state. is set, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol can be executed.

When the content of the state command set in the process of S857 described above is specifically described, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set), the probability variation counter When the value of 203aa is larger than 0, a state command indicating that the game state is a variable probability state is set, and when the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the game state is a time saving state. A state command is set. In addition, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set), if the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is greater than 0, the game state is the latent probability state. is set, and when the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is 0, a state command indicating that the game state is the normal state is set.

Furthermore, in the process of S857, when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (1 or more), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa, that is, the remaining probability variation number command is set as information indicating the number of remaining probability variation. The state command set in the process of S857 and the remaining probability variation count command are output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110 be done. The sound lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes processing corresponding to the received command in command determination processing 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). As a result, the current game situation can be properly determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first time-saving end condition (the condition that is established when the jackpot is won) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol at the stop display timing of the special symbol is low probability. state, and when the second time-saving end condition (condition established according to the number of fluctuations in special patterns (number of lotteries)) is satisfied, the high probability state of normal patterns is reduced at the start timing of fluctuations in special patterns. Along with moving to the probability state, when the probability variable end condition (the first probability variable end condition that is established when the jackpot is won, the second probability variable end condition that is established according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of lotteries)) is established is configured to shift the high probability state of the special symbols to the low probability state at the end timing of the stop display period (symbol fixing period) of the special symbols.

By configuring in this way, the period in which the latent state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player, is set as the game state can be varied according to the time-saving end condition that is satisfied, so that it is possible for the player. It is possible to make the player expect not only whether or not the lottery result of the special symbols will be a big hit, but also to expect the length of the period in which the advantageous game state is set to be longer.

Next, set the special figure 1 fixed period end command (S858), and perform the same processing as the processing of S801 to S805 in the first embodiment described above. Next, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation counter 203aa are reset (S859), the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 101, during the fixed time process ( S860) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the contents of the processing during the fixed time (S860).

In the fixed time process (S860), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901). This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and the lottery result is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). Then, during the period in which the small winning game is being executed, in the processing of S201 of the special symbol variation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97), the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 is configured not to be performed. In other words, in the process of S2901 of the process during the fixed time (see S860 in FIG. 101), it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON only after the small winning game ends. Only when the variation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

Therefore, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), set the special figure 1 resume command (S2902), special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is turned off (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2904. That is, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), since the small hitting game is finished, the small hitting game is executed As a result, the processes of S2902 and S2903 are executed in order to restart the temporarily stopped updating process of the design fixing period.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2901: No), the processing of S2902 and S2903 is skipped and S2904 to process.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is updated by subtracting 1 (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) replaces the process of S1002 with respect to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above, and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is The difference is that a process (S1051) for determining whether the value is greater than 0 is executed. Other processes are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S903), so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Also, the content of the process executed in S1051 described above is the same as the content executed in S451 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). Description is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 103, a second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) which is one process in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. will be explained. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) adds the processes of S1551 to S1563 to the second special symbol variation stop process (see S213 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, and S1506. The difference is that the process of S1560 is provided instead of the process of 1 and that the processes of S1509 and S1510 are deleted. Since other processing is the same as the second special symbol variation stop processing (S213 in FIG. 45), detailed description will be omitted.

This second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S263) is similar to the above-described first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99). It is different in that the process up to is executed, and the control object is changed from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure 2). In addition, among the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), for the various processes of the above-described first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99), simply the control target A detailed description of the processing that only changes the symbol types will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551). When it is determined that the flag 203ac during special figure 2 design determination is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the process of S1552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1553. On the other hand, in the processing of S1551, when it is determined that the flag 203ac during special figure 2 design determination is set to OFF (S1551: No), the second special design determination period setting processing (S1552) is executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 104, the second special symbol which is one process in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S263 in FIG. 103) executed by MPU 201 of main control device 110 in the second embodiment The fixed period setting process (S1552) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol fixing period setting process (S1552). In this second special symbol fixing period setting process (S1552), the target symbol type for the process executed in the above-described first special symbol fixing period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) is the first special symbol. to the second special symbol, the command to be set is the special figure 2 confirmation command corresponding to the second special symbol, and the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the second special symbol. The only difference is that the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, with reference to the content of the first special symbol fixing period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100), detailed description of this process is omitted.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description continues. After executing the processing of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is not 0 (that is, greater than 0) (S1553: No), update the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae (S1562), and update the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 (S1563 ), the process ends.

The processing of S1563 is for updating the display of the second special symbol that has already been stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, in order to indicate that the special symbols are stopped, the first symbol display device 37 lights up the symbols (including display of blinking at high speed enough for the player to recognize that the lights are on). Therefore, in the process of S1563, an instruction for lighting the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, in the case of using a configuration in which only the special symbols are continuously lit during the symbol determination period, for example, the second special symbol determination period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104) In the process of S3009, along with outputting an instruction to stop the variation of the second special symbol (stop display), information indicating a period of stop display (symbol confirmation period) is also output, and a predetermined period (symbol confirmation period), it may be configured to be preset so that the second special symbol is lit and displayed. By configuring in this way, in the process executed in a short cycle, it is not necessary to execute the process for updating the display content of the first symbol display device 37 each time, so the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the flag 203ac during special figure 2 design decision is set to OFF (S1554). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1555), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF (S1555: No), the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S1556).

When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S1556: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable probability counter 203aa (S1557), and the process proceeds to S1558. On the other hand, in the process of S1555, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 in the process of S1556 (S1556: No), the process of S1557 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1558.

In the process of S1558, set the state command corresponding to the value of the time saving counter 203f and probability variation counter 203aa (S1558), then set the special figure 2 fixed period end command (S1559), then the first embodiment described above The same processing of S1501 to S1505 is executed. Here, in the processing of S1501, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S1501: No), special figure 2 out stop processing 2 (S1561 ) is executed, and the process ends.

In addition, when the processing of S1505 is finished, next, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the processing of S1507, which is the same as the first embodiment described above, is executed. and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, special figure 2 out stop processing 2 ( S1561) will be described. Figure 105 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 omission stop processing 2 (S1561). Special figure 2 deviating stop processing 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment differs from special figure 2 deviating stop processing (S1508) in the first embodiment in that the processing of S1607 to S1610 is not executed. Since other processing is the same processing, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111. FIG. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment is the command determination processing 2 instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 59) in the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment. (see FIG. 106), and various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 111) is executed instead of various counter update processing (see FIG. 72), and otherwise the same processing is executed. Specifically, the processing executed when various commands output by changing the control contents executed by the main controller 110 from the first embodiment are received, and the various commands added from the second embodiment. A process to update the counter value has been added.

First, the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S4162). The command determination process 2 (S4162) differs from the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S4251 to S4255 are added. Other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4216 as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment are executed. In the process of S4215, if it is determined that a hit-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4215: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to the number of remaining times has been received (S4251). ).

Here, as a command related to the remaining number of times, a remaining time short number command (set by the processing of S603 in FIG. 36) indicating the remaining number of times (number of remaining fluctuations of special symbols) for which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set command) and a remaining probability variation command (command set by the processing of S857 in FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set (remaining variation number of special symbols). If it is determined that the remaining count related command has been received (S4251: Yes), remaining count update processing 2 (S4252) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the remaining count update process 2 (S4252), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the details of the remaining count update process 2 (S4252). The remaining count update process 2 (S4252) differs from the remaining count update process (S4218) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S4851 to S4852 are added. Specifically, the difference is that a process for transmitting a command for displaying the number of remaining probability variations to the display control device 114 is added.

In the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining time reduction number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4801). When it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the remaining time reduction command for display corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4851. Next, it is determined whether or not a remaining probability variation count command has been received (S4851). When it is determined that the remaining probability variation count command has been received (S4851: Yes), a display residual probability variation count command corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation count command has not been received (S4851: No), this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description continues. In the process of S4251, if it is determined that the remaining count related command has not been received (S4251: No), it is determined whether or not the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219). Here, the temporary stop related command is set when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to ON special figure 1 temporary stop command (see S1603 in FIG. 46) And, the variable display of the temporarily stopped first special symbol, or the special figure 1 restart command (see S2902 in FIG. 101) set when restarting the stop display is included. If it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), temporary stop related processing 2 (S4253) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, referring to FIG. 108, the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253). The temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) differs from the temporary stop related process (S4203) in the above-described first embodiment in that a process for calculating the remaining fixed time is added.

In this temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), when the elapsed time of the variable display of the first special symbol or the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporarily stopped), the temporarily stopped first special symbol A process for executing an effect mode corresponding to the variable display mode or the stop display mode in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received from the main controller 110 (S4951). If it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), restart processing (S4952) is executed and this processing ends. Details of the restart processing (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4951, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (S4951: Yes), that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) accompanying the execution of the small hit game, or If it is determined that it is time to temporarily stop the stop display, then it is determined whether or not the in-confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953). Here, if it is determined that the flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953: Yes), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (during the symbol confirmation period), so the set symbol confirmation time The remaining time of (symbol determination time of the first special symbol) is calculated (S4954), and the process proceeds to S4955.

In the process of S4954, the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, that is, the remaining time of the set symbol confirmation time is calculated by reading the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol. Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining time of the symbol fixing time calculated in the process of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), the period A indicating that the remaining fixed time is short is set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the process of S4952 is executed. and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4955, if it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4955: No), then the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds. (S4957). In the processing of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is two seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is stored as normal remaining fixed time. The indicated period B is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process ends.

In the processing of S4957, if it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (is 60 seconds or more) (S4957: No), the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac indicates that the remaining fixed time is long. A period C is set (S4959), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4953, if it is determined that the flag 223ad is set to OFF during determination (S4953: No), that is, if it is determined that the current is during the fluctuation display period of the first special symbol, The process for calculating the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) executed in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and the process of S4952 Move to In addition, since the processing for calculating the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the restart process (S4952), which is one process in the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the contents of the restart processing (S4952).

In the second embodiment, in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variable display period), it is possible to execute the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol during the stop display (during the symbol confirmation period). Since it is configured, when a small winning game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the stop display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the symbol fixing period is temporarily interrupted). It is configured as follows. Further, at the timing when the small winning game is finished, the stop display of the first special symbol is resumed (subtraction of the symbol fixing period is resumed). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the state of the first special symbol is determined when the variable display of the first special symbol or the stop display is resumed, and based on the determination result, the production mode after the restart is set. It is configured to

In the restart process (S4952), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 restart command is received (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 resume command is received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether the flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051). When it is determined that the flag 223ad during determination is set to ON (S5051: Yes), that is, when the timing of receiving the special figure 1 resume command is during the stop display of the first special symbol, remaining determination Remaining fixed time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac is read (S5052), and based on the read remaining fixed time information and the additional effect counter 223i, the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa ( S5053), the additional effect command for display corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the process of S5053 is set (S5054), and the information set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the in-confirmation flag 223ad is set to OFF (S5056), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5051, when it is determined that the flag 223ad is set to OFF during determination (S5051: No), that is, the timing of receiving the special figure 1 restart command is during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol If there is, the same processing of S5002 to S5005 as the variable restart processing (S4902 in FIG. 68) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description continues. In the process of S4219, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination related command has been received (S4254). When it is determined that the symbol determination related command has been received (S4254: Yes), symbol determination related processing (S4255) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol determination related command has not been received (S4254: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S4221), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the symbol determination related process (S4255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the contents of the design determination related process (S4255).

In the symbol confirmation related process (S4255), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command is received from the main controller 110 (S5071). When it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command is received (S5071: Yes), the display special figure 1 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, the value corresponding to the received command is set to the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa (S5073), and the process proceeds to S5074. On the other hand, in the process of S5071, when it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command is not received (S5071: No), the processes of S5072 and S5073 are skipped, and the process of S5074 is performed.

In the processing of S5074, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S5074). When it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S5074: Yes), the special figure 2 confirmation command for display corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is special figure The 2 confirmation counter 223ab is set (S5076), the in-decision flag 223ad is set to ON (S5077), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5074, if it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command is not received (S5074: No), the process of S5075 and S5076 is skipped as it is, the process of S5077 is executed, and this process ends do.

Next, various counter update processing 2 (S4161) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the details of the various counter updating process 2 (S4161).

In various counter update processing 2 (S4161), first, the value of the special figure 1 decision counter 223aa determines whether it is greater than 0 (S5451). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 decision counter 223aa is greater than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 decision counter 223aa is subtracted by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the process of S5452 is skipped and the process of S5453 is performed. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5453). If it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5454), and the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa And the reading of the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is executed (S5455). Next, the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa read in the process of S5455, and the remaining time is calculated (S5456). Next, the processing of S5407 and S5408 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5453, if it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processes of S5454 to S5456 and S5407 are skipped, and the process of S5408 is executed. , the process ends.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 135. FIG. The above-described second embodiment, like the above-described first embodiment, is configured so that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate at the same time (so-called , Simultaneous variation type), by executing the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 during the period when the latent state is set as the gaming state, so that many small winning games (RUSH games) can be executed was configured to

Furthermore, as a condition for setting the latent state (condition for RUSH game to be executable), in the state where the variable state is set, the first variable end that is established when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 1 A condition and a second probability variable end condition established when the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (50 times) are provided, and when the first variable probability end condition is established, a jackpot is won. The period (symbol confirmation period) during which the special symbol (special symbol 1) indicating that it has been stopped and displayed is in a latent state, and when the second probability variable end condition is satisfied, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The period (variation display period) and during the symbol fixing period are configured to be in a latent state.

In addition, the length of the pattern fixing period is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the special pattern, and the pattern fixing period is set longer in the case of winning the jackpot than in the case of not winning the jackpot. It was configured as

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of one special pattern (special 1), an invalid lottery that does not win a jackpot in the lottery of the other pattern (special 2) is executed. , and the invalid lottery does not update the value related to the condition for varying the game state. Specifically, during the period when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery (during the variable display period of the special pattern winning the jackpot and during the design confirmation period), the special drawing 2 lottery is executed. Even if it did, it comprised so that the value of probability variation counter 203aa might not be updated (decremented).

In the second embodiment configured as described above, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in a state where the variable probability state is set, the period (variable display Period, pattern confirmation period) is completed, no matter how many times the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is not updated (subtracted), so you can rest assured that the special figure 2 was capable of executing a variation of

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the number of types of probability variable end conditions is increased more than in the second embodiment described above, and the period in which the latent probability state is set is configured to be longer than in the second embodiment described above. are doing. Specifically, as the probability variable end condition, when the probability variable state is set and the small hit is won in the special figure 1, the probability variable end condition (3rd probability variable end condition) is established. When the variable probability end condition is established, the game state is shifted from the variable probability state to the latent probability state at the time when the small winning game is started.

Furthermore, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is set (the value of the variable probability counter 203aa) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the value of the time reduction counter 203f) are made the same (for example, "4 ), the probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and if you do not win the jackpot, the game state is changed from the probability state to the normal state. It consists of

That is, in the third embodiment, while the probability variable state (both special symbols and normal symbols are in a high probability state) is set, a small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, and the normal symbol is changed to a low probability state. By making the transition, the period from the start timing of the small winning game to the setting of the low probability state of the special symbol can be set to the latent state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the period in which the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is continuously set according to the timing of winning the small prize in the lottery of the special figure 1.例文帳に追加. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the lottery result of the special symbols, and to provide a game machine that does not get bored.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when a big win is won in the final variation in which the probability variation state ends, a variation pattern with a long variation time is easily selected. As a result, even if the final variation of the probability variable state is reached without winning a small hit, the latent probability state can be set for a long time, so that the player can play the game with expectations until the end. can let

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the types of benefits given based on the game contents of the special figure 1 during the variable probability state in the third embodiment will be described. Figure 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game content of the special figure 1 game after the variable probability state is set and the given privilege. As shown in FIG. 112, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the probability variation state is set in a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (4 variations of the special symbol), and the number of variations during the probability variation state (after the jackpot The special figure fluctuation frequency) and the lottery result of the special figure, the content of the privilege given to the player is made different.

Specifically, in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a big hit, there are many players In addition to the jackpot game that can win the prize balls, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed, the period during which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that it is a jackpot (symbol confirmation period ) to be set. In addition, when the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a small hit, a small winning game is executed based on the lottery result of special figure 1 as a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. After that, it is defined that a period (symbol fixing period) is set until the number of special symbol fluctuations after the big hit reaches 4 times.

In other words, when a small hit is won in the first special drawing 1 lottery after the end of the big hit, the timing at which the small hit game starts (the timing at which the first special symbol fluctuation stops and the small hit game is executed ), a latent state game (RUSH game) is set in a period from the end of the fourth special figure variation after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the period during which the latent state (RUSH state) is set is "ultra-long" in which the longest period can be set. In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is out of the 1st and 2nd special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, no benefits will be given to the player is not given.

In the third special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the probability variation state is set. Configure. Here, when a small hit is won, in addition to the small hit game, the period until the fourth special figure variation is completed is set as a latent state, so after the above-mentioned variable state is set Compared to the case of winning a small hit in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery), the period in which the latent state is set is shorter.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as the number of special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) increases after the probability variation state is set in the probability variation state, when the jackpot is won, variation with a long variation time It is configured so that the pattern can be easily selected. Therefore, compared with the case of winning the jackpot in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the above-mentioned probability variation state is set, it is easy to lengthen the period in which the probability condition is set. be able to.

Next, the fourth special figure variation (special figure lottery) after the probability variation state is set, that is, in the special figure final variation in the probability variation state, regardless of the result of the special figure lottery, the special figure variation is started The period from to the end (until the pattern confirmation period has passed) is set as the latent state. In addition, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure final variation in the probability variation state (4th special figure variation after the probability variation state is set), it is configured to easily set a long variation time. The length of the period during which the latent state is set is "long".

Then, when the jackpot is not won in the special figure final variation in the probability variable state, the normal state is set after the symbol fixing period elapses, and the special figure lottery after the fifth time is executed.

<Regarding effect display content in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, depending on the established transition condition (probability variable end condition), the period in which the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set is different. , and during the variable probability state, a suggestion effect (bingo game) for suggesting to the player the possibility of setting the latent certainty state and the timing at which the latent certainty state is set is executed Configure.

Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115, the display contents of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. Among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 113(a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game in which the variable probability state is set will be described. FIG. 113(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen at the end of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 113(a), among the display screens of the third symbol display device 81, in the main display area Dm, the same special figure 1 display area Dm1 and special figure 2 display area as in the second embodiment described above. Dm2, a guidance display area Dm3 is formed, in addition, a special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4 indicating the number of reserved balls of special figure 1, and a special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm5 indicating the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 , are formed.

FIG. 113(a) shows the end screen of the jackpot game executed based on the special figure 1 jackpot, and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 shows that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a jackpot. The stop display mode "777" of the third symbol is displayed, and "-" indicating that the special figure 2 variation is not executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3, characters of "left-handed" are displayed to indicate that the jackpot game is played in the left-handed game.

In the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the game content (right-handed or left-handed) displayed in the guide display area Dm3 during the jackpot game is the same as the game content when the jackpot is won. is configured to be That is, the state shown in FIG. 113(a) is a jackpot won during a left-handed game.

Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a bingo card 820 used in the variable probability state set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed. Here, the suggestive effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, during the period in which the variable probability state is set, bingo is performed as a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the probability state is set or whether or not the jackpot will be won. Configure the game to run.

In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113(a)) on which arbitrary numbers are arranged in nine squares (3 vertical×3 horizontal) is displayed on the jackpot end screen (ending screen). , Numbers are announced based on the lottery of special figure 1 executed in the state where the variable probability state is set, and based on the announced numbers and the array of numbers described on the bingo card 820 An effect suggesting a game result (lottery result of special figure 1) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 113(b) to 115, display contents (effect contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the bingo game will be described. When the bingo game is started (when the special figure 1 variation in the variable probability state is started), the display shown in FIG. 113(b) is executed. FIG. 113(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents displayed when the special figure 1 variation (first time) is executed after the end of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 113(b), when the special figure 1 variation (first time) is executed, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is being varied. . Then, "3" is displayed in the special figure 1 pending number display area Dm4, and from the value ("4") shown in FIG. showing.

In addition, in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, the number "1" is displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game based on the lottery result of this time (special figure 1 fluctuation (first time)), and the lower right area , a remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number of bingo games "Last 3" is displayed. Here, for example, an example of the effect in the case where the special figure 1 variation (fourth time) during the variable probability state is a jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. 114 .

Figure 114 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bingo game during the variation of the special figure 1 variation (third time) in the case where the special figure 1 variation (fourth time) in the probability variation state is a big hit , FIG. 114(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents during variation of special figure 1 variation (fourth time). In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 112, in the final variation of the probability variation state (special figure 1 variation (fourth time)), latent probability state is set at the timing when the variation display of special figure 1 is started During the latent state, the latent state game (RUSH game) for executing the lottery of special figure 2 by the right hitting game is executed.

Therefore, immediately after the final variation of the probability variation state is executed (after the special figure 1 variation (third time) pattern confirmation period has elapsed), the latent probability state is The effect result for notifying that it is set (bingo 2 rows aligned display) is before the special figure 1 variation (4th time) where the latent state is set (in special figure 1 variation (3rd time)) configured to run. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the latent state in a state in which the player fully understands that the latent state is set.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, if the lottery of special figure 1 in the final variation of the probability variation state is not elected to the jackpot or small hit (if it is lost), a short It is configured so that the effect result (bingo 2-line display) for notifying that the variation pattern of the variation time (1 second) is selected and the potential state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. . As a result, it is possible to eliminate the notification to the player that the latent certainty state is actually set for a short period of time, and to execute the failure effect of the bingo game. Further, when the latent state for a short period of time is set, it is not displayed in the guide display area Dm3 to the effect that the player is to play the right-handed game, so that it is possible to suppress the annoyance of the game.

Returning to FIG. 114(a), the description is continued. In Figure 114 (a), the variation display of the special figure 1 variation (3rd time) is performed, the lottery result "1" of the special figure 1 variation (1st time), the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation (2nd time) "8" is displayed as the past history 823 on the left side of the main display area Dm, and "5" is displayed as the lottery result 821 of this time. In the bingo card 820, the squares corresponding to "1", "8", and "5" displayed in the current bingo game are changed to "cross marks" to form and display two lines. .

Furthermore, "Double Bingo" is displayed as the status display mode 824 indicating the current situation, and the comment "Super lucky" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, by informing the player of the success of the bingo game during the fluctuation before the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) that actually wins the jackpot, the effect is given to the player. It is possible to provide a period in which the player can enjoy a sense of satisfaction with success, and to inform in advance that it is necessary to start a right-handed game from the next variation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a comment that notifies that the right-handed game is performed from the next variation (comment that notifies that the right-handed game condition is satisfied (that the condition for setting the latent state is satisfied)) The sub-display area Ds displays ``It's almost time for a right-handed game'', but the player is notified in advance of the timing at which the latent state is set, that is, the timing at which the right-handed game is played. If it is good, for example, the remaining period until the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) (remaining period of the sum of the remaining fluctuation display period and the design confirmation period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time)) is calculated. A calculation means may be provided, and information based on the calculation result of the calculation means (information for indicating the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time)) may be configured to be notified to the player.

In the third embodiment, when the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 in a state where the variable probability state is set as the gaming state (when the starting condition of special figure 2 is established), A variation pattern with a short variation time (0.5 to 1 second) is set regardless of the result of the lottery. As a result, when the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed by performing the right-handed game in the state where the probability variable state is set, the probability variable state is set for the period in which the latent probability state can be set. Since it is extremely short compared to the case where the left-handed game is performed in the state and the variation (lottery) is executed in the special figure 2, the right-handed game in the variable probability state can be made a disadvantageous game disadvantageous to the player. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress an act of intentionally playing an irregular game different from the displayed contents during the variable probability state in which "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 in a state where the variable probability state is set as the gaming state (if the starting condition of special figure 2 is established) ) is configured to set a variation pattern with a short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) regardless of the lottery result, but not limited to this, special figure 2 variation in the probability variation state The time may be configured to be extremely longer variation time (for example, 120 seconds) than the special figure 1 variation time.

By configuring in this way, for example, when a right-handed game is performed in a state in which the variable probability state is set ignoring the progress of the suggestive effect (bingo game) executed by the third symbol display device 81 However, since the special figure 2 variation is executed for a long time (for example, 120 seconds), even if the latent state is set after that (for example, the special figure 1 variation (4th time) variation that was elected to the jackpot Even if the display is started), since the special figure 2 variation is being executed, the latent state game (the game to execute the special figure 2 variation in the state where the latent state is set) is newly It can be made difficult to implement.

In the present embodiment, since the latent definite state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set based on the fluctuation period of the special symbol (special figure 1) and the symbol fixed period, the latent definite state is set (predetermined special figure 1 fluctuation is started), the longer the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation in execution is completed, the longer the period during which the special figure 2 fluctuation in the latent state can be executed (latent probability state game period) is shortened. Also, in the state where the probability variation state is set, in order to reliably prevent the special figure 2 variation from being executed, a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the probability state was set Similarly, when the right-handed game is started from , the latent state game period is shortened, so that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to the player in order to grasp the timing of executing the right-handed game. It is possible to make the user pay attention to the contents displayed on the screen.

Then, when the right-handed game is performed during the latent certainty state and the special figure 2 variation is executed, the effect display during the RUSH game (latent certainty state game) shown in FIG. is displayed on the display screen. FIG. 114(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special figure variation after the end of the jackpot (after setting the probability variation state) is a jackpot. In this embodiment, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, when the latent state is set, the latent state game (RUSH game) for executing the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is performed by the right hitting game. In other words, during the latent state, the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game, and the left-handed game becomes a disadvantageous game.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 114(b), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the guide display area Dm3 is "right hit", and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is special figure 1 variation (4 second) display mode indicating that it is being changed, the display mode indicating that the special figure 2 variation is being executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, and the special figure 1 pending number display area Dm4 "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 1, and "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 2 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball number display area Dm5.

During the period in which the RUSH game is being played, a character 811 resembling a rabbit runs from left to right and opens a treasure box 812 found on the way (the same effect as in the first embodiment). is displayed in the main display area Dm, and characters "RUSH in progress" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate that the latent state game (RUSH game) is in progress. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game is currently in the latent state game (RUSH game).

In Figures 113 to 114 described above, as the probability variable end condition for ending the probability variable state, when the second probability variable end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied, that is, the final variation of the probability variable state (4 An example of the display screen when the latent certainty state is set in the second special figure variation) was explained. In the third embodiment, as the probability variable end condition (condition for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state) for ending the probability variable state (shifting the probability variable state to the latent probability state), the first Probability variable end condition (probability variable end condition established based on jackpot winning), 2nd probability variable end condition (probability variable end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols), 3rd probability variable end condition (established based on small winning It has a variable probability end condition), and is configured to shift the game state from the variable probability state to the latent probability state when any end condition is satisfied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115(a), the display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first variable probability end condition is satisfied before the second variable probability end condition is satisfied. Explain the content. Figure 115 (a), after the jackpot (after setting the probability variation state), a schematic representation of an example of the display content to be executed during the third special figure variation in the case where the third special figure variation is a jackpot It is a diagram.

In the third embodiment, when the first probability variable end condition (election to the special symbol jackpot) is established, the special symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, The latent state is set during the period until the stop display is finished (symbol confirmation period). Therefore, during the variable display period of special figure 1 (during special figure fluctuation), the probability variation state is set continuously, so in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. A display mode is displayed indicating that FIG. 1 is being displayed in a variable manner, and "Left shot" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. Then, "4" is displayed in the lottery result 821, and the bingo cards 820 are displayed in a display mode indicating that one line has been established.

Also, although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, when the above-described first probability variable end condition is satisfied and the latent probability state is set during the special symbol design confirmation period, it becomes a target It is constructed so that different numbers can be displayed a plurality of times as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the variable display period of the special symbols, and information for showing the final result of the current bingo game is notified to the player step by step. It is configured to

In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 115 (a), the special figure 1 shows a state in which a single line is established during the variable display, but for example, the type of the jackpot won this time is a long pattern confirmation In the case of a jackpot type (eg, jackpot C) in which a period (eg, 300 seconds) is set, during the remaining period until the end of the variable display of the special figure 1, a different number as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game (for example, "5") is newly displayed, and an effect is executed in which the final result of the bingo game is "formation of two lines".

In this way, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) is changed a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbols. As a result, the content of the benefits (RUSH game, jackpot game) given to the player at the time when the special symbol fluctuation ends this time can be grasped with the passage of the special symbol fluctuation display period. The effect content displayed on the display screen of the 3-symbol display device 81 can be continuously watched.

Also, if the type of jackpot won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which a short symbol fixing period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) does not change. A number (for example, "3") may be displayed, and the result of the bingo game may be "one line established".

By configuring in this way, while the number of lottery results 821 displayed by the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) and the special symbols are displayed. can be associated with the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the end of the variable display of . Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content and the result of the bingo game, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, and the result of the bingo game is (The number of established lines) has been shown to make the player's heart throb. , the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823). As a result, the more numbers displayed as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, the more advantageous the player can be given a benefit, and the effect of presentation can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115(b), the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third variable probability end condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 115(b) schematically shows an example of the display contents executed during the second special figure variation in the case where the second special figure variation is a small hit after the big hit (after setting the probability variation state). It is a schematic diagram.

The third embodiment is configured such that the timing at which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the type of the satisfied variable probability end condition. Specifically, when the first variable probability end condition is satisfied, the period (target symbol The pattern confirmation period) is set as a latent state, and when the second probability variable end condition is satisfied, from the time when the corresponding special pattern variable display is started until the stop display of the corresponding special pattern is finished A period (variation display period of the target symbol and symbol determination period) is set as a latent state. That is, even if any of the above-described first variable probability end condition and second variable probability end condition is satisfied, the latent probability state is set within the period of the special symbol 1 fluctuation.

On the other hand, if the third probability variable end condition is satisfied, if a small hit is won in any of the special figure 1 fluctuations of multiple times (4 times) that can be executed within the period in which the probability variable state is set In addition, the latent state is set during the period from the time when the stop display of the special design indicating that the lottery result is a small hit is started until the stop display of the special design, which is the final variation of the probability variation state, ends. . That is, if you win a small hit in the special lottery (first special lottery) that is executed immediately after the variable state is set, the special symbol indicating the result of the first special lottery (small hit) is stopped. After being displayed, after the 2nd to 4th special drawing period (variable display period and design confirmation period), until the stop display of the special drawing indicating the result of the 4th special drawing is completed (multiple times Tokuzu fluctuation period), the latent state will be set.

As shown in FIG. 115 (b), when the third probability variable end condition is satisfied, "ALL" for all numbers is displayed in the lottery result 821, and 8 lines (all lines) are established. A bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode showing . Then, "341" is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 to indicate that a small hit has been won, and "Right Hit” is displayed.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the third embodiment, whether or not the first variable probability end condition or the second variable probability end condition is satisfied is determined by the special figure fluctuation (special figure lottery) where each probability variable end condition is satisfied. ) is configured to determine whether or not it is established (preliminary determination) before execution, whereas the third probability variable end condition is configured not to perform prior determination.

By configuring in this way, the content of the progress of the suggestive effect (bingo game) displayed across the fluctuations of the special symbols executed multiple times during the period in which the probability variable state is set is changed to the first probability variable end Since the condition can be set according to whether or not the second variable probability end condition is established, it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that does not cause discomfort to the player, and when the third end condition is established. , the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 115(b) is executed, so an unexpected effect can be provided.

In addition, in the third embodiment, it is configured to determine in advance whether the first variable probability end condition and the second variable probability end condition are satisfied, and the presence or absence of the third variable probability end condition is not determined in advance. However, without being limited to this, for example, only the second probability variation end condition that is established based on the number of variations of the special symbol may be configured to perform preliminary determination.

In addition, as the above-mentioned prior determination, at the end of the jackpot (during the ending period of the jackpot game), prior determination is performed for the reserved and stored special figures 1, and the jackpot is won among the reserved and stored special figures 1. It is configured to determine whether or not information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and to vary the combination of numbers displayed on the bingo card 820 based on the determination result.

By configuring in this way, the number of times of special figure fluctuations executed until the jackpot is won, and the privilege amount given to the player by winning the jackpot are given to the player. games) can be run. In addition, by allowing the player to grasp the numbers displayed on the bingo card 820, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the future game result in advance.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 124. FIG. In the third embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 are changed from the second embodiment described above. The difference is that Other points are the same as those of the second embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, instead of the first per random number table 202a, the first per random number 3 table 202ba, instead of the small per random number table 202b, the small per random number 3 table 202bb, instead of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa The above-mentioned point that the big hit type selection 3 table 202bc, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd instead of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be instead of the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac are provided. 2 embodiment.

The first winning random number 3 table 202ba is different from the first winning random number table 202a of the second embodiment (similar to the first embodiment, see FIG. 15(a)) in the low probability state of the special symbol. The difference is that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined as , and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined as a big win in the high probability state of the special symbol are changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 117(a), the contents defined in the first winning random number 3 table 202ba will be described. FIG. 117(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the game state is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of special symbols, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the acquired first It is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 9".

In addition, when the game state is a high probability state (variable probability state, latent probability state) of special symbols, the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 99", and if it is within the range of "0 to 99", it is determined to be a big win. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, out of the total number of 480 random number counters, in the low probability state of special symbols, 10 values are defined as values for determining the jackpot. The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability is 1/4.8 when the special symbols are in a high probability state.

Small hit random number 3 table 202bb is the first special symbol (special figure 1) for the small hit random number table 202b of the second embodiment (similar to the first embodiment and see FIG. 15(b)) It is different in that the lottery is also changed to win a small hit. Here, with reference to FIG. 117(b), the contents defined in the small winning random number 3 table 202bb will be described. FIG. 117(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "10 to 14", If it is any of "10 to 14", it is determined to be a small hit.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), since the same contents as the above-described small winning random number table 202b (see FIG. 15(b)) are defined, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In other words, the third embodiment differs from the above-described second embodiment in that it is configured so that a small hit can be won even in the first special symbol lottery. And, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery in a state in which the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, normal It is configured to execute processing for shifting the high probability state of the pattern to the low probability state, that is, processing for shifting the game state from the probability variable state to the latent probability state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift the game state to the latent state during the variable probability state, so that the player who is playing the game during the variable probability state is motivated to play. can be done.

As shown in FIG. 117(b), in the third embodiment, in the special symbol high probability state, the probability of winning the first special symbol jackpot (1/48 (see FIG. 117(a))) is higher than , The probability of winning the small hit of the first special symbol (1/32 (see FIG. 117 ((b))) is configured to be higher.By this, during the probability variation state, the special figure 1 jackpot Since the probability state is set based on the winning of the small prize with a higher probability than the case where the probability state is set based on the winning, the player who is executing the game in the variable probability state. On the other hand, both a latent state game (RUSH game) and a jackpot game are executed, but a game aiming at a jackpot winning that is difficult to win, and only a latent state game (RUSH game) are executed, and are more likely than winning a jackpot. It is possible to play both a game aiming at winning a small winning that is easy to win.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the probability of winning the small hit of special figure 1 is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the big hit of special figure 1 in the high probability state of special symbols, but it is limited to this However, it may be configured to be lower than the special figure 1 jackpot winning probability in the high probability state, for example, even if the probability of winning the special figure 1 small win is set to a low probability such as 1/480 good. By constructing in this way, in the state where the variable probability state is set, when the small win is won before the big win is won, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) in which the big win game is not executed is performed. Since it can be executed, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is different from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above in that the type of jackpot type is changed, and various counters set after the end of the jackpot (short time counter 203f, variable probability counter 203aa, fixed time counters 203ad, 203ae), and the difference is that the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, with reference to FIG. 118, the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be described.

FIG. 118(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118(a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is the jackpot operation contents of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) of the first embodiment described above. Only the number of rounds executed for each jackpot operation is defined, and for each jackpot type, a short time counter 203f, a probability variable counter 203aa, a special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, a special figure 2 fixed time A value of the counter 203ae is defined.

Specifically, the jackpot A, whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), has the value of the acquired first per type counter C2 (0 to 99) of "0 to 49". It is defined in the range, and the contents of the jackpot operation in which two rounds (2R) of the round game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) are executed, and the value of "4" in the time reduction counter 203f, A value of "4" is set to the probability variation counter 203aa, and a value indicating "5 seconds" is set to the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

The jackpot B whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is defined in the range of "50 to 96" for the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99). The contents of the jackpot operation in which the round game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the short time counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the variable probability counter 203aa The value of 4" specifies that a value indicating "100 seconds" is set to the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

The jackpot C whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is defined in the range of "97 to 99" with the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99). The contents of the jackpot operation in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the time reduction counter 203f with a value of "4", and the probability variation counter 203aa with " The value of 4" specifies that a value indicating "300 seconds" is set to the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

In addition, the jackpot D whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in the range of "0 to 64" for the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99). 2 rounds (2R) of the round game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is performed, and the time reduction counter 203f has a value of "4", and the variable probability counter 203aa A value of "4" is set to the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and a value indicating "0.5 seconds" is set.

The jackpot E whose pattern type is set corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is defined in the range of "65 to 99" for the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99). The contents of the jackpot operation in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the time reduction counter 203f with a value of "4", and the probability variation counter 203aa with " The value of 4" defines that a value indicating "1 second" is set to the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the special symbol jackpot probability is set higher than in the above-described second embodiment, making it easier to win the jackpot, and the benefits given to the player in the jackpot game ( It is configured to reduce the number of prize balls). By configuring in this way, the amount of benefits (prize balls number) can be greatly varied, it is possible to provide the player with novel game characteristics.

Small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is, for the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above, the content of the small hit type set when winning the special figure 1 It is different in that it is stipulated by adding Here, with reference to Drawing 118 (b), small hit classification selection 3 table 202bd is explained.

FIG. 118(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118(b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is, for the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) of the first embodiment described above, the symbol type " "It is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) in that a small hit D is added as a small hit type corresponding to ", and other than that, the small hit type selection table 202e (Fig. 16(b)). A detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

In the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1), regardless of the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5, the first attacker (first variable winning A small winning game is stipulated in which the device 65) is opened once for 0.02 seconds. That is, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, a small hit game is executed in which it is difficult for the player to acquire prize balls in the small hit game.

That is, in the third embodiment, the winning of the special figure 1 is not for the purpose of giving a privilege (prize ball) to the player by the small winning game, but as an opportunity to set the latent state as the gaming state. It is an object. As a result, when the special figure 1 small hit is won in the state where the variable probability state is set, the right-handed game is executed immediately after the effect (see FIG. 115 (b)) is executed to notify that effect Even if it is, since the small winning game has already ended (because the period required for the ball fired by the right hitting game to reach the right area is longer than the small winning game period), the latent state smoothly A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

Further, when winning the small prize of the special figure 1 in the normal state, the small prize game can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening time of the first variable winning device 65 by the small winning game is set as short as 0.02 seconds, when winning the special figure 1 small winning in the normal state, winning Even if the game method is changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game at the time when the special symbol indicating the winning of the small prize is stopped and displayed, the ball is placed in the first variable prize winning device 65 during the small prize game. Since it is difficult to win a prize, when winning the small win of the special figure 1 in the normal state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 emphasizes that the small win has been won, and guidance is provided. The display area Dm3 is configured so that the display of "Right-handed" for guiding the right-handed game is not executed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing troublesome game operations. In addition, a notification means for notifying that the special figure 1 small hit is won in the normal state may be provided, and even when the small hit game is in progress based on the special figure 1 small hit in the normal state, right-handed display can be configured to execute

Variation pattern selection 3 table 202be replaces time saving/probability variation table 202f2 referred to when probability variation state is set with respect to variation pattern selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above Probability variation 3 table 202be1 , in that a 3-table for confirmation 202be2 is provided instead of the table 202f3 for confirmation which is referred to when the confirmation state is set.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. FIG. 119(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119(a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the same normal table 202f1 as in the first embodiment is referred to, and the variable probability state is If it is set, the probability variable 3 table 202be1 is referred to, and if the potential probability state is set, the probability probability 3 table 202be2 is referred to.

In addition, in the present third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the value of the time saving counter 203f and the value of the probability variable counter 203aa are configured to be the same after the end of the jackpot, so the probability variable counter The value of 203aa becomes 0, the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 gaming state (that is, time saving state) is not set, so the variation referred to when the time saving state is set It does not have a pattern selection table.

Next, the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 119(b). FIG. 119(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1. In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 118(a), when the big hit is won, the variable probability state is always set for four special symbol variations. Then, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation pattern ( variable time) is selected.

By configuring in this way, depending on the timing (special figure fluctuation number) when the condition (special figure 1 jackpot winning or small winning) is established, the latent state is set as the gaming state, the latent state Is set period (special figure fluctuation time) can be different. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention not only to the lottery result of the special symbol but also to the number of special symbol fluctuations, the interest in the game can be improved.

Specifically, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special symbol 1 and the lottery result is "big hit", when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big win is "1 to 2 times" , "variable probability A table 202bea (variable probability A)" is referred to, in the case of "three times", "variable probability B table 202beb (variable probability B)" is referred, and in the case of "four times", "variable probability C Table 202bec (probability variation C)" is defined to be referred to. Also, if the lottery result is "small hit, off", if the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit is "1 to 3 times", refer to "probability variation A table 202bea (probability variation A)" In the case of "4 times", it is defined that the "probability variation C table 202bec (probability variation C)" is referred to.

Furthermore, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special figure 2, the lottery result and, regardless of the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, "probability variation D table 202 bed (probability variation D)" is referred to stipulated in

Next, the contents defined in various probability variation tables (probability variation A table 202bea to probability variation D table 202bed) referenced in the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119(c) to 120. . FIG. 119(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variable probability A table 202bea, and FIG. 120(a) schematically shows the contents defined in the variable probability B table 202beb. FIG. 120(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation C table 202bec, and FIG. 120(c) is defined in the probability variation D table 202bed It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically.

As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in the probability variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 ~99” range corresponds to jackpot variation 1 (1 second), “100 to 197” range corresponds to jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and “198” value corresponds to jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds) ) are associated. Also, if you win a small hit in the lottery of special figure 1, or if you win a loss, the small hit fluctuation 1 (1 second) or the off fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 It is

As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the probability variation B table 202beb, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 ~ 99” range is associated with jackpot variation 1 (1 second), “100 to 149” range is associated with jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and “150 to 198” range is associated with jackpot variation 3 ( 300 seconds) are associated.

As shown in FIG. 120(b), in the probability variation C table 202bec, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 ” value is associated with jackpot variation 1 (1 second), the value of “1” is associated with jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and the range of “2 to 198” is jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds). are mapped. In addition, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, a small hit variation 2 (240 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and when a loss is won, the variation type counter A deviation variation of 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of CS1.

As shown in FIG. 120 (c), in the probability variation D table 202bed, as the variation pattern determined when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit in the lottery, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 A big hit variation 1 (1 second) is associated, and when a small win is won, a small hit variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and when it is out. , and the deviation variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents defined in the 3rd table for concealment 202be2 will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the confirmation 3 table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, in a state in which the latent state is set, a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set when the special figure 1 lottery is executed is selected. It is configured as follows.

Here, in the third embodiment, in the state in which the variable probability state is set, when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the latent probability state is set. In order to select a variation pattern with reference to the 3 table 202be2, it is necessary to win a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery during the probability variation state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected by referring to different tables according to the number of special symbol variations in the state where the probability variation state is set. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to both the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of fluctuations after the probability variation state is set) which is the lottery result.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM203 of the third embodiment has a special figure 1 small per flag 203ba and a special figure 1 small per medium flag 203bb added to the RAM203 of the second embodiment described above. They are different in that respect. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that a small hit has been won in the lottery of the first special pattern (special figure 1), and when set to on, the special figure 1 lottery It indicates that you have won a small hit. This special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON during the period from when the small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery until the small hit game is executed.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is a flag for indicating that a small hit game is executed based on the small hit winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to ON. , indicates that a small winning game based on the small winning of special figure 1 is being executed. In the third embodiment, when the small winning game based on the small winning of the special figure 1 is started in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state. It is configured to execute the process to shift to

This special figure 1 small per medium flag 203bb is, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small per flag 203ba is set to ON in the special figure 1 off stop processing (see S871 in FIG. 128) (S3201 in FIG. 128 : Yes), set to ON (S3207 in FIG. 128), and in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129), when it is determined that it is time to start the small hit (see S2503 in FIG. 129), see (S2551 in FIG. 129).

Next, in the process of S2551 of FIG. 129, when it is determined that it is set to ON (S2551 of FIG. 129: Yes), that is, the small winning game of this time wins a small winning in the special figure 1 lottery. The value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 when it is determined to be a small win executed based on this. Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 of FIG. 129) (S2511 of FIG. 129: Yes), it is set to OFF.

Next, referring to FIG. 123(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM 222 of 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 123(a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment has a variable probability effect selection table 222ba instead of the additional effect selection table 222c in the ROM 222 of the second embodiment (first embodiment) described above. The difference is that the Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, the contents of the variable probability effect selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variable probability effect selection table 222ba. This variable probability effect selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final mode of the suggestive effect (bingo game) described with reference to FIGS. The final mode is defined based on the number of fluctuations (the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot) and the type of jackpot that can be won.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations in jackpot winning is "2", that is, when the jackpot is won again in the second special pattern change after the end of the jackpot, the types of jackpots to be won are "jackpot A" and "jackpot B." , a performance mode in which one row (line) is established in bingo is set, and in the case of "jackpot C," a performance mode in which three rows (line) are established in bingo is set.

When the number of variations of the winning jackpot is "3", that is, when winning the jackpot at the third special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot, if the types of jackpots to be won are "jackpot A" and "jackpot B". , a performance mode in which two rows (lines) are established in bingo is set, and if "jackpot C" is established, a performance mode in which three rows (lines) are established in bingo is set.

Finally, when the jackpot winning fluctuation frequency is "4", that is, when the jackpot is won at the 4th special pattern fluctuation after the jackpot ends (the special pattern final fluctuation in which the probability variable state is set), the winning jackpot type If is "jackpot A", the effect mode of establishing two lines (lines) in bingo is set. If so, it is stipulated that an effect mode in which all rows (lines) are established in bingo is set.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the third embodiment, if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol variation after the jackpot ends, the display screen at the end of the jackpot (normally, the bingo card On the screen where 820 is displayed (see FIG. 113)), a special display screen is displayed to guide that the latent certainty state is set after the end of the jackpot.

In this special display screen, an image for congratulating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "RIGHT HITTING" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to guide the right-handed game. Thereby, at the end of the jackpot game, a game (right-handed game) suitable for the game state (latency state) after the jackpot game is finished can be performed, so that the period in which the potential state is set is fully set. A lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed by utilizing it.

In the third embodiment, the display screen at the end of the big win is configured to display the special display screen in the case of winning the big win in the first special symbol variation after the end of the big win. The timing of displaying the special display screen may be any timing during the jackpot game, the timing when the jackpot game is started, or the timing when a predetermined round game in the jackpot game is executed. In this case, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, it corresponds to the special symbol variation to be executed next among the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b before the round game of the jackpot game is started. A preliminary determination means is provided for determining in advance whether information indicating winning of a big win is included in the winning information (winning information corresponding to the first special pattern variation after the end of the big win), and the prior determination by the prior determination means. As a result, when the information indicating that the jackpot is won is included, "Right-handed" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 in order to make the big-hit game be played in the right-handed game, and the right-handed game is played. If the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 does not contain the information indicating that the jackpot will be won, the guidance display area Dm3 displays "Left It is good to configure so as to display "strike".

By configuring in this way, when a jackpot is won in the normal state (game state in which a left-handed game is played), the jackpot game is displayed according to the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 for guiding the game method during the jackpot game. It is possible to predict the contents of the game after the end. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 similar to that of the first embodiment is used, when a jackpot game for opening the second variable winning device 650 is executed, a left-handed game is performed. It is configured so that the ratio of winning the ball to the second variable winning device 650 does not change between the case and the case of playing the right-handed game. Therefore, even if the game method (right-handed, left-handed) during the jackpot game is changed based on the prize-winning information stored in the prize-winning information storage area 223b, it is disadvantageous to the player during the jackpot game. It does not provide a good situation.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command is received in the jackpot related processing 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (S4605 in FIG. 132: Yes) executed jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133) In the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (winning information of the special figure 1) by determining whether there is winning information to win a jackpot (see S5605 in FIG. 133), during the jackpot game Newly generated winning information is also subject to discrimination, and it is configured so that more winning information can be discriminated. A timing other than the timing of the present embodiment may be set as the timing for determining whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot, such as the timing at which a jackpot game is started or a specific number of rounds (for example, two rounds). , or the timing at which a specific round game (round game in the first round) is completed, may be the timing for performing the determination.

Next, referring to FIG. 123(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223 of 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 123(b), the RAM 223 of the third embodiment has a remaining probability variation count area 223ba, a look-ahead hit flag 223bb, and a remaining variation count counter 223bc in contrast to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above. They are different in that respect. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The remaining probability variation number area 223ba is a storage area for storing the number of variations in which new winning information can be set as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. A value obtained by subtracting the winning prize information number already stored in the winning prize information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is set in the remaining probability variation count area 223ba (S5604 in FIG. 133). . Then, in the winning information related process (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referred to (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and if the set value is greater than 0, that is, during the probability variable state When it is possible to newly receive winning information corresponding to executable special symbol variation (S5504 in FIG. 131; Yes), look-ahead processing as special symbol variation executed during probability variation state (S5505 in FIG. 131), and then subtracts 1 from the set value (S5507 in FIG. 131).

In this way, using the remaining probability variation count area 223ba, the probability variation state is set by determining whether or not it is possible to set new winning information as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning information newly received in the state corresponds to the special symbol variation executed during the variable probability state. Therefore, since the variable probability performance executed during the variable probability state can be set based only on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during the variable probability state, the performance effect can be enhanced.

The look-ahead winning flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that there is winning information that a special symbol jackpot has been won. contains winning information corresponding to the jackpot.

This look-ahead winning flag 223bb determines that there is winning information indicating that the winning has been won in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133). If so (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes), it is set to ON (S5606 in FIG. 133). In addition, it determines that the winning information received this time in the winning information related process (see S4271 in FIG. 131) corresponds to the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state (S5504 in FIG. 131: Yes), Also when it is determined that there is winning information indicating that a jackpot is won in the winning information (S5505 in FIG. 131: Yes), it is set to ON (see S5506 in FIG. 131).

Then, it is referred to in the probability variable variation display setting process (see S5151 in FIG. 135), and if the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702 in FIG. 135: No), and if it is set to ON ( S5702 of FIG. 135: Yes) is executed so that a different rendering mode can be set.

The remaining variation number counter 223bc is for counting the number of remaining special figure variations until the jackpot is won, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133). When the winning information includes the winning information for winning the jackpot (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes), the value corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot fluctuates. is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, when it is determined to set the variable display in the probability variable state in the variable display setting process 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134) (see S5103 in FIG. 134), the variable display setting process for variable display (S5151 in FIG. 135 ), when it is determined that the special symbol that sets the variable display this time is the previous variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information that wins the big hit (the next time will be the big hit variation) (S5703 of FIG. 135: Yes ), an effect mode using the variable probability effect selection table 222ba is set.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 129. FIG. The control processing of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment is the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see FIG. 98) instead of the control processing of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment described above. 1 special symbol big hit determination process 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), first special symbol variation stop process 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127) in place of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99), small hit control It is different in that small hit control processing 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of processing (see FIG. 55). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. In addition, in the above-described second embodiment, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed, and thus the detailed description is omitted. In this embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to portions where the same processing as in the above-described second embodiment is executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 125, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, the first special symbol big hit determination process 3 (S376) is the first special in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the content of the process to be executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not a big hit is different from the symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). are doing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is executed, the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) is executed, and in the process of S406, the variation of this time is the jackpot. When it is determined that it is not (S406: No), special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471) is executed, and this processing ends. This special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is not a big hit, and it is determined whether or not a small hit is won, and the determination is made. It executes processing corresponding to the result.

Next, referring to FIG. 126, special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471 ) will be explained. Figure 126 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 omission change processing (S471). This special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (S471) is to execute a process for displaying a small winning symbol or a missing symbol on the first symbol display device 37, and targets the second special symbol (special figure 2). It differs in that the target special symbol is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1 with respect to the processing contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011 in FIG. 41) to be executed.

In the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation process (S471), first, it is determined whether or not the execution data acquired from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). When it is determined that the execution data is a small hit (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small hit (S3103 ). Next, the small winning design of the first special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S3104), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the execution data is not a small hit (no) (S3101: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 127, the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S277) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S277). The first special symbol variation stop processing 3 (S277) is different from the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) in the above-described second embodiment when the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit. That is, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off (S801: No), the difference is that the special figure 1 deviating stop process (S871) is executed. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 128, it is executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third embodiment. A special figure 1 out stop process (S871), which is one process in the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S277), will be described. Figure 128 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 omission stop processing (S871). In the special figure 1 deviating stop process (S871), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, a process for starting a small winning game is executed.

In the special figure 1 deviation stop processing (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small per flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201). If it is determined that the special figure 1 small per flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation during fluctuation is forcibly stopped by the lottery result showing the deviation, The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S3202).

Then, a special figure 2 variation stop command indicating ON of the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203s is set (S3203), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the symbol (S3204). Next, set a small per scenario based on the selected small per type (S3205), set the special figure 1 small per flag 203ba off (S3206), turn on the special figure 1 small per medium flag 203bb It sets (S3207) and terminates this processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the special figure 1 small per flag 203ba is not set to ON (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is out) (S3201: No), this End the process.

By configuring in this way, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), the special pattern 2 fluctuation during fluctuation can be forcibly stopped, so the small prize game is played. It is possible to make it easier to execute a new special figure 2 variation during the latent state set at the start timing. It should be noted that, in the third embodiment, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won, the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is forced to stop in a display mode showing that the lottery result is out. Without being limited to this, for example, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation is interrupted so that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution does not progress during the period when the small winning game is being executed You can

Next, referring to FIG. 129, it is executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third embodiment. Small hit control processing 3 (S2255) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S2255). The small hit control process 3 (S2255) differs from the small hit control process (S2205) in the above-described first embodiment in that the processes of S2551 and S2552 are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small winning control process 3 (S2255), in the processing of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing of starting the small winning (S2503: Yes), that is, the small winning scenario updated by the processing of S2502 starts the small winning If it is the content showing, to set the opening command (S2504), it is determined whether the flag 203bb during the special figure 1 small per is set to ON (S2551). When it is determined that the flag 203bb during the special figure 1 small hit is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552), and this process is terminated.

The third embodiment is configured to be able to win a small hit with both the first special pattern (special pattern 1) and the second special pattern (special pattern 2). The value of the time-saving counter 203f is set to 0 (cleared) only when the game is won.

In other words, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0), the special figure 1 small hit winning (start of the small winning game based on the special figure 1 small hit winning) is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end the high probability state of the normal design under conditions other than the case where the variation of the special design is executed for the predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the state where the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, at any timing (any special symbol lottery), the latent state ( Since it is possible to shift to a high probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols, it is possible to make the player always enthusiastically play the game.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured to be until the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (four times). Therefore, the shorter the period from the setting of the probability variable state to the winning of the small prize in the lottery of the special figure 1, the more times the special pattern lottery that can be executed during the latent probability state can be increased. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured not to end. As a result, even if the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the special figure 2 is set higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 is set in the state in which the variable state is set. It is possible to suppress the situation in which a right-handed game is performed in order to execute the lottery of.

On the other hand, in the process of S2551, when it is determined that the flag 203bb during the special figure 1 small hit is not set to ON (S2551: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won by lottery of special symbols, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot game ends is set for a predetermined period (4 special symbol variations), and various transition conditions (latent probability state transition state) to shift the high probability latent state of normal symbols to the low probability state during the variable state. is established, a potential state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set.

Then, in the third embodiment, as the latent state transition conditions, the first latent state transition condition that is established when the jackpot is won during the probability state, and the predetermined period in which the probability state is set (special symbol variation 4 times), the second latent transition condition that is established when the final variation is executed, and a specific special symbol (first special symbol (special figure 1)) in the probability variation state. and a third probability transition condition that is established. In this way, by configuring the probability state to be set under various conditions, it is possible to provide the player with a game that never gets bored.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned latent certainty transition conditions are configured so that the period in which the latent certainty state is set after being established is different, respectively, and when the first latent certainty transition condition is established, the jackpot is indicated. When the latent definite state is set during the symbol confirmation period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the second latent definite transition condition is satisfied, the latent during the fluctuation period of the target special symbol fluctuation and during the symbol confirmation period. When the definite state is set and the third latent definite transition condition is established, from the timing when the target small winning game is executed (the timing when the first variable winning device 65 opens as a small winning game), the definite variable state It is configured to be set until the timing when the special symbol fixing period corresponding to the final variation of the special symbol ends.

By configuring in this way, in performing a game for setting the latent certainty state during the variable probability state, rather than simply aiming for the latent certainty state, the game is also played against the opportunity for setting the latent certainty state. Since the player can be made to watch the player, the game can be played more motivated.

Further, in the present third embodiment, the special symbol determination period is changed according to the special symbol lottery result. In addition, the variable display period (fluctuation time) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to vary according to the number of times of special symbol variation after the probability variation state is set.

Specifically, when the lottery result of the special pattern that satisfies the first latent certainty transition condition, that is, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special pattern, the pattern fixing period is 5 seconds to 300 seconds depending on the lottery result. It is configured to be set within the range of By configuring in this way, even if the player determines that the first probability transition condition has been established (even if the special symbol indicating the big win is stopped and displayed), the symbol confirmation period is set after that. Since the length of the period cannot be easily determined, the game can be played while expecting that a long period is set as the period in which the latent state continues.

In addition, when the above-mentioned second probability transition condition is satisfied, the probability state is set by the lottery result of the special symbol variation (final fluctuation in the probability variation state) corresponding to the establishment of the second probability transition condition. The length of the period to be set is configured to be greatly different, for example, in the final variation in the probability variable state, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the length of the period set as the latent probability state, It is configured to be less than the variation time of Toku-zu 2 variation that is executed during the latent state (including the same). By configuring in this way, if the final variation of the definite variable state is out, the latent definite state is temporarily set internally, but the special figure 2 variation is executed during the latent definite state, and the small It is possible to set a disadvantageous latent state that is disadvantageous to a player who makes it impossible (difficult) to win a winning game.

It should be noted that, when the above-described disadvantageous probability state is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed so as not to execute an effect mode informing that the probability state game (RUSH game) will be executed. It is preferable not to inform the player that the latent certainty state is set.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol lottery result is out in the final variation of the probability variable state, the disadvantage latent probability state is set, but for example, the special symbol lottery result In some cases where is out, a long period of design determination (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big hit) is set, or if the special design lottery result is out 300 seconds, which can be set when the result of the lottery is a big hit, may be set as the variation pattern (variation time) selected for .

By constructing in this way, even if a big win or a small win is not won during the variable probability state, it is possible to set a latent probability state that is advantageous to the player, so that the player can have expectations until the end of the variable probability state. You can play a game while playing. In addition, by setting the set pattern fixing period and variation pattern to be the same as the period (time) that can be set when winning the jackpot, the players are expected to execute the jackpot game after the end of the latent definite state. be able to.

In the above-described example, if the length of the pattern fixing period is set to the same length as in the case of winning the jackpot, the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed, the lottery result of the special pattern is determined. It is preferable to stop and display the special symbol (third symbol) in a display mode that is difficult for the player to comprehend. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fact that the lottery result of the current special symbol is discriminated at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the desire to play during the latent certainty state game is lowered.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the length of the period during which the latent certainty state is set differs depending on the timing when the first latent certainty transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, the higher the number of special symbol variations in the probability variation state, the longer the probability state is likely to be set. As a result, the more the number of special symbol variations in the probability variation state increases, that is, the less the number of special symbol variations that can be executed during the probability variation state, the easier it is to set the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player want to win the big win as soon as possible (to satisfy the first probability transition condition), or to make the player want to win the big win just before the end of the variable probability state, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be made In addition, when the jackpot is won in the final variation of the variable probability state, that is, in one special symbol variation (lottery), when both the first probability transition condition and the second probability transition condition are established. Since the latent definite state is set from the period in which the jackpot variation is started, it is possible to provide the latent definite state for a longer period.

In the present embodiment, the delay in establishment of the first latent certainty transition condition makes it easier to set the latent certainty state for a longer period of time. The longest latency state period may be set when the number of fluctuations is an even number, or when a jackpot is won in the third time, or the earlier the first latency transition condition is established, the earlier it is. It may be configured such that the latent state is likely to be set for a long period of time.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 135. FIG. In the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment, the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described second embodiment is performed in place of the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 106). 3 (see FIG. 130), jackpot related processing 3 (see FIG. 132) instead of the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 64), and variable display setting processing 3 (see FIG. 134) instead of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 69) Also, the difference is that the winning information related processing (see FIG. 131), the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 133), and the variable display processing for probability variation (see FIG. 135) are added. executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, command determination processing 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S4172). The command determination process 3 (S4172) differs from the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the above-described second embodiment in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. Other processes are the same as the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, winning information related processing (S4271), which is one processing in command determination processing 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information related process (S4271).

In the winning information related process (S4271), first, information indicating the game state stored in the state setting area 223j is read out (S5501). Next, in the processing of S5501, it is determined whether or not the read game state (that is, the current game state) is during probability change (S5502). When it is determined that the read gaming state is during probability variation (S5502: Yes), the value of the remaining probability variation count area 223ba is read (S5503). Next, in the processing of S5503, it is determined whether or not the read value of the remaining probability variation count area 223ba is greater than 0 (S5504). When it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation count area 223ba is greater than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the winning information received this time (S5505). When it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information (S5505: Yes), the look-ahead winning flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no win information in the winning information (S5505: No), the process of S5506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5507.

Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining probability variation count area 223ba (S5507), the information of the received prize information command is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area 223b (S5508), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in the processing of S5502, if it is determined that the read gaming state is not in probability variation (S5502: No), or in the processing of S5504, if it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation number of times area 223ba is 0 (S5504: No), sets a prize winning command for display corresponding to the received prize winning information (S5509), executes the processing of S5508 described above, and ends this processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the jackpot related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 3 (S4552). Jackpot related processing 3 (S4552) executes the processing of S4608 or S4611 described above for the jackpot related processing (S4502) in the first embodiment described above, and then executes the jackpot end processing (S4651). They are different in that respect. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the process at the end of the jackpot (S4651), which is one process in the jackpot related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (S4651).

In the jackpot end processing (S4651), first, all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read out (S5601). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no prize winning information (S5602: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the process of S5602 is subtracted from the variable probability setting number (n=4) (S5603). Next, in the processing of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the remaining probability variation number area 223ba (S5604).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is hit information in the read information (S5605). If it is determined that the read information includes winning information (S5605: Yes), does winning information corresponding to the next variation (that is, the first variation executed after the end of the jackpot game) include winning information? is determined (S5606). In the processing of S5606, when it is determined that winning information corresponding to the next variation includes winning information (S5606: Yes), the player is notified that the potential state is set immediately after the big winning is completed. A special effect mode for the game is set (S5607), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next variation does not include winning information (S5606: No), the prefetch winning flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including the winning information changes. The number of special figure fluctuations until then is set to the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5609), the ending command for display including the bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and this process ends.

Also, in the process of S5605, if it is determined that there is no hit information in the read state (S5605: No), set the probability variation setting number (n = 4) to the remaining variation number counter 223bc (S5610), S5611 described above , and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, variable display setting processing 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). The variable display setting process 3 (S4173) differs from the variable display setting process (S4113) in the above-described first embodiment when it is determined in the process of S5103 that the current game state is not the latent state (S5103 : No), the difference is that the variable display setting process for probability variation (S5151) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, regarding probability variation variable display setting processing (S5151) which is one processing in variable display setting processing 3 (S4173) executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment explain. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing the content of the variable display setting process for probability variation (S5151). In the probability variation display setting process (S5151), when the current gaming state is the probability variation state, based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the first special symbol display variation pattern command is set and transmitted to the display control device 114 .

In the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a small hit (S5701). If it is determined that the change this time is a small hit (S5701: Yes), a production mode such as all bingo, that is, a production mode as shown in FIG. Go to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S5701, when it is determined that the current variation is not a small hit (S5701: No), it is determined whether the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702). If it is determined that the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining variation number counter 223bc is 2, that is, whether the remaining variation number is 2 ( S5703). When it is determined that the value of the remaining variation number counter 223bc is 2 (S5703: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the next variation is read out from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

Next, based on the winning information read in the process of S5704 and the number of times of variation, the effect mode is set from the probability variation effect selection table 222ba (S5705). Next, the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to OFF (S5706), the remaining probability variation number area 223ba and the remaining variation number counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the process proceeds to S5710. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5702 that the prefetch hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5703 that the value of the remaining variation number counter 223bc is not 2 (S5703: No), set the effect mode in which bingo cannot be established (S5708), subtract 1 from the value of the remaining variation number counter 223bc (S5711), and proceed to the process of S5710.

Next, the extracted variation pattern command and the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the rendering mode set in any one of S5705, S5708, and S5709 are set (S5710), and this processing ends.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 160. FIG. Each of the above-described embodiments is configured so that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation type), and the game state is latent. A lot of small winning games (RUSH games) are executed by executing the lottery (fluctuation) of the special figure 2 during the period in which the state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. configured to be possible.

Then, the latent certainty state once set is the first latent certainty end condition established based on the start of the jackpot game, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured to terminate when any of the second definite termination conditions established based on the above is satisfied.

In the above-described first to third embodiments configured in this way, for example, when the first latent certainty end condition is satisfied, the latent certainty gaming state ( RUSH game) is executed until immediately before the start of the jackpot game, which is the second advantageous game. It was something that could give satisfaction to.

However, in each of the above-described embodiments, after the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) Although it was configured to be able to set multiple types of definite variable end conditions to shift to, since only the two types described above are used for the latent definite end conditions to end the latent definite state, the latent to the player There is a problem that the period during which the certain state continues is easily predicted.

To solve such a problem, in the fourth embodiment, a lottery for shifting (falling) the high probability state of the special symbols to the low probability state every time the lottery of the special symbols (jackpot lottery) is executed. (hereinafter referred to as drop lottery), and is configured to set a low probability state of special symbols when winning the drop lottery.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to solve the problem that the player easily predicts the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, and it is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. A game can be played while expecting that the latent state game (RUSH game) will continue for a long time.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, during the period (special figure variation display period) during which the variation display (special figure variation display) for displaying that one special symbol has won the jackpot is executed, the other Even if the special pattern lottery is executed, the lottery result of the falling lottery is made invalid.

As a result, when the latent state is set due to the establishment of the first variable probability end condition (the variable probability end condition established based on the jackpot winning), the latent state game (RUSH game), since the fall lottery can be invalidated, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be made into an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) that can be executed for a long period of time.

On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set by the establishment of the second probability variable end condition (the probability variable end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols), the falling lottery is executed during the latent probability state. Therefore, since there is a possibility that the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed at an early stage based on winning the drop lottery, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is set to the above-mentioned advantageous latent state. It can be a normal latent state game that tends to be shorter than the state game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 136, the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 during the variable probability state in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing four game state transition methods set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the game state transition method in the pachinko machine 10 used in the above-described first embodiment, the contents of the game state transition when winning the fall lottery are added, and each transition The difference is that the elements until the condition (predetermined condition) is established and the shift ratio that shifts when the jackpot is won are changed, but the other points are the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the fourth embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to execute the falling lottery for shifting to the low probability state. When winning, it shifts to the time-saving state, and when winning the drop lottery during the latent state, it shifts to the normal state.

By configuring in this way, in order to set the latent probability state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set. In the state, the condition that shifts the high probability state of the normal pattern to the low probability state (for example, the number of times reduced) is more than the condition that shifts the high probability state of the special pattern to the low probability state (winning the falling lottery) must be established first.

Therefore, whether or not the latent definite state is set is determined according to the establishment timing of the transition condition of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol), so that the player can be made to pay attention to the game content, and the game can be played. can improve the interest of Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the game method to be executed is the same (left-handed game) in the variable probability state and the time saving state, and the effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are configured to be the same. Therefore, even if the drop lottery is won before the transition condition of the normal pattern (the condition for shifting the high probability state of the normal pattern to the low probability state) is satisfied, the player is made difficult to grasp the effect. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the flow of setting the latent certainty state and the flow of the game during the latent certainty state in the fourth embodiment will be described. Figure 137 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when winning the special figure 1 jackpot during the probability variation state (when the first probability variation end condition is satisfied), Fig. 137 (b) , It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the number of times of time reduction becomes 0 during the variable probability state (when the second variable probability end condition is satisfied).

As shown in FIG. 137(a), in the fourth embodiment, in a state in which a special symbol high probability state (probability variable state or latent probability state) is set, the special symbol high probability state is changed to a low probability state. A lottery (falling lottery) for shifting to is configured to be performed each time a special pattern lottery (fluctuation) is executed, and if a jackpot is won during the probability variable state (the first probability variable end condition is established) is set as a fall lottery invalid period during which the fall lottery is not executed.

On the other hand, when the latent certainty state is set based on the fact that the second probability variable end condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. Since it is executed, before the special figure 1 fluctuation ends, the latent certainty state will be shifted to the normal state based on the fact that the fall lottery was won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first variable probability end condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a latent probability state game (RUSH game) that is more advantageous than when the second variable probability end condition is satisfied.

<Regarding effect display content in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the effect contents executed in the above-described first embodiment as the effect contents executed during the probability variable state, the player is suggested (notified) the opportunity to set the latent probability state. The difference is that an effect for suggesting (announcing) that the falling lottery has been won during the latent state game (RUSH game) is added.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140, the effect contents added in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138(a) is a schematic diagram showing the effect contents for suggesting that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set by the establishment of the second probability variable end condition (time reduction number reached). 138(b) schematically shows the production content for suggesting that the latent state game (RUSH game) is set by the establishment of the first variable probability end condition (jackpot winning). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 138(a) and 138(b), in this embodiment, the player is given an opportunity to set the latent state by the display mode of the production pattern 813 displayed when the treasure box 812 is opened. It is configured to notify (suggestion) to, and when the display mode of "444" is displayed as the production pattern 813, it notifies that the second probability variable end condition (reaching the number of times of time reduction) is satisfied, When the display mode of "Super RUSH" is displayed, it is configured to notify that the first variable probability end condition (jackpot winning) is satisfied.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the production pattern 813 displayed as the production result in the variable probability state is configured to inform the player of the opportunity to set the latent probability state. Other configurations may be used, for example, it may be configured to provide a plurality of display modes in which the selection ratio is varied according to the type of the probability variation end condition established as the display mode of the displayed production pattern 813. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which probability variable end condition is met.

Here, with reference to FIG. 139(a), the display contents when winning the falling lottery during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when winning the falling lottery during the latent state game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, every time a special symbol lottery start condition for executing a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) is established, a falling lottery is executed, and the special symbol lottery start condition is established. After that, until the big winning lottery is executed, that is, before the big winning lottery is executed, the falling lottery is executed.

Therefore, when the fall lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the latent state game (RUSH game) while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the fall lottery win is displayed in a variable manner. Execution of a new special figure 2 variation is suppressed after winning the falling lottery (after the game state shifts from the definite state to the normal state). In addition, by variably displaying the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 from "right-handed" to "left-handed" while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is being variably displayed, After the falling lottery winning (after the game state shifts from the latent certainty state to the normal state), it is suppressed that the new special figure 2 variation is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139(b), the contents of the effect executed when a jackpot is won during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of effects executed when a jackpot is won during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the effect during the advantageous potential state game (super RUSH game) which is advantageous to the player among the potential state game (RUSH game) will be described. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the establishment of the first variable probability end condition, the falling lottery is invalidated during the setting period of the latent probability state. A lottery invalid period is set, and the fact that an advantage potential state game (super RUSH game) is in progress is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display number is increased, and a comment "Super RUSH in progress" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate that the game is in an advantageous potential state game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 141, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. , and differs from each of the above-described embodiments in that a falling lottery counter C6 used to determine the lottery result of the falling lottery is added.

The falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239", for example, it is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and Some of the counters are irregularly updated during the main process (see FIG. 52), and the updated values are stored in a counter buffer (falling lottery counter buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 .

The value of the falling lottery counter C6 is referred to in the falling lottery executed when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (when the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON), and is acquired. When it is determined that the value of the drop lottery counter C6 is a predetermined determination value in the drop lottery table 202cb, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state (falls down).

Next, referring to FIG. 142, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is provided with a jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a table 202cb is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed, there is an operation content (operation scenario) that always opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is set. In addition, as the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won, the operation content (operation scenario) is set so that at least five rounds or more of the jackpot game are executed. are different.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the special symbol jackpot or the small win has been won, the operation contents executed during the small win game A jackpot game in which the same action content as (action scenario) (concept including differences that are difficult for the player to distinguish) is executed, and a latent state, which is a game state in which the player has an advantage, is set. While the timing and the end timing are difficult to understand, the fourth embodiment makes it possible for the player to easily determine whether he or she has won a big win or a small win. It is configured so that the player can easily distinguish between the contents of the operation and the contents of the operation of the small winning game.

In this way, by allowing the player to easily determine whether the big winning game is executed or the small winning game is executed, the number of small winning games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be easily determined. can be grasped.

Next, the falling lottery table 202cb will be described with reference to FIG. 146(a). FIG. 146(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the falling lottery table 202cb. The fall lottery table 202cb is a data table that stores the determination values of the fall lottery counter C6 described above. The value of the falling lottery counter C6 obtained when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (at the time of starting winning) is either specified in the falling lottery table 202cb When it matches the judgment value of, it is set to shift to a special symbol low probability state (to fall).

More specifically, four determination values of "43, 107, 195, 222" are defined as determination values for falling in the high-probability state of the special symbol. Here, the drop lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated within the range of "0 to 239". Of the 240 possible values of the falling lottery counter C6, there are 4 judgment values that are judged to fall, so the probability of falling (moving to a low probability state of special symbols) in the variable probability state of special symbols. is 1/60 (4/240).

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in the high probability state of special symbols is set to 6/480 (see FIG. 15(a)), and a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery. is set to be 221/480 (see FIG. 15(b)). That is, the probability of winning the falling lottery is slightly higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the state in which the latent state is set, it is configured to facilitate winning in the order of a small hit, a fall, and a big hit.

It should be noted that the winning rates of the big win, the small win, and the drop in the high probability state of the special symbols are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment, and the easiness of winning may be varied. For example, the drop probability (probability of winning a drop lottery) is set to be lower than the jackpot probability, and in the latent state, the player enjoys repeating the big win game and the small win game until the fall is won. Alternatively, it is set so that the small hit probability and the fall probability are almost the same (for example, the small hit probability 1/3, the fall probability 1/4), and the special symbol lottery is performed during the latent state. It is also possible to make the player's heart throb every time it is played. Alternatively, the fall probability may be set high (for example, 1/2), and only when the player does not fall in the first drop lottery, the special symbol lottery may be executed with the latent state set. good.

It should be noted that, in the drop lottery table 202cb in the present embodiment, only the determination value for determining whether or not to fall in the high probability state of special symbols is defined, and the determination value for the low probability state of special symbols is defined. It has not been. This is because it is useless to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol low probability state has already been reached.

In the fourth embodiment, this drop lottery table 202cb is compared with a drop lottery counter C6 that is periodically updated, and the special symbol high probability state is shifted to the special symbol low probability state. ) is determined. That is, it is possible to randomize the timing of shifting from the latency state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) to the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). . Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the latent certainty state ends during the latent certainty state game (RUSH game) performed during the period in which the latent certainty state is set.

In the present embodiment, a lottery (judgment) was made as to whether or not to transition (fall) from a high probability state of special symbols to a low probability state of special symbols. ). For example, whether or not to shift from the high probability state of the normal design to the low probability state of the normal design may be determined by a lottery (special design lottery) executed for each variation of the special design. As a result, since it is possible to randomize how long the high probability state of the normal pattern lasts, the probability variable state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is changed to the latent state (high probability state of special patterns) , low-probability state of normal symbols) can be made difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, during the period in which the variable probability state is set, it is possible to always play the game while expecting the probability state to be set. Further, for example, it may be possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift from a low probability state of special symbols to a high probability state of special symbols.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that a state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag for indicating that updating of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for shifting the game state is restricted. This indicates that the update of parameters is restricted. In the fourth embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is skipped.

This state update restriction flag 203ca is, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S386 in FIG. 147) (S406 in FIG. 147 : Yes), or when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S975 in FIG. 150) (S1006 in FIG. 150: Yes ), it is set to ON (S487 in FIG. 147, S1077 in FIG. 150).

Furthermore, when it is determined that it is referred to in the gaming state update process 4 (see S388 in FIG. 149) (see S651 in FIG. 149) and is set to ON (S651 in FIG. 149: Yes), the time saving counter 203f The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating the parameter (number of times of time saving) corresponding to the condition for shifting the game state is skipped. Then, in the first special symbol variation stop processing 4 (see S287 in FIG. 148), when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801 in FIG. 148: Yes), it is set to OFF. (see S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151) (S1501 in FIG. 151: Yes), it is also turned off. It is set (S1571 in FIG. 151).

That is, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in any of a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, and the special symbol that has been won in the jackpot The game state is not changed during the period when the variable display is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 145(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of No. 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 145(a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment differs from the ROM 222 of the above-described first embodiment in that a latent mode selection table 222ca and a fall notification selection table 222cb are provided. are doing. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The latent certainty mode selection table 222ca is a data table referred to when selecting an effect mode (latent certainty mode) of an effect (latent certainty effect) for informing the player that the latent certainty state has been set. . In this probability mode selection table 222ca, a plurality of production modes ( Effect mode) is stipulated, and it is possible to suggest to the player the setting trigger of the latent certainty state by the selected effect mode of the latent certainty effect.

Next, detailed contents defined in the probability mode selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 146(b). FIG. 146(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the latent probability mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146(b), when the information included in the state command received from the main controller 110 indicates that the current potential state is the jackpot potential state, the value of the acquired mode setting effect counter 223ca "Invincible mode" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "Normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "Normal mode A" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". ing.

Then, when the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the latent state of this time is the time-saving latent state, the value of the acquired mode setting effect counter 223ca is "0 to 49". "Normal mode A" is defined in the range, "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

The falling notification selection table 222cb is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) that the player has won the falling lottery, and the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) continues. The notification mode is selected based on the value of the remaining short time number area 223k indicating the remaining period set by and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf.

In the fourth embodiment, the game method (left-handed game) and the third symbol display device 81 are executed in the case where the variable probability state is set as the game state and the case where the time saving state is set. are configured to be the same as the various display modes. By configuring in this way, it is configured so that the player cannot easily determine whether the current state is the variable probability state or the time saving state. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment executes a falling lottery, so that the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set. The state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is configured to be set.

Then, in the state in which the probability variation state is set, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state, the game state shifts from the probability variation state to the latent probability state, and the latent advantageous to the player While the definite state game (RUSH game) is executed, in the state where the time saving state is set, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state, the game state is normal from the time saving state. move to state.

Here, specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. 146(c). FIG. 146(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb. As shown in FIG. 146(c), this drop notification selection table 222cb is associated with the number of times of remaining short time (information of the number of times of remaining short time area 223k) at the time of falling winning and the value of the drop notification effect counter 223cf. , the notification mode is defined.

Specifically, when the timing of falling winning is 0, the remaining short time number of times is 0 (when the information stored in the remaining short time number area 223k indicates the remaining short time number of times 0), that is, the high probability of the normal symbol In the event that the drop lottery is won due to the change that terminates the state, the "determined notification" is defined regardless of the value of the acquired drop notification effect counter 223cf. Then, when the falling winning timing is 1 to 49, that is, when half or more of the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set has passed, the obtained fall notification production counter 223cf "Suggestive notification" is defined in the range of "0-49" or "90-99", and "definite notification" is defined in the range of "50-89". Then, when the number of remaining short time is 50 to 98, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set remains more than half, the value of the obtained fall notification effect counter 223cf is "0 to 89". "suggestive notification" is defined in the range of , and "definite notification" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, when the "determined notification" is selected as the notification mode, the notification mode in which the player can easily grasp that the falling lottery has been won, for example, the falling to the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A notification mode is set in which a display to that effect (for example, a display of "I'm sorry") is displayed, or that the winning of the falling lottery is notified by voice or the luminescent color of the decorative member.

Further, when "suggestion notification" is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, display of "pinch") for informing the player that there is a possibility of winning the falling lottery is set. . Although detailed description is omitted, this "suggestion notification" is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even when the drop lottery is not won. By configuring in this manner, the "suggestion notification" is executed both when the drop lottery is actually won and when the drop lottery is not won.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the aspect of the notification (suggestion) effect of whether or not the fall lottery has been won is the remaining period (remaining time short) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set period), and it is configured so that the longer the remaining short time is, the more difficult it is to set the “fixed notification”. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player understands that he or she has won the drop lottery in a state where the short remaining time period is long, and the desire to play during the short remaining time period is lowered.

In addition, it is preferable that the setting frequency of the "suggestion notification", which is set when the falling lottery is not won, is also variable based on the length of the remaining short period of time. It is preferable to configure so that the "suggestion notification" is easily set in a state in which the lottery has not been won. As a result, the possibility of actually winning the drop lottery when the "suggestion notification" is executed can be varied based on the length of the remaining short period of time, so the "suggestion notification" is executed. While discriminating the frequency (number of times) and the number of times of short remaining time, the player can predict whether or not the falling lottery will be won, and play the game during the short remaining time, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

Next, referring to FIG. 145(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223 of an MPU 221 of 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 145(b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment has a mode setting effect counter 223ca, a potential mode storage area 223cb, and the number of small hits compared to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment. The difference is that a counter 223cc, a fall flag 223cd, a short time notification completion flag 223ce, and a fall notification effect counter 223cf are provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The mode setting effect counter 223ca is a counter used when selecting the latent certainty mode using the latent certainty mode selection table 222ca. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-99. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The latent certainty mode storage area 223cb is a storage area for storing the currently set latent certainty mode, and stores (sets) the latent certainty mode determined in the latent certainty mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. (see S5804 in FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to in the special figure 1 variation display setting process 4 (see S5171 in FIG. 159) (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and the variation pattern command for display is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, it is referenced in the special figure 2 variation display setting process 4 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) (S5351 in FIG. 160), and the variation pattern command for display is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). The information (latency mode information) stored (set) in this latent probability mode storage area 223cb is stored when it is determined that the game state has shifted to the normal state in state command processing 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153). (see S4454 in FIG. 153).

The small hit number counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of small hits won during the latent state, and the small hit start command is issued in the small hit related processing 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) during the latent state. When received, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of small hits won during the latent certainty state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In this embodiment, based on the value of the small hit number counter 223cc, the small hit number display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the small hit is made during the period when the latent state is set. When the number of wins reaches a predetermined number (a multiple of 10), the remaining time of the latent probability state is displayed.

The drop flag 223cd is a flag for indicating that the drop lottery has been won during the variable probability state, and is for indicating that the drop lottery has been won by being set to ON.

The time-shortening notification flag 223ce wins the falling lottery during the variable state (high-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols), and goes to the short-time state (high-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols). A flag for indicating that the fall notification effect (effect executed when the final notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cb) for notifying the player that the transition has been made, A fall notification effect is set by being set to ON.

The drop notification effect counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting the notification mode of the drop lottery using the drop notification selection table 222cb. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-99. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. FIG. The control processing of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment is the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34) instead of the control processing of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. Special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 (see FIG. 147), first special symbol variation stop processing 4 (see FIG. 148) instead of first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 38), game state update processing (see FIG. 36) Instead of game state update processing 4 (see FIG. 149), second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 40) instead of second special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 (see FIG. 150), second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Refer to FIG. 45) is different in that the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (refer to FIG. 151) is executed. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 147, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), in contrast to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above, shifts from the special symbol probability state to the special symbol low probability state ( The difference is that a process for executing a lottery as to whether or not to fall down is added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, the data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481). When it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is ON (S481: Yes), since the jackpot of the second special pattern is being executed, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, whether it is during probability variation (S482). If the variable probability flag 203g is off, that is, if it is determined that the variable probability is not in progress (S482: No), the process proceeds to S404.

On the other hand, in the process of S482, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is ON, that is, if it is determined that the probability variation is in progress (S482: Yes), based on the falling lottery table 202cb, the lottery result is obtained. (S483). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the falling lottery counter C6 matches any judgment value (random number) defined in the falling lottery table 202cb (that is, the value corresponds to falling) (S484). ), and if it is determined that the value does not correspond to a fall (S484: No), the process proceeds to S403.

On the other hand, in the process of S484, if it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C6 matches any of the determination values (random numbers) defined in the falling lottery table 202cb (the value corresponds to falling), ( S484: Yes), by setting the probability variation flag 203g to OFF, the special symbol probability variation state to the special symbol low probability state (S485). Then, set a fall command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the transition (fall) has occurred from the probability variable state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S406, when it is determined that the data in the current execution area is a jackpot (S406: Yes), after executing the processing of S407 to S411, the state update limit flag 203ca is turned on (S487), and the process ends.

By executing the special symbol variation start processing 4 (S386), the lottery for determining whether or not to transition (fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol and the lottery for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit are easily executed. be able to. In addition, in this embodiment, as the order of processing in the probability variable state of the special design, after executing the lottery (falling lottery) whether to shift to the low probability state of the special design first, and then the special design jackpot Although it has been configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not it will be, the order of processing is not limited to this. The fall lottery may be performed after executing the jackpot lottery first.

Next, referring to FIG. 148, the first special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S287). The first special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S287) executes the processing of S801 to S805 with respect to the first special symbol variation stop processing (S207) in the first embodiment described above, and then sets the state update limit flag 203ca. The difference lies in the addition of processing for setting to off (S871). Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 149, the game state update process 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process 4 (S388). The game state update process 4 (S388) is different from the game state update process (S308) in the above-described first embodiment in that a process (S651) for determining whether the state update restriction flag 203ca is ON is added. differ. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the game state update process 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is ON (S651). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is ON (S651: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S651 that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not ON (S651: No), the process proceeds to S601.

And after executing the processing of S601 to S604, in the processing of S605, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is ON (that is, whether or not the probability variation is in progress) (S605). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on (S652). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is ON (S652: Yes), a state command indicating a jackpot probability state is set (S653), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S652, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not ON (S652: No), the state command indicating the time saving omission potential state is set (S654), and this processing is terminated. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) shifts from the special symbol probability variable state to the special symbol low probability state ( The difference is that a process for executing a lottery as to whether or not to fall down is added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, referring to FIG. 147, in contrast to the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), a process in which the target of the variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Since it is only executed, detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S293) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S293). The second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S293) executes S1501, S1503 to S1506 with respect to the first special symbol variation stop processing (S213) in the first embodiment described above, and then sets the state update limit flag 203ca. The difference lies in the addition of processing (S1571) for setting to OFF. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. FIG. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is the command determination processing 4 instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) in the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment. (see FIG. 152), and the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 157) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69), and otherwise the same processes are executed. The same processes are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 152, command determination processing 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 4 (S4182). Command determination processing 4 (S4182) differs from the command determination processing (S4112) in the first embodiment described above when it is determined in the processing of S4203 that a state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4203: No), the difference is that state command processing 4 (S4281) is executed instead of state command processing (S4204). Other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, state command processing 4 (S4281), which is one processing in command determination processing 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the contents of state command processing 4 (S4281). State command processing 4 (S4281) is different from the state command processing (S4204) in the above-described first embodiment, since latent mode setting processing (S4451) is added. The difference is that processing is added. Other processing is the same as the state command processing (S4204) in the first embodiment, so detailed description will be omitted.

In state command processing 4 (S4281), if it is determined that the command received this time is a state command indicating transition to the latent certainty state (S4403: Yes), latent certainty mode setting processing (S4451) is executed. Details of the latent probability mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4452. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the command received from main controller 110 this time is not a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403: No), main controller 110 issues a fall command. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S4452). When it is determined that the fall command has been received (S4452: Yes), a fall effect setting process is executed (S4453). Details of the falling effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4452, when it is determined that the fall command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4452: No), the process of S4453 is skipped and the process of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processing of S4406 to S4411, the latent probability mode storage area 223cb, the small hit number counter 223cc, the fall flag 223cd, and the short notice flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and this processing ends.

Next, the latency mode setting process (S4451), which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. . FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing the content of the latent certainty mode setting process (S4451).

In the latent certainty mode setting process (S4451), first, the type of the state command received from the main controller 110 this time is read out (S5801). Next, the latent probability mode is determined using the latent probability mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146(b)) based on the received state command and the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca (S5802). Next, in the processing of S5802, a display latent certainty mode command corresponding to the determined latent certainty mode is set (S5803), and the determined latent certainty mode is set in the latent certainty mode storage area 223cb (S5804). Next, a latent certainty notification effect for notifying entry into the latent certainty state is set (S5805), a value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and this processing is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the fall effect setting process (S4453), which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing the details of the falling effect setting process (S4453).

In the falling effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the latent state (S5901). When it is determined that the current game state is the latent state (S5901: Yes), the latent certainty notification effect for informing the end of the latent certainty state is set (S5902), and the state command received from the main controller 110 is set. A value corresponding to the game state notified by is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5901, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5901: No), then the number of times of reduced time remaining is 99 or more, that is, the number of times of reduced time remaining area 223k. is 99 or more (S5904). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 99 or more (S5904: Yes), the time reduction notification effect for notifying the entry into the time reduction state is set (S5905), and the time reduction notification completion flag 223ce is set to ON (S5906). . On the other hand, in the process of S5904, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the processes of S5905 and S5906 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5907. Next, the fall flag 223cd is set to ON (S5907), the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5908), and the present process is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to Drawing 156, small hit related processing 4 (S4574) performed by MPU221 of sound lamp control device 113 in a 4th embodiment is explained. FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit related process 4 (S4574). The small hit related process 4 (S4574) differs from the small hit related process (S4504) in the above-described first embodiment in that a process for displaying remaining time information is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

In the small hit related process 4 (S4574), first, when it is determined that the small hit start command is received from the main control device 110 (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is in the latent state (S4751). When it is determined that the current game state is the potential state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit number counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). When it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o is read (S4754). A time information command for display indicating remaining time information is set (S4755), then a small winning start command for display is set (S4702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4751, if it is determined that it is not in the latent state (S4751: No), or in the process of S4753, if it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10 ( S4753: No), the process of S4702 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, variable display setting processing 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The variable display setting process 4 (S4183) replaces the variable display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1 with respect to the variable display setting process (S4113) in the above-described first embodiment. 4 (S5171), the point to execute the variable display setting process 4 for the special figure 2 (S5175) instead of the variable display setting process for the special figure 2 (S5109), and the addition of the fall notification process (S5173). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

In the fluctuation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the latent state (S5103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171) is executed, and the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). Details of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the current game state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is determined whether the fall flag 223cd is ON (S5172). When it is determined that the fall flag 223cd is ON (S5172: Yes), a fall notification process (S5173) is executed. Details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S5106 described above. Next, the processing executed for the special figure 1 of S5171 to S5173 is executed to change the target to the special figure 2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 158, the falling notification process (S5173), which is one process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing the details of the falling notification process (S5173).

In the falling notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction notification completion flag 223ce is ON (S8001). When it is determined that the time reduction notification completion flag 223ce is ON (S8001: Yes), based on the extracted variation pattern, the latent probability variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S8009), and this processing exit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the shortened working hours notification flag 223ce is off (S8001: No), the information of the remaining shortened working hours area 223k is read (S8002). Next, based on the number of remaining time reduction read in the process of S8002 and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf, the fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cb (S8003). Next, in the processing of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is the fixed notification mode (S8004). When it is determined that it is in the fixed notification mode (S8004: Yes), the time saving notification completion flag 223ce is set to OFF (S8005), and the fall flag 223cd is set to OFF (S8006). Next, the time saving notification effect for notifying entry of the time saving state is set (S8007), the processing of S8009 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8004 that the determined notification mode is not the fixed notification mode (S8004: No), the fall notification command for display corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the process of S8003 is set ( S8008), the processing of S8009 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, variable display setting processing 4 for special figure 1 ( S5171) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171). The special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171) executes the processes of S5201 to S5205 with respect to the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104) in the first embodiment described above. Instead, the latent probability mode stored in the latent probability mode storage area 223cb is read (S5251), and based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and latent probability mode, the latent probability variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is executed. is executed (S5252). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 160, the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 ( S5175) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175). The special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175) executes the processes of S5301 to S5308 with respect to the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109) in the first embodiment described above. Instead, the latent probability mode stored in the latent probability mode storage area 223cb is read out (S5351), and based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and latent probability mode, the latent probability variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is executed. is executed (S5352). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in contrast to each of the first embodiments described above, there is a configuration for performing a drop lottery that shifts the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state based on the lottery result. Therefore, in the state where the variable state (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is set, at any timing the time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) It can be difficult for the player to predict whether the transition to

Also, if you win the falling lottery during the variable state and shift to the time saving state, the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) which is a gaming state advantageous to the player Since it is difficult to shift (more difficult to shift than the variable state), when the variable state is set once, the latent state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set. The game can be played while making the player's heart throb so as not to win the falling lottery before the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the variable probability state is set and when the time saving state is set, the same game method (left-handed game) is configured to be performed, so the current It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp whether the game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, immediately after the variable probability state is set (for example, the first special symbol variation), if the falling lottery is won, the player is notified that the variable probability state has been set. Since it is configured to execute a production mode (time reduction notification production) that makes it look as if the time reduction state has been set from the beginning (after the jackpot ends), the latent state may be set. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the variable probability state higher than the game state ends in a short period of time.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, an effect (suggestion notification) that suggests to the player the possibility of winning the drop lottery during the variable probability state and an effect (confirmed notification) that informs the player that the drop lottery has been won ) can be executed, and based on the number of remaining fluctuations of special symbols that can be continuously set in the variable probability state, the selection ratio between the suggestive notification and the fixed notification is made different. Specifically, it is configured such that the more the number of remaining variations in the probability variation state, the more difficult it is to perform the confirmation notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the variable probability state has shifted to the time saving state while the number of remaining fluctuations remains large, thereby reducing the player's willingness to play. In addition, the presentation of suggestive notification is configured to be executed even when the drop lottery is not won.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, it is configured to allow the player to determine whether the current game state is either the probability variable state or the time saving state by the above-described suggestion notification or confirmation notification. Other configurations may be used, for example, a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) that can only be selected during the variable probability state, and a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) that can only be selected during the time saving state It may be configured to make the player predict the current game state by the variation pattern of the special symbols to be executed. In this case, the content of the variation pattern dedicated to the probability variable state and the variation pattern dedicated to the time saving state should not be greatly different, and for example, the variation time should be set with an error of about 1 second. As a result, the current game state can be notified to the player due to an error in the variable display time that causes a slight sense of incongruity, so that the player can be strongly conscious of the variable display of the executed special symbols. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to use the error of 1 second, for example, for the period until the variation of the third symbol is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, thereby, the variation start timing of the third symbol. It is possible to inform the player of the current game state by giving a slight sense of incongruity that the speed is slower or faster than usual, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In the fourth embodiment, during the period in which the big hit variation is executed in one special symbol, the lottery result of the drop lottery associated with the other special symbol variation (lottery) is invalidated. . As a result, for example, the second special without winning the falling lottery during the period in which the latent state is set due to the establishment of the first latent probability transition condition that is established based on the special figure 1 jackpot winning It is possible to continue to receive the lottery of the pattern (special figure 2). Therefore, it is possible to set a latent certainty state that is more advantageous (longer and easier to continue) than the latent certainty state set by the establishment of other latency certainty transition conditions.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the special symbol variation (lottery) is executed, the fall lottery is also executed. That is, it is configured to execute a falling lottery triggered by the fulfillment of the conditions for executing a special symbol variation (lottery). The ball has entered the ball hole 64, the second ball hole 640, and the general winning hole 63), the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the normal pattern variation (lottery) execution condition has been established, , Special symbols or normal symbols stop display timing, or the timing of the elapse of the design confirmation period may be used as the trigger for the execution of the fall lottery, and when the execution conditions for the special symbol variation (lottery) are satisfied, the fall lottery It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery, and to execute the falling lottery based on the determination result. This makes it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the drop lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily perceiving the timing of winning the falling lottery.

In the fourth embodiment, the presence or absence of a fall is determined with the same probability each time the fall lottery is executed. A high-probability state in which it is easy to fall down and a low-probability state in which it is difficult to fall (hard to win) may be provided. In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type, a high probability variable state and a low probability variable state are provided as the probability variable state set after the end of the jackpot, and in the high probability variable state, the low probability state of the falling lottery is set, The state may be configured to set a high-probability drop lottery state. In addition, it may be configured to vary the state of the falling lottery (high probability state, low probability state) based on the number of special symbol variations (lottery) executed after the variable probability state is set. A high-probability state of the falling lottery is set for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the state is set, and then a low-probability state of the falling lottery is set. can be

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a period in which it is easy to fall from the variable probability state and a period in which it is difficult to fall, so that it is possible to provide the player with a well-balanced playability. Further, in the present embodiment, when the falling lottery is won, the process is configured to change the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state. A process of transitioning the high-probability state to the low-probability state may be executed. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when the falling lottery is won, the high probability state of the special pattern is shifted to the low probability state. state lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state), and may be configured so as not to shift to the medium probability state unless the fall lottery is won.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the content of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 179. FIG. In the above-described fourth embodiment, a falling lottery is executed for shifting the special symbol high probability state to the low probability state (for falling). By configuring in this way, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbols continues can be varied according to the lottery result of the drop lottery, so that the high probability state of the special symbols can be maintained for a long period of time for the player. This allows the player to play the game while anticipating that it will be continued.

However, in the configuration of the above-described fourth embodiment, since the drop lottery is executed each time the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the player can decide whether or not to execute the drop lottery with his/her own intention. There is a possibility that the players may lose their desire to play the game because they cannot be selected. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, a prize winning device (small winning variable A device) 2650 is provided, and when it is detected that the ball has passed through a region (channel) through which the winning ball of the small winning variable prize device 2650 can pass, the high probability state of the special pattern is changed to the low probability state. 164) is provided.

By configuring in this way, similarly to the above-described embodiments, the latent state in which small winning games are frequently executed based on the special figure 2 lottery (high probability state of special symbols, low probability of normal symbols state), it is possible to select whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol falls depending on whether or not the player shoots during the small winning game.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the operation contents (opening operation pattern) of the small winning game to be executed are configured to be different according to the type (small winning type) when winning the small winning, and the execution Depending on the opening operation pattern to be performed, the ratio of the balls that have won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game to pass through the falling gate 2650e3 is configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, the content of the small winning game to be executed is predicted so as not to fall the high probability state of the special pattern and to perform the game aiming to acquire the privilege (prize ball) by the small winning game. The player can be allowed to select a game while playing.

In addition, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, in the latency state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the big hit variation, the other special symbol variation (lottery) wins a small hit. , Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low probability state.

As a result, the state in which the latent state is set is an advantageous latent state in which the high probability state of the special pattern does not fall (it is difficult to fall), and the high probability state of the special pattern is easier to fall than the advantageous latent state. You can set a disadvantageous probability state.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 161 to 164, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). The point that the small winning variable winning device 2650 is provided, and the winning device (small winning variable winning device 2650) that is opened during the small winning game is provided upstream of the second ball entrance 640. is different.

Here, with reference to FIG. 161, the configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment will be described. A variable winning device 2650 for small winning is provided in the right area of the game board 13 . This small winning variable winning device 2650 has a plurality of flow paths for winning balls to flow down (a flow path for falling from a high probability state of special symbols to a low probability state, a high probability state of special symbols to a low probability state The variable winning device 2650 for small wins is configured so that the winning balls flow down different channels according to the timing at which the balls win.

The internal structure of this small winning variable winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. FIG. Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the structure of the small winning variable winning device 2650 will be described in detail. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of this small winning variable winning device 2650. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 162, the small winning variable winning device 2650 is combined with an opening forming member 2650b arranged so as to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the rear side of the opening forming member 2650b. A base member 2650c for screwing a variable winning device 2650 to the game board 13, and an LED is arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c and lights toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 2650c. LED board 2650d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged for the purpose of activating, a back cover body 2650e sandwiching the LED board 2650d with a base member 2650c, and a small winning prize opening formed in the opening forming member 2650b. An opening/closing unit 2650f having an opening/closing door 2650f1 for opening and closing the winning opening 2650a, a flow path cover body 2650g combined with the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a flow path, the back cover body 2650e and the flow path. A switching member 2650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the cover body 2650g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 2650i that engages with the switching member 2650h, and a back side of the flow path cover body 2650g. a back cover body 2650j fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j to operate a link member 2650i; It is composed of a fixing cover body 2650m for fixing.

FIG. 163 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 2650 for small winning. FIG. 163(c) is a top view of the small winning variable winning device 2650, and FIG. 163(b) is an Lb-Lb sectional view of the small winning variable winning device 2650. FIG. As shown in FIG. 163(b), the small winning variable winning device 2650 is formed with a small winning winning opening (small winning winning opening) 2650a which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 163(b). A bottom surface inclined to the lower left is formed as shown in FIG. A detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting winning of game balls is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the rear side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 163(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 163(b), the opening of the small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a can be opened by an open/close door 2650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side, so that a ball can enter. It is variable between an open state and a closed state where it is impossible to enter (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 2650f1, and the ball can roll on the top of the opening/closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening/closing door 2650f1 is retracted inside the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a. ing.

With this configuration, when the opening of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the open/close door 2650f1 of the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the second ball enters. It is configured to be guided to the mouth 640 side, and the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 while the right-handed game is being performed during the right-handed game (during the latent state). It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method to the left-handed game during the latent certainty state in which the small winning game is frequently executed. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the small winning variable winning device 2650, so more game balls can be efficiently released. Winning can be made in the winning prize opening) 2650a. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the ball wins the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 163(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 163(b). As shown in FIG. 163(a), a magnetic sensor 2650c1 having a detection port 2650a1 is fixed to a base member 2650c such that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration for distributing the balls guided to the distributing channel of the back cover body 2650e to a normal discharge channel 2650e1 and a special discharge channel 2650e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 164(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is actuated so that the balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164(a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guiding piece 2650h2 that guides the ball. It is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650h is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 2650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 164(a), the ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and is guided to the special discharge channel 2650e2. . The special discharge channel 2650e2 has a fall route through which the ball that has flowed in passes through a fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 and a second normal discharge channel 2650e5 branched from the special discharge channel 2650e2. 2 normal switch) 2650e6, and a fall switch 2650e3 capable of detecting passage of a ball that has flowed into the special discharge channel 2650e2, or the second normal switch 2650e6. It is detected and then discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the falling switch 2650e3 described above detects a ball during a small winning game, that is, when the ball passes through the falling route, a special symbol is configured to transition (fall) from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. That is, the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbols from the high probability state to the low probability state. In addition, the switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 2650e2) that can pass through a fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3, or a fall This is for setting one of the flow paths (ordinary discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot (difficultly) pass through the gate (fall switch) 2650e3. It is configured to switch the flow path so that the winning ball of the small hit variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 164(a)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to be off during normal play, and the ball that wins the small winning variable prize device 2650 passes through the special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to flow down. Therefore, even though the small winning game is not being executed, when it is detected that the opening/closing door 2650f1 of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is opened and the ball is allowed to win, the illegally winning ball falls to the fall switch. It is configured to pass through 2650e3.

In this way, the state in which the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to OFF is assumed to be maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, and the flow path configuration that is disadvantageous to the player (the variable winning device for small winning 2650 By adopting a flow passage configuration in which a winning ball can pass through the fall switch 2650e3, power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed, and a penalty can be imposed on a game in which an illegal game is performed.

In this way, since it is determined whether or not the high probability state of the special pattern is terminated by the flow route along which the balls that have won the variable winning device 2650 for small winning during the small winning game flow down, the game can be played even during the small winning game. It can improve the interest of the person. In addition, to pass through the entrance of the special discharge channel 2650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h) from the small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a of the small winning variable winning device 2650 The minimum required time is 1 second.

In addition, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge channel 2650e1. As a result, whether or not all the winning balls in the small-hit variable prize winning device 2650 have been discharged can be determined from the total number of balls detected by the normal switch 2650e4, the second fall switch 2650e6, and the fall switch 2650e3. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of balls winning the small winning variable winning device 2650) and various switches provided in the three discharge areas (normal switch 2650e4, second fall switch 2650e6, fall switch 2650e3) by comparing the number of balls detected by each (the number of balls discharged from the variable winning device 2650 for small winning) to determine whether or not the ball remains in the variable winning device 2650 for small winning. can do.

In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (end condition of the small winning game (if the variable winning device 2650 for small winning has a predetermined number (10 pieces) winning, or the opening scenario of the variable winning device 2650 for small winning When all the game balls entered in the small winning variable winning device 2650 are not discharged at the timing of the passage of the small winning ending period executed after the establishment of the case of ending), the small winning variable It is preferable to determine an abnormality inside the prize winning device 2650, notify the abnormality to the outside, or stop the game so as not to start a jackpot game or a normal game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the ball that has won the small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a of the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 is detected by the ball winning prize switch 2650c1. In the embodiment, 10 prize balls are paid out for one ball winning, and the ball after the detection (which passed the ball winning prize switch 2650c1) is used to pass the fall switch 2650e3. It is possible to determine whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends during the small winning game by distributing whether or not. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an exclusive area for shifting the high probability state of the special pattern to the low probability state separately from the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winning, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166, the game flow in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 165, the flow of the game when the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won in a state in which the variable probability state is set as the gaming state will be described. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in a state in which the probability variation state is set in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment described above, the latent probability during the jackpot fluctuation It is configured so that the state is set (see FIG. 165(a)). Then, during the period in which the latent definite state is set (during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), by performing the right-handed game to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the small winning game It is constructed so that a latent certainty state game (RUSH game) which is frequently executed is executed.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special pattern (for example, special pattern 1) (after winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result The period until) is configured so as not to win a big hit in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special symbol 2). As a result, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special pattern (for example, special pattern 1), the other special pattern (for example, special pattern 2) is won by lottery, and the other special pattern is based on the jackpot winning. By starting the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress shortening of the period in which the probability state is set. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state game (RUSH game ) can be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (after winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery) , the period until the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result), even if the ball passes the fall switch 2650e3 in the variable winning device 2650 for the small win, the high probability state of the special symbol changes to the low probability state. It is configured to be a period during which there is no transition (fall invalid period).

Therefore, when the latent state is set during the special figure 1 fluctuation that is winning the jackpot, the special figure 1 fluctuation period becomes the fall invalid period, so the high probability state of the special pattern ends. A latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed without worrying about this. Although the detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, the latent state is set based on the special figure 1 jackpot winning (the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first latent probability transition condition It is configured to determine whether or not to execute an invincible effect (see FIG. 169) for notifying the player of the fact that the player has been attacked.

By configuring to execute this invincibility effect (see FIG. 169), it is possible for the player to easily comprehend that the fall invalid period is set in the latent state currently set. Therefore, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be performed with peace of mind. Further, in the fifth embodiment, even in the latent state in which the fall invalid period is set, there may occur cases where the above-described invincibility effect is not executed. By configuring in this way, in the latent state game in which the invincibility effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, there is a case where the fall invalid period is actually set. When the variable winning device 2650 for winning wins, the rate of falling can be reduced.

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 jackpot variation elapses (see FIG. 165(b)), the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. If the small winning game is not executed at this timing, the big winning game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, when the small winning game is executed at the timing when the variation time of the special figure 1 big winning variation has passed, the start of the big winning game is postponed until the small winning game ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being presented with a game that is difficult to understand due to the start of the big winning game during execution of the small winning game.

After the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation shown in FIG. 165 has passed, the interruption period until the big hit game is started is set to the same game state (normal state) as during the big hit game. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the variation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation has passed, if the small hit game is executed, the start of the jackpot game is interrupted (postponed) until the small hit game ends ), but should be controlled so that the small winning game and the big winning game are not executed at the same time, for example, the small winning game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big winning fluctuation If there is, it may be configured to forcibly terminate the small winning game being executed.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted from the drawings, in the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, one special symbol (special figure 2) wins a small hit, and a small winning game is executed. During the period, it is configured to interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (special figure 1).

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the latent state (advantageous latent state) set based on the special figure 1 jackpot winning is set as the fall invalid period, special symbols for the player The latent state game (RUSH game) can be enjoyed without worrying about the end of the high probability state. Furthermore, the small winning game started during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, in a state in which the variable probability state is set as the game state, a description will be given of the flow of the game when the preset number of times of time saving is consumed. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when all the number of times of time reduction are consumed during the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, since the subtraction of the number of times of working hours is performed at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the value of the counter (time saving counter 203f) for continuously setting the working hours state is When it becomes 0, latent certain state is set from the special figure 1 variation to be executed (see FIG. 166(a)). In addition, as shown in FIG. 166, the latent state set by digesting the predetermined number of times of time saving is configured so that the falling lottery during the latent state period is effectively determined. Therefore, there is a possibility that the high-probability state of the special symbol will be terminated by the ball that is made to win the variable winning device (small winning variable winning device 2650) in the small winning game executed during the latent state game (RUSH). It becomes a certain disadvantageous latent state.

<Regarding the Contents of Effect Executed in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the characteristic presentation contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In addition, regarding the aspect of the effect executed during the variable probability state in order to suggest whether or not the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set, the effect described in each embodiment described above Since it is the same as the embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 167(a), description will be given of the content of the effect displayed when a small win is won in the state in which the potential state is set. FIG. 167(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when winning a small prize in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167 (a), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a display mode indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in a variable manner is displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 , a display mode ("341") indicating that the second special symbol (special symbol 2) has won a small hit is displayed. In the guide display area Dm3, "Right shot" is displayed to guide the game method during the latent certainty state.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode for notifying that the small prize has been won, and the characters "GET" are displayed. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "The small winning game is about to start" indicating that the small winning game is to be started is displayed.

When the small winning game is started, the display screen of FIG. 167(b) is displayed. FIG. 167(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents during a small winning game. According to the diagram shown in FIG. 167 (b), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, the same display mode as in FIG. Although the mode is displayed, in fact, during the small winning game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted. In addition, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (b), the state that the special figure 1 is appropriately fluctuating display (the state in which the fluctuation time is subtracted) and the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 are interrupted It may be configured so that the display mode displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is different from the state (state where the subtraction of the fluctuation time is not performed).

In the main display area Dm, an effect mode is displayed in which the character 811 runs from the left to the right, and a treasure box 812 appears from the advancing direction. In the present embodiment, an effect to open a treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the small winning game is executed, and depending on the display mode of the effect symbol 813 appearing from the treasure box 812, this small prize is displayed. It is configured to inform the player of the result of the winning game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b), display contents for showing the game result of the small winning game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168(a) shows, as a result of winning the ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game, the fall switch 2650e3 detects the ball, and the display contents when the high probability state of the special symbol ends. It is a schematic diagram showing an example, FIG. 168 (b) is a display content when the falling switch 2650e3 does not detect the ball as a result of winning the ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game It is a schematic diagram showing an example of.

In FIG. 168(a), an effect pattern 813 showing a "cross mark" is displayed in a treasure box 812, and the character 811 indicates that the high probability state of the special pattern has shifted to the low probability state during the small winning game. is displayed in the failure display mode shown. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment is displayed to guide the latent state game (RUSH game) to end and the game method to return to the left-handed game. That is, during the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) in which the RUSH game is performed, by shifting the high probability state of special symbols to the low probability state, the game state is latent. In order to shift from the state to the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols), a comment for executing a left-handed game is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

On the other hand, FIG. 168(b) shows a display mode (that is, the left A character 811 is displayed in a display mode in which the character 811 runs from the top to the right.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect corresponding to the game result during the small winning game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed by the third symbol display device 81, The player can easily grasp the progress of the latent state game (RUSH game) only by grasping the content of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in this embodiment, according to the type of the small winning game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game), the ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game is the variable probability switch 2650e3 The rate (possibility) of flowing down the special discharge channel 2650e2 provided with is different.

Therefore, for example, on the display screen at the time of winning a small hit shown using FIG. (For example, 'If you are unlucky with a small win, RUSH will end', 'If you are unsure, please stop launching'), and further, a character displayed when a small win is won. The display mode of 811 may be configured to be variable depending on whether or not the type of small win won this time is a small win that easily ends the latent state game (RUSH game).

By configuring in this way, the player can select whether or not the small winning variable winning device 2650 wins the ball during the small winning game. In addition, in the fifth embodiment in which the latent state is set only for a predetermined period (special figure 1 fluctuation time), the number of small winning games that can be executed during the latent state is limited, so the player , the game can be played while considering whether to acquire a privilege (prize ball) during the small winning game or to avoid the end of the latent state game (RUSH game), which is a novel game. can provide sexuality.

Further, the type of the small winning game being executed may be notified to the player by the display mode of the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen during the small winning game shown in FIG. 167(b). Well, for example, it is better to configure so that the older and worn-out treasure box 812 is displayed as the small winning type being executed is a small winning type that makes it easier to end the latent state game (RUSH game). It is preferable to display a comment according to the display mode of the treasure box 812 . Furthermore, the display mode displayed during the small winning game is more specific than the content that suggests the type of small winning won this time to the player when winning the small winning (RUSH game continuation expectation). It is preferable to configure so as to inform the player of the (reliable) contents.

By configuring in this way, the player who selects whether or not to win the ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650 in the current small winning game based on the display screen displayed when winning the small winning , since it is possible to indicate a more specific degree of expectation for continuation of RUSH, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the game content selected for the player is correct.

In this case, especially for the player who has selected not to win the ball in the variable winning device 2650 for small win, it is emphasized that the RUSH game is a small win type that is difficult to end even if the ball wins. It is preferable to configure so that it can be notified by Specifically, whether or not the ball has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during a predetermined period after the small winning type discriminating means for discriminating the type of the small winning game of this time and the small winning game is started (or means for determining that a right-handed game is executed after winning a small hit), and the result of discrimination by the small hit type discriminating means is a small win type that makes it difficult to end the RUSH game. In this case, when it is determined that the ball has not won the small winning variable winning device 2650 for a predetermined period after the start of the small winning game, it is better to shoot the ball in the small winning game this time. It is preferable to provide a display means for displaying an inciting comment (for example, "I should have shot the ball" or "Weakness") indicating that it has been acquired.

As a result, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the loss caused by not allowing the ball to enter the small winning variable winning device 2650, so that the player can positively receive the small winning prize during the small winning game. Variable winning device 2650 can be prompted to win a ball. In other words, when the RUSH game ends by winning the ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650, the game result indicates that the current selection was a failure, even if the effect is not performed. However, the player who has selected not to win the ball in the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winning cannot recognize whether the result of this selection was advantageous or not. By displaying the evaluation, the player can easily grasp whether or not the current selection is successful.

Furthermore, a display mode for notifying that the small hit type of this time was a small hit type that the RUSH game is likely to end for the player who has selected not to win the ball to the small hit variable winning device 2650 (For example, "Stop firing and it's a great answer", "You have a good idea") may be displayed, and even if the small hit type this time is a small hit type that makes it easy to end the RUSH game, In the small winning game of this time, it is possible to display an incendiary comment (for example, "I should have shot the ball", "Simple") indicating that the privilege could be obtained by shooting the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, description will be given of the display contents of the effect for notifying that the player is in the latent probability state (advantage probability state) in which the fall invalid period is set. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed at the end of the small win during the probability of advantage state. As shown in FIG. 169, when the currently set latent certainty state is the advantageous latent certainty state in which the fall invalid period is set, the same latent certainty mode setting process (FIG. 154 (see S4451 of )), when the invincible mode is set as the current latent certainty mode, an effect mode ("invincible mode") indicating that the currently set latent certainty state for the player is an advantageous ) is displayed.

When entering the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode dedicated to the invincible mode (a display mode with an aura surrounding it). Then, "lucky point x 0" is displayed with the number of balls passing through the falling gate 2650e3 during the invincible mode as the accumulated display mode 819. This cumulative display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the fall switch 2650e3 output from the main controller 110 (a command indicating the number of falls if the fall invalid period is not set). A number is displayed. As a result, the situation in which the invincible mode works to the player's advantage can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although not shown in FIG. 169, the small hit number display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment described above may be displayed, , and the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. In addition, non-game number measuring means for measuring the number of small winning games in which the player did not win the ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the number of times measured by the non-game number measuring means are displayed on the display means. It may be configured to

By configuring in this way, for example, for all the small winning games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game), the number of small winning games that the player has executed the game, and the player Since it is possible to easily grasp the number of small winning games that have not been executed, it can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. FIG. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM202 of the fifth embodiment is provided with a small hit type selection 5 table 202da instead of the small hit type selection table 202e for the ROM202 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that an operation scenario storage area 202db is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 5 table 202da. The fifth embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol (special figure 2) is elected as a small hit, and when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the small hit type selection 5 table A small hit type is selected with reference to 202da.

In the small hit type selection 5 table 202da, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of the value of the small hit type counter C5, and as shown in FIG. 171 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small win A" in the range of "0 to 14". This "small win A" is a small win type that sets the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) to an open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period of 1.5 seconds has passed during the small win game. In addition, after the open state of 1.5 seconds has passed, the ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, in FIG. 171 (a) omitted.

Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "15 to 59" in association with "small hit B". This "small hit B" is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.1 seconds after the opening period of 0.5 seconds has passed during the small hit game. , It is a small hit type that sets an open state for 1.4 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. In addition, after the second open setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171(a).

The value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "60 to 79" in association with "small hit C". This "small win C" is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has passed during the small win game. , It is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.1 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. In addition, after the second open setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171(a).

The value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with "small hit D". This "small hit D" is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has passed during the small win game. , It is a small hit type that sets an open state for 1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 0.3 seconds. In addition, after the second open setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171(a).

The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which the operation scenario of the flow path solenoid 2650h during the small winning game is stored in advance, and the flow path solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the small winning type to be executed. One operating scenario is set to run.

Here, the action scenario contents stored in the action scenario storage area 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 171(b). FIG. 171(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario defined in the action scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171(b), the action scenario storage area 202db defines an action scenario that is set in accordance with the start timing of the small winning game.

Specifically, until 1.4 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of the small hit, it is stipulated to set the flow path solenoid 2650h to OFF, and from 1.4 seconds after the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit. , the channel solenoid 2650h is set to ON. It should be noted that the operation scenario that defines the operation contents of the flow path solenoid 2650h is a loop counter scenario in which the value is incremented by 1 each time the main processing of main controller 110 is executed every 4 milliseconds. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, whether or not the winning ball of the small winning variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge channel 2650e2 is determined by the selected small winning type and the channel solenoid It is configured to be variably set according to the operation scenario of 2650h. Furthermore, the ball flowing down the special discharge channel 2650e2 is branched into a ball that passes through the fall gate 2650e3 and a ball that does not pass (second normal switch 2650e6) by the internal structure of the small winning variable winning device 2650. It consists of

Specifically, in the small winning game in which "small winning A" is set as the small winning type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) is the period during which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to OFF (1 from the start of the small winning .4 seconds), the ball does not pass through the falling route, and a small winning game most advantageous to the player who has set the open period long is executed.

In the small winning game in which "small winning B" to "small winning D" are set as the small winning types, the first open period is the timing at which the winning ball can pass the falling route. Furthermore, the "small win C" and the "small win D" have an opening period as short as 0.1 seconds (shorter than the "small win B"); Since the first opening period is as long as 0.5 seconds (longer than "small win B"), it becomes a small win game in which the ball easily passes through the falling route.

In addition, the "small win C" is the shortest period of 0.6 seconds in which the first attacker (first variable prize winning device) 65 is opened in one opening operation, so it is the most disadvantageous small win for the player. It's a hit game. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds until the ball fired by the right-handed game wins the small winning variable winning device 2650 and reaches the distribution flow path distributed by the flow path solenoid 2650h. It is constructed in such a manner that the design fixing period of the special design at the time of winning the small prize is 0.5 seconds.

Therefore, immediately after the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 167 (a)), by stopping the right-handed game, the small winning game is started. At this time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball shot before stopping the right-handed game wins the variable winning device 2650 for small hits.

Next, referring to FIG. 172, the contents of ROM 202 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 of the fifth embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the above-described fourth embodiment in that a small winning prize counter 203da, a fall passage counter 203db, and a passage flag 203dc are added. are doing. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The small winning prize counter 203da is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game. When it is determined that the timing at which the sensor (ball detection switch 2650c1) is turned on is during the opening period of the small winning prize opening 2650a (S3302 in FIG. 174: Yes), the value is incremented by 1, and after the addition A winning number command corresponding to the information indicating the value of is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). Then, in the small hit control process 5 (see S2271 in FIG. 176), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511 in FIG. 176: Yes), the value of the counter is cleared (see S2271 in FIG. 176). S2571).

Although detailed description will be given later, in the fifth embodiment, based on the winning number command set corresponding to the value of the small winning winning counter 203da, the latent state continues on the audio lamp control device 113 side. It is configured to accumulate the number of winning balls in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the set period. Thereby, it is possible to display the number of winning balls in one latent state game (RUSH game) on the third symbol display device 81 .

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, during the small winning game, the player has the gaming property of selecting whether or not the ball is to win the variable winning device 2650 for small winning. Depending on the content of the player's selection, even if the number of small winning games is the same, the cumulative value of the number of balls won by the variable winning device 2650 for small winning may differ greatly. Therefore, it is possible to provide detailed game results by displaying the number of winning balls in the small winning variable winning device 2650 instead of the number of times the small winning game is executed.

In addition, both the number of balls that won the small winning variable winning device 2650 described above and the number of times the small winning game was executed are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the winning during one small winning game The average value of the number of balls may be displayed, or the number of winnings may be displayed as the winning history for each small winning type of the executed small winning game.

The fall passage counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small winning game, and the fall switch 2650e3 detects the ball in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175). If so (S3402 in FIG. 175: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 (S3403 in FIG. 175), and the number-of-passes command is set with the information corresponding to the value after the addition (S3404 in FIG. 175). Then, when it is determined that it is time to end the small winning game (S2511 in FIG. 176: Yes), the value of the counter is cleared (S2571 in FIG. 176).

In the present embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, that is, when the advantage probability state is set, the number of balls passing through the fall route is always counted. . As a result, when "invincible mode" is set as the latent mode, if it is not in the advantageous latent state, the high probability state of the special pattern will transition to the low probability state (fall route). The number of balls played can be notified to the player (see cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

The pass flag 203dc indicates that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected the ball when the detection of the ball by the fall switch 2650e3 is effectively processed (when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to OFF). This flag is set to ON to indicate that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected a ball.

This passage flag 203dc is set when it is determined in the fall gate passage processing (see S172 in FIG. 175) that the ball has passed through the fall gate 2650e3 and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to OFF (S3405 in FIG. 175). : No), set to ON (see S3408 in FIG. 175). Then, when the passing flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not the new ball has passed the falling gate 2650e3 in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the process for causing the high probability state of the special symbol to fall is executed multiple times during one small winning game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a winning number counter 223da and a passing number counter 223db in comparison with the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. and are added, and the rest are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The winning number counter 223da is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game. (S8101 in FIG. 179: Yes), the value is incremented by 1, and the information corresponding to the value after the addition is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A number command is set (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

Then, when the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the value of the counter is cleared. In other words, once the latent state is set, the winning number counter 223da counts the balls that have won the small winning variable winning device 2650 in the small winning games executed a plurality of times until the latent state ends. It is configured so that the number can be accumulated and measured.

The passing number counter 223db is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3, and determines that a passing number command has been received from the main controller 110 in the ball passing related process (see S4582 in FIG. 179). If so (S8107 in FIG. 179: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 if the current latent probability state is an advantageous probability state (see S8110 in FIG. 179).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. FIG. The control processing of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is a small winning control processing 5 (see FIG. 55) instead of the small winning control processing (see FIG. 55) with respect to the control processing of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. 176) is executed, small winning entrance passage processing (see FIG. 174), and fall gate passage processing (see FIG. 175) are different. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 174, the small hit entrance passage process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit entrance passage process (S171).

In the small hit entrance passage process (S171), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor is on (S3301). If it is determined that the ball passing sensor is not on (S3301: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passage sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the opening period of the small winning prize opening is in progress (S3302). If it is determined that it is during the open period of the small winning prize opening (S3302: Yes), a small winning entrance passage command is set (S3303). The small hit entrance passing command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. sent. 1 is added to the value of the small winning prize counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the processing of S3304, based on the value of the small winning prize counter 203da after the addition, the winning number command is set (S3305), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3302, if it is determined that the small winning prize opening is not open (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the flow path solenoid is set to OFF (S3307). , the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 175, the fall gate passing process (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing the contents of the fall gate passing process (S172).

In the fall gate passage process (S172), first, it is determined whether or not the passage flag 203dc is ON (S3401). If it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is ON (S3401: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is not ON (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not there is passage through the fall gate (S3402). If it is determined that there is no passage through the fall gate (S3402: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fall gate has passed through (S3402: Yes), the value of the fall passage counter 203db is incremented by 1 (S3403), and the number of passages is calculated based on the value of the fall passage counter 203db after addition. A command is set (S3404). Next, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is ON (S3405). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is ON (S3405: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not ON (S3405: No), it is determined whether or not it is during the falling gate passage valid period (S3406). When it is determined that it is during the falling gate passage valid period (S3406: Yes), the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF (S3407), and the passage flag 203dc is set to ON (S3408). Next, a fall command is set (S3409), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that the fall gate passage valid period is not in effect (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the small winning control process 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit control process 5 (S2271). Small hit control processing 5 (S2271), in contrast to the small hit control processing (S2205) in the first embodiment described above, in the processing of S2511, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S2511: No ) Clears the values of the small hit prize counter 203da and the fall passage counter 203db (S2571), and sets the passage flag 203dc to OFF (S2572). Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. FIG. In the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, the state command processing (see FIG. 62) is replaced with the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described fourth embodiment. 5 (see FIG. 177), the hit-related processing 5 (see FIG. 178) is executed instead of the hit-related processing (see FIG. 63), and the ball passage-related processing (see FIG. 179) is different, but the other processes are the same. is executed. The same processes are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, state command processing 5 (S4291) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the contents of state command processing 5 (S4291). State command processing 5 (S4291) executes the processing of S4411 with respect to the state command processing 4 (S4281) in the above-described fourth embodiment, and then replaces the processing of S4454 with the latent mode storage area 223cb, small The difference is that a process (S4471) for clearing the winning number counter 223cc, the winning number counter 223da, the passing number counter 223db, the falling flag 223cd, and the short time notification completion flag 223ce is added. Other processing is the same as the state command processing 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, so a detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the hit-related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process 5 (S4292). Hit-related processing 5 (S4292) differs from the hit-related processing (S4216) in the above-described fourth embodiment in that processing related to ball passage is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

In the hit-related process 5 (S4292), if it is determined in the process of S4505 that the prize ball command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4505: No), it is determined whether or not the ball passing-related command has been received. (S4581). If it is determined that the ball passing related command has been received (S4581: Yes), the ball passing related process (S4582) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball-passing related command has not been received (S4581: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the ball passing related process (S4582), which is one process in the hit related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ball passage related process (S4582).

In the ball passage-related processing (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not a prize number command has been received from the main controller 110 this time (S8101). If it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223da (S8102), and the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is read out. Execute (S8103). Next, it is determined whether or not the latent probability mode read in the process of S8103 is the invincible mode (S8104). If it is determined that it is not invincible mode (S8104: No), a suggestive effect suggesting the end of the latent state is set (S8105), a command for the number of wins for display is set (S8106), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S8104, if it is determined that the read latency mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8106.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that the number-of-wins command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether or not the number-of-passes command has been received (S8107). If it is determined that the number-of-passes command has been received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the status setting area 223j is read (S8108). Next, in the processing of S8108, it is determined whether or not the read value is a value indicating the probability of missing working hours (S8109). When it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating the time saving probability (S8109: No), 1 is added to the value of the passage number counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, in the process of S8109, when it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating the probability of time saving omission (S8109: Yes), the process of S8110 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8111.

Next, the latent certainty mode stored in the latent certainty mode storage area 223cb is read (S8111). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability mode read out in the process of S8111 is the invincible mode (S8112). If it is determined that it is not invincible mode (S8112: No), a suggestive effect suggesting the end of the latent state is set (S8113), a display pass number command is set (S8114), and this process ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S8112, if it is determined that the read latent certainty mode is the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation contents (open operation pattern) of the small winning game to be executed are configured to differ according to the type (small winning type) when winning the small winning. According to the opening operation pattern to be executed, the rate at which the ball winning the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game passes through the falling gate 2650e3 is configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, the content of the small winning game to be executed is predicted so as not to fall the high probability state of the special pattern and to perform the game aiming to acquire the privilege (prize ball) by the small winning game. The player can be allowed to select a game while playing.

In addition, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, in the latency state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the big hit variation, the other special symbol variation (lottery) wins a small hit. , Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low probability state.

As a result, the state in which the latent state is set is an advantageous latent state in which the high probability state of the special pattern does not fall (it is difficult to fall), and the high probability state of the special pattern is easier to fall than the advantageous latent state. You can set a disadvantageous probability state.

In each of the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time saving times) is performed at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol fluctuation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) ), the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol and the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time in the gaming machine for a predetermined number of times. , Although it is configured to execute a time saving game (a game in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set), for example, when setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 100 (when setting the number of times of time saving 100 times ), the period from the start of the 100th special symbol variation to the start of the 101st special symbol variation becomes a non-time-saving state (low-probability state of normal symbols).

During the period in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set, even in the lottery (variation) of normal symbols different from the special symbols, it is a period in which the lottery (variation) advantageous to the player can be executed. The period from the start of the 100th special symbol variation to the start of the 101st special symbol variation, that is, the period until the special symbol variation of the number of times exceeding the predetermined number of time reductions is executed. , there is a problem that the non-time-saving state is set to make the player feel uncomfortable.

However, if the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time saving times) is configured to be updated at the timing when the fluctuation display of the special symbol ends (the timing when the symbol fixing period ends), In a game machine capable of simultaneously executing the variation (lottery) of a first special symbol and the variation (lottery) of a second special symbol, a time-saving state is set for a special symbol variation (lottery) equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times of time-saving. There was a problem that it was executed in a state where

In order to solve the above-described problem, the special symbol lottery executed when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (for example, the first special symbol) corresponding to the special symbol lottery (the 100th time saving time) to the time saving end condition Set the (first time saving end condition), set the time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) also for the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol), and set the two time saving end conditions You may comprise so that a time saving state may be ended based on the time saving end condition satisfied first among them.

Specifically, when a predetermined period (for example, 100 times of working hours) is set as the period in which the time saving state is set, the special symbol variation corresponding to the final variation of the working hours state (for example, the 100th time of working hours) ends. The first time-saving end condition that is established by this, and the second time-saving end condition that is established when the condition for starting the special symbol variation (for example, the 101st special symbol variation) newly executed after the elapse of a predetermined period is satisfied. And, when the first time-saving end condition is satisfied first, that is, by the time the 101st special symbol variation is started, the 100th special symbol variation period (or the symbol determination period) has ended. In that case, end the time saving state at that point.

On the other hand, prior to the establishment of the first time saving end condition, if the second time saving end condition is satisfied, that is, before the 100th special symbol fluctuation period (or design confirmation period) ends (special When the conditions for starting the 101st special pattern variation are established during the pattern variation), it is preferable to terminate the time saving state before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed.

By configuring in this way, in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state, while preventing the execution of the special symbol variation (lottery) more than the predetermined number of times, the maximum period is maintained. It can be set as a time saving state. Therefore, the state advantageous to the player can be set as long as possible as a normal symbol lottery (fluctuation).

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the probability variation counter 203aa for measuring the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the time saving counter 203f for measuring the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set Then, the value of each counter is subtracted and configured to be interrupted, but in each of the above embodiments, instead of the process of interrupting the subtraction of the probability variable counter 203aa (the process of interrupting (skipping) measurement), a time saving counter A process of interrupting the subtraction of 203f may be applied, or vice versa.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. FIG. In the above-described second embodiment, the so-called simultaneous variation type pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, It is configured to vary the game state during the symbol determination period (the period during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) during which the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. In other words, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability variation state is set, the start timing of the symbol confirmation period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed), the game state is changed from the probability variable state to the latent probability state.

By configuring in this way, during the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 (the period from the stop display of the first symbol indicating the jackpot to the execution of the jackpot game), the second special symbol in the latent state (Special Figure 2) It was possible to execute the game and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, the jackpot game and the special symbol lottery game are performed at the same time, so that the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot game. is being executed (from the setting of the opening period of the jackpot game to the end of the ending period of the jackpot game), the variation (lottery) of the special pattern is not executed. In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this way, since the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbols is not executed during the jackpot game, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game. However, since the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not performed during the whole period of the jackpot game, the period for executing the special symbol lottery is limited, and the game efficiency (the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed per unit time) is lowered. There was a problem that

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, during the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (the opening period of the jackpot game), the special symbol fluctuation on the side that has not won the jackpot configured to run. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during the opening period. It is configured to execute the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol.

That is, even during the jackpot game, the round game in which the ball can be entered by the jackpot game (the period in which the first variable prize winning device 65 or the second variable prize winning device 650 is in an open state that makes it easy for the ball to enter) A period (for example, an opening period, an interval period, an ending period) other than the game) is configured so that a special symbol lottery can be executed. By constructing in this way, players can be made to pay attention to the big winning game during the round game in the big winning game and to pay attention to the special pattern variation during the other period, so that the player can be provided with an efficient game.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, it is configured so as not to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive jackpot games from being provided to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (other than a big win), it is configured so that a small amount of benefits (prize balls) can be awarded to the player. ing. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have different probabilities of winning a small hit. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol can be made different.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. FIG. FIG. 180 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 180, the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the second embodiment described above in that an opening scenario table 202ea is added, and other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The open scenario table 202ea is a data table in which game contents during a jackpot game or a small winning game (hereinafter referred to as a winning game) are stored. remembered. Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from the start of the winning game to the start of the first round game, the length of the round game period, and the variable winning that opens in the round game The type of the device, the number of times the round game is executed, the length of the game between rounds (interval period), and the length of the ending period set after all the round games are completed are stored.

Information (winning game content) read out for executing a winning game corresponding to the winning big win or small win may be determined in advance. Information may be stored, or the method used in each of the above-described embodiments may be employed.

Next, referring to FIG. 181, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 181, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment has a jackpot state flag 203ea, a small hit state flag 203eb, a special figure variable flag 203ec, and a jackpot interruption flag 203ed in comparison with the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. , It is different in that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is added.

The jackpot state flag 203ea is for indicating the state of the jackpot game, and includes the type of special symbol that has been won in the jackpot and the current jackpot game situation (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, ending period This is a flag that is referred to when discriminating whether it is a medium). Here, the contents of the jackpot state flag 203ea will be described with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the jackpot state flag 203ea. As shown in FIG. 182(a), the jackpot state flag 203ea is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured to be able to specify the game state by the state of the lower 4 bits.

Specifically, the special symbol that won the jackpot this time is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are "0001" (Fig. 182 (a ), the lower 4 bits become "0010" (shown as "02" in FIG. 182(a)) during the round game (round), and the lower 4 bits during the inter-round game (interval). 4 bits become "0011" (described as "03" in FIG. 182(a)), and during the ending period (ED), the lower 4 bits become "0100" (described as "04" in FIG. 182(a)). Become.

And the special symbol that won the jackpot this time is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are "0101" (in FIG. 182(a), " 05"), during a round game (round), the lower 4 bits become "0110" (shown as "06" in FIG. 182(a)), and during an inter-round game (interval), the lower 4 bits become "0111" (described as "07" in FIG. 182(a)), and the lower 4 bits become "1000" (described as "08" in FIG. 182(a)) during the ending period (ED).

Further, when the jackpot game is not executed (when the jackpot flag 203o is set to OFF), the lower 4 bits are "0000" as the initial state. The jackpot status flag 203ea is configured such that its value is updated according to the updated jackpot scenario in the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188) executed during the jackpot game. The big win state flag 203ea is updated based on the information stored in the storage area 203j, that is, the type of the special symbol won in the big win and the contents (big win game state) indicated by the updated big win scenario.

As described above, the value of the jackpot status flag 203ea is configured to be updated based on the jackpot scenario. (past history), and may be provided to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the big win game based on the past history determination result of the big win state flag 203ea. Specifically, for example, from the value ("01" to "04" shown in FIG. 182 (a)) that can be set when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1, the jackpot by the lottery of the special figure 2 If it is determined that it has been updated to a value that can be set when winning ("05" to "08" values shown in FIG. 182 (a)), it is determined that the jackpot game is in an abnormal state, and externally It is preferable to configure so as to perform anomaly notification. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine that the player has played an illegal game during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea is changed according to the execution content of the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188). Any configuration may be used, for example, means for determining whether or not a jackpot is currently in progress, means for detecting the open state of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), may be provided, and the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea may be set based on the determination (detection) result of each means, or the content of the image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be determined. A means may be provided to determine the current jackpot gaming situation based on the determination result of the means.

Then, when the value set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is updated, a state command is set to indicate that effect, and is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The voice lamp control device 113 receives a state command indicating that the value set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is updated, determines the current jackpot game situation, and performs various production modes according to the jackpot game situation. is set.

In the sixth embodiment, as a jackpot game situation, the special symbol type for winning the jackpot is also determined. However, the special symbol type may not be determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of types for classifying the jackpot gaming situation.

The small winning state flag 203eb is for indicating the state during the small winning game, and which is the current small winning game situation (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, during the ending period) It is a flag that is referred to when determining Here, the contents of the small winning state flag 203eb will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG.182(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit state flag 203eb. As shown in FIG. 182(b), the small hit state flag 203eb is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured to be able to specify the game state by the state of the lower 2 bits.

Specifically, during the opening period (OP) of the small winning game, the lower 2 bits become "01" (described as "01" in FIG. 182 (b)), and during the round game (round), the lower 2 bits is "10" (described as "02" in FIG. 182(b)), and the lower two bits become "11" (described as "03" in FIG. 182(b)) during the ending period (ED). Then, when the small winning game is not executed (when the small winning medium flag 203p is set to OFF), the lower 2 bits become "00" (described as "00" in FIG. 182(b)). .

In this embodiment, since the round game is configured to be executed only once as a small winning game, the value for indicating the interval period is deleted from the big winning state flag 203ea described above, and the second Since it is constructed so as not to win a small hit in the lottery of one special pattern, the value for discriminating the type of special pattern that won a small hit is also deleted. The value of this small hit state flag 203eb is configured to be set according to the update contents of the updated small hit scenario in the small hit control process 6 (see S2273 in FIG. 193), and the small hit state flag When the value of 203eb is updated, a state command for indicating the value of the small hit state flag 203eb after updating is set and output to the sound lamp control device 113 .

The voice lamp control device 113 grasps the current small winning game situation by receiving the state command containing the information for indicating the value of the small winning state flag 203eb, and adjusts the effect mode according to the current situation. set.

The special symbol variation possible flag 203ec is a flag for indicating whether the current situation is a state in which a new special symbol variation can be executed, and is turned on when the new special symbol variation is executable. is set.

The jackpot interruption flag 203ed is a flag for interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario. For example, the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to ON when the special symbol lottery result executed during the opening period of the jackpot game results in a jackpot and the jackpot game is executed.

In the sixth embodiment, a new special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed in a part of the jackpot game (a state in which the round game is not executed), and the special symbol lottery When winning a small prize, a small prize game is executed. During the small winning game, the big winning interruption flag 203ed is set to ON so that the big winning scenario is not updated.

By configuring in this way, for example, even if a small winning is won during the opening period of the big winning game, the small winning game can be reliably executed without starting the big winning round game. In addition, even if a small win is won within a predetermined period such as the opening period of the jackpot, the opening period of the jackpot is not subtracted (update of the jackpot scenario), so many small win games are executed. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the small winning game is executed during the big winning game, the update of the big winning scenario is interrupted and the small winning game is surely executed, but it is limited to this. For example, without interrupting the update of the big winning scenario, the small winning game is forced to end based on the timing at which the big winning round game is executed, or the small winning game is continued until the big winning round game ends. may be temporarily interrupted.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, since the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to ON based on the timing at which the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot scenario is updated during the fluctuation time of the special symbol that wins the jackpot. be done. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting to set a variation pattern in which a variation time is set as short as possible in addition to winning a small win during the big win game. On the other hand, it is possible to pay attention to the contents of the special symbol lottery (fluctuation).

In this case, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol variation to be executed this time at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started, it is preferable to execute the variation time suggesting notification suggesting the set variation time. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player whether or not a short fluctuation time has been set, so that the effect of presentation can be enhanced. Also, even if the special symbol lottery result is a loss, the next special symbol lottery can be immediately executed by setting a short fluctuation time. In other words, the fluctuation time suggesting notification is a notification indicating whether or not the lottery result is advantageous to the player without indicating whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a win or a loss (whether the result of winning or not).

In addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment, for example, the big hit interruption flag 203ed may be set to ON based on the timing at which the special symbol variation that wins the small prize is executed. Thus, it is possible to solve the problem that a big win round game is executed while a special symbol variation winning a small win is being executed, and a game difficult to understand for a player is provided.

In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, means for determining the remaining period of the opening period of the jackpot game and means for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbols are provided, and the special symbol lottery (variation) this time is the opening period. If it is determined that it will end within the opening period, set the effect mode based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment), and if it is determined that this special symbol lottery (fluctuation) will not end within the opening period , It may be configured to set an effect mode corresponding to the case where the lottery result (property determination result) of the special symbol lottery is out. By constructing in this way, even if the lottery result of the special symbol variation forcibly terminated by the execution of the big win round game is a small win, the special symbol variation does not give the player a sense of incongruity. can be stopped.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 194. FIG. The control process of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment is the special symbol variation stop process 2 (see FIG. 97) instead of the special symbol variation stop process 2 (see FIG. 97) in the control process of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. Processing 6 (see FIG. 183), instead of the first special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 33), first special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 185), second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 39) Second special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 186) instead, jackpot control processing (see FIG. 53) instead of jackpot control processing 6 (see FIG. 188), jackpot end processing (see FIG. 54) instead of jackpot end Processing 6 (see FIG. 192), small hit control processing (see FIG. 55) instead of small hit control processing 6 (see FIG. 193), fluctuation condition determination processing (see FIG. 184), round execution processing (see FIG. 189 reference), and the difference is that small hit end processing (see FIG. 194) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 183, the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 6 (S181). In the special symbol variation processing 6 (S181), the variation condition determination processing (S291) is added to the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 97) of the second embodiment described above, and the first special symbol variation start processing (See FIG. 33) instead of first special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 185), second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 39) instead of second special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 186) The difference is that the Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 6 (S181), first, a variation condition determination process (S291) is executed. Details of the fluctuation condition determination process (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure variable flag 203ec is on (S292). If it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is not ON (S292: No), the process proceeds to S202. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is ON (S292: Yes), the process proceeds to S204.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the variation condition determination process (S291), which is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing the contents of the fluctuation condition determination process (S291).

In the variation condition determination process (S291), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation prohibition flag 203ee is ON (S3501). If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501: Yes), the special figure fluctuation possible flag 203ec is set to off (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is not ON (S3501: No), it is determined whether the flag 203o during the big hit is ON (S3502). When it is determined that the jackpot medium flag 203o is ON (S3502: Yes), the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is read (S3503). Next, in the process of S3503, it is determined whether or not the read information of the jackpot state flag 203ea is "01" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the jackpot (S3504). If it is determined that the read information is "01" or "05" (S3504: Yes), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3505), and the process proceeds to S3507. On the other hand, in the process of S3504, when it is determined that the read information is not "01" or "05" (S3504: No), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to OFF (S3506), and the process of S3507 transition to

On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag 203o during the big hit is not ON (S3502: No), it is determined whether the flag 203p during the small hit is ON (S3507). When it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203p is off (S3507: No), the special figure variation flag 203ec is set to on (S3512), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3507, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203p is ON (S3507: Yes), the information set in the small hit state flag 203eb is read (S3508). Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the small hit state flag 203eb read in the process of S3508 is "01" (S3509). When it is determined that the information is "01" (S3509: Yes), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3510), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read information is not "01" (S3509: No), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to OFF (S3511), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 185, a first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293) which is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. will be explained. FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293). The first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293) differs from the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) in the second embodiment in that the information of the jackpot state flag 203ea is read. . Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293), first, information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is read out (S391). Next, it is determined whether the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is during the opening period of the second special symbol jackpot or outside the jackpot execution period (S392). When it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is "00" or "05" (S392: Yes), the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is neither "00" nor "05" (S392: No), this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 186, a second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294) which is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. will be explained. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294). The second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294) reads out the information of the big hit state flag 203ea in contrast to the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) in the second embodiment, and the first special symbol big hit. Add a process to determine whether it is the opening period of or the round period. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294), first, information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is read out (S971). Next, it is determined whether the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is "00" or "01". That is, it is determined whether it is during the opening period of the first special symbol jackpot or outside the jackpot execution period (S972). When it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "01" (S972: Yes), the process proceeds to S901. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is not "00" or "01" (S972: No), the process of S902 is executed and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the electric accessary product opening/closing process 6 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric accessory opening/closing process 6 (S2271).

In the electric accessory opening/closing process 6 (S2271), first, it is determined whether or not there is an open setting (S3601). When it is determined that there is an open setting (S3601: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to ON (S3602), the jackpot state flag 203ea is set to the corresponding value (S3606), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3601 that there is no open setting (S3601: No), it is determined whether or not there is a closed setting (S3603). If it is determined that there is a setting for closing (S3603: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to OFF (S3604), the process of S3606 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3603 that there is no setting for closing (S3603: No), it is determined whether it is time to end the closed scenario (S3605). If it is determined that it is time to end the closed scenario (S3605: Yes), the process of S3606 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3605, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the closed scenario (S3605: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing the content of jackpot control processing 6 (S2272).

In the jackpot control process 6 (S2272), first, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S2301 (S2301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351). . When it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is ON (S2351: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not ON (S2351: No), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302).

Next, it is determined whether it is time to start a big hit (S2302). When it is determined that it is time to start a big win (S2303: Yes), an opening command is set (S2304), a value corresponding to the big win status flag 203ea is set (S2352), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2303, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the jackpot (S2303: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start a new round (S2305). If it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S2305: Yes), round execution processing (S2353) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 189, the round execution process (S2353), which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the contents of the round execution process (S2353).

In the round execution process (S2353), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of the first round (S3701). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S3701: Yes), a jackpot interruption process is executed (S3702), and the process proceeds to S3703. Details of the jackpot interruption process (S3702) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3701, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round (S3701: No), a value corresponding to the jackpot state flag 203ea is set (S3703), and a process corresponding to the jackpot scenario is set. (S3704), and the process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, the jackpot interruption process (S3702), which is one process in the round execution process (S2353) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot interruption process (S3702).

In the big hit interruption process (S3702), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit middle flag 203p is ON (S3801). When it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203p is ON (S3801: Yes), the big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to ON (S3802), the big hit interruption command is set (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3805. . On the other hand, in the process of S3801, when it is determined that the flag 203p during the small hit is not ON (S3801: No), the opening command indicating the start of the small hit is set (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

Next, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m or, or special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n whether value is larger than 0, namely, it distinguishes whether it is in the midst of fluctuation in the special design (S3805). When it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating (S3805: Yes), the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S3806), the special symbol fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is set to ON (S3807), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S3805, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S3805: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 188, the description continues. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2305 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2305: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S2307). When it is determined that it is time to end the round (S2307: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening is set (S2308), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2307, if it is determined that it is not the time to end the round (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is time to end the operation of the special train (S2354). When it is determined that it is time to end the operation of the special train (S2354: Yes), ending execution processing (S2355) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 191, the ending execution process (S2355), which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending execution process (S2355).

In the ending execution process (S2355), first, a value corresponding to the jackpot state flag 203ea is set (S3901), an ending command is set (S3902), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 188, the description continues. In the processing of S2354, if it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of the special train (S2354: No), it is determined whether it is the operation end timing of the role-linked actuator (S2356). When it is determined that it is time to end the operation of the combination operating device (S2356: Yes), the jackpot ending process 6 (S2357) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2356, if it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of the combination actuator (S2356: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the jackpot ending process 6 (S2357) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the content of jackpot end processing 6 (S2357). In the jackpot end processing 6 (S2357), after setting the state command (S2406) for the jackpot end processing (S2312 in FIG. 54) of the second embodiment described above, the jackpot state flag 203ea is set to "00". The difference is that processing (S2451) is added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the small hit control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit control process 6 (S2272). In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), the process of setting a value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is added to the small hit control process (S2205 in FIG. 55) of the second embodiment described above, The difference is that a small hit end process (S2584) is executed instead of the process of S2512. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), in the process of S2503, when it is determined that it is the timing of starting the small hit (S2503: Yes), the opening command is set (S2504), corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb A value is set (S2581), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2503, when it is determined that it is not the small hit start timing (S2503: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the small hit round (S2505). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit round (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process (S2506) is executed, the value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is set (S2582), and this process exit.

Then, in the present embodiment, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is the ending timing (S2509: Yes), the ending command is set (S2510) and the value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is set ( S2583), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the ending timing (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit end processing (S2584) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 194, the small winning end processing (S2584) which is one process in the small winning control processing 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning end process (S2584).

In the small hit end process (S2584), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591). When it is determined that the big hit interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591: Yes), the big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to off (S2592), and the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is set to on (S2593). Next, 1 is subtracted from the update value of the big hit scenario (S2594), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S2595), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2591, when it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not ON (S2591: No), the processing of S2592 to S2594 is skipped, the processing of S2595 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, during the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (the opening period of the jackpot game), the special symbol fluctuation on the side that has not won the jackpot is configured to run. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during the opening period. It is configured to execute the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol.

That is, even during the jackpot game, the round game in which the ball can be entered by the jackpot game (the period in which the first variable prize winning device 65 or the second variable prize winning device 650 is in an open state that makes it easy for the ball to enter) A period (for example, an opening period, an interval period, an ending period) other than the game) is configured so that a special symbol lottery can be executed. By constructing in this way, players can be made to pay attention to the big winning game during the round game in the big winning game and to pay attention to the special pattern variation during the other period, so that the player can be provided with an efficient game.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, it is configured so as not to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive jackpot games from being provided to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (other than a big win), it is configured so that a small amount of benefits (prize balls) can be awarded to the player. ing. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have different probabilities of winning a small hit. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol can be made different.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 233. FIG. In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot game is executed only when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a specific region 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball passes through the specific region 650V during the small winning game. It is configured so that a jackpot (so-called double winning) game is executed.

In addition, although the details will be described later, as a path for the ball to flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game, a first flow that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V A passage ta (see FIG. 196) and a second passage tb (see FIG. 196) through which the ball can easily pass through the specific region 650V are provided. As a result, the player pays attention to which channel the ball flows down during the small win game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball is distributed to the first flow path ta or the second flow path tb by the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a. It is also possible to make the player interested in Furthermore, when the ball flows down the second flow path tb that easily passes through the specific area 650V, the ease with which the ball enters the V winning device 650 is configured to vary according to the variation time of the special symbols. ing.

Furthermore, it is configured to vary the fluctuation time of the set special symbol according to the set game state and the winning small hit type. By configuring in this way, when winning a small win corresponding to a big win to which a time-saving state is imparted after the big-win game ends, the game state (advantageous time-saving) in which the ball is easily passed through the specific area 650V and the big win ends. A game state (disadvantageous time saving) can be set to make it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when winning a small win corresponding to the big win to which the time saving state is given later.

Then, in this embodiment, by using the above-described advantageous time saving and disadvantageous time saving configurations, once the jackpot is elected (first hit), a total of three jackpots including at least the first hit are executed. It is constructed so that a game state advantageous to the player is continued. By making it possible to set the game state in which the execution of the jackpot game is guaranteed a plurality of times in this way, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, although the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198, in the seventh embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so that the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 3640 which triggers the execution of the lottery. Then, the electric accessory 3640a shifts to the closed state based on the ball that has flowed down on the electric accessory 3640a entering the second ball entrance 3640, and at that time, the electric accessory 3640a is flowing down. The ball is distributed to the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb according to the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball has flowed down.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the ball located downstream of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a is distributed to the second flow path tb that is advantageous to the player, and It is configured such that when the ball is shot, the ball easily flows into the second flow path tb.

Therefore, in order to cause the ball to flow into the second flow path tb while the lottery for the second special symbol is being executed, it is necessary to continuously shoot the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the action of trying to obtain an advantageous result by launching the ball at a predetermined timing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 195, the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 195 is a front view schematically showing the structure of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195, the seventh embodiment differs from the game board 13 of the first embodiment in that the configuration of the right region of the game board 13 is greatly different.

Specifically, a channel unit 660 is provided in the right region of the game board 13, a second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is provided below the channel unit 660, and a second variable In the winning device (V winning device) 650, there is provided a specific area 650v that can provide a jackpot game based on the passage of the ball, and the second variable winning device provided in the lower center of the game board 13. 650, the second ball entrance 640, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 to which the electric accessory 64a is attached are eliminated. Other configurations are the same as those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the channel unit 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198. FIG. FIG. 196 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the channel unit 660, and FIG. 197(a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (embedded state). FIG. 197(b) is a perspective view schematically showing ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (embedded state). FIG. 198(a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. FIG. 10 is a perspective view schematically showing a sphere flow in an open state (protruding state);

In addition, to explain the terminology indicating the variable state of the electric role object 3640a used in the seventh embodiment, the closed state of the electric role object 3640a means the flow path for entering the ball into the second ball entrance 3640 (the flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) is closed, that is, the term used to indicate the state in which the electric accessory 3640a is embedded in the game board 13, and is a functional expression. , the term restricted state (a state in which the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 3640 is restricted) may be used.

In addition, the open state of the electric accessory 3640a is a state in which the flow path (the flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640 is opened. It is a term used to indicate a state in which the accessory 3640a protrudes from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, the term is an allowable state (a state in which the ball is allowed to enter the second ball inlet 3640). is sometimes used.

As shown in FIG. 196, the passage unit 660 forms a first passage 660a forming a first passage ta and a second passage tb as ball passages for causing balls to flow down toward the V winning device 650. A second passage 660b, and a first inlet 661 into which the ball that has flowed down in the approximate center of the right side area flows, and the ball that has flowed in from the first inlet 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a. A first guiding path 661a (see FIG. 197(b)), a second inlet 662 into which the ball that has flowed down the left side of the right area flows, and a ball that has flowed in from the second inlet 662 pass through the through gate 67. A third passage 660c that moves down to the lower area of the game board 13, a third inlet 663 into which the ball that has flowed down the right side of the right area flows, and a ball that has flowed in from the third inlet 663 and an out port 66 for discharging to the outside.

A plurality of nails (for example, a nail 660k (see FIG. 195) that is a channel variable member) arranged above the channel unit 660 allow the spheres flowing down the right side area to change the channel while moving through the channel unit. 660, about 55% of the spheres flowing down the right side flow into the first inlet 661, about 40% flow into the second inlet 662, and about 5% flow into the third inlet 662. It is configured to flow into the inflow port 663 . In addition, the distribution ratio described above indicates an average numerical value when a right-handed game is performed. , the proportion of balls flowing into the second inlet 662 increases. In this way, by allowing the player to operate the firing intensity in the right-handed game, by making it possible to vary the inflow ratio to each inlet arranged in the flow path unit 660, it is possible for the player to It is possible to provide the enjoyment of varying the firing intensity so that an advantageous game can be played.

Also, the balls flowing down the second inlet 662 are configured to be distributed to two channels formed in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the balls distributed to the channel on the front side (approximately 90 %) flows down the third passage 660c provided with the through gate 67, and the balls (about 10%) distributed to the back channel (not shown) flow into the out port 66, and the pachinko machine 10 It is configured to be discharged to the outside. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, positions close to both ends of the electric accessory 3640a that is opened when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win (formed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state) An out port 66 is provided (a partition wall is provided to partition the space from the out port 66) at a position adjacent to each of the upstream end and the downstream end of the spherical flow path.

By configuring in this way, since the player can easily grasp the movable range of the electric role product 3640a that is operated when the winning game of the normal symbol is executed, the electric role product 3640a during the winning game can be easily grasped. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity with respect to the opening operation of .

In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 196, the partition wall for partitioning the space between the outlet 66 and the movable area of the electric accessory 3640a is in contact with the electric accessory 3640a. , a gap of less than half a sphere. As a result, even if the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a is performed multiple times, it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 3640a or the partition wall from being damaged by friction. In addition, since the size of the gap is less than the size of half a ball, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling downward from the gap.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197, the ball flow in the right-handed game when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (embedded state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, the ball that has flowed in from the first inlet 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a. flow down to the first passage 660a provided below the first guideway 661a (see FIG. 197(b)). This first passage 660a is a passage in which the first flow passage ta is formed. The first flow path ta is configured so that the time required for the ball to pass through is about 0.5 seconds, and the ball can reach the V prize in a shorter time than the ball flowing down the second flow path tb, which will be described later. Device 650 can be reached.

In addition, most of the balls (about 90%) that have flowed into the second inlet 662 pass through the through gate 67, regardless of the state of the electric accessory 3640a, and pass through the front side of the second passage 660b, which will be described later. It flows down the third passage 660c formed (on the front side of the player's viewpoint when viewing the pachinko machine 10 from the front) and is discharged to the area below the game board 13 . Also, a portion (about 10%) of the balls that have flowed into the second inlet 662 pass through a fourth passage (not shown) provided on the far side of the third passage 660 c and flow into the out port 66 .

By constructing a plurality of ball passages using the space in the depth direction of the game board 13 in this way, it is possible to three-dimensionally form the flow path for the balls to flow down, so that the game area of the game board 13 It is possible to provide a game machine capable of constructing a larger number of ball passages within the limited range and realizing a ball flow that does not bore the player.

Similarly to the above-described second inlet 662, the ball entering the third inlet also passes through the out port 66 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 regardless of the state of the electric accessory 3640a. . Here, with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197(a), the structure of the upper surface (spherical flow lower surface) of the electric accessory 3640a will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, the electric role object 3640a is configured to form a downward slope from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The upper surface of the electric role object 3640a It is configured so that the ball that has reached the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a flows down from the upstream side (upper right side) to the downstream side (lower left side) by its own weight.

A delay member is provided on the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a for delaying the flow speed of the ball flowing down the upper surface. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 197(a), a first delay member 3641 and a second delay member 3642 are provided. The ball enters the second ball inlet 640 provided on the downstream end side of the electric accessory 3640a while contacting the second delay member 3642. As shown in FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, the installation member 3643 is provided as a delay member for delaying the flow speed of the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a.

This installation member 3643 is directly attached to the channel unit 660 instead of the electric accessory 3640a. Therefore, it is always arranged at a fixed position regardless of the operation of the electric accessory 3640a. Delay members for delaying the flow speed of the balls flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a are provided in the first delay member 3641 and the second delay member 3642 attached to the electric accessory 3640a, and the channel unit 660. By configuring with the attached installation member 3643, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state) (see FIG. 198(a)), the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a meanders. When the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (embedded state) (see FIG. 197(a)), it is impossible for the ball to flow down on the electric accessory 3640a. (Difficult) can be made to function as a flow-down suppressing means.

Here, to specifically explain the flow-down suppression means described above, when the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (see FIG. 197(a)), that is, when it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entrance. 197(a), the electric accessory 3640a is embedded in the back side of the game board 13, so the first delay member 3641 on the electric accessory 3640a is positioned on the game board 13 side. will be located in As a result, the distance tc between the first delay member 3641 and the mounting member 3643 is narrowed (the distance (approximately 5 mm) between the first delay member 3641 and the mounting member 3643 to the extent that a ball cannot pass through). Become). Similarly, the distance td between the second delay member 3642 and the installation member 3643 is also a distance (approximately 7 mm) that the ball cannot pass through.

As a result, even if a ball is illegally placed on the electric accessory 3640a while the electric accessory 3640a is closed, the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640. can be suppressed. Furthermore, when the electric accessory 3640a is opened (protruded state), it is not necessary to embed each delay member on the electric accessory 3640a inside the game board 13. The opening of the game board 13 to be provided can be narrowed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which dust and garbage enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening of the game board 13.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, even when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the electric accessory 3640a is not completely embedded in the game board 13, but partially (the first delay member 3641, the second (2) The state in which the delay member 3642) is exposed is the closed state of the electric accessory 3640a. Thereby, even when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the player can easily grasp the position of the electric accessory 3640a. In addition, since each delay member provided on the electric accessory 3640a is exposed, when the electric accessory 3640a is in an open state (protruding state), how does the ball flow down on the electric accessory 3640a? It is possible to let the player grasp whether to do so.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the movement of the ball (ball flow on the electric accessory 3640a) that can be executed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state is the state in which the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. , it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the state in which the electric accessory 3640a is actually opened and the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), as shown in FIG. to reach Then, the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a slopes and flows down toward the second ball inlet 3640 while meandering along the shape of each delay member.

Here, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), the spherical flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a will be described with reference to FIG. 198(a). , a meandering ball flow path is formed until the ball ejected from the first guiding path 661 a reaches the second ball entrance 3640 . It takes about 2 seconds for the sphere to pass through this meandering spherical flow path, and it passes through the flow path (flow path upstream part ZA) from the discharge port of the first guide path 661a to the far side of the first delay member 3641. is about 0.8 seconds, and the time required to pass through the channel (downstream part ZB of the channel) from the far side of the first delay member 3641 to the second ball entrance 3640 is about 1.2 seconds. It is configured to be seconds.

In this embodiment, as the operation end condition of the electric accessory 3640a, the first normal end condition that is satisfied when the elapsed time from the operation to the open state (protruding state) is 3 seconds, and the second A second normal electric end condition that is satisfied when one ball enters the ball entrance 3640 is set, and when any normal electric end condition is satisfied, the electric accessory 3640a is closed. (embedded state).

When the electric accessory 3640a moves from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (embedded state), the ball staying on the electric accessory 3640a is the first passage 660a seen below the electric accessory 3640a, Alternatively, it is configured to fall into any of the second passages 660b. That is, the moving distance (moving distance in the depth direction) when the electric accessory 3640a operates from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (embedded state) should be at least one sphere (11 mm) or more. In this embodiment, the moving distance of the electric accessory 3640a is set to 15 mm, which is longer than one ball (11 mm) and smaller than two balls (22 mm).

By configuring in this way, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the ball positioned on the electric accessory 3640a can be reliably dropped downward, and the two balls can be used for pachinko. Since the balls do not fall continuously in the depth direction of the machine 10, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging inside the first passage 660a and the second passage 660b.

The ball staying in the upstream part ZA (see FIG. 198(a)) of the meandering spherical channel stays in the first passage 660a and in the downstream part ZB (see FIG. 198(a)). The ball is configured to fall into the second passage 660b. In this embodiment, due to the inertia acting on the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a, the ball moves from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) at a speed at which the ball falls directly below. is configured as

In the seventh embodiment, the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), and the electric accessory 3640a is positioned between the second delay member 3642 and the second ball entrance 3640. moves to the closed state (embedded state), the ball collides with the second delay member 3642 moving toward the second ball entrance 3640, and enters the second ball entrance 3640. Configure. In this way, depending on the position of the ball on the electric accessory 3640a, the operation of moving the electric accessory 3640a from the open state to the closed state is used as the guiding operation for guiding the ball to the second ball entrance. be able to.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to shoot 100 balls per minute. A ball flows into the first inlet 661 . In other words, since one out of every two balls fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds enters the first inlet 661, the interval at which the balls enter the first inlet 661 is about 1.2 on average. seconds.

Then, as described above, since the downstream portion ZB of the flow path is configured to require 1.2 seconds for the ball to pass, when the above-described second normal electric end condition is satisfied, that is, the second ball inlet In the case where the electric accessory 3640a operates to the closed state (embedded state) due to the ball entering the 3640, if the ball is continuously shot to the right-handed area, the second ball entrance 3640 Since the electric accessory 3640a operates to the closed state in a state in which the ball that has flowed into the first inlet 661 next to the ball that has entered is positioned in the downstream portion ZB of the flow path, the ball will enter the second passage 660b. You can make it easier to fall.

On the other hand, when the game is played with the timing of intentionally launching the ball, it is difficult to cause another ball to fall into the second passage 660b while the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 3640. can do. Therefore, in order to enter the ball into the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650, which is advantageous to the player, it is possible to encourage the player to continuously shoot the ball.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the game state, 3 seconds is set as the first normal end condition of the electric accessory 3640a as described above, but the game state is the normal state , the condition for ending the first electric power is set to 0.2 seconds. This 0.2 seconds is set to be shorter than the time (0.8 seconds) required for flowing down the flow path upstream of the meandering spherical flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a. , Even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the ball will not enter the second ball entrance 3640. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to prevent an advantageous privilege from being given to a player who plays an inappropriate game such as a right-handed game during the normal state.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down the second passage 660b. It is possible to suppress cheating that allows the ball to pass through.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball passes through the second passage 660b that is advantageous to the player for the player who does not play the right-handed game during the normal state or the right-handed game continuously during the time saving state. Although the second passage 660b is provided on the downstream side of the electric accessory 3640a in order to make it difficult to do so, the second passage 660b may be provided on the upstream side of the electric accessory 3640a. In addition, three or more passages for receiving the ball falling from the electric accessory 3640a may be provided, and a plurality of receiving openings for receiving the ball falling from the electric accessory 3640a may be provided, and each receiving opening may be used in the V winning device 650. The configuration may be such that the probability of passing through the specific region 650V is varied. In addition, a plurality of passages are provided through which the ball that falls from the electric accessory 3640a can pass through the specific area 650V, and the time required for each passage to reach the specific area 650V (the time required to win the V prize device 650). may be configured to be different.

Returning to FIG. 195, the description continues. A first variable winning device 65 is provided below the channel unit 660 . This first variable winning device 65 is opened when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, as in the first embodiment described above. It should be noted that 90% of the balls launched in the right-handed game during the jackpot game (the balls that flowed into the first inlet 661 (50%) and the balls that flowed into the second inlet 662 (40%)) Since both are configured to win the first variable winning device 65, even if the channel unit 660 is provided on the upstream side (above) of the first variable winning device 65, the jackpot game can be executed smoothly. can be done. In addition, since the ball that has flowed into the first inlet 661 and the ball that has flowed into the second inlet 662 flow down different flow paths and reach the first variable winning device 65, a plurality of balls can be sent to the first at the same time. 1 variable winning device 65 can be made easy to win.

<Regarding production content in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, before describing the characteristic effects executed in the seventh embodiment, the gameplay of the seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In the seventh embodiment, when a big win is won by a special pattern lottery, or when a small win is won by a special pattern lottery, the ball is passed through a specific area (specific area 650V) during the small win game. In this case, a jackpot game is executed (so-called 1-type 2-type mixed type).

In addition, the lottery for the first special symbol does not win a small win, and the lottery for the second special symbol only wins a small win. The second ball entrance 3640, which triggers the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol, is configured so that the ball can be entered only in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state. Then, when a jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set at a predetermined rate after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 195) is configured to be opened in the small winning game, and the ball is passed through the specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650. It has a difficult first passage (first passage 660a) and a second passage (second passage 660b) that is easy to pass through, and changes which passage the ball flows down according to the contents of the game. is configured so that

Furthermore, the seventh embodiment has an advantageous small hit in which a time saving state is set after the end of a correspondingly set jackpot game, and a disadvantageous small hit in which a time saving state is not set. It is configured to vary the variable time set accordingly. In addition, an advantageous time-saving state that makes it easier to enter the ball into the specific area 650V when winning an advantageous small hit as a time-saving state, and a disadvantage that makes it easier to enter the ball into the specific area 650V when winning a disadvantageous small win It is configured to be able to set the time saving state.

In this embodiment, the second flow path (second passage 660b) capable of flowing down the ball toward the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 based on the start of the variation of the second special symbol It is constituted so as to set a state in which balls can flow down, and is constituted so as to vary the variation time of a special pattern set when winning a small prize between an advantageous time-saving state and an unfavorable time-saving state. Then, in the state in which the advantageous time-saving state is set, the ball flowing down the second flow path enters the V winning device 650 when the advantageous small win is won, and the second flow path when the disadvantageous small win is won. The variation time of the special symbol corresponding to each small winning type is set so that the ball flowing down does not win the V winning device 650. - 特許庁

By constructing in this way, when the advantageous time-saving state is set, the ball does not pass through the specific region 650V even if a small disadvantageous win is won, so the time-saving state is set across the big win games. be able to. That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when a big win (first win) in which an advantageous time-saving state is set after the big win is won, at least two subsequent big win games (three times including the first win) are executed. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199(a), the effect executed when winning the normal symbol (second symbol) in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 199(a) is a display screen showing an example of an effect that is executed when winning a normal symbol (second symbol) in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 199(a), while the time saving state is set, the character "Right hit" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 in order to make the player play the right hit game. Symbols for indicating the lottery result of normal symbols are displayed in the variable area Dm5.

The symbols displayed in the normal symbol variation area Dm5 are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol (second symbol) executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 195). In synchronism with the timing when the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) stops, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode for showing the lottery result of this time. Fig. 199(a) shows a display mode "a display mode imitating two circles" indicating that the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a win. In the embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal pattern (second pattern) is out, the "display mode imitating two cross marks" is stopped and displayed in the normal pattern variation area Dm5, and the normal pattern (second pattern) ), a “display mode in which a circle mark and a cross mark are alternately and variably displayed” is displayed in the normal figure change area Dm5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 199(a), when a winner is won in the normal drawing lottery, an effect is executed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit crosses a bridge 851 and heads for a race venue 852. FIG. In this production, the ball is made to flow down on the electric accessory 3640a which is operated to the closed state (protruding state) based on the winning in the normal drawing lottery, and the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 3640. This shows the game, and the operation state of the electric accessory 3640a is expressed using the construction state of the bridge 851 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640. The display contents are set so that whether the character 811 reaches the race venue 852 indicates whether or not the ball will be hit.

In this way, by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to produce effects that are reminiscent of the actual game, it is possible to inform the player of the complex game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 199 (a), it is a state in which neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol has started to change, and neither the special figure 1 display area Dm1 nor the special figure 2 display area Dm2 A display mode indicating that special symbol variation is not performed is displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, the text "preparing for the race" is displayed, suggesting the content of future effects.

Here, a brief description will be given of the flow of the production content executed during the time-saving state in this embodiment. When winning in the normal pattern lottery (normal lottery), as shown in FIG. An effect corresponding to the game in which the player enters the ball (the effect of heading to the race venue) is executed.

Then, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 and the variation of the second special symbol starts, the character 811 arrives at the race venue, and the race effect shown in FIG. 199(b) described later is executed. be. The contents of this race effect are based on the lottery results of the second special symbols being executed (results of winning or not determination, fluctuation time), and the flow of balls into the second passage 660b, which makes it easier for the balls to enter the specific area 650V. is set.

After that, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the small winning game, an effect is executed in which the character 811 comes first as a result of the race (see FIG. 201(b)). In this way, each game executed during the time-saving state, that is, a game that wins the winning of the normal pattern, a game that makes the ball enter the second ball entrance 3640, and a small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is possible to inform the player of the game result of the game for passing the ball to the specific area 650V during the game to let the ball pass through the specific area 650V during the small win game by using a series of effects. Therefore, the player can grasp the game result by watching the performance (race performance) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. .

Returning to FIG. 199(b), the description of the display screen during the race effect will be continued. The state in which the display shown in FIG. 199(a) is performed, that is, the normal symbol (second symbol) is won during the time saving state, and the electric accessory 3640a is variably operated to the open state (allowable state). 199(b), the race start screen shown in FIG. 199(b) is displayed.

On the race start screen, a display mode is displayed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit runs a race with a rival 860 imitating a turtle. The state shown in FIG. 199 (b) is a state in which the second special symbol variation is executed for the first time after the time saving state is set, and the special figure 2 variation area Dm2 includes the second special symbol (special A display mode (dynamic display mode) indicating that FIG. 2) is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed, and as the remaining number of time reductions, the characters "Race entry remaining 9 times" are displayed in the remaining time reduction number notification area Dm6. . Then, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "go first and finish" are displayed in order to guide the effect result of the race effect corresponding to the game result that is advantageous to the player.

Next, when the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed during the time saving state and the lottery result is out, the screen shown in FIG. 200(a) is displayed. In FIG. 200 (a), a stop display mode of "3, 4, 6" indicating that the special figure 2 lottery result is out is displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuation area Dm2, and in the main display area Dm , a presentation mode indicating that the race presentation has ended (a display mode in which the character 811 falls into the river and cannot reach the finish line) is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "expect next time" are displayed to indicate that the special figure 2 fluctuation this time was not an advantageous game result for the player and that the time saving state will continue. .

On the other hand, when the lottery of special figure 2 is hit, the screen shown in FIG.200(b) or FIG.201(a) is displayed. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in this embodiment, the ball passage is configured such that two flow paths are formed for the balls to flow down toward the V winning device 650 that is opened when the small win is won. Depending on which path the ball passes through, the time required to reach the V winning device 650 opened during the small winning game is varied. In addition, it is configured such that the ease with which the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 varies depending on the flow path through which the ball passes.

Therefore, during the special symbol fluctuation when winning the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the flow path in which the ball is flowing down toward the V winning device 650 is detected, and the detection result It is configured to vary the production mode based on. Specifically, when the ball flows down the second passage (delay passage) 660b that is advantageous to the player during the small hit fluctuation of the special figure 2, the effect mode shown in FIG. 200 (b) is displayed. When the ball flows down the first path (normal path) 660a that is disadvantageous to the player during the small hit variation in FIG. 2 (when the ball does not flow down the second path 660b), FIG. A presentation mode is displayed.

In FIG. 200(b), in order to show that the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V in the small hit game that is executed after the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is stopped and displayed, as a race effect, the main display An effect is executed in which the character 811 runs ahead of the rival 860 in the area Dm. Then, the display mode of the character 811 is changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode (a display mode with an aura), and the player is informed that the character 811 is highly likely to come first in the current race presentation. In order to do so, the words "speed up" are displayed. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "great chance" are displayed as a comment indicating that the character 811 is highly likely to come first in the present race effect.

On the other hand, in FIG. 201(a), as a race effect, a effect mode is displayed in which the character 811 and the rival 860 aim for the goal while fighting a dead heat. In this way, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is the same small winning type, the execution is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 due to the difference in the flow path through which the ball flows. By making the effect mode to be different, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the game result will be advantageous to the player. A player can be interested in the contents of a series of performances (race performances).

Then, when the ball passes through the specific region 650V during the small winning game, that is, when it is determined that the big winning game will be executed after the small winning game ends, the effect mode shown in FIG. 201(b) is displayed. be done.

On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game, the rival 860 reaches the goal before the character 811 in the production mode shown in FIG. A presentation mode is displayed.

In addition, although detailed description will be described later, in this embodiment, a first time saving state (time saving state A) that is advantageous to the player as a time saving state and a second time saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first time saving state A state (time saving state B) can be set, and when the time saving state A (first time saving state) is set, a small win of a small win type corresponding to a jackpot game to which the time saving state is given. , the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 only when the ball is won.

That is, in the state where the time saving state A is set, when the big win game is executed based on the winning of the small win, the time saving state which is advantageous to the player after the big win game is completed is surely set. are doing.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, in order to suggest (inform) the player that the time saving state A has been set, the effect mode shown in FIG. configured to be displayed. FIG.202(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd design display apparatus 81 when the time saving state A is set.

As shown in FIG. 202(b), when the time-saving state A is set, an effect mode is set in which an undersea race in which a background showing the seabed is set is executed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "If you win the race, you'll get a luxury prize!?" In this way, by suggesting that the time saving state A is set by varying the background when the race is executed, it is possible to set an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand, and to set the performance mode during the actual race. Since the effect can be shared, the capacity of the image data used for setting the effect mode can be reduced.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the present embodiment, a plurality of background images can be set as the background during the race, in addition to the normal background and the seabed background described above. You can set a background that imitates, a background that imitates a sea of trees, a background that imitates a city, and so on. And each background differs in the ratio set according to the time saving state (time saving state A, time saving state B) currently set. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which of the time-saving states is currently set based on the background type set as the background of the performance during the race.

Furthermore, a measurement means is provided to measure the number of times the time saving state A is set continuously, and a special function that can be set only when the number of times the time saving state A is set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) A background may be provided. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security that a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set, and to provide the surrounding players with a sense of superiority by informing them of the special game result. .

As described above, the characteristic presentation modes executed in the seventh embodiment have been described, but the above-described contents are merely examples, and other presentation modes may be displayed. For example, in the examples of effects described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, the examples of effects are shown in which the effect mode corresponding to the game result is set. may be configured to be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the production mode of FIG. , The display mode of the rival 860 may be variably set based on the lottery result of this special figure 2 lottery, for example, to an advantageous small win (small win A) that is advantageous to the player in the special figure 2 lottery. A rival 860 is displayed in the case of winning, the case of winning a disadvantageous small win (small win C) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous small win, and the case of not winning the small win (winning without winning). It may be configured such that the types of characters set as modes are different.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started, the future game content, that is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, and the information that can predict the winning small hit type to the player can provide.

In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started, if the production mode (display form) that suggests the lottery result of this special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed (set), grasp the contents of the displayed production form However, there is a problem that the action of continuing the game is performed only when the lottery result is advantageous to the player. It is configured so that it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 650V during the small winning game unless the ball is shot with the ball.

As a result, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started, even if the production mode (display mode) that suggests the lottery result of this special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed (set), after confirming the display mode, Since it is possible to prevent the player from judging whether or not the ball should enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, the above problem can be solved.

In addition, since the race shown in FIG. 199 (b) can be started from the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started, the period during which the race is executed (the production execution period during the race) can be lengthened, It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Specifically, since the fluctuation period of the special symbols can be included in the performance execution period during the race, for example, it is longer to win (big win, small win) by lottery of special symbols than to lose. By structuring such that the variable period is easily set, the longer the performance execution period during the race is, the more the player can be made to think that he or she has won a prize, and the period for executing the performance is lengthened. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of suggesting that the player has won a prize (hit-suggesting effect).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the period from the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation to the end of the small hit game, the discrimination by the discrimination means (special figure 2) is performed, and the discrimination result is a predetermined discrimination result Using a specific game (small winning game) executed in the case of (small winning), the character 811 is configured to execute an effect (see FIGS. 199(b) to 202(a)) in which the character 811 races. , At the start of the race (see FIG. 199 (b)), the value (information) for indicating the number of remaining short time displayed in the short time remaining notification area Dm6 (remaining number of times excluding special figure fluctuations currently being executed) is raced Until the end (Fig. 202(a)), that is, it is configured to be displayed continuously until the small hit game executed after the end of the special figure fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) ends.

In this way, even if the special figure fluctuation ends and the small winning game is executed, the display mode of the remaining time reduction number notification area Dm6 is not changed, so that the player can understand the production during the race. can be notified easily.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, as described above, one special figure variation (lottery), and the race using the period until the end of the small hit game when winning the small hit in the special figure lottery Since it is configured to execute the medium production, there is a problem that the period during which the production during the race is executed largely differs based on the result of the special lottery. In other words, when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the small winning game is not executed, so the period during which the small winning game is executed cannot be included in the performance execution period during the race, and the performance during the race is executed. There was a problem that the period was shortened.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as elements for branching the production mode of the production during the race, at least the lottery result of the special pattern and the game result of the small winning game are included. 200(b) and 201(a)) cannot be provided to the player. There was a possibility that the problem that the

In order to solve such a problem, for example, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery result is lost, a longer fluctuation time than when the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, specifically , A deviation variation pattern (variation pattern for fake effect) in which a variation time similar (identical) to the sum of the variation time set when winning a small win and the small winning game time is set When this variation pattern for guess performance is set, it is as if a special symbol variation wins a small win as a performance during a race, and the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small win game. It is preferable to set an effect mode (see FIG. 202(a)) to indicate that the As a result, even when a small prize is not won in the special lottery, the player can experience the performance mode set at the end of the performance during the race.

In addition, when a big win is won in a special lottery, the same variation time as that set when a small win is won is set, and the round game in the first round of the big win game and the small win are set. It is preferable to set the opening operation of the jackpot game so that the opening operation mode is the same as that of the game. As a result, even when a big win is won in a lottery of special symbols, the performance during the race can be executed, so that the player is provided with a performance mode in which the performance result of the performance during the race is advantageous to the player. can be made easier.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the period (special figure fluctuation period, small hit execution period) set based on one special symbol lottery is used to execute the production during the race. Without limitation, the during-race effect may be executed using a period set based on a plurality of special symbol lotteries. By configuring in this way, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is continuously out, it is possible to execute the production during the race using the continuous special symbol fluctuation period.

Therefore, even if the variable time set when the special symbol lottery result is a loss is configured to be shorter than when the special symbol lottery result is a win, it is set at the end of the production during the race. A performance mode can be provided to the player. In addition, in order to set one performance mode using a plurality of loss fluctuations, a performance mode for indicating to the player that the special symbol lottery was lost is made to correspond to each special symbol lottery. Compared to the case of setting, it is possible to reduce the number of times the performance for informing the player that the special figure lottery is lost is executed.

As described above, the contents of the production in the case where the time saving state is set have been described, but in addition to that, for example, by lottery of the first special symbol, after the big winning game is finished, the big win type in which the time saving state A is set is elected. In such a case, a special suggesting effect may be executed to notify that fact. 3 symbols may be stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can be promptly notified that a game state advantageous to the player will be set, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind for a long period of time.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 213. FIG. FIG. 203(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203(a), the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment includes a first winning random number 7 table 202fa, a first winning type selection 7 table 202fb, a second winning random number 7 table 202fc, a variation pattern 7 table 202fd, It has a small hit type selection 7 table 202fe and an open scenario 7 table 202ff. It should be noted that the configuration (table ) is the same as that of each of the above-described embodiments, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first winning random number 7 table 202fa is a data table used for the same purpose as the first winning random number table 202a used in each of the above-described embodiments. If it matches the value of the random number set by the random number 7 table 202fa as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit. In addition, the first winning random number 7 table 202fa is provided with two types of a special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of random numbers to become is the same, only the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol has set the value of the random number to become a small hit (see FIG. 204). In this way, by differentiating the number of random numbers to be a small hit (only one is set), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol provide benefits (big hit or small hit) to the player. ) can have different expectations for grants.

Here, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the first winning random number 7 table 202fa will be described. FIG. 204(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 7 table 202fa, and FIG. 204(b) shows the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1. FIG. 204(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2. This first hit random number 7 table 202fa is set with a random number value (determination value) determined as a big hit and a random value (determination value) determined as a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a table.

Specifically, when executing the lottery for the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1, "0 to 4" among the values of the first winning random number counter C1 are defined as jackpot determination values, and other values are other than jackpots. (that is, deviation) is defined as a judgment value. Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win.

When executing the lottery for the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204(c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2, "0 to 4" among the values of the first winning random number counter C1 are defined as big hit determination values, and "5 to 504" are small. It is defined as a hit determination value, and "505 to 999" is defined as a determination value other than (that is, out). Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery of the second special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win, and when it is any one of "5 to 504". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

The first hit type selection 7 table 202fb is a data table used for the same purpose as the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first win type selection 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 205(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in FIG. 205 (a), in this embodiment, when the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, special figure 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the acquired first per type counter C2 It has a selection table 202fb1 and a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202fb2 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). . As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 are made different, or each of a plurality of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratio can be changed, the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2) provide different game characteristics to the player It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used at the time of lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 205(b). FIG. 205(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 205 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is one of "0 to 9" is "jackpot A", and any of "10 to 49" The jackpot type is "jackpot B" when the number is 1, and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" when the number is one of "50 to 99".

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state (substantially, the number of times of time-saving is 10 times). Then, "time saving A" advantageous to the player is set as the time saving state set after the end of the big win. This "jackpot A" has a large number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the "time saving A" which is more advantageous even in the time saving state advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot A" is set. , is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers select "jackpot A", so the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery is a jackpot. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot A" is 10%.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) It is configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 3640, and in the time saving state, the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) When the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) and the total number of times (total number of times) reaches 100 times, or the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) of the second special pattern (special figure 2) reaches 10 times It is configured so that the time saving state ends when the

By configuring in this way, even if the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), which is disadvantageous to the player, is executed immediately after the time saving state is set, the lottery of the special figure 2 is performed the specified number of times ( 10 times), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. As a result, for example, when the sum of the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 in the time saving state reaches the specified number of times (10 times) If configured to end the time saving state , in order to prevent the special figure 1 variation (lottery) from being executed when the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, a game that does not ensure the reservation of the special figure 1 (a game that does not shoot balls continuously (So-called stopping game) can be prevented from being executed, and the operation of the game can be improved.

"Jack B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state (10 times of time saving). Then, as the time-saving state set after the end of the big win, "time-saving B" disadvantageous to the player is set. This "jackpot B" has a smaller number of rounds of the jackpot game than the above-mentioned "jackpot A", but since the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, it is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. However, rather than the time-saving state "time-saving A" set when winning the "jackpot A", "time-saving B" that is disadvantageous to the player is set.

In other words, the jackpot B is an advantageous jackpot in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot ends are more game than the above-described “jackpot A”. disadvantageous to the person. That is, the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the above-described "jackpot A". Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers select "jackpot B", so the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery is a jackpot. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot B" is 40%.

"Jack C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big win, the "jackpot C" is a big win type disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers are selected as "jackpot C", so the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot C" is 50%.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 15 rounds (R) of 15 rounds (R) jackpot game (jackpot Shortening of time A) is selected after completion, and 5 rounds (R) jackpot game (shortening of time B after completion of jackpot) is selected at a rate of 40%. In other words, a jackpot is selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends shifts to the time-saving state at a rate of 50%.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and the time saving state (time saving A) that is advantageous after the jackpot ends ) is set, then the number of rounds (5 rounds (R)) to be executed during the jackpot as a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, and the type of time-saving state set after the jackpot ends; However, the jackpot type "jackpot B", which is more disadvantageous to the player than the "jackpot A", and the jackpot type "jackpot C", which is the most disadvantageous to the player because the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends, are set. Although it is configured to be possible, it may be configured to be able to set other types of jackpots, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and “shorter time B” is set as the shorter time type. Although the jackpot type and the number of rounds of the jackpot game are small (5 rounds (R)), the jackpot type in which “time saving A” is set as the time saving type and the number of rounds of the jackpot game are the largest (15 rounds (R )), you may be able to set the jackpot type in which the time saving state is not set.

In addition, as a concept of whether or not the set jackpot type is advantageous to the player, as in the present embodiment, the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot ends are comprehensively determined. The concept of advantage or disadvantage may be defined based on consideration, the concept of advantage or disadvantage may be defined based only on the number of rounds of the big win game, or the concept of advantage or disadvantage may be defined based only on the game state set after the end of the big win. You can define the concept.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205(c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used during the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG.205(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to special figure 2 jackpot classification selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 205(c), in the first winning type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random value is either "0 to 89" is "jackpot D", and the random value is "90 to 99 ”, the jackpot type is defined to be “jackpot E”.

"Jack D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state (substantially, the number of times of time-saving is 10 times). Then, "time saving A" advantageous to the player is set as the time saving state set after the end of the big win. That is, this "jackpot D" is a jackpot type having the same content as the above-described "jackpot A", and is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers for which "jackpot D" is selected is 90. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot D" is 90%.

"Jack E" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state (substantially, the number of times of time-saving is 10 times). Then, as a time-saving state set after the end of the big win, "time-saving B" more disadvantageous to the player than "time-saving A" is set. That is, this "jackpot E" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the above-described "jackpot D". Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 10 random numbers that select the "jackpot E", so the second special pattern (special pattern 2) lottery is a jackpot. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot E" is 10%.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, the jackpot game of 15 rounds (R) is executed, and furthermore, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot ends. ing. As a result, a jackpot game is provided in which the player is more advantageous to win the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery than to win the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery. The lottery of the 2 special symbols is a lottery advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is five, but the number of types is not limited to five, and may be four or less, or may be six or more. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, the types of jackpot types selected in the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. It may be configured so that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The second winning random number 7 table 202fc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments. is used to refer to the second winning random number 7 table 202fc to determine whether or not there is a winning.

In this embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, when the probability of the normal design is low (the normal state of the normal design), and when the probability of winning the normal design is higher than the low probability (normal The number of values corresponding to the hit is set differently in the period in which the symbol is in a time saving state. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, it is possible to set a plurality of operation patterns (opening operation patterns) of the electric accessory 3640a to be executed when winning the normal symbol (second symbol). As a result, the timing of opening the electric accessory 3640a can be varied based on the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). It is possible to suppress the game in which the ball is shot by planning the timing at which the ball can be shot.

Here, with reference to FIG. 206(a), the contents of the second winning random number 7 table 202fc will be described. FIG. 206(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 206(a), the second hit random number 7 table 202fc is configured to be able to set "general pattern hit A", "general pattern hit B", and "off" as the second hit type. The second hit type is defined based on the game state (normal symbol high probability state or low probability state) and the acquired value of the second hit random number counter C4.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal pattern low probability state (normal state), the value of the second random number counter C4 is defined as "0" and "normal pattern hit A", and "1". "B" is defined in the normal figure, and "off" is defined in the range of "2 to 99". Then, when the game state is a normal pattern high probability state (time saving state), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is defined as "normal pattern hit A" in the range of "0 to 79", "80 "B" is defined in the range of ~98", and "off" is defined in "99".

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state, the probability of winning the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is 2% (2/100). And, when it is elected as a hit, it is configured so that "per normal pattern A" and "per normal pattern B" are selected at a rate of 50%.

Then, when the game state is a high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern, the probability of winning the lottery of the normal pattern (second pattern) is 99% (99/100), and the winning is the winning. If you do, "A per normal map" is selected at a rate of about 80% (80/99), and "B per normal map" is selected at a rate of about 20% (20/99) are doing.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the probability of winning the winning is higher in the high-probability state of the normal symbols than in the low-probability state of the normal symbols. It is configured so that the hit "A" is easily selected. In this way, by varying the winning probability and winning type of the normal symbols (second symbols) according to the game state, the player is expected to set a more advantageous game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a at the time of winning the second symbol is made different according to the game state and the winning type. An operation pattern that is more advantageous to the player to win the second pattern in a normal pattern state with a high probability than to win two patterns, that is, to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 3640. - 特許庁It is configured so that an operation pattern that is easy to cause is set. As a result, it is set as a condition for granting a benefit advantageous to the player that the win is won during the high probability state of the normal symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 206(a), the contents of the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a executed during the normal symbol high probability state will be described. In the seventh embodiment, different operation patterns are set according to the types of hits that are won. 1 second (S), the opening period is 2 seconds (S), and the ending period is 3.5 seconds (S). When "B" is set, the opening period is 0.1 Seconds (S), the opening period is 2.5 seconds (S), and the ending period is 3 seconds (S).

Then, regardless of which operation pattern is executed, when one ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 while the electric accessory 3640a is in the opening operation (while the opening period is set), the closing condition is Established, the closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a is executed. In other words, in the seventh embodiment, as the conditions for terminating the open state of the electric accessory 3640a, the condition that is satisfied when the predetermined open period is reached and the predetermined number are the second entrances. A condition that is established when the ball is entered into 3640 is set. As a result, when a lottery for the second pattern (ordinary pattern) is won, a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 3640, and excessive benefits (prize balls) are given to the player. can be suppressed.

Further, the ending period is set to be equal to or longer than the period (3 seconds) during which the ball flows down the second path (delay path) 660b regardless of which operation pattern is executed. Therefore, even if you win continuously in the general pattern, if you win the small prize by the special 2 lottery executed based on the previous general pattern, during the small game, the following It is possible to surely suppress the situation where the ball flowing down the second passage 660b wins the V winning device 650 based on the normal hit.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by using the above-described configuration, based on a plurality of continuous game results (ordinary figure lottery results), so that the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game at unintended timing Although it is configured so that a proper game is executed, it is not limited to this, for example, when winning a normal figure continuously, the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small winning game It may be configured to facilitate In this case, for example, as the hit type of the second hit (normal drawing), the opening period (0.1 seconds), the open period (2 seconds), and the ending period (0.1 seconds) are set. Per figure C) can be set, and when winning again in the next normal pattern variation after winning the normal pattern per C, it flowed into the second passage 660b during the winning game corresponding to the next normal pattern variation. The ball may pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game won in the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the normal figure winning C.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, in the case of adopting such a game property, the production during the race (Fig. 200(b)) is executed in correspondence with the normal game winning C, and then the production of temporarily losing the race (Fig. 202(a) ) is executed, when it is detected by the delayed passage ball entry switch 660e1 that the ball has flowed into the second passage 660b based on the next normal game hit, the revival effect after losing the race is executed. It should be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected presentation corresponding to a game with unexpectedness for the player.

In addition, a general pattern pre-discrimination means that can determine in advance the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired when passing through the through gate 67 is provided, and as a pre-discrimination result corresponding to the reserved general pattern winning information, When it is determined that the general pattern winning information winning in the normal pattern C and the general pattern winning information winning in the general pattern C are continuously reserved and stored, a plurality of consecutive general pattern winnings are dealt with. It may be configured to execute an effect (continuous effect). In this way, by executing the pre-reading process of the general pattern winning information, it is possible to set the production in a state in which the lottery result of the general pattern lottery (second pattern lottery) is determined in advance, so the production with high production effect can be executed.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, as a winning game that is executed when winning a normal game, the electric accessory 3640a is opened during the period in which the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 3640. Although it is configured so that only a winning game is executed, it is not limited to this. may be configured to open the electric accessory 3640a for a period (for example, 1 second) in which the

Variation pattern 7 table 202fd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each embodiment described above, and the type of special symbol in which the lottery was executed and its A variation pattern in which different variation times are set is defined in correspondence with the result of the lottery and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208. FIG. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, and FIG. FIG. 208B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 specified by the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. It is a diagram.

Next, referring to FIG. 208(a), the contents of the first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 will be described. This first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set as the gaming state, and is a second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 (time-saving In the case of winning a small win (for example, a small win C) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the fluctuation pattern table referred to when state B (time saving B) is set, the V winning device 650 The variable time is defined so that it is easy to set a variable time that makes it difficult for the sphere to pass through the specific region 650V.

Here, when the contents defined in the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 are specifically described, when the type of special symbol is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out, the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of, "ultra-short out" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is defined as a variation pattern, and if the lottery result is a big hit, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, as a variation pattern A "super-short hit" (variation time of 0.5 seconds) is defined. That is, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, that is, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in a state where it is easy to execute the second special symbol lottery, 0.5 seconds always It is configured so that a variation pattern is set.

Then, if the type of special symbol is special figure 2 and the lottery result is out, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern is "super short out" (variation time 0.5 seconds ) is defined, and when the lottery results are small hit A and small hit B, "long and small hit" (variation time 3 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern, and in the case of small hit C, the variation pattern is "short and small hit (Variation time 0.5 seconds)” is defined. Further, when the lottery result is a jackpot, when the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", "short jackpot (variation time 1 second)" is defined as the variation pattern, In the case of the range of "150 to 198", "medium jackpot (variation time 30 seconds)" is defined as the variation pattern.

By configuring in this way, when the first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to, that is, in a state where time-saving A is set as the gaming state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is set. It is configured so that the ball can easily pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 when winning the win A or the small win B. On the other hand, when winning a small hit C in which a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set, immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 (the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Since the small winning game is executed immediately after the second flow path tb, the opening operation of the V winning device 650 ends before the ball flowing down the second flow path tb is discharged from the second flow path tb. can be made difficult to pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 .

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, after the end of the big winning game executed based on the ball passing through the specific area 650V during the small winning game corresponding to the small winning C, the player is notified as a gaming state. A disadvantageous normal state is set, and after the end of the big win game executed based on the winning of other small wins (small win A, small win B), the game state is set as a game state. It is configured to set a time-saving state (time-saving A or time-saving B) that is advantageous to the player.

In this way, when the time saving A is set as the game state, the variation pattern is set with reference to the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2, and the small hit that is advantageous to the player according to the set variation pattern To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind by facilitating the continuous setting of an advantageous game state even after the end of the next big winning game because the big winning game via the small winning game is easily executed when winning the type. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG.208(b), the content of the 2nd time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is demonstrated. FIG.208(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation|variation pattern table 202fd3 for 2nd time reduction. This second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is a variation pattern table referred to when time-saving B is set as the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 208(b), this second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is set when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery for the above-described first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2. The difference is that the variation pattern (variation time) to be applied is different, and the other elements are the same.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a small hit A, the fluctuation pattern is defined as "long and small hit" (variation time 3 seconds), and in the case of a small hit B, the fluctuation pattern is "short and small hit" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is defined, and in the case of small hit C, when the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 169”, the variation pattern is “long and small hit” (variation time 3 seconds ) is defined, and when it is in the range of "170 to 198", "short and small winning" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern.

That is, when the second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to, that is, in a state where time-saving B is set as the gaming state, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, but the small hit Since a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is set when winning C, the normal state is more likely to be set as the game state after the next big win game than the state in which the above-described time saving A is set. Become.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the normal state is set as the game state, the lottery of the second special symbol that makes it easier to execute the jackpot game based on the lottery result than the first special symbol. In addition, a game state (time saving A) in which a game state (time saving state) advantageous to a player after the next big win is easily set again as the time saving state (time saving state) and the next big win end are made possible. A game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player later can be set to a game state (time-saving B) that is more difficult to set than time-saving A.

By constructing in this way, when the game state (time saving A) that is most advantageous to the player is set, the game state shifts to the normal state just by executing the jackpot game once. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, even if the time saving B which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A is set, the probability of setting the time saving A after the big winning game is higher than when the normal state is set. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting the time reduction A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208(b), in the seventh embodiment, even if the small win C, in which the normal state is set as the game state after the end of the big win game, is won, the ball is placed in the V winning device 650. Since it is configured to be able to select a variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds) that makes it difficult to pass through the specific area 650V in the can also interest the player. In this case, for example, it is preferable to notify the player that the small win C has been won, and then execute an effect to prompt whether or not the ball will pass through the specific area 650V. By constructing in this manner, a game state disadvantageous to the player is set because the ball did not pass through the specific area 650V even though the player won a small win disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player aware that he or she has been able to avoid the problem, and to provide a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, a means is provided for measuring the number of times the player wins a small win (the number of times the small win C is won) that is disadvantageous to the player, and the number of times the execution of the big win game based on the small win C is avoided (the small win C). The number of times the ball did not pass through the specific area 650V during the game may be displayed. As a result, the player can specifically grasp that the situation in which a game state disadvantageous to the player is set can be avoided, and whether the currently set game state is time-saving A. It is possible to make it easier for the player to predict whether it is time saving B.

In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 208(a) and (b) and described above, the data table (variation pattern A game state (time saving A) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V and a game state (time saving B) in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when winning a small win advantageous to the player are created by making the tables different. Configured to be configurable. In other words, it is possible to set a game state (time saving B) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V and a game state (time saving A) in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when winning a small win that is disadvantageous to the player. ing.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, depending on the type of time saving state that has been set (time saving A, time saving B), a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V at the time of winning a small hit, and a game in which it is difficult to pass state and are configured to be configurable. Specifically, when time saving A is set as the gaming state, the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to when selecting a special symbol variation pattern. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to this first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2, 90% at the time of winning the small hit (100% at the time of winning the small win A and 100% at the time of winning the small win B) %) is configured to set a variable time during which the ball can pass through the specific region 650V.

On the other hand, when the time saving B is set as the gaming state, the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to when selecting the special symbol variation pattern. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to this second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3, about 28.5% at the time of winning the small winning (100% at the time of winning the small winning A and winning the small winning C 85% of the time) is configured to set a variable time during which the ball can pass through the specific region 650V.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) set at the time of winning a small hit is configured to be different according to the type of time saving state to be set, and specified at the time of winning a small hit The region 650V is configured to vary the ratio of selection of variation patterns through which the sphere can pass. Therefore, it is possible to vary the probability of executing a big winning game based on winning a small winning during the time saving state depending on the type of time saving state to be set.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, as a transition condition (time saving end condition) for shifting the time saving state to the normal state, since the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches 10 times as a transition condition, time saving When the time saving B is set rather than when the time saving A is set as the type of the state, the transition condition can be easily established as much as the big winning game is difficult to be executed when the small winning is won.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, as described above, the ball is made easier to pass through the specific region 650V when winning a small win, which is advantageous to the player, and the ball is easy to pass through the specific region 650V when winning a small win. A time-saving state A, and a time-saving state B that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the specific region 650V when winning a small win, which is disadvantageous to the player, and makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific region 650V when winning a small win. However, without being limited to this, for example, the type of small win is set to one, and a variation pattern that allows the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when winning the small win is set. You may comprise so that the variation pattern table referred to may be changed according to the classification of the time saving state currently set so that only a ratio may be changed.

In addition, depending on the type of the time saving state to be set, the transition condition (time saving end condition) for shifting the time saving state to the normal state may be set differently, for example, the time saving state advantageous to the player When (for example, time saving A) is set, the time saving end condition (for example, time saving end condition established with a small number of special symbol fluctuations) is easier to be established than the time saving state (for example, time saving B) that is disadvantageous to the player. can be set. As a result, since it is possible to suppress that the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is executed during the period in which the time saving state is set differs greatly according to the type of the time saving state to be set, any time saving state is set, players can be motivated to play games with the aim of winning a jackpot game.

Furthermore, since it is possible to vary the game content expected during the short time period according to the type of the time saving state to be set, specifically, the time saving end condition is likely to be satisfied, and the specific area 650V at the time of winning the small winning When a time-saving state in which the ball is likely to pass is set, it is expected that a small win will be won during the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the specific area 650V is set when the small win is won. When a time-saving state in which it is difficult to pass is set, the player can expect that the ball will pass through the specific area 650V in the small win won during the time-saving state, so that the player gets tired of the game early. It can be suppressed.

The small hit type selection 7 table 202fe is a data table used for the same purpose as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 14) used in each embodiment described above. It is referred to when selecting the type of small hit, and is configured so that different small hit types are selected according to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe will be described with reference to FIG. 206(b). FIG. 206(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe. As shown in FIG. 206(b), in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, three types of small hit A to small hit C are selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5 as the small hit type of the second special symbol. is defined as Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is either "0 to 19", the small hit type is "small hit A (10R real time saving 10 times big hit when passing V)" , and the small hit type in the case of any of "20 to 89" is "small hit B (10R real time saving 10 times jackpot when passing V)", and if it was any of "90 to 99" The small hit type is “small hit C (10R short time no big hit when passing V)”.

Then, when the big win based on the winning of the "small win A" ends, the "time saving A" is set as the game state, and when the big win based on the winning of the "small win B" ends, the "time saving B" is set as the game state. Then, when the big win based on the winning of the "small win C" is completed, the "normal state" is set as the game state.

Here, each small winning type (small winning A to small winning C) is executed after the small winning game ends when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the respective small winning game. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of "small win A", a 10R substantial time-saving 10-time big win is set, and after the small win A is executed, the variable winning device 65 is set to 10 rounds (R) open state. After that, 10 times of time-saving games (a period until a total of 100 times of special symbol variations or 10 times of second special symbol variations) are set as a time-saving state.

In addition, in the case of "small win B", a 10 round (R) substantial time saving 10 times big win is set, and after execution of the small win B, the variable winning device 65 is set to 10 rounds (R) open state. A big hit is executed, and then 10 times of time-saving games as a time-saving state (the period until the fluctuation of the special design is 100 times in total, or the fluctuation of the second special design is executed 10 times) is set. is configured to In the case of "small win C", a 10R time-saving no big win is set, and after the execution of the small win C, a big win is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state for 10 rounds (R), After the jackpot game, the time saving state is not set and the normal state is set.

Thus, depending on the selected small winning type, the content of the big winning game executed after the small winning game is completed and the game state set after the big winning game can be varied.

Specifically, the "small win A" has a large number of rounds (10R) executed in the big win game, and the time saving state (time saving A) that is most advantageous to the player after the big win game is set. , is set as the most advantageous small win for the player, and the small win B has a large number of rounds (10R) executed in the big win game, and is set to be the same as the above-described small win A, but the big win game Since the time saving state to be set later is set as "time saving B" which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A, it is set as a small win more disadvantageous than the small win A. - 特許庁"Minor win C" is set as the most disadvantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is large (10R), but the time saving state is not set after the big win game.

In this embodiment, regardless of the type of winning small winning, the big winning game to be executed when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small winning game is configured to be a round game of 10 rounds (R). By grasping the number of round games (number of rounds) to be executed as the big winning game during the big winning game executed at the time of the small winning, the player can easily grasp the type of the small winning won this time. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to set a big winning game with a different number of rounds for each small winning type. As a result, the degree of advantage for each small win type can be made significantly different, so that the player can play the game while expecting to win the most advantageous small win type.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 10 times (first end condition), or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) A total of 100 times (second end condition) is set. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is 1 or more, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished, the first special pattern (special figure 1) is set after the jackpot is finished. ) is executed, the time saving state will not end. Also, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the second end condition described above is satisfied and the time saving state can be terminated, so any special symbol (second special pattern) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the hit type won during the time saving state (during the high probability state of normal symbols) and the ball flow to the second ball entrance 3640 will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the seventh embodiment, winning per normal figure, by changing the electric role product 3640a to the protruding state (see FIG. 198), the ball on the electric role product 3640a As a result, a state is constructed in which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 3640 .

Then, when the closing condition of the electric accessory 3640a is established, the electric accessory 3640a executes the closing operation, and the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a at that time is provided directly under the electric accessory 3640a. It flows into the first flow path ta or the second flow path tb. Here, the ball that has flowed down the first flow path ta reaches the V winning device 650 provided below the flow path unit 660 after a flow period of 0.5 seconds, and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path tb. reaches the V winning device 650 after a 3-second flowing period.

Next, a case where a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 will be described as a condition for closing the electric accessory 3640a. When the closing condition of the electric accessory 3640a is established by the ball entering the second ball entrance 3640, the electric accessory 3640a is closed and the second special symbol lottery is performed. . Then, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is determined according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to set an advantageous time saving (time saving A) that is advantageous to the player as a time saving state, and a disadvantageous time saving (time saving B) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous time saving. It is configured such that different variation patterns are set according to the state.

In the open scenario 7 table 202ff, the game content (open scenario) of the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) executed when winning (big winning, small winning) is won in the lottery of special symbols, is the winning winning type. , and when winning is won, an open scenario corresponding to the set winning type is read out and a winning game is executed.

Here, the contents of the release scenario 7 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the release scenario 7 table 202ff. This open scenario 7 table 202ff is a winning device (variable winning device) in which a ball can enter in a privilege game (big win game, small win game) executed when the lottery result of special symbols is a big win or a small win. 65, V winning device 650) is defined operation data (opening scenario) for differentiating the opening operation according to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type).

In this way, the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the contents of the opening operation (opening scenario ), it is possible to set the degree of advantage of the privilege game in multiple stages. can.

In the opening scenario 7 table 202ff, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big win type, small winning type) ), the opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (between rounds The period during which the winning device set in the game is closed) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games until the end of the winning game (the period until the start of new special symbol fluctuations is allowed) period)) are defined respectively.

Specifically, corresponding to the type of the winning "jackpots A, D, E", the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is set to "variable winning device 65" for "15 rounds". ”, and the release operation mode of “continuously 29 seconds” as one round game is defined as “1 second” as the inter-round interval period and “4 seconds” as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot types are jackpots A, D and E, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds, and many prize balls are paid out to the player. It becomes a jackpot game. Furthermore, when the jackpot types are the jackpots A and D, the jackpots A and D are the most advantageous to the player because they are jackpots in which a time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is over, is set. It will be a big hit with special benefits.

Next, corresponding to jackpot types B and C, the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the prize winning device is set to "5 rounds" for the "variable prize winning device 65", and one round game is set. The opening operation mode of "continuously 29 seconds" is defined with an inter-round interval period of "1 second" and an end interval period of "4 seconds". Therefore, when the jackpot types are jackpots B and C, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds, and jackpots A, D, and E are given to the player. It becomes a jackpot game in which prize balls about 1/3 of the corresponding jackpot game are paid out.

Next, corresponding to the small wins A to C, the start interval period is "0.1 second", and the "V winning device 650" is opened in the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device. , If the ball passes through the specific area 650V (V passing) during the opening operation of the first round (including 0.5 seconds set as the ball handling time after the opening operation is completed), "Variable The winning device 65" is opened in the "2nd to 11th rounds", and as one round game, the 1st round is "continuously open for 1.5 seconds", and the 2nd to 11th rounds are "continuously open for 29 seconds". The release operation mode is defined as an inter-round interval period of "5 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, and an end interval period of "4 seconds". In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small winning game, then the big winning game for 10 rounds is executed.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened from the first round. A jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) in which an open scenario similar to the hits A to C is set may be provided. With this configuration, when the big win Z is set, the V winning device 650 is operated in the same opening operation mode as the small win in the first round. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the player has won a big win or won a small win from the pattern.

In this case, since the jackpot game has already been executed, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V while the V winning device 650 is being opened in the first round of the jackpot Z, , the second and subsequent round games are executed. Therefore, when the big winning game in which the opening operation mode similar to the small winning game is set is executed, the effect shown in FIG. Good to configure. As a result, the game result of this time can make the player think that the big winning game has been executed due to the ball passing through the specific area 650V during the small winning game.

In addition, since the production shown in FIG. 201 (b) can be executed when the specific area 650V is actually passed during the small winning game and when the big winning Z is won, the production result in the production during the race It is possible to increase the rate at which the effect result (see FIG. 201(b)) that is advantageous to the player is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the performance during the race.

It should be noted that, in the case of winning the jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) in which the opening operation mode similar to the small winning game is set, and in the case of winning various small hits, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 showing the lottery result of the special symbol so that the same effect mode is executed as the variable display (variable effect), The stop display timing of the special design and the stop display timing of the third design displayed on the third design display device 81 are made different, or the stop display timing of the special design and the stop display timing of the third design are synchronized. In order to make the display of the third symbol more difficult for the player to identify at the stop display timing or during the period before or after that, the display mode or the display area is varied, or at the stop display timing of the special symbol, It is preferable to switch the design for performance displayed in the main display area Dm of the third design display device 81 from the third design to the normal design for performance corresponding to the variable display of the normal design. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fact that whether the lottery result of this time is a small win or a big win can be easily grasped by the stop display mode of the third symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 203(b), the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 203(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203(b), the RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a time saving medium total counter 203fa, a jackpot start flag 203fb, It has a medium jackpot flag 203o, a small jackpot start flag 203fc, a medium jackpot flag 203p, a V passage jackpot type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a short time medium special 2 counter 203ff, a V passage flag 203fg, and a memory area 203z. . It should be noted that the configuration (flag , counter, and area) are the same as those in the above-described embodiments, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The summing counter 203fa during time saving is a counter for adding up the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time saving state and counting up to 100 times. This time-saving middle total counter 203fa is set to 0, which is the initial value, when the jackpot is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 100 when the jackpot ends (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, 1 is subtracted each time the variation of the special symbol ends during the time saving state (see S10202 in FIG. 217). The value of this time-saving sum counter 203fa is referred to when determining whether or not the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been decremented to 0 (S10207 in FIG. 217 : Yes), the normal state is set as the game state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times the total variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition), or the second special during the time saving state The time saving state is terminated when any of the conditions that the number of pattern variations reaches 10 times (second termination condition) is satisfied, and whether the first termination condition is satisfied or not. In order to discriminate|determine, the sum counter 203fa is used in time saving. In addition, the value of the total counter 203fa during time saving is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the command of the number of times of remaining time saving (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the total counter 203fa is changed during the time reduction.

Voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the total counter 203fa is changed in the time saving, by the remaining time saving number of times command transmitted from the main control device 110, the number of remaining variation until the first end condition of the time saving state is satisfied can be obtained. As a result, the number of remaining time reductions managed by the game state storage area 223fe of the voice ramp control device 113 deviates from the actual remaining variation count counted by the time reduction medium summing counter 203fa of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the remaining time shortening number command is received next, the deviation can be corrected.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of remaining time reductions based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-described time reduction medium total counter 203fa, that is, the first time reduction state Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is not transmitted to the display control device 114 . This is because when a normal game is played, the time saving state is configured to shift to the normal state by satisfying the second end condition of the time saving state, and the first end condition is A situation in which the second end condition is met while the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of remaining fluctuations until it is met, and the time saving state ends is suppressed.

The jackpot start flag 203fb is a flag indicating that it is time to start the jackpot game. When the lottery result is determined to be a big hit and the variation of the special symbol stops, the big win start flag 203fb is set to ON (S10017 in FIG. 215). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203fb is ON and it is identified that it is the jackpot start timing, it is set to OFF (S10603 in FIG. 222). Note that the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to OFF in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and held in the state immediately before the power interruption in the event of a power interruption or the like.

The jackpot middle flag 203o is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (S10017 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (when it is determined that the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), it is set to OFF (S10617 in FIG. 222). This jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. is configured as follows. In addition, this during-big-hit flag 203o has the same function as the during-big-hit flag 203o used in the above-described first embodiment.

The small hit start flag 203fc is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S10304 in FIG. 218). It is determined that the small hit start flag 203fc is ON, and when it is identified as the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to OFF (S10703 in FIG. 223). This small winning start flag 203fc is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the power failure or the like occurs. configured to be

The small hit medium flag 203p is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (see S10304 in FIG. 218). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to OFF (see S10717 in FIG. 223). This small hit medium flag 203p is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when power failure etc. occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of power failure etc. configured to be

The V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is set when the ball that has won the V winning device 650 passes through the specific area 650V when the small win game is being executed (the detection switch detects that the ball has passed through the specific area 650V ( (not shown) is detected) is a storage area in which data for determining the jackpot type is stored. In the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd, a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type is stored when the fluctuation of the special symbol that results in a small hit stops (Fig. 218). (see S10302 of ). When the ball flows down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the detection switch, the V flag 203fe corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd. is configured to be set to on. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V passing big winning type storage area 203fd is cleared. This V pass jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. is configured to be held by

The V flag 203fe is set to the jackpot type corresponding to the type of the small winning game being executed when the ball flows down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game and the ball is detected by the detection switch. The corresponding flag is set on. At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether this V flag 203fe is on (see S10712 in FIG. 223), and when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is on (S10712 in FIG. 223: Yes), it is turned on The jackpot type to be executed is determined based on the set flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game (release scenario based on the jackpot type) is set (S10713 in FIG. 223). This V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared. is configured as

The time saving middle special 2 counter 203ff is a counter for counting up to 10 times the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state. This time-saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is set to 0, which is the initial value, when the jackpot is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 10 at the end of the jackpot (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, when the variation of the second special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S10204 in FIG. 217). The value of this time saving middle special 2 counter 203ff is referred to when determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been decremented to 0 (of FIG. 217 S10206: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times the total variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition), or the second special during the time saving state It is configured to end the time saving state when any of the conditions that the number of pattern variations reaches 10 times (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether the second end condition is satisfied or not. In order to discriminate, the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is used. In addition, the value of the short time medium special 2 counter 203ff is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the short time remaining command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the time reduction middle special 2 counter 203ff is changed.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining time reduction number of times based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-described time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff, that is, the time reduction state number 2, information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is transmitted to the display control device 114 . This is because when a normal game is played, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state by satisfying the second end condition of the time saving state. , to provide an easy-to-understand game by displaying the number of remaining fluctuations until the time saving state ends on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

The V passage flag 203fg is a flag used for determining the state in which the V flag 203fe is set to ON during the small winning game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203fe is set to ON. be done. In this embodiment, it is set to ON in the V passing process (see FIG. 221) corresponding to the ball that first passes through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game (S10507 in FIG. 221).

Then, in the V passage processing (see FIG. 221), it is determined whether the V passage flag 203fg is set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221). ), and the processing of S10502 to S10508 in the V passing processing (see FIG. 221) is skipped. As a result, when a plurality of balls pass through the specific area 650V during one small hit game (a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting balls passing through the specific area 650V detects a plurality of balls) ), only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected sphere is executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing executed during the small winning game, and the V passing command is transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times, and the V passing management on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 is complicated. can be prevented from becoming

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211. FIG. Figure 210 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the game state that follows based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and Figure 211 schematically shows the flow of operations of various devices executed during the small winning game It is a timing chart schematically shown.

In the seventh embodiment, a normal state in which a left-handed game is performed to shoot a ball aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 195) and a lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, and a game board A time-saving state in which a ball is shot aiming at the right side area of 13, and a time-saving state in which a lottery for a second special pattern (special pattern 2) is executed can be set, and a lottery for a first special pattern is performed rather than a lottery for a first special pattern. The lottery of 2 special symbols is configured to make it easier to execute the jackpot game.

Further, as the time-saving state, either a time-saving state A (time-saving A) that is advantageous to the player or a time-saving state B (time-saving B) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state A is set. ing. Here, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed in a state in which the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not set (hardly set) after the jackpot game ends. there is By configuring in this way, once the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not set as the game state unless at least two big winning games are executed, so the time saving state advantageous to the player is created. can be built.

As shown in FIG. 210, in the state where the normal state is set, the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery game is executed, and when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the jackpot is When the time-saving jackpot is "jackpot A" (10% of jackpot), time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set as a game state after the jackpot game ends, and "jackpot B" (40% of jackpot) is set. In this case, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends, and if it is "jackpot C" (50% of the jackpot), the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. be.

In addition, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the normal state and the big winning is won or the big winning game is executed based on the winning of the small winning, the normal state is set after the big winning game is finished. Configure. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally executing the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the normal state.

In the state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed. In this special figure 2 lottery, as described with reference to FIG. 205 (c), when the jackpot is won, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends, so the time saving state A (time saving A) When a jackpot is won during the game, the normal state is not set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, even if a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the variation pattern defined in the first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 referred to during the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set. When winning the small win type “small win C” in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650 V in the V winning device 650 . Therefore, when the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set, a plurality of jackpot games can be executed before the game state is set again to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the advantageous game state is immediately terminated even though the advantageous game state is set to be advantageous to the player, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.

In addition, in the state where this time saving state A is set, if the time saving end condition is satisfied (if the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 10 times), the time saving state ends and the normal state is set However, in the time-saving state, a small win is won with a probability of about 1/2, and in 80% of the cases, a small win game is executed that allows the ball to pass through the specific area 650V. As long as a normal game is performed in which a right-handed game is performed, a jackpot game can be executed before the time-saving end condition is satisfied. On the other hand, when executing a game that does not continue the right-handed game in order to pass the ball through the specific area 650V when winning a specific small hit type, the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency is 10 times By reaching it, you can shift to the normal state. As a result, a penalty can be imposed on the player who has played an inappropriate game during the time saving state.

When the small win A (20%) is won in a state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the time saving state A (time saving A) is performed again after the big win game based on the small win winning is executed. is set, and when a small win B (70%) is won, a time saving state B (time saving B) is set after a big win game based on the small win winning is executed. It should be noted that, when winning the small hit C (10%), as shown in FIG. The ball cannot pass through.

In addition, when the jackpot is won in the state where the time saving state B (time saving B) is set, the jackpot D (90%) and the jackpot E (10%) are the same as the time saving state A (time saving A) described above. is set. Also, when a small hit is won, the second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 (see FIG. 208(b)) is referred to, and the ball is configured to pass through the specific region 650V in the small hit A or the small hit C. ing.

Therefore, when a small hit A (20%) is won, a time saving state A (time saving A) is set after a big win game based on the small win winning is executed, and when a small win C is won, A normal state is set after a big win game based on a small win is executed. Also, like the time saving state A (time saving A), when the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 10 times), the time saving state ends and the normal state is set Configure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the operation flow of various devices during the small winning game will be described. Figure 211 (a) ~ (f) is a diagram schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 211 (a) ~ (f), when the special figure fluctuation display that wins the small hit is executed by the control processing of the main control device 110, the display of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 An effect during the race (see FIGS. 199(b) to 202(a)) is executed on the screen. Then, when t1 (0.1 seconds) elapses after the start of the small winning game, the V winning opening solenoid (not shown) is driven for 1.5 seconds according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 209).

The ball flowing down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is detected by a detection switch (not shown), and is detected within 4 seconds (V effective period t5) from 1 second after the start of the small winning game. When the switch detects the ball, the jackpot game is executed after the small jackpot game ends, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the jackpot game is started, the first round of the round game is started and the specific prize winning opening. 65a is opened.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the normal state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B can be set as the game state, and when the time saving state A is set, and the time saving state B is set. It is configured so that the data table to be referred to when setting the variation pattern of the special symbol is different from the case where it is set.

When the time-saving state A is set, when winning a small win (small win C) disadvantageous to the player, the ball does not pass through the specific region 650V during the small win game. It is configured so that a variation pattern is set. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 196, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the time saving state, the flow path that can pass through the specific area 650V (second flow The variation time (0.5 seconds) set when winning the small win C is longer than the period (3 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the second path tb) and pass through the second path tb). ) and the time (1.6 seconds) from the start of the small winning game to the end of the opening period of the V winning device 650 is set to be shorter.

Further, when the time-saving state B is set, when a small win (small win C) that is disadvantageous to the player is won, the ball fluctuates so that it can pass through the specific region 650V during the small win game. It is configured so that a pattern is set. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state is set as the game state, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed by simply changing the data table referred to when setting the variation pattern. can let

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, the RAM 223 of the seventh embodiment includes a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223fa, a stop type selection flag 223fb, an effect counter 223h, and a SW valid time. It has a memory area 223fd, a fluctuation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a delay passage state flag 223ff, a long fluctuation flag 223fg, a second ball entry flag 223fh, a normal/normal hit flag 223fi, and a memory area 223z. It should be noted that the configurations (flags, counters, areas) with the same names as the electrical configurations used in any of the above-described embodiments have the same uses as those of the above-described embodiments, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

The fluctuation start flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that the information (variation pattern command) indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol is started is received, and is set to ON when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started. It is a thing. This fluctuation start flag 223fa is based on the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice ramp control device 113, and whether the special design fluctuation of this time is the fluctuation of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design. It is configured so that it can be determined whether it is a variation of (special figure 2).

Specifically, the fluctuation start flag 223fa receives the fluctuation pattern command indicating the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223fa1 and the special figure 2 fluctuation which are set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command indicating the special figure 1 fluctuation is received It is formed from a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa2 that is set to ON when it is done.

Then, when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S12001 in FIG. 226: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa corresponding to the symbol type information included in the received variation pattern command is set to ON. (See S12002 in FIG. 226), and is set to OFF when the variable display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is made (See S5102 or S5108 in FIG. 231). When any of the fluctuation start flags 223fa is set to ON, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is sent to the display controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that a command (stop type command) including information for indicating the stop type of this special symbol variation from the main control device 110 is received, and the main control device 110 (See S12005 in FIG. 226) is set to ON when the stop type command transmitted from is received, and is turned OFF when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (See S5112 in FIG. 231). . When the stop type selection flag 223fb is set to ON, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The game state storage area 223fe is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when a state command regarding the game state is received from the main controller 110 . By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223fe, the current game state can be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side. In the present embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, so when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the data is stored in the game state storage area 223fe. The information indicating the current game state is also erased. However, in the present embodiment, the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 51) of the main control device which is executed after the power is turned on (S2115 in FIG. 51). is stored information indicating the game state set before the power is turned off. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the game state can always be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

It should be noted that the state command output from the main controller 110 is determined whether or not it has been received in command determination processing 7 (see S4182 in FIG. 226) of the sound lamp control device 113. The game state included in the state command is stored in the game state storage area 223fe. ), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The delay passage state flag 223ff is a flag for determining the state of the ball flowing down the second passage (delay passage) tb of the passage unit 660 . The contents of the delay path state flag 223ff will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the delay path state flag 223ff. As shown in FIG. 213, the delay channel state flag 223ff is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured to be able to specify the spherical flow state of the delay channel by the state of the lower 4 bits.

Specifically, the delay passage ball entry switch 660e1 for detecting the ball that has flowed into the second passage (delay passage) 660b is turned off, and the delay passage discharge for detecting the ball that has flowed out of the second passage (delay passage) 660b. When the switch 660e2 is turned off, that is, when the sphere does not pass through the second path (delay path) 660b, the lower 4 bits are "0001" ("00" in FIG. 213). In a state in which the delay passage ball entry switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to OFF, that is, in a state in which the ball is passing through the second passage (delay passage) 660b, the lower 4 bits becomes "0010" (described as "01" in FIG. 213), the delay passage entry switch 660e1 is set to OFF, and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, the second passage (delay passage ) 660b, the lower 4 bits become "0011" ("02" in FIG. 213).

Here, the delay path entry ball switch 660e1 and the delay path discharge switch 660e2 are both configured with proximity sensors capable of detecting balls flowing down the second flow path tb formed in the second path 660b. It is configured to be set to ON when an object is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time. Then, it is configured to be set to OFF when the object is not detected for a predetermined period of time.

Here, when the lower 4 bits of the delay path status flag 223ff are set to the above-described "0001", "0010", and "0011", the ball normally flows down the second path (delay path) 660b. , it is determined to be a normal ball flow down state.

On the other hand, the delay passage ball entry switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is also set to ON, that is, the state in which the ball enters the second passage (delay passage) 660b and the state in which the ball is discharged. state is detected at the same time, the lower 4 bits become "0011" (denoted as "03" in FIG. 213), and the delay passage entry switch 660e1 is in an abnormal state (denoted as "-" in FIG. 213). In the state where the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, in the state in which the sensor for detecting the state of ball flow down the second passage (delay passage) 660b is out of order, the lower 4 bits are "0100" (Fig. 213 is described as "04"), and it is determined to be an abnormal ball flow down state.

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 224. FIG.

FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment. This timer interrupt processing is regular processing executed every 2 milliseconds, for example, instead of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

Of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, each processing of S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 corresponds to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those of S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110 and S111 are executed.

Further, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), when the process of S103 is finished, next, the process for displaying the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S191), and then the process proceeds to S105. Details of the special symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the process of S105, the normal symbol variation process 7, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S192), and then the process proceeds to S107. Details of the normal symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S107, the V entrance passing process accompanying the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S193). After that, the V passing process executed when the winning ball of the V winning device 650 passes through the specific area 650V is executed (S194), and then the process proceeds to S110. Details of the V entrance passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221. FIG.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, the processing (2 As per species execution processing), V entrance passage processing (S193 in FIG. 214) and V passage processing (S194 in FIG. 214) are provided, processing related to fluctuation of the first symbol (special symbol), second symbol ( It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the detailed content of the processing relating to the fluctuation of normal symbols is different.

Next, with reference to FIG. 215, special symbol variation processing 7 (S191) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 7 (S191). This special symbol variation process 7 (S191) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, , the process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the third pattern display device 81, and the like.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 7 (see S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, there is also a place where the processing of the same content as the special symbol variation processing in the above-described first embodiment (see S104 in FIG. 32) is executed. However, for convenience of explanation, different reference numerals are assigned to the same processes. It should be noted that each modified content described in each of the above-described embodiments can naturally be applied to elements having the same processing content.

In the special symbol variation process 7 (S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit (S10001). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S10001: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S10001: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S10002), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating. If it is determined that it is not (S10002: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second ball entrance 3640 (S10003).

When it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 3640 (S10003: Yes), the second ball entry command is set (S10004), the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and stop Each value of the type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (S10005). Next, special symbol variation start processing 7 for starting variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10011). Note that the special symbol variation start process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10003, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance 3640 (S10003: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S10006). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10007). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (not larger than 0) (S10007: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (not 0) (S10007: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1 ) is subtracted by 1 (S10008), and a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S10009). Here, the set reserved ball number command is configured to include information for indicating that it is a command for indicating the reserved ball number of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the main control The reserved ball number command set by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the device 110 is output to the sound lamp control device 113. As a result, the current number of reserved balls can be grasped for each type of special symbol on the side of the voice lamp control device 113 .

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10009, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10010). After that, the process of S10011 is executed.

In addition, in the processing of S10002, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002: Yes), the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S10012). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S10012: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10012, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S10012: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10013). The display mode of the stop symbols is set in advance by special symbol variation start processing 7 (S10011), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process 7 is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot or not. A jackpot type (jackpots A to C) is determined according to the value of C2.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LED of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on. In addition, when it is a small hit, the red LED is lit, and when it is a loss, the red LED and the green LED are lit. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S10013 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 7 is , It is determined whether it is a jackpot of special symbols (S10014). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S10014: Yes), an opening scenario for a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S10015), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S10016). Next, the jackpot start flag 203fb and the jackpot middle flag 203o are set to ON (S10017), the value of the time-saving medium sum counter 203fa and the value of the time-saving medium special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10018), and S10019 Go to processing. In the processing of S10019, a stop command is set (S10019), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10014, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S10014: No), the time saving number update process (S10020) is executed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a small hit. (S10021). In addition, the details of this time saving frequency update process (S10020) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S10021, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S10021: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S10022). Next, the process of S10019 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10021, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S10021: No), the small hit start setting process (see S10022) is skipped and the process of S10019 is executed to end this process. do.

As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed and the lottery result of this time is not a big hit, the time saving number update process (S10020) is executed, and then the lottery result of this time is It is configured to determine whether it is a small hit, but it is not limited to this, for example, after executing the small hit start setting process (S10022), the time saving number update process (S10020) is executed. You can Furthermore, for example, when the time saving number update process is executed and it is determined that the time saving number ends by this special symbol variation process, if the lottery result of this special symbol is out, the execution timing of the time saving number update process The time saving state is ended at (symbol stop timing of the special pattern), and when the lottery result of the special pattern this time is a small prize, the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small prize game is finished. . As a result, the time saving state can be set until immediately before the next special symbol variation is started. Further, even when a small win is won in the final variation of the time saving state, the small winning game can be executed in a state where the time saving state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, special symbol variation start processing 7 (S10011) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 7 (S10011). This special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol big win", "special symbol small win" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol is determined. This is a process executed when setting information necessary for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 .

In the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011), first, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, which are stored in the execution area of the first special design reserved ball storage area 203a, And, each value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S10101). Next, the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 7 table 202fd corresponding to the type of the obtained special symbol (S10102). Specifically, in the case of lottery for the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 (see FIG. 204(b)) Random numbers stored in are compared to determine whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is a lottery for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 3640, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 And the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 (see FIG. 204(c)) is compared to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big win (S10103). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S10103: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first hit type selection 7 table 202fa corresponding to the type of the acquired special symbol (S10104). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S10101, and the random value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 or the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 are compared. , It is determined what the jackpot type is among the five types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to E) (see FIG. 205(b) or (c)).

In the seventh embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same judgment value for judging a big hit, but not limited to this, different random numbers may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the number of the jackpot random number values is set to be the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. The number of random values determined may be set differently. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

Then, the display mode at the time of the normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol type and the jackpot type is set (S10105). In the process of S10105, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37A) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to E). Also, in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the big win types on the third symbol display device 81, the big win types (big wins A to E) are set as the stop types.

Thereafter, a big hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S10106), and the process proceeds to S10113. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S10106, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. Specifically, the type of the acquired special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the lottery result and the RAM 203, and the variation pattern table of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, the current game The values defined in the data table corresponding to the state are compared to determine the variation time of the symbol variation (see FIG. 207).

In the processing of S10113, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S10106 is set (S10113). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S10105 is set (S10114). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and external output processing (S2201) executed in main processing (see FIG. 52) of main controller 110. Inside, it is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . As a result, the variable display mode (performance mode) of the third symbol can be set corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) and the stop type of the special symbol on the audio lamp control device 113 side. When the processing of S10114 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 7 (S191).

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S10103: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S10107). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S10107: Yes), a small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe (S10108). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random number value defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, and the small hit of the special symbols of three types (small Among hits A to C), it is determined what the small hit type is (see FIG. 206(b)).

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, since it is configured so as not to win a small hit in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), when a small hit is won in the special pattern lottery Since it is confirmed that the special symbol lottery this time is the second special symbol lottery, the process of determining the type of the special symbol won in the small hit is not executed, but for example, the first special symbol, In the case that any of the second special symbols is configured to win the small prize, after determining that the small prize has been won, processing is performed to determine the type of the special symbols corresponding to this lottery, and the determination is made. According to the result, it is good to configure so as to execute the process of selecting the small hit type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set different types of small wins in the case of winning the small win with the first special pattern and the case of winning the small win with the second special pattern, thereby improving the game performance. can have a range. In addition, without changing the types of small wins that can be set when a small win is won between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the selection ratio of each small win type may be made different. good.

Next, the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10109), and the small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S10110). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at a small winning symbol is determined. It should be noted that the processing executed in S10110 is different from the processing content of S10106 described above in that the target special symbol lottery result is a small hit instead of a big hit, but the set fluctuation Subsequent processing performed on the pattern (for example, processing for output to the audio ramp controller 113) is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a small hit in the process of S10107 (S10107: No), the display mode at the time of loss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S10111). After that, based on the number of held balls, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S10112). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. Next, the processing of S10113 and S10114 described above is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 7.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the special symbol lottery results are configured to be determined in the order of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". However, it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to give priority to "out of line". Such a configuration is an effective configuration for reducing the number of determinations repeatedly executed in various processes of the main controller 110 because the lottery result that is most likely to appear as the lottery result of the special symbol is "loss". becomes.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the variation pattern command and the stop type command are configured to be set within the same process, but the variation The pattern command and the stop type command may be configured to be set at different timings. Also, even when setting within the same process, the stop type command is output after a predetermined period of time after the variation pattern command is output so that the timing of output to the sound ramp control device 113 is not the same. You can

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the time-saving frequency|count update process (S10020) performed by MPU201 in the main control unit 110 in 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the time saving frequency update process (S10020). This time saving number update process (S10020) is executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), updates the time saving number, and sets the game state to the normal state. This process is for

In the time saving number of times update processing (S10020), first, it is determined whether the value of the total counter 203fa during time saving is greater than 0 (S10201). When it is determined that the value of the time saving sum counter 203fa is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S10201: No), that is, when it is determined that the current game state is the normal state, the number of time saving times is updated. Since there is no need, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving sum counter 203fa is greater than 0 (S10201: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state, the time saving number of times is updated (subtracted). (S10202 to S10209) for executing the processing of .

In the process of S10202, the value of the sum counter 203fa during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S10202), and then it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation of this time is the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S10203). If it is determined that the current variation is the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S10203: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff (S10204), and the process proceeds to S10205. On the other hand, in the processing of S10203, when it is determined that the current variation is not the second special symbol (it is the first special symbol) (S10203: No), the process of S10204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10205.

In the process of S10205, the remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the counter during time reduction changed by calculation (sum counter 203fa during time reduction and special 2 counter 203ff during time reduction) is set (S10205). The command for reducing the remaining time set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the first embodiment, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 .

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is not 0 (S10206: No), It is determined whether the value of the sum counter 203fa is 0 (S10207). In the process of S10207, when it is determined that the value of the total counter 203fa is not 0 (S10207: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S10206, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206: Yes), or in the process of S10207, it is determined that the value of the time-saving medium total counter 203fa is 0 In the case (S10207: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S10208), the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff and the time saving medium sum counter 203fa are both set to 0 (S10209), and this process ends .

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state are set, and when any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the process of ending the time-saving state (normal state ) is configured to be executed. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations in the first special pattern and the number of fluctuations in the second special pattern in the time saving state reach a predetermined number of times (total number of fluctuations), that is, the time saving When the state is set, the value (for example, 100) set in the time saving medium total counter 203fa is subtracted each time the special symbol variation is executed, and the time saving end condition established when the value becomes 0. And, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches a predetermined number, that is, when the time saving state is set, the value set in the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff (for example, 10) is 2 Special symbols (special 2) are subtracted each time the variation is executed, and the time saving end condition that is established when the value becomes 0, and the time saving end condition is completed when any of the time saving end conditions are met. It is configured to

By constructing in this way, the lottery for the second special symbol, in which the lottery for the player is more advantageous than the lottery for the first special symbol, is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) while the time-saving state is set. ) can be reliably executed. In addition, although it is set as the structure which has two time-saving end conditions mentioned above in this embodiment, you may comprise three or more time-saving end conditions so that a setting is possible, without restricting to this. In addition, in the jackpot election of the special symbol that triggers the setting of the time saving state, the value for establishing the time saving end condition may be changed according to the type of the jackpot that has been won. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when any one of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the time-saving end condition is configured to end the time-saving state. End conditions may be set in advance, and the time saving state may be ended when two of the time saving end conditions are met. By setting the conditions for terminating the time-saving state in a complicated manner in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time-saving state (advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player) will continue, It is possible to play a game with a sense of tension.

In addition, as described above, when setting a plurality of time saving end conditions, the value corresponding to the time saving end condition that is most likely to be established is set as an effect for notifying the player of the period until the time saving state ends. What is necessary is just to perform the production|presentation to notify. In this embodiment, in the state where the time saving state is set, since it is configured to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, the remaining time saving number of times executed during the time saving state is notified. Is configured to notify the value until the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2), is established among the time-saving end conditions (Fig. 199 (b ) of the number of remaining time reduction notification area Dm6).

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the small winning start setting process (S10022) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S10022). This small hit start setting process (S10022) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and the small hit type (small hit A to C ), the process for setting the start of the small winning game (game content (operation scenario) of the small winning game to be executed this time).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment changes the V winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can win (easy) when the small winning game is started, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 By passing through the specific area 650V, the big winning game is executed after the small winning game is finished.

That is, the game state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big winning game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability.

In the small hit start setting process (S10022), first, an open scenario (operation scenario) corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10301). This operation scenario is set by referring to the open scenario 7 table 202ff based on the small hit type set by referring to the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe when the small hit is won.

After that, a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V passage big hit type storage area 203fd (S10302). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, the V passing time big hit type (jackpot D to E) is determined. As described above with reference to FIG. 206 (b), if the small hit type is a small hit A, the V passing time jackpot type is determined to be "10 rounds short time 10 times big hit, short time A", and the small hit If the type is small hit B, it is determined to be "10 rounds short time 10 times big hit, short time B", and if the small hit type is C, it is determined to be "10 rounds short time no jackpot" (Fig. 206 (b)).

Next, based on the small hit type, the start of the small hit is set (S10303), and the small hit start flag 203fc and the small hit middle flag 203p are set to ON (S10304). After that, this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 219, the normal symbol variation process 7 (S192) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process 7 (S192). This normal symbol variation process 7 (S192) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is accompanied by the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the second entrance 3640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 3640a.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of winning types can be set as the winning type of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern (open scenario) of the electric accessory 3640a according to the set winning type. are configured to be different. As a result, when the normal symbol is won, the electric accessory 3640a can be opened and closed in a plurality of operation patterns, making it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the electric accessory 3640a operates. be able to.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, it is easier for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640 when the electric accessory 3640a is operating (more likely than when the electric accessory 3640a is not operating). ) state, and at the timing when the operation of the electric accessory 3640a ends, the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a flows through different flow paths (first flow path ta, second flow path tb) (see FIGS. 195-198).

The balls that flow down the second flow path tb are more likely to pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small win game than the balls that flow down the first flow path ta. . In this way, in the present embodiment, by varying the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a, it is possible to vary the ease with which a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 (second ball entry A first open state in which a ball is likely to enter the opening 3640 and a second open state in which a ball is less likely to enter the second ball entrance 3640 than in the easy-to-enter state are set. It is possible to change the ease with which the ball passes (a first guidance state in which the ball easily passes through the specific region 650V, a second guidance state in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific region 650V than in the first guidance state, can be set).

That is, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of winning types can be set as the winning type of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern (open scenario) of the electric accessory 3640a according to the set winning type. By making the different conditions for each of the plurality of conditions for having a privilege for the player, the ease with which each condition is satisfied can be made different, so one variable means ( It is possible to make the player more interested in the operation contents of the electric accessory 3640a).

It should be noted that, as a configuration for differentiating the ease with which a plurality of game conditions are established, a configuration other than the configuration of the seventh embodiment may be used. Instead of the accessory 3640a, a winning device (for example, the variable winning device 65) in which an operation pattern is set at the time of winning the jackpot may be used.

In the normal symbol variation process 7 (S192), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S801). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is fluctuating (S802), and the second symbol display device is displayed. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S802: No), then it is determined whether data (the value of the second winning random number counter C4) is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (S803).

In the process of S803, if it is determined that data is not stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area, that is, if it is determined that the condition for starting the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not satisfied (S803: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball possible area, that is, if it is determined that the condition for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is established (S803) : Yes), then the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area is acquired (S804).

Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S804 and the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S805). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number 7 table 202fc. As described above, if the current game state is a normal pattern high probability state (time saving state), if the value of the second per random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 79", per normal pattern A If it is in the range of "80 to 98", it is determined to be a normal figure hit B, and if it is a value of "99", it is determined to be out. In addition, when the current game state is a normal pattern low probability state (normal state), if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is a value of "0", it is determined to be a normal pattern winning A, If the value is "1", it is determined that it is a normal match B, and if it is "2 to 99", it is determined that it is out (see FIG. 206(a)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal design acquired by the process of S805 determines whether it is a hit of the normal design (per normal pattern A or B per normal pattern) (S806), and it is determined that it is a hit of the normal pattern. When determined (S806: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S807), and the process proceeds to S809. In the process of S807, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is illuminated and displayed as the second symbol stop symbol (stop display mode) so that the winning type can be identified. set as

On the other hand, in the processing of S806, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S806: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S808). In the process of S808, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S809.

When the processing of S807 or S808 ends, in the processing of S809, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols (time saving state) (S809), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols ( If it is (S809: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second pattern display device is set to 3 seconds (S810), and this process is finished. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol high probability state (time saving state) (S809: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S811), and this processing is executed. finish.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, a shorter variation time is set as the variation time of the second symbol than when the time-saving state is not set (when the normal state is set). It is configured as follows. As a result, the number of times of lottery of the second symbols per unit time can be increased in the time saving state more than in the normal state, so that the time saving game can be executed efficiently.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the normal pattern (second pattern) hit probability is higher than the normal state, and the normal pattern (second pattern) variation time By shortening the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a and making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640, the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. Although it is configured to be, it is sufficient if it is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is easier to execute in the time saving state than in the normal state, for example, in the time saving state than in the normal state. The normal pattern (second pattern) has a shorter fluctuation time, and the rest may be the same. It may be the same, or the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a in the time saving state may be made to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640 than in the normal state, and other than that may be the same.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S812). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S810 or the process of S811 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S812, if the variable time has not passed (S812: No), the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S812, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S812: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S813). In the process of S813, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S807, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed stopped (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S808, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S813, the second symbol display is next performed when the second symbol display update process (see S2208) of the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed. After the variable display on the device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S807 or S808.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result of the normal symbols (lottery result of this time) is a hit of the normal symbols (S814). If the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S814: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S814: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol high probability state (time saving state) (S815).

In the process of S815, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) (S815: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second ball entrance 3640 is set to 0.2 seconds. , and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S816), and the process proceeds to S818. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal patterns (S815: Yes), a normal pattern per command is set (S851), and the per type set this time and the current game state The operation pattern of the corresponding electric accessory 3640a is set (S817), and the process proceeds to S818.

In the process of S818, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second ball entrance 3640 is set (S818), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 3640a is set by the processing of S818, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S2206) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110 is executed, the electric role The opening and closing control of the object is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S816 or S817 are completed.

Next, the V entrance passage processing (S193) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing this V entrance passage processing (S193). This V entrance passage processing (S193) is a flow chart showing the V entrance passage processing (S193) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214).

In the V entrance passing process (S193), first, it is determined whether or not a ball passing sensor (not shown) for detecting that a ball has won the V winning device 650 is on (S10401). This ball passing sensor is detection means that turns on when a ball passes. Specifically, it consists of a proximity sensor arranged close to the ball flow path so that the period required for the ball to flow down the detection area of the ball passage sensor is a predetermined period (for example, 30 milliseconds). It is configured to turn on (output an on signal) when the proximity sensor continues to detect an object for 30 milliseconds. As a result, for example, even if a ball is detected at an interval of less than 30 milliseconds due to noise generated in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent such a situation from being determined as a state in which the ball has passed. can do.

In the process of S10401, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor is not ON (S10401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S10401, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor is ON (S10401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning device 650 is in the open period (S10402).

In the process of S10402, when it is determined that the V winning device 650 is open (S10402: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S10403), and this process is terminated. The V entrance passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is output by voice during the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the passage of the V entrance. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning device 650 is not open (S10402: No), it means that the ball has won the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set. (S10404), after that, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the V passing process (S194) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 221 is a flow chart showing the V passage processing (S194). This V passing process (S194) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment.

In the V passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203fg is ON (S10501). In the process of S10501, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203fg is ON (S10501: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10501 that the V passage flag 203fg is not ON (S10501: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S10502). That is, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 or not. In the process of S10502, if it is determined that the vehicle does not pass through the V (S10502: No), this process ends.

In the process of S10502, if it is determined that there is V passage (S10502: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is during the V passage valid period (S10503). If it is determined that it is during the V-passing valid period (S10503: Yes), the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is acquired (S10504), and the acquired V-passing jackpot The V flag 203fe corresponding to the type is set to ON (S10505). Then, the V passing command is set (S10506).

Then, the V passage flag 203fg is set to ON (S10507), after that, the total counter 203fa and the special 2 counter 203ff in time reduction are set to 0 (S10508), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10503 that it is not during the V passage valid period (S10503: No), an error command is set (S10509), and this process ends. If the ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 when it is not during the V valid period, it is considered that the ball has entered the V winning switch 650e3 illegally. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S10505, an error is output and fraud can be discovered.

Next, the jackpot control process 7 (S2282) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 222 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 7 (S2282). This jackpot control process 7 (S2282) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (S2204) in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state with special symbols, It is a process for executing various effects and opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 222, S2282), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S10601). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203fb is set to ON by the processing of S10017 of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215), it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S10601, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S10601: Yes), an opening command is set (S10602). Then, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to OFF (S10603), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10601, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S10601: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S10604). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S10604, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S10604: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10604, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (S10604: Yes), the processing of S10605 is executed. In the process of S10605, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S10605). In the processing of S10605, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S10605: Yes), based on the open scenario 7 table 202ff, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or The V winning opening 650a) of the V winning device 650 is opened (S10606), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S10607). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Inside, it is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when a continuous jackpot is executed in the sound lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Become. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the big win has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10605, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S10605: No), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) It is determined whether the closing condition is met (S10608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or , the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total), it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the process of S10608, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10608: Yes), the corresponding winning The opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed (S10609), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not established (S10608: No), the ending effect is started. It is determined whether it is timing (S10610). The start timing of the ending effect is when 15 rounds are completed, the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and the standby time (three seconds in this embodiment), which is the ball-throwing time, elapses. Determined as

In the processing of S10610, if it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S10610: Yes), the ending command is set (S10611), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10610, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S10610: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending effect (S10612). In the processing of S10612, if it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect is not reached (S10612: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10612, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the jackpot C (S10613). In the process of S10613, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot) (S10613: No), 100 is set to the time-saving medium total counter 203fa, and 10 is set to the time-saving medium special 2 counter 203ff (S10614), The process proceeds to S10615. On the other hand, in the process of S10613, when it is determined that it was a jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot) (S10613: Yes), the process of S10614 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10615.

In the processing of S10615, a state command corresponding to the state after the jackpot is set (S10615). Then, the end of the jackpot is set (S10616), the flag 203o during the jackpot is set to OFF (S10617), and then this process is finished.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 223, small hit control processing 7 (S2283) performed by MPU201 in main control unit 110 in a 7th embodiment is explained. FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process 7 (S2283). This small winning control process 7 (S2283) is executed in place of the small winning control process (S2205) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol small winning state. , execution of various effects according to the small hit, and opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) processing.

In the small hit control process 7 (S2283 in FIG. 223), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203fc is set to ON, it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the processing of S10701, when the special symbol small winning is started (S10701: Yes), an opening command is set (S10702). Then, the small hit start flag 203fc is set to OFF (S10703), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10701, when the small winning of special symbols is not started (S10701: No), it is determined whether or not the small winning of special symbols is in progress (S10704). During the special symbol small winning, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small winning (including during the special symbol small winning game). During the predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol is included. In the process of S10704, if it is not during the small hit of the special symbol (S10704: No), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S10704, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of a small hit (S10704: Yes), the process of S10705 is executed. In the process of S10705, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the V winning opening (S10705). In the processing of S10705, if it is determined that it is the V winning opening opening timing (S10705: Yes), the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario 7 table 202ff. (S10706), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10705, if it is not the V winning opening opening timing (S10705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is established (S10707). . Specifically, when the open scenario set corresponding to the small winning game ends, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) win the V winning device 650, the closing condition is established. and discriminate.

In the processing of S10707, if it is determined that the condition for closing the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of V winning device 650) is met (S10707: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening of V winning device 650 The port 650a) is closed (S10708), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of V winning device 650) is not established (S10707: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S10709). In the processing of S10709, if it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S10709: Yes), the ending command is set (S10710), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the S10709 process, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S10709: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10711). In the processing of S10711, if it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect is not reached (S10711: No), this processing is terminated.

In the processing of S10711, if it is determined that it is time to end the ending effect (S10711: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S10712), and the V flag 203fe is not set to ON. If so (S10712: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S10712: Yes), an open scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203fe is set (S10713), the jackpot start flag 203fb, the jackpot The medium flag 203o is set to ON (S10714), the V flag 203fe is set to OFF (S10715), the V passage flag 203fg is set to OFF (S10716), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S10717). , the process ends.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process 7 (S2281) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing the electric accessory opening/closing process 7 (S2281). This electric accessary product opening/closing process 7 (S2281) is a process executed instead of the electric accessary product opening/closing process (S2207) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment.

In the electric accessary product opening/closing process 7 (S2281), first, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing control setting of the electric accessary product 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is in progress (S10801). If it is determined that the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second ball entrance 3640 is not being set (S10801: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening/closing control setting of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second ball entrance 3640 is in progress (S10801: Yes), at the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second ball entrance 3640 It is determined whether or not there is (S10802). When it is determined that it is time to open the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second ball entrance 3640 (S10802: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second ball entrance 3640 is opened (S10803), A role product release command is set (S10804), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10802, if it is determined that it is not the time to open the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second ball entrance 3640 (S10802: No), then the electric role associated with the second ball entrance 3640 It is determined whether or not it is time to close the object 3640a (S10805). When it is determined that it is time to close the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10805: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is closed (S10806), A role product close command is set (S10807), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second ball entrance 3640 (S10805: No), then the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second ball entrance 3640 is performed. (S10809). When it is determined that it is time to end the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10809: Yes), the end command for the normal figure is set (S10810), and then the process ends. do. Also, in the process of S10809, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second ball entrance 3640 (S10809: No), this process ends.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 225 to 233, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 225, main processing in the seventh embodiment will be described. This main process is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and first embodiment), and is the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and first embodiment). 59).

Of the main processing (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, each processing of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 is different from the main processing (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as those of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 are executed. In addition, in the main process (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, after executing the process of S4111, the effect update process is executed (S4181). This effect update processing (S4181) is for performing processing for varying the contents of the effect currently being executed (already set variable display) during execution of the effect.

After executing the effect update process (S4181), the command determination process 7 is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S4182). The details of this command determination process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S4183. In the process of S4183, the variable display setting process 7 is executed (S4183). In the variation display setting process 7 (S4183), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third pattern display device 81. . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process 7 (S4183) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, after execution of variable display setting processing 7 (S4183), ball passage monitoring processing is executed (S4184). The details of this ball passing monitoring process (S4184) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or after the current processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). ), the process proceeds to S4182 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111 and S4181.

Next, command determination processing 7 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 7 (S4182). This command determination process 7 (S4182) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. do. Further, in this process, when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process 7 (S4182), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and changed from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not a pattern command has been received (S12001). When the variation pattern command is received (S12001: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa of the symbol type corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set to ON (S12002), and the variation pattern type from the received variation pattern command is extracted (S12003), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S12001: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S12004). When the stop type command is received (S12004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12005), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12006), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the change display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231), which will be described later, is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S12004: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S12007). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S12007: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 ( The holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is extracted and stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 (S12008). In addition, in the processing of S12008, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is set. After the process of S12008 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, each time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the main controller 110 by the processing of S12008. It can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc., the start winning It is possible to correct the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 and match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 at the time of detection or the lottery of special symbols. can. In addition, when the process of S12008 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the processing of S12007, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S12007: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12009). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S12009: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010), and then the process returns to the main processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S12009, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S12009: No), then it is determined whether a win-related command has been received (S12011), and the win-related command is received. When it is determined that it has (S12011: Yes), hit-related processing 7 is executed (S12012), and this processing ends. This winning-related process 7 (S12012) causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the big winning game or the small winning game executed when the big winning or the small winning is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbols. When a big win or a small win is won, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 is executed.

Here, the contents of the win-related process 7 (S12012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process 7 in the seventh embodiment. When this hit related process (S12012) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot start command is received (S12101). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S12101: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S12102), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the seventh embodiment. ) to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S12101: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S12103). In the process of S12103, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S12103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S12104), and this process ends. In the seventh embodiment, since information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command, the number-of-rounds command for display is set based on the received number-of-rounds command. , in order to reduce the volume of command data transmitted from main controller 110, in the case of a configuration in which information for indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from main controller 110 as a round update command, voice A round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided in the RAM 223 of the lamp control device 113, and based on the value of the round number accumulation counter, the sound lamp control device 113 side The current round number may be calculated and a display round number command may be set.

In the processing of S12103, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S12103: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S12105). In the processing of S12105, when it is determined that the jackpot end command is received (S12105: Yes), the jackpot end command for display is set (S12106), and this processing ends.

In the process of S12105, when it is determined that the command to end the big hit is not received (S12105: No), it is determined whether or not the command to start the small hit is received (S12107).

In the process of S12107, when it is determined that the small hit start command is received (S12107: Yes), the small hit start process is executed (S12108), and this process ends. Further, the details of this small winning start process (S12108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the contents of the small winning start process (S12108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing the contents of small winning start processing in the seventh embodiment. When this small winning start process (S12108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation flag 223fg provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S12201), and it is determined that the long fluctuation flag 223fg is ON. If so (S12201: Yes), the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is read (S12202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203). In the processing of S12203, when it is determined that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203: Yes), a small winning start command for display indicating a small winning with high V expectation is set (S12204). , and then returns to the hit-related process 7 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12201 that the long fluctuation flag 223fg is not ON (S12201: No), the process proceeds to S12205. If it is determined in the process of S12203 that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12203: No), the process proceeds to S12205.

In the process of S12205, a small winning start command for display indicating a normal small winning is set (S12205), and then the process returns to the winning related process 7.

Returning to FIG. 227, the description continues. In the process of S12107, when it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S12107: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command is received (S12109). In the process of S12109, when it is determined that the small hit end command is received (S12109: Yes), in order to execute the effect suggesting the end of the small hit game, set the small hit end command for display (S12110), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S12109, when it is determined that the small winning end command is not received (S12109: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passing command is received (S12111). In the processing of S12111, if it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S12111: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S12112), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S12111 that the V entrance pass command has not been received (S12111: No), then it is determined whether the V pass command has been received (S12113).

In the processing of S12113, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S12113: Yes), the display V effect command for indicating the effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set ( S12114), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S12113, if it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S12113: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 226, the description continues. In the processing of S12011, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S12011: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S12013). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S12013: Yes), the third symbol stop display is set (S12014), and then it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation flag 223fg is on (S12015). When it is determined that the long fluctuation flag 223fg is on (S12015: Yes), the long fluctuation flag 223fg is set to off (S12016), and then the process returns to the main process. In the process of S12015, if it is determined that the long fluctuation flag 223fg is not ON (S12015: No), the process of S12016 is not executed and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the process of S12013 (S12013: No), then it is determined whether or not the production related command for time reduction has been received (S12017). When it determines with having received the production|presentation related command for time reduction (S12017: Yes), a time reduction production|presentation related process is performed (S12018), and it returns to a main process after that. The details of this time saving effect related process (S12018) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12017 that the production-related command for time saving is not received (S12017: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S12019), and then the process returns to the main process.

Next, the contents of the time saving effect related process (S12018) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving effect related process (S12018). Time saving production related processing (S12018) is processing executed in command determination processing 7 (see FIG. 226) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

When the time saving performance related processing (S12018) is executed, first, the game state stored in the game state storage area 223fe is read (S12301), and then it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state (S12302). ). When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state (S12302: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to command determination process 7 (S4182 in FIG. 226).

On the other hand, in the processing of S12302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state (S12302: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the normal pattern per command is received (S12303), If it is determined that a hit command has been received (S12303: Yes), the type of the current general pattern is analyzed based on the received general pattern per command (S12304), and a time saving effect corresponding to the general pattern per type is executed. (S12305), set the time saving production start command for display (S12305), set the flag 223fi in the normal figure to ON (S12306), and then return to the command determination process 7.

On the other hand, in the process of S12303, if it is determined that the command per normal pattern has not been received (S12303: No), then it is determined whether or not the second entering command has been received (S12307). When it is determined that the second ball entering command has been received (S12307: Yes), the second ball entering flag 223fh is set to ON (S12308), a display effect command for updating the time saving effect is set (S12309), After that, the process returns to command determination processing 7 .

On the other hand, in the process of S12307, if it is determined that the second ball entering command has not been received (S12307: No), then it is determined whether or not the general pattern per end command has been received (S12310). When it is determined that the per general pattern end command is received (S12310: Yes), per general pattern end processing is executed (S12311), and then the command determination processing 7 is returned to. When it is determined that the normal pattern per end command is not received in the process of S12310 (S12310: No), the process returns to the command determination process 7 as it is. In addition, the details of the process at the end of the per normal pattern (S12311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the contents of the process at the end of per normal pattern (S12311) will be described. FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing the contents of the processing at the end of the normal pattern (S12311). Normal figure per end time process (S12311) is a process executed in the time-saving production related process (see FIG. 229) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

When the normal pattern per end process (S12311) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second entering flag 223fh is ON (S12401). If it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223fh is ON (S12401: Yes), the second ball entry flag 223fh is set to OFF (S12402), and the process proceeds to S12404. Also, when it is determined that the second entering flag 223fh is not ON (S12401: No), a display effect command for ending the time saving effect is set (S12403), and the process proceeds to S12404.

In the process of S12404, the normal pattern per medium flag 223fi is set to OFF (S12404), then this process is terminated, and the process returns to the time reduction effect related process (S12018 in FIG. 229).

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the variable display setting process 7 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 231 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process 7 (S4183). This variable display setting process 7 (S4183) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 to produce a variable effect. , a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the fluctuation display setting process 7 (S4183), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223fa1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5101). And, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5101: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, S5107 of Go to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is set to off (S5102), then for notifying the display control device 114 A display variation pattern command is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S5181). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started. When the processing of S5181 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5182), and the processing proceeds to S5107.

In the processing of S5107, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S5107). And, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5107: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, S5111 Go to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is set to off (S5108), then the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process 7 is executed (S5183). The details of this special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S5183 is completed, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S5110), and the process proceeds to S5111.

In the processing of S5111, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag fb1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag fb2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5111). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S5111: No), the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 Since it is in a state where there is no data, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is set to off (S5112), then, based on the stop type extracted from the command to set the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command (S5113), and then terminate this process.

Next, with reference to Drawing 232, change display setting processing 7 (S5183) for special figures 2 performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in a 7th embodiment is explained. FIG. 232 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183). This special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. be.

In the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183), first, the game state stored in the game state storage area 223fe provided in the RAM 223 is read out (S12501), and then the pachinko machine 10 is normally in the time saving state of the design. (S12502). When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S12502: No), the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S12510), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12502, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S12502: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S12503). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big win (S12503: Yes), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the big win is set (S12504), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S12503, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S12503: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S12505). When it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S12505: No), a variation pattern command indicating the end of the time saving effect is set (S12506), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12505, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S12505: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the small hit is a long variation (S12507). When it is determined that the variation pattern of the small hit is long variation (S12507: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to ON (S12508), and the process proceeds to S12509. On the other hand, in the process of S12507, if it is determined that the variation pattern of the small hit is not a long variation (S12507: No), the process of S12508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S12509.

In the process of S12509, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the small hit is set (S12509), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the ball passage monitoring process (S4184) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 233 is a flow chart showing this ball passing monitoring process (S4184). This ball passing monitoring process (S4184) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable effect. For execution, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 .

In the ball passage monitoring process (S4184), first, it is determined whether or not the delay passage ball entry switch (not shown) is on (S12601). If it is determined that the delay passage entry switch is on (S12601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the normal pattern hit flag 223fi provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12602). When it is determined that the normal pattern hit medium flag 223fi is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S12602: No), the process proceeds to S12611.

In the process of S12602, when it is determined that the normal/normal hit flag 223fi is ON (S12602: Yes), the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is read (S12603), and then the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff becomes " 00” is determined (S12604). When it is determined that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is "00" (S12604: Yes), the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is set to "01" (S12605), and the process proceeds to S12610. In the process of S12604, when it is determined that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is not 00 (S12604: No), the process of S12605 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S12610.

On the other hand, in the process of S12601, if it is determined that the delay passage entry switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12601: No), then whether or not the delay passage discharge switch (not shown) is on. (S12606). If it is determined that the delay passage discharge switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12606: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the delay passage discharge switch is on (S12606: Yes), the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is read (S12607), and then whether or not the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is "01". is determined (S12608). If it is determined that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is "01" (S12608: Yes), the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is set to "02" (S12609), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S12608 that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12608: No), the process proceeds to S12610. In the process of S12610, a value corresponding to the delay passage state flag 223ff is set (S12610), an error command is set (S12611), and then this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball moves through the specific region 650V during the small winning game. It is configured such that a jackpot (so-called double-win) game is executed by passing.

In addition, as a path for the ball to flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game, a first flow path ta (see FIG. 196) in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V ) and a second flow path tb (see FIG. 196) through which the ball can easily pass through the specific region 650V. As a result, the player pays attention to which channel the ball flows down during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball is distributed to the first flow path ta or the second flow path tb by the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a. It is also possible to make the player interested in Furthermore, when the ball flows down the second flow path tb that easily passes through the specific area 650V, the ease with which the ball enters the V winning device 650 is configured to vary according to the variation time of the special symbols. ing.

Furthermore, it is configured to vary the fluctuation time of the set special symbol according to the set game state and the winning small hit type. By configuring in this way, when winning a small win corresponding to a big win to which a time-saving state is imparted after the big-win game ends, the game state (advantageous time-saving) in which the ball is easily passed through the specific area 650V and the big win ends. A game state (disadvantageous time saving) can be set to make it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when winning a small win corresponding to the big win to which the time saving state is given later.

Then, in this embodiment, by using the above-described advantageous time saving and disadvantageous time saving configurations, once the jackpot is elected (first hit), a total of three jackpots including at least the first hit are executed. It is constructed so that a game state advantageous to the player is continued. By making it possible to set the game state in which the execution of the jackpot game is guaranteed a plurality of times in this way, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the electric accessory 3640a operates so as to make it easier to enter the ball. Then, the electric accessory 3640a shifts to the closed state based on the ball that has flowed down on the electric accessory 3640a entering the second ball entrance 3640, and at that time, the electric accessory 3640a is flowing down. The ball is distributed to the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb according to the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball has flowed down.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the ball located downstream of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a is distributed to the second flow path tb that is advantageous to the player, and It is configured such that when the ball is shot, the ball easily flows into the second flow path tb.

Therefore, in order to cause the ball to flow into the second flow path tb while the lottery for the second special symbol is being executed, it is necessary to continuously shoot the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the action of trying to obtain an advantageous result by launching the ball at a predetermined timing.

In the seventh embodiment, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path tb, that is, the ball distributed to the flow path that is advantageous to the player by the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a is directed toward the V winning device 650. Although it is configured to flow down, it may be configured so that a ball that has flowed down a flow path that is advantageous to the player can enter the general ball entrance 63 . As a result, many prize balls can be provided to the player.

Further, a valve member is provided in the V winning device 650 to change between a first state in which the ball can pass through the specific area 650V and a second state in which it is difficult for the ball to pass, and when the valve member is in the first state, the V prize is won. The variable time for winning the device 650 and the variable time for winning the V winning device 650 in the second state may be configured to be variable according to the set time saving state.

In addition, instead of the V winning device 650, a V attacker that is opened during the jackpot game is provided, and when the ball passes through a specific area in the V attacker, a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols) is given. It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 that

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 259. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are configured to be executed at the same time (in parallel), and the game state is When a latent definite state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) is set, lottery (fluctuation) of the second special design is facilitated and based on the lottery result of the second special design. It was configured to frequently generate a small winning game.

Thus, when the latent certainty state is set as the game state, that is, in order to frequently generate a small winning game in the second special symbol lottery in the low probability state of the normal symbol, similarly, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols), it is necessary to use a configuration that can easily execute the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, in order to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being frequently executed in the normal state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol set in the normal state has a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes). It was necessary to set a variation pattern.

In this way, if a long variation time is executed in the second special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed, it is possible that the player erroneously executes the lottery of the second special symbol. , Since the next special symbol lottery is not executed until the variation pattern ends, which interferes with the game, in the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (fluctuation) and the first special symbol lottery (fluctuation) The lottery (fluctuation) of 2 special symbols can be executed at the same time (in parallel).

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, during the big winning game, or during the small winning game executed in the low probability state (normal state, latent probability state) of the normal symbol, the execution opportunity of the second special symbol It is configured so that a ball can enter (be easier to enter) the second ball entry port 640. As a result, since it is possible to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being executed unless the winning game (jackpot game, small winning game) is executed, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed as in the above-described first embodiment. A small winning game is played based on the lottery of the second special symbol only during the latent state without using a configuration for executing (variation) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel). can occur frequently. Therefore, the control processing of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Further, according to the type of winning (big win, small winning), the winning type in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 and the winning type in which the ball is difficult to enter can be set. When a win (big win, small win) is won, not only the size of the privilege (the number of prize balls) obtainable during the winning game but also the balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during the winning game. The player may be interested in whether or not.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 when winning the first special symbol lottery and when winning the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the rate at which the easy-to-win hit type is set is made different. Specifically, winning with the second special symbol is easier than winning with the first special symbol. Configure.

By configuring in this way, once the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is shifted to the executable state, the lottery of the special figure 2 can be continued and made easy to execute. To give discomfort to a player by immediately ending the advantageous game mode even though the advantageous game mode advantageous to the player (a mode capable of executing the lottery of the special figure 2) is set. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol has a higher probability of winning a win (big win, small win) than the lottery for the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special pattern, only a big win (1/400 at low probability) is set without winning a small win, whereas in the lottery of the second special pattern, a big win is set. The probability of (1/400 at the time of low probability) is the same as the above-described first special symbol, but is set so as to win a small hit (300/400). Thus, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than the lottery of the first special symbol, so that the lottery of the first special symbol The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to make it easier to win a hit (big win, small win) than the lottery of the second special symbol.

As a result, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, it is possible to win a win (big win, small win) with a high probability. A winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbols can be executed frequently in a short period of time.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, a winning game is executed in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 with a higher probability when a small win is won than when a big win is won. are doing. Thus, when a small win is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed again after the winning game is finished.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, a plurality (four) of the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) can be stored (reserved storage), and according to the winning type Then, the opening operation pattern of the winning game is defined so that the number of pieces that can be retained and stored during one winning game is different.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to secure more reserved memories by one winning game. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the second opening and closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 that is opened in the winning game is in an open state (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). When the closed state (the state in which the ball cannot be guided to the second specific prize winning opening 3650a) is changed, a part of the ball falling from the second opening/closing door 3650f can enter the second ball entrance 640. configured to pass through In this way, a ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650, which is opened during the winning game, can enter the second ball entrance 640. The player can watch the movement of the ball entering the second specific winning hole 3650a and the movement of the ball entering the second ball entering hole 640.例文帳に追加

Here, with reference to FIG. 234, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 234 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 234, the eighth embodiment differs from the game board 13 of the first embodiment in that the configuration of the right region of the game board 13 is greatly different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 234, a first attacker (variable prize winning device) 650a is provided above the right side area of the game board 13, and a second attacker 3650 is provided substantially in the center of the right side area. A guide passage 3660 is provided below the second attacker 3650, and a second ball entrance 640 with an electric accessory 640a is provided at a position facing the outflow port of the guide passage 3660. , are very different. Other configurations are the same as those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234, a brief description will be given of the ball flow during a right-handed game in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Normally (other than during a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball fired toward the right side area of the game board 13 by the right-handed game is in the closed state (buried state) The opening and closing door 3650f It passes through and flows down so as to enter the general ball entrance 63 while passing through the game area on the right side of the guide passage 3660 .

This general ball entrance 63 (the general ball entrance 63 arranged on the right side of the second ball entrance 640) is set with one prize ball as a privilege given when a ball enters. there is Therefore, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the number of balls does not increase.

On the other hand, during the winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened, the opening and closing door 3650f is in an open state (protruding state), that is, a state in which the ball can flow down on the opening and closing door 3650f toward the second specific winning opening 3650a. , the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down on the open/close door 3650f and enters the second specific winning port 3650a. Then, the condition for closing the second attacker 3650 (elapse of a predetermined opening period, or the number of balls that have entered the second specific winning port 3650a reaches a predetermined upper limit winning number) is established, and the opening/closing door 3650f is established. is changed to the closed state (embedded state), the ball flowing down the downstream side of the opening/closing door 3650f flows into the guide passage 3660. As shown in FIG.

That is, in the eighth embodiment, even if a right-handed game is performed at normal time (other than during a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball path that can enter the second ball entrance 640 It is configured so that the ball does not flow down inside the guide passage 3660 in which is formed. By configuring in this way, unless the second attacker 3650 is opened by a winning game, the ball flowing down the guide passage 3660 will not enter the second ball entrance 640, so the lottery of the second special symbol You can limit the period during which

Furthermore, a through gate 67 is arranged between the opening/closing door 3650f and the inflow port of the guide passage 3660 so that the ball flowing into the guide passage 3660 passes through the through gate 67 before entering the guide passage 3660. It consists of Guidance passage 3660 is configured such that it takes about 2.5 seconds for the ball to flow down the guidance passage. In this way, a ball flowing down the flow path that can enter the second ball entrance 640 must pass through the through gate 67 and reach the second ball entrance 640 from the through gate 67. By configuring the time to be constant (approximately 2.5 seconds), the ball passing through the guide passage 3660 enters the second ball entrance 640 according to the set normal pattern fluctuation time. It is possible to easily change whether or not

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the variation time of the set normal symbols is varied according to the set game state. Specifically, a variable time of 2 seconds is set in the low probability state of the normal pattern (normal state, latent state), and a variable time of 0.1 seconds in the high probability state of the normal pattern (time saving state, probability variable state) is configured to be set. As a result, when the low-probability state of the normal pattern is set, when the ball passes through the guide path 3660, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640, and the high-probability state of the normal pattern is established. When a ball passes through the guide passage 3660 when set, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 .

Next, referring to FIG. 235, the configuration of the opening/closing door 3650f of the second attacker 3650 of the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 235(a) is a plan view schematically showing the opening/closing door 3650f in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 235(b) is the opening/closing door in the closed state (buried state). It is the top view which showed the door 3650f typically. As shown in FIG. 235(a), the opening/closing door 3650f of the present embodiment is arranged along the inclination of the opening/closing door 3650f (see FIG. 234) from the upper right side surface 3650y1 of the opening/closing door 3650f via the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening/closing door 3650f. It is configured to flow out toward the second specific winning port 3650a.

A first delay member 3650fa, a second delay member 3650fb, and a third delay member 3650fc are provided so that the ball meanders on the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening/closing door 3650f. .2 seconds. This falling period (1.2 seconds) is shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) for maintaining the open state when the second attacker 3650 is opened by the winning game (jackpot B, jackpot C, small hit). is configured to be By configuring in this way, in a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened, the ball can be made to enter the second specific winning port 3650a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a winning game for opening the second attacker 3650 is executed, the scenario of the opening operation is set so that the ball can win the second specific winning hole 3650a in all the winning games. However, without being limited to this, for example, as an opening operation scenario set during a winning game, an opening operation scenario in which the ball is likely to enter the second specific winning port 3650a and a ball flowing into the guide passage 3660 An easy opening operation scenario may be set.

In this case, for example, as an opening operation scenario of the second attacker 3650, the ball flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening/closing door 3650f flows down to a position facing the guide passage 3660 (downstream position ZD of the upper surface 3650f1) during a period (for example, 0. 5 seconds) is a period during which the opening/closing door 3650f is kept open. When the opening operation scenario defined in this way is set, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second specific winning port 3650a during the winning game, and the ball flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 of the open/close door 3650f flows into the guide passage 3660. becomes easier.

As a result, for example, when the winning upper limit number of balls into the second specific winning opening 3650a and the opening upper limit period of the opening/closing door 3650f are set as the conditions for ending the winning game, the second specific winning opening 3650a The winning game can be continued for a long period of time because the opening operation is executed in which the ball is difficult to win. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of balls flowing into the guide passage 3660 during one winning game, and to acquire more special figure 2 reserved memories.

Next, when the closing condition of the opening/closing door 3650f is established, the state shown in FIG. 235(a) is changed to the closed state (buried state) shown in FIG. 235(b). In this state, the ball located at the downstream position ZD passes through the through gate 67, and the ball located at the upstream position ZC also passes through the right area of the guide passage 3660. FIG.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the time for the upper surface ball of the opening/closing door 3650f to flow down is 1.2 seconds (upstream position ZC is 0.5 seconds, downstream position ZD is 0.7 seconds). It is constructed in such a manner that the open/close door 3650f is opened for 1.5 seconds in one small winning game. As a result, when the ball that has previously flowed down wins the second attacker 3650 and is detected by the detection switch 3650Z, the next ball can be positioned at the downstream position ZD. Therefore, when a small winning game is executed, the ball can be reliably passed through the guide passage 3660. - 特許庁

Note that the following configuration may be used instead of the configuration of this embodiment. That is, the position of the detection switch 3650Z for detecting the winning ball of the second attacker 3650 is positioned on the far side of the second attacker 3650 (the position of the modified example in FIG. 235), and from the opening of the second attacker 3650 to the detection switch 3650Z should be configured such that it takes 0.3 seconds for the sphere to pass through the distance ZE. By configuring in this way, even if the distance of the opening/closing door 3650f is shortened, the next falling ball can be reliably positioned at the downstream position ZD.

In addition, a plurality of opening patterns of the opening and closing door 3650f to be executed in the small winning game are prepared, and although the second attacker 3650 does not win, the small winning game in which the open period in which the ball can pass through the through gate 67 is set can be executed. can be configured to That is, using the small winning game, it is possible to execute the game for winning the ball to the second attacker 3650 and the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, the ball flow in the right area of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the second attacker 3650 is in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing a flow.

As shown in FIG. 236, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the open state (protruding state), all the balls fired by the right-handed game are received by the opening/closing door 3650f (the right side area of the game board 13). An opening/closing door 3650f is arranged so as to shield the . By configuring in this way, when a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened is executed, the ball can be easily entered into the second specific winning hole 3650a simply by performing a right-handed game.

Further, when the opening/closing door 3650f is positioned in the open state (protruding state), the inlet of the guide passage 3660 is blocked by the opening/closing door 3650f. It consists of In other words, in the eighth embodiment, the opening and closing door 3650f, which is opened by the winning game, has a function to make it easier to enter the ball into the second specific winning port 3650a, and the flow of the ball to the guide passage 3660 is regulated. It is used as a means to have a function for

Next, when the open/close door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), the ball shot to the right-handed area in the right-handed game flows down the area on the right side of the guide passage 3660 (see arrow in FIG. 237). . Here, in the eighth embodiment, the ball that flows down the right-handed area by the right-handed game executed when the opening and closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state) is prevented from flowing into the guide passage 3660 (difficult ) is configured.

Specifically, the nail K1 planted above the opening/closing door 3650f in the right area of the game board 13 is planted below the opening/closing door 3650f so as to form the inlet of the guide passage 3660. It is configured to be located on the right side (on the right side in the view of FIG. 237) by a distance Kz (approximately 10 mm) from the nail K2. The nail K1 and the nail K2 are arranged so that the interval in the height direction is one ball (approximately 15 mm). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball flowing down the right side of the nail K1 in a right-handed game from flowing into the inlet of the guide passage 3660 formed on the left side of the nail K2.

Furthermore, regarding the arrangement position of the second specific prize winning port 3650a in which the ball that has flowed down to the downstream end of the opening/closing door 3650f can win, the height direction distance from the nail K1 is shorter than the width direction distance. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), the ball will not enter the second specific prize winning port 3650a. In this embodiment, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 3650f is configured to change the state in which the ball can enter the second specific prize-winning port 3650a and the state in which the ball cannot (difficultly) win the prize. Other configurations may be used, for example, a variable member that can be changed between an open position for opening the opening of the second specific prize winning port 3650a and a closed position for closing the opening is provided by the second specific prize winning port 3650a and the opening/closing door 3650f. , and the variable member may be variably controlled to be variable in synchronization with the opening operation of the open/close door 3650f.

In this case, for example, when the open/close door 3650f is in a closed state (embedded state), that is, when the ball does not enter the second specific winning port 3650a, the variable member is positioned at the closed position. When the open/close door 3650f is in an open state (protruding state), that is, when the ball is allowed to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a, the variable portion is positioned at the open position. Variable control is good. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from entering the second specific winning hole 3650a at an unintended timing.

Furthermore, when using the configuration of the example described above, it is preferable to configure the variable member and the opening/closing door 3650f to be driven using one driving source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, or the like). As a result, the two members can be easily driven with regularity. In addition, it is preferable to configure the variable member to be variable by delaying the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing door 3650f by a grace period considering the falling time of the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball that has flowed down to the downstream end of the opening/closing door 3650f cannot win a prize in the second specific prize winning port 3650a due to the variable operation of the variable member.

Next, while the ball is flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 (see FIG. 235(a)) of the opening/closing door 3650f, the ball flow when the opening/closing door 3650f changes to the closed state (buried state) will be described with reference to FIG. 237. do. As shown in FIG. 237, below the door 3650f, a nail K2 is planted in the vicinity of the downstream ⅓ position of the door 3650f. a road is formed. Therefore, the ball flowing down the upstream 2/3 range of the opening/closing door 3650f flows down the area on the right side of the guide passage 3660 when the opening/closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (buried state). On the other hand, the ball flowing down the downstream 1/3 range of the opening/closing door 3650f passes through the through gate 67 and enters the guide passage 3660 when the opening/closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (buried state). flow into

The guiding passage 3660 used in the eighth embodiment is formed in a meandering shape in order to lengthen the time (falling time) until the ball reaches the second ball inlet 640. The time required for the ball to flow down the flow path ty from the position 3661a to the discharge position 3661b is set to about 2.5 seconds.

Then, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and flowed down the flow path ty reaches the second ball entrance 640, if the electric accessory 640a is open, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, If the accessory 640a is closed, the ball will flow down toward the out port 66 without entering the second ball inlet 640.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right side area, but it is not limited to this, and may be provided below the guide path 3660. FIG. As a result, the balls flowing down a plurality of channels can enter the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a at the same timing.

Furthermore, a delay member may be provided on the bottom surface of the guide passage 3660 used in the present embodiment to delay the flow speed of the balls.

<Regarding production content in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 238 to 241, the characteristic effects performed in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, it is configured to make it easier to acquire the right of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reserved memory) during the period when the winning game (jackpot game, small winning game) is being executed. The lottery for the second special symbol is configured to make it easier to win a small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol. That is, when the normal state is set, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed by the left-handed game, the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot game is started, the right-handed game is executed and released in the jackpot game. A game in which the attacker (first attacker 650a, second attacker 3650) to be operated wins a ball to win a prize ball (privilege), while acquiring the right of lottery (special figure 2 reserved memory) of the second special symbol. is done.

Then, when the special figure 2 reserved memory is acquired during the winning game, a lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed after the winning game is completed, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big win or a small win. Then, the winning game is executed again. In the eighth embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability in the lottery of the second special symbol, once the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed, the lottery of the special figure 2 is repeatedly executed. It becomes a game state that is easy to be played.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, an effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed (whether the lottery of the special figure 2 has moved to an executable state) is executed. It is configured so that As a result, the player can play the game while confirming the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by executing the winning game (performing operation in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), because it is configured to be able to acquire the special figure 2 pending storage, first, FIG. As shown in (a), an effect prompting to acquire the special figure 2 reserved memory is executed during the execution of the winning game (the winning operation in which the second attacker 3650 is opened). FIG. 238(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game when the second attacker 3650 wins the jackpot C, which is a jackpot that is opened.

As shown in FIG. 238(a), when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C is started, the guidance display area Dm3 displays " "Right hit" is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 811 collects the keys 871 is executed. This key 871 is set in a production mode so that the number corresponding to the number of pending memories of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is collected, and the character 811 collects many keys 871, It suggests (informs) the player that the number of reserved memories in FIG. 2 is large.

Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment "Collect treasure keys" for explaining the game nature of the effect is displayed. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired during the jackpot game (the key 871 is collected), and the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed after the jackpot game is completed. 871 is used to open a treasure box 873 (see FIG. 239), and an effect of informing the player of the contents of the treasure box 873 is executed.

In addition, below the main display area Dm, there are formed a winning display area Dm12a in which a value relating to the number of winning balls won during the jackpot game is added and displayed, and a round number display area Dm12b indicating the current number of round games played. . In the example shown in FIG. 238(a), since the jackpot game has just started, "00000" is displayed in the winning display area Dm12a, indicating that no prize balls have been won during the jackpot game. is shown. "Round 1" is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b.

In addition, in the performance during the jackpot game, obtained display areas Dm10a to Dm10d for informing the player of the number of collected keys 871 are formed at the right position of the main display area Dm. In the effect executed in this embodiment, it is configured so that one key 871 is collected each time one reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired. It is configured so that four keys 871 are displayed. It should be noted that this acquired display area Dm10a ~ Dm10d is also a display area for showing the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2.

Furthermore, in the secondary display area Ds, a comment "Keep hitting right" is displayed to show the game contents to the player, and a second guidance display area formed below the guidance display area Dm3 is displayed. In Dm11, a diagram schematically showing the configuration around the second entrance 640 is displayed. As described above, in this embodiment, since it is configured so that it is easier to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 by continuously firing the ball, other effects are provided so as not to provide the player with a disadvantageous game. The comment for indicating the content of the game is displayed in a display mode (a display mode in which the character size is enlarged) that is emphasized more than the display mode used in . In this way, by using the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds to explain in detail the game content aimed at during the jackpot game, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Then, after the display of FIG. 238(a) is executed, the jackpot game is executed, and when the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired, the effect contents shown in FIG. 238(b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . FIG. 238(b) is a schematic diagram showing a part of the effect displayed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 238(b), when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a jackpot game, the main display area Dm indicates that the ball entered the second ball entrance 640 (particularly An effect indicating that the key 871 has been collected is executed as an effect for informing the player that the reserved memory in FIG. 2 has been acquired, and a comment "Congratulations" is displayed.

Furthermore, in the obtained display area Dm10a, a key 871 is displayed to indicate that one key 871 has been obtained. Also, in the second guide display area Dm11, a specific effect is displayed at a position imitating the second ball entrance 640 in order to visually notify the player that the ball has entered. The win display area Dm12a displays "00085" as the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game, and the round number display area Dm12b displays "2" indicating that the current round is the second round. there is

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the screen shown in FIG. 239(a) is displayed. FIG. 239(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. During this ending period, the main display is a notification mode (display mode 872 indicating that two keys have been collected) for informing the player of the total number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 acquired during this jackpot game. Along with being displayed in the area Dm, a comment of "Continue right-handed hitting" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds for indicating that the right-handed hitting game is to be continued even after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, even after the jackpot game ends, the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 during the jackpot game is changed as the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 in order to make the player continue to play the right-handed game (Fig. 238(a) ) is set to a more emphasized display mode than (see ). As a result, the player can be reliably informed that the right-handed game must be continued even after the jackpot game ends.

After that, when the jackpot game ends and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the key 871 collected during the jackpot game is used as shown in FIG. An effect of opening the treasure box 873 by pressing is executed. FIG. 239(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed when the special figure 2 variation is executed after the end of the jackpot game.

Figure 239 (b) is a state in which the special figure 2 variation is being executed, so in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is fluctuating display showing that mode is displayed. Then, an effect using one of the two keys 871 (special figure 2 hold) collected during the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the number of keys 871 displayed in the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d is reduced from two at the end of the jackpot to one.

Also, while the continuous performance is being executed from the jackpot game, the acquisition display area Dm12a is always displayed, and when the small winning is won by the special figure 2 lottery, the ball is won by the second attacker 3650 to win. Information on the number of winning balls played is also added and displayed. As a result, the number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous period) during which the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be executed can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, the round number display area Dm12b is also continuously displayed in the same manner as the acquisition display area Dm12a described above, and the characters "round extra" are displayed while the game based on the special figure 2 variation is being performed. Thus, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the advantageous state is extended and set even after the end of the big winning game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to display the character "Round Extra" for the game period in which the special figure 2 variation can be executed. A summing means is provided for summing up the number of prize balls obtained during an executable game period, and the number of prize balls summed up by the summing means can be obtained in one round game executed during the jackpot game. When it is determined that the number has been reached, the number of rounds displayed during the big win game may be added by 1, or the small win won during the game period in which the special figure 2 variation can be executed. A small winning number measuring means for measuring the number of times is provided, and when the number of small winnings measured by the small winning number measuring means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the number of rounds displayed during the big winning game. may be configured to be incremented by 1.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is being extended. Also, in this case, it is preferable to perform an effect (see FIG. 239(b)) to open the treasure box 873 using the key 871 even while the jackpot game is being performed. As a result, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played from the effect being executed, so that the player is prevented from easily predicting the next game.

If a small win is won while the effect shown in FIG. 239(b) is being executed, the effect of opening the treasure box 873 and exposing the contents of the treasure box 873 is executed as shown in FIG. FIG. 240(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed when a small win is won when the normal state is set as the gaming state.

In this embodiment, when the normal design low probability state (normal state, latent probability state) is set than the case where the normal design high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set as the game state is configured to make it easier to acquire the special figure 2 reserved memory during the small hit game. And in the example shown in FIG. 240 (a), since the small hit is won in the state where the normal state is set, it shows that the small hit game that can acquire the special figure 2 reserved memory is executed. “V” is displayed as the display mode of the contents of the treasure box 873 .

In addition, there are multiple display modes other than "V" that show the contents of the treasure box 873. For example, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 is out, "x" is displayed, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 is reserved. If it is a small win that is difficult to remember, a display mode imitating "?" is set. In addition, a pre-discrimination process for preliminarily discriminating the winning information of the second special symbol that is reserved and stored is executed, and the decision result of the pre-discrimination process is a jackpot or a player in the reserved information that is reserved and stored. If the determination result indicates that there is a small hit that is advantageous to the second special symbol (special figure 2) corresponding to the reservation information is performed before the variation is performed Other By using the display mode showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, a display mode is set to suggest that a big win or a small win advantageous to the player is included in the retained information retained and stored. may be configured.

Here, as a result of the special figure 2 fluctuation, if you win a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, that is, a jackpot in which a high probability state of normal symbols (for example, a short time state) is set after the jackpot game ends, FIG. As shown in (b), a display mode imitating a “skull” is set as a display mode for showing the contents of the treasure box 873 .

Furthermore, based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 currently executed and the preliminary determination result for the hold information held and stored, the display mode of the key 871 and the display mode of the treasure box 873 may be changed. Well, for example, as shown in FIG. 241(a), a display mode (a rusted key and a crumbling treasure box) may be displayed to indicate that the special symbol lottery result is a loss. As a result, the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbol this time before opening the treasure box 873, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

238(a) to 241(a) are executed repeatedly, and when the key 871 disappears (when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 disappears), the advantageous period advantageous to the player ends. Therefore, the ending screen shown in FIG. 241(b) is displayed. In this ending screen, the value indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the current advantageous period (the period combining the jackpot game period and the special figure 2 fluctuation period) (the value displayed in the acquired display area Dm12a) and the small winning is displayed. Then, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 for guiding the player to return the game method to the left-handed game is variably displayed to 'left-handed', and 'return to left-handed, please' is displayed in the sub display area Ds. ” comment.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 is changed so that the game method is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game at the timing when the reservation memory of the special figure 2 is lost, not at the transition timing of the game state. ing. In other words, in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state, if there is a special figure 2 reservation, the right-handed game is guided, and if there is no special figure 2 reservation, the left-handed game is guided. ing. This allows the player to play an appropriate game without playing a disadvantageous game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the transition flow of each game state in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 242 is a transition diagram showing the transition flow of each game state in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 244, there are 5 types of jackpot types (jackets A to E) that are set when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. There are three types of jackpot types (jackets F to H) that are set when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols.

The game state set after the end of the big win game is different according to the big win type set when the big win is won and the game state set when the big win is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make each game state transition in a complicated manner in the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, a semi-advantageous game state is set by providing a game state (semi-advantageous game state) in which it is easy to shift to an advantageous game state (potential state) that is most advantageous to the player and a game state in which it is difficult to shift. In this case, the player can continue to play the game, so that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 242, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, a game is executed in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is drawn with the normal state set as the game state. Then, when the special figure 1 jackpot is elected, the variable state is set with a probability of 65% (jackpot A, B winning), and the time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (jackpot E winning), with a probability of 10%. A normal state is set (jackets C, D won).

Among them, when the jackpot C is won (5%), the second attacker 3650 opens in a part of the jackpot game, so it is possible to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game. .

Therefore, when winning a jackpot in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot D (5%) is played again with the special drawing 1 lottery game, and the jackpot C (5%) A game for drawing a special figure 2 is executed. Then, the special figure 2 wins the small prize with a probability of about 75%, and in the small winning game executed in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal pattern, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is stored during the small winning game. Since it is configured to be obtainable, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the normal state, the special figure 2 game can be continuously executed as long as the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not lost. Become.

In the state where the normal state is set as the game state, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 to be executed, the variable state is set with a probability of 30% (jackpot F winning), and the probability is 35%. A latent state is set (jackpot G winning), and a time saving state is set with a probability of 35% (jackpot H winning).

Next, when the probability variable state is set, since the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the reserved storage of the special figure 2. Also, it is configured so that it is not possible (difficult) to acquire a new reserved memory of special figure 2 during the small winning game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the probability variable state is a game state that is more advantageous than the time saving state because the probability of winning the jackpot of the special symbol is high. Even if a small hit is won in the lottery shown in FIG. 2, a new reserved memory for the special figure 2 cannot be acquired, so the game state is disadvantageous to the player.

In the state where the probability state is set, if you win the jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, the probability state is set again with a probability of 35% (jackpot A winning), and the probability state is set with a probability of 30% ( Winning jackpot B), a normal state is set with a probability of 10% (winning jackpots C and D), and a time-saving state is set with a probability of 25% (winning jackpot E). Then, if you win the jackpot in the lottery of special figure 2, the variable state is set again with a probability of 30% (jackpot F winning), and the latent state is set with a probability of 35% (jackpot G winning), 35%. A time-saving state is set with probability (jackpot H winning).

Next, when the latent definite state is set, since the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, a small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2. In that case, it is configured so that it is possible to acquire a new reserved memory of special figure 2 during the small winning game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the latent state is a state in which the special symbol jackpot winning probability is high, and the state having the reserved memory of the special figure 2, when the small winning is won in the special figure 2 lottery , Since it is possible to acquire the reserved memory of the new special figure 2, it becomes the most advantageous game state for the player.

In the state where the latent state is set, if you win the jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, the latent state will be set again with a probability of 65% (jackpot A, B winning), and the normal state will be restored with a probability of 10%. It is set (jackpot C, D winning), and a time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (jackpot E winning). Then, when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the variable state is set with a probability of 65% (jackpot F, G winning), and the latent state is set with a probability of 35% (jackpot G winning), 35%. A time saving state is set with a probability of (jackpot H winning).

Finally, when the time-saving state is set, the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so it is assumed that a small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2. Also, it is configured so that it is not possible (difficult) to acquire a new reserved memory of special figure 2 during the small winning game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the time saving state has a low special symbol jackpot winning probability, and in the state of having the reserved memory of the special figure 2, even if a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, a new Since it is not possible to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2, it becomes the most disadvantageous game state for the player.

In the state where the time saving state is set, if you win the jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, the variable state is set with a probability of 65% (jackpot A, B winning), and the normal state is set with a probability of 10% ( Winning jackpots C and D), and the time saving state is set again with a probability of 25% (jackpot E winning). Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 2, the probability variable state is set with a probability of 30% (jackpot F winning), the latent state is set with a probability of 35% (jackpot G winning), and the probability of 35%. The time saving state is set again (jackpot H winning).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when there is no reservation memory for special figure 2, regardless of the game state, it is configured so that the ball cannot be newly entered into the second ball entrance 640. ing. Further, the variation time of the first special symbol is configured to be the same between the high probability state and the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in a state in which there is no reserved memory of the special figure 2, even if the state of the normal design varies, the advantage to the player does not change.

In other words, in the state of running the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1, the low probability state of the special design (normal state, time saving state) becomes the same degree of advantage, the high probability state of the special design (variable state, latent Probable state) is a game state more advantageous than the low probability state of special symbols, because the probability of jackpot of special symbols is high.

In addition, in the state with the reserved memory of the special figure 2, in the high probability state of the normal pattern, it is not possible to acquire the new reserved memory of the special figure 2, so the high probability state of the normal pattern (variable state, time saving state) Rather, the low-probability state of normal symbols (normal state, latent certainty state) is a game state more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the most advantageous game state for the player is the potential state, and the most disadvantageous game state is the time-saving state.

Furthermore, when the jackpot is won, the ratio of shifting to the most advantageous latent state for the player will be explained. High (30%). Therefore, the definite variable state becomes a semi-advantageous gaming state in which it is easy to shift to the most advantageous advantageous gaming state (potential definite state).

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 250. FIG. FIG. 243(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243(a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment includes a first winning random number 8 table 202ga, a first winning type selection 8 table 202gb, a second winning random number 8 table 202gc, and a variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. , an operation scenario 8 table 202ge. It should be noted that the configuration (table ) is the same as that of each of the above-described embodiments, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243(a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment includes a first winning random number 8 table 202ga, a first winning type selection 8 table 202gb, a second winning random number 8 table 202gc, and a variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. , an operation scenario 8 table 202ge. It should be noted that the configuration (table ) is the same as that of each of the above-described embodiments, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first winning random number 8 table 202ga is a data table used for the same purpose as the first winning random number table 202a used in each of the above-described embodiments. If it matches the value of the random number set by the random number 8 table 202ga as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

In addition, this first winning random number 8 table 202ga prescribes the same number of random numbers for the big win for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (see FIG. 243(b)). In this way, by differentiating the number of random numbers to be a small hit (set only for one of the special symbols), a privilege ( It is possible to vary the degree of expectation for granting (jackpot or small win).

Here, the contents of the first winning random number 8 table 202ga will be described with reference to FIG. 243(b). FIG. 243(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 8 table 202ga. This first random number 8 table 202ga defines a random number value (determined value) determined to be a big hit and a random value (determined value) determined to be a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. This data table is referred to when acquiring the lottery result in special symbol variation start processing 8 (see FIG. 252) (see S11003 and S11004 in FIG. 252).

The first winning random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243(b)) is a data table that defines the correspondence between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the lottery result. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 1" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202ga1 in FIG. 243 (b)), and the first special symbol is determined to be off. "2 to 399" is defined as the range of judgment values to be determined (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243(b)).

In addition, "2 to 99" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243 (b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol "100 to 399" is defined as the range (see 202ga3 in FIG. 243(b)). In addition, in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variable state), "0 to 19" is defined as the range of the determination value that is determined to be a big hit (see 202ga4 in FIG. 243 (b)), and the first special symbol is out "20 to 399" is specified as the range of the judgment value to be judged (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243(b)). In addition, "20 to 99" is defined as the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243 (b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol "100 to 399” are defined (see 202ga6 in FIG. 243(b)).

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize matches one of the determination values corresponding to the big winning defined in this first winning random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243(b)) Secondly, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, and when it matches with any of the determination values corresponding to the small winning, it is determined to be a special symbol small winning.

Next, referring to FIG. 244, the contents of the first winning type selection 8 table 202gb will be described. FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection 8 table 202gb. In the eighth embodiment, there are 5 types of jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot E) set when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and the second special pattern (special pattern 2). Three types of jackpot types (jackpot F to jackpot H) are stipulated when a jackpot is won in the lottery, and depending on the jackpot type, an opening action scenario (action scenario) set during the jackpot game, , the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is different.

Specifically, when the type of symbol won in the jackpot is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the determination value of the obtained first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 34", the type of jackpot is "jackpot A". is set. This "jackpot A" is a 10-round probability variable jackpot, and action A is set as an opening action scenario (action scenario). The specific contents defined in the operation scenario will be described later using the operation scenario 8 table 202ge described in FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is defined that the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is different according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The game state is normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or time saving state (low probability of special symbols state, high probability state of normal patterns), the probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (high probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns). For example, it is stipulated that the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 64", "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type. In this "jackpot B", the same jackpot game as the above-described "jackpot A" is executed (a jackpot game in which action A is set as an opening action scenario (action scenario) with a 10-round probability variable jackpot), The game states set after the end of the jackpot game are made different.

Specifically, if you win the "jackpot B", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), or a short time state (low probability of special symbols state, high probability state of normal symbols), the probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or If the latent definite state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), it is defined that the latent definite state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

In this way, by providing the jackpot types in which the game content (operation scenario) of the jackpot game is the same and the game state set after the jackpot game is different, the player who is executing the jackpot game can win the jackpot. It is possible to prevent the game state set after the end of the game from being grasped in advance (before the end of the jackpot game). In addition, by making it difficult to predict the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game depending on the game content of the jackpot game, for example, a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is performed during the jackpot game. It is preferable to provide a suggestion effect execution means for executing it immediately. By configuring in this way, since the player will pay attention to the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this case, a suggestive effect setting is provided for setting the effect mode of the suggestive effect executed during the big win game based on the game state set after the end of the big win game and the game contents of the big win game. should be configured to Specifically, the game content of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game is finished are ranked in the order that is advantageous to the player, and each rank corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is fused ( It is preferable to set one effect mode out of a plurality of effect modes based on the summed value (information). Thus, as the jackpot game progresses (as the game content of the jackpot game becomes clear), it becomes easier to predict the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends based on the performance mode of the suggested performance to be executed. A player can be made to pay attention to the suggestive performance for a long period of time during the big winning game, and the performance effect can be further enhanced.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 69", "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type. In this "jackpot C", 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the same way as the above-described "jackpot A". This is a big win in which a scenario of operation B is set, in which the game content is defined to open both the 3650. Then, it is a normal jackpot in which a low probability of special symbols is set as a game state after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, when winning the "jackpot C", the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, Normal pattern high probability state), time saving state (special pattern low probability state, normal pattern high probability state), or latent state (special pattern high probability state, normal pattern low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is stipulated that the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 74", "jackpot D" is set. For this "jackpot D", the operation scenario of the action A is set so that the game contents of the jackpot game are the same as those of the above-described "jackpot A". And, like the above-mentioned "big win C", it is a normal big win in which a low probability of special symbols is set as the game state after the big win game ends.

Specifically, when winning the "jackpot D", the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, Normal pattern high probability state), time saving state (special pattern low probability state, normal pattern high probability state), or latent state (special pattern high probability state, normal pattern low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is stipulated that the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends.

When the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is "75 to 99", "jackpot E" is set. In this "jackpot E", the same jackpot game as the above-described "jackpot D" is executed (10-round normal jackpot, a jackpot game in which action A is set as an opening action scenario (action scenario)), Only the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is different from "jackpot D".

Specifically, when "jackpot E" is won, the game state at the time of jackpot winning is normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, Normal pattern high probability state), time saving state (special pattern low probability state, normal pattern high probability state), or latent state (special pattern high probability state, normal pattern low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is stipulated that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, if the type of symbol won in the jackpot is the second special pattern (special pattern 2) and the determination value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 29", "jackpot F" is set as the jackpot type. be. This "jackpot F" is a jackpot game having the same game content as the above-described "jackpot A", that is, a 10-round probability variable jackpot, and action A is set as an opening action scenario (action scenario). And the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), time saving state (special symbols Low probability state, high probability state of normal symbols), or latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), that is, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, definite change after the end of the jackpot game It specifies that the state is to be set.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 64", "jackpot G" is set. This "jackpot G" is a 2-round probability variable jackpot in which a 2-round jackpot game is executed, and an action scenario of an action C in which the game content for opening the second attacker 3650 is defined is set. And if you win the "jackpot G", the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, normal symbols) high probability state), or if it is a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the potential state, the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Finally, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99", "jackpot H" is set. This "jackpot H" is a 10-round normal jackpot in which the operation scenario of the action A is set such that the jackpot game having the same game contents as the above-described "jackpot D" is executed. And if you win the "jackpot H", the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, normal symbols) high probability state), time-saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), or latent state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), that is, game at the time of jackpot winning Regardless of the state, it is stipulated that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the state where the second special symbol lottery can be executed (the state in which the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is secured), the normal symbol low probability state (normal state, latent state) is set, it is possible to provide a game more advantageous to the player than when the high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) of the normal pattern is set.

Specifically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 75%. ) is configured to be opened. Then, the opening operation of the second attacker 3650 by the small winning game provides a state in which the ball easily flows through the through gate 67 and into the guide passage 3660 (see FIG. 243). When the normal symbol low probability state is set, the normal symbol variation time (2 seconds) suitable for the time until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entrance 640 is set. Therefore, the ball passing through the through gate 67 can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 .

On the other hand, when the normal symbol high probability state is set, the normal symbol fluctuation time (0.1 Seconds), more specifically, a normal game per game (electric role 640a (opening operation) is set to be short enough to complete the fluctuation time. Therefore, it is difficult for a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to enter the second ball entrance 640 .

By constructing in this way, it is possible to vary the acquisition number of the second special symbols in the reserved memory during the small winning game according to the game state set when winning the small winning. It should be noted that, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols, the low probability state of normal symbols is set during the jackpot game, so regardless of the game state set when the jackpot is won, the second special It is possible to make it easier to acquire the reserved memory of the design.

The operation scenario 8 table 202ge is a table that defines the operations of the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 3650 when the game state is a big win or a small win. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines whether or not it is possible to acquire the operation content and the special figure 2 pending during operation for each scenario type.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described with reference to FIG. 245(a). FIG. 245(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge. The action scenario 8 table 202ge defines a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 opens 10 rounds when the scenario type is A for a jackpot. Therefore, when the scenario A is set, since the second attacker 3650 is not opened, it is not possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game. Next, when the scenario type is B for a jackpot, a jackpot game is defined in which the second attacker 3650 is released for 1 to 2 rounds and the first attacker 650 is released for 3 to 10 rounds. there is Therefore, when the scenario B is set, since the second attacker 3650 is opened, it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game.

Next, when the scenario type is C for a jackpot, a jackpot game is defined in which the second attacker 3650 is released for one to two rounds. Therefore, when the scenario C is set, since the second attacker 3650 is opened, it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game. In the case of a small hit, the second attacker 3650 is opened for one round. Therefore, it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the small winning game.

Now, with reference to FIG. 245(b), the contents of each scenario defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described. FIG. 245(b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario. As shown in FIG. 245(b), when scenario A is set, 2 seconds are set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and the first attacker 650 is set for 30 seconds as one round game, or It will be open until the number of prizes reaches 10 balls. When one round game ends, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario is set in which the next round game is executed. Then, when the tenth round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

When scenario B is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times, or It is set until the number of winning prizes reaches 3 balls. When one round game ends, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario is set in which the next round game is executed. Then, when the interval period after the second round game has passed, as the third round game, the first attacker 650 is released for 30 seconds or until the winning number reaches 10 balls. When the tenth round game ends, 4 seconds are set as an ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

When scenario C is set, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times. Alternatively, it is set until the winning number reaches three balls. When one round game ends, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario is set in which the next round game is executed. When the second round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

In the scenario set during the small winning game, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the small winning game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds once. It is set until it is executed or the number of wins reaches one ball. When one round game ends, 4 seconds are set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, part of the jackpot game (jackpot B, jackpot C) and a hit game that opens the second attacker 3650 in the small hit game are configured to be executed. there is Therefore, the ball can pass through the through gate 67 during the winning game, and the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Further, as shown in FIG. 245(b), when the second attacker 3650 is opened in the jackpot game, the number of times the second attacker 3650 is opened is higher than when the second attacker 3650 is opened in the small hit game. Since it is set to increase, in one winning game, more balls can enter the second ball entrance 640 in the big winning game than in the small winning game.

Furthermore, as described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state) is set, even if the ball is passed through the through gate 67, the guidance passage 3660 is configured so that the ball that has flowed down cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 (becomes difficult), and when a big win game is executed, a low probability state of normal symbols is set, and a small win game When executed, the small winning game is executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small winning. Therefore, the big winning game becomes a winning game in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the small winning game.

The second winning random number 8 table 202gc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 15) used in each of the above-described embodiments. is used to refer to the second winning random number 8 table 202gc to determine whether or not there is a winning.

Here, the contents of the second winning random number 8 table 202gc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number 8 table 202gc. The second hit random number 8 table 202gc (see FIG. 246) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "0 to 237" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see 202gc1 in FIG. 246). In addition, in the high-probability state of normal symbols, "0 to 238" is defined as the determination value for winning normal symbols (see 202gc3 in FIG. 246). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the second winning random number 8 table 202gc are referred to. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a normal pattern hit.

In addition, in the normal state of the normal design, "238, 239" is defined as the determination value for the deviation from the normal design (see 202gc2 in FIG. 246). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "239" is defined as the determination value of the deviation of the normal design (see 202gc4 in FIG. 246).

The variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments. A variation pattern in which different variation times are set is defined in correspondence with the result of the lottery and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248. FIG. FIG. 247 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and FIG. FIG. 248(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents that are specified, and FIG. 248(b) schematically shows the contents specified in the time saving/probability variation 8 table 202gd2 specified by the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd It is a schematic diagram.

Here, with reference to FIG. 248(a), the contents of the normal/visibility 8 table 202gd1 will be described. This normal/latency 8 table 202gd1 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the normal state/latency state is set as the gaming state, and is a time saving/probability variation 8 table 202gd2 (time saving state , or a variation pattern table that is referred to when the variable probability state is set), it is easier to set a variation time that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the second ball entrance 640 or the second attacker 3650 The fluctuation time is defined as follows.

To explain in detail the contents defined in the normal / latent 8 table 202gd1, if the type of special symbol is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, "outside fluctuation" (variation time 30 to 120 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and if the lottery result is a big hit, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99" for the range , "Hit Normal Variation" (variation time 30 seconds) is defined as a variation pattern. On the other hand, for the range of "100 to 179", "win super fluctuation" (variation time 60 seconds) is defined, and for the range "180 to 198", "win special fluctuation" (variation time 120 seconds) is defined.

Then, if the type of the special symbol is special figure 2 and the lottery result is out, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern is defined as "out variation" (variation time 5 seconds). If the lottery result is a small win, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, "small win fluctuation" (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is acquired. Regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, "hit variation" (variation time: 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the normal/latency state, the variation time is set to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248(b), the contents defined in the time saving/probability variation 8 table 202gd2 will be specifically described. If the type of special symbol is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern is "out middle variation" (variation time 30 to 60 milliseconds). If the lottery result is a jackpot, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 39", the variation pattern is defined as "normal winning variation" (variation time: 30 milliseconds). . In the case of "40 to 119", "win super variation" (variation time 60 milliseconds) is defined. In the case of "120 to 198", "win special fluctuation" (variation time 120 milliseconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern.

Then, if the type of special symbol is special figure 2 and the lottery result is out, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern is "off short variation" (variation time 1 millisecond) is defined, and when the lottery result is a small win, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, "small win short fluctuation" (variation time 1 millisecond) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and the lottery result is a hit. In the case, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, "win short variation" (variation time 1 millisecond) is defined as the variation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the variation time is set to 1 millisecond regardless of the lottery result.

Next, referring to FIG. 249, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 249 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 249, the RAM 203 of the eighth embodiment includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol reserved ball. Number counter 203d, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, variable probability flag 203g, variable time counter 203gc, medium hit flag 203o, medium hit flag 203p, round end flag 203gd, other memory areas 203z. It should be noted that the configurations (flags, counters, areas) with the same names as the electrical configurations used in any of the above-described embodiments have the same uses as those of the above-described embodiments, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

It should be noted that the other memory area 203z of this embodiment has a data area capable of storing the currently set game state, and the special symbol high probability state, low probability state, or normal symbol high probability state is stored. States and low-probability states can be stored, and conditions until each state ends (transition to another state) and the current situation for those conditions can be updated. Since the specific contents are the same as the control processing for the variable probability flag, the variable probability counter, and the time saving counter in each embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga differs from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1~C3 stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga, the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on the winning of the second ball entrance 640, and other configurations are the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The variable time counter 203gc is a counter for counting variable time. A counter value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is set in the variation time counter 203gc (see S11011 in FIG. 252). Also, this variable time counter 203gc is decremented by 1 (see S10914 in FIG. 251) in the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 251), and whether the variable time has elapsed based on the value of this variable time counter 203gc is determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 250(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250(a), the ROM 222 of the tenth embodiment has the same electrical configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 250(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250(b), the RAM 223 of the tenth embodiment includes a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga, a fluctuation start flag 223fa, It has a stop type selection flag 223fb, a variable time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a jackpot effect extension flag 223gb, and a memory area 223z. It should be noted that the configurations (flags, counters, areas) with the same names as the electrical configurations used in any of the above-described embodiments have the same uses as those of the above-described embodiments, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on the winning of the second ball entrance 640, and other configurations are the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The jackpot production extension flag 223gb is a flag for indicating that the production during the jackpot game (see FIG. 238(a)) is continued even after the jackpot game ends, and continues after the jackpot game ends. It is set to ON when it is determined to execute (extend the jackpot effect). This jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on when a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is received from main control device 110 (S12806 in FIG. 257), and the received command indicates that the number of reserved balls is If it is determined that the command indicates 0, it is turned off (S12906 in FIG. 258). When the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on, the jackpot extension effect is executed after the jackpot game (see FIG. 239(a)).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 251, special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 8 (S9001). This special symbol variation process 8 (S9001) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed by the device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process 8, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a big hit or a small hit (S10901). Specifically, it is determined whether one of the flag 203o during the big hit and the flag 203p during the small hit is ON. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of a big hit or a small hit (S10901: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

In the process of S10901, when it is determined that the special symbol is neither a big hit nor a small hit (S10901: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S10902), When it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S10902: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb (number of times N2 of variable display held based on the second special symbol lottery) is obtained (S10903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is greater than 0 (S10904). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is not 0 (S10904: Yes), subtract 1 from the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb (S10905), and change by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is set (S10906). The command for the number of pending balls set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223ga.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S10906, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is shifted (S10907). In the process of S10907, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203ga are shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S10913.

On the other hand, in the process of S10904, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is 0 (S10904: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the value of the first special symbol (S10908), and determines whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10909).

In the process of S10909, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10909: No), both the first special symbol and the second special symbol start a new fluctuation. Since it is in a state in which it is not possible to On the other hand, in the process of S10909, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S10909: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S10910), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S10911). The command for the number of pending balls set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S10911, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S10907 (S10909), and the process proceeds to S10913. Transition. In the processing of S10913 executed after the processing of S10907 or S10912, the special symbol variation start processing 8 for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is performed (S10913), and this processing ends. The details of this special symbol variation start process 8 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S10902, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S10902: Yes), the value of the fluctuating time counter 203gc is updated by subtracting 1 (S10914), and the post-update fluctuating time counter Based on the value of 203gc, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10915). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter 203gc updated in the process of S10914 has become zero. The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S10915: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10916), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10915, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S10915: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10917). The display mode of the stop symbols is set in advance by special symbol variation start processing 8 (S10913), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to H is determined.

After the process of S10916 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 8 is , It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S10918). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S10918: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S10919), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S10920), and the process proceeds to S10921. do. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S10919, when the main processing (see FIG. 52) jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed, branch to S1101: Yes, and the opening command is set (S1102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

In the processing of S10918, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special design (S10918: No), the processing of S10919 and S10920 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S10921.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 8 (see S9001 in FIG. 251) in the eighth embodiment, the technical idea for stopping and displaying the special symbol for a predetermined period of time and the control contents are changed as in the above-described second embodiment. It may be configured to add. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery result of the specific symbols in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252, special symbol variation start processing 8 (S10913) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 8 (S10913). This special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 251) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga, a lottery (whether or not a special symbol big hit) or a "special symbol off" This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the one-symbol display device 37 and the third-symbol display device 81 .

In the special symbol variation start process 8, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga. Each value of C2 and stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S11001).

Next, the variable probability flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state (S11002). In the processing of this S11002, if the definite variable flag 203g is ON, it is determined that the special symbol is in the definite variable state, and if the definite variable flag 203g is OFF, it is determined as the special symbol low probability state (not the definite variable state). In the process of S11002, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol (S11002: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S11001 and the first value for high probability time Based on the hit random number 8 table 202ga, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S11003). When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S11005.

On the other hand, in the processing of S11002, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a variable probability state (low probability state of special symbols) (S11002: No), the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S11001 and , Based on the first random number 8 table for low probability (see FIG. 243(b)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S11004). When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S11005.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the processing of S11003 or S11004 is a special symbol jackpot (S11005), and when it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S11005: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S11001, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S11006).

In the process of S11006, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpots A to H). Also, in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the big win types on the third symbol display device 81, the big win types (big wins A to H) are set as the stop types.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S11007). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S11007, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd (see FIG. 247) to determine the variation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. time).

On the other hand, in the process of S11005, when it is determined that the special symbols are out (including small hits) (S11005: No), the display mode at the time of loss (small hits) is set (S11008). In the process of S11008, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off (small hit) symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, the As the stop type to be displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-order reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, a complete out-of-order, or a small hit.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S11001 and the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability time are compared. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss (small hit) is determined (S11009). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at a winning (small win) symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S11007, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 (variation time) is determined.

When the processing of S11007 or S11009 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S11007 or S11009 is set (S11010). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 203gc (S11011). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S11006 or S11008 is set (S11012). These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 52). When the processing of S11012 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 8.

In addition, in the special symbol variation start process 8 (see S10913 in FIG. 252) of the eighth embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S11005 in FIG. 252: Yes), it is not a big hit (off, or Small hit) case (S11005 in FIG. 252: No), the content of the processing to be executed is configured to be different, but as used in any of the above-described embodiments, it was determined that it was not a big hit In this case, a control process is executed for the loss, in which it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a loss or a small win, and if it is a loss or if it is a small win It may be configured such that the contents of processing to be executed are different between and. Note that the detailed contents of the control process executed in this case are the same as in any of the above-described embodiments, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 253, the starting winning process 8 (S9002) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process 8 (S9002). This starting winning process 8 (S9002) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) to determine whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. Then, when there is a start winning, it is a process for executing the holding process of the values indicated by the various counters.

When the start winning process 8 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S11101). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S11101: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times of holding variable display in special symbols N1) is acquired ( S11102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S11103).

Then, whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S11101: No), or even if the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d If (N1) is not less than 4 (S11103: No), the process proceeds to S11107. On the other hand, there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S11101: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S11103: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S11104). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S11105).

The command for the number of pending balls set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S11105, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) described above Each value is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S11106), and the process proceeds to S11107. . In addition, in the processing of S11106, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of S11107, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) (S11107). In this process as well, similarly to the process of S11101, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb (number of times N2 of holding variable display in special symbols) is acquired ( S11108), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S11109).

Then, there is no winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: No), or even if there is a prize to the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S11109: No), the process proceeds to S11113. On the other hand, there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: Yes), and if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is less than 4 (S11109: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb (S11110). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb changed by the calculation is set (S11111).

The command for the number of pending balls set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223ga.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S11111, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated by the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is changed. , Stores in the first area of the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203ga of the RAM 203 (S11112), and shifts to the processing of S11113. In addition, in the process of S11112, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is referred to in the same way as the process of S11106, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S11113, a pre-reading process for pre-reading the success or failure from the various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S11113), and this process ends. Details of this prefetch processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing prefetch processing (S11113). In this look-ahead process (S11113), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entry into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has been detected in the current startup winning process 8 (see FIG. 253). (S11201), and if a new ball entry is not detected (S11201: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11201 that a new ball has been detected (S11201: Yes), then the number of held balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit value (i.e., 4). It is determined whether or not (S11202), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S11202: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S11202, if it is determined that the number of pending balls is less than the upper limit (S11202: No), whether the timing to start the variable display based on the entering ball is the probability variable state of the special symbol (S11203). In the process of S11203, it is determined whether or not the variable probability state is obtained according to the current game state and the result of the read-ahead of the reserved balls that were reserved before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the held ball does not include a jackpot, the current game state and the timing of starting the variable display based on the entered ball detected this time match, so the current game state is the probability variable state. It is determined that In addition, when a jackpot is included in the reserved balls, there is a possibility that the game state is changed according to the type of the jackpot. Specifically, when the variable probability jackpot is reserved, the state is shifted to the variable probability state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is reserved, the state is shifted to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variation display based on the hit ball detected this time is in the probability variation state.

In the processing of S11203, if it is determined that the start time of the variation based on the entrance detected this time is the probability variable state of the special symbol (S11203: Yes), the type of the entrance where the entrance was detected and the high probability Based on the first hit random number 8 table 202ga, the lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S11204), and the process proceeds to S11206. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start time is a low probability state of special symbols (S11203: No), the type of the entrance where the ball is detected and the first per random number 8 table 202ga for low probability , the lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S11205), and the process proceeds to S11206.

In the process of S11206, which is executed after the process of S11204 or S11205, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance where the current ball is detected and the lottery result obtained in the process of S11204 or S11205. (S11206), this processing ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the prize winning information command, the audio ramp control device 113 stores the type of entrance notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the prize winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, normal design variation processing 8 (S9003) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 8 (S9003). This normal design variation processing 8 (S9003) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and the variation display of the normal design (second design) performed in the second design display device 83, the second entering ball This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the mouth 640 and the like.

In the normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S11301). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S11301: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S11301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S11302), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S11302: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S11303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S11304), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S11304: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S11304: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S11305).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S11306). In the process of S11306, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S11307).

Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S11308). In the process of S11308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a high probability state based on the information held by the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203.

In the process of S11308, when it is determined that the normal symbol high probability state (S11308: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S11307 and the second per random number 8 for high probability Based on the table 202gc (see FIG. 246), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S11309). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number 8 table 202gc for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 238", it is determined that it is a winning of the normal design, and if it is in the range of "239", it is out of the normal design. (see FIG. 246).

In the processing of S11308, when it is determined that the state is not the normal symbol high probability state (S11308: No), the process proceeds to S11310. In the processing of S11310, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot game, or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol low probability state (normal state), the second winning random number counter acquired in the processing of S11307 Based on the value of C4 and the second winning random number 8 table 202gc for the time of low probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S11310). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second winning random number 8 table 202gc for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 237", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design, and if it is in the range of "238, 239", the normal design is out. (see FIG. 246).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S11309 or S11310 is a normal symbol hit (S11311), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S11311: Yes), The display mode at the time of winning is set (S11312). In the process of S11312, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether it is the time saving state (high probability state) of the normal design (S11314), and if it is the time saving state (high probability state) of the normal design (S11314: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second design display device 83 is set to 0.1 seconds (S11315), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time saving state (high probability state) of the normal symbol (S11314: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 2 seconds (S11316), and this processing is executed. finish.

Also, in the process of S11302, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (S11317). Incidentally, the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S11315 or the process of S11316 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the processing of S11317, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S11317: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S11317, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S11317: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S11318). In the process of S11318, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S11312, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S11313, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S11318, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S11313 or the process of S11318.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S11319). If the lottery result of this time is a normal pattern hit (S11319: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal pattern is in a time saving state (high probability state) (S11320), and in a time saving state (high probability state) If not (S11320: No), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 are set to "0.9 seconds x 1 time" (S11321), and the process proceeds to S11323. to move to. On the other hand, in the processing of S11320, when it is determined that the normal pattern is in the time saving (during the high probability state) (S11320: Yes), the opening time and opening of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 The number of times is set to "1 second x 1 time" (S11322), and the process proceeds to S11323.

In the process of S11323, the opening time and the number of times of opening determined in the process of S11321 or S11322 are set (S11323), and the process ends. By the processing of S11323, when the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set, when the electric accessory opening and closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S11321 or S11322 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S11319, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S11319: No), each process of S11320 to S11323 is skipped, and this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 to 259. FIG. The control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 of the eighth embodiment differs from the above-described control processing of the seventh embodiment in that the content of command determination processing is changed. Since other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. For convenience of explanation, the same processes as in the above-described embodiments may be given different reference numerals, but the processes with the same names are used for the same purposes.

First, command determination processing 8 (S4191) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 8 (S4191). This command determination process 8 (S4191) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. This is a process for

In the command determination process 8, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is obtained from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S12701). In the process of S12701, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S12701: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S12702), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command is extracted (S12703), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S12701, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S12701: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12704). Then, when the stop type command is received (S12704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12706), and this End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12704, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S12704: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12707). . Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S12707: Yes), the pending ball number related process is executed (S12708), and this process ends. Details of the pending ball count related process (S12708) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the pending ball number command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), or when a lottery for special symbols is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time the starting winning prize is detected or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second special The value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga of the voice ramp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga can be corrected to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb of the main controller 110.

In addition, when the process of S12708 is executed, the values of the updated first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga are displayed for notification to the display control device 114. Number commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S12707, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S12707: No), then it is determined whether or not a state command has been received from main controller 110 (S12709). Then, when it is determined that the state command has been received (S12709: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223fe is updated according to the received command (S12710). Thereby, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12709 that the status command has not been received (S12709: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S12711). In the processing of S12711, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S12711: Yes), information corresponding to the received winning information command is set in the winning information storage area 223b (S12712), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S12711, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S12711: No), then commands related to wins (big wins, small wins) (opening command, round number command, ending command for each win) ) is received (S12713). Then, when it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S12713: Yes), a win-related process 8 for executing control corresponding to the type of the win-related command is executed (S12714), End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12713, when it is determined that the command related to the big win has not been received (S12713: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S12715), and this processing ends. In the process of S12715, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the pending ball number related process (S12708), which is one process in the command determination process 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing this pending ball count related process (S12708).

In the reserved ball number related process (S12708), first, it is determined whether or not a special figure 2 related command, that is, a command related to the reserved ball number of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is received (S12801). When it is determined that the special figure 2 related command is received (S12801: Yes), the received special figure 2 related command determines whether it is a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 (S12802). When it is determined that the command indicates an increase (S12802: Yes), information is read from the game state storage area 223fe (S12803). Next, it is determined whether the read information in the gaming state storage area 223fe is during a big hit or a small hit (S12804). When it is determined that it is during the big hit or the small hit (S12804: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit effect extension flag 223gb is ON (S12805). When it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is off (S12805: No), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to on in order to set the extension of the effect executed during the jackpot (S12806), A jackpot extension effect is set (S12807), and the process proceeds to S12808. On the other hand, in the processing of S12805, if it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is ON (S12805: Yes), since there is no need to set the jackpot extension effect, the processing of S12806 to S12807 is skipped and S12808 is skipped. Go to processing.

By configuring in this way, when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired while the winning game is being performed, the special figure 2 variation (lottery) is executed after the end of the big winning game, A jackpot extension effect can be set. That is, the effect to be executed after the end of the winning game is set based on the presence or absence of the reserved memory of the special figure 2 rather than the game state set after the end of the winning game. Since the performance mode corresponding to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special figure 2 that can be executed only under the conditions can be easily set, the performance that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In S12808, the key display mode (display mode of acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d) corresponding to the command received this time is set (S12808). Next, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12810), and the process proceeds to S12811. On the other hand, in the processing of S12804, when it is determined that the current game state is not during the big hit or during the small hit (S12804: No), an error command is set (S12809), and the process proceeds to S12810. .

On the other hand, in the process of S12802, when it is determined that the special figure 2 related command received this time is not a command indicating an increase (S12802: No), the decrease time process is executed (S12813), and the process of S12811 is performed. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 258, the decreasing time process (S12813), which is one process in the pending ball number related process (S12708) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing this decrease process (S12813).

In the decrease time process (S12813), first, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the command received this time and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12901). Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, whether the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902). In the process of S12902, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902: Yes), it is the timing of the end of the jackpot. A display effect command indicating the end of the extra round is set (S12903). Next, a display instruction command indicating left-handed hitting is set (S12904). Next, the right-handed command is set to OFF (S12905), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to OFF (S12906), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12902, if it is determined that the number of pending balls is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S12902: No), the key display mode corresponding to the number of pending balls is set (S12907), End this process.

Returning to FIG. 257, the description continues. When any one of S12801, S12810, or S12813 ends, the process proceeds to S12811. In the processing of S12811, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811). In the processing of S12811, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811). If it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S12812), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has not been received (S12811: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the content of the win-related process 8 (S12714) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flow chart schematically showing the contents of the win-related process 8 (S12714). This winning-related process 8 (S12714) is executed when a winning-related command (a command relating to a big win or a small win) is received.

When the hit related process 8 (S12714) is executed, first, it is determined whether the hit related command received this time is a jackpot related command (S12151), and if it is determined to be a jackpot related command (S12151: Yes) , the corresponding display command is set (S12152), and the process ends. Various display commands set in the process of S12152 are set by the same process as the process executed when a jackpot related command is received in the command determination process executed in each embodiment described above. and detailed description thereof is omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S12151, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not a jackpot-related command (S12151: No), then it is determined whether the hit-related command received this time is a small hit start command. (S12107), when it is determined that it is a small hit start command (S12107: Yes), small hit start processing 8 is executed (S12158), and this processing ends.

This small winning start process 8 (S12158) is different from the process executed in the small winning start process 7 (S12108) of the above-described seventh embodiment by changing the content of the display command to be set to the normal symbol high The difference is that the display command to be executed when the probability state is set and the display command to be executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. Other than that, since they are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

In the processing of S12107, if it is determined that the per related command received this time is not a small per start command (S12107: No), then it is determined whether the small per end command is received (S12109), and the small per end If it is determined that the command has not been received (S12109: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12109, if it is determined that the small hit end command is received (S12109: Yes), then set the small hit medium flag 203p to OFF (S12153), then the second special symbol holding ball It is determined whether the value of the number counter 223ga is greater than 0 (S12154). That is, in the process of S12154, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved memory of the special figure 2 at the timing when the small hit game ends.

In the process of S12154, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is greater than 0 (S12154: Yes), since the special figure 2 variation is executed after the small hit game ends, this process as it is exit. On the other hand, in the processing of S12154, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S12154: No), then the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on. (S12155), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S12155: Yes), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to OFF (S12156), and this process ends.

As a result, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed after the small winning game ends, that is, when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the small winning game, the big winning extension effect is executed after the small winning game ends. You can prevent it from happening. Although detailed description is omitted, in the hit related process 8, when the small hit end command is received (S12109: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12154: No), when the small winning game ends, the end screen of the big winning extension effect (see FIG. 241(b)) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably inform the player that the jackpot extension effect will end.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the second special symbol is executed during the jackpot game or during the small winning game executed in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol. It is configured so that the ball can enter (be easier to enter) the second ball entry port 640 that serves as a trigger. As a result, since it is possible to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being executed unless the winning game (jackpot game, small winning game) is executed, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed as in the above-described first embodiment. A small winning game is played based on the lottery of the second special symbol only during the latent state without using a configuration for executing (variation) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel). can occur frequently. Therefore, the control processing of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Further, according to the type of winning (big win, small winning), the winning type in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 and the winning type in which the ball is difficult to enter can be set. When a win (big win, small win) is won, not only the size of the privilege (the number of prize balls) obtainable during the winning game but also the balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during the winning game. The player may be interested in whether or not.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 when winning the first special symbol lottery and when winning the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the rate at which the easy-to-win hit type is set is made different. Specifically, winning with the second special symbol is easier than winning with the first special symbol. Configure.

By configuring in this way, once the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is shifted to the executable state, the lottery of the special figure 2 can be continued and made easy to execute. To give discomfort to a player by immediately ending the advantageous game mode even though the advantageous game mode advantageous to the player (a mode capable of executing the lottery of the special figure 2) is set. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol has a higher probability of winning a win (big win, small win) than the lottery for the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special pattern, only a big win (1/400 at low probability) is set without winning a small win, whereas in the lottery of the second special pattern, a big win is set. The probability of (1/400 at the time of low probability) is the same as the above-described first special symbol, but is set so as to win a small hit (300/400). Thus, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is set so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than the lottery of the first special symbol, so that the lottery of the first special symbol The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to make it easier to win a hit (big win, small win) than the lottery of the second special symbol.

As a result, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, it is possible to win a win (big win, small win) with a high probability. A winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbols can be executed frequently in a short period of time.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, a winning game is executed in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 with a higher probability when a small win is won than when a big win is won. are doing. Thus, when a small win is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed again after the winning game is finished.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, a plurality (four) of the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) can be stored (reserved storage), and according to the winning type Then, the opening operation pattern of the winning game is defined so that the number of pieces that can be retained and stored during one winning game is different.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to secure more reserved memories by one winning game. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the second opening and closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 that is opened in the winning game is in an open state (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). When the closed state (the state in which the ball cannot be guided to the second specific prize winning opening 3650a) is changed, a part of the ball falling from the second opening/closing door 3650f can enter the second ball entrance 640. configured to pass through In this way, a ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650, which is opened during the winning game, can enter the second ball entrance 640. The player can watch the movement of the ball entering the second specific winning hole 3650a and the movement of the ball entering the second ball entering hole 640.例文帳に追加

As in the above-described seventh embodiment, an inflow detection means for detecting that a ball has flowed into a flow path (guidance passage 3660) in which the ball can flow down when a specific condition is satisfied, and and discharge detecting means for detecting that the is discharged, and based on the detection result of each detecting means, there may be provided a production mode setting means for setting the production mode, or based on the detection result of each detecting means You may provide the operation|movement limitation means to restrict|limit game operation|movement.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 266. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be dynamically displayable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variable type). Furthermore, in order to efficiently execute the discrimination of the special symbols, it is possible to set a game state (high probability state of normal symbols) in which the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and the high probability state of the normal symbols (for example, time saving state). is configured to continue for a predetermined period (for example, a period until the number of times of discrimination (fluctuation) of special symbols (number of time reductions) reaches 100 times after the end of the jackpot).

In the above-described first embodiment, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are configured to be able to perform discrimination (fluctuation) at the same time (in parallel), so the high probability state of the normal symbol is predetermined as described above. In order to prevent it from being set longer than the predetermined period, at the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts, refer to when determining the period to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol It was configured to update the time saving information (eg, time saving counter 203f) (see FIG. 36).

As described above, in the first embodiment, since it is configured to update the time saving information at the timing of starting the variation of each special symbol, in the simultaneous variation type gaming machine, the special symbol discrimination (fluctuation) number of times Even if the number of times of time saving is set based on this, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from being set beyond the predetermined number of times of time saving.

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment, in the simultaneous variation type gaming machine, depending on the determination (variation) timing of each special symbol, the period in which the time saving state is set is shortened and the player feels uncomfortable. There was a problem.

Specifically, for example, as the determination (variation) of the first special symbol, immediately after the special symbol variation of the 100th rotation (the final time of the number of times of time saving) is executed, the determination (variation) of the second special symbol, that is , If the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is performed, the time saving state can be terminated at the timing when the special figure variation of the 100th time is performed (immediately before the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is performed) , Although it does not give the player a sense of discomfort, if the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is not performed in a state where the special figure variation of the 100th rotation (the final time of the number of times of time saving) is performed, for example, the 100th rotation In the case where the 101th special figure variation is started after the special figure variation is completed, the time saving state ends at the timing when the 100th special figure variation is executed, so the 100th rotation There was a problem that the state of the normal pattern during the special pattern fluctuation gave the player an unpleasant feeling.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, when the number of special figure fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time saving end condition is established. Tokuzu fluctuation (e.g., 100th rotation Tokuzu fluctuation) end timing and the start timing of Tokuzu fluctuation (e.g., 101st rotation Tokuzu fluctuation) that is executed first after the time saving end condition is established and can be determined, and the time saving state is terminated based on the timing executed first among any of the timings.

By configuring in this way, the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be set for a longer time, and the occurrence of a situation that gives the player an unpleasant feeling can be suppressed.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, as the timing at which the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is executed, the timing at which the condition for executing the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is established can be determined. It is configured so that the time saving state ends before the special symbol is discriminated. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which a time saving state is set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of times of time saving, and a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the time saving state.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the end timing of the special figure fluctuation that the time saving end condition is established and the timing that the special figure fluctuation is executed next to the special figure fluctuation that the time saving end condition is established, of which is established first Although it is configured to terminate the time saving state based on the timing, it is not limited to this. It may be configured to end the state.

By configuring in this way, for example, after the special figure variation of the 100th rotation is completed, if there is an empty period before the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is executed, that is, the special figure of the 100th rotation When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the fluctuation ends, the time saving state can be continued even during the idle period, so that the game state (high probability state of normal symbols) advantageous to the player can be improved. can be set long.

In this case, when a game is performed to pass the ball through the through gate 67 for starting the variation of the normal symbols, the ball fired by the game enters the ball for starting the variation of the special symbols. The game area of the game board 13 should be configured so that a ball can enter the mouth. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game in which only the variation in normal symbols is started without starting the variation in special symbols.

In addition, when a win is won in the determination (lottery) of normal patterns, the electric accessary 64a is opened, and the ball is easily entered into the ball entry means for starting the variation of the special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the long-term continuation of a game in which only determination (lottery) of normal symbols is performed.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a winner is won in the normal pattern lottery, the electric accessory 64a is opened, and the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. (See FIG. 2), but the opening of the electric accessory 64a makes it easier for the ball to enter, not the opening for starting the variation of the special symbol. A predetermined number of prize balls may be given based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 260, the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment will be described. The ninth embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the content defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is changed, and the electrical configuration other than that is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the ninth embodiment. As shown in Drawing 260, RAM203 of a 9th embodiment differs in the point which added time saving end waiting flag 203ha to RAM203 of a 1st embodiment mentioned above.

The time saving end waiting flag 203ha is a flag for indicating a waiting state for ending the time saving state, and is set to ON when it is a waiting state for ending the time saving state. In the ninth embodiment, a plurality of timings (time saving end timing) for ending the time saving state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of special figure fluctuations) are set, and among the plurality of time saving end timings, any It is configured such that the time saving state ends when one of the timings comes.

And when it becomes a state (standby state) where a plurality of time-saving end timings can be established, the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is set to ON. Specifically, in the main control device 110, in the first special symbol variation start processing (see S208 in FIG. 33) and the second special symbol variation start processing (see S210 in FIG. ) is executed in place of the game state update process 9 (see S396 in FIG. 263), when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S604: Yes), it is set to ON (see S691 ).

Then, when the special symbol variation stop processing (first special symbol variation stop processing 9 (see S297 in FIG. 264), second special symbol variation stop processing 9 (see S298 in FIG. 266)) is executed, or When executing the determination of a special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination processing 9 (see S395 in FIG. 261)), referred to in the second special symbol jackpot determination processing 9 (see S991 in FIG. 265)), time saving end standby When the flag 203ha is set to ON, the time saving end processing (see S492 in FIG. 262) for ending the time saving state is executed, and the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is set to OFF (S11404).

By configuring in this way, when the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is set to ON (that is, the waiting state), when any time saving end timing arrives, surely according to each timing can be made to execute time-saving end processing. In addition, since the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is set to OFF when the time saving end processing (see S492 in FIG. 262) is executed, it is possible to reliably prevent the time saving end processing from being executed redundantly at multiple timings. can do.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 266. FIG. The control process of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment is the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the control process of the main controller 110 in the above-described first embodiment. symbol jackpot determination processing 9 (see FIG. 261), game state update processing 9 (see FIG. 263) instead of game state update processing (see FIG. 36), first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 38) instead of 1 special symbol variation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 264), second special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 40) instead of second special symbol big hit determination processing 9 (see FIG. 265), second special symbol variation stop processing ( 45), the second special symbol variation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 266) is executed, and the time saving end processing (see FIG. 262) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 261, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S395). The ninth embodiment differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S491 and S492 are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395), after acquiring the data of the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a (S401), whether the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is on, that is, this time It is determined whether or not the fluctuation start is the timing of the time saving end (S491). When it is determined that it is time to end time saving (S491: Yes), time saving end processing is executed (S492), and the process proceeds to S402. Details of the time saving end process (S492) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S491, the time saving end standby flag 203ha is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the current fluctuation start is not the timing of the time saving end (S491: No), the process proceeds to S402.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the time saving before obtaining the special symbol lottery result. By constructing before obtaining the lottery result in this way, it is possible to set the time saving as the game state until the end of the fluctuation which is the timing of the end of the time saving.

Next, the time saving end process (S492) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing details of the time saving end process (S492). In the time saving end process (S492), a process for setting the game state after the time saving end is executed.

In the time saving end process (S492), first, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is ON (S11401). When it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is ON (S11401: Yes), a state command indicating the probability state is set (S11402), and the process proceeds to S11404. On the other hand, in the process of S11401, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is not ON (S11401: No), the state command indicating the normal state is set (S11403), and the process proceeds to S11404. In the process of S11404, the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF (S11404), and the process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 263, the game state update process 9 (S396) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing the details of the game state update process 9 (S396). In the ninth embodiment, after subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203f (S602) in the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 In the case (S604: Yes), the difference is that a process (S691) for setting the time saving end standby flag 203ha to ON is added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the first special symbol variation stop process 9 (S297) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flow chart showing details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 9 (S297). The ninth embodiment differs from the first special symbol variation stop process (see S207 in FIG. 38) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S891 and S892 are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol variation stop processing 9 (S297), after stopping the variation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 (S809), the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is on, that is, the current variation It is determined whether or not the timing of the stop of is the timing of the time saving end (S891). In the processing of S891, when it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203ha is off (S891: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S891, when it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203ha is ON, the time saving end process for ending the time saving state is executed (S892), and this process ends. In addition, this time saving end processing (S892) is the same as the time saving end processing (S492, see FIG. 262) executed in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing 9 (see FIG. 261). Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

Regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination processing 9 (see FIG. 265) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 266), the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 9 (see FIG. 261) and the second 1 Special symbol variation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 264) The same change as the change (addition of control processing for executing time saving end processing (see FIG. 262) when time saving end waiting flag 203ha is ON) The detailed description is omitted because it is merely a

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when the number of special figure fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time saving end condition The end timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the 100th special figure fluctuation) that is established, and the special figure fluctuation that is executed first after the time saving end condition is established (for example, the 101st special figure fluctuation) It is configured to be able to discriminate between the start timing and the time saving state based on which of the timings is executed first.

By configuring in this way, the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be set for a longer time, and the occurrence of a situation that gives the player an unpleasant feeling can be suppressed.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, as the timing at which the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is executed, the timing at which the condition for executing the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is established can be determined. It is configured so that the time saving state ends before the special symbol is discriminated. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which a time saving state is set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of times of time saving, and a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the time saving state.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the end timing of the special figure fluctuation that the time saving end condition is established and the timing that the special figure fluctuation is executed next to the special figure fluctuation that the time saving end condition is established, of which is established first Although it is configured to terminate the time saving state based on the timing, it is not limited to this. It may be configured to end the state.

By configuring in this way, for example, after the special figure variation of the 100th rotation is completed, if there is an empty period before the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is executed, that is, the special figure of the 100th rotation When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the fluctuation ends, the time saving state can be continued even during the idle period, so that the game state (high probability state of normal symbols) advantageous to the player can be improved. can be set long.

In this case, when a game is performed to pass the ball through the through gate 67 for starting the variation of the normal symbols, the ball fired by the game enters the ball for starting the variation of the special symbols. The game area of the game board 13 should be configured so that a ball can enter the mouth. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game in which only the variation in normal symbols is started without starting the variation in special symbols.

In addition, when a win is won in the determination (lottery) of normal patterns, the electric accessary 64a is opened, and the ball is easily entered into the ball entry means for starting the variation of the special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the long-term continuation of a game in which only determination (lottery) of normal symbols is performed.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a winner is won in the normal pattern lottery, the electric accessory 64a is opened, and the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. (See FIG. 2), but the opening of the electric accessory 64a makes it easier for the ball to enter, not the opening for starting the variation of the special symbol. A predetermined number of prize balls may be given based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 to 278. FIG. Each embodiment described above has two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and when the lottery of each special symbol results in a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit or a small hit) , The variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) is configured to run a privilege game (jackpot game, small winning game).

In this way, when the privilege game is executed according to the lottery of the special symbols, the privilege game is executed when the lottery result becomes the specific lottery result, so the lottery result becomes the specific lottery result. Although the player can be given a sense of satisfaction, even if the special pattern lottery is executed a plurality of times, the lottery result may not be a specific lottery result. However, it is not possible to give any privilege to the player who has executed the above.

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has entered, the variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) is activated. A ball means (specific ball entrance 4640 (see FIG. 267)) is provided. In this way, by configuring the variable prize winning device to operate only when a ball enters the specific ball entering means, a privilege is given directly to the game contents of the player (ball shooting result). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Here, with reference to FIG. 267, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. , the electric accessory 64a and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are deleted, a ball entrance 464 is provided in place of the upper first ball entrance 64b1, and a specific ball entrance 4640 and its specific ball entrance are newly added. The difference is that a special role item 4640a attached to 4640 and a small attacker 4650 are provided. Other configurations are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 267, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, of the game areas formed on the game board 13, the left side area (area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front) and its left side area Devices related to the game are concentrated in the lower area (the area below the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front) where the balls shot to the top flow down, and the player shoots the balls to the left area. It is configured to play a left-handed game.

Specifically, a through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the left area, and a ball entrance 464, a specific ball entrance 4640, a small attacker 4650, and a second variable winning device 650 are provided in the lower area in this order from the top. It is Here, the flow of a game when a left-handed game is played on the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

Most of the balls shot in the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the lower area. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, normal symbol discrimination (lottery) is executed based on the fact that the passage is detected (detected by a detection switch (not shown)). In the present embodiment, a winning game is executed in which a specific accessory 4640a, which will be described later, is released when winning a normal symbol.

A ball entrance 464 is provided so that one out of 20 balls that reach the lower area enters the ball entrance 464 . When it is detected that the ball has entered the entrance 464 (detected by a detection switch (not shown)), a lottery for a special symbol (first special symbol) is executed based on the detection. In addition, four prize balls are given to the player for one entering ball. Balls that do not enter the ball entrance 464 flow down toward a specific ball entrance 4640 provided below the ball entrance 464, a small attacker 4650, and a second variable winning device 650.

Here, in the specific ball entrance 4640, there is a specific role which is variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult to enter the ball and an open state that makes it easier for the ball to enter than the closed state. 4640a is attached, and it is configured so that the easiness of ball entry differs according to the variable state of the specific role 4640a. This specific accessory 4640a is variably controlled by variable control means (ordinary design variation processing executed by main controller 110 (see S106 in FIG. 48)) so that the state varies according to the lottery result of the normal design. It is designed to be in an open state in which the ball can easily enter the specific ball entrance 4640 when winning in the lottery of normal symbols executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. Variable controlled.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the game state is a state in which the specific accessory 4640a is likely to be in an open state (a high probability state of normal symbols), and a state in which the normal symbol is in an open state more than the high probability state. It is configured to be able to set a difficult state (normal pattern low probability state), but even if the normal pattern low probability state is set, the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640. configured to obtain

Returning to FIG. 267, the description continues. At the timing when the ball that did not enter the entrance 464 reaches the specific entrance 4640, if the specific role 4640a is in an open state, the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 and enters the specified When the accessory 4640a is in the closed state, it passes over the closed specific accessory 4640a and flows down toward the small attacker 4650.

When a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, a special symbol (first special symbol) lottery is executed, and one prize ball is provided for one winning prize. In this embodiment, up to four special symbol (first special symbol) lottery rights to be executed when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 can be reserved.

In the tenth embodiment, a plurality of nails are planted on the game board 13 so that the balls flowing down the game area are guided by the plurality of nails to the positions where various devices are arranged in the lower area. flow down to In addition, in the lower area, a device (for example, the second variable winning device 650 ) is configured so that the number of spheres guided toward the

Specifically, of the balls fired in the left-handed game, about one out of four balls is guided to a position where it can enter the ball entrance 464 (upper position of the ball entrance 464), of which five balls. It is configured so that about one ball per day (that is, about one ball out of 20 balls fired in a left-handed game) enters the ball entrance 464 .

And, to the specific ball entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650, one ball is guided out of about two balls out of the balls fired by the left-handed game. Despite being guided to a position where the ball can enter the specific ball entrance 4640 (a position above the ball entrance 464), the ball did not enter the entrance 464 and flowed down. Included are spheres and spheres that could not be guided to entrance 464 while flowing down the left region. Finally, the second variable winning device 650 is configured to guide substantially all of the balls shot by the left-handed game.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 267, a right-handed game can also be played, and a ball shot in a right-handed game is more likely than a ball shot in a left-handed game. , the ball entrance 464, the specific ball entrance 4640, and the small attacker 4650 are hardly guided, and the second variable winning device 650 is guided at an equal rate.

In this way, by varying the ease with which a ball can be entered into each ball entrance depending on the position from which the player shoots the ball, it is possible for the player to play the game while competing for skill. It is possible to suppress early boredom.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the game board 13 provided in the tenth embodiment, for example, it is possible to make it easier to guide the ball to the small attacker 4650 by performing a right-handed game rather than performing a left-handed game. can be configured to As a result, the player can play a game in which the game method (left-handed, right-handed) is changed according to the game result (whether or not the ball has entered the specific ball entrance 4640). can be made to play games voluntarily.

Returning to FIG. 267, the description continues. The small attacker 4650 is provided with a small opening/closing door 4650a which is variable means capable of changing between a closed state that makes ball entry difficult and an open state that makes ball entry easier than the closed state. It is configured such that the easiness of ball entry differs according to the variable state of the small opening/closing door 4650a. The small opening/closing door 4650a is controlled by specific variable control means (specific ball entry process executed by main controller 110 (see S196 in FIG. 278) so that the state is changed when a ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640. )) is variably controlled by Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, the value of the counter (first hit type counter C2) that is randomly updated and the set game The opening pattern of the small opening/closing door 4650a is changed based on the state.

Specifically, the period (waiting time for opening) from when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 until the small opening/closing door 4650a opens is made different. As a result, for example, in a game state (for example, normal state) in which the period (open waiting time) from when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 until the small opening/closing door 4650a opens is set long, the unit time It is possible to suppress the number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 in the winning, and the game state (for example, In the latent state), it is possible to increase the winning number of balls to the small attacker 4650 per unit time.

In the tenth embodiment, when the ball wins the small attacker 4650, ten prize balls are given to one prize ball. It is configured so that more prize balls than the ball mouth 4640 are awarded. Therefore, by varying the number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 per unit time according to the game state, for example, the winning number of balls to the small attacker 4650 will give the player more balls than the number of shots. number of balls can be awarded as prize balls.

By configuring in this way, the player can play a game based on the ball entering the specific ball entry means (specific ball entry port 4640) in addition to the game based on the special symbol lottery. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Finally, the ball that did not win even the small attacker 4650 flows down toward the second variable winning device 650 provided below the small attacker 4650 . This second variable winning device 650 is a variable means that operates (operates during a big winning game) when a big winning is won in a special symbol lottery, similarly to the above-described first embodiment. In addition, since the detailed content is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Balls that do not win the second variable prize winning device 650 flow into an out port 66 formed at the lowest position in the game area of the game board 13 and are discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball can be shot to the right side area of the game area (a right-handed game is possible). The right area may be completely eliminated so that (right-handed game) cannot be executed. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, all games (from the game in the normal state) are configured to be executable only with left-handed games, but not limited to this, for example, through gate 67 or specific ball entrance 4640 may be provided in the right area so that the contents of the game can be changed according to the game state.

<Regarding production content in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, a characteristic effect executed in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, the period from when the special symbol for indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped to when the jackpot game is executed (fixed period) is the jackpot type. are defined differently depending on

In the tenth embodiment, a game state (potential state) in which the small attacker 4650 is likely to be released during the fixed period is set. In other words, it is possible to execute a game (so-called small winning RUSH) in which the small attacker 4650 is continuously opened using the special symbol fixing period for indicating that the big winning has been won.

By configuring in this way, a small winning RUSH can be executed before a big winning game is executed. In addition, before the jackpot game is executed, the technical idea of executing the small winning RUSH is the same as the above-described second embodiment, so detailed explanation and derivation that can be conceived based on this technical idea The plan and other plans are the same as those of the above-described second embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the fixed period of the special symbol same as the second embodiment is used as the period during which the small hit RUSH is executed. You may use the period used in order to perform a winning game frequently. For example, as in the above-described sixth embodiment, a period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the round game may be used. Furthermore, based on the lottery result of the special pattern. It may be configured such that latent definite states (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) are set as game states, and a small hit RUSH is executed in the latent definite states.

Returning to FIG. 268, the description continues. FIG. 268(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, and FIG. 268(b) is executed during the symbol determination period of the special symbols. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen displayed.

As shown in FIG. 268(a), when a special symbol jackpot is won, "777" is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and "left strike" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. is displayed. In this embodiment, since the left-handed game is configured to be executed in all game states, "left-handed" is always displayed in the guide display area Dm3. It should be noted that when the same game method (left-handed hitting) is always executed as in the present embodiment, the guidance display area Dm3 is displayed because the player does not need to change the game method. It may be configured not to.

A character 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a comment "Aim for RUSH" is displayed to inform the player that a game period in which the small attackers 4650 are frequently released is about to begin. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "entering the chance zone" indicating that a game state advantageous to the player has been set is displayed.

In the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, if you win a special symbol jackpot in a probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), the special It is configured so that latent definite state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) is set during the determination period of the design. Then, when the gaming state is set to the latent state, an operation pattern is set in which the period (open standby time) from when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 until the first attacker 650 is released is short. Since it is configured to be easy, the game (RUSH game) that can increase the number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 per unit time for the player ends the fixed period of the special symbol is executed until

Furthermore, in the 10th embodiment, it is configured such that the period for finalizing the special symbols differs depending on the jackpot type that is won. Therefore, winning a jackpot type in which the special symbols are determined for a long period of time can lengthen the period in which the RUSH game can be executed, resulting in a jackpot advantageous to the player.

Here, in each of the above-described embodiments, the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win is determined whether the game content during the big win game is advantageous to the player ( A privilege (the number of prize balls) that can be granted to the player during the jackpot game and whether or not the game state set after the jackpot game is advantageous to the player is configured to be set. For example, when winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set to the same odd number (for example, "777"), which is not advantageous to the player (disadvantageous). i) When a jackpot is won, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set to the same even number (for example, "222").

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, as the stop display mode of the third symbol, whether or not the game contents during the jackpot game described above are advantageous to the player ( In addition to whether the bonus (the number of prize balls) is advantageous to the player or not, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is advantageous to the player, and whether the length of the pattern fixing period is advantageous to the player or not. configured to be set accordingly.

By configuring in this way, by grasping the stop display mode of the third symbol, the RUSH game executed before the jackpot game, the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, and the three game contents. A game can be played while predicting. In this case, for example, the period during which the RUSH game is executed (symbol determination period), the game content of the jackpot game, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are all advantageous to the player. It is preferable to provide a third symbol stop display mode (for example, "VVV") that is set only to . As a result, the game can be played while giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

Further, the stop display mode of the third symbol may be changed at each predetermined timing, for example, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it indicates that the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is a big win. Among the stop display modes, a stop display mode (e.g., "222") indicating that a big win is disadvantageous to the player is set. It is also possible to change the stop display mode of the third symbol so as to gradually indicate that the player has won a jackpot advantageous to the player, such as "VVV".

By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while expecting that the stop display mode of the third symbol will be changed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the sizes of a plurality of benefits given to the player based on the winning of the jackpot are combined to set the stop display mode of the third symbol. The size may be displayed in different modes.

For example, the type of the stop display pattern (number) of the third pattern is set according to the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, and the size of the third pattern is changed and set according to the game content during the jackpot game. Alternatively, the color of the third symbol may be set by varying it according to the length of the symbol fixing period. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the details of the game to be executed in the future.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, when the latent state is set as the game state during the symbol determination period, an efficient RUSH game is executed, but the normal state is set during the symbol determination period. In other words, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state and the jackpot is won, an inefficient RUSH game is executed. Therefore, when setting the stop display mode as the stop display mode of the third symbol based on the length of the symbol fixing period, the stop display mode of the third symbol set based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is variable. It is better to configure it so that As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the contents of the game to be executed in a more comprehensible manner.

After the display shown in FIG. 268(a) is entered, the display screen shown in FIG. 268(b) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 268(b), while the RUSH game is being executed, "in the chance zone" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the symbol fixing period. "Remaining time 30 seconds" is displayed as . This remaining period display mode is configured so that the number of seconds displayed is updated according to the elapsed time, and informs the player of the remaining period of the chance zone (symbol fixing period). In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Aim for small attackers" is displayed to indicate the game content during the chance zone (during the symbol fixing period).

In addition, the number of seconds displayed in the remaining period display mode may be set so as to indicate all of the remaining remaining period when entering the chance zone, or a period (seconds) shorter than the symbol fixing period to be set. , and a new number of seconds may be added to the number of seconds in the remaining period display mode displayed according to the passage of time. In addition, it is set to indicate a period (number of seconds) shorter than the set pattern confirmation period, and after the set period has passed, the remaining period display mode is set to "? seconds", and the remaining period is It's okay if you don't know.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the remaining period display mode is set so as to indicate the remaining period of the pattern fixing period in seconds. Any mode is acceptable as long as it can be done. For example, the character 811 may use an animation until it is caught by the enemy to indicate the remaining period of time, or use the period until the container containing the liquid is emptied. It may be configured to indicate the remaining period. In this way, by using animation showing the process of the story instead of the number of seconds, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the remaining period of time.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 273. FIG. The tenth embodiment differs from the above-described second embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are different. Other than that, the electrical configuration is the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 269 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269, in the tenth embodiment, the small hit random number table 202b, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the off type selection table 202ad are deleted from the ROM 202 in the second embodiment described above. A second winning random number 10 table 202ia is provided instead of the second winning random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa, and a specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic is newly added. is different.

The second winning random number 10 table 202ia is the second winning determined as winning in the state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set with respect to the above-described second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 15(c)). The difference is that the range of the random number counter C4 is different, and the rest is the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

Here, the contents defined in the second winning random number 10 table 202ia will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number 10 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 270, in this second winning random number 10 table 202ia, there are 231 random numbers that will win normal symbols in the low probability state of normal symbols as the game state (during normal state, during latent probability state). , the range is "0 to 230". Among the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of winning random numbers is 231, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "231/233".

On the other hand, in the high-probability state of normal symbols (probability variable state, time-saving state), there are 232 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of winning random numbers is 232 out of 233 possible random numbers of the second winning random number counter C4, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "232/233". As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the random number value that is the win for the normal symbol is configured to have a high probability (231/233) even for the low probability state of the normal symbol.

By configuring in this way, even in the game state (normal state, latent state) in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the game state in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set (probability variable state, time saving state), it is possible to make it easier to win the lottery of normal symbols. In addition, since the probability of winning is slightly higher in the high probability state of the normal pattern than in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the high probability of the normal pattern is higher than the low probability state of the normal pattern. It is configured so that the state is more advantageous. Furthermore, the release pattern of the specific role product 4640a executed in the winning game executed when winning is in a high probability state of normal symbols than when winning in a low probability state of normal symbols. Since an open pattern is set in which the ball is more likely to enter the specific ball entrance 4640 when winning a hit, the high-probability state of the normal pattern is more advantageous than the low-probability state of the normal pattern. there is In addition, the opening pattern of the specific entrance 4640 executed in the normal design winning game is not the normal design state (high probability state, low probability state) when winning in the normal design lottery, but the winning game. It may be configured to be set according to the normal symbol state (high probability state, low probability state) at the time of execution.

The jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is a data table for selecting the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and is similar to the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above. A plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the per type counter C2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 271, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib will be described in detail. FIG. 271 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib. In addition, the same elements as the elements defined in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa used in the second embodiment (for example, time saving counter 203f, special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad) are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 271, in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib, a plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2, and set to the time saving counter 203f for each jackpot type. The value to be set, the setting status of the variable probability flag 203g, and the value set to the fixed time counter 203ad are defined.

Specifically, for the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) in which 15 rounds of round games are executed, regardless of the game state when selected (when the jackpot is won), the time-saving counter 203f It is defined that the value of "10000" is set, and it is defined that the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. That is, when the jackpot A (jackpot A1 to A3) is selected as the jackpot type, the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set until the next jackpot is won. stipulated. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to "10000" in order to continue the high probability state of normal symbols until the next big hit is won, but this is not the only option. Instead, for example, a flag that is set to ON until the next big win is won may be used.

Furthermore, as the pattern confirmation period of the special pattern, the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined when the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and the jackpot A3 is defined in the range of "24". That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackpots A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and 80% of them (20/ 25) is a jackpot A1, 16% (4/25) is a jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is a jackpot A3.

In other words, in the tenth embodiment, even if the player wins the jackpot where the most advantageous jackpot game (15-round jackpot game) is executed, the period (symbol If a short symbol determination period is selected as the determination period), the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed becomes short. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the presence or absence of the winning of the jackpot but also to the length of the period for which the symbols are fixed in the lottery of the special symbols, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, a configuration is used in which the symbol determination period is defined in association with the jackpot type, but without being limited to this, a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jackpot type), A lottery for selecting the symbol fixing period may be executed independently. In this case, since it is possible to combine a plurality of symbol fixing periods for a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide game characteristics that are difficult for the player to predict.

Then, similarly to the above-described jackpots A1 to A3, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined respectively.

Specifically, when the jackpot B (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) is set with the game content (5 round games) of the jackpot game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A, when it is selected (the jackpot is won When the game state is normal state (normal pattern low probability state), the value of "10000" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "10" is set in the case of the time saving state and probability variable state. , and stipulates that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON.

That is, when the jackpot B is won, a jackpot game that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A is executed. A state in which an advantageous gaming state can be set (a high probability state of special symbols until the next big hit, and a game state in which the high probability state of normal symbols ends with 10 special symbol fluctuations) is defined so that it can be provided. there is Therefore, the big win A and the big win B are the big wins in which the big win A is more advantageous in terms of the big win game contents, but the big win B can be more advantageous in the game state set after the big win is finished.

Furthermore, as the pattern confirmation period of the special pattern, the jackpot B1 is set to "30 seconds", the jackpot B2 is set to "90 seconds", and the jackpot B3 is set to "120 seconds". A jackpot B1 is defined when the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "25 to 29", a jackpot B2 is defined in the range of "30 to 44", and a jackpot B3 is defined in the range of "45 to 49". there is

That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot B (jackpots B1 to B3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and 20% (5/ 25) is defined as a jackpot B1, 60% (15/25) is a jackpot B2, and 20% (5/25) is a jackpot B3. Here, when explaining the symbol fixing period that can be set in the case of the jackpot A and the pattern fixing period that can be set in the case of the jackpot B, the maximum value of the pattern fixing period is longer in the jackpot A than in the jackpot B. However, the average value of the symbol fixation period set for the big win B is longer than that for the big win A.

In this way, the maximum value of the design confirmation period that can be set is large, but the jackpot type (high risk, high return) with a small average value, and the maximum value of the design confirmation period that can be set is small, but the jackpot type with a large average value (low risk low return), and by configuring to set the pattern fixing period based on the selected jackpot type, the set pattern fixing period is set rather than setting the pattern fixing period completely at random. It is possible to make the player think that there is some kind of rule. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the tendency of the pattern confirmation period that can be set according to the major classification of the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot C) is different. A high-risk/high-return symbol fixing period selection group and a low-risk/low-return symbol fixing period selection group may be provided in the jackpot A to jackpot C). In addition, from among a plurality of symbol determination period selection groups in which the maximum value and the minimum value of the symbol determination period that can be set are different even though the average value (expected value) of the symbol determination period that can be set is the same, It may be configured such that the player can select a desired pattern fixing period selection group, and the pattern fixing period is set using the pattern fixing period selection group selected by the player.

Returning to FIG. 271, the description continues. As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot B3) for setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON after the jackpot game ends, the ratio of so-called probability variation jackpots to be selected is 50% (50/100) of the total. For the remaining 50%, a jackpot type that sets the probability variation flag 203g to OFF after the jackpot game ends, that is, a so-called normal jackpot is selected.

Specifically, in the jackpot C (jackpot C1 to jackpot C3) in which the game contents (15-round game) of the same jackpot game as the jackpot A described above are set, when selected (when the jackpot is won) Regardless of the game state, it is defined that the value of "50" is set to the time saving counter 203f, and the probability variation flag 203g is defined to be set to OFF.

In other words, when the jackpot C is won, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed in the same way as the jackpot A, but after the jackpot game is finished, the time-saving state is set 50 times without setting the high-probability state of the special symbol. is specified to be set. Therefore, for the jackpot C, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the above-described jackpot B is executed, but the game state set after the jackpot ends is a jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the above-described jackpots A and B. It is a type.

Furthermore, as the pattern confirmation period of the special pattern, the jackpot C1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot C2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot C3 is set to "150 seconds". A jackpot C1 is defined when the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "50 to 54", a jackpot C2 is defined in the range of "55 to 64", and a jackpot C3 is defined in the range of "65 to 74". there is

That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot C (jackpots C1 to C3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and 20% (5/ 25) is a jackpot C1, 40% (10/25) is a jackpot C2, and 40% (10/25) is a jackpot C3. Here, the jackpot C is defined to be the same as the above-described jackpot A in terms of the types of pattern fixing periods that can be set (5 seconds, 60 seconds, 150 seconds), but the selection ratio is different. It is defined that the average value (expected value) of the symbol fixing period that can be set is higher than the jackpot A. As a result, the jackpot C is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A in terms of the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game is finished, but the jackpot type is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A in terms of the symbol fixing time during which the RUSH game is executed. It becomes a jackpot type that is more advantageous than A.

Finally, in the jackpot D (jackpot D1 to jackpot D3) in which the same jackpot game game content (5-round game) as the jackpot B described above is set, the game state when selected (when the jackpot is won) Regardless, it is specified that the value of "50" is set to the time saving counter 203f, and the probability variation flag 203g is specified to be set to OFF.

That is, when the jackpot D is won, a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player is executed like the jackpot B, and after the jackpot game ends, a game state disadvantageous to the player is set like the jackpot C. It is Therefore, the jackpot D is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player among the jackpot types described above.

Furthermore, as the pattern confirmation period of the special pattern, the jackpot D1 is set to "30 seconds", the jackpot D2 is set to "90 seconds", and the jackpot D3 is set to "120 seconds". A jackpot D1 is defined when the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "75 to 84", a jackpot D2 is defined in the range of "85 to 94", and a jackpot D3 is defined in the range of "95 to 99". there is

That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot D (jackpots D1 to D3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and 40% (10/ 25) is a jackpot D1, 40% (10/25) is a jackpot D2, and 20% (8/25) is a jackpot D3. Here, the jackpot D is defined to be the same as the above-described jackpot B in terms of the types of pattern fixing periods that can be set (30 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds), but the selection ratio is different. It is defined that the average value (expected value) of the symbol fixing period that can be set is lower than the jackpot B.

In this way, the jackpot D is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player in all of the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, and the symbol fixing time when the RUSH game is executed.

The specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic is a data table that defines the contents of the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 that is executed when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, and the small attacker 4650 is released. The time until the opening (waiting time to open) and the content of the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 are defined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the game state at the time when the ball enters.

Here, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents defined in the specific ball-entering motion pattern table 202ic will be described. FIG. 272 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the specific ball-entering motion pattern table 202ic. As shown in FIG. 272, in the tenth embodiment, the operation contents of the small attacker 4650 are defined to be the same regardless of the game state. The waiting time for opening is defined to be different depending on the situation.

Specifically, as the operation content of the small attacker 4650, an opening operation is set in which the open/close door 4650a of the small attacker 4650 is opened once. Continue until the number of winning balls reaches 10. An ending period in which the opening operation is completed and the opening/closing door 4650a is closed is set to 0.5 seconds.

Next, the game state is a normal state, the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 89", the waiting time for opening is 20 seconds "normal 1", and the range of "90 to 98" , "Normal 2" with an open standby time of 2 seconds is defined, and "Normal 3" with an open standby time of 0.5 seconds is defined for the value of "99". In addition, the game state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, and the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 39", and "time saving 1" with an open waiting time of 10 seconds is defined, "40 to 89 ', 'time reduction 2' with an open standby time of 5 seconds is defined, and '90-99' is defined with 'time reduction 3' with an open standby time of 2 seconds. Furthermore, the game state is the latent certainty state, the first win type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 89", the waiting time for opening is 0.5 seconds, and the "latent certainty 1" is defined. ", and the value "98-99" defines "latency 3" with an opening standby time of 2 seconds.

As described above, the tenth embodiment is configured so that the waiting time for opening is greatly different depending on the game state. Even if a ball is entered, the number of balls possessed by the player will not increase. You can increase the number of balls.

Next, referring to FIG. 273, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 273, the RAM203 of the tenth embodiment has a second special symbol execution area 203b, a special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, a small hit Flag 203k, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, probability variation counter 203aa, special figure 2 design flag 203ac, special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is deleted, and a probability variable flag 203g, a specific entering ball flag 203ia, and a specific entering ball invalid flag 203ib are added. Since other elements are the same as those of the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the variable probability flag 203g has the same content as the RAM 203 (see FIG. 21) of the above-described first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific ball entering flag 203ia is a flag for indicating that the ball has entered the specific ball entrance 4640, and is set to ON when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific ball entrance 4640. It is. This specific ball entering flag 203ia indicates that the ball entered the specific ball entrance 4640 in the specific ball entering process (see S196 in FIG. 278) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 274) of main controller 110. If it is determined that it is (S11501 in FIG. 278: Yes), it is set to ON (see S11505 in FIG. 278).

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276), it is determined whether it is set to ON (see S496 in FIG. 276), and if it is determined to be ON (see S395 in FIG. 276 S496: Yes), the process of forcibly removing the lottery result of the first special symbol to be executed this time is executed (see S412 in FIG. 276). Then, it is set to off when the specific ball-entering motion is completed.

Thus, in the tenth embodiment, the small attacker 4650 is opened when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, and the specific ball for opening the small attacker 4650 When the operation scenario is set, a process of forcibly losing the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed so as not to result in a big win. As a result, the first special symbol jackpot is not won during the period in which the small attacker 4650 is open, so it is possible to prevent the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 from being redundantly executed. . Furthermore, the variable ball-entering means (small attacker 4650, second variable winning device 650), which is normally in a state (closed state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter, is changed to a state (open state) in which it is easy for a ball to enter. can be suppressed from being executed simultaneously (overlapping).

The specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is for indicating a period (specific ball entry invalid period) during which the action of opening the small attacker 4650 is not performed when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640. It is set to ON when the specific ball entry invalid period is set.

When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277), the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON (S801 in FIG. 277: Yes ), and is set to ON (see S892 in FIG. 277). Then, in the specific ball entry process (S196 in FIG. 278), the setting status is determined (S11502 in FIG. 278), and if it is determined that the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON (S11502 in FIG. 278: Yes), the process of setting the specific ball-entering action scenario (S11504 in FIG. 278) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 based on the ball entering the specific ball entrance 4640 during the period in which the big winning game is being executed.

<Regarding control processing in the tenth embodiment>
Here, control processing in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 278. FIG. In the tenth embodiment, since the configuration of the second special symbol is deleted and the configuration of the specific ball entrance 4640 is added to the above-described second embodiment, the contents of the control process to be executed , The difference is that the control processing related to the lottery (discrimination) of the second special symbol is deleted, and the control processing executed when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 is added. Also, the control processing is different due to the difference in the control processing described above.

Specifically, the timer interrupt processing 10 (see FIG. 274) is replaced with the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) of the main controller 110 in the above-described second embodiment, and the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 97). S154) instead of the special symbol variation process 10 (see S195 of FIG. 275), replace the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98) with the first special symbol big hit determination process 10 (see S395 of FIG. 276) ), the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) is replaced with the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277), and the specific entering ball processing (see FIG. 278 S196) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition to the contents described above, there are cases where the specific contents of the control process (for example, the contents of the process related to the second special symbol variation) are changed in correspondence with the configuration of the tenth embodiment. The difference is that the corresponding processing is simply deleted except for the portions marked with .

First, with reference to FIG. 274, the contents of timer interrupt processing 10 executed by MPU 201 of main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flow chart showing in detail the content of timer interrupt processing 10 . In the tenth embodiment, the subroutine of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) for the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment. , in that the subroutine of the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process 10 is executed, the processes of S101 to S103 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process described above, and then the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed. This special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is different from the above-described special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) in that the variation process relating to the second special symbol is deleted and a new special symbol variation can be executed. The difference is that the content of processing for determining whether or not it is possible has been changed. Details of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 274, the description continues. When the special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) is finished in the timer interrupt processing 10, next, the same S105 to S108 processing as the above-described special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 97) is executed, and then the specific entering ball. After executing the process (S196), other processes (S109) are executed, and this process ends.

Here, the specific ball entry process (S196) is a process that is executed when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 (see FIG. 267), and when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, Based on this, it is determined whether or not the small attacker 4650 is to be released, or whether or not the current ball entry is effectively handled, and processing for making settings based on the determination result is performed. Specifically, details of the specific ball entry process (S196) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 275, the contents of the special symbol variation process 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) control in the tenth embodiment. When this special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is during a big hit or during a specific ball entry (S295). In the process of S295, when it is determined that the flag 203o during the big hit is set to ON, it is determined that the present is during the jackpot, and when it is determined that the flag 203ia during the specific ball entry is set to ON It is determined that the player is currently entering a specific ball.

In the processing of S295, when it is determined that the current game state is during the jackpot or during the specific ball entry (S295: Yes), the above-described special figure variation processing 2 of the second embodiment (see S154 in FIG. 97) The same processing of S202 and S203 as above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S295, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not during the jackpot or during the specific ball entry (S295: No), the above-described special figure variation processing 2 (S154 in FIG. 97) (see S204, S205, S206, S251) are executed.

And, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol during determination flag 203ab is not set to ON (set to OFF), the first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is executed. , the process ends. This first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) in the second embodiment described above. ) in that the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34). Since the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is otherwise the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also, in the process of S206, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0 (S206: Yes), or in the process of S251, the flag 203ab during special figure 1 design determination is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (S296) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395). In this first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395), in contrast to the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above, the current is a special symbol high probability state. When determining whether or not to refer to the probability variation flag 203g instead of the probability variation counter 203aa, and when determining whether to execute the lottery (jackpot determination) of the first special symbol this time, special figure 2 The difference is that the specific ball entering flag 203ia is referred to instead of the jackpot flag 203i. Other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be given later.

When this first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) is executed, first, the process of S401 which is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above is performed. After that, it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S495). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in the processing of S495, the current lottery result is based on the first per random number table 202a for high probability because the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol. (S403).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not set to ON in the process of S495, the present is the low probability state of the special symbol, so this time based on the first per random number table 202a for low probability A lottery result is acquired (S404). Next, when the processing of S403 or S404 described above is completed, it is determined whether the specific ball entering flag 203ia is set to ON (S496), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S496: Yes), That is, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific ball entrance 4640 and the specific ball entry operation is being executed, the processing (S407 to S410) based on the judgment of the special symbol being executed (jackpot judgment) is skipped. Then, after executing the processing of S412 which is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above, this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S496, when it is determined that the specific entering ball flag 203ia is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S496: No), the first special symbol of the second embodiment described above is determined. The processing of S406 to S410, which is the same as the jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98), is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (S296) will be described. FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (S296). This first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (S296) deletes the update processing regarding the probability variation counter 203aa from the above-described first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment, Added control to set the state command according to the setting status of the time saving counter 203f and the probability variation flag 203g, and partially changed the contents of the processing executed when the first jackpot flag 203h is set to ON It is different in that

Specifically, when the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (S296) is executed, first, S851 which is the same as the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above. The processing of to S854 is executed. Also, in the process of S853, even if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S853: No), the first special symbol fluctuation stop of the above-described second embodiment During the fixed time process (S860), which is the same as the process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99), is executed.

When the processing of S854 is finished, next, the setting state of the time saving counter 203f and the state command corresponding to the setting state of the probability variation flag 203g are set (S891), and then the first special design confirmation period has ended. Set the special figure 1 fixed period end command for (S858). After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S801: Yes), the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S892), a specific entry invalidation command for indicating that the specific entry invalidation flag 203ib is set to ON is set (S893). The commands set here are output to the sound lamp control device by the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) of main controller 110 in the same manner as commands set in other control processing of main controller 110. 113. By receiving the specific ball entry invalid command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the period during which the specific ball entry operation is not executed even if the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, and based on the determination result, the third The display mode displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device 81 can be variably set.

When the processing of S893 is finished, then the same processing of S805 and S807 as the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is executed, and this processing is finished. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the processing of S805, between the processing of S807, processing (S894) to set the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and probability variation flag 203g to OFF is provided, but the processing of this S894 , The first special symbol variation stop processing 2 of the second embodiment described above (see S257 in FIG. 99) only changed the target of the processing executed for the probability variation counter 203aa to the probability variation flag 203g, so the details detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the specific ball entry process (S196) will be described. FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing the contents of the specific ball entry process (S196). This specific ball entry process (S196) is executed in timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) which is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds by main controller 110. Various processes are executed when it is determined that the ball has entered the ball.

Specifically, when the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the specific ball entrance 4640 (S11501). In the process of S11501, a determination is made with reference to the detection result of a detection switch (not shown) for detecting that a ball has entered the specific ball entrance 4640. FIG. In the processing of S11501, if it is determined that there is no ball winning (entering the ball) into the specific ball entrance 4640 (S11501: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11501 that the ball has entered the specific ball entrance 4640 (S11501: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S11502), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S11502: No), that is, the current time is a period in which the specific ball-entering operation based on the winning (ball-in) of the ball into the specific ball-entering hole 4640 is not executed. If there is, the processing is terminated as it is. In the processing of S11502, if it is determined that the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S11502: No), next, based on the specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic , determine the current specific ball-entering pattern (S11503).

Here, the contents executed in the processing of S11503 will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 272, the specific ball-entering operation pattern table 202ic has a plurality of specific ball-entering patterns (specific In the process of S11503, the current game state is read out from the game state information stored in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set. By acquiring it, the specific ball entry pattern of this time is determined.

After the processing of S11503 is finished, next, a specific ball-entering operation scenario corresponding to the determined specific ball-entering pattern is set (S11504), and the specific ball-entering flag 203ia is set to ON (S11505). Then, a specific ball-entering command is set to indicate that the specific ball-entering operation scenario is being set (S11506), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the specific ball entrance 4640 is provided in which the action of opening the small attacker 4650 is executed when the ball enters the ball. It is possible to make it easier to watch the flow of water.

In addition, the period (waiting period) from when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 until the small attacker 4650 is released is set to the game state set at the time when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640. Therefore, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to release the small attacker 4650 and a state in which it is difficult to release the small attacker 4650 according to the game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the currently set game state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, during the period (symbol confirmation period) during which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, the game is played. It is configured to set an advantageous gaming state (potential state) advantageous to the player, and when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 in a state in which this advantageous gaming state is set, other players The opening operation is set so that the period (waiting period) from when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 until the small attacker 4650 is opened (waiting period) is shorter than when the game state is set. there is

As a result, a special pattern jackpot is won, and the period from when the pattern (special pattern, third pattern) indicating the lottery result is stop-displayed to when the jackpot game is started, that is, when the player wins the jackpot. A special game capable of frequently opening the small attacker 4650 can be executed during the period from notification of winning to actual start of the big winning game.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, during the period (symbol confirmation period) during which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is displayed, the small attacker 4650 is likely to open the game state (potential state) is set, but it may be configured to set a game state (potential state) in which the small attacker 4650 is likely to be released at a timing other than this. As in the first embodiment, it may be set during the variable display of the special symbols for indicating that the jackpot has been won, or as in the sixth embodiment described above, the round game is started after the jackpot game is started. You may set to the period (opening period of a jackpot game) until it is performed. Furthermore, it may be set to only one of the respective periods described above, or may be set by combining a plurality of periods.

Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special symbols is a big win, a special game capable of opening the small attacker 4650 may be executed frequently before informing the player that the current lottery result is a big win. good. By constructing in this way, the execution of the special game makes it possible for the player to predict that the jackpot game will be executed after the end of the special game, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. .

Further, when the special game and the jackpot game are configured to be executed continuously as in the tenth embodiment, at least part of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is It is preferable to construct a series of performances straddling the special game and the jackpot game. In this case, for example, the period during which the special game can be executed, that is, information on the length of the pattern fixing period set this time, information on the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, and the game set after the jackpot game ends It is preferable to set the effect mode of the series of effects described above based on the information about the state. As a result, based on the game contents (special game game contents, jackpot game game contents) to be executed while the series of effects are being displayed, and the effect contents of the series of effects being displayed, future execution will be performed. It is possible to make the player predict the content of the game.

In addition, when the configuration is such that the jackpot game is continuously executed after the end of the special game as in the tenth embodiment, the special game and the jackpot game are notified to the player as one jackpot game. You may set the production|presentation mode to carry out. By constructing in this way, since the content of the jackpot game on the effect can be combined with the setting content of the special game and the setting content of the jackpot game, the game content of one jackpot game. can be set in various ways.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the fixed display period of the special symbol indicating the winning of the big win ends (elapses), a configuration is used in which the big winning game is executed. A jackpot game is executed when the ball passes through the specific area after the fixed display period has passed, and the period from the time when the fixed display period of the special pattern has passed until the ball passes through the specific area. It may be configured to set a game state (potential state) in which the small attacker 4650 is likely to be released during the period.

<Regarding Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 279, a modification of the tenth embodiment described above will be described. In this modification, unlike the tenth embodiment described above, a starting gate 670 is provided at a position through which the ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 (the left side area of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front) can pass. , and that the arrangement positions of the specific ball entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650 are varied. Other configurations are the same as those of the tenth embodiment, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the tenth embodiment described above, when the special symbol jackpot is won, the special symbol is variably displayed for the predetermined period set as the variable display period, and after the predetermined period elapses, the special symbol is specified as the symbol fixing period. A jackpot game is executed after the stop display for the period. On the other hand, in this modified example, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a specific period set as the symbol fixing period after the lapse of the predetermined period, the big winning game is executed based on the ball passing through the starting gate 670. It consists of

In the period from when the special symbol is stopped and displayed to when the jackpot game is executed, that is, in the period obtained by adding the symbol fixing period and the starting period until the ball passes through the starting gate 670 after the symbol fixing period has passed. , an advantageous game state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player is set.

According to this modification configured in this manner, it is possible to set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player for a period other than the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating that the advantageous game state will continue for a long time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, the ball fired to execute a special game that wins the ball to the small hit attacker 4650, that is, the position where the ball fired by the left-handed game can pass is provided with a start gate 670. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special game from being performed without allowing the ball to pass through the starting gate 670 during the starting period described above.

Furthermore, in this modification, the time from when the ball passes through the starting gate 670 until the second variable winning device 650 is opened by the jackpot game is the second variable winning device 650 It is configured to be shorter than the time required to reach As a result, when the ball that has passed through the starting gate 670 reaches the second variable winning device 650, the second variable winning device 650 can be brought into an open state, so that the jackpot game can be performed efficiently. can.

As shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, a plurality of nails planted in the game board 13 are used to change the direction of the flow of the ball, and the flow direction of the ball passes through the starting gate 670. Since the ball is configured to pass through the starting gate 670 when the direction is changed, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the starting period will continue, and the game area of the game board 13 is limited. Although it was possible to make players interested in the flow of individual falling balls, the start-up period continued for a long time because the falling direction of the balls was irregularly changed by a plurality of nails. In some cases, it ended immediately.

Therefore, among the game areas of the game board 13, a vibration that can regularly distribute the flowing direction of the ball to the first direction and the second direction is provided in the area where the ball can flow down toward the start gate 670. A dividing means is provided, and the ball that has flowed down the other flow path (the flow path in the second direction) is more likely to move toward the starting gate 670 than the one flow path (the flow path in the first direction) distributed by the distribution means. It may be configured so that it can flow down easily.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a predetermined regularity to the flow of the balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13, so that the balls immediately pass through the starting gate 670 during the starting period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the product is stored.

<Regarding Modified Example of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 284. FIG. In the seventh embodiment described above, the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 and the V winning device 650 is opened during the small winning game by one winning game of the second symbol (normal symbol). It is configured to be able to set whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 650V inside.

On the other hand, in this modification, in addition to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, even by a winning game with a plurality of second symbols (normal symbols), the ball entering the second ball entrance 3640 and the small The difference is that it is possible to set whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 that is opened during the winning game. Furthermore, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 that can be acquired by passing through the through gate 67 can be retained and stored up to four times. The detailed configuration and control contents for holding and storing the second winning random number counter C4 are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 280, description will be given of the effect specific to this modification executed by using the configuration of this modification. FIG. 280 schematically shows an example of a resurrection effect that is executed when the second symbols (normal symbols) are successively won and the ball can pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 280, when the resurrection effect is executed, the character 811 is resurrected from the losing effect in the mid-race effect described above with reference to FIG. 202(a), and the effect of winning is executed. During this resurrection effect, an effect is executed in which the rival character 860 and the goal of the race effect are flicked away and the character 811 runs fast in the main display area Dm. Here, the conditions for executing the resurrection effect will be briefly described. In this modification, a predetermined winning game is executed in a state where the time saving state is set, and immediately after that (at the next normal drawing lottery executed without opening) in a state where the normal state is set When a specific winning game is executed, a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 3640 by the previously executed winning game, and a small winning ball is won in the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the entering ball. During the small winning game, the balls that flowed into the second passage 660b (see FIG. 195) due to the next winning game are configured to pass through the specific area 650V, and such a state occurs. The state that can be done, that is, the result of the continuously executed general drawing lottery (the result of pre-determining the general drawing winning information included in the general drawing reservation) is a specific winning result, and for each winning result The game state when the based winning game is executed satisfies a predetermined condition, and furthermore, among the consecutive winning games, at least when the ball flows into the second passage 660b in the next (second) winning game, the above The resurrection effect is executed.

In this way, based on a plurality of normal figure lotteries, by configuring to be able to provide a game result advantageous to the player (a state in which the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small winning game), the player is unexpected. It is possible to provide a game with a sense of satisfaction, and to suppress early boredom with the game. Further, by making it possible to execute an unexpected effect (resurrection effect) corresponding to the above-described unexpected game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the electrical configuration provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of this modified example will be described. This modification is a modification of the above-described seventh embodiment, and the basic electrical configuration is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Here, only the configuration different from that of the above-described seventh embodiment will be described, and the other description will be omitted. FIG. 281(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the high-probability second winning random number 11 table 202ja, and FIG. 281(b) is a low-probability second winning random number 11 table. 202jb is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in 202jb.

As shown in FIG. 281(a), the high-probability second per random number 11 table 202ja is normally referred to when performing the validity determination of the second symbol in the high-probability state of the symbol. In the process of acquiring the lottery result (see S805 in FIG. 219) of the normal symbol variation process 7 (see S192 in FIG. 219) of the seventh embodiment, the currently set game state is a high probability state of normal symbols. Referenced in some cases.

This high-probability second hit random number 11 table 202ja differs from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the second hit types (general pattern hit types) are increased. Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 defines the C per normal pattern within the range of "80 to 98". It should be noted that, regarding the second winning type, the normal drawing per A and the normal drawing per B, only the corresponding range of the value of the second per random number counter C4 is different, and other than that, it is the same as the above-described seventh embodiment. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

Furthermore, the selected second winning type (normal drawing winning type) is set so that the action contents of the winning action executed according to the game state set at the timing at which the winning action is executed are different. .

The winning operation of the normal pattern A and the normal pattern B, which is executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, is omitted because it is the same as the above-described seventh embodiment, but the normal pattern per C The winning operation has an opening period of 0.1 seconds, an open period of 2.5 seconds, and an ending period of 1 second. A winning action is performed when the open period ends.

That is, in the seventh embodiment described above, by setting the ending period of the time (3 seconds) or more required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b, based on the special figure 2 fluctuation due to one normal figure During the executed small winning game, the ball that has flowed down to the second passage 660b based on another normal game is configured not to pass through the specific region 650V, whereas the normal game of this modification In the winning game (hitting action) corresponding to C, the ending period is set shorter (0.1 second) than the time (3 seconds) required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b, and the ordinary Based on the drawing lottery result, the balls that flowed into the second passage 660b are configured to be able to pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game.

Specifically, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed by the winning action based on the normal figure C winning, 0.1 seconds after the special figure 2 lottery starts, the next general figure lottery can be executed, and then When the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 at the shortest time (1.3 seconds) during the normal drawing, the normal drawing is executed first. 1.4 seconds after the special figure 2 lottery based on is started, the ball will flow into the second passage 660b.

In such a case, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed by the winning operation based on the normal C winning is a small winning, and when the small winning game is executed, the normal drawing is performed during the small winning game. It is possible to construct a state in which the ball that has flowed into the second passage 660b can pass through the specific area 650V based on the hit A win.

As described above, in this modification, by winning a predetermined per type (per normal pattern A, B) immediately after winning a specific per type (per normal pattern C), per a plurality of normal patterns It is possible to provide a game state advantageous to the player by the special figure 2 lottery executed across and the ball flowing down to the second passage 660b (the ball passing to the specific area 650V during the small winning game) .

The low-probability second winning random number 11 table 202jb is referred to when executing the propriety determination of the second symbol in the low-probability state of the normal symbol, and is the normal symbol variation process 7 of the seventh embodiment described above. (See S192 in FIG. 219), in the process of acquiring the lottery result (see S805 in FIG. 219), it is referred to when the currently set game state is a low-probability state of normal symbols.

This second random number 11 table for low probability 202jb is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that different normal electric operation patterns are defined according to the second winning type (normal drawing per type). there is Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is defined as a normal pattern per A in the range of "0 to 19". If the game state at the time of winning the normal pattern A and executing the winning action is a low probability state, the opening period is 0.1 seconds, the opening period is 1 second, and the ending period is 0.1 seconds. is stipulated to be executed.

Also, the value of the second random number counter C4 is "20", and the normal pattern B is defined. If the game state at the time of winning this normal figure winning B and executing the winning action is a low probability state, the winning game with an opening period of 2 seconds, an open period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds is executed. , and the value of the second random number counter C4 is defined as "21". If the game state at the time of winning the normal figure winning C and executing the winning action is a low probability state, a winning game with an opening period of 2 seconds, an open period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds is executed. specified to be The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is defined as "out of range" in the range of "22 to 99".

Here, in the state that the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, when the normal pattern is elected, the winning game is electric only for a period in which the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 3640. Although it is configured so that the accessory 3640a is not opened, the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a is set to be long (1 second) only for the winning game based on the normal figure winning A. When this 1-second open period is set, the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a to a position facing the second passage 660b (see FIG. 198).

Then, when the open period elapses for one second, the electric accessory 3640a is closed, and the ball flows into the second passage 660b and flows down toward the out port 66 as it is. In the normal state, the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 3640, so the V winning device 650 is not opened.

Thus, in the winning game executed in the normal pattern low probability state, the operation pattern (normal electric operation pattern) of the electric accessory 3640a is varied according to the set second winning type (normal pattern winning type). By differentiating the paths through which the balls flow down, for example, it is possible to win the balls that have passed through a plurality of flow paths to the first variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game. , it is possible to win a plurality of balls at once.

Furthermore, in this modification, in the state where the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the winning game based on the normal pattern C is executed, and immediately after that, the low probability state of the normal pattern is set to the normal pattern per A. When the corresponding winning game is executed, the ball flowing down the second passage 660b by the winning game corresponding to the normal pattern winning A in the low probability state is based on the normal pattern winning C executed during the high probability state. It is configured so that it can pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game executed by.

As a result, it is possible to execute a big winning game based on a small winning game even though the normal pattern has once shifted to a low probability state, so that a game with unexpectedness can be provided to the player. At the same time, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the contents of the control processing executed by main controller 110 in this modified example will be described. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 11 . This thru-gate passage processing 11 is obtained (stored) when the ball passes through the thru-gate 67, in contrast to the thru-gate passage processing (see S107 in FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the process of determining (predicting) the game result in advance is executed based on the values of various counters.

When the through gate passing process 11 (S157) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1905 as the through gate passing process (see S107 in FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment are executed, and then Based on the counter value stored by the process of S1905, the propriety of the lottery of the normal design and the type of the normal design are predicted (S1951). Then, set the general figure winning information command including the information indicating the predicted right or wrong, the general figure per type (S1952), and terminate this process.

It should be noted that the detailed contents of the processing executed in S1951 and S1952 are those in which the target of the processing of S1707 and S1708 of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) executed for the special symbol is replaced with the normal symbol. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the contents of control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. 283 is a flow chart showing the command determination processing 11. FIG. This command determination process 11 is different from the command determination process 7 (see S4182 in FIG. 226) executed by the above-described seventh embodiment. The difference is that the process (see S12051) for determining that the general figure winning information command) has been received and the process executed when the general figure winning information command is received (see S12052) are added, other than that are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in Figure 283, if it is determined that the winning information related command (winning information command, normal figure winning information command) is received (S12051: Yes), based on the received winning information command (normal figure winning information command) The received prize information is stored in the prize information storage area 223b (S12010). Here, in the winning information storage area used in this modification, in addition to the special symbol reserved ball storage area, the received winning information can be stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area. Then, when the processing of S12010 is finished, the general pattern effect setting processing (S12052) is executed, and this processing is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the contents of the normal pattern effect setting process (S12052) will be described. The general pattern effect setting process (S12052) determines each information stored in the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 21) based on the received general pattern winning information command, and the specific condition is established. If it is determined that the specific condition is established, a process for specifying that the special effect can be executed is executed.

When the general pattern effect setting process (S12052) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning related information received this time is a general pattern winning information command (S13001), and if it is a general pattern winning information command, to the command It is determined whether or not the information indicating the high probability per map C is included (S13002). In the processing of S13002, if it is determined that the information indicating the high-precision general figure per C is included (S13002: Yes), the general figure C election flag is set to ON (S13003), and this process is terminated.

This general pattern C winning flag is set to ON when information (command) indicating high probability general pattern per C is received, and is set to off when the general pattern winning prize information command is received next It is a thing. As a result, it is configured to be able to determine the general pattern winning information command received next to the general pattern winning prize showing C per high probability general map.

On the other hand, in the process of S13002, if it is determined that the information indicating the high probability per map C is not included (S13002: No), it is determined whether the information indicating the low probability per map A is included ( S13004), when it is determined that it is not included (S13004: No), the normal figure C election flag is set to OFF (S13007), and this process ends.

If it is determined that the information indicating the low probability map per A is included in the process of S13004 (S13004: Yes), it is determined whether the general map C winning flag is set to ON (S13005), ON If it is determined that it is set (S13005: Yes), set the special effect possible information to the corresponding general pattern winning prize information (S13006), set the general pattern C winning flag to OFF, and end this processing.

If it is determined in the process of S13005 that the setting is not ON (S13005: No), this process ends. As a result, it is possible to predict in advance that the low probability map A will be executed next to the high probability map C hit, and the special performance can be set according to the prediction result.

It should be noted that, as in this modification, when giving benefits that are advantageous to the player across the high probability state and low probability state of the normal symbol, for example, the number of times the small win is won (small win It is preferable that the high probability state of the normal symbol is terminated based on the number of times the game is executed. As a result, the first normal figure lottery is executed in a high probability state, and the special figure 2 lottery is executed by the winning game to win a small prize. Then, at the timing when the small winning game is executed, the normal symbol high probability state is shifted to the low probability state.

Since the high probability state of the normal pattern is still set at the timing when the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the next normal pattern lottery is executed in the high probability state. Then, after the fluctuation time elapses when winning the small hit in the lottery of the special figure 2, after the start timing of the small winning game to be executed, so that the winning game based on the next normal drawing lottery is executed. Set the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation in the stochastic state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute the winning game based on the next normal drawing lottery in the operation pattern of the low probability state.

<Modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 296. FIG. Among the above-described embodiments, in the embodiment using the technical idea of the first embodiment, in a state in which the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, the first When a jackpot is won in a special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery, the game state during the variation of the jackpot is set to be a latent state, and when the latent state is set, the second special pattern ( By facilitating the execution of the lottery of the special figure 2), it was configured to facilitate the execution of the small winning game.

In the embodiment configured in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game (so-called RUSH game) in which a small hit game is frequently generated using the period during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1, so that the game Since it is possible to continuously provide a plurality of different privilege games (RUSH game, jackpot game) to the player, the player can be motivated to aim for the jackpot winning more enthusiastically, and the game can be played. can improve the interest of

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, in order to suppress the fact that the special symbol jackpot winning is duplicated and the player is given an excessive privilege, The lottery of the special figure 2 executed during the variation of the big win is configured so as not to win the big win. Thus, even if the special figure 2 lottery is executed a plurality of times while the special figure 1 is fluctuating, the special figure 2 will not be won. Therefore, the period from the end of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation to the start of the jackpot game (jackpot fluctuation period of the special figure 1) can be set as the RUSH game period.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the length of the variable time that can be set when winning the special figure 1 jackpot (60 seconds at the shortest, 600 seconds at the longest) is defined to have a range ( (see FIG. 19(b)), in the state where the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, when the special figure 1 jackpot is won, that is, when the RUSH game is executed, FIG. 7(a) As described above with reference, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to stop and display the performance symbol 813 for suggesting the current big hit fluctuation period. Then, the variation time of the special figure 1 set this time and the display of the production pattern 813 stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is started according to the type of the winning jackpot. It was configured to change the mode.

In this way, the effect pattern 813 is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the length of the set special figure fluctuation time is suggested instead of the determination of the special figure lottery. On the other hand, the display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can make the player more interested, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

However, in the production of the first embodiment described above, at the time the special figure 1 jackpot variation is started (at the time the RUSH game is started), the length of the current RUSH game period, and the execution after the RUSH game ends Therefore, depending on the content of the suggestion, there is a risk that the player will be less motivated to play during the RUSH game. Specifically, for example, a short fluctuation period (for example, 60 seconds) is set as the RUSH period (special figure 1 fluctuation period), and the jackpot type that is won is more disadvantageous to the player than other jackpot types. In the case of the type (for example, jackpot D), by grasping the display mode of the stop-displayed effect pattern 813, the jackpot winning of the special figure 1 this time is a lottery result that is not very advantageous to the player. As a result, there is a problem that the interest in the game during the RUSH period is reduced.

Here, if the display mode of the production pattern 813, the length of the RUSH game period, and the contents of the big winning game executed after the RUSH game is completed are configured so as not to have any relevance, the above-described problem will occur. However, it is not an effective countermeasure because the enjoyment of predicting the future game development (RUSH game period and jackpot game content) based on the display mode of the effect pattern 813 is lost.

On the other hand, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1, the lottery result of the special figure 1 during fluctuation (fluctuation time, jackpot game content , a game state set after the jackpot game ends) is executed. And it is configured to vary the performance mode of the suggestive performance depending on the result of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 (whether or not it hits) and the number of times.

By configuring in this way, the more the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1, the more easily the lottery result of the special figure 1 during fluctuation can be predicted, so the special figure 1 fluctuation A player can be motivated to execute the special figure 2 lottery during the period.

Furthermore, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 in which the latent state is set, the RUSH game is executed by the special figure 2 lottery Since it is configured as such, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 lottery more motivated during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1.

It should be noted that this modification of the fourth embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment using the configuration of the first embodiment described above in that the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the execution However, the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

<Regarding the production content in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, a characteristic effect performed in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the modification of the fourth embodiment, during the RUSH game period (during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation period in which the latent state is set), based on the special figure 2 lottery, this special figure 1 jackpot lottery This embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a suggestion effect for suggesting the result is executed.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the suggestive effect, an effect is executed to suggest to the player the content of the jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot won and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game. ing. Then, in order to show the lottery result of the special figure 2, the display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, the combination of numbers can be changed, or during the RUSH period Suggestion performance is executed by varying the performance mode of RUSH performance (performance of displaying performance pattern 813 from inside treasure box 812) showing the result of special figure 2 lottery.

Next, an example of the actual presentation content will be described. Here, 110 seconds is set as the special figure 1 jackpot variation time, 15 rounds worth of round games are executed as the jackpot game, and the probability variable state that is advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot (jackpot ( An example in the case of winning 15R probability variation)) will be described. Figure 285 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when a small hit is won during the RUSH period, and Figure 285 (b) is displayed when a miss is won during the RUSH period It is the figure which showed an example of a display screen.

As shown in FIG. 285(a), in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the remaining time of the current RUSH game period is displayed on the display screen (FIG. 7(b)) of the first embodiment described above. The remaining time display 851 and the number of small wins display 825 showing the number of times the small win was won during the current RUSH game period are displayed. . The same elements (display contents) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 285(a) shows the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 after 10 seconds from the start of the special figure 1 variation, and the remaining time display 851 is "100 seconds", ie. A value obtained by subtracting 10 seconds that have already passed from the fluctuation time of 110 seconds is displayed, and "1" indicating that the number of small wins won during the RUSH game period is 1 is displayed in the number of small wins display 825. there is In addition, since the value of the small hit number display 825 is configured to be updated (1 is added) at the timing when the small hit game is started, the state shown in FIG. It shows a state in which the second small win is won (stopped display) while the second small win game is being executed.

Next, the effect contents related to the suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIG. 286(b). Figure 286 (b) shows the display screen when the lottery result of special figure 2 is out. "95 seconds" is displayed as the remaining time display 851 in this pattern 286(b). In addition, in this modification, as in the first embodiment described above, during the period in which the small winning game is being executed, since it is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is not subtracted, FIG. 286 ( The state shown in b) is a state in which 5 seconds have passed since the small winning game ended from the state shown in FIG. 286(a) described above. Therefore, the value of the small hit number display 825 is displayed as "2" by adding 1 to the value in FIG. 286(a).

As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the display mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period (the third pattern, or the display mode of the effect pattern 813) is used. It is configured to suggest to the player the result of the special figure 1 lottery that is currently being displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285 (b), as a suggestive display mode, the stop display mode (Kanji ) is different from the normal stop display mode (the display mode shown in FIG. 285(b)), or the production pattern 813 displayed from the treasure chest 812 is different from the normal display mode. A gorgeous display mode is displayed.

In this way, by configuring to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 using the display mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the lottery result of the special figure 1 , can be discriminated by the display mode of one symbol, so that the player can be more interested in the display mode of the symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the shorter the remaining period of the RUSH game period, the easier it is to set the effect mode in which the lottery result of the special figure 1 is easily determined as the suggested mode. Therefore, in any period during the RUSH game period, by executing the special figure 2 lottery, the game can be motivated to grasp the lottery result of the special figure 1 in advance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the effect content of the jackpot content suggestion effect will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 285, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the design (third design or production design 813) for showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period The display mode is configured to display a suggestive display mode that varies according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 during variable display. In addition to this, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is established based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed during the RUSH game period (for example, the number of winning small hits reached 10 case), the jackpot content suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 is configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

As a result, the player will eagerly execute the special figure 2 lottery while expecting that the performance suggesting the contents of the big win will be executed during the RUSH game period, so that the operation of the game can be improved.

Here, the specific content of the performance will be described. FIG. 286(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed during the jackpot content suggesting effect, and FIG. 286(b) is an example of the display content displaying the effect result of the jackpot content suggesting effect. It is a figure showing. In FIG. 286( a ), “10” is displayed as the number of small hits display 825 . Then, in order to notify the player that the number of small wins reaching 10 times is the execution timing (establishment condition) of the content suggesting effect of the big win, the display mode of the number of small wins display 825 is changed to the normal display mode ( A highlighting mode different from that shown in FIG. 285(b) is displayed.

Furthermore, when the big win content suggesting effect is executed, the next big win notice 865 is displayed as a notification mode for informing the game of the outline of the effect currently being executed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm. , three treasure boxes (treasure box 812, treasure box 860, and treasure box 870) are displayed. Of these three treasure boxes, the treasure box 812 is used to display the effect pattern 813 for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, as described above with reference to FIG.

Then, the treasure box 860 suggests to the player whether or not the game state after the next big win (after the big win based on the special figure 1 that is currently displayed in a variable manner) is advantageous to the player ( It is used for notification), and is displayed in a display mode with the character "definite" attached to indicate that. In addition, the treasure box 870 is used to suggest (inform) the player the content (number of rounds, etc.) of the jackpot game to be executed next time, and is marked with the letter "R" to indicate that fact. displayed in the displayed mode. As a result, even if a plurality of treasure boxes are displayed in the main display area Dm, the player can easily understand which treasure box suggests (reports) what, thereby providing an easy-to-understand presentation. can do.

In the sub-display area Ds, a display of 'RUSH in progress' to indicate that the current RUSH game period is in progress, and a comment of 'Open the box with the power of V' to guide the performance suggesting the content of the jackpot are displayed. be done. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 286(a), this jackpot content suggesting effect is executed independently of the effect (effect using the treasure box 812) for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2. During the period in which the performance suggesting the content of the big win is executed, the performance suggesting the content of the big win is preferentially displayed (emphasized) over the performance for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2. there is Specifically, the treasure box (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the effect of suggesting the contents of the big win is displayed in a larger display mode than the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the effect for indicating the lottery result of special figure 2. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the big win content suggestion effect.

Then, when it comes to the timing of showing the effect result of the big win content suggesting effect, the treasure box 860 and the treasure box 870 open as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 286(b), the treasure box 860 is opened and the character "Lucky" is displayed as the game state suggestive display 861, and the treasure box 870 is opened and the character "odd number" is displayed as the round number suggestive display 871. be.

In addition, the effect result of the jackpot content suggestive effect executed during one RUSH game period is displayed in the suggestive history display 880 as a history. In this modification, it is configured so that the execution condition of the jackpot content suggestion performance can be established multiple times during one RUSH game period, and the reliability of the suggestion content increases as the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion performance increases. It is configured to be high (so that the player can easily grasp the actual lottery result).

In this modification configured as described above, by using the suggestion history display 880 to display the effect result of the big win content suggestion effect as a history, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, this suggestion history display 880 has a plurality of stages of display modes (“cross mark”, “triangle mark”, “circle mark”) based on the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect and the actual special figure 1 lottery result. is displayed, even if the display mode showing the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect is varied in order to prevent the player from getting tired of the effect early, the effect is easy to understand as a history. Results can be reported.

In addition, in this modification, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 is configured to be variable in correspondence with the effect result of the one-time jackpot content suggestion effect. The suggestion history display 880 may be configured to have a specific display mode only when the jackpot content suggestion performance is executed a plurality of times during the RUSH game period and each performance result is a specific combination. By configuring in this way, even if the first big win content suggesting production is a production result that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a production result that suggests that the number of round games is a big win with a small number of round games), the next time It is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the performance suggesting the content of the big win is executed.

Although the details will be described later, the display contents (display mode) indicating the effect result of this jackpot content suggestive effect include a strong suggestive display that is easy for the player to predict, a weak suggestive display that is more difficult to predict than the strong suggestive display, is configured to be set, based on the lottery result of the special figure 1, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 (the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect that has already been executed), and the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion effect It is configured so that the selection ratios of the strongly suggestive display and the weakly suggestive display are different. Furthermore, only when a specific condition is satisfied, the effect of notifying the content of the next big win and the privilege effect different from the suggestion of the content of the big win are executed.

By constructing in this manner, even a player who has almost determined the next big win content by the already executed big win content suggesting performance continues to be ambitious to establish the conditions for establishing the big win content suggesting performance. You can play games.

In addition, in this modification, the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the effect of indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the treasure box (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the jackpot content suggesting effect are separated. However, without being limited to this, one treasure box may be used to perform an effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 and an effect for suggesting the contents of the big win. In this case, it is preferable to change the performance mode of the big win content suggesting performance so that the timing of displaying the performance pattern 813 and the timing of displaying the performance result of the big win content suggesting performance are different. As a result, even if one treasure box is used, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance, and to make the player think that the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed more often than it actually is.

In addition, in this modification, a plurality of elements (the number of round games played and the game state after the end) for indicating the content of the jackpot are individually displayed as the effect result of the content suggestive effect of the content of the jackpot. , only one of them may be displayed as the effect result of one big win content suggesting effect. In this case, the configuration may be such that the player can select for which element the big win content suggesting effect is to be executed.

Furthermore, in this modification, the effect results for a plurality of elements (the number of round games played and the game state after the end of the round game) for indicating the contents of the big win are simultaneously displayed as the effect result of the effect suggesting the content of the big win. , but not limited to this, and may be configured to be displayed at different timings. In this case, it is also possible to discriminate between elements that result in a lottery result that is advantageous to the player and elements that result in a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player, and to determine the element to be displayed first based on the determination result. good. Concretely, it is preferable to configure so that the elements that result in an advantageous lottery result for the player are displayed later. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game so that many jackpot contents suggesting effects are executed.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, as a result of the special figure 2 lottery during one RUSH game period, based on the number of times the small hit was won and the number of times the special figure 2 lottery was executed, the big hit It is configured so that the execution condition of the content suggestion performance is established, but in addition to this, for example, the jackpot content suggestion that the number of times of winning by the special drawing 2 lottery has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) You may set as execution conditions of production|presentation. As a result, even if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a lottery result (loss) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the willingness to play. In addition, it may be configured to set the execution condition of the big hit content suggestion performance not only as a result of the special figure 2 lottery during one RUSH game period but also over a plurality of RUSH game periods. By constructing in this way, even after the content of the next big win game is found to be disadvantageous to the player, the player will be motivated to easily execute the big win content suggestion performance during the next RUSH game period. It is possible to make a game by itself.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of elements (the number of round games played and the game state after completion) for indicating the content of the jackpot are suggested as the effect result of the content suggestion performance of the content of the jackpot. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to suggest a rendering result in which a plurality of elements described above are combined. In addition, the remaining period of the RUSH game period is configured so that the player cannot grasp it, and the remaining period of the RUSH game period, that is, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is suggested as the effect result of the jackpot content suggesting effect. may be configured.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 287 to 289, the electrical configuration of the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The modification of the fourth embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Other points are the same as in the fourth embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 287(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287(a), this embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a suggestive mode selection table 222ja and a suggestive effect selection table 222jb are provided.

The suggested mode selection table 222ja is a second special symbol (special figure 2) during a RUSH game executed when a latent definite state is set as a game state during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Using the effect mode for showing the lottery result of the lottery content of the special figure 1 during the jackpot fluctuation (jackpot game content, game state set after the jackpot game ends) Suggestion mode to suggest when setting data table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 288, the contents defined in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja will be described. FIG. 288 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestion mode selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 288, the suggested mode selection table 222ja corresponds to the value of the acquired special figure 2 variation counter 223jb, the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, and the value of the suggested effect counter 223jc. A plurality of suggestion modes are defined to be selected.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, as the type of suggestion mode defined in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja, "normal" in which no suggestion mode is set, and "normal" in which the suggestion mode is not set, and the content of suggestion is weak, that is, the player selects the special figure 1 lottery. `` Weak suggestion '' that makes it difficult to determine the lottery result (jackpot content), and `` Strong suggestion '' that makes it easier for players to determine the lottery result (jackpot content) of the special drawing 1 lottery than `` weak suggestion '' is stipulated. When "Normal" is selected as the suggestion mode, the normal presentation mode (see FIG. 285(a)) is displayed as the presentation mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery.

In addition, when "weak suggestion" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the player cannot specifically determine the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery, but whether the lottery result is advantageous for the player An effect mode (see FIG. 285(b)) is displayed to the extent that it suggests whether or not. Furthermore, when "strong suggestion" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the suggestion mode to the extent that the player can specifically determine the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery (for example, the lottery result of the special figure 2 is shown The number of rounds to be executed in the winning jackpot game and the suggestion mode attached with identification information for indicating the game state set after the jackpot game ends are displayed in the effect mode for . As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, since one type is selected from a plurality of suggested mode types having different degrees of suggestion using the suggested mode selection table 222ja, the RUSH game period It is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the suggested mode is displayed a plurality of times.

To explain specifically the content of the provisions for the plurality of suggested mode types described above, the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb is "1 to 5", and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is If it is "within 10 seconds", "normal" is defined regardless of the range of the value of the acquired suggestive effect counter 223jc, and if the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", "Normal" is defined when the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is in the range of "0-89", and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "90-99". Then, when the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "normal" is defined regardless of the range of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value.

In addition, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb is "6 to 39" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter The value of 223jc is defined as “normal” in the range of “0 to 59”, “strong suggestion” in the range of “60 to 89”, and “weak suggestion” in the range of “90 to 99”. ing. In addition, when the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", the obtained suggestion effect counter 223jc value is "normal" in the range of "0 to 89", and "weak suggestion" in the range of "90 to 99". ” is stipulated. Then, when the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", the obtained suggestive effect counter 223jc value is defined as "normal" in the range of "0 to 59", or in the range of "90 to 99", and "60 ~89” is defined as “weak suggestion”.

In addition, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb is "40 or more" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter "Normal" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of 223jc, and "strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 99". In addition, when the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", the obtained suggestion effect counter 223jc value is "weak suggestion" in the range of "0 to 89", and "suggestion" in the range of "90 to 99". strong” is defined. Then, when the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "strong suggestion" is defined regardless of the value of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the larger the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb, the larger the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb, the more the special figure 1 lottery during the big hit fluctuation. Since the content can be easily grasped by the player, the player can be made to execute the special figure 2 lottery as many times as possible.

Furthermore, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb is "1 to 5", and if the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p indicates that the remaining time is within 10 seconds, the suggested mode is configured so that is not selected. In other words, when the RUSH game is being executed, the number of special figure 2 lotteries is small, and if the remaining time is short, it is possible that the RUSH game is not actively performed, so the jackpot to be executed later In order to prevent the game content from being easily suggested to the player, the suggestion mode is configured to be difficult to select. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivately execute the special figure 2 lottery in order to quickly grasp the lottery result of the special figure 1 currently fluctuating.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the larger the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb during the RUSH game period, the easier it is for the player to select a suggestive mode that is easy to distinguish. ing. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in the modification of the present fourth embodiment, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb, and, although configured to select the suggested mode based on the information of the remaining time storage area 223p, it is limited to this Instead, for example, it may be configured to vary the rate at which the suggestion mode is selected according to the changing lottery result of the special figure 1, for example, the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A ), the suggestion mode may be more likely to be selected than in the case of winning a jackpot type (for example, jackpot D) that is more disadvantageous to the player than jackpot A. Also, in this case, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb is a predetermined value (for example, 39) or less, the ratio of the suggested modes to be selected is the same (similar concepts including some errors are also included), It is preferable to configure so that the ratio of selection of the suggestion mode is different when the number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 39). By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Furthermore, in this modification, the content of the next jackpot game is suggested to the player based on the content of the display by displaying the suggestion mode. The frequency of displaying the mode is varied according to the winning jackpot type (the jackpot game to be executed), and the content of the next jackpot game is suggested to the player according to how many times the suggestion mode is displayed. may be configured.

This suggested mode selection table 222ja is a suggested mode setting process (see FIG. 295 Refer to S5392 of) and when the suggestion mode is selected, then the variation pattern of the set special figure 2 and the display mode corresponding to the selected suggestion mode type are set (of FIG. 295 S14204 reference). As a result, when the variation pattern of the corresponding special figure 2 is out, the display mode of the design (third design, production design 813) indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is out is selected. Since it is possible to change and display the display mode corresponding to the mode, it is possible to provide the player with the notification of the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the suggestion of the lottery result of the special figure 1 at once. can.

Returning to FIG. 287(a), the description is continued. Suggestion production selection table 222jb, during the RUSH game executed when the latent certainty state is set as the game state during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second special symbol (special figure 2) When the lottery result satisfies a predetermined condition, the lottery contents of the special figure 1 during the jackpot fluctuation (jackpot game content, game state set after the jackpot game ends). Data table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 289, the contents defined in the suggestive effect selection table 222jb will be described. FIG. 289 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestive effect selection table 222jb. As shown in FIG. 289, the suggested effect selection table 222jb has the obtained value of the small winning number counter 223cc, the suggested information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and the lottery of the special figure 1. It is defined that a plurality of suggestive effects are selected in correspondence with the information indicating the jackpot type and the value of the suggestive effect counter 223jc.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the types of suggestive effects defined in the suggestive effect selection table 222jb are "failure" in which the suggestive effect is not executed, and "failure" in which the suggestive effect is not executed. "Suggestion weak", which makes it difficult to determine the lottery result (jackpot content), and "Suggestion strong", which makes it easier for players to determine the lottery result (jackpot content) of the special drawing 1 lottery than "Weak suggestion". On the other hand, "confirmation" to notify the lottery result (jackpot content) of the special figure 1 lottery, and "privilege effect" to be executed when the player has already been notified of the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery, suggesting "Pounding production", which is a stimulating production that does not contain content, is stipulated.

This suggestive effect selection table 222jb is, in the small hit related process 11 (see S14574 of FIG. 292), when it is determined that the execution condition of the suggestive effect (the number of times the small win wins is a multiple of 10) is satisfied (of FIG. 292 S4753: Yes) When it is determined that the remaining time of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or more in the executed suggestive effect setting process (see S14001 in Fig. 293) (S14102 in Fig. 293: Yes), the suggestive effect is executed. (S14106 in FIG. 293).

When "failure" is selected as the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect is executed (although the display screen of FIG. 286(a) is displayed), but the effect ends without opening the treasure chests 860, 870. is executed. In other words, an effect is executed that does not suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 to the player. When "suggestion weak" or "suggestion strong" is selected as the suggestive effect, as shown in FIG. A comment (game state suggesting display 861, round number suggesting display 871) suggesting (contents of jackpot) appears. The content of this comment is variably set corresponding to the suggestive effect type selected as the suggestive effect.

Further, when "Determine" is selected as the suggestive effect, the effect that a comment notifying the lottery result of the special figure 1 appears from the treasure boxes 860, 870 is executed as the effect result of the suggestive effect. In addition, in this modified example, it is configured such that "confirmation" is selected as the suggestive effect only when the result of the lottery is the most advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, when a "privilege effect" is set as the suggestive effect, an effect that is otherwise difficult to see (for example, an effect in which the character wears a special costume and congratulates the player) is executed. As a result, even a player who has already grasped the contents of the next big win during the RUSH game period can be motivated to continue the suggestive performance.

In addition, when "throbbing effect" is set as the suggestive effect, the result of the effect suggesting the contents of the big win to the player is not displayed as in the above-described failure effect, but the treasure chests 860, 870 (see FIG. 286(b)) are not displayed. ) is executed until the opening effect. In this way, as an effect (fake effect) in which the effect suggesting the content of the big win to the player is not displayed, the same effect mode as the effect in which the result of effect suggesting the content of the big win to the player is displayed is executed. By making it possible to set different fake effects, the player can be made to pay attention to the content of the suggestive effect until the end.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (comment contents displayed from each treasure box) are stored corresponding to the type of suggestive effect mode selected using the suggestive effect selection table 222jb. It has means (not shown), and one performance mode is set from a plurality of performance modes stored in the storage means. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of suggestive effects than the number of suggestive effect types defined in the suggestive effect selection table 222jb. The suggestive effect history displayed in the suggestive effect history display 880 in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type of the suggestive effect mode selected using the suggestive effect selection table 222jb. It is configured so that Thus, even if a wide variety of suggestive effects are executed, it is possible to inform the player of the suggestive effect history in an easy-to-understand manner after the suggestive effects are executed.

When the specified content for the plurality of suggested production types described above is specifically described, when the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "10", that is, when the execution condition for the suggested production is established for the first time during the RUSH game period , The suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), and the value of the suggested production counter 223jc is within the range of "0 to 59", regardless of the jackpot type of special figure 1. "failure" is defined, and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 99".

If the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "20", if the suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "10 ”, the value of the suggestive effect counter 223jc is set to the range of “0 to 59”, regardless of the jackpot type of the special figure 1, and the “suggestive weak ” is defined, “strong suggestion” is defined in the range of “60 to 89”, and “failure” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

On the other hand, when the suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("yes"), that is, when the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "10", "suggested When "weak" is selected, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "A", the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is defined as "failure" in the range of "0 to 59", and "60 to 89". "strong suggestion" is defined in the range of , and "failure" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". In addition, the special figure 1 jackpot type is "B to D", the value of the suggestion production counter 223jc is defined as "failure" in the range of "0 to 89", and "suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". strong” is defined.

If the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "30", if the suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "10 ”, and when “failure” is selected in the suggested effect executed when it is “20”, the jackpot type of special figure 1 is “A”, and the value of the suggested effect counter 223jc is “0 to "Strong suggestion" is specified in the range of "59", and "weak suggestion" is specified in the range of "60 to 99". In addition, the special figure 1 jackpot type is "B to D", and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is defined as "weak suggestion" in the range of "0 to 99".

On the other hand, when "weak suggestion" (yes, weak) is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, regardless of the jackpot type of special figure 1, the value of the suggested effect counter 223jc is "0 "strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "-59", and "failure" is defined in the range of "60-99". In addition, when "strong suggestion" (yes, strong) is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "A, B", and the suggested effect counter 223jc The range of the value of "0 to 59" defines "failure", the range of "60 to 89" defines "determined", and the range of "90 to 99" defines "failure". Further, when the jackpot type of special figure 1 is "C, D", "failure" is defined regardless of the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc.

Then, when the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "40" or more and is a multiple of 10, "definite" is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and When the jackpot type in FIG. 1 is "A, B", the "privilege effect" is specified in the range of the suggestive effect "0 to 99", and in all other cases, the "throbbing effect" is specified. It is

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the execution condition of the suggestion effect is that the value of the small hit number counter 223cc has become a predetermined value (multiple of 10). May be set. In addition, in this modification, it is configured so that suggestive effects can be executed multiple times during one RUSH game period, and suggestive effects with a lower degree of suggestion than previously executed suggestive effects are not executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the suggestive effect to the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 287(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287(b), the suggested information storage area 223ja, the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb, the suggested production counter 223jc, and the suggested production flag 223jd are provided. different from the form.

The suggested information storage area 223ja is a data area for temporarily storing the content of the suggested effect executed (see FIG. 286). A history can be stored. In this suggested information storage area 223ja, information indicating the suggested effect mode selected in the suggested effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is stored (S14108 in FIG. 293). is read out (S14104 in FIG. 293). Then, the stored information is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (the timing when the jackpot game starts) (see S4692 in FIG. 291). Also, a suggestion history display 880 is displayed based on the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja.

Special figure 2 variation counter 223jb is a counter for measuring the number of variations (number of lotteries) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the RUSH game period, and is a special figure 2 variation display setting In process 11 (see S5195 of FIG. 294), if it is determined that the latent state is set (S5303 of FIG. 294: Yes), the value of the counter is updated by 1 (see S5393 of FIG. 294). The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb is referred to when setting the suggestion mode showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 during fluctuation using the effect mode for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 (Fig. 295 (see S14201 of ). Then, the value of the counter is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (timing when the jackpot game starts) (see S4691 in FIG. 291).

The suggestive effect counter 223jc is a counter referred to when selecting the above-described suggestive mode or suggestive effect, and is repeatedly updated within a range of 0-99. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Since the detailed configuration is the same as that of the effect counter 223h described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The suggestive effect in-progress flag 223jd is a flag for indicating that the suggestive effect is being executed, and is set to ON while the suggestive effect is being executed. This suggestive effect in progress flag 223jd is set to ON when the suggestive effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is executed (S14109 in FIG. 293). Then, it is referred to in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) (see S5391 in FIG. 294). Here, if it is determined that it is during the suggestive effect (S5391 in FIG. 294: Yes), a special display variation pattern command for the variation effect of the special figure 2 is set in parallel with the suggestive effect (Fig. 294 S5394). When this variable pattern command for display is set, a variable effect (a effect with a lower effect than the suggestive effect) shown in FIG. 286 is executed. Then, in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296), when it is determined that it is time to end the suggestive effect (S14302: Yes), it is set to OFF (see S14303 in FIG. 296).

<Regarding control processing in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 290 to 296, control processing in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the modification of the fourth embodiment, command determination processing 11 (see S4182 in FIG. 152) is replaced with command determination processing 4 (see S4182 in FIG. S14182 reference) is replaced with the jackpot related process (see S4502 of FIG. 64), and the jackpot related process 11 (see S4592 of FIG. 291) is replaced with the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 of FIG. 156). 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) is replaced with the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (see S5175 in FIG. 160), and the variable display setting process 11 for special figure 2 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) is executed by liquid crystal effect. In place of management processing (see S4110 in FIG. 59), liquid crystal effect execution management processing 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296) is executed, suggestive effect setting processing (see S14001 in FIG. S5392) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 290, the command determination process 11 (S14182) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 290 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 11 (S14182). In command determination processing 11 (S14182), in contrast to command determination processing 4 (see S4182 in FIG. 152) in the fourth embodiment described above, in the processing of S4215, it was determined that a hit-related command was received from main controller 110. (S4215: Yes), the difference is that the hit-related process 11 (S14574) is executed instead of the hit-related process (S4216). Other processes are the same as the command determination process 4 (S4182) in the fourth embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the hit-related process 11 executed in S14574 replaces the above-described win-related process (S4216) with the jackpot-related process (see S4502 in FIG. 64) executed when a jackpot-related command is received. Related processing 11 (S4592 of FIG. 291) is different in that the small hitting related processing 11 (S14574 of FIG. 292) is executed instead of the small hitting related processing 4 (see S4574 of FIG. 156), and other elements are Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 291, hit-related processing which is one processing in command determination processing 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. 11 (see S14574) will be described. FIG. 291 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 11 (S4592). The jackpot related process 11 (S4592) differs from the jackpot related process (S4502 in FIG. 64) in the above-described fourth embodiment in that the content of the process executed when the jackpot start command is received is changed. , otherwise the same processing is executed. A detailed description of elements with the same processing content is omitted.

When the jackpot related process 11 (S4592) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S4601: Yes), the display jackpot start Set a command (S4602), then clear the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb (S4691), and information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (of the suggested production executed during the RUSH game period history information) is cleared (S4692), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the jackpot start command is not received (S4601: No), the same S4603 to S4613 processing as the jackpot related processing (S4502 in FIG. 64) described above is executed. End the process.

That is, in the jackpot related process 11 (S4592), at the start timing of the jackpot, a process of initializing each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game executed before the start of the jackpot is executed. Thereby, even if the RUSH game is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to reliably prevent the effect mode during the RUSH game from being set based on the information regarding the past RUSH game.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, since the RUSH game is configured to be executed during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation, the end of the RUSH game and the start of the jackpot game are the same timing. The initialization processing of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game is set as the start timing of the jackpot game, but is not limited to this, and a determination means for determining that the RUSH game has ended is provided, and the determination means is provided. may be configured to execute initialization processing of each parameter when it is determined that the RUSH game has ended. In addition, since the condition under which the RUSH game can be executed is that the latent state is set as the game state, it is determined that the determination result of the game state determining means for determining the current game state is not the latent state. In some cases, it may be configured to execute initialization processing of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game.

Furthermore, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, each parameter is initialized each time one RUSH game is completed. When executed, the information (value) of each parameter may be continuously updated. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to continue to play the RUSH game a plurality of times. In this case, after the end of the jackpot game, an elapsed period discriminating means for discriminating whether or not a predetermined period (for example, a period until the number of times the special drawing is executed 30 times) has passed is provided, and the elapsed period discriminating means is provided. If it is determined that a predetermined period of time has passed, the initialization process of each parameter may be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 292, hit-related processing which is one processing in command determination processing 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. 11 (see S14574) will be described small hit related processing 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292). FIG. 292 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit related process 11 (S14574). Small hit related processing 11 (S14574) is, with respect to the small hit related processing 4 (S4574 in FIG. 156) in the fourth embodiment described above, changed the contents of the processing to be executed when the small hit start command is received They are different in points, and otherwise the same processing is executed. A detailed description of elements with the same processing content is omitted.

When the small hitting related process 11 (S14574) is executed, first, it determines whether the small hitting start command is received (S4701), and if it is determined that the small hitting start command is received (S4701: Yes), the above The processing of S4741 to S4753, which is the same as the small hit related process 4 of the fourth embodiment (see S4574 in FIG. 156), is performed, and in the process of S4753, it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10. If so (S4753: Yes), a suggestive effect setting process is executed (S14001). After that, a small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S4701: No), S4703 which is the same as the small hit related processing 4 of the above-described fourth embodiment (see S4574 in FIG. 156) The process of S4710 is executed, and this process ends.

The suggestive effect setting process executed in the process of S14001 is a process for setting the effect mode of the suggestive effect. That is, the process of S4753 described above serves as determination means for determining whether or not the execution condition for executing the suggestive effect is satisfied. In this modification, the execution condition for executing the suggestive effect is set that the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is a predetermined value (value of multiples of 10), but other elements are set as execution conditions. It may be set, for example, the number of special figure 2 lottery executed while the latent state is set is a predetermined value (for example, a value of a multiple of 20) Even if it is set as an execution condition good. In this case, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223jb may be read and determined.

In addition, in this modification, since it is configured to set the suggestive effect based on the number of small hits won during the latent state (during the RUSH game period), the small hit related process 11 (S14574) sets the suggestive effect However, if the execution conditions of the suggestive effect are changed, the corresponding process may be configured to have the suggestive effect setting process. Furthermore, when setting multiple execution conditions for suggestive effects, if one suggestive effect execution condition is established, the other suggestive effect execution conditions are within a predetermined period (for example, the number of lotteries for special figure 2 is 5 times It is preferable to provide a restricting means for restricting the establishment of the condition within the period until the condition is reached (or within 30 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a plurality of different suggestive effect execution conditions from being established in a short period of time and suggestive effect to occur frequently. In addition, when the above-described limiting means is provided, it is preferable to vary the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the order in which a plurality of suggestive effect execution conditions are established. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the execution of the suggestive performance, but also in which suggestive performance execution condition has been established, so that the performance effect can be further enhanced. .

In addition, as the execution condition of the suggestive effect executed during the RUSH game period, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the number of times of winning the small hit, and the cumulative value of the number of times of losing the winning are set to a predetermined value. In addition to the cumulative value condition that can be established when reaching, a continuous winning condition that can be established when the number of consecutive winnings without winning reaches a predetermined value (for example, 5 times) may be set. Furthermore, an operation condition may be provided that is established when the player executes a specific operation on the operable operation means (frame button 22). As a result, it is possible for the player to actively operate the operation means during the RUSH game period, thereby increasing the willingness to participate in the game. In addition, it may be configured so that the execution condition of the suggestive effect is established based on the game result other than the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period. When the number is reached, or when the number of retained memories has reached the upper limit, the number of balls that enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (so-called over-winning balls) reaches the predetermined number. It may be configured such that the execution condition of the suggestive effect is established when the game is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the contents of the suggestive effect setting process (S14001 in FIG. 293) executed in the small winning related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) will be described. FIG. 293 is a flow chart showing the contents of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001). In this suggestive effect setting process, a process for setting the effect mode of the suggestive effect to be executed during the RUSH game period is executed.

When the suggested effect setting process (S14001) is executed, first, the time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, that is, the remaining time of the RUSH game period is acquired (S14101), and the acquired time information is 5 seconds. It is determined whether the time is longer than (S14102). Here, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, in the processing of S14102, if it is determined that the remaining period of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or less, the RUSH game period ends at the end timing of the suggestive effect, so a new suggestive effect is not executed. It is configured as follows.

In addition, in this modified example, the suggestive effect time is fixed to 5 seconds, but the suggestive effect is not limited to this, and the suggestive effect of a plurality of effect times may be executed. In this case, the performance time of the suggestive performance to be executed is determined first, then it is determined whether or not the remaining period of the RUSH game period is longer than the determined performance time, and the suggestive performance is executed based on the determination result. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence of. Alternatively, the remaining period of the RUSH game period may be determined first, and the suggestive effect may be set from the effect time that can be executed within the remaining period.

In the process of S14102, if it is determined that the remaining time is 5 seconds or less (S14102: No), there is no period during which the suggestion effect can be executed, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time is longer than 5 seconds (S14102: Yes), then read the value of the small hit number counter 223cc (S14103), information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ( Information indicating the type of suggested effect already executed during this RUSH game period) is read out (S14104), and then the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery currently being executed stored in the winning information storage area 223b is shown. Information (information indicating the jackpot type) is acquired (S14105).

Next, based on the information acquired (read) in the processing of S14103 to S14105, the suggestive effect selection table 222jb is used to select the effect mode of the suggestive effect to be executed this time (S14106), and the selected suggestive effect mode is selected. A corresponding suggestive rendering command for display is set (S14107). Here, in this modified example, a plurality of rendering modes are set for the suggestive rendering mode selected in the process of S14106. A suggestive effect command for display corresponding to one effect mode is set out of a plurality of effect modes (S14107).

Then, when the processing of S14107 is completed, the information indicating the suggestive effect mode selected this time is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (S14108), the suggestive effect in-progress flag 223jd is set to ON (S14109), and this process ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195) will be described. FIG. 294 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195). This special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195) is a process for setting a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation pattern, and is a special figure 2 variable display setting of the above-described fourth embodiment. Processing 4 (S5175 in FIG. 160) is added with the processing of setting the display variation pattern command when the suggestive effect is being executed and the processing of setting the suggestive mode during the RUSH game period. are different, and otherwise identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195) is executed, first, the same S5301 to S5351 as the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175 in FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above Execute the process. Then, when the process of S5351 is completed, it is determined whether or not the suggestive rendering flag 223jd is set to ON (S5391). In the processing of S5391, if it is determined that the suggestive effect in progress flag 223jd is not set to ON (is set to OFF), that is, if it is determined that the suggestive effect is not being executed (S5391: No), The process of S5352, which is the same as the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175 in FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above, is executed, and the process proceeds to S5392.

On the other hand, in the process of S5391, if it is determined that the suggestive effect in progress flag 223jd is set to ON (S5391: Yes), based on the extracted variation pattern and latent mode, the second special symbol (special figure 2) Set the latent probability variation pattern command during suggestive effect for display (S5394), and proceed to the process of S5393. That is, during the latent certainty state, it is configured to set the variable performance of the special figure 2 differently depending on whether the suggestive performance is executed or not. Specifically, when the suggestion effect is not executed, the variation effect of the special figure 2 is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 285 (a)). On the other hand, when the suggestive effect is being executed, in order to emphasize the suggestive effect, most of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is used to execute the suggestive effect, and the remaining part is used to perform the suggestive effect. 2 is executed (see FIG. 286(a)).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the most noticeable effect in an easy-to-understand manner. In this modified example, as described above, the display command set by the sound lamp control device 113 is changed based on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed. , The same display command is set, and the display command received by the display control device 114 and the area for displaying the variable effect of the special figure 2 are varied based on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed. Also good. As a result, when only the display position (the size of the display mode) is varied without varying the contents of the variable performance of the special figure 2 according to the presence or absence of the suggestive performance, the control load of the audio lamp control device 113 is reduced. can be easily mitigated.

When the processing of S5352 is finished, the suggestion mode setting processing (S5392) is executed, then the value of the special figure 2 variation number counter 223jb is added by 1 (S5393), and this processing ends. In the process of S5392, a process for setting the suggestion mode for suggesting the result of the special figure 1 lottery being executed (during variation) using the special figure 2 fluctuation effect of this time is executed.

In this modified example, as described above, the suggestive mode setting process (S5392) is not executed when the suggestive rendering flag 223jd is set to ON. In other words, during the period when the effect that suggests the lottery result (jackpot content) of the special figure 1 is executed by the suggestive effect, the lottery result (jackpot content) of the special figure 1 is suggested using the variable effect of the special figure 2 It is configured so that the production is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of suggestive effects from occurring at the same time and to provide a difficult-to-understand effect to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 295, the contents of the suggestive mode setting process (S5392) will be described. FIG. 295 is a flow chart showing the contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392). When the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb is read (S14201), and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 (S14202), and based on the counter value read in the process of S14201 and the stored information read out in the process of S14202, the present effect mode is selected using the suggestion mode selection table 222ja (S14203). ). Then, a display command corresponding to the set variation pattern command and the selected effect mode is set (S14204), and this process is terminated.

By configuring in this way, when setting the variable production of the special figure 2, it is possible to set the suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 using the variation production of the special figure 2, It is possible to inform (suggest) a plurality of information (lottery result of special figure 2, lottery result of special figure 1) with one variation performance to the player, and make the player pay attention to the variation performance. can. In addition, in the modification of the present fourth embodiment, as a suggestion mode using the variable effect of the special figure 2, a suggestion mode (see FIG. 285 (b)) in which the display mode of the production pattern 813 is varied, and a third pattern Suggestion mode to change the display mode (see FIG. 285 (b)) is used to show the result of the special figure 2 lottery stop display mode, but not limited to this, suggested using the mode during the variable display You may set the mode. For example, by changing the color of the background when the third pattern is variably displayed, the lottery result of the special figure 1 can be suggested, or the display mode of the treasure box 812 in which the production pattern 813 is stored is variable. It may be possible to configure the lottery result of the special figure 1 by allowing it to be suggested. In addition, not only the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but also the sound output device 226 provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the lamp display device 227 are used to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1. You can Specifically, or to vary the sound output during the period when the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed, or to vary the light emission mode of the lamp during the period when the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed By doing so, the lottery result of special figure 1 may be configured to be suggestible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 296, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160) will be described. FIG. 296 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal presentation execution management process 11 (S4160). In this liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160), the suggestion effect The difference is that a process for determining whether it is in the execution period of is added, and the other points are the same.

A brief description of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59) is as follows. Processing is performed. Specifically, it constantly manages the timing means (timer) of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the scenario of the set production (the production scenario being executed), and terminates the production being executed. A process for managing the timing and the timing of switching the effect mode is executed.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160) is executed, first, it is determined whether the suggestive effect in progress flag 223jd is set to ON (S14301), and if it is determined to be OFF (S14301: No), the process proceeds to S14304. On the other hand, in the process of S14301, when it is determined that the suggestive effect in progress flag 223jd is set to ON (S14301: Yes), it is determined whether the present is the suggestive effect end timing (S14302). When it is determined in the process of S14302 that it is time to end the suggestive effect (S14302: Yes), the suggestive effect in progress flag 223jd is set to OFF (S14303), and the process proceeds to S14304. On the other hand, in the process of S14302, when it is determined that it is not the suggestive effect end timing (S14302: No), the process of S14303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S14304. In the processing of S14304, other liquid crystal effect execution management is executed (S14304), and this processing ends.

To explain the processing of S14302, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestive effect is configured to be executed for 5 seconds, and the elapsed time from the timing when the suggestive effect is executed is 113 MPU 221 has a timer, and determination is made based on the measurement result. It should be noted that any processing other than the above-described processing may be performed as long as it is possible to determine the end timing of the suggestive effect. is set, and when the value of the counting means becomes a value indicating the passage of 5 seconds, the end timing of the suggestive effect may be determined.

As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, based on the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), during fluctuation Since the suggestion performance for suggesting (notifying) the lottery result of the special figure 1 to the player is executable, it is possible to make the player predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 in advance. . Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since it is configured to execute the above-mentioned suggestive effect using the variable effect for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2, the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the lottery result of the special figure 1 are 1 production Since it is possible to suggest (notify) the player with , the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since the suggestion performance is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can be motivated to execute the special figure 2 lottery. In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the more the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed, the more likely the suggestion effect is executed, so that the player's willingness to play can be further enhanced.

That is, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) suggests the lottery result of the special figure 1 It is configured to have both the role of establishing the execution condition of the suggestive effect for the purpose and the role of executing the suggestive effect. As a result, the player can be interested in whether the suggestion performance using the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed or the suggestion performance different from the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed.

Furthermore, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, as the effect mode of the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect (strong suggestion) that the player can easily predict the lottery result of the special figure 1, and the lottery of the special figure 1 rather than the suggestive effect Since it is possible to set at least a suggestive effect (weak suggestion) whose result is difficult to predict, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode of the suggestive effect. In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, it is configured to be able to execute a plurality of suggestive effects during one special figure fluctuation period. It is configured to facilitate the setting of a suggestive effect (strong suggestion) that makes it easy to predict the result. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game so that more suggestive effects are executed.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, it is configured to execute the above-mentioned suggestion effect based on the special figure 2 lottery during the special figure 1 fluctuation, but a plurality of lotteries that can be executed at the same time are used. For example, the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be executed based on the lottery of the normal design (second design) during the special design 1 fluctuation, and the special design (second design) during the normal design (second design) fluctuation 1 symbol) may be executed to suggest the result of the normal symbol lottery. Also, it may be configured to execute a suggesting effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 based on the normal symbol lottery while the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are fluctuating at the same time.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the special figure 1 lottery is configured to suggest the contents of the jackpot won based on the special figure 2 lottery during the jackpot fluctuation in which the jackpot is won. In addition, it may be configured to suggest the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1. In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, if one of the special symbols has won the jackpot (including during the fluctuation of the jackpot winning), the other special symbol will be selected by lottery. It is configured so as not to win the jackpot. Therefore, since the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation does not win the jackpot, even if the special figure 1 lottery result (jackpot content) is suggested, the jackpot game different from the suggested content It is possible to suppress the situation in which the (jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot won in the special figure 2 lottery) is executed.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, it is configured to execute a suggestive effect based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation that is won in the jackpot, but it is not limited to this. , It may be constructed so as to execute the suggestion performance based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 variation when the jackpot is not won. As a result, the execution of the suggestive performance can make the player think that the fluctuating special figure 1 has won a jackpot.

Further, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, when the jackpot is elected in a state in which the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state is set during the jackpot variation, and the special figure 2 lottery is easily executed. As a result, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed more often during the variation of the special figure 1 jackpot, so that the suggestive performance can be easily provided to the player. In addition, when the latent certainty state is set, it becomes easier to win a small win different from the big win in the special figure 2 lottery, so that the special figure 2 lottery can be more actively executed.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is performed. Although it is configured to be executed by the time it is started, the suggestive effect may be executed in a period other than this. Based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the big winning game, the lottery result of the special figure 1 (game state set after the big winning game content and the big winning game) may be suggested.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, it is configured to execute the suggestive effect based on the special figure 2 lottery only during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation, but the special figure 1 is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute a suggestive effect based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the deviation fluctuation. As a result, when the suggestive performance is executed, the player can be entertained as to whether or not the changing special figure 1 lottery is a big hit.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment described above, a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation was added to the above fourth embodiment. Although an example has been shown, the suggestive effect used in the modification of the fourth embodiment may be configured to be added to the other embodiments described above. can be configured to

In the third embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, a variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and in the state where the variable state is set, predetermined transition conditions (jackpot winning, When the small hit winning, the fourth lottery of special symbols) is established, the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set to the predetermined end condition (fourth lottery result of special symbols is stopped) is set.

When executing the above-described suggestion effect in the third embodiment configured in this way, the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the latent state is set It is preferable to perform not only the lottery result but also the suggestive effect suggesting the opportunity (transition condition) when the latent certainty state is set.

In other words, in the third embodiment, a plurality of transition conditions for setting the latent state are defined, and the period during which the latent state is set differs depending on the established transition condition. Since the specific contents have been described above with reference to FIG. 112, the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, according to the configuration used in the third embodiment, until the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the condition for transition to the latent state is established is stopped and displayed, the player can move to the latent state of this time It was impossible to report what the trigger was.

Therefore, to the configuration of the third embodiment, by adding the suggested effect explained using the modification of the fourth embodiment, during the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the transition condition to the latent state is established It is possible to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 during fluctuation based on the executed special figure 2 lottery. By configuring in this way, the player can predict the timing of the transition to the latent definite state this time by seeing the suggestive effect to be executed.

In other words, it is possible to set a first game state that is advantageous to the player as a game state (for example, a latent probability state) and a second game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state (for example, a variable probability state). When the transition condition is established, the special figure 2 variation that is executed during the special figure 1 variation when the second game state is configured to be able to move from the second game state to the first game state and the first game state is set Based on the (lottery), it is preferable to configure so that a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player what the transition condition for setting the first game state this time was can be executed.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment described above, by executing the lottery of the special figure 2 during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation (during the RUSH game period), by frequently executing the small winning game (RUSH game) , In a configuration that can give a prize ball to a player without executing a jackpot game, the lottery result of the special picture 1 (jackpot game content, game state after the jackpot game, special picture) based on the lottery of the special picture 2 1 variation remaining variation time) is configured to be executable, it is possible to give a plurality of meanings to the special figure 2 lottery during the RUSH game period. Specifically, a lottery result advantageous to the player as the lottery result of the changing special figure 1 while expecting a small hit to obtain a prize ball by the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period. It is possible to make the user expect that a suggestive effect suggesting that is is executed.

In the case of such a configuration, for example, if one of the multiple meanings of the special figure 2 lottery has a meaning that is disadvantageous to the player, the other is controlled to have a meaning that is advantageous to the player. good. Specifically, for example, as a result of the special figure 2 lottery, it is possible to set a small hit with a long fluctuation time (for example, a small hit A) and a small hit (small hit B) with a shorter fluctuation time than the small hit A. do. In this case, in order to execute many small winning games within the limited period of the RUSH game period, it is necessary to select many lottery results with short fluctuation times as the lottery results of the special figure 2. In other words, when winning the above-described small win A, the lottery results are more disadvantageous to the player than when winning the small win B.

In such a case, it is preferable that the suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the small win A is won than when the small win B is won. As a result, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is disadvantageous to the player, another added value (suggestive performance) can be easily provided, so that the player's willingness to play is remarkably reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition to the above-described examples, for example, the first small winning game that is advantageous to the player as a game mode of the small winning game that is executed when the small winning is won, and the player than the first small winning game To make it possible to set a second small winning game in which a small winning game disadvantageous to a player is executed, and to easily provide another added value (suggestive performance) when winning a small winning game disadvantageous to a player. It may be configured so that

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 316. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, in the state in which the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) In addition, the game state during the variation of the big win is set as the latent certainty state, and when the latent certainty state is set, the small winning game is easily executed.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, and when the time saving state of the normal pattern ends first in the variable probability state (when the time saving number of times ends), and in part when winning the jackpot, an advantageous latent state It is configured to shift to In addition, in the game state other than the latent certainty state, even if it becomes a big hit, the probability that the latent certainty state is set is extremely low (for example, 5%). When moving from the state to the latent state, most of it is when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends in the variable state.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the case of winning the probability variable jackpot again in a relatively advantageous time-saving state or probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot, rather than the case of winning the probability variable jackpot in a disadvantageous normal state. It is configured so that the end condition of the time saving state is easily established in the variable probability state (a small number of times of time saving is easily set). As a result, even if the probability variable jackpot is won without being able to terminate the time saving state of the normal pattern (that is, without being able to shift to the latent state), the transition to the latent state is made. Since the probability of becoming easier increases, the player's sense of expectation for the potential state can be further improved. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the audio lamp control device 113 The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game state in the eleventh embodiment will be briefly described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 306, but in the eleventh embodiment, four types of game states are provided. That is, the most disadvantageous normal state for the player, the time-saving state with a higher degree of advantage than the normal state, the variable state with a higher degree of advantage than the time-saving state, and the most advantageous latent state for the player are provided. ing.

In the time-saving state (probability variable state of special symbols and time-saving state of normal symbols), as in the first embodiment, the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is easily opened, and the lower first Since it becomes easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance 64b2, by performing a left-handed game, the lottery for the first special symbol can be executed more efficiently than in the normal state. That is, since the number of game balls to be launched and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 or the like are substantially the same, the first special symbol can be obtained without reducing the number of possessed balls. form an advantageous situation that allows the lottery to be carried out. In addition, the variable state (variable state of special symbols and short-time state of normal symbols) is a time-saving state of normal symbols, and the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of special symbols is higher than the time-saving state. It is even more advantageous. In addition, the latent probability state (probability variable state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) is significantly shorter than other game states (10 minutes → 1 second) On top of that, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, there is a high probability (59/60) of a small hit (a type of loss), and the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is predetermined. Since the lottery result is open for a period and gives an opportunity to win a prize ball), just by executing a right-handed game aiming at the second ball entrance 640, the game ball is sent to the first specific winning hole 65a. A highly advantageous game state is created in which it is possible to continuously obtain prize balls by entering balls frequently.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 297 to 301, the characteristic entertainment effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the time saving state ends in a relatively advantageous variable probability state, it is configured to shift to the most advantageous latent certainty state. For this reason, in the definite variable state, rather than becoming a big hit in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to shift to the latent state by losing the special symbol lottery continuously over the set number of time reductions. It is possible to provide a novel game property that makes the player expect more strongly. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the state is shifted to the variable probability state, a display effect is executed to suggest the remaining number of lotteries until the state is shifted to the latent probability state. As a result, when shifting to the variable probability state, the player can confirm the guideline of the remaining number of lotteries until shifting to the probability state by only confirming the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加Convenience can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 297(a), in the eleventh embodiment, the display mode of the ending effect executed in the ending period of the jackpot game in which the variable probability state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends will be described. As shown in FIG. 297(a), when the ending effect in the eleventh embodiment is executed, for the upper central portion (above the character 811 imitating a rabbit) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, A display area HR1 is formed in which characters such as "RUSH is confirmed by breaking through a maximum of three rivers!?" are displayed. With this display content, the player can easily understand that the character 811 will break through three rivers at most, and the transition to the RUSH (probability state) will be confirmed. Other display contents are the same as the display contents of the ending effect (see FIG. 6A) in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, there is also provided a jackpot type (jackpot A11, jackpot H11) that shifts directly to the latent state (RUSH) after the jackpot ends. Although not shown, in the case of a jackpot type, a latent probability state (RUSH) entry is notified in the ending period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 297(b) to FIG. 299, the display effect executed during the time saving state of the normal symbol in the eleventh embodiment (that is, during the variable probability state or the time saving state) will be described. . Although the details will be described later, while the time saving state of the normal design is set, the time saving state of the normal design is terminated each time the lottery of the special design of the specific number of times (25 times or 15 times) is executed. The player determines whether the time saving state of the normal pattern is terminated and moves to the most disadvantageous normal state, or whether the time saving state of the normal pattern continues (maintained). A production that suggests (informs) is executed. That is, depending on whether or not the character 811 will break through the river, a river break-through effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) capable of suggesting (announcing) the game state after the end of the variation is executed. In addition, the cycle in which the river breakthrough effect is executed is set to the number of fluctuations that may cause the time saving state to end. That is, when a jackpot is obtained in the normal state and the variable probability state or the time saving state of normal symbols is set, the number of times of time saving is set to either 25 times, 50 times or 75 times. Further, when the variable probability state or the time saving state is set, the number of times of time saving is set to 10 times, 25 times, or 40 times. By executing the river breakthrough performance every time the number of fluctuations that the time saving state may end, the game is played with the expectation that the transition to the latent state will be notified every time the river breakthrough performance is executed. can be done. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 297(b), an effect mode (display mode) before the river breaking effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 297(b), an effect in which the character 811 runs rightward in front view is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 until the river breaking effect is executed. In addition, a display area HR2 having a substantially oblong rectangular shape is formed on the right side of the character 811 when viewed from the front. In this display area HR2, characters (display mode) indicating (indicating) the number of times of lottery for the remaining special symbols until the character 811 reaches the next river are displayed. Note that FIG. 297(b) illustrates a state in which the characters "20 times left to the first river" are displayed. To make a player easily understand that it is a chance to shift to an advantageous latent certainty state by being continuously lost over 20 more special pattern lotteries by this display content. can be done. Other display contents are the same as those of the chance zone mode (see FIG. 6B) in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Here, the "chance zone" in the eleventh embodiment indicates a state while the time saving state of normal symbols is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 298(a), the display contents at the start of the river breaking effect will be described. FIG. 298(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breaking effect. As shown in FIG. 298(a), when the river breakthrough effect is started, an effect is executed in which the character 811 finds a river image KG imitating a river. In addition, the characters "Reach the first river! Jump over the river!" are displayed in the display area HR1 formed (displayed) in the upper part of the display screen. With these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that there is a possibility that the time saving state of the normal symbol ends (that is, the number of time saving times passes) in the variation. In other words, it is possible for the player to understand that there is a possibility of transitioning to an advantageous latent state and a possibility of transitioning to a disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the river breakthrough effect.

FIG. 298(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the river breakthrough effect when the river breakthrough is successful and the continuation of the time saving state (chance zone) of normal symbols is notified. As shown in FIG. 298(b), when success is notified by the river breaking effect, the character 811 jumps and lands on the opposite bank of the river image KG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 298(b), a signboard image 815 imitating a signboard is displayed on the other side (opposite bank) after jumping over the river. This signboard image 815 is displayed to suggest (notify) a privilege for the character 811 jumping over (breaking through) the river image KG. FIG. 298(b) illustrates a case in which a character "Continue" is displayed to indicate that the time saving state of normal symbols continues (the number of time saving times remains) even after the next variable display. Along with the display of the signboard image 815, the characters "Break through the first river!! Continuing the chance zone!!" By these display contents, the player can easily understand that the time-saving state of the normal symbol will continue to the next variable display transition. Therefore, by continuing the failure until the next river breakthrough performance, the player can play the game while having a sense of purpose to get a chance to shift to the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. can be made In addition, if the time saving state of the normal design continues, the lottery result of the special design will be out. Therefore, in the small area Dm1 for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol, the third symbol (for example, the combination of "8", "1", and "5") that is a combination indicating the loss is displayed.

Note that there is a time lag (for example, 1 seconds). As a result, the player can expect to be notified of the transition to the latent state (RUSH) as a privilege for jumping over the river image 811 during this one second period. Therefore, the player can strongly expect to be notified of the definite state for at least one second each time the river breakthrough effect is successful, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 299 (a) is, in the river breakthrough production, the river breakthrough is successful, the transition to the latent state (RUSH) (that the time saving state of the normal pattern is terminated in the variable state) display in the case where it is notified It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. As shown in FIG. 299(a), even when the transition to the latent state is reported, the character 811 is similar to the case where the continuation of the time-saving state of the normal symbol is reported (see FIG. 298(b)). An effect is executed in which the character jumps over the river image KG and lands on the opposite bank. On the other hand, when the transition to the latent state is notified, the characters "RUSH" are displayed on the signboard image 815, and "First river breakthrough! RUSH" is displayed on the display area HR1. Rush!!” is displayed. In addition, the characters displayed in the small area Dm3 are switched to "Right shot", and the display content of the sub-display area Ds is switched to "RUSH rush!! Hit right!!". With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the game has shifted to the most advantageous latent probability state (RUSH) and that the game should be played right-handed.

FIG. 299(b) shows an example of a display mode when failure to break through the river in the river breakthrough production and transition to the normal state (the time saving state of the normal pattern is terminated in the time saving state) is notified. It is a diagram showing. As shown in FIG. 299(b), when the transition to the normal state is reported, the character 811 jumps toward the opposite bank of the river image KG, but cannot jump over the river image KG. A production that falls towards is executed. In addition, the characters "Failure to break through... end of chance zone..." are displayed in the display area HR1, and the characters "End of the chance zone!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. be. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has shifted to a disadvantageous normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 300, in the eleventh embodiment, the game in the case where the chance zone is set after the end of the jackpot (that is, the variable probability state or the time saving state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot) A description will be given of the transition of the state and the mode of presentation. First, with reference to FIG. 300(a), the transition of the game state and the effect mode when winning the jackpot C11 in the normal state will be described. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 303, the jackpot C11 is a game state after the end of the jackpot is set to a variable probability state, and the time saving number of times is set to 50 times, and the probability variable number of times is set to 100 times. It is a type. In other words, if the lottery for the special pattern is lost 50 times in a row after the end of the big win, unless the big win is won thereafter, until the lottery for the special pattern is executed 100 times after the end of the big win, the latent state is advantageous. It is a jackpot of the type that becomes.

As shown in FIG. 300(a), when the jackpot C11 is won in the normal state, the time-saving state of the normal pattern continues until the 50th special pattern lottery is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the 50th special. At the timing when the lottery of the symbols is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbols is terminated and the normal state of the normal symbols is set. On the other hand, the variable probability state of the special symbols continues even if the lottery of the special symbols is executed 50 times or more (continues until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times at maximum). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300(a), as the production mode, during the execution of the variable display based on the execution of the 24th special symbol lottery, the continuation is notified of the river breakthrough production (FIG. 298). (b)) is executed, and during the execution of the variable display based on the execution of the 49th special symbol lottery, the transition to the latent state is notified of the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299 (a) ) is executed. Thereafter, a RUSH effect indicating that the game is in the latent certainty state is executed in the same display manner as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 7(b)). In addition, when the probability variable jackpot (jackpot D11) with the number of times of time saving set to 25 times is achieved, the transition to the latent probability state is notified by the first river breakthrough effect. On the other hand, when the probability variable jackpot (jackpot B11) with the number of times of time saving set to 75 times is achieved, the continuation of the time saving state (chance zone) of the normal pattern is notified in the first and second river breakthrough productions, and 3 The transition to the latent state is notified in the th river breakthrough effect (the river breakthrough effect executed in the variable display based on the execution of the 74th special symbol lottery).

Next, with reference to FIG. 300(b), the transition of the game state and the effect mode when the jackpot F11 is won in the normal state will be described. Here, the jackpot F11 is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state, and the number of times of time-saving is set to 50 times. In other words, this is a type of jackpot that becomes a disadvantageous normal state after 50 times in a row after the end of the jackpot when the special symbol lottery is lost.

As shown in FIG. 300(b), when the jackpot F11 is won in the normal state, the time-saving state of the normal pattern continues until the lottery of 50 special patterns is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the 50th special At the timing when the lottery of the symbols is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbols is terminated and the normal state of the normal symbols is set. In addition, the state of the special design is maintained in the low probability state of the special design from the end of the jackpot. Therefore, the game state shifts to the normal state by executing the 50th special symbol lottery after the end of the big win. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300(b), as the effect mode, during the execution of the variable display based on the execution of the 24th special symbol lottery, the continuation is notified of the river breaking effect (FIG. 298). (b)) is executed, and during the execution of the variable display based on the execution of the 49th special symbol lottery, the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299(b)) in which the river breakthrough fails. Executed to signal the transition to the normal state. After that, the normal effect for the normal state is executed. In addition, when the normal jackpot (jackpot G11) with the number of times of time saving set to 25 times is achieved, the transition to the normal state is notified by the first river breakthrough effect. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot (jackpot E11) in which the number of times of time saving is set to 75 times, the continuation of the time saving state (chance zone) of normal symbols is notified in the first and second river breakthrough productions. The transition to the normal state is notified in the th river breakthrough performance (the river breakthrough performance executed in the variable display based on the execution of the 74th special symbol lottery).

Thus, in the eleventh embodiment, when the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probability variable state or the time saving state, each time the number of fluctuations that the time saving state of the normal symbol may end, the river By executing the breakthrough production, whether the time-saving state of the normal pattern continues, the time-saving state of the normal pattern is terminated and shifts to the latent state, or the time-saving state of the normal design is terminated and shifts to the normal state. It is configured to notify periodically (every 25 times or 15 times of lottery of special symbols) whether to play. By configuring in this way, while the chance zone (time saving state of normal symbols) is set, the player is allowed to play the game with the execution of the next river breakthrough performance as one pleasure. can be done. In addition, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics in which the player wishes to continuously lose out in special symbol lotteries at least until the next river breakthrough performance. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, by configuring it so that there is a possibility of shifting to the normal state by failing to break through the river, the continuation of the time-saving state was notified in the river breakthrough production (even though the river was broken through, it shifted to the latent state. was not), it can be made to think that it is better than being notified of the normal state. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged even if the potential state is not notified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 301, a small winning effect that can be executed in the latent state in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, a plurality of productions with different modes are provided as the small winning production, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the lottery of the first special symbol during fluctuation Executed to suggest results. In addition, in the latent probability state, as a case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, mainly, the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated in the probability variable state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol are likely to accumulate, and the first special This is the case when the state is shifted to the latent state while holding the reserved ball of the design. In this case, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. The variable display of the second special symbol is overlapped and executed. The lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested by the small winning performance in the case of the small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol.

FIG. 301 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a small win effect (a small win effect for high expectations) suggesting that the lottery result of the first special symbol is highly likely to be a big win. When the small winning effect for the high expectation degree is executed, as shown in FIG. 301, the effect pattern 816 of the flashy display mode as compared with the effect pattern 813 in the normal small winning effect (see FIG. 7(b)). is displayed. As shown in FIG. 301, this production design 816 has a character color "V" for indicating a small hit set to a character color (yellow) different from the character color (black) in the production design 813. The effect around the letter "V" gives it a flashy appearance. With these display modes, the player can easily understand that a small win effect different from the normal small win effect (see FIG. 7(b)) has been executed, so that a big win is achieved. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the event.

Although not shown in the drawings, in the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the normal small hit production (small hit production for low expectations) and the small hit production for high expectations, the expectation is medium There is also a small hit effect (small hit effect for medium expectations). By configuring in this way, in a period such as immediately after the transition to the latent definite state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are likely to be overlapped, the second special symbol It is possible to realize a novel game property of predicting the lottery result of the first special symbol according to the type of the small winning performance. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, conventionally, there has been widely known a gaming machine that executes a variable display effect of symbols for showing the result of the lottery each time the result of the lottery of special symbols is executed. In such a conventional gaming machine, during execution of the variable display performance of symbols, various entertainment performances suggesting the lottery results of special symbols are executed to improve the interest of the player. However, in a game machine with a specification that can simultaneously execute a plurality of variable displays, there is a problem that while paying attention to the effect mode associated with one variable display effect, the effect mode in the other variable display effect is overlooked. there was a point In particular, in a game machine that displays one variable display in a manner that is easier to visually recognize than the other, it is difficult to confirm the effect mode of the other (hardly visually recognized) variable display, and the other variable display effect is difficult to confirm. However, there is a problem that the player may be confused if the jackpot is started in a state where the player is not paying attention.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the latent state, is preferentially (visually recognized) over the variable display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to be executed. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed together while being displayed (in an easy mode), the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the small hit production of the second special symbol (the production mode accompanying the variable display). It is configured to suggest the results. By constructing in this way, it is possible to confirm the degree of expectation for a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the display mode in the small winning effect of the second special symbol was configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol being executed at the same time is a big hit. It is not limited. For example, it may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol by the effect mode of the effect executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, for example, by the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbols in the second symbol display device, it is also possible to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a big hit. good. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the results of the variable display performance on the side that is difficult to visually recognize only by confirming the variable display performance on the side that is easy to see, so that the performance that is easier to understand is realized. can do. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

<Electrical Configuration of Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 304. FIG. ROM202 in the eleventh embodiment, the configuration of the ROM202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15 (a)), the defined content of the first per random number table 202a, the defined content of the small per random number table 202b, There is a difference in that the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d and the defined contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(a)), detailed description thereof will be given later.

First, with reference to FIG. 302(a), details of the first winning random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 302(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a. The first winning random number table 202a in the eleventh embodiment is similar to the first winning random number table 202a in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(a)), in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, It is a data table in which random numbers (determined values) that are determined to be winning in each game state are set.

As shown in FIG. 302(a), the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 302(a)) in the eleventh embodiment includes a random number (counter value ), while two of "7, 8" are defined, as a random number (counter value) that is determined to be a big hit in the high probability state (variable state) of the special symbol, eight of "0 to 7" of random values are specified. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability in the special symbol low probability state is 1/240 (2/480), and the jackpot probability in the special symbol variable probability state is 1/60 (1/480).

Next, with reference to FIG. 302(b), the small winning random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Figure 302(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small winning random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment. This small hit random number table 202b, like the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15(b)) in the first embodiment, sets a random value (counter value) determined to be a small hit in the special symbol lottery. It is a table that has been As shown in FIG. 302(b), in the small winning random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment, the random number value that becomes a small winning is not defined for the first special symbol lottery. That is, in the lottery for the first special symbol, a small hit is not won. On the other hand, 472 random numbers (counter values) of "8 to 479" are defined in association with the lottery for the second special symbol. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a small win is obtained with a probability of 59/60 (472/480). That is, in the eleventh embodiment, if the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the latent certainty state, a big win or a small win will occur. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the latent state can be further increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 303, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 303 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d. In the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment, similarly to the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 16(a)), the determination value for determining the jackpot type is determined for each type of special symbol. is a data table stored in

As shown in FIG. 303, in the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment, seven jackpot types of "jackpot A11" to "jackpot G11" as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stipulated. On the other hand, as the jackpot types of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "jackpot H11" to "jackpot J11" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 303, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and the jackpot type is "jackpot A11". are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot A11" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variable state of special symbols is set after the completion of the jackpot. In addition, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, it is variable whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. More specifically, when "jackpot A11" is won in the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state, the time saving state of normal symbols is not set (the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0). That is, when the "jackpot A11" is won in the normal state, the time-saving state, and the variable probability state, the state shifts to the most advantageous latent probability state. At this time, since the probability variation number is set to 100 times (100 is set to the probability variation counter 203j), at the maximum, after the "jackpot A11" ends, 100 times of the special symbol lottery is executed. Advantageous latent conditions continue for a while. On the other hand, when "jackpot A11" is won in the latent state, the number of times of time saving is set to 50 (the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 50), so after the jackpot ends, the lottery of special symbols at maximum. Until is executed 50 times, it will be in a relatively advantageous probability change state. Therefore, "jackpot A11" is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state when winning in a game state other than the latent certainty state. On the other hand, if you win in the latent state, it will be a relatively advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state (disadvantageous than the jackpot type in which the latent state is set, but it is more advantageous than the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set. Become).

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot A11" is five, so the lottery for the first special symbol. , the ratio of determining "jackpot A11" is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, "jackpot B11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 14". This "jackpot B11" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variable state of special symbols is set after the completion of the jackpot. In addition, if the "jackpot B11" is won in the normal state, the number of times of time saving is set to 75 times, while if the "jackpot B11" is won in the time saving state and the variable probability state, the time saving number of times is set to 40 times. be done. That is, when the "jackpot B11" is elected in the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous variable state. On the other hand, when "jackpot B11" is won in the latent certainty state, the number of times of time saving is set to 0, so the game state after the big win is the most advantageous latent certainty state. Therefore, "jackpot B11" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the game state when it is won in a game state other than the latent certainty state. On the other hand, when winning in the latent probability state, it becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B11", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot B11" is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, "jackpot C11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "15 to 69". This "jackpot C11" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variable state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot. In addition, if the "jackpot C11" is won in the normal state, the number of times of saving time is set to 50 times, while if the "jackpot C11" is won in the time saving state and the variable probability state, the number of times of saving time is set to 25 times. be done. That is, since the number of times of time saving is set less than when winning the "jackpot B11" in the above three game states, it becomes easier to shift to the latent state (normally, the time saving state continues until the end of the pattern) easier to make). Therefore, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state, the "jackpot C11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "jackpot B11". On the other hand, when "jackpot B11" is won in the latent certainty state, the number of times of time saving is set to 0, so the game state after the big win is the most advantageous latent certainty state. Therefore, "jackpot C11" is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state when winning in the latent state.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 55 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot C11", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot C11" is 55% (55/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "70 to 79" in association with "jackpot D11" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot D11" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variable state of special symbols is set after the completion of the jackpot. In addition, if the "jackpot D11" is won in the normal state, the number of times of time saving is set to 25 times, while if the "jackpot D11" is won in the time saving state and the probability variable state, the time saving number of times is set to 10 times. be done. That is, since the number of times of time saving is set less than when winning the "jackpot B11" or "jackpot C11" in the above three game states, it becomes easier to shift to the latent state (the time saving state of the normal pattern ends It becomes easier to continue to come off until). Therefore, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state, the "jackpot D11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "jackpot B11" and the "jackpot C11". On the other hand, when "big win D11" is won in the latent definite state, the number of times of time saving is set to 0, so the game state after the big win is the most advantageous latent definite state. Therefore, "jackpot D11" is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state when winning in the latent state.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot D11", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot D11" is 10% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "80, 81" in association with "jackpot E11" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot E11" is a type of jackpot (8-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and a special symbol low probability state is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win the "jackpot E11" in the normal state, while the number of times of time saving is set to 75 times, if you win the "jackpot E11" in the time saving state, the variable state, and the latent state, the number of time saving It is set to 100 times. The time-saving state is a type of jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player because it only shifts to the normal state (does not shift to an advantageous latent state) even after the number of times of time-saving has passed.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot E11" is two, so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot E11" is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, "jackpot F11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 "82 to 98". This "jackpot F11" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the low probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win the "jackpot F11" in the normal state, the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times, while if you win the "jackpot F11" in the time saving state, the variable state, and the latent state, the number of time saving It is set to 100 times. Therefore, the "jackpot F11" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the "jackpot E11" in the normal state, and is a jackpot with the same degree of advantage as the "jackpot E11" in the time saving state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state. .

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 17 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot F11", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot F11" is 17% (17/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "99" in association with "jackpot G11" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot G11" is a type of jackpot (8-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and a low probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win the "jackpot G11" in the normal state, while the number of times of time saving is set to 25 times, if you win the "jackpot G11" in the time saving state, the variable state, and the latent state, the number of time saving is It is set to 100 times. Therefore, the "jackpot G11" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the "jackpot E11" and the "jackpot F11" in the normal state, and the "jackpot E11" and the "jackpot F11" in the time saving state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state. ” is a jackpot with the same degree of advantage.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot G11" is one, so the lottery of the first special symbol. , the ratio of determining "jackpot G11" is 1% (1/100).

Thus, in the eleventh embodiment, as the jackpot of the first special symbol, the probability variable jackpot ("jackpot B11" ~ “jackpot D11”) and normal jackpots (“jackpot E11” to “jackpot G11”) in which the number of times of time reduction is set to 75 times, 50 times, and 25 times are provided. That is, the timing at which the time saving state of the normal pattern ends is configured to be three patterns of 75 times, 50 times, and 25 times after the end of the big win. By constructing in this way, every time the drawing for the special symbols is executed 25 times, 50 times, and 75 times after the time-saving state of the normal symbols is set, the state is shifted to the latent definite state. can be expected. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of the jackpots in which the number of times of time saving is set to 25 times is extremely low (1%) in the distribution of the normal jackpots. Therefore, it is difficult to determine the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous to the player (the number of times of time saving is small and there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state), so that the player can be prevented from being too disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining. In addition, the ratio of the normal jackpot (jackpot E11) in which the number of times of time saving is set to 75 times is also configured to be relatively low (2%). As a result, when the number of times of time saving exceeds 50 times (that is, when continuation is notified by the second river breakthrough performance), it is possible to improve the expectation for the variable probability state. Therefore, even if the transition to the hidden state is not notified in the second river breakthrough production (that is, even if the continuation is notified), the next (that is, the third) river breakthrough production is more expected. can be improved.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, in the time-saving state and the probability variation state, if you win the probability variation jackpot (that is, consecutively run), it is less than when you hit the jackpot in the normal state (that is, in the case of the so-called first hit) It is configured to set the number of times of working hours. In other words, it is constructed so that the end condition of the time saving state of the normal pattern is more likely to be established when winning the probability variable jackpot in the time saving state or the probability changing state than when winning the probability variable jackpot in the normal state. In other words, those who win the definite variable jackpot during the time-saving state of normal symbols are configured to have a higher possibility of shifting to the latent definite state. As a result, the player can feel as if he or she is getting closer to the latent state as the jackpot is won in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

In addition, when the normal jackpot is won in the time saving state or the variable probability state, 100 times are set as the number of time saving times regardless of the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case of a normal jackpot, which is disadvantageous in the time saving state and the probability variable state (that is, does not shift to the latent probability state even if the end condition of the time saving state of normal patterns is satisfied). Therefore, both in the case of a probability variable jackpot and in the case of a normal jackpot, the degree of advantage can be increased in the case of the occurrence of a so-called consecutive villa rather than in the so-called first hit, so the occurrence of a consecutive villa. It is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation in the case of doing so.

Also, as shown in FIG. 303, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special pattern 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 74", and the jackpot type is "jackpot H11 ” are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot H11" is a type of jackpot (16-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the probability variable state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot. In addition, if you win the "jackpot H11" in a state other than the latent state, the number of times of saving time is set to 100 times, while if you win the "jackpot H11" in the latent state, the number of times of saving time is set to 0 times. set. In other words, if the "jackpot H11" is won in a game state other than the latent probability state, the game state after the end of the big win is set to the variable probability state, while if the "jackpot H11" is won in the latent probability state, after the jackpot ends. is set to the latent state.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 75 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot H11", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot H11" is 75% (75/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, "jackpot I11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "75 to 79". This "jackpot I11" is a type of jackpot (16-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the probability variable state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot. In addition, if you win the "jackpot I11" in a state other than the latent state, the number of times of saving time is set to 100 times, while if you win the "jackpot I11" in the latent state, the number of times of saving time will be 50 times. set. That is, when the "jackpot I11" is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable state regardless of the game state at the time of winning.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot I11" is five, so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot H11" is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, "jackpot J11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". This "jackpot J11" is a type of jackpot (16-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and a low probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if the "jackpot J11" is won in a state other than the latent state, the number of times of time saving is set to 0 times, while if the "jackpot J11" is won in the latent state, the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. set. That is, if "jackpot J11" is won in a game state other than the latent certainty state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state, while if "jackpot J11" is won in the latent certainty state, the game state after the jackpot ends. It is set to short working hours.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 20 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot J11", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot J11" is 20% (20/100).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in a game state other than the latent definite state, the game state after the jackpot ends is relatively disadvantageous. . This is intended to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed game is performed and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, even though it is not in a latent state. That is, in the jackpot of the second special symbol won in a game state other than the latent certainty state, if the same game state as the latent certainty state is set, the second special symbol lottery is intentionally performed by hitting to the right. Due to the game method to be executed by the player, it will shift to the most advantageous latent state at a high rate of 75%, which is excessively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, even if a jackpot is hit by hitting the right in the gaming state where the left-handed game should be performed, there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state. A probability variable state in which the probability variable state is terminated at the same time as the passage of time is set, or the most disadvantageous normal state is set, so that the player who gets a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous to the player. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of performing a right-handed game in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 304, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, like the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment, determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is a data table for In the eleventh embodiment, of the variation pattern selection table 202f, the prescribed contents of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 and the latency/probability table 202f3 are partially changed. Specifically, the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 in the eleventh embodiment is, as shown in FIG. It is configured to shorten the variation time (10 seconds to 20 seconds) when the first special symbol hits. In addition, as a variation pattern when the first special symbol is out, a short variation with a variation time of 1 second, a middle variation with a variation time of 10 seconds, and a super variation with a variation time of 15 seconds are provided. there is As a result, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the time saving state and the variable probability state, and to diversify the variation pattern at the time of loss. Also, since the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state (see FIG. 18), it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the game state in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is configured to be set to 60 seconds regardless of the lottery result, as in the first embodiment. As a result, when the right hitting is performed in the time saving state or the variable probability state in which the left hitting game should be performed, the game efficiency can be deteriorated. It is possible to suppress the game method.

Further, as shown in FIG. 304(b), in the latent certainty table 202f3j in the eleventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol is the same as the time saving/probability variation table 202f2. On the other hand, for the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a variation pattern for one second is set regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, when the state is shifted to the latent certainty state and the right-handed game is performed, the small winning game is executed at relatively short intervals (about 1 second intervals), so that the first specific winning opening 65a is frequently opened. , prize balls can be won frequently. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of advantage for the player in the latent state.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the latent state is reached, the probability of a big hit becomes high, and the first specific winning hole 65a is opened at intervals of one second, which is an extremely advantageous game state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with the goal of transitioning to the latent state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 305, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided inside the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 305 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 305, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment is the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21), instead of the probability variation flag 203g, a probability variation counter 203ja is added. They are different in that respect.

The probability variation counter 203ja is a counter for counting the number of times of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the probability variation state of the special symbol ends. If the value of this probability variation counter 203ja is 1 or more, it indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if the value is 0, it indicates that it is a low probability state of the special symbol. The variable probability counter 203ja has an initial value set to 0, and the value is set to 0 when a big win is won. If the winning jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, a value of 100 is set at the end of the variable probability jackpot. Also, while the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is 1 or more, the value is updated by subtracting 1 each time a special symbol lottery is newly executed (see S623 in FIG. 310). When the lottery of special symbols is executed, the value of this probability variation counter 203ja is referred to, it is determined whether or not it is in the probability variation state, and a table for judging a big hit (first random number for high probability) table, or the first random number table for low probability) is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 306, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described. explain. FIG. 306 is a diagram showing a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 306, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is roughly divided into four game states. That is, the normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, the probability variable state shown in the center left side of FIG. 306, the time saving state shown in the center right side of FIG. is provided.

As described above, the normal state indicates a low-probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, the probability of becoming a big hit is low, and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to be released (the game ball is low). Since it is difficult to enter the ball into the 1 ball entrance 64b2), the game state is the most disadvantageous for the player. In addition, as described above, the probability variation state indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, the probability of the jackpot is high, and by performing the left-handed game Lower first entrance Since the game ball frequently enters 64 (the electric accessary 64a is frequently released), the game state is comparatively advantageous for the player. In addition, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and although the jackpot probability is low, by performing a left-handed game, the lower first Since the game ball is frequently entered into the ball entrance 640, a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state is formed. Furthermore, as described above, the latent definite state indicates that the definite variable state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of a big hit is high, and when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed To efficiently execute the lottery of the second special symbol by performing a right-handed game because the set fluctuation time is much shorter than the other three game states (60 seconds→1 second). can be done. Then, as described above, in the lottery for the second special symbol, a small win is won with a high probability (59/60), and the first specific winning opening 64a is opened. Game balls frequently enter the second ball entrance 640 and the first specific prize winning opening 64a, forming an extremely advantageous game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained without a big hit. Therefore, the potential state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

As shown at the top of diagram 306, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal state to another state only in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, when the jackpot A11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected (determined) as the first special pattern jackpot and the jackpot type determined at a rate of 5% is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. move to a secure state. Therefore, when the jackpot A11 is reached, the game directly shifts to the most advantageous probability state, so in the normal state, the jackpot A11 is the type of jackpot most pleasing to the player. In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot is selected (determined), one of the jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. Transition. Further, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and any one of the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected as the jackpot type, the state shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot ends. In addition, as described above, when the variable probability state and the time saving state are set as the game state after the end of the jackpot, it is configured so that it is difficult to recognize which game state has been set (which game state However, it is configured so that the river breakthrough effect is executed at the same timing). Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the result of the river breakthrough effect.

In addition, as shown in the center left side of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state from the variable probability state to another state, in addition to the case of a big hit, even when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends. be. Specifically, when the jackpot is achieved in the variable probability state and the jackpot A11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the state shifts to the advantageous probability state after the jackpot ends. Also, when the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% are selected, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state. On the other hand, when the time-saving state of normal symbols ends before winning the jackpot, the state shifts to the most advantageous latent certainty state. On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, if any of the jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75% is reached, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable state again ( Loop the variable state). In other words, in the probability variable state, even if you win a jackpot, it will only transition to an advantageous latent state with a low probability (5% rate), so it is better to allow the player to reduce the number of times. It can be made to feel that it is easy to shift to the state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player expects to continuously miss the set number of times of time saving. It should be noted that, as described above, rather than the probability variable state that was moved based on winning the probability variation jackpot in the normal state (the probability variation state that moved after the first hit), the probability variation state and the time-saving state transition based on winning the probability variation jackpot The definite variable state (the definite variable state that has been shifted after the occurrence of consecutive houses) is configured so that the average value of the number of times of time reduction that is set is smaller. That is, the average number of times of time saving set at the time of the first hit is 50 times, whereas the average number of times of time saving set at the time of occurrence of consecutive homes is 25 times. Therefore, since it is easier to pass the number of time reductions when a series of houses occurs, even if you win the jackpot before the number of times of time reduction in the probability state and loop the probability state, Since there is a high possibility that the number of times of time reduction (small number of times of time reduction) that easily shifts to the latent certain state is set, the disappointment of the player can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining.

In addition, as shown in the central right side of FIG. 306, from the time saving state to another state, in addition to the case of a big hit, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state even when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends. be. Concretely, when the big win is made in the time saving state and the big win A11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the game shifts to the advantageous latent certainty state after the big win. Also, when the jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75% are selected, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable state. On the other hand, when the time-saving state of normal symbols ends before winning the jackpot, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if one of the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% is reached as the first special symbol jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state again ( Loop the time-saving state). That is, in the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving in the normal pattern has passed, the state shifts to a disadvantageous normal state, so it is advantageous to win a big hit. In addition, as described above, it is difficult to distinguish whether the time saving state of the normal pattern is set or whether the probability variable state is set from the content of the production, etc. Therefore, the time saving state is set. You can expect to be in a definite variable state. In other words, it is possible to expect that the number of time reduction times of normal symbols has passed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of shifting from the latent definite state to another state when a jackpot is won or when the definite variable number of times has elapsed. Specifically, in the latent probability state, the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, and when the big win I11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the state shifts to the probability variable state after the big win. Further, when the jackpot J11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state. On the other hand, when the number of times of variable probability ends before winning the jackpot, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the second special symbol lottery results in a big win and the big win is H11, which is determined at a rate of 75%, the game state after the big win is set to the latent state again ( loop latent states). In other words, in the latent definite state, by winning the jackpot before the definite variable number of times has elapsed, the advantageous latent definite state is looped at a high rate (75% rate), so after moving to the latent definite state allows players to play while expecting a big win.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to realize a game property that expects continuous misalignment in the variable probability state, while realizing a game property that expects a big win in the latent probability state. can do. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 307(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 307(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307(a), the configuration of the ROM222 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22(a)). The difference is that a sound selection table 222jb is added.

The small winning effect selection table 222ja is a data table referred to for selecting the type of small winning effect during execution of the small winning game when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery. As described above, immediately after the transition to the latent state, etc., when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are overlapped (simultaneously), the small hit production Depending on the type, it is configured to be able to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol. The details of the small winning effect selection table 222ja will be described later with reference to FIG. 308(a).

The winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table referred to for selecting a winning sound to be output when a winning to the specific winning hole 65a is detected during execution of the small winning game. In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested (notified) by the winning sound output during the small winning game. As a result, it is possible to play the game paying attention not only to the small winning effect but also to the winning sound, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Details of the winning sound selection table 222jb will be described later with reference to FIG. 308(b).

Next, with reference to FIG. 308(a), details of the above-described small winning effect selection table 222ja will be described. FIG. 308(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small winning effect selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 308(a), in the small hit effect selection table 222ja, the type of winning information of the first special symbol (data stored in the storage area corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b type), the range of the counter value of the production counter (production lottery counter) 223h and the production mode of the small winning production are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 308(a), as the winning information of the first special symbol, when data indicating a big hit is stored in the execution area (that is, the fluctuation of the first special symbol during execution When the display is a jackpot), the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 69", and the normal effect mode (see FIG. 7(b)) is defined in association with "70 to 89". With respect to the range, the production mode for medium expectations is defined in correspondence, and the production mode for high expectations (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with the range of "90 to 99" there is Therefore, the ratio of selecting the normal production mode, the medium-expectation production mode, and the high-expectation production mode during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is 70% (70/100) and 20%, respectively. (20/100), and 10% (10/100).

Also, as shown in FIG. 308(a), when data indicating a big win is stored in an area other than the execution area as the winning prize information of the first special symbol (a jackpot is included in the reserved balls of the first special symbol). ), and when data indicating a super fluctuation is stored in the execution area (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol being executed is removed and super fluctuation), the value of the production counter 223h is "0 to 84". The normal production mode (see FIG. 7 (b)) is defined in association with the range of "85 to 97", the production mode for the medium expectation level is defined in association, A rendering mode for high expectations (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with the range of “98, 99”. Therefore, when the jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol, or when the super fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, the normal production mode, the medium expectation production mode, and the high The ratios of selection of the presentation modes for the degree of expectation are 85% (85/100), 13% (13/100), and 2% (2/100), respectively. That is, compared to the case where the first special symbol is fluctuating in the jackpot, the selection ratio of the high-expectation and medium-expectation production modes is reduced, and the selection ratio of the normal production mode is increased. It is Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at the time when the performance mode for high expectation or the performance mode for medium expectation is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol indicates a big hit. It is possible to strongly expect that it is a variable display for Therefore, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the small winning effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 308(a), when neither the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is being executed nor the super-missing variation is being performed, and the reserved balls of the first special symbol do not include the jackpot. , the normal effect mode (see FIG. 7(b)) is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter 223h of "0 to 94", and the range of "95 to 98", A presentation mode for medium expectations is defined in association with "99", and a presentation mode for high expectations (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with "99". Therefore, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is not being executed, the super variation is not being performed, and the reserved ball of the first special symbol does not include the jackpot, the normal production mode and the medium expectation level The ratios of selection of the effect mode for high expectations and the effect mode for high expectations are 95% (95/100), 4% (4/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively. That is, the selection ratio of the production mode for high expectations and medium expectations is higher than when the first special symbol jackpot variation or losing super variation is being executed, or when the jackpot is included in the reservation. is lowered, the selection ratio of the normal effect mode is increased. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at the time when the production mode for high expectation or the production mode for medium expectation is executed, and when the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists , the game can be played in anticipation that the variable display being executed will result in a big win, or that a big win is included in the hold. Therefore, every time a small win is obtained in the lottery of the second special pattern, the game property of predicting the lottery result of the first special pattern from the performance mode of the small prize performance can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

Here, conventionally, there has been widely known a gaming machine that executes a variable display effect of symbols for indicating the result of the lottery each time the result of the lottery of special symbols is executed. In such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of the variable display performance of symbols, various entertainment performances suggesting the lottery result of special symbols are executed to improve the interest of the player. However, in a gaming machine with a specification that can simultaneously execute a plurality of variable displays, there is a problem that while paying attention to the effect mode associated with one variable display effect, the effect mode in the other variable display effect is overlooked. there was a point In particular, in a game machine that displays one variable display in a manner that is easier to visually recognize than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the effect mode of the other variable display (the side that is difficult to visually recognize), and the other variable display effect is difficult to confirm. However, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the player may be confused if the jackpot starts while the player is not paying attention to it.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the latent state, is preferentially (visually recognized) over the variable display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to be executed. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed together while being displayed (in an easy mode), the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the small hit production of the second special symbol (the production mode accompanying the variable display). The structure suggests the results. By constructing in this way, it is possible to confirm the degree of expectation for a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the performance mode associated with the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the display mode in the small winning effect of the second special symbol was configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol being executed at the same time is a big hit. It is not limited. For example, it may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol by the effect mode of the effect executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, for example, by the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbols in the second symbol display device, it is also possible to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a big hit. good. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the results of the variable display performance on the side that is difficult to visually recognize only by confirming the variable display performance on the side that is easy to see, so that the performance that is easier to understand is realized. can do. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

Next, details of the winning sound selection table 222jb will be described with reference to FIG. 308(b). As described above, the winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table referred to for selecting a winning sound to be output when a winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected during execution of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 308(b), in the winning sound selection table 222jb, for each type of winning information in the execution area of the first special symbol (variation type of variable display of the first special symbol being executed), an effect counter (Effect lottery counter) The range of the counter value of 223h and the type of winning sound (one of the three types of normal sound, chance sound, and confirmation sound) are defined in association with each other. The normal sound is composed of a relatively short and plain sound (for example, "Charin"), and the chance sound is a longer and louder sound than the normal sound (for example, "Jackin"). The final sound is composed of the loudest voice among the three types (for example, the voice of "Dokkan"). Although the details will be described later, the confirmation sound is a special sound that is output only when the game ball enters (wins) the first specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot variation.

As shown in FIG. 308(b), when the first special symbol jackpot variation is being executed, the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 79", and the normal sound is used as the winning sound. A chance sound is defined as a prize-winning sound in correspondence with the range of "80 to 98", and a determination sound is defined as a prize-winning sound in correspondence with the range of "99". Therefore, when the winning to the first specific winning opening 65a is detected during the execution of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the ratios of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the confirmation sound to be output are 80%, 19%, respectively. and 1%. As mentioned above, the definite sound is a special sound that is selected only during the execution of the jackpot variation. Therefore, when the definite sound is output, it is possible to give great joy to the player. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 308(b), when the first special symbol deviation super fluctuation is being executed, the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 89", as a winning sound A normal sound is defined in correspondence, and a chance sound is defined in correspondence with the range of "90 to 99" as a winning sound. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the definite sound. Therefore, when the winning to the first specific winning opening 65a is detected during the execution of the first special symbol deviation super variation, the ratio of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the confirmation sound to be output is 90% and 10%, respectively. , and 0%. In other words, the ratio of the chance sound output is reduced (approximately halved) and the ratio of the normal sound output is increased as compared with the case of the big win variation. Then, the possibility of outputting the confirmation sound is eliminated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 308(b), when the first special symbol jackpot variation is not being executed and the super-loss variation is not being executed, the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is within the range of "0 to 94". , normal sounds are defined as winning sounds, and chance sounds are defined as winning sounds in the range of "95 to 99". On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the confirmed sound. Therefore, when the winning to the first specific winning opening 65a is detected during the execution of the first special symbol deviation super variation, the ratio of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the confirmation sound to be output is 95% and 5%, respectively. , and 0%. In other words, the output ratio of the chance sound is further decreased and the output ratio of the normal sound is increased more than in the case where the deviation super fluctuation is being executed. Therefore, when the chance sound is output, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the fact that the big winning variation is being executed. Further, by outputting the confirmation sound, it is confirmed that the big winning variation is being executed, so that the player can be greatly delighted. Therefore, since the game can be played while paying attention not only to the small winning performance but also to the winning sound output during the small winning game, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 307(b), details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 307(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 223jb is added.

The variation number counter 223ja is a counter for counting the number of variations of special symbols (the number of lotteries). The initial value of the fluctuation counter 223ja is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time it is time to start the fluctuation display effect (that is, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110). (See S5121 and S5125 in FIG. 314). Also, it is reset to 0 at the end of the jackpot (see S4422 in FIG. 312). In the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the variation counter 223ja is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the river breakthrough effect can be executed (S5132, S5133 in FIG. 315) reference).

The first hit flag 223jb is a flag indicating whether or not it is the time saving state of the normal design set after the first hit. If this first hit flag is on, it means that it is during the time saving state of the normal pattern set after the first hit, and if it is off, it means that it is not the time saving state after the first hit. In the time-saving state of the normal symbols, the first hit flag 223jb is referred to every time the variable display performance of the special symbols is started, and whether the time-saving state after the first hit or the time-saving state after the occurrence of the consecutive games is performed. It is determined whether there is Then, if it is the time saving state after the first win, the river breaking effect is set at the start of the 24th, 49th and 74th fluctuation display after the end of the big win (see S5132 in FIG. 315). On the other hand, if it is a time-saving state after the occurrence of consecutive houses, a river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the 9th, 24th, and 39th variation displays (S5133 in FIG. 315). As described above, this is the number of fluctuations (special This is because the number of lotteries of symbols) is different.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 309, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and is the first special symbol in the first embodiment. Similar to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on the set game state, It is a process for executing a jackpot determination whether or not a jackpot.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, the contents of control are changed by providing a probability variation counter 203ja in place of the probability variation flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, among the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, in each process of S401, S403 to S410, S412, the first special symbol jackpot in the first embodiment The same processes as those of S401, S403 to S410, and S412 of the determination process (see FIG. 34) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S401 ends, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more). (S421), and if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S421: Yes), the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, in the process of S421, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is 0 (S421: No), the process proceeds to S404.

Although illustration is omitted, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) is similarly modified in terms of control contents.

Next, with reference to FIG. 310, details of the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 310 is a flow chart showing the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment. This game state update process 12 (S322) is a process executed instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the game state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating various flags and counters indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 .

In the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, the contents of control are changed by providing a probability variation counter 203ja in place of the probability variation flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, among the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, in each process of S601 to S604, S606, and S607, the game state update process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36) , S601 to S604, S606, and S607 are executed.

In addition, in the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 in the process of S604 (S604: Yes), then the probability change It is determined whether the value of the counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621), and if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621: Yes), the process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is 0 (S621: No), the process proceeds to S607.

In addition, in the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S606 or S607 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0. (S622), when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is a value greater than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (S622: Yes), then the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is updated by subtracting 1 (S623), set a remaining probability variation count command indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203ja after updating (S624). When the processing of S624 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203ja after the update by the processing of S623 has become 0 (S625), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja has become 0 ( S625: Yes), a state command indicating that the state has shifted to the normal state is set (S626), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S622, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 (S622: No), and when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not 0 in the processing of S625 terminates this processing as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 311, details of the second winning process 12 (S2521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 311 is a flow chart showing the second winning process 12 (S2521) in the eleventh embodiment. This second winning process 12 (S2521) is a process executed in place of the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for performing control according to the winning to the first specific winning opening 65a detected during execution of the small winning game.

Of the second winning process 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S2701 to S2707 corresponds to each process of S2701 to S2707 of the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment. The same processing is performed. In addition, in the second winning process 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S2704 is completed, the detection of winning to the first specific winning hole 65a during execution of the small winning game is performed by voice lamp control. A small winning prize command for notification to the device 113 is set (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2705.

The small hit winning command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the main processing executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 52) External output processing (S2201) In the voice lamp control It is sent towards device 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the small hit winning command, it refers to the winning information of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h, and selects the winning from the winning sound selection table 222jb (see FIG. 308(b)). Select a sound and set the output of the selected winning sound. As a result, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol can be suggested by the type of the winning sound every time the first specific winning hole 65a wins in the small winning game of the second special symbol. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 to 316. FIG. First, state command processing 12 (S4231) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. State command processing 12 (S4231) in the eleventh embodiment is processing executed in place of the state command processing (see FIG. 62) in the first embodiment. ), this is a process for setting the current game state in the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main controller 110. FIG.

S4401 to S4406, S4410, and S4411 of the state command processing 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment correspond to S4401 to S4406, S4406 and S4406 of the state command processing (see FIG. 62) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4410 and S4411 is executed. In addition, in the state command processing 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, when the processing of S4401 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current state command is a state command for indicating the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. (S4421), and if it is determined that it is a state command for indicating the gaming state after the end of the jackpot (S4421: Yes), the value of the variation number counter 223ja is reset to 0 (S4422).

When the process of S4422 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (the game state determined in the process of S4401) is the normal state (S4423), and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state. If so (S4423: Yes), the first hit flag 223jb is set to ON (S4424), and the process proceeds to S4436. On the other hand, in the process of S4423, when it is determined that the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is not the normal state (S4423: No), the first win flag 223jb is set to OFF (S4425), and the process proceeds to S4426. .

In the process of S4426 executed after the process of S4424 or S4425, the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command is set in the state setting area 223j (S4426), and the process proceeds to S4402. On the other hand, in the processing of S4421, if it is determined that the state command received this time is not a state command for indicating the gaming state after the end of the jackpot (S4421: No), each processing of S4422 to S4426 is skipped, The process moves to S4402.

By executing this state command processing 12 (see FIG. 312), it is possible to determine whether the jackpot is the first win (jackpot won in the normal state) or continuous win (jackpot won in a game state other than the normal state). Accordingly, the first hit flag 223jb can be updated appropriately. Therefore, the river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) can be executed at an appropriate timing (the number of fluctuations that may end the time saving state of normal symbols).

Next, with reference to FIG. 313, details of the small hit related process 12 (S4521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 313 is a flow chart showing small hit related processing 12 (S4521) in the eleventh embodiment. This small hitting related process 12 (S4521) is a process executed instead of the small hitting related process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment, and the small hitting related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 65) and Similarly, it is a process for executing control according to the type of command related to the small hit.

Among the small hit related process 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, in each process of S4701 to S4710, each process of S4701 to S4710 of the small hit related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 65) The same processing is performed. Also, in the small hit related process 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4701: No), Next, it is determined whether or not a small hit winning command has been received (S4721), and if it is determined that a small hitting winning command has been received (S4721: Yes), then the winning sound selection table 222jb (Fig. 308 (b) (see) (S4722), out of the winning information storage area 223b, select the winning sound corresponding to the data of the execution area of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h, and set the output (S4723 ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4721, when it is determined that the small winning command has not been received (S4721: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the variable display setting process 12 (S4121) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 12 (S4121) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment. Similarly, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 This is processing for setting a variation pattern command for display and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 .

In the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, each of the processes in S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, and S5110 to S5113 is performed in the variable display setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 69). ) are executed in steps S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, and S5110 to S5113. In addition, in the fluctuation display setting process 11 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S5101: Yes), then the fluctuation The value of the number counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5121), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5102).

When the processing of S5102 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current state is the time saving state of normal symbols (S5122). In the processing of this S5122, it is determined whether or not the data set (stored) in the state setting area 223j is data indicating either the variable probability state or the time saving state. In the process of S5122, when it is determined that it is the time saving state of the normal symbol (S5122: Yes), the production mode during the time saving for setting the production mode (for example, river breakthrough production) in the time saving state of the normal symbol is executed. (S5123), and the process proceeds to S5106. The details of the effect setting process (S5123) during this time reduction will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S5122, if it is determined that it is not the time-saving state of the normal symbol (S5122: No), the variation display mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command is shown for the display of the first special symbol. A variation pattern command is set (S5124), and the process proceeds to S5106.

In addition, in the fluctuation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S5107, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is ON (S5107: Yes), then the fluctuation The value of the number counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5125), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S5108). Next, instead of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 is executed (S5126), and the process proceeds to S5110. The details of this special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (S5126) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to Drawing 315, the details of production setting processing (S5123) during time saving mentioned above are explained. This production|presentation setting process (S5123) in a time saving is a process for setting the production|presentation mode in the time saving state of a normal design as above-mentioned. When the time saving production setting process (S5123) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the first hit flag 223jb is on (S5131). : Yes), next, it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223ja is any value among 24, 49, and 74 (that is, whether it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the first hit). (S5132). In the process of S5132, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223jb is any one of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: Yes), the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (S5134 to Each process of S5137) is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5132, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223jb is a value different from any of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: No), it means that it is not time to execute the river breakthrough effect. Therefore, the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137) is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5139.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5131, if it is determined that the first hit flag 223jb is off (S5131: No), the value of the variation number counter 223ja is any of 9, 24, and 39 It is determined whether or not (that is, it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of a series of villas) (S5133). In the process of S5133, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223ja is any value of 9, 24, or 39 (that is, it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of the consecutive villas) (S5133: If Yes), the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137) is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5133, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223ja is neither 9, 24, or 39 (that is, it is not the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of the consecutive villas) (S5133: No), the processing for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137) is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5139.

In the process for setting the production mode of the river breakthrough production (each process of S5134 to S5137), first, it is determined whether or not the number of times the remaining time is reduced is 1 (S5134), and the number of times the remaining time is reduced is not 1 (2 or more) (S5134: No), it determines the execution of the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 298(b)) indicating the continuation of the chance zone (S5135), and shifts the process to S5139. do. On the other hand, in the process of S5134, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 1 (S5134: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state (S5136). In the processing of S5136, if it is determined that the game state is a variable probability state (S5136: Yes), it means that the transition to the latent probability state occurs at the start of the next fluctuation. Execution of the effect (see FIG. 299(a)) is determined (S5137), and the process proceeds to S5139. On the other hand, in the process of S5136, if it is determined that it is not a probability variable state (that is, the time saving state) (S5136: No), it means that the transition to the normal state at the start of the next fluctuation, so river 299(b)) is determined (S5138), and the process proceeds to S5139. In the processing of S5139, based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set (S5139), and this processing ends.

By executing this time-saving production setting process (see FIG. 315), while the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, every time the number of fluctuations that the time-saving state may end, the river breakthrough production is executed. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, details of the above-described special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (S5126) will be described. This special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (S5126) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, and the special figure in the first embodiment This is a process for setting the variable display mode of the second special symbol in the same manner as the variable display setting process for 2 (see FIG. 71).

Of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, in each process of S5301 to S5303 and S5309, the special figure 2 variable display setting process in the first embodiment (Figure 71) are executed. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S5303, when it is determined that the current game state is a latent state (S5303: Yes), then , It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol of this time is a small hit (S5311). In the processing of S5311, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S5311: Yes), the small hit effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 308 (a)) is read (S5312), and the winning prize information storage area 223b is stored. The data corresponding to the first special symbol and the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223h are specified (S5313). Next, a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol indicating the specified effect mode is set (S5314), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5311, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S5311: No), the process proceeds to S5309.

By executing this special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316), every time the second special symbol lottery becomes a small hit, the effect mode of the variable display effect showing the small win is being executed. , or it is possible to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been reserved. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is configured to shift to the latent probability state when the number of times of time saving has passed in the probability variable state. In the latent probability state, a small win is won with a high probability, and the first specific prize winning port 65a is frequently opened (opportunities to win prize balls are obtained frequently), and in addition, compared to the case of a big win. Since the same state is repeated (looped) at a relatively high rate, a very advantageous game state is formed for the player. For this reason, in the probability variable state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is performed with the goal of making the transition to the latent probability state by passing the time saving number of times of normal symbols, so that the player can respond to the game. Interest can be improved. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to win a probability variable jackpot in a probability variable state or a time saving state rather than a probability variable state (a probability variable state shifted after the first hit) based on winning a probability variable jackpot in a normal state. It is configured so that the average value of the number of times of time reduction set is smaller in the probability variable state that has been shifted based on (the probability variable state that has been shifted after the occurrence of consecutive residences). That is, the condition for transition to the latent state is more likely to be established in the definite state set at the time of occurrence than in the definite state set at the time of the first hit (over the set number of times to shorten the time. It is configured in such a way that it is easy to Therefore, since it is easier to pass the number of time reductions when a series of houses occurs, even if you win the jackpot before the number of times of time reduction in the probability state and loop the probability state, Since there is a high possibility that the number of times of time reduction (small number of times of time reduction) that easily shifts to the latent certain state is set, the disappointment of the player can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, when the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probability variable state or the time saving state, each time the number of fluctuations that the time saving state of the normal pattern may end, the river breakthrough production By executing the, whether the time saving state of the normal design continues, whether the time saving state of the normal design is terminated and shifts to the latent state, or whether the time saving state of the normal design is terminated and shifts to the normal state is periodically notified (every 25th or 15th time of special symbol lottery). By configuring in this way, while the chance zone (time saving state of normal symbols) is set, the player is allowed to play the game with the execution of the next river breakthrough performance as one pleasure. can be done. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player wishes to continuously lose out in special symbol lotteries at least until the next river breakthrough presentation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, by configuring it so that there is a possibility of shifting to the normal state by failing to break through the river, the continuation of the time-saving state was notified in the river breakthrough production (even though the river was broken through, it shifted to the latent state. was not), it can be made to think that it is better than being notified of the normal state. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged even if the potential state is not notified.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, output is output when detecting a winning to the first specific winning opening 65a during execution of a small winning game and an effect mode during small winning variation of the second special symbol Depending on the type of winning sound, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the other special symbol variation (variation display of the first special symbol) will be a big hit. Here, conventionally, there has been widely known a gaming machine that executes a variable display effect of symbols for showing the result of the lottery each time the result of the lottery of special symbols is executed. In such a conventional gaming machine, during execution of the variable display performance of symbols, various entertainment performances suggesting the lottery results of special symbols are executed to improve the interest of the player. However, in a game machine with a specification that can simultaneously execute a plurality of variable displays, there is a problem that while paying attention to the effect mode associated with one variable display effect, the effect mode in the other variable display effect is overlooked. there was a point In particular, in a game machine that displays one variable display in a manner that is easier to visually recognize than the other, it is difficult to confirm the effect mode of the other (hardly visually recognized) variable display, and the other variable display effect is difficult to confirm. However, there is a problem that the player may be confused if the jackpot is started in a state where the player is not paying attention. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the latent state, is preferentially (visually recognized) over the variable display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to be executed. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed together while being displayed (in an easy mode), the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the small hit production of the second special symbol (the production mode accompanying the variable display). The structure suggests the results. By constructing in this way, it is possible to confirm the degree of expectation for a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the display mode in the small winning effect of the second special symbol was configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol being executed at the same time is a big hit. It is not limited. For example, it may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol by the effect mode of the effect executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, for example, by the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbols in the second symbol display device, it is also possible to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a big hit. good. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the results of the variable display performance on the side that is difficult to visually recognize only by confirming the variable display performance on the side that is easy to see, so that the performance that is easier to understand is realized. can do. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the number of times of probability variation is 100 times, but the number of times of probability variation is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. By reducing the probability variation frequency, the degree of advantage for the player is lowered, so gambling can be suppressed. On the other hand, by increasing the number of probability variation times, the degree of advantage in the case of the most advantageous latent certainty state can be further increased, so that the game is played with a strong expectation of shifting to the latent certainty state. can be done. Likewise, the number of time reductions can be arbitrarily determined. By reducing the number of times of time saving, it becomes easy to shift from the probability variable state to the latent certainty state, so it can be easily made advantageous for the player, and by increasing the number of times of time saving, it is difficult to shift to the latent certainty state. It is possible to suppress gambling.

In the eleventh embodiment, the ease of shifting to the latent state depends on whether it is the first win (a jackpot won in a normal state) or after the occurrence of a series of games (a jackpot won in a state other than the normal state). (The easiness of establishment of the end condition of the time-saving state of the normal symbol) was configured to be different, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that as the number of consecutive games increases, the number of times of shortening of working hours set after the end of the jackpot decreases. As a result, even if it is not possible to shift to the latent state, it is possible to make the player feel as if the latent state is approaching each time a continuous game occurs, so that the player's response to the game is improved. Interest can be improved. In the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big win, "big win A11" is determined at a rate of 5%, and an advantageous latent state is set after the big win. In this sense, even in the configuration of the eleventh embodiment described above, it can be said that the higher the number of consecutive homes, the higher the possibility of shifting to the latent definite state.

In the eleventh embodiment, when a small win is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent definite state, an effect is executed that suggests the degree of expectation for the fluctuation of the first special symbol big win. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation, which is the type of jackpot that shifts to the probability state. As a result, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the continuation of the advantageous latent probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is also possible to inform (suggest) the degree of expectation for the fact that the big hit is not included in the holding at the time of shifting to the latent definite state during the variation performance of the second special symbol. That is, if a big win is obtained in the lottery for the first special symbol even though the state has shifted to the latent certainty state, the latent certainty state is terminated relatively early, which may disappoint the player. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player feels that he/she does not want to win the jackpot of the first special symbol in the latent state. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that suggests that the reservation does not include a jackpot, the player can understand that the latent definite state is not ended with at least the first special symbol jackpot. It is possible to make the person expect that the latent state will continue for a long time. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, on the contrary, the degree of expectation (pinch degree) for the fact that it is a pinch that usually wins a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state is changed during the variation performance of the second special symbol (and during the small winning game). It is good also as a structure which alert|reports (suggestion). By configuring in this way, when a performance with a high degree of pinch is executed, the game can be played with a feeling of tension, so that the game can be sharpened. In this case, when a specific type of small winning game is started in the lottery of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol may be forced to stop without being displayed. In other words, it may be possible to extend the life of the latent definite state by converting the normal jackpot to the loss. By configuring in this way, after the performance with a high degree of pinch is executed, a small win game of a specific type is executed, so that the player can have a great sense of relief. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 339. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, the potential state is configured as an advantageous game state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed and small winning games are frequently executed. In addition, by setting most of the cases of transitioning to the latent state to the case where the time saving state of the normal pattern ends in the probability state, it is expected that the deviation will continue over the number of time saving times set in the probability state. It was configured to be able to realize novel game characteristics that make it possible.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is configured as an advantageous game state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed and small winning games are frequently executed, and the latent state. was configured as the most unfavorable game state. Then, by ending the probability variable number of times in the latent probability state, it is configured to shift to the most advantageous normal state. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the most disadvantageous game state can be changed directly to the most advantageous game state without going through the big win. By configuring in this way, in the most disadvantageous latent probability state, the game can be played with one goal of passing the probability variable number of times.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 , the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 11th embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game state in the twelfth embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the normal mode is configured as the most advantageous game state, and the latent state is configured as the most disadvantageous game state. Further, the time-saving state and the variable probability state are configured as gaming states with a higher degree of advantage than the latent probability state. Since a special specification is adopted in which the normal state is advantageous, the advantageous normal state will be referred to as "Renso mode" in the description of transition. Also, the disadvantageous latent probability state is called "normal mode", and the relatively advantageous probability variable state and time saving state are called "chance mode A" and "chance mode B", respectively.

Next, referring to FIG. 317, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 317, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment is different from the board configuration (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment (and first embodiment) described above. The upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are eliminated, and a central first ball entrance 64c is provided instead. A small attacker 4650 is provided below the central first ball entrance 64c to be opened when a small hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery. In addition, since the small attacker 4650 is surrounded by the nail and the center first winning hole 64c on the left, right, and above, it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball during the small winning period of the first special symbol. . The reason why the small hit of the first special symbol is provided in the twelfth embodiment is that the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in a state other than the continuous mode, and the second special symbol is long. This is because it is installed for the purpose of forcibly ending the long variation in the event of a variation, and not for the purpose of winning prize balls. That is, even if the second special symbol fluctuates long, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the small winning is won with a high probability (475/480). Triggered by the start of , the second special symbol that has fluctuated in long can be forcibly stopped by the stop symbol that is out. Therefore, even if the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive mode, and the long variation of the second special symbol is started, it can be easily long by returning to the left-handed game. Variation can be terminated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 317, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 on the game board 13, there is a second ball entrance (through gate) 67 and a right first ball entrance provided downstream of the through gate 67. A mouth 64r, a right electric accessory 64ra capable of opening and closing the upper surface of the right first entrance 64r, and an upper surface of the right electric accessory 64ra while the right electric accessory 64ra is closed. A second ball entrance 640 is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through can enter. As shown in FIG. 317, the second ball entrance 640 is designed to allow only game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 with the right electric accessory 64ra closed to reach the game ball flow down path. is set. That is, even if the right electric accessory 64ra is likely to be in the open state, even if the right hand is hit in the time saving state of the normal pattern, almost all the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the right first ball entrance 64r. The game ball cannot be entered into the second ball entrance 640 because the ball will be thrown. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that the game can be progressed by the right-handed game even in the variable probability state (chance mode A) or the time saving state (chance mode B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 317, the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment does not have the second variable winning device 650, and only the first variable winning device 65 is provided. As a result, the first variable winning device 65 is opened in both cases of a big win and a small win of the second special symbol. That is, a chance mode A and a chance mode B in which a time-saving state of normal symbols is set, a game ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the most advantageous continuous mode in which small hits occur frequently, and The jackpot state is configured so that it can be progressed entirely by hitting to the right. In other words, all states (states advantageous in some respects for the player) other than the most disadvantageous game state (probability state) for the player are configured to be able to proceed with right-handed strokes. As a result, it is possible to separate the right-handed game as an advantageous state and the left-handed game as a disadvantageous state, so that it is possible to realize a game that is easier for the player to understand.

In addition, since the normal state of normal symbols is set during execution of the jackpot game, if a right-handed game is performed in an attempt to win a prize ball by entering the ball into the first specific prize-winning port 65a during the jackpot game, almost Four or more game balls enter the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls becomes the upper limit. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game, the variation of the second special symbol is almost started. However, as described above, by executing the lottery for the first special symbol, it becomes a small win with a high probability and can be forcibly terminated without the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Even if a game state other than the normal state is set as the game state and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the game can be progressed without any problem.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 318 to 320, various entertainment presentations characteristic of the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 318, an example of an effect mode in the normal mode (latent state) will be described. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, it is configured to directly shift to the most advantageous multi-family mode (normal state) by allowing the number of times of probability variation to elapse in the latent probability state. Therefore, in the normal mode, an effect aiming at the latent state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 318(a), an effect is executed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit climbs up a rocky mountain. In addition, in the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain, characters "Aim for the top!" Display content suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations until is completed (the number of probability fluctuations has passed) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 318(a), a case is illustrated in which characters "50 m remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. The remaining meter display up to the summit is displayed with a decrease of 1m each time the variable display is executed, so that the remaining meter (distance) up to the summit is displayed to the player in the Renso mode. It can be easily understood that it is the number of fluctuations remaining until the transition.

FIG. 318(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the probability variation count has passed in the normal mode (over 100 probability variation in the latent probability state, and it has been lost continuously). As shown in FIG. 318(b), when the probability variable number of times passes and the mode shifts to the continuous villa mode, an effect in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is executed, and the display area HR1 is displayed as "top Reached!!” is displayed. In addition, the characters "remaining 0 m" are displayed in the display area HR2. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that the mode has shifted to the consecutive villa mode.

FIG. 319(a) shows the state (preparation state) is a diagram showing a display mode. As shown in FIG. 319(a), in the ready state, the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small area Dm3, and "Right-handed to start RUSH!!" is displayed in the display area HR1. is displayed. In addition, the characters "RUSH preparation" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that hitting to the right will enter a RUSH state in which a prize ball can be obtained.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 319(a), when the mode is shifted to the continuous villa mode, the small area Dm1 is switched to the display area for performing the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the small area Dm1 is configured as a display area for displaying the variable display of the special symbols that are mainly executed in each game state. In addition, the small area Dm2 for displaying the variable display of the other special symbol is located on the lower right side of the sub-display area Ds in a display area relatively smaller than the small area Dm1 (in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize). )Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize the variable display of the special symbol on the main execution side simply by confirming only the small area Dm1 regardless of the game state, so that the player's convenience can be improved. In addition, by displaying the variable display on the side different from the side on which the main execution is performed in a manner that is difficult to see, it is possible to draw attention to the small area Dm1. That is, it is possible to make the player easily understand which of the variable displays is mainly executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide game characteristics that are easy for the player to understand.

FIG. 319(b) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the preparation state and wins a small prize in the second special symbol lottery. It is a figure showing. As shown in FIG. 319(b), when the player enters the second ball entrance 640 in the ready state and wins a small prize in the lottery of the second special symbol, the display area HR1 is displayed with "RUSH start!! ' is displayed, and the characters 'Rush into RUSH!!' are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Also, a treasure box 812 is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that the state (RUSH) in which prize balls can be obtained in the consecutive game mode has started. Therefore, it is possible to realize game characteristics that are easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in the 12th embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbols is set to 1/2. In other words, even if the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, there is a relatively high possibility that it will simply come off (there is a probability of about 1/2 that it will come off). In the twelfth embodiment, if the second special symbol lottery is lost in the preparation state, the preparation state is continued as it is. In other words, the start of RUSH is not notified until a small hit is won and a prize ball can actually be obtained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the state in which the prize balls cannot be acquired even though the start of RUSH has been notified.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery for one of the special symbols results in a big win, a configuration is adopted in which control is performed so that the lottery for the other special symbol executed during the execution of the variation of the big win is forcibly lost. ing. Therefore, at the time when the normal mode is shifted to the continuous mode, there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is started at the same time as the continuous mode is started, is a big hit. , while the big hit variation is being executed, the lottery for the second special symbol is always lost. That is, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started at the time of transition to the preparation state, the right-handed game is continued, and even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed, it is out. is continuous (not winning the small win), the preparation state will continue for a long time (until the big win variation is completed). As described above, the small winning probability of the second special symbol is 1/2, so that the more consecutive failures occur in the preparation state, the more the expectation during execution of the big winning variation of the first special symbol can be improved. More specifically, for example, the probability of four or more consecutive disengagements in the ready state is about 6%, and the probability of six or more consecutive disengagements is about 1%. Therefore, even if the player loses the lottery for the second special symbol in the preparation state, the player's expectation for the big win can be improved, and thus the player's interest in the game in the preparation state can be further improved. .

In addition, in the 12th embodiment, the probability of becoming a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol was set to 1/2, but it is not limited to this, and the small win probability may be arbitrarily determined. . For example, if the probability of a small win is increased and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as in the eleventh embodiment, it is configured to be a small win (for example, with a probability of 59/60). good too. In the case of such a configuration, even if the deviation occurs even once in the preparation state, the expectation for the fact that the changing first special symbol is a big win can be improved, so the deviation of the second special symbol in the preparation state can be improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the case of becoming. Also, the higher the small win probability, the shorter the preparation state (the average number of lotteries from switching to Renso mode to winning a small win decreases), so after switching to Renso mode. , It is possible to shorten the period until the ball is secured by the prize ball. In other words, since it is possible to give the prize ball to the player more quickly, the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the odds of a small win are made low so that it is easy to come off during the preparation state. By configuring in this way, it becomes easy to continue to come off, so it is possible to more frequently create a sense of expectation for the fact that the first special symbol is in the midst of a big hit fluctuation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, temporal changes in the presentation mode before and after the preparation state (before and after the start of RUSH) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 320(a), the held ball of the first special symbol at the time of shifting from the normal mode to the continuous mode is out, and during the preparation mode, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed twice. A description will be given of the change over time of the performance mode in the case of a small win in the third lottery of the second special symbol due to consecutive failures.

As shown in FIG. 320 (a), in the twelfth embodiment, when the 99th special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode (latency state in which the probability variation number of 100 times is set), the above-mentioned An effect of reaching the top of the rocky mountain (see FIG. 318(b)) is executed. Then, the variable display of the 100th special symbol is started, and at the same time, it is switched to the display mode showing the preparation state (see FIG. 319(a)), and a right-handed game is notified. When a game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by striking to the right during this preparatory state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the small area Dm1. Then, as shown in FIG. 320, during the two second special symbol deviation fluctuations, the display indicating the preparation state is continued, and the third second special symbol fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation) is started. At the time point, the display mode (see FIG. 319(b)) indicating RUSH entry is set. In addition, at the start of the small winning game, the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol which has been fluctuating is forcibly stopped and displayed. After that, the RUSH display continues until the continuous villa mode ends. In addition, in the 12th embodiment, the continuous mode is set to the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), so unless you win a big hit, the advantageous continuous mode will be continue. Therefore, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics in which players are expected not to win a big win over as many lotteries as possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320(b), the passage of time of the effect mode in the case where the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the continuous mode is the lottery result corresponding to "jackpot D12". Describe the change. Here, "jackpot D12" is a type of jackpot in which a time-saving state of twice the number of times of time-saving is set after the end of the jackpot. In other words, after the end of the jackpot, it is a type of jackpot that shifts to the Renso mode by continuously losing a maximum of two special symbol lotteries, and it is relatively easy to shift to the Renso mode (game It is a jackpot of a kind that is pleasing to the player. In the twelfth embodiment, only when the variable display corresponding to the "jackpot D12" is started at the time of shifting to the multi-family mode, the transition to the multi-family mode is notified, and other first special When the jackpot of the pattern (which is relatively difficult to shift to the consecutive mode) is reserved, it is configured to notify the winning of the jackpot without notifying the shift to the consecutive mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed when the continuous mode ends without winning a small prize even though the mode is shifted to the continuous mode.

As shown in FIG. 320(b), when the mode is shifted to the consecutive villa mode and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the "jackpot D12" is started, the second special symbol started during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation. The variable display of special symbols is all out. Therefore, since the loss continues while the big win variation is being executed, the more the loss continues, the more the player's expectation for the execution of the big win variation of the first special symbol is improved. can be made Incidentally, in the twelfth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the continuous mode, a variable time of 10 seconds is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, a variation time of 1 second is set with a high probability. Therefore, considering the period from the transition to the Renso mode to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and the institution that confirms and displays the lottery result of the second special symbol, the big hit fluctuation It is possible to execute the variable display of the second special symbol around 5 times during (10 seconds). In the lottery of the second special pattern in a state where the big hit of the first special pattern is not fluctuating, the probability of losing five times in a row is low (about 3%). It is possible to strengthen the player's conviction that the change is in progress. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the preparation state can be improved.

<Electrical Configuration in the Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 321(a). FIG. 321(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14). The difference is that a table 202ka is added. Also, the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is different in that a part of the first per random number table 202a, a part of the small per random number table 202b, and a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f are changed. are doing.

The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka is a data table referred to for selecting a table for determining a fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. When the special symbol lottery is executed, the variation pattern scenario table 202ka is referred to, one variation pattern table is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table. be done. The details of this fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka will be described later with reference to FIG. 322(b).

First, referring to FIG. 321(b), the configuration of the first winning random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 321(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321(b), in the first per random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment, as a random value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" Four random values (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 321(b), five random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 4" are defined as random numbers (counter values) determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of special symbols. ing.

Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the special symbol low probability state, the probability of a big hit is 1/120 (4/480), while the special symbol lottery is performed in the special symbol high probability state. The probability of winning a jackpot if executed is 1/96 (5/480). It should be noted that the change in the jackpot probability in the twelfth embodiment is intended to prevent the Renso mode from becoming excessively advantageous and the normal mode from becoming excessively disadvantageous to the player. . That is, when the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is low (for example, in the case of 1/240, which is the same as in the eleventh embodiment), once it shifts to the consecutive villa mode, it is difficult to end the shifted consecutive villa mode. Since it becomes excessively advantageous for the player, it may be disadvantageous for the hole. Also, if the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is high (for example, in the case of 1/60, which is the same as in the eleventh embodiment), the probability variation number is passed in the normal mode (over 100 special symbol lotteries Since the possibility of being out of the game continuously is low, the possibility of switching to Renso mode is extremely low. As a result, there is a risk that the player will be excessively disadvantaged, and that the player may avoid playing the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of special symbols is increased to suppress excessive advantage when shifting to the continuous mode, and the high probability state of special symbols is suppressed. By lowering the probability of a big hit in , the normal mode is suppressed from becoming excessively disadvantageous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 322(a), details of the small winning random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment will be described. Figure 322 is the figure which shows the specified contents of small winning random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment. In the small hit random number table 202b in this twelfth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 475 random values are defined. On the other hand, 240 random numbers "240 to 479" are defined as random numbers (counter values) determined as a small hit in the second special symbol lottery.

That is, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, a small hit is won with a high probability (probability of 475/480). This is because, as described above, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in a state other than the continuous mode, and the second special symbol undergoes a long variation, the long variation is changed. This is for forced termination. That is, when the long variation of the second special symbol is executed, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes a small hit and stops outside the long variation of the second special symbol at the start of the small winning. can be displayed. Therefore, even if the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive mode, and the long variation of the second special symbol is started, it is possible to easily make a long game by returning to the left-handed game. Variation can be terminated.

In addition, by setting the small winning probability of the second special symbol to 1/2 (240/480), it is configured to lose at a relatively high rate in the lottery of the second special symbol in the ready state. As a result, in the case that the loss continues in the preparation state, the small win is forcibly set to the loss due to the fact that the second special symbol is lost in the lottery or the big winning variation of the first special symbol is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand what is being done. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the more the second special symbol continues to come off in the ready state, the higher the expectation of the big hit of the special symbol on the other side (that is, the first special symbol). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 322(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322(b), the variation pattern scenario table 202ka has a corresponding relationship between the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the big win (or after clearing the RAM) and the selected variation pattern for each type of the previous big win. is stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 322(b), when the previous jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, the number of times of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99 times. A certain start table 202f11 is associated and defined. The details of the variable probability/potential probability start time table 202f11 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, the RUSH table 202f14 is defined in association with the range of 100 or more lotteries. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326(b), but when a variation pattern is selected with reference to this RUSH table 202f14, a short variation time (1 second or 10 second) variation pattern will be selected. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed in a short period only by playing the right-handed game, forming an advantageous state of winning a small prize with a high probability (1/2).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), when the previous jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the number of lotteries of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99 times. are defined in association with each other. The details of the time-saving start time table 202f12 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326(b)) is defined in association with the range of 100 or more lotteries.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 322(b), in a state (so-called state after RAM clearing) in which the jackpot has not been won even once, the number of lotteries for special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99 times. , and a normal start table 202f13 are defined in association with each other. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326(a), but the normal start table 202f13 has a relatively long fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed ( 60 seconds) long variation is set. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by clearing the RAM and placed in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the same state from occurring as in the consecutive game mode, which is advantageous to the player. In other words, similar to a general game machine, when initialization is performed, it is possible to set a disadvantageous state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being put in an advantageous state immediately after the initialization and suffering an unforeseen disadvantage to the hole. On the other hand, a RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326(b)) is defined in association with a range of 100 or more special symbol lotteries. For this reason, even after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the operation is the same as the normal mode except for the jackpot probability (the operation is shifted to the continuous mode by continuously losing out in 100 special pattern lotteries). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game with the pachinko machine 10 because the state after the initialization is excessively disadvantageous to the player, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. .

In the 14th embodiment, regarding whether or not the RAM is cleared (initialized), for example, whether or not the jackpot has been won once or more after the RAM is cleared for the RAM 203. By providing a flag (first time winning flag) indicating whether or not, it is configured to be distinguishable. If the first winning flag is off, it is determined to be in the normal state after initialization, and if the number of fluctuations is within the range of 1 to 99 times, the normal start table 202f13 is referred to and 100 times. In the above range, a variation pattern scenario is set with reference to the RUSH table 202f14. On the other hand, by winning the jackpot, the first-time-winning flag is set to ON, and henceforth, the scenario is set so that the normal start table 202f13 is not referred to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 323 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 323, in the twelfth embodiment, as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, six jackpot types of "jackpot A12" to "jackpot F12" are defined. Also, as the jackpot types of the second special symbol, two jackpot types, "jackpot G12" and "jackpot I12", are defined.

As shown in FIG. 323, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and the jackpot type is "jackpot A12". are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot A12" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the chance mode A (variable probability state) is set after the completion of the jackpot. This chance mode A continues until the lottery of special symbols is executed a maximum of 100 times after the end of the jackpot, and when the 100 times have passed, the game shifts to the continuous mode. Therefore, "jackpot A12" is a relatively advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, "jackpot B12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 49". This "jackpot B12" has 2 rounds of jackpot rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the type of jackpot (2 rounds probability variable jackpot) that is set to normal mode (potential probability state) or chance mode A (probability variable state). is. More specifically, when the "jackpot B12" is won in the normal mode or the continuous mode, the normal mode is set to be disadvantageous after the jackpot ends, while the "jackpot B12" is set in the time-saving state or the variable probability state. If so, the chance mode A is set, which is relatively advantageous after the big win. Therefore, "jackpot B12" is comparatively advantageous when winning in chance mode A or chance mode B, but comparatively disadvantageous in normal mode or consecutive villa mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, "jackpot C12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 69". This "jackpot C12" is a type of jackpot (two-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two, and the most disadvantageous normal mode (potential state) is set after the jackpot ends. That is, the "jackpot C12" is the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, "jackpot D12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 "70". This "jackpot D12" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. This chance mode B ends when the lottery of special symbols is executed twice after the end of the big win (the number of times of time saving is set to 2). In other words, since it shifts to the consecutive villa mode by losing the lottery of the special symbols two times in a row at most, it is an advantageous jackpot type that makes it extremely easy to shift to the consecutive villa mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, the value of the first winning type counter C2 "71 to 74" is defined in association with "jackpot E12" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot E12" is a type of jackpot (two-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2, and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. In this chance mode B, 50 times are set when "jackpot E12" is won in normal mode or latent mode, while 25 times are set when "jackpot E12" is won in time saving state or variable probability state. be done. Chance mode B is advantageous to the player because the chance mode B has a lower jackpot probability than the chance mode A and shifts to the continuous mode after the number of times of time saving has passed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "75 to 99" in association with "jackpot F12" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot F12" is a type of jackpot (two-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, the number of time saving times of the chance mode B set after the end of the "big win F12" is set to be greater than the number of time saving times of the chance mode B set after the end of the "big win E12". Therefore, the chance mode B after the end of the "jackpot F12" is in a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to pass the number of time reductions.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 69", and "jackpot G12" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence. ing. This "jackpot G12" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) set in chance mode A (variable probability state) with 8 rounds of jackpot rounds and 100 rounds after the completion of the jackpot. In addition, "jackpot I12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". This "jackpot I12" is a jackpot type (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set twice after the jackpot ends. As mentioned above, while it is extremely easy to let the number of times of time saving pass 2 times, it is relatively difficult to be out continuously over 100 times of the probability variation state, so "jackpot I12" direction However, it can be said that it is a jackpot of a type (that is, an advantageous type) that is easier to shift to the Renso mode than the “jackpot G12”.

In this way, in the twelfth embodiment, the number of times of time reduction is set to at least two times without providing a normal jackpot with a number of times of time reduction of 0 (a jackpot that shifts directly to the continuous mode after the end of the jackpot). . It is possible to prevent the same state as when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by structuring so that the game state after the end of the jackpot is not directly set to the normal state. In other words, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes longer, and a disadvantageous state in which the game must be progressed by hitting to the left (a state in which a variation pattern is determined by referring to a normal start table 202d13, which will be described later). The fluctuation pattern can be determined by referring to the time-saving start table 202f12. That is, it can be configured to immediately shift to the RUSH state when the number of times of time saving has elapsed. Therefore, while suppressing that the state at the time of initialization of the pachinko machine 10 is excessively advantageous for the player, the jackpot type (the number of times of time reduction is two times the jackpot) is equivalent to a direct transition to the continuous mode. type) can be provided. It should be noted that during the execution of the jackpot game, the normal pattern is in a low probability state, and as a result, the right electric accessory 64ra is in a state where it is difficult to open. enter the ball. That is, at the same time as the jackpot game ends, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and the long variation of the second special symbol is started. Therefore, when two times are set as the number of times of time saving, the first number of times of time saving is completed at the same time when the jackpot ends. By entering the game ball into the right first ball entrance 64r by striking to the right during the long variation of the second special symbol, a small hit is obtained with a high probability, and the long variation of the second special symbol is avoided. You can force it to quit. Therefore, when the number of times of time saving is set to 2 times, it is possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode only by generating one starting prize substantially after the end of the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the details of the table 202f11 for variable probability/potential probability start will be described. FIG. 324 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table 202f11 for variable probability/potential probability start time. As shown in FIG. 324, the table 202f11 for probability variation/latent probability start time defines the corresponding relationship between the game state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed and the variation pattern that can be selected for each type of special symbol. It is More specifically, a longer variation time is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol in the probability state (normal mode) than in the probability variation state (chance mode A). As a result, in the normal mode in which the left-handed game is played, the variation display mode can be diversified, while in the chance mode A, the game efficiency can be improved.

On the other hand, regarding the second special symbol, a long variation of 60 seconds is set regardless of the variation type or the game state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is shot aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive villa mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the details of the time-saving start table 202f12 described above will be described. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table 202f12 for time saving start. As shown in FIG. 325, when the table 202f12 for time saving start is referred to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, in the time saving state (chance mode B), relatively short (1 second to 20 seconds ) variable time is selected. Thereby, the game efficiency in the chance mode B can be improved. On the other hand, in the normal state (ie, after the number of time reductions has elapsed), a very short (0.1 second or 10 seconds) variation time is selected. As a result, after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state, and after the number of time saving times has passed (after shifting to the continuous mode), if the reserved ball of the first special pattern remains, the reserved ball can be held in an extremely short time. is digested.

On the other hand, regarding the second special symbol, regardless of the type of variation, a long variation of 60 seconds is set while the time saving state continues, and a short variation time of 10 seconds or 1 second after the time saving state has passed set. As a result, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is shot aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in a game state other than the continuous villa mode. In addition, after shifting to the continuous mode, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol and the small winning game are repeated in a short period of time. Therefore, since the game can be played with the goal of passing the number of time reductions, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 326(a), details of the normal start table 202f13 will be described. FIG. 326(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 202f13 for time saving start. As shown in FIG. 326(a), when the normal start table 202f13 is referred to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a relatively long variation time (7 to 90 seconds) is selected. . Therefore, it is possible to diversify the variation display mode in the state in which the left-handed game should be performed as in the latent state.

On the other hand, regarding the second special symbol, a long variation of 60 seconds is set regardless of the variation type. As a result, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is shot aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in a game state other than the continuous villa mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 326(b), details of the above-described RUSH table 202f14 will be described. FIG. 326(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the RUSH table 202f14. As shown in FIG. 326(b), when the RUSH table 202f13 is referred to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a very short (0.1 seconds or 10 seconds) variation time is selected. . Also, when the RUSH table 202f14 is referred to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a short (1 second or 10 seconds) variation time is selected. As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage after shifting to the RUSH state (Renso mode).

Next, referring to FIG. 327, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described. explain. FIG. 327 is a diagram showing a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 327, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment is provided with roughly four modes (game states). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 327 (probability state), the chance mode A shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327 (probability variable state), and the chance mode B shown on the right side of the center of FIG. , and the continuous mode (normal state) shown in the lower part of FIG. 327 are provided.

As described above, the normal mode indicates the variable probability state of the special symbols and the normal state of the normal symbols. It is difficult for the ball to enter the 1 ball entrance 64r), which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In addition, as described above, the chance mode A indicates that the special symbol probability variable state and the normal symbol time saving state, the probability of a large hit is high, and the right first ball is entered by performing a right-handed game. Since the game ball frequently enters the opening 64r (the electric accessory 64ra is frequently opened), the game state is comparatively advantageous for the player. In addition, the chance mode B indicates a low-probability state of special symbols and a short-time state of normal symbols. Since the game ball is frequently entered into the 1 ball entry hole 640r, a game state is formed that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode. Furthermore, as described above, the continuous mode indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, and the variable time set when the second special symbol lottery is executed , Since it is significantly shorter than the other three game states (60 seconds → 1 second), the lottery for the second special symbol can be efficiently executed by playing the right-handed game. Then, as described above, in the lottery for the second special symbol, a small win is won with a high probability (1/2), and the first specific winning opening 64a is opened. Game balls frequently enter the second ball entrance 640 and the first specific prize winning opening 64a, forming an extremely advantageous game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained without a big hit. Therefore, the continuous mode is the most advantageous game state for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transition from the normal mode to another state when a jackpot is won or when a prescribed probability variation count has passed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, when the jackpot A12 determined at a rate of 5% is selected (determined) as the jackpot with the first special pattern, the chance after the jackpot ends. Move to mode A. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and one of the jackpots D12 to F12 determined at a rate of 30% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, a relatively advantageous chance mode B is entered after the jackpot ends. and migrate. Furthermore, after the normal mode is set, by allowing the specified number of probability changes (100 times) to pass, the mode is directly shifted to the most advantageous continuous mode (without going through the jackpot). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is determined and the jackpot B12 or jackpot C12 determined at a rate of 65% is determined as the jackpot type, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more advantageous to pass the prescribed variable probability number of times rather than to win a big hit, so the player can expect that the loss will continue over the prescribed number of times. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transition from chance mode A (probability variable state) to another state when a big hit occurs and when a specified probability variable number of times has passed. Specifically, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327, when the first special symbol jackpot is selected (determined), one of the jackpots D12 to F12 determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type is selected (determined). shifts to a comparatively advantageous chance mode B after the end of the big win. Furthermore, after the chance mode A is set, the number of lotteries specified (100 times) is passed, and the mode is directly shifted to the most advantageous consecutive house mode (the probability variable number and the time saving number end at the same timing. ). In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot is determined and the jackpot C12 determined at a rate of 20% is determined as the jackpot type, the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and either the jackpot A12 or the jackpot B12 determined at a rate of 50% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the mode is changed to the chance mode A again after the jackpot ends. (loop chance mode A). Therefore, in the chance mode A, even if it becomes a big hit, it is difficult to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode (the ratio of setting the chance mode A increases), so the big hit occurs before the probability variable number of times elapses. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged even if he or she wins the prize (cannot switch to the Renso mode). In the chance mode A, similarly to the normal mode, the probability of a big win is relatively high (1/96), so it is relatively difficult to pass the variable probability count. Therefore, in the chance mode A, since it is possible to realize a game property in which both winning a big win and consecutive losses are expected, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in the center right side of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of shifting from chance mode B (probability variable state) to another state when a big hit occurs and when a prescribed number of time reductions has passed. Specifically, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 327, when the first special symbol jackpot is selected (determined), either jackpot A12 or B12 determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type. Then, the game shifts to a comparatively advantageous chance mode A after the end of the big win. Furthermore, after the chance mode A is set, by allowing the prescribed number of times of time saving (any of 2 times, 25 times, 50 times and 100 times) to pass, the mode is directly shifted to the most advantageous continuous mode. . Also, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is determined and the jackpot C12 determined at a rate of 20% is determined as the jackpot type, a disadvantageous normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the first special pattern is a jackpot, and either the jackpot A12 or the jackpot B12 determined at a rate of 30% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the mode is changed to the chance mode B again after the jackpot ends. (loop chance mode B). Therefore, in the chance mode B, as in the chance mode A, it is difficult to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode even if the jackpot is achieved (the rate at which the chance mode A is set increases), so the number of times of saving time has elapsed. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged even if he or she wins the jackpot (cannot shift to the continuous mode) before playing. In addition, in the chance mode B, the probability of a big hit is relatively low, and the number of times of 50 times or less may be set as the number of times of time saving, so compared to the chance mode A and the normal mode, it is possible to directly The possibility of shifting to Renso mode increases. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that there is a high possibility of shifting to the consecutive villa mode at the time of transition to the chance mode B, so that the player's expectation for the consecutive villa mode can be improved.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of shifting from the continuous mode (normal state) to another state only when a big win occurs. Specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, when the jackpot G12 determined at a rate of 70% is selected (determined) as the second special pattern jackpot and the jackpot type is selected (determined), the comparison is made after the jackpot ends. It shifts to chance mode A which is advantageous to the target. In addition, when the jackpot of the second special pattern is determined and the jackpot I12 determined at a rate of 30% is determined as the jackpot type, after the jackpot ends, the chance mode is more likely to shift to the consecutive mode than the chance mode A. Move to B. It should be noted that, when the jackpot I12, two times are set as the number of times of time saving, so if the chance mode B is set after the jackpot I12, almost, again after the number of times of time saving has passed, to the continuous mode can be transferred. Therefore, the jackpot I12 can be said to be a jackpot type more advantageous than the jackpot G12. As described above, in this continuous mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is significantly shorter than in other modes, and the second special symbol lottery has a high probability (1/2 probability). Since it becomes a hit, just by playing the right-handed game, the lottery of the second special pattern based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 and during the small winning period (during the opening period of the first specific winning opening 65a) Winning to the first specific winning port 65a can be generated frequently. Therefore, it is possible to continue to win prize balls based on the balls entering the first specific prize winning port 65a until the second special symbol lottery hits the jackpot (that is, a large amount of prizes can be won just by continuing to hit to the right). It is possible to acquire a ball) to form a very advantageous game state. In addition, as described above, regarding the normal state that shifts based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, since it is configured to set a long variation (60 seconds) as the variation time of the second special symbol, the normal mode and Similarly, a disadvantageous game state is formed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 from giving excessive advantages to the player and unforeseen disadvantages to the hall.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, four modes (game states) of the normal mode, the chance mode A, the chance mode B, and the consecutive villa mode are configured to alternate. As a result, the game characteristics change each time the mode is changed, so that the game can be sharpened. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 328, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment has a winning flag 223ka, a preparation state flag 223kb, and a RUSH The difference is that a middle flag 223kc is added.

The winning flag 223ka is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won once or more after the pachinko machine 10 was powered on. If the winning flag 223ka is ON, it means that the jackpot has been won once or more after the power is turned on, and if it is OFF, the jackpot has not been won even once after the power is turned on. means If the game state is normal at the start of the variation, the state of this winning flag 223ka is referred to, and if it is off, the normal state after power-on (that is, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is long. Disadvantageous state in which fluctuation is set) is determined (while the number of special drawing lots is less than 100 times) and the production for the normal mode is executed, while if it is on, the production for the consecutive villa mode to run.

The in-ready state flag 223kb is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in a ready state. If it is on, it means that it is in a ready state (see FIG. 319(a)), and if it is off, it is not in a ready state. means no. In the normal state, this ready state in-progress flag 223kb is referenced to determine whether or not the ready state has already ended (the display is switched to RUSH), and whether or not to execute the ready state effect, Determines whether to execute the RUSH state effect.

The RUSH in-progress flag 223kc is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in the multi-family mode. If it is on, it means that the multi-family mode is on, and if it is off, it means that it is not in the multi-family mode. In the normal state, with reference to the ready state flag 223kb and the RUSH state flag 223kc, it is determined which state effect mode is to be set.

The flag 223kd during execution of the ceiling effect indicates whether or not the effect of the character 811 reaching the top of the rocky mountain (top reaching effect), which is executed when the variable number of times or the number of times of time saving is left, is being executed. This is a flag that indicates whether If the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is on, it means that the peak reaching effect (see FIG. 318(b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the peak reaching effect is not being executed. do. When the pattern stop timing is reached while the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is ON, the mode is shifted to the continuous villa mode and a preparation state is established.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 333. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 329, details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 329 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment. This first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, and the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the eleventh embodiment. Similar to the symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309), based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on the set game state. It is a process for executing a big hit determination as to whether or not a big hit is made.

Of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, in each process of S401, S403 to S410, S412, and S421, the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the eleventh embodiment 12 (see FIG. 309) are executed.

In addition, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is not a jackpot in the process of S406, then the small hit It is determined whether or not it has been elected, and special figure 1 deviation variation processing for executing processing corresponding to the determination result is executed (S431), and this processing is ended. This special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (S431) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 deviation process (S431). In this special figure 1 deviation fluctuation process (S431), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S3111), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S3111: Yes ), a special figure 1 small hit flag for indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating is set to ON (S3112), and then the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small hit (S3113) ). Then, as the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37, a small winning symbol is set (S3114), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3111, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a loss) (S3111: No), the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 As a special symbol, set the off symbol (S3115), and terminate this process. This special figure 1 loss variation process (see FIG. 330) is a control process added by making it possible to win a small hit when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 331, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment is executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). In the same way as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35), the determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, in each process of S501 to S503 and S505 to S509, the first in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) The same processes as the processes of S501 to S503 and S505 to S509 of the 1 special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35) are executed. Also, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S503 is completed, then the variation pattern scenario table 202ka (see FIG. 322 (b)) is read out, The variation pattern selection table corresponding to the last big hit type and the number of times of the special drawing lottery is read out (S521). Specifically, if the previous jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, and the number of times of the special drawing lottery is 99 times or less, read the table 202f11 for the probability/probability start time as the variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 324), If the previous jackpot is a normal jackpot and the number of times of the special drawing lottery is 99 times or less, the time-saving start table 202f12 (see FIG. 325) is read as the variation pattern selection table. In addition, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, if the jackpot has never been won and the number of times of the special drawing lottery is 99 times or less, the normal start table 202f13 (Fig. 326 ( a) read cf. On the other hand, when the special figure lottery frequency is 100 or more, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326(b)) is read as the variation pattern selection table regardless of the type of the previous jackpot. After the process of S521 is completed, the process proceeds to S505.

By executing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331), it is possible to select a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the previous big hit type and the number of special symbol lotteries. Therefore, variation patterns can be diversified. In addition, the degree of advantage is differentiated between the normal state set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 and the normal state shifted from another obtained game state, and after the initialization, the state is different from that of a general game machine. Similarly, while a state disadvantageous to the player can be set, a normal state shifted through another game state can be formed as the most advantageous game state for the player. Although not shown, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 42) also refers to the variation pattern scenario table 202ka (that is, the previous jackpot type, the number of special symbol lotteries, and ) is modified to read the variation pattern selection table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 332, details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 13 (S221) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This first special symbol variation stop process 13 (S221) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38), this is a process for setting the stop display of the first special symbol.

Of the first special symbol variation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 332) in the twelfth embodiment, in each processing of S801 to S809, the first special symbol variation stop processing in the eleventh embodiment (and first embodiment) The same processes as the processes of S801 to S809 (see FIG. 38) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 332) in the twelfth embodiment, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off (S801: No), the A special figure 1 loss stop process for setting a stop symbol of the loss of 1 special symbol is executed (S821), and this process is terminated. The details of this special figure 1 out stop processing (S821) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 333 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 1 omission stop processing (S821). In this special figure 1 off stop processing (S821), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small per flag is on (S3211), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 small per flag is on (S3211: Yes), along with setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s on (S3212), indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s was set on (that is, the forced stop of the second special symbol was set) Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command for (S3213). Next, the first symbol display device 37 stops and displays the second special symbol as a lost symbol (S3214), and sets a small winning scenario corresponding to the current small winning type (S3215). Then, the special figure 1 small hit flag is set to OFF (S3216), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON (S3217), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3211, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is off (S3211), there is no possibility of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the second special symbol and the possibility of starting the small hit. Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is.

By executing this special figure 1 out stop processing (see FIG. 333), when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, the fluctuation display of the second special pattern is removed at the same time as the stop of the small hit pattern. You can forcibly stop the display with . Therefore, in a state where the long variation of the second special pattern is executed, the long variation of the second special pattern can be forcibly terminated only by executing the lottery of the first special pattern and winning a small prize.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 339. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 334, the variable display setting process 13 (S4121) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 13 (S4121) is a process that is executed instead of the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment. ), in order to display the variation display effect in the third symbol display device 81, based on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the first special symbol or the second special symbol This is processing for setting the display variation pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 .

Of the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, the processes in S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121, and S5125 each correspond to the variable display setting process in the eleventh embodiment. 12 (see FIG. 314), S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121 and S5125. In addition, in the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5102 is completed, then the effect mode according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command is set. Execution mode setting processing is executed (S5141), and the processing proceeds to S5106. The details of this rendering mode setting process (S5141) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5108 is completed, next, in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment Instead, the variable display setting process 13 for special figure 2 is executed (S5142), and the process proceeds to S5110. The details of this special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (S5142) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5113 ends, next, the ready state setting process for setting the ready state (see FIG. 319(a)) is executed. (S5143), and the process ends. Details of this preparation state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the effect mode setting process (S5141) described above will be described. This production mode setting process (S5141) is, as described above, a process for setting the production mode according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. In this production mode setting process (S5141), first, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (Renso mode) (S13101). It is determined whether or not it is (chance mode B) (S13102). In the process of S13102, if it is determined that it is not in a time saving state (S1302: No), it means that it is a latent state (normal mode) or a variable probability state (chance mode A), and the number of times of probability variation has passed 100 times This means that there is no possibility of shifting to the multi-storied house mode unless the mode is set. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13103).

In the process of S13103, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13103: Yes), the ceiling effect for selecting the effect mode of the last variable display effect before shifting to the multi-family mode. A setting process is executed (S13104), and the process proceeds to S13111. On the other hand, in the processing of S13102, if it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (S13102: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the number of remaining time shortening times is 1 (S13105), and the number of remaining time saving times is 1 If so, the same process as the ceiling effect setting process (S13104) described above is executed (S13110), and the process proceeds to S13111. On the other hand, in the process of S13105, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reduction is not 1 (S13105: No), and in the process of S13103, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223ja is not 99 (S13103: No) , since there is no possibility of shifting to the consecutive villa mode, the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S13106), and the process proceeds to S13111.

On the other hand, in the processing of S13101, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S13101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning flag 223ka is ON (S13107), When it is determined that the completion flag 223ka is ON (S13107), normal effect setting processing for setting the normal state effect mode is executed (S13108), and the process proceeds to S13111. The details of this normal effect setting process (S13108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S13107, if it is determined that the winning flag 223ka is off (S13107: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13109). When it is determined that the value of the number counter 223ja is 99 (S13109), the ceiling effect setting process (S13110) is executed, and the process proceeds to S13111. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13109 that the value of the variation number counter 223ja is not 99 (S13109: No), the process proceeds to S13108.

In the process of S13111 executed after any of the processes of S13104, S13106, S13108 and S13110, a variation pattern command for display indicating the rendering mode determined by any of the processes of S13104, S13106, S13108 and S13110 is set. (S13111), and the process ends.

Next, details of the above-described ceiling effect setting process (S13104, S13110) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As shown in FIG. 336, in the ceiling effect setting process (S4131), first, among the winning information storage area 223b, the data of the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol is read (S13201), and the data of the read execution area is the data corresponding to the jackpot (S13202), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S13202: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command (for notifying the jackpot is determined (S13203), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S13202, if it is determined that the data read from the execution area is not data indicating a big hit (S13202: No), then the first special symbol holding number in the winning information storage area 223b The data of one area is read (S13204), and it is determined whether or not the data of the read reservation first area is the data corresponding to the jackpot. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won immediately after shifting to the continuous mode. In the processing of S13205, if it is determined that the data in the first reserved area is a jackpot (S13205: Yes), then whether it is data indicating a jackpot D12 (that is, in a relatively short time after the jackpot ends (2 (S13206) When it is determined that it is not a jackpot D12 (S13206: No) , 10 seconds (that is, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in the continuous mode) is added to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display to be executed this time. (S13207), and the present process is terminated. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined by pre-reading that a jackpot variation of a jackpot type other than the jackpot D12 will start immediately after the start of the multi-family mode, the transition to the multi-family mode is made (see FIG. 318(b)). ) is not reported, and a performance mode as if a jackpot is won is executed immediately before the consecutive mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointment when the big win is started without enjoying the small win game even once in spite of the shift to the consecutive villa mode. can do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S13205, if it is determined that the data of the first reservation area of the first special symbol is not the data indicating the jackpot (S13205: No), and in the processing of S13206, the data of the first reservation area is the jackpot D12 (S13206: Yes), the character 811 reaching the top of the rocky mountain (see FIG. 318(b)) is determined (S13208), and the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is turned on. (S13209), and the process ends.

By executing this ceiling effect setting process (see FIG. 336), the prefetch result of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of shifting to the continuous mode (normal state) (time saving number of times or probability variable number of times ends) , it is possible to suitably set whether or not to execute the peak reaching effect (see FIG. 318(b)).

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 338, the details of the above-described special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (S5143) will be described. This special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (S5143) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment. When this special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 316) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RUSH flag 223kc is ON (S13401), and if the RUSH flag 223kc is OFF When it is determined (S13401: No), then, the variation display mode of the second special symbol corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S13402), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13401 that the in-RUSH flag 223kc is on (S13401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the in-preparation flag 223kb is on (S13403). If it is determined that the middle flag 223kb is off (S13403: No), it means that the preparation state has ended in the multi-family mode. The mode of presentation is determined (S13404), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S13403, if it is determined that the ready state flag 223kb is on (that is, in the ready state) (S13403: Yes), then the variation type of the small hit is notified by the variation pattern command (S13405), and if it is determined that the variation type of the small hit has been notified (S13405: Yes), set the ready state flag 223 kb to OFF (S13406), and the effect of the current variation display effect As a mode, the effect mode (see FIG. 319(b)) for informing the RUSH entry is determined (S13407), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S13405, if it is determined that it is not a small per variation type (S13405: No), at least until the variation is completed, it means that the preparation state continues, so the variation pattern The presentation mode for the ready state corresponding to the variation type indicated by the command is determined (S13408), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 338), the situation when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed (in the preparation state or in the state where the RUSH rush has been notified Appropriate mode of presentation can be executed depending on whether the mode is in a state other than the continuous villa mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339, the details of the preparation state setting process (S5144) described above will be described. This ready state setting process (S5144) is, as described above, a process for setting the ready state (see FIG. 319(a)). In this preparation state setting process (S5144), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is ON (S13501). Since there is no possibility that the On the other hand, in the processing of S13501, if it is determined that the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is ON (S13501: Yes), the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is set to OFF (S13502), and the display mode during RUSH preparation ( (see FIG. 319(a)) is set (S13503). Next, the in-RUSH flag 223kc and the in-preparation flag 223kb are both set to ON (S13504), and the process ends.

By executing this preparation state setting process (see FIG. 339), it is possible to set the display mode of the preparation state from the point of transition to the continuous villa mode.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is regarded as an advantageous game state (renso mode) in which the lottery for the second special symbols is easily executed and small winning games are frequently executed. We configured the latent state as the most unfavorable normal mode. Then, by ending the probability variable number of times in the normal mode, it is configured to shift to the most advantageous continuous mode. In other words, the most disadvantageous game state can be directly shifted to the most advantageous game state without going through a big win. By configuring in this way, in the most disadvantageous normal mode (latent probability state), the game can be played with one goal of passing the probability variable number of times.

Here, conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that shifts to a relatively advantageous normal state by setting the probability state to the most disadvantageous game state and ending the probability variable number of times in the probability state. However, in such a conventional game machine, when the jackpot is won in the normal state rather than when the jackpot is won in the latent state, the advantageous time-saving state is more likely to be given after the jackpot is finished. , The normal state is more advantageous, and while staying in the normal state (that is, until the jackpot is won), a disadvantageous state is formed in which the number of balls held tends to decrease. It was something. In other words, even if the probability change number of times passes in the latent probability state and the state shifts to the normal state, it is not advantageous for the player at that time, and furthermore, since it was necessary to win the jackpot, the latent probability state is changed to the jackpot. Even if the state is directly changed to the normal state without the intervening mode, the player is not satisfied with the state, and it is difficult to increase the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, by ending (elapsed) the probability variable number in the disadvantageous normal mode (latency state), it is configured to directly shift to the most advantageous continuous mode (normal state). did. In other words, even if the player does not win the jackpot, it is configured to shift to an advantageous state in which prize balls can be obtained intermittently by simply continuing the right-handed game. By constructing in this way, when the number of probability variable times can be ended, the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction and achievement, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. can be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, the normal state set by initializing the pachinko machine 10 and the normal state shifted by ending the variable probability number or the number of time reductions in another game state , so that the degree of advantage of the player is made different. That is, the normal state set by initialization and the normal state shifted through another game state refer to different variation pattern selection tables (the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the game state set after the end of the jackpot) refer to the variation pattern selection table based on)) configuration. By constructing in this way, the normal state shifted through other game states is formed as the most advantageous game state for the player, while the normal state set by initializing the pachinko machine 10 is It can be formed as a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. In other words, as in a general gaming machine, when initialization is performed, a state that is disadvantageous to the player can be set. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress unexpected disadvantages. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, even in the normal state after the initialization, when the number of special symbol lotteries reaches 100 times or more, the most advantageous state for the player is formed. ing. For this reason, even after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the operation is the same as the normal mode except for the jackpot probability (the operation is shifted to the continuous mode by continuously losing out in 100 special pattern lotteries). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game with the pachinko machine 10 because the state after the initialization is excessively disadvantageous to the player, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. .

Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is configured to notify the preparation state from the transition to the consecutive game mode until the first small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbols. When it becomes possible to obtain a prize ball immediately (that is, when the small hit fluctuation is started), it is configured to notify that it has become an advantageous state (RUSH state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the situation where the prize ball cannot be acquired despite the notification of the RUSH state continuing for a long time. Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of one special symbol results in a big win, a configuration is adopted in which control is performed so that the lottery of the other special symbol executed during the execution of the variation of the big win is forcibly lost. ing. Therefore, at the time when the normal mode is shifted to the continuous mode, there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is started at the same time as the continuous mode is started, is a big hit. , while the big hit variation is being executed, the lottery for the second special symbol is always lost. That is, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started at the time of transition to the preparation state, the right-handed game is continued, and even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed, it is out. is continuous (not winning the small win), the preparation state will continue for a long time (until the big win variation is completed). As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the more the disconnection continues in the preparation state, the more the expectation during the execution of the big hit variation of the first special symbol can be improved.

In addition, in the 12th embodiment, the probability of becoming a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol was set to 1/2, but it is not limited to this, and the small win probability may be arbitrarily determined. . For example, if the probability of a small win is increased and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as in the eleventh embodiment, it is configured to be a small win (for example, with a probability of 59/60). good too. In the case of such a configuration, even if the deviation occurs even once in the preparation state, the expectation for the fact that the changing first special symbol is a big win can be improved, so the deviation of the second special symbol in the preparation state can be improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the case of becoming. Also, the higher the small win probability, the shorter the preparation state (the average number of lotteries from switching to Renso mode to winning a small win decreases), so after switching to Renso mode. , It is possible to shorten the period until the ball is secured by the prize ball. In other words, since it is possible to give the prize ball to the player more quickly, the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the odds of a small win are made low so that it is easy to come off during the preparation state. By configuring in this way, it becomes easy to continue to come off, so it is possible to more frequently create a sense of expectation for the fact that the first special symbol is in the midst of a big hit fluctuation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, basically, when the probability variable number of times or the time saving number of times has ended, the configuration is such that the mode is shifted to the consecutive villa mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the jackpot, a jackpot of a type in which the continuous mode is set directly may be provided. In this case, if a jackpot of a type in which the direct consecutive mode is set is won, the RUSH table 202f14 may be referred to immediately after the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a type of jackpot that directly shifts to the Renso mode after the jackpot ends, while suppressing excessive advantage after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10. A game can be played while paying attention to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, as a condition for shifting to the continuous mode, for example, when the probability variable state continues for a specific number of times (for example, 5 times) and the probability variable jackpot is won again, the game state after the jackpot is forcibly changed to the normal state. may be configured to be set to That is, a so-called variable probability limit function may be installed. By constructing in this way, even if the probability variable jackpot is won continuously in the disadvantageous normal mode, it is possible to make the player feel as if he or she is approaching the consecutive villa mode, thus motivating the player to play the game. can increase

In the twelfth embodiment, in order to prevent the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 from being excessively advantageous, a dedicated variation pattern table is referred to in the initial state. It may be configured to be a mode. By constructing in this manner, the player can be made to want to start the game with the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall in anticipation of the initialization, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the degree of expectation that the first special symbol lottery is a big hit increases as the second special symbol lottery continues to lose during the preparation state. In addition to this, it may be configured to execute an effect that indicates the number of consecutive times of failure during the preparation state (that is, indicates the degree of expectation that the first special symbol is fluctuating in the jackpot). Specifically, for example, the background color of the display screen in the preparation state may change from blue to green to red to rainbow color each time the deviation occurs two times in a row. With this configuration, even a player who does not know how to use the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can easily understand that the more consecutive the second special symbols come off, the better. Therefore, it is possible to realize game characteristics that are easy for the player to understand.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 344. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, the normal state is an advantageous game state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed and small winning games are frequently executed, while the potential state is It is configured so that the game state becomes the most disadvantageous for the player. In addition, by setting many cases of transitioning to the normal state to the case where the number of probability variations ends in the latent probability state, we expect that the deviation will continue over the number of probability variations set in the disadvantageous probability state. It was configured to be able to realize novel game characteristics that make it possible.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the two game states of the latent state and the normal state are configured as advantageous game states in which the small winning game is frequently executed, while the variable probability state and the time saving state are used as the game state. It is configured as a game state that is disadvantageous for players. As a result, it is possible to set the time saving state that is advantageous in a general game machine as a disadvantageous state, and the state in which the time saving state is not set as an advantageous state, so that the time saving state ends. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player wishes to play the game.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment in that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 differs from that of the game board 13 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). ), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. be. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in Section 12. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the twelfth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, modes in the thirteenth embodiment will be briefly described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most advantageous state, and the latent state is also configured as a game state that is advantageous to the player although the degree of advantage is lower than that of the normal state. On the other hand, the probability variable state and the time saving state are configured as a disadvantageous game state in which the game should be progressed by the left-handed game. In addition, it can be said that the time saving state is more advantageous for the player because it is easier to shift to the most advantageous normal state in the time saving state than in the variable probability state. In the thirteenth embodiment, the most unfavorable probability variable state is called normal mode, the time-saving state is called chance mode, and the latent probability state that is advantageous for the player is called continuous mode A. The normal state, which is most favorable for In addition, as in the twelfth embodiment described above, in the normal state set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, only the long variation is selected when the second special symbol lottery is executed. , forms a disadvantageous state in which it is necessary to play the game by hitting left.

<Electrical configuration in the thirteenth embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 342. FIG. Here, the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment in the contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the contents of the second winning random number table 202c, and the jackpot type selection table 202d. The specified contents and the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. First, referring to FIG. 238(a), the configuration of the first winning random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 321(b) explains the first winning random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment.

FIG. 340(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 340(a), in the first per random number table 202a in the thirteenth embodiment, as a random number (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" Four random values (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340(a), eight random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 7" are defined as random numbers (counter values) determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of special symbols. ing.

Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the special symbol low probability state, the probability of a big hit is 1/120 (4/480), while the special symbol lottery is performed in the special symbol high probability state. The probability of winning a jackpot when executed is 1/60 (8/480). It should be noted that the change in the jackpot probability in the thirteenth embodiment is performed in order to further enhance the superiority of the normal state. That is, it is configured so that the latent certainty state does not last long by making it easy to win the jackpot in the latent certainty state. Therefore, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the state of frequently winning small wins will shift to a normal state that tends to continue for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 340(b), details of the second winning random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 340(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 340(b), in the second winning random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment, "0" as a random value (counter value) that is determined to be a winning of a normal symbol in a low probability state of a normal symbol. is stipulated. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340 (b), two random numbers (counter values) of "0, 1" are determined as normal symbol hits in the time saving state of normal symbols. stipulated.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, the normal symbols are hit only at a low probability. As a result, even if a left-handed game is performed in the time-saving state or the variable probability state, the electric accessory 64a is difficult to be opened, so that the game ball hardly enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. Therefore, it is necessary to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by entering the game ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 by the left-handed game. It becomes a game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 341, in the thirteenth embodiment, seven jackpot types of "jackpot A13" to "jackpot G13" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbols. In addition, as the jackpot types of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "jackpot H13" to "jackpot J13" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 341, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and the jackpot type is "jackpot A13". are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot A13" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the jackpot ends is set to consecutive mode A (potential state). As described above, the continuous mode A is a game state in which a small winning game is frequently executed only by hitting to the right. It is an advantageous jackpot type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, "jackpot B13" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 9". This "jackpot B13" is a type of jackpot (two-round probability variable jackpot) set to the most disadvantageous normal mode (probability variable state) after the jackpot ends with eight rounds of the jackpot. In addition, since 25 times are set as the number of times of time saving set after the end of "jackpot B13", it becomes comparatively easy to terminate the number of times of time saving. By ending the number of times of shortening of working hours, it becomes continuous mode A until the number of times of variable probability (100 times) is ended.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, "jackpot C13" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 29". This "jackpot C13" is a type of jackpot (two-round variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two, and the most disadvantageous normal mode (variable probability state) is set after the end of the jackpot. In the normal mode after the "jackpot C13" ends, the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times, so it is more difficult to shift to the continuous mode A than the "jackpot B13". Therefore, the "jackpot C13" is a jackpot of a type more disadvantageous than the "jackpot B13".

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, the value of the first winning type counter C2 "30 to 74" is defined in association with "jackpot D13" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot D13" is a type of jackpot (two-round variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two and the normal mode (variable probability state) is set after the end of the jackpot. In the normal mode after the "jackpot D13" ends, the number of times of time saving is set to 75 times, so it becomes more difficult to shift to the continuous mode A than the "jackpot C13". Therefore, the "jackpot D13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the "jackpot B13" and the "jackpot C13".

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "75" in association with "jackpot E13" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot E13" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. In the chance mode that is set after the "jackpot E13" ends, the number of times of time saving is set to two times, so it becomes extremely easy to end the number of times of time saving. When the number of times of time saving ends in the chance mode, the mode shifts to the most advantageous continuous mode B (normal state), so the ``jackpot E13'' is the most advantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, "jackpot F13" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 "76 to 80". This "jackpot F13" is a type of jackpot (2-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds and the chance mode (time-saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, since 50 times are set as the number of time reductions in the chance mode set after the end of the "jackpot F13", it is difficult to shift to the continuous mode B than the "jackpot E13". Therefore, the "jackpot F13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the "jackpot E13". In addition, in the chance mode, the probability of hitting the jackpot is low, and by ending the number of times of saving time, it will shift directly to the most advantageous continuous mode B, so it is better than "jackpot B13" to "jackpot D13" that shifts to normal mode. It can be said to be an advantageous (easy to shift to Renso mode B) jackpot type. In addition, it can be said that it is more disadvantageous than "jackpot B13" to "jackpot D13" if only the low jackpot probability is focused.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, the value of the first winning type counter C2 "81 to 99" is defined in association with "jackpot G13" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot G13" is a type of jackpot (two-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two and the chance mode (time-saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, since 75 times are set as the number of time reductions in the chance mode set after the end of "jackpot G13", it is more difficult to shift to consecutive mode B than "jackpot E13" or "jackpot F13". . Therefore, the "jackpot G13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the "jackpot E13" and the "jackpot F13".

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", and "jackpot H13" is defined as the jackpot type. ing. This "jackpot H13" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to Renso mode A or normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, when "jackpot H13" is won in Renso mode B (normal state), after the jackpot is set to Renso mode A (potential state), When "jackpot H13" is won in the normal mode (probability variable state), chance mode (time saving state), and continuous mode A (potential probability state), the normal mode is set after the jackpot.

In addition, "jackpot I13" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "25 to 74". This "jackpot I13" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to Renso mode A or normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, if the "jackpot H13" is won in Renso mode A (latent state) or Renso mode B (normal state), after the jackpot ends, Renso mode A (latent state) is won. On the other hand, if you win the "jackpot H13" in the normal mode (probability variable state) or chance mode (time saving state), the normal mode is set after the jackpot.

In addition, "jackpot J13" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "75 to 99". This "jackpot J13" is a type of jackpot (8-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot is completed is set to the chance mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341 , if “jackpot J13” is won in consecutive mode B, two times are set as the number of times of time saving, thereby forming an advantageous state in which the number of times of time saving is extremely easy to end. . When "jackpot J13" is won in continuous mode A, 75 times are set as the number of times of time saving, and when "jackpot J13" is won in normal mode or chance mode, 100 times are set as the number of times of time saving.

It should be noted that, in the normal mode and chance mode, if the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, setting 100 times as the number of time reduction is because the second input by the right-handed game in the gaming state where the left-handed game should be performed. This is to suppress the irregular game method aiming at the ball mouth 640 . As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, a game state disadvantageous to the player is formed while the time saving state of normal symbols is set. Therefore, in the normal mode or the chance mode, when the lottery of the second special pattern becomes a big hit, the time saving state of the disadvantageous normal pattern continues for a long time (100 times), so that it is irregular for the player. It is possible to make the player feel that he/she does not want to perform such a game method. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods in which a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the table 202f11 for variable probability/latent probability start in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The table 202f11 for the probability change/latent probability start time in the thirteenth embodiment is a lottery of the first special symbol in the probability state with respect to the probability change/latency probability start time table 202f11 (see FIG. 324) in the twelfth embodiment As the variation pattern selected when is executed, only the variation pattern with a short variation time (0.1 seconds or 10 seconds) is selected, and the second special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state The difference is that only a variation pattern with a short variation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern selected in the case. In this change, the latent state in the 12th embodiment is the normal mode that is disadvantageous to the player, whereas the latent state in the 13th embodiment is configured as the multi-floor mode A that is advantageous to the player. It is due to

Next, referring to FIG. 343, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described. explain. FIG. 343 is a diagram showing a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 343, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment is provided with roughly four modes (game states). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 343 (probability variable state), the chance mode shown in the center of FIG. , and the continuous mode B (normal state) shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343 are provided.

As described above, the normal mode indicates the variable state of the special symbols and the time saving state of the normal symbols, the probability of winning a big hit is high, and the electric accessory 64a is more likely to be released than the normal state of the normal symbols. However, the probability of opening is low, and game balls rarely enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. Therefore, since it is necessary to advance the game by entering the game ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 in the left-handed game, a game state disadvantageous to the player is formed. In addition, the chance mode, as described above, indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and although it is necessary to proceed with the game by left-handed games as in the normal mode, normal This is a game state with a higher degree of advantage than the normal mode because it is easier to shift to the consecutive villa mode A than the mode. In addition, the continuous mode A indicates a variable probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, and by performing a right-handed game, an advantageous game state in which small winning games are frequently executed is realized. Form. Further, the continuous mode A indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, and like the continuous mode A, a very advantageous game in which small winning games are frequently executed. form a state.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of transition from the normal mode to another state when a jackpot is won or when a prescribed probability variation count has passed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, when the first special symbol jackpot is selected (determined) as the jackpot type and the jackpot A13 determined at a rate of 5% is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. Shift to Sou mode A. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is achieved and one of the jackpots E13 to G13 determined at a rate of 25% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, a relatively advantageous chance mode is entered after the jackpot ends. Transition. Furthermore, after the normal mode is set, by allowing the specified number of times of variable probability (100 times) to pass, the game is directly shifted to the continuous mode A, which is advantageous to the player (without going through the jackpot). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is determined and the jackpot B13 to C13 determined at a rate of 70% is determined as the jackpot type, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more advantageous to pass the prescribed variable probability number of times than to get a big win, so that the player can expect that the loss will continue over the prescribed number of times. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, there is a possibility that the chance mode will shift to another state when a big win is made or when a prescribed number of times of reduced working hours has passed. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, when the first special symbol jackpot is selected (determined) as the jackpot type and the jackpot A13 determined at a rate of 5% is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. Shift to Sou mode A. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and one of the jackpots B13 to D13 determined at a rate of 70% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the mode shifts to a disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends. . Furthermore, after the chance mode is set, by passing a prescribed number of times of time saving (any of 2 times, 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times), the game goes to the consecutive house mode B, which is most advantageous for the player. and directly (without going through the jackpot). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is determined and the jackpot E13 to G13 determined at a rate of 25% is determined as the jackpot type, the chance mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the chance mode, even if you hit a big hit, the rate of maintaining the status quo or falling to the disadvantageous normal mode is extremely high, so it is more advantageous to let the prescribed number of times of reduction of time pass than to hit a big hit. easy to become As a result, the player can expect that the game will continue to be out for a prescribed number of times to reduce the time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of shifting from the continuous mode A to another state when a big win is made or when a specified number of times of probability variation has passed. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 343, when the jackpot H13 determined at a rate of 25% is selected (determined) as the second special pattern jackpot and the jackpot type is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends Shift to the unfavorable normal mode. In addition, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is obtained and the jackpot J13 determined at a rate of 25% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a disadvantageous chance mode after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, after the continuous mode A is set, the number of fixed probability changes (100 times after the end of the previous big win) has passed, so that the player can directly switch to the continuous mode B, which is most advantageous (without going through the big win). )Transition. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is determined and the jackpot I13 determined at a rate of 50% is determined as the jackpot type, the consecutive villa mode A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in Renso mode A, prize balls can be obtained while staying in Renso mode, and in addition, when a big win occurs, it is relatively easy to loop through the same mode, which is advantageous for the player. becomes. Furthermore, if the probability variable number of times can be passed, it will shift to the most advantageous continuous mode B, so even if it is a big hit or a failure (small hit) continues, the player can enjoy an advantageous state. Form.

In addition, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of shifting from the consecutive villa mode B to another state only when a big win occurs. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 343, the second special pattern is a jackpot, and when the jackpots H13 and I13 determined at a rate of 75% are selected (determined) as the jackpot types, the jackpot After the game ends, the mode shifts to consecutive villa mode A, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is determined and the jackpot J13 determined at a rate of 25% is determined as the jackpot type, the chance mode is set after the jackpot ends. In the chance mode set after the end of the jackpot J13, since the number of times of time saving is set to two times, the number of times of time saving can be almost ended and the mode can be shifted to the continuous mode B. - 特許庁Therefore, the type of jackpot is more pleasing to the player than the jackpots H13 and I13 that shift to the consecutive villa mode A. As described above, in the Renso mode B, prize balls can be obtained while staying in the Renso mode, and there is a possibility that the player will shift to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player, in the event of a big win. Therefore, it is very advantageous for the player.

<Control processing of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 344, control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 14 (S121) in the thirteenth embodiment. This normal symbol variation process 14 (S121) is a process executed instead of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and normally symbol variation in the twelfth embodiment. In the same manner as the process (see FIG. 48), the process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and the process for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are performed. This process is for

Of the normal symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, in each of the processes of S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823, the 12th embodiment The same processing as each processing of S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48) in the form (and the first embodiment) is executed. be done.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, when the process of S1810 or S1812 is completed, then 60 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time (S1831), and the process is started. The process proceeds to S1814. That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, a long variation time is set regardless of the result of the lottery of normal symbols or the game state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chances of opening the electric accessary 64a even in the variable probability state or the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, in the processing of S1821, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1821: No), the electric accessary 64a is opened. The time and number of times are set to "0.1 second x 1 time" (S1832), and the process proceeds to S1823. On the other hand, in the process of S1821, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S1821: Yes), the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory 64a are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time". (S1833), the process proceeds to S1823. Thus, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the time-saving state of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design is long (60 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is short, so it is lower in the variable probability state and the time-saving state. It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64b2. Therefore, the game state in which the time-saving state of normal symbols is set can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the two game states of the latent probability state and the normal state are configured as advantageous game states in which small winning games are frequently executed. Here, conventionally, by executing the lottery of the second special symbols in the latent certainty state, the game machine is constructed so as to win a small win with a high probability, and the latent certainty state is more advantageous than the variable certainty state. is proposed. In other words, there has been proposed a game machine equipped with an advantageous state (so-called small winning RUSH function) in which prize balls can be obtained without winning a big win. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if the state is shifted to an advantageous state other than the latent state such as the variable probability state, if the state is not shifted to the latent state (small winning RUSH state), the player feels satisfied. was difficult to hold. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, as a so-called small winning RUSH state, two types of states with different degrees of advantage are provided. It was designed to be relatively easy to migrate. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to experience the small winning RUSH state relatively easily can be formed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modification of the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the thirteenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 345 and 346. FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the two types of game states, the latent state and the normal state, are easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol with a high probability of winning a small hit (the fluctuation time of the second special symbol short) formed as favorable conditions. In other words, just by continuously hitting the ball to the right, the small winning of the second special symbol occurs frequently, and the first specific winning opening 65a is frequently opened, so that the winning ball can be awarded even if the big winning is not won. It is configured to form an advantageous state that can be obtained continuously (intermittently).

On the other hand, in the modification of the thirteenth embodiment, by playing a game aiming at the first ball entrance 64b1 in a left-handed game, a small hit of the first special symbol occurs frequently, and the small hit By performing a game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in an advantageous state (latent state) where it is easy to enter the game ball into the second specific winning opening 650a opened during the game and the right-handed game, An advantageous state (normal state) is provided in which small hits of the second special symbol occur frequently and the game ball is easily entered into the second specific prize winning port 650a opened during the small hit game. and That is, by playing a left-handed game, an advantageous state (potential state) in which prize balls can be obtained intermittently (continuously) without winning a jackpot, and by playing a right-handed game. , and an advantageous state (normal state) in which prize balls can be obtained intermittently (continuously) without winning a jackpot. In addition, the small winning probability of the first special symbol (for example, 1/5) is configured to be lower than the small winning probability of the second special symbol (eg, 59/60). It is configured to be in a more advantageous state in which prize balls can be obtained more easily than in the latent state.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the thirteenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment in that the small winning probability is changed and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64aj is changed. and that the board configuration of the game board 13 is changed. With reference to FIGS. 345 and 346, the board configuration of the game board 13 of this modified example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 345, the game board 13 in this modified example is provided with an electric accessory 64aj in place of the electric accessory 64a provided accompanying the lower first ball entrance 64b2. drink differently. This electric accessory 64aj, like the electric accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), is normally in a closed state ( 1st state) is formed, and in the case of winning in the normal pattern lottery, the open state (second state) makes it easier for the game ball to enter the lower first ball inlet 64b2 compared to the closed state. to form Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 346, in this modification, even if the opening state is set, almost no game ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In addition, in this modified example, when a big win is made and when a small win is made in the lottery of the second special symbols, the first specific winning opening 65a is configured to be opened, and the lottery of the first special symbols is made. , the second specific prize winning opening 650a is opened.

Next, the correspondence relationship between the state of the electric accessory 640aj and the downflow path of the game ball will be described with reference to FIG. First, referring to FIG. 346(a), the flow path of the game ball when the electric accessory 64aj is closed will be described. As shown in FIG. 346(a), when the electric accessory 64aj is closed, the game ball flowing down from above toward the electric accessory 64aj collides (interferes) with the electric accessory 64aj, thereby traversing the path. is changed (varied) and flows down to the right side of the second variable winning device 650 (path Ka1), or by colliding (interfering) with the electric accessory 64aj and changing the route, the second variable winning device 650 (path Ka2), or directly flows down toward the second variable winning device 650 (path Ka3) without colliding (interfering) with the electric accessory 64aj. That is, when the electric accessory 64aj is closed, the ball cannot enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2, but can reach the second variable winning device 650 relatively easily. Therefore, in the latent state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set (the electric accessory 64aj is difficult to be released), the probability of 1/5 that the first special symbol lottery is executed by playing the left-handed game. , and when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, the game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a relatively easily. It should be noted that when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, the long variation is set regardless of the lottery result, so even if the player continuously hits to the right, there is little merit for the player ( Although you win a small win, the interval between small win games becomes longer, making it difficult to win prize balls).

Also, FIG. 346(b) is a diagram showing a downflow path of a game ball in a state where the electric accessory 64aj is opened. As shown in FIG. 346(b), in the state in which the electric accessory 64aj is opened, the game ball flowing down from above the electric accessory 64aj collides (interferes) with the electric accessory 64aj and the flowing path is changed. Even if changed, the possibility of being reflected in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 decreases (paths Kb1, Kb2). Further, by opening the electric accessory 64aj, the area formed between the electric accessory 64aj and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is widened. It becomes relatively easy for game balls to enter the entrance 64b2 (for example, about 1 ball per 200 balls). In addition, compared to the closed state, it is easier to enter the ball, and compared to the time-saving state of normal symbols in other embodiments, it is configured as a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter. Therefore, in the probability variable state and the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 and the second specific winning opening 650a, so the first special symbol every time the lottery is executed, the game ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening 650a although the second specific winning opening 650a is opened with a probability of 1/5. to form In addition, in this modification, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, each time the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a variation time of 0.1 seconds is set, and a high probability (for example, 232/233) hits. In the case of winning, the electric accessory 64aj is opened for 2.5 seconds. That is, by performing a left-handed game, it becomes an operation that repeats a variation for 0.1 seconds and an opening for 2.5 seconds. In other words, the electric accessory 64aj is almost left open. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second specific ball entrance 650a in the time saving state or the variable probability state.

In this way, in the modification of the thirteenth embodiment, the electric accessory 64aj that is opened when the normal symbol is hit is configured to block the second specific winning opening 650a, thereby reducing the time saving state and the variable probability state. It is configured so that it is difficult to obtain a prize ball even if a small hit is achieved by hitting left at . As a result, the game is played to the second specific winning port 650a only when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting to the left in the normal state of the normal symbol (state in which the electric accessory 64aj is difficult to open). It is possible to create an advantageous state in which the ball can be easily (possibly) entered. In other words, it is configured to form a relatively advantageous state by hitting left in the latent certainty state. Therefore, it is possible to form an advantageous state in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball by hitting to the left and an advantageous state in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball by hitting to the right, so that the game method can be diversified. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in this modification, the degree of advantage is differentiated between the latent state in which it is easier to obtain prize balls by hitting left and the normal state in which it is easier to obtain prize balls by hitting right. ) configuration. As a result, since the game can be given a sharpness, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this modification, by increasing the probability that the second special symbol will be a small hit than the probability that the first special symbol will be a small hit, the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed. , the normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous, but it is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to varying the small winning probability according to the type of the special symbol, for example, the small winning of the first special symbol is higher than the small winning of the second special symbol in one small winning game. The normal state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed may be more advantageous by structuring so that the number of game balls that can be won can be easily reduced. Alternatively, or in addition to these, the number of prize balls based on the balls entering the second specific winning opening 650a that is opened when the first special symbol hits the small hit By reducing the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entered into the first specific prize winning port 65a opened in the case of becoming, the normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous. can be configured to By applying these modifications, the degree of advantage can be changed in a more multifaceted manner, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the normal state is more advantageous than the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the latent state may be configured to be more advantageous than the normal state.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 341. FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, in the two types of game states, the normal state and the latent state, an advantageous state is formed in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball by a small hit. In addition, by making different degrees of advantage between the normal state and the latent certainty state, the normal state is more advantageous than the latent certainty state, thereby achieving well-balanced playability.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the like, only the latent state is configured as an advantageous game state in which it is easy to win small prize balls. Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the degree of advantage (ease of winning prize balls) is variable according to the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the latent state. More specifically, as the latent state, the most advantageous state (latent state A) in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed with a high probability of winning a small hit (for example, a probability of 59/60); There are two types of states: a state (latent certainty state B) in which the degree of advantage is lower than the latent certainty state A in which the lottery of the first special symbol is likely to be executed with a low probability of winning a small prize (for example, a probability of 1/5). configured to be switchable. As a result, even in an advantageous latent state in which small winning games are likely to be executed, the degree of advantage can be further varied, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and that the main controller 110 The rest of the configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment, except that the configuration of the ROM 202 is partially changed. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the thirteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 347, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 347 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 347, the game board 13 in the 14th embodiment has an upper first ball entrance, as opposed to the configuration (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the 13th embodiment (and the first embodiment). Instead of 64b1 and lower first ball entrance 64b2, central first ball entrance 64c accompanied by central electric accessory 64ca is provided, and instead of second ball entrance 640, sorting device 6400D is provided, and the arrangement of the second variable winning device 650, which is opened when a big hit or a small hit of the first special symbol, is moved to the right side of the board, and the game launched by left-handed hitting It has been changed in that the upper left side is blocked with multiple nails so that it is difficult for the ball to enter. The reason why the arrangement of the second variable winning device 650 has been changed is that the game state (latent It is intended to prevent the game ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 in a game state other than the positive state and becoming advantageous to the player.

The electric accessory 64ca associated with the central first ball entrance 64c is opened when the normal symbol wins, similarly to the electric accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, in the time-saving state or the probability variable state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, the game ball is easily entered into the central first ball entrance 64c, so that the possession ball is difficult to consume. Therefore, since the game efficiency is improved in the time saving state and the variable probability state, it is advantageous for the player.

The sorting device 6400D is configured to be able to sort (enter) a game ball that has entered either the first ball entrance 6400D1 or the second ball entrance 6400D2 provided inside. there is The first ball entrance 6400D1, like the central first ball entrance 64c, is configured as a ball entrance that triggers the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, the second ball entrance 6400D2 is configured as a ball entrance that triggers the lottery for the second special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 347, inside the sorting device 6400D, the received game ball is received, and the received game ball is sent to either the first ball entrance 6400D1 or the second ball entrance 6400D2. A distributing member 6400Da is provided for flowing down. The distribution member 6400Da is provided with receiving portions on the left and right thereof, which can receive the balls flowing down from above. The distribution member 6400Da is arranged such that the right receiving portion is directly below the opening of the distribution device 6400D (the position where the game ball can enter), and the left receiving portion is the opening of the distribution device 6400D. can be arranged in two ways, that is, one immediately below the . FIG. 347 illustrates an arrangement in which the right receiver is directly below the opening.

In a state where the receiving portion on the right side is positioned directly below the opening, if a game ball entered into the sorting device 6400D through the opening is received by the receiving portion on the right side, the game As a result of the distribution member 6400a rotating clockwise around the shaft 6400Db due to the weight of the ball, the left receiving portion is positioned directly below the opening. In addition, since the right receiving portion is inclined in the lower right direction in front view due to the rotation, the game ball rolls along the inclination and flows down in the lower right direction of the distribution member 6400Da. That is, it flows down in the direction of the second ball entrance 6400D2 and enters the second ball entrance 6400D2.

On the other hand, in a state where the left receiving portion is positioned directly below the opening, if the game ball entering the sorting device 6400D is received by the left receiving portion, the weight of the game ball As a result, the distribution member 6400Da rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft 6400Db, so that the right receiving portion is positioned directly below the opening. In addition, since the left receiving portion is inclined in the lower left direction in front view due to the rotation, the game ball rolls along the inclination and flows down in the lower left direction of the distribution member 6400Da. That is, the ball flows down in the direction of the first ball entrance 6400D1 and enters the first ball entrance 6400D1. Therefore, every time a game ball enters the sorting device 6400D, it can be sorted alternately between the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2.

Details will be described later, but in the 14th embodiment, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol tends to be shorter (the small hit of the first special symbol starts during the fluctuation of the second special symbol As a result, the second special symbol fluctuation is likely to be forced to stop due to deviation) state (potential state B), and the second special symbol fluctuation time tends to be shorter (first By starting the small hit of the second special symbol during the variation of the special symbol, the phenomenon that the variation of the first special symbol is out and forced to stop easily occurs) state (potential state A) The configuration is such that one state is set. That is, in the latent state, the lottery of the first special symbol that wins the small win with a probability of 1/5 is mainly executed, and the lottery of the second special symbol that wins the small win with a probability of 59/60 is mainly executed. It is configured to provide two types of states, ie, a state to be executed. Along with this, the variable display on the game board 13 is made so that both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed only by hitting the right hand in the latent definite state. A distribution device 6400D capable of distributing game balls alternately to the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2 is provided in the right area of the device unit 80. FIG.

<Electrical configuration in the fourteenth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 348 to 352. FIG. Here, in the ROM 202 in the 14th embodiment, the configurations of the jackpot type selection table 202d, the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the variation pattern scenario table 202ka are partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 13th embodiment. The difference is that Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 348, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 348, in the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the 14th embodiment, when the previous jackpot type is jackpot A14 or G14, the number of lotteries of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99 times. As a variation pattern selection table, a probability variation A table 202f21 is associated and defined. Although FIG. 350 will be described later for details, this probability variation A table 202f21 is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and this table is referred to in the probability state While forming the most advantageous state in which the small winning game of the second special symbol is easily executed, when this table is referred to in the variable probability state, the game efficiency is higher in the left hand than in the right hand. A relatively advantageous game state is formed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, a normal table 202f23 is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with the range of 100 or more special symbol lotteries. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 352, but when this table for normal use 202f23 is referred to, a very unfavorable state is formed in which the game efficiency is deteriorated by executing a right hit in the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 348, when the last big hit type is one of the big hits B14, D14, and F14, the number of lotteries of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99 times, the probability variation B table 202f22 are associated and defined. This probability variation B table 202f22 is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and when this table is referred to in the latent probability state, the small winning game of the first special symbol On the other hand, when this table is referred to in the variable probability state, a relatively advantageous game state is formed in which the game efficiency is higher for left-handed players than for right-handed players. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, the normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with the range of 100 or more special symbol lotteries. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is jackpot C14, the number of lotteries of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 24 times. A table for probability variation 202f21 (see FIG. 350) is defined in association with the range of 25 times to 99 times. This probability variation B table 202f22 is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and when this table is referred to in the latent probability state, the small winning game of the first special symbol On the other hand, when this table is referred to in the variable probability state, a relatively advantageous game state is formed in which the game efficiency is higher for left-handed players than for right-handed players. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, the normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with the range of 100 or more special symbol lotteries. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, when the last big win type is the normal big win, the normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is associated and defined regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries. there is

Thus, in the fourteenth embodiment, whether the probability variation A table 202f21 is referred to, depending on whether the probability variation B table 202f22 is referred to (that is, according to the previous jackpot type), latent probability state It is configured to vary the degree of advantage in the case of becoming. That is, in the latent state, there are a state (latent certainty state B) in which a small winning game based on the lottery of the first special symbol, which has a relatively low degree of advantage, is easily executed, and a small winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol. Two types of states can be formed: one that is easy to execute (potential state A), and the other. Therefore, it is possible to form more states with different degrees of advantage for the player, so that the game can be diversified and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 349, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 349, in the 14th embodiment, as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, five jackpot types of "jackpot A14" to "jackpot E14" are defined. In addition, as the jackpot types of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "jackpot F14" to "jackpot H14" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 349, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and the jackpot type is "jackpot A14". are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot A14" has eight rounds of the jackpot, and is a type set to the most advantageous latent state A after the end of the jackpot (latent state in which the small winning game with the second special symbol is likely to be executed). It is a jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot). Since the probability state A is the most advantageous game state, the "jackpot A14" is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "jackpot B14" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 19". This "jackpot B14" has 8 rounds of the jackpot, and when winning in a game state other than the latent definite state, it is set to a variable definite state that is relatively advantageous after the end of the big win, while the definite state is set. , after the end of the jackpot is a jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) set in a potential state B (an advantageous state in which the small hit game of the first special symbol is likely to be executed). It should be noted that, if the variable probability state is set after the end of the "jackpot B14", by letting the number of times of time saving elapse (end), until the probability variable number of times (100 times) ends, it becomes the latent probability state B .

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "jackpot C14" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 29". In this "jackpot C14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and when winning in a game state other than the latent definite state, it is set to a variable definite state that is relatively advantageous after the end of the big win, while the definite state is set. , the type of jackpot (8 rounds of probability variable jackpot) is set in the latent state A (the most advantageous state in which the small hit game of the second special symbol is likely to be executed) after the jackpot ends. After the "jackpot C14" is completed, the lottery for the special symbol is executed 25 times, and the probability state A shifts to the probability state B with a low degree of advantage (see FIG. 348). In addition, when the probability variation state is set after the end of "jackpot B14", by letting the number of times of time saving pass (end), it becomes the probability state B until the probability variation number (100 times) ends .

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "jackpot D14" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 79". In this "jackpot D14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and when winning in a game state other than the latent definite state, it is set to a variable definite state that is relatively advantageous after the end of the big win, while the definite state is set. , after the end of the jackpot is a jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) set in a potential state B (an advantageous state in which the small hit game of the first special symbol is likely to be executed). It should be noted that, if the variable probability state is set after the end of the "jackpot D14", by letting the number of times of time saving elapse (end), until the probability variable number of times (100 times) ends, it becomes the latent probability state B . Here, when "jackpot D14" is won in a game state other than the latent certainty state, the number of probability variable times is set smaller than that of "jackpot B14" or "jackpot C14", so the state shifts to a more advantageous latent certainty state. It is possible to make the player have a strong sense of expectation for what to do. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "jackpot E14" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". This "jackpot E14" is a type of jackpot (8-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the time-saving state is set to 100 times after the jackpot ends. Since the time saving state in the 14th embodiment is more disadvantageous than the variable probability state, the "jackpot E14" is the most disadvantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbols.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and "jackpot F14" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence. ing. In this "jackpot F14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and when winning in a game state other than the latent definite state, it is set to a variable definite state that is relatively advantageous after the end of the big win, while the latent definite state is set. , after the end of the jackpot is a jackpot (16-round probability variable jackpot) set in a potential state B (advantageous state in which the small hit game of the first special symbol is easily executed). In addition, since 100 times are set as the number of times of time reduction, the probability change state set after the end of the "jackpot F14" is ended at the same time as the end of the time reduction number of times, the probability change state of the special symbol is also ended. Therefore, when winning the "jackpot F14" in a game state other than the latent certainty state, there is no possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent certainty state. This is intended to suppress an irregular game method of hitting to the right in a game state other than the latent certainty state.

In addition, "jackpot G14" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 79". In this "jackpot G14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and when winning in a game state other than the latent definite state, it is set to a variable definite state that is relatively advantageous after the end of the big win, while the definite state is set. , the type of jackpot (16-round probability variable jackpot) set to the latent state A (the most advantageous state in which the second special pattern small win game is easily executed) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, since 100 times are set as the time saving number of times, the variable probability state set after the end of "jackpot G14" is an irregular type that hits to the right in a game state other than the latent probability state, like "jackpot F14". It is possible to suppress the game method.

In addition, "jackpot H14" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". In this "jackpot H14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and when winning in a game state other than the latent state, the state is set to the most disadvantageous normal state after the end of the big win, while in the latent state When winning, the type of jackpot (16-round normal jackpot) is set in a time-saving state after the jackpot ends. It should be noted that setting the most unfavorable normal state when "jackpot H14" is won in a game state other than the latent probability state is to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the game state other than the latent probability state. This is for the purpose of

Next, with reference to FIG. 350, details of the probability variation A table 202f21 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 350 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the probability variation A table 202f21. As shown in FIG. 350, the probability variation A table 202f21 defines, for each type of special symbol, the correspondence relationship between the game state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed and the variation pattern that can be selected. More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the variable probability state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more. Become. In addition, in the latent probability state, only the long variation of the first special symbol is selected in the same manner as in the case where the number of the second special symbol held balls is one or more in the variable probability state.

On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, while the long variation of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result in the case of the variable state, the short variation time of 0.1 seconds to 1 second in the case of the latent state set. As a result, when the game balls are hit to the right in the variable probability state and the game balls continuously enter the distribution device 6400D, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2. , the number of held balls of the second special symbol becomes one or more, and the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol become longer, and the game efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the variable probability state. On the other hand, if the ball is hit to the right in the latent state, the ball is alternately entered into the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2. and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate. However, as shown in FIG. 350, in the latent state, while the long variation of the first special symbol is set, the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second or less, so the right-handed game is continued. By doing so, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed at a higher frequency than the lottery for the first special symbol. In other words, an advantageous state is formed in which only small hits of the second special symbols are successively won. Therefore, the probability state A most advantageous to the player is formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, details of the probability variation B table 202f22 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the probability variation B table 202f22. As shown in FIG. 351, in the probability variation B table 202f22, the variation pattern selected in the probability variation state is configured to be exactly the same as the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350). As a result, when a game ball continuously enters the distribution device 6400D by hitting to the right in a probability variable state in which a scenario in which a variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variable B table 202f22 is set, As in the case where the A table 202f21 is referred to, as a result of alternately distributing game balls to the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, Both the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol become long, and the game efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the variable probability state.

Also, in the latent state, while the variation time of the first special symbol is 1 second or less, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a long variation of 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. be done. As a result, if the player hits to the right in the latent state, the variation display of the first special symbol for 1 second or less and the long variation of the second special symbol are performed in duplicate, so the right-handed game is continued. By doing so, the lottery for the first special symbol can be executed at a higher frequency than the lottery for the second special symbol. That is, an advantageous state (latency state B) is formed in which only small hits of the first special symbol are successively won. The probability of getting a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/5, whereas the probability of getting a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 59/60. The frequency with which the small winning game is executed is lower than in the probability state A. - 特許庁In other words, the probability state B forms a state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that of the probability state A. Therefore, in the latent probability state, it is more advantageous for the player to refer to the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350) to determine the variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 352, details of the normal table 202f23 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202f23. As shown in FIG. 352, the normal table 202f23 is configured to select the same variation time as the variation pattern selected in the probability variation state. That is, while the variation pattern of the variation time of 20 seconds or less is set by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by the left-handed strike, the right-handed strike is continued in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variable state. By doing so, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2, and as a result, the second special symbol reserved ball becomes 1 or more, and the first special symbol fluctuates. The time and the variation time of the second special symbol become long, and the game efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in a state other than the latent probability state.

Next, referring to FIG. 343, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described. explain. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 341, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is roughly divided into five states. That is, the normal state shown on the upper left side of FIG. 341, the time saving state shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, the probability variable state shown in the center of FIG. , and latent state A shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341 are provided.

The normal state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, which is the most disadvantageous game state in which the probability of winning a big hit is low (1/240) and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to be released. to form In addition, the time-saving state indicates a low-probability state of special symbols and a time-saving state of normal symbols. By hitting, a relatively advantageous game state is formed in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls in hand. In addition, the definite variable state indicates the definite variable state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the probability of becoming a big hit is high (1/80), and the electric accessory 64a is easy to open, so it is left-handed. By performing, a game state is formed which is more advantageous than the time-saving state in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held. In addition, the latent probability state A and the latent probability state B indicate the variable probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of winning a big win is high (1/80), and the electric accessory 64a is a game state in which is difficult to be released. It should be noted that, in the latent state B, since the small winning game of the first special symbol is likely to be executed by hitting to the right, it is possible to enter the game ball by hitting to the right to the second specific winning opening 650a. To form an advantageous state in which a game ball can be entered relatively frequently (every time a lottery of a first special symbol is executed about five times) to obtain a prize ball. On the other hand, in the latent state A, as described above, it becomes easier to execute the small winning game of the second special symbol by hitting to the right, so the first specific winning that can enter the game ball by hitting to the right. A state more advantageous than the latent certainty state B in which prize balls can be obtained by entering balls into the opening 65a frequently (almost every time the lottery for the second special symbol is executed) is formed.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal state to another state only in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in the upper left part of FIG. 341, when the jackpot A14 determined at a rate of 5% is selected (determined) as the first special pattern jackpot and the jackpot type is determined at a rate of 5%, after the jackpot ends Transition to the most advantageous latent state A. In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot is selected (determined), one of the jackpots B14 to D14, which is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the state changes to a relatively advantageous variable state after the jackpot. Transition. Furthermore, when the first special pattern is a jackpot and a jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the state shifts to a time saving state after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal state, winning a big win inevitably shifts to a more advantageous state than in the normal state, so that the game can be played in expectation of a big win.

Moreover, as shown in the upper right part of FIG. 341, there is a possibility that the time saving state is changed to another state not only when a big win is achieved but also when the number of times of time saving ends. Specifically, as shown in the upper right part of FIG. 341, when the first special symbol jackpot is selected (determined) as the jackpot type A14 determined at a rate of 5%, after the jackpot ends Transition to the most advantageous latent state A. In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot is selected (determined), one of the jackpots B14 to D14, which is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the state changes to a relatively advantageous variable state after the jackpot. Transition. Furthermore, after the time-saving state is set, the number of times of time-saving (100 times) elapses (ends), so that the player is directly shifted to the most disadvantageous normal state (without going through a big win). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is determined and the jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% is determined as the jackpot type, the time saving state is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the time saving state, when a jackpot is reached, the game state is shifted to a game state with a higher degree of advantage, or at least the current game state (time saving state) is maintained, while the number of time saving times ends. If it is put away, it will shift to a disadvantageous normal state, so that the game can be played in anticipation of winning a big win before the time saving state ends.

In addition, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of shifting from the variable probability state to another state when the jackpot is won and when the prescribed number of time reductions has passed. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, when the first special symbol jackpot is selected (determined) as the jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, the probability changes after the jackpot ends. Transition to a shorter working hours state that is more disadvantageous than the state. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained and the jackpot A14 determined at a rate of 5% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the state shifts to the most advantageous probability state B after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, after the variable probability state is set, by passing the prescribed time-saving number of times (10 times, 25 times, or 50 times), the player can directly enter the continuous mode A, which is relatively advantageous (without going through the jackpot). to). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained and one of the jackpots B14 to D14 determined at a rate of 75% is determined as the jackpot type, the probability variable state is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the variable state, the rate of transition to a more advantageous state when the jackpot occurs is low (5%), while the time-saving state ends, ensuring a more advantageous latent state , it is possible to realize a novel game property that strongly expects the end of the time saving state.

In addition, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 341, from the latent state B to another state, in addition to the case of a big hit, it also shifts when the specified probability variable number of times (100 times after the end of the big hit) is completed. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 341, when the first special pattern jackpot is selected (decided) as the jackpot type, jackpots A14 and C14 determined at a rate of 55% are selected (determined). After the end, the most advantageous probability state B is entered. In addition, when the jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type with the first special symbol jackpot, the machine shifts to a disadvantageous time-saving state after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the probability variable number of times (100 times after the end of the jackpot) is completed, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the first special pattern is a jackpot, and the jackpots B14 and D14 determined at a rate of 25% are selected (determined) as the jackpot types, the latent state B is set again after the jackpot ends. be. Therefore, in the latent probability state B, it is possible to realize a game property that makes the player expect to win a big prize before the variable probability count ends and the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state.

In addition, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 341, from the latent state A to another state, in addition to the case of a big hit, it also shifts when the specified probability variable number of times (100 times after the end of the big hit) is completed. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 341, when the second special symbol jackpot is selected (determined) as the jackpot type at a rate of 5%, the jackpot F14 is selected (determined) after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the latent state A, which has a relatively low degree of advantage. In addition, when the jackpot of the second special pattern is obtained and the jackpot H14 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the machine shifts to a disadvantageous time-saving state after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the probability variable number of times (100 times after the end of the jackpot) is completed, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and the jackpot G14 determined at a rate of 75% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the probability state A is set again after the jackpot ends. For this reason, in the latent state A, by winning the jackpot, the most advantageous latent state A has a high probability ( 75% rate) to form a very advantageous game state that loops.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, there are two types of games, the latent state A and the latent state B, as an advantageous state in which a prize ball can be obtained by a small winning game without going through a big win. It was configured to provide a state. Both of these states are composed of a latent state (probability variable state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), and by varying the variation pattern scenario, the second special symbol lottery with a high probability of a small hit is biased. It is configured to form a latent certainty state A that is executed (emphasized) and a latent certainty state B that is executed biasedly (emphatically) to the lottery of the first special symbol having a low probability of a small hit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize different game properties (a game property in which more prize balls can be obtained and a game property in which it is difficult to obtain prize balls) in one latent state. It can improve the interest of the person. Also, unlike the thirteenth embodiment described above, the potential state can be the most advantageous game state, and the normal state can be formed as the most unfavorable game state. There is no need to make any difference in control between the state and the normal state that transitions via another game state. Therefore, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, in the 14th embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state may be configured as one of the advantageous states in which small winning games are likely to be executed. That is, in addition to the definite state A and the definite state B, the normal state may also be an advantageous state for the player. By configuring in this way, the number of advantageous states increases, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the fourteenth embodiment, when the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in a state other than the latent state, the long variation is always set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. It is not limited to this. For example, immediately after the end of the jackpot, or when the probability variation number has passed in the latent state, when switching from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, over the lottery of the first special symbol of a specific number of times (for example, 4 times), It may be configured so that long variation is not set even if the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more (variation time of 20 seconds or less is set). That is, as a variation pattern scenario, when the variation display executed for the first time after the end of the big win or the 100th time after the end of the big win is the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is, regardless of the state of the ball held, It is also possible to set a scenario in which a variable time of 20 seconds or less is selected. In this case, within 5 times after the end of the big win and within the range of 100 times to 105 times after the end of the big win, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds). You may By constructing in this way, after the big win is completed, the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be set to 0 before the first variable display of the first special symbol is completed, so that the regular game method can be used. It is possible to suppress the disadvantageous state that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol undergo a long variation even though it has been performed.

In the fourteenth embodiment, in a state other than the latent state, when the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more, by increasing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, The game efficiency is deteriorated when the right-handed game is performed in the game state, and the configuration is intended to suppress the irregular game method in which the right-handed game is performed in a state other than the latent state, but it is not limited to this. . For example, in a state other than the latent definite state, when the total number of reserved balls becomes 5 or more, the first special symbol may be configured to perform a long variation. When the regular game method (left-handed game) is performed in a state other than the latent definite state, only the reserved balls of the first special symbol are accumulated, so the number of reserved balls is four at maximum. On the other hand, if an irregular game method of hitting to the right is performed in a game state other than the latent probability state, as a result of the game balls entering the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2 alternately, More than 5 balls are held. Therefore, by continuing to hit to the right, the first special symbol and the second special symbol form a very disadvantageous game state in which long fluctuations occur, so an irregular game in which the player hits to the right in a game state other than the latent definite state. Constraints can be applied to the method. It should be noted that, at first glance, the number of pending balls is reduced to 4 or less by stopping right-handed hitting when the first special symbol variation display is started and restarting right-handed hitting when the first special symbol variation ends. It seems that a method of playing games by adjusting to However, when this method is performed, as the number of lotteries of the first special symbol increases, the number of held balls of the second special symbol that makes a long change regardless of the lottery result or the number of held balls increases, so the first special symbol When the lottery is performed 4 times, there are almost 4 reserved balls. Therefore, after that, the first special symbol also becomes a long variation, forming a disadvantageous state in which the game efficiency is remarkably poor. As a result, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in a state other than the latent definite state.

In the fourteenth embodiment, by making the probability that the second special symbol becomes a small win higher than the probability that the first special symbol becomes a small win, the probability state B in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Although the latent state A in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous than that, it is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to making the small winning probability different according to the type of the special symbol, for example, the small winning of the first special symbol is higher than the small winning of the second special symbol in one small winning game. By structuring so that the number of game balls that can be awarded is likely to be reduced, it may be constructed such that the latent state A in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous. . Alternatively, or in addition to these, the number of prize balls based on the balls entering the second specific winning opening 650a that is opened when the first special symbol hits the small hit By reducing the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entered into the first specific prize winning port 65a opened when it becomes, the latent state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous. It may be configured to be By applying these modifications, the degree of advantage can be changed in a more multifaceted manner, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 359. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in a state in which the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, by ending the time saving state, the variable probability state (special symbol high probability state, normal pattern low probability state), if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), the game state during the jackpot fluctuation is set to a latent state. It was configured to be (advantageous state in which small winning games are likely to be executed). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment described above, by ending the time-saving number of times earlier than the probability variable number in the probability variable state, from the probability variable state to the latent certainty state (an advantageous state in which small winning games are easily executed) It was configured to migrate.

On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the variable probability state, the second special symbol lottery is executed during the execution of the jackpot variation, thereby reducing the number of times of time reduction. is subtracted, and it is possible to shift to the latent definite state during the execution of the jackpot variation. In other words, it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the small winning game is easily executed even during the execution of the big winning variation. Further, by adopting the same state transition as in the eleventh embodiment, the game state after the end of the jackpot is more likely to be advantageous in the latent certainty state than in the variable probability state. Thereby, when the remaining time until the end of the big winning variation is short (even if the small winning game becomes easy to execute, the small winning game can hardly be executed and the big winning game is started). Even if there is, the player can be made to think that he/she wants to end the number of times of time saving. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property of positively executing the lottery for the second special symbol during the execution of the big hit variation.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and that the main controller 110 The only difference is that the configuration of the ROM 202 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the eleventh embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in form. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 354 and 355, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. 354 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. As shown in FIG. 354, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment has a right side area (right-handed game The difference is that the configuration of the area where the ball launched by the ball flows down) is different. Also, the difference is that a central first ball entrance 64c is provided in place of the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

As shown in FIG. 354, in the right area of the game board 13, a ball path ZK1 through which game balls can flow (pass) is formed. , a second ball entrance 640 accompanied by an electric accessory 640a, and a small winning variable winning device 2650 that is opened during a small winning game are arranged. In addition, above the second ball entrance 640, a right first ball entrance 64r is provided which triggers a first special symbol lottery when a game ball enters. It should be noted that the right first ball entrance 64r for the game ball that has flowed down the ball path ZK1 is located at a position where it is difficult for the game ball that has rolled along the ball path ZK1 to enter (interference with the ball path ZK1 and other game balls). ) is provided in a position where the ball can be entered only when ). Therefore, 90% or more of the game balls hit to the right enter the second ball entrance 640, or pass through the second ball entrance 640 to the small winning variable winning device 2650 or the out port 66 enter the ball. The percentage of game balls that enter the right first ball entrance 64r is about 1 in 20.

The variable winning device 1650 arranged on the ball path ZK1 is a device that opens and closes according to a predetermined opening scenario when a big win is won in the lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). A specific winning opening 1650a, an open state in which a ball can enter the specific winning opening 1650a, and a closed state in which it is more difficult (impossible) to enter the specific winning opening 1650a. , and 15 balls are paid out as prize balls every time one ball enters during a jackpot game.

The second ball inlet 640 has an opening formed by cutting out a part of the ball flow lower surface of the ball path ZK1, and one ball is awarded as a prize ball each time one ball enters. It is configured so that the ball is paid out. Also, like the first embodiment described above, it is configured to trigger the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol. The opening of the second ball entrance 640 is covered with an electric accessory 640a. It is configured so that the easiness of ball entry can be varied by variably controlling the closed state to be possible).

In a state (closed state) in which the opening of the second ball entrance 640 is covered by the electric accessory 640a, the ball that has flowed down the ball path ZK1 passes over the electric accessory 640a and is downstream of the ball path ZK1. It is configured so that it flows down. In other words, the game ball that flows downstream from the second ball entrance 640 in the ball path ZK1 is the game ball that did not (could not) enter the second ball entrance 640 .

A ball that flows downstream from the second ball entrance 640 in the ball path ZK1 reaches the variable winning device 2650 for small winning. This small winning variable winning device 2650 is composed of a small winning winning opening 2650a and an opening/closing door 2650f for covering the opening of the small winning winning opening 2650a. It has an opening formed by cutting out part of the bottom surface of the ball flow of ZK1, and is configured so that 10 balls are paid out as prize balls every time one ball enters. .

This small winning variable winning device 2650 operates to open during a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in a special symbol (second special symbol) lottery, and the opening and closing door 2650f is determined in advance. By opening in the open scenario, it is variably controlled between an open state in which a ball can enter and a closed state in which ball entry is more difficult (impossible) than in the open state. In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (for example, 59/60). .

In a closed state in which the opening/closing door 2650f closes the small winning prize opening 2650a, the ball flowing down the ball path ZK1 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 2650f and flows down toward the out port 66.例文帳に追加. The upper surface (sphere passage surface) of the opening/closing door 2650f is provided with a delay means for delaying the falling of the ball, and is configured so that it takes one second for the ball to pass over the opening/closing door 2650f. . By providing this delay means, the required ball passing time can be ensured in a smaller space. Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifteenth embodiment, as a delay means, opening and closing are performed so as to form a ball passage with high frictional resistance (coefficient of friction) (higher frictional resistance than other ball passage surfaces of the ball path ZK1). The upper surface of the door 2650f is formed with an uneven portion that a ball can climb over.

As the delay means, a spherical delay passage (for example, a path with a serpentine ball path) is formed by devising the structure of the ball passage surface, or a ball delay passage is formed by devising the material of the ball passage surface. or delay the passage time for the ball to pass through the predetermined section.

Furthermore, a ball shot in a left-handed game (a game aimed at the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80) enters each winning hole (ball entry hole) provided on the above-described ball path ZK1. Nails are implanted below the game board 13 (below and right of the first ball entrance 64) as a regulating member (regulating means) for regulating the falling of the ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with different games between the right-handed game and the left-handed game, so that the player can be provided with a game that does not get bored (hardly gets bored). .

Next, the details of the ball flow in the right area in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 355 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ball flow in the state in which the time-saving state or probability variable state is set as the game state, Figure 355 (b) is a game state set latent probability state FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ball flow in a state where the ball is in a state of

The ball path ZK1 of the game board 13 of the fifteenth embodiment is defined by the ball passage time from the through gate 67 to the second ball entrance 640 (by the time the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entrance 640 required time) is set to 0.5 seconds. Also, the ball passage time (time required for the ball to pass (flow down) from the upstream end to the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a) on the electric accessory 640a covering the second ball entrance 640 is configured to be 1 second. are doing.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state) of the normal design is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal design is 0.1 seconds. ∼0.4 seconds, that is, a time shorter than the ball passage time from the through gate 67 to the second ball entrance 640 is set. Furthermore, when winning a lottery for normal symbols, the opening operation of 0.2 seconds is executed twice with a closing period of 0.8 seconds. That is, it is configured to perform an opening operation in which a closing period shorter than the time (1 second) for the ball to pass over the electric accessory 640a is set.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355( a ), most of the balls enter the second ball entrance 640 when the time-saving state is set as the game state and a right-handed game is played. Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment, since the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to be less than half of the ball passage time (0.5 seconds) from the through gate 67 to the second ball entrance 640, the normal symbol Even if one lottery is performed in which the result of the lottery is lost, the ball that caused the lost lottery can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 by winning the winning lottery in the next lottery. can.

On the other hand, when the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal design is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal design is 3 to 5 seconds, that is, from the through gate 67 to the second entrance. It is configured to set a time longer than the ball passing time (0.5 seconds) up to 640. Furthermore, when winning the lottery of the normal symbol, it is configured to execute the opening operation once for 0.04 seconds. In other words, it is configured so that the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 only for 0.04 seconds in the period of 3 to 5 seconds.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355(b), most of the balls do not enter the second ball entrance 640 when the latent state is set as the game state and a right-handed game is played. The ball will flow down toward the prize winning device 2650 for small hits. In the fifteenth embodiment, the time for the ball to pass over the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 second, and the ball is shot once every 0.6 seconds. Therefore, by continuously playing the right-handed game, one ball always stays on the electric accessory 640a.

By configuring in this way, when winning the normal symbol lottery, the ball can be reliably entered into the second ball entrance 640 and the second special symbol lottery can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the second special symbol lottery is not executed in the game state (probability variable state, time saving state, latent probability state) in which the hitting game is executed. As described above, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is won with a high probability. Also, it is possible to enter a game ball into the winning device 2650 for a small hit and obtain a prize ball. In other words, a small winning game is frequently executed by lottery of the second special symbols, and an advantageous state is formed in which prize balls based on the small winning can be obtained frequently. On the other hand, in the time saving state and the variable probability state, almost all game balls hit to the right enter the second ball entrance 640 (or the first right ball entrance 64r), so small winning games are frequently executed. However, it becomes extremely difficult for the game ball to reach the small winning prize device 2650 during the execution period of the small winning game. Therefore, the variable probability state and the time-saving state simply allow the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (or the right first ball entrance 64r) efficiently. Compared to the positive state, the degree of advantage is low (it becomes difficult to win prize balls).

Next, with reference to FIG. 356, various operations when winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery during the variable probability state, which are characteristic operations in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 356 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the variable display effect executed corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 and the variable state of each special symbol in the fifteenth embodiment. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment will be briefly described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiments, the variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and the variable display for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol (dynamic display) and can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

As shown in FIG. 356, in the variable probability state, a chance zone display (see FIG. 297(b)) is set as an effect mode. In addition, during the variable probability state, as described above, most of the game balls fired by hitting to the right enter the second ball entrance 640, and rarely (for example, at a rate of 1 in 20) The ball enters the first ball entrance 64r. Therefore, during the variable probability state, the number of times of time saving is subtracted by basically executing the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, if the lottery of the second special symbol during the variable state becomes a jackpot, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, loop the variable state at a rate of about 75%, time-saving state at a rate of 20% It is configured to migrate (fall) to In other words, even if it becomes a jackpot in the variable probability state, it is unlikely that it will shift to an advantageous latent state. The game can be played with a stronger expectation that the player will play the game. In addition, even if the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 64r and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the small hit will not be won, but in the variable probability state, as described above, Since it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the small winning prize device 2650, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are overlapped (at the same time), thereby shortening the time. It is possible to give the player the impression that the number of times can be subtracted more. Therefore, in the variable probability state, the more the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 64r, the more the player can have the impression that the probability state is approaching. can improve interest in

Then, in the state in which the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, when the number of times of time saving ends, as described above, it shifts to a more advantageous latent probability state, and frequently A very advantageous state is formed in which the small winning game of the second special symbol is executed and the game ball can be easily made to win the winning device 2650 for small winning. In the latent probability state, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, there is no possibility of winning a small hit, so the player has the impression that the remaining number of variable probability has been wasted once. can let Therefore, in the variable probability state, it is possible to realize a game property that makes it possible to expect more game balls to enter the right first ball entrance 64r, whereas in the latent state, the right first ball entrance 64r can be realized. It is possible to realize a playability that makes one expect that the game ball will not enter the ball. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which it is possible to switch the role of the right first ball entrance 64r (whether or not it is a preferable ball entrance) depending on the game state. .

In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, by varying the opening control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 for each game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed even in the time saving state and the probability variable state. It was configured to be executed mainly. That is, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed without setting the second special symbol long variation in the time saving state or the probability variable state, the second special symbol lottery is executed It is configured so that a relatively short fluctuation time is set even if it is set. As a result, in the variable probability state, the number of times of time reduction is digested by lottery of the second special symbols, and the game property aiming at the most advantageous latent probability state is realized. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to realize the game property of digesting the number of time reductions of the second special symbol during the execution of the big hit variation of the first special symbol.

As shown in Figure 356, in the state where the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, it is easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, and a relatively low percentage (for example, of the game balls that have been launched At a rate of 1/20), a game state is entered in which the lottery for the first special symbol is also executed. In other words, the probability variable state is a state in which the electric accessory 640a is easily opened since the normal pattern high probability state is set, and the game ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, and a small hit is achieved. A game state is formed in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the winning device 2650 for use. In this variable probability state, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big hit, as shown in FIG. In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery hits a jackpot in the variable probability state, a long variation is executed for 600 seconds. During the big hit fluctuation in this variable probability state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted each time the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit. As a result, it is possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol a plurality of times during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, it is possible to execute the variation display of the second special symbol for the remaining number of time reductions during the execution of the big hit variation of the first special symbol. In this case, since the first special symbol jackpot is fluctuating (the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on), the second special symbol lottery will not duplicate the jackpot (the lottery result is out or small hit). Therefore, while the long variation of the first special symbol is being executed, there is no possibility that the lottery of the second special symbol will result in a big win and the variable probability state or the time saving state will be set. As a result, it becomes a very advantageous state in which the number of times of time saving can be reliably subtracted every time the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. In addition, since 90% or more of the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a variation time of 1 second, by continuing to hit to the right during the long variation of the first special symbol, long variation Regardless of the number of times of time saving at the start of the time, it is possible to end the number of times of time saving almost during the long fluctuation. It should be noted that during execution of the jackpot variation (long variation) of this first special symbol, a super chance zone effect (see FIG. 357), which will be described later, is performed. In other words, the performance mode is executed to indicate that the game moves to an advantageous latent certainty state by completing the number of times of time saving by hitting to the right.

As shown in Figure 356, during the execution of the super chance zone production (that is, during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol in the variable probability state), the second special symbol lottery is drawn over the time reduction number of times (end). When executed, the game state is changed from the variable probability state to the latent probability state. That is, the state in which it is difficult for the game ball to reach the small winning prize device 2650 shifts to the state in which it is easy for the game ball to reach the small prize winning device 2650 . Therefore, until the start of the big win, it is possible to enjoy an advantageous game in which small win games can be won frequently and prize balls can be obtained based on winnings to the small win prize winning device 2650.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. It should be noted that after shifting to the latent certainty state, the RUSH effect (see FIG. 7(b)) is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment and the like. Furthermore, by starting the jackpot after entering the latent certainty state, it is possible to set the game state (the number of times of time reduction) after the end of the big hit by referring to the latent certainty state. In other words, the rate of looping the same state is high (at a rate of 75%, the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot). Since it can be treated as winning the jackpot in the latent state, the end of the jackpot It can be configured to increase the possibility that the latent state will continue even later. Therefore, when the super chance zone effect is started, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, it is difficult to enter the right first ball entrance 64r even if the ball is hit to the right, and the variation time of the second special symbol jackpot variation is also limited. Since it is short, it becomes difficult to digest the remaining number of time reductions by lottery for the first special symbol. Therefore, normal jackpot production is executed during the jackpot variation of the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, a characteristic effect in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 357(a), the super chance zone effect will be described. This super chance zone effect is a effect executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol in the variable probability state. When this super chance zone effect is executed, a effect is executed in which the character 811 discovers the carrot images NG1 to NG3 imitating carrots, and at the same time, the display area HR1 is displayed with "Found carrots! Eat up!". is displayed. In addition, the characters "15 remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. Furthermore, the characters "Enter the Super Chance Zone!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that the character 811 eats up all the carrots shown in the carrot image, which is more advantageous for the player. In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, after the super chance zone effect is started, the effect that the character 811 eats one carrot is executed each time the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the remaining number of times of time saving and the remaining number of carrots are linked (synchronized). In other words, by eating all the carrots, it can be easily understood that the transition to the latent state occurs. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand.

In the variable probability state, when the character 811 is able to eat carrots (the number of times of time saving is completed) before the end of the big hit variation of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 357, the display area HR1. , the text "Complete!! Start RUSH!!" is displayed, and the text "0 left" is displayed in the display area HR2. In addition, the characters "RUSH Rush!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has entered (transitioned to) the most advantageous probability state (RUSH state).

In the fifteenth embodiment, as a super chance zone effect, the character 811 eats one carrot for each change, thereby making it possible to indicate the remaining number of lotteries until the potential state is reached. However, it is not limited to this. It is not limited to this form as long as it can suggest the remaining number of times, for example, as in the 12th embodiment, the height of climbing a rocky mountain (remaining distance to the top) suggests the number of remaining time reductions It is good also as a structure which carries out.

In the fifteenth embodiment, as a super chance zone effect, it was configured to execute a effect that suggests the remaining number of lotteries until the number of times of time saving ends, but instead of or in addition to this, the first special symbol A configuration may be adopted in which an effect (for example, a countdown display of the remaining time, etc.) indicating the remaining time until the end of the jackpot variation is performed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player play the right-handed game more seriously by trying to finish the number of times of time saving before the suggested remaining time elapses, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. can be made

<Electrical configuration in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 358 and 359, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided within the main controller 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 358, details of the second winning random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 358, in the second hit random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment, the random number (counter value) determined as the hit of the normal design in the low probability state of the normal design is "0 to 230". 230 random numbers (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 358, 231 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 231" are defined as the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to hit the normal symbols in the time-saving state of the normal symbols. there is

In other words, in the fifteenth embodiment, it is constructed so that the normal symbol wins almost every time the through gate 67 is passed, both in the time-saving state of the normal symbol and in the normal state of the normal symbol. As a result, even when the right-handed game is performed in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, and when the right-handed game is performed in the latent probability state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the second A state in which a ball can be entered into the ball entrance 640 can be formed. In addition, as described above, in the time saving state and the probability variable state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter and the opening time is longer, while in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is longer and the opening time is shorter. . As a result, almost all game balls that have reached the second ball entrance 640 can enter the second ball entrance 640 in the time-saving state and the variable probability state. On the other hand, in the latent state, since the game ball easily passes through the second ball entrance 640 while the second ball entrance 640 is closed, the game ball enters the small winning prize device 2650. becomes easier. Therefore, it is possible to form a state that is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state or the variable probability state.

Next, with reference to Drawing 359 (a), table 202f2 for time reduction and probability variation in the 15th embodiment is explained. Drawing 359 (a) is a figure showing the contents of regulation of table 202f2 for time saving and probability variation. As shown in FIG. 359(a), the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 in the fifteenth embodiment hits a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, 600 seconds per long While the variation is set, if the first special symbol is lost in the lottery, a 10-second loss middle variation is set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 359(a), as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a relatively short variation pattern of 1 second to 20 seconds is associated and defined. As a result, when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big hit in the variable probability state, it is possible to continuously execute only the lottery for the second special symbol by continuing the right-handed stroke. Therefore, by continuously hitting to the right in the variable probability state, the lottery for the second special symbol can be performed at relatively short intervals, and the number of times of time reduction can be consumed. Therefore, it is possible to easily shift to the most advantageous latent probability state during execution of the jackpot variation.

Next, referring to FIG. 359(b), the latency confirmation table 202f3 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 359(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the latency confirmation table 202f3. As shown in FIG. 359(b), the latency table 202f3 in the fifteenth embodiment is set to a long variation of 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result as the variation time of the first special symbol, while the second A relatively short variation time of 20 seconds or less is defined as the variation time of the special symbol. Therefore, a more advantageous game state is formed in which the lottery for the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the latent definite state or the definite variable state. That is, only the small winning game of the second special symbol is executed, and the chance of entering the small winning prize device 2650 increases, so the probability variation number ends or until the big win To form a game state in which a large number of prize balls can be continuously acquired by hitting.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment, by hitting to the right in the variable probability state and the time saving state, while suppressing that the game ball reaches the small winning prize device 2650, the second The board configuration and the control of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state are configured so that the lottery for the special symbol can be easily executed. On the other hand, in the latent state, by hitting to the right, an advantageous game state is formed in which game balls enter both the second ball entrance 640 and the small winning prize device 2650 in good balance. . That is, in a game state other than the normal state, the game is constructed so as to proceed with the game mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and in a state other than the latent state, the game ball is sent to the small winning prize device 2650. It is configured to suppress the entry of the ball. By constructing in this way, in a game state other than the normal state, it is possible to realize an easy-to-understand game property in which the game proceeds by lottery of all second special symbols.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the variable probability state, the second special symbol lottery is executed during the execution of the big win variation, thereby reducing time. The number of times is subtracted, and it is possible to shift to the latent definite state during the execution of the big win variation. In other words, it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the small winning game is easily executed even during the execution of the big winning variation. Furthermore, by structuring it so that the time-saving state can be extinguished during the execution of the big win variation and shifted to the latent definite state, when the first special pattern lottery results in a big win, the latent definite state is entered. It becomes easy to start a jackpot from. In other words, the game state after the end of the big win can be set with reference to the latent state, so that the possibility of continuing the latent state even after the end of the big win can be increased. . As a result, regardless of the remaining number of times in the time-saving state, aiming to end the number of times of time-saving during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, the right hitting is continued even during the big hit fluctuation. can do. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, it was configured to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern selection table common to the time saving state and the probability variation state (time saving / probability variation table 202f2), but it is not limited to this do not have. For example, in the case of the time-saving state, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the variation time may be shortened. This is because there is no advantage for the player even if the number of times of time saving is consumed in the time saving state.

In the fifteenth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the variable probability state, only the long variation of 600 seconds is set, but it is not limited to this, and an arbitrary variation time is set. You may The shorter the variation time, the higher the possibility that the big hit will be started before the number of times of time reduction is finished even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed during the variable probability state, so the first special. When the big winning variation of the pattern is executed (when the super chance zone performance is started), the game can be played while giving a sense of tension. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, the longer the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the easier it is to end the number of times of time reduction during the jackpot fluctuation. You can play games. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified example of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 360, a modification of the eleventh embodiment described above will be described. In the eleventh embodiment described above, each time the number of times of lottery that the number of times of time saving may elapse (finish), the river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) is executed. In addition to this, in this modified example, it is configured to execute a river breakthrough effect as an effect suggesting that a jackpot has been won during a chance zone (time saving state of normal symbols). Also, at the start of the river breakthrough effect, a privilege (reward) that can be given to the player when breaking through the river is notified in advance. As a result, the player can have more diverse expectations.

First, with reference to FIG. 360(a), the display mode at the start of the river breaking effect in this modified example will be described. FIG. 360(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a river breakthrough effect executed in the number of lotteries in which the number of times of time saving may end. As shown in FIG. 360(a), in the river breakthrough effect in this modified example, a privilege (reward) given to the player when breaking through the river in the current river breakthrough effect is displayed in the display area HR1. It is configured to The example of FIG. 360(a) illustrates a case where it is notified that RUSH will be given as a privilege (transition to the latent state) by successfully breaking through the river. That is, the display area HR1 shows a state in which the characters "Reach the first river! Break through and RUSH! Drop and finish..." are displayed. This display content makes it possible for the player to understand that the RUSH is entered by breaking through the river, so that the player can pay more attention to the result of the river breaking effect during the game. In addition to the example in FIG. 360(a), for example, there are suggested contents such as "Break through and continue! Drop and end..." and "Break through and hit big! Drop and finish..." there is In this way, by providing variations to the suggested content, it is possible to vary the player's expectations for the river breaking effect according to the suggested content. For example, if the display content is “Break through and RUSH! can be done. Also, if the display content is "Breaking through and ending with a fall...", either the time saving number of times will end by accident, or the time saving number of times will end. Therefore, it can be made to feel that the possibility of a big hit is low. Therefore, even if the time saving state ends, the shock can be softened. Furthermore, by executing the effect of breaking through the river in this display mode, it is possible to give the player great surprise and joy. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modified example, as described above, even at the timing when there is no possibility that the time saving state ends, the river breaking effect is configured to be executable. In other words, it is constructed such that the river breakthrough effect is executed in the case of a big win and part of the cases of failure (for example, 1/100 of the failure). The display mode in this case will be described with reference to FIG. 360(b). FIG. 360(b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the river-breaking effect that is executed in part when a big win is made and when a win is lost. As shown in FIG. 360(b), when there is no possibility that the number of time reductions will end, the river image KG is displayed in a thinner form than the normal river breaking effect. In addition, the characters "Found a stream! If you jump over it, you win a big win or continue!!" are displayed in the display area HR1. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that it is decided to break through the river itself. In the case of a big win, the big win is reported when the river is broken through, while the continuation is reported in the case of a miss.

As described above, in this modified example, even when a big win occurs during the chance zone, the big win is notified by the river breakthrough effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the production in the chance zone. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand. Further, in this modified example, at the start of the river breakthrough effect, a privilege (reward) to be given when the river is broken through is notified in advance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the player's expectation for the river breakthrough effect according to the contents of the privilege, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, at the start of the river breakthrough performance executed in the case of a big win or a loss, the type of big win in the case of a big win and the number of times of time reduction set after the end of the big win may be suggested. More specifically, for example, four character colors of white, green, and red are provided as the character colors of "jackpot", and in the case of white, the possibility of a normal jackpot is high, and in the case of green, the possibility of a variable jackpot. In the case of red, the odds are variable, and the number of times of short time (0 times or 10 times) increases (that is, it becomes easier to shift to the latent definite state). By constructing in this way, when the green characters or red characters are displayed, the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that a big win will be reported, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
Next, a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 423. FIG. It should be noted that the same elements as those of the above-described embodiments will be repeatedly described for convenience of description. Also, for convenience of explanation, the contents explained in each of the above-described embodiments are also described with different reference numerals in some places. Specifically, in each of the above-described embodiments, each control process is denoted by the symbol S, but in the present embodiment, the symbol C is denoted by the same symbol. , will be given different numbers and will be explained again. Further, the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments are applied to the portions where the detailed descriptions of the same elements as those described in each of the above-described embodiments are omitted.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment executes a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) by winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery as a trigger for executing a privilege game (jackpot game) in which the player is advantageous. Opportunity (first opportunity), winning a small hit in the lottery of special symbols, and during the small winning game, the game ball is in a specific area (V winning device 650 (see FIG. 361) that is opened during the small winning game) It has two opportunities (second opportunity) for executing a big win game (V big win game) based on passing through a V area (not shown) provided in the .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a jackpot game at various opportunities, so that a game with improved playability can be provided. Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more likely to win a small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1). And, during the time saving state which is a game state that can be set after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery of the special figure 2 is easily executed. Thereby, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to make it easier to execute the big win game than when the normal state is set. That is, the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly executed in the normal state, whereas the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed in the time saving state, so that the above-mentioned second opportunity can be easily established. . Therefore, since the time saving state can be set as a game state advantageous to the player, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting the time saving state.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set, it is configured to be able to temporarily appear the period during which the lottery of the special figure 2 is likely to be executed. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 361, but when a specific win (long open win) is won by a normal symbol lottery in a normal state, the electric accessory 640a is held for a long period of time (1.5 seconds). It is configured to set a period in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance (winning opening) 640, which is the trigger for executing the special figure 2 lottery. As a result, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed even for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, so the game can be played without executing the special figure 2 lottery (without shifting to the time saving state). It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the continuation condition (end condition) of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, at least the first condition (for example, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 5 times during the time saving state, or the small winning game end), and the second condition (hard to end) that is easier to continue the time saving state than the first condition times execution, or the end of the small winning game), can be set. Then, when the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the normal state and when the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the time saving state, the time is reduced. The setting ratio of the state continuation condition (termination condition) is made different. Specifically, after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state, than after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state , It is configured so that the continuation condition (end condition) that makes it easy for the time saving state to continue (it is difficult to end) is likely to be set.

By constructing in this way, the player can be interested not only in the lottery result of the special symbol (special symbol) but also in the game state when the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the sixteenth embodiment, as described above, the game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state than the case where the game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set. is set, it is easier to set a time-saving state that is easy to continue after the end of the V jackpot game. Therefore, both when the normal state is set and when the time saving state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, up to four pieces of winning prize information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be able to be held and stored, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 final variation in the time saving state is shown. It is configured to inform the player of the result of prefetching of the winning prize information of the special figure 2 held and stored using the variable performance. In other words, as a result of the variable production performed during the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the game state transitions from the time saving state to the normal state (to the normal state It is configured to inform the result of the lottery for the prize information of the special figure 2 held and stored at the time of shift). By configuring in this way, when the production result of the variable production is a production result indicating that a win (for example, a small win) has been won, whether the small win of this time has been won in a time-saving state or in a normal state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether he or she has won the lottery.

In addition, as described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the small hit is won in the time saving state and when the small hit is won in the normal state, the jackpot game (V jackpot game ) is set after the end of the time saving state is different, and specifically, if you win a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the normal state, the special figure in the time saving state 2 It is configured to facilitate setting of a continuation condition (termination condition) to facilitate the continuation of the time-saving state (difficult to end) than in the case of winning a small prize in the lottery, and furthermore, after shifting to the normal state. When the look-ahead result corresponding to the special figure 2 lottery to be executed is the determination result that the small hit that the time saving state is likely to continue is won, the variation performance showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 final variation in the time saving state , It is configured to notify the prefetch result (the prefetch result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state).

By configuring in this way, when it is notified that a small win has been won by the variable performance executed during the time saving state, the ratio of the small win that is won is a small win that makes it easy to continue the time saving state. can be enhanced. Here, in recent gaming machines (for example, the pachinko machine 10), in order to improve the soundness of the game, a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a time saving state or a variable probability state) is set after the jackpot game ends. By setting the (so-called continuation rate) low (for example, 65% or less), the gambling aspect of the game may be suppressed. In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a win (for example, a big win or a small win) is won in a state in which an advantageous game state is set that is advantageous to the player, the advantageous game state is returned after the winning game ends. Since the ratio to be set is suppressed, there is a problem that it is difficult to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for the winning notification effect during the advantageous game state.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, in the winning notification effect (variation effect) executed during the advantageous game state (time saving state), the winning during the advantageous game state (time saving state) (small hit) In addition to the notification of, in the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 lottery that is executed after the transition from the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) to the disadvantageous gaming state (normal state), if you win a small hit that is likely to continue the time saving state It is configured to notify the user when the determination is made. As a result, it is possible to increase the winning rate of small wins that tend to continue the time-saving state when the winning notification performance is executed during the advantageous game state (time-saving state), and the player's expectation for the winning notification performance during the advantageous game state. can heighten your senses.

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), or the special figure 2 variation (residual feature that exists at the time of normal state transition) executed after the end of the time saving state (after normal state transition) It is configured to execute a variation performance that makes it difficult for the player to understand which of the special figures 2 variation corresponding to FIG. Although detailed description will be described later, in the 16th embodiment, in addition to the lottery result of the variation, by the variation effect executed corresponding to the final variation period of the time saving state, after the end of the time saving state (after normal state transition) It is configured to notify the prefetch result of the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold that exists at the time of normal state transition) executed in the normal state, and after the time saving state ends (after the normal state transition) The variation time of the special figure 2 variation to be executed (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold existing at the time of normal state transition) is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the short time variation ends Until then, it is configured to display the performance result of the variable performance executed corresponding to the final variable period of the time saving state. In this way, the final variation of the time saving state, special figure 2 variation that is executed after the time saving state (after the normal state transition) (special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold that exists during normal state transition) and By executing a series of productions using the period during which is executed, and displaying the production results of the series of productions across multiple fluctuations, this series of productions corresponds to which special figure fluctuation It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand whether the result of the special drawing lottery is being notified.

First, referring to FIG. 361, the configuration of the game board 13 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 361) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 361) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area in front view (lower left side in FIG. 361). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

The first prize winning port 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80 . The variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to partition the game area on the game board 13 into the left and right sides. A right channel is formed through which the ball can flow down. A game ball that has flowed down the left channel is configured not to flow down the right channel. The first winning port 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball that has flowed down the left channel and the game ball that has flowed down the right channel can enter.

The second winning port 640 is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path is easier to enter than a game ball that has flowed down the left flow path. The second winning port 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, and a channel is formed in the opening through which a game ball can flow down. A photosensor is provided to detect a game ball. On the front side of the opening, an electric accessory 640a is attached as a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate capable of closing the opening, and the variable opening/closing plate is used as an axis to drive the opening/closing to the front side. and an open-mouth solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second winning port 640 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. When the normal pattern (second pattern) hits, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640a to the front lower side, and the open state where the ball easily wins the opening of the second prize winning port 640 is temporarily maintained. It operates so as to repeat the state of the open state and the normal closed state for a predetermined number of times determined by the game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, the 15R short time (99 times) jackpot (jackpot AA) set corresponding to the first special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner when the first winning opening 64 is won, 7R short time (5 times) jackpot (jackpot AB), 7R time saving (1 time) jackpot (jackpot AC) are prepared. In addition, 15R time-saving (99 times) jackpot (jackpot AD), 12R time-saving (99 times) jackpot (jackpot AE ), 7R short time (99 times) jackpot (jackpot AF) is prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, "15R time saving (99 times) jackpot (jackpot AA)" means that the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds after the jackpot, the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is changed 99 times, and 99 During the period until the fluctuation of the round stops, the lottery probability of the normal pattern (second pattern) shifts to a high probability state, and a short time game state is set in which the short fluctuation time of the normal pattern (second pattern) is easily selected. It's a big hit. "7R time saving (5 times) jackpot (jackpot AB)" means that the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is changed 5 times after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds, and the 5th change During the period until is stopped, the lottery probability of the normal pattern (second pattern) shifts to a high probability state, and a short-time game state in which the short fluctuation time of the normal pattern (second pattern) is easily selected is set. is. In addition, "7R short time (1 time) jackpot (jackpot AC)" has a maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds, and the lottery probability of the normal pattern (2nd pattern) during the period until the 5th fluctuation stops after the jackpot. It is a jackpot in which a time-saving game state is set in which a shift to a high-probability state and a short variation time of a normal symbol (second symbol) are likely to be selected.

During the time saving (during the time saving game state), not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, compared to the normal time. A long time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the time saving, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 640a may be changed to increase the number of times the is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit. Either one may be changed. In addition, during the time saving, only the winning probability of the second symbol is determined without the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit. , may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display unit 80, with the winning (starting winning) of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the variation of the third symbol is displayed. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") for display and the passing of a ball through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are used as triggers to variably display the second symbol. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), for example, the top, middle and bottom three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. It should be noted that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. are alternately turned on for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbols is set so as to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbols is performed in a short time during the time saving, so that the winning lottery (the number of variable display of the second symbols) can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 . When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls on the upper tray 17, so that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640. , the game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls possessed by the player, and the lottery of special symbols can be performed for a short period of time while suppressing the investment for additionally lending the balls. .

It should be noted that during the time saving, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the time saving by other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a for one time. In this case, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning may be set. The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 are assembled to the game board in the areas of the left channel and the right channel of the variable display unit 80, respectively. A part of the sphere that flows down is configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol suspension lamp. (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first prize winning port 64 is provided through which balls can win. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 12), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the prize ball is not paid out. It may be configured to pay out prize balls.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state, and the ball is likely to enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the symbol "○" in the variable display of the second symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 compared to the normal time.

In the sixteenth embodiment, a through gate 67 through which a ball can pass is formed in the midstream portion of the left game area (on the left side of the variable display unit 80). As a result, the lottery for normal symbols (normal symbols) is executed even while the player is playing a game (left-handed game) in which the ball flows down to the left game area. Although detailed description will be described later, in this embodiment, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, when winning a specific general pattern, It is configured to execute a game per normal pattern that allows the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 easily.

In this way, the special figure 2 lottery is used without shifting the game state to the time saving state by configuring to be able to provide a period (state) in which the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 during the normal state. It is possible to provide a player with a game property, that is, a game property in which a big win game is executed based on winning a small win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing the game in the normal state for a long time from getting bored with the game without experiencing the game property using the special figure 2 lottery.

In addition, as a game in the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed based on the winning of the ball to the first winning hole 64, and the ball to the through gate 67. A game aiming for a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be executed simultaneously based on the passage of the second special symbol (special symbol 2).

It should be noted that the probability of winning a big hit is the same between when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, as a type of jackpot selected when a jackpot is won, a ball enters the second winning port 640 (lottery corresponding to the second special symbol) and hits a jackpot (jackpot AD, jackpot AE, jackpot AF). In the case, at a rate of 100% as a game state after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving is 99 times (the high probability state of normal symbols is set until the variation of the special symbol is executed 99 times) game state to be given is set. Then, when the ball enters the first winning port 64 (a jackpot is won in the lottery corresponding to the first special symbol), the jackpot that gives the time-saving game state 99 times is a jackpot AA (jackpot). 1% of the total number of winnings), and the jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 is selected. By configuring in this way, in the normal game state (the state in which the time saving is not given in the low probability game state), it is easier for the ball to win in the first winning port 64 than in the second winning port 640. By winning the game ball in the 1 winning hole 64, as a condition for ending the time-saving gaming state, a jackpot (jackpot AA) in which the number of fluctuations of 99 special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is given. When the rate of selection is set to be low and the ball is easily entered into the second prize winning port 640 by giving the time saving, the time saving state is easily continued when the second special symbol wins a big hit. can be configured as Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the reduction in working hours.

In the 16th embodiment, a through gate 67, a second prize winning port 640 (an electric accessory 640a), a variable prize winning device 65, and a V prize winning device 650 are arranged in the right game area, and a lottery of normal patterns (normal patterns) is provided. , the game for drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the game during the winning game (jackpot game, small winning game) can be executed in a right-handed game. there is This eliminates the need for the player to change the shooting direction of the ball (direction of the left game area, direction of the right game area) during the period in which the game in the time saving state, the small winning game and the big winning game are repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress complicated changes in the shooting direction of the ball and allow the player to play the game comfortably. In addition, in the sixteenth embodiment, when the game state (time saving state, small winning game state, big winning game state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the normal state is set as the game state is set In addition, since it is configured so as to play a right-handed game, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player is in an advantageous state during the right-handed game.

The V winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a small winning game is executed. It has a winning door 650b. This V winning door 650b is configured so that a ball path is formed on its upper surface when it is positioned in the closed state, and when the V winning device 650 is in the closed state, the ball is shot in a right-handed game. The ball is configured to flow down the upper surface of the V winning door 650b toward the variable winning device 65. - 特許庁In addition, inside the V winning opening 650a, there is a specific area (V area) not shown, and a ball that has entered the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game (including the ball handling period after the small winning game ends) passes through a specific area (V area), a jackpot game is executed.

In addition, the configuration of the specific area (V area) provided in the V winning device 650 is a well-known general technology in the industry, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. A plurality of flow paths through which balls can pass may be provided, and only the balls that have passed through a specific flow path may be configured to pass through a specific area (V area). A distribution member that distributes the flow direction, for example, a distribution member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule from the time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, or a distribution member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule after a big win game is started. A member, a sorting member or the like that is always driven according to a predetermined rule after the start of a specific number of round games of the jackpot game is provided, and the balls sorted by the sorting member pass through a specific region (V region). It may be configured such that a jackpot game is executed when the game is played.

Furthermore, a plurality of types of small winning games are provided to be executed when winning a small winning game. A small hit type to be executed and a small hit type to execute a small hit game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area (V area) may be configured to be settable. In this case, the opening pattern of the V winning door 650b is changed according to the type of the winning small winning, and when executing a small winning game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area (V area), the V winning opening 650a is executed. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b that makes it difficult for the ball to enter is set, or the ball is distributed to areas other than the specific area (V area) by a distribution member provided in the V winning device 650. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b may be set so that the ball reaches the sorting member at the right timing. In addition, as the small winning game executed based on the winning of the small winning, the small winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened instead of the V winning device 650 can be set, and the small winning game is executed. In some cases, the configuration may be such that the ball cannot physically pass through a specific area (V area) within the V winning device 650 .

The variable prize winning device 65 is a prize winning device that is operated to be opened during a jackpot game, and has a prize winning door 65b that can be changed between an open state in which a ball can easily enter a specific prize opening 65a and a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter. have. This prize winning door 65b is configured so that a ball flow path is formed on its upper surface when it is positioned in a closed state, and when the variable prize winning device 65 is in a closed state, a ball fired by a right-handed game is opened. is configured to flow down toward the outlet 66 from the upper surface of the winning door 65b.

<Regarding Game Features of Pachinko Machine 10 in Sixteenth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 362, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 362 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 362, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment, the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, High probability state of the normal design) is configured to be set.

When a left-handed game is played in the normal state and a jackpot is won (jackpot probability 1/250) in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), a time saving state is always set after the jackpot game is finished. Here, the setting contents of the time saving state which is set when winning the special figure 1 jackpot during the normal state will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. Different time-saving termination conditions are stipulated. The time-saving end condition is a condition for ending the time-saving state, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state.

When the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the normal state, as shown in FIG. The jackpot type (jackpot AA) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when it reaches is set at a rate of 1%, and the time-saving end condition is The jackpot type (jackpot AB) that is established is set at a rate of 15%, and the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the second special pattern (special pattern 2) changes once. It is configured to be set at a rate of 84%. In other words, if you win the special figure 1 jackpot during the normal state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends, but depending on the set jackpot type, the ease of continuing the time saving state (time saving end conditions) are different.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the 16th embodiment, since it is configured so that up to four pieces of winning information of special figure 2 can be reserved and stored, one time saving is set as a time saving end condition Even if it is, while the first special figure 2 variation is being executed (until the first special figure 2 variation is stopped), the time saving state is set, and the electric accessory 640a is easy to open. Since it is in the state, it is possible to make it easier to hold and store the winning prize information of the special figure 2. Therefore, even if the time saving end condition of one time saving is set, during the period when the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state is executed once, the winning information of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 pending) is retained and stored By playing the game, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation up to 4 times after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state. By configuring in this way, when a big win is won, a lot of special figure 2 lotteries can be executed, so that a player can easily experience a big win game via a small win.

On the other hand, when a special prize is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state (small hit probability 1/500), the ball passes through the specific area (V area) during the small hit game. A time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, when the number of times of variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times, the small hit type ( Small hit AA) is set at a rate of 10%, and the small hit type (small hit AB) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern (special figure 2) reaches 5 times is 40%. is set at a ratio of 50%, and the small hit type (small hit AC) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 1 time is set at a rate of 50% It consists of

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the jackpot is won (when the symbol jackpot is won) and the small hit is won by the special figure 1 lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set, When the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game and the big winning game is executed (when the V big winning occurs) or when the big winning game is executed at any of the occasions, the big winning game ends. It is configured so that the time saving state is set later, and even if it is a jackpot game executed based on the special drawing 1 lottery, the easiness of continuing the time saving state is varied depending on the execution trigger of the jackpot game. there is As described above, among the execution opportunities of the jackpot game, in the case of the execution trigger that is likely to be established (jackpot winning by special figure 1 lottery), the average number of times of continuation of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends is 2.58 times, In the case of an execution opportunity that is difficult to materialize (small win winning by special figure 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the big win game is 12.4 times.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of jackpot game execution opportunities, by associating the ease of establishment of the execution opportunity with the ease of continuation of the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that can be set after establishment, any Even if a jackpot game is executed at the execution opportunity of , the player can have a sense of expectation.

In the 16th embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 361, it is configured so that the lottery of normal symbols (normal symbols) is executed even during the execution of the left-handed game in the normal state. , It is configured to be elected per normal figure with a probability of 1/10. Then, it is configured to execute a normal pattern winning game (long opening winning game) in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time (1.5 seconds) at a rate of 1/100 when winning a normal pattern. there is In other words, a state (long opening per game) that can execute the special figure 2 lottery is set with a probability of about 1/1000 of the normal figure lottery that is executed while the normal state is set.

When the ball is entered into the second winning port 640 during the long open winning game, the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 362, the flow of the game when winning the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be described. In the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be the same (1/250) between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. And if you win a jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery, the number of times of fluctuation of the first special pattern (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern (special figure 2) reach 99 times. Any of the jackpot types (jackpots AD to AF) that satisfies the end condition is set (see FIG. 381). That is, in the normal state, among the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery with the same jackpot probability, the execution opportunity of the special figure lottery is difficult to establish (it is difficult to win the ball in the corresponding start winning opening) special figure 2 lottery. is configured to facilitate the setting of a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, when winning is won by the normal drawing lottery and the long open winning game is executed (1/1000), the player can be motivated to execute the special drawing 2 lottery. can.

Next, the flow of the game when winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be explained. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery (about 1/7.1) is higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery (1/500). (See Fig. 380). Then, the time saving state is always set after the big winning game executed by passing the ball through the specific area (V area) during the small winning game. Specifically, when the number of times of variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times, the small hit type ( Small hit AD) is set at a rate of 40%, and the small hit type (small hit AE) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 5 times is 60% It is configured to be set at a ratio of In other words, in the normal state, the average number of continuations of the time saving state set via the small hit of the special figure 2 lottery is 42.6 times, and when the jackpot game is executed via the small hit of the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state It becomes easy to set the time saving state in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be established (easier to continue).

In this way, in the game in the normal state, although it is a low probability, it is possible to win the winning by the normal drawing lottery, and when the long opening winning game is executed (1/1000), it is better to win the jackpot in the special drawing. By making it easy to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the player who is playing in the normal state is allowed to play a game aiming for a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. A game aiming at a big win or a small win in the special figure 2 lottery can be played with the winning of the figure lottery as an opportunity.

Also, as shown in FIG. 361, when a left-handed game is performed to win the ball into the first winning hole 64, the ball launched into the game area (the ball flowing down the left game area) can pass through Since the through gate 67 is arranged in the normal state, the game that performs the special figure 1 lottery and the game that performs the normal figure lottery without changing the shooting direction of the ball for the player who is playing in the normal state. can be performed in parallel.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the more the jackpot game is executed with the opportunity that is difficult to be established, the easier it is to set the time saving state that is advantageous to the player. When a jackpot game is executed, it may be configured to make it easier to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, or a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, a special figure 1 lottery small winning ), it may be configured such that when a jackpot game is executed, a time-saving state advantageous to the player is easily set.

In addition, when the ball does not pass through the specific area (V area) during the above-mentioned small winning game (special figure 1 lottery or small winning game executed when the small winning is won in the special figure 2 lottery) (In the case of non-V winning), the normal state is set after the end of the small winning game (corresponding to the flow indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 361). As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to a player who plays an illegal game by intentionally not allowing a ball to enter a specific area (V area) while a small winning game is being executed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 362, the game flow when the time saving state is set will be described. In this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened, and it becomes easy to win the ball in the second winning hole 640. be.

This time-saving state continues until a predetermined time-saving end condition is satisfied, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift to a normal state. This time-saving end condition is configured so that different conditions are set according to the jackpot type set for the jackpot won in the special lottery or the small hit type set for the small hit won. there is Specifically, regardless of which hit type (big hit type, small hit type) is set, a common time-saving end condition set as a common condition and a different condition depending on the hit type are set. A time-saving end condition is defined, and common time-saving end conditions include a first end condition that is established when a jackpot is won (at the start of a jackpot game), a second end condition that is established when a small win game ends, and a time-saving end condition. The third end condition that is established when the number of special symbol (special figure) fluctuations executed during the state (accumulation of the number of special figure 1 fluctuations and the number of special figure 2 fluctuations) reaches 99 times is set, The corresponding time-saving end conditions are short end conditions that are established when the number of special figures 2 fluctuations that is executed during the time saving state is 1, and medium end that is established when the number of special figures 2 fluctuations is 5 times. Conditions are set according to the winning type.

As described above, the corresponding time-saving end conditions are set based on the number of special figure 2 fluctuations that are mainly varied during the time-saving state, so, for example, when the time-saving state is set. Based on the reserved memory of the special figure 1 variation, even if the special figure 1 variation is executed during the time saving state, the corresponding time saving end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, although the time saving state advantageous to the player is set, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending without executing the special figure 2 lottery. In addition, since it is configured so that the corresponding time reduction end condition is established based on the number of special figure 2 fluctuations, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations executed during the time saving state can be easily defined, and the player It is possible to suppress the provision of excessive benefits (special figure 2 lottery) to.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, as the time saving end condition, the common time saving end condition and the corresponding time saving end condition are configured to be settable with the above-described contents, but not limited to the setting contents of this embodiment, For example, in the sixteenth embodiment, as the end condition for the small winning game that is set to the common time saving end condition, the end condition is when the number of times the small winning game is executed becomes a specific number (for example, 3 times) It may be constituted so as to be established, the end condition regarding the small winning game is set as the corresponding time shortening end condition, and the number of executions of the small winning game in which the ending condition related to the small winning game is established is changed according to the winning type. may be configured. In addition, in the present embodiment, regardless of the small winning type set at the time of winning the small winning, it is configured so that the second end condition is established when the small winning game is executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a small winning game corresponding to a specific small winning type is executed, the second end condition may be established. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that the second end condition is established when the small hit game ends, but not limited to this, the second end condition at the start of the small hit game (at the time of winning the small hit) may be configured so that

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving end condition is established based on the winning of the small prize during the time saving state, so that the player is given a sense of tension as to how long the time saving state will continue. You can play games.

Returning to FIG. 362, the game flow during the time saving state will be described. If you win a big hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, as in the normal state, the number of variations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of variations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) Any one of the jackpot types (jackpots AD to AF) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when reaches 99 times is set (see FIG. 381). That is, only common time-saving end conditions are set as time-saving end conditions.

On the other hand, if a small win is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, after the jackpot game executed via the small win winning is completed, in addition to the above-mentioned common time saving end condition, according to the small win type A time saving state is set in which the corresponding time saving end condition is set. Specifically, during the time saving state, a special figure 2 lottery is won, and after the jackpot game executed via the small winning is completed, the special figure 2 changes as a corresponding time saving end condition at a rate of 10%. The number of times is set to 5 times, and it is configured so that the response time reduction end condition is not set at a rate of 90% (substantially 99 times is set).

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the setting ratio of the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition) set after the end of the jackpot game based on the small win of the special figure 2 lottery is changed to the game state at the time of the small win It is different depending on the situation, and if you win a small hit in the special 2 lottery during the normal state, it is more difficult to establish the time saving end condition than if you win a small hit in the special 2 lottery during the time saving state (correspondence The time saving end condition is not set) It is configured so that the time saving state can be easily set.

By configuring in this way, for example, the time saving state, which is an advantageous game state that makes it easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery, ends and the small winning is won by the special figure 2 lottery held and stored at the time of shifting to the normal state. By doing so, the time saving state advantageous to the player can be easily set, so that the game can be motivated to acquire many reserved memories of the special figure 2 until just before the time saving state ends.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation corresponding to the time saving end condition is satisfied) is executed by the variation production (final variation production), the In addition to the variable lottery result, it is configured to notify the prefetch result of the winning prize information of the special figure 2 that is reserved and stored. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery with the effect result of the final variation effect at maximum five times. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that winning (small winning, big winning) will be announced as the production result of the final variable production higher than the variable production that only informs the lottery result of one special 2 lottery. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the presentation with interest.

In addition, since it is configured to notify the lottery results (including prefetch results) of the special 2 lottery in the time saving state and the special 2 lottery in the normal state at once, the final variation effect of this time will win It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand whether the winning special figure 2 lottery is the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state or the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state when is reported. By configuring in this way, as in the present embodiment, when the time-saving end condition is set at a different rate according to the game state at the time of winning the small hit, the big win executed based on the small win this time It is possible to prevent a player from easily grasping what kind of time-saving end conditions a time-saving state is set after the end of a game by a performance mode (performance timing) of a variable performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, configured to set a short (0.5 seconds) variation time as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation to be executed after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state, the It is configured to display the effect result of the final variable effect described above as the variable effect of short-time fluctuation. As a result, even if it is configured to notify the prefetching result of the winning information of the special figure 2 that is reserved and stored in the final variation performance that is executed in correspondence with the final variation of the time saving state, the target of the prefetching result It is possible to continue to display the final variation effect until the special figure 2 variation ends. Then, when the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation in the normal state) corresponding to the special figure 2 remaining hold after the end of the time saving state ends (when the special figure 2 retention memory number becomes 0), the special figure 1 lottery A left-handed game aiming at execution is performed.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, even if the normal state is set, the predetermined condition is satisfied (by winning the long open per normal drawing lottery), The special figure 2 lottery is configured to be able to be executed, and the special figure 2 lottery is configured to have a higher probability of winning a small prize than the special figure 1 lottery. Thereby, in the normal state, the player can play the game of executing the normal drawing lottery in parallel with the game of executing the special drawing 1 lottery by aiming at the first winning hole 64, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

<Regarding the flow of production in the sixteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 363 to 377, the characteristic presentation contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment, when the normal state is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation. During the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation, if you win a long open per normal figure lottery, the general figure fluctuation production is displayed so as to interrupt the fluctuation production of the special figure 1 fluctuation. It is

Here, the normal pattern fluctuation effect is, after the normal pattern per game (opening of the electric accessory 640a) period from the start timing of the normal pattern fluctuation, the ball is won in the second winning port 640, and the winning ball is corresponded. It is executed as a part of a series performance using a period until a small win is won by special figure 2 fluctuation and a big win game is executed based on the small win.

Here, in recent years, during the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time (for example, 1.5 seconds). There is one that sets the lottery contents of the normal figure lottery so that it can be won, and tries to execute a temporarily advantageous special figure lottery (for example, special figure 2 lottery) in the normal state. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute an advantageous special figure lottery for a player who has been playing a game for a long time in a normal state, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, in such a gaming machine, a normal pattern fluctuation effect for indicating the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, and the result of the normal pattern lottery is executed before the winning game per long opening is executed for the player. A production that can provide the pleasure of predicting is executed using a part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (a display area smaller than the display area where the fluctuation production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation is executed). There is also

However, in recent gaming machines that execute only normal figure fluctuation effects that can inform the player that the winning game will be executed per long opening, the fluctuation production of the special figure 2 lottery acquired by the winning game and the above-mentioned The special figure 2 lottery was executed by executing the privilege given to the player by the winning game per long opening, that is, the winning game per long opening. There is a problem that it is not possible to notify the fact in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is impossible to enhance the performance effect of the normal pattern variation performance.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, from the start timing of the normal pattern fluctuation, after the normal pattern per game (opening of the electric accessory 640a) period, the ball is won in the second winning port 640, and the winning ball A series of performances is executed using a period until a small winning is won by the corresponding special figure 2 fluctuation and a big winning game is executed based on the small winning. Thus, by executing a series of performances, it is possible to inform the player of the flow of the game up to execution of the jackpot game in an easy-to-understand manner based on the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, thereby enhancing the performance effect. can.

Here, in the case of executing the above-described series of effects, during the winning game per normal long open, that is, when the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time, the ball is won in the second winning port 640 In addition, the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the winning prize is started is greatly different depending on the fluctuation situation of the special figure 1 fluctuation occurs. Specifically, for example, when the ball is won in the second winning hole 640, the special figure 1 variation is being executed, and if the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation is 120 seconds , The period (waiting period) from when the ball is won to the second winning hole 640 until the special figure 2 fluctuation is started is 120 seconds. If the series of effects is continuously executed in such a situation, the effect mode of the series of effects is delayed, and the player becomes bored with the effects.

In order to solve such a problem, in the 16th embodiment, when the waiting period is 60 seconds or longer, after the series of effects is simulated, the series of effects is simulated again. It is configured so that the mode is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the production mode of the series of productions is delayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 363, the flow of the variation performance regarding the special figure variation executed during the normal state and the variation performance regarding the normal figure variation will be described. Figure 363 (a), the waiting period from the second winning opening 640 to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation is less than a predetermined period (less than 60 seconds) flow of effect executed when 363(b) is a predetermined period or more (60 seconds or more) of the waiting period from the ball winning the second winning hole 640 to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation performed in a case.

As shown in Figure 363 (a), the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 until the variation (long open variation) corresponding to the normal figure long open per normal figure variation is executed Variation performance (special 1 performance) corresponding to special figure 1 variation is executed using the entire surface of. Here, with reference to FIG. 365 (a), the display screen of the variation production corresponding to the special figure 1 variation will be described. Figure 365 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of variation production corresponding to special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation production). As shown in FIG. 365(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is divided vertically into a main display area Dm and a sub-display area Ds. Small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed (on the upper right side when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). These small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas where identification information (fourth pattern) for indicating the lottery status of special symbols (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed. Then, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery situation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The fourth pattern (special figure 2 fourth pattern) for indicating is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to display the lottery status of the special symbols. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variably displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 365). 368(a) is indicated by a downward arrow) to show the situation in which the special pattern is fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth pattern in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 368(a) ), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special pattern, but it is not limited to this, for example, using a display mode imitating a figure as the fourth pattern or a display mode showing a plurality of colors, a figure can be displayed. It is configured to indicate the result of lottery of the special symbols by indicating that the special symbols are changing according to the display mode to be deformed or the display mode to change the color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific pattern or color. You can

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result), but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the process of lottery (during fluctuation). Further, as shown in FIG. 365(a), in this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is displayed as the main display. Although an example is shown in which the fourth pattern display area is formed on the upper right side of the area Dm, the position and size of the fourth pattern display area may be changed according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. can be different.

Specifically, in the variable performance executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, it is known whether the variable performance being executed corresponds to the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation. When the effect mode for making it difficult is set, it is preferable to change the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) so that the player cannot easily see it. Further, for example, by switching the position of the display area of the fourth symbol corresponding to each special symbol, or displaying only one display area, the player can see the display mode of the fourth symbol display area. It may be configured so that the type of the special symbol being executed cannot be easily discriminated only by it. By configuring in this way, the type of the special symbol currently being executed is grasped by the display mode of the fourth symbol display area, and the effect of the variable presentation performed in the main display area Dm is lowered. The occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, as described above, although it is notified that the special figure is fluctuating by the display mode of the fourth symbol display area corresponding to the period during which the special symbol (special figure) is fluctuating, the fluctuating special figure When it is configured to be variably displayed in a display mode in which the type is difficult to distinguish, the result of the corresponding special figure variation (lottery) and the special figure type can be notified by the stop display mode after the end of the variation display. For example, when a red stop display mode is displayed as the display mode (stop display mode) of the fourth symbol that is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol corresponding to Special Figure 1 (Special 1 4th In the symbol), when the blue stop display mode is displayed, it may be configured to notify that it is the fourth symbol (special 2 fourth symbol) corresponding to the special figure 2.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from restricting the area in which the variable effect is executed and lowering the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth pattern display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. should be configured to run

Furthermore, a small display area Dm1a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm1, and a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, a small display area Dm2a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm2, and a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 365 (a) to be described later, in the number of reserved display areas (small display areas Dm1a, Dm1b), the number of reserved balls of each special figure, in a display mode using numbers Although it is configured to display, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display a display mode using colors or symbols that allow identification of the number of retained balls in the acquisition diagram.

A small display area Dm4 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front (in the upper left direction from the center of the main display area Dm). In this small display area Dm4, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 366(b)).

In the sixteenth embodiment, the small display area Dm4 is used as the guidance display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board 13 the ball should be shot to by merely visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area Dm4. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm4), a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode of "right-handed" to guide the player to play a left-handed game. and a display mode of ``left-handed'' for guiding the player. It is displayed during the time-saving state, during the jackpot game, and during the small win game, and the display mode of ``left-handed'' is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is finished. ing. Also, when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It is configured so that the display mode is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 365(a), the description continues. Although detailed description is omitted, the above-described small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are the result of pre-discrimination of the stored winning information (read-ahead result ) is displayed in a display mode that allows suggestive notification to the player. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (lottery result of the special symbols reserved and stored).

A small display area Dm3 is formed below the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. This small display area Dm3 is an area where identification information for indicating the lottery status (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) of the normal pattern (normal pattern) is displayed. The fourth pattern (the fourth pattern of the general pattern) for indicating the lottery situation of the pattern (the general pattern) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm3.

In addition, a small display area Dm3a is formed in the vicinity of the small display area Dm3, and the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is displayed. The small display area Dm3a mentioned above can suggest and inform the player of the result (prefetch result) of preliminarily discriminating the prize information retained and stored in addition to the value for indicating the number of retained balls of the corresponding normal symbol. It is configured to display such a display mode. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (lottery result of the normal symbols retained and stored).

Furthermore, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 365(b), this sub-display area Ds is configured to display comments on the content of the game being played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, the sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose, for example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. may be configured.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to display a reserved display mode (for example, a circular reserved symbol display mode) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in the sub-display area Ds. Then, it is preferable that the player can grasp the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol according to the number of display of the reserved display mode. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the prize winning information corresponding to each reserved and stored special symbol, and to vary the corresponding pending display mode based on the determination result.

By constructing in this way, the game is played while expecting to win a big prize in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed among the possible plurality of reserved symbols. can let Furthermore, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to individual reserved memory numbers, a display mode for showing a game result that can be advantageous to the player among a plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the variable pending symbol display.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, the game result suggesting mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. The effect explanation mode for explanation, the frame button related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and the win related information display mode for displaying information about the big win game are displayed in the sub display area Ds. The ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a reserved ball, the third symbols are stopped and displayed for one second in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost. After that, the fixed display is performed, and then the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state is maintained until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or until the ball wins the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. A situation in which there is no winning (a winning ball) in either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 despite the fact that the player continuously shoots balls for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is It is rare, and in many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the game is not played at all by the pachinko machine 10 because the player quits the game. due to that.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the newly entered ball is executed. be done.

In FIG. 365(a), for convenience of explanation, the small display area (guidance display area) Dm4 is shown to be displayed in the main display area Dm. The small display area Dm4 itself is not displayed when the guidance display mode is not displayed. In this way, when there is no need to guide the game method (direction), by deleting the display area where the guide display area is displayed, an area for displaying other display modes (for example, variable effect display mode) can be displayed. Since it can be widened, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 363(a), the description is continued. While the special figure 1 variation is being performed, the ball passes through the through gate 67, and when the normal figure long open variation is performed, a part of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 A normal pattern (normal pattern) fluctuation production for showing normal pattern (normal pattern) fluctuation is executed using (see point A in FIG. 363(a)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point A in FIG. 363(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 365(b).

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal pattern long open fluctuation passes a predetermined time, the display area of the special pattern fluctuation effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the normal pattern fluctuation effect The process of switching the size is executed, the normal figure fluctuation effect is executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the special figure fluctuation effect is executed in a part of the main display area Dm (Fig. 363 (a) point B). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point B in FIG. 363(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 366(a).

In this embodiment, 10 seconds after the start of the normal figure fluctuation effect is set as the timing of switching the size of the display area between the special figure variation effect and the normal figure variation effect. Although detailed description will be described later, in this embodiment, in a part of the case where the result of the general figure lottery is out, it is configured to set a variation time of 10 seconds, and the 10 seconds general figure It is configured so that the normal pattern variation effect (see FIG. 365(b)) is executed even when the deviation variation is set.

By configuring in this way, when the normal figure fluctuation production is executed based on the normal figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds), the display area between the special figure fluctuation production and the general figure fluctuation production is not switched, and the general figure An effect is executed in which the variable effect ends. Therefore, after the normal figure fluctuation production is executed, the display area of the special figure fluctuation production and the normal figure fluctuation production is switched and displayed (see FIG. 366 (a)), so that the normal figure fluctuation production being executed is normal. It is possible to increase the expectation that the figure is long open fluctuation.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal pattern long open fluctuation passes, the normal pattern per game (long open game) is executed, and the display screen during the normal pattern per game is displayed (see point C in Figure 363 (a)) . The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point C in FIG. 363(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 366(b).

Here, with reference to Figure 365 (b) - Figure 366 (b), you explain concerning the display contents of normal figure fluctuation production which is executed on the basis of normal figure fluctuation. FIG. 365(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents displayed immediately after the normal pattern fluctuation effect is started (see point A in FIG. 363(a)). As shown in FIG. 365(b), when the normal figure variation effect is executed, a small display area Dm5 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm (the lower right direction when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). , Normal figure fluctuation production is started.

That is, the small display area Dm5 becomes a normal figure fluctuation effect display area in which the normal figure fluctuation effect is executed. Then, as the normal pattern variation effect, the effect that the character 851 finds the treasure box 852 and approaches it is executed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 365 (b), the special figure 1 variation and the normal figure variation are being executed, so the display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is displayed in the small display area Dm1 365(b), a "downward arrow") is displayed, and the display mode (in FIG. 365(b), "downward arrow) is displayed.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters to the effect that the normal map variation effect has been executed and a comment indicating the content of the normal map change effect are displayed: "Treasure box found! Chance to reach!" . As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how the normal pattern variation effect executed in a part of the main display area Dm should develop in the future.

After that, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the normal pattern variation effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 366(a) is displayed. FIG. 366(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents displayed immediately after the display area of the normal figure fluctuation effect is switched (see point B in FIG. 363(a)). As shown in FIG. 366(a), when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the normal pattern fluctuation production, the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed using the entire main display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the first A variable display effect of the special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in a small area Dm6 formed in a part (lower left part) of the main display area Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "great chance" is displayed, which indicates that the normal pattern fluctuation effect has progressed (indicating that the result of the normal pattern lottery was not a normal pattern deviation fluctuation).

As shown in Figure 365 (b) and Figure 366 (a), fluctuation production (special figure fluctuation production, general figure fluctuation production) for showing the lottery results of multiple pattern lottery (special figure lottery, general figure lottery) are executed at the same time, the size of the display area in which each variable performance is executed is varied according to the suggestive state of the lottery result of each symbol lottery, thereby providing a plurality of pattern lotteries to the player. To notify that the variable performances for showing the results are simultaneously executed and to easily inform which variable performance should be watched by the size of the display area in which each variable performance is executed. can.

Although illustration is omitted, if the executed normal pattern fluctuation effect is normal pattern deviation fluctuation (10 seconds), the small display area Dm5 gradually becomes smaller from the display screen of FIG. 365 (b) and finally An effect in which the small display area Dm5 is not displayed is executed, and the player is informed that the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the current normal pattern variation effect is lost. In this way, when the normal figure fluctuation production is executed based on the normal figure deviation fluctuation, only the general figure fluctuation production using a display area smaller than the special figure fluctuation display production is executed, so the normal figure for the out The figure fluctuation production does not hinder the special figure fluctuation production.

In other words, according to the above-described example, the production result of the normal figure fluctuation production (the result of the general figure lottery that triggered the execution of the general figure fluctuation production) is out (normal figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds)) is selected. There is a possibility period, that is, the period from the start of the normal figure fluctuation production to 10 seconds, by executing the display mode shown in FIG. The player is notified that the variable effect is being executed at the same time, and when 10 seconds have passed since the normal pattern variable effect was started, the effect result of the normal pattern variable effect (normal pattern that triggered the execution of the normal pattern variable effect) As a result of the figure lottery), there is no possibility that the off (normal figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds)) is selected, so the possibility that this normal figure lottery is a hit increases, so Figure 366 (a) As shown in , a display mode in which the display area of the normal figure fluctuation production is large (larger than the display area where the special figure fluctuation production is executed) is executed.

As a result, the lottery result that is advantageous to the player as the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation effect, that is, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be the lottery result in which the winning game is executed for long opening, the normal pattern fluctuation Since the display area in which the effect is executed can be enlarged, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the normal pattern variation effect appropriately. Also, for example, if the normal figure fluctuation production is executed based on the normal figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds), the normal figure fluctuation executed in the display area (see FIG. 365 (b)) smaller than the special figure fluctuation production Since it ends only with the production, it does not hinder the visibility of the special figure fluctuation production. In addition, regardless of the lottery result of the general figure lottery, the size of the display area at the start of the general figure variation production is unified, so the general figure lottery lottery will be drawn according to the display mode immediately after the general figure variation production is started. It is possible to prevent the player from predicting the result.

It should be noted that, in the sixteenth embodiment, as shown in Figure 365 (b) and Figure 366 (a), as the display area in which the normal figure fluctuation effect is executed, than the display area in which the special figure fluctuation effect is executed A small display area (small display area Dm5 (see FIG. 365 (b))) and a display area larger than the display area (small display area Dm6 (see FIG. 366 (a)) in which the special figure variation effect is executed (see FIG. 366 (See a)) and two sizes are provided, but not limited to this, three or more sizes of the display area of the normal figure fluctuation effect may be provided, for example, the special figure variation effect A display area of the same size as the display area in which is performed may be used.

In addition, in the sixteenth embodiment, as the normal pattern variation effect progresses, the display area in which the normal pattern variation effect is executed gradually increases, but the present invention is not limited to this. After the display area in which the variable effect is executed is reduced from the initial range (see FIG. 365(b)), it may be configured to be variable to the size of the final range (see FIG. 366(a)). . By constructing in this way, it is possible to continue the normal pattern fluctuation performance while making the player think that the normal pattern fluctuation performance will end, so that it is possible to provide an unexpected performance. can.

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, when the special figure variation effect and the normal figure variation effect are executed at the same time, by varying the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed, the player can watch. However, without being limited to this, for example, the aspect of the display area in which each variable effect is executed (for example, the color of the outline of the display area, the color of the background of the display area, etc. variable mode), output mode of sound corresponding to each variable effect (for example, output only the sound corresponding to one variable effect, or change the output level (volume) of the sound corresponding to each variable effect By setting the output mode), the player may be made to pay attention to one of the plurality of variable effects.

In addition, in this 16th embodiment, according to the progress status (elapsed time) of the normal pattern fluctuation production, the range of the display area in which the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed is configured to be variable. Without limitation, for example, the range of the display area in which the normal pattern fluctuation effect is executed is variable based on the operation content of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that the player can operate, and the normal pattern fluctuation Based on the development status (elapsed time) of the production and the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery (result of judgment), it may be configured to set the variable range of the display area in which the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed. .

By configuring in this way, for the player who wants to quickly grasp the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery during the normal pattern fluctuation performance, the normal pattern lottery is based on the range of the display area that can be changed based on the operation of the operating means. For players who want to quickly grasp the lottery results of the normal pattern fluctuation production and want to grasp the normal pattern lottery result with the production result of the normal pattern fluctuation production, the display area where the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed by not operating the operation means It is possible to execute the normal figure fluctuation effect without changing the range of.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the normal pattern long open fluctuation has passed and the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is displayed as a long open per, then the long open per is executed, shown in Figure 366 (b) A display screen appears. FIG. 366(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when a normal figure long open win is won and a long open win game is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 366(b), when winning the normal long open win, the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 in the main display area Dm, and from the treasure box 852, to show that the normal open long open win has been won. , the effect that the capsule 853 appears is executed. Then, in the small display area Dm3, a display mode (in the figure, "three circles") is displayed to indicate that the result of the normal drawing lottery is a long open hit, and in the small display area Dm4 , "Right-handed" is displayed in order to perform a game (right-handed game) to win a ball in the second winning port 640, and the small display area Dm5 visually indicates the position where the ball is won by the right-handed game. As a guide display mode for notification, a guide map schematically showing a part of the right game area of the game board 13 (in the vicinity of the second winning opening 640) is displayed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 366 (b), since the special figure 1 variation is being executed even while the normal figure long open per game is being executed, the special figure 1 is being varied in the small display area Dm1 The special figure 1 fourth pattern is displayed in a display mode indicating that the special figure fluctuation effect is reduced in the small display area Dm6 formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (display of FIG. 366 (a) displayed smaller than the screen). In this way, even without changing the size of the display area where the normal figure fluctuation production is executed, by reducing the display area where the special figure fluctuation production is executed, the display area where the special figure fluctuation production is executed Since the display area in which the normal pattern fluctuation performance is executed can be relatively enlarged, the performance contents of the normal pattern fluctuation performance can be made more conspicuous to the player.

Then, a comment "Challenge GET" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds to inform the player that the normal pattern variation effect will progress further. Here, in the 16th embodiment, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the general figure lottery is a hit, the variation time (60 seconds) set at the time of winning per general figure long open is the same variation time as the general figure It is configured to set short-circuit open variation (60 seconds). When the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed corresponding to this normal pattern short open fluctuation, the normal pattern fluctuation production progresses until the display mode similar to the display screen shown in FIG. An effect of displaying a loss mode for indicating that the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is out of 852 is executed.

In other words, when winning is won in the normal drawing lottery and the short opening operation is executed as a winning game, the electric accessory 640a is opened to such an extent that the ball cannot enter the second winning port 640. ing. In this case, even if a right-handed game is executed, the ball cannot (is difficult) enter the second winning hole 640, so the comment "Right-handed" is not displayed in the small display area Dm4. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a winning game (a game that opens the electric accessory 640a) that is executed when winning is won in the normal drawing lottery, a long opening winning game that can win a ball in the second winning port 640 and a short-open winning game in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, but not limited to this, three or more types of winning games can be executed. For example, as a long open winning game in which a ball can be won in the second winning hole 640, a winning game with different opening timings and opening times of the electric accessory 640a can be executed. good.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a during the normal long open game, so that the ball is fired only at a predetermined timing during the winning game. It is possible to suppress the game of winning the ball in the second winning hole 640 from being performed. Also, in order to achieve the same effect, for example, the execution timing of the normal pattern fluctuation effect (the timing of displaying the display mode for notifying that the normal pattern per game is started) may be configured to be different. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the winning ball launch timing of the second winning opening 640 based on the presentation mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 363(a), the flow of production will be described. When the right-handed game is performed while the normal game is being executed, and the ball wins the second winning opening 640 (see point C in FIG. 363 (a)), the display mode indicating that is the third It is displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device 81 . The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point C in FIG. 363(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 367(a).

Here, in the sixteenth embodiment, the special figure 1 variation for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 variation for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery are simultaneously (in parallel ) can not be executed, it is configured to preferentially execute the special figure 2 variation with respect to the special figure 1 variation.

Therefore, when the ball wins in the second winning hole 640 during the normal game, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, the winning information of the special figure 2 is reserved and stored, and the special figure 1 being executed Period until the end of the variation (waiting period), the execution of the special figure 2 variation is on standby. After that, when the special figure 1 variation being executed is completed, the special figure 2 variation based on the pending and stored winning information is preferentially executed, and the special figure 2 that develops the production mode of the normal figure variation production described above. Variation effect is executed (see point D in FIG. 363(a)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point D in FIG. 363(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 367(b).

After that, when the special figure 2 fluctuation ends and the special figure 2 is stopped in the display mode showing the small hit winning (see point E in FIG. 363 (a)), the special figure 2 for showing the small winning Variation production is executed. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point E in FIG. 363(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 368(a). Then, while the small winning game is being executed, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) provided in the V winning device 650 (see point F in FIG. 363(a)), a small After the winning game ends, a display mode indicating that the big winning game will be executed is displayed (see FIG. 368(b)).

Here, referring to FIG. 367 (a) to FIG. 368 (b), the normal pattern long open winning game is executed during the normal state, and the third symbol is executed before the big winning game is executed based on the winning game. The content of the effect executed on the display screen of the display device 81 will be described.

In the 16th embodiment, a series of games (normal pattern fluctuation, normal pattern per, special pattern 2 fluctuation, special pattern 2 small per , a game executed in the flow of a big win), a series of effects with a story is executed. Specifically, the effect content of the general pattern variation effect described with reference to FIG. 365 (b) to FIG. It is possible to suggest

By constructing in this way, as the execution opportunity of the jackpot game, the presence or absence of establishment of the execution opportunity more complicated than the execution opportunity established when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols (special symbols) is determined using a series of performances. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Figure 367 (a) shows the state shown in Figure 366 (b), that is, in the state where the long open winning game executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, the ball wins the second winning hole 640 FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen for indicating that; As shown in FIG. 367(a), when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open game, the capsule 853 is broken, and the capsule 853 suggests the contents of the game to be executed in the future. A ticket 854 stating "challenge game" as a mode is displayed. Then, in the secondary display area Ds, a comment "Challenge game GET" is displayed to notify that the challenge game will be executed in the future.

Here, according to the example shown in FIG. 367 (a), since the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 variation is immediately executed based on the ball winning the second winning opening 640 Without being done, the prize information of special figure 2 will be retained and stored. Therefore, "1" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a to indicate that one piece of winning information of the special figure 2 has been obtained. Then, when the special figure 1 variation that has been executed in the state of FIG. (See FIG. 367(b)).

FIG. 367(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen during the challenge game. As shown in Figure 367 (b), when the special figure 2 variation is executed during execution of a series of effects, a challenge game is started. This challenge game is an effect executed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and as shown in FIG. .

In the 16th embodiment, the result display mode is a result display mode 861a with a "cross mark" to indicate that the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is "missing", and a "small win". The result display mode 861d with "V" to indicate that it is, the result display mode 861c with "777" to indicate that it is a "jackpot", and the lottery result of the special figure 2 are not notified. and a result display mode 861e with "NEXT" indicating that the challenge game will be executed again.

Here, as the effect result of the challenge game, the result display mode 861b with "?" , and an effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is not notified in the challenge game. It should be noted that even when this result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, "Right shot" is displayed in the small area Dm4.

By configuring in this way, when the result display mode 861b is stop-displayed in the result display area 860 as the effect result of the challenge game, the right-handed game is played without grasping the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. Therefore, whether the ball shot in the right-handed game wins the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, or wins the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the big winning game, Does it win the second winning port 640 that is opened during the normal game, or does not win the special prize (big hit, small hit) and the normal prize, and does not win any prizes Since it is possible to determine whether the ball is actually flowing down while watching the actual flow-down behavior of the ball, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the sixteenth embodiment, when the result display mode 861b is stop-displayed in the result display area 860, the player cannot grasp the effect result of the challenge game. , For example, after the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, by varying the display mode of the result display mode 861b, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery this time is notified as the effect result of the challenge game. You may make it possible.

By configuring in this way, during the execution of the challenge game, it is possible to inform the game that the result display mode 861b corresponds to which special figure 2 lottery lottery result, and the challenge game is completed. Then, the effect result of the current challenge game, that is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 can be notified to the player.

A result display mode 861e (“NEXT display”) shown in FIG. 367(b) is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 when the challenge game is executed again. In the 16th embodiment, when a plurality of winning information of special figure 2 is acquired during the long open winning game, the lottery of special figure 2 continues until a big hit or a small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2. is executed. In this case, for example, if the lottery result of the first special figure 2 lottery is out, the second special figure 2 lottery will be executed continuously, so the challenge executed in response to the first special figure 2 fluctuation A result display mode 861e is stop-displayed in the result display area 860 as a result of the game effect, and the second special figure 2 variation is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the first special figure 2 lottery is a hit (big hit, small hit), one of the result display modes 861b to 861d for showing the lottery result is stop-displayed in the result display area 860. be.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an effect (challenge game) corresponding to the number of winning information of the special figure 2 acquired during the game per long opening without discomfort. In addition, although detailed description is omitted, as the variable time set in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state, the variable time corresponding to one challenge game (10 seconds) and the variable time corresponding to two times (20 seconds ) can be set, and when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is out, the fluctuation time of 20 seconds is configured to be less likely to be selected than the fluctuation time of 10 seconds.

As a result, when the challenge game is executed twice in the variation performance of one special figure 2 variation, it is possible to set a high possibility of winning the special figure 2 lottery (big win, small win). . In addition, when the result display mode 861e to which "NEXT" is attached by the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, and the challenge game is executed again, the second challenge game is one special figure 2 It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it was executed within the fluctuation time or whether it was executed across two special figure 2 fluctuations.

The state shown in FIG. 367 is a state in which the special figure 2 variation is being executed, so the small display area Dm1 does not include the special figure 1 variation that was changing at the time shown in FIG. 367 (a). is displayed stopped in the display mode "451" shown, and in the small display area Dm2, the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed. is displayed. In addition, since the special figure 2 variation was executed using the special figure 2 winning information that had been reserved and stored at the time shown in FIG. is displayed.

Then, as a series of productions, the special figure 2 fluctuation production is executed using the display area where the normal figure fluctuation production was executed, so the special figure fluctuation production (special figure 1 fluctuation production) is executed in Figure 367 (a) The small display area Dm6 that has been displayed is erased from the main display area Dm. In addition, in the small display area Dm4, the characters "Right-handed" are continuously displayed to prompt the player to play the right-handed game. A comment "What will come out?" is displayed.

Incidentally, according to the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 367(b), the small display areas Dm1 to Dm3 and Dm1a to Dm3a are displayed in a visible size in order to explain the current game situation. Actually, it is displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect of the effect mode (challenge game) being executed in the continuous main display area Dm.

In addition, the state shown in FIG. 367 (b) is, as described above, the normal figure long open per game is finished, and the special figure 2 variation is being executed, so at that timing it is provided in the right game area It is in a state in which it is not easy for the ball to win any of the winning openings (the second winning opening 640, the specific winning opening 65a, and the V winning opening 650a). However, until just before the state shown in FIG. 367 (b), it is a state in which the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 by the normal long open per game, for example, a small hit by the special figure 2 lottery being executed or when winning a jackpot, the ball is likely to enter the V winning opening 650a or the specific winning opening 65a.

In this way, the right-handed game is continuously performed even if the right-handed game that causes the ball to flow down to the right game area momentarily does not become an advantageous game method for the player. By displaying the characters "Right-handed" in the small display area Dm4, the player's annoyance of frequently switching between the right-handed game and the left-handed game is eliminated, and the switching operation of the game method is delayed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a right-handed game cannot be performed in a state where a small winning game is executed and a ball cannot be entered into the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game.

In the present embodiment, for the reason described above, when the right-handed game can be executed with a predetermined interval (the period during which the special figure 2 variation is executed), the small display area Dm4 is continuously displayed during the predetermined interval. However, it is not limited to this, and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 only when the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player. It may be configured to display, and the state in which the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player (normal figure long open per period, small per game period) and the period between the states (special figure 2 fluctuation It is also possible to display the characters "right-handed" in the small display area Dm4 in different display modes depending on the time period).

By configuring in this way, a player who is not accustomed to the game is made to continuously play the right-handed game, and a game situation disadvantageous to the player It is possible to make it difficult for a skilled player to select a game method according to the display mode of "right-handed" displayed in the small display area Dm4. Therefore, the game can be played according to the skill of the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

368 ( a) will be referred to. FIG. 368(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a small win is reported in the challenge game.

As shown in FIG. 368 (a), when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the small hit, the special figure 2 4th pattern in the display mode "341" indicating the small hit winning in the small display area Dm2 is displayed, and the result display mode 861 d is stopped in the result display area 860 . In the secondary display area Ds, a comment "Get a small win!!" indicating that the small win has been won is displayed, and in the small display area Dm7 of the main display area Dm, the player aims during the small win game. As a guide display mode for visually guiding the V winning device 650, a schematic diagram in which the vicinity of the V winning device 650 is displayed in an enlarged manner is displayed.

Then, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game, to inform that the right to execute the big winning game has been acquired after the small winning game is finished. The display screen shown in FIG. 368(b) is displayed as the display screen of . FIG. 368(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed when the right to play the big win game is acquired during the small win game.

As shown in FIG. 368(b), characters "777" indicating that a jackpot game will be executed are displayed in the main display area Dm, and "Big win!! Congratulations!" congratulating the player in the sub-display area Ds. !” is displayed.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the normal pattern (normal pattern) long open per variation is started in the normal state normal pattern fluctuation production (see FIG. 365 (b)) , The electric accessory 640a is opened during the general pattern per game effect (see FIG. 366 (b)) executed during the normal pattern per game, and the second winning port 640 during the normal pattern per game to win the ball, Special figure 2 pending acquisition effect (see FIG. 367 (a)) executed when special figure 2 winning information is acquired, special figure 2 variation effect performed when special figure 2 variation (lottery) is started (See Fig. 367 (b)), Winning effect (see Fig. 368 (a)) indicating that you have won a small hit in the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery), Winning the right to play a big hit during a small hit game Since the production during the small winning game (see FIG. 368 (b)) executed in the case is configured to be executed as a series of productions with a story, the big win is established when a plurality of conditions are met. In a pachinko machine 10 having a game execution opportunity, it is possible to inform a player of the game property in an easy-to-understand manner.

Returning to FIG. 363, the description continues. As described above, according to the game flow shown in FIG. Depending on the game state when the ball is made to enter the second prize-winning hole 640, it may not be possible to inform the player of the progress of the game in an easy-to-understand manner in the above-described effect mode of the series of effects.

Specifically, at the timing of the point C in FIG. 363 (a), since the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the start timing of the special figure 2 variation is a predetermined period (the remaining period of the special figure 1 variation during execution) The display screen when waiting (see FIG. 367 (a)) is used to produce a series of production modes that are displayed, for example, in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed, during the normal figure per game When the ball is won in the second winning hole 640, the special figure 2 fluctuation will be started immediately. Therefore, when the effect mode of the series of effects described above is used, the display screen of FIG. 366(b) directly shifts to the display screen of FIG. There was a problem that the relevance of the production was weakened.

Therefore, in the 16th embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation is being performed at the timing when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the period in which the series of effects is executed, and the determination result Based on, it is configured to vary the effect mode after acquiring the winning prize information of the special figure 2. Here, at the timing of acquiring the winning information of the special figure 2 during the period in which a series of productions are being executed, the contents of the production when the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed will be described with reference to FIG. 369.

Figure 369 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the special figure 1 non-fluctuation, and figure 369 (b) , FIG. 369(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning information acquired in FIG. 369(a) is a small hit.

As shown in Figure 369 (a), in a state in which the special figure 1 variation is not executed, when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the special figure 2 variation is immediately started, so Figure 366 (b) 2, the character 851 uses the hammer 851aa to destroy the capsule 853 appearing from the treasure box 852. As shown in FIG. And, when reaching the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation stops, the display screen shown in FIG. 369(b) is displayed. Figure 369 (b) shows an example of the display screen that is displayed when the special figure 2 variation that is executed based on the fact that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 variation is not fluctuating is stopped It is a schematic diagram shown typically.

As shown in Figure 369 (b), when the special figure 2 fluctuation stops, the effect that the result display mode 855 showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation appears from the capsule 853 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 369(b), since the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a small hit, the result display mode 855 with "V" indicating the small hit winning is displayed. In addition, the display mode of the result display mode 855 is configured to be variable according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation, specifically, the effect result of the challenge game shown in FIG. 367 (b) Since it is the same as the display mode shown, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, during a series of effects, if the ball wins in the second prize opening 640 during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the effect that the capsule 853 appears from the treasure box 852 corresponds to the normal figure winning period (first stage production), and the production of acquiring a ticket 854 from the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation acquisition period (the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1) (second stage production), and the challenge game production is the special figure 2 fluctuation. While the presentation mode is set so as to correspond to the period (third stage presentation), when the ball wins the second prize opening 640 during the special figure 1 non-variation, the capsule 853 from the treasure box 852 Production mode is set so that the production that appears corresponds to the normal figure per period (first stage production), and the production that destroys the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 fluctuation period (second stage production). Configure.

In this way, depending on the game situation during a series of performances, different performance modes can be set depending on whether the standby period for the special figure 2 fluctuation occurs or not, thereby giving the player a sense of discomfort. An easy-to-understand series of performances can be executed without any trouble.

Returning to FIG. 363, the explanation of the flow of the effect is continued. In the series of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 365 to 369, the contents of effects that can be displayed when a normal game is executed in the state where the series of effects are being executed have been described. Specifically, the effect contents when the ball normally enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open winning game, and the effect contents when the ball enters the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game explained.

Here, description will be given of the content of the effect that is executed when the normal game is not executed while the series of effects are being executed. First, with reference to FIG. 370, the effect contents when the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open per game will be described. FIG. 370(a) schematically shows an example of a display screen displayed when the ball has not won the second winning hole 640 when one second has elapsed since the normal long open per game was started. It is a schematic diagram shown, and FIG. 370 (b) is displayed when the normal long open per game ends without the ball winning the second winning opening 640 during the normal long open per game. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a display screen typically.

As shown in FIG. 370(a), until the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open winning game, the effect that the capsule 853 rolls away from the character 851 is displayed in the main display area Dm. At the same time, the sub-display area Ds displays a comment "Hurry!! In addition, it is possible that the player does not play the right-handed game as a cause of the situation where the ball has not entered the second winning hole 640 even after the predetermined period of time has passed after the normal long open per game. The guidance display mode of "Right shot" displayed in the small display area Dm4 is displayed in a display mode that is emphasized more than usual (in FIG. 370(a), the outline of the small display area Dm4 is displayed with double lines). be done. In addition, the voice output device 226 also outputs a voice for notifying that a right-handed game will be played.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, after the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second, the electric accessory 640a is opened again for 0.5 seconds after a closing period of 1.5 seconds, as a normal long open winning game. It is configured so that a winning game (opening action) is executed. Therefore, when 1 second has passed from the start of the game per normal long open, the attention calling screen shown in FIG. It is configured so that the ball can enter the second winning port 640 during the opening period (0.5 seconds). As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity to win a ball in the second winning hole 640 to a player who has played a right-handed game after visually recognizing the display contents of the attention calling screen.

After that, when the game time (3 seconds) of the normal pattern long open per game has passed without the ball entering the second winning hole 640, as shown in FIG. A production indicating that is executed. As shown in FIG. 370(b), a character 851 who regrets not being able to acquire the capsule 853 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "End" indicating that the series of effects has ended is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. comment is displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm4, characters of "left shot" for executing the normal game for executing the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state are displayed. By configuring in this way, if a normal game (a game in which the ball is entered in the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open per game) is not executed in the middle of the series of effects, the series of effects will be performed. Since the effect to end is executed, for example, it is possible to suppress the fact that the series of effects progresses to the end while the winning information of the special figure 2 is not obtained, and the player has excessive expectations. .

Next, as the effect contents to be executed when the normal game is not executed in the state where the series of effects are being executed, the ball does not enter the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game, or the specified The content of the effect when the area (V gate (V area)) is not passed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 371(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the ball has not won the V winning opening 650a when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game. FIG. 371(b) schematically shows an example of a display screen displayed when the small winning game ends without the ball entering the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 371(a), if the ball has not won the V winning opening 650a when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, a small ball formed in a part of the main display area Dm In the display area Dm8, the characters "Last 5 seconds!!" are displayed as remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the small winning game, and a countdown display is executed in which the value decreases with the passage of time. Then, in the main display area Dm, a situation in which the display mode for showing the game result of the small winning game is wrapped in smoke is displayed. In addition, similarly to the above-described FIG. 370(a), a highlighted display mode emphasizing the guidance of the right-handed game is displayed in the small display area Dm4, and the sub-display area Ds indicates that the small winning game is currently being played. , a comment of "Hurry up!!" is displayed to indicate that the game is to be played in a hurry.

Then, when the small winning game ends without causing the ball to enter the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game, the same screen as in FIG. b) see). In this manner, the data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by using the same image data when the series of effects ends at each time point of the series of effects. In addition, since it cannot be displayed when the game is played normally, even if the same image data is used, it is difficult for the player to think that the same image data is being used repeatedly. It is a thing.

Returning to FIG. 363, the description continues. Depending on the variation situation of the special figure 1 during the series production, the state in which the standby period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set and the state in which it is not set occur, and the production mode of the series production in each state was described above. A new problem occurred even in the state in which the waiting period of FIG. 2 variation is set.

That is, the standby period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed, and the winning timing of the ball to the second winning opening 640 is the special figure It is set irrespective of the fluctuation timing of 1. Furthermore, since the length of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation is various, for example, there is a possibility that the standby period of the special figure 2 variation during the series of productions will exceed 100 seconds. In such a situation, if the display screen showing the standby period of the special figure 2 fluctuation (see FIG. 367 (a)) is displayed continuously, the same display mode will continue to be displayed for 100 seconds, There is a problem that the player feels a sense of incongruity, and the series of performances is delayed, resulting in a decrease in the performance effect.

On the other hand, in this 16th embodiment, the presence or absence of special figure 1 fluctuation and the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 fluctuation are determined at the time when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during a series of effects, When the remaining variation time of FIG. 1 variation is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (60 seconds), it is configured to execute a special series of effects.

Here, with reference to FIG. 363(b), the flow of the game when executing the special series of effects will be described. In Figure 363 (b), the period from the ball winning the second winning hole 640 during the normal game to the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation period during execution) is 60 seconds It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation (special series production|presentation) performed in the above case. Note that detailed descriptions of elements that are the same as those in the flow shown in FIG. 363(a) will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 363 (b), when a series of production (normal figure fluctuation production) is executed based on the normal figure long open fluctuation, special figure 1 as special figure 1 fluctuation (shown as special 1 fluctuation in the figure) Long off variation (special 1 long variation (off)) is being executed, and at the time the ball enters the second winning port 640 during the normal figure long open per game, the remaining period of the special figure 1 variation being executed is determined to be 60 seconds or more, the series of performances being executed is terminated with a pseudo-off performance (see point G in FIG. 363(b)). After that, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 long deviation fluctuation under execution reaches 10 seconds, a series of pseudo effects are executed, and the challenge game is matched to the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation (see FIG. 367 (b)) is set (see point H in FIG. 363(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 372, the effect content of the above-described special series effect will be described. FIG. 372(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at point G in FIG. 363(b). As shown in FIG. 363(b), when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation being executed is 60 seconds or more at the time when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640, in the small display area Dm2a In spite of the state where "1" indicating that one winning prize information of the special figure 2 is reserved and stored is displayed, the end screen indicating that the series of effects has ended is displayed in the main display area Dm. be.

After that, as a series of special performances, once the series of performances is finished, the special figure variation performance corresponding to the special figure 1 variation under execution is executed until the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds. Then, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds (when the special figure 2 variation is executed after 10 seconds), the display mode shown in FIG. 372(b) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 364, the contents of the effect executed during the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment will be described. Fig. 364 (a) schematically shows the flow of production executed when a jackpot is won in a special figure 1 lottery in a normal state and a time saving state (once) is set after the jackpot game ends. It is a timing chart, and FIG. 364(b) shows that a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and the time saving state (5 times) is set after the jackpot game executed based on the small hit. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the production|presentation performed when.

As shown in FIG. 364 (a), when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, there is a special figure 1 suspension (hereinafter also referred to as special 1 suspension), and a special figure 2 suspension (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 suspension If there is no special figure 1 lottery, that is, if a jackpot is won by a game (left-handed game) that executes the special figure 1 lottery, the special figure 2 lottery is executed by playing the right-handed game during the time saving state. It is configured so that all the reserved and stored special figure 1 lotteries are executed before.

Specifically, it is executed in a state where the time saving state is set than the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time set during the high probability state of the normal pattern) executed in the state where the time saving state is set It is configured so that the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is shorter. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game during the time saving state in the state of having the special figure 1 reservation. Therefore, while various performances are being executed in the time saving state, the special figure 1 variation that makes it more difficult to win a small hit than the special figure 2 variation is performed, and the problem that the performance balance of various performances is lost. can be suppressed.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the 16th embodiment, when the special figure 1 lottery is executed during the time saving state, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery, 0.2 seconds It is configured so that the variable time is set. Then, a jackpot game end screen showing the end of the jackpot game is displayed until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses after the jackpot game ends, or until special figure 2 variation is executed. ing.

Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game, the period in which the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation) based on the special figure 1 reservation that was already acquired at the start of the jackpot game is executed (when the number of special figure 1 reservations is 4, about 1 second), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a display mode indicating the end of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to digest the special figure 1 reservation without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Also, in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game), if the jackpot is won or the small win that can pass through V is won, the jackpot game is played again from the jackpot game end screen. The game information indicating the content of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds information indicating the number of rounds executed during one jackpot game, or the number of rounds obtained during one jackpot game) The game information indicating the accumulated value with the game information of the previous jackpot game is set as the winning ball number information indicating the number of balls won, and the display mode corresponding to the set game information is displayed. ing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that a plurality of jackpot games are just one jackpot game, so that the second jackpot game (the period in which the jackpot game end screen is displayed) A variation display mode (short time (0.2 seconds) variation and variation of the third symbol that makes it difficult for the player to identify the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) corresponding to the newly executed jackpot game) No display), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In addition, since the upper limit of the value that can be displayed as the game information of one big win game can be increased, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for winning the big win. Furthermore, the 16th embodiment is configured so that the right-handed game is appropriate for both the jackpot game and the game during the time saving state, so the jackpot game ends internally and the time saving state is set. During the special figure 1 fluctuation period (during the special figure 1 fluctuation period in which the jackpot game end screen is displayed), the characters "Right shot" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the game is currently in a jackpot game or in a time-saving state, depending on the display mode of the small display area Dm4 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment is configured such that the special figure 2 reserve is preferentially digested over the special figure 1 reserve. Therefore, in the state where the time saving state is set, for example, even if the player makes a mistake in the game operation and acquires the special figure 1 reservation with the special figure 2 reservation, the special figure 1 until the special figure 2 reservation is lost Toku-zu variation based on the hold (Toku-zu 1 variation) is not executed. And, as long as the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, it is configured so that the special figure 2 reservation will not be lost. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the special figure 1 variation is unnecessarily executed during the time saving state.

In addition, in the sixteenth embodiment, as the corresponding time-saving end condition, which is part of the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the end condition that is established based on the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set. , Even if the special figure 1 variation is executed a predetermined number of times (maximum 4 times) after the end of the jackpot game, the game situation is updated until the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of variations of the special figure 1 variation. there is nothing to do.

In addition, as described above, in the sixteenth embodiment, special figure 2 variation is configured to be executed with priority over special figure 1 variation, and special figure 2 variation is executed in a state where the time saving state is set By changing the special figure 1 variation for a short time during the period when it is not done, it is configured so that the special figure 1 suspension is eliminated during the time saving state, but not limited to this, for example, special figure 1 variation is better It may be configured to be executed with priority over the FIG. 2 variation.

As the corresponding time saving end condition after the end of the jackpot game, when "special figure 2 fluctuation 1 time" is set, using the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the time saving state, the special figure 2 fluctuation The time-saving final variable performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the lottery result and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the time-saving state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 373 to 377, the contents of the effect executed during the time saving state in the 16th embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment, as the effect during the time saving state, the first time saving variation effect set corresponding to the special figure 2 variation other than the special figure final variation of the time saving state, It is configured to execute the second time-saving variation production set corresponding to the special figure 2 variation that is the final variation of the figure.

Then, the first time-saving variable performance is a variable performance for showing the lottery result of the variation, and the second time-saving variable performance is the lottery result of the variation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation. is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 373(a), the display contents of the first time reduction variation effect will be described. FIG. 373(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content in the variable effect during the time saving state. The display content shown in FIG. 373(a) is a display screen when the first special figure 2 variation is executed in the time saving state in which the time saving number of times "5 times" is set.

As shown in FIG. 373(a), in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "time saving mode" are displayed to indicate that the current time saving state is displayed, and the rabbit is displayed. An effect is executed to get one of lottery result modes 871a to 871c showing the result of the current special figure lottery while the imitated character 851 runs. In the 16th embodiment, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 386, the character 851 tries to get the lottery result modes 871a to 871c according to the variation time set during the time saving state (excluding the final time saving change). The get performance is configured to be executed a plurality of times during one variation period, and the lottery result of this special figure variation increases as the number of times of the get performance executed during one variation period increases. It is configured to increase the probability that the lottery result will be advantageous to By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the effect result of each get effect, but also to the number of executions of the get effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the small display area Dm4, the characters "Right shot" for guiding the game method during the time saving state are displayed, and in the right display area Dm20, "Last 4" indicating the period until the time saving state ends times” is displayed. In other words, it is notified that the time saving state ends when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed four times later. In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, it is configured to be able to set a plurality of time saving end conditions that are established based on the number of special figure fluctuations, but on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, among a plurality of time saving end conditions , is configured to display the remaining period until the time-saving end condition, which is most likely to be satisfied, is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, all of the time-saving end conditions that exist are displayed, and the period until all the displayed time-saving end conditions are satisfied (remaining period) is displayed. To easily inform a player of an easy time-saving end condition in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, when the ease of establishment of the time-saving end conditions overlaps, all the overlapping time-saving end conditions may be displayed, or only one of the overlapping time-saving end conditions is displayed. It may be configured to

In addition, in this embodiment, in FIG. 373 (a), as the lottery result modes 871a to 871c, the first lottery result mode 871a to which "777" indicating jackpot winning and "V" indicating small win winning are added. A second lottery result mode 871b marked with a character 851 and a third lottery result mode 871c marked with a "cross mark" indicating failure are displayed. An action that acquires the result modes 871a to 871c but cannot be acquired is performed, and an effect of finally acquiring one of the lottery result modes 871a to 871c and notifying the lottery result of the variation is executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, lottery result modes 871a and 871b indicating a lottery result that is advantageous to the player in the get effect are attached with "chance" indicating that the degree of expectation for obtaining is high. Alternatively, the character 851 executes the get effect to acquire the lottery result suggesting mode and the effect number suggesting mode with "next" indicating the remaining number of times the get effect is executed. may be configured.

With this configuration, the character 851 can perform the action of acquiring any display mode a plurality of times during one variable display effect, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the effect. be able to. In addition, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of this special figure variation in the middle stage of the special figure variation period, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 373 (a), the display mode for showing the remaining number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation as the remaining period for which the time saving state is set is displayed in the small display area Dm20. Without limitation, for example, it may display a display mode for showing the remaining time the time saving state is set based on the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation, get production executed during this time saving state A display mode for indicating the remaining number of times may be displayed. Furthermore, the number of remaining executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation at the time the time saving state is set, that is, the time saving end condition set in this time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation number) and the special figure executed during the time saving state 2 It may be configured such that a display mode indicating the number of fluctuations is displayed on the display screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 373(b), the display contents of the time saving final variation performance (second time saving variation performance) executed in the final time saving state variation will be described. FIG. 373(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed in the first half period of the time saving final variable effect. In the 16th embodiment, as a variable effect for the final time-saving change, the reserved ball acquisition effect for letting the player acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball, the lottery result of the variation, the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation, A second time-saving variation effect for informing the player of the , 25 seconds) to execute the second time-saving variation production.

When the reserved ball acquisition effect is executed in the first half period of the time saving final variation effect, as shown in FIG. ' is displayed, and an effect is executed in which allied characters gather around the character 851 in the main display area Dm. In FIG. 373(b), a state is displayed in which an ally character 851a imitating a "turtle" and an ally character 851b imitating an "elephant" are gathered. Then, in the small display area Dm20, characters "Last" are displayed in order to notify the player that the special figure variation of this time is the final variation of the time saving state.

This ally character 851 is variably displayed in association with the number of acquired special-figure 2 reserved balls, and since "2" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a, in FIG. Since it shows a state in which two reserved special figures 2 are obtained, two ally characters 851 are gathered. In the small display area Dm7, a gathering history display is displayed in the order in which the gathered ally characters 851 were gathered, and "turtle" is displayed as the first history 872a, and "elephant" is displayed as the second history 872b. .

In this small display area Dm7, a set history display is displayed, but the order displayed here is associated with the order of digestion of the special figure 2 reservation, and the friend character used in the second time-saving variation production described later Based on the type of 851 and the display order of the set history display, for example, when winning, it is configured to be able to suggest which special figure 2 reservation has won.

Then, when the number of special 2 reservations reaches the upper limit value (4 pieces) during execution of the reservation ball acquisition effect, as shown in FIG. A presentation mode is displayed. Specifically, an ally character 851c imitating a “snake” and an ally character 851d imitating a “lion” are newly added around the character 851, for a total of four ally characters 851a to 851d. A collective performance is displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm21, "snake" is displayed in the third history 872c, and "lion" is displayed in the fourth history 872d. A comment of "All members gathered!!" is displayed. As described above, during execution of the pending ball acquisition effect, the group number of teammate characters 851 is associated with the number of special 2 pending balls, so the number of special 2 pending balls is displayed in the small display area Dm2a. "4" indicating the upper limit (4) is displayed.

After that, when the first half period of the time saving final variable effect has passed and the second half period is reached, the second time saving change effect shown in FIG. 374(b) is started. FIG. 374(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content (second time saving variable effect) displayed when the second half period of the time saving final variable effect is started. As shown in FIG. 374 (b), in the second time-saving variation production, any of the ally characters acquired in the first half of the time-saving final variation production challenges the mission, and notifies the successful winning of the mission, and the mission failure. At , an effect for informing non-winning is executed. Then, the performance result of the second time-saving variable performance is configured to be set by reflecting even the foreseeing result of the special figure 2 reservation acquired at the time when the first half period of the time-shortening final variable performance has passed. .

According to the example shown in FIG. 374(b), the mission effect using the ally character 851a imitating the "turtle" is executed as the mission effect executed as the second time reduction variable effect. Here, the content of the mission effect to be executed (“Withstand Falling Rocks” in FIG. 374(b)) is configured so that a plurality of patterns can be set. And, depending on, mission success expectations are different. By configuring in this way, the player can be interested not only in the effect result of the second time reduction variable effect, but also in the effect process until the effect result is displayed.

Then, when the mission effect is successful, the mission success effect is executed as shown in FIG. 375(a). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 375 (a), the first special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 hold to be executed next), that is, the first rotation special figure 2 fluctuation after shifting to the normal state In anticipation of winning a small hit, and the result of the foreknowledge is used as the effect result of the second time reduction effect, as shown in FIG. At the change stop timing of the time saving final change being displayed, the display mode of "351" indicating that the result of this special figure 2 lottery is out is displayed in the small display area Dm2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 375(b), while the pseudo symbol "VVV" for notifying that the winning is hit in the main display area Dm is oscillatingly displayed, the special figure 2 variation that wins the small hit is displayed. A notification screen for notifying the player of the effect result of the second time reduction variable effect is displayed until the end. In addition, at the time of FIG. 375 (b), the normal state is set as the game state, and the special figure 2 is fluctuating (during the non-jackpot game, non-small hit game), so the right-handed game is actually performed. Although it is in a state where it is not possible to play an advantageous game for the player, it is a state in which a small winning game is executed immediately after, so it continues from the time saving state to guide the right-handed game. A display is displayed in the small display area Dm4. As a result, the game can be played smoothly without requiring the player to change the shooting direction of the ball.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation based on the winning information stored in the first special figure 2 reservation is stopped and displayed at the time when the second time saving variation production is executed, it is shown in FIG. 376 (a) As described above, the display mode for displaying the small win to the player is displayed, and in the main display area Dm, the third symbol "777" for indicating the small win type set in the current small win. It is displayed in the display mode.

On the other hand, when the failure effect is set as the effect result of the mission effect described above with reference to FIG. ), the mission failure effect shown in FIG. 376 (b) is displayed, and then the time saving state end screen shown in FIG. is displayed.

Although the details will be described later, at the timing when the first half of the time saving final fluctuation production ends, the special figure 2 suspension has not reached the upper limit, and since the second time saving fluctuation production has started (second time saving After the production result of the fluctuation production is set), if you acquire a new special figure 2 reservation, after the final fluctuation of the time saving, at the first special figure 2 fluctuation start timing in the normal state, the newly acquired special Prefetching processing is executed for FIG. An effect is executed in which a small winning winning screen (see FIG. 376(a)) is suddenly displayed from the screen.

Next, referring to FIG. 378, the configuration of the counter buffer in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. 378 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. As shown in FIG. 378, in the sixteenth embodiment, a stop type counter C3 is added to the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) in the first embodiment described above, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb, and a stop type selection counter storage area for storing the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 In order to store the second winning type counter storage area for storing the value of the second winning type counter C6 and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 in the point that the storage area is provided and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc. 2. The second variation type counter storage area is provided, and the special symbol holding ball execution area and normal symbol holding ball execution area are changed in correspondence with the counter value stored in each holding ball storage area. , are different. Since other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low-probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. table for is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing of the main controller in this embodiment), and the normal pattern is reserved in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is stored in the ball storage area 203lc. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the hit of the normal symbol is defined in the normal symbol per random number 16 table 202lc (see FIG. 380(d)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 . When the value of the second winning random number counter C4 coincides with the value of the random number to be a winning normal pattern defined in the random number 16 per normal symbol table 2021c, it is determined as winning a normal symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 380(d), the random number 16 table per normal symbol 202lc will be described. The normal symbol per random number 16 table 202lc is a table in which random numbers (determined values) determined to be hit in each game state (normal symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) are set in the normal symbol lottery. is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 380(d), when the game state is a normal symbol low probability state (normal state), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the normal symbol lottery is within the range of "5 to 28", and if within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a hit. In addition, when the game state is a normal pattern high probability state (time saving state), in the normal pattern lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204". Then, if it is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal figure.

In other words, in the 16th embodiment, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal design, it is elected with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal design, with a probability of 5/6 It is configured to be elected by chance. And, although the detailed explanation will be described later, during the normal state, the ball enters the second winning hole 640 as a game per normal pattern with a probability of 1/100 when winning the normal pattern (per normal pattern). It is constructed so that an easy long opening winning game is executed. In addition, during the time saving state, it is constructed so that a long open winning game is always executed when winning a normal game.

By configuring in this way, even in the normal state, it is possible to execute a winning game that allows the ball to enter the second winning port 640 with a probability of 1/1000. To simultaneously execute a game for executing a special figure 1 lottery and a game for executing a special figure 2 lottery (a game aiming for a specific win in a normal figure lottery) for a player who is playing can be done.

The second variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). By the second variation type counter CS2, one normal pattern variation pattern is determined from the set normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202lf. In this normal figure fluctuation pattern, fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 403) of main controller 110 is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, from the value (random value) of the second variation type counter CS2, the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202lf (see FIG. 384) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of normal symbol variation is provided in the ROM 202 of the

Returning to FIG. 378, the description continues. In the 16th embodiment, a variable type counter storage area is provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb, and the winning information stored in the reserved storage is stored in advance (special symbol fluctuation (before), the actually executed variation pattern (variation time) can be read ahead. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to determine the timing at which the special figure variation corresponding to the reserved and stored special symbol winning information is executed.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, the normal symbol winning information, that is, as the type of each counter value acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the first per random number counter used for the normal symbol winning lottery C2, the second variation type counter CS2 used when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and used when setting the type of the winning game per normal symbol.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 379(a), the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixteenth embodiment. The ROM 202 contains a first hit random number 16 table 202la, a first hit type selection 16 table 202lb, a normal pattern per random number 16 table 202lc, a variation pattern 16 table 202le, a small hit type selection 16 table 202lg, and a big hit scenario. There are provided at least 16 tables 202lh, small winning scenario 16 tables 202li, normal pattern per type selection 16 tables 202ld, and normal pattern variation pattern selection tables 202lf.

The first winning random number 16 table 202la is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

First, referring to FIG. 380, the contents defined in the first winning random number 16 table 202la will be described. FIG. 380(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 16 table 202la. As shown in FIG. 380(a), the first random number 16 table 202la is a special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 that is referred to during the winning lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 that is referred to when executing the winning lottery of (special figure 2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 380(b), the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 will be described. FIG. 380(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1. As shown in FIG. 380(b), a "big win" is defined when the value of the first random number counter C1 ranges from "0 to 3", and a "minor win" is defined when the value is "10, 11". That is, in the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the special drawing 1 lottery is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small win is 1/500.

Next, with reference to FIG. 380(c), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 will be described. FIG. 380(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2. As shown in FIG. 380(c), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 defines a "big win" in the range of "0 to 3" and a "minor win" in the range of "10 to 149". That is, in the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the lottery of the special figure 2 is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small win is about 1/7.1.

That is, in the 16th embodiment, the same big hit probability is set for the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, and the small probability is higher for the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, in the 16th embodiment, since it is configured so that the small winning can be the execution trigger of the big winning game, the special figure 2 lottery is more likely to execute the big winning game than the special figure 1 lottery. It will be a drawing lottery.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, as described above, the same jackpot probability is set in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, but not limited to this, the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 A different jackpot probability may be set for the lottery. In addition, although the big win probability and the small win probability are set to a constant value regardless of the game state, it is not limited to this, and according to the game state, the high probability state ( A special symbol high probability state) and a lower low probability state (special symbol low probability state) may be set.

The first winning type selection 16 table 202lb determines the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1, which is a data table for determining the type of the jackpot game for the first special symbol, and the type of the jackpot game for the second special symbol. A special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2, which is a data table for doing, is set respectively.

First, with reference to FIG. 381(a), the contents of the first win type selection 16 table 202lb will be described. FIG. 381(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first win type selection 16 table 202lb. As shown in FIG. 381 (a), the first hit type selection 16 table 202lb includes a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1 and a special figure 2 lottery that are referred to when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery. It has a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2 that is referred to when a jackpot is won.

Here, with reference to FIG. 381(b), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1 will be described. FIG. 381(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1. The pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment is set so that three types of jackpot AA to jackpot AC are selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2 when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery. there is Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is set to "0", "jackpot AA (15R short time 99 times jackpot)" is defined as the jackpot type, and "jackpot AB (7R time-saving 5 times jackpot)” is defined, and “jackpot AC (7R time-saving 1 time jackpot)” is defined in the range of “16 to 99”.

In other words, in the normal state in which the left-handed game is performed and the special figure 1 lottery is executed, if the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the time saving state is always set (given) after the jackpot game ends. there is And according to the set jackpot classification, it is comprised so that the end conditions of a time saving state may be changed and set.

Specifically, when the jackpot AA is set as the jackpot type, only the common time-saving end conditions described above are set, so the special lottery wins (jackpot or small hit), or the special figure fluctuation (Total of Toku-zu 1 variation and Toku-zu 2 variation) The time saving state continues until it reaches 99 times. In the 16th embodiment, a right-handed game that executes the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state is performed, and in the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/250, and the probability of winning the small win is 1/ Because it is set to 7.1, for example, when a time-saving state based on a jackpot AA is set, the special figure fluctuation is a predetermined number of times (99 times) without winning the special figure 2 lottery. The probability of reaching is 0.01% or less. Therefore, when the jackpot AA is selected, substantially, it becomes a game state in which the time saving state is set until the next jackpot game is executed.

Next, when the jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the common time-saving end conditions described above, as the corresponding time-saving end conditions, "the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation is 5 times" is set. Therefore, the probability that the special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (5 times) without winning the special figure 2 lottery (probability that the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is about 46%. . In other words, when the jackpot AB is set, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation number 5 times is set as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning the winning before the time saving end condition is satisfied (continuous chance probability) about 54%.

Also, when the jackpot AC is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the common time saving end conditions described above, "the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation is 1 time" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special figure variation reaches a predetermined number of times (once) without winning the special figure 2 lottery (probability that the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is 85%. In other words, when the jackpot AC is set, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation number of times is set as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning the winning before the time saving end condition is satisfied (continuous chance probability) about 15%.

As described above, according to the type of jackpot set when the jackpot is won in special figure 1, the degree of advantage of the set time saving state (consecutive chance probability) is configured to be different, and the jackpot AA is the most advantageous jackpot type, then jackpot AB is the most advantageous jackpot type, and jackpot AC is the most unfavorable jackpot type.

In addition, the number of round games to be executed as jackpot games also has different values depending on the type of jackpot. stipulated in The larger the number of round games in one jackpot game, the larger the number of balls (the number of prize balls) that the player can acquire. It becomes an advantageous jackpot type.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, the jackpot type (jackpot AA) with the highest consecutive chance probability is configured to execute the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds (15R), but it is not limited to this, The jackpot type with the highest consecutive chance probability and the jackpot type in which the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds is executed may be different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the most advantageous game state according to the game situation. For example, if the jackpot is won just before the game hall closes, the jackpot type that allows you to win more prize balls in one jackpot game than the jackpot type that gives (sets) a time-saving state with a high probability of consecutive chances. is a more advantageous jackpot type, and if the pachinko machine 10 has a limit value (limit) for the number of times the time saving state is set across the jackpot games, one jackpot game is played in the jackpot election immediately before reaching the limit. A jackpot type that can acquire a large number of prize balls is a more advantageous jackpot type. On the other hand, for example, when the number of consecutive chances (the number of times the jackpot game is executed without ever shifting to the normal state) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the player receives a privilege (for example, a valuable In the pachinko machine 10 capable of providing the image), a jackpot type in which a time-saving state with a high consecutive chance probability is given (set) is a more advantageous jackpot type for a player who wants to obtain a privilege.

In addition, the above-mentioned consecutive chance probability indicates the probability of winning a winning lottery based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, but in the 16th embodiment, the special figure 2 lottery is (4 pieces) is configured to be able to be reserved and stored. Therefore, even after the time-saving end condition is satisfied and the transition to the normal state is performed, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed by the number of special figure 2 reservations that are reserved and stored (number of remaining special figure 2 reservations). It is configured so that it is possible to aim for a small winning by special figure 2 lottery. As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit by the special figure 2 lottery is set to a high probability of about 1/7.1, so the number of remaining special figures 2 pending (up to 4) By the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the number of times, it is possible to sufficiently aim for small winning.

Specifically, when the number of remaining special figures 2 reserved is 1, the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 reservation (return probability) is about 14%, and the remaining special figure If the number of 2 holds is 2, the pull-back probability is about 28.5%, and if the number of remaining special figures 2 holds is 3, the pull-back probability is about 39.6%, and the number of remaining special figures 2 holding balls is 4, the pullback probability is about 49%.

In this way, the special figure 2 lottery can be held and stored, and the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 reservation is executed even after the shift from the time saving state to the normal state, Regardless of the special figure 2 lottery result during the time saving state, it is possible to motivate the game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation until the end of the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Also, once the time saving state is set, the game period during the time saving state described above (continuous chance period) and the period during which the special figure 2 lottery is executed based on the remaining special figure 2 hold in the normal state (pull back Period) and, in two periods, it is possible to aim for a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery, so even though the time saving state is set, the special figure is never executed. It is possible to reduce the probability of shifting to the normal state aiming at one lottery, and to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and a big win game (ream chan big win game) is executed based on the small win during the normal state. It is configured to make it easier to set a time-saving state advantageous to the player when a small win is won in a special figure 2 lottery and a big win game (pull-back big win game) is executed based on the winning of the small win. . As a result, the player can play the game while expecting to win a small prize during the pull-back period even after the period of successive chances has passed, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 381(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2 will be described. FIG. 381(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery, three types from jackpot AD to jackpot AF are selected by the value of the first win type counter C2. there is Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, and “jackpot AD (15R short time 99 times jackpot)” is defined as the jackpot type, and the range of “20 to 69” “Jackpot AE (12R short time 99 times big hit)” is defined in “70 to 99”, and “jackpot AF (7R short time 99 times big hit)” is defined.

In other words, when a big win is won by the special figure 2 lottery, an advantageous game state is set so that the time saving state continues until the special figure fluctuation reaches 99 times without fail after the end of the big win game. As a result, in the special figure 2 lottery whose execution frequency is lower than that of the special figure 1 lottery, when a big win set at a probability three times or more lower than the probability of winning a small win is won, it is advantageous to the player. A game state can be reliably provided. Therefore, for a player who has a special experience with a low occurrence frequency of winning a jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery, a game that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a setting of one time reduction) is set, and the motivation to play is set. It is possible to suppress a significant decrease.

In addition, each jackpot type specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2 is also executed during one jackpot game according to the jackpot type, like the above-described special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1. The number of round games to be played is different, and it is stipulated that a round game of "15R" for the jackpot AD, "12R" for the jackpot AE, and "7R" for the jackpot AF is performed. Since the number of balls (the number of prize balls) that the player can obtain increases as the number of round games in one jackpot game increases, the jackpot AD is most advantageous to the player in terms of the jackpot game to be executed. It will be a big hit type.

Next, referring to FIG. 380(d), the contents of the normal 16 per symbol random number table 202lc will be described. FIG. 380(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal 16 per symbol random number table 202lc.

As shown in FIG. 380(d), the normal per symbol random number 16 table 202lc includes values to be referred to when executing the lottery per normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and normal in the high probability state of the normal symbol. A value to be referred to when executing a lottery per figure is defined, and specifically, in a low probability state of normal symbols, the value of the second random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28". "Hit" is defined, and in the high-probability state of normal symbols, "hit" is defined in the range of "5 to 204" for the value of the second winning random number counter C4.

The normal pattern per type selection 16 table 202ld is a data table for selecting the normal per pattern type, and when the normal pattern (normal pattern) lottery is executed with reference to the normal per pattern random number 16 table 202lc and the winning is won. is referred to. In the 16th embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is set so that the ball can win the second winning hole 640 as a normal pattern winning game that is executed when the normal pattern is won in the low probability state of the normal pattern. A long opening winning game in which an opening operation is performed and a short opening winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened so as to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 than in the long opening winning game can be executed. Then, different winning games are executed according to the type of normal pattern selected at the time of winning the normal pattern.

Here, with reference to FIG. 382, the contents defined in the per normal pattern type selection 16 table 202ld will be described. FIG. 382(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the per-universal figure type selection 16 table 202ld. As shown in FIG. 382 (a), per normal pattern type selection 16 table 202ld, according to the probability state of the normal pattern and the value of the second per type counter C6 obtained, two types per normal pattern ( It is configured so that A per normal pattern and B per normal pattern are selected.

Specifically, the probability state of the normal pattern is a low probability state (normal pattern low probability), and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6 is defined as "0" and "per normal pattern A", " 1 to 99” is defined as “per normal figure B”. In addition, the probability state of the normal pattern is a high probability state (high probability of normal pattern), and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6 is defined as "per normal pattern A" in the range of "0, 1", "B" is defined in the range of "2 to 99".

Next, the relationship between the general pattern per type selected in the general pattern per type selection 16 table 202ld and the game state at the time when the general pattern per game is executed, with reference to FIG. 382 (b). do. FIG. 382(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening operation contents of the electric accessary 640a based on the normal figure winning type and the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, the normal pattern (normal pattern) winning lottery is executed according to the game state set at the timing (normal pattern fluctuation start timing). When winning, it is configured to set the game content per normal pattern according to the game state set at the timing of executing the game per normal pattern (timing to stop fluctuation of normal pattern). That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, since the game state is configured to shift according to the special symbol (special figure) lottery situation and fluctuation situation, the special figure lottery game is independent In the general pattern lottery game to be executed, different game states are set at the timing of executing the general pattern lottery and the timing of executing the general pattern winning game executed when winning in the general pattern lottery. I have a case.

For example, if the general pattern lottery is executed during the special figure fluctuation (shortening final fluctuation) in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal pattern of the random number 16 table 202lc per normal pattern (normal pattern high A winning lottery is executed using the judgment value specified in the definite). And, when it hits and is elected, after the lapse of a predetermined normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds), the normal pattern fluctuation is stopped, and then the normal pattern per game is executed. Here, when the time saving final variation ends during the normal figure fluctuation and the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, the normal state is set as the game state at the timing when the game per normal figure is executed It will be.

In such a case, if you set the game mode of the normal figure per game according to the game state that is set at the time the normal figure lottery is executed, even though the normal state is set, There is a problem that a normal game per game (long open per game) executed during the time saving state as a normal game per game is executed, and an excessively advantageous privilege (special figure 2 lottery) is provided to the player. there were.

On the other hand, in the sixteenth embodiment, the game state that is set at the timing of executing the game per normal pattern is determined, and the content of the game per normal pattern is set based on the determination result, As in the above-described example, when the game state shifts to the normal state during the normal pattern fluctuation, it is possible to execute the normal pattern per game corresponding to the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (special figure 2 lottery).

Specifically, when per normal pattern A is selected (set) as the type per normal pattern, the game state set to the execution timing of the game per normal pattern (at the time of opening operation of electric auditors 640a) Regardless, the game per normal figure long opening is executed. On the other hand, when the normal pattern per B is selected (set) as the normal pattern per type, the game state set at the execution timing of the normal pattern per game (during the opening operation of the electric auditors 640a) is the normal symbol. If it is a low probability state (normal pattern low probability), normal pattern short open per game, if the normal pattern high probability state (normal pattern high probability), normal pattern long open per game is executed is defined as

Here, the per game per normal pattern long open per game and the normal pattern short open per game, which is the normal per pattern game, will be described for the contents of the per game. The normal pattern long open per game is a normal pattern per game that opens the electric accessory 640a for a long period of time so that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 (positioned in an open state). After a second closed state (opening period), the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second (first open period), and then opened again for 0.5 second after a closed state (waiting period) of 1.5 seconds. (Second open period) per normal game is executed. The flow of this opening operation is defined in a normal pattern per scenario (not shown), and when executing a normal pattern per game, a normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the normal pattern per type and game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the scenario per normal pattern in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the flow of the above-described per normal pattern game.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, when the game per normal long open is executed, two open periods are set so as to secure a period in which the ball can win the second winning opening 640 are doing. Then, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second winning port 640 when the first opening period has passed among the two opening periods, and the determination result indicates that the ball has not won the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加When it is determined, a warning screen (see FIG. 370(a)) for calling attention to the player to play a game of winning a ball in the second winning hole 640 is displayed. there is

By configuring in this way, in the state in which the normal state is set (the state in which the left-handed game is performed), the player who does not notice that the normal figure long open per game (right-handed game) has been executed In response to this, it is possible to perform notification for executing a right-handed game again, and to suppress the game result that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, in the sixteenth embodiment, after the warning screen (see FIG. 370(a)) is displayed and a waiting period of a predetermined period (1.5 seconds) passes, the second opening operation (0.5 seconds) is performed. configured to run.

This waiting period (1.5 seconds) is set to be longer than the time (about 0.5 seconds) required for the ball shot by the player to reach the second winning hole 640. It is As a result, it is possible for a player who executes a right-handed game after viewing the caution screen (see FIG. 370(a)) to easily win the ball into the second winning hole 640 .

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, when the normal pattern per scenario is updated with the passage of time and the scenario indicating the end is reached, the normal pattern per game is ended, and the normal pattern per game is the second winning during the normal pattern per game. Two types of normal pattern per end conditions are set in the case of ending the normal pattern per game when the number of balls that have won into the mouth 640 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1 piece).

Then, when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640 during the first opening period and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640 during the second opening period, the ball wins the second prize winning port 640. It is configured so that the notification modes for indicating that the event has occurred are different. Specifically, when the ball wins the second winning hole 640 during the second opening period, there is a high possibility that a proper game (right-handed game) is not being executed from the start stage of the game per normal pattern. , It is configured to display a game explanation (comment such as "Be sure to hit the right during the game per normal long open game") so that an appropriate game can be played at the time of the next normal pattern per game. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the above-mentioned game explanation is not notified to the player who has won the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the first opening period, the game content that the player has already grasped is repeatedly notified, and the game is not played. It is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation.

On the other hand, in the general pattern short opening per game, the general pattern per game that opens the electric accessory 640a for 0.1 seconds after the closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds is executed. The flow of this opening operation is defined in a normal pattern per scenario (not shown), and when executing a normal pattern per game, a normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the normal pattern per type and game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the scenario per normal pattern in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the flow of the above-described per normal pattern game.

Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is as short as 0.1 seconds, the above-mentioned normal pattern short opening winning game is a normal pattern winning game in which the ball can not be substantially won into the second winning hole 640. . In addition, this general pattern short open per game is, as shown in FIG. As the normal pattern short opening per game is started 0.2 seconds after the normal pattern per game ends, the normal pattern short opening per game is executed in a state where the player is executing the left-handed game , Even if a right-handed game is performed, the normal game will be completed before the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (0.5 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 during the game per normal short open.

In addition, the electric accessory 640a may be configured so that the ball cannot enter the second winning hole 640 during the normal short open game. In the open state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is configured so that the ball can flow down from one end side to the other end side, and only the ball flowing out from the other end side of the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a can win. The second prize winning port 640 is arranged at the position, and the period during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is preferably 0.5 seconds at the shortest. By configuring in this way, when a game per normal short open is executed, the ball that flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a during the period (0.1 seconds) in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state cannot reach the other end side, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, the winning game content of the normal pattern per game is set according to the game state set at the timing at which the normal pattern per game is executed. Therefore, even if you win per normal pattern in a short time state (high probability state) that wins per normal pattern with a high probability, the game per normal pattern based on winning per normal pattern is normal state (low probability normal pattern) state), it is possible to make it difficult to execute the game per normal pattern long open.

It should be noted that, as shown in Figure 382 (a), in the sixteenth embodiment, regardless of the game state, per normal pattern long open per game per normal pattern per type (per normal pattern A) is selected rate is different between the low probability state of normal patterns (low probability of normal patterns) and the high probability state of high probability of normal patterns (high probability of normal patterns). It is configured to be selected with a probability of 2% at the time of probability. By configuring in this way, it is elected per the general pattern at the time of the low probability, and the general pattern is elected at the time of the high probability, compared to the case where the game per the general pattern is executed at the low probability of the general pattern. When the normal pattern per game is executed at the normal pattern low probability, the probability of executing the normal pattern long open per game at the normal pattern low probability can be increased. Therefore, even when using the configuration for setting the game contents of the game per normal pattern according to the game state at the timing when the game per normal pattern is executed, it is executed when the time saving state shifts to the normal state It is possible to increase the probability that the normal pattern per game will be the normal pattern long open per game, and allow the player to pay attention to which game content the normal pattern per game is executed.

The variation pattern 16 table 202le is a data table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and includes the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol lottery ( Various variation patterns (variation time) are configured to be selected based on the lottery result of special figure lottery) and the set game state. In addition, since the basic technical idea of the variation pattern 16 table 202le is the same as that of each of the above-described embodiments or various variation patterns used in each embodiment, detailed description is omitted. The description will continue focusing on the characteristic contents of the 16 variation pattern table 202le used in the embodiment.

Here, the contents of the 16 variation pattern table 202le will be described with reference to FIG. 385(a). FIG. 385(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the 16 variation pattern table 202le. As shown in Figure 385 (a), the variation pattern 16 table 202le is referred to when the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1 is referred to when the game state is the normal state, and when the game state is the time saving state. It has a time saving variation pattern 16 table 202le2, and a special symbol variation pattern is selected using a data table corresponding to a game state set when selecting a special symbol variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 385(b), the contents of the normal 16 variation pattern table 202le1 included in the 16 variation pattern table 202le will be described. FIG. 385(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1. As shown in FIG. 385(b), the variation pattern 16 table 202le includes the symbol type of the special symbol, the number of special symbol variations after the normal state is set, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the acquired variation type counter. Different variation patterns are defined depending on the value of CS1.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the normal state is set as the game state, the special figure 1 lottery is mainly executed, and the second special symbol ( The pattern in which the special figure 2) lottery is executed is the pattern in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed according to the special figure 2 hold stored at the end of the time saving state, and the long open in the normal figure lottery. There is a pattern in which a special figure 2 lottery is executed based on winning a ball in a second winning port 640 during a long open winning game.

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, as a variation effect corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state, the prefetch result of the special figure 2 hold stored at the time of the start of the time saving final variation can be notified. It consists of Then, the performance result of the time saving final variation performance is configured to be continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation executed (to the normal state) after the time saving state ends.

The variation pattern 16 table 202le corresponds to the special figure 2 lottery performed between 1 to 4 special figure variations as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation performed during the normal state. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be a special fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, when the first special symbol variation after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 variation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is "off", the acquired variation type counter CS1 "Short win A (0.5 seconds)" is selected regardless of the value of , and "Short win A (2 seconds)" is selected in the case of "win (big win, small win)". Also, if the second special symbol variation after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 variation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is "off", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, "Short out A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "Hit", "Short hit B (1.5 seconds)" is selected, special symbol fluctuation after the normal state is set If the third time is the special figure 2 fluctuation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation is "off", regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 "short off A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "win", "short win C (1 second)" is selected. Then, if the fourth special symbol variation after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 variation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is "off", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, "short miss A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "hit", "short hit D (0.5 seconds)" is selected.

By configuring in this way, when the number of special 2 reservations is the maximum number (4) when the time saving state ends, the special 2 lottery corresponding to the special 2 reservation is hit (small hit , jackpot) (the period during which the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the winning), and the lottery results of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold are all It is possible to unify the period until it is out and the period to two seconds.

Therefore, for example, even if there is winning information that will be a hit in the special figure 2 reservation, even if there is no winning information, just by controlling to display the result for 2 seconds after the end of the time saving final variation, the player feels uncomfortable. Special Figure 2 variation during normal state can be performed without granting. Also, no matter how many special figures 2 are held and won, it is possible to unify the timing at which the identification information indicating the winning is stopped and displayed (2 seconds after the normal state is set). Since it is possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many special figure 2 reservations have been won.

Also, as shown in FIG. 385 (b), as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state, if the number of special symbol fluctuations is "5 times or more", the number of special figures 2 pending at the time the time saving state ends Since it exceeds, the normal figure long open per game is executed in the normal state, and since it is a special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning of the ball in the second winning port 640, the above-mentioned series of effects A variation pattern (variation (10 seconds)) for properly executing is selected, and based on the selected variation pattern, a display mode for indicating that the current is a special figure 2 variation period in a series of productions ( production mode) is set.

Next, the contents of the time saving variation pattern 16 table 222ee2 referred to when the time saving state is set will be described. Figure 386 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the fluctuation pattern of the special figure lottery executed when the time saving state is set.

In the 16th embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the special figure 2 lottery, which tends to be a lottery result advantageous to the player for the special figure 1 lottery, is more likely to be executed than the normal state, so the time saving state When set, a right-handed game for executing the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 361, the game board 13 is configured such that when a right-handed game is played, it is difficult for the ball to enter the first winning port 64 that triggers the execution of the special figure 1 lottery. Therefore, the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state in which the right-handed game is executed is a special figure executed based on the special figure 1 reservation already acquired at the jackpot game end timing when the time saving state is set 1 will be a lottery.

Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the state where the normal state is set, and the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (time-saving initial setting state), the ball wins in the second winning port 640. Since the easy game is not played, the special figure 2 reservation cannot be acquired, and when there is the special figure 1 reservation at that time, the special figure 1 lottery is executed.

In this case, as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the time saving initial setting state, a long time (for example, 60 seconds) variation time If it is set, there is a problem that the special figure 2 variation cannot be executed until the special figure 1 variation ends, and the game in the time saving state cannot be smoothly performed.

In contrast, in the sixteenth embodiment, a short time (0.2 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure 1 variation executed during the time saving state. As a result, even if the time saving state is set in a state where the maximum number (four) of the special figure 1 reservation is secured, the special figure 1 variation can be executed without hindering the special figure 2 variation.

Further, in the sixteenth embodiment, the end screen of the jackpot game is configured to be continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation is executed even after the jackpot game is finished. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special figure 1 fluctuation is fluctuating in a short time during the time saving state. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state is a big win, the continuously displayed end screen of the big win game is shifted to the big win game screen.

Normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202lf is a data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation), and the game state at the time of executing normal pattern variation, Based on the lottery result of normal figure fluctuation and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 obtained, different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) are configured to be selected.

Here, with reference to FIG. 384, the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202lf will be described. FIG. 384 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202lf. As shown in FIG. 384, in the 16th embodiment, as the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation, short fluctuation (2 seconds) in which a short fluctuation time is set and long fluctuation in which a longer fluctuation time than short fluctuation is set (30 seconds to 60 seconds) is configured to be selected.

And, when the long fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation, the normal pattern fluctuation production is configured to be executed. In addition, in the 16th embodiment, only during the period in which the normal state is set in which it is difficult to win per normal long open, the normal change effect is executed to suggest that the normal long open is won. Therefore, long variation (30 to 60 seconds) is specified only in the data table referred to during the normal state.

Specifically, if the game state at the time the normal pattern fluctuation is executed is a normal state (normal pattern low probability state), and the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "per normal pattern A", The value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0 to 499" in the range of "Normal long fluctuation A (30 seconds)", and in the range of "500 to 999" "Normal long fluctuation B (60 seconds)" are defined respectively, and if the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "per normal pattern B", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 999", "normal pattern short fluctuation A (2 seconds)” is defined. Also, if the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "out", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 996", "normal pattern short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" 997, 998” and “Normal long fluctuation A (30 seconds)” are defined in “999” and “Normal long fluctuation B (60 seconds)”, respectively. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed is a time saving state (normal pattern high probability state), regardless of the lottery result of normal pattern fluctuation and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, "Normal figure short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is defined.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the lottery result of normal pattern fluctuation is "per normal pattern A", that is, per normal pattern long open, normal pattern long fluctuation as normal pattern fluctuation time It is designed to be easily selected. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to be elected per normal pattern long opening by executing the normal pattern fluctuation effect. In addition, it is configured so that a different variation time (30 seconds or 60 seconds) can be selected as the long variation in which the normal pattern variation effect is executed. As a result, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period from the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation effect to the start of the normal pattern long open game, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation effect is started It is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which the shooting of the ball is stopped and the shooting of the ball is restarted after waiting for a specific period of time (for example, 60 seconds) to elapse.

Also, although it is slight, even if the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is out, it is configured so that the normal pattern long fluctuation is selected, so even if the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed, the normal pattern It is possible to leave the possibility of not winning per Figure Long open. Therefore, the player can be entertained with the normal pattern variation effect to the end.

It should be noted that, in the 16th embodiment, it is configured so that long variation (30 seconds or 60 seconds) is always selected when winning the "normal pattern per A" that will be the normal pattern long open per. , Not limited to this, for example, in some cases when winning "A per normal figure", "short fluctuation" or "middle fluctuation (10 to 15 second) may be configured to be selectable.And, when a variation pattern other than "long variation" is selected, it is preferable to configure so that the normal figure variation effect is not executed.

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute the normal pattern long open per game without executing the normal pattern fluctuation effect, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player, It is possible to predict the execution timing of the game per normal pattern long open, and make it difficult to perform the game of shooting the ball in accordance with the predicted timing.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, when the lottery result of normal figure fluctuation is "per normal figure B" in which "per normal figure short game" is executed as a game per normal figure, "long fluctuation" is Although it is configured not to be executed, it is not limited to this and may be configured so that "long fluctuation" is selected.

The small hit type selection 16 table 202lg is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small hit type that is set when the small hit is won in the special drawing lottery.

Here, with reference to FIG. 383, the small hit type selection 16 table 202lg will be described. Figure 383 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small per type selection 16 table 202lg, Figure 383 (b) is a schematic representation of the contents defined in the special figure 1 small per type selection 16 table 202lg1 FIG. 383(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 small per type selection 16 table 202lg2.

As the small winning type of the first special symbol, three types of small winning AA, small winning AB and small winning AC are set so as to be selected by the value of the small winning type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 39", the small hit type is "small hit AA (7R time short 5 times big hit when passing V)" becomes. That is, a value of "0 to 39" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of "40 to 49" is "small hit AB (7R short time 9 times big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "40 to 49" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. And, when the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is any one of "50 to 99", the small hit type becomes "small hit AC (no 2R time saving when passing V)". That is, the value of "50 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small winning AA and the small winning AB, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 650 in the small winning game, the type of the big winning game to be executed after that is set. Also, the small win AC is a small win in which the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 650 in the small win game. In the case of the small win AA, a 7R time-saving 5-time big win is set, and after the execution of the small win AA, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state to execute a big win, and then 5 times as a time-saving game state. Time-saving game (a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed five times and stopped and displayed) is set. In addition, in the case of the small winning AB, a 7R time-saving 99-time big winning is set, and after the execution of the small winning AB, a large winning game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 7R open state, and after the big winning game. , 5 times of time-saving game (a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 5 times and stopped and displayed) is set.

Then, in the case of the small win AC, a 2R time-saving no big win is set, and after the execution of the small win AC, a big win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 2R open state, and after the big win game, The time-saving game state is not set, and the normal game state is set. In this way, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the same as the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game, but the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is 99 times, which is the largest compared to other small hit types. Since the period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 99 times and is stopped and displayed) is set, it is set so as to provide the most advantageous small win for the player. In the small winning AA, the number of rounds to be executed in the big winning game is the same as the number of rounds to be executed in the small winning AB, but 5 times (variation of the special symbol is executed 5 times as a time saving game state after the big winning game is completed) Since the period until the stop display is set, the small win is disadvantageous to the player when compared with the small win AB. In addition, the small win AC is the most disadvantageous to the player because the number of rounds in the big win game is two rounds, and the normal game state is set instead of the time-saving game state as the game state after the end of the big win game. It will be a small hit type.

FIG. 383(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small per type selection 16 table 202lb2. As the small hit type of the second special symbol, two types of the above-described small hit AD and small hit AE are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is either "0 to 9" is "small hit AD (15R short time 99 times jackpot when passing V)”. That is, the value of "0 to 9" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of "10 to 99" is "small hit AE (7R short time 5 times big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "10 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Also, when the game state is the normal game state, the small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 39" is "small hit AD (V passage Time 15R short time 99 times jackpot)”. That is, a value of "0 to 39" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. In addition, when the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is any one of "140 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit AE (7R time short 5 times big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "40 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small winning AD and the small winning AE, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 650 in the small winning game, the type of the big winning game to be executed after that is set. In the case of the small winning AD, a 15R time-saving 99-time big winning is set, and after the execution of the small winning AD, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state to execute a big winning, and then 99 as a time-saving game state. It is configured to set a time-saving game (a period from when the variation of the special symbol is executed 99 times until it is stopped and displayed). In addition, in the case of the small winning AE, a 7R time-saving 5 times big winning is set, and after the execution of the small winning AE, a big winning game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 7R open state, and then the variable winning. A jackpot is executed in which the device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and then five times of time-saving games (a period from five times of special symbol variations to being stopped and displayed) are set as a time-saving game state. It is configured.

In this way, with respect to the small winning type for the second special symbol, when the V winning opening 650 is won more than the small winning type for the first special symbol, the small winning in which the time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set. The percentage of types selected is set high. As a result, when the time-saving gaming state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed, and the probability of being determined as a small hit is set higher than the lottery for the first special symbol. It is determined as a small win, and winning the V winning opening 650 makes it easy to execute the big win game in which the time-saving game state is set again. As a result, while the time-saving game state is continued, the jackpot game can be given to the player, and the value of the time-saving game state can be further increased.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be a small hit and the fluctuation display stops, the LED corresponding to the small hit type of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed. is configured as follows. Therefore, when the player is in the time-saving game, the player wants to play the game so that a more advantageous jackpot game (jackpot game in which the time-saving game state is set) is executed by effectively using the remaining time-saving number of times. . Then, the small winning game type displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is discriminated, and only when it is the small winning type to which the time-saving game state is not given, the shooting of the game ball is stopped to enter the V ball entrance 650a. There is a possibility that a game method that is disadvantageous to the game parlor side, in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter the game, is executed. However, in this embodiment, the V winning door 650b is set to the open state for 1.6 seconds 0.1 seconds after the variable display determined as the small hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the configuration of this embodiment, which takes 2 seconds to reach the V ball entrance 650a, the game ball is fired after confirming the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, it is difficult to enter the ball into the V entrance 650a, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits, the fluctuation stops, and the third symbol display device 81 announces hitting to the right. It seems difficult to enter the game ball into the V ball opening 600a in the small winning game in all the small winning types unless the game is played by immediately launching the game ball to the right side area when it is executed. is configured to As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game method that is extremely disadvantageous to the game parlor.

The jackpot scenario 16 table 202lh is a data table that defines a jackpot scenario in which operation details during the jackpot game are set. period until it is done), round period (maximum period in which 1 round round game is set), inter-round interval period (period from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game) are the jackpot types It is defined in correspondence with

The small winning scenario 16 table 202li is a data table in which a small winning scenario in which the operation contents during the small winning game are set is set.

The 16 jackpot scenario table 202lh and the 16 jackpot scenario table 202li are different from the jackpot scenario table 202aa and the small jackpot scenario table 202ab in the above-described A1 embodiment, and the content defined in each scenario is changed to the 16th The only difference is that it corresponds to the content of the big winning game or the small winning game executed in the embodiment, and the other is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 379(b). The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the 16th embodiment includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 2031b. Symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203le, normal symbol pending ball number counter 203lf, time saving medium counter 203lg, jackpot start flag 203lh, jackpot middle flag 203li, small hit start flag 203lj, small hit medium flag 203lk, V passing ground jackpot type value 203lm , V flag 203ln, and other memory area 203lz.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG. , the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type counter C5 obtained based on winning the first ball entrance 64 are stored. .

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 2031a only in that the counter values obtained for the winning to the second winning opening 640 are stored. are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is a variable display (first It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the three-symbol display device 81 . The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see C304 in FIG. 394). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see C210 in FIG. 390).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (C211 in FIG. 390, FIG. 394 C305). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls displayed. As a result, the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual holding ball of variable display that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld in that it stores the number of reserved balls that have entered the second winning opening 640. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203lf counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is set to zero. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203lf (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter C4 A value is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc. On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc.

During time saving counter 203lg is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. A counter value corresponding to the number of times of time saving is set in the time saving medium counter 203lg, and by subtracting 1 at the timing when the variation of the special pattern stops, the time is shortened until the number of times of variation of the special pattern set in the time saving game state is completed. It is configured so that the game state is set.

The jackpot start flag 203lh is a flag indicating that it is time to start a jackpot game. When the lottery result is determined to be a big hit and the variation of the special symbol stops, the big win start flag 203lh is set to ON (see FIG. 390: C219). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203lh is ON and it is identified that it is time to start the jackpot, it is set to OFF. Note that the jackpot start flag 203lh is set to OFF in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and held in the state immediately before the power failure when power failure or the like occurs.

The jackpot middle flag 203li is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the determination result is a big hit, and the special symbol stops changing and a big win game is started (Fig. 404: C1203). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (when it is determined that the number of rounds of games corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), it is configured to be set to OFF. This jackpot flag 203li is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. is configured as follows.

The small winning start flag 203lj is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. It is determined that the small winning start flag 203lj is ON, and when it is identified as the start timing of the small winning game, it is set to OFF. This small hit start flag 203lj is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the power failure or the like occurs. configured to be

The small hit medium flag 203lk is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is configured to be set to OFF. This small hit medium flag 203lk is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when power failure etc. occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before power failure etc. configured to be

The V passage time jackpot type value 203lm stores data for determining the jackpot type set when a ball wins in the V winning opening 650 within the V valid period when a small win game is being executed. area. The V-passing jackpot type value 203lm stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type when the variation of the special symbol in which the determination result is a small hit stops. When a ball wins in the V winning opening 650 during the V valid period, the V flag 203ln corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V-passing jackpot type value 203lm is set to ON. ing. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V-passing big winning type value 203lm is cleared. This V-passing jackpot type value 203lm is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. is configured to be held by

In the V flag 203ln, when a ball enters the V winning opening 650 during the V valid period in the small winning game, the flag corresponding to the big winning type corresponding to the type of the small winning game being executed is set to ON. be. At the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether or not this V flag 203ln is on, thereby identifying that there was a prize in the V winning opening 650 during the V valid period, and the flag is set to on. Then, the type of jackpot to be executed is discriminated, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set. This V flag 203ln is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared. is configured as

The special figure 2 variation frequency counter 203ll is a counter for measuring the variation frequency of the second special symbol, and a specific counter value is set when the time saving state is set. And, when the special figure 2 variation is executed during the time saving state, the counter value is subtracted, and when the counter value after the subtraction becomes 0, the time saving state ends. In other words, the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ll is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and constitutes a part of the time saving end conditions that are set in plurality.

In the 16th embodiment, it is configured to vary the counter value set in the special figure 2 variation counter 203ll according to the jackpot type that has been elected. Thereby, according to big hit classification, the ease of completion|finish of a time saving state can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the presence or absence of the winning of the jackpot, but also in the type of jackpot to be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 387, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 387(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 387(a), the ROM 222 in this embodiment is provided with at least a variation pattern selection 16 table 222la.

First, referring to FIG. 388, the contents of the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la will be described. Figure 388 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la, and Figure 388 (b) is a time saving final variation pattern selection 16 table that the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la has 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in H.222la3.

As shown in FIG. 388(a), the variation pattern selection 16 table 2221a has three variation pattern selection tables associated with the game state and variation status. Normal variation pattern selection 16 table 222la1 referred to in a certain case, time saving variation pattern selection 16 table 222la2 referred to when it is in the time saving state, and time saving final use referred to when it is the final variation of the time saving state It has a variation pattern selection 16 table 222la3.

The normal variation pattern selection 16 table 222la1 and the time reduction variation pattern selection 16 table 222la2 described above have the same technical idea as the variation pattern selection table described in each embodiment or each embodiment. It is a data table in which a display variation pattern (effect mode) corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is selected. , the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving final variation pattern selection 16 table 222la3 is the final variation in the time saving state, that is, when the time saving end condition is satisfied by executing the variation, refer to when selecting the production mode of the variation production for the special figure fluctuation. In addition to the pattern type of the change, the lottery result, the number of special 2 reserved balls (the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223lc), the presence or absence of a hit in the hold (winning prize information storage area 223la Different variation patterns (effect mode) are selected based on the determination result of whether or not winning information indicating winning is included in the winning information stored in .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 388 (b), if the time saving final fluctuation is the special figure 1, that is, among the time saving end conditions, one of the common time saving end conditions "special figure fluctuation number 99 times If the special figure fluctuation when ” is established is the special figure 1 fluctuation, regardless of the lottery result of the variation, the number of special figure 2 pending balls, “Special figure 1 short time final” is selected as the variation pattern be done.

Next, if the time-saving final variation is special figure 2, the lottery result of the variation (response judgment result) is "hit", and the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "0", the variation pattern is "time-saving final A" is selected, the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "1, 2", and if the winning information indicating the hit is included in the special figure 2 pending, "time saving final A" is selected as the variation pattern , If the prize information indicating the hit is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "time saving final B" is selected as a variation pattern.

Then, if the lottery result of the change (result of winning or not) is "hit", the number of special 2 pending balls is "3", and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special 2 pending, the change When "time saving final C" is selected as a pattern and winning information indicating a win is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "time saving final D" is selected as a variation pattern.

On the other hand, if the time-saving final variation is special figure 2, the lottery result of the variation (response judgment result) is "off", and the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "0", the variation pattern is "time-saving final E ” is selected, and the number of special 2 pending balls is “1, 2”, and if the winning information indicating the hit is included in the special 2 pending, “time saving final B” is selected as the variation pattern, If the winning information indicating the hit is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "shortening final F" is selected as a variation pattern.

Also, if the lottery result of the change (result of judgment) is "out", the number of special 2 pending balls is "3", and the winning information indicating the hit is included in the special 2 pending, the change "Time saving final D" is selected as a pattern, and when winning information indicating a win is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "Time saving final E" is selected as a variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 387(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 387(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 387(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment has a winning information storage area 223la, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb, and , special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223lc, fluctuation start flag 223ld, stop type selection flag 223le, production counter 223lf, SW valid time counter 223lg, state storage area 223lh, series production flag 223li, pseudo series production flag 223lj, time saving final fluctuation Flag 223lk, small hit caution flag 223ll, non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223lm, special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln, normal figure fluctuation time counter 223lo, continuous series production flag 223lp, series production counter 223lq, and other memory area 223z are provided at least. there is

The winning information storage area 223la has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223la, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the pending ball and the like before the change starts.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203lld of the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb is a variable effect (variable display ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and obtain the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203ld stored in the RAM 203l of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is counted based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb counts the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and suspended. When the number of balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203ld after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203lld.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb is used to display the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223lb, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved balls. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203lld of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203lld of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that they are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223ld is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, and is turned off when the variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set. When the fluctuation start flag 223ld is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223le is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see C2105 in FIG. 406), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See C4007 in FIG. 415). When the stop type selection flag 223le is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223lf is a counter used for advance notice effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The SW valid time counter 223lg is a storage area that stores a period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid.

The state storage area 223lh is a storage area for temporarily storing the current game state, and stores information included in state commands output from the main controller 110. FIG. In this embodiment, in the state storage area 223lh, information indicating the gaming state (normal state, time saving state), information indicating the time saving end condition of the time saving state, and the hit type (jackpot type, Information indicating a small hit type) is configured to be stored. Based on the various information stored in the state storage area 223lh, the effect mode is variably set.

Although detailed description is omitted, the state storage area 223lh is configured to temporarily store the game state set in the past in addition to the information indicating the current game state. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute variation based on the state of transition of the game state (from which game state to which game state).

The series effect flag 223li is a flag for indicating that a condition for executing a series of effects is satisfied, and is set to ON when the condition for executing a series of effects is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when a series of production is set as the variation pattern of the special figure lottery that has been won, or when the long variation of the normal symbol is executed, the execution condition of the series of production is configured so that

This series effect flag 223li is set in the normal figure effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 417), when a series effect is set (C4207 in FIG. 417), or in the hit variation effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 419) , When a series of effects is set (C4402 in FIG. 419: Yes), it is set to ON (C4208 in FIG. 417, C4403 in FIG. 419), and in the small hit related command process (see C3504 in FIG. 412 (a)) , It is referred to when setting the effect mode during the small winning game (C3701 in FIG. 412(a)). Further, it is referred to when determining whether or not a new series of effects can be executed in the variable effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 416) and the normal figure effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 417). Then, in the series effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 421), it is set to OFF when it is determined that the continuous execution condition of the series effect is not established (see C4613 in FIG. 421).

As described above, in the present embodiment, a series of effects are executed by a plurality of opportunities (special figure lottery, general figure lottery). Even in the case of such a configuration, by using the series effect flag 223li, it is possible to prevent the series of effects from being set (executed) redundantly.

The pseudo series production flag 223lj is a flag for indicating that the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation is out and the execution condition of the series production is satisfied, and the series production is set as the fluctuation production of the special figure fluctuation. It is set to ON when The pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to have a lower priority than the series effect flag 223li described above. , and when the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to ON, different effect setting processing is executed.

Specifically, when the series production flag 223li is set to ON in the normal figure production setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 417) (for example, a series production is executed as a special figure fluctuation hit variation production case), even if the normal pattern fluctuation satisfies the execution conditions for the series of effects, a new series of effects is not executed, whereas the pseudo series of effects flag 223lj is set to ON. If it is (for example, if a series of production is executed as a variation production out of the special figure fluctuation), the normal figure fluctuation meets the execution conditions for a series of production, and meets the special conditions In this case, a new series of effects (special series of effects) can be executed (see C4211 in FIG. 417).

In this way, in a state in which the same series of effects is being executed, the process of executing a new series of effects (the process of replacing the effect mode of the series of effects being executed) based on the execution trigger of the series of effects being executed. Since it is possible to change whether to perform or not, it is possible to diversify the contents of the series of effects. Further, only when it is possible to display an effect result that is more advantageous to the player than the effect result of the series of effects being executed, the effect mode of the series of effects being executed is replaced. It is possible to make the player pay attention to a series of performances while expecting that .

The time saving final variation flag 223lk is a flag for indicating that the special figure variation of this time is the final variation of the time saving state, and is set to ON when the special figure variation of this time is the final variation of the time saving state. . By setting the time saving final variation flag 223lk to ON, it is possible to set an effect mode for the time saving final variation.

The small-hit attention flag 223ll is a flag indicating that the ball has not passed through the specific area even after a predetermined period of time has passed during the small-hit game, and is a predetermined period (1 second) after the start of the small-hit game. is set to ON when the sphere has not passed through the specified area even after the elapse of . And, by setting the small hit caution flag 223ll to ON, a guidance display mode (see FIG. 371 (a)) for performing a right hitting game during the small hitting game is displayed. Then, it is set to OFF at the timing when the small winning game ends.

The non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223lm is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the normal state, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67 It is set to ON when special figure 1 variation is not executed. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to perform a left-handed game in a normal state, and to enter a ball into the first winning port 64 to execute the special figure 1 lottery. Then, a normal pattern lottery is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left game area, and when the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is a normal pattern long open hit, the electric accessory 640a. Since the normal figure long open hitting game is executed in which is long open, a right-handed game is performed in order to win the ball in the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁

In other words, when the game is played normally, the special figure 1 variation is executed at the timing when the ball is passed through the through gate 67. On the other hand, for example, in a state in which the normal state is set, when a game is played in which the ball is only passed through the through gate 67 provided in the right side game area of the game board 13, the ball is passed through the through gate 67. It means that the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the timing when it is made. Here, as the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the 16th embodiment, the rate at which the ball fired by the left-handed game passes through the through gate 67 provided in the left-hand side game area is higher. It is constructed so that the percentage of balls passing through the through gate 67 provided in the right game area is higher.

In this way, in the normal state, if you play a right-handed game and try to execute only the normal drawing lottery, even if you win the long open by the normal drawing lottery, the normal drawing It is configured so as not to execute the variable production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the normal pattern long open per game is executed for the player who performs the right hitting game in the normal state.

Special figure variation time counter 223ln and normal figure variation time counter 223lo are counters for measuring each design variation time, and when design variation is executed, a value corresponding to this variation time is set. be. Then, the value is periodically subtracted in the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 . By using the values of the special figure variation time counter 223ln and the normal figure variation time counter 223lo, it is possible to determine the remaining time of each design variation time during design variation.

The continuous series effect flag 223lp is a continuous series effect that is executed when the standby period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a predetermined period (30 seconds) or more during the period in which the series effect is being executed (See FIG. 363 (b) ) is set, and is set to ON when a continuous series of effects is executed.

The series effect counter 223lq is a counter for updating the effect scenario of the series of effects, and when the series of effects is set, a value corresponding to the effect period of the series of effects to be executed this time is set. , is updated in the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) that is periodically executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 . The series effect counter 223lq is set to a value indicating the period until the series effect is completed (the effect of executing the jackpot game (see FIG. 368(b)) is executed). A rendering mode is set according to the updated counter value. Then, during the execution of a series of effects, the condition to end the effect (for example, the condition that is established when the ball does not enter the second winning port 640 during the normal game and the special figure 2 reservation cannot be obtained) is established. On the other hand, when the series of effects is to be terminated, the effect mode for indicating the end of the series of effects is set, and the value of the series of effects counter 223lq is reset to zero.

The re-read-ahead flag 223lr is a flag for indicating that it is necessary to re-execute the pre-reading process on the prize-winning information stored in the prize-winning information storage area 223la. set to on if In the 16th embodiment, as a variable production corresponding to the final special figure fluctuation in the time saving state, a variable production (time saving final fluctuation production) in which the production mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation is set is executed. It is configured to execute the prefetching process for the special figure 2 reservation that has been acquired at the specific timing of the final special figure fluctuation period, and to set the effect mode corresponding to the result of the prefetching.

The above-mentioned re-prefetching flag 223lr is set on when the final special figure fluctuation is being executed, and when a new special figure 2 hold is acquired after the specific timing of the final special figure fluctuation period has elapsed, and is set on In the case, at the execution timing of the special figure 2 variation of the first rotation after the end of the time saving state, the prefetching process for the special figure 2 hold is executed again, and the variation effect based on the result of the prefetching process is executed.

Suspension upper limit flag 223ls is a flag for determining whether the number of special 2 pending balls has reached the upper limit (4), and when the number of special 2 pending balls reaches the upper limit (4) set to on. And it is referred when setting the production|presentation mode of time-saving final fluctuation|variation production|presentation. Specifically, in the 16th embodiment, as a variation effect corresponding to the final special figure fluctuation in the time saving state, the reservation ball for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation during the first period of the final special figure fluctuation period To make it possible to execute the acquisition production, and during the second period after the first period, to make it possible to execute the time-saving final fluctuation production for showing the result of the lottery of the fluctuation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation. It is configured, and when the holding upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON at the start time of the first period, the first period and the second period are used to execute the time saving final variation effect. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect (holding ball acquisition effect) for acquiring a new special figure 2 hold for the player who has already acquired the special figure 2 hold to the upper limit. The execution period of the time-saving final variation performance is lengthened for the player who is able to suppress the game and continuously acquires the special figure 2 reservation to the vicinity of the upper limit value, that is, the player who is continuously executing the right-handed game. can be set. Therefore, the player can continue to play the game, and the operation of the game can be improved.

The execution completion flag 223lt is a flag for indicating that the time reduction final variation performance is being executed as the variation performance corresponding to the final special figure variation, and is normally executed from the second period of the time reduction final variation period. It is set to ON when the time saving final variation effect is executed from the first period set before the second period. In other words, at the start of the first period of the time-saving final fluctuation period, the number of special 2 reservations has reached the upper limit, and the time-saving final fluctuation production during the first period (production using the first period and the second period) is set to ON when it is determined that the second period is to be executed, and it is determined whether the execution completion flag 223lt is set to ON at the start of the second period. Since the effect mode to be executed during the period is set, the process of setting a new effect mode is skipped. And it is set to OFF when the stop command corresponding to time-saving final fluctuation|variation is received.

The special 2 winning flag 223lu is a flag for indicating that the ball has won the second winning port 640 during the normal game (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a), and during the normal game ( It is set to ON when a ball wins in the second prize winning port 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. This special 2 winning flag 223lu is, when it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 in the update process (see FIG. 422 (a)) during the game per normal figure (C4701 in FIG. 422 (a): Yes), it is set to ON (see C4705 in FIG. 422(a)), and is referenced in the series of effect update processing (see C4503 in FIG. 421) to determine whether to continue the series of effects (see FIG. 421). 421 C4608). In the process of C4608, if it is determined that it is not set to ON (set to OFF) (C4608: No in FIG. 421), it becomes a state in which the special figure 2 variation is not executed, and the end condition of a series of effects is established. Therefore, a process (C4612) for ending the series of effects is executed.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the sixteenth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 389 to 405. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process 16 and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Processing and main processing will be described. In addition, in the 16th embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the contents explained in each of the above-described embodiments are also described with different reference numerals, but they are explained in each of the above-described embodiments. The contents described in each of the above-described embodiments are applied to the portions where the detailed description of the same elements as those described above is omitted. Further, the technical ideas described in each of the above-described embodiments are naturally applied to the 16th embodiment, and the modified examples and additional examples described in each of the above-described embodiments are also applicable to the 16th embodiment. It naturally applies to the embodiment.

389 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 16 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The timer interrupt processing 16 is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process 16, first, various prize winning switches are read (C101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the update of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the second hit type counter C6 is executed (C103). Specifically, 1 is added to the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4, the small per type counter C5, and the second per type counter C6. At the same time, when those counter values reach the maximum values (999, 99, 239, 239, 99, 99 respectively in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C6 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, the special symbol variation processing 16 for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (C104). . After that, the starting winning process 16 associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (C105). The details of the special symbol variation process 16 and the starting winning process 16 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process 16 (C105), the normal symbol variation process 16, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (C106). Details of the normal symbol variation process 16 will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process 16, the through gate passage process 16 associated with the ball passing through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (C107). The details of the through gate passage processing 16 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 397 and 398. FIG.

After executing the through gate passage processing 16, the V entrance passage processing 16 is executed (C108), and then the V passage processing 16 (C109) is executed. Details of the V entrance passage processing 16 and the V passage processing 16 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 399 and 400. FIG.

After executing the V passage processing 16 (C109), the firing control processing is executed (C110), and further, other processing to be executed periodically is executed (C111), and the timer interrupt processing 16 ends. . Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 390, special symbol variation processing 16 (C104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 390 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 16 (C104). This special symbol variation process 16 (C104) is executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the three-pattern display device 81 .

In this special symbol variation process 16, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big win (C201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (C201: Yes), the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) cannot be executed, so this process is terminated as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (C201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is fluctuating (special symbol fluctuation) (C202), and the first symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the devices 37a and 37b is not fluctuating (during special figure fluctuation) (C202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol N2) is acquired ( C203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is greater than 0 (C204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is not 0 (C204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is subtracted by 1 (C205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is set (C206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of C206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb is shifted (C207). In the process of C207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203lb are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process 16 for starting variation display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (C213). Note that the special symbol variation start process 16 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of C204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is 0 (C204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld A value is acquired (C208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is greater than 0 (C209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is 0 (C209: No), that is, when there is no reserved ball for starting a new special symbol variation, this processing is performed as it is. exit.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is not 0 (C209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is subtracted (C210), and by the process of C210 A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is set (C211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of C211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la is shifted (C212). After that, the process of C213 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when a new special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is executed, the special symbol 2 It is configured to determine the value of the number of reserved balls counter (N2), and when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved number of balls counter (N2) is greater than 0, the second special symbol (special figure 2) It is configured to execute processing for starting special symbol variation (special symbol variation) (special symbol variation start processing 16 (see C213)). Thereby, the second special symbol can be preferentially varied over the first special symbol.

Further, in the process of C202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (C202: Yes), the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (C214). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (C214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (C214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (C215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing 16 (C213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process 16 is executed, a special symbol lottery is drawn based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb. done. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is changed. According to this, any one of jackpot AA, jackpot AB, jackpot AC, jackpot AD, jackpot AE and jackpot AF is determined, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the small win is determined according to the value of the small win type counter C5. Any one of AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit AD, small hit AE and small hit E is determined.

In this embodiment, the player is notified of the lottery result of the special symbol (determination result of each type of counter) according to the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. When the lottery result of the special pattern is a big hit, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b turn on the blue LED, and when it is a small hit, turn on the red LED, and when it is out. , a red LED and a green LED are lit.

Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot AA is determined, the blue LEDs in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b indicate the jackpot AA (for example, the alphabet "a" ), and when the jackpot AB is determined, it is lit in a mode indicating the jackpot AB (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "b"), and when the jackpot AC is determined It is lit in a manner indicating AC (for example, in a manner imitating the alphabet "c"), and when the jackpot AD is determined, it is lit in a manner indicating the jackpot AD (for example, in a manner imitating the alphabet "d"). Let

Also, even if the lottery result of the special pattern is a small hit, the red LED is displayed for each small hit type (small hit AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit Lights up in a mode corresponding to AD, small hit AE and small hit E). The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped. In addition, in this embodiment, the mode (color corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol) that indicates the contents of each hit type so that the player can grasp the hit type (big hit type or small hit type) determined as described above. , The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are configured to light up in a mode formed from a lighting mode corresponding to each hit type), but other configurations may be used. Even if the determined winning types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode for the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, it is configured so that it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol of this time and the hit type to be determined. However, other configurations may be used, for example, it may be configured to display in a lighting mode classified to the extent that the player can distinguish that the lottery result of the special symbol is different. .

After the process of C215 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is a special symbol jackpot ( C216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special pattern jackpot (C216: Yes), a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type (C217), and then the jackpot is awarded in correspondence with the jackpot type determined in the jackpot this time. Start setting (setting of jackpot such as 15 rounds) is executed (C218).

Incidentally, when the jackpot scenario is set in the processing of C217, the jackpot scenario table corresponding to the jackpot type of this time is set among the jackpot scenario tables defined in the jackpot scenario table 202lh.

When the process of C218 is completed, next, the jackpot start flag 203lh and the jackpot flag 203li are set to ON (C219), the value of the time saving counter 203lg is set to 0 (C220), and the stop command is set (C225 ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C216, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (C216: No), the time saving update process is executed (C221). Details of this time saving update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 392, but when the time saving state is set, various parameters (second special symbol (special figure 2) A process of updating the number of fluctuations and the total number of fluctuations of special symbols) is executed. After executing the process of C221, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (C222), and if it is determined to be a small hit (C222: Yes), the small hit start setting process 16 (C223) is executed. Then, the processing of C225 described above is executed later, and this processing ends. Details of the small winning start setting process 16 (C223) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of C222, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (no) (C222: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the time saving update process is executed at the timing when the special symbol variation is finished (the timing when the special symbol variation time has passed). By configuring in this way, for example, when "1 special figure 2 fluctuation number of times" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition which is part of the time saving end condition, the time saving state is set, and the special figure 2 change is executed Even if it is done, the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation stops can be made into a time saving state, so it is possible to secure the period to acquire the special figure 2 hold.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the 16th embodiment, it may be configured to execute the time saving update process at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, in this case, the period of one special figure 2 fluctuation is secured as a time saving state In order to do so, it may be configured to set "special figure 2 fluctuation number of times 2 times" as the corresponding time saving end condition.

Next, with reference to FIG. 391, special symbol variation start processing 16 (C213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 16 (C213). This special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 390) of the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area of 203la and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb, "special symbol jackpot", "special symbol small win", or "special symbol loss" Lottery (whether judgment) is performed, and the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed by the first design display devices 37a, 37b and the third design display device 81 is determined.

In the special symbol variation start process 16, first, a first hit random number counter stored in a common execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage areas (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb). C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and small hit type counter C5, to obtain each value of the variation type counter CS1 (C231). Next, the lottery result of the special design is determined based on the special design jackpot random number table (special design 1 random number 16 table 202la1, special design 2 random number 16 table 202la2) corresponding to the type of special design (special design 1, special design 2). Acquire (C232) and move to the process of C233.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is changed to the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 ( 380(b)) are compared one by one with the four random values set. As described above, as the random number value for the first special symbol jackpot, four numbers of "0 to 3" are set. When the numerical values match, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is obtained. Similarly, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 and the two random numbers "10, 11" that are small hits set in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 (see FIG. 380 (b)) If they match, it is determined to be a small hit of a special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for judging a big hit, but not limited to this, different random numbers may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. You may set the number of random values to be different. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the number of determination values determined as a small hit is different. By configuring in this way, the probability that the lottery result will be a small win can be varied according to the type of the special symbol, and the player will be motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with the higher probability of a small win. It is possible to make a game by itself.

In this embodiment, the first winning random number 16 table 202la is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win the small winning, but only one of the special symbols wins the small winning. 16 random number table 2021a may be set so that . Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with a random number value that is a small hit of the special symbol, and the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 corresponding to the second special symbol is It is better to set the random number value that will be the small hit of the special symbol only. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the privilege (small winning game) that can be given to the player according to the type of the special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in this embodiment, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in a predetermined range (0 to 3) corresponds to the special symbol jackpot, and the other range (4 to 999) according to the type of special symbol. However, as another configuration, for example, the value of a part of the range (for example, 0 to 2) that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is set to a small value in the second special symbol. It may be set as a hit range.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number 16 table 202la are used to perform a lottery (big win, small win, loss) for a special symbol. Alternatively, a plurality of winning random number tables may be used to draw a special symbol. If the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit using the second random number table. may be configured. By performing the special symbol lottery using a plurality of random number tables in this way, the special symbol lottery result can be set more randomly, and the fraudulent act of manipulating the special symbol lottery result can be suppressed. .

In this embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is used when performing the lottery for the special symbols, but other configurations may be used. A random number 16 table 202la may be used to draw a special symbol. In this case, for example, based on the value of the first random number counter, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and based on the value of the second random number counter, the special symbol lottery result is small. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a win.

Returning to FIG. 391, the description continues. In the process of C233, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of C232 is a special symbol jackpot (C233). When it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (C233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first winning type selection 16 table 202lb corresponding to the special symbol type corresponding to this special symbol lottery ( C234), set the display mode at the time of the big win corresponding to the special symbol and the big win type (C235), determine the big win variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (C236), and follow the determined big win variation pattern. A corresponding variation pattern command is set (C243), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (C233: No), then it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (C237). If it is determined (C237: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 16 table 202lg corresponding to the special design type corresponding to this special design lottery (C238), and the special design and the small A display mode at the time of a small hit corresponding to the hit type is set (C239), a small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (C240), and a variation corresponding to the small hit variation pattern determined this time. A pattern command is set (C243), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of C237, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit (C237: No), that is, if it is determined that the result of this lottery is a loss, the loss corresponding to the type of special symbol Set the display mode of the time (C241), determine the variation pattern at the time of loss based on the number of held balls (C242), set the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern at the time of loss determined this time (C243), End this process.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the variation pattern is determined regardless of the number of pending balls, whereas the special symbol If the result of the lottery is lost, the variation pattern is different according to the number of held balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) is executed, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a shorter variation time. As a result, the greater the number of pending balls, the shorter the period until the lottery result (loss), in which the special pattern lottery result does not give a benefit to the player, is displayed. In order to increase the number of lotteries of the special symbols to be drawn, the player can be motivated to play the game to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, it is possible to lengthen the special symbol variation time for one time, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a state in which the special symbols are not varied during the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their desire to play.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is configured to be different based on the number of held balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) is executed. On the condition that the number of held balls becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more while the is fluctuating, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern being executed may be shortened. good. By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbols are fluctuating.

In addition, in this embodiment, only when the lottery result of the special pattern is out, the variation pattern is changed based on the number of reserved balls. The variation pattern may be varied based on the number, or it may be configured such that the larger the number of held balls, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a longer variation time. Furthermore, the number of reserved balls to be referred to when determining the variation pattern may be a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Of the 2 special symbols, only the value of the number of held balls of the second special symbol for which the special symbol variation start processing is preferentially executed may be sufficient, or the special symbol on the side to be the target of the special symbol variation start processing to be performed this time. Only the value of the number of retained balls in the design may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 392, the time saving update process (C221) will be described. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (C221).

In the time saving update process (C221), first, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203lg during the time saving of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C251). Incidentally, the time-saving medium counter 203lg is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal pattern high probability state. If the value of the time-saving counter 203lg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state of normal symbols. In addition, in the 16th embodiment, two game states can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set two game states: normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) and time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) It consists of That is, in this embodiment, the probability state of the special symbol is always constant, and only the probability state of the normal symbol can be variably set. Therefore, there is a case where the normal state is used as a term indicating the low probability state of the time saving state and the normal symbol as the term indicating the high probability state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the counter 203lg during time saving is 0 (C251: No), since the time saving state is not set, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203lg is 1 or more (C251: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current time is in the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203lg is subtracted by 1 (C252), Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation of this time is the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C253). If the special figure fluctuation of this time is the special figure 2 fluctuation (C253: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ll is subtracted by 1 (C254), and the remaining time short command indicating the value of various counters is set (C255), and the process proceeds to C256.

In the process of C255, the value of the counter 203lg during time saving and the remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203ll are set. Remaining time reduction number command set here, by the external output process (see C1001 in Figure 403) of the main process (see Figure 403) to be described later, to the voice lamp control device 113 as part of the state command indicating the gaming state output. On the audio lamp control device 113 side, when it is determined that the state command (remaining time reduction command) is received in the command determination process 16 (see C3113 in FIG. 406) (C3212 in FIG. 406), included in the received command Information is extracted, and the current game state (remaining time reduction count) is stored in the state storage area 223lh. This makes it possible to predict (discriminate) the remaining time period of the time saving state currently set in the voice lamp control device 113, and to set the effect mode according to the remaining time of the time saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, every time the time saving update process (see C221 in FIG. 392) is executed, the main control unit 110 is configured to output a remaining time saving number command for indicating the remaining time saving number of times. , Without being limited to this, for example, when the time saving state is set (when the jackpot game is finished) time saving end condition command for indicating the time saving end condition set at the time the time saving end condition is output to the voice lamp control device 113 Configured to extract the time saving end condition from the time saving end condition command received by the voice lamp control device 113 side, and then the command indicating the special figure fluctuation output from the main control device 110 side (variation pattern command) received number of times may be accumulated, and it may be determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the accumulated value. By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main controller 110 side can be reduced.

In the process of C253, if this special figure variation is not the variation of the special figure 2 (C253: No), the process of C254 and C255 is not performed, and the process proceeds to C256.

In the process of C256, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203lg is 0 (C256). If the value of the time saving counter 203lg is 0 (C256: Yes), it means that the time saving end condition (common time saving end condition) is satisfied, so it is determined whether the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied among the time saving end conditions. The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ll for the purpose is reset to 0 (C257), and the process proceeds to C260.

In the process of C256, if the value of the counter 203lg during time saving is not 0 (C256: No), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ll is 0 (C258). If the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ll is 0 (C258: Yes), since it is a case where the time saving end condition (corresponding time saving end condition) is established, the establishment of the common time saving end condition among the time saving end conditions The value of the counter 203lg during time saving for determining is reset to 0 (C259), and then the process proceeds to C260. On the other hand, when the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203ll is not 0 in the process of C258 (C258: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of C260, the gaming state is set to the normal state (C260), a state command indicating the normal state is set (C261), and then the processing is terminated.

As described above, the time saving update process (C221 in FIG. 392) is, among the time saving end conditions, a plurality of time saving end conditions (a part of the common time saving end conditions, and It is constituted so as to be able to discriminate the establishment status of corresponding time reduction end conditions), and when any one of the time reduction end conditions is established, the value of a parameter for establishing the other time reduction end conditions is also reset. Thereby, even if time saving end conditions are satisfied based on the value of which parameter, the state after ending a time saving state can be unified.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a time saving end condition, a common time saving end condition that is set in common regardless of the time saving state set based on which jackpot type (first end condition established when the jackpot is elected, small hit The second end condition that is established after the end of the game, the third end condition that is established when the number of special figure fluctuations (total of special figure 1 and special figure 2) reaches 99 times) and the jackpot type It is configured to set the corresponding time-saving end condition (condition that is established when the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 reaches a predetermined number), but the condition for ending the time-saving state is not limited to this For example, when the number of times of winning a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of times a specific small hit type is selected reaches a predetermined number of times, a small winning end condition may be set. In this case, the small winning end condition may be set as a common time saving end condition, or may be set as a corresponding time saving end condition. In addition, an end lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to end the time saving state based on the execution of the special symbol variation (special figure variation) is provided, and when the lottery result of the end lottery means is the lottery result for ending the time saving state. Alternatively, the time saving state may be terminated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends, so that the game in the time saving state can be executed while giving the player a thrilling feeling. . In addition, when a predetermined continuation condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a lottery result indicating a specific deviation as a lottery result of a special symbol) is established during the time saving state, various parameters related to the time saving end condition are set for a predetermined period. It may be configured not to be updated. Furthermore, only the time saving state that is set when a specific jackpot type is selected, until a predetermined period has elapsed since the time saving state was set (for example, until the special figure fluctuation number reaches 30 times), You may comprise so that the various parameters regarding time saving end conditions may not be updated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably set the period during which the time saving state continues, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, a discriminating means capable of discriminating that the ball did not enter the V winning port 650a despite the execution of the small winning game is provided, and the discriminating means determines that the ball does not enter the V winning port 650a. You may comprise so that the time-saving forced termination conditions satisfied when it is discriminate|determined may be set as common time-saving termination conditions. By configuring in this way, the small hit type that is set when the small hit is won is determined, and the small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, the ball in the specific area in the V winning opening 650a) If it is determined that it is a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player (jackpot game with a small number of rounds or a jackpot game that does not set a game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player after the end), A penalty can be imposed on a player who plays an illegal game such as not shooting a ball during a small winning game and aiming for winning the next small winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 393, the small winning start setting process 16 (C223) will be described. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the small winning start setting process 16 (C223). In this small winning start setting process 16 (C223), a scenario is set for opening and closing the solenoid (V entrance solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 650b when a small winning is won in the special symbol lottery. Processing is performed.

In the small winning start setting process 16 (C223), first, based on the small winning scenario 16 table 202li, a scenario (winning scenario) corresponding to the set small winning type is set (C291). Next, set the small hit type corresponding to the small hit type determined to the V passing time jackpot type value (C292), set the start of the small hit corresponding to the small hit type (C293), and set the small hit medium flag 203lk is turned on (C294), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 394, the starting winning process 16 (C105) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 394 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process 16 (C105) executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389) in this embodiment. This startup winning process 16 (C105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), and the winning to the first ball entrance (award winning opening) 64 or the second ball entrance (award winning opening) 640 It is a process for determining the presence or absence of (starting winning), acquiring various random number counters when there is a starting winning, and executing the holding process of the value.

When the start winning process 16 (see C105 in FIG. 394) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (start winning) (C301). Here, the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole (winning hole) 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is changed. Acquire (C302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (C303).

Then, whether there is no winning to the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter If the value (N1) of 203ld is not less than 4 (C303: No), the process proceeds to C307. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is less than 4 (C303: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld (C304). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld changed by the calculation is set (C305).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of C305, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in C103 of the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389) described above. , the values of the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the vacant reservation area (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203la of the RAM 203. Store in the first area (C306). In the process of C306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from C307 to C312, the same processing as in the processing from C301 to C306 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance (winning entrance) 640 as well. The only difference is that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is reserved for the winning of the second ball entrance (winning opening) 640, and the other processes are the same. detailed description is omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of C307 that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 (C307: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is less than 4. If not (C309: No), prefetching process 16 is executed after the process of C312 (C313). After that, this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 395, prefetching process 16 (C313) will be described. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing prefetch processing 16 (C313). When the look-ahead process 16 (C313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning (C321). If there is no new winning (C321: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (C321: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (C322).

In the process of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (C322: Yes), by the process of C306 or C312 of the starting winning process 16 (see C105 in FIG. 394) Using the acquired various counter values, special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 (see FIG. 380 (b)), special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1 (see FIG. 381 (b)) and special figure 1 small per type selection Based on the 16 table 202lg1 (see FIG. 383(b)), the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (C323), and the process proceeds to C325.

On the other hand, in the process of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C322: No), the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 (see FIG. 380 (c)), the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2 (see FIG. 381 (c)) and special figure 2 small hit type selection 16 table 202lg2 (see FIG. 383 (c)) Based on the lottery result, jackpot type and small hit type are acquired (C324), the process proceeds to C325. In the process of C325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the above-described C323 or C324 process is set ( C325). Then, this processing ends.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the look-ahead process 16 (see C313 in FIG. 395) in the sixteenth embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned look-ahead result, when the special figure variation based on the corresponding winning information is executed The variation pattern (variation time) to be set is also configured to be discriminable in advance. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is also acquired by the processing of C306 or C312 of the start winning process 16 (see C105 of FIG. 394), and C323 of the prefetching process 16 (see C313 of FIG. 395) Alternatively, in the processing of C324, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined in advance based on the variation pattern 16 table 202le (see FIG. 385), and the determination result is included in the winning information in the processing of C325. there is As a result, it becomes possible to predict at what timing (after how many seconds) the special figure variation corresponding to the stored prize information will be executed on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Next, referring to FIG. 396, normal symbol variation processing 16 (C106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 396 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process 16 (C106). This normal symbol variation process 16 (C106) is executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a It is a process for controlling such as.

In the normal symbol variation process 16, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (C601). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the moment when the winning is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 and the moment when the electric accessory 640a is controlled to open and close. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (C601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (C601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (C602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (C602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (C603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203lf is greater than 0 (C604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203lf is 0 (C604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203lf is not 0 (C604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203lf is subtracted by 1 (C605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc is shifted (C606). In the process of C606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203lc are processed to sequentially shift to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc is obtained (C607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203lg during time saving in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C608). In addition, the time-saving medium counter 203lg is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203lg is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the counter 203lg during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols.

If the value of the time-saving counter 203lg is 1 or more (C608: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained by the processing of C607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal 16 per symbol random number table 2021c for high probability (see FIG. 380 (d)), the lottery result of whether or not the winning of the normal symbol is acquired (C609 ). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the normal 16 per symbol random number table 202lc for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a winning of normal symbols, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 380(d)).

In the process of C608, when the value of the counter 203lg is 0 (C608: No), the process proceeds to C610. In the process of C610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of C607 and the low Based on the random number 16 table 2021c (see FIG. 380(d)) per normal symbol for probability time, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (C610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the normal 16 per symbol random number table 202lc for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 380(d)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of C609 or C610 is a normal symbol hit (C611), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (C611: Yes), Next, per general pattern type selection 16 table 202ld is used to set per general pattern type (per general pattern A, per general pattern B) (C612). Specifically, the value of the second per type counter C6 is compared with the random value stored in the per normal pattern type selection 16 table 202ld. As described above, when the current game state is a time saving state (high probability state of normal pattern), if the value of the second per type counter C6 is in the range of "0, 1", it is per normal pattern A If it is in the range of "2 to 99", it is determined that it is a normal pattern hit B (see FIG. 382 (a)). Alternatively, if the current game state is a normal state (low probability state of normal pattern), if the value of the second per type counter C6 is in the range of "0", it is determined that it is per normal pattern A, " If it is in the range of 1 to 99", it is determined that it is a normal hit B (see FIG. 382(a)).

Next, the display mode for winning is set based on the setting result of C612 (C613), and the process proceeds to C615. In the process of C613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). On the other hand, in the process of C611, if it is determined that it is not a normal pattern hit (C611: No), this normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) is a case of loss, so the display mode at the time of loss is set. (C614), the process proceeds to C615.

In the process of C615, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203lg during time saving is 1 or more (C615), and if the value of the counter 203lg during time saving is 1 or more (C615: Yes), the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf Among them, the normal pattern fluctuation time (2 seconds) is set using the prescribed contents corresponding to the time saving state (normal pattern high accuracy) (C617), and then this process is terminated. In the process of C615, if the value of the counter 203lg during time saving is 0 (C615: No), out of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf, normal using the prescribed contents corresponding to the normal state (normal figure low probability) The figure fluctuation time (2 to 60 seconds) is set (C616), and then various contents set in this process (the value of the normal design holding ball number counter 203lf, the lottery result of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design ) is set (C623), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of C602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (C618). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of C616 or C617 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of C618, if the variable time has not elapsed (C618: No), the process proceeds to C623 and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of C618, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (C618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (C619). In the process of C619, if the normal symbol lottery wins and the display mode is set by the process of C613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of C614, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of C619, when the second symbol display update process (see C1008) of the main process (see FIG. 403) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of C613 or C614.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process 16 is the normal symbol hit. (C620). If the result of the lottery this time is a win for a normal symbol (C620: Yes), the opening pattern of the electric accessory is set according to the type of the normal symbol and the game state (C621), and the opening/closing control process for the electric accessory is set. (C622), after that, it moves to C623, sets a command for showing the contents of the normal figure per game set by the process of C621, and ends this process. When the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of C621, when the electric accessory opening and closing process (see C1006) of the main process (see FIG. 403) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time set in the process of C616 or the process of C617 ends. On the other hand, in the processing of C620, if the lottery result of this time is normal symbol deviation (C620: No), the processing of C621 and C622 is skipped, the process of C623 is shifted, and the normal symbol deviation fluctuation is stopped. A command indicating is set, and this processing ends.

Next, through gate passage processing 16 (C107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. This through gate passage processing 16 (C107) judges whether or not the ball has passed through this normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and when the ball has passed, the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4 is changed. This is a process for acquiring and holding.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (C431). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (C431: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (C432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (C433).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (C431: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203lf If the value (M) is not less than 4 (C433: No), the process proceeds to C437. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is less than 4 (C433: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf 1 is added to the value (M) of (C434), and the normal figure holding ball number command is set (C435). Then, the values of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit type counter C6 updated in C103 of the timer interrupt processing 16 described above, and the second The value of the variation type counter CS2 is stored in the first area of the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203lc of the RAM 203 (C436), and the process proceeds to C437. .

In addition, when storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in the first area of the empty reservation areas of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is referred to, and the value is If 0, make the first reserved area the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of C437, normal map prefetch processing is executed (C437), and then this processing is terminated. In addition, the details of this general pattern prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, before the normal pattern fluctuation (normal pattern fluctuation) is executed, the process of determining in advance the lottery result of the normal pattern reservation and the fluctuation pattern is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 398, the normal map prefetching process (C437) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 398 is a flow chart showing the normal map prefetching process (C437) executed in the through gate passing process 16 (see FIG. 397).

In the general pattern look-ahead process (C437), first, per normal pattern random number 16 table 202lc (see Figure 380 (d)), per general pattern type selection 16 table 202ld (see Figure 382 (a)), and general pattern fluctuation pattern A lottery result is acquired based on the selection table (C451), and a winning information command for indicating each lottery result is set (C452), after which this process is terminated. The winning information command set here (the winning information command indicating the result of the prefetching of the general map) is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 403). ) is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 in the external output process (C1001). When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it determines whether the received winning information command is a winning information command relating to a special figure fluctuation or a winning information command relating to a normal figure fluctuation, and stores the corresponding winning information storage area 223la. . The winning information stored here is actually the timing before the symbol variation (special figure variation or normal figure variation) corresponding to the winning information command is executed, the lottery result of the symbol variation. It is referred to when setting the suggestive effect to suggest.

Next, V entrance passage processing 16 (C108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 399 is a flow chart showing V entrance passage processing 16 (C108) executed in timer interrupt processing 16 (see FIG. 389).

In the V entrance passage processing 16 (C108), first, it is determined whether or not the present is during a winning game (during a small winning game) (C501). : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the present is in the winning game (during the small winning game) (C501: Yes), next, during the V winning opening opening period, that is, it is determined whether or not the small winning game is in progress. (C502). In the process of C502, when it is determined that the V winning opening is open (C502: Yes), the V entrance passing command is set (C503), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the small winning game is not in progress (C502: No), it means that the ball has won the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set. (C504), and the process ends.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of C503 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403). , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114 . As a result, it is possible to execute the effect during the small winning game based on the winning to the V winning device 650 .

Next, V passage processing 16 (C109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 400 is a flow chart showing V passage processing 16 (C109) executed in timer interrupt processing 16 (see FIG. 389).

When the V passing process 16 (C109) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is V passing, that is, whether the ball has won in a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V winning opening 650a (C601). If it is determined that the player has not won a prize (C601: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has won a prize (C601: Yes), then it is determined whether the V valid period is currently in effect (C602). In the process of C602, when the progress of the small winning scenario set during the small winning game is within the specific period, it is determined that it is within the V valid period, and in other cases, it is not during the V valid period. and discriminate.

In the process of C602, if it is determined that it is during the V valid period (C602: Yes), then it is determined whether the current small winning game is in progress (C603), and if it is in the small winning game (C603 : Yes), acquire the V passing time jackpot type value corresponding to the small hit type of the small hit game this time (C604), set the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (C605), and set the time saving medium counter 203lg Set to 0 (C606), set the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ll to 0 (C607), and proceed to the process of C608.

That is, in the processing of C604 to C607, the processing for executing the big winning game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game. On the other hand, in the process of C603, if it is determined that it is not during the small winning game (C603: No), since there is no need to perform the process for newly executing the big winning game, the processes of C604 to C607 are skipped. , C608.

In the process of C608, a V pass command is set (C608), and this process ends. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control processing of the main controller 110 . When the voice ramp control device 113 receives the V passing command, for example, when the V passing command is received during the small winning game, the V challenge executed during the small winning game succeeds, and following the small winning game , an effect is executed to indicate that a jackpot game is to be executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the big winning game, the same performance as when the V passing command is received during the small winning game is executed. On the other hand, when the V passing command is not received at a predetermined timing during the small winning game, a disappointing effect indicating that the ball did not pass through the specific area during the small winning game is executed.

In this embodiment, only a command (V passing command) for indicating that the ball has won (passed) a specific area in the V winning opening 650a is set. It may be configured to set a command (for example, V non-passing command) to indicate that the ball has not won a prize. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game balls are jammed in the V winning device 650 .

On the other hand, in the processing of C602, if it is determined that the V valid period is not currently in effect (C602: No), an error command is set (C609), and this processing ends. By performing the process of C609, the state in which the game ball has entered the V winning opening 650a outside the V valid period, that is, when a game is illegally made to enter the V winning opening 650a with the game ball, or when the V winning It is possible to quickly notify the outside of the case where a problem (ball clogging, etc.) occurs in the ball flow path in the port 650a.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 401 is a flow chart showing the contents of NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (C801). That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 402 is a flow chart showing the contents of the startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (C901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (C902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (C903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (C904). A payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111 (C912). On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (C904: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905), and if not stored (C905: No). , there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the payout initialization is performed to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device). Send the command (C912).

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (C906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (C907: No), If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data has been destroyed. A payout initialization command is transmitted (C912). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (C913), sets the initial value, and is ready to start the game ball payout control. becomes. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during execution of startup processing, RAM initialization processing is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 is initialized (C914). After that, the processing shifts to C910. In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on, power failure occurrence information is stored, and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (C907: Yes), the data is backed up in the RAM 203. While retaining the data, clear the power failure occurrence information (C908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (C909). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Then, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (C910), and execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (C911). Next, the interrupt is permitted, and the main processing, which will be described later, is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 403, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing this main processing. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of C1001 to C1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and counter update processes of C1011 and C1012 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 403), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to the sub side during execution of the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389). (C1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of C101 in the timer interrupt processing 16 (see FIG. 389) is determined. Send the corresponding prize ball command. In addition, various commands set in special symbol variation processing 16 (see FIG. 390), start winning processing 16 (see FIG. 394), V entrance passage processing 16 (see FIG. 399) and V passage processing 16 (see FIG. 400) It is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, various commands set in the opening command, round number command, ending command and small hit control processing 16 (see FIG. 405) set in the jackpot control processing 16 (see FIG. 404) are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 Send. In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated (C1002). Specifically, each variation type counter (variation type counter CS1, second variation type counter CS2) is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the various fluctuation type counters are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203 . Although detailed description is omitted, in the sixteenth embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used when referring to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (special figure variation), and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 The value is used when referring to the variation pattern of normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation). And it is configured to be executed by the establishment of a separate and independent opportunity between the special figure fluctuation and the normal figure fluctuation. As a result, even if the timing of updating the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 and the contents of updating are synchronized, the counter values used when actually executing each symbol variation will not be synchronized. None. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing contents of the main controller 110 without affecting the game.

In addition to this, the processing for updating the values of the various fluctuation type counters may be configured not to be synchronized. For example, each time the main processing is executed a predetermined number of times, the value of one fluctuation type counter may be updated, and only the value of the other variation type counter may be updated each time it is executed a specific number of times different from the above-described predetermined number of times. By differentiating the update contents of the various fluctuation type counters in this way, it is possible to prevent the value of one fluctuation type counter from being determined based on the acquired value of the other fluctuation type counter.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, the variation type counter CS1 referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation, and the second variation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the normal figure variation, Provided separately, configured to periodically update each counter value, but not limited to this, for example, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern of the special figure variation and the normal figure variation may be configured to select .

When the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (C1003). , the execution of the jackpot production and the jackpot control processing 16 for opening or closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (C1004). In the jackpot control process 16, the winning door 65b is opened for each round in the jackpot state to open the specific winning port 65a. Determine whether or not a specified number of prizes have been won. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process 16 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 403), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389). Further, the details of this jackpot control process 16 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, small hit control processing 16 (C1005) is executed. A detailed description of this small winning control process 16 (C1005) will be given later with reference to FIG. After that, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second ball entrance (winning opening) 640 is executed (C1006). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of C622 of the normal symbol variation processing 16 (see FIG. 396), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of C616 or C617 in the normal symbol variation processing 16 are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (C1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of C236, the process of C240 or the process of C242 of the special symbol variation start process 16 (see FIG. 391), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. , the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of C236, the process of C240 or the process of C242 of the special symbol variation start process 16 (see FIG. 391) has ended, The variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is terminated, and the stop symbol (the first 1 symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (C1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of C616 or the process of C617 of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 396), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of C619 of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 396), it is executed in the second symbol display device. Ending the variable display, in the display mode set by the processing of C613 or the processing of C619 of the normal symbol variation processing 16 (see FIG. 396), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device indicate.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (C1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (C1010: Yes), the process proceeds to C1001, and the above-described processes after C1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (C1010: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (C1011, C1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated by the same method as the process of C1002 (C1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of C1001 to C1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, various fluctuation type counters can be updated randomly.

In the configuration for updating the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 as in the 16th embodiment, in order to make the update timings of the various fluctuation type counters different, for example, in C1002 of the main processing In the process, both fluctuation type counters are updated, and in the process of C1012, only one fluctuation type counter (for example, the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be updated.

In addition, in the process of C1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process has been executed, so the power-off process after C1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (C1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (C1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (C1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (C1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

In addition, the process of C1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in C1001 to C1008, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of C1011 and C1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of C1001. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of C1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( initial value), the process can be started from C1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process 16 (C1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 404 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 16 (C1004). This jackpot control processing 16 (C1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 403), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, variable winning device This is a process for opening or closing the 65 specific winning opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process 16 (C1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203lh is on (C1201). This jackpot start flag 203lh is set to ON in the process of C219 of the special symbol variation process 16 (see C104 in FIG. 390). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203lh is ON (C1201: Yes), the opening command is set (C1202), the jackpot middle flag 203li is set to ON, and the jackpot start flag 203lh is set to OFF (C1203). , and then terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1201, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203lh is off (C1201: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203li is on (C1204).

In the process of C1204, when it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 203li is off (C1204: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203li is ON (C1204: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1215). If it is determined in the process of C1205 that the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1205: Yes), the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set to be opened (C1206) (Opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a The specific winning opening solenoid is set to ON so that the door 65b is open), then a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (C1207), and then this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (C1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 201, an audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the 16th embodiment, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed while satisfying a predetermined continuous condition, the number of rounds executed during a plurality of jackpot games is accumulated. The cumulative number of rounds obtained is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Then, the accumulated number of rounds is determined by determining whether a continuous condition is established when a command indicating that the jackpot game has started (that the jackpot has been won) is received on the voice ramp control device 113 side, and the number of continuous rounds is determined. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the value of the cumulative round number counter that accumulates the received round number commands is not cleared, and the value of the cumulative round number counter is updated based on the newly received round number command. Then, the accumulated number of rounds is displayed in a display form showing the update result.

With this configuration, the player can be made to think that the consecutively executed jackpot games are one jackpot game. You can show a lot of the maximum number of rounds that can be played. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while having expectations for the size of the privilege (the number of prize balls) provided by one big winning game.

In the present embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113 side is configured to execute the process of judging whether or not the continuous condition is satisfied and the process of accumulating the number of rounds. A part of the processing for executing the number display may be configured to be executed by the main controller 110 side. A continuous condition that is established when the jackpot game is executed within a predetermined number of special figure fluctuations (for example, 5 special figure 2 fluctuations) is set, and the accumulated round number of the jackpot game is measured on the main control device 110 side. A cumulative round number counter is provided, and a command indicating the value of the cumulative round number counter is set as a round number command. Then, the value of the accumulated round number counter is cleared when the special figure 2 variation is executed five times after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, when the continuous condition is satisfied when the jackpot game is executed, the value obtained by accumulating the number of rounds of the previous jackpot game is set as the value of the cumulative round number counter. , When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets the round number display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the round number (accumulated round number) information included in the command. The accumulated number of rounds can be notified to the player only by

In addition, as a continuous condition for cumulatively displaying the number of rounds executed in multiple jackpot games, other conditions may be set. is executed, the period until 10 seconds have elapsed since the end of the jackpot game) If the jackpot game is executed during the period when the jackpot game end screen that is continuously displayed is displayed ( For example, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery) and the condition established as the game state, the jackpot game is executed during the period when the specific game state (for example, time saving state) is set It may be configured to set a condition that is established when the In addition, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, both the value of the cumulative round number counter (accumulated round number) and the round number (single round number) of the current jackpot game are displayed. may be configured.

In the process of C1205, if it is determined that the current timing is not the time to start a new round (C1205: No), then it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the specific winning opening are satisfied (C1208). If it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208: Yes), the specific winning opening is closed (the specific winning opening solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the opening and closing door 65b of the specific winning opening 65a is closed ) (C1209), and then the process ends. In the process of C1208, if it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening is not met (C1208: No), then it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start of the ending effect (C1210). If it is determined that now is the time to start the ending effect (C1210: Yes), an ending command is set (C1211), and then this process ends.

In addition, when it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied in the process of C1208, the closing condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control process after the next time.

On the other hand, in the process of C1210, if it is determined that the current timing is not the start time of the ending effect (C1210: No), it is determined whether the current time is the end time of the ending effect (C1212). When it is determined that the current is the end timing of the ending production (C1212: Yes), the time saving end condition corresponding to the jackpot type is set to the time saving medium counter 203lg and the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ll (C1213), and the jackpot A state command corresponding to the subsequent game state is set (C1214), the end of the jackpot is set (C1215), and then this process is terminated.

Here, the values set to the values of the respective counters in the process of C1213 are varied according to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed (see FIGS. 381 and 383). When the type AD ~ AF is set, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203lg, and "-" indicating that it is not set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ll is set. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type AA, as the time saving end condition, the corresponding time saving end condition established based on the special figure 2 fluctuation number is not set, and the common time saving end condition (jackpot winning, small winning game End of, special figure fluctuation number reaches 99 times) only will be set.

When the jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203lg, "5" is set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ll, and when the jackpot AC is set, the time saving medium counter "99" is set to 203lg, and "1" is set to the special figure 2 variation counter 203ll.

In addition, when the jackpot game is executed based on the small hit winning, it is configured so that the value of the jackpot type corresponding to the set small hit type is referred to, and as shown in FIG. 383, the small hit At the end of the big win game based on the small win winning in which the types AA and AE are set, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203lg, "5" is set to the special figure 2 variation counter 203ll, and the small win types AB, AD. At the end of the big win game based on the small win winning set, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203lg, and "-" indicating that it is not set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ll. On the other hand, at the end of the big win game based on the small win winning in which the small win type AC is set, "0" is set to the time saving medium counter 203lg, and "0" is set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ll.

On the other hand, in the process of C1212, if it is determined that the current timing is not the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: No), the process ends.

Next, the small hit control process 16 (C1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 405 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process 16 (C1005). This small hit control process 16 (C1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 403), setting of commands for executing various effects according to the small hit by the audio lamp control device 113, and V winning This is processing for controlling the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600b attached to the mouth 650a.

In the small hit control process 16 (C1005), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301). In the processing of C1301, it is determined whether or not the small winning scenario set in the processing of C291 of the small winning start setting processing 16 (see C223 in FIG. 393) indicates the start of the small winning game. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301: Yes), the opening command for the small hit is set (C1302), the flag 203lk during the small hit is set to ON (C1303), and the operation for the small hit The start of the scenario is set (C1304), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of C1301, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small winning game (C1301: No), it is then determined whether or not the small winning middle flag 203lk is ON (C1305). If it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203lk is off (C1305: No), it means that the game is not currently in the small hit game, so this process is terminated as it is. In the process of C1305, when it is determined that the flag 203lk is ON (C1305: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the small winning game (C1306). When it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small winning game (C1306), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of C1306, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small winning game (C1306: Yes), the small winning medium flag 203lk is set to OFF (C1307), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg is reset to 0 (C1308), and it is determined whether the V flag 203ln is set to ON (C1309). As described above, in the sixteenth embodiment, regardless of whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area during the small winning game, "0" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg after the small winning game ends. It is configured as follows.

One condition of the time saving end condition (common time saving end condition) is set by the processing of this C1308. In other words, when the small winning game is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state also ends with the end of the small winning game, for example, during the time saving state, the small winning game being executed is disadvantageous to the player During the small winning game so that the big winning game based on the small winning game being executed is not executed when it is determined that it is the small winning type (for example, the small winning type in which the big winning game that is disadvantageous to the player can be executed) It is possible to prevent a game in which the ball is not shot (the ball is not passed through the specific area) from being played.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203lg is always set (reset) to "0" when the small winning game ends, but it is not limited to this, for example, When a small winning game based on a specific small winning type is executed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg may be set (reset) to "0" after the small winning game ends.

In the process of C1309, if it is determined that the V flag 203ln is off (C1309: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203ln is ON (C1309: Yes), then the start of the jackpot corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area is set (C1310), and the V flag 203ln is set to OFF. (C1311), and then the process ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since all small winning games are set as one round games, unlike the big winning scenario that executes the operation control of the big winning game, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds, and the interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big winning scenario used in the above-described big winning game may be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small winning scenario is set for the period during which the small winning game is executed. You may set a small hit scenario for between. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to set the V passage valid period until one second has elapsed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that is set across different game states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the volume of control processing can be reduced.

In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening 650a in the small winning game, a big winning game corresponding to the preset big winning type corresponding to the small winning is executed. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined by acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning opening 650a.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 406 to 421. FIG. Of the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment, the detailed description and illustration of the parts that execute the same processes as in the above-described embodiments are omitted. do.

Further, regarding the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 of the present embodiment, various counters After executing the update process (S4111), the later-described effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) is executed, and the command determination process 16 (see S4112 in FIG. C3113), and the variable display setting process 16 (C3114 in FIG. 415) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 59), and illustration thereof is omitted. Note that other processes in the main process are executed in the same manner, so the same reference numerals as in the main process (see FIG. 59) in the first embodiment are given, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the sixteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 363, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) and the normal symbol variation (general symbol variation ), and the normal figure fluctuation production according to ) are configured to be executable.

Then, the normal pattern fluctuation performance is configured to be executed as a series of performances in which a series of performances are executed across the normal pattern fluctuation period, the normal pattern per game period, the special pattern 2 fluctuation period, and the small per pattern game period. there is By configuring in this way, the game when winning a specific normal pattern (per normal pattern long open) by the normal pattern lottery, that is, the ball during the normal pattern long open per game Wins the second winning port 640 Then, a small win is won by a special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning, and a big win game is executed by the ball passing through a specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small win game. The flow can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the performance mode of the series of performances.

In addition, the series of effects described above, the execution period is greatly different depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a special figure 1 fluctuation) at the time of winning the ball in the second winning port 640 during the game per normal long open, It is configured to set different performance modes according to the game situation (presence or absence of special figure 1 fluctuation) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning hole 640 during the long open per game. In other words, when the ball wins the second winning port 640 during the normal long open per game, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation after the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is completed Since is executed, the effect mode according to the length of the remaining variation period (standby period) of the special figure 1 variation is set. Specifically, when the waiting period is less than the predetermined period, an effect mode corresponding to the normal series of effects is set, and when the waiting period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the series of effects are pseudo-finished and are being executed. When the remaining variation period (standby period) of the special figure 1 variation reaches a specific period, a continuous series performance is set to execute a series of performances in a pseudo manner again. In this way, by configuring the effect mode of the series of effects to be variably set in accordance with the length of the waiting period, it is possible to provide a series of effects that do not make the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to suppress the player from becoming bored with the game due to the uselessly lengthening of the performance execution period.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open game, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed, the special figure 2 immediately after the ball enters the second winning hole 640 Since variation is executed, a shortened series of effects shorter than the normal series of effects is set.

That is, the sixteenth embodiment is configured such that when the normal state is set as the game state, the game for executing the special figure 1 lottery is executed by the left-handed game, and the series of effects described above is It is executed when the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery (lottery executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67) executed during the normal state is a specific lottery result (per normal pattern long open). Since it is configured as such, while a series of effects are being executed, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed. Therefore, the usual series of productions are the normal figure fluctuation period, the normal figure per game period, the waiting period (the period to wait until the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed), the special figure 2 fluctuation period, and the small per game period. It is constructed so that it is executed straddling and the content of the effect is changed according to the stage to which each period is shifted.

Here, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure long open per game, the above-mentioned series of effects are executed Among the periods, the standby period Since does not occur, after the game period per normal figure, the special figure 2 fluctuation period will be set. While such a state can occur, regardless of the game situation (whether or not there is a special figure 1 fluctuation) at the time the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure long open game, the same production mode If it is set, an unnecessary effect (for example, an effect indicating that the standby period is in progress even though the standby period is not set) may be executed, resulting in a decrease in the effect of the effect. .

On the other hand, in this 16th embodiment, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure long open per game, during the standby period described above It is configured to execute a series of effects skipping the effects. In addition, even if the performance of the standby period is skipped, the performance mode does not give a sense of incongruity to the player when skipping from the normal figure per game period to the special figure 2 fluctuation period so that the performance effect does not decrease. is configured to be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the general pattern fluctuation production (series production) executed based on the lottery result of the general pattern lottery.

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 364, as a variation effect indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state, the first suggestion effect that suggests only the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery And, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, the judgment result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the prize information included in the special figure 2 reservation is determined in advance. Suggestive production and are configured to be executable.

Specifically, in the time saving state, it is determined whether the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) to be executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state, and the determination result is not the final variation (time saving final variation) If it is determined, the above-described first suggestion effect (see FIG. 373 (a)) is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation, and if it is determined that it is the time saving final variation, the special figure 2 The above-described second suggestive effect (see FIGS. 373(b) to 375(a)) is executed as the variable effect corresponding to the change.

By configuring in this way, in the variation performance corresponding to the final variation of the time saving, the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state and the special figure 2 lottery executed after the time saving state (after normal state transition) , Because the second suggestion effect based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) is executed, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the time saving state ends for the player is executed as if it were during the time saving state. Since the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery can be reminiscent, the winning probability (big winning probability, small winning probability) in the time saving state can be made to be higher than the actual set value.

In addition, it is easy to set a production mode (success production mode shown in FIG. 375 (a)) indicating winning in a dedicated production (for example, mission production shown in FIG. 374 (b)) executed during the time saving state Therefore, the performance effect of the dedicated performance can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, the variation time (normal state It is configured so that a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed during), and during the variation period of the special figure 2 variation, it corresponds to the short final variation It is configured to display the effect result of the second suggestive effect that is executed by doing. By configuring in this way, when the successful production is executed based on the fact that the winning information indicating the winning (small winning) winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation as the second suggestive production, the special winning small winning Until the change in FIG. 2 is stopped and displayed, the second suggestive effect can be continuously executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, the performance period of the variable performance executed corresponding to the time-saving final variation is divided into a plurality of performance periods, and each performance period is used for a different purpose. Specifically, during the first period from the execution of the time-saving final variation to the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the player acquires a large number of special figures 2 pending before the variation ends. It is configured to execute an effect (holding acquisition effect) for making the game available, and to execute the above-described second suggestion effect during a second period set after the first period.

Then, the production mode of the second suggestive production executed during the second period of the time saving final variation is the special figure 2 at the specific timing (for example, the end timing of the first period) before the second period is set. It is configured to be set based on the number of pending and the result of prior determination.

By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state ends (when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is out), the special figure 2 lottery can be executed the maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, in the time saving final variation, it is configured to execute the pending acquisition effect and the second suggestive effect. This executes the pending acquisition effect during the special figure 2 fluctuation that is executed before the time saving final variation, and acquired the upper limit number (4) of the special figure 2 suspension while the pending acquisition effect is being executed. Even so, when the special figure 2 variation is executed as the time saving final variation, the special figure 2 reservation is subtracted, so the player is allowed to execute the special figure 2 lottery the maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. This is to solve the problem of not being able to

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, as the second suggestion effect executed in the time saving final variation, a plurality of special figure 2 lotteries that are the target of the production (special figure 2 lottery of time saving final variation, special figure 2 reservation Although it is configured to set a production mode for suggesting to the player whether or not the winning is included in the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery), it is not limited to this, and is the object of production. It may be configured to set an effect mode for suggesting and informing the player of the number of winning lottery results included in a plurality of special figure 2 lotteries. In this case, for example, as the effect mode of the second suggestive effect, the fact that at least one win is included in a plurality of special 2 lotteries to be the target of the effect, is included in the effect mode of the normal second suggestive effect. It is also possible to set a special performance mode in which the player can be informed earlier than the above, and to execute a win number suggesting performance for suggesting and informing the player of the winning number in the special performance mode. In this way, by notifying the player that the winning is included as early as possible, the player can be given a sense of security, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the effect of suggesting how many winnings are included. can.

First, the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 406 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process 16 (C3113). This command determination process 16 (C3113) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment, and is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59). This is processing for executing control according to the type of command received from the device 110 .

In the command determination process 16, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the winning information command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (C3201). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (C3201: Yes), the winning information command process 16 is executed (C3202), and this process ends.

Here, the winning information command process 16 (C3202) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 407 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information command process 16 (C3202). This winning information command process 16 (C3202) is executed when a winning information command is received from the main controller 110 during the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. A process for storing the information included in the received prize information command in the corresponding area (reserved storage area corresponding to the prize information command) of the prize information storage area 223la provided in the RAM 223 is executed.

The information included in the winning information command includes information on the result of win/fail judgment, information on the stop type, information on the variation pattern, and the pattern type (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) corresponding to the winning information this time. However, other information may be included, for example, winning information on already winning balls (for which a winning information command has been received in the past) may be included. In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the 16th embodiment, since the main control device 110 is configured to set the winning information command for indicating the prefetch result of the normal symbol (see FIG. 398), In the winning information storage area 223la, in addition to an area for storing special symbol winning information, an area for storing normal symbol winning information is also formed.

When the winning information command process 16 (C3202) is executed, first, the information (prefetch information) of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223la (C3401), and the winning status determination process (C3402) is executed. Execute. As described above, the winning information storage area 223la stores up to four winning information commands for the first special symbol (special figure 1), up to four winning information commands for the second special symbol (special figure 2), It is configured to be able to store up to 4 prize winning commands of normal symbols, totaling 12 prize winning information commands, and the prize winning information commands are stored in a designated storage area in accordance with the order in which the prize winning information commands are received. .

Here, the winning status determination process (C3402) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 408 is a flow chart showing the details of the prize winning status determination process (C3402). This winning status determination process (C3402) is a process executed in the winning information command process 16 (C3202) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the winning information of the normal pattern (normal pattern) A game state at the time of receiving a command is discriminated, a process for setting a different performance mode based on the discrimination result, and a proper game (left-handed game) is discriminated in a normal state. process is executed.

In the winning status determination process (C3402), first, the presence or absence of the general figure winning (whether the winning information command received this time is a command corresponding to the general figure) is determined (C3451). If it is determined that it is not a normal figure winning (C3451: No), the process proceeds to C3458, which will be described later. If it is determined that it is a normal figure winning (C3451: Yes), then read the current game state from the state storage area 223lh provided in the RAM 223 (C3452), and determine whether the game state is a normal state (C3453). When it is determined that the game state is not the normal state (C3453: No), that is, when it is determined that it is the time-saving state, this processing is terminated as it is, and the processing returns to the winning information command processing 16.

On the other hand, in the processing of C3453, if it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C3453: Yes), then it is determined whether the current first special symbol (special figure 1) is fluctuating (C3454 ). Here, by determining whether the value of the special figure variation time counter 223 ln corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is greater than 0, it is determined whether the current special figure 1 variation is in progress. If it is determined that the current is not during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (C3454: No), it is in a state where the normal figure fluctuation is executed in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed during the normal state, so in RAM223 The provided non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223lm is set to ON (C3455), and the process proceeds to C3458.

By setting the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223lm to ON in the processing of C3455, it is possible to memorize that the winning information command of the normal figure has been received during the normal state and during the special figure 1 non-fluctuation, this time When the general pattern fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the general pattern winning information command is received, by determining the setting status of the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223lm, the special figure 1 at the time of general pattern winning (passing through gate 67) It is possible to set different variable performance modes according to the variable situation.

In the sixteenth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 406, the processing (C3203, C3203 in FIG. 406, C3204) is prioritized to execute the processing (C3201, C3202 in FIG. 406) to be executed when the winning information command is received.

Here, in the external output process (C1001 in FIG. 403) of the main process (see FIG. 403) of the main control device 110, the winning information command for the normal figure winning and the variation pattern command for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) And, even if is output in the same process, specifically, when the normal pattern winning occurs in a state where the normal pattern fluctuation is not executed, the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 (Fig. The winning information command is set in the processing of C105 of 389), and the variation pattern command is set in the processing of C104 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 389) which is executed next (after 2 milliseconds). . Then, in the processing (external output processing) of C1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 403) of the main controller 110 executed every 4 milliseconds, a command that can be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is output. From, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt processing and the execution timing of the main processing, when the winning information command for the general figure winning prize and the variation pattern command are output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same processing There is

In such a case, in the sixteenth embodiment, in the command determination processing (see C3113 in FIG. 406) of the audio ramp control device 113, the winning information command processing 16 (C3202 in FIG. 407), the variation pattern command processing 16 (see FIG. 409 C3204), so even if the winning information command and the variation pattern command are output at the same time from the main controller 110, when setting the variation pattern of the normal figure variation, at the time of non-fluctuation The setting status of the winning flag 223lm can be used for determination without missing.

In the process of C3454, if it is determined that the current special figure 1 is fluctuating (C3454: Yes), then it is determined whether the variation time of special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456) . If it is determined that the variation time of special figure 1 is not 30 seconds or more (C3456: No), then the process proceeds to C3458.

In the process of C3456, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456: Yes), set the display command indicating the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information (C3457), then C3458 to process.

When proceeding to the process of C3458, it determines whether the winning information command received this time is the winning information command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) (C3458), and determines that it is the winning information command of special figure 1 If so (C3458: Yes), then it is determined whether the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223lm is set to ON (C3459), and if it is determined to be set to ON (C3459: Yes), non- The variable winning flag 223lm is set to OFF (C3460), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C3458, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information command of the special figure 1 (C3458: No), whether the information indicating that the left-handed game is performed is received Determine (C3461). In the process of C3461, for example, it is determined whether winning information indicating winning of a ball to each winning hole (general winning hole 63) provided in the left game area of the game board 13 is received.

In the process of C3461, when it is determined that the left-handed game is detected (C3461: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described C3459 process, and when it is determined that the left-handed game is not detected (C3461: No), This process is terminated as it is.

As described above, the 16th embodiment determines whether the special figure 1 variation is executed at the time of the normal figure winning (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the special figure 1 variation is performed. When it is determined that there is no change, the non-fluctuation prize winning flag 223lm for indicating that is set to ON. In addition, when receiving information indicating that the special figure 1 winning or left-handed game is performed while the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm is set to ON, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm is set to OFF It is configured to

And, although the details will be described later, when the normal pattern long fluctuation is executed in a state where the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223lm is set to ON, the fluctuation production (series production) corresponding to the normal pattern long fluctuation configured not to run.

By configuring in this way, in the state where the normal state is set, the game situation where the normal figure fluctuation is executed without performing the left-handed game (through-gate provided in the right-hand side game area by the right-handed game 67), and in that case, it is possible to prevent the execution of the variation production corresponding to the normal pattern long fluctuation (the production suggesting that the normal pattern per game is executed). .

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, even if the left-handed game is properly executed, depending on the winning condition of the ball to the first winning opening 64, special figure 1 Since there is a case where the variation is not executed, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm which is set to ON at the time of the normal drawing winning can be set to OFF by the left-handed game. As a result, for example, by executing a left-handed game within a predetermined period from the normal figure winning to the start of the normal figure fluctuation, the variation production corresponding to the normal figure long fluctuation (the normal figure per game is executed It is possible to execute normally. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the setting of an effect mode that is disadvantageous to a player who is playing a proper game.

In addition, as long as it is possible to determine that a proper game (a left-handed game in a normal state) is being performed, it is not limited to the configuration of the sixteenth embodiment described above. It may be possible to determine whether a left-handed game is being executed based on the resistance value (fire intensity) of a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation by the change in electrical resistance, or the game board 13 Detecting means for detecting passage of balls is provided in a part of the left game area (upstream area where most of the balls flowing down the left game area pass), and a left-handed game is executed based on the detection result in the detecting means. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether the

Further, in the sixteenth embodiment described above, a configuration for determining whether or not a left-handed game is being executed is used, but not limited to this, a configuration for determining whether or not a right-handed game is being executed Use, in a state where it is determined that the right-handed game is being executed, when the predetermined normal pattern fluctuation (normal pattern long fluctuation) is executed, the variation production corresponding to the normal pattern long fluctuation (normal pattern per game It may be configured to limit the execution of the effect suggesting that the is executed). In this case, as a configuration for determining that the right-handed game is being executed, when it is detected that the ball has passed through a predetermined area (for example, through gate 67) provided in the right game area A configuration that determines that a right-handed game is being executed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 or the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) by changes in electrical resistance It may be configured to be able to determine whether a right-handed game is being executed based on the resistance value (firing intensity).

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the player is executing a proper game in the period from the normal pattern winning to the start of the normal pattern fluctuation. However, without being limited to this, the period used for determining whether or not a proper game is being executed (determination target period) may be set longer. In this case, for example, a game situation storage means capable of temporarily storing the game situation is provided, and the game situation (past history) indicating whether or not the player is playing a left-handed game is stored in the game situation storage means. It is preferable to configure so as to determine whether or not the regular pattern has been won during a proper game based on the game situation stored in the game situation storage means at the timing of the regular pattern winning.

Furthermore, as a winning information command (normal drawing winning information command) set when a normal drawing winning is performed, a winning information command indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 disposed in the left game area Winning information command) and the normal figure winning information command (right normal figure winning information command) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 arranged in the right game area are identified by the audio lamp control device 113 side. Based on the type of the received general pattern winning information command and the game situation, the execution limit of the variation production corresponding to the general pattern long fluctuation (the production that suggests that the game per normal pattern is executed) may be configured to be variably set.

Returning to FIG. 407, the description continues. As information (prefetch information) included in the winning information command received this time, it is determined whether or not there is special 2 winning information (C3403). In the process of C3403, if it is determined that there is no special 2 winning information (C3403: No), then the process proceeds to C3406. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is special 2 winning information (C3403: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time saving final variation flag 223lk provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C3404). When it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223lk is off (C3404: No), the process of C3405 is skipped and the process proceeds to C3406.

When it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223lk is ON in the process of C3404 (C3404: Yes), the information indicating the hit notification is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223la (C3405), and then the process of C3406 is performed. do.

In the process of C3406, the effect mode related to the other winning information is set (C3406), the display command for showing the set effect mode is set (C3407), then this process is terminated and the command determination process 16 is returned to.

In the present embodiment, a specific effect set at the beginning of the variable display (for example, a specific effect (specific effect C) executed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) is replaced with a specific effect set in another period (for example, a variable It is stipulated to be an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is higher than a specific effect executed 20 seconds after the start. In other words, the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is stipulated so that the variation pattern capable of executing the specific effect C is more likely to be selected.

As a result, when the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays, the player can be made to have a higher expectation of winning a big prize in the next and subsequent variations. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player ambitiously accumulate special symbols so that a suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, based on the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing of receiving the winning information command (remaining period of the variable display being executed), a plurality of variable displays are displayed. , but other configurations may be used, for example, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). may be determined whether or not to be executed, and if it is determined to be executed, an omen effect is executed as a suggestive effect, and at the timing of starting the next variable display, a specific effect may be set. , a specific effect is set based on the contents of the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the period in which the portent effect is being executed (the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Also good. By configuring in this way, based on the game situation after the suggestive effect is started (the lottery result of the next change, the variation pattern, or the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22)), the suggestive effect is produced. Aspects can be set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the presentation as compared with the configuration in which the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is determined in advance and then executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as an example of executing the suggestive effect across a plurality of variable displays, the variable display being executed and the variable display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variable display are displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of variable display, the suggestive effect may be executed so as to extend from the variable display being executed to the variable display that is executed one after another, or it will be executed one after another from the variable display that is executed next time. A suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display being executed), it is determined whether the timing of executing the suggestive effect is set to the variable display being executed or to the next variable display. It is good to have a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the sound lamp control device 113. For example, the number of pending balls of special symbols is displayed in the pending display area. In Dn4, in order to suggest a pending display (a pending pattern) corresponding to winning information indicating a big hit, a pending change notice effect for changing the display mode of the pending display is set, or a special pattern corresponding to winning information indicating a big win is set. It is referred to when setting a continuous advance notice effect that makes a big hit expected as a special symbol effect that starts to change before.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is referred to at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot, and the winning information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. (whether or not there is an on-hold renso), and based on the result of the determination, an effect is set during the jackpot game or after the jackpot ends. In addition, even in the continuous effect executed during the variable probability state, the content of the effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when an effect (read-ahead effect) referring to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is being executed, a flag ( For example, when the prefetching effect in progress flag) is set to ON and the prefetching effect in progress flag is set to ON, when a new prize information command is received, the winning prize included in the prize information command is displayed. It is configured so that a new look-ahead effect based on information is not executed. This suppresses the occurrence of the problem that a plurality of look-ahead effects are continuously executed without an interval, giving the player a sense of discomfort.

It should be noted that control other than the contents described above may be used to solve the above-described problem. Comparing the priority rank of the pre-reading effect currently being given and the priority rank of the pre-reading effect that can be set based on the prize information included in the new prize information command, the pre-reading effect with the higher priority rank may be controlled to execute In this case, when it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead performance is higher, the look-ahead performance switching notification is executed to notify the player that the look-ahead performance being executed will end in the middle. After that, a new look-ahead effect is executed, or a new look-ahead effect is executed after changing the effect mode of the look-ahead effect being executed to a shortened look-ahead effect mode earlier than the end timing initially set. You can

Further, as the priority rank of the look-ahead effect, the priority rank of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest. should be set to be high. Thus, when the read-ahead performance being executed ends in the middle, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the big win, and can be made to pay attention to the new read-ahead performance to be executed next.

Returning to FIG. 406, the description continues. In the process of C3201, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (C3201: No), then it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3203). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (C3203: Yes), variation pattern command processing 16 is executed (C3204), and then the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted in the variation pattern command process 16 is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to in order to determine the detailed display mode of the variation pattern in the variation display setting process 16 (see FIG. 415) described later. . Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. In addition, in this 16th embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set a variation pattern for special symbols (special symbols) and a variation pattern for normal symbols (general figure), this time It is determined whether the received variation pattern command is for a special figure or for a normal figure, and processing based on the determination result is also executed.

Here, the variation pattern command process 16 (C3204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 409 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variation pattern command process 16 (C3204). This variation pattern command process 16 (C3204) is executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. is.

In the variation pattern command process 16 (C3204), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is not a special figure variation pattern command (C3301: No), skip the processes of C3302 and C3303 and proceed to the process of C3304. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301: Yes), the variation start flag 223ld for special figures provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON ( C3302), extracts the variation pattern from the received special figure variation pattern command (C3303), and then proceeds to the process of C3304.

In the process of C3304, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is the normal figure variation pattern command (C3304). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is not the normal figure variation pattern command (C3304: No), skip the processes of C3305 and C3306 and return to the command determination process 16.

On the other hand, in the process of C3304, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is the variation pattern command for the normal figure (C3304: Yes), the variation start flag 223ld for the normal figure provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3305), a variation pattern is extracted from the received normal figure variation pattern command (C3306), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to command determination process 16.

Returning to FIG. 406, the description continues. In the processing of C3203, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (C3203: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3205). When the stop type command is received (C3205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223le of the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3206), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (C3207), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the later-described variable display setting process 16 (see FIG. 415) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C3205 that the stop type command has not been received (C3205: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (C3208). Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command is received (C3208: Yes), the pending ball number is extracted from the received pending ball number command, and the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is generated. Store the value contained in the reserved ball number command received from the special symbol reserved ball number counter or the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf (C3209), and then return to the main process. Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld of the main controller 110 from the received reserved ball number command A value (number N1 of suspension of variable display in special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 223lb provided in RAM 223 of audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the reserved ball number command received this time is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le of the main controller 110 (special The holding number N2 of the variable display in the symbol 2) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223lc provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to FIG. 406, the description continues. In the process of C3208, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (C3208: No), then it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (C3210), and if a hit-related command has been received (C3210: Yes), the hit related command process 16 (C3211) is executed, and after the end of the hit related command process 16 (C3211), this process ends.

Here, the contents of the win-related command process 16 (C3211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 410 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related command process 16 (C3211). The hit-related command process 16 (C3211) is a process executed in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In the hit-related command process 16, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3501). And when it determines with having received the jackpot related command (C3501: Yes), a jackpot related command process is performed (C3502), and after that, it transfers to the process of C3503.

Here, the contents of the jackpot related command process (C3502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 411 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command process (C3502). The jackpot-related command process (C3502) is a process executed in the win-related command process 16 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the jackpot-related command process (C3502), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3601). When it is determined that an opening command has been received (C3601: Yes), the display opening command process is executed (C3602), and then the process proceeds to C3608.

The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

In the processing of C3601, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (C3601: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (C3603). Here, when the round number command is received (C3603: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (C3604), and then the round number command for display is set according to the round number extracted this time. (C3605), and then proceeds to the processing of C3608. The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the 16th embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed in a state where a predetermined continuous condition is established, the round game executed in the previous jackpot game The number is configured to accumulate and display the number of round games of the jackpot game to be executed this time. Specifically, the period during which the time saving state is set, and after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state, the period flag is set to ON for the period until the special figure 1 variation is executed is provided. Then, when the jackpot game is started, it is determined whether the period flag is set to ON, and when it is determined that it is set to ON, the number of round games executed in the previous jackpot game (Number of rounds) is configured to accumulate and display the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C3603 that the round number command has not been received (C3603: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from main controller 110 (C3606). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (C3606: Yes), the display ending command is set (C3607), and then the process proceeds to C3608. The ending command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

In the process of C3606, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (C3606: No), the process proceeds to C3608. In the process of C3608, the process according to other commands is executed (C3608), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the win-related command process 16.

Returning to FIG. 410, the description continues. In the process of C3501, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3501: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit related command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3503). And, when it is determined that the small hit related command is received (C3503: Yes), the small hit related command process is executed (C3504), and then the process proceeds to C3505.

Here, the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504) will be described with reference to FIG. 412(a). FIG. 412(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504). The small hit related command process (C3504) is a process executed in the hit related command process 16 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the small hit related command process (C3504), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223li provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C3701). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (not on) (C3701: No), the normal small winning process is executed (C3702), then this process is terminated and the process returns to the winning related command process 16. .

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the effect mode when the small winning game is executed is configured to be variably set according to whether the small winning game execution timing is in the middle of a series of effects. . That is, when a small winning game is executed during a series of productions, a small winning game production (see FIG. 370) is executed as part of the series of productions. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Here, the contents of the normal small winning process (C3702) will be described with reference to FIG. 412(b). FIG. 412(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal small winning process (C3702). The normal small hit process (C3702) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the normal small winning process (C3702), first, it is determined whether or not a small winning start command is received from the main controller 110 (C3801). Then, when it is determined that the small hit start command is received (C3801: Yes), the display small hit start command is set (C3802), and then this process is terminated to return to the small hit related command process.

In the process of C3801, if it is determined that the small winning start command has not been received (C3801: No), then it is determined whether or not the small winning end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3803). . When it is determined that the small hit end command is received (C3803: Yes), the small hit end command for display is set (C3804), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

In the processing of C3803, if it is determined that the small winning end command has not been received (C3803: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3805). When it is determined that the V passing command is received (C3805: Yes), the V passing command for display is set (C3806), and then this process is terminated to return to the small hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the description is continued. If it is determined that the series production flag 223li is ON in the process of C3701 (C3701: Yes), since the small winning game of this time is a small winning game executed during the series production, the series production small winning process is executed. Execute (C3703), then terminate this process and return to the win-related command process 16.

Here, the contents of the small winning process for a series of effects (C3703) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 413 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning process for a series of effects (C3703). A small hit process for a series of effects (C3703) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the small winning process for a series of effects (C3703), first, it is determined whether or not a small winning start command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3901). Then, when it is determined that the small hit start command is received (C3901: Yes), the series production hit start command is set (C3902), and then this process is terminated to return to the small hit related command process.

In the processing of C3901, when it is determined that the command to start the small hit has not been received (C3901: No), next, it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3903). When it is determined that the V passing command has been received (C3903: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the small hit caution flag 223ll provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C3904). When it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is off (C3904: No), the V effect command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3905), and then this process is terminated to return to the small hit related command process.

Here, the small winning attention flag 223ll indicates that the ball has passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, even though the small winning game is being executed. A flag that is set on if not. In the 16th embodiment, the game board 13 is configured so that it takes about 1 second for the ball fired in the right-handed game to reach the V winning device 650. When performing a right-handed game based on the execution of the game, the small hit caution flag 223ll is configured not to be set to ON.

On the other hand, if a left-handed game is played without noticing that a small winning game is being executed, or an inappropriate game is performed in which the number of balls fired during the small winning game is intentionally reduced (including 0). If it is, the ball may not pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a after 3 seconds from the start of the small winning game, so the small winning caution flag 223ll is turned on. Easier to set. By setting this small hit attention flag 223ll to ON, the emphasis guide display (see FIG. 371 (a)) for making the player play the right-handed game on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. be done. Also, at the timing when the ball passes through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a, different display modes are set depending on whether the small hit caution flag 223ll is set to ON or OFF. For example, when the V passing command is received in a state where the small hit caution flag 223ll is set to ON, in the next small hit game, a guidance effect for quickly performing the right-handed game is executed.

In the process of C3904, if it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is ON (C3904: Yes), set a special V effect command for a series of effect display (C3906), then finish this process and small hit Return to related command processing. The special V effect command for displaying a series of effects set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 and executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). Inside, it is sent to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the special V effect command for displaying a series of effects, the third symbol display device 81, as part of the series of effects, indicates that the timing at which the ball passed through the V in the small winning game this time was late. The V effect including the effect mode shown (for example, the comment "Let's hit the right sooner next time") is started.

On the other hand, in the process of C3903, if it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (C3903: No), then it is determined whether or not the small winning end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3907 ). If it is determined that the small hit end command is received (C3907: Yes), then it is determined whether there is V passage (C3908), and if it is determined that there is V passage (C3908: Yes), a series of effects A small hit end command for display is set (C3909), after that, the small hit caution flag 223ll is set to OFF (C3912), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

On the other hand, in the process of C3908, if it is determined that there is no V passage (C3908: No), a display command indicating the end of the series of effects is set (C3910), the series of effects flag 223li is set to off (C3911), The small hit attention flag 223ll is set to OFF (C3912), after that, this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

That is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area in the small winning game during the series of effects, it is not possible to display the effect result indicating the occurrence of the big winning game as the effect result of the series of effects, so the end of the series of effects ( Failure) is set (see FIG. 371(b)). Also, when it is determined that the small hit end command is not received in the process of C3907 (C3907: No), then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 410, the description continues. In the process of C3503, if it is determined that the small hit related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3503: No), then whether or not the general figure per related command has been received from the main controller 110 Determine (C3505). Then, when it is determined that the per-universal figure related command is received (C3505: Yes), the display command corresponding to the per-universal figure related command is set (C3506), and then this process is terminated to determine the command Return to process 16.

Returning to FIG. 406, the description continues. In the processing of C3210, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3210: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3212). If it is determined that a state command has been received (C3212: Yes), the current game state is extracted from the received command, stored in the state storage area 223lh (C3213), and a state command for display is set (C3214). , and then terminate this process.

In the processing of C3212, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (C3212: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (C3215), and if the stop command has been received (C3215: Yes ), the stop command process 16 (C3216) is executed, and after the stop command process 16 ends, this process ends.

Here, the contents of stop command processing 16 (C3216) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing 16 (C3216). The stop command process 16 (C3216) is a process executed in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In the stop command process 16, first, it is determined whether the special figure stop command is received (C3951), and if it is determined that the special figure stop command is received (C3951: Yes), then the special figure fluctuation time counter The value of 223ln is reset to 0 (C3952), and it is determined whether the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to ON (C3953).

In the process of C3953, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to ON (C3953: Yes), the stop command received this time is a special figure that executes a series of effects as a variation effect of the special figure deviation fluctuation Since it is a fluctuation, the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to OFF (C3954), and the process proceeds to S3955. On the other hand, in the process of C3953, when it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is not set to ON (C3953: No), the process of C3954 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C3955.

In the process of C3955, it is determined whether the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is set to ON (C3955), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (C3955: Yes), the re-read-ahead flag is set to ON (C3956 ), the time saving final fluctuation flag is set to OFF (C3957), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C3955, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223lk is not set to ON (C3955: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 406, the description continues. In the process of C3215, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3215: No), the process corresponding to the received command is executed (C3217), and this process ends. . For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

By this processing, commands for performing various settings for the display control device 114 can be set based on commands output from the main control device 110 .

Next, the variable display setting process 16 (C3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 415 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process 16 (C3114). This variable display setting process 16 (C3114) replaces the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 59) in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. In order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

The variable display setting process 16 (C3114) of the 16th embodiment is configured to set a variable pattern command for displaying normal symbols for the variable display setting process used in each of the above-described embodiments. , and that the content of the set variable effect is changed, and the other elements (technical concept) are the same. A detailed description of the same elements (technical ideas) as those of the variable display setting process used in each of the above-described embodiments will be omitted.

In the variable display setting process 16 (C3114), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223ld provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C4001). In the process of C4001, either the fluctuation start flag 223ld for the special figure or the fluctuation start flag 223ld for the normal figure in the process of C3302 and C3305 of the above-described fluctuation pattern command process 16 (see C3204 in FIG. 409) is set to on.

Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223ld is not on (that is, the fluctuation start flag 223ld for the special figure and the fluctuation start flag 223ld for the normal figure are both off) (C4001: No), the main control Since no variation pattern command has been received from the device 110, the process proceeds to C4006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223ld is ON (C4001: Yes), the corresponding fluctuation start flag 223ld is set to OFF (C4002), then C3303 of the fluctuation pattern command processing 16 (see FIG. 409) And in the process of C3306, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4003), and the variation effect setting process is executed (C4004). Details of the variable effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type and the variation pattern set in the variation effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 416), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (C4005). After that, the processing shifts to C4006. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

In the processing of C4006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223le provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C4006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223le is not ON (that is, is OFF) (C4006: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223le is on (C4006: Yes), the corresponding stop type selection flag 223le is turned off (C4007), and then in command determination processing 16 (C3207 in FIG. 406) , the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (C4009), and the process proceeds to C4010. In the processing of C4010, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (C4010). , and then terminate this process. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 416, the variation effect setting process (C4004) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 416 is a flow chart showing this variable effect setting process (C4004). This variable effect setting process (C4004) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 16 (see FIG. 415) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the special symbol variable effect mode, Alternatively, a process for setting a normal pattern variation effect mode is executed.

In the fluctuation production setting process (C4004), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation production setting process of this time sets the fluctuation production of the special symbol fluctuation (special figure fluctuation) (C4101). In the processing of this C4101, in the processing of C4001 of the variable display setting processing 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415), when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223ld is set to ON, this time fluctuation effect setting processing Determines that is to set the variation effect of the special figure variation. Here, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation production is not set (set the normal figure fluctuation production) (C4101: No), the normal figure production setting process is executed (C4117), and then this process is terminated . Details of the general pattern effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect based on is executed.

In the process of C4101, if it is determined to set the special figure fluctuation effect (C4101: Yes), read the information indicating the game state stored in the state storage area 223lh (C4102), the current game state is normal state It is determined whether there is (C4103). When it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (it is a time saving state) (C4103: No), a time saving effect setting process is executed (C4104), and then the process proceeds to C4116. Production setting processing for time reduction (C4104) is processing for setting the production mode of the variable production to be executed in the time reduction state. A detailed description of this time saving effect setting process (C4104) will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4103, if it is determined that the game state is the normal state (C4103: Yes), it is determined whether the re-prefetching flag 223lr is set to ON (C4105), and the re-prefetching flag 223lr is ON. If it is determined that it is set (C4105: Yes), that is, the current variation production is a variation production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the time saving state ends, and during the time saving state If there is a special figure 2 suspension in which the look-ahead result is not reflected in the time saving final variation performance executed in the time saving final variation among the special figure 2 suspension acquired in , the winning stored in the winning information storage area 223la Of the information (winning information corresponding to special figure 2), extract the winning information (winning information corresponding to special figure 2) that has not been prefetched (C4106), and hit the winning information in the extracted winning information It is determined whether or not there is winning information included (C4107).

In the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is winning information including winning information (C4107: yes), a display command for replacing the result display mode of the time-saving variation effect with the recovery winning display mode is set (C4108) , the re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to OFF (C4109), and the process proceeds to C4110. On the other hand, in the process of C4105, if it is determined that the re-read-ahead flag 223lr is not set to ON (C4105: No), the variable production setting process of this time is executed at the timing of changing the result display mode of the time-saving variable production. Therefore, the processing from C4106 to C4109 is skipped, and the processing shifts to C4110. Also, in the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is no winning information including winning information in the extracted winning information (C4107: No), the variable effect setting process of this time changes the result display mode of the time-saving variable effect. However, the condition for changing the result display mode (including that the new prefetch result is a hit) is not satisfied, so the process of C4108 is skipped, the process of C4109 is executed, and the process of C4110 is performed. Move to

In the process of C4110, it is determined whether the current time is within the extended display period of the time-saving variable effect executed during the time-saving state (C4110), and the game result during the extended display period, that is, during the time-saving state is displayed. If it is determined that the end screen (see FIG. 377) is displayed (C4110: Yes), this process is terminated without setting the variation effect corresponding to the variation. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the extended display period (C4110: No), next, based on the variation pattern acquired in the process of C4003 in FIG. 415, whether the current variation pattern is a winning variation pattern is discriminated (C4111).

In the process of C4111, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the winning variation pattern (C4111: Yes), the winning variation effect setting process is executed (C4112), and then the process proceeds to C4116. In this hit variation effect setting process (C4112), the process of determining whether or not to execute a series of effects as this special figure variation effect, and when a series of effects are executed as a normal figure variation effect, the series of effects A performance result replacement process is executed. The hit variation effect setting process (C4112) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of C4111, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a winning variation pattern (C4111: No), then it is determined whether the series effect flag 223li is on (C4113), If it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is ON (C4113: Yes), then the process proceeds to C4116.

In the processing of C4113, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is turned off (C4113: No), based on the extracted variation pattern, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects ( C4114). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern of a series of effects (C4114: No), then the process proceeds to C4116.

On the other hand, in the process of C4114, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4114: Yes), the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to ON (C4115), and then to the process of C4116 Transition.

In the process of C4116, to set the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln (C4116), after that, to end this process and return to the fluctuation display setting process 16.

Next, with reference to FIG. 417, the normal figure effect setting process (C4117) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 417 is a flow chart showing this general-purpose drawing effect setting process (C4117). This general pattern effect setting process (C4117) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 416) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is a variable effect based on the normal pattern variation. A process for setting (a series of effects) is executed.

In the normal figure effect setting process (C4117), first, the current game state is read from the state storage area 223lh provided in the RAM 223 (C4201), and it is determined whether or not the read current game information is in the normal state. (C4202). If it is determined that the current game information is not in the normal state (C4202: No), then this processing is terminated.

In the processing of C4202, if it is determined that the current game information is in the normal state (C4202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variation time is 30 seconds or longer (C4203). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not longer than 30 seconds (C4203: No), then this processing is terminated. When it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223li is ON (C4204).

If it is determined in the process of C4204 that the series effect flag 223li is ON (C4204: Yes), then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223lm is on (C4205). is off (C4205: No), next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4206). When it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is off (C4206: No), the series effect is set (C4207), the series effect flag 223li is set to ON (C4208), and then this process ends.

In the process of C4206, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is ON (C4206: Yes), set the normal figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation time (C4209), then this process exit.

On the other hand, in the process of C4205, if it is determined that the non-fluctuation winning a prize flag 223lm is on (C4205: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is greater than 0 (C4210 ), If it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223 ln is not greater than 0 (is 0) (C4210: No), when the normal figure fluctuation is executed in a state where the special figure fluctuation is not executed Therefore, this process is terminated as it is without setting the normal pattern fluctuation effect for showing the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation is not executed, it is configured not to set the normal figure fluctuation effect, but not limited to this, for example, the normal figure fluctuation effect may be configured to execute a normal pattern variation effect to be executed at different timings, and based on the normal pattern variation effect to be executed, the electric accessory 640a is long open according to the lottery result of the current normal pattern lottery. It is only necessary to configure the timing to make it difficult for the player to easily determine the timing.

In the process of C4210, if it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is greater than 0 (C4210: Yes), set the special series effect (C4211), set the series effect flag 223li to ON (C4212 ), and then terminate this process.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, in the case where normal figure fluctuation time is a predetermined time (30 seconds) or more, based on the execution situation of a series of effects, and the situation of special figure fluctuation during execution It is configured to set the normal figure fluctuation production (normal figure production). By configuring in this way, when an effect that makes it easy to inform the player of the lottery result that is advantageous to the player is executed as a special figure variation effect for displaying the lottery result of the special figure variation, the normal figure effect is that. It is possible to suppress the situation of hindering the special figure fluctuation performance, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to Drawing 418, production setting processing for time saving (C4104) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 418 is a flow chart showing this effect setting process for time saving (C4104). This production|presentation setting processing for time saving (C4104) is performed in the fluctuation|variation production|presentation setting processing (refer FIG. 416) performed by MPU221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113. FIG.

In the production setting process for time saving (C4104), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation of this time is the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (C4301). If it is determined that the special figure variation of this time is not the variation of the special figure 2 (C4301: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special figure variation of this time is the variation of the special figure 2 (C4301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special figure variation of this time is the time saving final variation (C4302). If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation of this time is not the time saving final fluctuation (C4302: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation of this time is the final time saving change (C4302: Yes), the time saving final change flag 223lk is set to ON (C4303), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read. (C4304), based on the lottery result of the variation and the lottery result included in the winning information, the variation pattern of the final variation is set (C4305), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 419, the hit variation effect setting process (C4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 419 is a flow chart showing this winning variation effect setting process (C4112). This hit variation effect setting process (C4112) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 416) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

In the hit variation effect setting process (C4112), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223li is ON (C4401). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4401: No), next, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern of the series effect (C4402). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern for a series of effects (C4402: No), this processing is terminated. When it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for a series of effects (C4402: Yes), the series of effects flag 223li is set to ON (C4403), and then this process is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4401, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is ON (C4401: Yes), the fluctuation stop timing and the series effect branch timing are analyzed (C4404), and then the result can be replaced. It is determined whether or not there is (C4405). If it is determined that the result cannot be replaced (C4405: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the result can be replaced (C4405: Yes), a replacement command for display indicating a change pattern for replacing the effect result of the series of effects is set (C4406), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 420, the effect update process 16 (C3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 420 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 16 (C3112). This effect update process 16 (C3112) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of the fluctuation of the special symbol. This is a process for setting the effect to be displayed.

When the effect update process 16 (C3112) is executed, first, the values of various variable time counters are updated (C4501), and then it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223li is ON (C4502). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4502: No), then it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4504). When it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is off (C4504: No), the process proceeds to C4505.

In the process of C4502, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is ON (C4502: Yes), and if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is ON in the process of C4504 (C4504: Yes), the series Effect update processing is executed (C4503), and then the process proceeds to C4505. Further, the details of the series of effect update processing will be described later with reference to the processing in FIG. 421 .

In the process of C4505, it is determined whether or not the time saving final variation flag 223lk is ON (C4505). When it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223lk is ON (C4505: Yes), the final variation effect update process is executed (C4506), and the process proceeds to C4507.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4505, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223lk is ON (C4505: Yes), other effect update processing is executed (C4507), and then this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 421, a series of effects update processing (C4503) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 421 is a flow chart showing this series of effect update processing (C4503). This series of effect update processing (C4503) is executed in the effect update processing 16 (see FIG. 420) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the series effect update process (C4503), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the value of the series effect counter is updated (C4603), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the series effect counter is 0. (C4604). When it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the process proceeds to C4605. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4604: Yes), the series effect flag 223li is set to ON (C4612), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4601, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601: Yes), set the value corresponding to the current series effect to the series effect counter (C4602), and proceed to the process of C4605. Transition.

In the process of C4605, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in the normal game (C4605). When it is determined that the game is currently per normal pattern (C4605: Yes), update processing during game per normal pattern is executed (C4606), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4605, if it is determined that the game is not currently in the normal pattern (C4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal pattern per game has ended (C4607). It is determined whether or not the normal figure per game has ended (C4607). When it is determined that the normal pattern per game has not ended (C4607: No), the process proceeds to C4609. When it is determined that the normal figure per game has ended (C4607: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the special 2 winning flag is ON (C4608). When it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is off (C4608: No), the series effect flag 223li is set to on (C4612), and then this process is terminated. In the process of C4608, when it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is ON (C4608: Yes), the process proceeds to C4609.

In the process of C4609, it is determined whether or not a small winning game is currently being played (C4609). When it is determined that the game is currently playing a small hit (C4609: Yes), update processing during a small hit game is executed (C4610), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4609, if it is determined that the current small winning game is not in progress (C4609: No), the display command corresponding to the value of the series effect counter is set (C4611), and then this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 422, the contents of the update process (C4606) during the game per normal pattern executed in the series of effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 421) will be described. FIG. 422 is a flow chart showing the contents of the per normal game update process (C4606). In this general pattern per game update process (C4606), the player is alerted when the ball does not win the second winning hole 640 for a predetermined period of time despite being in the general pattern per game. The process to do is executed.

When the per normal game update process (C4606) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (C4701), and it is determined that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640. If it does (C4701: No), then it is determined whether 1 second has passed from the start of the game per normal pattern (C4702). Here, if it is determined that one second has passed (C4702: Yes), a display warning command is set (C4703), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of C4702, when it is determined that the timing does not have elapsed after 1 second has elapsed since the game per normal pattern was started (C4702: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Here, in the process of C4703, when the display attention calling command is set, the attention calling screen (see FIG. 370 (a) ) is displayed. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when the normal pattern long open per game is executed as a normal pattern per game, after the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second, after a closing period of 1.5 seconds, 0.5 again It is configured to execute a normal figure winning game that opens the electric accessory 640a for a second. Then, the attention calling screen shown in FIG. 370(a) is displayed after one second has passed since the game per normal pattern is started. By configuring in this way, when a player who sees the attention calling screen plays a right-handed game, the ball shot by the right-handed game can easily enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the process of C4701, if it is determined that the ball has won the second prize winning opening 640 (the special 2 prize has been won) (C4701: Yes), a display command for indicating the special 2 prize is set ( C4704), the special 2 winning flag 223lu is set to ON (C4705), and this processing ends. Here, when the display command is set in the process of C4704, the display mode for notifying the special 2 winning is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special 2 prize has been won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 422(b), the contents of the updating process during small winning game (C4610) will be described. FIG. 422(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process during small winning game (C4610). In this small winning game update process (C4610), it is determined whether the ball has passed through a specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game, and a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed since the small winning game was started. If the ball has not passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a despite the passage of time, a process for calling the player's attention is executed.

When the update process during the small hit game (C4610) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit caution flag 223ll is set to ON (C4751), and it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is not set to ON. If so (C4751: No), then it is determined whether 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game (C4752). Here, if it is determined that 3 seconds have passed since the small winning game (C4752: Yes), it is determined whether the ball is passing through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a at the present time (C4753), and it is not passing. When it is determined (C4753: No), the small hit caution flag 223ll is set to ON (C4754), a display caution command is set (C4755), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4751, when it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is already set to ON (C4751: Yes), in the process of C4752, it is determined that it is not the timing when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit game If (C4752: No), in the processing of C4753, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a (C4753: Yes), the processing of C4754 and C4755 is skipped and this processing is performed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 423, the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506) will be described. FIG. 423 is a flow chart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506). In this final fluctuation production update process (C4506), a process for setting a fluctuation production corresponding to the final fluctuation of the time saving state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, as a variation effect in the time saving state, in addition to the first suggestion effect that suggests only the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, and the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, the special figure A second suggesting effect suggesting the result of prefetching of 2 reservations is executable, and the second suggesting effect is executed in the final change of the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in the final variation of the time saving state of this embodiment, there is also a hold acquisition effect to prompt the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit (4 pieces) during the period when the time saving state is set. It is constituted so as to be executable, so that the holding acquisition performance is executed in the first half of the fluctuation period of the final fluctuation, and the second suggestion performance (shortening final fluctuation performance) is executed in the second half. And it is configured so that the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation acquired at the end timing of the first half period is reflected in the effect result of the second suggestive effect.

By constructing in this way, after the player acquires a large number of special 2 reserves, the second suggestive performance (shortening final variable performance) reflecting the look-ahead result for the acquired special 2 reserves is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the performance mode indicating winning as the performance mode of the time-saving final variable performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, at the timing (starting timing of the first half period) until the pending acquisition effect is executed, if the number of acquired special 2 pending balls is the upper limit (4) or more, the pending acquisition effect is executed. Instead, the second suggestive effect is executed from the first half period. As a result, a useless performance for the player, that is, a suspension acquisition performance for trying to acquire the special figure 2 suspension even though the number of special figure 2 suspension balls has already reached the upper limit is executed. can be prevented, and a situation in which the player is puzzled by the contents of the performance can be suppressed. Further, by executing the second suggestive performance from the first half period, the performance period of the second suggestive performance can be lengthened, so that the second suggestive performance can be executed with more interest. Since the player can be motivated to play the game (right-handed game) in order to execute the interesting second suggestive effect, the operation of the game can be improved.

In the final variation effect update process (C4506 in FIG. 423) explained with reference to FIG. Determine the elapsed period of the final variation performance to be executed (elapsed period of special figure 2 variation), the process based on the determination result is executed. When executed in the final fluctuation performance update process (C4506), first, it is determined whether the current timing is the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801), and if it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed (C4801: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the number of special symbols 2 reserved balls (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223lc) is the upper limit value of "4" (C4802).

In the process of C4802, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (C4802: Yes), the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON (C4803), and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of C4802, if it is determined that the special figure 2 pending ball number is not "4", that is, "3" or less (C4802: No), without setting the pending upper limit flag 223ls to ON End this process.

In the processing of C4801, if it is determined that the present time is not the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: No), then it is determined whether the present time is the first period start timing (C4804), and at the first period start timing If it is determined that the If it is determined that the predetermined number (4), which is the upper limit number, of the special figure 2 reserved balls is secured (C4805: Yes), the first period and the second period are used as the time saving final fluctuation production Time saving fluctuation production is set (C4806), the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to OFF, the executed flag 223lt is set to ON (C4808), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4805, if it is determined that the pending upper limit flag 223ls is not set to ON (C4805: No), the pending ball number acquisition effect for acquiring the special figure 2 pending up to the upper limit (4) (C4809), and the present processing ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the effect executed during the first period according to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the timing when the waiting period elapses, and to provide various effects to the player. can do.

In the process of C4804, if it is determined that the current timing is not the start of the first period (C4804: No), then it is determined whether the current timing is the start of the second period (C4810). If it is determined that it is the start timing (C4810: Yes), it is determined whether the execution completion flag 223lt is set to ON (C4811).

Here, when it is determined that the executed flag 223lt is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the effect mode of the effect to be executed during the second period is set at the start timing of the first period, (C4811: Yes) Since there is no need to set a new effect mode, the executed flag 223lt is set to OFF (C4812), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4811, if it is determined that the executed flag 223lt is not set to ON (C4811: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read (C4813), The lottery result (win determination result) and the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) included in the read prize information are set (C4814) to set a display effect command indicating a time-saving variable effect (C4814), and the process ends.

Thus, not the timing of execution of the time saving final variation, at the timing after the predetermined time has elapsed since the time saving final variation is executed (timing when the second period is set), production mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 pending By setting the special figure 2 reservation ball number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223lc) that is subtracted when executing the variation, is re-added to the special figure 2 reservation look-ahead result You can set the production mode based on. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of special figures 2 pending to be read ahead, so that in the production executed during the second period (time-saving final fluctuation production), the production result indicating the hit can be easily displayed, It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In the process of C4810, if it is determined that the current timing is not the start timing of the second period (C4810: No), then it is determined whether the current timing is the end timing of the second period (C4815). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4815: Yes), it is determined whether a new Special 2 hold has been acquired during the second period (C4816), and whether a new Special 2 hold has been acquired If so (C4816: Yes), the re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to ON (C4817), and this processing ends.

Here, to explain the contents of the processing executed in C4816, the winning information storage area 223la is formed with a storage area corresponding to each symbol reservation, and in this embodiment, the first special symbol (special symbol The storage area for 1), the storage area for the second special design (special design 2), and the storage area for the normal design (general design) are the number corresponding to the upper limit reserved storage number (4) of each design. formed. Each storage area stores pre-reading information included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110, and a reference indicating whether or not the pre-reading result was referred to when setting various effects in the sound lamp control device 113. It is configured to store information.

That is, in the process of C4816, in addition to the special figure 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) referred to by the processing of C4806 or C4814, whether a new special 2 reservation is stored in the winning information storage area 223la is stored in each storage area It is determined based on the presence or absence of the referenced information stored, and the prefetch information is described in the storage area (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) of the winning information storage area 223la, and the referenced information When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new Special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-read-ahead flag 223lr to ON in the process of C4817, as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation to be executed next (the first special figure fluctuation after the end of the time saving), again, the special figure 2 is reserved A variable effect based on the look-ahead result of is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of C4816, if it is determined that there is no new special 2 reservation (C4816: No), all of the currently acquired special figure 2 reservation is prefetched, and the second in the effect mode based on the prefetch result Since it is the case where the time saving final variation effect during the period is being executed, the display effect result command indicating the result of the time saving change effect is set as it is (C4818), and this processing ends. In the process of C4815, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4815: No), next, display commands corresponding to other update contents are set (C4819), and this process ends. In the process of C4819, the setting of the effect mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, the update setting of the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the final variation, and the elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the final variation and the setting of the operation display mode executed based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22) during the final change.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
Next, the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 424 to 431. FIG. In the 16th embodiment described above, the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is configured to be 4 pieces, and the special figure 2 reservation that is reserved and stored when the time saving state ends and shifts to the normal state (Up to 4 pieces), it was configured to execute the special figure 2 lottery with the lottery probability of the normal state.

Furthermore, the 16th embodiment described above is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is more likely to result in a lottery result that is advantageous to the player than the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state. At the end of the game, the game was motivated to acquire a large number of special 2 reserves.

In the 16th embodiment described above, it is possible to easily acquire the maximum number of special figures 2 pending only by performing the right-handed game continuously during the final fluctuation of the time saving state, so the player can play with confidence However, it was not possible to make a difference in the number of special 2 lotteries that could be executed after the end of the time saving state, and further technical improvement was required.

On the other hand, in the seventeenth embodiment, the maximum number of held balls of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is set to "1", and the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state is short variation. A period in which time is likely to be selected can be set according to the type of the time saving state and the number of special figure fluctuations during the time saving state, and a winning game period is set as a normal figure winning game executed during the time saving state. It is configured to be able to set multiple types of long open winning games. In addition, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the end of the time saving state, it is configured to be able to set a state in which short-time fluctuation (0.1 second fluctuation) is easily set.

By configuring in this way, the number of special figure 2 lotteries that can be executed after the end of the time saving state (after setting the normal state) can be varied according to the satisfaction of various game conditions. Therefore, the player can be entertained by what kind of game conditions are satisfied when the time saving state ends.

First, referring to FIG. 424, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 424 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventeenth embodiment differs from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above in that the configuration of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is changed. are different, and otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 424, in the seventeenth embodiment, the closed state (indicated by the solid line in FIG. 424) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 640 and the open state (indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 424) in which it is easy to enter the prize. , and a variable electric accessory 640a are provided. This electric accessory 640a is different from the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 361) of the sixteenth embodiment described above, so that it becomes easier to win a plurality of balls into the second winning opening 640 when it is in an open state. is configured to Further, although detailed description is omitted, the period from passing through the electric accessory 640a in the open state to winning the second prize winning port 640 is configured to vary depending on the flow condition of the ball. For example, the ball that flows down along the structure having the second winning port 640 and reaches the vicinity of the base of the electric role object 640a (the side of the structure having the second winning port 640), and the tip of the electric role object 640a (the second The ball that reaches the vicinity of the structure having the winning opening 640 (the side away from the structure having the winning opening 640). difference is greater than 0.1 second.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning port 640 by providing a time difference of 0.1 seconds or more during the normal game in which the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the open state. can. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation when the normal state is set as the game state, the minimum fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set. there is

That is, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that the special figure 2 variation can be executed in a shorter variation time than the time lag of the occurrence of a plurality of winning balls during the game per normal figure. Therefore, even if a plurality of balls enter the second winning port 640 during one normal game, the special figure 2 lottery can be easily executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of winnings.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 424, a time lag is generated for the winning ball depending on which part of the electric accessory 640a in which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a in the open state. However, without being limited to this, for example, a plurality of openings (first opening, second opening) communicating with the second winning opening 640 are provided, and the balls that flow into each opening enter the second winning opening 640 It is configured so that the period until reaching is different by at least 0.1 seconds or more, and further, in one normal game per game, it is configured to execute a normal game per game in which each opening is opened. Also good.

By configuring in this way, during the normal game per game, the period until the ball passing through the first opening and the ball passing through the second opening at approximately the same timing reach the second winning opening 640 can be made different, it is possible to more reliably execute the special figure 2 lottery for the number of times according to the number of winnings.

In this case, an electric accessory 640a may be provided for each opening, or one electric accessory 640a may be configured to open and close a plurality of openings. .

<Regarding the contents of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment>
Next, the display contents of the display screen in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied at the timing of the end of the time saving state, a state (support state) that makes it easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery is set for a predetermined period even after the end of the time saving state. In the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation effect), it is configured to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the support state will be set after the end of the time saving.

FIG. 425(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in the time saving final variation effect during the final time saving state variation. As shown in FIG. 425(a), in the seventeenth embodiment, unlike the sixteenth embodiment described above, even in the final variation of the time saving state, a variation effect (first suggestion effect) is executed, an effect screen similar to the variable effect (see FIG. 373(a)) executed corresponding to the non-final change during the time saving state of the sixteenth embodiment is displayed. The same elements as those of the display screen of the sixteenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 373(a)) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the seventeenth embodiment, in addition to the lottery result modes 871a to 871c for the display screen of the sixteenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 373(a)), it is suggested that the support state is set after the end of the time saving. The difference is that the state suggestion mode 871d with the characters "support" is displayed. This state suggesting mode 871d is configured to be displayed more easily as the end of the time saving state approaches. An effect mode is set in which the character 851 obtains the state suggestion mode 871d. In addition, when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is hit, the effect mode to get the lottery result mode 871a to 871b indicating the win is set.

When the support state is set after the time saving state ends, the display screen shown in FIG. 425(b) is displayed. FIG. 425(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display content displayed during the support state. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the normal figure per game elected during the time saving state is a long open per game, and the long open per game is continuously executed even after the end of the time saving state, and during the normal state A support state is set when the ball can enter the second winning hole 640 .

During this support state, which is a normal state, since the ball can enter the second winning hole 640, "Right shot" is highlighted in the small display area Dm4. In the small display area Dm31, a guidance display mode is displayed to visually inform the player that the game of winning the ball in the second winning hole 640 will be performed, and in the sub display area Ds, the support state is set. A comment "Support time rushed" is displayed to indicate that the support time has been reached.

In addition, in the small display area Dm6, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 variation being executed is displayed in a variable manner, and the information indicating the number of special figure 2 variations performed during the current support state is displayed in the small display area Dm30. will be displayed as "Number of Supports". In the example shown in FIG. 425 (b), since the support state is set, since the first special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed, "support times x 1" is displayed. In the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the character 851 is about to stand up, and the comment "Do your best" is displayed. During this support state, it is configured so that a short variation (0.1 second variation) can be executed as a special figure 2 variation, and in some cases a large number of special figure 2 variations are performed. If winning is won in the special figure 2 variation in the support state, the effect that the character 851 stands up is executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the seventeenth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 426 to 429. FIG. In this embodiment, with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above, the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed, and the upper limit number of special figures 2 pending is set to 1 The difference is that the configuration of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 has been changed due to the change, and the rest is the same. is. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. Further, the detailed description of the difference of the RAM 203 is also omitted.

FIG. 426 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventeenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 426, for the 16th embodiment described above, instead of the random number 5 table 202ld per normal pattern, 6 per normal pattern table 202fd, and instead of the 16 fluctuation pattern table 202le, the 17 fluctuation pattern table 202me, The difference is that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 17 table 202mf is provided instead of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 427(a), the contents of the per normal pattern type selection 17 table 202md will be described. FIG. 427(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the per-universal pattern type selection 17 table 202md. In the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 427 (a), as per the general pattern type, per the general pattern A and B1 per the general pattern and B2 per the general pattern are provided. It differs from the selection 16 table 202ld.

Specifically, the probability state of the normal pattern is a low probability state (normal pattern low probability), and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6 is defined as "0" and "per normal pattern A", " "1 to 50" is defined as "B1 per normal figure", and "51 to 99" is defined as "B2 per normal figure". In addition, the probability state of the normal pattern is a high probability state (high probability of normal pattern), and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6 is defined as "per normal pattern A" in the range of "0, 1", "B1 per normal map" is defined in the range of "2 to 50", and "B2 per normal map" is defined in the range of "51 to 99".

Next, the relationship between the general pattern per type selected in the general pattern per type selection 17 table 202md and the game state at the time when the general pattern per game is executed, with reference to FIG. 427 (b). do. FIG. 427(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening operation contents of the electric accessory 640a based on the normal figure winning type and the game state.

In the 17th embodiment, in contrast to the 16th embodiment described above, instead of "per normal map B" as the type per normal pattern, "per normal pattern B1" and "per normal pattern B2" are provided. Although different, the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessary product 640a for the "normal hit B1" of the present embodiment are the same as the opening operation contents of the "normal hit B" of the 16th embodiment described above. A detailed description thereof is omitted.

If the type per normal pattern is "B2 per normal pattern" and the game state at the time the game per normal pattern is released is a time-saving state (high accuracy per normal pattern), the game per normal pattern is "Long The opening operation of "Opening B" is performed. When this "long opening B" is set, a normal game per game is executed in which the electric accessary 640a is opened for 1.5 seconds after a closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is defined in a normal pattern per scenario (not shown), and when executing a normal pattern per game, a normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the normal pattern per type and game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the scenario per normal pattern in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the flow of the above-described per normal pattern game.

That is, in the 17th embodiment, when winning per normal pattern during the time saving state, any normal pattern per game of "long opening A" and "long opening B" is executed as a normal pattern long opening per game. be. Even if any general pattern per game is executed, the period in which the electric accessory 640a is open is common with 1.5 seconds, and if the general pattern per game is executed during the time saving state, any It is configured to provide a state in which the same privilege can be given to the player even if the game per normal pattern is executed.

However, in "Long opening A" and "Long opening B", after the normal game is started, the electric accessary 640a is in an open state (a state where the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640). is different, and when "long open A" is set, after the normal figure per game is started, 2.6 seconds (including the opening period of 0.1 seconds) to 3.1 seconds later The electric accessory 640a is configured to open to the open state during the period of .

Therefore, just before the time-saving state ends, if you are elected per normal pattern in which the opening action of "long opening A" is executed, per normal pattern in which the opening action of "long opening B" is executed at the same timing After the time saving state ends and the normal state is set, the electric accessary product 640a can be made more likely to be in the open state than in the case of winning .

Next, with reference to FIG. 428, the contents of the normal variation pattern 17 table 202me1 included in the variation pattern 17 table 202me will be described. FIG. 428 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 17 table 202me1, and the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1 of the sixteenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 385 (b) ), the difference is that the content selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the 17th embodiment, according to the type of time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) set after the end of the jackpot, the special figure executed before the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number after the end of the jackpot It is configured such that the variation pattern (variation time) of the two variations is made different.

Specifically, when the time saving A (time saving 1 time, or time saving 99 times) is set as the time saving state, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is in the range of "1 to 99 times" in the normal state If the special figure 2 variation in is executed, the value of the variation type counter CS1 and, regardless of the result of the special figure 2 lottery, "short variation (10 seconds)" is set, "100 to 151 times" In the range, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is "out", "ultra-short out (0.1 seconds)" is "hit (jackpot, small hit)" is set to "long hit (20 seconds)", and in the range of "after the 152nd time", "short variation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery specified to be

Here, in the seventeenth embodiment, as in the sixteenth embodiment described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions (common time-saving end conditions, corresponding time-saving end conditions) are set as time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state. , for example, a time-saving state in which 99 times of working hours are set , When the small winning game is executed and the ball does not pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game and the big winning game is not executed, the common time saving end condition is established and the time saving state ends. It is configured to Therefore, even if the time saving 99 times is set, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is executed when the special figure fluctuation frequency after the end of the big hit is shifted to the second time.

As shown in Figure 428, when the time saving A is set, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "100 to 151 times" when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 0.1 second fluctuation time is configured to be set. In other words, when the time saving state is set and the time saving 99 times is completed without winning, the variation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the variation time for the special figure 2 hold stored at that time. be done. In addition, when the normal figure per game is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state, the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the normal state, and the special figure 2 fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 0.1 second is executed, even if a plurality of balls wins the second winning port 640 during the game per normal figure, the special figure 2 fluctuation of the number of times according to the number of winnings is configured to be easily executed. .

On the other hand, if the time saving state of the time saving number of times is set, even if the game per normal figure is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state, the fluctuation time of 10 seconds as a special figure 2 fluctuation Since it is set, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure per game, the special figure 2 variation is executed only the number of times with the upper limit of the number of memories of the special figure 2 reservation. are doing.

Also, if the time saving B (time saving state in which 5 times of working hours are set) is set, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is in the range of "1st to 5th" special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state is executed, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and regardless of the result of the special drawing 2 lottery, "short variation (10 seconds)" is set, and in the range of "6th to 20th", the variation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is "off", "ultra short off (0.1 seconds)" is "hit (jackpot, small hit)", "long hit ( 20 seconds)” is set, and in the range of “after the 21st time”, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the result of the special figure 2 lottery, “short variation (10 seconds)” is set. It is

As described above, in the present embodiment, three time saving states (1 time saving, 5 times saving time, 99 times saving time) in which different time saving end conditions are set, and the time saving state in which 5 times saving time is set , Time saving state in which 99 times of working hours are set, and in two types of time saving states, when the working hours saving state ends and the normal state is set by reaching the working hours saving number of times specified by the special figure fluctuation number, 0. 1 second special figure 2 variation is configured to be executable.

And 0.1 seconds set as the special figure 2 fluctuation is, as described above, from the continuous opening period (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a in the normal figure long open per game Since it is also short, it is possible to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations by winning a plurality of balls in the second winning opening 640 in one normal figure long open per game.

Therefore, according to the set time saving state and the established time saving end condition, the ease of execution of the special figure 2 lottery after the end of the time saving state can be changed, so that the player, the time saving state It is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play when the is terminated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state of one time saving is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed within the period when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is "100 to 151" In the case, that is, the time-saving state of one time-saving is completed, and then, while the normal state left-handed game is being executed, the timing of winning the normal figure long open and executing the special figure 2 lottery is When the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is ``100 to 151'', a short fluctuation of 0.1 seconds is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is lost. Therefore, it is possible to perform multiple special figure 2 fluctuations when elected per normal figure long open in the normal state.

By configuring in this way, not only after the end of the time saving state, but also at the time of winning the normal figure long open in the normal state, it is possible to set the period during which the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed, so the player On the other hand, it is possible to play a game in a normal state while being conscious of the special figure fluctuation frequency, and to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, players who have been playing for a long time can grasp the contents of the previous time-saving state (number of times of time-saving), and furthermore, the special figure 2 lottery is advantageous in the normal state long open winning. Since it is possible to predict the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed (the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game), and it is possible to play more advantageous than other players, motivation to continue playing can be raised.

In the seventeenth embodiment, when a specific time saving state is set, when the time saving state ends due to the establishment of a specific time saving end condition, a short time (0. 1 second) is configured to be selected, but not limited to this, a short time (0.1 second) according to the timing of winning per normal long open in the normal state It may be configured to separately provide a range in which the variation pattern is selected. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed when winning the normal figure long opening per time, so that the interest of the game can be improved. .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation is configured to be selected based on the type of time saving state and the number of special figure variations after the end of the jackpot game, but it is limited to this Without, for example, it may be configured to select the variation pattern of special figure 2 variation based on the type of time saving state and the number of special figure variations after the time saving state ends. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state ends under any time saving end condition, it is possible to select the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation after the time saving state ends, and it is safe for the player You can play games with your heart.

In addition, when the same type of time saving state is set, different variation patterns may be selected. Of the time saving type, only when a specific time saving type is set, it may be configured so that the special figure 2 variation for a short time (0.1 seconds) can be executed after the time saving state ends. Thereby, when the time saving state is set (when the number of remaining time saving times is grasped), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game contents after the time saving state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed, the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set, but the electric power in the game per normal figure It suffices to set a variable time shorter than the opening time of the accessory 640a, and there are multiple types of variable times (for example, 0.1 second, 0.2 second, and 0.3 second). It may be configured such that one fluctuation time is selected from among. By configuring in this way, the number of special figure 2 lotteries that can be executed during the support state by the length of the special figure 2 fluctuation time set in the state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed is variable, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the game during the support state.

Next, the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 429 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 17 table 202mf, Figure 429 (b) is a normal figure for time saving A that the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 17 table 202mf has Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202mf2, FIG. 429 (c) is defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202fe3 for time saving B having the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 17 table 202mf FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the present invention;

As shown in FIG. 429 (a), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 17 table 202mf includes the normal normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202mf1 that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the type of time saving state " It has a normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202mf2 for time saving A that is referred to when "time saving A" is set, and a normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202mf3 for time saving B that is referred to when "time saving B" is set. are doing.

For the contents defined in the normal normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202mf1, the normal state of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf in the 16th embodiment described above (normal low probability) Because it is the same as the contents referred to , the detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, the normal figure fluctuation pattern table referred to during the time saving state (normal figure high probability) is set for the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf of the sixteenth embodiment described above, and the type of time saving state and the jackpot It is different in that it is configured to vary the normal figure variation pattern selected based on the special figure variation number after the end.

Here, with reference to FIG. 429 (b), the contents defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202mf2 for time saving A will be described. This normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202mf2 for time saving A is a data table referred to when "time saving A" is set as the type of time saving state, that is, 1 time or 99 times of time saving, FIG. As shown in (b), various normal figure fluctuation patterns (variation time) are defined based on the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 98 times", and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", "short fluctuation ( 2 seconds)” is defined as “ultra-short variation (0.1 seconds)” in the range of “630 to 999”, and the number of special figure variations is “99 times”, and the acquired second When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 709", "ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is defined, and in the range of "710 to 989", "medium fluctuation (10 seconds)" is defined. and "short fluctuation (2 seconds)" is defined in the range of "990 to 999".

In other words, in the final time-saving change when one time-saving is set, 63% is configured to select 2 seconds and 37% is 0.1 seconds as the normal figure variation pattern, and 99 times of time-saving is set. In the time-saving final fluctuation in the case, as the normal figure fluctuation pattern, 71% is configured to select 0.1 seconds, 28% is 10 seconds, and 1% is configured to select 2 seconds. Here, as the short fluctuation time is set as the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, the normal pattern per game is more likely to be executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state. The time saving state in which the time saving 99 times is set can make it easier to set the state (support state) in which the ball can be easily won in the second winning hole 640 after the time saving state ends.

On the other hand, when the number of special figure fluctuations is "99 times", it is configured so that the normal figure fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected with a probability of 28%, and this 10 second normal figure fluctuation time was selected. In that case, it becomes difficult to execute the normal figure per game so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the time saving 99 times is set as the time saving end condition, as the normal figure fluctuation time during the execution of the special figure fluctuation (99th special figure fluctuation) in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, other Since it is configured so that the normal figure fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is easier to select than the period of , the normal figure fluctuation of 0.1 seconds is continuously executed without executing the final fluctuation of the time saving state. It is possible to make it difficult to play a game that excessively wins a privilege (a prize ball paid out by causing a ball to enter the second prize hole 640).

In addition, the game board 13 is set so that the special figure variation set as the time saving final variation and the normal figure variation are set with different triggers, and any execution trigger can be established by the ball fired in the right-handed game. Since it is configured, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game that executes the normal pattern fluctuation (per normal pattern fluctuation) in accordance with the end timing of the special pattern fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 429(c), the contents defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202mf3 for time saving B will be described. Normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202mf3 for time saving B is a data table referred to when "time saving B" is set as the type of time saving state, that is, the number of time saving times is set to 5 times, and shown in FIG. 429(c) As you can see, various normal figure fluctuation patterns (variation time) are defined based on the special figure fluctuation number of times after the end of the jackpot and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 4 times", and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", "short fluctuation ( 2 seconds)”, but in the range of “630 to 999”, “ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)” is defined, and if the number of special figure fluctuations is “5 times”, the acquired second Regardless of the value of the 2-variation type counter CS2, "ultra-short variation (0.1 seconds)" is defined. In addition, since the time saving state is set to 5 times at the maximum, the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation number 6th or later is not set.

As described above, when the time saving state of five times of working hours is set, it is configured so that the normal figure fluctuation is always executed with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds during the time saving final fluctuation. Therefore, it becomes easy to execute the normal figure per game so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state.

As described above, in this embodiment, according to the type of time saving state set (time saving A, B), the fluctuation time of special symbols and the fluctuation time of normal symbols can be set differently. The time-saving type (time-saving B) in which 5 times of time-saving is set makes it easy to set the state (support state) in which it is easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery after the end of the time-saving state (support state), and then 99 times of time-saving and 1 time of time-saving. It is configured to be in the order of

As a result, when the conditions for executing the jackpot game are not established during the time saving state, a privilege (support state) can be given to the player, and further, according to the type of the set time saving state, the privilege is given. The interest in the game can be improved by varying the granting probabilities.

In addition, in this embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation, or when selecting the variation pattern of the normal figure variation, it is configured to refer to the number of special figure variations after the end of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to select each variation pattern by referring only to the number of variations of the special figure 2 variation, or configured to refer to the number of variations of the normal figure variation You can Moreover, you may comprise so that each variation pattern may be selected with reference to the establishment condition of the set time saving end conditions.

Also, in this embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation, or when selecting the variation pattern of the normal figure variation, it is configured to refer to the number of special figure variations after the end of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, based on the small hit type elected during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern table used when selecting each fluctuation pattern may be changed, and after the small hit game ends It may be configured to select each variation pattern based on the special figure variation frequency and the normal figure variation frequency.

<Regarding control processing in the seventeenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431, the contents of control processing in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, in contrast to the above-described 16th embodiment, the normal design variation processing 16 (see C106 in FIG. 396) is replaced with the normal design variation processing 17 (see C136 in FIG. 430), and the main control 426 to 429) to be referred to in various determination processes in the device 110, and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, only the numerical values have been changed, and technically speaking, are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 430, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 17 (C136) will be described. FIG. 430 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 17 (C136). When the normal symbol variation processing 17 (C136) is executed, the same C601 to C611 processing as the normal symbol variation processing 16 (see C106 in FIG. 396) of the 16th embodiment described above is executed, and in the processing of C611, If it is determined that this normal pattern lottery is a hit (C611: Yes), refer to the normal pattern per type selection 17 table 202md to set the per normal pattern type (C641), The display mode (at the time of winning the drawing) is set (C613), and the process proceeds to C642. On the other hand, in the processing of C611, when it is determined that the winning lottery for the normal symbols is lost (C611: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (C614), and the process proceeds to C642.

In the process of C642, set the current general pattern fluctuation pattern based on the general pattern fluctuation pattern selection 17 table (C642), and set the command corresponding to each setting content (winning lottery decision, general pattern fluctuation pattern) (C623), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of C602, if it is determined that the present is normal pattern fluctuation (C602: Yes), C618 to the same as the normal pattern fluctuation processing 16 of the sixteenth embodiment (see C106 in FIG. 396) The process of C623 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 431, the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the seventeenth embodiment will be described. The contents of the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the present embodiment are different from the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the sixteenth embodiment described above, instead of the normal figure effect setting processing (see C4117 in FIG. 417) It is different in that it is configured to execute the effect setting process 17 for normal figure (see C4167 in FIG. 431). Other control processes are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

FIG. 431 is a flow chart showing the contents of the general pattern effect setting process 17 (C4167). As shown in Figure 431, in the general figure production setting process 17 (C4167), the above-described general figure production setting process (see C4117 in Figure 417) is executed during the special figure final fluctuation period of the time saving state The difference is that a process for setting the effect mode is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same control process contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the general figure production setting process 17 (C4167) is executed, the same C4201 to C4212 processes as the general figure production setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 417) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and this process exit. Also, in the process of C4202, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (C4202: No), then it is determined whether the current is in the final variation of the time saving state (C4251), the final variation If it is determined that it is not in the middle (C4251: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4251, if it is determined that the current is in the final fluctuation of the time saving state (C4251: Yes), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is obtained, and the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation being executed Extract (C4252).

Then, it is determined whether the end timing of the special figure fluctuation being executed is during the normal figure long per game (C4253), and when it is determined that it is during the normal figure long open game (C4253: Yes), this time reduction Since the normal figure long open per game is executed to cross the state end timing, set a display command to suggest that the special figure 2 fluctuation zone (support state) will be set after the end of the time saving (C4254) , the process ends. When the display command is set by the process of C4254, the display command is output to the display control device 114 in the same process as other display commands, and the effect screen shown in FIG. 425(a) is the third symbol. It is displayed on the display screen of the display device 81 .

In the process of C4253, when it is determined that the long button is not released at the time saving end timing (C4253: No), this process is terminated as it is. In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the long release is not performed at the time saving end timing in the processing of C4253 (C4253: No), the present processing is configured to end as it is. The time-saving state that was set was a time-saving state (for example, time-saving B) that made it easy to set the support state. It is also possible to provide a means for determining whether a time-saving state (for example, time-saving A) in which it is difficult to set is set, and display a display mode that can notify (suggest) the determination result to the player. . In addition, at the end timing of this normal pattern fluctuation and the end timing of the normal pattern per game executed based on this normal pattern fluctuation, a means for determining whether the final fluctuation of the time saving state has ended Provided, at the end timing of this normal pattern fluctuation and the end timing of the normal pattern per game executed based on this normal pattern fluctuation, if it is determined that the final fluctuation of the time saving state has not ended, that The determination result may be suggested (notified).

As described above, in the 17th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is more than the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery). It is set so that it is easier to win a small hit, and when the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, It is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute than when the normal symbol low probability state) is set. Then, when a ball is entered into the V winning port 650a which is in an open state during the small winning game and the ball passes through a specific area (V gate), an opportunity to execute the big winning game is established. .

Then, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the first end condition (the number of special figure fluctuations (the number of special figure 2 fluctuations) reaches the specified number of times (for example, 5 times)) and When at least the second end condition (a condition that is met when a specific small hit is won a specified number of times (for example, once) by a special lottery during the time saving state), and the first end condition is met Only in this case, an advantageous state advantageous to the player can be given. Specifically, during the special figure fluctuation in which the first end condition is established, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is extremely shortened (normal figure fluctuation time 0.1 seconds), and many within one special figure fluctuation period It is configured to be able to execute normal figure fluctuations.

As a result, when the time saving state ends based on the establishment of the first end condition, the fluctuation period of the normal figure fluctuation to be executed is shortened by the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure final fluctuation) be able to. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the normal long open per game during the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure final fluctuation), and in addition, the time saving state ends during the execution of the normal long open per game, normal Even after the state is set, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the normal pattern long open per game.

That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the time saving state (1 time, 5 times, 99 times) is set, and the first privilege (small hit winning (small winning probability about 1/ 7)) While playing a game aiming to be awarded, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, It is configured such that a second privilege (a period during which a short variation is executed as a normal pattern variation) different from the first privilege is granted. By configuring in this way, even if a small hit is won as a game result (special figure 2 lottery result) during the time saving state, even if it is not won, a privilege advantageous to the player can be given. It is possible to improve the game motivation of.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a period during which a short variation is executed as a normal figure variation during the execution period of the special figure final variation in a specific time saving state (for example, 5 times of working hours) is configured to be set , When the time saving state ends, it is possible to make it easier to acquire the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special figure 2) up to the upper limit (4 pieces). Furthermore, by shortening the normal pattern fluctuation time, it is possible to increase the ratio of the period in which the electric role product 1640a is open per unit time, so that the state in which the game is being executed per normal pattern (electric role The normal state can be easily set in a state where the object 1640a is open, or a state where the electric accessory 1640a remains open.

As a result, even after the normal state is set, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 1640. Many special figure 2 lotteries can be executed, and players can be motivated to play games.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment changes from the first state (closed state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter during a specific game (for example, a small winning game), so that the ball is more likely to enter than in the first state. A specific ball entry means (V winning opening 650a) is provided that is variable to a second state (open state) that is easy to open, and a ball that enters the specific ball entering means (V winning opening 650a) enters a specific area (V gate). However, it is not limited to this, and the ball enters the V winning opening 650a that is opened when the small winning game is executed. The technique described in the present embodiment may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is given the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. Even in this case, by configuring the special figure 2 lottery so that the probability of winning a small prize is higher than the special figure 1 lottery, it is advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned second privilege is granted. A game state can be provided.

Furthermore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 429, the period during which the above-described second privilege is granted is the period during which the final variation of the time saving state is executed (a specific time saving end condition is period to be established), but not limited to this, for example, when the time saving 99 times is set, immediately after the time saving state is set (for example, the number of special figure fluctuations after the time saving state is set period of 1 to 5 times), or after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time saving state was set (for example, the number of special figure fluctuations after the time saving state is set is 45 to 50 times). As given, the contents defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 17 table 202mf may be configured. In addition, a plurality of time saving types are provided for the time saving state in which the same time saving end condition is set, and the period in which the second privilege is given may be changed according to the set time saving type. good.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the second privilege is granted, so it is expected that the second privilege will be granted. It is possible to play a game in the time saving state while letting the player play.

<Regarding Modified Example of Seventeenth Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the seventeenth embodiment described above will be described. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, when a predetermined condition is established in the time saving state, that is, in a state in which a specific time saving state (time saving state of five times of working hours) is set, when the fifth special figure variation is executed An advantageous game in which a short (0.1 second) variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the normal pattern (ordinary pattern) is executed, just before the end of the time reduction state or immediately after the end of the time reduction state. It is configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning port 640 at . In the seventeenth embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 424, the second winning opening 640 accompanied by the electric accessory 640a is provided in the right game area of the game board 13, and when a right-handed game is executed, It is configured so that a ball can win in the second winning port 640 but cannot win in the first winning port 64.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in this modification, when the lower position of the second winning hole 640 provided in the right game area, specifically, the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the ball fired by the right-handed game can win a prize and the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, the game board 13 in which the first winning port 64 is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win a prize is used. ing. Since the configuration of the game board 13 other than that is the same as that of the seventeenth embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, in this modification, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate in the order in which the acquisition information is acquired (the order in which the ball wins in the corresponding winning opening) (Lottery) is configured to be executed, and the point of deleting the configuration of holding and storing the acquisition information of the special figure 2 is different from the seventeenth embodiment described above. Other contents are the same as those of the seventeenth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example configured in this way, the second privilege (a game period in which a short time (0.1 seconds) is likely to be set as the normal figure fluctuation time) is granted during the time saving state, and the normal figure during the game per normal figure When the state is set, it becomes easier for the ball shot by the right-handed game to win the second prize winning opening 640, and it is possible to make it difficult to win the first winning opening 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special figure 2 variation during the normal state. On the other hand, when the normal state is set at the timing other than during the normal game, the ball fired by the right-handed game becomes easier to win the first winning hole 64. And since it does not have a configuration for storing the suspension of the special figure 2, even if the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 variation configured not to run.

That is, in this modification, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a serves as guiding means for guiding the ball to the second winning hole 640 and limiting means for limiting the winning of the ball to the first winning hole 64. configured to function. By configuring in this way, the second privilege is given to the player when the time saving state is terminated and the normal state is set depending on whether the second privilege is given during the time saving state or when it is not given. Benefits can vary greatly. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting the second privilege to be awarded.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 432 to 443. FIG. In the 16th embodiment described above, a series of effects can be executed as a variable effect executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the lottery result of the normal symbol, and the series of effects are executed. When it is done, it is difficult to understand whether the execution trigger of this series of production is a special lottery or a normal lottery, and it is configured to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the production result (lottery result). (See Figure 363).

However, the information mode (small display area Dm 4 display mode) is displayed, there is a risk that it will be determined which pattern lottery the current series of effects is based on.

On the other hand, in the 18th embodiment, in the effect (set effect) that is executed triggered by the special symbol lottery (special lottery) or the normal symbol lottery (general lottery), which pattern lottery However, a notification mode (display mode of the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) for changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game at the same timing can be displayed. The characteristic configuration and control contents of the eighteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that detailed descriptions of the same contents as those of the sixteenth embodiment described above will be omitted.

<About the game board configuration in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 432 to 434. FIG. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment has a different configuration of the right game area from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 361). , are otherwise identical. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 432 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment. In the 18th embodiment, the ball flowing down the right side game area by the player playing the right-handed game, each winning opening that can win by each winning game (normal figure winning game, small winning game, big winning game) (Second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a, specific winning opening 65a) are configured to have different times. It takes about 4 seconds to reach , about 2 seconds to reach the V winning opening 650a, and about 6 seconds to reach the specific winning opening 65a.

Here, the configuration of the right game area of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 432 to 434. FIG. As shown in FIG. 432, a distribution means 700 capable of distributing balls to a plurality of ball paths is provided above the right game area. , and the second route 702 alternately.

The first path 701 is formed by a meandering sphere path, and is configured so that it takes about 3 seconds for the sphere to pass through the first path 701 . After passing through the first path 701, the ball reaches the upper surface of the channel unit provided with the variable winning device 65 and the electric accessory 640a. The flow path unit is configured so that its upper surface slopes downward toward the outlet 66, and as part of the flow path formed on its upper surface, an electric accessory 640a and a winning door 65b are provided. is provided. When both the electric accessory 640a and the winning door 65b are closed, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the flow path unit flows out from the bottom end of the upper surface of the flow path unit (the end on the side of the out port 66), and is out. It is configured to flow into port 66 .

The time required for the ball passing through the first path 701 to reach the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is about 1 second. The surface forming the path) is provided with a delay member for delaying the flow of the ball, so that the time required for the ball to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is about 2 seconds. Configure. Here, in the eighteenth embodiment, a meandering flow path is formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, which meanders in the depth direction so that the ball does not flow down in a straight line. This makes it possible to delay the flow of the ball.

On the other hand, the spheres distributed to the second path 702 by the distribution means 700 flow into the opening 704a of the straight passage channel formed in the depth direction of the first path, and are provided near the outlet of the passage channel. It is constructed so as to flow down toward the V winning opening 650a, and is constructed so that the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650a in about 2 seconds.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, each winning opening (first 2 winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a, and specific winning opening 65a) are configured to have different times. It takes about 4 seconds to reach the V winning opening 650a, about 2 seconds to reach the V winning opening 650a, and about 6 seconds to reach the specific winning opening 65a.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to sequentially confirm which winning hole the ball shot in the right-handed game will enter, so that the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Also, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in a special figure lottery, and when a big hit is won, different special figure fluctuation times are set, and each winning game is executed. Immediately after hitting the ball, in order to win the winning opening opened by the game, it is configured to perform notification to guide the right-handed game during the special figure fluctuation time. Then, when a small win is won or when a big win is won, a set performance is executed after the special figure variation is started, and a right-handed game is notified at the same timing after a specific time has passed. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from judging the lottery result of this time by the timing when the notification for guiding the right-handed game is performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case of winning per normal figure long opening by the normal figure lottery, so as to set the execution timing of the set effect so as to notify the right-handed game at the specific timing of the set effect Configure. By constructing in this way, even if the set effect is executed and the notification to guide the right-handed game is performed, it is difficult for the player to understand which winning game the effect result of the set effect this time indicates. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 435, a series of effects used as a variation effect of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) in the eighteenth embodiment, and a right-handed game that guides a right-handed game The relationship with the display timing of the notification will be explained. FIG. 435 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of execution effect (notification) in each symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 435, in this embodiment, the effect (series of effects) is executed for a predetermined period of time (54 seconds) after the symbol variation is started, and then the player is notified of the guidance to guide the right-handed game. (Right stroke notification) is executed. Then, when the player executes the right-handed game based on the execution of the guidance notification, the balls shot by the right-handed game are released according to the lottery result of the pattern variation being executed this time. It is configured to win a prize in a prize winning port (second winning port 640, V winning port 650a, specific winning port 65a).

Specifically, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (60 seconds) that has been won, hit the right after 54 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (during the special figure 1 fluctuation) Notification is performed. Then, the jackpot game is started at the timing (6 seconds after the right-handed game is performed) when the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the specific winning opening 65a.

Also, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (58 seconds) that is winning a small hit, right-handed notification after 54 seconds from the start of fluctuation (during special figure 1 fluctuation) is executed. Then, a small hit game is started at the timing (4 seconds after the right-handed game is performed) when the ball shot by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650a. In addition, in this embodiment, when the ball enters the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game, it is configured to always pass through the V gate, and the ball enters the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game. In this case, the big winning game is started two seconds after the start of the small winning game. As a result, in the case of winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 fluctuation and in the case of winning the small prize, the performance mode of the variable performance (series performance) executed from the start of the variation and the guide notification for guiding the right-handed game. In addition to the execution timing of , it is possible to make the timing from the start of variation to the start of the big winning game the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the winning normal pattern fluctuation (54 seconds), the right-handed notification will be executed 54 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (when the normal pattern fluctuation is stopped) be done. Then, at the timing when the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (2 seconds after the right-handed game is performed), the normal pattern per game is started. It should be noted that even if a series of effects are executed based on this normal pattern fluctuation, the start timing of the jackpot game via the normal pattern per game is the same as when the jackpot is won in the above-mentioned special figure 1 lottery, or when the small hit is won. configured to be the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of timings of the period (right-handed ball flowing period) from the execution of the guide notification (right-handed notification) for guiding the right-handed game to the start of the jackpot game, this time A failure effect for informing that the result of the effect is a failure (the jackpot game is not executed) can be executed. Specifically, failure notification timings are set 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 6 seconds after the right-handed notification is executed.

In other words, although detailed description and illustrations are omitted, in some cases where the result of the special figure 1 lottery is out, the variation time is configured to set a variation pattern of 56 seconds, 58 seconds, and 60 seconds , When the variation pattern is selected, the same variation effect as the above-described content is executed, and failure notification is performed at the timing when the variation time has elapsed. Then, the failure notification timing described above is based on the timing at which it is determined that the ball could not be entered into the second winning port 640 during the normal game, and the ball was entered into the second winning port 640. It is configured to coincide with the timing of notifying the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed by the special figure 2 lottery, or the timing of winning the small winning and ending the small winning game as a result of the special figure 2 lottery.

By configuring in this way, the performance mode of the losing series performance executed when the result of the special figure 1 lottery is lost, and the series performance executed based on the winning of the general figure winning, In the game process after the game is played, it is possible to make the same performance mode as that set when the big win game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, even if you win a jackpot with a special figure 1 variation and a special figure variation of 60 seconds is performed, to incite whether or not the above-described failure notification is performed It is configured to execute the inciting production of. In this case, since the special figure 1 jackpot is won internally, a success performance mode for informing the player that it will not fail is set as a result of the fanning performance and executed as a performance.

In this way, by executing the fanning production, it is possible to reduce the difference in the production mode between the series of productions in which the failure notification is actually executed and the series of productions in which the failure notification is not executed. ) makes it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result indicates, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect to be executed (the effect to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81), based on the ball flow situation in the right game area, the current effect It can be difficult to determine in advance what the result will be.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 436 to 438, the electrical configuration of this embodiment will be described. This embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 436(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the eighteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 436(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the eighteenth embodiment. In the present embodiment, a variation pattern 18 table 202ne is provided instead of the variation pattern 16 table 202le, and a normal figure variation pattern selection 18 table 202nf is provided instead of the normal figure variation pattern selection table 202lf, in contrast to the above-described 16th embodiment. They are different in one respect and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 437, the contents of the variation pattern 18 table 202ne will be described. FIG. 437(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 18 table 202ne. As shown in FIG. 437(a), the variation pattern 18 table 202ne has a normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 and a time saving variation pattern 16 table 202le2, and in contrast to the sixteenth embodiment described above, the normal The contents of the fluctuation pattern table referred to when the state is set are made different.

Here, the contents of the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 will be described with reference to FIG. 437(b). FIG. 437(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1. As shown in FIG. 437(b), the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 is the first special symbol ( The contents defined in the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of special figure 1) are different, and the data referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The contents defined in the table are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1, even if the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is "loss", "big hit", or "small hit", a dedicated variation pattern (variation time ) is selected, and specifically, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 is “out”, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to “0 to 139” in the range of “short "Out (7 seconds)" is in the range of "140 to 179", "Out (30 seconds)" is in the range of "180 to 189", "Short set effect (30 seconds)" is in the range of "190 to 194" "Various types of Super Reach (60 seconds)" are defined in the range, and "Set effects (60 seconds)" are defined in the range of "195 to 198".

Also, if the lottery result of special figure 1 is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29" and "normal reach (30 seconds)" is in the range of "30 to 39" ``Short set effect (30 seconds)'' is specified in the range of ``40 to 179'', ``Various super reach (60 seconds)'' in the range of ``180 to 198'', and ``Set effect (60 seconds)'' in the range of ``180 to 198''. , If the lottery result is "small win", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99" in the range of "super reach (60 seconds)", "100 to 198" in the range of "small Hit set effect (56 seconds)” is defined.

As described above, in this embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, it is configured to select a variation pattern for executing the set effect at a predetermined rate. The variation pattern (variation time) set as the set effect is different between when the small win is won and when the big win is won. Specifically, when a big win is won, a variable time of 60 seconds can be selected as a set performance, and when a small win is won, a variable time of 56 seconds can be selected as a set performance. In other words, the variation time of the set performance at the time of winning the small prize is shorter by 4 seconds than the time of variation of the set performance at the time of winning the big prize.

Here, as described later with reference to FIG. 432, the game board 13 of the present embodiment prevents the ball from reaching the V winning opening 650a, which is in the open state during the small winning game, when a right-handed game is executed. The time (about 6 seconds) required for the ball to reach the specific winning hole 65a that is open during the jackpot game is longer by 4 seconds than the time (about 2 seconds) required to complete the game. . And, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the set effect (60 seconds) is executed, 54 seconds after the set effect is executed regardless of the set fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) It is configured to execute a notification (right-handed notification) that guides a right-handed game.

By configuring in this way, the timing from the execution of the set performance to the execution of the notification of hitting to the right can be the same for both the big winning and the small winning, so that the player can be informed of the performance result of the set performance. can be obfuscated. Furthermore, after 54 seconds from the execution of the set production, a right-handed notification is performed, and when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, a special drawing lottery result that triggers the execution of the set production this time. No matter which one (big hit, small hit), the ball shot by the right-handed game can be won in any of the winning openings that are in the open state.

Next, the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection 18 table 202nf will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 438 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202nf. As shown in FIG. 438, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202nf is defined by the normal pattern long fluctuation B (60 seconds) in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf (see FIG. 384) of the 16th embodiment described above. The difference is that the normal chart long fluctuation C (58 seconds) is specified in the range, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in the normal pattern selection 18 table 202nf, the game state is the normal state (normal pattern low probability), the result of the normal pattern lottery is A per normal pattern, and the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 is "500 ~ 999" range, and the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 fluctuates in the range of "800 to 999" when the game state is normal (normal figure low probability) and the result of the general figure lottery is out. "Normal figure long fluctuation C (58 seconds)" is defined as a pattern.

Then, when the normal pattern long variation C is selected, it is configured so that the set effect can be executed. That is, even when the set effect is executed based on the normal pattern long variation C, the right hitting notification is executed 54 seconds after the set effect is executed. Then, when the player plays the right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the shot ball is configured to win the second prize-winning opening 640.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, the timing from the execution of the set effect to the execution of the right-handed notification can be the same for the jackpot winning, the small winning winning, and the normal drawing winning, so that the player can give the set effect. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the performance result of. Further, after 54 seconds have passed since the set effect is executed, a right-handed notification is performed, and when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the pattern lottery result that triggers the execution of this set effect is determined. Regardless of whether it was a jackpot, a small hit, or a normal hit, any winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a, second winning opening) that opens the ball fired by the right-handed game 640) can be awarded.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special figure reservation and the normal figure reservation are foreseen, and the start timing of the special figure fluctuation is for a predetermined period (for example, 70 seconds). After a predetermined range period (for example, after 58 seconds to 62 seconds) from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, when it is determined that it is the timing at which the winning is won in the general figure lottery and the long open winning game is executed. A set performance is executed from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and 54 seconds after the start of the set performance executed from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, the right hitting information corresponding to the normal figure long open winning game is notified. configured to run

In this way, the contents of the special figure fluctuation and the contents of the normal figure fluctuation are read ahead, and when it is determined that the set production can be executed at any of the pattern fluctuation start timings, the set production can be executed. The frequency of performance execution can be increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, the performance result of the set performance executed at the start timing of the special figure variation can indicate winning per normal figure long open, so that the player can play a game with extra features.

It should be noted that the relationship between the start timing of the set effect and the execution timing of the right-handed notification should not deviate greatly. It may be shifted back and forth for a few seconds (2 seconds), and in fact it is the timing when the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the winning opening 58 seconds after the execution of the set effect is executed, but the set effect is After 54 seconds from the execution, the right hitting notification may be executed. By enabling execution of the set effect while allowing a slight deviation in this way, the conditions for executing the set effect are more likely to be satisfied, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Also, in the present embodiment, the set effect is configured to be executed at the start timing of the pattern variation, but without being limited to this, if the above-described set effect execution condition is satisfied, for example, a special figure It may be constructed such that the set effect is executed while the variation is being executed. In this case, before the set effect is executed, it is preferable to display a pseudo-stop display mode for making the player think that the special figure variation has ended. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to execute the set effect that is started from the middle of the execution of the special figure variation without a sense of incongruity.

Next, with reference to FIG. 436(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. This embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that an effect prohibition flag 223na is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The effect prohibition flag 223na is a flag for prohibiting setting of a new set effect, and is set to ON when prohibiting setting of a new set effect. In this embodiment, in addition to the period during which the set effect is executed, the set effect is not executed even during the period during which a specific super reach effect (including loss) is executed based on the special figure fluctuation. , the production prohibition flag 223na is set to ON even during the period in which the specific super ready-to-win production is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the effect being executed (especially, the effect with a high degree of expectation for winning) is switched to the set effect in the middle, and the player's desire to play is lowered.

<Regarding control processing in the eighteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 439 to 443, the contents of control processing in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the 18th embodiment, the main controller 110 performs various determination processing (hit determination processing, etc.) and various selection processing (hit type selection processing, variation pattern selection processing, etc.) in contrast to the control processing contents in the above-described 16th embodiment. ), the processing results are different because the data tables referenced in the . Although the content is different, the technical concept is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113, instead of the stop command processing 16 (see C3216 in FIG. 414), the stop command processing 18 (see C3246 in FIG. 439) is replaced with the variable display setting processing 16 (see C3114 in FIG. ) in place of the variable display setting process 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440), and in place of the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420), the effect update process 18 (see C3142 in FIG. 443) is executed. are doing. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

First, the contents of stop command processing 18 (C3246) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing 18 (C3246). As shown in FIG. 439, the stop command process 18 (C3246) differs from the above-described stop command process 16 (see C3216 in FIG. 414) in that processing for setting the effect prohibition flag 223na is added. are identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the stop command process 18 (C3246) is executed, first, the same C3951 to C3956 processes as the stop command process 16 (see C3216 in FIG. 414) are executed, and then the stop command this time is the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON to determine whether it indicates the stop of the target variation (C3971), and when it is determined that it indicates the stop of the target variation (C3971: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223na is turned off. Set (C3972) and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of C3971, if it is determined that it does not indicate the stop of the target variation (C3972: No), this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 440, the contents of the variable display setting process 18 (C3144) will be described. FIG. 440 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 18 (C3144). As shown in FIG. 440, the variable display setting process 18 (C3144) is different from the above-described variable display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415) in that a process for setting the effect mode of the set effect is added. , and the addition of processing for setting the effect prohibition flag 223na to ON when the acquired variation pattern is super reach, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variable display setting process 18 (C3144) is executed, the same processes C4001 to C4004 as the variable display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415) are executed, and then the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed. Execute. This set effect setting process (C4041) will be described later with reference to FIG. 441, but it is determined whether the current fluctuation display setting process is executed based on the special figure fluctuation or based on the normal figure fluctuation Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the set effects are satisfied, and when the conditions for executing the set effects are satisfied, the processing for setting the effect mode of the set effects is performed. executed.

Returning to FIG. 440, the description continues. When the process of C4041 is finished, then it is determined whether the variation pattern acquired this time is super reach (C4042), and when it is determined that it is super reach (CS24042: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON. Then (C4043), a display variation pattern command is set (C4044), and the same processing from C4006 to C4010 as the above-described variation display setting processing 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4042, if it is determined that the variation pattern acquired this time is not super reach (C4042: No), skip the process of C4043 and proceed to the process of C4044.

Next, with reference to FIG. 441, the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041) will be described. FIG. 441 is a flow chart showing the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041). In the set effect setting process (C4041), the process for setting the set effect is executed at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation or the normal figure fluctuation.

When the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state (C4901), and if it is determined that it is not the normal state (it is a time saving state) (C4901) , this process is terminated as it is because it is not in the game state for executing the set effect. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is in the normal state (C4901: Yes), next, this time variation display setting processing 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440) sets the variation display of the special figure variation (sets the effect) It is determined whether it is a process (C4902), and if it is determined that it is a process of setting the variation display of the special figure variation (C4902: Yes), the process of C4003 of the variation display setting process 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440) (C4903).

In the processing of C4903, when it is determined that the variation pattern does not correspond to the set effect (C4903: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the set effect (CS24903: Yes), then it is determined whether the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C4904), and it is determined that it is not set to ON. If it does (C4904: No), it is determined whether the present is in long fluctuation per normal pattern (C4905).

In the process of C4905, if it is determined that the current is per normal long fluctuation (C4905: Yes), the value of the normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223lo and the value of the special pattern fluctuation time counter 223ln are compared ( C4906), it is determined whether the remaining period of normal figure fluctuation is shorter than the special figure fluctuation time of this time (C4907). Then, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time this time is longer (C4907: No), the normal symbol winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read (C4908), and in the read winning information Determine whether there is winning information corresponding to the normal long fluctuation (C4909), and if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the normal long fluctuation (C4909: Yes), set production according to this fluctuation pattern is set (C4910), the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C4911), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4909, when it is determined that there is no normal/universal pattern long variation in the winning information read out in the process of C4908 (C4909: No), this process is terminated as it is. Also, in the process of C4907, if it is determined that the remaining period of the normal pattern fluctuation is longer (C4907: Yes), set the set effect according to the normal pattern fluctuation stop timing (C4912), and turn on the effect prohibition flag 223na (C4920), and the process ends.

In addition, in the process of C4905, the state of determining that it is in the process of long fluctuation per normal pattern, that is, in the process of C4904, although it is determined that the production prohibition flag 223na is not set to ON, the long fluctuation per normal pattern As the case of being in, for example, at the start timing of the long variation per normal figure being executed, it is the case where the super reach production is executed as the variation production of the special figure fluctuation.

As described above, in this embodiment, the process of C4909 is provided, and when there is a normal pattern long variation in the winning information, it is configured to set the set effect. By configuring in this way, when it is determined that there is a general pattern long variation in the winning information, the general pattern long variation is executed during the execution of the set effect based on the special pattern variation, so the set effect is executed During the normal figure fluctuation is executed multiple times in a short time, for example, by executing the normal figure short per game, this set production is a set production executed based on the special figure fluctuation It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping it. In addition, although the process of C4909 is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set effect may be set.

In addition, in the set effect set in the process of C4912, the set effect is executed at the timing of the normal figure fluctuation stop timing instead of the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, so the result of the set effect is the normal figure long open You will be notified of the outcome. In addition, if the remaining period of the normal figure fluctuation at the start of this special figure fluctuation is shorter than the period (15 seconds) during which the production mode of the set production can be executed, instead of setting the set production, the general figure long open It is preferable to configure so that a dedicated presentation mode indicating winning is set. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the winning per normal pattern long opening.

On the other hand, in the process of C4904, if it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C4904: Yes), or, in the process of C4905, if it is determined that it is not during long fluctuation per normal figure (C4905: No) acquires the lottery result of the normal drawing lottery currently being executed (C4913), determines whether it is elected per normal drawing (per normal drawing long open) (C4914), per normal drawing (normal drawing If it is determined that the long open per) is not won (or the normal drawing lottery is not executed) (C4914: No), the process proceeds to C4910 described above.

In the process of C4914, if it is determined that it is elected per normal figure (C4914: Yes), then it is determined whether this special figure variation is a variation (C4915), and it is determined that it is a variation If (C4915: Yes), the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223lo and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln are compared (C4916), and the remaining period of the general figure fluctuation is from this special figure fluctuation time is also shorter (C4917). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of this special figure fluctuation is shorter than the remaining period of the normal figure fluctuation being executed (C4917: Yes), the set production that is being executed for the general figure fluctuation is this time (C4918) is set to the set effect showing the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation, and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4915, if it is determined that this special figure variation is not per variation (C4915), or in the process of C4917, the variation of this special figure variation than the remaining period of the normal figure variation being executed If it is determined that the time is longer (C4917: Yes), this process is terminated without setting the set effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation of this time.

In addition, in the process of C4902, if it is determined that the current variable display setting process 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440) is the process of setting the variable display of normal symbols (C4902: No), normal pattern set effect setting The process is executed (C4919) and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 442, the contents of the general pattern set effect setting process (C4919) will be described. FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general pattern set effect setting process (C4919). When the general pattern set effect setting process (C4919) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a set effect (C5001), and if it is determined to be a set effect (C5001: Yes), the next First, it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C5002).

When it is determined that the production prohibition flag 223na is not set to ON in the process of C5002 (C5002: No), the set production corresponding to the current variation pattern is set (C5003), and the production prohibition flag 223na is set to ON. (C5004), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C5002, if it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C5002: Yes), it is determined whether the normal pattern variation is per variation (long open per variation) ( C5005), when it is determined that it is per long open variation (C5005: Yes), the special figure lottery result being executed is acquired (C5006), and it is determined whether it is per special figure (C5007). That is, it is determined whether the production prohibition flag 223na is set to ON based on the special figure deviation fluctuation.

In the process of C5007, if it is determined that it is not per special figure (C5007: No), then the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223lo and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln are compared (C5008), To determine whether this normal figure fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining time of the running special figure fluctuation (C5009), and if it is determined that this normal figure fluctuation time is shorter (C5009: Yes), the running A replacement effect (set effect) for notifying the general pattern lottery result (long opening hit) is set (C5010) by the special figure effect (set effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation), and this processing is finished. do. On the other hand, in the process of C5007, if it is determined that the special figure variation being executed is per variation (C5007: Yes), or in the process of C5009, the remaining special figure variation during the normal figure variation time of this time If it is determined that the time is longer than the time (C5009: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 443, the contents of effect update processing 18 (C3142) will be described. FIG. 443 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update processing 18 (C3142). As shown in FIG. 443, the effect update process 18 (C3142) is, in contrast to the effect update process 16 of the sixteenth embodiment described above (see C3112 in FIG. 420), the right hitting notification process when the set effect is executed. The difference is that the Other than that, they are the same, and detailed description of the same content is omitted.

When the effect update process 18 (C3142) is executed, first, the same processes of C4501 to C4506 as the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) of the sixteenth embodiment are executed. Then, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223lk is not set to ON in the process of C4505 (C4505: No), or when the final variation effect update process (C4506) is finished, the set effect is executed. (C4541). In the process of C4541, when the set effect is executed, the determination is made by referring to the value of the effect time measurement counter (not shown) set to measure the effect time.

In the processing of C4541, if it is determined that the set effect is being executed (the effect time measurement counter is being measured) (C4541: Yes), is it the timing when 54 seconds have elapsed since the set effect was started? is determined (C4542), and when it is determined that 54 seconds have passed (C4542: Yes), a display guidance command indicating a right-handed game is set (C4543), the process proceeds to C4507, After that, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C4541, when it is determined that the set effect is not being executed (C4541: No), or in the process of C4542, when it is determined that the timing has not passed 54 seconds (C4542: No) , C4543 are not performed, the process proceeds to C4507, and then the present process ends.

In addition, in the effect update process 18 (C3142) shown in FIG. 443, only when it is determined that the set effect is being executed, the right-handed game is shown at the timing of 54 seconds from the start of the effect. However, in practice, it is configured to set a display guide command for showing a right-handed game even at other timings. Although specific illustration is omitted, for example, as shown in the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 in FIG. 437(b), when the set effect of 30 seconds is set, the set effect is executed At the timing when 24 seconds have passed since, a display guidance command for indicating a right-handed game is set. In addition, when the effect result of the set effect being executed is replaced in the middle, a display guide command for indicating a right-handed game may be set at a different timing. As a result, a right-handed game is notified at a timing different from usual, so that an unexpected performance can be provided to the player.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
Next, the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 444 to 456. FIG. The nineteenth embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that the method of setting the effect mode of the series of effects is different. First, a method for setting a series of effects in the sixteenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 444 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of setting a series of effects in the sixteenth embodiment described above.

As shown in Figure 444, in the 16th embodiment described above, when winning per normal pattern (per normal pattern long open), and when winning the jackpot or small hit in the first special pattern (special 1) lottery , a series of effects can be set, and the effect data of the series of effects are classified into a plurality of scenario types and stored.

Specifically, the scenario 1 corresponding to the production mode (see FIG. 365 (b), FIG. 366 (a)) executed during the normal pattern fluctuation, and the production mode executed during the normal pattern per game (FIG. 366 Scenario 2 corresponding to (b)), Scenario 3 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 369 (a)) executed when the ball wins the second winning hole 640 during the normal game per game, It is executed when the period (waiting period) from when the ball wins in the second winning port 640 during the normal game to when the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning ball is executed is 10 to 30 seconds. Scenario 3-1 corresponding to the production mode (see FIG. 367 (a)), Scenario 4 corresponding to the production mode (see FIG. 367 (b)) executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation, and during the small hit game Scenario 5 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 368 (b)) executed at the end, and the effect mode (see FIG. 370 (b) and FIG. 371 (b)) executed when the series of effects ends in the middle Corresponding scenario 7 and are stored.

Then, when a big win or a small win is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a series of performances using a plurality of performance data are collectively set in correspondence with the variation pattern command of the corresponding special figure 1 variation. there is Specifically, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, a variable production (series of productions) that sets the production data from the scenarios 1 to 5 described above collectively is executed, and a small win is made in the special drawing 1 lottery. , a variable performance (a series of performances) in which the performance data of the scenarios 1 to 4 are collectively set is executed.

On the other hand, the series of productions set based on the winning per normal figure sets each scenario that constitutes the series of productions individually, and sets the next scenario based on the establishment of the scenario transition condition for one scenario. It consists of Specifically, if you win a normal long open per normal lottery, and if the execution conditions for a series of effects are met, scenario 1 is set to indicate the start of a series of effects, and a normal long open per is set. Scenario 2 is then set when the indicated stop command is received. In addition, in the 16th embodiment, there is a case where scenario 1 is set (so-called gimmick effect) in a state where it is not won per normal long open, and in that case, the elapsed time of scenario 1 ends , the series of performances ends.

Next, the production mode corresponding to the scenario 2 is executed during the normal long open per game, and when the ball wins the second winning hole 640, the special figure 2 (special 2) winning command indicating that A notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second winning hole 640 is displayed in a layer different from the display layer in which the series of effects is output from the main controller 110 (sub display area in FIG. 367(a) Ds). Then, when the special figure 2 winning command is received, scenario 3 is set. If the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the period in which Scenario 2 is set, Scenario 7 is set in order to end the series of effects, and an end screen is displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds). Is displayed.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, when transitioning to scenario 3, that is, the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the normal game per game (waiting period) However, it is determined based on the fluctuation situation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and different scenarios are set according to the length of the waiting period. Specifically, if the waiting period is less than 10 seconds, scenario 3 (see FIG. 369(a)) is set, and if the waiting period is 4 to 30 seconds, scenario 3-1 (see FIG. 367(a) reference) is set. Here, if the waiting period is 30 seconds or longer, the series of performances being executed is artificially terminated (scenario 7 is set), and a special series of performances (continuous series of performances) is restarted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. is executed (see FIG. 372). Further, when scenario 3-1 is set, the effect mode corresponding to scenario 3-1 is continuously displayed until the scenario transition condition is satisfied.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received in a state where scenario 3 or scenario 3-1 is set, the conditions for transition to the next scenario are established, and scenario 4 is set. Scenario 4 is set until the special figure 2 stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation is received, and the production mode of the same length as the fluctuation time (15 seconds) of the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed . Then, when the special figure 2 stop command is received, if the special figure 2 variation of this time indicates a hit, it moves to scenario 5. On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation indicates the deviation, the process moves to scenario 7 and ends the series of processes.

Here, in this embodiment, the same variation time is set even if the special figure 2 variation being executed in the state where scenario 4 is set is a small hit or a big hit, and the transition to scenario 5 However, without being limited to this, for example, when winning a jackpot with special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state, the fluctuation time is a small hit fluctuation time (15 seconds) and a small hit game time (10 seconds ) to set a variation time of 25 seconds, and transition from scenario 4 to scenario 5 during the special figure 2 jackpot variation, and according to the timing of stopping the special figure 2 jackpot variation, the jackpot It may be configured so that a game is executed.

When the scenario 5 is set when the special figure 2 variation is a small hit, the production mode corresponding to the scenario 5 is executed until the V passing command is received during the small hit game or until the small hit game ends. When the V passing command is received, a notification mode indicating the fact is displayed in a layer different from the display layer in which a series of effects are executed, and the game shifts to a jackpot game. On the other hand, when the V passing command is not received after the small winning game period (10 seconds) has passed, the process proceeds to scenario 7 in order to end the series of effects.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when executing a series of effects based on the special figure 1 fluctuation, a series of production scenarios are collectively set in correspondence with the variation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation, and normal When the series of effects is executed based on the figure variation, the effect mode of the series of effects is updated according to the degree of establishment of the transition condition corresponding to each scenario. Therefore, in the case of executing a series of performances in the same performance mode, when the update of the performance mode is fixed, the processing for setting the series of performances can be simplified, and the update contents of the performance mode can be changed according to the game situation. In this case, the mode of presentation can be flexibly changed according to each game situation.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, when executing a series of effects based on the general pattern lottery, it is configured to set the scenario of the series of effects individually, but not limited to this, for example, the general pattern Of the series of effects to be executed based on a lottery, a plurality of scenarios may be collectively set for portions where the update of the effect mode is confirmed. This simplifies the process of setting a series of effects.

The setting method of the series of effects in the sixteenth embodiment described above with reference to FIG. In addition to simplifying the processing, if the contents of the presentation mode update are variable depending on the game situation, the presentation mode can be flexibly changed according to each game situation. Since the effect mode that can be variably set is only the effect mode corresponding to the scenario 3, the player feels a sense of incongruity when compared with the effect mode based on other scenarios in the series of effects executed in a predetermined period. I had a problem.

Here, in order to solve the above-described problem, in the 19th embodiment, when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, predict the fluctuation situation of the special pattern (first special pattern) during the normal pattern per game, Based on the prediction result, it is configured to set the production mode of a series of productions corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation. In other words, when the normal figure fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation to be executed this time and the general figure lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per normal figure are calculated, and the calculation result is Based on this, it is determined whether or not the currently executed special figure 1 fluctuation is finished during the normal figure per game, and based on the determination result, the production mode of a series of performances corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation is set. are doing.

By configuring in this way, for example, the variation end timing of the special figure 1 variation being executed is the period in which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640, that is, the game period per normal figure (maximum period) After If it is, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) that can be executed by special figure 2 fluctuation at the time of executing normal figure fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the length of the standby period as various effect modes to be executed during the standby period. Therefore, in contrast to the sixteenth embodiment described above, it is possible to lengthen the variable settable period of the effect mode of the series of effects according to the length of the waiting period. It is possible to make it easier to execute the production.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the nineteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 445 and 446, the electrical configuration of the nineteenth embodiment will be described. The nineteenth embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that the partial configuration of the ROM 222 and the partial configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Specifically, the difference is that a series of effect scenario table 222oa is added to the ROM 222, and that a normal pattern hit medium flag 223oa, a effect scenario storage area 223ob, and a constant monitoring flag 223oc are added to the RAM 223. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 445(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 445(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the nineteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 445(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the nineteenth embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment in that a series of effect scenario table 222oa is added.

The series of effects scenario table 222oa is a data table that defines the effects of a series of effects to be executed corresponding to the progressing game situation. Here, with reference to FIG. 446, the contents of the normal pattern scenario table 222oa1, which defines the production scenarios of the series of effects set based on the normal pattern variation, out of the series pattern scenario table 222oa will be described.

FIG. 446 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the series of effect scenario table 222oa. Note that FIG. 446 shows only the characteristic contents of the 19th embodiment (a series of production scenario set based on the normal pattern fluctuation) among the contents defined in the series of production scenario table 222oa. The description and explanation are omitted for the same content as the sixteenth embodiment described above, that is, the content of the production mode of a series of productions set in correspondence with the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 446, in the 19th embodiment, when setting the production mode of a series of productions based on the normal pattern fluctuation, it is possible to set multiple normal pattern scenarios (normal pattern scenarios 1 to 4). It is configured, and based on the result of the first prediction (prediction on the length of the waiting period that can occur during the execution of a series of productions) executed at the time of normal pattern fluctuation, different normal pattern per scenarios are set Configure.

Specifically, at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation that was elected per normal pattern long open, it is determined whether the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is fluctuating, and if it is determined that the special pattern 1 is fluctuating To determine the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation in execution. Next, compare the game period of the normal figure long open per game executed based on this normal figure fluctuation and the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed, and the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed Determine whether it is later than the end time of the game per normal pattern long open to be executed based on this normal pattern fluctuation, and if it is determined that it is later, special from the end of the game per normal pattern long open The waiting period until the FIG. 1 variation ends (the period until the special figure 2 variation can be executed) is determined. Then, it is configured to set a normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the length of the waiting period determined by the above-described processing.

By configuring in this way, at the start of the normal figure fluctuation, it is possible to predict in advance the length of the waiting period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed, so depending on the length of the waiting period It is possible to execute a series of performances in a different performance mode.

In addition, in the first prediction described above, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not being executed at the start timing of the normal figure fluctuation, or the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is longer than the game period per normal figure long If it is before, because the standby period cannot be predicted in advance, only the production mode of the series of productions corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation time is set at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 446, the series effect scenario table 222oa defines a plurality of normal-pattern winning scenarios that are set based on the prediction result of the first prediction executed at the start of the normal-pattern fluctuation. As a result of the prediction, if the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is "less than 2 seconds", "scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, and if it is "2 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds" "Scenario 2 per normal map" is set, and if it is "30 seconds or more", it is defined so that "scenario 3 per normal map" is set. Moreover, when the prediction result of the first prediction is "unpredictable", it is defined that "scenario 4 per normal pattern" is set.

Here, I will explain the contents of each normal scenario. When "normal map per scenario 1" is set, as a production mode of a series of effects, "scenario 1" in "normal map fluctuation", "scenario 2" in "normal map per game", "special figure 2 fluctuation" The content of the winning scenario is defined so that the effect mode corresponding to the "scenario 3" is set to "medium". In other words, when "normal figure per scenario 1" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 waiting period is short, without setting the special figure 2 waiting period exclusive production mode, the production mode showing the normal figure per game A series of productions that shift from to the production mode showing the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand by setting the effect mode indicating the special figure 2 waiting period for a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). can be done. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when scenario 1 per normal pattern is set, special pattern 2 standby period of less than 2 seconds generated when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during normal pattern long open per game Inside, it is configured so that the production mode that can be set during the game per normal figure is continuously set, but without being limited to this, the special figure 2 fluctuation during the special figure 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds It may be configured so as to set an effect mode that can be set inside.

When "normal map scenario 2" is set, as a production mode of a series of effects, "scenario 1" for "normal map fluctuation", "scenario 2" for "normal map per game", "special figure 2 fluctuation" The content of the winning scenario is defined so that the effect mode corresponding to "scenario 3" is set for "waiting" and "scenario 4" is set for "during special figure 2 fluctuation". In other words, when "per normal figure scenario 2" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 waiting period exists for a predetermined period, it is configured to set the special presentation mode for the special figure 2 waiting period.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure 2 standby period occurs for a predetermined period, it is possible to execute a series of effects that do not give the player a sense of discomfort (pause). Furthermore, in this embodiment, when "scenario 1 per normal map" is set, "scenario 3" set to "during special map 2 fluctuation" is set, and when "scenario 2 per normal map" is set is configured to be set in correspondence with "special figure 2 waiting". By configuring in this way, regardless of the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period, it is possible to set a production mode that shifts from "scenario 2" to "scenario 3" as a series of productions. Therefore, it is possible to execute a series of performances that do not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, when "normal map scenario 3" is set, the series of production modes are "scenario 1" for "normal map fluctuation", "scenario 2" for "normal map game", and "special The contents of the winning scenario are defined so that the effect mode corresponding to "scenario 2", "scenario 3" in FIG. In other words, if "normal figure scenario 3" is set, that is, if the special figure 2 waiting period is greater than or equal to a predetermined period, the period during which the corresponding "scenario 2" is set during the normal figure game is It is configured to be longer than other normal scenarios.

By configuring in this way, even if the special figure 2 waiting period is long for the player, it is possible to make the player think that the one period is in the middle of the game per normal figure. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to think that the special figure 2 waiting period is long. In addition, since it is configured to display the production mode (scenario 2) corresponding to the game per normal pattern for a long time, the game per normal pattern is executed for a long time instead of the special figure 2 waiting period for the player. I can make you think that it is.

Also, if the "normal pattern scenario 4" is set, the fluctuation situation of the special pattern 1 fluctuation during the game per normal pattern long open can not be predicted at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, so "normal pattern Only "scenario 1" corresponding to "during figure fluctuation" is set, and this process is terminated. In addition, when "normal map winning scenario 4" is set, it is determined whether the scenario transition condition is satisfied at the scenario switching timing as in the 16th embodiment described above, and the scenario is set based on the determination result. It is configured as follows.

In addition, even when a different normal pattern winning scenario is set as the normal pattern winning scenario, the same performance mode is set during the small winning game and during the big winning game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 447 and FIG. 448, the flow in the case where scenario 2 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects of the 19th embodiment will be described. FIG. 447 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when Scenario 2 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects.

As shown in Figure 447, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed when normal figure fluctuation is executed. Then, when it is determined that the waiting period is "20 seconds" as a processing result of the first prediction process, at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, the production data corresponding to the "normal pattern winning scenario 2" defined in the series production scenario table 222oa. is set, and stored in an effect scenario storage area 223ob, which will be described later. Then, based on the lapse of time, a series of effects are executed in the effect mode corresponding to the effect data stored in the effect scenario storage area 223ob.

In this way, at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, if the future game content can be predicted, by configuring to set a plurality of production data (scenario) collectively, to set the production mode of the series production processing can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 448, a description will be given of the flow in the case where scenario 4 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects. FIG. 448 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when Scenario 4 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects.

As shown in Figure 448, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed when normal figure fluctuation is executed. Then, when it is determined that the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed as a processing result of the first prediction process is before the stop timing of the fluctuation per normal figure, it is possible to predict the length of the waiting period. Since it is impossible, the processing result of the first prediction process is determined as "unpredictable", and at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, the production data corresponding to the "normal pattern winning scenario 4" defined in the series production scenario table 222oa. is set.

That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 448, after the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is stopped, during the period until the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure long open per game, a new Since it is not possible to predict whether or not Toku-zu 1 variation will be executed, it is a situation where the length of the waiting period cannot be predicted. In such a case, at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, only the production mode (scenario 1) during the period corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation is set as the production mode of the series of effects, and when the normal pattern fluctuation stops (at the start of the normal pattern) ), the second prediction process is performed.

The second prediction process is for determining the length of the waiting period again when the normal pattern fluctuation stops (at the start of the normal pattern), and the length of the waiting period cannot be determined in the first prediction process. This process is executed when In this second prediction process, it is determined whether special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed at the time of normal figure fluctuation stop (normal figure per start time), and if it is determined that special figure 1 fluctuation is in progress, the special being executed The remaining period of FIG. 1 fluctuation is compared with the game period of the game per normal long open, and the length of the waiting period is determined. Then, based on the determination result, the effect mode of the series of effects is set based on the contents defined in the series of effect scenario table 222oa.

As shown in Figure 448, if it is not possible to predict the waiting period in the second prediction process (if the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the timing when the second prediction process is executed), Even at the present time, the standby period cannot be determined, so the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation in the normal figure per game (normal figure long open per game), or the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation is always monitored. A constant monitoring process is executed for this purpose. And, by the constant monitoring process, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation is executed before the new special figure 1 variation is performed, the special figure 2 is made to correspond to the start of the special figure 2 variation An effect mode (scenario 3) corresponding to the fluctuation is set.

As described above, in the 19th embodiment, when setting the effect mode of a series of effects to be executed based on the normal pattern fluctuation, the standby period in which an irregular period is set according to the game situation It is configured to predict the length and execute a series of effects according to the prediction result. By configuring in this way, even if a long standby period is set during the period in which the series of performances is executed, it is possible to provide the player with a series of performances that does not cause a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in the 19th embodiment, since the waiting period is predicted at the timing when the series of effects is executed, the series of effects to be executed before the actual waiting period is set. It is possible to variably set the mode of presentation according to the length of the waiting period. Therefore, it is possible to execute a series of performances without a sense of incongruity as compared with the case where only the performance modes set corresponding to the standby period among the performance modes of the series of performances are varied according to the length of the standby period. .

Furthermore, in the nineteenth embodiment, in a state in which the waiting period is set, it is configured to be able to set an effect mode indicating that it is a period other than the waiting period (for example, a game period per normal figure), It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a long waiting period is set. In addition, in the 19th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, since it is configured to perform a right-handed game during a series of effects, it is possible to determine whether or not the present is the waiting period depending on the game method. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to discriminate.

In addition, in the 19th embodiment, at the start of normal pattern fluctuation, when it is difficult to predict the length of the waiting period (impossible), at a different timing (per normal pattern game start timing), the waiting period again is configured to execute processing for predicting the length of (second prediction processing). In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for predicting the length of the standby period before the standby period is set, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy of the length of the standby period.

In addition, in the process of predicting the waiting period, only when the waiting period cannot be predicted, the game situation during the game per normal pattern is constantly monitored, and the waiting period is handled based on the results of constant monitoring. Since it is configured to set the effect mode to be played, the process for setting the effect mode of the series of effects can be simplified.

In addition, in the nineteenth embodiment, in the process for predicting the waiting period (first prediction process, second prediction process), the length of the waiting period using the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed Although it is configured to predict (discriminate), it is not limited to this, for example, the special figure 1 pending winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read in advance, and based on the result of the reading, the next It may be configured to predict the length of the standby period also using the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation executed in the second.

By configuring in this way, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 448, when the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is before the start timing of the normal figure per game, that is, during execution When the special figure 1 fluctuation is completed, the start condition of the special figure 2 fluctuation (winning of the ball to the second winning opening 640) cannot be established, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed next It is possible to look ahead and predict the length of the waiting period based on the look-ahead result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy with respect to the length of the waiting period.

Furthermore, in the 19th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, it is configured so that the special figure 2 variation is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation, but not limited to this, For example, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation may be configured to be executed according to the winning order of the balls to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and priority over the special figure 2 variation It may be configured so that special figure 1 variation is executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth embodiment>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 449 to 456. FIG. In the present embodiment, in place of the winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407), the winning information command processing 19 (see FIG. 449) is executed in place of the sixteenth embodiment described above; 450), the point of executing the hit related command process 19 (see FIG. 451) in place of the hit related command process 16 (see FIG. 410), and the normal figure hit related command process (see FIG. 452). Point to execute, point to execute variable production setting process 19 (see FIG. 453) instead of variable production setting process 16 (see FIG. 415), and point to execute production setting process (see FIG. 454) during constant monitoring And, the point of executing the variable effect setting process 19 (see FIG. 455) instead of the normal figure effect setting process (see FIG. 417), and the point of executing the series of effect prediction setting process (see FIG. 456) They are different and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, only the numerical values have been changed, and technically speaking, are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 449, the contents of the winning information command process 19 (C3242) will be described. FIG. 449 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information command process 19 (C3242) executed in the 19th embodiment. In this winning information command processing 19 (C3242), in contrast to the winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407) described above, processing executed when a winning information command is received during execution of a series of effects (series of effects determination processing ( C3441 in FIG. 450)) is added, and the rest is the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the prize information command process 19 (C3242) is executed, after executing the same processes of C3401 to C3405 as the prize information command process 16 (see FIG. 407) of the sixteenth embodiment described above, in the process of C3403, If it is determined that there is no 2 hit information (C3403: No), the process of C3441 is executed. In the processing of C3441, a series of effect determination processing is executed (C3441). The details of this series of effect determination processing (C3441) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of C3441, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 450, the contents of the series effect determination process (C3441) will be described. FIG. 450 is a flow chart showing the contents of a series of effect determination processing (C3441) executed in the winning information command processing 19 (FIG. 449) in the 19th embodiment. In this series of effect determination processing (C3441), it is determined whether a series of effects are currently being executed, and if it is determined that a series of effects are being executed, the type of the winning command received this time (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal map) is executed.

When the series effect determination process (C3441) is executed, first, the value of the series effect counter 223lq is obtained (C5101), and then it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223lq is 0 (C5102). The series effect counter 223lq acquired in the process of C4101 is set to a value corresponding to the effect period when a series of effects is executed, and is decremented (updated) in the effect update process that is periodically executed, and the counter value is set to "0", the series of performances is terminated. That is, in the processing of C5102, it is determined whether or not a series of effects are being executed.

In the processing of C5102, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223lq is not greater than 0 (is 0) (C5102: No), since the series effect is not currently being executed, various display modes during execution of the series effect Skipping the processing of C5103 to C5110 for setting , the process proceeds to the processing of C5111.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223lq is greater than 0 (C5102: Yes), since the series effect is being executed, the winning information command received this time is the special figure 2 prize (special 2 prize) (C5103), and if it is determined that the special 2 prize is won (C5103: Yes), the information in the production scenario storage area 223ob is read (C5104), and then the constant monitoring flag 223oc is turned on. It is determined whether there is (C5105). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is off (C5105: No), the process proceeds to C5108.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is on (C5105: Yes), that is, the waiting period in which the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation is waited out of the production period in which the series of productions this time is executed If the state cannot be predicted, the waiting period is calculated (C5106).

Here, the contents of calculation executed in the processing of C5106 will be described. Since the process of C5106 is a process that is executed when a winning information command indicating special figure 2 winning (special figure 2 winning) is received, the present time is the second winning opening 640 (starting winning opening of special figure 2 variation) The ball wins, and the condition that is part of the execution opportunity of the special figure 2 fluctuation is established. In this embodiment, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are configured not to be executed at the same time (overlapping), and the special figure 2 variation is given priority over the special figure 1 variation configured to run on

That is, when the special figure 1 variation is being executed at the present time, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command received this time is executed after the special figure 1 variation being executed is completed. Therefore, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed at the present time is extracted using the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln, and the extraction result is calculated as the waiting period. Also, if the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the present time, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command received this time will be immediately executed, so "0" is set as the standby period .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of balls winning the second winning opening 640 is configured to be one during the execution of one series of effects (during one normal long open game). Therefore, when receiving a winning information command indicating special figure 2 winning (special 2 winning) in the process of C5103, it is configured to always execute processing for calculating the waiting period, but this Without limitation, for example, during execution of one series of effects (during one normal long open per game) When configuring so that two or more balls can win in the second winning port 640 is set to ON in the process of C5106 to indicate that the standby period has been calculated (calculated flag), and after determining that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is ON in the process of C5105 (C5105: Yes) , is configured to determine whether the above-described calculated flag is set to ON, and if the calculated flag is set to ON, skip the processes of C5106 and C5107 and proceed to the process of C5108. It should be configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, while a series of effects are being executed, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning port 640 and the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received multiple times , Since the standby period can be calculated only based on the winning information command indicating the first received special figure 2 winning, it is possible to suppress unnecessary processing from being executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the period from the timing of the first special figure 2 winning to the execution of the special figure 2 variation is set as a waiting period during the execution of a series of effects, and the effect mode according to the length of the waiting period By setting , even if the period (waiting period) in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed despite winning the special figure 2 is long, the effect that is executed in the middle of the series of effects (during the waiting period A plurality of balls enter the second prize winning opening 640 while the series of performances are being executed, since the performance to be executed is slowed down and the performance effect is suppressed from being lowered. However, even if the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received multiple times, there is no need to calculate the length of the waiting period based on the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning received after the second time. processing.

It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, during the period in which a series of effects are being executed, every time the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received, if the waiting period is calculated, first Figure 2 When receiving a prize information command indicating a prize, whether or not the special figure 1 variation is executed, and if it is being executed, it is sufficient to determine the remaining period and calculate the waiting period. When the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received, it is determined whether the special figure variation under execution is the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation, and if the special figure 1 variation is being executed , Based on the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation in execution and the winning information command indicating the previously received special figure 2 winning, the waiting period may be calculated.

In this case, the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning previously received is read in advance, and if the result of the look-ahead is out, the winning indicating the special figure 2 winning received this time The remaining period until the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the information command is executed, that is, the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed and the fluctuation time of the next executed deviation fluctuation Waiting period It is good to configure it to be set as By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the period during which the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation is executed as a waiting period, so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the special figure 2 lottery is out. can.

Returning to FIG. 450, the description continues. In the process of C5108, the display command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning is set (C5108), and the process proceeds to C5109. In the processing of this C5108, a display command indicating that the special figure 2 has been won is set. The display commands set here include, for example, a direct display mode that directly displays that the special figure 2 has been won, and a display that suggests the remaining period until the special figure variation corresponding to the winning is executed A mode, that is, an indirect display mode for indirectly displaying that the special figure 2 winning is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, using the display command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning, the above-described direct display mode and indirect display mode are configured to be settable, but not limited to this, for example , the effect mode may be set based on the lottery result of the variation, or may be configured based on the length of the standby period of the series of effects. In addition, the notification mode indicating that the ball has entered the second prize-winning opening 640 for the first time during the series of performances and the notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second prize-winning opening 640 for the second and subsequent times are made different. Also good.

Next, in the processing of C5109, it is determined whether or not the ball that has won the V winning opening 650a has passed through a specific area (V area) (whether there is a V winning) (C5109). When it is determined that the ball that has won the V prize opening 650a has passed through the specific area (V area) (C5109: Yes), a display command corresponding to the V prize is set (C5110), and the process proceeds to C5111. . When it is determined that the ball that has won the V winning opening 650a has not passed through the specific area (V area) (C5109: No), then the process proceeds to C5111.

In the process of C5111, an effect mode related to other winning information is set (C5111), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C5112), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 451, the contents of the win-related command process 19 (C3261) will be described. FIG. 451 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related command process 19 (C3261) executed in the nineteenth embodiment. In this hit related command process 19 (C3261), based on the execution of the general pattern winning game during the period in which the series of effects are being executed, the effect mode in each period of the series of effects is set.

When the win-related command process 19 (C3261) is executed, the same processes of C3501 to C3504 as the win-related command process 16 (see FIG. 410) of the sixteenth embodiment described above are executed, and in the process of C3505, the main control If it is determined that the command per general pattern has been received from the device 110 (C3505: Yes), per general pattern per related command processing is executed (C3551), and then this processing ends. The details of this normal per figure related command process (C3551) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 452, the contents of the normal per figure related command process (C3551) will be described. FIG. 452 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal per figure related command process (C3551) executed in the 19th embodiment. This per normal per related command process (C3551) is executed when the per related command related to per per normal per per per per normal per figure (C3505: Yes in FIG. 451) is executed, and the start timing and end of per normal per per game game At the timing, various processes for setting the effect mode of the series of effects are executed.

In the normal per figure related command process (C3551), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (C5201). When it is determined that an opening command has been received (C5201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223lq is greater than 0, that is, whether a series of effects is currently being executed (C5202). . If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223lq is not greater than 0 (C5202: No), an opening command process for display is executed (C5203), the normal pattern per middle flag 223oa is set to ON, and C5215 Go to processing.

The display opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sixteenth embodiment. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5202, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223lq is greater than 0 (C5202: Yes), the information stored in the effect scenario storage area 223ob is read (C5205), then the effect scenario It is determined whether or not the information stored in the storage area 223ob is scenario 4 for a normal pattern (C5206).

Here, in the production scenario storage area 223ob, information indicating the normal pattern winning scenario set in the series of production prediction setting processing (C4251 in FIG. 456) performed when executing the normal pattern variation (normal pattern lottery) is stored. In the process of C5206, when it is determined that it is a "normal pattern per scenario 4 (see FIG. 446)" which is a general pattern per scenario in which the production mode corresponding to the period during the normal pattern per game is not set , processing for setting an effect mode during a game per normal pattern in a series of effects is executed.

In the process of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the production scenario storage area 223ob is not scenario 4 for the normal pattern (scenarios 1 to 3 for the normal pattern) (C5206: No), Because the effect mode during the game is set, that is, in the series of effect prediction setting processing (C4251 in FIG. 456) performed when executing the normal pattern fluctuation (normal pattern lottery), Since it is a case where the effect mode corresponding to the period is set, without setting the effect mode corresponding to the period during the game per normal pattern in this process (Skip the processing of C5207 to C5210 d) Move to the process of C5204.

On the other hand, in the process of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the production scenario storage area 223ob is scenario 4 per general pattern (C5206: Yes), special figure fluctuation time counter (special figure 1 fluctuation time counter) The value of 223ln is compared with the game period per normal pattern (C5207). When the processing contents of C5207 are explained in detail, first, using the value of the special figure variation time counter 223ln, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is calculated. For example, when the special figure 1 variation of 60 seconds is executed, the value corresponding to the variation time 60 seconds at the start timing of the special figure 1 variation (in this embodiment, the value of the special figure variation time counter 223ln , the effect update process 18 (see C3142 in FIG. 443), which is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 59), is configured to subtract 1, so the value corresponding to 60 seconds is "60000") is set. And, when this process is executed when 30 seconds have passed since the special figure 1 fluctuation was started, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223 ln indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is "30000" Therefore, "30 seconds" is calculated as the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation. Then, it is calculated based on the type of game per normal figure to be executed this time. In this embodiment, since the opening command output from the main controller 110 includes information indicating the type of game per normal pattern to be executed this time, the game period per normal pattern is calculated based on the information. In addition, here, as the game period per normal figure, the time defined as the end condition established based on the passage of time is calculated.

Specifically, when 3 seconds have passed since the normal pattern per game is started, or when the winning number of balls to the second winning hole 640 reaches 10, the normal pattern per game ends When the end condition is set in advance, "3 seconds", which is the maximum time that the game per normal pattern can continue, is set as the game period per normal pattern. As a result, in the process of predicting the standby period in advance (the period from the special figure 2 winning to the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation) in order to set the production mode of the series of productions, the normal figure used for prediction Since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game period per normal figure actually executed is longer than the game period, the period predicted as the period in which the ball can win the prize to the second winning opening 640 After the elapse of, the ball enters the second winning hole 640, and it is possible to avoid the situation where the special figure 2 variation is executed. Therefore, even when the performance mode is set in advance based on the prediction result, the actual game content and the performance content to be executed are less likely to deviate from each other, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

It should be noted that, when the game period per normal pattern is calculated as described above, the game per normal pattern ends in a period shorter than the calculated game period per normal pattern, that is, the predetermined number within the game period per normal pattern ( 10) balls have won in the second winning hole 640, so that the general pattern per game may end. In this case, it becomes a case where the ball wins in the second winning hole 640 during the normal pattern per game, and at the time when the normal pattern per game ends, the effect corresponding to the waiting period or the special figure 2 fluctuation period Since the performance is executed, it is configured so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

Returning to FIG. 452, the description continues. When the processing of C5207 is finished, then, based on the comparison result of C5207, the special figure 1 remaining period (the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation) is larger (longer) than the game period per normal figure, that is, the feature being executed It is determined whether the timing at which the FIG. 1 fluctuation ends is later than the timing at which the general pattern per game to be executed this time ends (C5208). In the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is shorter than the game period per normal figure (C5208: No), the special figure at the time the ball enters the second winning port 640 during the normal figure per game Since there is a possibility that 1 change has not been executed, the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to ON (C5209), and the process proceeds to C5210.

On the other hand, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is longer than the normal figure per game period, that is, the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed does not end during the normal figure per game that is executed this time (C5208 : Yes), since it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure per game, the process of setting the constant monitoring flag 223oc (C5209) is skipped and shifts to the processing of C5210.

In the process of C5210, the series production scenario during the game per corresponding normal figure is set (C5210), and then the process proceeds to the process of C5204. In the process of C5204, set the normal per figure middle flag to ON (C5204), and then proceed to the process of C5215. Here, when the processing content of C5210 described above is explained in detail, in the processing of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is longer than the game period per normal figure (C5208: Yes), the difference period, that is , Calculate the period from the end of the normal figure per game to the end of the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation. Then, using the calculation result as the special figure 2 waiting period, the general figure scenario corresponding to the special figure 2 waiting period is selected from the general figure scenario table defined in the series production scenario table 222oa, and the production set the mode.

On the other hand, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is shorter than the game period per normal figure (C5208: No), the effect mode (series effect ), the same effect mode as in the sixteenth embodiment described above is set.

Next, in the processing of C5201, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (C5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (C5211). Then, when it is determined that the ending command is received (C5211: Yes), the normal per figure medium flag 223oa is set to OFF (C5212), the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to OFF (C5213), and the display ending A command is set (C5214), and then the process proceeds to C5215. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing executed by the MPU 221. sent. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C5211 that the ending command has not been received (C5211: No), the process proceeds to the process of C5215. In the processing of C5215, processing according to other commands is executed (C5215), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 453, the contents of the variable effect setting process 19 (C4044) will be described. FIG. 453 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process 19 (C4044) executed in the nineteenth embodiment. In this variable effect setting process 19 (C4044), when the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to ON (the game is per normal figure executed during a series of effects, and the length of the waiting period is not set In the case), the point of adding the process for setting the variable effect to be executed and the point of changing the contents of the process for setting the variable effect of the normal symbol, the variable effect setting of the 16th embodiment described above. It is different from processing 5 (see FIG. 416), and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variable effect setting process 19 (C4044) is executed, the same C4101 process as the variable effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 416) of the sixteenth embodiment described above is executed, and the special figure variable effect is not set (normal (C4101: No), the variable effect setting process 19 is executed (C4167), and then this process ends. The details of this variable effect setting process 19 (C4167) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4101, if it is determined to set the special figure fluctuation effect (C4101: Yes), then it is determined whether the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to ON (C4151). When it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is ON (C4151: Yes), constant monitoring effect setting processing is executed (C4152), and the process proceeds to C4102. The details of this constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of C4151 that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is not set to ON, the process of C4152 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C4102. After executing the process of C4152, the same processes of C4102 to C4116 as the variable effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 416) of the sixteenth embodiment described above are executed, and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the contents of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described. FIG. 454 is a flow chart showing the contents of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) executed in the nineteenth embodiment. This constant monitoring production setting process (C4152) is executed in the fluctuation production setting process 19 (see C4044 in FIG. 453), and is executed when a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to special symbol fluctuation is received. It is.

In the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is received (whether it is the start of the special figure 1 variation) (C5301), and corresponds to the special figure 1 variation (C5301: Yes), variation pattern command processing 16 (see C3204 in Figure 409) when it is determined that the variation pattern command to Based on, to extract the variation time of this special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation time) (C5302). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation time is greater than the period per normal figure (long) (C5303).

In the process of C5303, the special figure 1 fluctuation time extracted in the process of C5302 is compared with the remaining period of the general figure per game during execution (per general figure period), and the end timing of the special figure 1 variation time is, It is determined whether it is later than the end timing of the period per normal figure. In the present embodiment, the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is configured to be executed when the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to ON, that is, at least during normal game per game, so C5303 The processing of is to be executed during the game per normal pattern, but when the processing of C5303 is configured to be executable in a state where the game per normal pattern is not executed, the game per normal pattern is executed. As a state without, it may be configured to compare the special figure 1 fluctuation time and the period per normal pattern using the period "0" per normal pattern.

In the process of C5303, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the game period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303: Yes) , Since the special figure 1 fluctuation does not end during the game per normal pattern, the production mode (production scenario of a series of productions) during the normal pattern per game is set based on the determination result of C5303 (C5304), and constant monitoring The flag 223oc is set to off (C5305), and the process proceeds to C5306.

Here, the processing of C5304 will be described in detail. First, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the game period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303: Yes), the difference Period, that is, the period from the end of the game per normal figure to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is calculated, and the calculated period is the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation waiting period (special figure 2 standby period), and out of scenarios 1 to 3 per general pattern defined in the series production scenario table 222oa, the production mode is set based on the normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the special figure 2 standby period calculated this time. On the other hand, in the process of C5303, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is not longer than the period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is earlier than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303 : No), even if this special figure 1 variation is executed, it is not possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period, that is, during this special figure 1 variation, the ball won the second winning opening 640 If not, even after the special figure 1 variation to be executed this time is finished, since the normal figure per game is being executed, the special figure 1 variation is performed during the remaining normal figure per game, or special Since it is not possible to predict whether the variation in FIG. In this case, since the constant monitoring flag 223oc is not set to OFF, the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is subsequently executed.

In the nineteenth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 447 and 448, a period effect (a series of In the case of executing production), the previous game content (length of special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted at multiple timings (ordinary figure fluctuation start timing, normal figure per game start timing), and production is performed based on the prediction result It is configured to set the mode. Then, at each prediction timing, only when it is determined to be unpredictable, the production setting processing during constant monitoring (C4152) is executed, and whether the special figure fluctuation is executed during the normal figure per game is always monitored. Configure.

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to set the production mode of a series of productions at once for the range in which the previous game content (the length of the waiting period of special figure 2) can be predicted in advance, the production of a series of productions It is possible to simplify the processing for setting the presentation mode. In addition, since the processing for predicting the content of the game to be played is configured to be executable at a plurality of timings, the prediction accuracy can be improved. Further, when the preceding game content cannot be predicted at a plurality of prediction timings, the production mode of the series of productions is executed based on the actual game content, so the production of the series of productions is performed. Aspects can be reliably set.

Returning to FIG. 454, the description is continued. In the process of C5301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is not received (it is not the start of the special figure 1 variation) (C5301: No), then the variation corresponding to the special figure 2 variation It is determined whether the pattern command is received (whether it is the start of the special 2 variation) (C5306), and if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 2 variation is received (it is the start of the special 2 variation) (C5306: Yes), since the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the game per normal figure, as described above with reference to FIG. Scenario 3 is set as the effect mode of the corresponding series of effects (C5307), the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to OFF (C5308), the special 2 fluctuation command for display is set (C5309), and then the processing of C5310 is performed. do.

In addition, the process of C5307 described above is a case where a series of effects are executed based on the normal pattern fluctuation, and the first prediction process executed at the normal pattern fluctuation start timing, and the normal pattern per game start timing. It is not possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period in any of the second prediction processes, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the period when the production setting process during constant monitoring is being performed during the normal figure per game. This is done when In other words, it is a case where the special figure 2 variation is executed without predicting the special figure 2 waiting period. Thus, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed in a state where the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, in the process of C5307, the production mode corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation period is configured to be set. Therefore, even if the previous game contents cannot be predicted at a plurality of prediction timings, the series of effects is performed based on the actual game contents, so that the series of effects can be performed. It is possible to reliably set the presentation mode.

On the other hand, in the process of C5306, if it is determined that the variation of the special figure 2 has not started (C5306: No), the process proceeds to C5310. In the processing of C5310, processing according to other commands is executed (C5310), and then this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 455, the contents of the variable effect setting process 19 (C4167) will be described. FIG. 455 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process 19 (C4167) executed in the nineteenth embodiment. This fluctuation production setting process 19 (C4167) is a series production prediction setting process (first 1 prediction process) is different from the effect setting process for normal figure (see FIG. 417) of the sixteenth embodiment described above. Since other contents are the same as those of the general-purpose drawing effect setting process (see FIG. 417) of the sixteenth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variable effect setting process 19 (C4167), first, the same C4201 to C4206 processes as the normal figure effect setting process (see FIG. 417) of the sixteenth embodiment described above are executed. When it is determined that the flag 223lj is off (C4206: No), a series of effect prediction setting processing is executed (C4251), and then the process proceeds to C4208. The details of this series of effect prediction setting processing (C4251) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after executing the same C4208 to C4212 processing as the normal figure production setting processing (see FIG. 417) of the 16th embodiment described above, the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223lm is set to OFF (C4252), then this End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 456, the contents of the series effect prediction setting process (C4251) will be described. FIG. 456 is a flow chart showing the contents of the series effect prediction setting process (C4251) executed in the nineteenth embodiment. In this series effect prediction setting process (C4251), the future game contents (special figure 2 waiting period) are predicted (first prediction) at the time of the start of normal pattern fluctuation, and a series based on the prediction result (first prediction result) A process for setting the effect mode during the period during which the effect is executed is executed, and when the length of the special figure 2 waiting period is predicted as the first prediction result, and when it is not possible to predict , the processing for setting the effect mode is executed for a different period of the period during which the series of effects are executed.

In the series effect prediction setting process (C4251), first, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern variation of this time is a winning variation (C5401). If it is determined that the current normal pattern variation is not a winning variation (C5401: No), the conditions for executing a series of effects are not established, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal figure variation of this time is a variation (C5401: Yes), read the value of the special figure variation time counter (special figure 1 variation time counter) 223 ln (C5402), special figure variation time counter 223ln is greater than 0 (C5403).

In the process of C5403, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is 0, that is, if it is determined that the present time is not in the state of special figure 1 fluctuation (C5403: No), this process is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, the condition for executing a series of effects in the case where the variation per normal pattern is executed, specifically, as shown in FIG. , normal pattern low probability state), the current normal pattern fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more, the series effect counter 223ga is set to off, the non-fluctuation win prize flag 223lm is set to off, and the pseudo series In the state where the production flag 223lj is set to OFF, and further, as shown in FIG. If the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the time this process is executed, it is configured not to execute (set) a series of effects.

By configuring in this way, the presence or absence of the execution of a series of production that can be executed based on the normal per variation, because it is possible to set according to the execution status of the special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation), the normal state It is possible to prevent a series of performances from being executed for a player who is playing a game in which a right-handed game is executed in and only normal pattern fluctuations are executed.

In the process of C5403, if it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is greater than 0 (C5403: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is fluctuating, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln Calculates the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time based on (C5404), extracts and adds up the normal pattern fluctuation time of this time and the game time per normal pattern executed after the end of this normal pattern fluctuation (C5405). In the processing of this C5405, by adding the normal pattern fluctuation time and the game period per normal pattern, the period from the current time (starting time of normal pattern fluctuation) to the end of the game per normal pattern (end period per normal pattern) A process for calculating is executed.

Then, the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time calculated in the process of C5404 and the total time (calculated) in the process of C5405 (total time per normal figure) are compared (C5406), and the comparison result is special figure 1 It is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is greater than the total time per normal figure (longer) (C5407). If it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time is greater than the total time per normal figure (longer) (C5407: Yes), the normal figure per game ends before the special figure 1 fluctuation in execution ends Therefore, it is possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure per game. Therefore, with reference to the series production scenario table 223ha, set the scenario per normal pattern based on the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the total time per normal pattern (special pattern 2 waiting period) (C5408), then this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of C5407, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time is shorter than the total time per normal figure (C5407: No), at the present time, the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period, and predict the length Since it is not possible, scenario 4 per normal pattern is set (C5409), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 19th embodiment, when the general pattern variation is executed, the variation situation of the special pattern (first special pattern) during the general pattern per game is predicted, and based on the prediction result It is configured to set the production mode of a series of productions corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation. In other words, when the normal figure fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation executed this time and the general figure lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per normal figure are calculated, and the calculation result is Based on this, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation currently being executed during the normal figure per game ends, and based on the determination result, the production mode of a series of productions corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation is set. are doing.

By configuring in this way, for example, the variation end timing of the special figure 1 variation being executed is the period in which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640, that is, the game period per normal figure (maximum period) After If it is, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) that can be executed by special figure 2 fluctuation at the time of executing normal figure fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the length of the standby period as various effect modes to be executed during the standby period. Therefore, in contrast to the sixteenth embodiment described above, it is possible to lengthen the variable settable period of the effect mode of the series of effects according to the length of the waiting period. It is possible to make it easier to execute the production.

It should be noted that, in the nineteenth embodiment described above, as in the sixteenth embodiment described above, as a general game per game, a short open per game (closed period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds, open period is 0.1 seconds ) and long open per game (closed period (opening period) 0.1 seconds, first open period 1 second, closed period (waiting period) 1.5 seconds, second open period 0.5 seconds) And, since it is configured to be executable, in the first prediction process (series effect prediction setting process (see C4251 in Figure 456)) executed at the time of normal pattern fluctuation, it was elected in this normal pattern fluctuation It may be configured to determine the type of hit per normal figure and set the prediction range of the first prediction (the period during which the ball can win in the second winning hole 640) based on the determination result. In addition, the aspect of the prediction range corresponding to the type per normal figure determined this time (the length and timing of the period in which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640), that is, the game aspect of the per game per normal figure to be executed Based on this, the ease of winning the ball into the second winning hole 640 during the normal game is determined, and in the first prediction process, the waiting period (after the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the If it is not possible to predict the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the winning is executed, the winning difficulty determination means for determining the ease of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640 Based on the determination result of , it may be configured to set the production mode during the normal pattern fluctuation period.

Specifically, by the winning difficulty level determination means, the winning difficulty level is low (by performing a normal game, it is possible to win the ball in the substantially second winning hole 640) per normal game (for example, Normal pattern long open per game) corresponding to normal pattern per type (for example, normal pattern per A (see Figure 382 (b))) is set, as a production mode that is set during the normal pattern fluctuation period , a performance mode is set in which it is easy to shift to the next performance mode set as a series of performances, and the degree of prize winning is high (even if a normal game is played, it is difficult to win a ball into the second prize winning port 640). When the normal pattern per type (for example, normal pattern per B (see FIG. 382 (b))) corresponding to the normal pattern per game (for example, normal pattern short open per game) is set, normal As the effect mode set during the figure fluctuation period, it is preferable to set the effect mode that suggests the end of the series effect (the effect mode that makes it difficult to shift to the next effect mode set as the series effect). . In this way, when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing of executing the first prediction process, the production mode of the production executed during the normal pattern fluctuation period is varied based on the type of the normal pattern per game to be executed. Therefore, at the time when the normal pattern fluctuation is started, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the jackpot game is likely to be executed with the current normal pattern fluctuation as a trigger, so the first prediction process is executed It is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance executed when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing to be performed.

In addition, it corresponds to the general pattern per game (for example, general pattern short open per game) that is determined to be difficult to win (even if a normal game is played, it is difficult to win the ball in the second winning port 640) If the type per normal pattern (for example, per normal pattern B (see FIG. 382(b))) is set, it may be configured not to set the effect mode corresponding to the series effect. By configuring in this way, it is not possible to win the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the normal game, and the game for the big game (special figure 2 fluctuation, small winning, small winning game) It is possible to suppress the execution of a series of performances when it is difficult to proceed. In this case, when it is determined that the ball has won in the second winning port 640 during a normal game with a high winning difficulty, it is preferable to execute a series of effects from the winning timing. When the length of the waiting period (the period until the special figure 2 variation based on this winning is executed) at the time when the ball wins in the 2 winning opening 640 is a predetermined period or more (for example, 30 seconds or more) , Using a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the time the ball wins in the second winning hole 640, it is preferable to set the effect mode normally set during the normal pattern fluctuation period.

In this way, when a normal game with a high degree of winning difficulty is executed, the start timing of a series of effects is not the normal pattern fluctuation start timing, but the timing when the ball wins the second winning hole 640. To suppress the frequency of ending a series of performances in the middle of the series of performances despite the execution of the series of performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example was shown in which one type per normal pattern corresponding to the game per normal pattern with a low degree of winning difficulty was provided, but without being limited to this, it corresponds to a game per normal pattern with a low degree of winning difficulty. It may be configured to be able to set a plurality of types per normal pattern, and the game mode of the game per normal pattern executed corresponding to each type per normal pattern may be different, for example, it corresponds to a game per normal pattern with a low degree of winning difficulty. At least the normal per pattern type α and the normal per pattern type β can be set as the normal per pattern type, and the game mode of the normal per pattern game (normal per pattern game α) corresponding to the normal per pattern type α As, closed period 0.1 seconds, set a game mode of open period 3 seconds, as a game mode of the normal figure per game (ordinary figure per game β) corresponding to the normal figure per type β, closed period 0.1 seconds , a first open period of 0.1 seconds, a closed period (standby period) of 3 seconds, and a second open period (2.9 seconds).

In this case, when the normal pattern per game with a low winning difficulty level is executed, the period during which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 differs according to the set normal pattern per type, so the normal pattern fluctuation start In the first prediction process executed at the timing, the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second winning opening 640 is determined based on the type of normal pattern, and the first prediction process is performed based on the determination result of the determination means. It is preferable to configure the range of prediction to be made different. Specifically, when the game α per normal pattern is executed, the range of prediction executed in the first prediction process is the range of 0.1 seconds to 3.1 seconds from the start of the game per normal pattern ( open period range), and when the game β per normal pattern is executed, the range of prediction executed in the first prediction process is 3.3 seconds to 6.1 from the start of the game per normal pattern It is preferable to configure the setting based on the range of seconds (the range of the second open period).

In this way, by setting the range to be predicted in association with the game mode (difficulty of winning, setting timing of winning period) of the game per normal figure to be executed, prediction to be executed in the first prediction process range can be narrowed. This makes it easier to predict the standby period in the first prediction process. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a series of performances and enhance the performance effect.

In addition, it is configured to be able to set the type per normal pattern γ as the type per normal pattern corresponding to the game per normal pattern with low winning difficulty, and the game per normal pattern corresponding to the type per normal pattern γ (game per normal pattern γ) game As a mode, when it is configured to set a game mode of a closed period of 0.1 seconds, a first open period of 1.5 seconds, a closed period (standby period) of 3 seconds, and a second open period (1.5 seconds), That is, when the normal pattern per game is executed in which a plurality of open periods in which the ball can win in the second winning hole 640 is set, in the first prediction process, first, it corresponds to the second open period set later Compare the range and the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) during execution, and determine whether the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) is later than the second open period , If it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining variation period) is later than the end timing of the second open period, the special figure being executed from the end timing of the second open period It is configured to set up to the end timing of 1 fluctuation as a standby period, and on the other hand, it is determined that the timing of the elapse of the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) is earlier than the end timing of the second open period. If so, next, the timing of the elapse of the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) and the range corresponding to the first open period are compared.

And, when it is determined that the elapse timing of the first open period is before the elapse timing of the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining variation period), the special figure being executed from the end timing of the first open period The standby period is set to the end timing of one variation, and on the other hand, when it is determined that the timing of the first open period has passed after the timing of the first open period, that is, the first If the special figure 1 variation being executed is stopped and displayed before the 1 open period elapses, the second prediction process described above is executed assuming that the waiting period could not be predicted in the first prediction process. It should be configured as follows.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 457 to 466. FIG. The twentieth embodiment differs from the above-described sixteenth embodiment in that control processing for the final variation performance executed in the final variation of the time saving state is different.

In the 16th embodiment described above, using the final variation effect that is executed in the final variation of the time saving state, the lottery result of the variation, and the special figure 2 variation that is performed after the variation (the time saving state ends, normal It was configured to suggest the pre-discrimination result for the special figure 2 variation) executed in the state where the state is set. By constructing in this way, when a win (big win, small win) is won by the special figure 2 variation executed after the end of the time saving state, it is possible to suggest that effect by the final variation presentation.

The twentieth embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that the processing for setting the effect mode of the final variable effect is described in detail. Specifically, when executing the final variation of the time saving state, based on the lottery result of the variation and the number of special 2 reserved balls (value of special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc), production of final variation production It is configured to set the mode.

Furthermore, when the final fluctuation of the time saving state is a deviation fluctuation, the production period of the final fluctuation production is set based on the special figure 2 reserved ball number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc). there is In other words, if the final variation of the time saving state is a deviation variation, the next special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation executed during the normal state) that is the target of the final variation production after the end of the variation is executed Therefore, if the final variation of the time saving state is an off variation, at the start timing of the final variation of the time saving state, in advance for the variation period of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold already acquired It is configured to set the production mode (final variable production).

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the twentieth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 457 to 461, the electrical configuration of the twentieth embodiment will be described. The twentieth embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. is. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 457(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. FIG. 457(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 457(a), the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment has a final variation effect table 222pa and The difference is that a final effect variable setting table 222pb is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The final variation performance table 222pa is a data table that is referred to when setting the performance mode of the final variation performance, and is referred to when a variation pattern command corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is received. It is what is done. Here, the contents of the final variation effect table 222pa will be described with reference to FIGS. 458 and 459. FIG.

FIG. 458(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final variation effect table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 458(a), the final variation effect table 222pa includes the winning final table 222pa1, which is referred to when the variation lottery result is a win, and the winning final table 222pa1, which is referred to when the variation lottery result is a loss. and a final table 222ib2 for deviation.

Here, the effect period in the final variable effect will be described. In the 20th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, a "waiting period", a "first period", a "second period", and a "third period" are formed as the effect period of the final variable effect. It is configured so that the effect mode can be set for each period. In the sixteenth embodiment described above, regardless of the lottery result of the variation (shortening final variation), the effect mode (standby effect) for notifying that the final variation effect starts in the "waiting period" is set. In the 1st period, the effect mode (acquisition effect) is set to acquire a lot of special figures 2 pending, and in the ``second period'', the lottery result of the change and the prefetching result of the special figure 2 reservation are suggested. A performance mode (mission performance) for performing is set, and a performance mode (result performance) for showing the performance result of the mission performance is set in the 'third period'.

Furthermore, it is configured to determine whether to execute the acquisition effect or the mission effect as the effect to be executed during the ``first period'' based on the number of special 2 reserved balls when the ``waiting period'' has elapsed. However, if the number of special 2 pending balls after the "waiting period" has passed is a predetermined number or more (if the upper limit number is (4)), the mission production is executed in the "first period". Ta.

On the other hand, in the 20th embodiment, based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the timing when the time saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed, the production mode of the final variation production is configured to be set. It is different from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that the Also, based on the lottery result of the variation, the difference from the 16th embodiment described above in that the production mode of the final variation production set at the timing when the time saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed is different are doing. Furthermore, it is different from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that a plurality of timings for setting the effect mode of the final variable effect are provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 458(b), the contents defined in the winning final table 222pa1 included in the final variation effect table 222pa will be described. FIG. 458(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the winning final table 222pa1. As shown in FIG. 458(b), in the winning final table 222pa1, according to the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc (special figure 2 reserved ball number) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf, A performance mode set in each performance period of the final variable performance is defined.

Specifically, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc is "0" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 169", the effect pattern A is used as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "170 to 189", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variable effect, and in the range of "190 to 198", the effect pattern C is defined as the effect pattern of the final variable effect. ing. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc is "1, 2" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 169", the effect pattern A is specified as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "170 to 198", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variable effect. Furthermore, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc is "3", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 109", the effect pattern A is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect, In the range of "110 to 198", an effect pattern B is defined as an effect pattern of the final variable effect.

Here, detailed contents of various effect patterns defined in the winning final table 222pa1 will be described. In effect pattern A, the final variable effect similar to that of the sixteenth embodiment described above is executed, and as described above with reference to FIG. In the waiting period (0th period), the effect mode "standby effect (effect a)" for indicating that the final variable effect is executed is set, and in the first period after the waiting period has passed , "Acquisition effect (effect b)", which is an effect mode for guiding a game method that allows the player to execute the subsequent game advantageously (acquire the special figure 2 reservation), is set, and the first period In the second period after the elapse, the lottery result of the pattern that is the target of the final variation production (the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation that will be the final variation in time saving, the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the moment) A "mission effect (effect c)", which is a effect mode for suggesting, is set, and in a third period after the second period has elapsed, the "mission effect (effect c)" executed during the second period is displayed. A “result effect (effect d)”, which is a effect mode for indicating the effect result (lottery result), is set.

The performance pattern B is a performance pattern set when the time-saving final variation wins (big win, small win), and is a performance for notifying the player of winning as the final variation performance. A mode "special effect 1 (effect e)" is set.

Production pattern C is a production mode that is set when the number of special figures 2 pending when setting the final variable production is a predetermined number or less (0), and the waiting period ( "Standby effect (a)" is set in the 0th period). When this production pattern C is set, after the standby period (0th period) ends, the production mode of the final variable production (production mode executed in each of the first period to the third period) is set again. (final effect variable process) is executed.

The details of this final effect variable process will be described later, but in the final effect variable process, the number of special figures 2 reserved acquired during the waiting period (0th period), and the waiting period (0th period) at the end A process for setting a different effect mode to each of the first period to the third period is executed according to the special figure 2 reservation number.

As described above, in the 20th embodiment, in contrast to the setting method of the final variation production in the 16th embodiment described above, the final variation production is set at the time of setting the final fluctuation production (at the start of the time saving final fluctuation). The point that it is configured to set the production mode, and the lottery result (prefetch result) targeted for the final fluctuation production is the lottery result of the fluctuation and the time of setting the final fluctuation production (at the start of the final fluctuation ) is different in that it is limited to the prefetch result of the special figure 2 pending that has already been acquired.

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to vary the production mode of the final variation production that is executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed It is possible to diversify the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold executed before (during the time saving state). Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved. It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, in the case of varying the production mode of the final variation production to be executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed It is preferable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at a certain time is a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number). By configuring in this way, the player is motivated to play the game so that the number of special figures 2 reserved becomes a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number) at the time when the time saving final variation is executed. can be done.

Since the final table for winning 222pa1 described above is a data table that is referred to when the variation (final time-saving variation) is won, the final variation effect set by referring to the final table for winning 222pa1 is executed. The period is a period corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the time saving final variation. That is, after the end of the final variation effect set with reference to the final table for winning 222pa1, the winning game corresponding to the lottery result of the variation is executed. In this way, if the time-saving final variation is hit and won, the final variation corresponding to the variation time of the variation without considering the variation time of the special figure 2 variation that is executed based on the special figure 2 reservation Since the effect mode of the effect can be set collectively, the processing for setting the effect mode can be simplified.

As described above, the winning final table 222pa1 used in the present twentieth embodiment is such that the smaller the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223lc), the more easily the production pattern C is selected. stipulated. In other words, the smaller the number of special figures 2 pending at the time the final variation of the time saving is executed, the more the number of special figures 2 pending that can be acquired during the waiting period (0th period), so the waiting period (0th period ), it is configured to make it easier to select the production pattern C in which the production mode can be variably set according to the number of special figure 2 reservations acquired during. By configuring in this way, when the time saving final variation is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reservation number is small, it is possible to execute a different final variation performance.

In addition, it is stipulated that the greater the special figure 2 reserved number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc), the more easily the production pattern B is selected as the final variation production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special performance 1 indicating that the winning is won, when the time saving final variation is executed in a state where the number of special figure 2 reservations is large. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game for acquiring the number of reserved special figures 2, and to improve the operation of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 459, the contents of the final table for failure 222ib2 included in the final variation effect table 222pa will be described. FIG. 459 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final table for failure 222ib2. This final table 222ib2 for loss is a data table that is referred to when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation, which is the time saving final variation, is out, and is reserved and stored during the variation period of the variation. It is used to set the production mode of the final variable production with the period of adding the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the suspension as the production period.

In the 20th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, using the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state (final time saving variation), the lottery result of the variation and the execution after the variation It is configured to suggest the pre-discrimination result for the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation executed in the state where the time saving state is finished and the normal state is set). And if the lottery result of the time-saving final fluctuation is won (jackpot, small hit), the winning game will be executed after the end of the fluctuation, so the final fluctuation production will be in the period corresponding to the fluctuation period of the fluctuation configured to run.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is out, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension stored after the end of the variation is executed. In this embodiment, it is configured to execute the final variation production including the variation period of the special figure 2 variation that is retained and stored at the time when the time saving final variation ends.

As shown in FIG. 459, the final table 222ib2 for out is, special figure 2 reservation number (value of special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223lc), look-ahead result for special figure 2 reservation, value of production counter 223lf obtained and , the effect mode of the final variable effect is defined. In addition, as the production period during which the final fluctuation production is executed, the fluctuation period of the time saving final fluctuation and the time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) end, normal state (low probability of special patterns The fluctuation period of the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state) executed in the state, low probability state of the normal symbol) is defined.

Then, at the execution timing of the time-saving final variation, the effect mode of the final variation performance is set even for the variation period of the special figure 2 variation executed corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations already acquired. are doing. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to collectively set the production mode of the production (final fluctuation production) executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations (special figure 2 fluctuation), each special figure fluctuation It is possible to simplify the processing for setting the effect mode compared to the case of setting the effect mode of the final variable effect each time is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if there is winning information indicating winning winning in the special figure 2 reservation that has been acquired at the time of setting the effect mode of the final variable effect (if the look-ahead result is winning), When there is no winning information indicating winning (when the look-ahead result is lost), the execution contents (execution/non-execution, execution period) of the acquisition effect executed during the final variation effect are configured to be different. If there is winning information indicating winning in the reserved special figure 2 that has already been acquired (if the result of the look-ahead is a win), it is more difficult to execute the acquisition effect than in other cases, Alternatively, even if it is executed, the execution period is shortened.

By constructing in this way, the player can predict the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation according to the performance mode of the variable performance executed as the final variable performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, the state where the time saving state can end, that is, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the time saving final variation is a deviation variation, and the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation that has been acquired at the time the time saving final variation is executed In the state of being out, the production mode (acquisition production (production b)) for increasing the number of executions of the advantageous game (special figure 2 lottery during normal state) executed after the time saving state ends can be emphasized as compared with the case of . Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the number of executions of the advantageous game executed after the time saving state ends.

Here, when the contents defined in the final table 222ib2 for loss are specifically described with reference to FIG. , when the obtained value of the effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 159", "effect a" is set in the standby period, "effect b" is set in the first period, and "effect c" is set in the second period. Directive data is specified. In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number (value of special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223lc) is 0, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "160 to 179", the waiting period, and the Effect data is defined in which “effect b” is set in the first period and “effect c” is set in the second period. Further, when the obtained value of the effect counter 223lf is in the range of "180 to 198", the effect data is defined so that "effect a" is set during the standby period.

In addition, in the final table 222ib2 for this deviation, the effect mode executed in the final effect period of the final variable effect at the present time is not set (in FIG. 459, "○" is displayed as a display mode indicating that it is not set). It consists of In other words, if the hit is not included in the special figure lottery result (prefetching result) that can be grasped at the execution timing of the final time saving variation, special figure 2 corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired after the execution timing of the final time saving variation Variation may be executed after the special figure 2 variation that is the target of the look-ahead process at the execution timing of the time saving final variation.

In this way, when it is necessary to vary the effect result (effect mode) of the final variable effect according to the lottery result of the special figure change that can be executed in the period from the execution of the final variable effect to the end of the final variable effect is configured to be able to variably set the presentation mode of the final variation presentation even at a timing other than the execution timing of the time saving final variation. Therefore, the final variable production can be executed in various production modes.

Returning to FIG. 459, the description continues. If the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223lc) is 1, and the special figure 2 reservation contains the winning information indicating the winning and is "with a reservation hit", that is, , The special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is a deviation variation, and the next special figure 2 variation (the first special figure 2 variation to be performed after the normal state is set ) becomes a hit variation, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "effect a" is in the standby period, and "effect b" is in the first period. , "Production c" in the second period, the third period, and the first special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 1) after the normal state is set In the fluctuation period (common 1) Effect data in which "effect d" is set is defined.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223lc) is 1, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, and it is "no hit in the reservation". In the case, that is, the special figure 2 variation to be executed this time (time saving state last special figure 2 variation) is an off variation, and the special figure 2 variation to be performed next (normal state is set first special to be executed Figure 2 fluctuation) is also a deviation fluctuation, if the value of the acquired production counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 189", "production a" in the standby period and "production b" in the first period , "Continuous effect (effect f)", which is a display mode for delaying the display of "effect c" in the second period and the effect result of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period, is set. Production data to be executed is specified.

Here, the above-mentioned "continuous effect" is a effect mode that is displayed after the mission effect (see FIG. 374(b)) is executed, and is a effect mode that indicates the effect result of the mission effect (see FIG. 375 ( See a)), that is, the result effect (effect d) is a effect mode executed when extending the period until it is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Although the detailed display contents are omitted, for example, when the production mode shown in FIG. By reducing the speed, the period indicating the process until the effect result (success or failure) of the mission effect being executed is displayed is extended, or the mission effect continues as the effect result of the mission effect being executed ( A display mode (for example, characters “Continue!”) for indicating that the second mission production is executed) is displayed, and a plurality of mission productions are performed in one final variation production. A performance mode is set for executing a pseudo-result display performance for temporarily displaying a display mode suggesting a performance result different from the actual performance result as the performance result of the mission performance.

In this way, by configuring to execute "continuous performance" as the final variable performance, for example, after the final variable performance is executed, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, and the execution period of the final variable performance being executed is extended, the performance period of the final variable performance can be extended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223lc) is 2, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation (hit in the reservation "Yes") If it is, that is, the special figure 2 variation (time saving state last special figure 2 variation) to be executed this time is a deviation variation, and the special figure variation corresponding to at least one of the two special figure 2 reservations that have been acquired In the case of a hit variation, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "effect a" is applied during the standby period, "effect b" is applied during the first period, and "effect b" is applied during the first period. "Production c" in the 2nd period, the 3rd period, and the first special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 1) after the normal state is set (1), 2 Of the fluctuation period (2) of the second special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 2), the effect data in which "production d" is set in the period until the end of the hit fluctuation is specified. ing.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223lc) is 2, and the special figure 2 reservation does not contain the winning information indicating the winning, and it is "no hit in the reservation". In the case, that is, the special figure 2 variation to be executed this time (time saving state last special figure 2 variation) is an off variation, and the special figure 2 variation to be performed next (normal state is set first special to be executed Figure 2 fluctuation) is also a deviation fluctuation, if the value of the acquired production counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 189", "production a" in the standby period and "production b" in the first period , "Continuous effect (effect f)", which is a display mode for delaying the display of "effect c" in the second period and the effect result of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period, is set. Production data to be executed is specified.

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223lc) is 3, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation (hit in the reservation "Yes") If it is, that is, the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is a deviation variation, and the special figure variation corresponding to at least one of the three special figure 2 reservations that have been acquired In the case of a hit variation, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "effect a" is applied during the standby period, "effect b" is applied during the first period, and "effect b" is applied during the first period. ``Production c'' is set in the 2nd period, and ``Production d'' is set in the 3rd period and the period until the winning fluctuation ends among the 1st fluctuation period, the 2nd fluctuation period, and the 3rd fluctuation period. Data are specified.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223lc) is 3 and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 reservation (hit in the reservation "none") That is, if the special figure 2 variation (last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) executed this time is a deviation variation, and the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the three special figure 2 reservations that have already been acquired are all deviations , regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), effect data is defined in which "effect a" is set during the standby period.

Returning to FIG. 457(a), the description continues. The final production variable setting table 222pb is a data table used to select the production mode of the final variable production executed in the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation). When setting using the final variation performance table 222pa, if there is a performance period (unset period) in which the performance mode is not set, the performance mode is set for the unset period during execution of the final variation performance. It is used for Specifically, in the final variable effect update process 20 (C4566 in FIG. 466), it is determined that the waiting period (0th period) has ended (C4863 in FIG. 466: Yes), and the variable effect flag 223pc is set to ON. (C4864 in FIG. 466: Yes), that is, when there is an effect period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set, it is referred (see C4865 in FIG. 466).

Here, the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222pb will be described with reference to FIGS. 460 and 461. FIG. FIG. 460(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222pb. As shown in FIG. 460 (a), the final effect variable setting table 222pb is a winning setting table 222pb1 that is referred to when the special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) being executed is a winning fluctuation, and the It has a setting table 222pb2 for deviation, which is referred to when the special figure 2 fluctuation (shortening final fluctuation) is an off fluctuation, and according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (shortening final fluctuation) being executed , different presentation modes are set. In addition, although detailed description will be described later, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) being executed is a hit, and if it is off, the elements that are referred to when setting the production mode are different. I'm letting

By configuring in this way, the effect mode set as the final variable effect can be set in correspondence with the actual game content (the special drawing lottery result and the increase in the number of retained balls), so that the player It is possible to make the audience interested in the performance contents of the final variable performance executed for.

Next, the contents of the win setting table 222pb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 460(b). FIG. 460(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the win setting table 222pb1. As shown in FIG. 460(b), the winning setting table 222pb1 is the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa, that is, during the period from the execution of the final variation effect to the end of the waiting period (0th period) Different production modes are defined based on the acquired special figure 2 reservation number and the value of the acquired production counter 223lf.

Specifically, when the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is "0, 1" and the value of the acquired production counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 198", "production b" in the first period, It is stipulated that "effect c" is set in the second period and "effect d" is set in the third period. In addition, without setting a new production mode for the period in which the production mode has already been set at the time of execution of the final variable production, an unset period (Fig. This table is referred to only for the period indicated by "○" in 458(b) to set the mode of presentation.

Next, when the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is "2" and the value of the acquired production counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 149", "production b" in the first period and in the second period If it is specified to set "effect c" and "effect d" in the third period, and if it is in the range of "150 to 198", in the first period, the second period, and the third period, Set "special performance 2 (performance g)", which is a high-expectation notification mode to indicate that the performance result of the final variable performance is highly likely to be a performance result indicating winning of the special symbol (special figure 2). It is stipulated to

The above-mentioned "special effect 2 (effect g)" is an effect mode in which an effect different from the mission effect (see FIG. 374(b)) normally executed as the final variable effect is executed, and detailed description is given. Although will be described later, the selection ratio is defined so that the effect result of the final variable effect of this time is more likely to be the effect result indicating winning than the mission effect is executed.

The detailed display contents of this "special effect 2" will not be explained, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will darken, and the result will be a effect indicating winning. A win display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") and a loss display mode (display mode imitating a "cross mark"), which is the effect result indicating a lost win, are displayed, and are displayed to the end. An effect is executed in which the displayed mode is the effect result of the final variable effect. In this way, immediately after the waiting period ends, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that an effect different from the normal one will be executed, so that the player can expect the effect to be executed while expecting a win. can be watched.

The contents of the "special effect 2" are not limited to those described above. For example, according to the example shown in FIG. , a character that is not displayed in the small display area Dm21 (for example, a character that imitates a whale) may be set to execute a mission effect different from the normal one, or the same ally character (851a to 851d) may be used to execute an effect in which a special mission is executed.

By configuring in this way, image data used in normal mission effects can be diverted as part of the image data of effects executed as "special effect 2", so the image data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. can be reduced.

Next, when the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is "3" and the value of the acquired production counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 119", "production b" in the first period and in the second period If it is specified to set "effect c" and "effect d" in the third period, and if it is in the range of "120 to 198", "effect g" in the first period, the second period, and the third period is specified to be set.

Finally, if the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is "4" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 149", the first period, the second period, and the third period " Effect g” is defined to be set, and if it is in the range of “150 to 198”, the effect result of the final variable effect being executed is a special symbol ( It is stipulated to set "special effect 3 (effect h)" which is a fixed notification mode for notifying that the effect result indicating winning of special figure 2) will be set.

The above-mentioned "special production 3 (production h)" is usually performed as a final variation production mission production (see FIG. 374 (b)) different production is executed, the time-saving final variation ( It is executed only when the lottery result of special figure 2 fluctuation) is hit. Although the detailed display contents of this "special effect 3" will not be described, for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes dark, and the effect result indicating winning is displayed. An effect is executed in which a winning display mode (a display mode imitating the letter "V") is displayed. In this way, immediately after the waiting period of the final variable performance ends, the player is notified of winning, thereby allowing the player to mentally prepare for the winning game. In addition, by making the display mode at the start of the special effect 2 and the display mode at the start of the special effect 3 the same (mode in which the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is darkened (blacked out)), the player can On the other hand, it is possible to notify in advance that the final variable performance of this time is the special performance 2 or the special performance 3. As a result, the player watches the final variable performance while expecting that the special performance 3 will be executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the twentieth embodiment, as a benefit given to the player when the effect corresponding to the special effect 3 is executed, the effect result of the final variable effect is notified before the final variable effect ends. Although it is configured to provide benefits, it may be configured to provide other benefits, for example, based on the prefetch result of special figure 2 pending acquired at the timing when special effect 3 is set It is also possible to provide a privilege for informing the player of the number of times the player wins the prize. Specifically, when there are two special figures 2 suspensions in which the look-ahead result is hit and won among the four special figures 2 suspensions, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used as the performance mode of the special performance 3. becomes dark, and an effect is executed in which a plurality of winning display modes (display modes imitating the letter "V"), which are the effect results indicating winning, are displayed, and finally the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The number of winning display modes displayed may be configured to indicate the number of winning times. In this way, as a special effect (special effect 3) that is executed when a special effect condition is established, the first benefit (notification of winning) is given to the player based on the execution of the special effect. Then, after the first privilege is granted, a second privilege (notification of the number of wins) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege can be granted, so that even after the first privilege is granted, It is possible to make the player interested in the performance contents of the special performance (special performance 3) executed for the player, and to enhance the performance effect.

Now refer to FIG. The contents of the out setting table 222pb2 will be described. FIG. 461 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the setting table for deviation 222pb2. This setting table 222pb2 for the deviation, when setting the final variation effect to be executed corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), when using the final table 222ib2 for the deviation (see C4364 in Figure 465 ), the data table used for setting the effect mode for the unset period (the period indicated by “○” in FIG. 459) in which the effect mode is not set, and the final variable effect update process 20 (FIG. 466 C4566 in FIG. 466), when it is determined that it is time to end the waiting period (0th period) (C4863 in FIG. 466: Yes), it is referred to (see C4865 in FIG. 466).

As shown in FIG. 461, the setting table 222pb2 for the loss includes the value of the number of pending balls increase counter 223ia (the number of special figures 2 pending acquired during the waiting period) and the presence or absence of additional hits ( acquired during the waiting period Presence or absence of winning based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation), the setting state of the reservation upper limit flag 223ls, and the value of the obtained production counter 223lf Based on, it is set for each production period of the final variable production. Production modes are defined.

It should be noted that, when the final variation effect to be executed corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is set using the final table 222ib2 for the loss (see C4364 in Figure 465), the effect mode is already set It is configured such that the effect mode is set by referring to the setting table 222pb2 for failure only for the unset period without setting a new effect mode for the effect period that has been set.

Next, the contents defined in the out setting table 222pb2 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. First, if the value of the number of pending balls increase counter 223ia is "0", that is, if the new special figure 2 pending is not acquired during the waiting period, the presence or absence of additional hits and the setting status of the pending upper limit flag 223ls , Regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf, various effect modes are set such that "effect b" is set in the first period, "effect c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third period to the fourth period. is stipulated. That is, since there is no change in the number of special figures 2 pending when the final variable production is started, the final result production (production d) is performed without setting a special production mode. Result is set.

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "1", the additional hit is "Yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation production In a state where the number of reservations is 3 and the prefetch results of the acquired special figure 2 reservations (3 pieces) are all out, if the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation newly acquired during the waiting period is a hit , In the range of "0 to 169" of the obtained effect counter 223lf, various effects are set such that "effect c" is set in the first and second periods, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. Aspects are defined. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance b) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. It is By configuring in this way, for the player, useless production (acquisition production to play a game to acquire special figure 2 reservation even though the number of special figure 2 reservations has reached the upper limit) You can prevent what is happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the contents of the executed performance and lowering the effect of the performance. In addition, when the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf is in the range of "170 to 198", various effects are specified such that "effect g" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. ing.

In addition, when the value of the number of pending balls increase counter 223ia is "1" and the additional hit is "none", the first Various production modes are defined such that "production b" is set for the period, "production c" is set for the second period, and "production d" is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, when the final variable production is started, one new special figure 2 reservation is acquired, and if the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation is out, a dedicated production mode is set. There is no effect, and the effect result indicating the failure is set as the final result effect (effect d).

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "Yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect In a state where the number of reservations is 2 and the prefetch results of the acquired special figure 2 reservations (2 pieces) are all out, as the prefetch results of the two special figure 2 reservations newly acquired during the waiting period, at least If the look-ahead result of any special figure 2 reservation is a win, regardless of the value of the acquired production counter 223lf, "production c" in the first period and the second period, "production c" in the third to four periods d” is set, various presentation modes are defined. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition production (production b) for letting the player acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is

By configuring in this way, for the player, useless production (acquisition production to play a game to acquire special figure 2 reservation even though the number of special figure 2 reservations has reached the upper limit) You can prevent what is happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the contents of the executed performance and lowering the effect of the performance.

On the other hand, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 pending at the start of the final variation production In a state where the number is 2 and the prefetching results of the acquired special figure 2 suspension (2 pieces) are all out, the prefetching results of the two special figure 2 suspensions newly acquired during the waiting period are also out. In this case, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf, various effect modes are defined such that "effect c" is set in the first and second periods, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. there is That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition production (production b) for letting the player acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is

Also, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to off, that is, the special acquired during the waiting period of the final variation effect In the state where the look-ahead results of FIG. If the number does not reach the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf, "effect b" in the first period, "effect c" in the second period, and the third to four periods Various production modes are defined so that "production d" is set to . That is, when the waiting period ends, since the hold upper limit flag 223ls is set to OFF, the acquisition effect (production b) for making the player acquire the special figure 2 hold newly using the first period configured to run

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "0 to 109", various effects are defined such that "effect c" is set for the first and second periods, and "effect d" is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, when the standby period ends, the acquisition effect (effect b) is executed even though the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON. In this way, when the performance result indicating winning is displayed as the performance result of the final variable performance, the state in which the suspension upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, that is, a new special figure 2 suspension is obtained. Even in a state in which it is not possible to do so, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved balls of special figure 2 and the performance mode to be executed by intentionally executing the acquisition performance.

In addition, in the twentieth embodiment, only when the effect result of the final variable effect is the effect result indicating the win winning effect (despite the above-described effect (holding upper limit flag 223ls being set to ON), Since the production b) is executed, the production is executed with a difference between the actual number of special figures 2 reserved balls and the production mode to be executed. , it is possible to inform that the effect result of the final variable effect becomes the effect result indicating winning. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "110 to 198 , various effects are defined such that "effect c" is set in the first and second periods, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance b) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. It is

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to OFF, regardless of the value of the production counter 223lf obtained, Various production modes are defined such that "production c" is set for the first and second periods, and "production d" is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, when the standby period ends, the acquisition effect (effect b) is not executed even though the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to OFF. In this way, when the effect result indicating winning is displayed as the effect result of the final variable effect, the state in which the hold upper limit flag 223ls is set to off, that is, it is possible to obtain a new special figure 2 hold. Even if it is possible, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of special-figure 2 reserved balls and the performance mode to be executed by configuring so as not to execute the acquisition performance intentionally.

Even in this case, by executing an effect with a difference between the actual number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 and the effect mode to be executed, the effect result of the final variable effect becomes the effect result indicating winning. can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game contents and the effect contents to be executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

If the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 pending number at the start of the final variation effect 2, in a state where the prefetching results of the acquired special figure 2 pending (2 pieces) are all out, if the prefetching result of the two special figure 2 pending newly acquired during the waiting period is also out , irrespective of the acquired value of the effect counter 223lf, various effect modes are defined such that "effect c" is set in the first and second periods, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance b) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. It is

In addition, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to off, that is, the special acquired during the waiting period of the final variation effect In the state where the look-ahead results of FIG. If the number does not reach the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf, "effect b" in the first period, "effect c" in the second period, and the third to four periods Various production modes are defined so that "production d" is set to . That is, when the waiting period ends, since the hold upper limit flag 223ls is set to OFF, the acquisition effect (production b) for making the player acquire a new special figure 2 hold using the first period configured to run

Finally, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "4", that is, the number of special figures 2 pending at the time the final variation effect is executed is "0", and four special figures 2 during the standby period When a new hold is acquired, the value of the production counter 223lf acquired with an additional hit of "Yes" is in the range of "0 to 99" in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth period " Various production modes are defined so as to set "production g", and in the range of "100 to 198", various types are set so as to set "production h" in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth period. Production modes are defined. Then, if the additional win is "none", regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf, "effect c" is set for the first and second periods, and "effect d" is set for the third to fourth periods. Various presentation modes are defined as follows. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance b) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. It is

Next, with reference to FIG. 457(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment described above, with a holding number increase counter 223pa, a variable period storage area 223pb, The difference is that a variable effect flag 223pc is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The holding number increase counter 223pa is a special figure 2 acquired within a specific period (waiting period set as part of the production period of the final fluctuation production executed in response to the final fluctuation of the time saving state, and the first period) It is a counter for measuring the number of reservations, and the value of the counter is incremented by 1 each time a new special figure 2 reservation is acquired within a specific period. This pending number increase counter 223pa received the winning information command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning in the final winning process (see C3461 in Figure 464) executed in the winning information command process 20 (see C3262 in Figure 463) (C5501: Yes), if it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is set to ON (C5502: Yes), that is, in order to set the effect mode of the final variable effect, special acquired during the standby period If it is necessary to count the number of FIG. 2 pending, 1 is added to the counter value (see C5503 in FIG. 464).

Then, in the final variable effect update process 20 (see C4566 in FIG. 466), when it is determined that the waiting period has ended (C4863 in FIG. 466: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the counter value is the final effect variable setting table 222pb. (see C4865 in FIG. 466). Furthermore, when it is determined that the first period has ended (C4866: Yes in the figure), the variation period of the special figure 2 hold acquired during the final variation performance is the performance period of the final variation performance. Therefore, the counter value is referenced (C4868), and then the counter value is reset to the initial value (0).

In this way, by providing a configuration that counts the number of specific reserved memories (for example, special figure 2 reserved) acquired during a specific period (for example, during the waiting period), a specific reserved memory at the end of the specific period Since it is possible to set a performance mode after a specific period based on not only the number but also the specific number of reserved memories acquired during the specific period, it is possible to set a wide variety of performance modes. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with a new game feature of acquiring a large number of reserved memories within a predetermined period of time, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a configuration for counting the number of specific pending storage (eg, special figure 2 pending) acquired during a specific period (eg, during the waiting period), a dedicated counter (holding number increase counter 223pa) is used, but not limited to this, for example, a storage means is provided to temporarily store the number of pending memories at the start of the specific period, and the number of pending memories at the end of the specific period and the number stored in the storage means The number of reserved memories acquired during a specific period may be calculated by comparing with the number of reserved memories obtained.

Also, in the present embodiment, a specific period (for example, waiting period) for measuring the number of acquisitions of a specific pending memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) is within one special figure fluctuation period (for example, special figure 2 fluctuation within the period), the number of reserved memories does not decrease within a specific period, and a configuration is used that simply adds the number of reserved memories acquired. As a specific period for measuring the number of acquisitions, it may be configured to set a period during which the number of acquisitions of a specific pending memory may decrease (for example, a period set across multiple special figure 2 fluctuations), In this case, as a configuration that counts the number of specific pending memories (for example, special figure 2 pending), the counter value is added by 1 each time a specific pending memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) is acquired, and a specific (For example, each time the special figure 2 variation using the special figure 2 suspension is executed) the counter value may be configured to be decremented by 1 each time the reservation storage decreases. In addition, in this case, than the start of the specific period, since it is possible that the number of specific pending memories at the end of the specific period is less, a specific pending memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) of As a configuration for counting the number, it is preferable to set the initial value of the counter to a value larger than the upper limit number that can be stored in a specific reserved memory. With this configuration, when the counter value is increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the specific reserved storage during the specific period, the counter value can be reliably prevented from becoming smaller than 0.

Also, as a specific period to measure the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved memory, set a period during which the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved memory can decrease (for example, a period set across multiple Toku-zu 2 fluctuations) , it is not a configuration that counts the number of specific reserved memories actually increased within a specific period as described above, but only adds the number of specific reserved memories newly acquired within a specific period. configuration may be used.

Furthermore, in the twentieth embodiment, based on the number of increases in the specific retention memory (special figure 2 retention) within a predetermined specific period (within the standby period), to set the effect mode after the specific period elapses However, without being limited to this, the specific period is set according to the game content (lottery result of each symbol, game state, etc.) and the operation content of the player's operation means (for example, the frame button 22) For example, a plurality of discontinuous periods may be set as the specific period, or the length of one specific period may be variable. In this case, by not notifying the player of the timing at which the specific period is set, it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the reserved value is counted. Therefore, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player.

Also, the specific period is not set based on the establishment of a predetermined deletion condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the player performs an operation indicating that the specific period is not to be set using the operation means). can be configured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect in a manner suitable for each player.

The fluctuation period storage area 223pb is a storage area for temporarily storing the production mode of the final fluctuation production to be executed in the final fluctuation of the time saving state (final time saving fluctuation). In this variable period storage area 223pb, there are a standby period (0th period), a first period, a second period, a third period associated with the final variable period of the time saving state, and after the end of the time saving state (normal state setting Later) Toku-zu 2 variation (Toku-zu 2 variation based on Toku-zu 2 hold acquired during the time saving state) period), 2nd period (2nd special 2 fluctuation period after normal state is set), 3rd period (3rd special 2 fluctuation period after normal state is set), 4th period (normal A storage area corresponding to each period is formed in order to store the effect mode set for each period of the 4th special figure 2 fluctuation period after the state is set.

Then, the information indicating the effect mode of the final variable effect set in the time saving effect setting process 20 (see C4164 in FIG. 465) is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4365 in FIG. 465), and the final variable effect update process (See C4566 in FIG. 466), if it is determined that it is the end timing of the standby period (C4863: Yes in FIG. 466), and if it is determined that it is the set effect mode (C4865) or the end timing of the first period (C4866 in FIG. 466: Yes), the set rendering mode is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4869 in FIG. 466). Then, although illustration is omitted, when the final variable effect ends, the information indicating the effect mode stored in each storage area is cleared.

In this way, in the case of using a configuration in which the effect mode of the period effect executed using the predetermined period can be set at a plurality of timings (timing to start the period effect, predetermined timing during execution of the period effect), the period effect By providing a storage area for storing the set performance mode each time the performance mode is set, it is possible to set the subsequent performance mode based on the contents of the previously set performance mode. Become. Therefore, in the case of executing the effect for one period using the effect modes set at a plurality of timings, it is possible to set the effect mode without causing discomfort.

The production variable flag 223pc is a flag for indicating that there is a period (unset period) in which the production mode is not set as the production mode of the final variation production executed in the final fluctuation of the time saving state (final time saving fluctuation). It is set to ON when it is determined that there is an unset period. Specifically, in the production setting process 20 for time saving (see C4164 in FIG. 465), the production mode of the final variable production is set (see C4362 and C4364 in FIG. 465), and the production mode is not set. If it is determined that there is (C4366 in FIG. 465: Yes), it is set to ON (see C4367 in FIG. 465).

Then, in the final fluctuation performance update process 20 (C4566 in FIG. 466), it is the timing when the waiting period ends (C4863 in FIG. 466: Yes) and the timing when the first period ends (C4866 in FIG. 466: Yes). That is, when it is determined that it is the timing at which it is possible to set the effect mode of the final variable effect, the setting status is determined (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 466), and when it is determined that it is set to ON , a new presentation mode is set for the unset period (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 466). Then, it is set to OFF after setting the effect mode for the unset period (see C4871 in FIG. 466).

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the twentieth embodiment>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 462 to 466. FIG. In the present embodiment, the command determination processing 20 (see FIG. 462) is executed instead of the command determination processing 16 (see FIG. 406), and the winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. (see FIG. 463) instead of executing the winning information command process 20 (see FIG. 463), the point of executing the final winning process (see FIG. 464), and the time saving production setting process (see FIG. 418) instead of the time saving The difference is that the performance setting processing 20 (see FIG. 465) is executed, and the final fluctuation performance update processing 20 (see FIG. 466) is executed instead of the final fluctuation performance update processing (see FIG. 423). are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, the numerical values were simply changed, and technically speaking, are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 20 (C3163) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 462 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 20 (C3163) executed in the twentieth embodiment.

When the command determination process 20 (C3163) is executed, if it is determined in the above-described process of C3201 that the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3201: Yes), the winning information command process 20 is executed. (C3262), and the process ends. A detailed description of this winning information command process 20 (C3262) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of C3201, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (C3201: No), the same C3203 to C3209 as in the command determination process 16 of the sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 406) After executing the process, it is determined whether the number of special 2 reservations (special figure 2 number of reservations) is the upper limit (C3261). Here, in the process of C3261, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc is the upper limit value "4".

In the process of C3261, if it is determined that the special 2 pending number (special figure 2 pending number) is the upper limit (C3261: Yes), set the pending upper limit flag 223ls to ON (C3262), then end this process If it is determined that the special 2 reservation number (special figure 2 reservation number) is not the upper limit (C3261: No), the process of C3262 is not executed and the process ends.

Also, after executing the same processing of C3210 to C3217 as the command determination processing 16 (see FIG. 406) of the sixteenth embodiment described above, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 463, the contents of the winning information command process 20 (C3262) will be described. FIG. 463 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information command process 20 (C3262) executed in the twentieth embodiment. In this winning information command process 20 (C3262), the content of the process executed when it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is set to ON with respect to the above-described winning information command process 16 (see FIG. 407) The difference is that the

When the winning information command process 20 (C3262) is executed, the same processes of C3401 to C3402 as the winning information command process 16 (see FIG. 407) of the sixteenth embodiment described above are executed, and then the process of C3403 is executed. First, in the process of C3404, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223lk is ON (C3404: Yes), the final winning process is executed (C3461), and the process proceeds to C3406. The details of this final winning process (C3461) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of C3404, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223lk is off (C3404: No), the process of C3461 is skipped and the process proceeds to C3406. After that, the processing of C3406 and C3407 is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 464, the contents of the final winning process (C3461) will be described. FIG. 464 is a flow chart showing the details of the final winning process (C3461) executed in the twentieth embodiment. In this final winning process (C3461), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 while the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is being executed, and a new special figure 2 reservation (winning information) A process for setting an effect mode when a winning information command indicating that a prize has been won is received is executed.

When the final winning process (C3461) is executed, first, the winning information command received this time determines whether the winning information command indicates that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (whether there was a special figure 2 winning). (C5501), when it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning port 640 has not been received (not special figure 2 winning) (C5501: No), this process is terminated as it is .

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning hole 640 is received (special figure 2 winning) (C5501: Yes), then the effect variable flag 223pc is on. (C5502). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is ON (C5502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa (C5503), and the process proceeds to C5504. When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is off (C5502: No), the process of C5503 is skipped and the process proceeds to C5504.

In the process of C5504, the information in the variable period storage area 223pb is read (C5504), and then it is determined whether the acquisition effect is currently in progress (C5505). If it is determined that the acquisition effect is currently being performed (C5505: Yes), a display command indicating pending acquisition during the acquisition effect is set (C5506), and then this processing is terminated. In the process of C5505, if it is determined that the acquisition effect is not currently in progress (C5505: No), a display command indicating pending acquisition is set (C5507), and then this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the final variation effect in correspondence with the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), and a new special figure 2 hold as part of the final variation effect It is configured to execute an acquisition effect (see FIG. 373(b)) for allowing the player to acquire. Then, when the timing of acquiring the new special figure 2 reservation (the timing of receiving the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning) is during execution of the acquisition performance, it is configured to execute the exclusive performance. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to associate the content of the effect being executed with the actual game situation, so that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the special figure 2 suspension is acquired based on the production contents being executed at the timing of acquiring the new special figure 2 suspension (the timing of receiving the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning) Although it is configured to vary the production mode shown, other configurations may be used, for example, the timing of acquiring a new special figure 2 hold and the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining variation time of the time saving final variation ) may be used to set the effect mode. In this case, for example, the winning determination means indicating that the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning has been received, and the remaining time determination for determining the remaining time of the time saving state at the time of receiving the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning means, and the remaining period of the time saving state at the time when it is determined that the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received by the winning determination means (there is a special figure 2 winning), that is, the special figure 2 hold If the remaining period that can be easily acquired is a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more, a display mode indicating that the special figure 2 pending number has increased due to the special figure 2 winning (for example, "plus 1" comment ) is displayed, and if it is less than the predetermined period, a display mode (for example, a comment of "plus 1") indicating that the number of special figures 2 pending has increased due to the special figure 2 winning, in addition to special figures 2 pending It is preferable to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "barely safe") indicating that the number of special figures 2 pending has increased in a state where the remaining period that can be easily acquired is small.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to determine whether the timing of acquiring the new special figure 2 reservation is a timing with a margin, so it can be used as a reference for future games. can be done. Also, in this case, it is preferable not to notify the player of the remaining period of the time-saving state, ie, the remaining period in which the special figure 2 reservation can be easily acquired. As a result, the player determines the remaining period of the time saving state based on the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired, so the display displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired Aspects can be watched. In addition, the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired may be configured to be different according to the number of special figure 2 reservations, for example, the number of special figure 2 reservations that have been acquired is predetermined In the state below the number (for example, "2" or less), when the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received, the remaining period of the time saving state, that is, the remaining period that can easily acquire the special figure 2 reservation is specified If it is less than the period (for example, 3 seconds), in addition to the display mode (for example, "plus 1" comment) indicating that the number of special figures 2 pending has increased due to the special figure 2 winning, special figures 2 pending It may be configured to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "It might be severe") suggesting that it is difficult to set the number of .

Also, as a method of determining the remaining period of the time saving state, the period until the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the period until the final special figure fluctuation of the time saving state ends) is set as the remaining time of the time saving state. Alternatively, the period until the end of the last normal figure per game executed in the time saving state may be set as the remaining period of the time saving state.

That is, in the present embodiment, the time saving state ends when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 1 time, 5 times) during the time saving state It is configured to Therefore, it becomes possible to calculate the remaining period until the time saving state ends based on the number of times of variation and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, in the state where the time saving state is set, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and the ball is easy to win in the second winning opening 640. It is structured to make it easier to win the election. In addition, the normal symbol is configured such that the game mode is set according to the game state at the time when the lottery is executed and the game state at the time when the game per normal pattern is executed, specifically. If the time saving state is set when the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) is executed, the normal pattern lottery and the normal pattern fluctuation time setting are executed as a high probability state of the normal pattern, and the normal pattern per game If the time-saving state is set when is executed, the game per normal pattern is executed as a high-probability state of the normal pattern. Therefore, even if it is elected per normal pattern by the normal pattern lottery executed during the time saving state, when the normal state is set at the time the normal pattern per game is executed based on the normal pattern, normally A normal pattern per game will be executed as a low probability state of the pattern.

In this embodiment configured in this way, depending on the variation timing of the special symbol and the variation timing of the normal symbol, before the last special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) executed during the time saving state ends Then, the state in which the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640 may end. In this case, if the period until the end of the last special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) executed during the time saving state is determined as the remaining period of the time saving state, the second winning prize within the remaining period Since the opening 640 includes a period in which it is not easy for the ball to win a prize, there arises a problem that the player's desire to play is lowered.

Therefore, when determining the remaining period of the time saving state, the period until the state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 ends, that is, the period during which the normal game can be executed during the time saving state is determined. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately determine a period advantageous to the player (a period in which a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 is likely to be set) as the remaining period in the time saving state. Therefore, in the case of executing the effect of notifying the remaining period of the time saving state, the accuracy of the notification content can be improved. Also, in the case of determining the remaining period of the time saving state in this way, even after the time saving state ends and the normal state is set, a period advantageous to the player (a ball is placed in the second winning hole 640 If the period during which the winning state is likely to be set continues, the period until the end of the period may be determined as the remaining period of the time saving state. That is, when the general pattern per game (normal pattern long open per game) executed during the time saving state is executed across the time saving state and the normal state, the general pattern per game (normal pattern long open per It is preferable to configure so that the period until the end of the game is determined as the remaining period of the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine a period advantageous to the player (a period in which a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 is likely to be set). When executing, the accuracy of the content of the notification can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 465, the contents of the effect setting process 20 for time reduction (C4164) will be described. FIG. 465 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) executed in the twentieth embodiment. This time saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) is the effect mode when the special figure 2 change is executed as the time saving final change with respect to the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 418) of the sixteenth embodiment described above The difference is that the processing for setting has been changed.

When the time saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) is executed, after executing the same C4301 and C4302 processes as the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 418) of the sixteenth embodiment described above, in the process of C4302, If it is determined that the special figure variation of this time is the time saving final variation (C4302: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) of this time is a variation (C4361). If it is determined that this special figure 2 variation (shortening final variation) is a variation (C4361: Yes), the final table 222pa1 for the final variation production table 222pa has is referenced to set the production mode (C4362 ), the process proceeds to C4365. Also, in the process of C4301, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation of this time is not the special figure 2 fluctuation (C4301: No), or in the process of C4302, the special figure fluctuation of this time is not the final fluctuation of the time saving state If it is determined (C4302: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that this special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) is not a hit variation (it is an off variation) (C4361: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la (the second Winning information on the special symbol (special figure 2) is read out (C4363), the final table for loss 222ib2 of the final variation production table 222pa is referenced to set the production mode (C4364), and the process proceeds to C4365.

In the process of C4365, the effect content (effect mode) set by the above-described process of C4362 and the process of C4364 is stored in the corresponding variable period storage area 223pb (C4365). is determined (C4366). If it is determined that there is an effect non-set period (C4366: Yes), the effect variable flag 223pc is set to ON (C4367), and then this processing is terminated. Also, if it is determined that there is no effect unset period (C4366: No), the process of C4367 is skipped and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 466, the contents of the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566) will be described. FIG. 466 is a flow chart showing the details of the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566) executed in the twentieth embodiment. In the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566), the final variation executed corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state updated in the process of C4501 of the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) in the 16th embodiment Elapsed period of production (elapsed period of special figure 2 fluctuation) is determined, and processing based on the determination result is executed.

When the final fluctuation production update process 20 (C4566) is executed, first, the information in the fluctuation period storage area 223pb is read (C4861), and the read information in the fluctuation period storage area 223pb (set production period) and the special figure Based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223ln (the value indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation), extract the current production situation (C4862), and then determine whether the current timing is the end timing of the waiting period Then (C4863), if it is determined that it is time to end the waiting period (C4863: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223pc is ON (C4864). If it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is ON (C4864: Yes), the effect mode is set using the final effect variable setting table corresponding to the determination result of the variation (C4865), and then this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is off (C4864: No), the process of C4865 is skipped and the process ends.

In the process of C4863, if it is determined that the current timing is not the end of the standby period (C4863: No), then it is determined whether the current timing is the end of the first period (C4866). If it is determined that there is (C4866: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223pc is ON (C4867). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is ON (C4867: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is greater than 0 (C4868). If it is determined that the value of the number-of-holds increase counter 223pa is greater than 0 (C4868: Yes), the effect period corresponding to the increase is stored in the variable period storage area 223pb (C4869), and the process proceeds to C4870. In the process of C4868, when it is determined that the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is 0 (C4868: No), the process of C4869 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C4870.

In the process of C4870, the effect mode of the effect final period is set (C4870), the effect variable flag 223pc is set to OFF (C4871), and the process proceeds to the process of C4872. Also, when it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is off (C4867: No), the process proceeds to C4872. In the process of C4872, the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is cleared (C4872), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C4866 that the current timing is not the end of the first period (C4866: No), then it is determined whether the current timing is the end of the second period (C4873). If it is determined that it is time to end the second period (C4873: Yes), it is determined whether a new Special 2 hold has been acquired during the second period (C4874), and it is determined whether a new Special 2 hold has been acquired. If so (C4874: Yes), the re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to ON (C4875), and this processing ends.

Here, to explain the contents of the processing executed in C4874, in the winning information storage area 223la, a storage area corresponding to each symbol reservation is formed. The storage area for 1), the storage area for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the storage area for the normal symbol (normal symbol) are the number corresponding to the upper limit reserved storage number (4) of each symbol. formed. Each storage area stores pre-reading information included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110 and a reference indicating whether or not the pre-reading result was referred to when setting various effects in the sound lamp control device 113. It is configured to store information.

That is, in the process of C4874, in addition to the special figure 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) referenced by the processing of C4806 or C4814, whether a new special 2 reservation is stored in the winning information storage area 223la is stored in each storage area It is determined based on the presence or absence of the referenced information stored, and the prefetch information is described in the storage area (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) of the winning information storage area 223la, and the referenced information When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-prefetching flag 223lr to ON in the process of C4875, as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation to be executed next (first special figure fluctuation after the end of time saving), again, special figure 2 hold A variable effect based on the look-ahead result of is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of C4874, if it is determined that there is no new special 2 reservation (C4874: No), all of the currently acquired special figure 2 reservation is prefetched, and the second in the effect mode based on the prefetch result Since it is the case where the time saving final variation effect during the period is being executed, the display effect result command indicating the result of the time saving change effect is set as it is (C4876), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C4873 that it is not the end of the second period (C4873: No), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4877), and this process ends. In the process of C4877, the setting of the effect mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, the update setting of the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the final variation, and the elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the final variation , and the setting of the operation display mode executed based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22) during the final change.

As described above, in the twentieth embodiment, at the time of setting the final variation production (at the time of starting the final fluctuation of time saving), the production mode of the final fluctuation production is set. The lottery result (prefetch result) subject to the effect is limited to the lottery result of the change and the prefetch result of the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired at the time of setting the final change effect (at the start of the final time-saving change). The difference is that

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to vary the production mode of the final variation production that is executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed It is possible to diversify the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold executed before (during the time saving state). Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved. It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, in the case of varying the production mode of the final variation production to be executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed It is preferable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at a certain time is a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number). By configuring in this way, the player is motivated to play the game so that the number of special figures 2 reserved becomes a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number) at the time when the time saving final variation is executed. can be done.

In the twentieth embodiment, the final variation effect described above is started from the timing at which the final variation of the time saving state is executed, but the remaining period of the time saving state is a predetermined period. When it becomes, for example, when the number of remaining time reduction becomes two times, it may be configured to execute the final variable effect. In addition, in the 20th embodiment, the configuration for executing the final variation performance using the period for one special figure fluctuation in the time saving state and the period for several special figure fluctuations in the normal state is explained. As for the increase and decrease of the number of special figures 2 pending while the final fluctuation effect is being executed, the number of special figures 2 pending increases until the special figure fluctuation in the time saving state ends, and the number of special figures in the normal state increases. After the figure fluctuation has started, only the pattern in which the number of special figures 2 is reduced has been described, but as other patterns, for example, during the execution of the normal figure long open per game executed during the time saving state Time saving After the state ends (the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) stops) and the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) in the normal state is started, the ball wins in the second winning port 640 There are cases. In such a case, for example, at the timing of executing the final variation effect, the normal pattern lottery situation (the result of the normal pattern lottery being executed, the type of the winning game to be executed, and the reserved and stored normal Figure information (win/fail result, winning game type)) is configured to be discriminable, and based on the discrimination result, it is determined whether the ball can win in the second winning hole 640 after the transition to the normal state, and the determination It may be configured to vary the production mode of the final variable production based on the result, for example, when it is determined that the ball can (easily) win the second prize winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state. is a production mode that makes it easy to reflect the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning to the second winning port 640 after the transition to the normal state and the fluctuation period in the final fluctuation production (using a still image that makes it easy to extend the production period It is also possible to set a performance mode in which the performance result can be suddenly changed).

Also, when executing the final variation production using a plurality of special figure 2 fluctuation periods in the time saving state, the number of remaining time reductions when executing the final variation production (the number of remaining special figure 2 fluctuations that can be executed during the time saving state ) is determined, and based on the determination result, the maximum number of special figure 2 fluctuation times that can be executed during the final variation production is calculated, and the production mode based on the calculation result may be configured to be set. . In this case, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations actually executed during the final variation production may be less than the calculated maximum number (for example, stop the game during the final variation production If the special figure 2 hold becomes 0). Therefore, as the production mode based on the above-described calculation result, it is preferable to configure to set the production mode in which the production effect does not decrease even if the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency suddenly decreases.

Furthermore, in the state where the final variation production is executed for the special figure 2 fluctuation, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, the final fluctuation production is continued even for the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 fluctuation It may be executed, or the final variation performance may be suspended temporarily, and the performance corresponding to the special figure 1 variation may be executed during the suspension period.

<21st embodiment>
Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 467 and 468. FIG. In the sixteenth embodiment described above, as described above with reference to FIG. 361, the game (left-handed game ) is configured to be able to execute the normal drawing lottery, and a suggestive effect (series of effects) is executed to suggest that a specific hit (normal drawing long open hit) was won in the normal drawing lottery executed during the normal state. was configured to

Then, a guidance display mode (right-handed display) is displayed (a series of (displayed during execution of performance), so that the player can easily win the ball into the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open winning game. In addition, while the player is playing an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game in the normal state), the above-mentioned suggestion effect and guidance display mode are displayed when the winning is won in the normal pattern long open. First, it was configured to make it difficult for the player to enter the ball into the second winning port 640 during the normal long open winning game.

On the other hand, in the twenty-first embodiment, while the normal pattern long open per game is being performed by the normal pattern lottery, the ball fired by the left-handed game (the ball flowing down the left side game area) is also An electric accessory 1640a to be opened during a normal game and a second winning port 1640 are arranged at a position where a ball fired by a hitting game (a ball flowing down the right game area) can also win a prize. is different.

Furthermore, the ratio of balls that reach the electric accessory 1640a out of the balls fired in the left-handed game and the ratio of the balls that reach the electric accessory 1640a out of the balls fired in the right-handed game are made different. In the hitting game, the ball reaches the electric accessory 1640a at a higher rate than in the left-handed game.

In addition, in the 21st embodiment, in a part of the case of winning per normal long open during the normal state, rather than executing the game per normal long open Information that can be notified to the player before (for example, during the winning normal pattern fluctuation, or the period from the acquisition of the winning information of the normal pattern (normal pattern) to be won until the normal pattern fluctuation is executed) It is configured to execute a production.

By configuring in this way, in the case of winning per normal long open, the ease of winning the ball to the second winning hole 640 can be changed depending on whether or not the notification effect is executed. Therefore, the player can be interested in the performance to be executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since the second prize winning port 1640 is arranged at a position where the ball fired by the left-handed game can also win a prize, the ball is made to win the second prize winning port 1640 even when the notification performance is not executed. becomes possible. Therefore, even if the notification effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game that is extremely disadvantageous.

<About the configuration of the pachinko machine of the 21st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 467, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 467 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-first embodiment. In the 21st embodiment, the positions of the components arranged in the right game area are different from those in the 16th embodiment described above. 2 The positions of the winning openings 1640 are different.

As shown in FIG. 467, in the game board 13 of the 21st embodiment, a second winning hole 1640 accompanied by an electric accessory 1640a is provided below the first winning hole 64. It is configured so that both the ball that has flowed down in the area and the ball that has flowed down in the right game area due to the right-handed game can reach the second winning hole 1640 .

Specifically, the first winning port 64 and the left end side (left side in FIG. 467 front view) of the electric accessory 1640a in the open state (shown in black in FIG. 467), and the regulation member (nail) in the area between is planted, and it is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to pass through the area. As a result, of the balls flowing down the left game area, only the balls guided by the nails planted in the game board 13 and passing through the upper area of the first winning opening 64 reach the second winning opening 1640. Configured. In the 21st embodiment, the game board 13 is configured such that the percentage of balls reaching the second winning hole 1640 out of the balls flowing down the left game area is about 10%.

On the other hand, the ball launched by the right-handed game and flowing down the right-hand side game area is the ball flow formed on the upper surface of the V prize door 650b positioned in the closed state and the prize door 65b positioned in the closed state. The game board 13 is configured so that it flows down the path and most of it (about 100%) reaches the second winning opening 1640 .

By configuring in this way, during the normal long open per game, that is, in the state where the ball can win the second winning opening 1640, the number of balls flowing down the right side game area is higher than the number of balls flowing down the left side game area. It is possible to make it easier to make the second winning port 1640 win. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select whether to play the left-handed game or the right-handed game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 467, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, more It is configured so that there are more prize winning openings (winning openings that can give benefits (prize balls, lottery) to the player) in which the balls flowing down the left side game area can win prizes. Specifically, a ball flowing down the right game area can enter (pass through) the through gate 67 or the second prize winning opening 1640, while a ball flowing down the left game area can pass through the through gate 67. , the first winning port 64, the second winning port 1640, and the general winning port 63 can be won (passed through).

By configuring in this way, in the normal state, except for the period during which the ball can be won in the second winning hole 1640 (game period per normal figure long open), the ball is fired toward the right side game area From the right-handed game Also, a left-handed game in which a ball is shot toward the left game area is a game method more advantageous to the player. As a result, during the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from continuously playing the right-handed game, and to allow the player to play the left-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting at what timing the right-handed game will be played during the normal state.

In addition, in the twenty-first embodiment, the time required for the ball fired by the left-handed game to reach the second winning port 1640 (left-handed arrival time) is the second winning time for the ball fired by the right-handed game. It is configured to be longer than the time required to reach the mouth 1640 (right hitting arrival time). Specifically, while the time to reach the left side is about 4 seconds, the time to reach the right side is about 3 seconds.

By configuring in this way, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game executed after the left-handed game (for example, one second after the left-handed game executed before A ball shot by a right-handed game to be executed) can be made to reach the second winning hole 1640 at the same timing.

Therefore, when the normal pattern long open per game is executed, depending on the timing of switching the game method from the left hitting game to the right hitting game, the winning of the ball to the second winning port 1640 during the normal pattern long open per game Since the easiness of playing the game can be varied, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the 21st embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, the game period per game per normal long open is 3 seconds (open period 1 second, closed period 1.5 seconds seconds, open period 0.5 seconds). That is, when the right-handed game is executed after the normal long open per game is executed, the ball fired by the right-handed game is difficult to win the second winning opening 1640, that is, the second winning opening 1640 It is configured so that the game may have ended when the ball reaches .

As a result, the ball is not fired until the normal long open per game is executed, and the ball is hit to the right after the normal long open per game is started. Since it is possible to make it difficult to grant the privilege (prize ball, special figure 2 lottery)) granted by winning the ball to 1640, it is possible to continuously shoot the ball to the player, and the game is improved. can improve performance.

In addition, as described above, in this 21st embodiment, the game period per normal long open per game is set to 3 seconds, and even if the right hitting game is executed after the normal long open per game is started, Although it is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning hole 1640, it is not limited to this, and the winning game period of the normal long open winning game (for example, 5 seconds (open period: 1 second, closed period: 1 second, open period: 3 seconds)). As a result, the player can play the game during the game per normal figure long open with peace of mind.

<Regarding production content in the 21st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 468, the content of the characteristic presentation performed in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the twenty-first embodiment using the configuration of the game board 13 explained with reference to FIG. For this reason, guidance information (e.g., right-handed information) for guiding the game method to the player is configured to be executable, and as a notification mode of the guidance information, the player can easily identify the game method. A first guidance notification mode and a second guidance notification mode in which the game method is more difficult for the player to identify than the first guidance notification mode can be set.

By configuring in this way, depending on whether the notification mode of the executed guidance notification is the first guidance notification mode or the second guidance notification mode, the ball is placed in the second winning opening during the normal figure long open game. 1640 It is possible to set a state in which it is easy to win a prize and a state in which it is difficult to win.

The first guidance notification mode is a notification mode that is set as part of the special figure variation effect that is executed in response to the special figure variation, and during the general figure variation that is elected per general figure long open, It is set when a special figure variation is executed with a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 90 seconds or more is set), and on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 When the variation effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern described above is being executed, the player can use a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm). A guidance display mode (for example, a comment of "Right shot") for guiding the game method is displayed (see FIG. 366(b)).

Furthermore, in the 21st embodiment, before the game is executed per normal long open During the period during which the symbol is displayed in a stopped state (confirmed display), or after receiving the winning information command for winning the normal symbol long opening as the normal symbol winning information command, until the normal symbol long opening winning game is executed. During the period of ), the first guidance notification mode is configured to be displayable. By configuring in this way, even if a game corresponding to the display content of the first guidance notification mode (for example, "right-handed") is executed after recognizing that the first guidance notification mode is displayed, The ball can be easily reached to the second winning port 1640 which is in the open state where the ball is easy to win by the normal figure long open hitting game.

On the other hand, the second guidance notification mode is always displayed when the game is executed per normal long open, and is displayed in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to identify than the first guidance notification mode. It is a thing. Specifically, at the end of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a guidance display mode (for example, "Right-handed ) is displayed.

As described above, in the twenty-first embodiment, the game board 13 is formed so that it takes about 3 seconds for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the second winning hole 1640. After recognizing the notification content of the second guidance notification mode, if a game method (for example, right-handed game) is performed according to the notification content, depending on the ball flowing down situation, the ball may be played during the normal long open per game. A state in which it is impossible to reach the 2 winning opening 1640 occurs.

Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to win per normal pattern long open in the state that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is established. In addition, in the present 21st embodiment, in the state in which the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is established, when winning per normal long open, the normal long open per game is executed based on the winning The first guidance notification mode is displayed 3 seconds before, and the second guidance notification mode is displayed at the time when the normal pattern long open winning game is executed. By configuring in this way, even if the first guidance notification mode is displayed before the normal long open per game is actually executed, it is possible to indicate that the normal long open per game is being executed. The player can be notified in the second guidance notification mode.

In addition, in the twenty-first embodiment, it is set as the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode that the special symbol variation is executed in the variation pattern in which the variation time of 90 seconds or more is set. Without limitation, for example, a notification condition may be set that a predetermined operation has been performed on an operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that the player can operate, or the state of transition of the game state, Specifically, it may be set as the notification condition that the time saving state has ended and the state has shifted to the normal state.

In addition, a flag indicating that the notification condition is satisfied (notification condition satisfaction flag) is provided, and when the notification condition is satisfied, the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to ON, and during the period in which the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to ON is configured to be able to display the above-described first guidance notification mode and second guidance notification mode, and is configured to display only the second guidance notification mode when the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to OFF. Also good. In this case, it is preferable to set a notification end condition for turning off the notification condition satisfaction flag that is set to ON, and set the notification condition satisfaction flag to OFF when the notification end condition is satisfied. .

Specifically, a predetermined period after the notification condition establishment flag is set to ON (the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times, or the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes))) It may be set so that the notification end condition is satisfied when it has passed, or a lottery that is executed when a predetermined execution opportunity (for example, execution of a special drawing lottery, winning of a ball to each winning hole) is established It may be configured such that the notification end condition is established when a predetermined lottery result is obtained.

In addition, multiple types (e.g., per normal pattern long A, per normal pattern long B) are provided per normal pattern long opening, and notification conditions and notification end conditions are set according to the type per normal pattern long opening that was elected. By making it different, it may be configured to be able to set the general pattern long open per which the first guidance notification mode is likely to be displayed and the general pattern long open per which is difficult to be displayed.

In addition, the notification conditions may be varied based on the player's gaming situation, for example, the elapsed period from the previous big hit game (small hit game) (the number of special figure fluctuations, the elapsed time) satisfies the predetermined conditions In the case (for example, when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches the number of times corresponding to the reciprocal of the jackpot probability), it may be configured to always display the first guidance notification mode when winning the normal figure long open per. .

In addition, a predetermined period after the player moves from an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game performed when a normal state is set (a game state in which a right-handed game is performed (time saving state) to a normal state )) is being performed, a warning display for correcting the game method to the player (for example, in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, "Left-handed If it is determined that the inappropriate game is continued even after the comment "Please return" is displayed, the notification condition may not be established.

The technique for displaying the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above is not limited to the 21st embodiment, and may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments. As in the 16th embodiment described above, it may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is formed so that the ball cannot be entered into the second winning hole 640 unless a right-handed game is executed. . In this case, since the benefits granted to the player differ greatly depending on whether or not the first guidance notification mode is displayed, the player is motivated to play a game to satisfy the notification condition. can let

In addition, a notification means for notifying the player of the game method for establishing the notification condition may be provided. It should be configured to display the necessary necessary information (for example, show super reach). Further, it is preferable to share whether or not the necessary information is displayed as suggestion information for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, when the game corresponding to the display content displayed as the necessary information is executed, whether the notification condition for displaying the first guidance notification mode is established or whether the special symbol lottery result is determined. Since it is possible to notify the player of whether or not a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result indicating winning of a jackpot) has been obtained in an incomprehensible way, the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide notification means capable of informing the player that the first guidance notification mode is currently in a state in which notification is possible (a state in which the notification condition is satisfied). This allows the player to play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the 21st embodiment, as a guidance notification mode that suggests that a game will be executed per normal pattern long open, the first guidance notification mode and the player discriminates the notification content from the first guidance notification mode However, in the state in which the first guidance notification mode can be notified, a special execution condition (for example, a special operation to the operation means (frame button 22) (Condition that is established when is performed) is established, a special guidance notification mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first guidance notification mode may be set.

Here, the special guidance notification mode is a guidance notification mode for notifying the player of the timing of executing a game method (for example, a right-handed game) according to the notification content, and guidance is provided in the guidance notification mode. By executing a game method corresponding to the content of notification at the appropriate timing, it is possible to play a game in which an advantageous privilege is more likely to be awarded to the player. As described above, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 21st embodiment is configured so that both the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game can reach the second winning hole 1640. The period required for the ball fired by the left-handed game to reach the second winning port 1640 is about 4 seconds, and the time required for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the second winning port 1640. is about 3 seconds. By operating the operation handle 51, 100 balls can be shot per minute.

Therefore, by changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game in accordance with the execution timing of the normal figure long open game, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game can reach the second winning opening 640 at substantially the same timing. The above-mentioned special guidance notification mode is based on the timing at which the game is executed per normal long open, from the game method being executed to the player (for example, left-handed game) according to the content of the notification (for example , right-handed game), and the timing at which a plurality of balls can reach the second winning port 640 substantially simultaneously as the timing of shooting the balls of the game method being executed (for example, left-handed game). A notification mode for notifying is set.

By configuring in this way, the player will play the game with motivation so that a more advantageous guidance notification mode is displayed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In the example described above, when the notification conditions for the first guidance notification mode are satisfied, the special guidance notification mode described above can be set. A special execution condition for setting the special guidance notification mode may be established even when the notification condition of (1) is not satisfied, and the special execution condition is the first guidance notification It may be configured such that when the notification condition of the mode is satisfied, the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is more likely to be satisfied than when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied.

In addition, a plurality of conditions are set as notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes. may be configured to set Furthermore, the easiness of establishment of notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes may be varied based on the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player. Each notification condition (execution condition) is variably set so that notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes are likely to be established each time a person performs a specific operation on the operating means. can be configured to As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, and early boredom with the game can be suppressed.

As described above, in the 18th embodiment, the normal pattern per game (normal pattern long open per game) that allows the ball to be won in the second winning hole 1640 is executed. It is configured to execute guidance notification (for example, right-handed notification) for informing the player during the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation, which is the result of the lottery to be executed, and the normal pattern per game is started. At the time before (before the normal figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed), the game method executed by the player is configured to vary from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and the normal figure per game is started. It is configured so that the game ball fired by the right-handed game before the normal game is won during the game per the normal long game, but not limited to this, for example, the normal game long A predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds) is set as the opening period of the open game, and the above-mentioned guidance information (for example, right-handed information) is set during the opening period of the game per normal long open (after the per game is started) , until the electric accessory 1640a is opened).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the guidance notification (right-handed notification) after the normal figure fluctuation to be won is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), so the guidance notification (right-handed notification) was executed In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game per normal pattern is not executed. Also in this case, similarly to the twenty-first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the notification conditions for the first guidance notification mode are established, and only when it is determined that the notification conditions are satisfied, the first guidance notification mode is set. It is preferable to configure so as to execute guidance notification. Also, if it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not established, the normal pattern fluctuation period and the opening period of the normal pattern per game are used to produce the result of the general pattern lottery lottery. is executed, and as a result of the effect, a display mode indicating that the game has been won in a general pattern is displayed at the end timing of the opening period of the general pattern game (opening operation timing of the electric accessory 640a).

As a result, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, it is notified that the winning of the general pattern is performed at the timing of executing the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a as the general pattern winning game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball shot by the right-handed game to enter the second prize-winning hole 1640 even if the player who has identified that he has won the normal game by the notification plays the right-handed game. In the above-described example, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, it is elected per normal pattern at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 1640a is executed as a game per normal pattern. Although an example of notifying that is shown, without being limited to this, in the opening period of the game per normal pattern, when the remaining period of the opening period is less than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) per normal pattern It may be configured so as to notify that the winner has been selected. In other words, even if the player who recognizes that he/she has been elected per normal game performs a right-handed game, the timing when it becomes difficult to win the ball in the second winning port 1640 during the normal game per game, for example, by a right-handed game Rather than the period required for the shot ball to reach the second winning hole 1640, the normal drawing game ends after notification of winning the normal game (the ball can win the second winning hole 1640) It is preferable to configure so that the period until the end of the period is shortened.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, if the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, until the game per normal pattern is executed In the variable production corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation in the period, the production that suggests winning per normal pattern is executed, and the production in which the first guidance notification mode is set in the opening period of the game per normal pattern is executed. It may be configured to do so, and by combining the performance mode of the variable performance of the special figure fluctuation and the performance mode of the opening performance of the normal game, the player is notified of the timing to perform the right-handed game. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, the first notification for indicating the lottery result of the special figure lottery is performed by the special figure effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation, and the general figure lottery is performed by the general figure effect executed based on the general figure fluctuation By executing the second notification for indicating the lottery result and further executing the first notification and the second notification with a relationship (continuous execution or overlapping execution) It may be configured to execute the third notification for showing the right hitting timing to execute the right hitting game to the player for the winning game.

In addition, depending on the type of game per normal pattern to be executed, the length of the opening period to be set is changed, and the period of a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more is set as the opening period Per normal pattern game , A normal game in which a period of less than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is set as an opening period, and the ease of winning the ball to the second winning hole 640 during the normal game. Also, if the type of the set guidance notification mode (first guidance notification mode) and the type of the game per normal figure to be executed satisfy a predetermined combination condition, than when the combination condition is not satisfied , Guidance information for making it easier to win the ball into the second winning hole 640 during the normal game may be configured to be executed. As a result, different benefits for the player (to the second winning port 640 (ease of winning a prize) can be given, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the 17th embodiment, the setting method of the guidance notification mode for making it easier to win the ball to the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal pattern was described, but a specific winning game (for example, per normal pattern game) is executed, a game (for example, a left-handed game) in which a ball is shot with one shooting intensity is changed to a game (for example, a right-handed shot) in which a ball is shot with a predetermined shooting intensity different from one shooting intensity. game) to make it easier for the ball to enter a specific winning hole (for example, the second winning hole 640), for example, a small hit by a special lottery executed during a left-handed game As a small winning game executed when winning, a winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) is opened during a small winning game at a position (for example, a right game area) where a ball fired by a right-handed game can win. 650a), using the special figure fluctuation period and the opening period of the small winning game, it may be configured to set the guidance notification mode of the same idea as the present embodiment.

<Regarding the 22nd embodiment>
Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 469 and 470. FIG. FIG. 469 is a front view schematically showing the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second embodiment. The board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment differs from the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment in that the configuration of the right game area is changed. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 469, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow speed of the ball is reduced in the flow path of the first flow path 701 (the time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 is delayed ), delay members 701y and 701z are arranged so that the time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 (ball passing time) is about 4 seconds. An operating gate 670 is provided at the downstream end of the first flow path 701 .

Operation gate 670 will now be described. In this embodiment, an initiation gate 720a is provided which is composed of a photosensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball. In each of the above-described embodiments, when a jackpot is won by lottery of special symbols, the special symbols are stopped and displayed (determined display) in a display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot through a special symbol variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined time. Then, a jackpot game is executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the special symbols are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating winning of the jackpot, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the operation gate 670, the jackpot game is executed. It is configured as follows. In other words, the operation gate 670 is used as an execution means for executing a jackpot game when the jackpot execution condition is established (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot is won).

Furthermore, this embodiment differs from the eighteenth embodiment described above in that the arrangement positions of the electric accessory 640a and the V winning device 650 are changed. Also, the difference is that the configuration of the second prize winning opening 640 is changed to a gate shape through which a ball can pass. Other configurations of the game board 13 are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that the variation time of the special symbols to be selected and the variation time of the normal symbols are different from those of the pachinko machine of the eighteenth embodiment. Specifically, a special special figure with a variation time of 50 seconds as a variation pattern that can be selected when a big hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery in the normal state or when a small win is won. 1 variation pattern is made selectable, and the special special figure 2 variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected as a variation pattern that can be selected when a small win is won in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery in a normal state. It is made selectable, and furthermore, a special normal pattern variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds is configured to be selectable as a normal pattern variation pattern that can be selected when winning per long opening of the normal pattern.

Then, as the ending condition of the small winning game, the first ending condition established when the number of winning balls reaches one, and the period during which the V winning opening 650a is opened in the small winning game is 1.5 seconds. and a second termination condition, which is satisfied when .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way, when the special figure variation in which the special special figure 1 variation pattern is set is stopped and displayed, or the normal figure variation in which the special figure normal figure variation pattern is set When the stop display is displayed, a guidance notification (see FIG. 366(b)) for making the player play a right-handed game as a game method is executed.

Here, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the jackpot winning, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701 and passes through the operation gate 670, resulting in a big hit. A game is started. As described above, since it takes about 5 seconds for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the operation gate 670, the jackpot game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed. become.

In addition, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the small winning, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the second flow path 702 and enters the V winning opening 650a. A jackpot game is started. As described above, the time required for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the V winning opening 650a is about 4 seconds, and the small winning game ends when one ball wins during the small winning game. In addition, when a ball wins in the V winning opening 650a, the winning ball always passes through the V gate (V area). A jackpot game is started.

Furthermore, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on winning per normal game, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows into the second flow path 702, passes through the second winning opening 640, When the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the passage is a small hit, the small hit game is executed after a fluctuation time of 1 second. Since the second flow path 702 is formed so that the time it takes for the ball passing through the second winning opening 640 to reach the V winning opening 650a is about 2 seconds, a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery. If so, the ball passing through the second winning hole 640 will win the V winning hole 650a. Therefore, the jackpot game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is played.

That is, in the present embodiment, the same variation time is set for the case of winning the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol) in the normal state and the case of winning the small hit, and the variation time has passed. When a guidance notification (right-handed notification) for changing the game method at the timing is executed, the player performs a right-handed game based on the guidance notification, so that a jackpot game can be executed at the same timing. is configured to

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the current big winning game is executed based on the winning of the big winning or through the winning of the small winning. can. Furthermore, as in the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot game that is executed when the special symbol jackpot is won and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is executed via the small hit, the player If the size of the benefits to be granted (the number of prize balls during the jackpot game, the advantageous game state (time saving state) set after the jackpot ends) is different, what triggered the jackpot game to be executed? By making it difficult to understand, the game can be played while expecting the game state set during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described above, even when winning a specific hit (normal pattern long open per) in the lottery of normal symbols, the jackpot game is started after the guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed. The period until winning is the same as when winning a big win or winning a small win of a special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand the execution trigger of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a lottery result (special figure lottery result, general figure lottery result) that can execute a jackpot game is obtained, the same variation time (50 seconds) is configured to be selected. Therefore, it is possible to set a special variable effect using the same effect mode as the effect using the variable time. This makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the special variation performance being executed is the special variation performance based on the special pattern variation or the special variation performance based on the normal pattern variation even while the special variation performance is being executed. be able to.

In the above example, the case of setting a special variation effect for a special variation pattern in which a variation time of 50 seconds is set has been described. Of the variable effects corresponding to the set variable patterns, the above-described special variable effect may be executed when the remaining variable time of the variable time is 50 seconds. Further, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, a special loss variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds can be set, and as a performance result of the special variation performance, a right-handed game is guided after the variation time has passed. An effect pattern (failure effect) in which notification is not executed may be configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, even when the special variation performance is executed, it is possible to provide a pattern (gase pattern) in which the right-handed game is not guided, so that the player pays attention to the contents of the special variation performance. be able to.

In addition, as described above in each embodiment, a specific hit (normal pattern long open hit) is won in the normal pattern lottery, and guidance notification to guide the right-handed game is executed, and the ball is awarded the second prize by the right-handed game. When the mouth 640 wins (passes), if the special figure 1 variation is in progress, the special figure 2 variation is not immediately executed, that is, the special figure until the special figure 1 variation in execution ends 2 A waiting period is set during which no variation is performed. In this case, it is preferable to execute a failure effect as a failure pattern in which the jackpot game is not executed despite the guidance notification being executed. In addition, when the ball wins (passes) the second winning hole 640 by the right-handed game and the special figure 2 lottery is executed immediately, the above-mentioned failure effect is also performed when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is out. should be configured to run

By constructing in this way, it is possible to set the same performance mode in the case of winning the special figure 2 lottery and in the case of setting the standby period of the special figure 2 lottery. Then, if the waiting period is within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the waiting period has elapsed is a small hit, the small hit is won from the failure effect described above. It is preferable that an effect (resurrection effect) for switching to an effect mode indicating that the character has been played is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect capable of making the player have expectations until the end.

In addition, the standby period of the special figure 2 lottery may be calculated and predicted using various techniques used in each embodiment described above, and may be appropriately combined with various techniques used in each embodiment. Furthermore, when performing a right-handed game based on winning per normal, or when performing a small winning game based on winning a small hit, as in each embodiment described above, the ball is a specific winning opening (Second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a) There are cases where winning (passing) is not possible. Also in this case, it is sufficient to display the presentation mode (see, for example, FIG. 370(b)) described in the sixteenth embodiment. In addition, even if the jackpot is won in the special lottery, the predetermined timing, for example, the timing at which the ball fired by the right-handed game can pass near the second winning opening 640 (after the guidance notification mode is displayed) Approximately 1 second later) or at a timing when the ball can reach the V winning opening 650a (approximately 4 seconds after the guidance notification mode is displayed), a pseudo failure effect may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a jackpot game with a plurality of triggers, the player is notified that the conditions for executing a jackpot game have been established ("right hit notification" in this embodiment). By making the period from the start to the actual execution of the big winning game the same regardless of the trigger until the big winning game is executed, the player is notified in advance that the big winning game will be executed. Since it is structured so as to make it difficult to understand when the jackpot game is executed while notifying, it is possible to determine which game mode the jackpot game is actually executed, or the game state after the jackpot game is finished. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which game state will be set.

The notification mode for notifying that the conditions for executing the jackpot game have been established is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. A performance mode may be set to indicate that a condition for executing a jackpot game is established, and a period from execution of notification based on the notification mode to actual execution of the jackpot game is unified. can be set, the notification timing and notification mode may be appropriately set.

Further, when using the opportunity to execute the big winning game through the small winning game, even if the ball wins the V winning opening 650a at any timing during the small winning game, it is determined in advance after the small winning game is started. It is preferable that the jackpot game is executed after the time has elapsed. As a result, the period from when the notification based on the notification mode is performed to when the big win game is actually performed can be made more uniform.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration for setting the type (jackpot type) of the jackpot game to be executed later when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) during the small win game, A plurality of specific areas (V gates) are provided in a V winning opening 650a where a ball can win a prize, and on the upstream side of the V winning opening 650a, winning balls are distributed to any of the plurality of specific areas (V gates). By providing a distribution movable member and configuring the distribution movable member to be movable according to the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game, after the small winning game is started, the swing in the V winning opening 650a The ball passes through different specific regions (V gates) depending on the time it takes for the ball to reach the movable member. Then, when each specific area (V gate) is passed, a jackpot type in which a jackpot game in which a different opening period is set is set is set, so that each specific area (V gate) is set. Even in the case of using a configuration in which a jackpot game is executed based on the passage of the , the timing at which the specific winning opening 65 is opened may be unified in the jackpot game.

<Regarding an example of response to power failure in each embodiment>
Next, among the various effects executed in each embodiment described above, a plurality of periods in which different game control (special figure fluctuation game, general figure fluctuation game, small hit game, jackpot game) is performed by the main control device 110 The control processing contents of the sound ramp control device 113 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted during execution of period effects (series effects, final variable effects) that are executed over the period will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted, the contents of the control processing of the main controller 110 (various information stored in the RAM 203) While the information can be temporarily held (backed up), the contents of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (various information stored in the RAM 223) are stored when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted. It is configured to be deleted when

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted while the above-described period effect is being executed based on the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (power failure state). ), when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed (at the time of power restoration), it becomes impossible to read out what period of performance was being executed immediately before the power failure state. There is a problem that the period production cannot be restarted.

Therefore, in this corresponding example, a return command indicating the gaming situation at the time of power recovery is configured to be set in the start-up process (see FIG. 402) of the main controller 110 (set after C910 in FIG. 402), As a command at the time of return, the presence or absence of special figure fluctuation, the presence or absence of normal figure fluctuation, the current game state, the presence or absence of big hit game, the presence or absence of small hit game, the presence or absence of right-handed notification, the remaining period until the game state shifts It is configured to set a command including each information of information, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the above-described return command, the current state (at the time of power restoration) is a state in which the period effect can be executed (power failure It is configured to be able to execute determination processing (pre-power-off performance determination processing) for determining whether or not it is in a state in which there is a possibility that the period performance was executed immediately before.

Then, when it is determined in the effect determination process before power failure that the current state is such that the period effect cannot be executed (for example, during the jackpot game), the effect corresponding to the command output from the main controller 110 is executed. When it is determined that the period effect can be executed at present in the effect determination process before power failure, the period effect is restarted later based on the command output from the main controller 110. A preparatory processing state is set, and a comment indicating that the effect is being prepared is displayed to the player indicating that the effect may be resumed.

Then, in a state where the preparation processing state is set, a command including information of a small winning type indicating a small winning winning (normal long open winning game) in which a series of effects is executed as a winning related command from the main control device 110 is issued. When it is determined that it is output, the period performance is restarted from the start of the small winning game. By configuring in this way, different game control (special figure fluctuation game, general figure fluctuation game, small hit game, big hit game) is performed in the main control device 110 Period production executed over multiple periods When the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted during the execution of (a series of performances, the final variable performance), it is possible to suppress the abandonment of all the performances during that period.

Furthermore, in this correspondence example, even if the conditions for executing a new effect (period effect) are established while the preparation processing state is set, there is a restriction means for limiting the execution of the new effect (period effect). are doing. In other words, the restart processing of the performance (period performance) executed before the power failure is executed with priority over the processing of newly executing the performance (period performance) after the power is restored. By configuring in this way, the effect (period effect) that has already been provided (partially provided) to the player can be preferentially executed, so that the player can be provided with an effect that does not cause discomfort. . In addition, when the effect mode of the effect (period effect) being executed before the power cut is combined with the effect mode of the effect (period effect) that is newly set regardless of the effect (period effect), the game Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent a performance result that is advantageous to the player.

Also, in the state where the preparatory processing state is set, every time various commands are received from the main controller 110, there is a possibility that an effect (period effect) was being executed immediately before the power failure. It is configured to repeatedly execute determination processing for determining whether or not there is, and based on the determination result, if it is determined that the effect (period effect) cannot be executed immediately before the power failure, It is configured to delete the comment during preparation for the effect indicating the possibility of resuming the effect (period effect) to the player, and to execute the normal control processing of the sound lamp control device 113.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, if the state in which the preparatory processing state is set continues for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the number of commands received from main controller 110 reaches 10, 20 seconds after power is restored), the power is turned on. It determines that the effect (period effect) that may have been executed before the power failure (period effect) cannot be restarted, and displays to the player that the effect (period effect) before the power failure cannot be restarted (for example , and the comment ``All of the performance contents before the power failure have been invalidated'') are displayed, and the normal control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

By configuring in this way, even if the effect (period effect) that was being executed before the power failure cannot be restarted, it is possible to notify the player that it could not be restarted. , Before the power cut, a mission effect such as "If a reach of 3 occurs within 10 rotations, a big win!" ” and confusing the player. In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a predetermined period after the power is restored (for example, the maximum period in which the mission production can be set (the number of special figure fluctuations is 30 times, etc.)) can overlap the production result in the mission production. It may be configured such that the mode of presentation is not set. Specifically, in a game in which a mission can be set to establish a specific reach mode (for example, a reach of "3", "5", or "7") as a mission effect, a predetermined During the period, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is configured not to be set, and if the result of the special lottery is a hit, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is set. It should be configured so that it can be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect within a limited range even within a predetermined period after power is restored. Also, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a hit, a specific reach mode can be set, so the mission effect (for example, generate a reach of "3") is executed before the power is cut off. Even if "reach of 3" happens to occur within a predetermined period after the power is restored, the result of the lottery is a win, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

As described above, in each of the above-described embodiments, as a trigger for executing a privilege game (jackpot game) in which the player is advantageous, a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) is played. is executed (first opportunity), and a special symbol lottery wins a small hit, and the game ball is in a specific area during the small win game (V winning device 650 (Fig. 361) provided in the V area (not shown)) based on the fact that the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed (second trigger), gaming machine having two opportunities However, without being limited to this, as a trigger for executing a privilege game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) is executed by winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery. The technique of each of the above-described embodiments may be diverted to a gaming machine having only a trigger (first trigger).

In addition, in each embodiment described above, the normal state as the game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), can be set, but without being limited to this, it is possible to set a high probability state of special symbols in which the winning probability of special symbols is increased after the end of the jackpot game, and a variable state (high probability of special symbols Probability state, high probability state of normal design) and latent probability state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) may be configured so as to be settable.

And, when a specific game state (latency state) is set as the game state, it is easier to execute a specific special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) than when another game state is set (special 2 Make it easier to enter the ball into the starting port that triggers the execution of the lottery.Or shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery), and frequently present a small winning game based on the small winning of the special figure 2 lottery. The game to be played may be configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, the player can play a game in which many prize balls can be obtained even if the player does not win a big prize in the special lottery, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the sixteenth embodiment to the twenty-first embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of jackpot execution opportunities for executing the jackpot game is used, specifically, the first special symbol. The first jackpot execution opportunity triggered by winning the jackpot by the lottery of (Special Figure 1), and the small win by the lottery of the first special pattern (Special Figure 1), are executed based on the small winning. It has a second big hit execution opportunity triggered by winning a ball in the V winning opening 650a (see FIG. 361) that is open to the small winning game. In addition, as a special figure variation execution opportunity for executing the special symbol lottery, the first special figure variation execution opportunity triggered by winning the ball in the first winning opening 64 and the ball passing through the through gate 67 A ball in the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 361) that will be opened by the normal pattern winning game that is executed when the normal pattern (normal pattern) lottery is won by the normal pattern lottery. and a second special figure variation execution opportunity triggered by winning a prize. And according to establishment condition of each big-hit execution opportunity and each special-figure variation execution opportunity, it is comprised so that a big-hit game may be performed through various game processes. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to execute a jackpot game through various game processes, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, from one game state (time saving state) that is easy to obtain a specific lottery right (ball winning to the second winning port 640 that triggers the execution of the special figure 2 lottery), the one game When a transition condition to shift to another game state (normal state) in which it is more difficult to obtain a specific lottery right than in a state is satisfied, an acquisition guidance notification is executed for acquiring a specific lottery right during one game state. By structuring to make it easier to execute a specific lottery after shifting to another game state, it is possible to make the player willingly play the game until just before the end of the one game state. However, without being limited to this, for example, if it is easier to acquire a specific lottery right during a big win game than in a game state set after the end of the big win game, the acquisition guide notification is given during the big win game. may be executed so that a specific lottery is likely to be executed after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, the ease with which a particular lottery right can be obtained may be varied by varying the ease with which a ball enters a winning opening (starting prize opening) that is a specific lottery right, or the game state may vary. By varying the length of the set period, the easiness of obtaining a specific lottery right during the game state may be varied.

Furthermore, in the sixteenth embodiment described above, the easiness of acquiring a specific lottery right is made different between one game state and another game state. It is sufficient if the degree can be varied and the game content in another game state can be changed based on the benefits obtained during one game state. A storage member (retention member) is provided, and when one game state is set, it is easier to store balls in the storage member than when another game state is set. In other game states, playing a game with the balls stored in the storage member is more advantageous to the player than playing a game with the balls not stored in the storage member. Also good.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
Next, a twenty-third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 471 to 541. FIG. It should be noted that some of the configurations used in the twenty-third embodiment are the same as those in the above-described embodiments and are assigned different reference numerals. Since the specific contents of the configuration are the same as those corresponding to the above embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments are also redundantly described by attaching different reference numerals. Specifically, in each of the above-described embodiments, the code "S" or "C" is assigned to each control process, but in the present embodiment, the code "Z" is assigned. Identical processing will also be given a different number and will be redundantly described.

First, an overview (specifications) of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment has a first area (V area) in which a game ball can enter and a variable winning device 65 in which a ball can enter when a special symbol lottery results in a big win. , a second area (non-V area) different from the first area, and a distribution device (V Roles) are provided. During one big win, at least one game ball enters (passes through) the first area, so that after the end of the big win, a variable probability state of the special symbol is imparted, while the second during one big win. When not even one game ball enters one area, a time-saving state of normal patterns is imparted until the lottery of special patterns is executed 100 times at maximum after the end of the big win. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed, the game can be played in anticipation that the game balls will be distributed to the first region (V region) by the distribution device (V role).

The distribution device (V role) is basically maintained in an arrangement that allows game balls to be distributed to the second area (an arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first area), and a predetermined round (for example, 5 Round), only during a specific period (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round), change the arrangement so that the game balls can be distributed to the first area. . By entering the game ball into the specific winning hole 65a during this specific period, the game ball can be entered into the first area, and the game state after the big win is finished is changed with an advantageous special pattern. state can be transferred.

In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can reach the sorting device during the specific period in the 5th round (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 9.5 seconds The opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds at the time of elapse). A specific winning opening with an opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the device (for example, an opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the start of the 5th round to the time when 4.5 seconds have elapsed) At least a jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the (large opening) 65a is opened and closed is provided. In the former jackpot type (probable variable jackpot), game balls are easily sent to the first area by the sorting device simply by continuing to shoot the game balls aiming at the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot. can be distributed, so after the end of the big hit, it will be in a probability variable state of special symbols. On the other hand, in the latter jackpot type (normal jackpot), even if game balls continue to be shot aiming at the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot, all game balls that reach the sorting device Since it is distributed to the second area, a variable probability state is not given (a time saving state is given).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third embodiment, when shifting to the probability variable state of the special symbols, it is determined whether or not to fall to the low probability state of the special symbols each time the lottery condition of the special symbols is satisfied. It is configured to execute a lottery. More specifically, when the special symbol lottery condition is established in the special symbol probability variable state, first, a lottery (fall probability 1/500) is executed to determine whether or not to fall to the special symbol low probability state. When a corresponding lottery result is obtained, a large winning lottery is executed with a lottery probability (1/250) in a special pattern low probability state, while a special pattern high probability state is not obtained when the lottery result does not correspond to falling. It is configured to execute a jackpot lottery with a lottery probability (1/125). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment, regardless of whether it is a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot, after the jackpot is finished, the special pattern lottery is completed 100 times. It is configured to be maintained at That is, when the variable probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot, it depends on whether the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained before the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. However, the normal state of normal symbols continues until the lottery condition for the 100th special symbol is established after the end of the big win. Therefore, after the end of the big win, until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times, the operation other than the probability of the big win is almost the same. can be made imperceptible to the player. Therefore, if the previous big win is a normal big win and the probability of special symbols is low after the big win is over, or if the previous big win was a variable big win, the lottery of special symbols will be executed 100 times. Even if the player falls to a low probability state in the meantime, the player continues to have expectations for the variable probability state of the special symbols until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times. You can keep on doing it. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game.

FIG. 471 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 471, the game board A13 is a base plate A cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
60 includes a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guide and a windmill (not shown), as well as rails 61, 62,
General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit A80, etc. fixed to

The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side thereof. General prize gate 6
3. The first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640, and the variable display device unit A80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and fixed by tapping screws or the like from the front side of the game board A13. It is

The central part of the front of the game board A13 is the inner frame 1 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
2 can be viewed from the front side. Mainly referring to FIG. 471, the game board A13
will be described.

In front of the game board A13, there is an outer rail 6 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
2 is erected, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected on the inner side of the outer rail 62 . The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board A13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front of the game board A13 and has two rails 61 and 6
2 and a resin-made outer edge member A73 connecting between the rails (the area in which the winning openings are arranged and the shot ball flows down).

In this embodiment, a metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308) made of metal is attached to the outer edge member A73.
By incorporating, the combined strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73 is strengthened, the details of which will be described later.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the purpose of arranging the general prize winning openings 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be explained below.

In this embodiment, in the normal game, the route passing the left side of the third symbol display device 81 is the first
The ball is shot with the aim of making the ball enter the winning hole 64 .
A part of the balls flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning opening 64 without reaching the , wins the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. That is, the general prize winning port 63 arranged on the left side of the game area is arranged with the aim of influencing the game during the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning the general winning hole 63, the easier it is to win the first winning hole 64 with a smaller number of balls during normal operation.

On the other hand, in a game during time reduction or probability change, the ball is shot with the aim of winning the ball to the second winning port 640 on the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second A part of the balls flowing down the area on the right side of the second winning opening 640 without reaching the winning opening 640 wins the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. That is, the general prize winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged with the aim of influencing the game during probability variation or time reduction. For example, the higher the possibility of winning a prize to the general winning opening 63, the more it is possible to suppress the loss of balls during probability variation and time saving.

By suppressing the loss of the balls, the next big win is obtained before the balls held on the upper tray 17 run out, even if the game is not played in a shooting mode in which the shooting of the balls is stopped with good timing during the probability change (even if the balls are continuously hit). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the stress (feeling of fatigue) that the player receives while playing the game. Therefore, the number of rotations to the next big hit frequently increases during the probability variation (for example, 10
0 rotation or more), the player can comfortably play the game.

In the game in the special game state, the ball is shot with the aim of winning the ball into the specific winning hole 65a on the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second winning hole 640
part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of . Since the prize balls accompanying the winning to the general prize winning port 63 are paid out as prize balls different from the prize balls to the specific winning prize port 65a, the player can, by the end of the special game state, In addition to the prize balls based on the number of winnings to the specific winning opening 65a that is scheduled, the prize balls based on the number of winnings to the general winning opening 63 can be obtained.

That is, the general prize winning port 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged with the aim of increasing the number of payout prize balls that the player can acquire in the special game state. Here, as the number of winnings to the general winning opening 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning to the specific winning opening 65a decreases, so the elapsed time until the special game state ends tends to become longer. In other words, the number of rounds in the special game state and the number of counts (regular number of prizes won in each round) in the special game state are the same in terms of control, depending on the location and number of the general winning ports 63 and the design of the upstream channel. Also, the time (long or short) required until the end of the special game state and the number of prize balls paid out to the player (more or less) can be varied.

In the special game state, the display mode when displaying the numbers corresponding to the number of paid-out prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited at all. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning to the specific winning opening 65a and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on winning to the general winning opening 63 may be displayed separately, or the number of winning balls to be paid out to the specific winning opening 65a may be displayed separately. The total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning to the general prize winning opening 63 may be displayed, or a combination thereof may be displayed.

As mentioned above, during variable probability and short time, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal,
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short,
is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640.
4, shoot the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit A80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning the first prize hole 64, get a lot of chances of winning the jackpot lottery, It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win.

On the other hand, during the probability variation and the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
The electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to win. (so-called "right-handed"), let it pass through the through gate 67, and the electric accessory 640a
is in an open state, and it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning a prize in the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine A10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is left-right asymmetrical, and it is required that the balls are hit to the left and right according to the game state, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be symmetrical (see FIG. 471).
. In this case, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 640 by "left-handed hitting".
can also be aimed at. Therefore, depending on the game state (whether the game is variable, time-saving, or normal), the player changes the way the ball is shot between ``left-handed'' and ``right-handed''. can be made unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

In this embodiment, an input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. (see FIG. 4). Other devices 228 include a drive motor AMT1, a drive motor AM
T2 and a drive motor for raising and lowering the production unit A710 are included.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 471 and the like, the second ball entrance (second winning opening) 640 is a game that flows down the flow path provided on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front. It is provided at a position where a ball can be entered (a position where a game ball that has flowed down the flow path provided on the left side in front view cannot be entered (difficult)). That is, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened (that is, the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640). In the time-saving state, by shooting a game ball toward the flow path on the right side in front view, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 at a high rate (for example, a rate of 1 ball out of 3 balls). Therefore, the game can be played efficiently. On the other hand, in the normal state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is difficult to open (that is, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640). difficult), the position where the game ball that has flowed down the flow path provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81 can enter (the game that flowed down the flow path provided on the right side of the front view A game is played by a game method in which a game ball is aimed at a first ball entrance (first prize winning opening) 64 provided at a position where a ball cannot (is difficult to) enter. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, shooting a game ball toward the flow path on the left side of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front will be referred to as "left-handed hitting". Shooting a game ball is called "right hitting". Also, the lottery for the special symbol executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance (first winning slot) 64 is referred to as the lottery for the first special symbol (lottery for special symbol 1). A lottery for a special symbol that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second entrance (second prize entrance) 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery). ).

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 472(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 in the twenty-third embodiment, and FIG. 472(b) shows the third 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents of a pattern display device 81. FIG. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 487) so that, for example, the left, middle and right three A row of symbols is displayed.

The third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are composed of nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "1" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have accessory designs imitating characters such as shields, swords, cloaks, etc. that cover almost the entire front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of , in green, small, and to be displayed in front of the attached symbols.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 487) described later is a big hit (jackets A to E), the same main pattern Matching variable display is performed, and after the variable display is finished, a big win is generated. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

Furthermore, if the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols with even numbers are always displayed, while if the variable jackpot is a variable jackpot, the same main symbols with even numbers are displayed. Either the matching variation display or the variation display including the same main symbols with odd numbers is executed. In other words, by executing the variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned, not only the big win but also the definite variable state after the big win is finalized. In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, the rate of execution of the variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned when the probability variable jackpot is achieved is set to an extremely low probability (for example, 1% rate). there is As a result, it is possible to make rare the case where it is possible to grasp that it is a probability variable jackpot from the type of symbols that are collected when the jackpot is won. As described above, until the lottery of 100 special symbols is executed after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbols is maintained (whether or not the variable probability state is determined from the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a). Therefore, by making it difficult to grasp whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot from the types of the main patterns arranged at the time of jackpot winning, from the end of the jackpot to the end of the lottery of special patterns 100 times. During the period, it is possible to more frequently generate a situation in which it is not known whether it is a variable probability state or a time saving state. Therefore, even if the probability variable jackpot is won or when the normal jackpot is won, the player is in a variable probability state from the end of the jackpot to the end of the lottery of 100 times of special symbols. You can keep your hopes up.

As shown in FIG. 472(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display for displaying the third symbol when the third symbol is variably displayed or when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. A region Dm, a small region Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, a small region Ds2 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and a predetermined effect (for example, an interrupt described later and a small area Ds3 for reducing and displaying the variable effect of the third symbol while executing the continuous hitting effect).

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol stops, if a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of balls (holding balls) for which variation has not been executed (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol) among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64. The small area Ds2 is an area for displaying the number of balls (holding balls) for which variation has not been executed (the number of holding balls of the second special symbol) among the balls that have entered the second ball entrance 640, and is a small area. Ds3 is an area in which the variable effect is reduced and displayed when, for example, a display effect different from the variable effect is executed in the main display area. By shrinking and displaying the variable effect, it is possible to prevent the display effect different from the variable effect from being hidden by the third pattern and becoming difficult to see.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 472(b), a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the background of the third pattern, a display indicating the degree of expectation for the big win is displayed. Performances and the like are executed.

When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display devices 37A, 37B), the number of times the ball enters is up to four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37A and is also displayed in the small area Ds1. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the number of times that the ball enters is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37B, and in the small area Ds2. Also shown in In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed per one reserved ball number of the first special pattern, and in the small area Ds2, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed per one reserved ball number of the second special pattern. is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 or small area Ds2, it indicates that the number of reserved ball numbers is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, It shows that the number of retained balls is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed, it indicates that the reserved ball number of the first special symbol is 0 ball, that is, the reserved ball does not exist. FIG. 472(b) illustrates a case where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is four. , and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small areas Ds1 and Ds2, the number of reserved balls may be displayed in part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or the area divided into four may be displayed as many as the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 473 to 486, various entertainment effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIGS. 473 to 476, in the twenty-third embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is executed during the game state (time saving state or probability variable state) in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set. The following describes the display effect. As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, after the big hit, until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a time saving state or a variable probability state. Configure. That is, even when the game state after the end of the big win is set to the time-saving state or the variable probability state, the lottery for the special symbol is executed 100 times after the last big win is finished unless the big win is made. Until then, it is configured to be maintained in a time-saving state of normal patterns. This time-saving state of the normal pattern is maintained even if it falls from the probability variable state of the special pattern to the low probability state of the special pattern until it is executed 100 times, so the game set at the end of the big win. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify not only the state but also the timing of falling from the probability variable state of the special symbol to the low probability state.

However, if the state of the special symbols of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbols are in the variable probability state or the low probability state) is configured to be completely unidentifiable, the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbols is set. The game becomes monotonous while is continuing, and there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game cannot be sufficiently improved. Therefore, in the twenty-third embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 allows the player to predict the possibility of the variable probability state to some extent. More specifically, every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, one back mode is selected from among three types of back modes that suggest the degree of expectation of the variable state considering the game state etc. at the time of execution. It is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting the state of the special symbol from the aspect of the backside mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 473(a), the display mode (rear view mode) with a relatively low degree of expectation that the current state is the variable probability state will be described. As shown in FIG. 473(a), when the back mode (cave exploration mode), which is a variable state with a relatively low expectation, is set, a character 801 imitating an adventurer holds a sword and a torch. A display mode for searching the inside of the cave is displayed. In addition, on the lower right side of the front view on the display screen of the third design display device 81, the number of lotteries of the remaining special symbols until the number of lotteries that the time saving state of the normal design may end (time saving state of the normal design guaranteed number of times) is displayed. The example of FIG. 473(a) illustrates a case where 90 times is displayed as the guaranteed number of times. That is, it illustrates the state after the lottery for the special symbol is executed 10 times after the big win is finished. Further, a display area 803 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape is displayed in the lower part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front. Inside this display area 803, horizontally elongated substantially elliptical right-handed images displaying the characters "right-handed" are displayed on the left and right, and between these right-handed images, "cave search mode" is displayed. is displayed. According to these display modes, the time-saving state of normal symbols continues until the lottery of special symbols is executed at least 90 times (the time-saving state may end when the lottery of 90 times ends), And the player can easily understand that the game should be played by hitting to the right. In addition, compared to the temple search mode (see FIG. 473 (b)) and the super temple search mode (see FIG. 474), which will be described later, the display contents are plain, so that the player can intuitively It can be made to understand that the possibility of the condition continuing is relatively low.

FIG. 473(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the back mode (temple search mode), which has a high expectation that the current state is a variable probability state, is set compared to the cave search mode. When the temple search mode is set, a display mode in which a character 801 imitating an adventurer searches the temple is displayed, and the characters between the right-handed images in the display area 803 are displayed as "temple search mode". is changed to The contents displayed in the temple search mode are brighter in appearance than in the cave search mode, and the display mode is such that the player can easily have a flashy impression. can be intuitively understood.

FIG. 474 is a diagram showing a display mode when the back mode (super-temple search mode) indicating that the degree of expectation of the probability change state is higher than the temple search mode is set. When this super temple search mode is set, the characters "CHANCE" are displayed on the pillars of the temple, and torches are set on the pillars of the temple. Furthermore, a substantially circular display area 804 displaying the characters "super" is displayed on the upper left side of the characters "temple search mode" in the display area 803. FIG. These display modes can give the player a more flashy impression than the temple search mode (see FIG. 473(b)), so that the expectation of the variable probability state can be further improved. It should be noted that this super temple search mode is a back mode that may be set (shifted) only when the game state is a variable probability state and the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold. In other words, at the time of transition to the super temple search mode, not only the variable state is confirmed, but also the variable state is confirmed to continue until at least the pending ball at the time of transition is digested, so the transition to the super temple search mode By doing so, it is possible to please the player.

Thus, in the twenty-third embodiment, during the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the cave search mode with a relatively low expectation of the probability change state, the temple search mode with a relatively high expectation of the probability change state , and 3 of the super temple search mode that confirms that the definite variable state is confirmed and that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the definite variable state continues until the hold is digested) It is configured to set one of the types of back modes at the time of execution of the variable display performance based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By constructing in this way, while the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, the player can be given the pleasure of predicting the current game state from the back mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved. In addition, by setting the super temple search mode, it is confirmed that the game state is a variable state. You can make them feel joy that their predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the state of the special symbol is predicted to be low probability, but the state is shifted to the super temple mode, the player will be delighted that the game state is set to be more advantageous than expected. can let Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is confirmed that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the lottery for the number of pending balls can be executed with a probability of a jackpot in a variable state. possible), the game can be played with a stronger expectation of a big win during the hold.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 475 and 476, in the twenty-third embodiment, a special symbol lottery is drawn for a predetermined number of times (for example, 96 times) without winning the jackpot in a state where the time saving state of normal symbols is set. A description will be given of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect that is executed when is executed. FIG. 475 is a diagram showing a display mode at the start of this variable probability continuation suggestion effect. This variable probability continuation suggesting performance is a performance for suggesting whether or not the game state is the variable probability state, and is executed from the 96th variable display performance to the 99th variable display performance after the end of the big win. That is, it is an effect that is executed until immediately before the 100th special symbol lottery, which is the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state, is executed. In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, in the time saving state, it is configured to subtract the number of remaining time saving times when the special symbols start to fluctuate. That is, in the time saving state, after the jackpot ends, the number of time saving times becomes 0 at the start of the 100th variable display, so during the execution of the 100th variable display, the time saving state has already ended (shift to normal state completed state). Therefore, whether or not it is in the probability variable state or in the time-saving state is notified by the 99th variable display performance in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is surely maintained. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to identify whether the probability variation state continues until the result of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is confirmed (that is, it is a time saving state from the operation of the electric accessory 640a It becomes difficult to see whether it is in a probability variable state or not), so the player can be made to pay attention to the game by the probability variable continuation suggestive effect.

As shown in FIG. 475, when the variable probability continuation suggestion effect is started, an effect is executed in which a door 806 appears in front of a character 801 imitating an adventurer. Also, above the door 806, a display area 805 is displayed in which the characters "Door breaking mode start!" Further, the characters displayed between the right-handed images in the display area 803 are changed to "door breaking mode". With these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the character 801 can break through the door, it means that the variable probability state continues. In this probability variable continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode), the effect of adding an attack to the door 806 is executed each time the variable display is executed, and if the door 806 can be finally destroyed (breakthrough), the probability variable state An effect in which the continuation of is notified is executed.

FIG. 476(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode suggesting that the degree of expectation that the probability change state continues is relatively low in the probability change continuation suggestion production (door breakthrough mode). When this low-expectation production mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 476(a), a character 801 imitating an adventurer attacks the door 806 by slashing it with a sword, thereby destroying (breaking through) the door 806. ) is executed. On the other hand, FIG. 476(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode suggesting that the degree of expectation that the probability change state continues is relatively high in the probability change continuation suggestion production (door breakthrough mode). 476(b), a character 801 imitating an adventurer strikes the door 806 with a giant hammer, thereby opening the door 806. An effect of trying to destroy (break through) is executed.

It is intuitively obvious to many players that hitting with a hammer is more effective than cutting with a sword in order to destroy the door 806, so the effect of hitting with a hammer is more effective. , the player can easily understand that the expectation of breaking through the door 806 is high. Therefore, during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestive effect, the game can be played expecting that the effect of hitting the door 806 with a hammer will be executed more times. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twenty-third embodiment, at the start of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect, the lottery results of the 96th to 99th times, which are the execution range of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, are read in advance, and the probability change state until the 99th special symbol lottery. It is determined whether or not is continuing, and if the variable probability state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the production scenario that is likely to generate high-expectation attack patterns is high. . On the other hand, if the time-saving state has fallen before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or the time-saving state was after the end of the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern occurs. It is configured to increase the selection rate of production scenarios that are easy to play. In this way, by setting the effect mode based on the game state at the end of the effect, it is possible to more accurately notify the game state after the end of the effect.

Here, if it is configured to execute the variable probability continuation suggestion effect only based on the game state at the start of the effect, it falls to a low probability state during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation of the variable probability state is notified. In spite of this, there is a possibility that the time saving state will be ended with the start of the 100th special symbol lottery. In this case, there is a possibility that the player will have a sense of distrust towards the pachinko machine 10 and the hall due to the contradiction between the content of the performance and the actual action. Also, as a countermeasure, there is a method of configuring the variable probability continuation suggestion production by a production that is completed with one fluctuation, but in this method, it is difficult to ensure a sufficient production period, so there are various production modes. becomes difficult to convert.

On the other hand, in the 23rd embodiment, it is configured to execute the probability variable continuation suggestion effect over the last four variable displays that guarantee the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the notification content of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect , It is determined based on the game state at the time when the last special symbol lottery in the execution range of the variable probability continuous effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation while making it possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the presentation. It should be noted that, when the probability is variable at the start of the production, and the ball is not held until the end of the production, the production is selected so that an attack pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation is likely to occur. ing. This is because the probability of a lottery result corresponding to the fall is lower than the probability of a big hit, and it is extremely rare to fall into a low probability state of special symbols during the production period (relatively high probability of a variable state) This is because the performance ends immediately).

Next, with reference to FIG. 477, transition of various states after completion of the variable probability jackpot in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 477(a), the transition of the state in the case of falling to the low probability state within 100 times after the end of the variable probability jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 477(a), when falling within 100 times, although it shifts to the low probability state of the special design at the time of falling, the lottery of the special design is executed 100 times in the time saving state of the normal design. continue until Then, in the 96th to 99th variable probability continuation suggestion effects executed in the 96th to 99th variable display effects, the effect of failing to break through the door 806 is executed, and the transition to the normal state is notified.

On the other hand, FIG. 477(b) is a diagram showing the transition of the state in the case of falling to the low probability state of the special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol 100 times or more after the end of the probability variable jackpot. As shown in FIG. 477(b), when falling after 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of normal symbols and the variable probability state of special symbols are maintained until falling. Therefore, in the variable probability continuation suggestion performance executed over the execution period of the 96th to 99th variable display, the performance of successfully breaking through the door 806 is executed to notify the continuation of the variable probability state.

In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, as in the case of falling in the special symbol lottery after the 100th time, even if the special symbol lottery hits a big hit during the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is normal at the start of the fluctuation. It is configured to end the time saving state of the pattern. Therefore, when the time saving state is ended within 100 times of lottery times of special symbols (that is, within the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state), winning of a jackpot is determined at that time. On the other hand, when the time saving state is ended after 100 times (that is, after the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state has elapsed), it means that it is either a big hit or a fall. And since the probability of winning the jackpot (1/125) is higher than the probability of falling (1/500), even if the time saving state ends at the start of the fluctuation after 100 times, it will be a jackpot. can be expected. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game while paying attention to whether or not the time saving state continues, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 478, the pressing stop effect in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. This pressing stop effect is a effect in which each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the lens member (PUSH button) 10317 provided on the swing operation member 10310 is pressed. In other words, it is an effect that the player can set the stop timing of each symbol row to any timing by the player's operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 .

FIG. 478(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the press stop effect. As shown in FIG. 478(a), in this pressing stop effect, button images imitating the PUSH button 10317 (left button image 807aL, center button image 807aC, right button image) are displayed below each symbol row during variable display. 807aR) is displayed. Also, below each button image, effective period gauges (left effective period gauge 807bL, central effective period gauge 807bC, right effective period gauge 807bR) indicating the remaining period during which the stop operation for each symbol row is effective are displayed. . With these display contents, the player can easily understand that each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed.

FIG. 478(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the player performs the first operation (pressing) on the PUSH button 10317 during execution of the press stop effect. As shown in FIG. 478(b), when the first operation (pressing) is executed, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed. When the second operation is performed within the operation valid period, the right symbol row is stopped and displayed, and when the third operation is performed, the center symbol row is stopped and displayed. In this way, by allowing the player to arbitrarily determine the timing of symbol stoppage, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the case where each symbol row is stopped and displayed according to the operation timing of the player, if the player operates too early, there may be too much time left after all the symbol rows are stopped. As a countermeasure against this, in the twenty-third embodiment, when the stop operation is performed three times early (for example, within one second after the start of the valid period), the central symbol row is not immediately stopped and displayed. 2, the stop display of the center symbol row is executed after a specific effect is performed, thereby suppressing the period after the stop display from becoming too long. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 479(a), a plurality of ( 3) symbols move up and down in the central symbol row (i.e. after suggesting that any of the three symbols may be displayed as a stopping symbol in the central symbol row). It is configured to execute an effect (chance charge fan effect) in which symbols other than (chance charge symbol) are stopped and displayed. In this way, depending on the length of the remaining operation valid period at the time when the stop operation of the center symbol row (the third depression of the PUSH button 10317) is performed, the center symbol row is immediately stopped and displayed, or the chance charge is performed. By adopting a configuration in which it is switched whether to fill up the time by the fanning effect, it is possible to prevent the state in which all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed from becoming unnaturally long. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more natural presentation mode.

In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, there is another pattern effect in which the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed in the center symbol row in the press stop effect. In this case, regardless of the timing at which the stop operation is performed on the center symbol row, the chance charge symbols are stop-displayed through the chance charge effect (see FIG. 479(a)). When the stop display of this chance charge symbol occurs, it develops into a chance charge effect (see FIG. 479(b)), which will be described later. By setting an effect pattern in which the chance charge symbol is actually stopped and displayed, even if the operation stop effect is selected as a simple effect of losing the chance charge and the chance charge fan effect occurs, there is a possibility that it will develop into a chance charge effect. The player can be made to think that there is Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 479(b) and FIG. 480, an effect mode of the chance charge effect will be described. FIG. 479(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the chance charge effect is started. When the chance charge effect is started, a character 801 imitating an adventurer is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the surroundings are set to emit light (aura-clad mode). be done. Also, on the right side of the character 801, there is displayed a spirit gauge KG having a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape. The fighting spirit gauge KG is for displaying the degree of fighting spirit of the character 801 in a meter format, and can be displayed in one to six levels. In addition, in a display area 805 displayed above the character 801, characters such as "The more you get fired up, the more chances you will have" are displayed. Further, the characters “Chance Charge, remaining 5 times” are displayed in the display area 803 . In the chance charge effect 1, the character 801 tries to build up his fighting spirit five times. is signaled by a metered amount of With these display contents, the player can easily understand that there are things that are better the more motivated you are.

FIG. 480(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect. As shown in FIG. 480(a), in addition to the size of the light around the character 801 (amount of aura enveloping the character) and the meter amount of the kiai gauge KG, characters displayed in the display area 805 also determine how much kiai is accumulated. is reported. In the example of FIG. 480(a), a state in which yell is accumulated up to the 5th stage out of 6 stages is illustrated, and the display area 805 displays characters "Charge Level 5!!". With these display contents, the player can easily understand the amount of yell that has finally been accumulated.

In addition, the energy gauge accumulated in the chance charge effect is consumed to generate some chance up effect at each timing until the held balls are consumed at the start of the chance charge effect. The chance-up effect is a effect that increases the expectation of a big hit. occurrence and the like. It should be noted that the spirit gauge is always consumed until it reaches zero. That is, it is configured so as not to be discarded without being consumed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up performances, so that the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up performance will occur next. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG accumulated in the chance charge effect is mainly determined based on the number of held balls at the start of the chance charge effect. After completion of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is variable in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load (the processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

FIG. 480(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the spirit gauge is consumed. FIG. 480(b) exemplifies a case where one gauge of the spirit gauge is consumed and a so-called pending change effect is executed as a chance-up effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 480(b), the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG is reduced (consumed) by one gauge, and at the same time, the display mode of the third reserved ball number symbol Hz3 in the small area Ds1 changes from white to blue. A production that changes to (increases the degree of expectation) is executed. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which some kind of effect (chance-up effect) is executed to increase the expectation of winning as the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG decreases, while the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG remains, the game can be played at any time. , the game can be played looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 481, the change over time of the display mode (effect mode) in the variable display effect in which the pressing stop effect is set will be described. First, referring to FIG. 481(a), in the pressing stop effect that does not develop into a chance charge effect, when the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed after 1 second from the start of the valid period. A description will be given of the change over time of the effect mode of . As shown in FIG. 481(a), when the variable display in which only the press stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, the normal A variable display (simply a variable display in which each symbol row fluctuates in the vertical direction at high speed) is executed, and when 6 seconds have passed, the press stop effect (see FIG. 478(a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed after 1 second from the start of the effective period of the pressing stop effect (when 2 seconds have elapsed in the example of FIG. 481(a)), the already stopped left symbol column , and in addition to the right symbol row, the central symbol row is pseudo-stopped. It should be noted that the pseudo stop display means that display is performed in a manner that is difficult to distinguish from the final stop display (for example, a manner in which vibration is performed with extremely small amplitude). This pseudo-stop continues until the stop display timing of the original variable display (the timing of receiving the stop command from the main controller 110), and each symbol row is completely stopped and displayed at the stop display timing.

Next, referring to FIG. 481(b), in the pressing stop effect that does not develop into a chance charge effect, the third stop operation (stop operation for the medium symbol row) is executed within 1 second or less from the start of the valid period. A description will be given of the change over time of the effect mode when the player is shown. As shown in FIG. 481(b), when the variable display is executed in which only the press stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed), normal The variable display is executed, and when 6 seconds have passed, the press stop effect (see FIG. 478(a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed in the range of 1 second or less (when 0.5 seconds have elapsed in the example of FIG. 481(b)) after the effective period of the pressing stop effect has started, the chance charge effect is performed. (See FIG. 479(a)) is executed, and then an effect is executed in which the winning symbol combination is stop-displayed at the stop display timing. As a result, even if the stop operation is executed three times at a relatively early stage after the start of the valid period, the period until the stop display can be connected (filled) by the chance charge fanning effect, so that the missing symbol. It is possible to show the transition of the presentation mode up to the stop display of , in a natural form. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect mode that causes less discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 481(c), the change over time of the presentation mode in the case of developing into the chance charge presentation will be described. As shown in FIG. 481(c), even when the chance charge effect develops, the transition of the effect mode is the same as when the chance charge effect is not executed until the press stop effect is executed. Then, in the variable display in which the chance charge effect is set, when the stop operation is executed three times in the press stop effect, the chance charge boost effect (FIG. 479(a)) is performed regardless of the timing of the third stop operation. ) is generated, and after that, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, it develops into a chance charge effect.

As described above, in the twenty-third embodiment, even in the variable display in which only the press stop effect is set, the chance charge effect can be executed depending on the end timing of the stop operation, so the chance charge effect can be executed. It is possible to hold the expectation for more times. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 482 to FIG. 484, an interruption continuous hit effect, which is a type of entertainment effect in the twenty-third embodiment, will be described. This interrupting continuous hit effect is a display mode effect as if a different mode of effect from the display effect that had been displayed until then suddenly interrupted during normal variable display or reach fluctuation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 482(a), the image of the normal variable display effect is displayed by executing the continuous interrupt effect during execution of the normal variable display effect (see FIG. 472(b)). (on the front layer), a cut-in area CR is formed (displayed) in which the face of the monster is displayed in close-up. That is, as shown in FIG. 482(a), a display area (cut-in area CR) formed in a belt shape extending downward from the upper left side to the lower right side on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. . As shown in FIG. 482(a), this cut-in area CR occupies about 70% of the area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and a monster is modeled in the central part of the cut-in area CR. The displayed image is enlarged. In addition, a display area 805 displaying characters "Monster Group Assault!!" is displayed (formed) above the image simulating a monster in the cut-in area CR. From these display contents, the player can easily understand that an effect completely different from the effect executed before the cut-in area CR is displayed (interrupted) has been executed. can be made While the cut-in area CR is being formed (that is, while the interrupt repeated hitting effect is being executed), the display effect being executed immediately before is interrupted. That is, the display effect of the layer on the back side of the cut-in area CR is all temporarily stopped, and the effect mode is restarted from the state at the time of interruption when the interrupt continuous hit effect ends. Note that audio (music) can be paused (interrupted) or continued depending on the situation. In the 23rd embodiment, when the continuous hit effect is executed during normal variable display, both the display mode and the sound mode are controlled so as to be interrupted until the repeated continuous hit effect ends. Only the display mode is interrupted when the interruption continuous hit effect is executed after the reach occurs (while the reach is fluctuating). This is because more flashy music (BGM) is played after the occurrence of ready-to-win as compared to during execution of normal variable display. It is intended to prevent them from being caught.

After the cut-in region CR in which images imitating monsters and the like are displayed by executing the interrupt continuous hitting effect, the player is urged to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (continuous hitting). A display mode is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 482(b), a button image BG imitating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in the cut-in region CR, and below it is displayed an indication that the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is valid. A gauge image GG showing the remaining period of time in a gauge format is displayed. In addition, above the button image BG, the characters "Consecutive hits" and an image of three arrows facing the PUSH button image BG are displayed. Furthermore, a display area 805 is displayed with the text "Reduce the number of monsters with repeated hits!" Is displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the number of monsters can be reduced by pressing the PUSH button 10317 within the continuous hit valid period.

In the 23rd embodiment, as the types of interrupt barrage effects, there are provided a plurality of types that differ in at least the number of monsters that can be reduced during the barrage valid period (the lower limit of the number of remaining monsters to be displayed). It is And basically, it is configured so that the more monsters are subjugated (the number of remaining monsters is reduced), the higher the expected jackpot is. More specifically, in the case where an interrupt continuous hit effect is set for the variable display of the jackpot, a type of effect that makes it possible to subdue all 100 monsters (reset the number of remaining monsters to 0). While the mode can be selected, it is configured so that it is impossible to reduce the number of monsters to 0 (the number of monsters can only be reduced to 3 at maximum) in the non-variable display.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the number of monsters to be subjugated (subtracted) by pressing the PUSH button 10317 once is made variable according to the length of the remaining effective period. More specifically, the longer the remaining effective period is, the smaller the number of subjugations (subtraction number) per pressing is. By configuring in this way, even when a player with a fast pace of repeated hits is playing a game, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being reduced to the minimum number of monsters early after the start of the effect.

Here, conventionally, as a kind of entertainment effect, an operation effect is known in which an operation means such as an operation button is continuously operated for a predetermined period to change the effect mode. In this operation effect, the upper limit of the number of times the effect mode is variable (the number of times of development) is generally set for each effect, and when the number of times of operation reaches a specific number, the upper limit of the development mode is variable. Things were normal. However, in the production of such specifications, when a player with a fast operation speed is playing a game, the upper limit level of the production is developed (variable) early, so the upper limit level is low. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be spoiled when the stage of indicating Furthermore, when a player whose operation speed is slow is playing a game, even though the player is actively performing the operation, the operation is performed before the predetermined number of operations for developing to the upper limit development mode. There is a possibility that the valid period will expire and the interest of the player will be spoiled.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment, the number of monsters to be subjugated (subtracted) by pressing once is varied according to the length of the remaining valid period, and the longer the remaining valid period, the more Since it is configured so that the number of subjugated monsters is reduced, even if the button is pressed at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being subjugated at an early stage up to the minimum number of monsters. In other words, it is possible to prevent the decrease of the number of monsters based on the depression of the remaining 10 bodies or the remaining 4 bodies, which are likely to be set in the case of losing, from being stopped, and the player's expectation for the big win being spoiled. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, pressing in the latter half of the continuous hitting effective period makes it easier to select a relatively large number of subjugations, so that the lower limit number of monsters can be reached. can make it more likely. Therefore, even a player whose pressing pace is slow can be entertained with the continuous interrupt effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 483(a), in an effect such as an interrupt continuous hit effect in which continuous operation of the PUSH button 10317 is effective, the operation (press) of the PUSH button 10317 is performed within the continuous hit effective period of the effect. A description will be given of the output mode of the sound that is output each time it is detected. As shown in FIG. 483(a), each time a push (operation) to the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the repeated hitting valid period, the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 501), which will be described later, is activated to reproduce voice data. Audio data corresponding to pressing is reproduced for either CN2 or CN3 among the plurality of provided channels. More specifically, when the pressing is detected for the first time in the repeated hitting valid period, the first voice data (first repeated hitting sound) is reproduced for CN2. As shown in FIG. 483(a), the sound data corresponding to the first repeated hitting sound is composed of sound data that produces a sound of "busy" when reproduced. Further, when the second depression is detected in the repeated hitting valid period, the second voice data (second repeated hitting sound) is reproduced for CN3. As shown in FIG. 483(a), the sound data corresponding to the second repeated sound is composed of sound data that outputs a sound of "bushi-ooh" when reproduced. Thereafter, every time a depression is detected, the control for reproducing the audio data corresponding to the first repeated tapping sound for CN2 and the control for reproducing the audio data corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound for CN3 are alternately performed. is repeated to In this way, by outputting audio data corresponding to a different sound each time a depression is detected, it is possible to diversify the audio mode during continuous hitting. In other words, since it is possible to prevent the voice mode from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the repeated hitting valid period. Also, if the configuration is such that the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are simply alternately reproduced in a single channel (i.e., control is performed to stop the output of one sound during reproduction and output the other sound). ), it is possible to output one sound while maintaining the output state of the other sound (the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are output in duplicate). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in a configuration where the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately reproduced in a single channel, when a player whose interval between repeated hits is short performs a repeated hit operation, the leading portion of each sound data This results in a monotonous voice mode in which only the voices are alternately repeated. On the other hand, if a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data is reproduced on other channels. can be played. That is, it is possible to synthesize and output a sound based on one sound data and a sound based on another sound data. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the beginning part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify the sound modes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twenty-third embodiment, each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, two types of audio data are alternately played back on two channels, thereby diversifying the audio mode. The configuration is not limited to this, and three or more types of audio data may be alternately reproduced in order on CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify voice modes. In this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. By configuring in this way, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, until the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is terminated). can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify the voice modes. Furthermore, the type of the audio data to be output may be changed according to the interval of successive hits. Specifically, for example, when a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between consecutive hits (for example, 0.5 seconds or less), three types of sound modes are reproduced in order on three channels. On the other hand, when a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between consecutive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data are sent to two channels in order. It may be configured to reproduce (alternately). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the output mode of the sound according to the interval of successive hits, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the interval of repeated hits. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, it is configured to output one of the repeated hitting sounds in conjunction with the repeated hitting operation. . More specifically, for example, if the last repeated hitting sound output during the effective period of the repeated hitting operation is the first repeated hitting sound, the second repeated hitting sound may be output after the end of the repeated hitting sound. With this configuration, although the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output as a set according to the repeated hitting operation, the last output sound is the first repeated hitting sound. (That is, the paired second repeated hitting sound is not output), and it is possible to prevent the voice mode from becoming incomplete. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, if the last repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, the control to output the second repeated hitting sound after the end is changed to a variation display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during the execution of the jackpot variation). By constructing in this way, for the player who desires to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last continuous hitting sound to be output during the interrupt continuous hitting effect is dared to be the first repeated hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between repeated hits by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the first repeated hitting sound is always output when the repeated hitting operation is detected while no sound is being reproduced. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of the first repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. By constructing in this way, a player who desires to diversify the voice modes can be made to perform the continuous hitting operation at a faster pace, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting performance can be improved. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 483(b), the relationship between the pressing timing in the continuous hitting effective period of the interrupt continuous hitting effect and the subtraction number of the monster will be described. In the example of FIG. 483, the correspondence relationship in the type of interrupt continuous hit effect that can subdue a maximum of 100 monsters will be described as an example. FIG. 483(b) is a graph showing the correspondence relationship between the elapsed time (horizontal axis) and the number of monsters defeated (vertical axis) at the time when the depression of the PUSH button 10317 is detected. As shown in FIG. 483(b), the later the pressing timing is, the more monsters are subtracted (killed). As a result, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being quickly defeated to the minimum number. In other words, it is possible to prevent the decrease of the number of monsters based on the depression of the remaining 10 bodies or the remaining 4 bodies, which are likely to be set in the case of losing, from being stopped, and the player's expectation for the big win being spoiled. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, pressing in the latter half of the continuous hitting effective period makes it easier to select a relatively large number of subjugations, so that the lower limit number of monsters can be reached. can make it more likely. Therefore, even a player whose pressing pace is slow can be entertained with the continuous interrupt effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the correspondence relationship between the pressing timing and the monster subtraction number is not limited to that shown in FIG. 483(b), and can be determined arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, by reducing the inclination (for example, halving) of the corresponding relationship shown in FIG. You can make it more difficult to subtract monsters until Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform the continuous hitting more seriously, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupting continuous hitting effect can be further improved. On the other hand, if the slope is increased, it is relatively easy to reduce the number of monsters until the number of monsters reaches the minimum number by repeated hits. It becomes possible to easily confirm. Therefore, even a player who is not good at repeated hits can be made to actively participate in the interrupt repeated hit effect. In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, the correspondence relationship between the pressing timing and the subtraction number of the monster is proportional (linear function). An arbitrary correspondence relation such as a correspondence relation or an exponential correspondence relation can be set by the designer. Further, the correspondence relationship may be configured to be different according to the effect type of the repeated interrupt effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player can predict the degree of expectation for a big win even from the transition of the subtraction number in repeated hits, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 484, the change over time of the effect mode during execution of the variable display effect in which the interrupt repeated hit effect is set will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 484(a), the change over time of the effect mode during execution of the variable display effect in which the interrupt repeated hit effect is not executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 484(a), when the variable effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set is executed, the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds. Then, while the normal variable display is being executed, the variable display BGM (music 1) corresponding to the normal variable display is loop-reproduced. This song 1 consists of three melody parts, A part, B part, and C part. is configured to

Then, as shown in FIG. 484(a), normal reach occurs after 10 seconds have passed, and the display mode changes to the variable display mode of normal reach. When this normal reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 484(a), the sound is switched to BGM (music 2) corresponding to normal reach variation. As with the music 1, the music 2 is also loop-reproduced so that the reproduction time is set so as to end in time with the normal reach performance.

On the other hand, in the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect occurs before the normal reach effect occurs, as shown in FIG. , The normal variable display effect is interrupted, and the interrupt continuous hit effect is started (interrupted). When the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed, not only the display mode (normal variable display effect) but also the sound (normal variable display BGM) is interrupted. Then, when 9 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation (when 7 seconds have passed since the start of the interrupt repeated hitting effect), the interrupt repeated hitting effect is ended, and the normal changing display effect and the changing display BGM are resumed from the interruption point. After that, at the timing when 17 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the normal fluctuation display ends and the normal reach occurs. That is, normal reach occurs after the normal variable display is performed for a total of 10 seconds. After progressing to normal reach, the transition of the display mode is the same as in the variable display in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set (see FIG. 484(a)), so the description thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, in the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect occurs after the normal ready-to-win effect occurs, as shown in FIG. Up to this point, it is the same as the transition of the display mode of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set (see FIG. 484(a)). Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the development to the normal ready-to-win effect, the normal ready-to-win effect is interrupted, and the interrupting continuous hitting effect is executed for 7 seconds. Then, when the continuous hitting effect for 7 seconds ends, the interrupted normal ready-to-win effect is resumed. It should be noted that, when the interruption continuous hit effect is executed after the occurrence of the reach, only the display mode is interrupted, and the voice output mode is maintained as it is. In other words, while maintaining the reproduction of the BGM for the ready-to-win effect, the BGM for the repeated interrupt effect is reproduced in other channels (eg, CN2 to CN4). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the relatively lively BGM for the ready-to-win effect from being suddenly interrupted and making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, as the type of variation in which normal reach occurs, normal reach with a variation time of 30 seconds (loss normal reach A, hit normal reach A) and normal reach with a variation time of 37 seconds (loss normal reach B, hit normal reach B ) are provided. That is, different variation types with different variation times are set for 7 seconds, which is the effect time of the interrupt continuous hit effect. Then, the execution of the continuous interrupt effect is determined by lottery only in the case of a variation type with a variation time of 37 seconds. By configuring in this way, by combining a production mode (a production mode for 30 seconds) that can be set for a variation pattern of 30 seconds and a production mode of continuous interrupting production, a variation time of exactly 37 seconds can be obtained. can be filled. That is, since it is no longer necessary to provide a dedicated effect mode when the interrupt continuous hit effect is set, it is possible to reduce display data and sound data. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Similarly, for the variation type that does not generate reach and the variation type that develops to super reach, multiple types with different variation times of 7 seconds are set. It is configured so that it can be set only for As a result, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased because the variation time that is longer by 7 seconds can be filled just by combining the performance mode that can be selected in the variation type that is shorter by 7 seconds and the performance mode of the continuous interrupting performance. It is possible to suitably execute the production without

Here, although the details will be described later, in the twenty-third embodiment, along with the execution of the special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of the first symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery result is determined by lottery in the main controller 110. Then, the determined variation time is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the variable display effect of the effect period that matches the variable time notified by the variable pattern command, synchronizes with the variable display of the first pattern, and the variable display effect of the third pattern. is configured to execute The variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating a basic variation time and an additional time command indicating an additional variation time. Whether or not is notified by an additional time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as a basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is issued as an additional variation time. be notified. On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as a basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as an additional variation time. . In other words, it is configured to be able to identify whether or not it is a variation type longer by 7 seconds depending on the notification content of the additional time command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the change type is a lottery target for whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hitting effect, simply by confirming the content of the additional time command. Further, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect, the variable time can be filled by setting the effect mode corresponding to the variable time notified by the basic time command (the variable time shorter by 7 seconds). can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the performance mode with the end timing of the variable display performance without preparing the performance mode dedicated to the interrupt continuous hitting performance, so that a suitable performance mode can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 485 to FIG. 486, the pending collective change effect, which is a kind of interest effect in the twenty-third embodiment, will be described. This pending collective change effect is an effect that may be executed when there are a plurality of pending balls. It is an effect that changes to a highly anticipated display mode based on the operation of . In FIGS. 485 to 486, there are four reserved balls, and the second reserved ball number pattern Hz2 is changed to a blue display mode, and the third reserved ball number pattern Hz3 is changed to a green display mode. , the case where the pending collective change effect is executed will be described as an example. It should be noted that the display mode of the number of pending ball symbols is configured so that the expectation of a big win increases in the order of white, blue, green, and red. The display mode of the number of pending balls is basically, when the start winning (entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is detected, various types acquired based on the starting winning It is determined based on a random value (counter value). In more detail, from the various random values obtained at the time of the start winning, predict in advance (read ahead) whether the special symbol lottery will be executed and the type of fluctuation, and according to the prediction result (read ahead result) At the lottery probability, a lottery is made to determine which display mode the number of reserved balls pattern is to be set. In this lottery, control is performed such that the higher the prospective result corresponding to the lottery result with the higher degree of expectation, the higher the percentage of the number of pending balls symbols set in the form of the higher degree of expectation. It should be noted that the timing of the start winning is variable according to the game situation of the player (pace of game ball launch, etc.), so the pending collective change effect is executed independently of the variable display effect. . In other words, it is an effect that may be executed over a plurality of variable display effect fluctuation periods (possibly within one fluctuation period).

FIG. 485(a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the time when the pending collective change effect is executed. This pending collective change effect may be executed when a plurality of pending balls are present when a new start winning prize is detected. When the pending collective change effect is executed, first, the pending change character HC suggesting the start of the pending collective change effect is framed in from the top of the display screen. As shown in FIG. 485(a), this pending change character HC is displayed in a manner imitating the PUSH button 10317 in the part corresponding to the face. The display mode of the pending change character HC can suggest to the player in advance that the effect of pressing the PUSH button 10371 will be executed.

After the pending change character HC appears (into the frame), as shown in FIG. 485(b), all of the pending ball symbols Hz1 to Hz4 are changed to a rock-like display mode. That is, the degree of expectation indicated by the number of pending balls pattern (the display color of the number of pending balls pattern) is temporarily changed to a hidden state. Moreover, a balloon image FG imitating a balloon is displayed above the hold change character HC, and inside the balloon image FG, a character saying "Press button PUSH to increase hold rank!?" is displayed. With this display mode, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the degree of expectation (display color) of any of the number of reserved ball symbols is improved by pressing the PUSH button 10317 for the player. can.

FIG. 486(a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the player presses the PUSH button 10317 during execution of the pending collective change effect. As shown in FIG. 486(a), when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, the rocks around all the reserved ball number symbols that have been changed to a rock-like display mode pop off, and normal reserved balls are displayed. An effect of returning to the display mode of several symbols is executed. In addition, at this time, the degree of expectation indicated by at least a part of the reserved number of balls symbols increases compared to before the occurrence of the reserved collective change effect. In the example of FIG. 486(a), the second reserved ball number pattern Hz2, which had been set to a blue display mode before execution of the pending collective change effect, was changed to a red display mode through the pending collective change effect. indicates the case.

By executing this pending collective change effect, it is confirmed that the degree of expectation indicated by at least one pending ball number symbol is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, which pattern of the number of pending balls will change (increase in the degree of expectation), the operation on the PUSH button 10317 will be fun to see which pattern of the number of pending balls will change. can be done. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the player's favorite timing. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

FIG. 486(b) shows a state in which the suspension change character HC (mini character) fades out of the screen during the effective period of the suspension collective change effect. When the pending change character HC fades out to the outside of the screen, even if the operation valid period in the pending collective change performance remains, the valid period is interrupted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 486(b), even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317, an effect (see FIG. 486(a)) in which the degree of expectation of each reserved ball number symbol changes is executed. no. This effect in which the mini character is absent is executed, for example, when another operation effect involving the operation of the PUSH button 10317 conflicts with the pending collective change effect. The absence of the pending change character HC corresponding to the pending collective change effect makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the valid operation period is temporarily interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the fact that the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is misunderstood as effective in the pending batch change effect and the effect does not develop. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

<Electrical configuration in the twenty-third embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 487, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 487 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 488) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 488, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, a special hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a special hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot pattern, A stop type counter C3 used for selecting a stop type, a falling lottery counter C4 used for a falling lottery from a probability variable state of special symbols, a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a special winning random number counter. An initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of C1 is used. Also, a normal winning random number counter C5 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 502), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 511). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the drop lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball execution area, and a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a falling lottery counter C4, and a variable Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. - 特許庁

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 999), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (eg, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0-999, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0-999. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 502) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 511).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa of the RAM203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb.

The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202qa (see FIG. 490(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 is , Special symbol jackpot random number 23 If it matches with the value of the random number set for the jackpot set by the table 202qa, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low) and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high than when the probability is low ( It is divided into two types, one for a period in which the special symbol is in a probability variable state), and the number of random numbers that will be a big hit included in each is set differently (see FIG. 490 (a)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa of the RAM 203 (special symbol reserved ball execution area when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb of the RAM 203 (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, the special symbol reserved ball execution area ).

Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will be out of the special symbol, display the first symbol. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. will be the one at the time of the special pattern jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb. Become.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 999. FIG. In this special winning random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that become a special symbol jackpot when the special symbol probability is low, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are the special symbol jackpot random numbers 23 for when the probability is low. It is stored in a table (see FIG. 490(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 4 among the total number of random number values of 1000, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/250". It should be noted that the random number value (counter value) that becomes a big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 8 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the values "4 to 11" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table for high probability. (FIG. 490(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 8 among the total number of random numbers of 1000, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/125".

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 491(b), when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit and the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "0 to 9", the big hit type is "jackpot A" (15 Round probability variation jackpot). In addition, when the value is "10 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" (5 round probability variable jackpot), and when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C". (5 rounds normal jackpot).

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit and the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the jackpot type is "jackpot D" (15 round probability variable jackpot). Also, when the value is "80 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot E" (15-round normal jackpot).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects one jackpot type out of five jackpot types (jackpots A to E) depending on the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. configured to be determined.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In this embodiment, the stop type of the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3. As the stop type, for example, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol is shifted to the front or back of the reach symbol by one and stops, "front and back reach", or after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol is before or after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and rear out" that stops at other than, "Complete out" that does not occur reach, etc. are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa (special symbol reserved ball execution area when special symbol lottery is not being executed). Also, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb of the RAM 203 (special symbol reserved ball execution area when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Stored.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 511) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern selection table 202qb (see FIG. 492(a)) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of pattern fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is It is provided in the ROM 202 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 492 and 493, the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb used when main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 492(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection 23 table 202qb. As shown in FIG. 492(a), the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb in the twenty-third embodiment is a symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the normal state. Normal table 202qb1 that is referred to for determining the fluctuation time, and the game state (probability variable state and time saving state) in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set. It is configured at least with a table 202qb2 for probability variation/time reduction that is referred to for determining the variation time.

First, the normal table 202qb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 492(b). FIG. 492(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal table 202qb1. In this normal table 202qb1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols, and for each variation pattern, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 and values are assigned. In addition, when the result of the judgment is a hit, the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd based on the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2) fluctuates respectively A pattern is set. Specifically, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the success/failure determination result is a jackpot, and the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50". When the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 180", normal reach A is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds. When the hit normal reach A is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 0 seconds, when the hit normal reach A is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, as described above, the interruption continuous hit effect (see FIG. 482) is not executed. Also, when the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50" and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "181 to 198", the variation pattern is 37 seconds per normal reach B is stipulated. When the hit normal reach B is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 7 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 7 seconds, when the hit normal reach B is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, as described above, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 482) can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 492(b), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "51 to 250", and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 150". , a super reach A per variation time of 60 seconds is defined, and a super reach B per variation time of 67 seconds is defined in the range of the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 from "151 to 198". In winning super reach A, since the additional time is 0 seconds, there is no possibility that an interrupting continuous hit effect will be executed, while in winning super reach B, an additional time command indicating that the additional time is 7 seconds is voiced. Since the notification is sent to the lamp control device 113, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not the interrupt continuous hit effect can be executed.

Also, if the symbol type is special figure 1 and the result of the judgment is out, similarly, as shown in FIG. A variation pattern is defined in which a variation time of 8 seconds to 67 seconds is set. Even in the case of deviation, in the variation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to the additional time of 7 seconds is specified, the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect is randomly selected in the voice lamp control device 113, while the additional time of 0 seconds. In the variation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to is stipulated, the interrupt repeated hit effect is not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 492 (b), if the symbol type is special figure 2, the result of the hit/fail determination is hit (jackpot D, jackpot E), the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type selection counter Regardless of the value of CS1, long fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 150 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern, and if the result of the judgment is wrong, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 An off-long variation with a variation time of 150 seconds is specified, regardless of the value. This is because, in the normal state, the distribution of the jackpot is advantageous (that is, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot is high), and when the player hits to the right to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, the game efficiency is deteriorated. This is intended to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right normally.

Next, with reference to FIG. 493, the defined contents of the table 202qb2 for probability variation/time reduction will be described. Also in the table 202qb2 for probability variation / time reduction, as shown in FIG. 493, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the lottery results of special symbols, and for each of the variation patterns, the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are allocated. In addition, in the table 202qb2 for probability variation / time reduction, relative to the normal table 202qb1, it is easy to set a relatively short fluctuation time, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery Common variable time Since the only difference is that it is configured to select , a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. By structuring so that a short variable time can be easily set, a lottery for special symbols can be executed more efficiently than other game states during the probability variable state in which the time-saving state of normal symbols is set and the time-saving state. can do.

Returning to FIG. 488, the description continues. The normal hit random number counter C5 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C5 completes one cycle, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal random number counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203qc.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal winning pattern is defined in the normal winning random number 23 table 202qc (see FIG. 490(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is , Normal winning random number 23 When it matches with the value of the random number that becomes a winning specified in the table 202qc, it is determined as a winning of the normal design. In addition, this normal random number 23 table 202qc is for normal design low probability (period in which normal design is normal state), and for high probability of normal design hit (normal design) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that will be a big hit included in each is set differently (see FIG. 490 (b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 490(b), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are two random numbers that are normal symbols, and the values are "5, 6". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 2 among the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/120".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is acquired, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. In , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C5 is within the range of "5, 6", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal winning random number 23 table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is at the time of normal pattern high probability, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83. At , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal design winning. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lighted and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". be done. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbols are won. The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C5 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 502). , is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 511).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 487, the description continues. The RAM 203 includes a buffer for the counter shown in FIG. 488, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, an I/O and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 511) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up processing (see FIG. 510) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 509) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 489(a). FIG. 489(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as part of the fixed value data, a special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa, a variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb, a normal hit random number 23 table 202qc, a jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd, and a drop lottery At least a table 202qe and an open pattern selection table 202qf are stored.

The special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490(a)) is a data table that defines the correspondence between the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the lottery result. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special design, "0 to 3" is defined as the range of the determination value that is determined to be a big hit, and in the high probability state (variable state) of the special design, the judgment that it is determined to be a big hit "4 to 11" is defined as the value range (see FIG. 490(a)). When the value of the special winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the starting winning matches with any of the judgment values corresponding to the big winning specified in this special symbol big winning random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490(a)) , is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

The jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd (see FIG. 491(a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the special hit type counter C2 is , are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd, and the special hit type A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the counter C2 is selected.

As shown in Figure 491 (a), the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd is a special feature that is referred to determine the jackpot type when the first special symbol lottery (lottery of special figure 1) results in a jackpot. Figure 1 jackpot 23 table 202qd1 and special drawing 2 jackpot 23 table 202qd2 that is referenced to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the second special pattern (lottery of special drawing 2) At least configured. First, with reference to FIG. 491(b), the details of the special figure 1 jackpot 23 table 202qd1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 491(b), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in association with "jackpot A" (see FIG. 491(b)). This "jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a variable probability state is given (the opening and closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. ) is a big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 10 counter values become ``jackpot A'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, ``jackpot A'' is determined. The proportion is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot A" has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots of the first special symbol, and is given an advantageous variable state after the jackpot is completed, so it is the most advantageous jackpot among the jackpots of the first special symbol. It is a type.

In addition, the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with "jackpot B" in the range of "10 to 49" (see FIG. 491 (b)). This "jackpot B" has 5 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a variable probability state is given (the opening and closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. ) is a big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 40 counter values become ``jackpot B'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, ``jackpot B'' is determined. The proportion is 40% (40/100). This "jackpot B" has a smaller number of rounds than the "jackpot A", but is a relatively advantageous jackpot type because an advantageous variable probability state is provided after the jackpot ends.

In addition, the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the "jackpot C" in the range of "50 to 99" (see FIG. 491 (b)). This "jackpot C" has 5 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a time-saving state is given (the opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. It is a big hit. Among the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 50 counter values become the ``jackpot C'', so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the ``jackpot C'' is determined. The proportion is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot C" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the first special pattern jackpots because it has the smallest number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a comparatively disadvantageous time-saving state. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 491(c), details of the special figure 2 jackpot 23 table 202qd2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 491(c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 79" in association with "jackpot D" (see FIG. 491(c)). This "jackpot D" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a variable probability state is given (the opening and closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. ) is a big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 80 counter values become ``jackpot D'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, ``jackpot D'' is determined. The proportion is 80% (80/100). This "jackpot D" is the most advantageous jackpot type because it has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots and is given an advantageous probability variable state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 491 (c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with "jackpot E" (see FIG. 491 (c) ). This "jackpot E" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a time-saving state is given (the opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. It is a big hit. Among the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 20 counter values become ``jackpot E'', so when the second special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, ``jackpot E'' is determined. The proportion is 20% (20/100). This "jackpot E" has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots, but is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the jackpot is finished because a disadvantageous time-saving state is given after the jackpot is finished.

Thus, in the twenty-third embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the probability variable jackpot (jackets A and B) is determined at a rate of 50%, while the second When the lottery of the special symbols results in a big win, the variable probability big win (jackpot D) is determined at a rate of 80%. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, the player can be made to expect a probability change state more strongly. As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is clearly indicated to the player is extremely rare (1% of the probability variable jackpot). After the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbols is maintained until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the variable probability state or the time saving state is set during the period from the end of the big win until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times. Even if a disadvantageous time-saving state is set, a game can be played in anticipation of a variable probability state until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times. Also, if you hit a jackpot within 100 times, even if it was a jackpot in a time-saving state, you can make it seem like you hit a jackpot during the variable state, so you can enter the variable state more than originally. It can make you feel like you have a high rate and retention rate. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The normal hit random number 23 table 202qc (see FIG. 490(b)) is a data table that defines (stores) the hit determination value of the normal symbol. Specifically, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal design, "5, 6" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design (see FIG. 490(b)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see FIG. 490(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third embodiment, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 obtained based on the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the normal winning random number table 202qc are stored. By referring to it, it is determined whether or not it is a hit of a normal design.

The variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (see FIG. 492(a)) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202qb are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The falling lottery table 202qe is a data table that defines the determination value of the falling lottery counter C4 that is determined to be a fall. The value of the fall lottery counter C4 acquired when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in the probability variable state of the special symbol (at the time of start winning) is the fall lottery table 202qe. If it matches any of the determination values defined in, it is set to shift to a special symbol low probability state (to fall down).

More specifically, two determination values of "0, 1" are defined as determination values determined to fall in the probability variable state of the special symbol. Here, the drop lottery counter C4 is a loop counter whose value is updated within the range of "0 to 999". Of the 1000 possible values of the falling lottery counter C4, there are two determination values for falling, so the probability of falling (moving to a low probability state of special symbols) in the variable probability state of special symbols. is 1/500 (2/1000).

It should be noted that, in the fall lottery table 202qe in the present embodiment, only the determination value (determination value for the probability variation state of the special symbol) for determining whether or not to fall in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined, and the special symbol Criteria for low-probability conditions are not specified. This is because it is useless to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol low probability state has already been reached.

In this embodiment, this drop lottery table 202qe is compared with a drop lottery counter C4 that is updated periodically, and whether or not to shift (fall) from the probability variable state of special symbols to the low probability state of special symbols. is determined. That is, the timing of shifting from the variable probability state to the time saving state can be made random. Therefore, when the state is shifted to the variable probability state, the player can play the game while having a sense of tension for not knowing when the variable probability state will end, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the lottery (judgment) was made as to whether or not to shift (fall) from the variable probability state of the special symbols to the low probability state of the special symbols, but it is possible to shift to another state. A lottery (judgment) may be configured. For example, it may be determined by a lottery executed for each variation whether or not the time saving state of the normal design is shifted to the normal state of the normal design. As a result, since the number of continuation times of the time saving state of the normal symbols can be randomized, also in this case, the game can be played with a sense of tension. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The opening pattern selection table 202qf is a data table that defines data for setting a pattern according to the jackpot type as the opening pattern (opening/closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a) in the fifth round of the jackpot. Although not shown, in the fifth round of the variable probability jackpot (jackpots A, B, D), the distribution device (V role) is arranged in a state of distributing the game balls to the first region (V region). During the period (5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round), the release period (5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 9.5 seconds) during which the game ball can reach the distribution device. Data for setting the open period until 5 seconds have passed is read. On the other hand, in the 5th round of the normal jackpots (jackets C, E), the period during which the distribution device (V role) distributes the game balls to the second region (non-V region) (5th round start Set the release period (4.5 seconds from immediately after the start of the 5th round to 4.5 seconds after the start of the 5th round) during which the game ball can reach the sorting device during the period from immediately after the start to the time when 5 seconds have passed. data is read out.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 489(b). FIG. 489(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 486(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd, and a special symbol. 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf, time saving medium counter 203qg, probability variable flag 203qh, jackpot start flag 203qi, jackpot medium flag 203qj, probability variable setting flag 203qk, probability variable passing counter 203qm, winning number counter 203qp, remaining It has at least a ball timer flag 203qq, a remaining ball timer 203qr, a variable probability effective flag 203qs, a variable probability effective timer 203qt, a discharge number counter 203qu, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, And each value of the stop type selection counter C3, the drop lottery counter C4, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1-C4, CS1 is acquired, the acquired data is stored in four holding areas Among the vacant areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the respective counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa are the special symbols. It is shifted (moved) to the reserved ball execution area (see FIG. 488), and based on each value of each counter C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the special symbol reserved ball execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In the twenty-third embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb has four reserved areas like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa. Each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb. Since the method of storing the counter value and the like is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C5. More specifically, at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the counter C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C5 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move winning data stored in other reserve areas to a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of times of standby) of variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. is incremented by 1 (see Z404 in FIG. 505). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see Z210 in FIG. 503).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd (the number N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (Z211 in FIG. 503, Z405 in FIG. 505 reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended by the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203qd is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223qa of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual number of holding balls of variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of times of standby) of variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203qe is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. is added by 1 (see Z410 in FIG. 505). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see Z205 in FIG. 503). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball number ( This is a counter that counts the number of standby times up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See Z704 in FIG. 508). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see Z605 in FIG. 507).

When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203qf (the number M of holding fluctuation display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the normal random number counter C5 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc (Z705 in FIG. 508). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc (Z703 in FIG. 508: No).

The time saving medium counter 203qg is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern working time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal working time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 0 and the variable probability flag 203qh is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203qg during time saving is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and 100 is set at the end of the big win every time the big win is made (see FIG. 514). Z1303). Also, regardless of the type of jackpot, when a jackpot is won by lottery of special symbols, the value is set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating the jackpot (see Z310 in FIG. 504). By configuring the value to be set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating a big hit, there is a possibility that the time-saving state has ended, such as the normal design being missed during the variable display executed in the time-saving state of the normal design. If a certain behavior occurs, it is possible to improve the expectation for the big win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

When the lottery for the normal pattern is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg and the state of the probability variation flag 203qh are referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 1 or more, or the probability variation flag 203qh is on. For example, it is determined that it is during the time saving of the normal pattern. In this case, a lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the normal winning random number 23 table 202qc for high probability (see Z609 in FIG. 507). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203qg is 0 and the probability variation flag 203qh is off, it is normally determined as a normal state of the symbol, and based on the normal per random number 23 table 202qc for low probability, normal A design lottery is performed (see Z610 in FIG. 507).

The variable probability flag 203qh is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbol. If the flag 203qh is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state. In addition, as described above, during the probability variation state of the special symbol, it becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203qh is ON, it indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The variable probability flag 203qh has an initial value set to OFF, and when the game ball enters the first area (V area) in the variable prize winning device 65 in the fifth round of the jackpot, at the end of the jackpot It is set to ON (see Z1302 in FIG. 514). In addition, the variable probability flag 203qh is reset to OFF when the lottery result corresponding to falling in the variable probability state (see Z305 in FIG. 504) and when the variation display of the jackpot starts (see Z310 in FIG. 504) be done.

This variable probability flag 203qh is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the variable probability state in the special symbol variation start process 23 (see Z302 in FIG. 504). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process 23 (FIG. 504, Z208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process 23 (FIG. 504, Z208), the probability variation flag 203qh is referred to, and if it is ON, first, the falling lottery is executed, and if it is not falling, the first per random number table for high probability time. Based on 202qa (see FIG. 490(a)), a special symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203qh is off or the probability variation flag 203qh is on and it is determined that the fall is determined by the fall lottery, the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa for low probability (Fig. 490 (a) See), a lottery for special symbols will be held.

In addition, the probability variation flag 203qh is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing 23 (Z608, Z614, Z620 in FIG. 507). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203qh and the above-described time saving counter 203qg are referred to in the normal symbol variation process 23, and if the probability variation flag 203qh is on or the value of the time saving counter 203qg is 1 or more , It is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the normal winning random number table 202qc for high probability (see FIG. 490(b)) (see Z609 in FIG. 507). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203qh is off, and if the value of the time saving counter 203qg is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the symbol is normal, and the second random number table 202qc for low probability (Fig. 490 ( (See Z610 in FIG. 507). In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 23, the probability variation flag 203qh is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is won (Z614 in FIG. 507). , Z620).

The jackpot start flag 203qi is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big win start flag 203qi is ON, it means that it is time to start a big win, and if it is OFF, it means that it is not time to start a big win. This jackpot start flag 203qi is set to ON when the end timing of the fluctuation display indicating the jackpot has come (see Z217 in FIG. 503). Also, the jackpot start flag 203qi is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see Z1103 in FIG. 512).

The jackpot flag 203qj is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the big-hit flag 203qj is on, it means that the big-hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the big-hit is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203qj becomes a jackpot by lottery of special symbols, and is set to ON as soon as the jackpot (special game state) is started (see Z1103 in FIG. 512). Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see Z1305 in FIG. 514). In the special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503), this jackpot in progress flag 203qj is referenced to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see Z201 in FIG. 503).

The variable probability setting flag 203qk is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the game ball enters the first region (V region) during the jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that the game ball has entered the first area (the passage of the variable probability switch provided in the first area) is detected, the variable probability setting flag 203qk is set to ON (Z1415 in FIG. 515) . On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203qk is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see Z1305 in FIG. 514). The variable probability setting flag 203qk is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

In addition, if the variable probability setting flag 203qk is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the variable probability switch has passed before the power is turned off. may be configured to formally set to ON and return. In this case, whether or not the variable probability switch is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203qm, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement center side by discriminating fraud such as turning on only the variable probability setting flag 203qk and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203qm is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch (entered the V area) in one round (one round of the jackpot in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. . In addition, it can be determined whether or not all the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203qm and the discharge number counter 203qu described later. This variable probability passage counter 203qm is updated by adding one by one when passing through the variable probability switch (detecting the ball entering the V area) (Z1414 in FIG. 515). In addition, after executing the determination processing of whether or not the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharge matches, the initial value is reset to "0" (Z1511 in FIG. 516). It should be noted that the probability variable passing counter 203qm is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The prize winning number counter 203qp is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. is added and updated by 1 (Z1403 in FIG. 515). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won by the variable prize winning device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203qp) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203qu and the probability variable passage counter 203qm) are the same. After it is determined whether they match, the initial value is reset to "0" (see Z1511 in FIG. 516). The value of the winning number counter 203qp is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203qq is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball sweeping period after one round is finished and the specific winning hole 65a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is set to ON, it means that it is the period of hitting the ball. While the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203qr, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated (see Z1505 in FIG. 516). The remaining ball timer 203qr is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning hole 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203qr is required for discharging the winning game balls to the variable winning device 65 when one preset round ends and the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 closes. A counter for determining whether time has passed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds. 203qr is set as the upper limit. When the remaining ball timer 203qr reaches the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. (Z1507 in FIG. 516). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加In addition, the balls are illegally left in the variable winning device 65, and the game balls are distributed to the distribution device (V role) at the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round of the big win C or big win E. It is possible to suppress fraud that flows down.

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203qk is turned on even if the game ball passes the probability variation switch may be configured not to be set to . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

Probability variation effective flag 203qs, after the V role is switched to an arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first region (V region), when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch (enters the V region), the passage ( It is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the ball entry). When this variable probability effective flag 203qs is set to ON, it indicates that the game ball passes through the variable probability switch in a normal period.

The variable probability valid timer 203qt is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203qs is set to ON. After the V role is switched to the non-V side arrangement by this variable probability valid timer 203qt, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass the variable probability switch. In this embodiment, it takes 0.3 seconds for the game ball that has reached the V accessory to pass through the variable probability switch. The upper limit of the variable probability valid timer 203qt is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, the game ball is illegally entered into the V area and passed through the variable probability switch, the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch and passed, or the magnetic sensor is erroneously detected by radio waves etc. It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud such as

The discharged number counter 203qu is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The discharge number counter 203qu is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the discharge number (Z1511 in FIG. 516).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Thus, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Next, referring to FIG. 494, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203. explain. FIG. 494 is a diagram showing a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 494, the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third embodiment is provided with roughly three game states. That is, the normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 494, the probability variable state shown in the middle part of FIG. 494, and the time saving state shown in the lower part of FIG. 494 are provided.

As described above, the normal state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, the probability of becoming a big hit is low, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. (The electric accessary 640a is difficult to be released), which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In addition, as described above, the probability variation state indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, the probability of the big hit is high, and by hitting the right hand to the second entrance 640 Since the game balls enter the ball frequently, the game state becomes the most advantageous for the player. In addition, the time-saving state indicates a low-probability state of special symbols and a time-saving state of normal symbols. Since the ball is hit frequently, the game state becomes relatively advantageous for the player.

As shown in the upper part of diagram 494, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal state to another state only in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 494, the first special pattern is a jackpot, and when either jackpot A or B is selected as the jackpot type, the game ball moves to the V area in the fifth round of the jackpot. On the condition that the ball was entered, it will shift to a variable state after the jackpot ends. In the big hits A and B, the game ball can enter almost the V area simply by hitting right in 5 rounds. In addition, if the game ball does not enter the V area in the 5th round due to the player not hitting the game ball in the 5th round, the game state after the jackpot ends will be in a time saving state. set. On the other hand, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 494, when jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, it is impossible (difficult ), so it shifts to a time saving state after the end of the jackpot.

In addition, as shown in the interruption of FIG. 494, there is a possibility that the variable probability state will shift to another state when a jackpot is won or when the player falls in a fall lottery. Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable probability state and a jackpot E determined at a rate of 20% is reached, the game state after the jackpot is completed is set to the time saving state. In addition, when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery before the lottery for the special symbol is executed 100 times after setting the variable probability state, the state is shifted to the time saving state. Further, when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery after the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times or more after setting to the variable probability state, the state is shifted to the normal state. On the other hand, when a big win is achieved in the variable probability state and a big win D determined at a rate of 80% is reached, the game state after the end of the big win is again set to the variable probability state (the most advantageous variable probability state is looped). Therefore, in the variable probability state, the game can be played with the expectation that the player will get a big win and a big win D before falling down.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 494, from the time saving state to another game state, in addition to the case of winning the big hit, after the end of the big hit, even when the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times is executed, other move to state. More specifically, when the big win is achieved in the time saving state and the big win D determined at a rate of 80% is reached, the game state after the big win is set to the most advantageous variable probability state. In addition, when the lottery for special symbols is executed 100 times after the previous big win is completed, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is a jackpot E determined at a rate of 20%, the game state after the jackpot is again set to the time saving state (time saving state ). In the short time state, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/250, which is the same as in the normal state, so the possibility of winning the jackpot again within 100 times is not so high (about 33% of the time). . Therefore, when it becomes a time-saving state, possibility that it will transfer to a normal state will become high. In addition, as described above, it is difficult to accurately distinguish between the time saving state and the variable probability state (operations other than the jackpot probability, such as the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, are the same), so the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the player can continue to have expectations for being in the variable probability state. That is, even if the time-saving state, which is disadvantageous compared to the variable probability state (that is, it is easy to shift to the normal state), it is possible to make it seem as if the player is playing in the variable probability state. Motivation for games can be maintained at a high level. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the twenty-third embodiment, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which three types of game states are traversed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 487, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric function. A solenoid 209 for driving an object is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208. Also, various processes are executed based on the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. FIG.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 509) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the game ball. be. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and a game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51. - 特許庁

The audio lamp control device 113 performs display control such as audio output in the audio output device 226, output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effect (variable display). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the device 114, and the like. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the PUSH button 10317, and the like.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the performance contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 495(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 includes a variation pattern selection table 222qa, a back mode lottery table 222qb, a hold change lottery table 222qc, a change point calculation table 222qd, a batch change lottery table 222qe, a chance charge lottery table 222qf, and a continuation suggestion effect selection table. 222qg, and an interrupt consecutive hit lottery table 222qh.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 222qa is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113, and the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command). ) to determine more detailed variations. This makes it possible to determine more diverse variations. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

The back mode lottery table 222qb is data for lottery for changing the back mode to indicate the degree of expectation that the probability variable state is set in the game state (probability variable state, time reduction state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. is a data table in which Details of the back mode lottery table 222qb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 496 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the back mode selection table 222qb.

As shown in FIG. 496, in the back mode lottery table 222qb, the current game state is the variable probability state, and the back mode lottery table 222qb confirms that the holding does not include the lottery result corresponding to the fall. In order to draw a lottery for changing the back mode in the state where the variable probability continuation table referred to in order to draw a lottery for the change and the lottery result corresponding to the fall are included in the hold even though the current game state is the variable probability state. and a table for having fallen, which is referred to for lottery for changing the rear mode in the state of having already fallen to the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 496, the background mode lottery table 222qb defines the value range of the effect lottery counter 223qy in association with each combination of the current background mode type and the transition destination (after change) background mode. It is Here, the effect lottery counter 223qy is composed of a random number counter whose value is periodically updated, and is updated to any value within the range of "0 to 99" at each update timing. The value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is used to select the effect mode of various effects. The effect lottery counter 223qy is provided with an independent random number counter for each type of effect for executing the lottery. In other words, the effect lottery counter 223qy is a general term for random number counters used for lotteries for various effects.

As shown in FIG. 496, in the probability variable continuation table, the current back mode is the cave search mode, and the destination back mode is the temple search mode (mode transition from cave search mode to temple search mode). A value range "0 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is associated and defined. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the production lottery counter 223qy, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20, so the current game state is In the probability variable state and in the state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the ratio of shifting (changed) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20% (20/100). In addition, as shown in FIG. 496, the values "20, 21" of the effect lottery counter 223qy are defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super-temple search mode. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the production lottery counter 223qy, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is 2, so the current game state is a variable state. In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the cave exploration mode to the super temple exploration mode is 2% (2/100). If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "22 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

In this way, in the state where the cave search mode is set, if the probability variation continuation table is referenced (the probability variation state and the lottery result of falling in the hold is not included), the fluctuation display is Every time it is executed, it shifts from the cave exploration mode to another mode at a rate of 22%. That is, the number of continuations of the cave exploration mode is reduced to about 5 times on average. In other words, even if it is set to cave exploration mode, it will shift to another mode with higher expectations in a relatively short period of time, so the period set in cave exploration mode tends to be shortened (high expectation mode stay rate will tend to increase). Therefore, the longer the period of staying in the high-expectation mode, the more the player's expectation for the continuation of the variable probability state can be improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the variable probability continuation table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the production lottery counter 223qy, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is one. In the probability variable state and in the state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of shifting (changed) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 1% (1/100). Further, as shown in FIG. 496, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "1 to 10" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the production lottery counter 223qy, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10, so the current game state is a variable state. In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10% (10/100). If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "11 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, in the state where the temple search mode is set, if the probability variation continuation table is referred to (the probability variation state and the lottery result of falling in the hold is not included), the fluctuation display Every time it is executed, it shifts to the cave exploration mode at a rate of 1%, and at a rate of 10%, the probability change state is confirmed, and the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. switch to mode. In other words, the configuration is such that it is difficult to shift to the cave exploration mode with low expectations, and it is easy to shift to the super temple mode with high expectations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the variable probability continuation table, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy. In addition, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 4" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the production lottery counter 223qy, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current game state is a variable state. In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100). If the value range of the effect lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "5 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the super temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, in the state where the super temple search mode is set, only 5% of the time it shifts to another mode, and even if the mode is shifted, temple searches with relatively high expectations Since the mode is shifted to the mode, even if the super-temple mode with the highest degree of expectation is shifted to another back mode, the player's expectation for the variable state can be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the non-falling table, mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 4" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. . Of the 100 possible random numbers of the effect lottery counter 223qy, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current game state is a probability variable state, In addition, in a state in which the lottery result of falling is included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the cave exploration mode to the temple exploration mode is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy. If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (namely, the range of "5 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the non-falling table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. . Of the 100 possible random numbers of the effect lottery counter 223qy, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10, so the current game state is a variable state, In addition, in a state in which the lottery result of falling is included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10% (10/100). On the other hand, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy. If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "10 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the non-falling table, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. That is, in a state in which the super-temple search mode is set, when the non-falling table is referred to, the transition (fall) to the temple search mode is made without fail. When the non-falling table is referenced in the super temple search mode, at the start of the previous change, the result of the falling lottery was not included in the hold, and the new hold until the start of the change display this time Only if the ball on hold is the result of a fall lottery. Therefore, in order to prevent the super temple mode from being maintained even though the lottery result of the fall is included, in this case it is always configured to shift to the temple search mode.

In this way, when the back mode transition lottery is executed with reference to the non-fall table (that is, the lottery result corresponding to the fall is included in the hold), the probability variable continuation table is referenced. The mode transition rate from cave search mode to temple search mode is lower than when it is done, and even if it shifts to temple search mode, the rate of falling to cave search mode is higher. That is, the rate of staying in the cave exploration mode with a low degree of expectation increases. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting whether or not the current game state is the variable probability state by using the staying ratio of the cave search mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the fallen table, mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0, 1" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. . Of the 100 possible random numbers of the production lottery counter 223qy, the number of random numbers associated with the mode shift from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2, so the current game state is the time saving state. In this case, the rate of transition (changed) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2% (2/100). On the other hand, the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy. If the value range of the effect lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "2 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the table for having fallen, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 29" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. . Of the 100 possible random numbers of the effect lottery counter 223qy, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30, so the current game state is a probability variable state, In addition, in a state in which the lottery result of falling is included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30% (30/100). On the other hand, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy. If the value range of the effect lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "30 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the fallen table, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy. On the other hand, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. That is, in the state in which the super-temple search mode is set, when the fallen table is referred to, the transition (fall) to the temple search mode is made without fail in the same manner as when the non-falled table is referred to. In the super-temple search mode, the fallen table is referred to only when it is in the variable probability state at the start of the previous fluctuation, and the special symbol lottery results in falling. Therefore, in order to prevent the super temple mode from being maintained even though the lottery result of the fall is included, in this case it is always configured to switch to the temple search mode.

In this way, when the back mode transition lottery is executed with reference to the table for fallen (that is, in the time saving state), the temple from the cave search mode is further removed from the cave search mode than when the table for not fallen is referenced. Mode transition rate to search mode is low, and even if you shift to temple search mode, the rate of falling to cave search mode is greatly increased. That is, the rate of staying in the cave exploration mode with a low degree of expectation increases. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting whether or not the current game state is the variable probability state by using the staying ratio of the cave search mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 495(a), the description continues. The pending change lottery table 222qc refers to the look-ahead result executed based on the detection of the start winning for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the number of pending balls symbols corresponding to the start winning. It is a data table referred to when executing a lottery in the display mode of . The details of this hold change lottery table 222qc will be described with reference to FIG. 497(a). FIG. 497(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hold change lottery table 222qc.

As shown in FIG. 497(a), in the pending change lottery table 222qc, each pending pattern mode (white, blue, green, red) is selected for each look-ahead result (variation type) value of the production lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the range of More specifically, as shown in FIG. 497(a), when the variation type is "long out", the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 98", and the white reserved symbol Modes are defined in association with each other, and blue reserved symbol modes are defined in association with the value "99" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the green and red reserved symbol modes. Therefore, when the look-ahead result becomes a long-out variation type (the main control unit 110 notifies the long-out look-ahead result by the winning information command), 99% of the reserved ball number symbols corresponding to the start winning A white reserved design mode is set at a rate of (99/100), and a blue reserved design mode is set at a rate of 1% (1/100). That is, in the case of the long out, almost, the white reserved design mode is set, and it is extremely rare that the reserved change (the reserved design mode other than white) is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 497 (a), for the variation type "normal reach out", the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 94", the white pending symbol mode is associated. , and the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in a range of "95 to 99" in association with a blue reserved symbol mode. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the green and red reserved symbol modes. Therefore, if the look-ahead result is off and the variation type is normal reach, the white pending pattern mode is set at a rate of 95% (95/100) as the pending ball number pattern corresponding to the start winning prize, and 5% ( 5/100), a blue reserved design mode is set. That is, even in the case of the lost normal reach, the white pending symbol mode is set at a relatively high rate, and the rate at which the pending change (non-white pending symbol mode) is set is low.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 497(a), for the variation type "outgoing super reach", the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 74", and the white reserved symbol mode corresponds. is defined with, the range of "75 to 89" is defined in association with the blue reserved design mode, and the range of "90 to 97" is defined in association with the green reserved design mode. , “98, 99” are defined in association with red reserved symbol modes. That is, in the case of the variation type of super-reach, in which the variation time is long and a relatively flashy (lively) production mode is executed, the ratio of the white pending symbol mode is 75% (75/100) and others. It is lower than the variation type of the deviation, and the percentage of the blue reserved design mode is as high as 15% (15/100). Furthermore, it can also be set to a green or red reserved symbol mode. That is, the ratio of green reserved design mode is 8% (8/100), and the ratio of red reserved design mode is 2% (2/100). Therefore, in the case of a green or red reserved pattern mode, at least the variation type below the normal reach out (variation type with low expectation) is denied, so that the player's expectation for the big hit is improved. be able to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 497(a), for the variation type "win normal reach", the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range "0 to 74", and the white reserved symbol mode is associated. , and the range of "75 to 84" is defined in association with the blue reserved design mode, and the range of "85 to 94" is defined in association with the green reserved design mode, A red pending symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99". That is, the rate of being set to the green or red reserved symbol mode is higher than in the case of the lost super reach.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 497(a), when the variation type is "win super reach", the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 49", and the white reserved symbol mode corresponds. is defined with, the range of "50 to 59" is defined in association with the blue reserved design mode, and the range of "60 to 84" is defined in association with the green reserved design mode. , and the range of "85 to 99" are defined in association with red reserved symbol modes. That is, the rate of occurrence of pending change itself is improved, and the percentage of green and red pending symbol modes selected is also high, compared to the variation type of lost super reach and hit normal reach. Therefore, when the reserved pattern mode of green or red is set, the expectation for the big win can be further improved.

Returning to FIG. 495, the description continues. The change point calculation table 222qd is a data table that is referred to when calculating a change point that serves as a criterion for determining whether or not the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486) can be executed. Details will be described later, but at the time of the lottery for the batch change effect on hold, this change point is a deviation between the variation type of each hold ball and the expected jackpot indicated from the hold pattern mode (lower expectation It is configured such that the more points are set, the more points are set. It is configured such that the more a reserved pattern mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is set by the reserved change performance, the more easily the performance for improving the degree of expectation is executed by the reserved collective change performance. Thereby, the degree of expectation can be notified more appropriately by the reserved symbol mode. Details of the change point calculation table 222qd will be described with reference to FIG. 497(b).

As shown in FIG. 497(b), in the change point calculation table 222qd, a change point is associated with each change type (prefetch result) of the hold ball and each hold design mode set for the hold ball. are stipulated. In the 23rd embodiment, when a plurality of reserved balls are reserved at the time of detecting the starting prize, the change point of each reserved ball is calculated by the change point calculation table 222qd, and the total value of the change points is calculated. Based on this, it is configured to draw a lottery as to whether or not the pending batch change effect can be executed. That is, the larger the total value of change points, the higher the execution ratio of the pending collective change effect. As a result, even if a lower expectation degree is once notified in the reservation change performance, an opportunity to improve the expectation degree can be given by the reservation collective change performance, so that the expectation degree can be more appropriately notified by the reservation pattern mode. can be done.

As shown in FIG. 497(b), "0" is defined as a change point in association with the variation types of short and long deviations regardless of the reserved symbol mode. In addition, with respect to the variation type of the lost normal reach, "1" is defined as a change point in association with the reserved design mode of white reservation, and "0" is defined as the change point with respect to the other reserved design modes. are defined in association with each other. In addition, for the variation type of super reach out, "2" is defined as a change point in association with the reserved design mode of white reservation, and "2" is defined as the change point for the reserved design mode of blue reservation. 1" is defined in association with the other reserved design modes, and '0' is defined in association with the other reserved symbol modes as a change point. In addition, for the variation type of hit normal reach and hit super reach, 3 is defined as a change point in association with the reserved design mode of white reservation, and as a change point for the reserved design mode of blue reservation 2 are defined in association with each other, 1 is defined in correspondence with the reserved design mode of green reservation, and 0 is defined in association with the reserved design mode of red reservation as a change point.

As described above, in the twenty-third embodiment, the change points are increased as the reserved symbol mode with a low degree of expectation is set for the reserved ball of the variation type with a high degree of expectation. That is, the larger the room for improving the expectation level of the reserved symbol mode, the more the change points are, so that the execution of the reserved batch change effect is more likely to be permitted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation according to the reserved symbol mode.

Returning to FIG. 495(a), the description continues. The collective change lottery table 222qe is a data table that is referred to when performing a lottery as to whether or not the pending collective change effect can be executed. Details of the collective change lottery table 222qe will be described with reference to FIG. 498(a). FIG. 498(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the collective change lottery table 222qe. As shown in FIG. 498(a), in the collective change lottery table 222qe, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223qy for determining the execution of the pending collective change effect is defined in association with each total change point value. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 498(a), the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the total change point value of 0. In addition, when the total value of change points is 1, the value "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in correspondence, and when the total value of change points is 2, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined. "0 to 24" are defined in association with each other, and the value "0 to 49" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the total value of change points of 3 or more. In other words, if the change point is 1, the pending collective change effect is selected at a rate of 10%, and if the change point is 2, the pending collective change effect is selected at a rate of 25%. For example, the pending collective change effect is selected at a rate of 50%.

Thus, in the twenty-third embodiment, as the total number of change points increases (a reserved pattern mode with a low degree of expectation is set for a reserved ball with a high degree of expectation), the collective change effect of the reservation is configured to have a high percentage of decisions to execute. As a result, the larger the room for improving the degree of expectation of the reserved symbol mode, the more the number of change points, so that the execution of the reserved collective change effect is more likely to be permitted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation by the reserved symbol mode.

Returning to FIG. 495(a), the description continues. The chance charge lottery table 222qf is a data table referred to in order to determine whether or not the chance charge effect can be executed. Details of the chance charge lottery table 222qf will be described with reference to FIG. 498(b). FIG. 498(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the chance charge lottery table 222qf. As shown in FIG. 498(b), in the chance charge lottery table 222qf, the number of pending balls and the value range of the effect lottery counter 223qy determined to execute the chance charge effect are associated with each variation type. stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 498(b), in the variation patterns of lost normal reach and lost super reach, for the number of held balls of 0 and 1, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 4” are defined in association with each other. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with "0 to 14", and when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined. A range "0 to 24" is associated and defined. That is, if the number of pending balls is 0 or 1, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the number of pending balls is 2, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 15%. If the number of pending balls is 3 or more, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 25%.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 498(b), in the variation pattern of the hit normal reach, the number of retained balls 0, 1 is defined in association with the value range "0 to 34" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the number of pending balls of 2 or more. That is, if the number of pending balls is 0 or 1, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 35%, while if the number of pending balls is 2 or more, execution of the chance charge effect is determined. do not have. That is, when the number of held balls is 1 or less, the decision rate of the chance charge effect is higher than in the case of the variation pattern of loss. Also, the reason why the chance charge effect is not executed when the number of pending balls is 2 or more is to suppress the problem that the spirit gauge is accumulated too much and a big win is started before it is completely consumed. That is, in the case of winning normal reach, the fluctuation time is relatively short (there are few chances to execute the chance-up effect), so there is a high possibility that the spirit gauge will be accumulated beyond the timing at which the chance-up is possible. Then, the number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge effect is determined only according to the number of held balls. That is, the higher the number of held balls, the higher the possibility that a larger number of spirit gauges will be set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of pending balls is large under the situation where the change is successful, the execution of the chance charge effect is avoided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the big win is started before the number of the spirit gauge is completely consumed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 498(b), in the variation pattern of winning super reach, the value range "0 to 49" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the number of held balls of 0 to 2. When the number of reserved balls is 3, the value range "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in correspondence. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the number of reserved balls of 4. That is, if the number of pending balls is 0 to 2, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the number of pending balls is 3, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls is 4, execution of the chance charge effect is not determined. That is, when the number of pending balls is 2 or less, the determination ratio of the chance charge effect is higher than in the fluctuation pattern of loss and the fluctuation pattern of hit normal reach. When the number of reserved balls is 3, the execution ratio of the chance charge effect is low, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the chance charge effect is not executed. This is for the purpose of suppressing the problem that the big win starts before the spirit gauge is completely consumed, as in the normal reach for the win.

Returning to FIG. 495(a), the description continues. The continuous suggestive effect selection table 222qg is used when selecting the effect scenario of the continuous suggestive effect to be executed over the 96th to 99th variable display effects after the end of the jackpot (that is, after the start of the time saving state of the normal symbols). A referenced data table. Details of this continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 499 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg. As shown in FIG. 499, the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg includes a continuation determination table that is referred to when the continuation of the variable probability state is determined until the end of the continuation suggestion effect, and a continuation suggestion effect until the end of the continuation suggestion effect It is confirmed that the continuous rich table referred to when the suspended ball is not suspended, but it is confirmed that the probability variable state is maintained within the suspension, and the time-saving state at the end of the continuous suggestion production. and a non-continuation table. Each table prescribes a plurality of combinations (scenarios) of presentation modes to be executed in the 96th to 99th variable displays.

As shown in FIG. 499, in the continuation decision table, seven scenarios "01H" to "07H" are defined in association with the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223qy. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 499, in the 96th to 98th fluctuation displays, a weak attack with a low expectation (see FIG. 476(a)) is executed, and in the 99th fluctuation display, a high-expectation attack is executed. Values "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223qy are defined in association with the effect scenario "01H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 476(b)) is executed and the door 806 is broken through. Also, a weak attack (see FIG. 476(a)) is executed in the 96th and 97th fluctuation displays, and a strong attack (see FIG. 476(b)) is executed in the 98th and 99th fluctuation displays to break through the door 806. A value of "10 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect scenario "02H" in the form of "02H", and a weak attack (see FIG. 476(a)) is executed in the 96th variable display, In the 97th to 99th fluctuation displays, the effect lottery counter 223qy has a value of "20 to 59" for the production scenario "03H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 476(b)) is executed to break through the door 806. Effect lottery counter 223qy for effect scenario "04H" which is defined in association with and in which a strong attack (see FIG. 476(b)) is executed in all of the 96th to 99th fluctuation displays to break through the door 806. values "60 to 89" are defined in association with each other. In other words, the selection rate of production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 499, the continuation decision table is provided with a special effect scenario in which the door 806 is broken through less than 99 times. That is, the effect scenario "05H" (range of values "90, 91" of the effect lottery counter 223qy) in which a light attack is performed in the 96th variable effect and the door 806 is broken through as it is, and the light attack, 97 in the 96th time. A production scenario "06H" (a value in the range of "92 to 94" of the production lottery counter 223qy) in which a strong attack is made on the first time to break through the door 806; A production scenario "07H" (a value in the range of "95 to 99" of the production lottery counter 223qy) is set in which a strong attack is made to break through the door 806. These special aspects scenarios may only be set when the table for continuation determination is referenced. That is, until the end of the 99th variable display, there is a possibility that it will be executed only in a state where it is confirmed that the probability variable state continues. Therefore, by executing a special scenario, It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 499, four scenarios from "08H" to "0BH" are defined in the continuous rich table. Since the production flow of the production scenarios "08H" to "0BH" is exactly the same as the production scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, the details thereof will be omitted here. As shown in FIG. 499, the effect scenario "08H" is defined in association with the value "0 to 14" of the effect lottery counter 223qy, and the effect scenario "09H" is defined by the value "15 to 15" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. 29” is defined in association with the effect scenario “0AH”, the value “30 to 69” of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect scenario “0BH”, and the value “ 70 to 99” are defined in association with each other. That is, similar to the continuation determination table, the selection rate of production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is high. In addition, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall occurs during the progress of the scenario specified in the continuous rich table, the effect specified in the non-continuing table will be displayed from the fluctuation display that resulted in the lottery result of that fall. It is switched to the production scenario "0CH" which is one of the scenarios. As a result, even if the reserved balls up to the 99th variation display are not reserved at the start of the continuation suggestion effect, the game state at the end of the 99th variation can be accurately reproduced by switching the scenario on the way. can be notified.

Also, as shown in FIG. 499, the discontinuation table defines four scenarios "0CH" to "0FH". The production flow of the production scenarios "0CH" to "0FH" is exactly the same as the production scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, except that the breakthrough of the door 806 is ultimately failed. Details are omitted. As shown in FIG. 499, the effect scenario "0CH" is defined in association with the value "0 to 39" of the effect lottery counter 223qy, and the effect scenario "0DH" is defined by the value "40 to 40" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. 79” is associated with the production scenario “0EH”, the production lottery counter 223qy value “80-94” is associated with production scenario “0FH”, and the production lottery counter 223qy value “ 95 to 99” are defined in association with each other. That is, in contrast to the continuation determination table and the continuation rich table, the selection rate of production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is high, and the selection rate of production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is low. there is Therefore, the greater the number of strong attacks, the lower the possibility that the non-continuing table is referred to and the production scenario is determined. can be done. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 495(a), the description continues. The interrupt repeated hitting lottery table 222qh is a data table referred to for lottery of whether or not the interrupt repeated hitting effect (see FIG. 482) can be executed and the type of effect. The details of this interrupt consecutive hit lottery table 222qh will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 500 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the interrupt consecutive hit lottery table 222qh. As shown in FIG. 500, the interruption consecutive hit lottery table 222qh defines, for each variation type, an effect type and a value range of the effect lottery counter 223qy in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 500, in the long variation pattern, it is executed during the normal variation performance period, and the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the remaining monsters to a minimum of 10 , the values "0 to 4" of the effect lottery counter 223qy are defined in association with each other. For this reason, in the case of long-out, the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 500, in the change pattern of the lost normal reach, the effect lottery is executed during the normal change effect period, and the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the remaining monsters to the minimum of 5 The value "0 to 9" of the counter 223qy is defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy for the effect type of the effect mode that is executed during reach fluctuation and can reduce the number of monsters to the minimum of four remaining monsters. "10 to 14" are associated and defined. Therefore, in the fluctuation pattern of the lost normal reach, the execution of the 15% rate interrupt continuous hit effect in total is determined. That is, the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect is determined at a higher rate than in the case of long out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 500, in the variation pattern of Lost Super Reach, as an interrupting continuous hit effect executed during the normal variation effect period, the effect mode can be reduced to a minimum of 5 remaining monsters. A value "0 to 4" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the type, and the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy corresponds to the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four remaining monsters. "5 to 9" are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interrupting barrage effect executed during reach fluctuation, the value "10 to 14" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four. Values "15 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223qy are defined in correspondence with the effect types of the effect modes that are defined and can reduce the number of monsters to three at the minimum. That is, the execution ratio of the total interrupting continuous hit effect is higher than that of the losing normal reach, and the number of monsters can be reduced to a smaller number, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 500, in the hit normal reach variation pattern, as an interrupt continuous hit effect executed during the normal variable effect period, the effect type of effect mode that can reduce the remaining monsters to a minimum of 5 bodies. , the value "0 to 3" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in correspondence, and the value "4" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined for the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 0. are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interrupting barrage effect executed during reach fluctuation, the value "5 to 24" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four. A value "25" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode that is defined and can reduce the number of monsters to zero. That is, the execution ratio of the total interruption continuous hit effect is higher than in the case of losing, and there is a possibility that all the monsters will be defeated, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 500, in the variation pattern of winning super reach, as an interrupt continuous hitting effect executed during the normal variable effect period, the effect mode can be reduced to a minimum of 4 remaining monsters. A value "0, 1" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is associated with each type, and a value "2" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined for the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interrupting barrage effect executed during reach fluctuation, the value "3 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four. A value of ``20 to 39'' of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with a specified effect type in which the number of monsters can be reduced to three, and a effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to zero. , the value "40, 41" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect type. That is, compared to the case of losing or winning normal reach, the execution ratio of the total interrupt continuous hit performance is higher and the possibility of defeating all the monsters is higher, so that the player's expectation for the big win is improved. can be done.

As described above, in the twenty-third embodiment, the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect and the number of monsters that can be defeated are different for each variation type, and only in the case of a big win, the effect of defeating all the monsters is provided. It is configured so that it can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to actively perform the continuous hitting operation during execution of the interrupting continuous hitting effect, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupting repeated hitting effect can be improved.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 495(b). FIG. 495(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 contains a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb, a normal reserved ball number counter 223qc, a fluctuation start flag 223qd, a stop type selection flag 223qe, and a game state storage area 223qf. , a time-saving guaranteed number counter 223qg, a continuous scenario storage area 223qh, a right-handed win flag 223qi, a repeated hitting type storage area 223qj, a chance charge waiting flag 223qk, a charge number counter 223qm, and a charge state number counter 223qn. , batch change flag 223qp, change point storage area 223qq, reserved symbol state storage area 223qr, variable time timer 223qs, operation effective period timer 223qt, stop operation number counter 223qu, continuous hit effective period timer 223qv, batch At least a change period timer 223qx, an effect lottery counter 223qy, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol reserved in the main control device 110, and special symbol 2 reserved. The number-of-balls counter 223qb is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 cannot get the value of Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is added to the number of pending balls of the variable display, or when the main controller 110 When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe Send the command to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203qe is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb (see Z3910 in FIG. 528). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb are used to display the reserved ball number pattern on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223qa of the sound lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 pending The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the number of pending ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number of ball counter 223 qb in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe of the main controller 110. while its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe of the main control device 110. It can be changed while Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223qc has the same content as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb described above, but differs in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed description is omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223qd is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see Z3904 in FIG. 528), and the third symbol. It is turned off when the variable display is set in the display device 81 (see Z4202 in FIG. 532). When the fluctuation start flag 223qd is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (Z3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 518), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223qe is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see Z3907 in FIG. 528), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see Z4208 in FIG. 532). When the stop type selection flag 223qe is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The game state storage area 223qf is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. This game state storage area 223qf is updated every time a state command output each time a change occurs in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is received from the main controller 110 (see Z3902 in FIG. 528). The game state storage area 223qf is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not it is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the bit of the second lower order bit indicates whether or not it is the probability variable state of special symbols. Therefore, in the "low probability state of special design" and "normal state of normal design", the lower 2 bits are "00B", and in the "low probability state of special design" and "time saving state of normal design", the lower The 2 bits are "01B", and in the "probability variable state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols", the lower 2 bits are "11B". The MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223qf.

Shortening of working hours guarantee counter 223qg is a counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations in which the time saving state is guaranteed. The initial value of the guaranteed time counter 223qg is set to 0, and the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot (see Z4107 in FIG. 531). In addition, the value is decremented by 1 every time the execution of a new variable display is set (see Z4304 in FIG. 533). As described above, in the twenty-third embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbols is maintained until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times. By counting the number of time saving guarantees by the time saving guarantee number counter 223qg, the sound lamp control device 113 side can also accurately grasp the guaranteed number of times.

The continuation scenario storage area 223qh is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of effect scenario determined from the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) when the variable probability continuation suggestion effect is started. The initial value of this continuation scenario storage area 223qh is set to 00H, and when the production scenario is determined by lottery using the continuation suggestion production selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) at the start timing of the probability variable continuation suggestion production, Data indicating the rendering scenario is stored (see Z4409 in FIG. 534). During execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, the variable display mode at the start of each variable display is determined based on the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223qh (see Z4415 in FIG. 534).

The winning flag 223qi during right hitting is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot during execution is a jackpot won during the right hitting gaming state (ordinary symbol time saving state). If this right-handed winning flag 223qi is on, it indicates that the jackpot was won during the right-handed gaming state, and if it is off, the jackpot won during the left-handed gaming state (that is, the first hit). indicates that At the end of the jackpot, the back mode is set according to the state of the winning flag 223qi during hitting to the right. That is, if it is on, the temple search mode is set, and if it is off, the cave search mode is set (see Z4109 and Z4110 in FIG. 531). As described above, when the jackpot is hit in the left-handed game state (that is, the jackpot is hit in the lottery of the first special symbol), only at a rate of 50%, the state is shifted to the variable probability state, while the jackpot is hit in the right-handed game state. When it becomes (that is, it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol), it shifts to the probability variation state at a rate of 80%. This difference in ratio is configured to be notified by the degree of expectation indicated by the rear mode.

The repeated hit type storage area 223qj is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of interrupt repeated hit effect (the execution timing of the effect and the lower limit value of the subtraction number of monsters). Depending on the data in the repeated hit type storage area 223qj, the start timing of the interrupt repeated hit effect, the subtraction number of monsters corresponding to the depression of the PUSH button 10317, and the like are set.

The chance charge standby flag 223qk is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period (chance charge standby period) from when the execution of the chance charge effect is determined to when the chance charge effect is actually started. If so, it indicates that it is the chance charge waiting period. The chance charge standby flag 223qk has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON when execution of the chance charge effect is determined (see Z4564 in FIG. 536), and execution of the chance charge effect is started. is set to OFF (see Z3313 in FIG. 520). When a new start prize is detected while the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on, the number of gauges is added to the number of gauges determined in advance as the number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge performance to be executed thereafter. It is determined whether or not

The charge number counter 223qm is a counter indicating the gauge number of the spirit gauge notified in the chance charge effect. This charge number counter 223qm has an initial value set to 0, and when execution of the chance charge effect is decided, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of pending balls at the time of the decision is set (see FIG. 536). Z4563). Also, by executing the chance-up effect, every time the spirit gauge is consumed, the value is decremented by 1 and updated (see Z3559 and Z3561 in FIG. 523).

The charge state number counter 223qn is a counter that indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until consumption of the energy gauge accumulated by the chance charge effect is completed. This charge state number counter 223qn is set to a value corresponding to the current number of pending balls at the start of the chance charge effect (see Z3314 in FIG. 520), and each time a new variable display effect is set to be executed, the value increases. It is decremented by 1 (see Z4302 in FIG. 533). While the value of the charge state number counter 223qn is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not to execute the chance-up effect by consuming the spirit gauge each time the chance-up effect can be executed.

The collective change flag 223qp is a flag indicating whether or not the pending collective change effect is being executed. If it is ON, it means that the pending collective change effect is being executed, and if it is OFF, the pending collective change is being executed. Indicates that the performance is not in progress. The batch change flag 223qp has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON when execution of the pending batch change effect is set (see Z4059 in FIG. 530).

The change point storage area 223qq is a storage area for storing the change points specified by referring to the change point calculation table 222qd. The change point storage area 223qq is configured to be able to separately store the change points of each reserved ball.

The reserved symbol state storage area 223qr is a storage area for storing data indicating the reserved symbol mode of each reserved ball number symbol. With the data stored in the reserved symbol state storage area 223qr, it is possible to accurately grasp the reserved symbol mode of each reserved ball number symbol.

The variable time timer 223qs is a timer for measuring variable time. The timer value of the variable time timer 223qs makes it possible to accurately determine the progress of the variable display effect.

The operation effective period timer 223qt is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is effective in the press stop effect (see FIG. 478). This operation effective period timer 223qt determines whether or not the operation of the PUSH button 10317 in the pressing stop effect is treated as valid. In the press stop effect, separate button images and validity period gauges are displayed on the display screen for each symbol row, but in reality, the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is validated by a single operation validity period. It is determined whether or not By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the judgment as to whether or not the stop operation of each symbol row is valid, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The stop operation number counter 223qu is a counter indicating the number of remaining stop operations that can be executed in the press stop effect (see FIG. 478). When the stop operation counter 223qu has a value of 3 and a stop operation is detected during the valid operation period, the left symbol row is stopped, and the value is 2 and the operation is stopped during the valid operation period. When the operation is detected, the right symbol row is stopped and displayed, and when the value is 1 and the stop operation is detected during the operation effective period, the center symbol row is stopped and displayed.

The repeated hit valid period timer 223qv is a timer for measuring the period during which the repeated hit operation on the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the interrupt repeated hit effect (see FIG. 482). It is determined whether or not the operation of the PUSH button 10317 in the interrupt continuous hitting effect is treated as valid by the continuous hitting effective period timer 223qv.

The collective change period timer 223qx is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 486 and 487). By this collective change period timer 223qx, it is determined whether or not the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the pending collective change effect is treated as valid.

The effect lottery counter 223qy is a random number counter for executing the lottery for the effect mode, as described above.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The other memory area 223z includes, for example, a winning information storage area for storing winning information based on winning information commands received from the main controller 110, and the like. The winning information storage area has a storage area consisting of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning is detected in the main controller 110, from each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning , Various information obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning prize is performed (win or fail, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the audio lamp controller 113 of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and stores the winning information in the RAM 223. It is stored in a winning information storage area (not shown), which is a storage area. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and a time-lapse timer that measures the presentation time. are doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing 23 (see FIG. 528) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing 23 is executed. (see S3114 in FIG. 528), the command is analyzed and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM deletion switch 122. have. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. It should be noted that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 509).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 501, the audio output device 226 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. FIG. 501 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 501, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 301, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A RAM 303 is built in.

The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input/output port 305 and the audio synthesizing section 306 . When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp controller 113 to the audio output device 226 , the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input/output port 305 . Also, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizing section 306 .

The voice synthesizing unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesizing LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307 . Synthesized speech data is amplified by amplifier section 307 and input to speaker section 308 . As a result, various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308 .

Next, referring to FIG. 501, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 501, the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area (audio file) 302a.

The audio file storage area (audio file) 302a is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, etc. in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 are stored. When the execution of various effects is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio file corresponding to the effect is read out from the audio file storage area (audio file) 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesizing section 306. be done.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 501, the RAM 303 is provided with at least a repeated hitting sound output flag 303a, a playback position storage area 303b, and a song output flag 303c.

The repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is a flag indicating the type of repeated hitting sound (whether it is the first repeated hitting sound or the second repeated hitting sound) that was output most recently during execution of the interrupting repeated hitting effect. If the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is 01H, it indicates that the latest repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, and if it is "02H", it indicates that it is the second repeating sound. By using the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a, it is possible to grasp the type of the repeated hitting sound output most recently, so that each time a repeated hitting operation is detected, different types of repeated hitting sounds can be alternately reproduced for different channels. can. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the voice mode during execution of the repeated hitting operation, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The reproduction position storage area 303b is a storage area for storing data indicating a reproduction position at the time of interruption of music reproduction when an instruction to interrupt reproduction of music is given. When resuming the reproduction of music, the reproduction can be restarted accurately from the interrupted reproduction position based on the data stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b.

The music output flag 303c is a flag indicating whether or not a variable display effect or the like is being executed and music based on an audio file is being output. If the music output flag 303c is ON, it means that music is being output, and if it is OFF, it means that music is not being output.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twenty-third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 502 to 516. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 502 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize winning switches are read (Z101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. stored in the corresponding buffer area.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the normal winning random number counter C5 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fall lottery counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, 999, 99, 250, 999, 198, 239) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, the special symbol variation processing 23 for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (Z104), and then , the first ball entry 64, and the second ball entry 640 (start winning), the start winning process 23 is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation process 23 and the starting winning process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process 23, the normal symbol variation process 23, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate is passed along with the passage of the ball at the normal entrance. Process 23 is executed (Z107). Details of the normal symbol variation processing 23 and the through gate passage processing 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 507 and 508. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing 23, the firing control processing is executed (Z108), and then other winning processing is executed (Z109). Furthermore, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (Z110), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 503, special symbol variation processing 23 (Z104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 503 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 23 (Z104). This special symbol variation process 23 (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed by the device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process 23, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a jackpot at the moment (Z201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not occurring (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe The number of times N2) is obtained (Z203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is greater than 0 (Z204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is not 0 ( Z204: Yes), subtract 1 from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe (Z205), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe changed by calculation. (Z206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223qb of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb is shifted (Z207). In the process of Z207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203qb are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After the process of Z207 is executed, the process proceeds to Z208.

On the other hand, in the process of Z204, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203qd is 0 (Z204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd acquired in the process of Z203 It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (Z209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is 0 (Z209: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is not 0 (Z209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is set to 1 Subtract (Z210), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd changed by the calculation (Z211). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the RAM 223 as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223qa. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa is shifted (Z212). In the process of Z212, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203qa are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process 23 for setting the start of variation of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed (Z208), and this process ends. Note that the special symbol variation start processing 23 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z213). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (Z213: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z213, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (Z213: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing 23 (Z208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208) is executed, various counters stored in execution areas provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb are counted. Based on the value, a lottery for special symbols is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot is determined according to the value of the special winning type counter C2. A type is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the first symbol (special symbol) is stopped, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED when the jackpot A is reached, and the red LED when the jackpot B is reached. When the jackpot C is reached, the green LED is turned on. When the jackpot D is reached, the blue and red LEDs are turned on. When the jackpot E is reached, the red LED is turned on. and turn on the green LED. In addition, when it is out, it is set to turn on the blue LED and the green LED. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of Z215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208) (this lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (Z216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (Z216: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203qi is set to ON (Z217). Then, a stop command is set (Z218), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (Z216: No), the process of Z217 is skipped, and after executing the process of Z218, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 504, special symbol variation start processing 23 (Z208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 504 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208). This special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa. And based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 .

In the special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208), first, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type counter C3, a falling lottery counter C4, and a variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area. (Z301). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is currently changing probability (high probability state of special symbols) (Z302). It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the probability variation is in progress is made by determining whether the value of the probability variation flag 203qh is 1 or more. Here, the variable probability flag 203qh is set to a predetermined value based on the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 based on the start of the jackpot game.

In the process of Z302, if it is determined that the probability is changing (Z302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing (high probability state of special symbols), so the falling lottery counter C4 acquired in the process of Z301 By comparing the value and the falling lottery table 202qe (see FIG. 490 (c)), a lottery (falling lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to fall from the probability variable state of the special design to the low probability state of the special design ( Z303). Specifically, the value of the drop lottery counter C4 is compared one by one with two random numbers stored in the drop lottery table 202qe. As described above, two random numbers "0, 1" corresponding to falling to a low probability state are set during probability variation (high probability state of special symbols), and the value of the falling lottery counter C4 and , and the random numbers corresponding to these falls, it is determined that the player falls to the low probability state. When the lottery result of the fall lottery is obtained in the process of Z303, the process proceeds to Z304.

In the process of Z304, it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponds to the fall to the low probability state of the special symbol (Z304), and when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the fall (Z304: Yes), The variable probability flag 203qh is set to OFF (Z305), a state command indicating a fall to a low probability state is set (Z306), and the process proceeds to Z307.

On the other hand, in the process of Z302, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols), that is, when it is determined that it is a low probability state of special symbols (Z302: No), Z303 to Z306 Skip the process and move to the process of Z307.

In the process of Z307, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z301 and the special symbol big winning random number 23 table 202qa for low probability (see FIG. 490 (a)), the special symbol big winning A lottery result of no is obtained (Z307). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with four random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number 23 table 202qa. Four random numbers of "0 to 3" are set as the random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot in the special symbol low probability state, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings are set. If they match, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z309.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z304 that the lottery result does not correspond to falling (Z304: No), the process proceeds to Z308. In the process of Z308, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z301 and the special symbol big winning random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)) for high probability, whether the special symbol is a big hit or not A lottery result of no is acquired (Z308). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the eight random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa. Eight numbers of "4 to 11" are set as the random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot in the special symbol high probability state, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings are set. If they match, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z309.

In the process of Z309, whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of Z307 or Z308 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that has been acquired and the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (Z309), and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (Z309: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg and the probability variation flag 203qh are initialized. The value is reset (Z310), and based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (Z311). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z301 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd, and the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot E), it is determined which jackpot type this time is. As described above, in the first special pattern jackpot, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot), and "10 to 49" If it is in the range, it is determined to be a jackpot B (5R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (5R normal jackpot) (See FIG. 491 (b)) . In addition, in the second special pattern jackpot, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined to be a jackpot D (15R probability variable jackpot), and in the range of "80 to 99" If there is, it is determined as a jackpot E (15R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 491(c)).

In this process of Z311, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of LEDs 37A and 37B) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to E). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpots A to E) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . The display mode of the stop symbol set in the process of Z311 is stopped and displayed by the process of Z215 of the above-described special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503).

Next, with reference to the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (see FIGS. 492(a) and 493), a variation pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is selected. Here, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. The variable time of the special symbol is set by referring to different data tables depending on the state. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, while determining the variation pattern by referring to the normal table 202qb1 (see FIG. 492 (a)) of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb, the gaming state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation/time saving table 202qb2 (see FIG. 493) of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (Z312). After completing the process of Z312, the process proceeds to Z318. When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z312, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined. .

On the other hand, in the process of Z309, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is out (Z309: No), next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is a value greater than 0. (Z313). In the process of Z313, if it is determined that the value of the counter 203qg during time saving is greater than 0 (that is, the value is 1 or more) (Z313: Yes), subtract 1 from the value of the counter 203qg during time saving (Z314), A state command indicating the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg after subtraction is set (Z315), and the process proceeds to Z316. On the other hand, in the process of Z313, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203qg during time saving is 0 (Z313: No), the processes of Z314 and Z315 are skipped, and the process proceeds to Z316.

In the process of Z316, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the stop type selection stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol reserved ball execution area is selected. Based on the values of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern (variation time) at the time of deviation is determined (Z317). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similar to the process of Z312, the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area. .

In the process of Z312 or in the process of Z318 that is executed after the process of Z317 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of Z312 or Z317 is set. (Z318). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of Z312 or Z317 is set (Z319). When the processing of Z319 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 23 (Z104).

Next, the starting winning process 23 (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 505 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 23 (Z105). This starting winning process 23 (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502) to determine whether or not there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). Secondly, it is a process of holding values indicated by various random number counters and a process for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from the values shown by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process 23 (Z105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (Z401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (Z401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (Z402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Z403).

Then, in the processing of Z401, if it is determined that there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (Z401: No), the process proceeds to Z408, and even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 ( Z401: Yes), in the process of Z403, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is not less than 4 (that is, 4, which is the upper limit) (Z403: No), the process of Z407 to On the other hand, in the process of Z401, it is determined that there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (Z401: Yes), and in the process of Z403, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd When it is determined to be less than 4 (Z403: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is added by 1 (Z404). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd changed by calculation is set (Z405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd from the reserved ball number command, and saves the extracted value as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number in the RAM 223. It is stored in the counter 223qa.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of Z405, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variation type updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203qa of the RAM 203 (Z406). In the process of Z406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. After completing the processing of Z406, the prefetch processing 23 is next executed (Z407), and the process proceeds to the processing of Z408. Details of this look-ahead processing 23 (Z407) will be described later with reference to FIG. Based on the value, a process of preliminarily determining (reading ahead) each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

It should be noted that the processing of Z408 to Z413 is only performed by changing the processing of Z401 to Z406 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 to the processing based on the ball entering the second ball opening 640. , Z401 to Z406 are executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of Z413, the prefetching process 23 is executed (Z414 (Z407)), and then this process ends.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is obtained based on the incoming ball, but may be obtained at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the values of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, a counter related to winning/failure determination can be acquired when a ball is entered, and a counter not related to winning/failure determination can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 506, the look-ahead process 23 (Z407 (Z414)), which is one process in the starting winning process 23 (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 506 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process 23 (Z407 (Z414)).

In the look-ahead process 23, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (Z501). In this process of Z501, when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd or the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is added, it is determined that a new prize has been won. . In the process of Z501, if it is determined that there is no new winning (Z501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning (Z501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current winning is a special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (Z502). When it is determined (Z502: Yes), the lottery result for each counter value acquired this time is based on the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa and the special pattern jackpot 23 table (special drawing 1 jackpot type selection 23 table) 202qd1. It is obtained in advance (Z503), and the process proceeds to Z504. In the processing of Z504, as the lottery result obtained in advance, a prize information command including the jackpot determination result and the jackpot type is set (Z504), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z502, if it is determined that the winning this time is not the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), that is, the special symbol 2 (special figure 2) (Z502: No), each counter acquired this time The lottery result for the value is acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa and the special figure 2 jackpot 23 table (special figure 2 jackpot type selection 23 table) 202qd2 (Z505), and as the previously obtained lottery result , the winning information command including the jackpot determination result and the jackpot type is set (Z504), and the process ends.

In this way, before the start of the variation, the result of the winning/failure determination in advance is output to the audio ramp control device 113 as a prize winning information command each time the ball is held, so the audio ramp control device 113 , it is possible to recognize in advance the result of the judgment of success or failure and the type of success. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the prize winning information command, foreseeing the result of the judgment result of the reserved ball to the player in advance (for example, changing the color of the reserved symbol to a color that suggests the result of the judgment result) Or, an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the success/failure determination result in the held ball) can be executed. As for the winning information command, one winning information command is output for each pending ball, so that the sound lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the pending ball. can. In addition, in the prefetching process 23 (see Z407 in FIG. 506) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that there is no new winning in the process of Z501 (Z501: No), this process is terminated as it is. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is configured to set the winning information command again for each counter value already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb. can be By configuring in this way, even if it is determined not to execute the notice effect in response to the prize winning information command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, the notice effect is executed again for the same reserved pattern. It is possible to determine whether or not to Further, in this embodiment, the lottery result based on each counter value acquired by the main controller 110 side is determined in advance, and the information for indicating the result of the preliminary determination is set as the winning information command. However, without being limited to this, information for indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, and the result of the lottery is determined in advance based on the winning information command received by the sound lamp control device 113 side. may be configured. In addition, when information indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, it may be encrypted so that the counter value acquired this time cannot be specified by a player who illegally acquired the winning information command. It is preferable to configure such that the winning information command is output at a plurality of timings.

Next, referring to FIG. 507, the normal symbol variation process 23 (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 507 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process 23 (Z106). This normal symbol variation process 23 (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and is accompanied by the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a to be activated.

In the normal symbol variation process 23, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (Z601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (Z601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Z601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (Z602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (Z602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (Z603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203qf is greater than 0 (Z604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203qf is 0 (Z604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203qf is not 0 (Z604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203qf is subtracted by 1 (Z605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc is shifted (Z606). In the process of Z606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203qc are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc is acquired (Z607), and the process proceeds to Z608.

In the process of Z608, it is determined whether or not it is during time saving (normal symbol high probability state) (Z608). In this Z608 process, the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg and the state of the probability variation flag 203qh are checked, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 1 or more or the probability variation flag 203qh is on, during the time saving If the value of the time saving counter 203qg is 0 and the probability variation flag 203qh is off, it is determined that the time saving is not in progress. In the process of Z608, when it is determined that it is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbol) (value of counter 203qg during time saving is 1 or more, or probability variation flag 203qh is ON) (Z608: Yes) , Since the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal pattern high probability state, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 acquired in the process of Z603 and the normal winning random number table 23 for high probability (normal per symbol random number table) 202qc (Fig. 490(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (Z609), and the process proceeds to Z611. In the process of Z609, specifically, the value of the normal random number counter C5 and the normal random number 23 table for high probability (random number table per normal symbol) 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)) are stored. Compare with random values. As described above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a hit in the normal design, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is normal It is determined that the pattern is out of line (see FIG. 490(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of Z608, when it is determined that it is not during time saving (high probability state of normal symbol) (value of counter 203qg during time saving is 0, and probability variation flag 203qh is off) (Z608: No) , Since the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (normal state, latent probability state) of normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 acquired in the process of Z603 and the normal winning random number 23 table for low probability (normal Based on the per symbol random number table) 202qc (see FIG. 490(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (Z610). Specifically, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is compared with the random value stored in the normal winning random number table 23 for low probability (normal random number table per symbol) 202qc (see FIG. 490(b)). . As described above, if the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is in the range of "5, 6", it is determined that it is a winning of the normal design, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", it is normal It is determined that the pattern is out of line (see FIG. 490(b)).

In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of special symbols, it is difficult to win the lottery of normal symbols. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry hole 640 is opened. This is to suppress as much as possible the game ball which is to be entered into the specific winning hole 65a by entering the second ball entering hole 640.例文帳に追加

After executing the process of Z609 or Z610, the process moves to Z611. In the process of Z611, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of Z609 or Z610 is a hit of the normal symbol (Z611). Yes), set the display mode at the time of winning (Z612), and shift to the processing of Z614. In the process of Z612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is set to light up as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z611 that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (Z611: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (Z613), and the process proceeds to Z614. In the processing of Z613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of Z614, it is determined whether the present is in time saving (whether it is in a normal pattern high probability state) (Z614), and if it is in time saving (normal pattern high probability state) (Z614: Yes) , the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z614, it is not during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols), that is, if it is a low probability state of normal symbols (Z614: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is 30 Seconds are set (Z616), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is discriminated (Z617). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of Z615 or the process of Z616 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of Z617, if the variable time has not elapsed (Z617: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z617, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (Z617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z618). In the process of Z618, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of Z612, the “○” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of Z613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of Z618, when the second symbol display update process (see Z1007) of the main process (see FIG. 511) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of Z612 or Z613.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process 23 is a normal symbol win. (Z619). If the result of the lottery this time is not a hit of the normal symbol (Z619: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery this time is a win in the normal design (Z619: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present is in the time saving mode (Z620). If it is determined that the time is being reduced (Z620: Yes), the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to 1 second x 2 times (Z622), and the process proceeds to Z623. Transition.

On the other hand, in the process of Z620, if it is determined that the time is not being shortened (Z620: No), the opening time and number of times of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 are set to 0.2 seconds x 1 time. (Z622), and the process proceeds to Z623.

In the process of Z623 executed after the process of Z621 or Z622, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (Z623), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of Z623, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see Z1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 511) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the processing of Z621 or Z622 of FIG. 507 are completed.

In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, in the normal symbol high-probability state, compared to the normal symbol low-probability state, the variable display time is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds", and furthermore. , the release period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 .

In this embodiment, the opening time and the number of opening times per long time are the same operation in the normal state and the latent state, but not limited to this, it is configured to set different opening times and opening times. good too. Further, in the present embodiment, the content of the opening operation of the first electric accessory 640a is set based on the game state set at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols (at the time of lottery). Without limitation, for example, at the time of start of variation of normal symbols (at the time of lottery), the determination of whether the normal symbols are normal is executed based on the game state set, and the game at the time when the variation time of the normal symbols that have been elected has passed. The content of the opening operation of the first electric accessory 640a may be set based on the state. That is, in the present embodiment, since the game state is variably set based on the lottery of special symbols, the game state may be variably set during normal symbol fluctuation. In such a case, if the contents of the opening operation of the first electric accessory 640a are set based on the game state set at the start of the variation of the normal symbols (during the lottery), for example, during the jackpot game or the normal There is a problem that the first electric accessory 640a is open for a long time during the high probability state of the pattern. On the other hand, by configuring so as to set the contents of the opening operation of the first electric role product 640a based on the game state at the time when the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol has passed, the first electric role product 640a is set. can be executed with contents suitable for the set game state.

Next, through gate passage processing 23 (Z107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 508 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing 23 (Z107). This through gate passage processing 23 (Z107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 502) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal winning random number counter C5 when

In the through gate passing process 23, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (Z701). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (Z701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (Z702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Z703).

The game ball does not pass through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (Z701: No), or even if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203qf is not less than 4 (Z703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (Z701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203qf is less than 4 (Z703: Yes), normal 1 is added to the value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf (Z704). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203qc of the RAM 203. Store it in the area (Z705), and then terminate this process. In addition, in the process of Z705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (Z801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 510 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (in this embodiment, wait time of 1 second setting process) is executed (Z902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the process proceeds to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if not stored (Z905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process moves to Z913.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of Z1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Z913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (Z914, Z915).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during execution of startup processing, RAM initialization processing (Z914, Z915) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203 is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to Z911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (Z905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( Z907: Yes), the value of the counter 203qg during time saving, and the state command indicating the state of the probability variation flag 203qh (that is, the game state at the time of start-up) are transmitted (Z908). Next, while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (Z909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (Z910), and the process proceeds to Z911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of Z911, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the main process to be described later is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 511, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 511 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral (Z1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of Z101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 502). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing 23 (see FIG. 503) and the starting prize winning processing 23 (see FIG. 505). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the winning command set in the starting winning processing 23 (see FIG. 505) and the look-ahead processing 23 (see FIG. 506). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process 23 for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). In the jackpot control process 23, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened according to the contents of the jackpot game to be executed (jackpot type), and the maximum opening time of the specific winning prize port 65a has passed or the ball is specified in the specific prize winning port 65a. Determines whether a number of prizes have been won. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. The details of this jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. In addition, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game content (type of entrance to be opened, opening time, number of openings (number of rounds), opening period, interval period, ending period) corresponding to the jackpot type is used as a jackpot scenario. A jackpot scenario stored in advance corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read, and a jackpot game is executed based on the read jackpot scenario.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of Z623 of the normal symbol variation processing 23 (see FIG. 507), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the processing of Z621 or Z622 of FIG. 507 in the normal symbol variation processing 23 are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of Z312 or Z317 of the special symbol variation start process 23 (see FIG. 504), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol. Start at display 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished, the green LED is lit, and the green LED is lit. If the LED is on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of Z312 or the process of Z317 of the special symbol variation start process 23 (see FIG. 504) ends, the first symbol display End the variation display being executed in the device 37, in the display mode set by the processing of Z311 of the special symbol variation start processing 23 (see FIG. 504) or the processing of Z316, the stop symbol (first symbol) to the first symbol The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the display device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of Z615 or the process of Z616 of the normal symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 507), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of Z618 of the normal symbol variation processing 23 (see FIG. 507), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. 507), and stop the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of Z612 or Z613 of the normal symbol variation processing 23 (see FIG. 507). Display (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the process moves to Z1001, and the above-described processes after Z1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (Z1009: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second 1 Initial value random number counter CINI1, second initial value random number counter CINI2 and variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Z1010, Z1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1, the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In the process of Z1008, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (Z1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 509 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after Z1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). and transmit (Z1013). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (Z1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of Z1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of Z1010 and Z1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. We can start with the processing of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( initial value), the process can be started from Z1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 512 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 23 (Z1004). This jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 511). This is a process for opening or closing the (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203qi is ON (Z1101). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203qi is on (Z1101: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (Z1102), the jackpot start flag 203qi is turned off, and the jackpot middle flag 203qj is turned on (Z1103). , the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z1101, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203qi is off (Z1101: No), then whether the special symbol jackpot is currently on (that is, the jackpot flag 203qj is on) ) or not (Z1104). In the process of Z1104, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203qj is off) (Z1104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Z1104, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (the jackpot flag 203qj is ON) (Z1104: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round ( Z1105).

In the process of Z1105, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (Z1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process 23 for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed ( Z1106), and the process ends. The details of this jackpot operation setting process 23 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (Z1105: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the round currently being executed (Z1107). . Here, in the present embodiment, when the final round of the jackpot ends, it is determined that it is time to start the ending period. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending period (Z1107: Yes), an ending command is set (Z1108), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 511). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1107, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (Z1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (Z1109). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of Z1109, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (Z1109: Yes), the big win end process 23 for setting the game state after the end of the big win is executed (Z1110), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z1109, if it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (Z1109: No), the winning process 23 for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning hole 65a is executed (Z1111), Abnormal processing 23 for determining whether or not the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was discharged normally is executed (Z1112), and then this processing ends. The details of the winning process 23 and the abnormality process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516. FIG.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process 23 (Z1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 513 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process 23 (Z1106). This jackpot operation setting process 23 (Z1106) is executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds. .

When this jackpot operation setting process 23 (see FIG. 513) is started, first, it is determined whether it is time to start the 5th round (that is, the round in which the V role is activated) (Z1201). In the processing of Z1201, if it is determined that it is time to start round 5 (Z1201: Yes), the start of the action scenario of the V role is set (Z1202), and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a corresponding to the jackpot type. is set (Z1203), and the process proceeds to Z1205.

In addition, as described above, in the twenty-third embodiment, a common action scenario is set for the V role item regardless of the jackpot type. Specifically, an operation scenario is set in which the arrangement is changed so that the game balls can be distributed to the V area from the time when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the 5th round to the time when 10 seconds have passed. On the other hand, as described above, different opening patterns are set for the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a depending on whether the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot is selected. Specifically, in the case of a variable probability jackpot, the opening and closing pattern that allows the game ball to reach the V role while the V role is changing to the arrangement that distributes the game ball to the V area (5th round For 4.5 seconds after 5 seconds to 9.5 seconds after the start, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed in the opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened, while normal In the case of a big hit, the opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the V role while changing the arrangement of the V role to distribute the game balls to the V area (4.5 seconds after the start of the 5th round During the 4.5 seconds until time, the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened and closed in an opening/closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1201, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the fifth round (Z1201: No), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (Z1204), and the process proceeds to Z1205. In the process of Z1205 executed after the process of Z1203 or Z1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (Z1205), and this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 511) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 . Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process 23 (see FIG. 513), the specific winning hole 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and a state is set in which a ball can enter the V area in the fifth round. be able to. As a result, in the jackpots A, B, and D, the game ball almost certainly enters the V area and passes through the variable probability switch just by hitting the player right in the fifth round, so that after the jackpot ends. It is possible to shift to a definite variable state (a definite variable state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols). In the case of the big hits C and E, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the V region even if the player hits to the right. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol, in which the jackpot C is determined at a relatively high rate (50%) in the case of a big win, is set as a lottery disadvantageous to the player, and when a big win is made, the The lottery for the second special symbol in which the jackpot E is determined at a low rate (20% rate) can be an advantageous lottery for the player.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process 23 (Z1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 514 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process 23 (Z1110). This jackpot end process 23 (Z1110) is executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end processing 23 (Z1110), first, it is determined whether the variable probability setting flag 203qk is ON (Z1301). In the process of Z1301, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203qk is ON (Z1301: Yes), it means that the game ball has passed the variable probability switch during the big hit, so the variable probability flag 203qh is set to ON. The state after the jackpot is set to the variable probability state (Z1302), and the process proceeds to Z1303. On the other hand, in the process of Z1301, if the variable probability setting flag 203qk is off (Z1301: No), it means that the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch during the big hit, so by skipping the processing of Z1302 , After the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the process proceeds to Z1303.

In the process of Z1303, the value of the counter 203qg during time saving is set to 100 (Z1303), and based on the state of the probability variation flag 203qh and the counter 203qg during time saving, a state command (jackpot end command ) is set (Z1304). The state command (jackpot end command) set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511). , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the game state storage area 223qf according to the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Next, both the jackpot medium flag 203qj and the variable probability setting flag 203qk are set to OFF (Z1305), and the process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end processing 23 (see FIG. 514), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the game ball has passed the variable probability switch during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the winning process 23 (Z1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 515 is a flow chart showing this winning process 23 (Z1111). This winning process 23 (Z1111) is executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In this prize winning process 23 (Z1111), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (Z1401). Here, the round effective period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the process of Z1401, if it is not the round effective period (Z1401: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1401, if it is determined that the current round valid period (Z1401: Yes), then it is determined whether winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (Z1402), If winning is detected (Z1402: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203qp is updated by adding 1 (Z1403), and a winning command indicating that a winning to the specific winning port 65a is detected is set. (Z1404), the processing shifts to Z1405. On the other hand, in the process of Z1402, if the winning to the specific winning hole 65a is not detected (Z1402: No), the processes of Z1403 and Z1404 are skipped and the process of Z1405 is started.

In the process of Z1405, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203qp is 10 or more (Z1405), and if the value of the winning number counter 203qp is 10 or more (Z1405: Yes), the process proceeds to Z1407. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1405, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less (Z1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (Z1406), and if the round time has elapsed ( Z1406: Yes), shift to processing of Z1407. Note that in the processing of Z1406, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round.

In the process of Z1407, closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (Z1407), and a closing command indicating that closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (Z1408). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning port 65a this time is based on the end of 5 rounds (Z1409). By turning off the flow path solenoid for varying , the state of the V role is set to an arrangement in which the game balls are distributed to the non-V area (Z1410), and the process proceeds to Z1411. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1409, when it is determined that the closing of the specific winning port 65a this time is due to the completion of rounds other than the 5th round (Z1409: No), the channel solenoid is set to ON. Since there is no possibility, the process of Z1410 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z1411.

In the process of Z1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203qq, the variable probability effective flag 203qs, and the round end flag are set to ON (Z1411), and the process proceeds to Z1412. Further, when it is determined in the process of Z1405 that the value of the winning number counter 203qp is 9 or less (Z1405: No), and when it is determined in the process of Z1406 that the round time has not elapsed (Z1406: No), Skip the processing from Z1407 to Z1411 and shift the processing to Z1412.

In the process of Z1412, it is determined whether the round end flag is ON (Z1412), and if the round end flag is OFF (Z1412: No), the process proceeds to Z1413. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag is ON in the process of Z1412 (Z1412: Yes), then it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203qs is ON (Z1416). In the process of Z1416, if the variable probability effective flag 203qs is off (Z1416: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the probability variable effective flag 203qs is on (Z1416: Yes), add 1 to the value of the probability variable effective timer 203qt (Z1417), then determine whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203qt is the upper limit value ( Z1418). Then, if the value of the variable probability valid timer 203qt is not the upper limit value (Z1418: No), the process proceeds to Z1413, and the variable probability switch is monitored to update the variable probability setting flag 203qk. As a result, if the variable probability effective timer 203qt is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch, so the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time for hitting the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the variable probability switch from being illegally passed through the game ball and the variable probability state being imparted.

On the other hand, if the value of the probability variable effective timer 203qt is the upper limit value (Z1418: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203qs and the round end flag are set to OFF (Z1419), and the value of the probability variable effective timer 203qt is reset (Z1420) , the process ends.

In addition, in the processing of Z1413, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch (Z1413), and if the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch (Z1413: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch (Z1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passage counter 203qm (Z1414), the variable probability setting flag 203qk is set to ON (Z1415), and this processing exit.

Next, abnormality processing 23 (Z1112) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 516 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing 23 (Z1112). This abnormality process 23 (Z1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512). This is processing for determination.

In the abnormality processing 23 (Z1112), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (Z1501). On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (Z1501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (whether or not the game ball discharged from the variable winning device 65 has been detected). Determine (Z1502).

In the process of Z1502, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (the game ball has been discharged from the variable winning device 65) (Z1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203qu. (Z1503), the processing shifts to Z1504. On the other hand, in the process of Z1502, if the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch (Z1502: No), the process of Z1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z1504.

In the process of Z1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is ON (Z1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is off (Z1504: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is on (Z1504: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is updated by adding 1 (Z1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is the upper limit (Z1506). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is the upper limit (Z1506: Yes), then the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the probability variable passing counter 203qm and the value of the discharge number counter 203qu) wins. It is determined whether the number (the value of the winning number counter 203qp) matches (Z1507).

In the processing of Z1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (Z1507: No), an error command is set (Z1508), and the process proceeds to Z1509. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the V area is closed, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally entering the game ball into the V area and passing through the variable probability switch.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (Z1507: Yes), the process of Z1508 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Z1509. In the processing of Z1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is set to OFF (Z1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is reset (Z1510). After that, the values of the winning prize number counter 203qp, the discharge number counter 203qu, and the variable probability passage counter 203qm are reset (Z1511), and this process is terminated.

By executing this abnormal processing 23 (see FIG. 516), a problem occurs such that the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is not discharged normally due to clogging of balls inside the variable winning device 65. can be detected early and notified.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 517 to 535, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 517, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 517 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (Z3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing of Z3119 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (Z3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 518, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see Z3116 in FIG. 518), it executes power-off processing in Z3119. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of Z3119 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (Z3002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the Z3119 was powered off. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z3003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of Z3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If destruction of the data in the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z3003: Yes), the process proceeds to Z3004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z3003: No), the process proceeds to Z3008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to Z3004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of Z3119 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the process is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z3003: No), and the process proceeds to Z3008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (Z3002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure and during execution of the power-off process of Z3119. It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process shifts to Z3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of Z3004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (Z3004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (Z3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (Z3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (Z3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of Z3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (Z3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off processing of Z3119 is executed (see Z3118 in FIG. 518). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of Z3119 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of Z3119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (Z3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (Z3009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (Z3010), an interrupt Permission is set (Z3011). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 . When the processing of Z3011 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from main controller 110 (Z3012). This status command is a command set in Z908 of the startup process (see FIG. 510) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 . In the process of Z3012, if it is determined that a status command has been received (Z3012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area (Z3013), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 518). and migrate. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z3012 that the status command has not been received (Z3012: No), the process of Z3013 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 518).

On the other hand, the process of Z3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the startup process this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (Z3008: No), Z3009, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processing shifts to Z3010, the above-described processing of Z3010 to Z3013 is executed, and the main processing (Fig. 518).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the long-term hit state, so that the sound lamp control unit 113 side can also determine the state. can be done.

The reason why the clearing process of Z3009 is skipped is that when the process of Z3008 is reached from Z3004 via the process of Z3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of Z3004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 518, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 518 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the current process of Z3101 was executed (Z3101), and 1 msec or more has passed. If not (Z3101: No), the process proceeds to Z3114 without performing the processes Z3102 to Z3113. In the processing of Z3101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has passed, while Z3102 to Z3113 are mainly processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , Z3114, the variable display setting process 23 of Z3115, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in short cycles. That is, by executing the processing of Z3114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of Z3115 in a short cycle, the command determination processing 23 (Fig. 528 S3114 reference) based on the received command, it is possible to perform without delay the setting related to the variable effect.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of Z3101 (Z3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z3103 to Z3115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z3102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of Z3108 described later (Z3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Z3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to Z3105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of Z3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (Z3106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223qa, the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223qb, and the value of the normal pending ball number counter 223qc. is done.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (Z3107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (Z3108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (Z3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of Z3109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (Z3110), and the processing shifts to Z3111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp edit process of Z3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution management process. The sound editing/output processing of Z3109 is also executed at the same time as the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the processing of Z3110 is finished, next, the effect update process 23 for updating the effect mode of various effects executed during execution of the variable display effect is executed (Z3111). This rendering update process 23 (Z3111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After execution of effect update processing 23 (Z3111), next, the operation status (whether pressed or not) of PUSH button 10317 is monitored, and if pressed is detected, control is executed according to the pressed status. is executed (Z3112). The details of this press detection process (Z3112) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When the processing of Z3112 ends, the counter update processing is executed (Z3113). In this counter update process (Z3113), a process for updating the value of a counter (for example, the effect lottery counter 223qy for lottery of the effect mode) required when executing various effects is executed.

When the processing of Z3113 is finished, next, command determination processing 23 for executing control according to various commands received from main controller 110 is executed (Z3114). The details (Z3114) of this command determination process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the command determination process 23 (Z3114), the variable display setting process 23 is executed (Z3115). In the variable display setting process 23 , a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of the variable display setting process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When the processing of Z3115 is finished, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power-off occurrence information (Z3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Z3116 (Z3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z3118), and the power-off processing is executed (Z3119). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (Z3120), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of Z3116 (Z3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (Z3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z3117: No), the process returns to Z3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z3117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 519, the effect update process 23 (Z3111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 519 is a flow chart showing the effect update process 23 (Z3111). This effect update process 23 (Z3111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, various This is a process for updating the effect mode of the effect.

In the effect update process 23 (Z3111), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time timer 223qs is greater than 0 (Z3201). This means that the variable display is not being executed at present, meaning that there is no possibility that an effect to be updated is being executed, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223qs is greater than 0 (that is, the value is 1 or more) (Z3201: Yes), the value of the variable time timer is subtracted (Z3202), and then A press stop effect process for updating the effect mode during execution of the press stop effect (see FIG. 478) is executed (Z3203). The details of this press stop effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of Z3203 is completed, next, an interrupt continuous hit effect process for updating the effect mode during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 482) is executed (Z3204). The details of this interrupt continuous hit effect processing (Z3204) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when the processing of Z3204 ends, next, batch change effect processing for updating the effect mode during execution of the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486) is executed (Z3205). Details of this collective change effect processing (Z3205) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of Z3205 ends, charge consumption processing for setting the consumption of the charged spirit gauge in the chance charge effect (see FIG. 480) is executed (Z3206), and this processing ends. Details of this charge consumption processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 520, the pressing stop rendering process (Z3203) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 520 is a flow chart showing this press stop effect processing (Z3203). This press stop effect process (Z3203) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the press stop effect (see FIG. 478) This is a process for updating the effect mode during execution.

In this press stop effect processing (see FIG. 520), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the press stop effect (see FIG. 478) (Z3301). In the processing of Z3301, if it is determined that it is time to start the press stop effect (see FIG. 478) (Z3301: Yes), the start of the press stop effect is set (Z3302), and the value of the operation effective period timer 223qt is set to 3. A timer value corresponding to seconds is set (Z3303). Next, the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is set to 3 (Z3304), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3301 that it is not the time to start the press stop effect (Z3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation effective period timer 223qt is greater than 0 (Z3305). In the processing of Z3305, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is greater than 0 (Z3305: Yes), the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is updated (Z3306), and then the updated operation valid period timer It is determined whether or not the value of 223qt is 0 (Z3307). In the process of Z3307, if it is determined that the value of the post-update operation effective period timer 223qt is not 0 (Z3307: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the value of the operation effective period timer 223qt after updating is 0 (Z3307: Yes), next it is determined whether or not the chance charge waiting flag 223qk is ON (Z3308). In the process of Z3308, when it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is ON (Z3308: Yes), stop display of the chance charge symbol is set (Z3309), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3308, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is off (Z3308: No), only the press stop effect (see FIG. 478) is set for the current variable display effect. In this state (the execution of the chance charge effect has not been set), it means that the operation valid period (3 seconds) has passed without the player performing the stop operation, so the stop display of the missing symbol is set. (Z3310) to terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3305, if it is determined that the value of the operation effective period timer 223qt is 0 (Z3305: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has elapsed (Z3311). . If it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbols has not passed (Z3311: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3311 that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has passed (Z3311: Yes), the start of the chance charge effect corresponding to the value of the charge number counter 223qm is set (Z3312), and the chance The charge standby flag 223qk is set to OFF (Z3313). Next, a value corresponding to the current number of balls on hold is set to the value of the charge state number counter 223qn (Z3314), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 521, the interrupt continuous hitting effect processing (Z3204) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 521 is a flow chart showing this interrupt continuous hit effect processing (Z3204). This interrupt continuous hit effect process (Z3204) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process for updating the effect mode.

When this interrupt continuous hitting effect process (see FIG. 521) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the interrupt continuous hitting effect (Z3401). In the process of Z3401, if it is determined that it is time to start the interrupt continuous hit effect (Z3401: Yes), then, from the value of the variable time timer 223qs, whether or not the current variable time is the time before reach is determined (Z3402). In the process of Z3402, if it is determined that it is a variable time indicating before reach (Z3402: Yes), after setting a pause for both display and sound, set the pause flag to "01H" ( Z3404), and shifts to the processing of Z3405. Specifically, in the processing of Z3404, a display interruption command indicating the start of stopping (suspending) the display mode is set to be output to the display control device 114, and the stopping (suspending) of BGM output is started. is set to be output to the audio output device 226.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3402, if it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223qs is not the timer value indicating the pre-reach (Z3402: No), a temporary stop (interruption) is set only for the display mode, and a temporary stop flag is set. is set to "02H" (Z3403), and the process proceeds to Z3405. In the process of Z3405, which is executed after the process of Z3403 or Z3404 is finished, the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 482) is set (Z3405), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3401, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (Z3401: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start the continuous hit period (Z3406). In the process of Z3406, if it is determined that it is time to start the repeated hit period (Z3406: Yes), the timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the value of the repeated hit valid period timer 223qv (Z3407), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3406 that it is not the time to start the repeated hitting period (Z3406: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223qv is greater than 0 (Z3408). If it is determined that the value of the continuous-hit effective period timer 223qv is greater than 0 (Z3408: Yes), the value of the continuous-hit effective period timer 223qv is subtracted by 1 (Z3409), and then the value of the repeated-hit effective period timer 223qv after the subtraction. is 0 (Z3410). If it is determined that the value of the continuous-hit effective period timer 223qv after the subtraction is 0 (Z3410: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3410, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223qv after the subtraction is not 0 (Z3410: No), display of the end image of the interruption repeated hitting effect is set (Z3411), and then, End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3408, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hit effective period timer 223qv is 0 (Z3408: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to end the interrupt repeated hit effect (Z3412). . In the process of Z3412, if it is determined that it is time to end the interrupt continuous hit effect (Z3412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the pause flag is "01H" (Z3413). If it is determined that the value of the temporary stop flag is "01H" (Z3413: Yes), it means that both the display and the sound were stopped (interrupted) at the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect. Both the aspect and the audio aspect are set to resume from the paused position (Z3414). That is, the display control device 114 is set to output a display interruption command indicating the end of interruption of the display mode, and the audio output device 226 is set to output an audio interruption command indicating the end of interruption of the audio mode. Set output. When the processing of Z3414 ends, the processing shifts to Z3415.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3413, if it is determined that the value of the pause flag is not "01H" (Z3413: No), it means that the value of the pause flag is "02H", and only the display mode is temporary. Since it means that the display mode is stopped (interrupted), it is set to resume the display mode from the pause position (that is, to the display control device 114, to output a display suspension command indicating the end of the suspension of the display mode). setting) (Z3416), and the process proceeds to Z3415. In the process of Z3415 executed after the process of Z3414 or Z3416, neither the sound nor the display is paused (interrupted) by setting the initial value "00H" to the pause flag (Z3415). is displayed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3412, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (Z3412: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 522, collective change effect processing (Z3205) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 522 is a flow chart showing this collective change effect processing (Z3205). This batch change effect process (Z3205) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486) is executed. This is a process for updating the effect mode during execution.

In the collective change effect processing (see FIG. 522), first, it is determined whether or not the collective change flag 223qp is ON (Z3501). Z3501: No) This means that the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486) is not being executed, and there is no possibility of setting the pending collective change effect. When it is determined that the collective change flag 223qp is ON (Z3501: Yes), next, in the pending collective change effect, the timing at which the valid period of operation to the PUSH button 10317 for collectively changing the pending symbol mode is started. (Z3502). In the process of Z3502, if it is determined that it is time to start the effective period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 (Z3502: Yes), by setting the timer value corresponding to 3 seconds to the batch change period timer 223qx ( Z3503), sets the validity period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 to 3 seconds, and terminates this processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of 3502 that it is not the start timing of the effective period (Z3502: No), next, the value of the collective change period timer 223qx is greater than 0 (that is, whether the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is valid or not). (Z3504). In the processing of Z3504, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is greater than 0 (Z3504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the batch change period timer 223qx (Z3505), and the post-subtraction batch change period timer 223qx is 0 (Z3506). In the process of Z3506, if it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223qx after subtraction is not 0 (Z3506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3506, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx after the subtraction is 0 (Z3506: Yes), each number of pending balls in the pending design mode indicated by the data in the pending design mode storage area 223r The pattern is changed and displayed (Z3507), the values of the batch change flag 223qp, the change point storage area 223qq, and the batch change period timer 223qx are all reset (Z3508), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3504 that the value of the collective change period timer 223qx is 0 (Z3504: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 523, charge consumption processing (Z3206) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 523 is a flowchart showing this charge consumption processing (Z3206). This charge consumption process (Z3206) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the chance charge effect (see FIG. 480) This is the processing for setting the consumption of the fired spirit gauge.

In the charge consumption process (Z3206), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the charge number counter 223qm is greater than 0 (Z3551), and if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is 0 (Z3551: No). , it means that there is no room for consuming the spirit gauge to generate the chance-up effect, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z3551 that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is greater than 0 (Z3551: Yes), next it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the charge consumption effect (Z3552). In the process of Z3552, if it is determined that it is not the time to execute the charge consumption effect (Z3552: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3552, if it is determined that it is time to execute the charge consumption effect (Z3552: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the charge state number counter 223qn is 0 ( Z3553). If it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223qn is 0 (Z3553: Yes), it means that this is the last variation display in which the spirit gauge can be consumed. is consumed, processing (each processing of Z3560, Z3561) for consuming the spirit gauge and setting a chance-up effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3553, if it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223qn is not 0 (Z3553: No), then the currently executed variation display (the variation) indicates the degree of expectation of super reach or higher. It is determined whether or not the displayed effect mode is the set variable display (Z3554). If it is determined that the variation is not the expected degree of super reach or higher (it is equal to or lower than the normal reach performance) (Z3354: No), then whether or not the charge state range includes a hold of super reach or higher. is determined (Z3555). If it is determined that the range of the charge state includes a hold of super reach or higher (Z3555: Yes), then the value of the charge number counter 223qm is a value obtained by adding 2 to the number of balls held within the charge range. It is determined whether or not it is larger (Z3556). When it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is greater than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of balls held within the charge range (Z3556: Yes), the ball held above the super reach effect, which has many opportunities to execute the chance-up effect. Even if it is included, it means that the number of gauges (charges) of the spirit gauge remains large compared to the number of balls held, so in order to reduce the spirit gauge in the change, A process (each process of Z3558, Z3559) for consuming the gauge and setting a chance-up effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3556, if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is equal to or less than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of held balls within the charge range (Z3556: No), variable display with super reach effect set. By consuming the spirit gauge at the execution timing of the chance-up effect a plurality of times in , it is possible to fully consume the spirit gauge within the value range of the charge state number counter 223qn. This processing ends without setting the consumption of the spirit gauge in .

In addition, in the process of Z3555, if it is determined that the super reach or more hold is not included in the range of the charge state (Z3555: No), then the value of the charge number counter 223qm is the hold ball within the charge range It is determined whether or not it is greater than the number (Z3557). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is equal to or less than the number of held balls within the charge range (Z3557: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3557, when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is greater than the number of balls held within the charge range (Z3557: Yes), the gauge number (number of charges) of the spirit gauge for the number of balls held is increased. Since it means that a lot remains, in order to reduce the spirit gauge in the change, the processing (each processing of Z3558, Z3559) for setting the chance up effect by consuming the spirit gauge is executed.

In the process of Z3558, the charge consumption effect of the effect mode corresponding to the execution timing is set (Z3558), the value of the charge number counter 223qm is subtracted by 1 (Z3559), and then the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3554, if it is determined that the fluctuation is greater than or equal to Super Reach (Z3354: Yes), the charge consumption effect of the effect mode corresponding to the execution timing is set (Z3560), and the value of the charge number counter 223qm is set. is decremented by 1 (Z3561), and then the process ends.

Next, the press detection process (Z3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 524 is a flow chart showing this press detection process (Z3112). This press detection process (Z3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and monitors the operation status (whether pressed or not) of the PUSH button 10317. This is a process for executing control according to the state of the depression when the depression is detected.

In the press detection process (Z3112), first, it is determined whether or not the push on the PUSH button 10317 has been detected (Z3601). End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that pressing of the PUSH button 10317 has been detected (Z3601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation validity period timer 223qt is greater than 0 (Z3602). If it is determined that the value of the operation effective period timer 223qt is greater than 0 (Z3602: Yes), it means that the PUSH button 10317 was pressed (operated) during the effective period of the press stop effect (see FIG. 478). Therefore, stop operation detection processing for performing control corresponding to the stop operation during execution of the press stop effect is executed (Z3603), and this processing ends. The details of this stop operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of Z3602, if it is determined that the value of the operation effective period timer 223qt is 0 (Z3602: No), then the value of the repeated hit effective period timer 223qv is greater than 0 (Z3604). If it is determined that the value of the repeated hit valid period timer 223qv is greater than 0 (Z3604: Yes), repeat operation detection processing is executed for executing control corresponding to the repeat operation during execution of the interrupt repeat effect (Z3605). , and then terminate this process. The details of this repeated-hit operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z3604, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hit effective period timer 223qv is 0 (Z3604: No), then whether the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is greater than 0 (that is, in the pending batch change effect (Z3606). When it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223qx is greater than 0 (Z3606: Yes), change operation detection processing for performing control for setting the collective change is executed during execution of the pending collective change effect. (Z3607), after which this processing ends. Details of this change operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z3606, if it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223qx is 0 (Z3606: No), this process ends.

Next, the stop operation detection process (Z3603) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 525 is a flow chart showing this stop operation detection process (Z3603). This stop operation detection process (Z3603) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This is processing for performing corresponding control.

In the stop operation detection process (Z3603), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is greater than 1 (Z3701). : Yes), the stop display of the symbol row corresponding to the value of the stop operation counter 223qu is set (Z3702), and the process proceeds to Z3709. In the process of Z3702, if the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is 3, the stop operation of the left symbol row is set, and if the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is 2, the right symbol row is stopped. set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z3701 that the value of the stop operation counter 223qu is 1 or less (Z3701: No), it is determined whether or not the chance charge waiting flag 223qk is ON (Z3703). In the process of Z3703, if it is determined that the chance charge waiting flag 223qk is ON (Z3703: Yes), it means that the variable display for which execution of the chance charge effect is set is being executed, and therefore the remaining period. By setting the stop display effect of the chance charge symbol in (Z3707), the start of the chance charge effect is notified (Z3707), and the process proceeds to Z3708.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3703 that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is off (Z3703: No), then it is determined whether or not the valid operation period remains for two seconds or more (Z3704). If it is determined that there are two seconds or more left in the valid operation period (Z3704: Yes), the execution of the chance charge effect (see FIG. 479(a)) is set for the remaining period (Z3705), and the process proceeds to Z3708. do. By executing the process of Z3705, in the variable display in which only the press stop effect is set, if three presses are completed early in the valid period (within 1 second after the start), the It is possible to execute a chance charge fanning performance with a longer performance period than stopping the symbol. Therefore, the effect period can be varied according to the speed of the player's operation (pressing), so that a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

In the processing of Z3704, if it is determined that the valid operation period does not last longer than 2 seconds (it is less than 2 seconds) (Z3704: No), the stop display of the middle symbol row is set so as to combine the winning symbols. (Z3706), shift to the processing of Z3708.

In the process of Z3708 executed after any one of the processes of Z3705 to Z3707 is executed, the value of the operation validity period timer 223qt is reset to 0 (Z3708), and the process proceeds to the process of Z3709. In the process of Z3709 executed after the process of Z3702 or Z3708 is executed, the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is decremented by 1 and updated (Z3709), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 526, the repeated hitting operation detection process (Z3605) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 526 is a flow chart showing this continuous hit operation detection process (Z3605). This continuous-hit operation detection process (Z3605) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This is processing for executing corresponding control.

In the repeated hit operation detection process (Z3605), first, the remaining effective period (T) is specified from the value of the repeated hit effective period timer 223qv (Z3751), and then the number of monsters corresponding to the effect type of the current interrupt repeated effect is determined. A lower limit value (D) is calculated (Z3752). It should be noted that the lower limit of the number of monsters is defined in advance for each effect type in the interruption repeated hit lottery table 222qh (see FIG. 500) as described above. When the process of Z3752 is completed, next calculate "T/5 seconds x (100 bodies - D)" (Z3753), and subtract the calculated value from the current remaining number of monsters to calculate the value (Z3754 ). In addition, in the processing of Z3754, the value after the decimal point is rounded off. When the process of Z3754 is finished, next, it is determined whether or not the calculated number of monsters is less than the lower limit value of the effect type of the interrupt continuous hit effect this time (Z3755).

In the process of Z3755, if it is determined that the number of monsters below the lower limit has been calculated (Z3755: Yes), the display of the number of remaining monsters is updated to the lower limit (Z3756), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3755, if it is determined that the calculated number of monsters is equal to or greater than the lower limit (Z3755: No), the number of remaining monsters displayed is updated by subtracting the specified subtraction number (Z3757), and then , the process ends.

Next, the changing operation detection process (Z3607) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing this change operation detection process (Z3607). This change operation detection process (Z3607) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process for performing control for setting changes.

In the change operation detection process (Z3607), first, a change point corresponding to each ball on hold is specified from the data in the change point storage area 223qq (Z3801), and the state of the ball on hold with a change point of 1 or more is uniformly increased by one level. Data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r is updated (Z3802). Next, the change type of hold 1 is specified (Z3803), and the hold design mode is specified according to the specified change type, hold change lottery table 222qc, and effect lottery counter (Z3804). Then, it is determined whether or not the identified reserved design mode has a higher degree of expectation than the data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r (Z3805). When it is determined that the specified reserved design mode has a higher degree of expectation than the data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r (Z3805: Yes), the data indicating the specified reserved design mode is replaced with the data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r. (Z3806), and shifts to the processing of Z3807.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3805, when it is determined that the specified reserved design mode is not higher expected than the data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r (Z3805: No), the process of Z3806 is skipped and the process of Z3807 is performed. Transition.

In the processing of Z3807, it is determined whether or not the rank-up lottery of the reserved design mode by the processing of Z3804 to Z3806 has been completed for all the reserved balls (Z3807), and the lottery for all the reserved balls has not been completed. If it is determined (Z3807: No), the variation type of the pending ball whose start winning detection time is newer than the pending ball targeted for this lottery is specified (Z3808), and the process returns to Z3804.

In the process of Z3807, when it is determined that the rank-up lottery for all the reserved balls has been completed (Z3807: Yes), the display of the reserved design mode indicated by the data of the reserved design mode storage area 223r is set (Z3809), and all at once. The values of the change flag 223qp, the change point storage area 223qq, and the collective change period timer 223qx are all reset (Z3810), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 528, command determination processing 23 (Z3114) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 528 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 23 (Z3114). This command determination process 23 (Z3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. do.

In command determination processing 23 (Z3114), first, an unprocessed command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the unprocessed command received from main controller 110 is analyzed. (Z3901). In the process of Z3901, if it is determined that the state command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 (Z3901: Yes), the game is played according to the game state notified by the received command. The data in the status storage area 223qf is updated (Z3902), and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3901 that the status command has not been received (Z3901: No), then the variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (variation pattern command is included) (Z3903). In the process of Z3903, if it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (Z3903: Yes), the variation start flag 223qd is set to ON (Z3904), and the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (Z3905) , and then terminate this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3903 that no variation pattern command has been received (Z3903: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (Z3906). In the process of Z3906, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (Z3906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223qe provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z3907), and the stop type is extracted from the received command. (Z3908) to terminate this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3909 that the stop type command has not been received (Z3906: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending pitch command has been received (Z3909). In the process of Z3909, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (Z3909: Yes), the pending ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol pending ball number counter (special symbol 1 pending ball number The values of the counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb) are updated (Z3910), and this process is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb. Stored. Further, when receiving a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls of normal symbols, information for indicating the number of reserved balls is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter 223qc. In this embodiment, since information indicating the current number of reserved balls is included in the number-of-held-balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, for example, due to a power outage, etc., each of the number of reserved balls counter on the voice lamp control device 113 side Even if the value is erased, the value of each pending ball number counter can be restored to an appropriate value by receiving the pending ball number command to be transmitted next. In this case, it is preferable to transmit each pending ball count command in the state command transmission process (see Z908 in FIG. 510) of the start-up process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 510).

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3909, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (Z3909: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from main controller 110 (Z3911). In the process of Z3911, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (Z3911: Yes), depending on the type of winning information notified by the winning information command, various effects (prefetching effects) are set. (Z3912), and the process ends. The details of this winning information command process 23 (Z3912) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 529 and 530. FIG.

In the process of Z3911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (Z3911: No), then various commands related to winning (opening command, round number command, jackpot end command, and ending command (either) is received (Z3913), and if it is determined that a win-related command is received (Z3913: Yes), execute control according to the type of command related to win Win-related command processing 23 is executed (Z3914) to terminate this processing. This win-related command process 23 (Z3914) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3913, if it is determined that the winning-related command has not been received from main controller 110 (Z3913: No), then this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 529, the details of the winning information command process 23 (Z3912), which is one process in the command determination process 23 (Z3114), will be described. FIG. 529 is a flow chart showing this winning information command process 23 (Z3912). In the winning information command process 23 (Z3912), first, the data indicating the lottery result notified by the command is stored in the free area of the winning information storage area (Z4001), and the process proceeds to Z4002. In the process of Z4001, the data indicating the prize information notified by the command is stored in the empty area with the smallest number among the first to fourth areas of the prize information storage area.

In the process of Z4002, it is determined whether or not the chance charge waiting flag 223qk is ON (Z4002). If it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is ON (Z4002: No), it means that the variable display effect set for the chance charge effect is being executed and the chance charge effect has not yet started. Therefore, according to the content of the newly detected starting prize, the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge charged in the chance charge effect is added to the value predetermined at the start of the fluctuation. Execute the process. More specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current winning information command is a winning information command indicating winning (Z4003), and if it is determined to be a winning information command indicating winning (Z4003: Yes ), the value of the charge number counter 223qm is updated by adding 2 (Z4004), and the process proceeds to Z4006. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4003, if it is determined that the current winning information command is not a winning information command indicating a win (a winning information command indicating a loss) (Z4003: No), the value of the charge amount counter 223qm 1 is added and updated (Z4005), and the process proceeds to Z4006.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4002, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is off (Z4002: No), since there is no possibility of adding the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge, each of Z4003 to Z4005 Skip the process and move to the process of Z4006. In the process of Z4006, it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponding to falling has been notified (Z4006). In the process of Z4006, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (Z4006: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the production mode corresponding to the continuous rich scenario in the variable probability continuous suggestion production is being executed. Determine (Z4007). In this process of Z4007, when the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223qh is any of "08H" to "0BH" corresponding to the continuous rich scenario, the presentation mode corresponding to the continuous rich scenario is being executed. determine that there is

In the processing of Z4007, if it is determined that the continuation suggestion effect of the continuation rich scenario is being executed (Z4007: Yes), then the winning information notified by the winning information command this time is the probability variable continuation suggestion effect It is determined whether or not the winning information is consumed during execution (Z4008). That is, according to the new winning information, during the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion production, it is determined whether it is confirmed that the special symbol falls from the probability variation state to the low probability state, and it is digested during the execution of the continuation suggestion production (Z4008: Yes), refer to the discontinuation table of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) Then, a continuation suggestive rendering scenario is determined (Z4009), the continuation scenario storage area 223qh is overwritten with data indicating the selected scenario (Z4010), and the process proceeds to Z4011. In each process of Z4009 and Z4010, the production scenario of "0CH" in the discontinued table is stored in the continuous scenario storage area 223qh.

In the twenty-third embodiment, when the new starting prize is a lottery result corresponding to the number of times of variation within the execution range of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, the production scenario of "0CH" is always set. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and one scenario may be determined by lottery from among the four production scenarios (one of "0CH" to "0FH") defined in the discontinuation table. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation at the time of falling.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4006, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has not been notified (Z4006: No), if it is determined that the probability variable continuation suggestion effect of the continuous rich scenario is not being executed (Z4007: No ), and if it is determined that the new winning information notified by the winning information command this time is not the winning information digested during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect (Z4008: No), the effect in the probability variable continuation suggestion effect Since there is no need to rewrite the scenario to the scenario of the table for discontinuation, the processing proceeds to Z4011 as it is.

By executing each process of Z4006 to Z4010, the probability variable state at the start of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect, and the probability change in a situation where the pending balls up to the number of fluctuations at which the probability variable continuation suggestion effect ends are not accumulated When the continuation suggestion performance is executed, and after that the start prize corresponding to the fall occurs, by switching to the non-continuation performance scenario (“0CH” performance scenario), the result of the probability variable continuation suggestion performance is that the player has fallen. It can be notified that it is. That is, since it is possible to prevent the effect from being continued even though the player has already fallen, it is possible to realize a more suitable effect.

In addition, in the process of Z4011, based on the winning information notified by the winning information command, a pending advance notice lottery process is executed for determining whether the pending change effect and the pending batch change effect can be executed (Z4011), and this process exit. The details of this pending advance notice lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 530 is a flow chart showing this pending notice lottery process (Z4011). In this pending notice lottery process (Z4011), first, data indicating a pending design mode of white pending is stored in an empty area of the pending design mode storage area 223r (Z4051). More specifically, data indicating the reserved design mode of white reservation is stored in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas of the reserved design mode storage area 223r. When the process of Z4051 ends, it is then determined whether or not the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z4052). If it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z4052: Yes), the white hold is held. The symbol mode is set so as to be displayed as a reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information (Z4053), and this process is terminated. By executing the process of Z4053, the pending ball number pattern changed to a rock-like mode by the pending batch change effect and the pending ball number pattern based on the start prize newly detected after the start of the pending batch change effect. Since the reserved pattern mode can be changed between and, the player can easily understand the range of the reserved number of ball patterns to be subjected to the reserved batch change effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand.

In the 23rd embodiment, the number of pending ball symbols based on the start winning prize detected after the start of the pending collective change effect is uniformly set to the pending symbol mode of white pending, but it is limited to this. isn't it. For example, for a new number of reserved ball symbols, it may be configured to execute a lottery in a reserved design mode using the reserved change lottery table 222qc (see FIG. 497(a)). As a result, not only the reserved number of balls pattern which is the target of the reserved batch change performance but also the reserved number of balls pattern based on the new start prize can be made to have the expectation of a big win. Further, for example, a new starting winning prize detected after the start of the pending batch change effect may be added to the target of the pending batch change effect. In this case, the number of pending ball patterns based on the new start winning may be configured to always be added to the target of the pending batch change effect, or may be added to the target of the pending batch change effect only under a predetermined condition. good too. As a predetermined condition, for example, if the winning information corresponding to the new start winning indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot more than the super reach out, it may be included in the execution target of the pending collective change effect. , For example, only when winning information corresponding to a variation type with a higher degree of expectation than the pending ball in the range where the pending batch change effect is set is newly notified, as a configuration to be included in the execution target of the pending batch change effect good too. By constructing in this way, when a reserved number of balls pattern based on a new start prize is added to the execution target of the reserved collective change performance, the player's expectation for the big win can be further improved.

In the process of Z4052, if it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is off (Z4052: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls is greater than 1 (Z4054), and the number of pending balls is 1 or less. If it is determined that (Z4054: No), there is no possibility of executing the pending collective change effect, so to the process of Z4060 for lottery of the pending symbol mode of the pending ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information Transition. On the other hand, in the process of Z4054, if it is determined that the number of pending balls is greater than 1 (2 or more) (Z4054: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area and the data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r. , and the change point calculation table 222qd (Z4055), and whether or not the pending batch change effect can be executed is determined according to the calculated change points, the values of the batch change lottery table 222qe, and the effect lottery counter. (Z4056). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result by the processing of Z4056 is the determination result corresponding to the execution of the pending batch change effect (Z4057), and it is determined that it is not the determination result corresponding to the execution of the pending batch change effect. In that case (Z4057: No), the processing shifts to Z4060 for drawing a lottery for the pending symbol mode of the pending ball number symbol corresponding to the new prize information. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4057, if it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the pending batch change effect (Z4057: Yes), the execution of the pending batch change effect is set (Z4058), and the batch change flag 223qp is turned on is set (Z4059), and this processing ends.

In the process of Z4060, the hold change lottery table 222qc (see FIG. 497(a)) is read (Z4060), and the read hold change lottery table 222qc, the winning information notified by the command, and the value of the effect lottery counter to determine the reserved design mode (Z4061). Next, according to the reserved design mode determined in the processing of Z4061, the data corresponding to the latest winning information in the reserved design mode storage area 223r is updated (Z4062), and the reserved design mode indicated by the updated data is updated. The display is set (Z4063), and this processing ends.

By executing this reservation advance notice lottery process (see FIG. 530), it is possible to suitably set various effects modes using the number of reserved ball symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 531, the content of the hit-related command process 23 (Z3914) described above will be described. FIG. 531 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related command process 23 (Z3914). This hit-related command process 23 (Z3914) is executed in the command determination process 23 (see FIG. 528) of the sound lamp control device 113, and when a win-related command is received from the main controller 110 Second, it is a process for performing control according to the type of the received command.

In the hit-related command process 23 (see FIG. 531), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an opening command (Z4101). If it is determined that the command received this time is an opening command (Z4101: Yes), a display opening command corresponding to the received opening command is set (Z4102), and then this processing ends.

In the processing of Z4101, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the opening command (Z4101: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is the number of rounds command (Z4103). If it is determined that there is (Z4103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (Z4104), and this processing ends.

In the process of Z4103, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a round number command (Z4103: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot end command (Z4105), and it is a jackpot end command. When it is determined (Z4105: Yes), according to the information indicating the game state after the end of the jackpot included in the received jackpot end command, update the data in the game state storage area 223qf (Z4106), and the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is set to 100 (Z4107). Next, it is determined whether or not the right-handed winning flag 223qi is on (Z4108), and if it is determined that the right-handed winning flag 223qi is on (Z4108: Yes), the game is played by right-handed hitting. It means that the jackpot was hit during the variable state or the time-saving state (that is, the so-called Renso occurred), and it means that the second special symbol lottery with a high rate of the variable jackpot has become a jackpot. , the back mode for high expectations (see FIG. 473(b)) is set (Z4110), and this processing ends. Uniformly setting the back mode for high expectations is to make it difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the variable probability state is set, so that the player can predict the current game state It is for realization.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4108, when it is determined that the winning flag 223qi for right-handed hitting is off (Z4108: No), a jackpot is won in the normal state in which the game is played by left-handed hitting (so-called first winning). This means that the ratio of the probability variable jackpot is low in the lottery of the first special symbol, so the back mode for low expectations (see FIG. 473 (a)) is set (Z4109), After that, this process is terminated. Uniformly setting the back mode for low expectations is to make it difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the variable probability state is set, so that the player can predict the current game state. It is for realization.

Also, if it is determined that the jackpot end command is not received in the processing of Z4105 (Z4105: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is the ending command (Z4111), and if it is the ending command If determined (Z4111: Yes), the ending command for display is set (Z4112), and this processing is terminated. If it is determined in the process of Z4111 that the ending command has not been received (Z4111: No), then this process ends.

Next, the variable display setting process 23 (Z3115) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 532 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process 23 (Z3115). This variable display setting process 23 (Z3115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variable effect. , a process for generating and setting display variation pattern commands based on the variation pattern commands received from main controller 110 .

In the fluctuation display setting process 23 (Z3115), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223qd provided in the RAM 223 is ON (Z4201). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223qd is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Z4201: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process of Z4207 Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223qd is on (Z4201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223qd is turned off (Z4202), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is stored in the RAM 223. (Z4203).

Next, a variable effect setting process 23 for setting the effect mode to be executed with the extracted variable pattern (variable time) is executed (Z4204). The contents of this variable effect setting process 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of Z4204 ends, a display variation pattern command is generated for notifying the display control device 114 of the presentation mode determined in the processing of Z4204, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 ( Z4205). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area is shifted (Z4206). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to Z4207.

In the process of Z4207, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223qe provided in the RAM 223 is ON (Z4207). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223qe is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Z4207: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223qe is on (Z4207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223qe is turned off (Z4208), and the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is stored in the RAM 223. (Z4209). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (Z4210), and the process proceeds to Z4211.

In the processing of Z4211, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z4211). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled. After the process of Z4211 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 533, the contents of the variable effect setting process 23 (Z4204), which is one process in the variable display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 533 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process 23 (Z4204). In this variable effect setting process 23 (Z4204), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (announcement contents) of the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

In the variable effect setting process 23 (Z4204), first, it is determined whether the value of the charge state number counter 223qn is greater than 0 (Z4301), and if it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223qn is greater than 0 ( Z4301: Yes), the value of the charge state number counter 223qn is decremented by 1 (Z4302), and the process proceeds to Z4303. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z4301 that the value of the charge state number counter 223qn is 0 (Z4301: No), the process of Z4302 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Z4303.

In the process of Z4303, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223qg is greater than 0 (Z4303). When it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is 0 (Z4303: No), the process proceeds to Z4311. On the other hand, in the process of Z4303, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223qg is greater than 0 (Z4303: Yes), the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223qg is subtracted by 1 (Z4304), then after the subtraction It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223qg is greater than 0 (Z4305). In the process of Z4305, when it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours guarantee counter 223qg is 0 (Z4305: No), the process proceeds to Z4311. On the other hand, in the process of Z4305, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223qg after subtraction is greater than 0 (Z4305: Yes), then whether the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223qg after subtraction is greater than 4 It is determined whether or not (Z4306). In the process of Z4306, when it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours guarantee counter 223qg is greater than 4 (Z4306: Yes), the process proceeds to Z4312.

In the processing of Z4311, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state (Z4311). Here, based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223qf, it is determined whether the current game state is the probability variable state. In the process of Z4311, if it is determined that the current state is the variable probability state (Z4311: Yes), it means that the variable probability state continues beyond 100 times after the end of the jackpot, so the back mode lottery is performed. Therefore, the process shifts to Z4312. On the other hand, in the process of Z4311, when it is determined that the current state is not the variable probability state (Z4311: No), the process of Z4312 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Z4313.

In the process of Z4312, in the gaming state (time saving state, probability variable state) in which the game is played with the right hand, one back mode is drawn by lottery from among a plurality of back modes that indicate the expectation of the probability variable state with a lottery probability according to the gaming state. Back mode lottery processing is executed (Z4312), and the process proceeds to Z4313. The details of this back mode lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z4313, an effect mode selection process for selecting an effect mode in the variable display effect is executed (Z4313), and then this process ends. The details of this rendering mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the variable effect setting process 23 in the twenty-third embodiment, in the process of Z4306, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is 4 or less (Z4306: No), the probability variable continuation suggestive effect (Z4307). In the process of Z4307, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big win (Z4307: Yes), the big win performance mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuous suggestive performance is set as the current variable display mode (Z4308), and during right hand hitting The winning flag is set to ON (Z4309), and this processing is terminated. In addition, as a jackpot effect mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuation suggestion effect, for example, the effect of breaking through the door 806 causes the adventurer who breaks through the door 806 to discover a treasure on the other side of the door 806. , an effect or the like in which a jackpot is announced is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4307, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a special symbol jackpot (Z4307: No), the continuous suggestion effect setting for setting the effect mode in the execution period of the probability variable continuous suggestive effect The process is executed (Z4310) and the process ends. The details of this continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 534, the content of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310), which is one process in the variable effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 534 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310).

When the continuation suggestion production setting process (Z4310) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction guarantee number counter 223qg is 4 (Z4401), and the value of the time reduction guarantee number counter 223qg is not 4 (3 or less) (Z4401: No), the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223qh is read (Z4411), and it is determined whether or not the read scenario is a continuous rich scenario (Z4412). In the process of Z4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is not the continuous rich scenario (Z4412: No), the process proceeds to Z4415. On the other hand, in the process of Z4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is a continuous rich scenario (Z4412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery result is the fall lottery result ( Z4413), if it is determined that the lottery result is not falling (Z4413: No), the process proceeds to Z4415. On the other hand, in the process of Z4413, when it is determined that the lottery result is falling (Z4413: Yes), the effect scenario is switched to "0CH" (Z4414), and the process proceeds to Z4415.

In the process of Z4415, from the scenario read from the continuation scenario storage area 223qh, the effect mode of the number of fluctuations corresponding to the value of the guaranteed time reduction counter 223qg is read (Z4415), and the read effect mode is used as the display mode of the current variation pattern. Set (Z4416). Next, it is determined whether or not the final rendering mode of the scenario has been set (Z4417). If it is determined that the final rendering mode of the scenario has been set (Z4417: Yes), the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223qh is determined. is reset to "00H" (Z4418), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4417, if it is determined that the final effect mode of the scenario is not set (Z4417: No), the processing of Z4418 is skipped and the present processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4401, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223qg is 4 (Z4401: Yes), it means that it is the start timing of the probability variation continuation suggestion production (see FIG. 475), so the probability variation A process for determining a production scenario for continuous suggestive production is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state (Z4402). In the process of Z4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable probability state (Z4402: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read (Z4403), and the winning information includes the lottery result of falling. It is determined whether or not there is (Z4404). In the process of Z4404, if it is determined that the lottery result of falling is not included in the winning information (Z4404: No), then four winning information is stored (that is, the probability variation continuation suggestion effect It is determined whether or not the ball on hold until the end is already on hold (Z4405).

In the process of Z4405, if it is determined that four pieces of winning information are stored (Z4405: Yes), the continuation suggestion performance scenario is generated by referring to the continuation determination table in the continuation suggestion performance selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499). is determined (Z4406), and the process proceeds to Z4409. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4405, if it is determined that the four pieces of winning information are not stored (Z4405: No), the continuous suggestion table in the continuous suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) is referred to, and the continuous suggestion is made. A production scenario is determined (Z4407), and the process proceeds to Z4409.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a probability variable state (Z4402: No), and in the processing of Z4404, the lottery result of falling is included in the prize information If so (Z4404: Yes), the discontinuation table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) is referred to determine the effect scenario (Z4408), and the process proceeds to Z4409.

In the process of Z4409 executed after any one of the processes of Z4406 to Z4408 is executed, data indicating the selected effect scenario is stored in the continuous scenario storage area 223qh (Z4409), and the first variation in the determined scenario is executed. is set as the effect mode of the current variation pattern (Z4410), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 535, description will be given of the contents of the back mode lottery process (Z4312), which is one process in the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. do. FIG. 535 is a flow chart showing the details of the back mode lottery process (Z4312).

When the back mode lottery process (Z4312) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern (Z4501). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern for the big win (Z4501: Yes), the variation display mode for the big win is selected as the variation display mode (Z4502), and the winning flag 223qi during right hitting is set to ON. (Z4503) to terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4501, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a big hit variation pattern (Z4501: No), then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation state (Z4504) . If it is determined that the current game state is not the variable probability state (Z4504: No), the back mode lottery table 222qb (see FIG. 496) and the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy are referred to. is selected (Z4505), and the process proceeds to Z4510.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4504, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable probability state (Z4504: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read (Z4506), and then the lottery result of falling in the winning information is included (Z4507). In the process of Z4507, if it is determined that the prize winning information includes the lottery result of falling (Z4507: Yes), the non-falling table in the back mode lottery table 222qb (see FIG. 496) and the effect lottery counter 223qy. , and the back mode is selected by lottery (Z4508), and the process proceeds to Z4510.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4507, if it is determined that the falling lottery result is not included in the winning information (Z4507: No), the probability variation continuation table in the back mode lottery table 222qb (see FIG. 496) and the effect lottery The back mode is selected by referring to the value of the counter 223qy (Z4509), and the process proceeds to Z4510.

In the processing of Z4510 executed after any one of the processing of Z4505, Z4508, Z4509 is executed, the lottery result of each processing is the lottery result indicating the change to the rear mode different from the current rear mode. (Z4510). In the processing of Z4510, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the change of the back surface mode (Z4510: Yes), a back surface change command for display indicating the back surface mode after change is set (Z4511), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z4510 that the back mode is not to be changed (Z4510: No), the process of Z4511 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 536, description will be given of the contents of the effect mode selection process (Z4313) which is one process in the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. do. FIG. 536 is a flow chart showing the details of the presentation mode selection process (Z4313).

When the effect mode selection process (Z4313) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command including an additional time command (including an additional time command indicating an additional time of 7 seconds) has been received (Z4551). If it is determined that the variation pattern command including the additional time command has not been received (Z4551: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z4551, if it is determined that the variation pattern command including the additional time command has been received (Z4551: Yes), read out the interrupt repeated hit lottery table 222qh (see FIG. 500) (Z4552), the effect lottery counter Whether or not the continuous hit effect can be executed and its type are determined according to the value of 223qy (Z4553), and then it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the repeated interrupt effect (Z4554). In the process of Z4554, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect (Z4554: Yes), the data corresponding to the type of the interrupt continuous hit effect to be executed is stored in the continuous hit type storage area 223qj (Z4555 ), and then, it is determined whether or not the type of interrupt continuous hit effect is a type to be executed before reach (Z4556). In the process of Z4556, if it is determined that the type of interrupt continuous hit effect to be executed before reach (Z4556: Yes), determine the voice mode corresponding to the variable time indicated by the basic time command (Z4558), Z4559 Go to processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4556, when it is determined that the type of the determined interrupt continuous hit effect is not the type to be executed before reach (Z4556: No), the variable time indicated by the basic time command and the additional time command The voice mode corresponding to the sum of the indicated fluctuation time is determined (Z4557), and the process proceeds to Z4559.

In the process of Z4559, the display mode corresponding to the variable time indicated by the basic time command is determined (Z4559), and this process ends. Thus, in the twenty-third embodiment, it is configured to be easily identifiable whether or not it is a variation type long by 7 seconds depending on the presence or absence of the additional time saving command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the variation type is the lottery target for whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect, simply by confirming the content of the additional time command. Further, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect, by setting the effect mode corresponding to the variable time (the variable time shorter by 7 seconds) notified by the basic time command, the variable time can be filled. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the performance mode with the end timing of the variable display performance without preparing a performance mode dedicated to the interrupt continuous hitting performance, so that a suitable performance mode can be provided.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4554, if it is determined that the interrupt continuous hit effect is not executed (Z4554: No), the chance charge lottery table 222qf (see FIG. 498(b)) is read out (Z4560), and the current variation type Then, it determines whether or not the chance charge effect (see FIGS. 479(b) and 480(a)) can be executed (Z4561) according to the number of pending balls and the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy, and then the process of Z4561. It is determined whether or not execution of the chance charge effect has been determined by determination (lottery) (Z4562). In the process of Z4562, if it is determined that the execution of the chance charge effect has not been determined (Z4562: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (Z4566), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, in the process of Z4562, when it is determined that the execution of the chance charge effect is determined (Z4562: Yes), the value of the charge number counter 223qm is set to the number of pending balls plus 1 (Z4563), and the chance The charge standby flag 223qk is set to ON (Z4564), the effect mode including the chance charge effect is determined as the variable display mode of this time (Z4565), and this processing ends. As described above, in the twenty-third embodiment, when execution of the chance charge effect is determined, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG accumulated by the chance charge effect (charge number counter 223 qm value). After completion of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is variable in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load (the processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

<Regarding control processing of the audio output device in the twenty-third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 537 to 541. FIG. First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 537(a). FIG. 537(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, command determination processing for performing control according to various commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (20001). Details of this command determination process (Z20001) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of Z20001, an audio setting process for reproducing audio data (audio file) corresponding to the effect is executed (Z20002). Details of this audio setting process (Z20002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of Z20002 is finished, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 303 stores power-off occurrence information (Z20003). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Z20003 (Z20003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z20005), and the power-off processing is executed (Z20006). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (Z20007), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of Z20003 (Z20003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (Z20004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (Z20004: No), the process returns to Z20001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 has been destroyed (Z20004: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processing.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 537(b). FIG. 537(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 537(b)) is processing executed each time a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (Z20101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 538, the command determination process (Z20001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 537(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 538 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z20001).

In the command determination process (Z20001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z20201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (Z20201: No), the command determination process is terminated. and return to main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z20201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Z20202). Analyze the types of all the commands for processing (Z20203).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z20204). This audio variation pattern command is used when outputting the display variation pattern command (see Z4205 in FIG. 532) in the variation display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) of the audio lamp control device 113. It is set to notify the type of sound to be reproduced and the output timing corresponding to the display mode.

In the process of Z20204, when it is determined that there is a variation pattern command for voice among the unprocessed commands (Z20204: Yes), the music and sound effects used during execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (Z20205 ), set the specified song, output channel and output timing of the sound effect (Z20206), and return to the process of Z20201.

On the other hand, in the process of Z20204, if it is determined that there is no voice variation pattern command (Z20204: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a voice repeated command ( Z20207), if an audio repeated hit command is included (Z20207: Yes), it means that the player has performed a repeated hit operation. is executed (Z20208), and the process returns to Z20201. The details of this repeated hitting sound command process (Z20208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z20207, if it is determined that the unprocessed command does not include the repeated sound command for voice (Z20207: No), then it is determined whether or not the interrupt command for voice is included. (Z20209), and if it is determined that the unprocessed command includes a repeated sound command for voice (Z20209: Yes), the interrupt command processing for setting the interruption and restart of the BGM being played is executed. Execute (Z20210) and return to the process of Z20201. The details of this suspend command process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z20209, if there is no voice interruption command among the unprocessed commands (Z20209: No), the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (Z20211), and the process returns to Z20201.

Next, with reference to FIG. 539, the details of the continuous hitting sound command process (Z20208) will be described. FIG. 539 is a flow chart showing repeated hitting sound command processing (Z20208). This repeated hitting sound command processing (Z20208) is executed in the command determination processing (FIG. 538) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and as described above, is processing for setting the reproduction (output) of the repeated hitting sound.

In this repeated hitting sound command process (Z20208), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "00H" (Z20301). In the process of Z20301, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hit sound output flag 303a is set to "00H" (Z20301: Yes), the repeated hit sound command for the first repeated hit operation in the interrupt repeated hit effect (see FIG. 482) is issued. Since it means that it has been received, the processing moves to Z20305 in order to reproduce the first repeated hitting sound.

On the other hand, if it is determined that "00H" is not set to the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a (Z20301: No), then it is determined whether "01H" is set to the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a. is determined (Z20302). If it is determined in the process of Z20302 that the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is not set to "01H" (that is, the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is "02H") (Z20302: No), 1 This means that the last repeated hitting sound in the interrupt repeated hitting effect is the second repeated hitting sound. Therefore, in this case also, the process proceeds to Z20305 in order to reproduce the first repeated hitting sound.

In the process of Z20305, CN2 of the voice synthesizing unit 306 (see FIG. 501) is set to reproduce the audio file corresponding to the first repeated hitting sound (Z20305), and the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to correspond to the first repeated hitting sound. It is updated (set) to "01H" (Z20306), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z20302 that the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "01H" (that is, the previously output repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound) (Z20302: Yes). , CN3 of the voice synthesizing unit 306 (see FIG. 501) is set to reproduce the sound file corresponding to the second repeated hitting sound (Z20303), and the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "02H" corresponding to the second repeated hitting sound. is updated (set) to (Z20304), and this processing ends.

By executing this repeated hitting sound command processing, it is possible to alternately reproduce two types of audio data on two channels each time a repeated hitting operation is executed, so that it is possible to diversify the audio mode. . Also, if the configuration is such that the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are simply alternately reproduced in a single channel (i.e., control is performed to stop the output of one sound during reproduction and output the other sound). ), it is possible to output one sound while maintaining the output state of the other sound (the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are output in duplicate). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in a configuration where the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately reproduced in a single channel, when a player whose interval between repeated hits is short performs a repeated hit operation, the leading portion of each sound data This results in a monotonous voice mode in which only the voices are alternately repeated. On the other hand, if a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data is reproduced on other channels. can be played. That is, it is possible to synthesize and output a sound based on one sound data and a sound based on another sound data. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the beginning part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify the sound modes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twenty-third embodiment, two types of sound data (sounds of repeated hits) are alternately output to two channels each time a repeated hit operation is detected. A configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of audio data are alternately reproduced in order on CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify voice modes. In this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. By configuring in this way, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, until the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is terminated). can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify the voice modes. Furthermore, the type of the audio data to be output may be changed according to the interval of successive hits. Specifically, for example, when a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between consecutive hits (for example, 0.5 seconds or less), three types of sound modes are reproduced in order on three channels. On the other hand, when a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between consecutive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data are sent to two channels in order. It may be configured to reproduce (alternately). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the output mode of the sound according to the interval of successive hits, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the interval of repeated hits. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, it is configured to output one of the repeated hitting sounds in conjunction with the repeated hitting operation. . More specifically, for example, if the last repeated hitting sound output during the effective period of the repeated hitting operation is the first repeated hitting sound, the second repeated hitting sound may be output after the end of the repeated hitting sound. With this configuration, although the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output as a set according to the repeated hitting operation, the last output sound is the first repeated hitting sound. (That is, the paired second repeated hitting sound is not output), and it is possible to prevent the voice mode from becoming incomplete. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, if the last repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, the control to output the second repeated hitting sound after the end is changed to a variation display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during the execution of the jackpot variation). By constructing in this way, for the player who desires to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last continuous hitting sound to be output during the interrupt continuous hitting effect is dared to be the first repeated hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between repeated hits by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the first repeated hitting sound is always output when the repeated hitting operation is detected while no sound is being reproduced. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of the first repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. By constructing in this way, a player who desires to diversify the voice modes can be made to perform the continuous hitting operation at a faster pace, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting performance can be improved. be able to.

Next, the suspend command process (Z20210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 540 is a flow chart showing this suspend command processing (Z20210). The interruption command process (Z20210) is executed during the command determination process (see Z20001 in FIG. 538) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and is a process for setting interruption and resumption of the BGM being reproduced.

In the suspension command process (Z20210), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating the start of suspension (Z20401). If it is determined that the received command indicates the start of interruption (Z20401: Yes), data indicating the playback position of the variation BGM being played is stored in the playback position storage area 303b (Z20402). Playback of BGM for interrupting continuous hit effect is set (Z20403), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z20401, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating the start of interruption (that is, it is a command indicating the end of interruption) (Z20401: No), the BGM for continuous interrupt effect The reproduction is terminated (Z20404), the data in the reproduction position storage area 303b is read (Z20405), the reproduction of the variation BGM from the read reproduction position is resumed in CN1 (Z20406), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 541, the details of the audio setting process (Z20002) will be described. FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing (Z20002). This audio setting process (Z20002) is executed in the main process (FIG. 537) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. FIG.

In this audio setting process (Z20002), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to output music (Z20501). If it is determined that the present time is not the output timing of the music (Z20501: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z20501, if it is determined that the current time is the output timing of the music (Z20501: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (Z20502), and the read audio file is played on the corresponding channel. (Z20503), the music output flag 303c is set to ON (Z20504), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment, when a jackpot is won, regardless of the jackpot type, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the time of normal symbols is shortened. The configuration was such that the state continued. That is, the variable probability jackpot and the normal jackpot are configured so that the operation (operation mode of the electric accessory 640a) until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends is common. Only when the game state is the probability variable state at the time when the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbols is continued after the 100th time. That is, when the time-saving state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit, and the variable probability state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit, and the state is shifted to the low probability state of the special symbol within 100 times. In this case, at the timing when the lottery for the 100th special symbol is executed, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is ended, and the state is shifted to the normal state. By configuring in this way, if a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, or if the variable probability state is set, it falls to a low probability state within 100 times. Also, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving state and the variable probability state, so the special symbol lottery is executed at least 100 times. Until then, the player can continue to have an expectation that the game state is a variable probability state.

In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, if the time-saving state of normal symbols is reached at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state is set to the normal state (time-saving state of normal symbols) at the start of the variable display for showing the big win. end). By configuring in this way, the case where the time saving state of the normal pattern ends within 100 times after the end of the big win can be limited to the case where the variation pattern of the big win is started, so after the end of the big win, 100 Behavior that is likely to end the time saving state of the normal pattern during the execution of the variable display effect within the times (for example, if the fluctuation time of the normal pattern exceeds 3 seconds, or if the lottery of the normal pattern is lost or when a pattern of 0.2 seconds x 1 time is executed as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a), the player can be pleased. Therefore, the game can be played while paying attention to the result of the lottery of normal symbols, the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, etc. until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times after the end of the big win.

Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 allows the player to predict the possibility of the variable probability state to some extent. More specifically, during the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, the cave search mode with a relatively low expectation of the probability change state, the temple search mode with a relatively high expectation of the probability change state, and the probability change state It is confirmed that there is a lottery result corresponding to the fall in the hold (at least the variable state continues until the hold is digested). Either one is configured to be set at the time of executing the variable display effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By constructing in this way, while the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, the player can be given the pleasure of predicting the current game state from the back mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved. In addition, by setting the super temple search mode, it is confirmed that the game state is a variable state. You can make them feel joy that their predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the state of the special symbols is predicted to be low-probability, but the state is shifted to the super-temple mode, the player will be delighted that the game state is set to be more advantageous than expected. can let Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is confirmed that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the lottery for the number of pending balls can be executed with a jackpot probability in a variable state. possible), the game can be played with a stronger expectation of winning a jackpot during the hold.

In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, regardless of the game state, over the variable display of the specific range executed before the end of the lottery of 100 special symbols that guarantees the time saving state of the normal symbols ( That is, just before the lottery of 100 times of special symbols ends, over the 96th to 99th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit), the probability variation continuation suggestion production for informing whether the probability variation state continues or not It is configured to run. When starting this definite variable continuation suggestion production, the lottery results from the 96th to 99th times, which is the execution range of the definite variable continuation suggestion production, are read in advance, and whether the definite variable state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery. When the variable probability state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the performance scenario in which the highly expected attack pattern is likely to occur is increased. On the other hand, if the time-saving state has fallen before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or the time-saving state was after the end of the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern occurs. It is configured to increase the selection rate of production scenarios that are easy to play. In this way, by setting the effect mode based on the game state at the end of the effect, it is possible to more accurately notify the game state after the end of the effect. Here, if it is configured to execute the variable probability continuation suggestion effect only based on the game state at the start of the effect, it falls to a low probability state during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation of the variable probability state is notified. In spite of this, there is a risk that the time saving state will be terminated with the start of the 100th special symbol lottery. In this case, there is a possibility that the player will have a sense of distrust towards the pachinko machine 10 and the hall due to the contradiction between the content of the performance and the actual action. Also, as a countermeasure, there is a method of configuring the variable probability continuation suggestion production by a production that is completed with one fluctuation, but in this method, it is difficult to ensure a sufficient production period, so there are various production modes. becomes difficult to convert. On the other hand, in the 23rd embodiment, it is configured to execute the probability variable continuation suggestion effect over the last four fluctuation displays that guarantee the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the notification content of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect , It is determined based on the game state at the time when the last special symbol lottery in the execution range of the variable probability continuous effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation while making it possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the presentation. It should be noted that, when the probability is variable at the start of the production, and the ball is not held until the end of the production, the production is selected so that an attack pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation is likely to occur. ing. This is because the probability of a lottery result corresponding to the fall is lower than the probability of a big hit, and it is extremely rare to fall into a low probability state of special symbols during the production period (relatively high probability of a variable state) This is because the performance ends immediately).

In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, as a kind of entertainment effect, it is possible to execute a press stop effect in which a stop operation of each symbol row is executed according to the operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 of the player. This press stop effect is basically an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of developing into a chance charge effect. In this pressing stop effect, if it does not develop into a chance charge effect, each symbol row is stopped and displayed as a simple combination of failures according to the timing of pressing by the player, while if it develops into a chance charge effect, a chance The charging pattern is (pseudo) stop-displayed, and the development to the chance charge effect is notified. In this way, by changing the stop timing of each symbol row according to the player's pressing timing, the timing of notifying whether or not the chance charge effect will develop can be set to the player's favorite timing. can be adjusted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the press stop effect which does not develop into the chance charge effect, at least the mode of the stop display of the central symbol row is changed according to the timing at which the stop operation is performed for all the symbol rows. More specifically, when the stop operation is completed a specified number of times (three times) within a predetermined period of time (one second) (that is, at a relatively early stage) after the start of the effective period of the stop operation, a comparative effect is obtained. While the stop display of the central pattern row is performed by the long chance charge fan effect, when the stop operation of the specified number of times is completed after the predetermined period (1 second) has passed, the central pattern row is immediately removed. An effect (that is, a relatively short effect) that is stopped and displayed with a symbol is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the period after the stop display from becoming too long or conversely shortening depending on the completion timing of the stop operation by the player, and to prevent the period from becoming too short depending on the completion timing of the stop operation by the player. It is possible to show the transition of the performance mode up to the stop display of the missing pattern in a natural form. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect mode that causes less discomfort. In addition, in the pressing and stopping effect in the twenty-third embodiment, separate button images and valid period gauges are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen. It is determined whether or not the operation of is valid. Then, according to the number of times the stop operation (pressing the PUSH button 10317) is executed in one operation valid period, the symbol row for which the stop display is set is varied (it is determined whether the stop operation has been executed for all symbol rows). ) configuration. As a result, it is possible to simplify the judgment as to whether or not the stop operation of each symbol row is valid, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, a chance charge effect can be executed as a kind of entertainment effect. This chance charge production is the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) that a specific production mode (chance up production) is performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all the balls held on hold at the start of the production are consumed). This is an effect that suggests (informs) the player in advance. The guaranteed number of chance-up effects notified in this chance-charge effect (the number of accumulated spirit gauge gauges) generates some kind of chance-up effect at each timing until the held balls are consumed at the start of the chance-charge effect. consumed for Here, the chance-up effect is a effect that increases the expectation of a big win. and the like. It should be noted that the spirit gauge is always consumed until it reaches zero. That is, it is configured so as not to be discarded without being consumed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up performances, so that the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up performance will occur next. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In the twenty-third embodiment, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge effect is mainly determined based on the number of held balls at the start of the chance charge effect. After completion of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is variable in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load (the processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, as a kind of entertainment effect, it is configured to be able to execute interrupt continuous hitting effect. This interrupting continuous hit effect is a display mode effect as if a different mode effect from the display effect that had been displayed until then suddenly interrupted during the normal variable display or the reach fluctuation. On the other hand, the PUSH button 10317 is composed of an effect mode of prompting to operate the PUSH button 10317 in a specific operation mode (continuous hit operation mode). In this interrupt continuous hit effect, the more the stage of the effect mode develops (the number of displayed monsters is reduced) according to the player's continuous hit operation, the higher the expectation of a big win. be. As a result, the player can be made to actively perform the continuous hitting operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting effect can be improved. This interrupt continuous hit effect is performed when it is determined that the additional time command is not a command indicating 0 seconds (is a command indicating 7 seconds) of the basic time command and the additional time command that constitute the variation pattern command. It is a production that may be executed. Here, the variable time is set by the sum of the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time notified by the additional time command. Then, when it is decided to execute the repeated interrupt effect, the repeated repeated effect is executed for the same length of time as the additional time notified by the additional time command, and the normal variable display effect (execution of the repeated repeated interrupt effect) is performed. Regarding the mode of presentation for a period other than the period), the configuration is such that the mode of presentation for a period of the same length as the basic time notified by the basic time command is set. By constructing in this way, even if the variable display performance in which the interrupt continuous hitting performance is set is executed, the performance mode corresponding to the basic time command can be reused, thereby reducing the memory capacity of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can do.

In addition, in the interrupting repeated hitting effect in the twenty-third embodiment, each time a repeated hitting operation is executed, a plurality of types of sound data (sound data corresponding to the first repeated hitting sound, sound data corresponding to the second ), one audio data is reproduced. More specifically, when an odd-numbered repeated hit operation is detected during the effective period of the repeated hit operation in one interrupt repeated hit effect, the audio data corresponding to the first repeated hit sound is played back to CN2 in the voice synthesizing unit 306. On the other hand, when an even-numbered repeated tapping operation is detected, the voice data corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound is played back to CN3 in the voice synthesizing section 306 . In this way, each time a repeated hit operation is performed, one of a plurality of different sound data is output to one of a plurality of different channels (the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are output to CN1 and CN2). output alternately), it is possible to diversify the voice modes during the continuous hitting operation. In other words, since it is possible to prevent the voice mode from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the repeated hitting valid period. Also, if the configuration is such that the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are simply alternately reproduced in a single channel (i.e., control is performed to stop the output of one sound during reproduction and output the other sound). ), it is possible to output one sound while maintaining the output state of the other sound (the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are output in duplicate). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in a configuration where the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately reproduced in a single channel, when a player whose interval between repeated hits is short performs a repeated hit operation, the leading portion of each sound data This results in a monotonous voice mode in which only the voices are alternately repeated. On the other hand, if a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data is reproduced on other channels. can be played. That is, it is possible to synthesize and output a sound based on one sound data and a sound based on another sound data. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the beginning part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify the sound modes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the interrupt continuous hit effect in the 23rd embodiment, the later the timing of pressing (the remaining time of the effective period becomes shorter) in the effective period in which the continuous hitting operation is valid, the more the subtraction number of the monster increases (the more It is configured to make it easier to set the production mode at the stage of high expectation. As a result, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being quickly defeated to the minimum number. In other words, it is possible to prevent the decrease of the number of monsters based on the depression of the remaining 10 bodies or the remaining 4 bodies, which are likely to be set in the case of losing, from being stopped, and the player's expectation for the big win being spoiled. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, pressing in the latter half of the continuous hitting effective period makes it easier to select a relatively large number of subjugations, so that the lower limit number of monsters can be reached. can make it more likely. Therefore, even a player whose pressing pace is slow can be entertained with the continuous interrupt effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, as a kind of entertainment effect, a plurality of reserved ball number symbols that are reserved are changed to a specific mode (display mode that looks like a rock) different from the normal reserved pattern mode. It is configured to be able to execute the pending batch change effect. In this pending collective change effect, after a plurality of pending ball number symbols are changed to a specific mode, the player performs a specific operation (pressing operation on the PUSH button 10317) to obtain at least one pending ball number symbol. is changed to a mode with a higher degree of expectation than the reserved symbol mode before being changed to the specific mode. By executing this pending collective change effect, it is confirmed that the degree of expectation indicated by at least one pending ball number symbol is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, which pattern of the number of pending balls will change (increase in the degree of expectation), the operation on the PUSH button 10317 will be fun to see which pattern of the number of pending balls will change. can be done. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the player's favorite timing. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

It should be noted that, in the twenty-third embodiment, two types of audio data are alternately reproduced on two channels each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect, thereby changing the audio mode. Although the configuration is diversified, the configuration is not limited to this, and three or more types of audio data may be alternately reproduced in order by CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify voice modes. In this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. By configuring in this way, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, until the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is terminated). can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify the voice modes. Furthermore, the type of the audio data to be output may be changed according to the interval of successive hits. Specifically, for example, when a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between consecutive hits (for example, 0.5 seconds or less), three types of sound modes are reproduced in order on three channels. On the other hand, when a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between consecutive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data are sent to two channels in order. It may be configured to reproduce (alternately). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the output mode of the sound according to the interval of successive hits, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the interval of repeated hits. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect, it is configured to output one of the repeated hitting sounds in conjunction with the repeated hitting operation. It may be configured to enable output. More specifically, for example, if the last repeated hitting sound output during the effective period of the repeated hitting operation is the first repeated hitting sound, the second repeated hitting sound may be output after the end of the repeated hitting sound. With this configuration, although the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output as a set according to the repeated hitting operation, the last output sound is the first repeated hitting sound. (That is, the paired second repeated hitting sound is not output), and it is possible to prevent the voice mode from becoming incomplete. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, if the last repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, the control to output the second repeated hitting sound after the end is changed to a variation display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during the execution of the jackpot variation). By constructing in this way, for the player who desires to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last continuous hitting sound to be output during the interrupt continuous hitting effect is dared to be the first repeated hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are alternately output during execution of the interrupt repeated hitting effect regardless of the intervals between repeated hitting by the player. isn't it. For example, it may be configured such that the first repeated hitting sound is always output when the repeated hitting operation is detected while no sound is being reproduced. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of the first repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. By constructing in this way, a player who desires to diversify the voice modes can be made to perform the continuous hitting operation at a faster pace, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting performance can be improved. be able to.

In the twenty-third embodiment, every time a continuous tapping operation is detected, the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the first continuous tapping sound and the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound are alternately transferred to different channels. However, the configuration may be such that the method of reproducing the audio data is changed (or the audio data is processed in a predetermined manner) under predetermined conditions. More specifically, for example, the reproduction speed may be varied (or the sound data may be processed) so that the output period of each repeated hitting sound varies according to the interval between repeated hitting operations by the player. . That is, if the interval between repeated hits by the player is longer than a predetermined interval (for example, 1 second interval), the output period may be longer (for example, 1.5 seconds or longer). With this configuration, even when a player is playing a game with a long interval between repeated hits, it is relatively easy to output one repeated hit sound while the other repeated hit sound is being output. Voice mode can be diversified. In the twenty-third embodiment, the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are alternately output (reproduced) to different channels based on the execution of the repeated hitting operation. is not limited to the case based on the continuous hitting operation. The same control may be executed when outputting a starting winning sound based on a starting winning or when outputting a winning sound based on detection of winning to the specific winning opening 65a. By configuring in this way, the sound can be output more preferably, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Also, this control can be employed when simply outputting a sound effect whose output period is set in advance as part of the variable display effect. With this configuration, when sound effects are continuously output in a relatively short period of time, the sound can be output more preferably, so that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced. can.

In the twenty-third embodiment, if the execution timing of the interrupting repeated hits effect is before the ready-to-win effect, both the display mode and the sound mode are interrupted to execute the interrupting repeated hits effect, while the interrupting repeated hits effect execution timing is during the ready-to-win effect. If so, the configuration is such that only the display mode is interrupted and the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous hit effect that is executed before reaching the reach, only the display mode is interrupted. good. Since the sound output before the reach is relatively plain, it is difficult to interfere with the sound of the continuous hit effect even if the output is not interrupted. On the other hand, since a flashy sound is likely to be output after the reach, interrupting the sound mode can prevent the sound of the interruption repeated hit effect from becoming difficult to hear. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the sound mode of the interrupt continuous hit effect. Further, for example, both the display mode and the sound mode may be interrupted regardless of the execution timing of the interrupt barrage effect, or conversely, only the display mode may be interrupted regardless of the execution timing. . In addition, the control is not limited to switching the object to be interrupted (at least one of the audio mode and the display mode) according to the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect, and control may be performed to switch according to other conditions. . More specifically, for example, it may be configured such that it is determined by lottery at the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect whether both the sound and the display are to be interrupted or only one of them is to be interrupted. In this case, the probability of determining that both are interrupted may be made different depending on whether it is a big win or a loss. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether both the sound and the display are interrupted, or whether only one of them is interrupted. can improve interest in In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, only an effect with an effect time of 7 seconds is provided as an interrupting repeated effect, but a structure may be adopted in which a plurality of interrupting repeated effects with different effect times are provided. In this case, by providing a command indicating an additional time different from 0 seconds and 7 seconds as the additional time command, an interrupt continuous hit effect is executed for the effect time corresponding to the additional time notified by the additional time command. can be configured to As a result, it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, instead of or in addition to increasing the variation of the additional time that can be notified by the additional time command, the total notified by the variation pattern command (that is, the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time command A configuration that determines the effect time of the continuous interrupt effect so that the difference between the fluctuation time of the variable time of the sum of the additional time notified by and the effect time of the continuous interrupt effect is the basic time that can be notified by the basic time command. may be More specifically, for example, when the variation pattern of the lost super reach B with a variation time of 67 seconds is notified, the effect time of the interrupt repeated hit effect is 37 seconds so that 30 seconds, which is the basic time of the lost normal reach, remains. may be set. By constructing in this way, the variable display performance can be ended just at the end of the variable time together with the performance time of the continuous interrupt performance only by setting the performance mode for 30 seconds which is the basic time. Therefore, it is possible to preferably set the effect mode of the variable display effect in which the continuous interrupt effect is set without providing a variable display effect exclusively for the continuous interrupt effect. It should be noted that, when this control (control for determining the effect time of the interrupt continuous hit effect so that the fluctuation time for the basic time remains) is adopted, even if the additional time is 0 seconds, the interrupt continuous effect can be executed. can. That is, it can also be applied to a pachinko machine 10 having specifications that do not have an additional time command in the first place. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the repeated interrupt effect, thereby further enhancing the player's interest in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, after the end of the big hit, when the number of times of lottery of special symbols exceeds 100 times and the variable probability state continues, based on the lottery result corresponding to falling, the special symbol is low. While falling to the probability state, it was configured to terminate the time-saving state of normal symbols, but it is not limited to this. Even after the number of lotteries of the special symbols exceeds 100 times, the condition for ending the time saving state of the normal symbols may be different from the condition of falling to the low probability state of the special symbols. Specifically, for example, a lottery as to whether or not to fall from the time-saving state of the normal pattern to the normal state of the normal pattern may be configured to be executed at the start of the fluctuation, separately from the falling lottery from the variable probability state. good. Further, for example, when a specific lottery result is obtained in the lottery of special symbols, only the time saving state may be terminated. By constructing in this way, even if the time saving state of the normal design is ended, it can be configured so that the probability variable state of the special design may continue, so immediately after the time saving state of the normal design is finished. To prevent a player from quitting the game and to continue the game in anticipation of the continuation of the variable probability state of the special symbols. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the number of pending ball symbols based on the start winning prize detected after the start of the pending batch change effect is uniformly set to the pending symbol mode of white pending, but it is not limited to this. . For example, for a new number of reserved ball symbols, it may be configured to execute a lottery in a reserved design mode using the reserved change lottery table 222qc (see FIG. 497(a)). As a result, not only the reserved number of balls pattern which is the target of the reserved batch change performance but also the reserved number of balls pattern based on the new start prize can be made to have the expectation of a big win. Further, for example, a new starting winning prize detected after the start of the pending batch change effect may be added to the target of the pending batch change effect. In this case, the number of pending ball patterns based on the new start winning may be configured to always be added to the target of the pending batch change effect, or may be added to the target of the pending batch change effect only under a predetermined condition. good too. As a predetermined condition, for example, if the winning information corresponding to the new start winning indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot more than the super reach out, it may be included in the execution target of the pending collective change effect. , For example, only when winning information corresponding to a variation type with a higher degree of expectation than the pending ball in the range where the pending batch change effect is set is newly notified, as a configuration to be included in the execution target of the pending batch change effect good too. By constructing in this way, when the reserved number of balls pattern based on the new start prize is added to the execution target of the reserved collective change performance, the player's expectation for the big win can be further improved.

<24th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 542 to 557. FIG. In the twenty-third embodiment described above, the chance charge effect is configured to be executable as one type of entertainment effect. That is, the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) that a specific production mode (chance-up production) is performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all the balls held at the start of production are consumed) is set during production. It is configured so as to be able to perform a mode of performance suggesting (notifying) the player in advance according to the gauge number of the accumulated fighting spirit gauge KG. This chance charge performance allows the player to grasp in advance the remaining number of times of the chance-up performance, thereby realizing the playability of predicting what kind of chance-up performance will occur next, and allowing the player to play. was trying to improve interest in games.

In addition to this, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the gauge number of the spirit gauge acquired in the chance charge effect (remaining number of times of the chance up effect) is made variable according to the operation contents of the PUSH button 10317 of the player. . More specifically, in the chance charge effect, an effect mode prompting the player to operate (press) the PUSH button 10317 is displayed, and depending on the length of the period during which the player operates (presses) the PUSH button 10317 , the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is increased. The maximum gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is determined when the chance charge effect is started. As in the twenty-third embodiment, this maximum gauge number is determined based on the number of held balls at the time when the effect is started. By making the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG variable according to the contents of the player's operation (pressing), it is possible for the player to have the impression that the number of chance-up effects is determined by the player himself/herself. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the chance charge effect.

In addition, in the 23rd embodiment described above, after the end of the jackpot, the state after 100 times over the 96 times to 99 times fluctuation display (the last 4 fluctuation display that guarantees the time saving state of normal symbols) It was configured to execute a probability variation continuation suggestion production for indicating whether it is a probability variation state or whether it shifts to a normal state. This probability variable continuation suggestion effect is the result of the effect (the continuation of the chance zone is notified or the end of the chance zone is notified) was configured to be variable.

In addition to this, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the BGM is set for each variable display effect during execution of the variable probability continuation suggestive effect. That is, instead of setting the BGM over the variable display period of the 96th to 99th variable display as the BGM for the probability variable continuation suggestion effect, the configuration is such that the variable display BGM is set according to the variable time for each variable display. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the variable display BGM from being deviated even when the variable stop state occurs in the execution range of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect. can do. In more detail, the probability variable continuation suggestion effect is executed over the variable display period of the 96th to 99th variable display after the end of the jackpot (that is, at a fixed timing) regardless of the state of the ball being held. It is an effect, and it is irrelevant whether the reserved balls for the end of the effect (that is, the 99th variable display) are reserved at the start of the effect (that is, the start of the 96th variable display after the end of the jackpot). It is a production that is executed at Therefore, since there is a possibility that the reserved ball will be lost during the performance, the period from the start of the performance to the end of the performance will be indefinite. In such a situation, when the BGM of a fixed reproduction period is reproduced with the start of the variable probability continuation suggestive effect as a trigger, the timing of the end of the reproduction of the BGM and the end timing of the effect do not match, and the player There is a possibility that you will feel uncomfortable with. On the other hand, by setting the BGM in variable display units, it is possible to reliably match the end timing of the effect with the end timing of the BGM. can.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in Section 23. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the twenty-third embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 542, a description will be given of a display mode when a long-pressing effect (a effect prompting the player to operate the PUSH button 10317 in a predetermined operation mode) is executed in the chance charge effect. FIG. 542(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the long press effect is started. As shown in FIG. 542(a), in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the chance charge effect is executed, the PUSH button 10317 is continuously pressed in the substantially central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. An image (long-press image NG) prompting to continue (long-press) is displayed. More specifically, a long-press image NG is displayed, which is composed of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, an image of an arrow pointing upward to the PUSH button 10317, and characters "Long press!" be done. In addition, a character saying “Press and hold to build up your spirit!” is displayed on the display area 805 . With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases by continuously pressing (long pressing) the PUSH button 10317 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 542(a), the text "10.00 seconds left" is displayed on the right side of the display area 803 when viewed from the front. The display of the number of remaining seconds is counted down according to the elapsed time, and when the remaining number of seconds reaches 0.00, the long-press effect is terminated, and the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG at that time is displayed. is determined as the number of occurrences of the subsequent chance-up effect. As a result, the player can easily understand the end timing of the long-pressing effect, so that an effect that is easier for the player to understand can be realized. Other display contents are the same as the display contents of the chance charge effect (see FIG. 479(b)) in the twenty-third embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 542(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode while the player is performing a long press in the long press effect. As shown in FIG. 542(b), when the player continuously presses (long presses) the PUSH button 10317, the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases. The example of FIG. 542(b) illustrates a state in which the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is increased to 2 gauges by long pressing. In this way, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is increased according to the length of the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is pressed. can make you think Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the long-press effect. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed for one second in the long press effect, the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases by one. In addition, even if the long press is interrupted, the period of the long press is memorized, and when the long press is resumed, the long press period is restarted from the point of interruption of the long press. are doing. As a result, convenience for the player can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 543, the correspondence relationship between the sound mode and the display mode during execution of the long press effect in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 543(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence when the PUSH button 10317 is continuously pressed in the long press effect. As shown in FIG. 543(a), when the player continues to press and hold the PUSH button 10317 during the long press effect, the sound mode corresponding to the gauge number increases (synchronously) as the gauge number increases. is configured to output Specifically, while the number of gauges is 0 (while the long-pressing period is less than 1 second), the voice mode (voice for 0 gauge) in which the voice "ta" is output 3 times in 1 second. . Further, as shown in FIG. 543(a), while the gauge number is 1 (while the long-pressing period is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds), the sound "da" is output three times in 1 second. It becomes the voice mode (voice for 1 gauge). This 1-gauge sound is a louder (louder) sound mode than the 0-gauge sound.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 543(a), while the gauge number is 2 (while the long-pressing period is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds), the sound "do" is output 3 times in 1 second. It becomes a voice mode (voice for 2 gauge). This 2-gauge voice is a louder (louder) voice than the 0-gauge voice and 1-gauge voice. Similarly, for subsequent gauges (3 gauge to 5 gauge), as the number of gauges increases, a flashy (loud) voice is output as the voice output during long pressing. As a result, not only the gauge number of the fighting spirit gauge KG but also the gauge number (the number of chance-up performances) can be easily grasped by the player from the voice mode, so that the player's convenience is improved. can be done.

FIG. 543(b) shows the correspondence relationship between the voice mode and the display mode when the long press is interrupted during the long press effect (while the gauge number is 1 gauge) and then the long press is resumed. It is a figure showing. As shown in FIG. 543(b), if the long press is interrupted in the middle of the long press effect, the output of the voice (sound for 1 gauge) is interrupted, while the display mode remains the same as before the suspension. maintained. That is, when the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is 1, the sound output is stopped. These voice modes and display modes allow the player to easily understand that the increase in the number of gauges has been stopped by stopping the long press. Further, as shown in FIG. 543(b), when the long press is resumed, the sound is output from the continuation of the sound mode that was output at the time of interruption. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the gauge number increases and the timing at which the voice mode switches can be matched (synchronized) regardless of the presence or absence of interruption, so the presentation mode of the long-pressing presentation is more suitable. can be set to

Next, with reference to FIG. 544, the transition of the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG during the long press effect for each game method of the player will be described. FIG. 544(a) shows the gauge when the push button 10317 is continuously pressed for a long time from the time when one second has elapsed after the start of the effect to the end of the long press effect in the long press effect with the upper limit of the number of gauges being 4 gauges. It is the figure which showed the transition of the number.

As shown in FIG. 544, if the long press is continued during the long press effect, the number of gauges increases by 1 every second, and reaches the upper limit of 4 gauges after 5 seconds have passed. do. Thereafter, the number of gauges is maintained at 4 until the effect period ends (until 10 seconds elapse from the start of the long-press effect).

FIG. 544(b) is a diagram showing changes in the number of gauges in the long-press effect when the long-press is interrupted in the middle of the long-press and then the long-press is resumed. In the example of FIG. 544(b), after the start of the long press effect, when the long press is interrupted between 2.5 seconds and 3.5 seconds, and between 5 seconds and 9.3 seconds. It shows the transition of the number of gauges in As shown in FIG. 544(b), after the start of the long-press effect, if the long-press is continuously executed from the point of 1 second to the point of 2.5 seconds, the number of gauges will be reduced at the point of 2 seconds. As the gauge increases to 1 gauge, a 1 gauge sound is output, and the 1 gauge state is maintained until 2.5 seconds have passed. Then, when 2.5 seconds have passed (that is, when 0.5 seconds have passed since the transition to the 1 gauge state), if the player interrupts the long press, the gauge number (the display mode of the spirit gauge KG ) is maintained in the 1-gauge state and audio output is interrupted. That is, interlocking with interruption of the long press (pressing of the PUSH button 10317), output of sound is also interrupted. This allows the player to easily understand that the increase in the number of gauges is interrupted by interrupting the long press without changing the display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 544(b), when the player resumes the long press, the output of the 1 gauge sound is resumed. At this time, the playback position of the restarted audio is set to the playback position where the previous playback was interrupted. That is, when the long press is interrupted, the playback position is stored (backed up), and when the long press is resumed, the sound for the long press is resumed from the backed up playback position. With this configuration, even when the long press is interrupted, the voice mode can be changed (developed) in synchronism with the change in the display mode (the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG). The display mode can be preferably set. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the mode of presentation.

As shown in FIG. 544(b), when the total long-pressing period after the number of gauges increases to 1 gauge reaches 1 second (that is, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the long-pressing effect) , the number of gauges increases to 2 gauges, and the voice mode is switched from the voices for 1 gauge to the voices for 2 gauges. That is, the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is increased to 2 gauge, and the voice mode is switched to the voice for 2 gauge.

As shown in FIG. 544(b), when the number of gauges is 2 gauge, the sound for 2 gauge continues to be output (reproduced) while the player continues the long press. When 4.9 seconds have passed after the start of the long-press effect (0.9 seconds after the state of the 2-gauge), the player interrupts the long-press, thereby interrupting the output of the voice for the 2-gauge. while the fighting spirit gauge KG remains at 2 gauge. This state (the state in which only the output (reproduction) of the audio mode is interrupted) is maintained until the player resumes the long press (in the example of FIG. 544(b), 9.3 seconds have passed since the long press effect started) up to the point in time). Then, when the long press is resumed, the output in the audio mode is resumed again. Although the details will be described later, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the long press is resumed, the length of the remaining period during which the long press can be executed (long press effective period) and the upper limit of the current long press effect are set. The number of gauges is discriminated, and the increasing speed of the number of gauges (the playback speed of the voice mode and the update speed of the display mode) is made variable. More specifically, each time the long press is restarted, the reproduction speed (renewal speed) is set so that it can be increased to the upper limit gauge number by the end of the long press valid period, with double speed as the limit. It is configured. By configuring in this way, the chance charge performance can be ended in a state in which the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is larger, so that the number of chance-up performances occurring after the end of the chance charge performance can be increased. . Therefore, the presentation effect can be further improved.

In the example of FIG. 544(b), when the long press is restarted (9.3 seconds elapsed), the remaining long press valid period is 0.7 seconds, and the upper limit gauge number (4 gauges) is reached. is a diagram showing a state in which two gauges remain in the number of remaining gauges. Until the long press is interrupted, the long press is executed for 0.9 seconds in the state of 2 gauge, so originally, the remaining long press period to raise to 3 gauge is 0 .If you don't hold down for 1.1 seconds, which is the sum of 1 second and 1 second, which is the remaining long press period to raise from 3 gauge to 4 gauge, it will rise to the upper limit of 4 gauge. It becomes impossible to let In other words, if the playback speed is not varied, it becomes impossible to increase the gauge by 2 in the remaining 0.7 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 544(b), by setting the playback speed to double speed after the long press is resumed, the number of gauges can be raised to the upper limit of 4 gauges in 0.7 seconds. becomes possible. That is, after the restart, the gauge increases to 3 at the time when 0.05 seconds have passed (9.35 seconds have passed since the start of the long press effect), and after the increase to 3 gauge, the time when 0.5 seconds have passed (the long press effect starts) After 9.85 seconds have passed), control is performed to increase the gauge to 4 (normally, it takes 1 second to increase 1 gauge, but the regeneration speed is set to 0 to increase 1 gauge). By setting the playback speed to 0.5 seconds (playback speed of double speed), it is possible to increase the number of gauges up to 4 gauges, which is the upper limit, within the effective period of the long press. As a result, the chance charge effect can be ended in a state in which the number of gauges is larger, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, even if the reproduction speed is doubled, if it is impossible to increase the gauge number to the upper limit, the reproduction speed is set to the normal reproduction speed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable due to excessively high playback speed.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, if it is impossible to raise the gauge number to the upper limit even if the speed is set to double speed, the playback is performed at the normal playback speed. not a thing For example, even if it is impossible to increase the number of gauges to the upper limit, the speed may be set to double speed. By configuring in this way, even if the number of gauges is less than the upper limit, the chance charge effect can be ended in a state of a larger number of gauges, so that the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 545 and 546, the correspondence relationship between the voice mode and the display mode during execution of the continuous suggestive effect of the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 545(a), all the lottery results of the special symbols within the execution period of the continuous suggestive effect are out, and the fluctuation display for four times is continuous (that is, the suspension is cut off in the middle). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when executed without As shown in FIG. 545 (a), during the continuous suggestion production, if the variable display is continuously executed, in synchronization with the variable display period in the variable display of the special symbol, the display mode of the probability variable continuous suggestion production ( (see FIG. 476) is displayed. Similarly, for the audio mode, the variation BGM is reproduced in synchronization with the variation display period of each of the four variation displays. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the variable display period in the event that the 96th to 99th special symbol lottery is lost after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect, is a fixed period of 4.5 seconds. It is configured to be Therefore, it is sufficient to prepare only a mode for 4.5 seconds as a display mode and a voice mode corresponding to each variable display during execution of the continuous suggestive effect. Therefore, since variations in the display mode and the audio mode can be minimized, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 545 (a), during the variable stop state in the execution period of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect, the stop display of the third symbol is displayed as the display mode, and the variable stop sound is output as the audio mode. (played). Since the fixed display period after the end of the fluctuation is uniformly set to 0.5 seconds, it is possible to minimize variations in the display mode during the stop display and the fluctuation stop sound. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 545(b), the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the voice mode when the suspension becomes 0 during execution of the variable probability continuation suggestive effect will be described. FIG. 545(b) illustrates a case where the number of held balls becomes 0 at the time when the 96th special symbol lottery is executed, and the state of held 0 continues even after the variation ends. As shown in FIG. 545(b), when the 96th fluctuation display is completed and the fluctuation is stopped (the number of held balls is 0, and the special symbol lottery cannot be executed), the display mode is demo. Switch to the display mode. For this demonstration display mode, for example, the display mode of the immediately preceding (96th) continuation suggestive effect and the display mode of continuing to display the stop symbol are set. In addition, as for the audio mode, there is no sound after the 96th stop sound is output. With these display modes and voice modes, the player can easily understand that the number of held balls is 0, so that game balls can be actively shot with the aim of winning a new starting prize. . Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 545(b), when the starting prize is generated during the demonstration display, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and the continuation suggestion effect is started from the continuation.

In this way, by configuring the voice mode to be output in variable display units, even if the pending ball becomes 0 in the middle of execution of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect, the voice mode and the display mode will be displaced after that. You can prevent it from slipping. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the production effect in the variable probability continuation suggestion production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 546, the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the voice mode when winning a jackpot during execution of the variable probability continuation suggesting effect will be described. Here, in the twenty-third embodiment described above, one effect corresponding to the preset effect scenario is executed for each one variable display executed in the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. It was configured to For this reason, if the jackpot occurs at an early stage (96th or 97th special pattern lottery) in the probability variation continuation suggestion production, the jackpot will be notified without enough time to enjoy the probability variation continuation suggestion production. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of people.

On the other hand, in the 24th embodiment, if a big hit occurs during execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, a pseudo-variation display for the remaining number of times of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot variation. It is configured so that a jackpot is notified as a result of the variable probability continuation suggestion production. That is, when the door 806 is destroyed (breakthrough) in the probability variable continuation suggestion performance, it is configured so that a big hit can be notified. By configuring in this way, even when a big win is achieved in the middle of the variable probability continuation suggestion performance, the performance for the number of times of the probability variable continuation suggestion performance can be executed, so that the probability variable continuation suggestion performance can be more enjoyable. .

FIG. 546 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the sound mode when the 97th special symbol lottery results in a big win after the big win. As shown in Figure 546, in the 96th deviation variation, the first suggestive effect is displayed and the playback time for one variation (4.5 seconds) is displayed, as in Figures 545 (a) and (b). is reproduced (output). Then, in synchronism with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds as the display mode, and the fluctuation stop sound is reproduced (output) as the voice mode. After that, when the 97th special symbol variation display (jackpot variation) is executed, as shown in FIG. 546, three suggested performances are simulated during the variation display period of one jackpot variation. , at the end of each suggestive effect, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a pseudo manner. In addition, as shown in FIG. 546, in synchronism with the pseudo suggestive effect, the fluctuation display BGM and the fluctuation stop sound are pseudo output (reproduced). Then, in the fourth suggestive effect, the effect that the door 806 is successfully destroyed is displayed, and a big win is announced. After the fluctuation stop period (0.5 seconds) of the big win fluctuation has passed, the big win is displayed and the display mode for the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the BGM for the opening of the big win is played. output.

In addition, in the 24th embodiment, when the jackpot is hit during the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion production, the same period as when all the special symbols lottery during the production period of the probability variation continuation suggestion production is lost The variation time of the jackpot is set so that the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is ended. For example, when the 97th special symbol lottery after the big win shown in FIG. A fluctuation time of 14.5 seconds, which is the sum of stop display periods (0.5 seconds×2), is set. As a result, the same display mode and performance mode as during the losing variation can be used in the pseudo suggestive performance and the pseudo stop display of the third symbol executed during the big win variation, so the display mode and sound can be used. Modification variations can be minimized. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

In this way, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is not achieved during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestive effect (four consecutive failures), the voice mode (variable BGM) is output in units of variable display. By doing so, even if the number of held balls becomes 0 during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the voice mode and the display mode from being deviated after that. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the production effect in the variable probability continuation suggestion production. In addition, when the jackpot is achieved during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestive performance, the suggestive performance for the number of unexecuted times at the time of winning the jackpot is simulated during one big win variation. By constructing in this way, even when a big win is won, the variable probability continuation suggestion effect can be confirmed to the end, so that the player's interest can be improved. In addition, since it is configured to notify the jackpot in the same manner (the manner of destroying the door 806) as the manner of notifying that the probability variable state continues, it is possible to expect the jackpot when the door 806 is destroyed. can. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the expectation for the variable probability continuation suggestion effect.

<Electrical configuration in the twenty-fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 547, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. Here, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-fourth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-third embodiment only in that the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202qb are partially changed. . Therefore, only changes in the variation pattern selection table 202qb will be described here, and description of other details of the configuration of the ROM 202 will be omitted.

FIG. 547(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection 24 table 202rb in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 547(a), the variation pattern selection 24 table 202rb in the twenty-fourth embodiment suggests the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb in the twenty-third embodiment (see FIG. 492(a)). The difference is that a production table 202r1 is added. This suggestive effect table 202r1 is referred to for selecting a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) for indicating the special symbol lottery result of the 96th to 99th special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the variable probability continuation suggestive effect. data table. That is, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the first to 95th special symbol lottery is executed after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation/time reduction table 202qb2, and the 96th to 99th When the lottery for the special symbol of the time is executed, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the suggestion effect table 202r1. After the 100th time, the variation pattern is determined by referring to either the normal table 202qb1 or the probability variable/shortening time table 202qb2 according to the game state.

FIG. 547(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the suggestion rendering table 202r1. As shown in FIG. 547(b), the table for suggestive effect 202r1 is selected for each special symbol lottery result (win/fail judgment result) and the special symbol lottery number (96 times to 99 times) after the big hit. A variation pattern is associated with and defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), the success or failure determination result is a big hit, and the number of lotteries of special symbols is 96 times, the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 A special variation A is defined as a variation pattern in association with a variation time of 19.5 seconds regardless of the value of . This variation time of 19.5 seconds is the sum of the variation time (4.5 seconds x 4) and the stop display period of 3 times (0.5 seconds x 3) is the time that matches That is, it is composed of a period during which it is possible to execute four (pseudo) loss fluctuations and fluctuation stoppages, including the fluctuation stop period of the actual jackpot fluctuations. For this reason, after the start of the probability variation continuation suggestion production, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, by executing the pseudo variation display four times in the jackpot variation, the probability variation continuation suggestion production and the normal probability variation continuation suggestion production Similarly, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect four times.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), the success or failure determination result is a big hit, and the number of times of lottery of special symbols is 97 times, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 Therefore, as a variation pattern, a special variation B with a variation time of 14.5 seconds is associated and defined. This variation time of 14.5 seconds is the sum of the variation time (4.5 seconds x 3) and the stop display period of two times (0.5 seconds x 2) is the time that matches That is, it is composed of a period during which (pseudo) loss fluctuation and fluctuation stop can be executed exactly three times, including the fluctuation stop period of the actual jackpot fluctuation. Therefore, after the start of the probability variation continuation suggesting performance, when the first lottery for the special pattern is lost and the second lottery results in a big win, pseudo-variation display is executed three times in the big win variation. By doing so, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect four times in combination with one deviation variation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), the success or failure determination result is a big hit, and the number of lotteries of special symbols is 98 times, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 However, as a variation pattern, a special variation C with a variation time of 9.5 seconds is associated and defined. This variation time of 9.5 seconds corresponds to the sum of the variation time (4.5 seconds x 2) of 3 times of deviation variation in the probability variation continuation suggestion production and the stop display period of 1 time (0.5 seconds) It is time to In other words, it is composed of a period in which it is possible to execute two (pseudo) loss fluctuations and fluctuation stoppages, including the fluctuation stop period of the actual jackpot fluctuations. For this reason, after the start of the probability variation continuation suggestion production, if the first and second special symbol lotteries are lost and the third lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-variation display will be displayed in the big win variation. By executing it twice, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect four times in combination with the two deviation fluctuations.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 547(b), the success/failure determination result is a big hit, and the number of lotteries for special symbols is 99 times. Therefore, as a variation pattern, a special variation D with a variation time of 4.5 seconds is associated and defined. Since this 4.5 second variation time consists of the same variation time as the deviation time, by executing the suggestive performance in the same way as the deviation time, the suggestive performance for 4 fluctuations is executed without discomfort. be able to.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), if the success or failure determination result is out, regardless of the number of lotteries of special symbols, the fluctuation time is 4.5 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. It is For this reason, the suggestion performance for 5 seconds can be executed every time the lottery for the special pattern is lost 96 times to 99 times after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the variable probability continuation suggestion performance. Therefore, since the variable probability continuation suggesting effect can be executed every time with the same effect time, it is possible to realize a more easily understandable effect mode for the player.

Thus, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, whether or not a jackpot occurs during execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, the total fluctuation time (and stop display time) until the variable probability continuation suggestion effect ends is configured to be 20 seconds. By configuring in this way, the effect period of the variable probability continuation suggestive effect can be fixed each time, so that the effect can be provided that is easier for the player to understand.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the production period of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect was fixed to 20 seconds, but the production period is not necessarily limited to 20 seconds, and a specific number of times (4 times) of the suggestion effect can be executed, it may be longer or shorter than 20 seconds.

Next, referring to FIG. 548, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 548(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 548(a), the ROM 222 in the twenty-fourth embodiment has a playback speed selection table 222ra added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-third embodiment (see FIG. 495(a)). is different. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 in the twenty-third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The reproduction speed selection table 222ra indicates the remaining long-pressing period (A) required to increase the gauge number to the maximum and starting (resuming) the long-pressing during execution of the long-pressing effect (see FIG. 542). 10 is a data table that defines data for selecting the reproduction speed of the effect mode (display mode and sound mode) during the long press according to the remaining long press effective period (B) at the point in time. The specified contents of the reproduction speed selection table 222ra will be described with reference to FIG. 548(b).

FIG. 548(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the reproduction speed selection table 222ra. As shown in FIG. 548(b), the reproduction speed selection table 222ra contains the remaining long-pressing period (A) required to increase the gauge number to the maximum and The reproduction speed (update speed) of the display mode and the audio mode is defined in association with each correspondence relationship with the remaining long-press valid period (B). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 548(b), when B is longer than A (that is, by continuing to press and hold until the end of the long-press valid period, the number of gauges increases to the maximum). (when it is possible to play back), 1× speed is selected as the playback speed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 548(b), when B is shorter than A and the duration is 2/3 or more of A, 1.5 times speed is selected as the playback speed. is configured as Also, when B is less than ⅔ of A and more than half of A, double speed is selected as the playback speed. On the other hand, if B is less than half the length of A, 1× speed is selected as the playback speed.

As described above, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, by setting the reproduction speed with reference to the reproduction speed selection table 222ra, it is possible to increase the number of gauges up to the upper limit within the remaining time of the long-press valid period. It is configured so that the speed can be set. Therefore, in the chance charge effect, the effect can be ended in a state in which the number of gauges has been increased to a greater number, so that a greater number of executions of the chance-up effect can be ensured. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 549, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 549 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 549, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-third embodiment (see FIG. 495(b)). 223rb, a long-press timer 223rc, a long-press execution flag 223rd, a long-press interruption flag 223re, a spirit gauge counter 223rf, a gauge rise timing storage area 223mg, a pseudo fluctuation counter 223rh, and a pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj. The difference is that the .

The long-press effect in-progress flag 223ra is a flag indicating whether or not the long-press effect (see FIG. 542) is being executed. If so, it means that the long press effect is not being executed. This long-press effect flag 223ra is set to ON at the start timing of the long-press effect (see Z5902 in FIG. 551), and is set to OFF when the long-press effective period elapses (see Z5908 in FIG. 551).

The long press period timer 223rb is a timer for measuring the long press valid period in the long press effect, and a counter value corresponding to 10 seconds is set at the start of the long press effect (see Z5903 in FIG. 551). During this long-press valid period, the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is increased by the player's long-press.

The long-pressing timer 223rc is a timer for timing the total period (long-pressing period) during which the player operates the PUSH button 10317 during one long-pressing effect. Basically, until the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG reaches the upper limit value, the gauge number increases by one each time the value of the long-pressing timer 223rc increases by one second. When the playback speed is 1.5x or 2x, the number of gauges increases at a timing corresponding to the playback speed.

The long press execution flag 223rd is a flag for indicating whether or not the player is executing a long press in the long press effect. If the long press execution flag 223rd is ON, it means that the player has executed the long press, and if it is OFF, it means that the long press has not been executed. This long-press execution flag 223rd is set to ON when a new operation (pressing) on the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the long-press valid period (see Z6101 in FIG. 553), and is turned off when the long-press is interrupted. It is set (see Z6002 in FIG. 552).

The long-press interrupt flag 223re is a flag for indicating whether or not the long-press is interrupted during the long-press valid period of 1. If it is on, it means that the long-press is interrupted. , off means the long press is not interrupted. The long-press interruption flag 223re is set to ON when the long-press is interrupted (see Z6002 in FIG. 552), and is set to OFF when the long-press is resumed (see Z6105 in FIG. 553).

The spirit gauge counter 223rf is a counter for counting the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG actually increased by the player executing a long press during the long press effect. The initial value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is set to 0, and each time the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases, the value is updated by adding one (see Z6007 in FIG. 552). At the end of this long press effect, the value of this spirit gauge counter 223rf is overwritten with the value of the charge number counter 223qm (see Z5907 in FIG. 551). As a result, the gauge number actually increased by the player's operation can be reflected in the number of chance-up effects to be executed thereafter.

The gauge rise timing storage area 223mg is a storage area for storing data indicating the remaining period until the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases during execution of the long press effect. While the player is performing a long press in the long press effect, whether or not the number of gauges is increased according to the data stored in the gauge rise timing storage area 223mg and the value of the long press timer 223rc. (See Z6005 in FIG. 552).

The pseudo-fluctuation number counter 223rh is a counter for counting the number of times of the remaining pseudo-fluctuation effects (pseudo-suggestive effects) to be executed during the big hit fluctuation in the probability variable continuation suggestive effects. This pseudo-variation number counter 223rh is the value of the time-saving guarantee number counter 223qg at the time of the big hit when the special symbol lottery hits during the probability variation continuation suggestion effect (that is, the remaining probability variation continuation suggestion effect The number of effects) is set (see Z6202 in FIG. 557), and the value is subtracted by 1 each time the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed (see Z6206 in FIG. 554). By counting the number of times of the pseudo-variation effect by the pseudo-variation number counter 223rh, four times of the suggestive effect can be reliably executed in each probability variable continuation suggestive effect. Therefore, the variable probability continuation suggestion effect can be preferably executed.

The pseudo-fluctuation timer 223rj is a timer for timing the remaining effect period in the pseudo-fluctuation effect. This pseudo-fluctuation timer 223rj is set to a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds each time the start of the pseudo-fluctuation effect is set (see Z6203 in FIG. 557). By managing the effect period of the pseudo-variation effect by the pseudo-variation timer 223rj, the pseudo-variation effect can be executed one or more times corresponding to the variation time of the big hit variation. Therefore, the variable probability continuation suggestion effect can be preferably executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 550 to 557. FIG. In the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the effect update processing 23 (Fig. 519 Z3111) instead of effect update processing 24 (Z3181 in FIG. 550), variable display setting processing 24 (Z3115 in FIG. 532) instead of variable display setting processing 24 (Z3182 in FIG. 555), variable effect setting processing 23 (Fig. Z4204 of 533) is different in that the variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281 of FIG. 556) is executed instead. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 550, the rendering update process 24 (Z3181) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. This effect update process 24 (Z3181) is executed in place of the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) in the twenty-third embodiment, and is similar to the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a process for updating the effect mode of various effects executed during execution of the effect.

Of the rendering update processing 24 (see FIG. 550) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, each processing of Z3201 to Z3206 is the same as each processing of Z3201 to Z3206 of the rendering updating processing 23 (see FIG. 519) in the twenty-third embodiment. process is executed.

In addition, in the effect update process 24 (see FIG. 550) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the process of Z3206 ends, the long press effect process (Z3261) for updating the effect mode in the long press effect (see FIG. 542) is executed. Then, a pseudo-variation setting process (Z3262) for updating the display mode during execution of the pseudo-variation effect (see FIG. 546) is executed, and this process ends. The details of these long press effect processing (Z3261) and pseudo change setting processing (Z3262) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 551 to 553 and 554, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 551, the above-described long press effect processing (Z3261) will be described. FIG. 551 is a flow chart showing the contents of the long press effect processing (Z3261). This long press effect processing (Z3261) is, as described above, a process for updating the effect mode in the long press effect (see FIG. 542).

In the long-press effect processing (Z3261), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the long-press effect (Z5901). If it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the long-press effect (Z5901: Yes), the long-press effect flag 223ra is set to ON (Z5902), and the value of the long-press period timer 223rb corresponds to 10 seconds. A counter value is set (Z5903), and this processing ends. As a result, the long-press valid period in the long-press effect can be set to 10 seconds.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5901, if it is determined that the current timing is not the time to start the long-press effect (Z5901: No), then whether the long-press effect flag 223ra is on (that is, execution of the long-press effect (Z5904). If it is determined that the long-press effect flag 223ra is off (that is, the long-press effect is not being executed) (Z5904: No), there is no possibility of updating the effect mode related to the long-press effect. End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z5904, if it is determined that the long-press effect flag 223ra is ON (that is, the long-press effect is being executed) (Z5904: Yes), the value of the long-press period timer 223rb is subtracted. (Z5905) Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the long press period timer 223rb after subtraction is 0 (Z5906). If it is determined that the value of the long-press period timer 223rb after the subtraction is 0 (Z5906: Yes), it means that it is time to end the long-press effect. By overwriting the value of (Z5907), the number of gauges actually increased (reached) in the long press effect is set as the number of subsequent chance-up effects (Z5907).

When the processing of Z5907 ends, then the values of the long-press effect flag 223ra, the long-press timer 223rc, the long-press execution flag 223rd, the spirit gauge counter 223rf, and the long-press interruption flag 223re are all reset (Z5908), and the chance charge is performed. The end of the effect is set (Z5909), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z5906, if it is determined that the timer value of the long-press period timer 223rb after subtraction is not 0 (not the end timing of the long-press effect) (Z5906: No), the long-press execution flag 223rd is turned on. (that is, the player is pressing and holding the PUSH button 10317) (Z5910). When it is determined that the long press execution flag 223rd is ON (Z5910: Yes), a long press execution process is executed for updating the presentation mode while the player is performing a long press (Z5911). , the process ends. The details of this long press execution processing (Z5911) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5910 that the long press execution flag 223rd is off (that is, the player has not long pressed the PUSH button 10317) (Z5910: No), then It is determined whether or not a press has been detected (Z5912). If it is determined that pressing of the PUSH button 10317 has not been detected (Z5912: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5912 that the push button 10317 has been pressed (Z5912: Yes), long press start processing is executed to set control for the start of long press (Z5913). , the process ends. Details of this long press start process (Z5913) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 552, the processing during long press execution (Z5911) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 552 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long press execution processing (Z5911). As described above, this long-press executing process (Z5911) is a process for updating the effect mode while the player is performing a long-press.

In this long press execution processing (Z5911), first, it is determined whether or not the PUSH button 10317 is pressed (Z6001). The push execution flag 223rd is set to OFF, and the long push interruption flag 223re is set to ON (Z6002). Then, display and audio pause are set (Z6003), and this processing ends. More specifically, a suspend command is set for each of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z6001 that the PUSH button 10317 has been pressed (Z6001: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the long press timer 223rc to update it (Z6004). It is determined whether or not the timer value corresponds to the rise timing of the gauge number of KG (Z6005). In the process of Z6005, if it is determined that the timer value does not correspond to the timing of increasing the gauge number (Z6005: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z6005, if it is determined that the timer value corresponds to the gauge number increase timing (Z6005: Yes), then the value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is smaller than the value of the charge number counter 223qm. (Z6006).

In the processing of Z6006, if it is determined that the value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is smaller than the value of the charge number counter 223qm (Z6006: Yes), the value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is updated by adding 1 (Z6007). Execution of the display mode and voice mode corresponding to the value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is set (Z6008), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z6006 that the value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is greater than or equal to the value of the charge number counter 223qm (Z6006: No), the gauge number cannot be increased any more in this long press effect. Therefore, the execution of the display mode and voice mode corresponding to the current value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is set (Z6009), and this processing ends.

Next, the long press start process (Z5913) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 553 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long press start process (Z5913). The long press start process (Z5913) is, as described above, a process for setting control for the start of the long press by the player.

In the long-press start process (Z5913), first, the long-press execution flag 223rd is set to ON (Z6101), and then it is determined whether or not the long-press interruption flag 223re is ON (Z6104). In the processing of Z6104, if it is determined that the long-press interruption flag 223re is off (Z6104: No), it means that the player has operated the PUSH button 10317 for the first time in the long-press effect, so the gauge rise timing. Data indicating an increase every second is stored in the storage area 223rg (Z6102), the display mode and voice mode for long press are reproduced at 1x speed (Z6103), and then this processing ends. Setting 1x speed for the first long press regardless of the cutting time may make the player feel uncomfortable if the display and sound are played back at 1.5x or 2x speed from the beginning. This is the purpose of suppressing this.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z6104 that the long-press interruption flag 223re is ON (Z6104: Yes), the long-press interruption flag 223re is set to OFF (Z6105), and the value of the charge number counter 223qm×1 second A value (A) is calculated by subtracting the value of the long-pressing timer 223rc from (Z6106). Next, a value (B) is calculated by subtracting the value of the long press period counter from the timer value corresponding to 10 seconds (Z6107), and from the reproduction speed selection table 222ra (see FIG. 548(b)), A and B are calculated. A playback speed corresponding to each value is selected (Z6108). Next, according to the playback speed selected from the playback speed selection table 222ra, the data in the gauge rise timing storage area 223rg is updated (Z6109), and playback of the display mode and voice mode at the selected playback speed is started (Z6110). ), the process ends.

By executing this long-press start processing (see FIG. 553), a suitable playback speed can be set according to the timing at which the long-press is restarted.

Next, the pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z3262) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 554 is a flowchart showing the details of the pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z3262). The pseudo-variation setting process (Z3262) is, as described above, a process for updating the display mode during execution of the pseudo-variation effect (see FIG. 546).

In the pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z3262), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is greater than 0 (Z6201). In the process of Z6201, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is 0 (Z6201: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6201, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is greater than 0 (Z6201: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj is subtracted by 1 (Z6202), and then the pseudo fluctuation after the subtraction It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation timer 223rj is 0 (Z6203). In the processing of Z6203, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj after subtraction is not 0 (Z6203: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6203, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223rj after subtraction is 0 (Z6203: Yes), 5 seconds of pseudo-variation production corresponding to the value of the pseudo-variation number counter 223rh after subtraction is set (Z6204), and the reproduction of BGM for variation for 5 seconds is set (Z6205). Next, the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is decremented by 1 (Z6206), and this processing ends.

By executing this pseudo-variation setting process (see FIG. 554), when a jackpot is won during execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion performance, the pseudo-variation performance can be preferably executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 555, the variable display setting process 24 (Z3182) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 24 (Z3182) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) in the twenty-third embodiment, and is similar to the variable display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) in the twenty-third embodiment. , the third symbol display device 81 is a process for executing a variable effect.

In the processing of Z4201 to Z4203, Z4205, and Z4206 to Z4211 of the variable display setting processing 24 (Z3182), Z4201 to Z4203, Z4205, and Z4206 of the variable display setting processing 23 (see FIG. 532) in the twenty-third embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of Z4211 is executed. In addition, in the variable display setting process 24 (Z3182) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the process of Z4203 is completed, instead of the variable effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the twenty-third embodiment, the variable effect setting process 24 is executed (Z4281). The details of this variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the variable display setting process 24 (see FIG. 555) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, after the process of Z4205 is finished, it is next determined whether or not the value of the pseudo variable timer 223rj is greater than 0 (Z4282). If it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223rj is 0 (Z4282: No), the reproduction of fluctuation BGM corresponding to the fluctuation time is set (Z4283), and the process proceeds to Z4206. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z4282 that the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj is greater than 0 (Z4282: Yes), the process of Z4283 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z4206.

Next, with reference to FIG. 556, the variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. This variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281) is executed instead of the variable effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the twenty-third embodiment, and is similar to the variable effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the twenty-third embodiment. , the third symbol display device 81 is a process for executing a variable effect.

In the processing of Z4301 to Z4307 and Z4310 to Z4313 of this variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281), each of Z4301 to Z4307 and Z4310 to Z4313 of the variable effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the twenty-third embodiment The same processing as the processing is executed. In addition, in the variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, in the process of Z4307, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (Z4307: Yes), during the execution period of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect Since it means that the big win variation is started, the winning process during the suggestion performance is executed for setting the execution of the remaining suggested performance that has not been executed during the big win variation (Z4381), and this processing is finished. The details of the winning process during the suggestion effect (Z4381) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 557 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning process during suggestion effect (Z4381). In this suggestion production winning process (Z4381), first, the winning flag 223qi during right hitting is set to ON (Z6201), and then the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is set to the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh (Z6202 ). When the processing of Z6202 is completed, the timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223rj (Z6203), and the start of the pseudo-variation effect for 5 seconds is set (Z6204), and the variable for 5 seconds is set. By setting the reproduction of BGM (Z6205), the execution of the pseudo-fluctuation effect for 5 seconds is set. Then, the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is decremented by 1 (Z6206), and this processing ends.

By executing the winning process during the suggestion performance (Z4381), it is possible to complete all of the suggestion performances that have not yet been executed during the execution of the jackpot variation, so that the variable probability continuation suggestion performance can be executed more favorably. .

<Regarding control processing of the audio output device in the twenty-fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 558, control processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. The twenty-fourth embodiment is different only in that the interruption command process 24 (Z20221) is executed instead of the interruption command process (see FIG. 540) in the twenty-third embodiment. Details of this suspend command process 24 (Z20221) will be described with reference to FIG. Other control processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 558 is a flowchart showing suspend command processing 24 (Z20221). This suspend command process 24 (Z20221) is a process executed instead of the suspend command process (see FIG. 540) in the twenty-third embodiment described above, and is the same as the suspend command process (see FIG. 540) in the twenty-third embodiment. Second, it is a process for performing control according to the interruption command received from the audio lamp control device 113 .

In the interruption command processing 24 (see FIG. 558) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the interruption command corresponds to the variation BGM (Z20601). If so (Z20601), variation BGM suspension processing for setting suspension and resumption of variation BGM is executed (Z20602), and this processing ends. This variation BGM interruption process (Z20602) is the same as the interruption command process (see FIG. 540) in the twenty-third embodiment. The suspension command processing (see FIG. 540) has already been described in the twenty-third embodiment, so the detailed description of the variation BGM suspension processing (Z20602), which has the same contents as the suspension command processing (see FIG. 540), will be omitted. do.

Also, in the processing of Z20601, if it is determined that it is not the interruption command corresponding to the BGM for variation (Z20601: No), the audio mode (output for long-press effect) that is reproduced (output) during the long-press effect is interrupted. Or it means that it is a suspend command for resuming, so next, whether the current suspend command is a command indicating the start of suspension (a command based on the player suspending the long press) or not determine. In the processing of Z20603, if it is determined that the command indicates the start of interruption (Z20603: Yes), data indicating the playback position of the long-press effect sound being played is stored in the playback position storage area 303b (Z20604). , set interruption of reproduction of long-press effect sound (Z20605), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z20603, if it is determined that it is not the interruption command indicating the start of interruption (that is, the interruption command indicating the resumption of the long-press effect sound) (Z20603: No), then the playback position is determined. The data stored in the storage area 302b is read (Z20606), and the reproduction of the long-press effect sound is resumed from the reproduction position indicated by the read data at the reproduction speed notified by the interruption command (Z20607), End this process.

By executing this interruption command process 24 (see FIG. 558), the long-press effect sound can be interrupted and resumed accurately in synchronization with the timing at which the player interrupts and resumes the long-press effect during execution of the long-press effect. can be set to Therefore, the long press effect can be executed more preferably.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment is configured to be able to execute a long-press effect for prompting the player to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (operation of specific operation content). When this long-pressing effect is executed, an effect is executed in which the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is increased in stages according to the duration of the long-pressing. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel presentation mode that affects the number of gauges (the number of chance-up presentations to be executed thereafter) according to the player's operation content (duration of long press). can be further improved. In addition, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, while the player is performing a long press, a voice mode is output in synchronization with the display of the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG. That is, each time the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases, a voice mode corresponding to the increased gauge number is output. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the player interrupts the long press in the long press effect, the voice reproduction position is stored. It is configured so that the sound is output from the playback position that has been set. With this configuration, the timing at which the gauge number increases and the timing at which the voice mode switches can be matched (synchronized) regardless of whether or not the long press is interrupted. can be set more suitably.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the long press is resumed in the long press effect, the remaining gauge up to the maximum number of gauges that can be increased in the long press effective period and the current long press effect number is determined, and the update speed (playback speed) of the voice mode and display mode during the subsequent long press is varied according to the determination result. That is, if the remaining long-press valid period is short, the speed is set to 1.5x or 2x, so that the number of gauges can be increased to the maximum possible within the valid period. are doing. By configuring in this way, each long-press effect can be ended in a state in which a larger number of gauges is accumulated. Therefore, since a state can be created in which more chance-up effects can be executed after that, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the 24th embodiment, as in the 23rd embodiment described above, a series of story-like productions (probable variable continuation suggestion production) are executed over the 96th to 99th variable display period after the end of the jackpot. It is configured to In addition, during the execution period of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect, it is configured to set the voice mode and the display mode in units of variable display. In other words, instead of setting the display mode and the voice mode over four variations of the variation time, the display mode and the voice mode are set so that the display mode and the voice mode end at the variation time set at the start of the variation for each variation. . By configuring in this way, even if the number of held balls becomes 0 during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggesting effect, it is possible to prevent the voice mode and the display mode from being deviated after that. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the production effect in the variable probability continuation suggestion production.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the number of pending balls becomes 0 during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, the variable probability continuation suggestion effect is interrupted (demonstration display is displayed). It is not something that can be done. For example, even when the hold becomes 0, a pseudo variable display effect may be executed, and the display mode and sound mode for the suggestive effect may be set accordingly. By configuring in this way, the variable probability continuation suggesting effect can be configured to be difficult to be interrupted, so that the effect with a better tempo can be realized. It should be noted that the pseudo variable display effect may be executed only when the result of the effect has already been determined. More specifically, the game state is a time saving state, and only when it is confirmed that the 100th special symbol lottery is executed to shift to the normal state, the variable probability continuation suggestion effect is simulated. may be configured to end at As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contradiction between the content of the presentation and the actual behavior, so that a more suitable mode of presentation can be realized.

<Modification of 24th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 559, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment described above will be described. In the twenty-fourth embodiment described above, in the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, the configuration is such that the voice mode and the display mode are set in variable display units. On the other hand, in this modification, at the timing of setting a new effect, the effect mode (display mode and effect mode) is collectively performed up to a range that is reliably and continuously executed according to the situation of the reserved ball. It was configured to be set by In this case, the configuration is such that the continuous display mode and effect mode are set over the range of continuous execution. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance from being interrupted in units of variable display, so that it is possible to realize a performance mode with a better tempo.

The correspondence relationship between the audio mode and the display mode in this modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 559 is a diagram showing the corresponding relationship between the display mode and the voice mode when the suspension becomes 0 at the time when the second suggestion effect in the probability variable continuation suggestion effect is set in this modification. As shown in FIG. 559, at the start of the first suggestive effect, in a situation where there is one suspended ball, the display mode and audio mode for the variable display and the variable display corresponding to the suspended ball are changed. Configured to be set collectively. That is, as shown in FIG. 559, the execution of suggestive effects 1 and suggestive effects 2 is set, and BGM for variation of reproduction time over two times of variable display is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further emphasize the story of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. After entering the fluctuation stop state, the demonstration display is set, the voice mode is stopped, and the execution of the suggestive effect is resumed with the new start winning as a trigger, as in the twenty-fourth embodiment described above. be.

In this way, by setting the voice mode up to the suggestive effect in the range where the execution is confirmed, the story of the variable probability continuation suggestive effect can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment and its modification described above, the BGM played during the execution period of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect was configured to end in units of variable display, but it is not limited to this. do not have. For example, at the start of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, a predetermined BGM loop is set (that is, the playback is started without determining the end timing), and it is determined that the pending ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect. In this case, a good playback position (for example, a playback position where the melody changes) is determined within a predetermined range before and after the end timing of the last variation display (for example, within one second before and after the end). Then, the display mode may be set so that the performance is interrupted at the well-determined reproduction position, and the BGM may be interrupted. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to set the BGM in units of variable display, so that the processing load during execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect can be reduced.

<25th embodiment>
Next, the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 560 to 579. FIG. In the twenty-third and twenty-fourth embodiments described above, an operation means (PUSH button 10317) that can be operated by a player is provided, and an operation to the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is determined to be effective within an operation valid period. By operating the operation means (PUSH button 10317), it is possible to execute an operation effect that changes the effect mode of the effect being executed. More specifically, by operating the operation means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times within the effective period of operation, it is possible to execute a continuous operation effect (so-called repeated hit effect) that changes the effect mode in stages. .

This continuous hit effect is configured to suggest that the more the effect mode is changed, the more advantageous the player is to be awarded a privilege (for example, a special symbol lottery jackpot). Each time the button 22 is pressed, it is determined whether or not to change the performance mode, and when it is determined that the performance mode is to be varied, the continuous hitting performance is controlled so as to vary the performance mode. there were.

However, in the continuous hit effect in each of the above-described embodiments, when the player willingly operates (presses) the PUSH button 10317, the variable number of times of the effect mode reaches the upper limit number early, and the remaining operation is effective. There is a problem that no matter how many times the PUSH button 10317 is operated (depressed) within the time period, the effect state does not change. In other words, in the continuous hit effect executed in each of the above-described embodiments, unless the player presses the PUSH button 10317 a plurality of times, the effect mode cannot be varied up to the upper limit number of times. When the PUSH button 10317 is operated immediately, there is a problem that the period in which the effect mode is not changed continues, and the player loses motivation to operate the PUSH button 10317 .

On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the variable range (variable number of times or variable value) of the presentation mode is limited according to the progress of the valid operation period. With this configuration, even if the same operation is performed on the operating means within the valid period of operation, the variable content of the presentation mode based on the operation can be changed according to the progress of the valid period of operation. can be different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 during the operation valid period in addition to the operation contents of the PUSH button 10317 executed during the operation presentation. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the content of restrictions for limiting the variable range of the presentation mode is configured to be scenario managed according to the progress of the operation effective period, and a plurality of scenarios with different contents are configured as the scenario types. It is configured to select one scenario type from the scenario types. Specifically, a scenario type in which the variable range of the presentation mode reaches the upper limit only in the first operation valid period, which is the first half of the operation valid period, or the variable range of the presentation mode is limited during the first operation valid period. , a scenario type, etc., in which the variable range of the presentation mode reaches the upper limit in a second operation valid period later than the first operation valid period can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to easily vary the degree of variation of the presentation mode based on the number of operations of the operation means during the valid operation period and the operation timing according to the set scenario type. Variations can be easily diversified.

Therefore, compared to the conventional structure that determines whether or not to change the presentation mode each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, it is possible to provide regularity to the variation pattern of the presentation mode within the operation valid period. For example, by differentiating the type of scenario that is set according to the determination result of whether or not a privilege is granted, the variable number of times of the presentation mode reaches the upper limit number of times, i.e., A player can be made to easily predict the performance result of the current operation performance according to the variable state of the performance mode, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the variable amount of the rendering mode that can be varied according to one operation of the PUSH button 10317 is also limited. Specifically, based on the operation of the PUSH button 10317, it is configured to execute an operation effect in which the effect mode can be varied in five stages. The variable amount is limited so that the presentation mode is variable only by the number of stages. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to intentionally operate the PUSH button 10317 multiple times during the continuous hitting effect.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment described above in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in Section 24. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the twenty-fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding production content in the 25th embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 560 to 562, the contents of characteristic effects among the various effects executed in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the content of the continuous hit effect (operation effect) is different from that of the twenty-fourth embodiment described above, and is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous hit effect. The display mode to be displayed is also different in that it is made different according to the repeated hitting effect to be executed. In describing the contents of the presentation of the twenty-fifth embodiment, the detailed description of the contents that are the same as those of the twenty-fourth embodiment will be omitted. Further, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, a description will be given of the display mode when the continuous hit effect is executed. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, a waiting period for informing the player that an effect for operating the operating means is to be executed and a An operation valid period is set for determining whether the operation is valid, an execution period during which the display mode (rendering mode) is changed based on the operation result of the operation means, and based on the operation result of the operation means during the execution period A result period for notifying the performance result of the repeated hitting performance is divided, and the standby performance is executed during the standby period, the repeated hitting period performance during the execution period, and the result performance during the result period.

FIG. 560(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the standby effect executed during the standby period of the repeated hit effect period in which the above-described repeated hit effect is executed. This standby effect is an effect executed before the operation valid period is set, and is an effect for informing the player in advance that the operation valid period will be set. By configuring in this way, it is easy to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operator fails to notice that the operation effective period has been set and forgets to operate the operation means (frame button 22), or cannot perform a desired operation. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 560(a), in the twenty-fifth control example, when the standby effect is executed, a An image NG is displayed in a display mode indicating that the operation means to be operated is the PUSH button 10317 and that the operation to be executed by the player during the valid operation period is a continuous hit operation. More specifically, an image NG composed of an image simulating the PUSH button 10317 and characters of "Consecutive hits" is displayed. It should be noted that during the standby effect, the operation effective period is not set, and even if the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317), the effect mode does not change. On the other hand, a mode prompting the user to operate the operation means (PUSH button 10317) (for example, the word "press" or an image of an arrow pointing upward to an image imitating the PUSH button 10317) is displayed. There is no

In addition, on the left side of the image NG when viewed from the front, the character 801 is displayed in a state of wearing the initial mode of spirit (aura). A fighting spirit gauge KG is displayed in which the number of gauges for indicating the degree of fighting spirit accumulation based on the operation is displayed in five stages. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that by repeatedly hitting the PUSH button 10317, an effect of increasing the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG will soon be executed.

In addition, in a display area 805 displayed above the character 801, characters "waiting for repeated hits" are displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the current state is the state before the operation effective period was set. In addition, the text "2 seconds left until the start of repeated button presses" is displayed in the display area 803 .

Although the detailed description will be given later, the continuous hit production is set as a variation production pattern selected at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is started, and the standby production is executed (the standby period is set). Timing, continuous hit period production is executed (execution period is set) timing, result production is executed (result period is set), the elapsed time of special symbol fluctuation (elapsed time of fluctuation production) It is defined accordingly.

Therefore, based on the elapsed time of the special symbol variation (the elapsed time of the variation effect), it is possible to determine after how many seconds the continuous hit period effect will be executed. can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who has grasped the effect contents of the standby effect easily understand not only that the continuous hitting period effect in which the operation effective period is set will be executed, but also the execution timing thereof. Although detailed description is omitted, the remaining time display of the waiting period (remaining time display until the repeated hitting period effect is executed) displayed in the display area 803 during the waiting period is displayed in units of seconds. Further, the display timing indicating that there is no remaining time, i.e., 0 seconds, is configured to be slightly before (0.5 seconds before) the execution timing of the consecutive hitting period effect. ing.

By configuring in this way, when the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is operated (continuous hitting operation) when the remaining time display displayed in the display area 803 during the standby effect becomes 0 seconds, The player can be made to operate the PUSH button 10317 immediately after the operation valid period is set. The timing indicated by the remaining period display may be set based on the timing at which the repeated hit period effect is executed (the timing at which the operation valid period is set). The timing at which the effective period is set) may be shown as it is, or the timing (for example, 0.5 seconds later). In addition, without being based on the timing at which the continuous hit period effect is executed (the timing at which the operation valid period is set), the end timing of the standby effect, and the timing when the elapsed time from the execution timing of the standby effect is a predetermined time can be configured to

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the timing at which the repeated hit period effect is executed is configured to be predictable by the player using the number of seconds, but the timing at which the repeated hit period effect is executed is not limited to this. is approaching, for example, a mode in which the balloon gradually inflates and when it bursts, a continuous hit period effect is executed, or a predetermined moving body is at the first position It may also be possible to use a mode or the like indicating that the continuous hit period effect is executed when the moving body gradually approaches the second position from the beginning and reaches the second position. In other words, it is sufficient if the player can understand (predict) the timing at which the consecutive hitting period effect is executed according to the update status of the display mode displayed in the display area 803 during the standby effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 560(b), the display mode during the continuous hit period effect in which the operation valid period is set will be described. FIG. 560(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the continuous hitting period effect. This continuous hit period effect is a effect executed in a state where the operation effective period is set, and includes a first effect for notifying the player that the operation effective period has been set, and a game effect. A second effect in which the effect mode is varied based on the operation of the operating means (PUSH button 10317) by the player, and a second effect for indicating that the player has operated the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period. 3 effects are executed at least.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the first effect that the operation effective period is set. In addition, since the effect mode of the second effect can be changed according to the operation to the operation means, the player can be actively operated the operation means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times. In addition, by executing the third effect, when the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period, even if the effect mode of the second effect does not change, the operation means can be operated. The player can easily understand that the operation has been effectively accepted.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is operated during the operation valid period, a predetermined variable lottery is executed, and when the variable lottery is won, It is configured such that a variable condition for varying the effect mode of the second effect is established. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times during the valid period of operation, a situation may occur in which the effect mode of the second effect is not changed.

In this way, the effect mode of the second effect is not necessarily changed when the number of times of operation to the operation means reaches a certain number, but when the variable lottery executed based on the operation to the operation means is won. When the performance mode of the second performance is configured to be variable, at what timing the second performance changes for the player, and to what stage the performance mode is variable in this continuous hitting performance. can be made difficult for the player to predict, and the performance effect can be enhanced. However, if the variable lottery is not won for a long period of time despite operating the operating means a plurality of times, the effect mode of the second effect is not changed for a long period of time. Due to the failure of the pachinko machine 10, there is a problem that it is thought that the operation to the operation means is not effectively accepted, and the motivation to operate the operation means is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the third effect for indicating that the player has operated the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the valid operation period can be executed, Even if the variable lottery is not won, the player can easily grasp that the operation to the operation means is effectively accepted, so that the player's motivation to operate is reduced. can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 560(b), when the continuous hitting period effect is executed, an image NG for prompting the continuous hitting operation of the PUSH button 10317 is displayed near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. . More specifically, an image simulating the PUSH button 10317, the characters "continuously hit", and a plurality of arrow images for prompting the user to press the PUSH button 10317 multiple times are displayed. Then, in the display area 805, characters of "Beat up your spirit with repeated hits!" are displayed. These displays allow the player to easily understand that the current operation validity period is set. In other words, the display mode described above corresponds to the first effect executed during the repeated hitting period effect.

Furthermore, in the display area 803, the remaining period of the execution period (remaining period of the operation effective period) during which the consecutive hitting period effect is executed is displayed. As a result, the player can be informed of the length of the execution period of the continuous hitting period presentation in an easy-to-understand manner. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the remaining time is displayed in seconds so that the player can understand the remaining period (the remaining period of the valid operation period) of the continuous hitting period effect. A configuration other than this may be used, and a mode that allows the player to understand that the end timing of the continuous hit period presentation (operation valid period) is approaching, for example, a balloon gradually inflates and bursts when repeated hits A mode indicating that the period effect ends, or indicating that the repeating period effect ends when a predetermined moving body gradually approaches the second position from the first position and the moving pair reaches the second position. A mode or the like may be used. In other words, it is sufficient if the player can understand (predict) the timing at which the repeated hitting period effect ends according to the update status of the display mode displayed in the display area 803 during the repeated hitting period effect.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, 10 seconds is set as the effect period (operation effective period) of the repeated hit period effect. In the example shown in FIG. 560(b), the repeated hit period effect is executed. 3.5 seconds have passed since (after the operation valid period was set), that is, the display mode at the time when the remaining time of the continuous hitting period effect (operation valid period) is 6.5 seconds is displayed. By repeatedly hitting the PUSH button 10317 during the operation effective period (3.5 seconds) that has already passed, the spirit gauge KG increases to the second stage gauge number, and the spirit (aura) that the character 801 is wearing is displayed. ) is displayed in a mode corresponding to the gauge number (a mode larger than the initial state (see FIG. 560(a))). In other words, the display mode of the character 801 and the variable mode of varying the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG correspond to the second effect executed during the continuous hitting period effect.

Further, the image simulating the PUSH button 10317 displayed in the image NG is configured to be displayed in a variable manner based on the player's operation (pressing) of the PUSH button 10317 . Specifically, when the player does not press the PUSH button 10317, the initial display mode shown in FIG. 560(a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 560(b), the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is configured to be displayed in a depressed display mode rather than the initial display mode (see FIG. 560(a)). That is, the variable aspect of the image modeled after the PUSH button 10317 displayed in the image NG corresponds to the third effect executed during the continuous hit period effect. Thus, the player can easily understand that the player's operation to the operation means is effectively accepted even if the period in which the performance mode of the second performance is not changed continues.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when it is detected that the player has operated (pressed) the operation means (PUSH button 10317) in a state where the operation effective period is set, the PUSH displayed in the image NG is displayed. It is configured to display the press display mode as the display mode of the image imitating the button 10317, but if it is possible to notify the player that the operation to the operation means is effectively determined, However, other configurations may be used. For example, the pressed display mode continues for 0.5 seconds at the shortest, and the initial display mode displayed after the pressed display mode also continues for 0.5 seconds at the shortest. You can control the display to In this case, for 0.5 seconds after the condition for changing the display mode is established, it may be configured not to determine whether the condition for changing the display mode is established. With this configuration, even if the operation means is operated a plurality of times in a short period of time, for example, even if the button is pressed at intervals of 0.1 seconds, the display image displayed in the image NG is displayed in the initial state. Since the display mode and the press display mode are alternately variably displayed at an interval (0.5 second interval) that is visible to the player, the operation of the operation means by the player is effectively accepted. can be easily understood by the player.

Furthermore, as the third effect executed during the continuous hit period effect described above, not only the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 but also output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 487) It may also be configured to be able to execute a voice effect capable of notifying that the player's operation to the operating means is being effectively accepted by voice. In this case, the execution intervals may be different between the display effect and the sound effect. , and the voice effect may be executed according to the actual operation interval of the operation means.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the above-described third effect, that is, the effect mode of the effect for notifying that the player's operation to the operation means is effectively accepted, is the remaining period of the operation valid period, Although the same effect mode is set regardless of the effect mode (variable situation) of the second effect, it is not limited to this, and the remaining period of the operation valid period, the effect mode of the second effect ( For example, the shorter the remaining period of the operation valid period, the easier it is for the player to understand the variable situation of the third effect effect mode. Alternatively, the effect mode (variable state) of the second effect may be changed as the effect mode (variable state) approaches the upper limit, the effect of the third effect may be changed. The effect mode may be changed so that the player can easily understand the variable state of the mode, or the effect mode may be changed so as to make it difficult for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 561, variable contents of the second effect during the continuous hit period effect will be described. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is possible to control the variable degree of the second effect during the continuous hit period effect. Specifically, the upper limit that can be reached by the current continuous hit effect is determined in advance, and the internal value can be determined up to the predetermined upper limit according to the progress of the operation valid period. are doing. Then, when the variable condition of the second effect is established, the effect mode of the second effect is varied with the internal value at that time as the upper limit. By configuring in this way, the variable condition of the second effect is satisfied a plurality of times immediately after the continuous hit period effect is executed, and the second effect reaches the upper limit value with a large remaining period of the operation effective period. variability can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, one scenario can be set from a plurality of scenarios in which the internal value transition states are different, as the scenario indicating the degree of internal value transition described above. As a result, the variable degree of the second effect during the continuous hitting period effect can be changed according to the set scenario, so that the player can enjoy the effect without getting bored.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the selection ratio of the scenario indicating the degree of transition of the internal value varies depending on the type of variation pattern in which the continuous hit effect is executed, that is, the result of the special symbol lottery that is the target of the effect. I'm letting In other words, when the continuous hit effect is executed as part of the big hit fluctuation effect in which the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and when the repeated hit effect is executed as part of the lost fluctuation effect in which the special symbol lottery is lost and won. , and different scenarios can be easily set. By configuring in this way, the player is made to assume the set scenario type based on the variable situation of the second effect during the continuous hit effect, and based on the result of the assumption, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is determined. It is possible to predict. Therefore, it is possible to make the player, especially the player who wants to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery as soon as possible, interested in the performance contents of the continuous hitting performance and to operate the operation means willingly. can improve the interest of

FIG. 561(a) shows a display mode in which the second effect (the display mode of the spirit gauge KG and the effect for varying the display mode of the character 801) has reached the internal value during the continuous hitting period effect. It is a diagram. As described above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the scenario is managed so that the internal value shifts (increases) in accordance with the lapse of the operation effective period set during the continuous hit period effect. It is configured such that the display mode of the second effect can be varied to the upper limit. Therefore, when the display mode of the second effect is variable to the display mode corresponding to the internal value, the effect mode of the second effect is changed until the internal value is updated (increased) according to the passage of time. It becomes a non-variable period (variable interruption period).

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 561(a), when the variable interruption period starts, the display mode is different from the normal execution period (the period during which the continuous hit period effect is executed). , in the current repeated hitting period effect, the effect mode of the second effect may be further varied, that is, it is configured to suggest that the internal value can be changed (updated). As a result, even if the display mode of the second effect is not changed for a predetermined period (period until the internal value is updated), the player is motivated to change the effect mode of the second effect. can be made to operate the operation means (PUSH button 10317).

Here, with reference to FIG. 561(a), the display mode during the variable suspension period will be described. The display mode during the variable interruption period is different from the display mode during the normal execution period (see FIG. 560(b)) in that the display mode of the image NG and the display mode of the display area 805 are different. . Other display modes are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same display modes are omitted.

More specifically, in the image NG, an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in a slightly reduced size compared to the display mode during normal execution (see FIG. 560(b)). Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the command for indicating that the current time is the variable suspension period is output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the PUSH button 10317 is pressed by the display control device 114. As a control for displaying the simulated image, it is configured to execute control to make the scale smaller than the normal time (for example, the scale rate is 100% during normal time, and the scale rate is 90% during variable interruption). ing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set a display mode different from the display mode during the normal execution period without using dedicated image data for indicating that it is in the variable suspension period. The amount of image data can be reduced. In addition, since the display mode of the image NG is changed by changing the scale of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317, the display mode during the variable suspension period and the display mode during the normal execution period are relatively different. It is possible to make it easier for a player who is playing a game to a degree that can be discriminated to recognize that the current is a variable interruption period based on the display mode of the image NG than other players, and Added value can be given to a player who has been playing for a long time.

Also, in the display area 805, the characters "Keep hitting more!" are displayed. By configuring in this way, even if the display mode of the second effect is not changed for a predetermined period (period until the internal value is updated), the effect mode of the second effect is variable for the player. The operation means (PUSH button 10317) can be voluntarily operated.

As described above, the display mode of the image NG and the display mode of the display area 805 described with reference to FIG. The state in which the internal value is updated during the remaining period, in other words, corresponds to a suggestion mode for suggesting to the player that the state in which the performance mode of the second performance can be varied after a while.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the current internal value is the same as (or less than) the upper limit value set for the continuous hit period effect being executed, and if it is determined that they are not the same (or less). 561(a) is determined to be a variable interruption period, and the suggested mode shown in FIG. 561(a) is displayed. It may be configured to display the above-described suggestive mode even in a part of the case where it is determined that it is the same as . As a result, even when the effect mode of the second effect is varied up to the display mode corresponding to the upper limit value, the player is motivated to expect that the effect mode of the second effect is further varied. The operation means (PUSH button 10317) can be operated. In this case, if the current internal value is not the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous hit period effect in progress, the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the repeated hit period effect. It is preferable to configure such that the suggested mode described above is more likely to be displayed than in some cases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation when the suggestive mode is displayed, that is, the degree of expectation that the effect mode of the second effect will be varied from now on, from significantly decreasing.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous hitting period effect being executed, the effect of the second effect When the mode is changed to the display mode corresponding to the internal value, it is possible to execute an upper limit suggestive effect for suggesting to the player that the effect mode of the second effect will not be changed any more in the current continuous hitting period effect. It consists of In this upper limit suggestive effect, the characters "Maybe I can't get any more fired up!?" A display mode is set in which the simulated image is reduced (for example, at a scale of 50%). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the PUSH button 10317 unnecessarily.

Note that the above-described upper limit suggestive effect may be configured to be executable even in a case where it is determined that the current internal value is different from the upper limit value set for the repeated hit period effect being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to leave the possibility of changing the performance mode of the second performance based on the operation to the operation means even in the state where the upper limit suggestion performance is executed, so that the player can In contrast, it is possible to perform an unexpected performance. In this case, it is better if the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous hit period effect that is being executed. It is preferable to configure such that the above-described upper limit suggesting effect is more likely to be executed than when it is not present. As a result, it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the reliability in the case where the upper limit suggestive effect is executed, that is, the reliability in that the effect mode of the second effect will not be changed in the future.

Next, with reference to FIG. 561(b), the display contents displayed when the player does not operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the continuous hitting period effect will be described. FIG. 561(b) schematically shows a display mode when the player has not operated the operation means (PUSH button 10317) even once in a state where 4 seconds have passed since the successive hitting period effect was executed. It is a diagram.

As described above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a scenario is set for shifting (updating) the internal value according to the elapsed time from when the operation effective period is set during the continuous hit effect, and the second effect is produced. When a variable condition for varying the aspect is established, the presentation aspect of the second presentation can be varied within a range whose upper limit is an internal value determined according to the content of the set scenario at that time. had configured. In other words, when the operation effective period is set, the internal value is transferred (updated) regardless of the actual operation status of the operation means.

Then, when the difference between the display value actually displayed (the degree of variation indicated by the effect mode of the second effect) and the internal value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (3 in this embodiment), the continuous hit period effect is activated. It is configured to display a specific display mode (depression promotion mode) as an effect mode (display mode). By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the effect mode (display value) of the second effect is easily variable when the PUSH button 10317 is operated. can be made to operate the PUSH button 10317 willingly.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the scenario type set during the valid period of operation is set to be different depending on whether the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the continuous hit effect is a big win or a loss. there is Therefore, when the continuous hit period effect is executed, the PUSH button 10317 is not intentionally operated, and the type of scenario set for the current repeated hit period effect is changed based on the timing at which the above-described pressing promotion mode is displayed. It is also possible to provide a novel game property of judging and predicting the result of the special symbol lottery based on the judgment result.

Referring to FIG. 561(b), the contents of the press-promoting mode will be specifically described. Please,” is displayed, and the image NG is displayed with “Continuous hits!!”, but the rest is the same. In this way, by setting the pressing promotion mode so as to have a slight difference from the display mode during the normal continuous hitting period effect (see FIG. 560(b)), the game can be played for a long time. Added value can be given to the player who is in the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 561(b), the PUSH button 10317 has not been pressed even once since the operation period effect was executed. ) is the initial state (level 0), and the display mode of the character 801 is also displayed in the initial state (same aura as the initial state).

Next, with reference to FIG. 562, the effect contents of the result effect executed after the continuous hit period effect is completed will be described. FIG. 562 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode of the result effect in the continuous hit effect. This result effect is a effect of displaying the effect result according to the spirit (variable state of the second effect) acquired during the continuous hitting period effect. This is suggestive of the results.

As shown in FIG. 562, when the result effect is executed, the character 801 attacks the target icon 806 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the result for showing the effect result from the destroyed target icon 806 is displayed. An effect in which display 806 is displayed is executed. The example shown in FIG. 562 shows an example in which the result effect is executed in a state where the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG has risen to the fourth level, and the right side of the display screen displays during the continuous hit period effect. The spirit gauge KG that has been displayed is continuously displayed, and the character 801 is also displayed in a display mode (fourth stage aura) corresponding to the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG. Then, in the result display 806, characters of "great chance" are displayed. In addition, in the display area 803, characters of "Attack with accumulated spirit" are displayed as a guide mode for guiding the effect mode of the result effect.

The above-described display content makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the result performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the spirit (gauge number of the spirit gauge KG) accumulated during the continuous hitting period performance. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value set during the continuous hit period production is higher in the repeated hit production corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation that has won the jackpot than the repeated hit production that corresponds to the special symbol fluctuation that has not won the jackpot. It is configured so that it is easy to increase (the variable amount is easy to increase). In the result effect, the effect mode (the attack pattern of the character 801, the display contents of the result display 806a) is changed according to the spirit (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) accumulated during the continuous hitting period effect, not the lottery result of the special symbol. configured to decide.

With this configuration, the player is motivated to increase the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG (to vary more the performance mode of the second performance) during the continuous hitting period performance. It is possible to make the PUSH button 10317 easy to operate, and to enhance the presentation effect. In the present embodiment, the effect mode of the result effect is configured to be determined according to the effect content of the repeated hit period effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The result of the special symbol lottery and the result of the special symbol lottery may be combined to determine the effect mode of the result effect, or the content of the effect during the repeated hit period effect (the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG) and the repeated hit period effect are set. It may be configured such that the effect mode of the result effect is determined based on the difference value between the set upper limit value and the difference value.

In this case, for example, when the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG reaches the 4th level during the continuous hitting period effect, it is determined whether the upper limit value is 4 or 5, and if the upper limit value is 4, It is determined that the PUSH button 10317 has been actively operated during the continuous hitting period effect, and an effect result (for example, display of "great chance") that is advantageous to the player is displayed. It is determined that the PUSH button 10317 is not actively operated during the period effect, and the result of the effect that is more disadvantageous to the player than when the upper limit value is 4 It is preferable to display a character of "chance" indicating that the probability is low. As a result, the player intentionally operates the PUSH button 10317 in order to increase the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG during the continuous hitting period effect (to change the effect mode of the second effect more). can be made easier.

Also, part of the effect mode of the result effect (for example, the display mode of the target icon 806) may be varied according to the number of times the operation means is operated during the continuous hit period effect. In this way, regardless of the degree of increase in the gauge number of the fighting spirit gauge KG, by configuring the effect mode of the result effect to be variable depending on the number of times the operation means is operated, the player can enjoy purely operating the operation means. can be provided to In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so as to determine the effect mode of the result effect according to the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG accumulated during the repeated hitting period effect, but the result effect effect is determined based on other factors. The mode may be determined. For example, the performance mode of the result performance may be determined based on the timing when the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG rises or the type of the set scenario. By configuring in this way, even if the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG accumulated during the continuous hit period production is the same, the production mode of the result production can be changed, so that the production content of the result production can be changed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to be interested in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 563, the flow of the continuous hit effect in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 563 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) and the continuous hit effect. As shown in FIG. 563, in this embodiment, when the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is executed, a predetermined period of special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is performed, and a predetermined After the special pattern variation of the period ends, the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed. By constructing so that the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed through the period during which the special symbol variation is executed in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a large number of special symbol lotteries in a short period of time.

In addition, in order to prevent the player from getting bored with the game while the special figure fluctuation is being executed, it is configured so that the fluctuation performance corresponding to the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation is executed. , based on the performance mode of the variable performance, the player can predict the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery before the result of the special symbol lottery is actually stop-displayed. . By configuring the variable performance to be executable in this manner, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance mode of the variable performance during the special figure fluctuation period, so that it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game.

In this embodiment, as in the 23rd embodiment described above, the result of the special symbol lottery, and, depending on the set game state, the special figure of 2 seconds to 150 seconds as the period during which the special figure fluctuation is executed The variation period is configured to be selected, and FIG. 563 shows an example when a variation time of 60 seconds is set as a special figure variation (see FIG. 563 (a)). When the special figure fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set, the fluctuation effect of 60 seconds which is the same length as the special figure fluctuation time is executed (see FIG. 563(b)). Since the contents of various control processes from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the execution of the variable effect are the same as those of the twenty-third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, a brief description will be given of the flow of determining the effect mode of the variable effect. When the special symbol lottery (discrimination by the discrimination means) is executed by the main control device 110, the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery (the dynamic display of the identification symbol for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means) ) is selected (dynamic display period). Then, a variation pattern command including at least information for indicating the selected variation pattern (dynamic display period) and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (determination result of the determination means) is sent from the main controller 110 for voice lamp control. Output to device 113 .

In the sound lamp control device 113, based on the reception of the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command as a variation effect pattern of the third pattern (identification information) to be displayed (dynamically displayed) by the third pattern display device 81 A variable performance pattern of a period corresponding to the dynamic display period included in is determined, and the variable performance is executed. That is, the effect mode of various variable effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, and the special symbol variation is started. Variation production is executed at the timing.

Then, based on the elapsed time of the special symbol variation (variation performance), the variation performance is executed in the performance mode corresponding to the performance mode of the predetermined variable performance. Also, during the execution of the variable effect, when the variable condition of the effect mode (for example, the operation of the operation means by the player or the reception of the winning information command from the main control device 110) is established, the process of changing the effect mode. is executed.

The example shown in FIG. 563 shows the flow when a variable effect pattern is determined as the variable effect of 60 seconds, in which a continuous hit effect of 20 seconds is executed from the time when 10 seconds have passed. 560 to 562, the effect of each display mode described above is executed. It is a production that can be changed.

The effect period of 20 seconds in which this repeated hit effect is executed is the standby effect (see FIG. 560 (a)). ) is executed (10 seconds), and a waiting period (5 seconds) during which the standby effect (see FIG. 562) is executed. It is configured to set an operation effective period (10 seconds) during which the operation of is determined to be effective.

Next, the flow of determining the effect mode of each effect executed in the repeated hit effect will be described. First, at the timing of determining the entire variable effect pattern, that is, at the start timing of the variable effect, the execution timing of the repeated hit effect and the effect period are determined. Furthermore, the effect mode of the standby effect (see FIG. 560(a)) and the effect mode at the time of execution of the repeated hitting period effect are also determined. That is, the effect mode described above becomes a predetermined effect mode before the continuous hit effect is executed.

Then, when the PUSH button 10317 is operated during the continuous hit period effect (during the operation valid period) and the variable condition of the effect mode is satisfied, the effect mode after the change is determined as the effect mode of the repeated hit period effect, and is determined. 560(b) and 561(a)). In addition, even when the variable condition of the effect mode is established based on the elapsed time of the repeated hit period effect, the effect mode after the change is determined as the effect mode of the repeated hit period effect, and the determined effect mode is displayed (Fig. 561). (b)). In other words, the above-described presentation mode is a presentation mode determined according to the variable condition established during the continuous hitting period presentation.

Finally, the flow of determining the effect mode of the standby effect will be described. The effect mode of the standby effect is configured to be determined when the execution period ends and the standby period is set. Specifically, an effect mode corresponding to the effect mode (gauge number of the spirit gauge KG) when the execution period ends is determined, and the effect corresponding to the determined effect mode is executed for a certain period of time (5 seconds). . That is, the effect mode of the standby effect is a effect mode determined at a predetermined timing in the repeated hit effect, and according to the effect content (the effect content of the repeated hit period effect) until the standby effect is executed among the repeated hit effects It will be a production mode in which different contents are determined by pressing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 563, the period during which the continuous hit effect is executed is composed of three periods: a waiting period, an execution period, and a result period. It may be configured with one or more periods. In this case, for example, the standby period and the execution period may be set repeatedly, and the valid operation period may be set a plurality of times in one repeated hit effect. In addition, it is possible to set an interval period in which a predetermined performance mode is set before the continuous hit effect is executed, between a part of the period constituting the repeated hit effect, for example, between the execution period and the result period. may be configured. By providing the interval period in this way, for example, as a result effect, not only the display effect using the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 but also the movable role object effect using the decorative accessory possessed by the pachinko machine 10 can be performed. In the case of execution, it becomes possible to execute the preparation process for the result production during the interval period, and the result production can be executed smoothly.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the result effect is determined at the timing when the execution period ends. length) is executed, the effect mode of the result effect can be appropriately set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 563, in this embodiment, the length of the execution period and the valid operation period are the same. For example, the effective operation period may be set 0.2 seconds after the execution period is set, or the end timing of the effective operation period may come before the end timing of the execution period. You can Also, the operation valid period may be set multiple times during the execution period.

Next, referring to FIGS. 564 to 566, details of operation to the operation means during the continuous hitting period effect in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and variable conditions of the effect mode of the second effect (variation of the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG) explain the relationship between

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the effective period of operation is set during the continuous hit period presentation, and when the player operates the PUSH button 10317 during the effective period of operation, the operation is determined to be valid. , A variable lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the performance mode of the second performance (the display value indicating the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG) is to be varied, and if the variable lottery wins and wins, the display value indicating the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG. is configured to raise

Furthermore, the upper limit value in the repeated hit period performance is set based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery so that the display value does not rise to a value larger than the upper limit value during the repeated hit period effect. In addition, it is possible to determine an internal value that can be updated (increased) so that the maximum value becomes the upper limit according to the elapsed time of the operation effective period, and when the variable condition of the display value is satisfied, at that time It is configured to update (increase) the display value with the internal value at the upper limit.

In the 25th embodiment, the transition state (transition state) of the internal value updated (increased) during the valid period of the operation is managed by the scenario. By setting one scenario type among the scenario types, the internal value is updated according to the elapsed time of the operation effective period according to the set scenario type.

Here, a detailed description will be given later, but in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as the types of scenarios for updating the internal values, an equal type "scenario 1" in which the internal values increase in proportion to the passage of time; The second half period (6 to 10 seconds) of the operation effective period (10 seconds) is more likely to increase the internal value than the first half period (1 to 5 seconds). ), in which the internal value is more likely to rise in the first half (1 to 5 seconds) than in the second half (6 to 10 seconds). A descending random type "scenario 4" can be set. In this way, by setting one scenario from a plurality of scenario types (scenarios 1 to 4) with different tendencies to shift (update) the internal value, the display value during the continuous hit period effect Various variations can be given to the degree of increase (variable degree) of (the presentation mode of the second presentation), and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, internal value transition data (transition line) is created based on the determined scenario type, the upper limit of the display value, and the length of the operation valid period, and the created It is configured to migrate (update) internal values based on migration data. Therefore, even when different lengths of periods are set as the operation effective period, or when various upper limit values are determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery, transition data corresponding to each pattern is prepared in advance. It is possible to reduce the amount of data used for executing the effect compared to the case.

Furthermore, as described above, since the internal value migration data is created each time the operation valid period is set, additional conditions can be easily set for the internal value migration content (update content). For example, additional conditions that make the start timing of internal value migration (update) different from the setting timing of the operation valid period, additional conditions that change the scenario type in the middle, internal value migration (update ) is provided for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to easily create internal value migration data including the additional condition.

FIG. 564 is a diagram schematically showing an effect pattern during the continuous hit period effect when "scenario 1" is set as the scenario type and "4" is set as the upper limit value. As shown in FIG. 564, during the continuous hit period effect (10 seconds) as the repeated hit effect (see FIG. 564(a)), the operation effective period is set to 10 seconds (see FIG. 564(b)). Then, at the same time as the operation valid period is set, the internal transfer data is set, and the transfer (update) of the internal value is started (see FIG. 564(c)).

FIG. 564(d) is a diagram showing how the player presses the operation means (PUSH button 10317). When the player presses the PUSH button 10317, it turns on, and when the player releases the PUSH button 10317, it turns off. becomes. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is determined that the player has operated the operating means at the timing when the player releases the PUSH button 10317 (timing when the ON state changes to OFF). A lottery is executed as to whether or not the display value is to be varied within the valid period of operation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 564(d), even if the player operates the operation means in a situation where the operation effective period is not set, for example, during the standby period (5 seconds) during which the standby effect is executed, (First operation timing in FIG. 564(d)), the operation is not determined to be valid, and no lottery is performed to determine whether the display value is to be varied.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, at the timing of setting the effect pattern of the variable effect, that is, the timing at which the corresponding special symbol variation is executed, the length of the operation effective period used for the current continuous hit effect and the upper limit value of the display value and a scenario type indicating the internal value transition status are determined, and processing for creating internal value transition data based on the determined various contents is executed.

In the example shown in Fig. 564, a scenario type "scenario 1" is set in which the internal value increases evenly over time, "4" is set as the upper limit value, and "10 seconds" is set as the operation valid period. Based on these settings, internal value transition data for raising the internal value to "4" within 9 seconds from the start is created as internal value transition data. As a result, immediately after the valid operation period is set, the internal value increases evenly, reaches "1" after 2.25 seconds, and reaches "2" after 4.5 seconds. ”, the internal value reaches “3” when 6.75 seconds have passed, and the internal value reaches “4” when 9 seconds have passed.

In this embodiment, the internal value transition data is generated so that the internal value reaches the upper limit value with at least a predetermined period of time (one second) remaining in the operation valid period. . By constructing in this manner, the display value is raised to the upper limit for a player who has a short operation effective period after the internal value reaches the upper limit and is actively operating the operating means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that cannot be done.

A predetermined fixed value (for example, 1 second) may be used as the length of the remaining period from when the internal value is increased to the upper limit until the operation valid period ends, or a set scenario may be used. A value corresponding to the type may be used, a value set at random may be used, or a value corresponding to the length of the operation validity period may be used. In this way, when one length is selected from a plurality of lengths as the length of the remaining period, one of the additional conditions for creating the internal value transition data is the length of the remaining period. should be configured to set

Next, with reference to FIGS. 564(c) to (e), the relationship between the internal value, the operation state of the PUSH button 10317, and the change state of the display value during the continuous hit period effect will be described. Since the internal value has not reached "1" until 2.25 seconds have passed since the operation valid period was set (after the continuous hit period effect is executed), the second and third button operations The displayed value does not change. Then, the fourth button operation executed after 2.25 seconds has passed, that is, the button operation in the state where the internal value has reached "1" (state in which the display value can be changed) changes the display value. In the variable lottery for determining whether or not the prize was won (indicated by a cross mark in the figure), the displayed value does not change in this fourth button operation.

Next, the fifth button operation is executed after 2.25 seconds and before 4.5 seconds, that is, at the timing when the internal value is "1", and a variable lottery wins ( circles in the drawing), the display value is varied from "0" to "1". Here, when the display value is changed from "0" to "1", the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG shown in FIG. ) to the gauge number 1 state (only the bottom frame of the spirit gauge KG is displayed in white), and the display mode of the character 801 is the initial state (shown in FIG. 560(a)). Aura mode) to a mode in which the aura mode is increased by one step.

Here, by the fifth button operation, the internal value "1" and the display value "1" became the same value. , the displayed value cannot rise, so the display mode shown in FIG. 561(a) is displayed. At the time when the sixth button operation is performed, the internal value remains "1". and the display value is not changed. Also, for the seventh button operation, similar to the above-described fourth button operation, the internal value is set to a value larger than the display value, but since the variable lottery is lost and won, the display value is It cannot be changed.

Next, the eighth button operation, like the fifth button operation, wins in the variable lottery, and the display value changes from "1" to "2". After that, based on the transition of the internal value over time, the button operation timing, and the lottery result of the variable lottery, the display value changes from "2" to "3" by the tenth button operation, and the eleventh button operation. button operation changes the display value from "3" to "4".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal value is updated (increased) based on the internal transition data, and the degree of change (increase) of the display value within the operation valid period is limited by the internal value. Since it is configured, it is possible to easily change the display value over the entire operation effective period. Therefore, the display value reaches the upper limit value in the first half of the operation valid period, and the player is made to perform useless operations during the remaining period of the operation valid period, thereby suppressing the player's willingness to play. can do. In addition, in order to prevent the display value from reaching the upper limit value only during the first half of the operation effective period, it is difficult to establish a variable condition for changing the display value with respect to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. By configuring as follows, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the display value does not reach the upper limit value during the operation valid period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 565, description will be given of the effect content when the button operation content by the player is changed from the example shown in FIG. 564 under the same conditions as the example shown in FIG. 564 described above. do. FIG. 565 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the flow of effects when the player does not intentionally operate the operation means during the repeated hitting effects. FIG. 565 is different from FIG. 564 described above in that the button operation content (see FIG. 565(d)) and the variable state of the display value (see FIG. 565(e)) are different. is. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 565(d), when the player does not perform the button operation until 6.75 seconds have passed since the continuous hit period effect was executed, the display value remains “0” and the internal The value will change to "3". In this case, since the difference between the display value and the internal value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (3 or more), the display mode of the press promotion mode shown in FIG. 561(b) is displayed. In this way, by displaying the display mode of the pressing promotion mode, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that pressing the PUSH button 10317 will easily change (increase) the display value. can.

Then, in the second button operation (button operation executed within 6.75 seconds to 9 seconds after the operation valid period is set), the variable lottery wins and the display value changes from "0" to "2". variable to Here, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the variable amount of the display value that can be varied by one button operation is set to two steps. Therefore, when the display value is changed based on the second button operation in which the internal value is "3", the display value is changed only from "0" to "2", which is two steps higher. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to intentionally operate the PUSH button 10317 a plurality of times during the continuous hitting period effect.

In the present embodiment, when a variable condition for varying the display value is satisfied (when a variable lottery is won), if there is a difference of multiple stages between the display value and the internal value, the above-mentioned Although it is configured to vary the display value up to the upper limit of the variable amount, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to determine the variable amount of the display value to be varied by one button operation by lottery. . By configuring in this way, even if there is a difference in multiple stages between the display value and the internal value, it is possible to change the display mode by one stage with one button operation. It is possible to make it easy for the player to experience many events in which the display value changes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 566, a description will be given of an effect pattern during the continuous hit period effect when the scenario type “scenario 2” in which the transition tendency of the internal value is the second half type is set. FIG. 566 is a diagram schematically showing an effect pattern during the continuous hit period effect when "scenario 2" is set as the scenario type and "4" is set as the upper limit value. It should be noted that, among the contents shown in FIG. 566, the detailed description of the parts that are the same as the contents described above with reference to FIG. 564 will be omitted.

When the scenario type "scenario 2" is set, internal value transition data is created in which the internal value rises more rapidly in the second half period than when the scenario type "scenario 1" is set (see Fig. 564). be. In this embodiment, the period until the internal value changes to 1 is set to 2.25 seconds regardless of the set scenario type. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily discerning the currently set scenario type immediately after the continuous hitting period effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 566, when the degree of transition of the internal value indicated by the scenario internal value transition data increases exponentially, while the player operates the operating means a plurality of times, A plurality of internal values may increase while winning the variable lottery executed based on the operation of the means. In this embodiment, when winning the variable lottery, an upper limit is set for the display value that can be increased once. FIG. 566 shows an example in which "2" is set as the upper limit of increase in display value. In other words, even when the display value and the internal value are deviated from each other, the display value can be increased by only two steps at maximum with one variable display. Therefore, when the variable lottery is won by the 11th button operation (operation to the PUSH button 10317), the internal value at that time has increased to "4", but the display value is "1". , the display value becomes "3".

With this configuration, unless the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times during the continuous hitting period effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the display value to rise to the upper limit. , can be made to play games willingly.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 567 to 571, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment differs from the above-described pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third embodiment in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and the part of the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the sound ramp control device 113 are different. The only difference is that they are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 567 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 567, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, an internal scenario table 222sa, a pressing lottery table 222sb, and an upper limit selection table are added to the ROM 222 (see FIG. 495(a)) of the twenty-third embodiment described above. 222sc and a difference upper limit value selection table 222sd are added, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

The internal scenario table 222sa is a data table that is referred to when selecting an internal value transition tendency during the continuous hitting period production, and is configured to enable selection of a plurality of scenario types with different internal value transition tendencies. there is This internal scenario table 222sa, in the basic production mode selection process 25 (see Z4581 in FIG. 579) executed in the production mode selection process 25 (see Z4353 in FIG. 578) to set the variable production, this time (Z6701 in FIG. 579: Yes), it is referred to set the effect mode of the repeated hit effect (see Z6702 in FIG. 579). Then, by using the scenario type selected by referring to the internal scenario table 222sa, internal transition data indicating the transition state of the internal value during the operation effective period set during the current continuous hit effect is created.

Here, the contents defined in the internal scenario table 222sa will be described with reference to FIG. 568(a). FIG. 568(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the internal scenario table 222sa. As shown in FIG. 568(a), the internal scenario table 222sa has 4 types of scenario types (scenario 1 to scenario 4), the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to this variation pattern, and the acquired scenario effect counter. 223sa value.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the scenario effect counter 223sa falls within the range of "0 to 39" for "scenario 1" and within the range of "40 to 69" for "scenario 1". 2”, “scenario 3” in the range of “70 to 89”, and “scenario 4” in the range of “90 to 98”. Further, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the value of the scenario effect counter 223sa is in the range of "0 to 59" for "scenario 1", and in the range of "60 to 79", "scenario 2". , “Scenario 3” is defined in the range of “80-89”, and “Scenario 4” is defined in the range of “90-98”.

Here, the contents of each scenario type defined in the internal scenario table 222sa will be explained. “Scenario 1”, as described above with reference to FIG. 564, shows a transition tendency in which the internal value rises (varies) evenly with the lapse of the operation effective period. In other words, when this "scenario 1" is selected, the successive hitting period effect is executed that can evenly increase (variable) the display value over the entire range of the operation effective period. As a result, the display value reaches the upper limit during the first half of the operation valid period, and the display value does not rise (variable) for a long period of time even though the PUSH button 10317 is operated multiple times. , it is possible to suppress the player's desire to operate the operating means from being lowered.

Next, as described above with reference to FIG. 566, “scenario 2” shows a transition tendency in which the internal value is more likely to rise (variable) in the latter half of the operation valid period than in the first half. In other words, when this "scenario 2" is selected, the consecutive hit period effect is executed in which the display value is more likely to increase (variable) in the latter half of the operation effective period than in the first half. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to operate the operating means while having a sense of anticipation until the end of the valid operation period. In addition, in this embodiment, since the scenario type is selected to determine the transition tendency of the internal value, as described above with reference to FIG. is constructed so as to follow the same course as "scenario 1", and the update status of the internal values after that is constructed in line with the tendency of "scenario 2". Therefore, even when "scenario 2" is selected, it is possible to prevent the display value from remaining unchanged for a long period of time during the first half of the valid operation period.

In addition, by configuring the progress until the internal value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "1") to be the same as for other scenario types, immediately after the operation effective period is set (immediately after execution), it is possible to prevent the scenario type adopted for the current continuous hit period effect from being specified.

“Scenario 3” shows a tendency opposite to “Scenario 2” described above, and shows a transition tendency in which the internal value is more likely to rise (change) in the first half of the operation valid period than in the latter half. . In other words, when this "scenario 3" is selected, the consecutive hit period effect is executed in which the display value is more likely to increase (variable) in the first half of the operation effective period than in the latter half. Therefore, the display value tends to increase immediately after the repeated hitting period effect is executed, and it is suspected that a large value (for example, "5") is set as the upper limit value set in this repeated hitting period effect. You can make it easier for people to think about it.

Also, when internal migration data is created based on this "scenario 3", it is configured to follow the same process as in "scenario 1" until the internal value reaches "1". It may be configured such that the update status of values is created along the trend of "scenario 3". By configuring in this way, the progress until the internal value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "1") is the same as for other scenario types, and immediately after the operation valid period is set (the continuous hit period effect is executed) It is possible to prevent the scenario type adopted for the current consecutive hitting period production from being specified immediately after the continuous hitting period effect.

Finally, unlike the other scenarios, "scenario 4" shows a transitional tendency in which the internal value repeatedly rises and falls as the operation effective period elapses. In other words, the above-mentioned "scenario 1" to "scenario 3" show only the tendency of the internal value to rise as the operation valid period elapses, while "scenario 4" shows the operation valid period The major difference is that the internal value may decrease over time.

That is, when this "scenario 4" is selected, the second timing (for example, 3.5 seconds elapsed time), the internal value becomes smaller. Therefore, since the degree of increase in the display value can be greatly varied depending on the operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 during the repeated hitting period effect, it is difficult for the player to predict the upper limit set in the present repeated hitting period effect. can be done.

It should be noted that when the above-described "scenario 4" is selected, a state can occur in which the internal value is smaller (lower) than the display value. That is, in a state where the internal value is changing to "3", the variable condition of the display value (winning the variable lottery) is established, and after the display value is changed to "3", the internal value is changed to "2". ”. In this case, it may be constructed such that the consecutive hitting period effect is executed in a special manner suggesting that the internal value is smaller than the display value. As a result, the player can predict that the internal transition data based on "scenario 4" is set in the current consecutive hitting period effect. Also, even if the internal value is smaller than the display value, the display may be made in the same manner as when the display value and the internal value are the same (see FIG. 561(a)). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict that the internal transition data based on the "scenario 4" is set in the repeated hitting period effect of this time.

As shown in FIG. 568(a), in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the selection ratio of each scenario type is different according to the result of the special symbol lottery (jackpot, loss) corresponding to the variable effect in which the continuous hit effect is executed. If the jackpot is won, the selection rate of "scenario 1" is about 40%, the selection rate of "scenario 2" is about 30%, the selection rate of "scenario 3" is about 20%, and the selection rate of "scenario 4” selection ratio is set to be about 10%, and if the jackpot is not won (if the jackpot is won), the selection ratio of “scenario 1” is about 60%, and the selection ratio of “scenario 2” is about 60%. It is defined that the ratio is about 20%, the selection ratio of "scenario 3" is about 10%, and the selection ratio of "scenario 4" is about 10%.

In other words, when the jackpot is won, the "scenario 2" and "scenario 3" are more likely to be selected than when the jackpot is not won (when the jackpot is won). ” is configured to be less likely to be selected. With this configuration, the selected scenario type is discriminated by predicting the transition state of the internal value based on the internal transition data set during the repeated hit period effect, and the repeated hit effect is produced based on the determination result. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery before the end of the lottery.

In addition, when the jackpot is won, the selection ratio of “scenario 1” is set to be lower than when the winning is lost, but the selection ratio of “scenario 1”, which is stipulated low, is the highest among the scenario types. Since it is stipulated so as to be a selection ratio, every time the continuous hitting performance is executed, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is easily grasped before the continuous hitting performance ends. can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the same scenario type can be selected depending on whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a loss, and the result of the special symbol lottery is determined only by the selected scenario type. Although it is configured to be difficult to identify, without being limited to this, the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (such as , jackpot winning), it is preferable to define a scenario type (for example, "scenario V") that can be selected.

By configuring in this way, when it is determined that "scenario V" is selected, it is possible to grasp the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery before the end of the repeated hitting effect, so the repeated hitting period In the production, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting which scenario type is selected. It should be noted that in the case of providing "scenario V" that can be selected only in the case of a specific lottery result in this way, the internal value of the scenario is set so that internal transfer data that is clearly different from other scenario types is created. For example, regardless of the set upper limit value, the internal value will only increase up to a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the invalid tendency that the internal value will not increase at all, and the operation valid Regardless of the elapse of the period, it is preferable to configure such that the internal value always shows a transition tendency such as an upper limit tendency indicating an upper limit value. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the selected scenario type when the internal value is changed based on the internal transition data created based on the "scenario V".

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 568(a), the selection ratio of the scenario type is made different based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, that is, whether or not the jackpot has been won. However, without being limited to this, for example, the selection ratio of the scenario type may be configured to be different based on the length of the operation valid period, or the length of the effect period set for the corresponding variable effect It may be configured to vary the selection ratio of the scenario type based on the length (length of time of fluctuation of the special symbol), or based on the result of the prize information (prefetch information) possessed by the special symbol reservation that has already been acquired It may be configured so that the selection ratio of the scenario type is made different. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 (so-called pachinko machine 10 with a setting function) has a probability setting function that can set a value of 1 from a plurality of values with different probabilities as the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, it can be set. It may be configured such that the selection ratio of the scenario type is varied according to the value (set value) indicating the set jackpot probability. In other words, by grasping the selected scenario type, it is possible to provide a benefit that is advantageous to the player.

The pressing lottery table 222sb is a variable lottery for determining whether or not to change the display value (display mode) when the player operates the PUSH button 10317 (operation means) within the operation valid period during the continuous hitting effect. is a data table used for executing the lottery, in which the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the continuous hitting effect being executed (jackpot, loss) and the acquired value of the lottery effect counter 223sb are associated with each other. The results (election, loss) are defined respectively. When the result of the variable lottery executed using this press lottery table 222sb is winning, the variable condition of the display value is satisfied, the display value can be varied, and the result of the variable lottery is lost. In some cases, the condition for changing the display value is not satisfied, and the display value cannot be changed.

In this way, when the player's operation to the operation means is determined to be valid during the operation valid period, a variable lottery is executed based on the operation, and the display mode (display value) is executed based on the variable lottery result ), it is possible to set the state in which the display value can be changed irregularly, so that the display is displayed at a timing that surprises the player. It is possible to make it easier to change the aspect, and to enhance the presentation effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 568(b), the contents defined in the pressing lottery table 222sb will be described. FIG. 568(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressing lottery table 222sb. As shown in FIG. 568(b), the pressing lottery table 222sb shows "winning" and "missing" as the lottery results, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to this variation pattern, and the obtained lottery effect counter 223sb. It is defined in association with a value.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the value of the lottery effect counter 223sb is "win" in the range of "0 to 29" and "off" in the range of "30 to 98". are defined respectively. In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the value of the lottery effect counter 223sb defines "win" in the range of "0 to 19" and "loss" in the range of "20 to 98". It is

In other words, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a jackpot, it is easier to win the pressing lottery than when the result is a loss. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily predict the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery according to the variable frequency of the display value during the repeated hitting period production, and the player is interested in the contents of the production during the repeated hitting period production. can be made easier to hold.

Note that in this embodiment, when it is determined that an operation to the operation means is valid during the effective period of operation during the continuous hit period effect, the pressing lottery table 222sb is always referenced to determine whether or not the variable condition is satisfied. However, without being limited to this, for example, a measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the variable lottery executed by referring to the pressing lottery table 222sb is continuously lost is provided, and the measuring means is provided. It may be configured such that when the result of measurement by the number reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), it becomes easier to win the lottery in the variable lottery. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the production effect of the continuous hitting period production is lowered without winning the variable lottery continuously.

Further, the winning probability of the variable lottery may be varied based on the number of winning times of the variable lottery within one operation valid period and the length of the remaining period of the operation valid period, for example, the operation valid period. When the remaining period of the variable lottery is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the probability of winning the variable lottery is preferably reduced when the number of winning times of the variable lottery reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times). As a result, it is possible to prevent the display value from reaching the upper limit value in a state in which a large amount of time remains in the operation valid period. In addition, when the remaining period of the operation valid period is less than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) and the number of winning times of the variable lottery is a specific number (for example, 0 times), the winning probability of the variable lottery increases. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the production effect of the continuous hitting period production is lowered without winning the variable lottery continuously.

The upper limit value selection table 222sc is a data table that is referred to when setting the upper limit of the display value that can be displayed during the continuous hitting period effect, and includes the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery and the acquired upper limit value effect counter 223sc. The upper limit value is set in the range of "2" to "5" in correspondence with the value of .

This upper limit value is the display value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous hit period production, specifically, the upper limit of the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG and the display mode of the character 801 (see FIG. 560). is shown. A larger value (for example, "5") is more likely to be selected as the upper limit value when a big win is won in the corresponding special symbol lottery than when the big win is not won. By configuring in this way, as the display value is changed to a larger value during the production of the repeated hitting period, the degree of expectation that the corresponding special symbol lottery will win a jackpot can be increased. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the display value increases.

Here, the contents defined in the upper limit value selection table 222sc will be described with reference to FIG. 569(a). FIG. 569(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the upper limit value selection table 222sc. As shown in FIG. 569(a), the upper limit value selection table 222sc has the upper limit value "2" to "5", the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to this variation pattern (result of judgment), and the acquired It is defined in association with the value of the upper limit effect counter 223sc.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) is a big hit, the value of the upper limit value production counter 223sc is in the range of “0 to 39”, the upper limit value is “5”, and “40 to "4" is defined in the range of "89", and the upper limit value "3" is defined in the range of "90 to 98". Also, if the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) is out, the value of the upper limit value production counter 223sc is in the range of “0 to 9”, the upper limit value is “5”, and the value is in the range of “10 to 69”. "4" is defined in the range, "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", and "2" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

In other words, if the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (result of judgment) is a big hit, the upper limit value "5" is set at about 40%, whereas if the result of judgment is out. , the upper limit value "5" is set only in about 10% of them. Therefore, when the display value rises (variable) to "5" during the continuous hitting period production, the expectation that the corresponding special symbol lottery will win a jackpot can be increased. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to increase the .

Further, as described above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the degree of increase in the display value during the continuous hit period effect is regulated not only by the set upper limit value, but also by the internal value that changes according to the internal transition data. are doing. Therefore, even if the upper limit value of "5" is set during the continuous hitting period effect, the display value does not change to "5" until the internal value reaches "5". Thus, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play while expecting the display value to rise to "5" during the entire period of the continuous hitting period effect.

The difference upper limit value selection table 222sd is a data table that is referred to when selecting a specified value (difference upper limit value) for the difference between the internal value and the display value. This difference upper limit value is used when determining whether or not to display the pressing promotion mode (see FIG. 561(b)), and when determining the amount of increase (variable amount) in the case of increasing (variable) the display value. used for

Here, the contents defined in the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd will be described with reference to FIG. 569(b). FIG. 569(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd. In this difference upper limit value selection table 222sd, the difference upper limit values "2" to "4" are the results of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current variation pattern (results of winning or not) and the obtained difference value production counter 223sd. It is defined in association with a value.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery (win/fail judgment result) is a big hit, the value of the difference value production counter 223sd is in the range of “0 to 4”, the difference upper limit value “4”, “5 to 64”, and the difference upper limit value of “2” is defined in the range of “65 to 98”. In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) is out, the value of the difference value production counter 223sd is in the range of "0 to 59", the difference upper limit value is "3", and "60 to 98". "2" is defined in the range of each.

In other words, only when the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) is a big hit, it is possible to select "4" as the difference upper limit value, and the difference upper limit value "3" is the same ratio regardless of the success judgment result. (approximately 60%), and the difference upper limit value "2" is configured to be less likely to be selected when the success/failure determination result is a jackpot than when it is a loss.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the display value is variably displayed during the continuous hitting period effect, the display value is increased by four levels (for example, the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is increased from "0" to "4"). ), the effect is equivalent to informing that a jackpot is won in the corresponding special symbol lottery. Therefore, the player can be interested not only in the value of the display value displayed during the continuous hitting period effect, but also in the degree of change of the display value, so that the effect of the repeated hitting period effect can be enhanced. can be enhanced.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the value (difference value between the internal value and the display value) used for determining whether or not to display the pressing promotion mode and the display value are changed in one variable display. The variable amount (range) that can be changed is the difference upper limit value selected in the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd. In this case, a selection table for selecting a value (difference value between an internal value and a display value) used when determining whether or not to display the pressing promotion mode, and a display value that is changed in one variable display and a selection table from which a variable amount (range) can be selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the difference upper limit value determined by referring to the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd is configured to be used for the entire period of the repeated hitting period effect. The upper limit value of the difference may be varied according to the degree of progress, for example, the elapsed time of the continuous hit period effect, the display content of the display value, or the transition state of the internal value.

Next, referring to FIG. 570, the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 570 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment. The RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the twenty-third embodiment described above (see FIG. , lottery effect counter 223sb, upper limit value effect counter 223sc, difference value effect counter 223sd, upper limit value storage area 223e, difference upper limit value storage area 223sf, upper limit value storage area 223se, difference upper limit value storage The difference is that an area 223sf, an internal transfer data storage area 223sg, a display value storage area 223sh, and a repeated hit effect setting flag 223si are added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The scenario effect counter 223sa, the lottery effect counter 223sb, the upper limit value effect counter 223sc, and the difference value effect counter 223sd are counters for updating the random value referred to when selecting the effect mode of the corresponding effect. It consists of a loop counter whose value is updated within the range of "0 to 99". The values of these various counters are updated by the counter updating process (see Z3113 in FIG. 518) executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Also, it is configured to be updated using the remaining period that occurs when the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 is executed. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, before the main process (see FIG. 518) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed a plurality of times (before the counter update process is repeatedly executed), the process of selecting various effects is performed. configured to run. In other words, if there is only one counter for updating the random number value that is referred to when selecting an effect mode, the same random number value will be used when selecting various effect modes. , there is a problem that the selected combination of presentation modes becomes monotonous. Further, in order to solve the problem, if a configuration is used in which the process of selecting the effect mode can be executed only once each time the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, a plurality of effect modes can be selected. Since it takes a long time to select , there is a new problem that smooth production cannot be executed.

On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when selecting an effect mode corresponding to the number of effect mode selection processes that can be executed when the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed once, A counter that can update the referenced random value is provided. As a result, different random numbers can be used in the selection processing of the presentation mode that can be executed when the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed once, so that the combination of the selected presentation modes can be varied. It can be held, and the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, since a plurality of effects modes can be selected in one main process of the sound lamp control device 113, effects can be executed (set) smoothly.

The upper limit value storage area 223se is a storage area for temporarily storing the upper limit value of the display value that can be displayed during the consecutive hitting period effect, and stores the upper limit value selected by referring to the upper limit value selection table 222sc. be done. Internal migration data is then created using the stored upper limit value. In addition, when it is determined that the display value is the same as the internal value at that time when the display value variable condition is satisfied, the difference between the stored upper limit value and the internal value at that time is calculated. It is referred to when selecting an aspect. After that, the stored value is cleared at the end timing of the continuous hit effect.

The difference upper limit value storage area 223sf is a storage area for temporarily storing the difference upper limit value, which is the specified value for the difference between the internal value and the display value. Temporarily stores the selected difference upper limit. Then, when the variable condition of the display value is established and the display value is to be varied (increased), the difference upper limit value stored for determining the variable amount of the display value is read. Further, when determining whether or not to display the display mode of the pressing promotion mode, the difference upper limit value is read as a determination criterion. After that, the stored value is cleared at the end timing of the continuous hit effect.

The internal transition data storage area 223sg is a storage area for temporarily storing internal transition data for indicating the content of transition of the internal value during the continuous hit period effect, and is used in the process for selecting the effect mode of the variable effect. , where the created internal migration data is stored. Then, it is read out at the start timing (timing for setting the effective period of operation), and the internal value is transferred (updated) according to the contents shown in the internal transfer data. After that, the stored data is cleared at the end timing of the continuous hit effect.

The display value storage area 223sh is a storage area for temporarily storing the display value during the continuous hitting period effect, that is, the value corresponding to the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. and is a storage area for storing values that have already been notified to the player. Then, when the variable condition of the display value is satisfied, it is read out, and the display mode is determined according to the difference value from the internal value or the upper limit value. After that, the stored value is cleared at the end timing of the continuous hit effect.

The repeated-hit effect setting flag 223si is a flag for managing the execution status of the repeated-hit effect, and is configured to be able to determine the execution status of the repeated-hit effect based on the setting status of the repeated-hit effect setting flag 223si.

Here, with reference to FIG. 571, the content of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si will be described. FIG. 571 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si. As shown in FIG. 571, the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is configured to be able to set six types of states from 00H to 05H. As described above with reference to FIG. 563, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as the execution status of the repeated hit effect, it is confirmed that the repeated hit effect is executed as a variable effect, and the repeated hit effect is not executed "before start". That is, in the production mode selection process 25 (see Z4353 in FIG. 578) executed at the start timing of the special symbol variation, the situation in which the variable production in which the continuous hitting production is executed is set, and the continuous hitting production, the standby "Waiting", which is the situation in which the effect is being executed, "Running", which is the situation in which the continuous hit period effect is being executed, "Result", which is the situation in which the result effect is being executed, and the internal value , a "special" situation in which the total value of the difference upper limit value and the display value is greater than the total value, and a "-" situation in which it is not confirmed that the continuous hit effect will be executed. there is

As shown in FIG. 571, the high value “00H” of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si corresponds to the “-” situation, “01H” corresponds to the “before start” situation, and “02H” corresponds to the “before start” situation. ' corresponds to the status 'waiting', '03H' corresponds to the status 'running', '04H' corresponds to the status 'result', and '05H' corresponds to the status 'result'. ” corresponds to a “special” situation. In this way, by making it possible to determine the situation regarding the continuous hitting effect, it is possible to easily change the effect mode (display mode) in each situation at various timings according to the effect result in other situations and the game result. can.

<Regarding the Control Contents of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the Twenty-Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 572 to 579, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. The content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is different from the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth embodiment. 24 (see Z3181 in FIG. 550), the effect update process 25 (Z3191 in FIG. 572) is replaced with the press detection process (Z3112 in FIG. 524), the press detection process 25 (Z3192 in FIG. 576) is replaced with the effect mode The difference is that instead of the selection process (Z4313 in FIG. 536), the effect mode selection process 25 (Z4353 in FIG. 578) is executed, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted. For details of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth embodiment described above, refer to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-third embodiment described above. Therefore, when explaining the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is necessary to appropriately The content of the control processing to be performed is used.

First, with reference to FIG. 572, the content of effect update processing 25 (Z3191) will be described. FIG. 572 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update process 25 (Z3191). This effect update process 25 (Z3191) is configured to execute a process (Z3271) for updating various timers regarding the elapse of the effect time, in contrast to the effect update process 24 (see Z3181 in FIG. 550). , and the addition of the repeated hit effect processing (Z3272).

Next, with reference to FIG. 573, the contents of the repeated hit effect processing (Z3272) will be described. FIG. 573 is a flow chart showing the contents of the repeated hit effect processing (Z3272). In this repeated hit effect processing (Z3272), various controls in the repeated hit effect are executed.

When the repeated hit effect processing (Z3272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the set state of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is "00H", that is, whether or not any setting relating to the repeated hit effect is made (Z6501). In the process of Z6501, if it is determined to be "00H" (Z6501), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not "00H", i.e., if it is determined that some kind of information related to the repeated hitting effect is set (Z6501: No), then the setting status of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is "01H", That is, it is determined whether or not the variable effect in which the repeated hit effect is set is being executed and the start timing of the repeated hit effect has not yet arrived (Z6502). (Z6502: Yes), next, it is determined whether it is time to start the repeated hit effect (Z6503).

In the process of Z6503, among the various timers updated in the production update process 25 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572), based on the value of the timer that updates the elapsed time of the variable production, the elapsed time of the variable production starts the continuous hit production It is determined whether it is timing. If it is determined that it is the start timing in the processing of Z6503 (Z6503: Yes), the setting status of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is set to "02H", that is, the setting state indicating the standby period of the repeated hitting effect (Z6504), The start of repeated hit effect is set (Z6505), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z6503, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the repeated hit effect (Z6503: Yes), this process ends.

In the process of Z6502, if it is determined that the setting status of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is not "01H" (Z6502: No), then it is determined whether the setting status of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is "02H". Then (Z6506), if it is determined to be "02H" (Z6506: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the repeated hitting period (Z6507), and if it is determined that it is the start timing of the repeated hitting period (Z6507 : Yes), the timer value corresponding to the operation effective period is set to the value of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223qv (Z6508), and the setting state of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is set to "03H", that is, the repeated hitting period (executing period). is set (Z6509), the internal value transition data stored in the internal value transition data storage area 223sg is read (Z6510), and the internal value is transitioned based on the read data (internal value transition data). is started (Z6511).

Also, in the process of Z6506, if it is determined that the setting status of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is not "02H" (Z6506: No), then the second repeated hit effect process is executed (Z6512), and then this End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 574, the contents of the second repeated hit effect processing (Z6512) will be described. FIG. 574 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second repeated hit effect processing (Z6512). In this second repeated hitting effect process (Z6512), various processes are executed when the setting state of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is "03H".

When the second repeated hitting effect process (Z6512) is executed, first, it is determined whether the setting state of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is "03H" (Z6531). : Yes), next, it is determined whether the value of the continuous hit effective period timer 223qv is 0 (Z6532).

In the process of Z6532, if it is determined that the value of the continuous-hit effective period timer 223qv is not 0, that is, it is still within the operation effective period (Z6532: No), the data in the internal transfer data storage area 223sg and the continuous-hit effective period Based on the value of the timer 223qv, the current internal value (A) is calculated (Z6533), the display value (B) stored in the display value storage area 233sh is read (Z6534), and the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf (Z6535).

Then, it is determined whether the internal value (A) is greater than the sum of the display value (B) and the difference upper limit value (C) (Z6536), and if it is determined to be greater (Z6536: Yes), the button is pressed. is set (Z6537), "05H" is set to the setting status of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si, and this process is terminated.

Here, the display command set by the processing of Z6537 executes an effect prompting the player to press the PUSH button 10317 as shown in FIG. 561(b).

On the other hand, in the process of Z6532, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223qv is 0 (Z6532: Yes), the setting status of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is set to "04H" (Z6539), and the display value The display value stored in the storage area 223sh is read out (Z6540), a display command for indicating the effect mode of the result effect corresponding to the read display value is set (Z6541), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of Z6531, if it is determined that the setting status of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is not "03H" (Z6531: No), then the third repeated hit effect process is executed (Z6542), and this process is executed. finish.

Here, with reference to FIG. 575, the contents of the third repeated hit effect processing (Z6542) will be described. FIG. 575 is a flow chart showing the contents of the third repeated hit effect processing (Z6542). In the third repeated hit effect (Z6542), the set state of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is "04H", that is, various processes are executed when ending the repeated hit effect.

When the third repeated hit effect processing (Z6542) is executed, first, it is determined whether the set state of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is "05H", that is, a special situation (Z6571), and it is determined to be "05H". If so (Z6571: Yes), then it is determined whether the current internal value (A) is greater than the sum of the display value (B) and the difference upper limit value (C) (Z6572).

In the process of Z6572, if it is determined that the internal value (A) is larger (Z6572: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the continuous hit effective period timer 223qv is 0 (Z6573), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z6573: Yes), set the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si to "04H" (Z6574), read the display value stored in the display value storage area 233sh (Z6575), and store the read display value A display command for showing the effect mode of the result effect corresponding to the value obtained by subtracting 1 is set (Z6576), and this processing is terminated.

That is, when the setting status of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is set to "05H", that is, when the player does not intentionally operate the PUSH button 10317 during the repeated hitting period, the value of the internal value and the value of the display value When there is a large divergence from the above, as a penalty, an effect mode corresponding to a display value smaller than the display value actually displayed is set as the effect mode of the result effect. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means. In addition, for a player who is not interested in the repeated hitting effect (a player who operates the operation means lightly during the repeated hitting effect), it is difficult to predict the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot depending on the content of the effect as a result of the repeated hitting effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissuaded of unnecessary information and losing the desire to play the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as a method of determining a player who is not willingly participating in the repeated hitting effect, the setting status of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is used to determine the closing value and the display value. Although the method of determining the degree of divergence from the value is used, it is not limited to this. A method of discriminating players who are not actively participating may be used.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6572, if it is determined that the internal value (A) is not larger (Z6572: No), the setting status of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is changed from "05H" indicating a special situation to " 03H" (Z6577), and the process ends. With this configuration, even if the player is in a special situation due to the discrepancy between the internal value and the display value, he or she can operate the operation means positively to return to the normal state. You can return to the situation. Therefore, a player who did not notice that the continuous hit effect was being executed, or an internal transition data based on a scenario tendency (for example, scenario types "2" and "3") in which the internal value greatly increases in a short period of time. In the case where transition data is created, even for a player who continuously misses the variable lottery and is motivated to operate the operation means, a special situation is set. Continuous hit production can be provided.

Also, in the process of Z6571, if it is determined that the setting status of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is not "05H" (Z6571: No), then the setting status of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is "04H", that is, It is determined whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (whether the operation valid period has ended) (Z6578). It is determined whether there is (Z6579).

In the process of Z6579, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the repeated hit effect, that is, the end timing of the result effect (Z6579: Yes), the setting status of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is set to "00H" (Z6580), The values stored in the upper limit value storage area 223se, difference upper limit value storage area 223sf, internal transfer data storage area 223sg, and display value storage area 233sh are cleared (Z6581), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6578, if it is determined that the setting status of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is not "04H" (Z6578: No), or in the process of Z6579, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the repeated hit effect ( Z6579: No) terminates this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 576, the contents of the press detection process 25 (Z3192) will be described. FIG. 576 is a flow chart showing the contents of the press detection process 25 (Z3192). This press detection process 25 (Z3192) is executed when it is determined that the value of the repeated press valid period timer 223qv is greater than 0 (Z3604: Yes) in the above-described press detection process (see Z3112 in FIG. 524). The difference is that the process to be performed is changed from the repeated-hit operation detection process (Z3605) to the repeated-hit operation detection process 25 (Z3651).

Next, with reference to FIG. 577, the content of the repeated hit operation detection process 25 (Z3651) will be described. FIG. 577 is a flow chart showing the contents of the repeated hit operation detection process 25 (Z3651). In this repeated hitting operation detection process 25 (Z3651), various effects are executed based on the operation of the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the repeated hitting period (during measurement of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223qv).

When the repeated hit operation detection process 25 (Z3651) is executed, first, the press lottery table 222sb is referred to, the press lottery is executed (Z6601), and the notification command for indicating the button press is set (Z6602). In other words, the notification command is set regardless of the result of the pressing lottery. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the pressing of the PUSH button 10317 has been properly determined.

Next, it is determined whether or not the pressing lottery has been won (Z6603), and if not (Z6603: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery has been won (Z6603: Yes), then the current internal value is extracted based on the data stored in the internal transfer data storage area 223sg (Z6604), and the display value is stored. The display value stored in the area 233sh is read out (Z6605), and it is determined whether the internal value and the display value are the same (Z6606).

In the process of Z6606, if it is determined that they are not the same (Z6606: No), the difference upper limit value stored in the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf is read (Z6607), and the difference between the internal value and the display value is the difference upper limit value. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (Z6608), and if it is determined that it is not larger (Z6608: No), the difference value is added to the display value (Z6609), and the display for showing the display value after addition A command is set (Z6610), a value indicating the display value after addition is set in the display value storage area 223sh (Z6611), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z6608 that the difference between the internal value and the display value is greater than the difference upper limit value (Z6608: Yes), the value of the difference upper limit value is added to the display value (Z6612), and then It shifts to Z6610 mentioned above.

In the process of Z6606, when it is determined that the internal value and the display value are the same (Z6606: Yes), the upper limit value stored in the upper limit storage area 223se is read, and the display value and the upper limit value are the same. (Z6614), and if it is determined that they are not the same (Z6614: No), the display value cannot be updated at present, but the display value can be changed by updating the internal value. Therefore, a suggestion command is set to suggest that the display value will increase with repeated repeated hits (Z6615), and this process ends.

In addition, in the processing of Z6614, if it is determined that the display value and the upper limit value are the same (Z6614), a suggestion command is set to suggest that it is difficult for the display value to rise any further ( Z6616), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 578, the contents of the presentation mode selection process 25 (Z4353) will be described. FIG. 578 is a flow chart showing the contents of the presentation mode selection process 25 (Z4353). This effect mode selection process 25 (Z4353) is performed when it is determined that the variation pattern command including the additional time command is not received (Z4551: No), in contrast to the above-described effect mode selection process (see Z4313 in FIG. 536). However, the basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581) is configured to be executed, and the rest is the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the basic rendering mode selection process 25 (Z4581) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 579 is a flow chart showing the contents of the basic presentation mode selection process 25 (Z4581). In this basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581), an initial setting process relating to the repeated hit effect when a variation pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) including the repeated hit effect is extracted is executed.

When the basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the extracted variation pattern includes a continuous hit effect (Z6701), and if it is determined that it is included (Z6701: Yes) , the internal scenario table 222sa is referred to determine the internal scenario (Z6702). Then, the effective period of operation set for the current repeated hit effect is extracted from the variation pattern (Z6703), and internal transition data is created based on the determined internal scenario and the extracted effective period of operation (Z6704). The migrated data (internal migrated data) is stored in the internal migrated data storage area 223sg (Z6705).

Thereafter, the upper limit selection table 222sc is referenced to determine the upper limit (S6706), the determined upper limit is stored in the upper limit storage area 223se (Z6707), and the difference upper limit selection table 222sd is referred to. The upper limit value is determined (Z6708), the determined upper limit difference value is stored in the upper limit difference storage area 223sf (Z6709), the setting status of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is set to "01H", and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z6701, when it is determined that there is no continuous hit effect (Z6701: No), the effect mode corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is determined (Z6711), and this process ends.

<Regarding the twenty-sixth embodiment>
Next, the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 580 to 594. FIG. In the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, the internal transition data for shifting the internal value according to the lapse of time is created for one operation effective period, and the player's operation to the operation means during the operation effective period is performed. By configuring the display value to be updated based on the content, the internal value indicated by the internal transition data, and the display value that has already been displayed, the effect of the operation effect in which the operation valid period is set is improved. It was something that could be done.

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the internal value can be transferred across the operation validity period set multiple times. Specifically, as a mid-jackpot performance performed during a big win game, a mid-jackpot performance in which an operation valid period is set a plurality of times can be executed, and a plurality of operations are valid set in one mid-jackpot performance. It is configured so that internal values are migrated (updated) across periods.

By configuring in this way, when a plurality of operation valid periods are set within one presentation period, the variable degree of the presentation mode (display value) within each operation valid period executed within one presentation can be determined. , 1, so that the operation performance can be executed a plurality of times without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Also, in the case where the valid operation period is set a plurality of times within one effect period, the display value reaches the upper limit value during the valid operation period set first, and then the effect becomes meaningless. It is possible to suppress the setting of an operation valid period that does not exist and the deterioration of the rendering effect. Furthermore, since one internal transition data is created for the entire period of a plurality of valid operation periods, the presentation mode (display value) did not increase during the valid period of operation that was previously set. However, while expecting that internal migration data based on "scenario 2", which is the scenario type of the second half, is set, the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is enthusiastically operated during the remaining operation valid period. can be made

Although the details will be described later, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, in order to transfer (update) the internal value across a plurality of operation effective periods, the transition period for transitioning (updating) the internal value is measured by a dedicated measuring means ( It is different from the twenty-fifth embodiment described above in that it is configured so as to be measured by a shift timer 223ta). In other words, in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, the internal value is transferred (updated) by using the measuring means (repeated hit effective period timer 223qv) for measuring the elapsed time of the set operation effective period. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated measuring means for transferring (updating) the internal value, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed, and the control processing related to the operation presentation can be simplified. Since the period during which the internal value is shifted (updated) and the operation effective period are the same period, variations in the operation effect (particularly, variable pattern of the effect mode executed based on the operation of the operation means) There was a problem of running out.

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, as described above, the transition period during which the internal value is transitioned (updated) is measured by a dedicated measuring means (transition timer 223ta). It is possible to shift (update) the internal value in a period different from the period in which is set. As a result, the internal value at the timing at which the operation effective period is set can be varied, so that it is possible to easily vary the variable state of the presentation mode in response to the operation of the operation means by the player, thus providing a wide variety of possibilities. It is possible to make it easier to execute the operation presentation.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, a part of the configuration of the RAM 223, Part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, and the effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the above-mentioned changes The difference is that the mode of presentation is changed, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted. Further, in applying the above-described differences to the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described twenty-fifth embodiment, among the points that require changes, those skilled in the art can easily conceive of the points will also be omitted from detailed description. .

<Regarding production content in the twenty-sixth embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 580 and 581, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth embodiment, the effect during the jackpot game, which is the characteristic effect in the twenty-sixth embodiment I will explain the contents of the performance).

FIG. 580(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the first operation valid period is set as an effect during the jackpot, and FIG. 580(b) shows the first operation valid. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when a period has ended; And FIG. 581(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode suggesting that the second operation valid period is set as the effect during the jackpot, and FIG. 581(b) FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when a second operation valid period is set;

Here, in this embodiment, the probability variable jackpot in which the probability variable state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is set, and the time reduction jackpot in which the time saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is completed. and can be executed, and whether the winning jackpot is a variable probability jackpot or a time-saving jackpot can be notified to the player in the stop display mode of the third pattern indicating the jackpot winning. . Specifically, when a stop display mode (for example, "777") displayed with the same odd-numbered symbols as the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is displayed, the winning jackpot is a variable jackpot. Inform the player of something.

By constructing in this way, since the player can grasp that the current big win is a probability variable big win before the big win game is executed, the big win game can be executed while giving the player a sense of security. can be made

On the other hand, if it is notified whether the winning jackpot is a probability variable jackpot or a short-time jackpot before the jackpot game is executed, the player who wins the short-time jackpot loses his/her willingness to play. , Part of the probability variable jackpot, and when the time-saving jackpot is won, a stop display mode (for example, "666") displayed with the same even-numbered symbols as the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the jackpot winning is displayed. The operation round performance executed during the jackpot game is configured to execute a performance (so-called variable probability promotion performance) to incite whether the current big win is a variable probability big win or a short-time big win. there is

By constructing in this way, it is possible to leave the possibility that the current big win is a probability variable big win until the end of the big win game, so that the game can be easily played while maintaining the player's willingness to play. can be done.

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, it is configured to execute an operation round effect in which an operation effective period is set in a specific round game as an effect during the jackpot that is executed during the jackpot game. Also, the number of operation round performances to be executed within the performance period of one mid-jackpot performance is selected from 1 to 3 times. Further, it is configured to create internal transfer data based on a cumulative operation effective period obtained by summing up the performance period of the one-time jackpot mid-performance.

By using these configurations, depending on the number of operation round effects executed during the jackpot game, the operation effective period set for one operation round effect may have a different ratio to the cumulative operation effective period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the effect result of the present big winning effect only by the variable state of the display value during the one operation round effect.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the player is not notified of the number of operation round effects executed in one jackpot medium effect (difficult to comprehend). Therefore, even if the display mode does not vary greatly (increase) in one operation round effect, a big winning game can be played while expecting that the operation round effect will be executed again.

First, when the operation round effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 580(a), a guide for the player to press the PUSH button 10317 repeatedly is displayed near the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. An image KG for playing is displayed, and above it, a display area 826b for indicating the number of times of operation round effects executed in the current jackpot middle effect is formed, indicating that the first operation round effect is in progress. is displayed in the display area 826b as a display mode indicating "first time!!".

In the display area Ds10, "2nd round" is displayed to indicate that the current round number is the second round, and in the display area Ds3, the third symbol stopped and displayed when the jackpot is won is displayed. "666" is displayed to indicate the stop display mode. That is, the state shown in FIG. 580(a) is the second round of the jackpot game in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of "666", and the first operation round effect is performed as the variable probability promotion effect. It is a diagram showing the state of execution.

On the right side of the display screen, a repeated hitting gauge RG whose effect mode is variable during the operation round effect and an icon 826a for indicating the effect result of the variable probability promotion effect are displayed. In the display area 803, as a guidance display mode for guiding the effect contents of the variable probability promotion effect, characters of "Pump the button repeatedly to accumulate the gauge and make it explode!" are displayed. In addition, as a game guidance display mode 803a for guiding the player to the game method during the jackpot game, characters of "Right shot" are displayed.

That is, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a game is executed in which the player repeatedly hits the PUSH button 10317 as a variable probability promotion effect to increase the gauge number of the repeated hit gauge RG, and the gauge number of the repeated hit gauge RG is the upper limit value. 5", the icon 826a explodes, and an effect of varying the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the display area Ds3 is executed.

By executing the performance for increasing the gauge number of the repeated hitting gauge RG in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the progress of the variable probability promotion performance in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the player can push during the variable probability promotion performance. It is possible to make it easy to continuously perform the continuous hitting operation of the button 10317 .

Here, the content of the image NG displayed during the operation round effect will be described in detail. It is the same as the image NG displayed during the continuous hit period effect (see FIG. 560(b)) in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above. , an image simulating the PUSH button 10317, the characters "Continuous hit" for prompting repeated hitting operations, and a plurality of arrow images are displayed. A remaining period gauge is displayed as a remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period.

Since the state shown in FIG. 580(a) is immediately after the operation round effect has been executed, the remaining period gauge is displayed in a state in which it is not decreased (displayed in black in the figure), and the operation effective period has expired. It is displayed in such a manner that the remaining period gradually decreases from the left as time elapses. Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the present embodiment, an operation effective period of 10 seconds is set during the operation round effect, and at the timing when the round game targeted for the operation round effect is executed An operation valid period is set, and when 10 seconds have passed since the round game was executed, the operation round effect is completed. In addition, as in the above-described embodiments, the conditions for ending the round game are the conditions for ending when 30 seconds have passed, and when 10 game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a (see FIG. 470). For example, before 10 seconds elapse (before the end of the operation round effect), when the end condition of the round game is satisfied, at that time It is configured so that the operation round effect ends at .

It should be noted that the effect mode and the control details for increasing the gauge number of the repeated hitting gauge RG used in the twenty-sixth embodiment are described in order to increase the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG in the above-described twenty-fifth embodiment. Since it is the same as the effect mode and control content of , the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the first operation round effect is completed, the display mode shown in FIG. 580(b) is displayed. The display mode shown in FIG. 580(b) is the display mode at the time when the operation valid period (10 seconds) has passed in the first operation round effect, and the image NG shows the remaining operation valid period. A remaining period gauge (displayed in white in the figure) indicating 0 seconds is displayed together with the characters "END" indicating that the operation valid period has ended, and the PUSH button 10317 is operated by the player. In order to show that the state is not effectively determined even if the button is pressed, the image simulating the PUSH button 10317 is deleted, and instead, in the first operation round effect, the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG is set to the upper limit. The word "sorry" is displayed to indicate that the value (5) was not reached.

In addition, the continuous hit gauge RG is displayed in a display mode (displayed in black in the figure) indicating that the gauge number has increased to the second stage in the first operation round effect, and the display area 803 shows the current In the middle-of-the-big-wins production, the characters "May be the second time!!" are displayed as a suggestion mode for suggesting that the operation round production will be executed again.

Note that the repeated hitting gauge RG and the icon 826a are configured to be continuously displayed even after the end of the first operation round effect. Then, when the second operation round effect is executed, the effect result of the first operation round effect, that is, the operation round that inherits the gauge number of the repeated hit gauge RG increased in the first operation round effect. It is configured so that the production is executed. Therefore, even during the period in which the operation round effect is not being executed, the player who is executing the jackpot game expecting that the second operation round effect is being executed will have the current repeated hitting gauge RG. The number of gauges can be easily grasped.

In the jackpot middle effect described above with reference to FIG. 580, the first operation round effect is executed in the second round (see FIG. 580(a)), and the second operation round effect is executed in the fourth round. The timing before the start of the round game of the fourth round in which the middle effect is executed and the second operation round effect is executed, specifically, at the timing of the start of the round game of the third round, the second time An advance notice display is executed to inform the player that the operation round effect will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 581(a), the characters "3 rounds" are displayed in the display area Ds10 as a display mode indicating that the third round is being played, and "Next round" is displayed near the center of the display screen as an advance notice display. A second consecutive hitting chance will start in the round!!" is displayed. As described above, the continuous hit gauge RG and the icon 826a are continuously displayed even during the period when the operation round effect is not executed, and the effect result of the first operation round effect executed in the second round (Fig. 580 ( b)) is displayed as it is.

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, an advance notice that the operation round effect will be executed soon is displayed at the timing of the execution of the round (3rd round) preceding the round (4th round) in which the operation round effect is executed. However, it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a notice display at the timing when the round game of the third round ends, or the third round The advance notice may be displayed using an interval period set between the second round and the fourth round.

Further, when the rounds in which the operation round effect is executed are consecutive, the interval period set between the round in which the first operation round effect is executed and the round in which the second operation round effect is executed. Alternatively, the advance notice display may be displayed during the period during which the first operation round effect is being executed. In this way, by informing the player that the operation round effect will be executed before the operation round effect is actually executed, the operation means can be set during the operation effective period set during the operation round effect. can be made easier to operate.

When the jackpot game progresses to the 4th round, the second operation round effect that takes over the effect result of the first operation round effect is executed, and the display mode shown in FIG. 581(b) is displayed. In FIG. 581(b), "4 rounds" is displayed in the display area Ds10 to indicate that the current round is the 4th round, and the display area 826b indicates that the second operation round effect is being executed. "2nd time" is displayed. Then, during the second operation round effect, the gauge number of the repeated hitting gauge RG reaches the upper limit value of "5", the icon 826a explodes, and the third symbol displayed in the display area Ds3 stops displaying. However, the display mode is switched (promoted) to "777" indicating the probability variable jackpot.

That is, in FIG. 581, an effect (probability variable promotion effect) is executed to increase the gauge number of the repeated hit gauge RG across two operation round effects, and the effect result indicating the success of the probability variable promotion is displayed as the effect result. there is In this way, by configuring it so that the effect result of the variable probability promotion effect can be displayed across a plurality of operation round effects, when the effect result of one operation round effect is bad (for example, the continuous hit gauge RG Even if the gauge number rises only by one stage), expectations can be given to the operation round effect to be executed next.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the internal transition data for updating (increasing) the internal value that can increase the gauge number of the repeated hit gauge RG is set so as to straddle a plurality of operation round effects. It is possible to intentionally create a performance mode in which the gauge number of the repeated hitting gauge RG is difficult to rise during the first operation round performance in the probability variable promotion performance executed during the jackpot winning game. Therefore, even if the effect result of one operation round effect is bad (for example, if the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG rises only by one stage), the next operation round effect can be expected. can have

In addition, since the internal transition data that updates (increases) the internal value that can increase the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG is set so as to straddle multiple operation round effects, the time-saving jackpot is won. It is possible to intentionally create an effect mode in which the gauge number of the repeated hitting gauge RG is likely to increase during the first operation round effect in the variable probability promotion effect executed during the first operation round effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a good state (for example, a state in which the gauge number of the repeated hitting gauge RG has increased by four stages) as a result of the performance of one operation round performance even in the probability variable promotion effect that does not increase the probability variable promotion. Thus, the game can be played while expecting a variable promotion until the last operation round performance in the performance during the big win is completed.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, even if the gauge number of the repeated hitting gauge RG does not reach the upper limit value (5), there is still a possibility that the variable probability promotion will remain. In this case, the probability variation promotion failure effect is executed without the icon 826a exploding in the probability variation promotion performance, and the player is notified of the probability variation jackpot during the ending period of the jackpot game or after the jackpot game ends. It consists of By constructing in this way, the player can continue to expect the probability variable jackpot until the game state is actually set after the jackpot game ends, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. be able to.

In this case, the timing of notifying whether the jackpot type won is the probability variable jackpot or the time-saving jackpot is most likely to be notified by the probability variable promotion effect, that is, at the timing when the jackpot game is being executed. It is preferable to make the selection easier in the following order: before the start of the jackpot game, i.e., the timing of notifying in the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the timing near the end of the jackpot game. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the probability variation promotion ratio in the probability variation promotion performance executed to incite the player whether or not the probability variation promotion will occur over a long period of time, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 582, the flow of effects executed during the jackpot game in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 582 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect during the jackpot executed during the jackpot game. As shown in Figure 582, as a result of the special pattern fluctuation (special pattern fluctuation), when the jackpot is won, the round game from the first round to the final round is performed as the jackpot game after the OP (opening) period. It is constructed so that the jackpot game is finished after being executed and after an ED (ending) period. An interval period of a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is set between each round game (see FIG. 582(a)).

During the special figure variation, a variation effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery (special figure lottery) is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . And, during the jackpot game, the performance during the jackpot is executed. The effect during the jackpot consists of an OP effect executed during the OP period, a round effect executed during the round game, an ED effect executed during the ED period, and an interval effect executed during the interval period ( See FIG. 52(b)).

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, among the effects during the jackpot, in the round effects executed for each round game, a variable probability promotion effect for informing whether or not the current big win is a variable probability jackpot is performed. It is configured to be executable, and in the variable probability promotion performance, it is configured to execute the continuous hitting performance over a plurality of round games. In addition, it is configured to execute a repeated-hit announcement effect for notifying that the repeated-hit effect will be executed before the repeated-hit effect is executed.

As in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, during the continuous hit effect, it is configured so that the operation valid period is set (see FIG. 582 (c)). period, in the example of FIG. 582, the degree of movement of the internal value is calculated with respect to the total operation valid period that is the sum of the operation valid periods set for the two continuous hit effects executed in the second and fourth rounds. The shown internal value transition data is created, and the internal value is configured to vary (increase) based on the created internal value transition data. Note that the method of creating internal value transition data in the twenty-sixth embodiment is the same as the above-described twenty-fifth embodiment except for the calculation method of the effective period of operation. Description is omitted.

The internal value transition data is not updated during the period from the end of one continuous hit effect (effective period of operation) to the start of the next repeated hit effect (effective period of operation) (Fig. 582(d)). By configuring in this way, even if repeated hitting effects are executed at intervals in the mid-jackpot effect, the internal value transition data can be continuously updated.

In the present embodiment, the update period of the internal value transition data is the period in which the operation effective period is set, but is not limited to this. It may be configured to update the internal value migration data. In this way, by configuring the internal value to be updated based on the internal value transition data during a period different from the operation effective period, the display value that surprises the player in the next successive hit effect can be changed. Variability can be facilitated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the internal value is updated (variable) by referring to the internal value transition data based on the passage of time. When the end timing of the round game is early, that is, when the end condition of the round game (winning 10 game balls) is satisfied early, the condition for updating the internal value is established, and the internal value is set earlier than the actual time. It may be configured to advance the value transition data. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the round game in which the continuous hitting effect is executed ends early and the internal value cannot reach the upper limit value during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, during the jackpot game, the cumulative total of the number of game balls that enter the specific winning port 65a more than the number of winnings (10) for satisfying the end condition (for example, the number of over winnings) is a specific number (for example, 10) is satisfied, regardless of the content of the internal value transition data, forced update processing for updating the internal value to the upper limit value may be executed. As a result, the internal value can be updated according to the game content of the jackpot game during the period in which the continuous hitting effect is not executed, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to execute a notification effect for notifying that the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied and a notification effect for notifying information until the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 583, a description will be given of the effect contents of the repeated hit effect in the twenty-sixth embodiment that differ from the effect contents of the repeated hit effect in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above. In the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, the created internal migration data is set in accordance with the setting timing of the operation valid period, and the update (increase) of the internal value during the operation valid period is executed based on the set internal migration data. was configured to On the other hand, the twenty-sixth embodiment is different in that the timing for setting the created internal transfer data can be made different from the timing for setting the valid period of operation. Specifically, as the timing to set the internal transition data, the setting timing of the operation valid period is used as a reference timing, and the internal transition data can be set at a timing that is two seconds earlier than the reference timing or a timing that is ten seconds later than the reference timing. It is configured so that

By varying the set timing of the internal migration data in this way, even if the same internal migration data is created, it is possible to make the update status of the internal values different with respect to the elapsed time of the operation validity period. . Therefore, even if the same internal transfer data is created and the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317) with the same operation contents during the operation valid period, the degree of change of the display value can be made different. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

FIG. 583 is a diagram schematically showing an effect pattern during the repeated hitting period effect when "scenario 1" is selected as the scenario type indicating the transition tendency of the internal value, and is the diagram of the twenty-fifth embodiment described above. The difference from the diagram shown in 564 is that the timing at which the internal transition data is set is advanced by 2 seconds, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 583(c), since the internal transition data is set 2 seconds before the timing at which the operation effective period is set (execution timing of continuous hit period effect), 0 after the operation effective period is set. After 0.25 seconds the internal value reaches "1", after 2.5 seconds it reaches "2", after 4.75 seconds it reaches "3" and after 7 seconds it reaches "4". That is, the sooner the set timing of the internal transition data is set, the earlier the internal value can be easily updated (increased) within the valid operation period.

In the example shown in FIG. 583, the timing for setting the internal transition data is two seconds before the timing for setting the effective period of operation. Although it is configured to be 2 seconds earlier than the 25th embodiment, it is not limited to this. A period between the fixed timing and the set timing of the internal migration data may be calculated as the update period of the internal value, and the internal migration data may be created according to the length of the update period.

Further, as described above, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the timing at which the internal transition data is set can be delayed by 10 seconds from the timing at which the operation effective period is set. Here, if the timing for setting the internal transition data is delayed by 10 seconds, since the operation valid period is 10 seconds, the internal value is not updated based on the internal transition data during the operation valid period. ing. Therefore, in this case, even if the operation means is operated during the repeated hitting period (during the effective period of operation), the internal value remains "0", so the display value is not changed (updated).

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, only when the corresponding special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the timing at which the internal transfer data is set can be delayed by 10 seconds from the timing at which the operation validity period is set. In addition, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, at least a value of "2" or more is selected as the upper limit value in the continuous hitting period effect.

Therefore, if you actively operate the PUSH button 10317 during the continuous hitting period production, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, it is possible to update (increase) the display value to at least "2". Furthermore, if the timing at which the internal transition data is set is delayed by 10 seconds from the timing at which the operation valid period is set, the display value will change from "0" to A state can be set that is never changed (updated).

By configuring in this way, the display value is variable (updated) in spite of intentional operation of the operation means in the repetitive hit period production in which the more the display value is varied (updated), the more advantageous it is to the player. Since it is possible to produce effects that are advantageous to the player even when the operation is not performed, the content of the operation to the operation means during the operation valid period and the change state of the display value based on the operation to the operation means, A player can be interested.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 of the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 584 to 586. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 584, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 584 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 584, the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 (see FIG. 567) of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, with a transition timer start timing selection table 222ta The difference is that a number of times of presentation selection table 222tb is added. Other elements are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The transition timer start timing selection table 222ta is a data table that is referred to when selecting the timing for setting the internal transition data. The internal transfer data is updated and varied based on the selected set timing.

The contents of the shift timer start timing selection table 222ta will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 585(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the shift timer start timing selection table 222ta. In the transition timer start timing selection table 222ta, the start timing of the transition timer (time measurement by the transition timer is started) in correspondence with the corresponding special symbol lottery result (win/fail judgment result) and the acquired effect lottery counter 223y "-5 seconds", "origin", and "+10 seconds" are defined as the timing).

Specifically, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (whether or not determination result) is a big hit (hit), the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 19", and the start timing is "-5". second”, the range of “20 to 94” as the “origin”, and the range of “95 to 98” as “+10 seconds”. On the other hand, if the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (result of judgment) is out, the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 9", the start timing is "-5 seconds", "10 The "origin" is defined in the range of "98".

In other words, when the target special symbol lottery result is "hit", "-5 seconds" is more likely to be selected as the start timing of the transition timer than when it is "losing". ", it is made easy to select "+10b seconds" as the start timing of the transition timer. By configuring in this manner, the timing at which the internal transition data is set is predicted based on the transition (variable) state of the display value during the repeated hitting period effect, and the judgment result of the success/failure judging means is displayed in the game based on the prediction result. It is possible to provide people with predictable enjoyment.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 585(a), a timing different from the origin (timing for setting the valid period of operation) can be selected as the timing for setting the internal migration data. Specifically, a timing earlier than the origin (-2 seconds) and a timing later than the origin (+10 seconds) are selectable, but other timings may be selectable. As the timing earlier than the origin, two or more different timings may be selectable. In addition, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, when a timing later than the origin is selected, the start timing is delayed until the operation effective period expires to such an extent that the internal value is not updated according to the internal transition data. However, without being limited to this, the start timing of the transition timer delayed within the range until the operation valid period ends (for example, +5 seconds) may be configured to be selectable.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the timing at which the valid operation period is set is used as the origin, and the start timing of the transition timer can be selected by varying it with respect to the origin. Regardless of the timing to be set, for example, the start timing of the shift timer can be selected from a plurality of timings based on the elapsed time from the execution of the variation performance (the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation). Alternatively, a predetermined start condition (for example, a start condition established based on the player's operation on the operation means, or a start condition established by executing a specific effect as a variable effect) is established. It may also be configured to set the internal migration data based on this. By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a production pattern in which a plurality of timings for setting the operation valid period exists or a production pattern in which different lengths can be selected as the length of one operation valid period, the internal Since the relationship between the update status of the internal value based on the transition data and the progress status of the valid operation period can be made more diverse, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The effect number selection table 222tb is a data table that is referred to when selecting the number of effects of the operation round effect that is executed in the mid-jackpot effect. ) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223qy, different number of effects (1 to 3) are selected. This number-of-effects selection table 222tb determines that an opening command has been received (Z4101 in FIG. 590: Yes ) In the hit production setting process (see Z4151 in FIG. 592) to be executed, this time the jackpot design (the third design stopped and displayed) is a probability variation design (for example, "777") When it is determined that it is not (Z6801 in FIG. 592: No), it is referred to determine the number of repeated hits, which is the operation round effect (see Z6805 in FIG. 592).

Here, with reference to FIG. 585(b), the contents defined in the number-of-effects selection table 222tb will be described. FIG. 585(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-effects selection table 222tb. As shown in FIG. 585(b), the number of effects selection table 222tb contains different numbers of effects based on the type of target jackpot (probability variable jackpot, normal (time-saving) jackpot) and the value of the obtained effect counter 223qy. (1 to 3) are stipulated, and when the target jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot, the number of productions selected is more likely to be greater than when it is a normal (time-saving) jackpot. there is

Specifically, when the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot, and the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 29", the number of times of effect is "1", and the number of times of effect is in the range of "30 to 89". "2" is specified, and the number of effects "3" is specified in the range of "90 to 98". On the other hand, the jackpot type is a normal (time-saving) jackpot, and the value of the obtained production lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 39", the number of productions is "1", and in the range of "40 to 98", the number of productions is "2" is specified.

In other words, it is configured so that the number of times of production "3" can be selected only when it is a probability variable jackpot, and the number of production times "2" is also more likely to be selected for the probability variable jackpot than the normal (time saving) jackpot. stipulated. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the number of operation round effects to be executed during one jackpot game, that is, the number of operation round effects to be executed during one big win game is determined by referring to this number of times of effects selection table 222tb, and the determined number of times is determined. Throughout the operation round production, it is configured to execute a variable probability promotion production for inciting whether or not this big hit is a variable probability big win.

By configuring in this way, not only the performance result of the variable probability promotion performance but also the number of operation round performances executed during the variable probability promotion performance is used to predict to the player whether or not the current big win is the variable probability big win. It is possible to Therefore, not only the performance result of the variable probability promotion performance but also the performance contents of the variable probability promotion performance can be made interested in the player, so that the performance effect of the performance during the big win can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation effective period of the operation round effect executed in one jackpot middle effect is added, and one internal transfer data is created for the total operation effective period. As a result, the value of the internal value that is varied during the first operation round performance executed in the middle jackpot performance based on the probability variable jackpot can be varied according to the number of performances of the operation round performance. Therefore, in the variable probability promotion performance in which only one operation round performance is executed, the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, or multiple operation round performances are executed, although the display value does not reach the upper limit. Even though it is a variable promotion effect, the display value reaches the upper limit in the first operation round effect, and the remaining operation round effect becomes meaningless. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is lowered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 586, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 586 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 586, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 570). , a transition timer 223ta, an effect number counter 223tb, a round effect storage area 223tc, a promoted flag 223td, and a transition timer interruption flag 223te are added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The transition timer 223ta is a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the internal transition data was set, and the current internal value is determined based on the content of the internal transition data and the elapsed time indicated by the transition timer 223ta. be done. This transition timer 223ta is activated when it is determined that it is the internal value transition start timing, that is, the internal transition data setting timing (Z6521 in FIG. 588: Yes ), a value of 1 is set (Z6524 in FIG. 588), and in the effect update process 26 (see Z3198 in FIG. 587), when it is determined that the value of the transition timer 223ta is 1 or more (Z3275 in FIG. 587: Yes), the value is updated (Z3277 in FIG. 587). Then, in the repeated hit operation detection process 26 (see Z3671 in FIG. 590), when the press lottery is won (Z6603 in FIG. 590: Yes), it is referred to specify the internal value based on the internal transfer data. Then, the value of the transition timer 223ta is cleared to 0 when the effect during the big win ends (when the big win game ends).

In this embodiment, as described above, the internal value is updated based on the internal migration data across a plurality of valid operation periods. The value of the transition timer 223ta is configured not to be updated until the operation valid period is set. Therefore, when the continuous hit effect (operation round effect) for which the operation effective period is set ends, the measurement of the elapsed time by the transition timer 223ta is interrupted, and the next repeated hit effect (operation round effect) is started. , the interrupted transition timer 223ta restarts the measurement of the elapsed time. By configuring in this way, the internal value is updated by the internal migration data so as to straddle the multiple operation valid periods, regardless of the length of the non-operation valid period provided between the multiple operation valid periods. can do.

The number-of-effects counter 223tb is a counter for measuring the number of repeated hitting effects (operation-round effects) executed in the mid-jackpot effect. It is set and decremented each time a continuous hit effect (operation round effect) is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the number of times of continuous hitting performance (operation round performance) executed in the performance during the big win and the performance mode corresponding to the remaining number of times, and provide the performance that is easy for the player to understand. can do.

The round effect storage area 223tc is a storage area for temporarily storing the type of round effect to be executed for each round game in the jackpot game. Contents of the round performance to be executed in each round game set in any period until the first round game is executed are temporarily stored. Then, each time a new round game is started, the contents of the stored round production are read out, and the round production is executed based on the contents.

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, as the types of round effects, three types of normal round effects, operation round effects, and advance notice round effects are determined for each round game.

The promoted flag 223td is a flag for indicating that the variable probability promotion has succeeded as a result of the variable probability promotion effect executed during the jackpot game. is set to off. Then, when the setting status is determined (Z6901 in FIG. 593) in the round effect setting process (see Z4152 in FIG. 593) executed at the start timing of a new round game, and it is determined to be ON (FIG. 593 of Z6901: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the display mode (see FIG. 581 (b)) indicating the probability variation promotion success as the production result of the probability variation promotion effect is displayed, blessing the probability variation promotion If the round effect of the display mode is executed and it is determined to be off (Z6901 in FIG. 593: No), that is, the display mode indicating the success of the probability change promotion effect as the effect result of the probability change promotion effect is not displayed. When it is determined, a predetermined round effect corresponding to each round game is executed.

In addition, the promoted flag 223td is also referred to when setting the effect mode in the ending period of the jackpot game, and is performed when a command indicating the ending period of the jackpot game is received. (See Z4153), if it is determined that the promoted flag 223td is set to ON (Z4153 in FIG. 594: Yes), the production mode for indicating that the definite variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. If it is set (see Z7002 in FIG. 594) and it is determined that the promoted flag 223td is set to off (Z4153 in FIG. 594: No), if the current jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot ( 594 Z7004: Yes), during the ending period, the production mode indicating the probability variation promotion is set (Z7005 in FIG. 594), and not the probability variation jackpot, that is, when it is a normal (time saving) jackpot (Z7004 in FIG. 594 : No), an effect mode for indicating that the non-probability variable state (time saving state) is set is set (see Z7006 in FIG. 594).

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, according to the degree of operation of the player's PUSH button 10317 (operation means) during the variable probability promotion effect, or the degree of transition of the internal transfer data, even if the probability variable jackpot is hit, During the probability variation promotion production (during the operation round production), the display mode indicating the probability variation promotion may not be displayed. Therefore, by making it possible to determine whether or not the display mode indicating the variable probability promotion is displayed by the setting status of the promoted flag 223td, it is possible to set the round production corresponding to the production contents of the variable probability promotion production, and the game. It is possible to execute a performance during a big win without giving a sense of incongruity to a player.

The transition timer interruption flag 223te is a flag for interrupting the measurement of the passage of time by the transition timer 223ta, and is set to ON when the measurement of the passage of time by the transition timer 223ta is interrupted. This transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON when the continuous hit effect (operation round effect) for which the operation valid period is set is finished, and is set to OFF when the next repeated hit effect (operation round effect) is started. be done. As a result, the transition timer 223ta can measure the passage of time so as to straddle a plurality of valid operation periods.

<Regarding Control Contents of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the 26th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 587 to 594, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described. The content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-sixth embodiment is different from the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. 25 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572), effect update process 26 (see Z3198 in FIG. 587) is replaced with repeated hit effect processing (see Z3272 in FIG. 573), and repeated hit effect processing 26 (see Z3282 in FIG. 588). is replaced with the third repeated hitting effect processing (see Z6542 in FIG. 575), and the third repeated hitting effect processing 26 (see Z6592 in FIG. 589) is replaced with the repeated hitting operation detection processing 25 (see Z3651 in FIG. 577). The detection process 26 (see Z3671 in FIG. 590) is different in that the hit-related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591) is executed instead of the hit-related command process, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 587, the content of effect update processing 26 (Z3198) will be described. FIG. 587 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update processing 26 (Z3198). This production update process 26 (Z3198) differs from the above-described production update process 25 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572) in that a process when the value of the variable time timer is 0 is added. are identical.

When the effect update process 26 (Z3198) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the variable time timer is greater than 0 (Z3201). Z3271 to Z3262, which are the same as Z3191 in FIG. 572), are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3201, if it is determined that the value of the variable time timer is 0 (Z3201: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot (during jackpot game) (Z3274), (Z3274: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the transition timer 223ta is 1 or more (Z3275).

In the processing of Z3275, when it is determined that the value is 1 or more (Z3275: Yes), it is determined whether the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON (Z3276), and when it is determined that it is not set to ON. (Z3276: No), the value of the transition timer 223ta is updated (Z3277), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of Z3274, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (Z3274: No), if it is determined that the value of the transition timer 223ta is not 1 or more (Z3275: No), the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON. If so (Z3276: Yes), this process ends without executing the process of Z3277. As a result, the value of the migration timer 223ta for updating the internal migration data can be updated appropriately.

Next, with reference to FIG. 588, the content of the repeated hit effect processing 28 (Z3282) will be described. FIG. 588 is a flow chart showing the contents of the repeated hit effect processing 28 (Z3282). This repeated hit effect processing 28 (Z3282) differs from the above-described repeated hit effect processing (see Z3272 in FIG. 573) in that processing for setting the transition timer 223ta and the transition timer interruption flag 223te is added. , are otherwise identical.

When the repeated hit effect processing 28 (Z3282) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is time to start shifting the internal value (Z6521), and if it is determined that it is time to start shifting (Z6521: Yes), then The data (internal transfer data) stored in the internal transfer data storage area 223sg is read (Z6522), the transfer of the internal value based on the read data (internal transfer data) is started (Z6523), and the value of the transfer timer 223ta is reached. 1 is set (Z6524), and then the processing of Z6501 to 6509 and Z6512, which is the same as the above-described continuous hit effect processing (see Z3272 in FIG. 573), is executed.

When the process of Z6509 is completed, it is next determined whether the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON (Z6525), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z6525: Yes), The interrupt flag 223te is set to OFF (Z6526), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of Z6525 that it is not set to ON (Z6525: No), the process of Z6526 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 589, the contents of the third repeated hit effect processing 26 (Z6592) will be described. FIG. 589 is a flow chart showing the contents of the third repeated hit effect processing 26 (Z6592). This third repeated hit effect process 26 (Z6592) differs from the above-described third repeated hit effect process (see Z6542 in FIG. 575) in that a process for setting the shift timer interruption flag 223te is added.

Specifically, in the process of Z6579, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the repeated hitting effect (Z6579: Yes), the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON (Z6594), and the setting status of the repeated hitting effect setting flag 223si is set to "01H" (Z6580), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the effect number counter tb is 1 or more (Z6595). In other words, in the processing of Z6595, it is determined whether or not the repeated hit effect executed this time is the last repeated hit effect in the effect during the jackpot.

In the process of Z6595, if it is determined that the value of the effect number counter tb is not 1 or more (is 0) (Z6595: No), this time is the last repeated hit effect, so the above-mentioned third repeated hit effect (Fig. Z6581 processing identical to Z6542 of 575) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z6595, the value of the number of effects counter tb is 1 or more, that is, if it is determined that the next continuous hit effect is to be executed in the effect during the jackpot (Z6595: Yes), the number of times of effect The counter value of the counter tb is decremented by 1 (Z6596), and it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter tb after the subtraction is 0 (Z6597), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z6597: Yes), the display value (Z6598), and terminates this process.

In addition, in the processing of Z6597, if it is determined that the value of the effect number counter tb is not 0 (Z6597: No), the effect mode (see FIG. 580(b)) suggesting that the repeated hit effect will continue is set. , the process ends. In this way, when one whole performance is executed across a plurality of repeated hit performances, when one repeated hit performance ends, it is determined whether or not there are remaining repeated hit performances, and the determination is made. By setting a display mode (performance mode) to be displayed at the end of continuous hitting performance based on the result, one overall performance can be smoothly executed as a series of performances.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 589, only the end timing of the last repeated hit effect is set according to the display value (number of gauges of the repeated hit gauge RG), and the end timing of other repeated hit effects is set. is configured to suggest that the next repeated hit effect will be executed, but it is not limited to this. number) may be configured to set the effect mode according to the number). As a result, the player who enjoys the performance during the big win is made to think that all the repeated hit performances executed as the performance during the big win are completed, and then the performance with the unexpectedness of further executing the continuous hitting performance is performed. can provide.

Further, at the end timing of the last repeated hit effect, it may be configured to set an effect mode suggesting that the next repeated hit effect will be executed. As a result, the player can play the game while anticipating that a new continuous hitting effect will be executed until the end of the effect during the big win.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the continuous hit effect is executed in the effect during the jackpot is the round game period, but it is not limited to this. can be As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the continuous hit effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 590, the content of the repeated hit operation detection process 26 (Z3671) will be described. FIG. 590 is a flow chart showing the details of the repeated hit operation detection process 26 (Z3671). In this repeated hitting operation detection process 26 (Z3671), the repeated hitting operation detection process 25 (see Z3651 in FIG. 577) described above is added with a process related to repeated hitting effect (promoting effect) executed during the jackpot (during the jackpot game). are the same except that The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the repeated hitting operation detection process 26 (Z3671) is executed, the same processes of Z6601 to Z6616 as the repeated hitting operation detection process 25 (see Z3651 in FIG. 577) are executed. Then, when the processing of Z6611 is completed, it is determined whether the display value after addition is 5 (Z6651), and if it is determined to be 5 (Z6651: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot is in progress. (Z6652).

In the process of Z6652, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress, that is, when the display value reaches 5 in the jackpot middle production (promotion production) and the promotion screen shown in FIG. 581 (b) is displayed (Z6652: Yes), sets the promoted flag 223td to ON (Z6653), and terminates this process. In the present embodiment, when the promoted flag 223td is set to ON, in subsequent round games, a round effect is executed in an effect mode for indicating success in promotion (indicating a probability variable jackpot). there is Therefore, even though the promotion screen (see FIG. 581(b)) has been executed, it is possible to avoid the problem that the successive hits effect (promotion effect) is executed again in the subsequent round effects.

Next, with reference to FIG. 591, the contents of the win-related command process 26 (Z3974) will be described. FIG. 591 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related command process 26 (Z3974). This hit-related command process 26 (Z3974) is different from the hit-related command process 23 (see Z3914 of FIG. It is different in that it has been changed. The same reference numerals are given to the parts that do not have the same processing, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the hit-related command process 26 (Z3974) is executed, in the process of Z4101, when it is determined that the opening command is received (Z4101: Yes), the effect setting process during the hit is executed (Z4151), and the process of Z4102 is executed. and terminate this process. The detailed content of the effect setting process (Z4151) during hitting will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z4103, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z4103: Yes), the process of Z4104 is executed, then the round effect setting process is executed (Z4152), and this process ends. Details of the round effect setting process (Z4152) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the process of Z4103, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z4103: No), Z4105 to Execute the processing of Z4111. Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the process of Z4111 (Z4111: Yes), the effect end process during hitting is executed (Z4153), the process of Z4112 is executed, and this process ends. The detailed contents of the effect ending process (Z4153) during winning will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the contents of the hit effect setting process (Z4151) executed in the hit related command process 26 (Z3974) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 592 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process (Z4151) during winning. In this hit during production setting process (Z4151), according to the type of the jackpot game and the type of the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot (probable variable symbol or normal symbol), the effect during the jackpot to be executed during the current jackpot game. A process for setting an effect mode is executed.

When the hit medium effect setting process (Z4151) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit design (third design) is a probability variation design (Z6801). Here, in the present embodiment, a variation effect is performed in which the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the period during which the special symbol variation is performed. Then, in accordance with the timing when the special symbols are stop-displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot winning, the third pattern is also stop-displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot winning (for example, the combination of the same numbers (666, etc.)). As a combination indicating the jackpot winning of the third pattern, the jackpot type of the winning jackpot (probable variable jackpot, normal (time-saving) jackpot, etc.) can also be notified (for example, a variable probability pattern “777” etc. indicating the probability variable jackpot), It has a combination that does not notify the type of jackpot (for example, a normal symbol "666" that can be displayed as a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot). Then, when the combination of the third pattern that does not notify the jackpot type is stopped and displayed, the current jackpot type (probable variable jackpot, normal (time-saving) jackpot) is notified in the jackpot middle performance executed during the jackpot game. It is configured to execute a promotion performance.

By configuring in this way, when the jackpot type is notified at the stop display timing of the third symbol (before the start of the jackpot game), and when the jackpot type is notified during the jackpot game (during the execution of the performance during the jackpot). , and so on, the player can play the game for a long period of time while expecting to win a more advantageous jackpot (probability variable jackpot), and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the process of Z6801, it is determined whether or not the player has already been notified of the probability variation jackpot before the start of the jackpot game. In (Z6801: No), next, it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is a probability variation jackpot (Z6802), and if it is determined that it is a probability variation jackpot (Z6802: Yes), 5 in the upper limit storage area 223se (Z6803), if it is determined that it is not a probability variable jackpot, that is, if it is a normal (time saving) jackpot (Z6802: No), set 4 to the upper limit storage area 223se (Z6804), respectively Z6805 to process.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 580 and 581, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, it is configured such that a plurality of consecutive hitting effects are executed. is increased, and when the gauge number rises to 5, a promotion performance is executed to indicate a probability variable jackpot. Therefore, as described in the processing of Z6803 and Z6804, only when the current jackpot is the probability variable jackpot, by setting 5 to the upper limit storage area 223se, during the jackpot game other than the probability variable jackpot , it is possible to prevent the problem that the gauge number of the repeated hitting gauge RG rises to five.

Returning to FIG. 592, the description continues. At Z6805, the effect number selection table 222tb is referred to determine the number of repeated hit effects to be executed in the current hitting effect (Z6805), and the determined number is set as the value of the effect number counter tb (Z6806). . Then, the number of rounds in which the continuous hit effect is executed is determined, information indicating the round effect corresponding to each round is stored in the round effect storage area 223tc (Z6807), and the internal scenario is determined by referring to the internal scenario table 222sa. (Z6808), internal value transition data (internal value transition data) is created based on the number of repeated hits and the internal scenario (Z6809), and the created internal value transition data is stored in the internal transition data storage area 223sg ( Z6810), 5 is set in the difference upper limit value storage area (Z6811), and this processing ends.

As shown in the process of Z6811, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, unlike the above-described twenty-fifth embodiment, the difference upper limit value is set to 5, which is the upper limit of the gauge number of the repeated hit gauge RG. there is In other words, when the probability variable jackpot is increased and the internal value rises to 5, for example, even if the current display value is 0, the probability variable jackpot is generated based on one operation to the operation means. It becomes possible to display the display value 5 shown. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Note that the technical idea that the display value can be increased to the upper limit value based on one operation to the operation means as in the present embodiment may be used in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, or may be used in the second embodiment described above. The technical idea used in the twenty-fifth embodiment, that is, the technical idea that the display value cannot be increased to the upper limit by one operation to the operation means, may be used in the twenty-sixth embodiment.

Furthermore, when configured as in the present embodiment, for example, by configuring not to execute the effect prompting the player to operate the operating means until the internal value rises to 5, the continuous hit effect can be achieved. , can be changed to a one-time press effect. In this case, on the display screen shown in FIG. 580(a), instead of the characters "Consecutive hits", the characters "Impact push" are displayed as a display mode prompting the user to press the operating means once with the image NG. Then, in the display area 803, by operating the PUSH button 10317 once, a guide display indicating that the effect result of the promotion effect will be displayed may be displayed.

In addition, in this way, when making it possible to execute a continuous hitting effect and a one-time pressing effect as the effect during the big win, the player is configured to be able to select the type of effect to be executed during the big win game. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the degree of probability variable big win expectation is varied according to the type of performance, and the type of performance to be executed is determined by a predetermined lottery based on the actual type of big win.

Returning to FIG. 592, the description continues. In the process of Z6801, if it is determined that the jackpot design is a probability variation pattern (Z6801: Yes), then set the production mode of the production during the hit for showing the probability variation jackpot (Z6812), and end this processing . In other words, when the player is already notified of the probability variable jackpot before the start of the jackpot game, there is no need to execute the promotion effect in the jackpot middle effect (hit middle effect). , different effects are executed.

By constructing in this way, when winning the variable probability big win, the game state set after the end of the big win game does not change depending on the notification timing of the variable probability big win, but the performance mode of the performance during the big win is made different. be able to. In this case, the jackpot type is the jackpot type that is executed when the player is already notified that the probability variation jackpot is already occurring before the jackpot game starts (when the probability variation pattern hits the jackpot). An effect that can give benefits that are available to different players (for example, if the pachinko machine 10 has specifications that allow the jackpot probability to be set in multiple stages, the set value and the high probability state of special symbols across the jackpot game) If the pachinko machine 10 (a so-called limit machine) has a specification in which an upper limit is set for the number of consecutively set numbers, the remaining number of times until reaching the upper limit (limit), the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, etc. are reported. possible production). As a result, when the same jackpot type (variable probability jackpot) is won, the benefits that the player can acquire (advantageous information that can be obtained from the performance) can be changed depending on the timing at which the jackpot type is notified. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the above-mentioned technical concept is used, for example, in the remaining round game period after the probability variation big win is notified in the promotion effect, the production mode of the effect during the jackpot when the probability variation pattern is stopped and displayed can be executed. As the effect mode of the effect during the jackpot when the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed, it is preferable to provide a effect mode in which the benefits are more likely to be given as the game progresses to the latter half. As a result, even when the promotion effect is executed, it is possible to create an advantageous situation for the player by informing the variable probability big win as soon as possible, so that the player is willing to operate the operation means. can be operated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 593, the contents of the round effect setting process (Z4152) will be described. FIG. 593 is a flow chart showing the contents of the round effect setting process (Z4152). This round effect setting process (Z4152) is executed when a round number command is received in the above-described win-related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591), and is stored in the round effect storage area 223tc. Based on the existing round effect information, a process of setting the effect mode for the newly started round game is executed.

When the round effect setting process (Z4152) is executed, it is first determined whether the promoted flag 223td is set to ON (Z6901), and if it is determined to be set to ON (Z6901: Yes), The production mode of the production during hitting for indicating the probability variable jackpot is set (S6902), and this processing is finished. That is, as in the present embodiment, the promotion effect is executed across a plurality of round games, and the effect result of the promotion effect (timing to notify the probability variable jackpot) is the operation of the operation means by the player. When configured based on the results, it is unclear at what timing the variable probability jackpot notification is executed.

In other words, as a promotion effect, even if the internal value transition data that increases the internal value to 5 is set during the continuous hit effect that is executed in the second round, the situation where the probability variable jackpot can be notified, that is, the internal value When the player does not operate the operation means in the continuous hitting performance, the round game is finished without executing the variable probability big win notification, and the next continuous hitting performance (for example, the fourth round) is executed. On the other hand, if the player intentionally operates the operating means in the second round, the probability variable jackpot may be reported during the second round.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, every time a new round is started, it is determined whether the promoted flag 223td is set to ON. A dedicated effect mode different from the effect mode based on the information stored in the round effect storage area 223tc is set. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity with regard to the content of each round effect in the mid-jackpot effect.

In the present embodiment, when the promoted flag 223td indicating that the probability variable jackpot notification has been executed is set to ON, a predetermined effect mode (information stored in the round effect storage area 223tc Although a dedicated performance mode different from the performance mode based on the game is set, it is not limited to this, and the promotion performance (continuous hit performance) is not forced to be executed in the performance during the big win. A flag (restriction flag) indicating the ) may not be executed. In this case, for example, during the opening period of the jackpot game, a selection screen is displayed for the player to select whether or not to execute the promotion effect, and the player is promoted. If it is selected not to execute the effect, the regulation flag may be set to ON.

In the processing of Z6901, when it is determined that the promoted flag 223td is not set to ON (Z6901: No), next, the information stored in the round effect storage area 223tc is read out, corresponding to the current round number. A round effect is specified (Z6903), it is determined whether the specified round effect is a repeated hit effect (Z6904), and if it is determined to be a repeated hit effect (Z6904: Yes), the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is set to "02H". ” is set (Z6905), the start of repeated hit effect is set (Z6906), and this processing is terminated.

Also, in the process of Z6904, if it is determined that the round effect is not the repeated hit effect (Z6904: No), then it is determined whether the round effect is the repeated hit notice effect (Z6907), and it is determined that it is the repeated hit notice effect. If so (Z6907: Yes), the start of repeated hit notice effect is set (Z6908), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a continuous hit notice effect (Z6907: No), the start of a normal round effect is set (Z6909), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 594, the content of the effect ending process (Z4153) during winning will be described. FIG. 594 is a flowchart showing the during-hitting effect end processing (Z4153). This hit production end process (Z4153) is executed when the ending command is received in the above-mentioned hit related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591), and according to the setting status of the promoted flag 223td A process for setting a different effect mode and a process for ending the effect during the jackpot are executed.

When the hit production end process (Z4153) is executed, first, it is determined whether the promoted flag 223td is set to ON (Z7001), and if it is determined to be set to ON (Z7001; Yes) , Determines the effect mode indicating the probability variable state rush (Z7002), sets the promoted flag 223td to OFF (Z7003), shifts to the processing of Z7007 described later, and then ends this processing. On the other hand, in the process of Z7001, if it is determined that the promoted flag 223td is not set to ON (Z7001: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (Z7004), and the probability variation jackpot If it is determined that (Z7004: Yes), the production mode indicating the probability variation promotion is determined (Z7005), the process proceeds to the process of Z7007 described later, and then the process ends.

Also, in the process of Z7004, if it is determined that it is not a probability variation jackpot (Z7004: No), the production mode indicating non-probability variation state entry is determined (Z7006), the upper limit storage area 223se, the difference upper limit storage area 223sf, The internal transition data storage area 223sg, the display value storage area 233sh, the round effect storage area 223tc, and the value of the transition timer are cleared (reset) (Z7007), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment and the twenty-sixth embodiment described above, the target value (upper limit) is set in advance, and the range of values that can be variably displayed (internal value) is defined based on the elapsed time. Since the variable display can be continuously executed over the entire period), the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the transition degree of the value (internal quantity) defined based on the elapsed time, as shown in FIG. It is possible to increase variations in performance in the operation performance.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment and the twenty-sixth embodiment described above, a specific degree of transition is created for one effect period (total period of operation valid periods set during one effect period). However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to preferentially create the degree of transition for a part of the period and then create the degree of transition for the other period.

Specifically, when creating the degree of transition (internal transition data) for an operation effect with an operation effective period of 10 seconds and an upper limit of 10, priority internal transition data for the last 5 seconds is first generated. create. In this case, the preferential internal transition data is created under the condition that the internal value can be increased by a maximum of 10 in 5 seconds. Then, when preferential internal transition data that increases the internal value by 8 in 5 seconds is created as the preferential internal transition data, then internal transition data that increases the internal value by 2 seconds from the first half of 5 seconds is generated. will be created.

In this way, one rendering period is divided into a plurality of sub-periods, priority is assigned to each sub-period, internal transition data is created individually, and finally the upper limit in one rendering period is determined. By configuring it so that it is possible to create overall internal transition data that matches the value, for example, among the operation effects executed within one effect period, the period during which the player pays the most attention (for example, the final stage of the operation effect It is possible to create internal transition data such that the internal value greatly increases for a period or a period during which an operation presentation in a mode different from usual is executed.

Therefore, it becomes possible to easily change (easily raise) the display mode by operating the operation means during the period in which the player is watching, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect. In each of the above-described embodiments, the pattern of increasing the display mode (the gauge number of the repeated hit gauge RG) was described as the operation effect (continuous hit effect), but the display mode can be changed a plurality of times. For example, it may be configured to reduce the value indicated by the display mode, or a display mode that does not have a concept of value (for example, a plurality of display modes that individually indicate a plurality of reach modes) , may be configured to be variable.

Further, in the above-described twenty-fifth embodiment and twenty-sixth embodiment, the configuration is such that the internal transition data is created when the operation presentation is executed. It may be configured to create internal migration data after the elapsed time according to the time. In this case, for example, determining means capable of determining the operation result of the player in the first half period of the operation presentation may be provided, and internal transition data in the second half period of the operation presentation may be created based on the result of the determination means. More specifically, whether or not the variable displayable upper limit (internal value after the first half period has elapsed) has been reached (whether the player is actively operating the operation means) is determined in the first half period. If it is determined that the upper limit of variable display is reached, the internal value is likely to reach the upper limit (the upper limit of variable display during the current operation effect period) in the latter half of the period. It is preferable to configure such that data (internal transfer data whose internal value tends to increase at the beginning of the second half period) is created, or that the upper limit value is increased.

By configuring in this way, the player can actively play the game over the entire period of the operation presentation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 568, in the above-described twenty-fifth and twenty-sixth embodiments, one internal scenario is selected from four types of internal scenarios as a scenario indicating the tendency of the degree of internal migration data migration. and create internal migration data based on the trends indicated by the selected internal scenario, but without being limited to this, multiple internal scenarios can be selected, and the selected multiple internal scenarios are configured to create internal migration data. After creating a fusion scenario in which scenarios are merged, internal migration data may be generated based on the fusion scenario.

Furthermore, by providing a processing means for processing the above-described internal scenario, for example, by performing processing to expand, contract, or lengthen the curve showing the tendency of each internal scenario (see FIG. 568(a)), the same internal scenario can be obtained. may be configured to increase the variations of internal migration data created when is selected.

Furthermore, in the above-described twenty-fifth embodiment and twenty-sixth embodiment, the internal scenario is read when the internal transfer data is created. Elapsed time after the is put in, variation time after special symbol variation is executed with a specific variation pattern, elapsed time after the start of the jackpot game, elapsed time after the jackpot game ends Alternatively, the waveform indicating the internal scenario progresses based on the result of time measurement by the time measurement means (for example, RTC) of the pachinko machine 10, and when it is determined that the internal transition data is created, the progress It may also be configured to create internal transition data based on the waveforms in. By configuring in this way, it is possible to bias the internal transition data that are likely to be created depending on the timing at which the operation effect is executed. It is possible to make it easy to predict the relationship between the variable degree of the mode and the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the operation effect.

<27th Embodiment>
Next, the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 595 to 603. FIG. Conventionally, as in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, an operation means (PUSH button 10317) that can be operated by a player is provided, and an operation to the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is determined to be valid within an operation valid period. By operating the operation means (PUSH button 10317), there is an operation effect that changes the effect mode of the effect being executed. As part of the operation effect, there is a continuous operation effect (so-called repeated hit effect) in which the effect mode is changed step by step by operating the operation means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times within the operation effective period. .

This continuous hit effect is configured to suggest that the more the effect mode is changed, the more advantageous the player is to be awarded a privilege (for example, a special symbol lottery jackpot win). Every time the means (PUSH button 10317) is operated (pressed down), it is determined whether or not to change the presentation mode, and when it is determined that the presentation mode is to be varied, repeated hits are made to vary the presentation mode. The performance was controlled. Then, every time the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317), operation notification (for example, output of a pressing sound) is executed to notify the player that the operation means (PUSH button 10317) has been operated. By doing so, in the case where the presentation mode is not changed despite the operation of the PUSH button 10317, by reliably informing the player that the PUSH button 10317 has been operated (depressed), the operation means can be prevented from malfunctioning. There is something that makes it easy to understand what you are not doing.

However, when the above-described conventional repeated hit effect is executed, each time the PUSH button 10317 is operated, it is determined whether or not to change the effect mode. In the operation of the PUSH button 10317 operated a plurality of times in between, if it is determined that the effect mode is to be varied, before the variable effect for changing the effect mode is completed, There is a problem that the next variable effect is executed, and an operation effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

On the other hand, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is operated within the operation effective period and the variable effect is executed to change the effect mode based on the operation to the operation means. is configured so that the next variable performance is not executed until the performance period of the variable performance elapses. By configuring in this way, the variable performance executed based on the operation to the operation means is redundantly executed, or the variable performance being executed is stopped and a new variable performance is executed. , it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect of the operation production.

In addition, even during the effect period of the variable effect, the operation notification that is executed when the player operates the operation means is configured to be executable. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the operation performed by the player on the operation means within the operation effective period is correctly recognized, so that a new variable effect is performed.

Furthermore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the player operates the operation means during the variable performance effect period, the variable performance is not executed, but an internal lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed. Based on the result of the internal lottery, the performance mode after the variable performance is completed is configured to be variable. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means even while the variable performance is being executed. Moreover, by configuring in this way, even if the effect period of the variable effect is set long, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the desire to operate the operation means.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice ramp control device 113, a part of the configuration of the RAM 223, and a voice ramp control The difference is that part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the device 113 is changed, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

<Regarding the production contents of the twenty-seventh embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 595 to 596, the characteristic effect contents among the various effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. Specifically, the content of the effect that is executed based on the player's operation of the operation means in a state in which the operation valid period is set will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 595(a), a description will be given of a mode in which the presentation mode is changed during the repeated hitting presentation. FIG. 595(a) is a diagram schematically showing a display mode when the effect is variable in the continuous hit effect. The content shown in FIG. 595(a) is a diagram showing the same variable content as the display mode described with reference to FIG. 560(b) in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above. It shows the display mode immediately after (0.1 second) after operating the operating means. In FIG. 595(a), only differences from FIG. 560(b) described above will be described, and descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

When the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317) in a state in which the operation effective period is set, the voice output device 226 outputs a pressing sound (indicated by "duck" in the figure) for 0.1 seconds, and the spirit gauge is displayed. An effect display for varying (increasing) the gauge number of the KG and an effect display for varying (increasing) the display mode of the aura that the character 801 wears are executed for 0.5 second. The figure shown in FIG. 595(a) is immediately after the player operates the PUSH button 10317 (after about 0.1 seconds), so the character 801 is displayed while the second gauge of the spirit gauge KG is being displayed. It shows a display mode in the middle of display in which the aura is increased by one level. In the display area 803, characters "6.50 seconds left" are displayed to indicate the remaining period of the valid operation period.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has a variable effect display that varies (increases) the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG, and the display mode of the aura that the character 801 wears is variable (larger). During the period (0.5 seconds) until the end of the variable effect display, even if the player operates the PUSH button 10317, only a pressing sound is output, and a new variable effect is not executed. Configure. Therefore, since it is possible to prohibit the start of a new variable effect until the variable effect display being executed ends, the effect display executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed to the player. It can be easily understood.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, it takes 0.15 seconds at the shortest to determine that the player has operated the PUSH button 10317 . In other words, even if the player repeatedly hits the PUSH button 10317 at intervals shorter than 0.15 seconds, the operation of pressing the PUSH button 10317 at intervals of 0.15 seconds or more is subject to operation determination. It consists of With this configuration, the press interval of the PUSH button 10317 can be made longer than the press sound output period (0.1 seconds), so there is no possibility that multiple press sounds may be output in duplicate. You can physically prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, although a detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, when the operation means is operated during the period (0.5 seconds) during which the variable effect display is being executed, that is, during the period during which no new variable effect is being executed. button display for changing the display mode of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the display screen, instead of the lottery for varying the mode of the variable effect display. A variable lottery is configured to be executable, and when the button display variable lottery is won, an image simulating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the display screen is displayed after the variable effect display being executed is finished. It is configured such that an effect display that changes the aspect is executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, one display mode (for example, a character display mode) is configured to be variable based on the player's operation of the operation means, and the period during which the one display mode is varied By setting the (variable period) as an invalid period in which one display mode is not changed even if the player operates the operation means, it is configured to prevent a situation in which one display mode is changed redundantly. are doing. Then, when the operation means is operated during the invalid period, as a process different from the process (variable) for changing the one display mode, another display mode different from the one display mode is changed. It is configured to execute the processing of By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which one display mode is changed redundantly, and even during a period (variable period) in which one display mode is changed, The player can be made to operate the operation means willingly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 595(b), a description will be given of a display mode when the variable effect display ends in a state where the variable button display lottery is won. FIG. 595(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode when the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 is varied, and is 0.4 seconds after the state shown in FIG. 595(a). It is the figure which showed the display mode displayed later.

As shown in FIG. 595(b), when the variable effect display (the effect display that changes the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG and the display mode of the character 801) is completed, the button display variable executed during the variable effect display period is displayed. Based on the result of the lottery, the display mode of the image simulating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the image NG is displayed in a mode different from the normal display mode (in the figure, the edge is painted black). Then, in the display area 803, characters "6.10 seconds remaining" are displayed.

Although the details will be described later, in the variable button display lottery, there is a variable button display lottery for determining whether or not to change the display mode of an image simulating the PUSH button 10317, and if the button display variable lottery is won, the display mode is selected. A display mode lottery for determining the type is executed. Then, when winning the button variable lottery, the display value variable condition is satisfied based on the first operation to the operation means executed after the variable effect display is finished (without executing the variable lottery, It is configured so that the privilege that the variable condition is always satisfied) is given to the player.

Furthermore, in the display mode lottery, different display modes are based on the type (jackpot, loss) of the result of the target special symbol lottery (result of judgment) and the upper limit value set for the continuous hit effect. configured to be selected. In other words, when the display mode of the image simulating the PUSH button 10317 is changed, it is possible to give the privilege that the player can predict the result of the target special symbol lottery according to the type of the display mode. Configure.

Therefore, even while the variable effect display is being executed, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means. In addition, the longer the effect period of the variable effect display is, the less chance there is to newly change the display value within the operation effective period, which is a limited period, and the effect of the effect is reduced. However, by enabling execution of the button variable lottery using the effect period of the variable effect display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the effect during the operation valid period.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the period (additional variable invalid period) in which the new variable effect is not executed, the player is made to predict the result of the special symbol lottery. This effect is executed by changing the display mode of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, but is not limited to this, for example, when an additional variable invalid period is set , a new display mode (for example, a rock icon simulating a rock) may be displayed on the image NG, thereby executing an effect mode indicating that the operation of the operation means is restricted by the rock icon. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the additional variable invalid period has been set.

Furthermore, the rock icon described above is configured to be variable based on the operation of the operation means during the addition variable invalid period, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the variable lottery is won), the rock icon is destroyed, It may be configured such that a display icon capable of giving an advantageous privilege to the player is displayed. In this case, as a privilege advantageous to the player, a privilege different from the privilege (expectation of winning the jackpot) provided based on the result of the variable performance (the result of varying the spirit gauge KG) may be provided. Well, for example, when a jackpot is won, a privilege that suggests the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, a privilege that suggests the number of round games to be executed when the jackpot is won, or the currently set game state It is good to constitute so that the privilege which suggests may be provided.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect (duplicate variable effect) that is difficult for the player to understand during the execution period of the continuous hitting effect, and to provide advantages to the player by a plurality of effects. Since it is possible to provide a plurality of such benefits, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operating means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 596, the contents of various effects that are executed in response to the operation of the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the continuous hitting effect in which the operation effective period is set will be described. FIG. 596 is a timing chart showing the contents of various effects that are executed in response to the operation of the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the continuous hit effect in which the operation effective period is set.

As shown in FIG. 596, when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, a 0.1-second pressing sound (indicated by “duck” in the figure) is output from the audio output device 226, and if the variable lottery is won, , 0.5 second variable effect (effect of increasing the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG, effect of changing the display mode of the character 801) is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 for 0.5 seconds. While this variable effect is being executed, even if the player operates the PUSH button 10317, there is an additional variable invalid period in which no new variable effect is executed.

Each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, a pressing sound is output even during this additional variable disable period. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the pressing operation is properly recognized. Furthermore, even during the additional variable invalidation period, the variable lottery is configured to be executed based on the push operation of the PUSH button 10317, and if the variable lottery is won, the internal variable A state in which it is easy to win the lottery is set (corresponding to pressing the PUSH button 10317 for the fourth time in FIG. 592(a)).

Then, when a state in which it is easy to win the variable lottery is internally set, when the PUSH button 10317 is pressed after the additional variable invalid period ends, the variable effect is executed without executing the variable lottery. (See the black circle in FIG. 596(a)). With this configuration, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means (PUSH button 10317) even during the additional variable disable period.

In the example shown in FIG. 596(a), an example is shown in which 0.5 seconds is set as the execution period of the variable production, but the execution period of the variable production varies depending on the type of variable production. ing. Specifically, when the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG shifts from the 1st stage to the 2nd stage and from the 2nd stage to the 3rd stage, the execution period of the variable effect is 0.5 seconds, and from the 3rd stage The execution period of the variable performance at the 4th stage and at the time of shifting from the 4th stage to the 5th stage is configured to be 1 second. In other words, the higher the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot by the variable performance, the longer the execution period of the variable performance, and the more impactful performance is executed for the player.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the degree of expectation of winning the big win in the variable presentation in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, as the variable effect progresses (as the number of gauges increases), the execution period of the variable effect becomes longer, so the additional variable invalid period becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the operation period for executing an effect (effect for varying the display mode of the PUSH button 10317) different from the variable effect executed during the continuous hitting effect.

Also, in the present embodiment, the period during which the variable effect is executed and the period during which the additional variable invalid period is set are the same period, but the period during which the variable effect is executed is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the additional variable invalid period is longer than . By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of the next variable effect immediately after the variable effect ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 595, as an effect mode of continuous hit effect, the effect mode in which the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases is used, but the display is based on the player's operation to the operation means. Any presentation mode may be used as long as the mode is variable, and the degree of expectation for granting a privilege (for example, winning a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player is changed depending on the variable state. , a specific value is decreased, and the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be changed according to the amount of decrease. You may use the production|presentation mode which varied the provision expectation degree of . Further, as an idea opposite to that of the present embodiment, an effect mode may be used in which the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher when the display mode is not changed based on the operation of the operation means by the operation means.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by causing the player to operate the operation means a plurality of times, an effect of changing the display mode a plurality of times is executed. Depending on the length of the period in which the player continues to press the operating means, an effect (long-press effect) that changes the display mode multiple times, or an effect that is added to the operating means when the player operates the operating means. An effect may be used in which the display mode is varied a plurality of times based on the strength and direction of the pressure (impact) applied.

Also, as shown in FIG. 596, in the present embodiment, one type of sound “duck” is used to indicate that the PUSH button 10317 has been operated (pressed) during the operation valid period. , but not limited to this, for example, different sounds are output when operating the operation means during a period in which the display mode can be changed and when operating the operation means in a period in which the display mode cannot be changed (additional variable disabled period). It may be configured as possible. With this configuration, it is possible to effectively recognize that the operating means (PUSH button 10317) has been operated by the type of sound output when the operating means (PUSH button 10317) is operated, and to change the current display mode. Whether or not the period is variable can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, as the continuous hitting effect, the display mode (the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG) is configured to be varied (increased) in multiple stages, but this is not the only option. Instead, the variable mode may be changed in an analog manner, or the variable degree may be displayed as a percentage. Further, it may be arranged such that a decrease in the display mode is more advantageous to the player, or a greater number of times the display mode is changed is more advantageous to the player.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twenty-seventh embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 597 and 598. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are , and the electrical configuration is otherwise the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 597(a). FIG. 597(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 597(a), the twenty-seventh embodiment differs from the ROM 222 of the twenty-fifth embodiment in that a button display mode selection table 222ua is added, and the rest is the same. Descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

The button display mode selection table 222ua is a data table referred to when selecting the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is configured so that a plurality of types of display modes (display colors) can be selected. In the effect timer processing (see Z3281 in FIG. 601), this button display mode selection table 222ua determines that the value of the timer 223ua during effect described later is 0 (Z7102 in FIG. 601: Yes), and the confirmation flag 223ub described later is turned on. (Z7103 in FIG. 601: Yes), that is, in a state where the variable effect display is completed, it is decided to change the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 during the variable effect display. 601, it is referred to select the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 (Z7104 in FIG. 601).

Here, the contents of the button display mode selection table 222ua will be described with reference to FIG. 597(b). FIG. 597(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the button display mode selection table 222ua. In this button display mode selection table 222ua, the lottery result of the special symbol to be targeted (result of determination), the upper limit value set for the continuous hit effect being executed, and the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223qy , four types of display modes (blue, yellow, red, and rainbow) are defined respectively. Note that the upper limit value is specified by reading information stored in the upper limit value storage area 223sf.

Specifically, if the success/failure determination result is a win (jackpot) and "5" is set as the upper limit value, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 59", "yellow", " If "red" is specified in the range of "60 to 89", "rainbow" is specified in the range of "90 to 98", and "~4" (other than "5") is set as the upper limit, The value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined as "yellow" in the range of "0 to 59", "blue" in the range of "60 to 89", and "red" in the range of "90 to 98".

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is out of line and the upper limit value is set to "5", the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 59", "yellow" is in the range of "60 to 89". "Blue" is defined in the range of "90-98", "Red" is defined in the range of "90-98", and "-4" (other than "5") is set as the upper limit value, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy "Blue" is specified in the range of "0 to 59", "Yellow" is specified in the range of "60 to 89", and "Red" is specified in the range of "90 to 98".

In other words, the four types of display modes selectable in the button display mode selection table 222ua are defined with different degrees of advantage to the player, and the display mode most disadvantageous to the player is "blue", followed by "blue". The content of the button display mode selection table 222ua is defined so that "yellow" and "red" are gradually advantageous in that order, and "rainbow" is the most advantageous display mode for the player.

To explain in detail, the display mode “rainbow” can only be selected when the result of the win/fail judgment is “win (jackpot)”. , the player can be made to understand that the success/failure determination result is a hit (jackpot) before the performance result of the continuous hit performance being executed is displayed. Therefore, the display mode is the most advantageous for the player who wants to quickly grasp that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only when the target special symbol lottery result (win/fail determination result) is a big hit and the set upper limit value is "5", the display mode is "rainbow". Since it is configured so that it can be selected, when the display mode "rainbow" is selected, it is notified in advance that the display value will change (rise) to the maximum "5" in the continuous hit effect being executed. will do. Therefore, even a player who wants to change (increase) the display value to the maximum value during the repeated hitting effect can be notified that the display value can be changed (increased) to the maximum value during the repeated hitting effect. Therefore, the display mode is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, other display modes (“blue”, “yellow”, “red”) are defined so that the selection ratio differs according to the success/failure determination result and the set upper limit value. and the upper limit value (other than "5") disadvantageous to the player, the display mode "blue" is most likely to be selected, followed by "yellow" and "red ” is configured to be difficult to be selected in this order. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the selection rate in the most disadvantageous situation for the player, the display mode "blue" is the most disadvantageous display mode for the player. The display mode "yellow" is more advantageous to the player than the display mode "blue", but is more disadvantageous than the display mode "red".

It should be noted that even when comparing the selection ratio of each display mode when the success/failure determination result is a hit (jackpot) and the selection rate of each display mode when the success/failure determination result is a loss, the display mode "Blue" is the most likely to be selected when the result of the success/failure judgment is "no", and is the least likely to be selected when the result of the success/failure judgment is a hit (jackpot). ” in order to facilitate selection at the time of winning. Therefore, even from the viewpoint of the selection ratio when the result of the success/failure judgment is a result (win) that is advantageous to the player, the selection ratio when the result of the success/failure judgment is a result (loss) that is disadvantageous to the player From the point of view, the display mode "blue" is the most disadvantageous display mode for the player. The display mode "yellow" is more advantageous to the player than the display mode "blue", but is more disadvantageous than the display mode "red".

Next, with reference to FIG. 598, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 598 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 598, the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 570). The difference is that a flag 223ub is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The effecting timer 223ua is a timer for measuring the effect period of the variable effect display executed during the operation effective period (during the repeated hit period effect), and In the executed normal operation process (see Z7206 in FIG. 602), when a variable effect is executed, a value corresponding to the effect period (0.5 seconds) of the variable effect is set. Then, the timer is updated each time the process of Z3271 of the effect update process 27 (see Z3188 in FIG. 599) is executed. When the value of the effect timer 223ua is greater than 0, that is, when the variable effect display is being executed, the pressing lottery table 222sb is referred to in the continuous hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601). The process of executing a variable lottery and the process of executing a variable effect display (effect display that changes the display value) (processes of Z7203 to Z7207 in FIG. 601) are skipped. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the execution of a new variable effect display during the variable effect display.

Further, when it is determined that the value of the effecting timer 223ua is 1 or more (Z7202 in FIG. 601: Yes) in the continuous hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601), the above-described PUSH button 10317 is displayed. During presentation operation processing (see Z7208 in FIG. 603) for executing a button variable lottery for varying the mode is executed.

Whether or not the value of the timer 223ua during production has been updated to 0 is determined by the timer processing during production (see Z3281 in FIG. 600) executed in the production update processing 27 (see Z3188 in FIG. 599), and updated to 0. Yes, that is, when it is determined that the variable effect display has ended (Z7102 in FIG. 600: Yes), processing for determining the display mode after the end of the variable effect display is executed.

The determination flag 223ub is a flag for indicating that it is determined that the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 is to be varied, and is set to ON when it is determined that the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 is to be varied. This determination flag 223ub is set when it is determined that the value of the effecting timer 223ua is 1 or more (Z7202 in FIG. 601: Yes) in the continuous hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601), that is, the current is variable. In the during-effect operation process (see Z7208 in FIG. 603) executed when it is determined that the effect is being displayed, it is set to ON when the press lottery is won (see Z7354 in FIG. 603).

Then, in the timer process during rendering (see Z3281 in FIG. 600), when the value of the timer 223ua during rendering becomes 0, the setting state is determined (Z7102 in FIG. 600). Based on this determination result, the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 after the end of the variable effect display is determined. Also, when the player operates the operating means after the variable effect display is finished, it is referred to in the continuous hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601) (see Z7203 in FIG. 601), and is set to ON. If so, normal operation processing (see Z7206 in FIG. 602) is executed without executing the pressing lottery.

In other words, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the display mode after the end of the variable effect display is determined based on the setting status of the confirmation flag 223ub, and the display mode is determined based on the operation of the operating means by the player after the end of the variable effect display. It is configured to vary the easiness of variable display of display values. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the operation means to be operated even during a period in which no new variable effect display is executed.

<28th Embodiment>
Next, the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 604 to 629. FIG. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, as in the twelfth embodiment described above, even while one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation) is being executed, the other special symbol variation (for example, , second special symbol variation) are configured to be executable. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the most advantageous game state for the player who frequently executes the small winning game. On the other hand, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the game state that is most advantageous to the player is the latent state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) as in the first embodiment described above. It is different in that it is set to be

Also, the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player is more likely to be selected in the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery than in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent probability state. It consists of

Furthermore, at the time when the first special symbol lottery is won in the first special symbol lottery and the first special symbol for indicating the lottery result (small win win) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the second special symbol lottery ( variation) has won a big hit, the second special symbol variation that has won a big win is forcibly stopped and displayed with a lottery result indicating a failure.

And, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation set when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery is set when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation time of

By configuring in this way, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the latent definite state, the period until the first special symbol variation that has won the small hit is stopped and displayed is set to the second period. Even if a special symbol lottery wins a big win, the big win can be invalidated. Therefore, it is possible to set a period in which the player can play the game without worrying that the latent state will end based on the winning of the jackpot.

In addition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, as the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a disadvantageous jackpot type in which a game state other than the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends, and a jackpot game Advantageous jackpot types for which a probability state is set after the game ends can be set, and different fluctuation times are set according to the set jackpot types. Specifically, when the disadvantageous jackpot type is set, it is easier to set a longer fluctuation time than when the advantageous jackpot type is set, and in particular, when the advantageous jackpot type is set. In this case, it is possible to set a variation time (for example, 1 second) shorter than the variation time set when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery.

As a result, based on the fact that the small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the big win variation of the second special symbol, in which the big win type (advantageous big win class) that is advantageous to the player is set, is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to make it more difficult to discard than the jackpot variation of the second special symbol in which the jackpot type (disadvantageous jackpot type) is set.

More specifically, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol set when the small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the disadvantageous big winning type when the big winning is won in the second special symbol lottery are set. It is configured so that the variation time of the second special symbol is almost the same length (about 30 seconds). In other words, if a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery after the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol variation is executed with a variation time of 30 seconds, the first special symbol lottery is small. The jackpot of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed earlier than the hit.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of an irregular game such as a left-handed game in order to cancel the unfavorable big winning variation being executed after the disadvantageous big winning variation of the second special symbol is executed.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 that the main controller 110 has, and the ROM 222 and A part of the configuration of the RAM 223, a part of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and a part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. different, otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the game state in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, there are three game states as the game state, specifically, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and the variable state (high special symbol) Probability state, high probability state of normal design) and latent probability state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) are configured to be settable.

The potential state is configured as the most advantageous game state for the player, and the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous game state. Also, the variable probability state is configured as a game state with a higher degree of advantage than the normal state. In the following description, the advantageous latent state will be referred to as "RUSH mode". In addition, the disadvantageous normal state is referred to as "normal mode", and the comparatively advantageous variable probability state is referred to as "chance mode".

Here, with reference to FIG. 604, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 604 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 604, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth embodiment has the same configuration as the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 317). there is

That is, below the variable display unit 80, the central first entrance 64c is provided. A small attacker 4650 is provided below the central first ball entrance 64c to be opened when a small hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery. In addition, since the small attacker 4650 is surrounded by the nail and the center first winning hole 64c on the left, right, and above, it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball during the small winning period of the first special symbol. . The reason why the small hit of the first special symbol is provided in the twenty-eighth embodiment is that the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in a state other than the RUSH mode (for example, a chance mode in which the variable probability state is set). To forcibly end the long variation when the ball is thrown and the second special symbol goes to the long variation, and to disadvantage the player in the second special symbol lottery during the RUSH mode. When the lottery results and the second special symbol variation (disadvantageous special figure 2 variation) for indicating the disadvantageous lottery result is executed, the unfavorable special figure 2 variation is forcibly terminated (in a stop display mode indicating outage This is because it is installed for the purpose of forcibly stopping) and not for winning prize balls.

That is, even if the second special symbol fluctuates long, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the small winning is won with a high probability (120/480). With the start of the game as a trigger (when a stop pattern indicating a small win is confirmed and displayed), the second special pattern that has been fluctuating long in a game state other than the RUSH mode is forcibly stopped with a stop pattern that is off. can be made Also, the second special symbol during the unfavorable special figure 2 fluctuation can be forcibly stopped with an off stop symbol during the RUSH mode. Therefore, in a game state other than the RUSH mode (for example, a probability variable state in which a right-handed game is executed), the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, and the long variation of the second special symbol is started. Also, the long variation of the second special symbol can be ended without waiting for the end of the long variation of the second special symbol.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the variable probability state is set and the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) without winning the jackpot (when the time saving end condition is satisfied), the probability state is changed. It is configured to migrate with Therefore, in a right-handed game executed in a state in which the variable probability state is set, the game ball vigorously flows down the right side area (the game area provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80), and the right electric accessory 64ra There is a risk that the ball will jump over and enter the second ball entrance 640, and the long variation of the second special symbol will be executed.

Since the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed even while the long variation of the second special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times. Thus, the above-described time saving end condition is satisfied, and it is configured to be able to shift from the probability variable state to the latent probability state. In this case, even if the latent state (RUSH mode), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, is set, the game ball cannot be acquired in the RUSH mode unless a new lottery for the second special symbol is executed. becomes difficult (because game balls cannot be acquired by winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery), there is a problem that the RUSH mode that is advantageous to the player cannot be provided.

On the other hand, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, as in the twelfth embodiment described above, the game ball is entered into the right first ball entrance 64r by the right-handed game during the variable probability state, and the first special symbol lottery is performed, even if the long variation of the second special symbol is executed during the variable probability state, the long second special symbol being executed by the first special symbol lottery mainly executed during the variable probability state It is possible to forcibly terminate the change. Therefore, when the time saving end condition is established in a state where the variable probability state is set, and the RUSH mode (potential probability state) advantageous to the player is set, a situation occurs in which the second special symbol fluctuates long. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when a specific jackpot (potential jackpot) is won in the special symbol lottery, the RUSH mode (potential state) is executed (set) after the jackpot game ends. However, when a jackpot is won for both the first special pattern and the second special pattern, based on the stop display (confirmed display) of the jackpot pattern (execution of the jackpot game), the execution is started. Since the special symbol variation is forcibly terminated, when the RUSH mode (latency state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, a new second special symbol variation is started. 2 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the special symbol is fluctuating long.

In addition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed than the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment described above, and prize balls can be obtained by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the first special symbol lottery can be easily executed during a game state (RUSH mode). Specifically, even in the RUSH mode (potential probability state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is configured to make it easier to win the normal symbol.

Then, when the first special symbol lottery is executed during the RUSH mode and the small winning is won, the first special symbol variation is executed in a specific variation time (30 seconds), and the second special symbol winning is the small winning. If the second special symbol variation during variation is a small winning variation at the time when the 1 special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the small winning variation is interrupted, and if it is a big winning variation or a losing variation, a lottery is performed. It is configured to forcibly stop in a display mode indicating that the result is out.

By configuring in this way, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode, even if the jackpot (disadvantageous jackpot) that can be the trigger to end the RUSH mode is won, the disadvantageous jackpot is fluctuating. Then, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) as a symbol indicating winning of the small winning, so that the disadvantageous big winning can be discarded.

In addition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode, an advantageous jackpot in which the RUSH mode (latency state) is set again after the jackpot game is finished, and a normal game after the jackpot game is finished It is configured so that it can be won with a disadvantageous jackpot in which the mode (normal state) is set, and from the fluctuation time of the second special symbol variation (advantageous special figure 2 variation) set when winning the advantageous jackpot Also, the variation time of the second special symbol variation (disadvantageous special symbol 2 variation), which is set when winning the disadvantageous jackpot, is likely to be longer.

As a result, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the RUSH mode, the fluctuation time can be longer in the case of winning the disadvantageous jackpot than in the case of winning the advantageous jackpot. It can be made easy to discard based on the result of the pattern lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the player's willingness to play due to the discarding of the advantageous jackpot that is advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the RUSH mode, a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation (special figure 1 small per variation). The above-mentioned disadvantageous special figure 2 fluctuation (the second special symbol fluctuation set when winning the disadvantageous jackpot) is also configured so that the fluctuation time of 30 seconds can be easily selected. As a result, during the special figure 1 small per fluctuation period, even if the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the newly executed second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the disadvantageous jackpot. Before that, the first special symbol can be stop-displayed with the symbol indicating the small win. Therefore, it is possible to set the period during which the RUSH mode does not end (invincible period) during the special figure 1 small per fluctuation period.

Also, as described above, it is configured so that the same length of variation time (30 seconds variation) is easily executed with the special figure 1 small per variation and the disadvantageous special figure 2 variation during the RUSH mode, For example, even if a small hit is won with the first special pattern after winning the disadvantageous jackpot in the second special pattern lottery during the RUSH mode, the disadvantageous special pattern 2 fluctuation ends before the special pattern 1 small prize fluctuation. It will be. Therefore, after determining that the disadvantageous special figure 2 variation is executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of the irregular game of executing the left-handed game and aiming for the small winning in the first special symbol lottery. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 604, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 on the game board 13, there is a second ball entrance (through gate) 67 and a right first ball entrance provided downstream of the through gate 67. A mouth 64r, a right electric accessory 64ra capable of opening and closing the upper surface of the right first entrance 64r, and an upper surface of the right electric accessory 64ra while the right electric accessory 64ra is closed. A second ball entrance 640 is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through can enter. As shown in FIG. 604, the second ball entrance 640 is designed so that only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can reach the right electric accessory 64ra. is set. That is, even if the right electric accessory 64ra is likely to be in a state of being opened, even if the right hand is hit in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the normal pattern, almost all the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 are the right first entering balls. The game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 because it enters the opening 64r. By configuring in this way, it can be configured so that the game can be progressed by the right-handed game even in the variable probability state (chance mode).

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the number of times of the first special symbol lottery that can be executed when the right-handed game is performed in the normal symbol low-probability state, the left-handed game is performed in the normal symbol low-probability state. It is configured so that the number of times of the first special symbol lottery that can be executed in the case of a larger number tends to increase. As a result, it is possible to suppress the action of executing the right-handed game and executing the first special symbol lottery in the state where the normal mode (normal state) is set.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode, the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation is a period in which the RUSH mode cannot be terminated. A notification effect (invincible mode) for showing this to the player is executable. As a result, during the period when the invincible mode is displayed, the second special pattern is positively changed and prize balls are won by the small winning game without worrying about the execution of the disadvantageous big winning game. can be done.

On the other hand, in the RUSH mode, if an advantageous jackpot different from the disadvantageous jackpot is won, the fluctuation time of the advantageous special figure 2 fluctuation is shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot (for example, 1 second) is configured to be easily selected. In this way, by varying the variation state (variation time) of the special symbols according to the degree of advantage to the player, it is possible to display the variable mode of the second special symbol variation based on the winning of the first special symbol. can.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the RUSH mode is set, the RUSH mode continues until a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. Then, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode without winning the jackpot, the game shifts to a special state (invincible mode high probability state) in which the invincible mode is easily executed. Configure.

Specifically, as a variation pattern table to be referred to when selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed during the RUSH mode (latency state), special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode. It has a first concealment table that is referenced until it is executed, and a second concealment table that is referenced after the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode. , The first concealment table is constructed so that a long variation time (30 seconds) is more likely to be selected than the second concealment table when the first special symbol lottery is lost and won. In other words, the number of times of the first special symbol lottery performed per unit time is reduced by executing the first special symbol variation for a long time even though the small hit is not won, and as a result, the unit It is constructed so as to lower the degree of expectation for winning a small winning by the first special symbol lottery per hour.

Therefore, if the RUSH mode continues for a long period of time, it is possible to execute a game that is more advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

<Regarding production content in the 28th embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 605 and 606, among the various contents of effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, contents of characteristic effects are executed. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, in contrast to the above-described twelfth embodiment, part of the effect content during the RUSH mode that is executed when the game state (potential state) that is most advantageous to the player is set. are different, and otherwise the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 605(a), a description will be given of a display mode in the case where a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the RUSH mode. FIG. 605(a) is a display displayed when a special symbol variation (special figure 1 small per variation) indicating that a small hit has been won in the first special symbol lottery during the latent state (RUSH mode) is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the mode.

As shown in FIG. 605 (a), when the special figure 1 small hit variation is executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit wearing flames is displayed near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and downward. , the text "Enter invincible mode!!" is displayed. These displays allow the player to easily understand that a jackpot game based on a disadvantageous jackpot will not be executed. In other words, the display mode described above becomes a guidance notification mode for notifying that the current period is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, on the lower right side of the screen, the period during which the above-described invincible mode continues, that is, the remaining period display for showing the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation per special figure 1 is displayed in the display area Dm28a. In Figure 605 (a), since it is immediately after the special figure 1 small per variation is started, the characters "remaining 30:00 seconds" indicating the variation time of the special figure 1 small per variation are displayed. In this remaining period display, the value decreases with the passage of time, and when 30 seconds have passed and "remaining 0:00 seconds" is displayed, the first special symbol indicates a small hit. A stop display (confirmed display) is displayed.

Due to the display of the remaining period in the display area Dm28a, the player can easily determine the remaining period of the invincible mode, so that the game is motivated to execute the second special symbol lottery more during the invincible period. can be done. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the second special symbol lottery executed during the special figure 1 small per variation is elected (special figure 2 small per winning), and the special figure 1 small per variation is stopped and displayed. When the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 small winning variation) indicating the special figure 2 small winning is stopped and displayed before the special figure 2 small winning is executed, the small winning game corresponding to the special figure 2 small winning is executed. During the small winning game period, the remaining period of the special figure 1 small winning variation does not decrease, and after the small winning game ends, the remaining period of the special figure 1 small winning variation decreases again. Therefore, even if a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery during the invincible mode, the remaining period of the invincible mode does not decrease during the small win game, and the player can play the game during the invincible mode period. can be enjoyed to the fullest.

In the second special symbol lottery executed during the period of the invincible mode, if the player wins a big win that is disadvantageous to the player, that is, if the player wins a disadvantageous big win in which the normal state is set after the big win game is over, it is notified to that effect. An exclusion effect is executed to notify the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 605(b), the content of the exclusion effect will be described. FIG. 605(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display mode of the elimination performance that is executed when the second special symbol lottery wins a disadvantageous jackpot during the period of the invincible mode.

As described above, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, it is easy to set a variation time of 30 seconds as a special figure 1 small winning variation that is executed when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode. Similarly, it is configured so that the variation time of 30 seconds can be easily set as the disadvantageous jackpot variation executed when the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode. In this way, by configuring the variation time set for the special figure 1 small per variation and the variation time set for the disadvantageous big per variation to be the same, the second special during the special figure 1 small per variation When a disadvantageous jackpot is won in the pattern lottery, the disadvantageous jackpot can be discarded by the special figure 1 small win, so the special figure 1 small win fluctuation period can be set as an advantageous period (invincible mode) for the player. can.

However, when the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed immediately after the invincible mode is set, the special symbol 1 small winning variation is the first special symbol variation, and the second special symbol variation is disadvantageous. Each big winning variation is executed for about 30 seconds, and the period in which the small winning game is not executed continues even in the RUSH mode, and there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play is lowered.

Therefore, when the disadvantageous jackpot variation is executed during the invincible mode, as shown in FIG. It is configured to execute a production. By providing a dedicated effect in this way, the player's attention can be drawn to the effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the period during which the small win game is not executed continues. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play due to

When the elimination effect is executed, an effect is executed in which a character 811 resembling a rabbit chases an enemy character 860 resembling a turtle at the bottom center of the display screen, and above it is displayed "XX seconds left until the enemy is eliminated." ” is displayed. Then, the value of "10:00" displayed in the display area Dm28a indicating the remaining time of variation per special figure 1 is inserted and displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the remaining period until the disadvantageous jackpot is discarded is 10 seconds due to the special figure 1 small prize.

Furthermore, the display area Dm3 displaying the guidance display mode "Right-handed" for guiding the game method during the RUSH mode is displayed in a smaller size than the normal display during the RUSH mode (see FIG. 605(a)). . This makes it difficult to execute a new second special symbol lottery during the RUSH mode, that is, even if a right-handed game is played, it is more disadvantageous to the player than during the normal RUSH mode. can be suggested to In other words, the size of the display area Dm3 is configured to suggest to the player the degree of advantage in playing a game according to the game method corresponding to the guidance display mode.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment, the exclusion performance is configured to be executed only when the special figure 1 small hit is fluctuating in the RUSH mode and the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol. , without being limited to this, for example, in a part of the case where the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, the variation time of 30 seconds is selected, and the small winning variation of 30 seconds is executed. In the case, regardless of the presence or absence of the first special symbol variation, it may be configured to execute the elimination effect, and in some cases when the advantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the variation time of 30 seconds It may be configured to be selected, and when this 30-second advantageous jackpot variation is executed, regardless of the presence or absence of the first special symbol variation, it may be configured to execute the exclusion effect.

By configuring in this way, as a result of the elimination production, a special figure 1 small winning game (a small winning game to open the small attacker 4650) and a special figure 2 small winning game (to open the first variable winning device 65 Since it is possible to provide a small winning game) and a special figure 2 big winning game (a big winning game that opens the first variable winning device 65), even during the performance period of the elimination performance for the player, A game can be played while expecting a more advantageous game result to be provided.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a 30-second loss variation in part when the second special symbol lottery is lost and won, and when this 30-second loss variation is executed, regardless of the presence or absence of the first special symbol variation. Instead, it may be configured to execute an exclusion effect, and regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery, as a variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 small per variation, it is in the middle of variation (for example, special figure 1 small per variation It is also possible to configure such a variable performance pattern that the exclusion performance is executed from the timing when the remaining period of the game becomes 20 seconds.

By constructing in this way, even if the second special symbol lottery does not actually result in a disadvantageous jackpot, the player can be made to think that the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the invincible mode and the disadvantageous jackpot is discarded. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, in the RUSH mode, in order to suppress the excessive awarding of prize balls to the player in a short period of time, in the case where the variation time of the deviation variation of the second special symbol is set long, Since the elimination performance can be executed using the fluctuation period of the loss fluctuation, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from being lowered due to the execution of the loss fluctuation for a long period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 606, the contents of the effect during the invincible mode high probability state which is set after the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode will be described. FIG. 606 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the invincibility mode high probability state.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode, the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to when selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation is switched. Configure. Specifically, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation, from the fluctuation pattern table (first latency table) in which 30 seconds fluctuation is selected in a part of the small hit fluctuation and the deviation fluctuation, the small hit fluctuation It is configured so that the variation pattern table referred to is switched to the variation pattern table (second latency table) in which the 30-second variation is selected only when.

Therefore, in a state in which the second concealment table is referenced (a state in which the special symbol lottery is executed more than a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode), the first special symbol variation other than the small winning variation Because it ends early, it is possible to increase the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery per unit time, and as a result, the state in which the ratio of the special figure 1 small per fluctuation per unit time can be increased. (invincible mode high probability state).

When the invincible mode high-probability state is set, the characters "in high-probability state" are displayed in the display area Dm28b at the bottom of the display screen, and a guidance mode for guiding the current game content is displayed therebelow. , the text "It's easy to enter the invincible mode!" is displayed. With these displays, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state in the RUSH mode is more advantageous to the player.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twenty-eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 607 to 613, the electrical configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. In contrast to the twelfth embodiment described above, the twenty-eighth embodiment has a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, a partial configuration of the RAM 203, and a partial configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. , and a partial configuration of the RAM 223, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 607(a), the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 607(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 607(a), the ROM 202 of the twenty-eighth embodiment replaces the first winning random number table 202a with the ROM 202 of the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 321(a)). The winning random number 28 table 202va is replaced with the small winning random number table 202b with the small winning random number 28 table 202vb, the big winning type selection table 202d is replaced with the big winning type selection 28 table 202vd, and the small winning type selection table 202e is replaced with the small winning. The difference is that the type selection 28 table 202ve is replaced with the variation pattern selection table 202f by the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf, and the variation pattern scenario table 202ka is replaced by the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg. be.

First, the contents of the first winning random number 28 table 202va will be described with reference to FIG. 607(b). FIG. 607(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 28 table 202va. This first winning random number 28 table 202va is, for the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 321(b)) in the twelfth embodiment described above, for the special symbol state (low probability state, high probability state) However, the difference is that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as a big winning is defined differently, and the other points are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 607 (b), regardless of the type of special design (first special design, second special design), as a value determined as a jackpot in the low probability state of the special design, the first per acquired The value "7, 8" of the random number counter C1 is specified, and the value "0 to 5" of the acquired first random number counter C1 is specified as the value determined as a big win in the high probability state of the special symbol. . Since the range of values that can be taken by the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 479", the jackpot probability is 2/480 (1/240) in the low probability state of special symbols, and in the high probability state of special symbols The jackpot probability is 6/480 (1/80).

Next, with reference to FIG.607(c), the content of the small hit random number 28 table 202vb is demonstrated. Figure 607 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning random number 28 table 202vb. As shown in FIG. 607(c), the small hit random number 28 table 202vb is small for the first special symbol with respect to the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 322(a)) in the twelfth embodiment described above. The difference is that the value range of the first winning random number counter determined as winning is changed, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, the symbol type is the first special symbol, regardless of the probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined as a small hit judgment value in the range of "360 to 479", The value of 1 of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as a small hit determination value in the range of "240 to 479" regardless of the probability state of the special pattern for the pattern type of the second special pattern.

That is, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a small hit is won with a probability of about 1/4 when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and a probability of about 1/2 when the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to win a small hit. In addition, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit game is executed in which the small attacker 4650, in which the ball cannot (is difficult to win) during the small hit game, is opened. When a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened during the big win game. Therefore, even if the first special symbol lottery is set to win a small prize with a high probability, it is possible to prevent the player from being given excessively specific (prize balls). In addition, the second special symbol lottery is set so that the small winning probability is higher than that of the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery. In the latent state, it is possible to frequently execute a small winning game, and it is possible to easily increase (hardly decrease) the number of balls possessed by the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment provides a game state in which the potential state is most advantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 608, the contents of the jackpot type selection 28 table 202vd will be described. FIG. 608 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 28 table 202vd. As shown in FIG. 608, this jackpot type selection 28 table 202vd changes the types of jackpot types that can be selected from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 323) in the twelfth embodiment described above. is different. In addition, with the change in the type of jackpot type that can be selected, the set value of the time saving counter 203f and the setting content of the variable probability flag 203g specified for each jackpot type are also different, and each jackpot The selection ratio of types is also different. Since the other elements, such as the type of the variable winning device to be opened for the jackpot game and the details of the opening operation, are the same, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 608, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, three jackpot types, "jackpot A28" to "jackpot C28", are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbols. Also, as the jackpot types of the second special symbol, two jackpot types, "jackpot D28" and "jackpot E28", are defined.

As shown in FIG. 608, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and "jackpot A28" corresponds as the jackpot type. It is stipulated with This "jackpot A28" is a type of jackpot (8-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the normal mode (normal state) is set after the jackpot ends.

In this embodiment, as in the twelfth embodiment described above, the value of the time reduction counter 203f set at the end of the big win game (after the end of the big win game) is configured to vary according to the game state at the time of winning the big win. However, when this "jackpot A28" is won, the value of the time-saving counter 203f can 0 is set. Further, at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot game is finished), the variable probability flag 203g is not set to ON (set to OFF). That is, after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type is always set to the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). Therefore, from the viewpoint of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type is the most disadvantageous to the player.

Next, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "35 to 79", and "jackpot B28" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence. ing. This "jackpot B28" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot ends.

When the "jackpot B28" is won, a different value is set for the time reduction counter 203f according to the game state when the jackpot is won, and the game state when the jackpot is won is the normal state. In some cases, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 100 in the variable probability state, and the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 50 in the latent state. is defined as Also, at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot game is finished), the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. That is, in the normal state, when the "jackpot B28" is won, after the jackpot game ends, the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, variable probability state and latent state. , when "jackpot B28" is won, a variable probability state (high-probability state for special symbols, high-probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, when "jackpot B28" is won in the variable probability state, a larger value is set to the time-saving counter 203f than when "jackpot B28" is won in the probability state. As described in the twelfth embodiment, this time saving counter 203f is a counter for indicating the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues, and the counter value is based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. is subtracted, and when the counter value becomes 0, the normal symbol low probability state is set.

In other words, when "jackpot B28" is won in the variable probability state, a game state is set in which the low probability state of normal symbols is less likely to be set than when "jackpot B28" is won in the latent probability state. . In the twenty-eighth embodiment, since the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, rather than winning the "jackpot B28" in the variable state Also, winning the "big win B28" in the latent state is a big win advantageous to the player.

Next, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 99", and "jackpot C28" is defined as the jackpot type. ing. This "jackpot C28" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot ends.

When the "jackpot C28" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 10000 regardless of which game state (normal state, probability variable state, probability state) the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is. . In addition, at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot game is finished), the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. In other words, after the end of the jackpot game, it becomes a jackpot type in which the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set.

As described above, in the 28th embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the "jackpot A28" is selected at a rate of 35%, and the "jackpot B28" is selected at a rate of 45%. and "jackpot C28" is selected at a rate of 20%. Since the number of round games to be executed during the jackpot game is the same (8 rounds) regardless of which jackpot type is selected, from the viewpoint of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game , a jackpot game with no advantage or disadvantage is executed. In addition, from the viewpoint of the degree of advantage of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, "jackpot A28" is the most disadvantageous to the player, and "jackpot B28" is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player. Also, "jackpot C28" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A28" and more disadvantageous to the player than "jackpot B28".

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and "jackpot D28" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence. ing. The "jackpot D28" has the same content as the "jackpot A28" which is one of the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1) described above. In other words, when this "jackpot D28" is won, the value of the time-saving counter 203f is set to 0 regardless of which game state the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is (normal state, variable probability state, probability state). be done. Further, at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot game is finished), the variable probability flag 203g is not set to ON (set to OFF). That is, after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type is always set to the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). Therefore, from the viewpoint of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type is the most disadvantageous to the player.

Next, "jackpot E28" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 99". This "jackpot E28" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot ends.

When this "jackpot E28" is won, 100 is set to the value of the time-saving counter 203f regardless of which game state (normal state, variable probability state, latent probability state) the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. . In addition, at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot game is finished), the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. In other words, after the end of the jackpot game, it becomes a jackpot type in which the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 609, the contents of the small winning type selection 28 table 202ve in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 609 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 28 table 202ve. This small hit type selection 28 table 202ve, with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) described above, the point that defines the small hit type also for the first special symbol, and the small hit game The difference is that the release target to be opened in is changed, the design confirmation time is changed, and the control content to be performed for the special design variation being executed is changed. Others are the same. . Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

To specifically explain the contents defined in the small hit type selection 28 table 202ve, for the first special symbol (special figure 1), the whole range "0 to 99" that the small hit type counter C5 can take A "small hit A28" is associated with it. Since the range of values that the small hit type counter C5 can take is 100 of "0 to 99", the ratio of selecting "small hit A28" when winning the first special symbol lottery is 100% ( 100/100).

When "small win A28" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the second attacker (small attacker) 4650 is opened for 0.1 second. As described above with reference to FIG. 604, the small attacker 4650 is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to win even if the opening action is executed, and the opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds. In the small winning game based on the "small winning A28", the player can hardly win prize balls.

Although detailed description is omitted, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the third pattern display device is displayed until the small prize game (0.1 seconds) ends. On the display surface of 81, the third symbol is stop-displayed in a display mode (for example, "341") indicating that the first special symbol lottery did not win the jackpot. In other words, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, a display mode is displayed for informing the player that the small win has been won and that the small win game is being executed. It is configured not to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a small winning game that cannot (is difficult to win) a prize ball is executed (is being done), so that the small winning game is executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player cannot acquire a prize ball even though the game is being played, and the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered.

In addition, when winning the "small win A28", the symbol determination period of the first special symbol, that is, the period during which the stop display mode indicating the lottery result is continuously stopped and displayed is compared with "0.1 second". a relatively short period of time is stipulated. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period from when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode indicating "small winning A28" until the small winning game ends, so that the time until the small winning game ends can be shortened. Even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a while, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, when "small hit A28" is selected, the processing of interruption or abandonment is executed with respect to the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) being executed. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed based on the result of one special symbol lottery (when a special symbol indicating a small winning is confirmed and displayed), during execution The result of the special symbol lottery for the other special symbol variation is discriminated, and based on the discrimination result, the content of the control processing to be executed for the other special symbol during variation is made different.

More specifically, if the other special symbol is in the middle of a big hit fluctuation, or if it is in a lost fluctuation, the other special symbol fluctuation (big hit fluctuation or off fluctuation) is discarded (compulsory If the other special symbol is a small winning variation, the control to interrupt the small winning variation (stop the subtraction of the variation time until the small winning game ends) is executed. configured as possible.

By configuring in this way, for example, in the RUSH mode in which the latent state is set, when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, if the second special symbol is changing the big hit, the big hit The fluctuation is discarded, and if it is during the small hit fluctuation, the small hit fluctuation can be prevented from being discarded. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to stop and display the result of the lottery of the second special symbols (big hit win) that can end the latent definite state, so that the player can easily enjoy the RUSH mode for a long time.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the advantageous jackpot in which the RUSH mode (latent state) is set again after the jackpot game ends, and the normal mode (latency state) after the jackpot game ends Normal state) is set so that a different length of fluctuation time is set for the disadvantageous jackpot. is also configured to facilitate selection of a short variation time (1 second).

As a result, the first special symbol can be stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning of a small prize more easily during the special symbol variation of the disadvantageous big win than during the special symbol variation of the advantageous big win. In other words, the disadvantageous jackpot can be made more likely to be discarded than the advantageous jackpot. Therefore, in the latent definite state, a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery while a prize ball is acquired by the small winning game, and a situation is created in which the disadvantageous big win is easily discarded. It is possible to provide a novel game property that makes you expect to be played.

Here, based on winning the small hit of the first special symbol, the contents of the control when interrupting the second special symbol variation being executed will be briefly described. When the control process for interrupting the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) being executed is executed, the process for measuring the variation time lapse of the second special symbol variation being performed is interrupted. executed. Specifically, when a small hit game is executed, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON, and while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON, the second special symbol (special figure 2 ) to skip the process of updating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n indicating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time). Then, with the end of the small winning game, the restart condition is established (the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to OFF), and the interrupted process of updating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is resumed. By configuring in this way, while the small winning game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied), it is possible to prohibit the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation being executed from decreasing. Therefore, while the small winning game is being executed, for example, the second special symbol variation that is winning is stopped and displayed, and the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is executed redundantly. can be prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, since the process of measuring the variation time lapse of the special symbol variation being executed is only interrupted (skipped), after the restart condition is established, the second special symbol variation that was performed before the small winning game can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the result of the special symbol lottery that has already been executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the interruption condition is established with the fact that the small hit is won, the processing for interrupting the special symbol variation being executed is executed, but it is not limited to this, For example, the special symbol variation being executed may be continuously executed, and the stop display of the second special symbol variation may be interrupted after the variation time of the special symbol variation has elapsed. In other words, even if the interruption condition is satisfied, the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is continuously executed, and if the update process is executed until the preset fluctuation time elapses, the interruption It is also possible to determine whether or not the condition is established, and when it is determined that the interruption condition is established, the stop display of the special symbol variation is not executed until the restart condition is established. Since this eliminates the need to interrupt the update process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation, the processing load can be reduced.

Next, returning to FIG. 609, among the contents defined in the small hit type selection 28 table 202ve, the small hit type that can be selected when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery ("small hit C28", small The contents of the win E28) will be explained. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is associated with the "small hit C28" in the range of "0 to 89", and the "small hit E28" in the range of "90 to 99". . Since the range of values that the small hit type counter C5 can take is 100 of "0 to 99", the ratio of selecting "small hit C28" when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery is 90%. (90/100), and the ratio of selecting "small win E28" is configured to be 10% (10/100).

When "small win C28" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "0.5 seconds" is selected as the design fixing time of the special design. Further, when the "small win E28" is selected, the same small win game as the "small win C28" described above is executed. That is, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small hit game is executed in which the first attacker 65 arranged at a position where the game ball is likely to win is opened for 1.5 seconds. A small winning game is executed in which a player can easily win prize balls.

In other words, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the first attacker 65 is opened and the game ball is easily won in the first small winning game, and the second attacker 4650 is opened and the game ball is won. It is configured to be able to execute a second small winning game that is difficult to play. The first small winning game and the second small winning game are small winning games in which the first small winning game is more advantageous than the second small winning game from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the small winning game. It's a hit game.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 609, the small hit type (small hit C28, small hit E28) for executing the above-described first small hit game (small hit game that opens the first attacker 65) includes the above-described A longer design determination time (0.5 seconds) is defined than the small winning type (small winning A28) that executes the 2 small winning game (small winning game that opens the second attacker 4650). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a period in which an effect can be executed to make the player recognize that the small winning game has been won and that the small winning game will be executed, and the game is easy for the player to understand. can be provided. As described above, since the second small winning game is a small winning game in which prize balls cannot be obtained (difficult to win), the symbol fixing time is set shorter than the small winning type in which the first small winning game is executed. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that a small winning game has been won and that a small winning game will be executed.

Furthermore, even when "small win C28" and "small win E28" are selected, control to interrupt or discard the other special symbol variation being executed is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "small win A28". be done. In addition, the control content in this case is different from the above-mentioned "small win A28" in that the type of the other special symbol is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and other than that are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, when the "small hit E28" is selected, the time-saving end condition for shifting the high-probability state of normal symbols to the low-probability state is established. By configuring in this way, for example, the second special symbol lottery is executed during the variable probability state which is the chance mode, and from the "chance mode" based on the fact that the "small hit E28" is selected. It will shift to "RUSH mode".

In this way, by providing a time-saving end condition that can be satisfied even when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number of times, the player who is playing the "chance mode" can always receive the "RUSH mode." , so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment, the small hit type (small hit E28) in which the time saving end condition is established based on the small hit winning is defined only when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. Without being limited to this, even when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it may be configured such that a small win type that can satisfy the time saving end condition can be selected. By configuring in this way, in the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the "chance mode", regardless of the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, it is possible to establish the time saving end condition, so the "chance It is possible to make the players who are playing the "RUSH mode" more likely to expect the transition to the "RUSH mode".

Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment, it is configured so that the time-saving end condition is established based on winning the small hit E28 once, but not limited to this, multiple times for a specific small hit type ( For example, it is possible to provide a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when winning (five times). By providing such a time-saving end condition, when the probability that the time-saving end condition based on the small win winning is established is fixed, the ratio of selecting a specific small win type can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily vary the period required until the time-saving end condition is satisfied according to the game result of the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, in this way, if the pachinko machine 10 has a time-saving end condition that is established when a specific small hit type is won multiple times (for example, 5 times), the number of times a specific small hit type is won, and time saving It is preferable that a number-of-times informing effect is executed for the player to grasp the remaining number of winnings required until the termination condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, one type of time-saving end condition that can be established based on the small winning is provided, but not limited to this, a plurality of time-saving end conditions may be provided. The first time-saving end condition that is established when the first small hit type, which is one of the small hit types, is won five times, and the second that is one of the specific small hit types and is different from the first small hit type A second time-saving end condition that is established when the small winning type is won twice may be provided. And it is good to constitute so that the 1st small hit classification may become easier to be selected than the 2nd small hit classification. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player expect to select a different small hit type while grasping which time saving end article is likely to be established.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, one type of time-saving end condition that can be established based on the small winning is provided, but not limited to this, a state where the time-saving end condition is likely to be established based on the small winning, and a time-saving end A state in which the condition is difficult to be established may be settable, for example, in the jackpot type in which the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot type in which the time-saving end condition is likely to be established during the probability variable state, and the time-saving A jackpot type in which the end condition is difficult to be established may be selectable.

More specifically, the first jackpot type that can set a variable state in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the specific first small hit type is won five times, and the specific first small hit type. A second jackpot type that can set a variable probability state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied in the case may be configured to be selectable. By configuring in this way, even in the jackpot types in which the same variable probability state is set, it is possible to vary the easiness of establishment of the time saving end condition. Also, in this case, when the variable probability state is set for the player, it is preferable to execute an effect that makes it difficult to understand which jackpot type has been selected. It is preferable to configure so as to execute an effect for notifying the remaining number of times until is established. Then, when the remaining number of times becomes 0, an effect is executed to incite whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and when the jackpot type in which the time-saving end condition that is most advantageous to the player is set is selected. performs the performance of shifting to the RUSH mode as it is, and when a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition that is most advantageous to the player is set, continues the performance of continuing the game in the variable probability state. It should be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that entertains the player as to when to shift to the latent probability state that is the "RUSH mode" during the variable probability state that is the "chance mode".

In addition, a time-saving end condition that can be established based on the small winning winning (small winning time-saving end condition) and a time-saving end condition that can be established based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (fluctuation number of time-saving end conditions) are set respectively. In the possible pachinko machine 10, the same time-saving end condition (for example, 50 times) is set as the variable number of time-saving end condition, and only the small winning time-saving end condition is changed according to the big win type selected as described above. Alternatively, the same time-saving end condition (e.g., winning 5 times in a specific small hit type) is set as the small hit time-saving end condition, and only the variable number of time-saving end conditions are selected as described above. It may be changed according to the situation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the types of time-saving end conditions that are likely to be established (small-hit time-saving end conditions, fluctuation number of time-saving end conditions) according to the selected jackpot type, making the game more interesting. can be improved.

In addition, as the fluctuation number time saving end condition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (number of lotteries) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (number of lotteries) are summed based on the total number of fluctuations However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to set the fluctuation number time saving end condition for counting only the fluctuation number (lottery number) of one special symbol.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a specific lottery result, the other special symbol variation being executed can be discarded or interrupted. are doing. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of discarding or interrupting the special symbol fluctuations being executed, the number of special symbol lotteries (variation start times) and the number of special symbol variations (in a mode showing the lottery results) The number of times it was stopped and displayed may not match. In this case, as an element for establishing the time saving end condition, the number of times the special symbol lottery was executed may be used, or the number of times the special symbol variation was executed (stopped display in the form showing the lottery result) number of times) may be used. In particular, when the latter number of times is used, for example, when the other special symbol variation being executed is discarded, the number of times is not counted, and when the other special symbol variation being executed is interrupted. , the number of times is counted when the special symbol variation after restart (for example, restarted after the end of the jackpot) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the time saving end condition is satisfied, and it is possible to make the player play the game while keeping the player interested.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the contents of the control executed for the other special symbol variation being executed are changed to the other special symbol variation lottery result. Although it is configured to be switchable based on this, it may be configured to be switchable based on the variation situation (remaining variation time) of the other special symbol variation without being limited to this, specifically, the other during execution If the variation pattern set for the special symbol variation is a variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds or more, the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped (discarded) and has a variation time of less than 30 seconds. In the case of the variation pattern, the control contents may be switchable so as to interrupt the special symbol variation. By configuring as above, it is determined whether or not to discard the lottery result of the special symbol lottery being executed according to the fluctuation situation of the special symbol variation being executed. The player can also be interested in the timing of the stop display.

Furthermore, in this case, since the content of the variation pattern, that is, the length of the variation time is set as the condition for switching the control content for the special symbol variation being executed, for example, the variation corresponding to the lottery result disadvantageous to the player Only by prescribing a variation pattern table so as to lengthen the pattern variation time, the special symbol variation corresponding to the lottery result disadvantageous to the player can be easily stopped (discarded). In addition, the conditions used when determining the control content are not limited to this, for example, the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed, and whether the lottery result satisfies the specific condition is determined, and the determination result You may determine the result of the content of control based on. Furthermore, the control contents to be executed for the first special symbol variation being executed may be determined based on the combination of the first special symbol variation being executed and the lottery result of the second special symbol that has been won with a small hit. .

Next, referring to FIG. 610, of the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf in the present twenty-eighth embodiment, a first concealment table 202vf1 and a second concealment table 202vf2, which are referred to during the concealment state, explain about First, FIG. 610(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf. As shown in FIG. 610(a), the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf is referred to during the latent state with respect to the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 17) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. Since the content of the variation pattern table is changed and the time saving state is not set as the gaming state, the difference is that the name of the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 17) is changed to the probability variation table 202f2. are identical. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf includes, as shown in FIG. A first latency table 202vf1 and a second latency table 202vf2 to be referred to are defined.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, immediately after the latency state is set, the first latency table 202vf1 is referred to, and after that, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the second latency table 202vf2 is referred to. It is configured so that The first special symbol table 202vf1 and the second special symbol table 202vf2 differ in the contents defined as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1).

Here, the contents of the first latency confirmation table 202vf1 will be described with reference to FIG. 610(a). FIG. 610(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first latency table 202vf1. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, during the latent state (RUSH mode), the second special symbol lottery in which the lottery opportunity is established by entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 by the right-handed game is mainly used. It is constructed so that a short variation time is selected for the second special symbol variation so as to be executed.

In addition, in the right-handed game in the latent state (RUSH mode), when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 64r is opened when the normal game is won in the normal game winning lottery. A game ball enters the right first ball entrance 64ra, and the first special lottery is executed. Then, when a small win is won in this first special symbol lottery (when "small win A28" is selected), the second special symbol variation being executed is interrupted or discarded.

To give a specific explanation of the contents stipulated in the first concealment table 202vf1, if the type of special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the hit/fail judgment result is a jackpot, the acquired A big hit short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is defined for the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and if the result of the judgment is a small hit, the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 A small hit variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined for the entire range of values obtained (0 to 198), and if the result of the judgment is out, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" On the other hand, an outlier short variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined, and an outlier variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined for the range of "150 to 198".

In addition, if the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the result of the win/fail determination is a big hit that is a disadvantageous big hit that is disadvantageous to the player among the big hits, "jackpot D28", the acquired A jackpot variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined for the entire range (0 to 198) of values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and the result of determination of success or failure is a jackpot that is an advantageous jackpot that is advantageous to the player among the jackpots. In the case of the type "jackpot E28", a short jackpot variation with a variation time of 1 second is defined for the entire range of values (0 to 198) that can be taken by the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the result of the judgment is a small hit. In the case, a small hit variation with a variation time of 1 second is defined for the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that can be taken by the acquired variation type counter CS1, and if the result of the judgment is out, the acquired variation type A variation time of 1 second is defined for the entire range of possible values of the counter CS1 (0 to 198).

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 609, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating small winning, the other special symbol variation being executed is a big winning variation. In that case, it is configured to discard (forcibly stop) the variation of the big hit. In the above-described first concealment table 202vf1, when a disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a variation time of 30 seconds is selected, and a small win is made in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected even when winning.

In other words, during the period in which the small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery and the small winning variation is executed for 30 seconds, even if the disadvantageous big winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, the disadvantageous big winning variation is ensured. configured to be discarded. Therefore, during the period in which the first special symbol variation is executing the small winning variation, it becomes an advantageous period in which the disadvantageous jackpot that ends the RUSH mode (latency state) is not won. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, an "invincible mode" (see FIG. 605) can be executed as an effect for indicating that the advantageous period has arrived. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a period during which he or she can play the game without worry.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the variation time of 30 seconds is selected in both the case of winning a disadvantageous jackpot in the second special symbol lottery and the small win in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, for example, even if you win a disadvantageous hit in the second special symbol lottery and win a small win in the first special symbol lottery during the second special symbol fluctuation period (disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation period) of 30 seconds, you will be disadvantaged first. Since the jackpot is stopped and displayed, it is configured so that the disadvantageous jackpot variation is not discarded. By configuring in this way, for example, after noticing that the second special symbol variation for a long time (30 seconds) is executed by the right-handed game, the left-handed game is executed and the first special symbol lottery is performed. It is possible to suppress the execution of an irregular game aiming at winning a small prize.

In addition, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a variation time longer than the variation time selected when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery is selected. In this embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 50%) in the second special symbol lottery, during the RUSH mode, by continuously executing the second special symbol lottery , It is possible to almost discard the big hit variation of the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, if the second special symbol lottery wins the advantageous jackpot, that is, the jackpot E28, which is the jackpot type in which the RUSH mode is set again after the jackpot game ends, the second special symbol variation (advantageous) with a variation time of 1 second Since the big winning variation) is executed, it is possible to make it more difficult to discard the small winning of the first special symbol lottery than the disadvantageous big winning variation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 610(b), in the first concealment table 202vf1, when the first special symbol lottery is lost and won, a variable time of 30 seconds is selected at a rate of about 1/4. It is configured as follows. In this way, even when the lottery result is other than the small win, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be changed to the variation time of the executed special symbol variation by configuring the long variation time to be selectable. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is determined based on. In addition, since the frequency of the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent certainty state can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress excessively setting the "invincible mode" and providing the player with excessively advantageous games. be able to.

Next, the contents of the second latency confirmation table 202vf2 will be described with reference to FIG. 610(c). FIG. 610(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second latency table 202vf2. In this embodiment, in the RUSH mode (latency state), when a specific transition condition is established, it is configured to switch the type of the variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation. Until a specific transition condition is established, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is selected with reference to the first latency table 202vf1 described above, and after the specific transition condition is established, the second latency is selected. The variable time of the special symbol variation is selected by referring to the table 202vf2.

This second concealment table 202vf2 differs from the above-described first concealment table 202vf1 in that the length of the variable time that can be selected in the case of winning the first special symbol lottery is different. are otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 610 (c), in the second confirmation table 202vf2, the type of special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and if the result of the success/failure determination is out, the acquired variation A short variation with a variation time of 1 second is defined for the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the type counter CS1. In other words, when the first special symbol lottery is lost and won, the change is always performed with a change time of 1 second.

By configuring in this way, the first special symbol variation executed during the RUSH mode will not be varied for a long time except for the small hit variation (invincible mode), so the first special symbol lottery per unit time can be increased more than the state in which the variable time is selected with reference to the first latency table 202vf1, and the length of the invincible mode period occupied in the game period can be easily increased. can.

That is, during the RUSH mode, it is possible to set a second period that is more advantageous to the player than the first period in which the first latency table 202vf1 is referred to. Therefore, the player who is playing the game in the RUSH mode can play the game while expecting that the specific transition condition is satisfied.

Further, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a special The execution frequency of the symbol variation is defined, and specifically, when the special symbol variation is performed 50 times, the transition condition is satisfied and the second period is started. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player in the RUSH mode with a novel game property in which the player is expected to play the game while expecting that he will not win a big win. Furthermore, when the second period is set, it becomes more difficult to win a jackpot (a state in which fluctuations in the jackpot are easily discarded), so the RUSH mode can be easily continued for a long period of time.

Next, referring to FIG. 611, the contents of the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg will be described. FIG. 611 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg. As shown in FIG. 611, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the latent state is set, the variation time is selected by referring to different variation patterns according to the number of special symbol variations (the number of special symbol variations). It is configured to

Specifically, the first latency table 202vf1 is referred to until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times after the latency state is set, and after that, the second latency probability table 202vf2 is referred to. It is configured as follows. That is, when the period of the latent state (RUSH mode) becomes longer, the second latent table 202vf2, which is more advantageous to the player than the first latent table 202vf1, is referred to. As a result, the player in the RUSH mode can be motivated to continue the RUSH mode for a long period of time.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the content of the variation pattern scenario table 202vg is defined so that the longer the RUSH mode continues, the more advantageous it becomes for the player. Therefore, another configuration may be used based on the technical concept of configuring the game so that the degree of advantage to the player is different. may define the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the players who enter the RUSH mode to play games in an evenly advantageous state.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment, the degree of advantage to the player is varied by varying the variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the first special symbol lottery results in a loss, but this is not the only option. For example, by varying the variation pattern (variation time) selected when a small win is won by the first special symbol lottery, that is, the length of the invincible mode period, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied. 2 By varying the variation pattern (variation time) selected when winning an advantageous jackpot by a special symbol lottery or by varying the variation pattern (variation time) selected when winning a disadvantageous jackpot, the game is played. It may be configured such that the degree of advantage to the user is variable.

In this case, for example, 30 seconds and 2 seconds can be selected as the variable time that can be selected when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, and a disadvantageous big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. As the variable time to be selected in this case, a variable time longer than 30 seconds and a variable time shorter than 30 seconds may be selected. By constructing in this way, when the disadvantageous big win is won in the second special symbol lottery while the first special symbol is fluctuating, the disadvantageous big win may or may not be discarded according to the selected variation time. It can create cases. In an advantageous state advantageous to the player, the 30-second special symbol variation is more likely to be selected when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery than in a disadvantageous state, and the second special symbol variation leads to a disadvantageous jackpot. It is preferable to configure so that a variable time longer than 30 seconds is likely to be selected when winning.

Further, according to the above-described example, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a variation time of 2 seconds can be selected. Even after is executed, it is possible to cancel the disadvantageous big winning variation by winning the small winning in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to have the possibility of canceling the disadvantageous big winning variation until the second special symbol indicating the winning of the disadvantageous big winning is stopped and displayed, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, two types of variation pattern tables are provided to be referred to during the latent certainty state. Three or more types of variation pattern table to be referred to during the state may be provided. In addition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, an example in which one switching timing for switching the referenced variation pattern table is provided in the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg is shown, but it is not limited to this, variation at multiple timings The scenario contents may be specified so that the pattern table is switched.

In addition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, as a transition condition for switching the variation pattern table, the number of executions of the special symbol variation is set. For example, the variation pattern table is switched when a specific small win is won, or the number of times the RUSH mode is set continuously across the big win game (number of consecutive games) The variation pattern table is based on. can be switched. Furthermore, in this way, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of transition conditions, it may be configured so that the variation pattern to be referred to differs depending on the order in which each transition condition is satisfied. A special variation pattern table that can be referred to only when a transition condition is established is provided, and the state in which the special variation pattern table is referred to is the most advantageous state or the most disadvantageous state for the player. It is preferable to specify the contents of the special fluctuation pattern table.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the transition condition is satisfied but also in the order in which the transition condition is satisfied.

Next, referring to FIG. 612, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the main controller 110 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 612 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 612, the RAM 203 of the twenty-eighth embodiment deletes the second special symbol execution area 203b from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 21), and the second special symbol holding ball A storage area 203va, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203vc, a special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd, a special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve, and a time saving end standby flag 203vf are added. are the same except that The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203vb is a storage area for temporarily storing the lottery right of the second special symbol. In the above-described first embodiment, the lottery right of the first special symbol is configured to be able to store up to a predetermined number (four pieces), but the lottery right of the second special symbol is not configured to be memorizable. , When the lottery right of the second special symbol is acquired, if the state permits the execution of the second special symbol lottery, each value acquired in the second special symbol execution area 203b is stored, and immediately, the second special It was configured to execute a pattern lottery.

On the other hand, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a predetermined number (four) of lottery rights are stored up to the upper limit even for the second special symbols. The contents of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203vb are different from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a described in the first embodiment, only by changing the type of the special symbol to be stored. Other contents are the same. That is, in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640, each of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 Each value is stored.

Then, when the start condition (fluctuation condition) of the second special symbol is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203va are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various values stored is started.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery at the same time (in parallel). Each reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203va) is configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is established, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is a counter for measuring the number of lottery rights (reserved balls) of the second special symbol, and is counted against the above-described first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. is changed from the number of the first special symbol reserved balls to the number of the second special symbol reserved balls, and the rest is the same.

This second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 detected in the timer interrupt process periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to a maximum of 4 times. The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

Also, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and the second special symbol reserved ball is stored. When the counter value is stored in the area 203va, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110 . The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is incremented by one. is.

The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is a flag indicating whether or not the variation should subtract the value of the time saving counter 203f when the variation is stopped in the variation of the first special symbol. This special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is the first special symbol variation start process 28 (see S10208 in FIG. 614), when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S10301 in FIG. 614: Yes ), is set to ON (S10302 in FIG. 614), time saving update process (at, when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is ON, subtract the value of the time saving counter 203f, then set to OFF be done.

It should be noted that, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (see S10221 in FIG. 620) is set to OFF. Similarly, in the lottery for the second special symbol, when the jackpot is won, the second special symbol variation stop processing 28 (not shown) is set to OFF. In addition, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd to OFF when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbols, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped after the jackpot game is over, the fluctuation is reduced. When the variation is stopped after restarting, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is off, and when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is off, the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted. Skip the process and execute the process to stop its variation.

The special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve is a flag for indicating whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f should be subtracted when the variation is stopped in the variation of the second special symbol. The detailed contents are different only in that the target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the special figure 1 subtraction flag 103vd described above, and the other is the same, so detailed Description is omitted.

The time saving end waiting flag 203vf is a flag indicating that the special figure variation in which the end condition of the time saving state is established has started. This time saving end waiting flag 203vf determines whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 in the first special symbol variation start processing 28 (see S10208 in FIG. 614) (that is, the final variation of the specified number of times in the time saving state) Then (S10303), when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 (S10303: Yes), it is set to ON (S10304 in FIG. 614).

Then, when the time saving update process (see S10908 in FIG. 621), which is the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbols, is executed, it is set to OFF. By configuring in this way, when the time saving end waiting flag 203vf is set to ON (that is, the standby state), when any time saving end timing arrives, surely according to each timing can be made to execute time-saving end processing.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twenty-eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 614 to 622, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. In contrast to the control processing of the main controller 110 in the twelfth embodiment described above, the twenty-eighth embodiment is the control processing content for updating the time saving counter 203f and the control processing executed when a small hit is won. The contents are different from the control processing contents corresponding to the differences described above. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the contents of the control processing of the main controller 110 are described with reference to the first embodiment described above. For the explanation, the contents of the control processing of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment will be cited as appropriate.

First, with reference to FIG. 614, the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 28 (S10208) will be described. FIG. 614 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 28 (S10208). This first special symbol variation start process 28 (S10208) is the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) for the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) in the first embodiment described above. Instead, it is different in that the processing according to the value of the time saving counter 203f is executed, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the first special symbol variation start process 28 (S10208) is executed, first, the same S301 to S307 processes as the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) in the first embodiment described above are executed. do. Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0, that is, whether the current game state is in the time saving (S10301). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S10301: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is set to ON (S10302), and the process proceeds to S10303. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10301 that the value of the time saving counter 203f is not greater than 0 (S10301: No), the game state is the normal state, so this process ends. Thus, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is a value greater than 0, that is, if it is in the time saving, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd to ON, it is started during the time saving when the fluctuation stops It is possible to determine whether it is a fluctuation or not, and it is possible to update the time saving end condition (subtract the value of the time saving counter 203f) when the fluctuation stops.

After executing the process of S10302 mentioned above, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 (S10303). That is, it is determined whether it is the final variation which is the end condition of the time saving state. When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 (S10303: Yes), the time saving end standby flag 203vf is set to ON (S10304), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S10303, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is not 1, this process is terminated as it is because it is not the final variation of the time saving game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 615, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331) will be described. FIG. 615 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331). This first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34) of the above-described first embodiment, and the process based on the setting status of the time saving end standby flag 203vf. They are different in that they are added and that the processing executed when the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery is changed, but otherwise they are the same.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S401). Then, in order to determine whether the time saving end condition is satisfied and waiting state, that is, whether the final variation of the time saving is being executed by the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving end It is determined whether the standby flag 203vf is set to ON (S10401). If it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203vf is on (S10401: Yes), the period of the time saving state set this time has ended, so the game state storage area ( (not shown) to set the normal state (S10402), and set the time saving end standby flag 203vf and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve to OFF (S10403). Next, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S10404), a state command indicating that the game state has switched to the normal state is set (S10405), and the process proceeds to S10406. On the other hand, in the process of S10401, if it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203vf is not on (S10401: No), since the final variation of the time saving state is not being executed, the processing of S10402 to S10405 is skipped, The process proceeds to S10406.

Thus, in the state of waiting for the end of the time saving state (the state in which the final variation of the time saving state is started in the other special symbol), before obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the game By setting the state to the normal state, even though the time saving game state has ended, the time saving game state with the other special pattern until the fluctuation of the special pattern in which the final fluctuation of the time saving state is executed ends It is possible to eliminate the problem of executing a game based on. Therefore, a proper game can be provided to the player.

Next, in the process of S10406, the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number 28 table 202va (S10406), and it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S406). (S406: Yes), the processing of S407 to S410, which is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (S306 in FIG. 34) of the first embodiment described above, is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S406, if it is determined that it is not a big hit (no, it is a small hit) (S406: No), the special figure 1 loss variation process 28 is executed (S10407), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 616, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation process 28 (S10407) will be described. FIG. 616 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation process 28 (S10407). In this special figure 1 loss variation process 28, when the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery (when the win is lost), the process for determining the presence or absence of the small hit is executed. In addition, for the detailed contents, the only difference is that the processing target is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol with respect to the above-described special figure 2 deviation variation process (see S1011 in FIG. 41). and are otherwise identical.

In the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing 28 (S10407), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time (lottery result of S406 of the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 28 (see FIG. 615)) is a small hit (S3111). .

If it is determined that the small hit is won in the process of S3111 (S3111: Yes), information indicating the special figure 1 small hit is set for the small hit flag 203k (S3112), and the first special symbol lottery The result is set to the small hit (S3113), then the small hit design of the first special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S3113), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S3111, if the lottery result of this time is not a small hit, that is, if it is determined that it is out (S3111: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. is set (S3115), and the process ends.

As described above, the first special symbol variation start processing 28 (see S10208 in FIG. 614) executed as one process special figure 1 deviation variation processing 28 (S10407 in FIG. 616), that is, the variation of the special symbol ( By setting the small winning flag 203k to ON when it is determined that the small winning is won in the processing executed at the timing of starting the lottery, the small winning flag 203k is turned on at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is possible to easily execute the process corresponding to the winning of a small prize based on the setting situation.

In addition, the small hit flag 203k used in this embodiment is a special figure 1 area indicating that a small hit has been won in the first special symbol lottery, and a special figure 2 area that indicates that a small hit has been won in the second special symbol lottery. And, when the small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery, the flag of the special figure 1 area is set to ON, and when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery. , It is configured to set the flag of the special figure 2 area to on. As a result, even if a small hit is won in duplicate in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the state can be easily stored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 617, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332) will be described. FIG. 617 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332) is different from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 35) executed in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for selecting is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332) is executed, the same S501 to S505 processes as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 35) are performed, and this process is terminated. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit in the process of S501 (S501: No), the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 28 is executed (S10501), and then the process of S503 described above. do. The contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 28 (S10501) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 618, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process 28 (S10501) will be described. FIG. 618 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process 28 (S10501). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 28 (S10501), the same processing content as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1207 in FIG. 43) of the seventh embodiment described above is performed from the second special symbol. A process of switching to the first special symbol is executed.

When the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 28 (S10501) is executed, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery result) is not a small hit (S10591: No), Special Figure 2 out variation pattern selection process (see S1207 in FIG. 43) S1307 ~ S1309 and the same content of the process, the process target is changed to the first special symbol (S10597 ~ S10599), then this process finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a small hit in the process of S10591 (S10591: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is obtained (S10592), and the small hit type based on the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 A small hit type is selected by referring to the selection 28 table 202ve (S10593). Then, special figure 2 out variation pattern selection process (see S1207 in FIG. 43) S1304 ~ S1306 processing and the same content processing, the processing target is changed to the first special symbol and executed (S10594 ~ S10596), this End the process.

Next, referring to FIG. 619, the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S10205) will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the same processes of S701 to S705 as the first special symbol variation executing process (see S205 in FIG. 37) of the first embodiment are executed. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 620, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (S10221) will be described. FIG. 620 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (S10221). This first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (S10221) discriminates that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON for the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38). In the case (S801: No), that is, when the first special symbol variation to be stopped this time is a variation, the special figure 1 deviation stop processing 28 (S10801) is changed to execute and the special figure The difference is that the content of the process executed when it is determined that the 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801: Yes) is changed. For convenience of explanation, the number (S number) attached to each process and the wording of the process contents are different, but the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment described above (see S207 of )) will not be described in detail.

When the first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (S10221) is executed and it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801: Yes), next, during the special figure 2 variation, that is, To determine whether the second special symbol variation is executed (S10802), here, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation is in progress (S10802: Yes), the special figure 2 variation stop indicating the stop of the special figure variation Command is set (S10803), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S10804), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is set to 0 (S10805), to S10806 Transition.

In other words, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lottery result indicating a big win, the special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped due to the deviation, and the processing of S10803 to S10805 described above is executed. . In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation in execution, it is configured to forcibly stop the special symbol fluctuation in execution. By constructing in this way, when both the reserved ball of the first special pattern and the reserved ball of the second special pattern are held after the end of the jackpot game, both special pattern fluctuations can be executed at the same time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the lottery result indicating the big hit, it is configured to be forced to stop by being out regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed. , Not limited to this, depending on the lottery result of special figure 2 variation, it may be possible to vary the control content.

On the other hand, in the process of S10802, when it is determined that the second special symbol variation is not executed (S10802: No), the process of S10803 to S10808 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10809.

In the process of S10806, in order to determine whether the special figure 2 variation determined to be fluctuating in the process of S10802 is a jackpot variation, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is ON (S10806), ON If it is determined (S10806: Yes), the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF (S10807), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S10808), and the process proceeds to S10809. In addition, in the processing of S10806, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S10806: No), the processing of S10807 and S10808 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S10809. That is, the processing of S10807 to S10808 is processing for discarding the result of the special symbol lottery in which the jackpot is won. As a result, it is possible to prevent the information about the big hit from remaining after the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is forced to stop.

In the process of S10809, a jackpot scenario is set based on winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (S10809), special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h, special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd, special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve, time saving end waiting The flag 203vf and the variable probability flag 203g are set to OFF, and the value of the time saving counter 203g is reset to 0 (S10810). After that, the flag 203o during the big hit is set to ON (S10811), the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S10812), and the variation of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display device is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the big hit. (S10813), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 621, the special figure 1 deviating stop processing 28 (S10801) will be described. FIG. 621 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviating stop processing 28 (S10801). In this special figure 1 out stop processing 28 (S10801), the same processing as the special figure 2 out stop processing (see S1508 in FIG. 46) of the above-described first embodiment is performed, from the second special symbol to the first special Executed by switching to the pattern, and differs in that the small winning process 28 (S10902) is executed and the time saving update process (FIG. 10908) is executed, and the other is the same, so the detailed description is omitted.

Here, the small winning process 28 (S10902) executed in the special figure 1 out stop process 28 (see S10801 in FIG. 621) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 622 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning process 28 (S10902). In this small winning process 28 (S10902), various control processes corresponding to the winning small winning type are executed. Specifically, when winning a specific small hit type (small hit A, B, C), processing (interruption processing, forced stop (discard) processing) according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation being executed configured to run.

When the small hit process 28 (S10902) is executed, first, the small hit type set for this special symbol variation is read (S11001), and the read small hit type is "small hit A or small hit C ” (S11002). If it is determined to be "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S11002: Yes), it is determined whether the current special figure is fluctuating (the other special symbol is fluctuating) (S11003), When it is determined that it is in the figure fluctuation (S11003: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation is a small hit fluctuation (S11004).

And, when it is determined that it is during the small hit fluctuation in the processing of S11004, the temporary stop flag indicating that the special symbol fluctuation being executed is interrupted (temporary stop), that is, the current process is that the first special symbol is If it is a small hit process 28 when the small hit stops, the temporary stop flag (special figure 2 temporary stop flag) corresponding to the second special symbol, If it is a winning process 28, the temporary stop flag (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v) corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON (S11005), and the temporary stop command indicating ON of the temporary stop flag is set (S11006 ), the process ends.

Also, in the process of S11004, when it is determined that it is not in the middle of a small hit variation, that is, when it is determined that it is a big hit variation or an off variation (S11004: No), the stop of the special figure variation being executed is indicated. Set a special figure fluctuation stop command (S11007), stop and display the corresponding special symbol in the first special symbol display device 37 (S11008), and the corresponding special figure (special symbol) fluctuation time counter ( The value of special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m or special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n) is set to 0 (S11009).

Next, it is determined whether the big hit flag (special figure 1 big hit flag 203h or special figure 2 big hit flag 203i) is set to ON (S11010), and is set to ON If it is determined that there is (S11010: Yes), the corresponding jackpot flag (special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h or special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i) is set to off (S11011), and the stored information for the jackpot is deleted (S11012 ), the process ends.

Also, in the process of S11003, if it is determined that it is not during the special figure fluctuation (S11003: No), the process of S11004 to S11006 is skipped and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S11002, if it is determined that it is not "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S11002: No), that is, if it is determined that it is "small hit B", the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether or not the present is in a high-probability state of normal symbols (S11013). If it is determined that the current is in a normal pattern high probability state (S11013: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving end waiting flag 203vf is set to ON (S11014), and the time saving end waiting flag 203vf If it is determined that it is not on (S11014: No), that is, if it is determined that it is not the final variation of the probability variable state, the time saving end standby flag 203vf is set to ON (S11015), and the process of S11003 described above is performed. .

As described above, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed, the processing contents are determined according to the contents of the special symbol variation being executed. More specifically, at the time when the small winning game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small winning is stopped and displayed), the lottery result of the other special symbol variation being executed is determined, and if the lottery result is a specific lottery result (for example, a loss, a big hit), the other special symbol variation being executed is discarded (loss forced stop), and if it is other than the specific lottery result is configured to be able to interrupt the other special symbol variation being executed. That is, when a specific condition for executing special processing is established for the special symbol variation being executed, it is configured to determine the processing contents of the special processing with reference to the lottery result of the special symbol being executed. .

By constructing in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the lottery result of the other special symbol variation being executed at the time when the small winning is won in one special symbol (when the small winning is stopped).

It should be noted that, without being limited to this, for example, the content of the special processing that is determined when a specific condition is satisfied may be varied according to the game state that has been set. Specifically, when the normal state is set, even if the specific condition is satisfied, only "interruption" is determined as special processing, and when the variable probability state is set, "interruption" or " It may be configured so that "discard" is set. By making the determined contents of the special processing different according to the game state set in this way, it is possible to provide diversity in the game characteristics in each game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, even when the small winning is won with the first special symbol and when the small winning is won with the second special symbol, the above-described small winning process 28 is executed. Without limitation, depending on the type of special symbol in which the specific condition is established, the content of the special processing to be determined may be different. It may be configured such that “discard” is more likely to be determined when a specific condition is established in the special symbol. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery may be configured so that the specific condition is more difficult to be established than the second special symbol lottery (so that it is difficult to win a small win), or the specific condition is established. In the case, the condition for determining "discard" is more difficult to be satisfied when the specific condition is satisfied in the first special symbol than when the specific condition is satisfied in the second special symbol. As a result, the contents of the special processing can be changed depending on which special symbol type the specific condition is established, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this 28th embodiment, it is different from the above-described 12th embodiment in that it is configured so that a small winning can be won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. there is By configuring in this way, even if a big win is won in one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the big win can be canceled by the other small win, The ratio of the probability variable jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot can be surely varied according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, as a condition (specific condition) that triggers execution of special processing (interruption or abandonment) for one special symbol variation (for example, first special symbol variation), the other special symbol It shows the condition that is established when a specific small hit is won in the variation (for example, the second special symbol variation), but it is also possible to provide an opportunity to establish a specific condition other than this, for example, the ball is specified. It may be configured so that a specific condition is established when a ball enters the entrance of the pachinko machine 10, or a state in which the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is not normal (for example, noise is generated and the power supply is temporarily is disconnected), the specific condition may be established. In addition, the game method executed by the player is an illegal game method (for example, a game method when a magnetic sensor that detects magnetic force is provided and the magnetic sensor detects the magnetic force, or an impact detection method that detects an impact on the pachinko machine 10 A sensor may be provided, and a specific condition may be established when the impact detection sensor detects a predetermined amount of impact.

Also, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the high probability state of the normal design is set (probability variation state, when the time saving state is set) when the special design variation to be executed is discarded (forced stop) , It is configured so that the number of times of saving time (number of times of probability variation) is not added according to the discarded special symbol variation. Specifically, when the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) while the probability variation state is set, the gaming machine is configured to set the probability state, When the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state is discarded (forcibly stopped), it is configured so that the number of times of shortening time (the number of probability variation) is not added. In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, for example, the display mode for indicating the number of time reductions (variable number of times) until the probability variation state ends on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the number of time reductions. and the display mode is not updated. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation has been canceled without updating the number of times of time saving. In this case, for example, pachinko configured so as to update the display mode for indicating the number of times of time reduction (number of times of probability variation) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing of the special symbol variation If it is machine 10, the display mode is restored based on the fact that the special symbol variation is discarded (for example, if the number of remaining time reductions is displayed, addition, if the elapsed time reductions number is displayed Subtraction if there is) may be executed.

In addition, as a transition condition (end condition (time-saving end condition) for ending the high-probability state of normal symbols) for shifting from the probability variable state to the latent state, a plurality of time-saving end conditions (for example, the first special symbol The first time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of fluctuations and the second special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times, and the second time-saving end condition that is established when the second special symbol fluctuation is executed 5 times) In the pachinko machine 10 that has been set, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, among the plurality of time saving termination conditions, the termination condition that is most likely to be satisfied (for example, the second special symbol variation corresponding to 5 times If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to inform the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying only "5"), the first special symbol variation is executed immediately after the probability variation state is set. Even so, the display mode of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured not to be updated. And, in the state where the first special symbol variation is executed 95 times after the probability variation state is set, when the first special symbol variation is further performed (when the 96th first special symbol variation is performed) , display control for updating the display of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to "4". In this way, it is determined whether or not to update the number of times of shortening of working hours displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 according to the special symbol type in which the special symbol variation is executed during the variable probability (shortening of working hours) state. Thus, it is possible to inform the player of the period until the variable probability state ends in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Regarding the Control Contents of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the 28th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 623 to 629, the contents of control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. The control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth embodiment are different from the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described twelfth embodiment. (see S4121 in FIG. 334), the variable display setting process 28 (see S14121 in FIG. 623) is replaced with various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72), various counter update processes 28 (S14111 in FIG. 628) ), the small hit related process (see S4504 in FIG. 65) is different in that the small hit related process 28 (see S14504 in FIG. 629) is executed, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the content of the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 is described with reference to the first embodiment described above, so the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth embodiment In describing the contents, the contents of the control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment will be cited as appropriate.

First, referring to FIG. 623, the contents of the variable display setting process 28 (S14121) will be described. This variable display setting process 28 (S14121) is different from the above-described variable display setting process 13 (see S4121 in FIG. 334) in the effect mode ( Variation display setting process 28 for special figure 1 (S15102) for setting the variation display content) and special figure for setting the production mode (variation display content) corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation 2 variable display setting process 28 (S15104) and effect mode setting process 28 (S15105) which is executed regardless of the special symbol type, but the other contents are the same.

Here, the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 28 (S15102) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 624 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 28 (S15102). In this special figure 1 fluctuation display setting process 28 (S15102), the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation display setting process (see S5104 in FIG. 70) is executed to set the effect mode during small hit fluctuation. They are different in that respect.

When the special figure 1 variable display setting process 28 (S15102) is executed, first, the same S5201 and S5202 processes as the special figure 1 variable display setting process (see S5104 in FIG. 70) are executed. Then, it is determined whether this special figure 1 variation is a small hit variation (S15201), and if it is determined that it is a small hit variation (S15201: Yes), set a display command to show the invincible state (S15202), the invincible flag 223va is set to ON (S15203), based on the extracted variation pattern, the latent probability variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S15201, when it is determined that there is no small hit variation (S15201: No), the process proceeds to S5206, and then the process ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the latent state, the display command for showing the invincible state is always set. Although there is, it may be determined by lottery whether to set the display command to show the invincible state, the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed, and the prefetch result for the acquired special figure 2 hold Based on the (preliminary determination result), it may be determined whether or not to set a display command for indicating an invincible state.

Specifically, before the special figure 1 fluctuation (small hit fluctuation) to be executed this time is stopped and displayed, the result of the special figure 2 lottery that can be stopped and displayed is determined (preliminary determination), and the special figure to be executed this time When it is determined that the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a big win before the 1st variation (small winning variation) is stopped and displayed, the display command for showing the invincible state is preferably not set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the disadvantageous jackpot game from being executed even though the display mode (see FIG. 605(a)) based on the display command for indicating the invincible state is displayed.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating that the lottery result of one special symbol lottery is a small hit, the other special symbol variation during execution is changed. The lottery result is discriminated, and according to the discrimination result, the contents of processing for the other special symbol variation are determined. In the other special symbol lottery, the length of the variation time set in the case of winning a big win that is disadvantageous to the player and the case of winning a big win that is advantageous to the player are set to be different. By making the disadvantageous jackpot more likely to be discarded based on the winning of the small prize than the jackpot, a specific period in which the disadvantageous jackpot is likely to be discarded can be set before the disadvantageous jackpot is won. , The configuration for setting the specific period is not limited to this. , Determine the lottery result of the other special symbol variation being executed, and discard the other special symbol variation being executed (lottery showing loss It may be configured so that the result is forced stop).

Also, in the above-described first embodiment, the invalid lottery process used during the special symbol jackpot variation, that is, during the special symbol variation in which one special symbol is jackpot-elected, the other special symbol lottery is won. It may be constructed so as to execute the processing to control so as not to obtain during the special symbol variation in which the small hit is won. Even in this case, during the specific period in which one of the special symbols is fluctuating with the small winning, the player can rest assured that the latent state will end based on the winning of the big winning. It is possible to set a period during which the player can play the game with care. In this case, it is not possible to win a jackpot in which a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is set in a special symbol lottery during a specific period, but a small win can be won in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, a game for winning a prize ball by a small winning game can be executed without worrying about winning a big winning.

In the above-described A embodiment, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the special symbol variation period corresponding to the small win is a specific period in which the player cannot (or is unlikely to) win a big win disadvantageous to the player. It was configured to be Then, when the first special symbol lottery does not win a small win, that is, when a big win or a loss is won, a short time (1 second) of fluctuation time is set. Therefore, for example, after the latent certainty state is set, a left-handed game is executed to establish only the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol without establishing the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol. When the variation has passed for one second or more, there is a possibility that an irregular game such as a right-handed game is played. In other words, by executing the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game only while the first special symbol fluctuates, a game that makes it difficult to execute the disadvantageous big winning game during the latent state is performed. There was a problem.

In order to solve this problem, in the present A embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the first special symbol variable lottery has established the lottery opportunity by the left-handed game. If it is determined that the lottery opportunity is established by right-handed games, the lottery opportunity is established by left-handed games. It is configured to make it easier to notify the player that the specific period has been set than when it is determined that there is.

As a result, whether or not the first special symbol variation being executed has won a small hit for the player who executes the first special symbol lottery in the left-handed game during the latent state (whether or not) can be made difficult to grasp, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an irregular game (left-handed game) during the latent state.

In addition, as a method for determining whether the first special symbol variation lottery to be executed has established the lottery opportunity by the left-handed game or the one that has established the lottery opportunity by the right-handed game, for example, the main control A winning command output from the device 110 includes a ball entry type for indicating whether a game ball has entered the center first ball entrance 64c or a game ball has entered the right first ball entrance 64r. By configuring the information to be settable, it is possible to determine which ball entrance (central first ball entrance 64c or right first ball entrance 64r) on the sound lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to be able to determine whether it is a winning command set based on the fact, and the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is input corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is set this time. It may be configured to set ball type information.

In addition, based on various commands output from the main controller 110, the sound lamp control device 113 side controls which ball entrance (central first ball entrance 64c or right first ball entrance 64r). For example, left-handed game detection means for detecting that the player is playing a left-handed game and right-handed game A right-handed game detection means for detecting is provided, and by configuring the sound lamp control device 113 to be able to receive the detection result of each detection means, the game situation of the player (right-handed game, left-handed game) can be directly determined by the audio lamp control device 113 without going through the main control device 110 . By configuring in this way, the processing to be executed by the main control device 110 can be reduced, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, making it easier to provide smooth games. can.

Furthermore, unlike the 28th embodiment, for at least a part of the case where the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent state is lost or the jackpot is won, the same fluctuation time as when the small win is won ( For example, 30 seconds) may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is executing a left-handed game in the latent certainty state to grasp the lottery result based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation being executed. It is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether the current period is in the specific period.

In addition, if it is another example using the above-described variable time setting method, it is notified to the player that it is a specific period in the case of winning a missed prize rather than in the case of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. It is preferable to configure so that the notification effect for doing so is easily executed. As a result, although the specific period is not internally set, the player can be made to actively play the game to the right.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the game board 13 has a plurality of ball entry means (central first ball entry 64c, right first ball entry 64c) as start winning openings for establishing a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol lottery. A mouth 64r) is provided, and the performance mode of the variation performance executed by the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the special symbol variation for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is entered by establishing the lottery opportunity. Although it is configured to vary according to the type of means, other than that, it is sufficient if the performance mode is changed according to the type of ball entry means that has established the lottery opportunity. Three or more ball-entering means may be provided for establishing the lottery opportunity.

In addition, even when a lottery opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the same ball entry means, it is also possible to vary the effect mode of the variable production according to the timing when the lottery opportunity is established. , the effect mode of the variable effect may be varied according to the frequency with which the lottery opportunity is established. Furthermore, means for determining the process (for example, flowing path) until the game ball enters the ball entering means may be provided, and the effect mode of the variable effect may be changed based on the determination result. In this case, for example, a plurality of flow paths are formed in the game area of the game board 13, and a game ball flowing down the game area can enter one ball entering means in various flowing patterns. If it is the machine 10, a detection means capable of detecting the type of the flow path through which the game ball flows is provided, and based on the detection result of the detection means, the process until the game ball enters the ball entry means (for example, It is preferable to configure so as to discriminate the flow path).

In addition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when a game ball enters the ball entry means (first center ball entry 64c or right first ball entry 64r) for establishing a special symbol lottery opportunity, Although the configuration has been described in which the production mode of the variable production executed based on the above is changed according to the type of the ball entry means, if there are a plurality of ball entry means provided for the same purpose, a special symbol lottery Other than the ball entry means for establishing the opportunity, for example, when the game board 13 is provided with a plurality of ball entry means (through gate 67) for establishing the lottery opportunity of the normal symbol, for example, the right A left area where a game ball shot by a left-handed game flows more easily than a game ball shot by a hitting game, and a game ball shot by a right-handed game rather than a game ball shot by a left-handed game. In the case where through gates 67 are provided in the right side area where it is easier to flow down, the performance mode of the variable performance for showing the lottery result of the normal pattern is established, and the lottery opportunity of the normal pattern is established. (Through gate 67) may be configured to be different according to the type, or a general ball entrance 63 that pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls by allowing game balls to enter. In the case where the game board 13 is provided with a plurality of game balls, the performance mode of the ball entry effect for indicating that the game ball has entered the general ball entrance 63 is set to the general ball entrance 63 into which the game ball has entered. You may make it differ according to classification.

By constructing in this way, by grasping the performance mode of various effects executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, it is possible to determine which ball entering means the game ball has entered. Since it is possible to distinguish between them, it is possible to allow the player to easily grasp the contents of the past game that he or she has been executing.

<29th Embodiment>
Next, the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 630 to 635. FIG. The 29th embodiment differs from the above-described 28th embodiment in that the variation pattern selected during the latent state (RUSH mode) is changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 allows the first special symbol to be displayed. The type of ball entrance where the lottery opportunity is established (first center ball entrance 64c or right first ball entrance 64r) can be distinguished, and the entrance where the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol is established is distinguishable. It is greatly different in that it is configured so as to vary the production mode of the variation production corresponding to the first special symbol variation according to the type.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, the first special symbol lottery is executed during the latent state (RUSH mode), and when a small hit is won (small hit A28 win), during the special symbol fluctuation (special figure 1 small Even if a big win (big win D28) that is disadvantageous to the player is won in the second special symbol lottery during the win fluctuation), the big win is discarded. By providing a first ball entrance (right first ball entrance 64r) that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol in the game area (right area) where the game ball fired by the right-handed game can flow down. , the first special symbol lottery is periodically executed even during the right-handed game executed during the latent definite state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a special period (invincible mode period) during which a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is not executed in the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the latent state, It is possible to provide a period in which the player who is playing the game in the latent certainty state can play the game with peace of mind.

However, in the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the latent state (RUSH mode), during the special figure 1 small per fluctuation, the player is given a special period (Invincible mode period) is configured to execute an effect for notifying that it is, for example, without executing a left-handed game, that is, a second special symbol lottery during a latent state. There is an irregular game in which only the first special symbol lottery can be executed, and only when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the right-handed game is executed and the second special symbol lottery is executed. There was a risk of it being executed.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, if the first special symbol lottery in the latent state is lost and won, a short (1 second) variation time is easily selected, so that a special period (invincible mode period) ) is not set, and the special period (invincible mode period) is easily set during the latent state (easy to execute a new first special symbol lottery). However, in the case of such a configuration, when the first special symbol variation with a variation time longer than 1 second is executed in the state where the latent state is set, the small winning is won. Since it is easy for the player to grasp that it is a special symbol variation that is in progress, the notification effect for notifying the player that the special period (invincible mode period) is set is not executed. Also, there is a problem that it is easily determined whether or not a special period (invincible mode period) is set for the player.

On the other hand, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, compared to the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, when the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent state is lost and won, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is easily selected. are doing. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent certainty state is a small win or a loss based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. .

Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol is established by the left-handed game (when the game ball is entered into the central first ball entrance 64c), the right-handed game is used. When the lottery opportunity of 1 special symbol is established (when the game ball is entered into the right first ball entrance 64r), the effect mode of the variation performance executed corresponding to the first special symbol variation is changed. It is configured to be different, and executing the first special symbol lottery by the right-handed game in the latent state is more likely to win a small hit than the case where the first special symbol lottery is executed by the left-handed game. It is configured to make it easy for the player to grasp that the first special symbol variation is being executed, that is, that a special period (invincible mode period) is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a left-handed game is executed in a state in which the potential state is set.

In addition, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol is established by the left-handed game during the latent state (when the game ball is entered into the central first ball entrance 64c) , Even if the lottery result of the first special pattern is out, the variation performance suggesting that the special period (invincible mode period) is set can be executed, and on the other hand, the lottery result of the first special pattern. Even if is a small hit, it is configured not to execute a variable performance suggesting that a special period (invincible period) is set.

Thereby, when the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol is established by the left-handed game during the latency state (when the game ball is entered into the central first ball entrance 64c), a special period (invincible period) Since it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether or not is set, it is possible to further suppress the situation in which a left-handed game is executed in a state where the latent state is set.

First, referring to FIG. 630, the structure of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the game board 13 (see FIG. 604) of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment described above detects that a game ball has entered the central first ball entrance 64c. The difference is that a first detection sensor 64s1 and a second detection sensor 64s2 for detecting that a game ball has entered the right first ball entrance 64r are provided, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the detection results of the respective detection sensors (64s1, 64s2) are configured to be received by the sound lamp control device 113 without going through the main control device 110. FIG. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to determine whether the game ball enters into which ball entrance on the voice lamp control device 113 side and the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol is established, and the first special A variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol variation can be set in a performance mode corresponding to the type of the ball entrance that established the symbol lottery opportunity.

In addition, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, without going through the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 side determines which entrance the game ball has entered and the first special symbol lottery opportunity has been established. Since it can be determined, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twenty-ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 631 and 632, the electrical configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. Unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment has a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. The difference is that part of the Specifically, as the configuration of the ROM 202, a variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf is provided in place of the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf, and as the configuration of the RAM 223, an irregular winning flag 223wa is added. ing. Other elements are the same as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 631, the contents of the variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf will be described. FIG. 631(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern selection 29 table 202wf. As shown in FIG. 631(a), the variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf is provided with a first latency 29 table 202wf1 instead of the first latency table 202vf1 for the above-described variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf. They are different in one respect and otherwise identical.

Here, with reference to FIG. 631(b), the contents of the first confirmation 29 table 202wf1 will be described. FIG. 631(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first confirmation 29 table 202wf1. The 29th table for first confirmation 202wf1 is defined so that the variation time of 30 seconds is more likely to be selected than the above-described first confirmation table 202vf1 when the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol is wrong. The only difference is that they are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is out, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" and the variation time is 30 seconds. However, deviation fluctuation of 1 second is stipulated in the range of "150 to 198". That is, in the state in which the latent state is set, when the first special symbol variation is executed, the lottery result (right or wrong determination result) is the same variation time in the case of a small hit and in the case of a loss. (30 seconds) can be made more likely to be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the result of the first special symbol lottery due to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 632, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 632 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 632, the twenty-ninth embodiment differs from the RAM 223 (see FIG. 613) of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth embodiment described above in that an irregular winning flag 223wa is added. are identical.

The irregular prize winning flag 223wa is a flag for indicating that a special symbol lottery opportunity has been established by an inappropriate game with respect to the set game state, and a special symbol lottery opportunity has been established by an inappropriate game. It is set to ON when it is established. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, a left-handed game (a game in which a game ball is shot toward the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is used as an entrance for establishing the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol. A game launched by a central first ball entrance 64c that can win a game ball shot by and a right-handed game (a game that shoots a game ball aiming at a game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) and a right first ball entrance 64r through which a ball can enter.

Then, when the normal state is set as the game state, the left-handed game becomes a game method advantageous to the player, and when the probability variable state and the latent probability state are set, the right-handed game is given to the player. It is configured to be an advantageous game method.

This irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON when it is detected that a game ball has entered the central first ball entrance 64c in the state where the latent state is set. Specifically, it is set to ON when the first detection sensor 64s1 capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the central first ball entrance 64c detects a game ball. Then, it is referred to in the special figure 1 variable display setting process 29 (see S15172 in FIG. 634) for determining the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol change, and the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON. If it is determined that there is, it is set to OFF (see S15174 in FIG. 634), and regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery, the invincible state is set for 30 seconds fluctuation (see S15202 in FIG. 634).

That is, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the player's game method being executed in the latent state is configured to be discriminable, and based on the discrimination result, the variation effect set for the same special symbol variation It is configured so that the production modes of are different. Specifically, when the irregular winning flag 223wa is not set to ON in the latent probability state, the invincible state is set only when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the irregular winning flag 223wa is turned ON. , when the variation pattern for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery is a 30-second variation, that is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a small hit or a loss, invincible It is configured so that the state can be set.

By configuring in this way, if the proper game (right-handed game) is not performed in the latent state, the invincible state is set in addition to the special figure 1 small per fluctuation, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not a small hit is fluctuating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a game such as performing a left-handed game in the latent certainty state and performing a right-handed game when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (when an invincible state is set).

<Regarding control processing contents of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 633 and 634, the details of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. The content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth embodiment is different from the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. 59), instead of the main processing 29 (see FIG. 633), instead of the special figure 1 variable display setting processing 28 (see S15102 in FIG. 624), the special figure 1 variable display setting processing 29 (see FIG. 634 S15172) is executed, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. Since the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth embodiment have been explained with reference to the first embodiment and the twelfth embodiment, When describing the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the above-described first embodiment and twelfth embodiment will be referred to as appropriate.

First, with reference to FIG. 633, the contents of main processing 29 will be described. 633 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 29. FIG. This main process 29 is different from the main process (see FIG. 59) in the above-described first embodiment in that a prize winning opening determination process (S14101) is added, and the rest is the same. The contents of this winning hole determination process (S14101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 634, the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 29 (S15172) will be described. FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 29 (S15172). This special figure 1 variable display setting process 29 (S15172) is different from the above-described special figure 1 variable display setting process 28 (see S15102 in FIG. 624) in the production mode in the first special symbol variation in the latent state. (invincible state setting method) is different, but other than that, they are the same.

When the special figure 1 variable display setting process 29 (S15172) is executed, the same S5201 and S5202 processes as the special figure 1 variable display setting process 28 (see S15102 in FIG. 624) are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON (S15173), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S15173: Yes), the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to OFF (S15174), It is determined whether this special figure 1 variation is 30 seconds variation (S15175).

In the 29th embodiment, as shown in the 29th table 202wf1 for the first hidden confirmation (see FIG. 631 (b)), the result of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) is a small hit. , 30-second variation is selected in about 75% of the cases where the prize is lost. Therefore, in the process of S15175, it is determined whether it is a small hit variation or an off variation (30 seconds). In the process of S15175, when it is determined that the variation is 30 seconds (S15175: Yes), regardless of whether or not the small hit is won, a display command for indicating an invincible state is set (S15202), and the invincible flag 223va is turned on (S15203), and the process proceeds to S5206. On the other hand, in the processing of S15173, if it is determined that the irregular winning flag 223wa is not set to ON (S15173: No), the same as the variable display setting processing 28 for special figure 1 (see S15102 in FIG. 624) The processing of S15201 to S15203 is executed, then the processing of S5206 is executed, and this processing ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON, that is, when the left-handed game is executed during the latent state, the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) 605(a)) is executed even if the result of the above is not a small win. Therefore, after the latent state is set, only the special figure 1 lottery is executed by the left-handed game, and the right-handed game is performed only during the period when the special figure 1 lottery is fluctuating (invincible period). It is possible to make it difficult to execute an irregular game that makes it impossible to win a disadvantageous jackpot in a lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 635, the contents of the winning opening determination process (S14101) will be described. FIG. 635 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning opening determination process (S14101). In this winning opening determination process (S14101), a process for determining whether or not an irregular game is being executed in the latent state is executed.

When the winning opening determination process (S14101) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the potential state (S14151). It is determined whether the 1-ball sensor 64s1 (see FIG. 630) is on (S14152). When it is determined that the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is on (S14152: Yes), that is, when the game ball enters the central first ball entry hole 64c during the latent state, the irregular winning flag 223wa is turned on. (S14153), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S14151 that the potential state is not set (S14151: No), or if it is determined in the process of S14152 that the first ball entering sensor 64s1 is not turned on (S14152: No ), the process ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to OFF each time the first special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON. However, without being limited to this, the irregular winning flag 223wa may be set to OFF when the 30-second variation is executed while the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON. By configuring in this way, when the irregular game is performed, it is possible to set an invincible state (invincible state executed regardless of the small winning) based on the fluctuation time without fail, so special figure 2 It is possible to make it difficult to execute an irregular game that prevents winning of a disadvantageous jackpot in a lottery.

In addition, as a condition for turning off the irregular winning flag 223wa, the second ball entering sensor 64s2 (see FIG. 630) detects a predetermined number (10) of game balls under the condition that the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON. In this case, a condition for setting the irregular winning flag 223wa to OFF may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an invincible state (invincible state to be executed regardless of winning a small prize) based on a predetermined period and a variable time for a player who has once executed an irregular game. , it is possible to make it more difficult to execute an irregular game that prevents a disadvantageous jackpot from being won in the special figure 2 lottery.

Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, when it is determined that the first ball entering sensor 64s1 is turned on during the latent state, the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to be turned on. Without being limited to this, the irregular winning flag 223wa may be set to ON when the number of times the first ball entering sensor 64s1 is determined to be ON during the latent probability state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). may be configured. In this way, by providing an allowable range until the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON, the game ball flows down the left side area even though the game is played to the right, and the first ball entering sensor 64s1 fails. When turned on, the irregular prize winning flag 223wa can be made difficult to be set to on. Therefore, it is possible to set an invincible state (invincible state executed regardless of winning a small prize) based on a predetermined period of time and a variable time only for players who are intentionally playing irregular games. To make it more difficult to execute an irregular game that prevents winning of a disadvantageous jackpot in a special figure 2 lottery.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol lottery is configured to be established by a plurality of requirements, and according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity, the first special symbol lottery It is configured so that the performance mode for showing the lottery result is different. In other words, different effects can be executed by varying the requirements for establishing the lottery opportunity.

In the twenty-ninth embodiment, according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity, an advantageous production mode (invincible state based on small winning) that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous production mode that is disadvantageous to the player ( Invincible state based on variable time) can be set, but the configuration is not limited to this, and an additional mode set for the same effect mode may be configured to be variable.

In addition, based on the technical idea of improving the performance effect, not the technical idea of changing the degree of advantage of the player, according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity, to indicate the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery. It may be configured so that the mode of presentation is made different. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the production mode (variation production) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity, but it is limited to this. Instead, for example, the production mode (fluctuation production) for showing the lottery result of normal symbols may be configured to vary according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity.

In addition, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, an example is shown in which two elements for establishing a lottery opportunity are provided for the same lottery. may be provided three or more.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, only when a specific gaming state (probable state) is set, according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity, to indicate the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery When the production mode is configured to be different and a game state other than a specific game state (latency state) is set, the first special symbol lottery according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity. Although it is configured so that the production mode for indicating the lottery result is not different, it is not limited to this, and according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity regardless of the set game state, You may change the production|presentation mode for showing the lottery result of the 1st special design lottery. Further, the types of different presentation modes may be configured to be further different according to the set game state.

<Thirtieth Embodiment>
Next, the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 636 to 647. FIG. The thirtieth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above in that the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed is different.

In the above-described sixteenth embodiment, as a trigger for executing a privilege game (jackpot game) in which the player is advantageous, a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery. (1st opportunity), and a special symbol lottery wins a small hit, and the game ball is in a specific area during the small win game (V winning device 650 (see FIG. 361) that is opened during the small win game) (2nd opportunity) for executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on passing through a V area (not shown) provided in the The lottery of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is configured to make it easier to win a small prize than the lottery of 1 special pattern (special pattern 1). And during the time saving state which is a game state that can be set after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery of the special figure 2 is easily executed.

As a result, in the time-saving state in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed, the second opportunity described above can be easily established, so that it is possible to make it easier to execute the jackpot game than during the normal state. The time saving state becomes a game state advantageous to the player, and the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting the time saving state.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment described above, up to four pieces of winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be able to be held and stored, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 final variation in the time saving state Using the variable effect shown, it was configured to notify the player of the prefetch result of the reserved and stored special figure 2 winning information. More specifically, as a production corresponding to the special figure 2 final fluctuation in the time saving state, the first production (final fluctuation production), and the second production executed after the first production (result notification production), is configured to be executable, and the effect mode of the final variation is configured to be set based on the prefetch result of the reserved and stored special figure 2 winning information. In other words, as a result of the variable production performed during the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the game state transitions from the time saving state to the normal state (to the normal state It was configured to inform the result of the lottery for the prize information of the special figure 2 held and stored at the time of shift).

However, due to the final variation effect showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 final variation in the time saving state, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the game state transitions from the time saving state to the normal state (holding memory at the time of transition to the normal state Since it was configured to notify (advance notification) all the results of the lottery for the winning information of the special figure 2) to the player, the variation performance (final variation performance) for the special figure 2 final variation in the time saving state However, when the final variable performance is executed in a performance mode indicating that the player has not won a winning prize, the player's desire to play the game suddenly drops. was there.

In addition, in the above-described 16th embodiment, the number of acquired special figures 2 reserved is determined at the execution timing of the final variable effect, and the effect mode of the final variable effect is set based on the determination result. Therefore, for example, just before the end of the special figure 2 final fluctuation period in the time saving state, that is, near the timing when the final variation production ends and the result notification production is executed, the game is played so as to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit number. By doing so, as the production mode of the final variable production, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the game state transitions from the time saving state to the normal state (the special figure 2 winning prize information that is reserved and stored at the time of transition to the normal state It was possible to prevent the results of the lottery for) from being reflected, but in order not to reflect the results of all the special 2 lotteries in the production mode of the final variation production, the special 2 reservation Since it is necessary to delay the acquisition timing of , in the worst case, it will shift from the time-saving state to the normal state without acquiring the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit, providing a disadvantageous game to the player. There was a problem of hoarding.

On the other hand, in the thirtieth embodiment, it is possible to execute the look-ahead range to be the target of the final variation effect by varying it. Specifically, if the production content of the final variation production shows the lottery result of the variation, if it shows the lottery result including part of the acquired special figure 2 reservation, and if it shows the lottery result including a part of the acquired special figure 2 It is configured to be one of the case of showing the lottery result including the reservation. Then, the lottery result of the special figure 2 pending that is not included in the production content of the final variation production is executed across the special figure 2 final fluctuation period and the special figure 2 fluctuation period executed during the normal state It is configured to notify the player using the result notification effect (time saving result display effect).

By configuring in this way, even if the production content of the final variation production is the production content that indicates the deviation, it is possible to determine to what extent the production content is for the prefetch result of the special figure 2 hold. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand, it is possible to make the player expect to win even during the period when the time saving result display screen is displayed.

Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment, the range of the special figure 2 reservation to be reflected in the effect contents of the final variable effect is configured to be determined based on the operation contents of the operation means by the player. By configuring in this way, since it is possible for the player to determine all or part of the special figure 2 reservation range to be reflected in the production content of the final variation production, the game content desired by the player It is possible to easily set the effect mode of various effects (final change effect, result notification effect) executed in the special figure 2 final variation in the effect mode along.

Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, it is configured so as to make it difficult for the player to grasp the range of the special figure 2 reservation to be reflected in the effect contents of the final variable effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how the production contents of the final variation production are set based on the lottery result (prefetch result) for how many second special symbol lotteries, so even if the final fluctuation Even if the performance content of the performance is the performance content indicating the failure, the performance can be enjoyed until the end while expecting that the number of the special figure 2 suspensions to be the target of the result notification performance is large.

In addition, in the thirtieth embodiment, when the result notification effect is executed, the player can be notified of the number of special figure 2 reservations that were not targeted for the final variation effect. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the result notification effect while predicting the degree of expectation that the effect indicating winning will be executed during the result notification effect.

<Regarding production content in the thirtieth embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 636 to 639, the characteristic contents of the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment will be described. Specifically, among the production performed during the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 final variation), the content of the production executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above is different. give an explanation.

First, with reference to FIG. 639, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment, regarding the content of the effect executed during the special figure 2 final variation, the special figure 2 final in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above The explanation will be centered on the difference from the effect contents (see FIG. 364) executed during variation. Figure 639 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of production executed in the special figure 2 final variation in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 639, in the thirtieth embodiment, similarly to the sixteenth embodiment described above with reference to FIG. A second variation period is set, the first 5 seconds is a standby period, and the standby performance is a performance mode for prompting the player to acquire the second special pattern reserved ball (special figure 2 reserved). configured to run.

After that, the first period in which the operation valid period is set is set for 5 seconds. The contents of the effect (pressing effect) executed during the first period will be described later with reference to FIG. 636(a). Then, after the first period has passed, a second period of 15 seconds is set. During the second period, a mission effect (ready-to-win effect) is executed in a display mode based on the effect result of the pressing effect executed during the first period. Note that the content of the mission effect (ready-to-win effect) is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 374(b) and 375(a) of the sixteenth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

And when the second period ends, the remaining period of the special figure 2 final variation (5 seconds) and the variation time (2 seconds) for digesting the special figure 2 suspension (up to 4 pieces) at the end of the time saving (2 seconds) from A third period is set, and during the third period, a result notification effect for displaying the game result during the time saving state is executed. The effect contents of this result notification effect will be described later with reference to FIG. In the thirtieth embodiment, as in the sixteenth embodiment described above, the fluctuation time required when all the special figure 2 lottery results included in the special figure 2 hold at the time of the time saving end are out, The variation time required when any special figure 2 lottery result included in the hold is also configured to be the same variation time (2 seconds).

Specifically, in the 16th embodiment described above, by the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1 (see FIG. 385) referred to when selecting the variation time of the second special symbol variation in the normal state, four The total variation time (0.5 seconds × 4 times = 2 seconds) in which the special figure 2 hold is all lost and digested, and the variation time (2 seconds) when the first special figure 2 hold is a hit, 1 The total variation time (0.5 seconds + 1.5 seconds = 2 seconds) when the second special figure 2 suspension is off and the second special figure 2 suspension is a hit, and the first and second It is configured so that the total variation time (0.5 seconds x 2 times + 1 second = 2 seconds) when the special figure 2 suspension is off and the third special figure 2 suspension is a hit .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a certain period as the third period regardless of the lottery result corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (4 pieces) acquired at the end of the time saving.

In addition, in FIG. 639, the case is shown as an example when the special figure 2 hold acquired at the time of the time saving end is the upper limit value (4 pieces), but without being limited to this, the special figure acquired at the time of the time saving end Figure 2 Depending on the number of reservations, by varying the variation time selected when the lottery result is out, all special The variable time (total variable time) required to complete the FIG. 2 hold may be configured to be 2 seconds.

For example, if there is one special figure 2 hold acquired at the end of the time saving, if the special figure 2 hold is out, a variable time of 2 seconds is selected, and the time saving end If there are two special figures 2 pending at the time, and any lottery results are out, 0.5 as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the first special figure 2 pending Seconds, the variation time of 1.5 seconds may be selected as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the second special figure 2 suspension. As a result, regardless of the special figure 2 reservation number acquired at the time of the time saving end, and the special figure 2 lottery result corresponding to each special figure 2 reservation can be unified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 636(a), the contents of the effect (pressing effect) executed in the first period of special figure 2 final variation (see FIG. 639) will be described. FIG. 636(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed during the pressing effect. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given to the same contents as the display mode displayed during the special figure 2 final variation, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the pressing effect will be described. In this embodiment, during the first period of the special figure 2 final variation, an operation valid period is set in which the player can operate the frame button 22 (operation means), and the operation to the frame button 22 during the operation valid period Based on the content, it is configured to be able to execute a press effect in which the effect mode can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 636(a), when the pressing effect is executed, a button icon for indicating the operation means (frame button 22) to be operated by the player is displayed near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. 829a is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance mode for explaining the effect contents during the depression effect, the characters "BUTTON PUSH RELEASE STOCK" are displayed. Furthermore, in the display area Dm21, a number of pressed icons (872a to 872d) corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 2 that have been acquired are displayed. Figure 636 (a) is a state in which "4" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a for indicating the number of special figures 2 pending, that is, the state of acquiring 4 special figures 2 pending, so the display Four pressed icons are displayed in the area Dm21.

When the player presses the frame button 22 during the pressing effect period, the display modes of the pressed icons are variably displayed in the order of the first pressed icon 872a, the second pressed icon 872b, the third pressed icon 872c, and the fourth pressed icon 872d. be. In the thirtieth embodiment, based on the fact that the player presses the frame button 22 during the pressing effect, the special figure 2 suspension to be read ahead is determined by lottery from the acquired special figure 2 suspension, and the determination It is configured to set the display mode after the variable based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 pending. Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed for each pressed icon, it is configured so that the prefetched special figure 2 reservation is redundantly determined.

That is, the number of pending icons corresponding to the number of acquired special figures 2 pending is displayed, and each time the player presses the frame button 22, each pending icon is variably displayed to the display mode showing the look-ahead result. , While each pending icon appears to be variably displayed to the display mode for showing the look-ahead result of the corresponding special figure 2 suspension, in fact, randomly selected (including duplicate selection) special figure 2 suspension The pending icon can be variably displayed in a display mode indicating the result of prefetching.

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute a pressing effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand the number of special figures 2 pending actually read ahead, various effects executed in the special figure 2 final variation In addition to the lottery result of the variation, it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to grasp in which range the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation is included.

In this embodiment, as described above, the push icons 872a to 872d are configured to be pushed in order. In this case, an image corresponding to the first pressed icon 872a, an image corresponding to the second pressed icon 872b, an image corresponding to the third pressed icon 872c, and a fourth The image corresponding to the pressed icon 872d is displayed, the displayed images are configured to be selected in order, and the pressed icons 872a to 872a corresponding to the images selected when the operation means is operated. 872d may be configured to change to a display icon.

Also, in this case, for each of the pressed icons 872a to 872d, it is preferable to define so as to vary the distribution of the special figure 2 hold that can be the target. As a result, the player can select the desired pressing icon from among the pressing icons 872a to 872d, so that the target special figure 2 pending selection ratio can be varied. In addition, when the player uses a configuration that can be operated by arbitrarily selecting the pressed icons 872a to 872d, each pressed icon 872a to 872d can be configured to completely correspond to each special figure 2 hold good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 636(b), description will be given of the contents of the effect when the display modes of all (four) pressed icons are variably displayed during the pressing effect. FIG. 636(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when the display modes of all (four) pressed icons are variably displayed during the pressing effect.

As shown in FIG. 636(b), the display mode of the character 851 is varied in accordance with the display mode of the variably displayed pressed icon. In FIG. 636(b), the first pressed icon 872a is changed to display "chance", the second pressed icon 872b is changed to display "sword", and the third pressed icon 872c is changed to "large aura". , and the fourth push-down icon 872d is changed to a display mode showing "Chance".

The display mode of the character 851 is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display mode of each of the variably marked pressed icons, and the character 851 wearing a "large aura" is displayed in a display mode equipped with a sword. It is Then, the characters “chance” are displayed below the character 851 . In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "clear the mission with emitted power" are displayed as a guide display for showing the content of the mission effect (the effect mode during the second period) to be executed after the pressing effect. be done.

In this case, the mission effect is executed in the effect mode including the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation determined for each pressed icon. As described above, in the present embodiment, since it is configured so that the prefetch target special figure 2 reservation is determined at random for each pressed icon, the number of special figure 2 reservations to be the prefetch target determined The degree of expectation of the mission production can be varied according to the situation.

As shown in FIG. 636(b), this embodiment is configured so that the types of displayed icons for each pressed icon may overlap. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the more the pressed icon is pressed, the more diverse display icons can be displayed, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 636(a), when the player never presses the frame button 22 and the first period (depression period) elapses, the display mode shown in FIG. 637(a) is displayed. . FIG. 637(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode when the frame button 22 is never pressed during the pressing effect (when the stock is not used). As shown in FIG. 637 (a), if the frame button 22 is not pressed during the pressing effect, for each pressing icon (872a to 872d), the special figure 2 hold to be prefetched is not determined Because it is a state, it is not possible to variably display each pressing icon (872a to 872d) to the display mode for showing the prefetch result (lottery result) of special figure 2 pending for prefetch. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 637(a), the display mode of each pressed icon (872a to 872d) is variably displayed to show "?".

In this case, since there is no special figure 2 reserve to be read ahead, the mission effect executed after the pressing effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of the variation. In other words, even if four special figures 2 pending are acquired, by not pressing the frame button 22 during the pressing effect, the effect mode of the final variation effect (mission effect) is read ahead of the special figure 2 pending. It can be set without using the result.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, the type of the character 851 whose display mode is changed during the pressing effect is determined based on the lottery result of the change (special figure 2 final change). Configure. Specifically, when the lottery result of the variation (special figure 2 final variation) is a hit (small hit or big hit), the character (advantageous character) that is more likely to be selected than when it is off, and the variation 1 out of a plurality of characters including a character (disadvantageous character) that is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of (special figure 2 final variation) is a win (small win or big win) than when it is a win. character can be determined (selected).

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to press the frame button 22 during the pressing effect according to the type of the character 851 displayed as the pressing effect. For example, when an advantageous character is displayed in the pressing effect, even if the mission effect is executed only for the lottery result of the variation, the effect result is likely to indicate a win. When a game in which the frame button 22 is not operated is selected or, conversely, when an advantageous character is displayed in the pressing effect, the pressing effect is provided in order to increase the probability that the effect result of the mission effect will be a result of winning. A game in which the frame button 22 is operated can be selected.

In this embodiment, as described above, the display mode of the character 851 displayed during the pressing effect is changed as a suggesting effect suggesting the lottery result of the change, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the specific character 851 may be determined regardless of the lottery result of the variation. In this case, the effect mode of the mission effect executed after the pressing effect may be changed according to the effect result of the variation. In other words, in the present embodiment, after predicting the lottery result of the variation, in the press effect, it is configured to make the prefetch target of the special figure 2 hold different, while predicting the lottery result of the variation It may be configured so that the look-ahead target of the special figure 2 reservation is different in the pressing effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 637(b), the display mode of the special pattern executed during the pressing effect will be described. FIG. 637(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when winning information indicating a plurality of wins is included in the special figure 2 reserve.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in the thirtieth embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22 in order to change the display mode of the fourth pressing icon 872d, the special figure 2 to be read ahead is displayed. It is configured so that the number of reservations is not one but multiple (all special figure 2 reservations). Then, in the case where a plurality of special figures 2 suspension are targeted, as a result of pre-reading for the plurality of special figures 2 suspension, when it is determined that there are multiple special figures 2 suspension having winning information indicating winning , It is configured so that the display mode of each pressed icon is displayed in a special pattern for showing the player that there are a plurality of hits in the special figure 2 reservation.

When the display mode of the special pattern is displayed, as shown in FIG. 637(b), in the display area Dm21, a display mode showing "V" is displayed as a special display mode in which the pressed icons are merged, and the character 851 is also displayed in a display mode with a "V" mark. Then, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "Premium Item GET" are displayed as a guidance display mode for indicating that the effect result of the current pressing effect is a special effect result that is advantageous to the player. These displays make it possible for the player to easily understand that a special privilege (multiple small winnings) will be awarded.

As described above, in the thirtieth embodiment, as a condition for displaying the display mode of the special pattern, the number of acquired special figures 2 pending is the upper limit (4 pieces), and the display mode of the fourth pressing icon 872d A condition is set that is established when the player operates the frame button 22 in order to vary the . Therefore, with the aim of displaying the display mode of the special pattern, the player is motivated to play the game so that the number of reserved special figures 2 reaches the upper limit, and the frame button 22 is actively operated during the pressing performance. can be made

Next, with reference to FIG. 638, description will be given of the effect executed during the third period (see FIG. 639) in the case where the effect indicating failure is executed in the mission effect.

Here, the contents of the presentation executed during the third period will be briefly described. As described above with reference to FIG. 639, this third period is an effect period set after the second period during which the mission effect is executed. Then, at the timing when the third period starts, the content of the effect is set according to the result of the effect up to the second period.

Specifically, when the result of the mission effect is the effect result indicating winning, the effect mode indicating winning is set as it is (see FIG. 375(b)), and the result of the mission effect is the effect indicating loss. In the case of the result, it is configured to execute a result notification effect in which a display screen (time saving end screen) indicating that the time saving state ends is displayed. Then, in the pressing effect executed during the first period, if the win is included in the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation that was not included in the prefetch target, the effect indicating the win during this result notification effect ( revival effect) is executed. By configuring in this way, the prefetch result for the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired at the time the first period is set is notified during the second period or in the third period according to the effect result of the pressing effect. Since it is determined whether or not to notify during the game, the player can play the game while having a feeling of expectation for winning until the end of the special figure 2 final variation performance.

FIG. 638(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed during the result notification effect executed during the third period. As shown in FIG. 638(a), when the result notification effect is executed, the time saving end screen having the same content as described above with reference to FIG. 377 of the sixteenth embodiment is displayed. Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment, the number of treasure box icons corresponding to the number of special figures 2 reserved that were not targeted for prefetching in the pressing effect are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Hmm? There is a treasure box" are displayed for guiding the player that there is a special figure 2 reserve that has not yet been prefetched.

In the example shown in Figure 638 (a), as a result of the press effect, it shows the result notification effect in the case where only the prefetch result of one special figure 2 pending is prefetched, and the prefetch target in the press effect Three treasure box icons 829b1 to 829b3 are displayed to show that the number of special figures 2 reserved that did not come out is three.

In this way, in the result notification effect, by configuring the player to be able to notify the number of special figures 2 reserved whose prefetch result is not yet reflected in the execution effect, the effect indicating winning is executed during the result notification effect. It is possible to let the player predict the degree of expectation. Therefore, when a large number of treasure box icons are displayed, attention can be paid to the result notification effect with expectation of winning, and when the number of displayed treasure box icons is small, excessive expectations are placed on the result notification effect. The game can be played without having to hold the

In the result notification effect, the displayed treasure box icons (three treasure box icons 829b1 to 829b3 in the figure) are sequentially opened. If there is a special figure 2 hold containing, the display mode shown in FIG. 638 (b) is displayed. FIG. 638(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when winning is indicated in the result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 638(b), if there is a special figure 2 hold containing winning information indicating winning in the special figure 2 hold that is the target of the result notification effect, the target treasure box icon (in the figure, the treasure box icon 829b1) is opened, and pseudo symbols 881a to 881c are displayed to indicate that a winning will be made. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Congratulations on the recovery big win" are displayed as a guide display mode for informing of winning (winning a small win).

In addition, the timing at which the display mode shown in FIG. 638 is displayed is during the special figure 2 final fluctuation period, as shown in the small display area Dm2 and the small display area Dm2a. In other words, the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c do not indicate the lottery result of the variation, but inform in advance the result of the special figure 2 lottery to be executed later. Therefore, in the thirtieth embodiment, as in the sixteenth embodiment described above, after the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c are displayed in the result notification effect, the special figure 2 variation that actually wins is stopped and displayed. Between, the pseudo patterns 881a to 881c are configured to be oscillatingly displayed (indicated by curved arrows in the figure), and the pseudo patterns 881a to 881c are displayed in accordance with the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation to be won is stopped. is switched to a third symbol (for example, 777) indicating winning.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress misperception that the lottery result corresponding to the second special symbol variation actually being executed is winning. That is, in the present embodiment, the pattern (pseudo pattern) for notifying in advance the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed later, and the symbol for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. (3rd pattern) and by displaying in a different display mode, it is configured to be able to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Although illustration is omitted, if the winning information indicating winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the result notification effect, all the treasure box icons will not open display), and the time saving state ends as it is.

In the thirtieth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 638 (a), in the result notification effect, it is configured to be able to notify the player of the number of special figures 2 pending that the look-ahead result has not yet been reflected in the execution effect. , but not limited to this, for example, regardless of the number of reserved special figures 2 whose prefetch results have not yet been reflected in the execution effect, one treasure box icon is displayed, and the display mode of the treasure box icon is It may be configured to be different based on the prefetch result of the target special figure 2 pending.

In this case, for example, if there is a special figure 2 suspension (hit special figure 2 suspension) with winning information indicating winning in the special figure 2 suspension that is the target of the look-ahead of the result notification effect, the case where there is no winning special figure 2 suspension It is preferable to select an advantageous display mode that is more likely to be selected and a disadvantageous display mode that is easier to select when there is no winning special figure 2 reservation than when there is a winning special figure 2 reservation. By configuring in this way, in the special figure 2 final variation production, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which production used how much special figure 2 suspension as a look-ahead result. Further, as a result of prefetching special figure 2 reservation, the display mode of the treasure box icon may be varied according to the number of reservations indicating winning (big hit, small hit).

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirtieth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 640 to 642. FIG. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above. The difference is that a part of the configuration of is changed, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 640(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described. FIG. 640(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 640(a), in this embodiment, a variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la for the ROM 222 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above. , in that a character selection table 222xb, an object pending selection table 222xc, and a display icon selection table 222xd are added.

The variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa has two variation pattern selection tables associated with the gaming state, specifically, the normal variation pattern selection 16 table referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. 222la1 has a time-saving variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa2 that is referred to when it is in the time-saving state. Since the normal variation pattern selection 16 table 222la1 is the same as that of the sixteenth embodiment described above, its description is omitted. In addition, the time-saving variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa2 is based on the same technical idea as the variation pattern selection table described in each embodiment described above, and is included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. A data table for selecting a display variation pattern (drawing mode) corresponding to a variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, design type), and stipulates a variation time of 30 seconds as the final variation of the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is different from the sixteenth embodiment in that it is configured such that the current variation pattern is always selected.

In the thirtieth embodiment, the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 final variation) is configured to always be a 30 second variation. Therefore, it is possible to unify the performance pattern of the variation performance executed corresponding to the special figure 2 final variation, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113. Further, when the first special symbol variation is executed as the final variation of the time saving state, a short variation of 0.2 seconds is performed in the same manner as in the above-described sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 386), and the short variation As a variable effect corresponding to , it is configured to display a time saving end screen. In other words, when the irregular game is performed in the time saving state and the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first special symbol variation, the special figure 2 hold is acquired in the final variation period in the time saving state. Sufficient period is not set to make it, and furthermore, it is configured so that the production (standby production) prompting to acquire the special figure 2 reservation is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally executing an irregular game during the time saving state.

The character selection table 222xb is a data table referred to when selecting the type of the character 851 (see FIG. 636) to be displayed in the pressing effect executed during the first period of the special figure 2 final variation effect period. is. This character selection table 222xb is executed when it is determined to be the first period start timing in the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) executed for determining the final variation effect mode in the time saving state. It is referred to when selecting the type of the character 851 in the first period effect setting process (see C4882 in FIG. 644) (see C8001 in FIG. 644). This character selection table 222xb is defined so that the ratio of the type selection of the character 851 is different according to the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 final variation (result of determination).

Here, the contents defined in the character selection table 222xb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 641 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the character selection table 222xb. As shown in FIG. 641, the character selection table 222xb has three types of selected characters ( character type) is defined.

Specifically, if the hit/fail judgment result corresponding to the variation (special figure 2 final variation) is a big hit, the value of the acquired production counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 49" "rabbit" 50 to 98" are defined in the range of "brave" respectively, and if the result of the judgment corresponding to the variation (special figure 2 final variation) is a small hit, the value of the acquired production counter 223lf is " "Rabbit" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "Tortoise" is defined in the range of "50 to 79", and "Brave" is defined in the range of "80 to 98". If the success/failure determination result corresponding to the fluctuation) is out, the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "turtle" in the range of "0 to 39", "rabbit" in the range of "40 to 89", Each "brave" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

In other words, of the three types of characters that can be selected by referring to the character selection table 222xb, "brave" is the character type that is most advantageous to the player, "turtle" is the character type that is most disadvantageous to the player, and "rabbit" is the character type that is most disadvantageous to the player. ' is a character type that is more disadvantageous to the player than 'brave' and more advantageous to the player than 'turtle'.

Thus, based on the determination result corresponding to the variation (special figure 2 final variation), by differentiating the selected character type, based on the type of the character 851 displayed as the pressing effect, the variation It is possible for the player to predict the success/failure determination result corresponding to (special figure 2 final variation). Therefore, depending on the prediction result of the result of determination corresponding to the variation (special figure 2 final variation), it is possible for the player to select whether to operate the frame button 22 during the pressing effect, so that the special figure 2. It is possible to easily increase the variation of the performance executed during the final variation.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if any character type is selected, the content of the character selection table 222xb is set so that the possibility of "out" remains as a result of the determination corresponding to the change (special figure 2 final change). However, without being limited to this, for example, a special character that is selected only when the success/failure determination result corresponding to the variation (special figure 2 final variation) is a hit (big hit, small hit) ( For example, a character imitating an angel) may be configured to be selectable. By configuring in this manner, the player can select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 during the depression effect, after understanding that the variation will win. As a result, for example, a player who does not want to uselessly grasp the look-ahead result in advance can select a game in which the frame button 22 is not operated during the pressing effect. By actively operating and changing the display mode of the pressed icon, it is also possible to select a game that predicts the number of outliers included in the special figure 2 reservation.

The target hold selection table 222xc is a special figure 2 hold referred to for varying the display mode of each pressed icon when the player presses the frame button 22 for the pressed icons 872a to 872d during the pressing effect. is a data table for selecting the type of This target holding selection table 222xc is set in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 30 (see C3157 in FIG. 647) for periodically monitoring that the player has operated the frame button 22. If it is determined that it is during one period (C8201 in FIG. 647: Yes) and if it is determined that there is a pressed icon whose display mode is not changed (C8202 in FIG. 647: Yes), the target special figure 2 Hold is referenced (see C8203 in FIG. 647). And, according to the propriety determination result (prefetch result) of the selected special figure 2 reservation (object reservation), the display mode after the change is selected by the display icon selection table 222xd described later.

Here, with reference to FIG. 642(a), the contents defined in the target hold selection table 222xc will be described. FIG. 642(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the target hold selection table 222xc. As shown in Figure 642 (a), in the target pending selection table 222xc, the type of the pressed icon to be selected this time, the number of acquired special figures 2 pending, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf, Correspondingly, target hold (target special figure 2 hold) is defined.

It should be noted that the values "1" to "4" defined as target suspension indicate the order stored in the winning information storage area 223la. It shows the special figure 2 reservation (first special figure 2 reservation) where the symbol lottery is executed, and the target reservation "2" is the special figure 2 reservation (second special symbol lottery) where the second special symbol lottery is executed next. 2 hold), below, the target hold "3" is the 3rd special figure 2 hold, and the target hold "4" is the second special symbol lottery at the end of the acquired special figure 2 hold. It shows the special figure 2 reservation (4th special figure 2 reservation).

Specifically, the first pressed icon 872a (pressed icon whose display mode is first changed in the pressed effect) is targeted, and if the number of acquired special figures 2 pending is 1, acquisition When the value of the produced effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 79", the target suspension is "1", and when the value is in the range of "80 to 98", the target suspension is "-", that is, there is no target suspension. In addition, if the number of acquired special figures 2 pending is 2, the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is within the range of ``0 to 39'' and the target suspension is ``1'', and the target suspension is in the range of ``40 to 79''. "2" is defined as subject pending "-" in the range of "80 to 98", that is, no subject pending. If the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations is 3, the value of the acquired production counter 223lf is "1" in the range of "0 to 39", and "2" in the range of "40 to 79". , object hold "3" in the range of "80 to 89", and object hold "-" in the range of "90 to 98", that is, no object hold. If the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations is 4, the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "1" in the range of "0 to 39", and "2" in the range of "40 to 79". , object hold “3” in the range of “80 to 89”, and object hold “4” in the range of “90 to 98”.

Then, the second pressed icon 872b (pressed icon whose display mode is changed second in the pressed effect) is targeted, and if the number of acquired special figures 2 pending is 2, the acquired effect When the value of the counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39", the target suspension is "2", in the range of "40 to 79", the target suspension is "-", in the range of "80 to 89", the target suspension is "1", Object hold "-" is defined in the range of "90 to 98". If the number of acquired special figures 2 pending is 3, the value of the acquired production counter 223lf is in the range of ``0 to 39'' and the target suspension is ``2'', and in the range of ``40 to 79'', the target suspension is ``3''. , object hold “1” in the range of “80 to 89”, and object hold “-” in the range of “90 to 98”. If the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations is 4, the value of the acquired production counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target reservation is "2", and in the range of "40 to 79", the target reservation is "3 , object hold “1” in the range of “80 to 89”, and object hold “4” in the range of “90 to 98”.

The third pressed icon 872c (pressed icon whose display mode is varied third in the pressed effect) is targeted, and if the number of special figures 2 pending acquired is 3, the acquired effect counter 223lf The value of is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold is "3", in the range of "40 to 79" the target hold is "2", in the range of "80 to 89" the target hold is "1", "90 ~ 98”, the object hold “-” is defined. If the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations is 4, the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "0 to 39" in the range of "3", and "40 to 79" in the range of "40 to 79". , object hold “2” in the range of “80 to 89”, and object hold “1” in the range of “90 to 98”.

Finally, the fourth pressed icon 872d (pressed icon whose display mode is changed at the end (fourth) in the pressed effect) is the target, and if the number of acquired special figures 2 pending is 4 , The value of the obtained effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39", the target suspension is "2", in the range of "40 to 79", the target suspension is "3", and in the range of "80 to 89", the target suspension is " 4”, and the target hold “all” is defined in the range of “90 to 98”.

In addition, the target hold "all" that can be selected as the target hold for the fourth pressed icon 872d indicates that all the special figure 2 holds are made the target hold. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to determine the display mode after the variable with reference to the propriety determination result of a plurality of special figures 2 pending for one pressed icon, one special figure 2 pending Compared to the case where the display mode after the change is determined by referring to the result of the success/failure determination, the probability that the win is included in the result of the success/failure determination can be increased. can be made easier to select.

Furthermore, since it is possible to determine that multiple hit winnings are included in the success or failure determination results of multiple special figure 2 reservations, a special display mode (Fig. 637 (b)) can be displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as a pressing effect to be executed in a partial period (first period) of the special figure 2 final variation, the number of pressing icons 872a to 872d corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations , and when the player presses the operation means (frame button 22) during the first period, the display modes of the pressed icons 872a to 872d are sequentially variably displayed. Then, when the display mode of the pressed icons 872a to 872d is variably displayed, randomly select the target special figure 2 hold for each pressed icon, based on the prefetch result of the selected special figure 2 hold It is configured to determine the mode of presentation after variable display. Furthermore, it is configured so that the special figure 2 hold that is the target of each pressed icon can overlap, and it is also possible to change the display mode of the pressed icon without providing the target hold.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many special figures 2 pending look-ahead results are indicated by the display mode of the pressed icon variably displayed during the pressed effect, Even if the effect result of the mission effect executed after the pressing effect is the effect result indicating the disconnection, the result A game can be played while expecting to be notified of winning by the notification performance.

In addition, when a plurality of display modes that are likely to be selected at the time of winning are selected as the display mode of each pressed icon, are the plurality of display modes selected for a specific winning special figure 2 hold? Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not there are a plurality of winning special figures 2 pending, the player can be interested in the game contents to be executed in the future.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the target hold of the pressed icon, it is configured to be able to select either one special figure 2 hold or all special figure 2 holds, but not limited to this, It may be configured so that two special figure 2 suspension or three special figure 2 suspension can be selected as target suspension. In addition, in the present embodiment, depending on the selection result referring to the target hold selection table 222xc, it is configured so that three or more pressing icons with the same special figure 2 hold as the target hold can occur. Without limitation, the same special figure 2 reservation may be provided with an upper limit to the number of pressing icons to be the target reservation, or may be configured so as not to overlap. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily match the number of times the player operates the operation means during the pressing effect and the number of special figures 2 pending referring to the look-ahead result, so the final variation effect (pressing The special figure 2 reservation number used for production and mission production) and the special figure 2 reservation number used for result notification production can be easily set to the contents desired by the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the more the player operates the operation means during the pressing effect, the more the special figure 2 pending number used for the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect) is configured to increase. , Without being limited to this, for example, the more the player operates the operation means during the pressing effect, the more the special figure 2 reserved number used for the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect) is configured to be reduced. Also good. In this case, in the start screen of the pressing effect shown in FIG. An effect of erasing the displayed pressed icons 872a to 872d in order is executed, and at the end timing of the pressed effect, the pressed icons 872a to 872d displayed in the display area Dm21 are subject to suspension in the same manner as in the present embodiment. It may be configured to change the display mode according to the determination result of whether or not to hold the object.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player who does not want to reflect the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold in the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect) to operate the frame button 22 willingly. Become. Further, as the pressing effect, the first pressing effect and the second pressing effect can be executed. A press effect is executed in which the special figure 2 pending number used for the effect (press effect and mission effect) increases, and as the second press effect, the more the player operates the operation means, the final variation effect (press effect and mission effect It may be configured to execute a pressing effect that reduces the number of special figures 2 reserved used for production). As a result, even for the player who does not want to reflect the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold in the final variation production (press production and mission production), the special figure 2 hold in the final fluctuation production (press production and mission production) A player who wants to reflect the look-ahead result of is allowed to operate the frame button 22 during the pressing performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced, and a player who does not want to operate the frame button 22 can Also, it is possible to execute the final variable performance in a different mode, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The display icon selection table 222xd is a data table for selecting the display mode of each pressed icon after being varied. Here, the contents defined in the display icon selection table 222xd will be described with reference to FIG. 642(b). FIG. 642(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display icon selection table 222xd. As shown in FIG. 642(b), in the display icon selection table 222xd, the result of determination (read-ahead result) of target holding of each of the pressed icons 872a to 872d selected with reference to the target holding selection table 222xc, and the effect Different display modes (display icons) are defined based on the value of the counter 223lf.

Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is “hit”, the display icon “large aura” is specified in the range of “0 to 49” for the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf, and the range of “50 to 89” is specified. , and the display icon "chance" is defined in the range of "90-98". In addition, when the result of the success/failure determination is “off”, the display icon “?” "Sword" is defined, the display icon "chance" is defined in the range of "80-89", and the display icon "large aura" is defined in the range of "90-98".

Furthermore, if the success/failure determination result is "-", that is, if no object hold is provided, the display icon "chance" is specified in the range of "0 to 49" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf, and "50 A display icon “?” is specified in the range of “98”. Also, if the result of the judgment is "multiple win", that is, the target hold "all" is selected in the target hold selection table 222xc, and multiple small hits are selected in all the special figure 2 holds. If there is a success/failure determination result (prefetch result) shown, the display icon "special V" is defined in the range "0 to 98" that is the entire range that the acquired effect counter 223lf can take.

In this way, by varying the selection ratio of the selected display icon (display mode after change) according to the determination result (prefetch result) of the target hold, based on the display mode displayed in the pressing effect Therefore, it is possible to predict the prefetch result of special figure 2 pending. Therefore, for example, it is selected when the operating means is operated for the first pressed icon 872a during the pressing effect, and the display mode of the pressed icon 872a is "large aura", that is, when the target hold is won. When the display is variably displayed in an easy-to-understand display mode, either stop the operation of the operation means during the pressing effect at that time, or further operate the operation means, and display the second "aura large". It is possible to provide the enjoyment of allowing the player to choose whether to aim for.

Next, with reference to FIG. 640(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described. FIG. 640(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 640(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the thirtieth embodiment has the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the sixteenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 387(b)). On the other hand, it differs in that a press counter 223xa, use pending information storage area 223xb, unused pending information storing area 223xc, and completed flag 223xd are added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The pressing counter 223xa is a counter for counting the number of pressing icons 872a to 872d displayed during the pressing effect. This pressing counter 223xa is the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc when it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed in the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) (C4801 in FIG. 643: Yes). A value corresponding to the special figure 2 pending number is set based on (see C4881 in FIG. 643). Then, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated during the first period (during the pressing effect), it is subtracted (C8207 in FIG. 647). Also, the value of the press counter 223xa is determined at the end timing of the first period in which the press effect is executed (C4885 in FIG. 643), and the value is greater than 0, that is, the display mode is changed at the end of the press effect. If it is determined that there is no pressed icon (C4885 in FIG. 643: Yes), the display mode of the pressed icon corresponding to the value of the pressed counter 223xa is changed to "?", and then the value is cleared to 0. (See C4887 in Figure 643).

The use reservation information storage area 223xb and the unused reservation information storage area 223xc are storage areas for storing information for managing the special figure 2 reservation in which the look-ahead result is used in the pressing effect.

The completed flag 223xd is a flag for indicating that an effect indicating winning is executed in the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect), and when the effect indicating winning is executed. is set to on. Then, in the third period effect setting process (see C4891 in FIG. 646), the setting situation is discriminated, and the effect mode based on the discrimination result is set. In other words, if an effect indicating winning is executed in the effects (final variable effects) executed in the first period and the second period, the effect to congratulate winning is executed in the third period. (see C8111 in FIG. 646) and then set to off (C8112 in FIG. 646).

On the other hand, if the effect (final variable effect) executed in the first period and the second period is not executed, the time saving end screen is displayed in the third period effect. A result notification effect is executed to perform the result notification effect, and further, it is determined whether or not to execute the resurrection effect during the result notification effect, and the effect mode is determined according to the determination result. As a result, a plurality of effects to be executed during the special figure 2 final variation period can be executed as a series of effects without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

During the first period flag 223xe is a flag for indicating that it is during the first period of the final variable effect, and is set to ON when the first period is set. Then, it is set to OFF at the end timing of the first period.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the thirtieth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 643 to 647, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described. The content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment is different from the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment. In place of the update process (see C4506 in FIG. 423), in place of the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643), in place of the frame button input monitoring/effect process (C3107), the frame button input monitoring/effect process ( C3157 in FIG. 647) is executed, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. In the sixteenth embodiment described above, the contents of the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 are described with reference to the first embodiment. Therefore, when explaining the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment will be described as appropriate. Description will be made using the content (more specifically, the content where the S number is changed to the C number).

First, with reference to FIG. 643, the contents of the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596) will be described. FIG. 643 is a flow chart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596). In this final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596), during the execution of the final variation effect (special figure 2 final variation effect), the start or end timing of each effect is determined, and the control process according to the determination result is performed. executed.

When the final fluctuation effect update process 30 (see C4596) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801), and if it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed (C4801: Yes), A value corresponding to the number of pending in FIG. 2 is set in the press counter 223xa (C4881), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of C4801 that it is not the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: No), then it is determined whether it is the first period start timing (C4804). If so (C4804: Yes), the first period effect setting process is executed (C4882), and this process ends. Note that the first period effect setting process (C4882) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of C4804, if it is determined that it is not the first period start timing (C4804: No), then it is determined whether it is the first period end timing (C4883), and it is determined that it is the first period end timing. If so (C4883: Yes), the flag 223xe during the first period is set to OFF (C4884), it is determined whether the value of the press counter 223xa is greater than 0 (C4885), and if it is determined to be greater than 0 (C4885: Yes), a display command is set to change the display mode of the pressed icon corresponding to the value of the pressed counter 223xa to "?" (C4886), and the value of the pressed counter 223xa is cleared to 0 ( C4887) and terminates this process. If it is determined in the process of C4885 that the value of the press counter 223xa is 0 (C4885: No), this process ends.

Next, in the process of C4883, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the first period (C4883: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second period (C4888), and it is determined that it is the start timing of the second period. If so (C4888: Yes), the second period effect setting process is executed (C4889), and this process ends. The second period effect setting process (C4889) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of C4888, if it is determined that it is not the second period start timing (C4888: No), then it is determined whether it is the third period start timing (C4890), and it is determined that it is the third period start timing. If so (C4890: Yes), the third period effect setting process is executed (C4891), and this process ends. Note that the third period effect setting process (C4891) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of C4890 that it is not the third period start timing (C4890: No), this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 644, the contents of the first period effect setting process (C4882) will be described. FIG. 644 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first period effect setting process (C4882). In this first period effect setting process (C4882), a process for setting the effect mode for the first period, that is, the effect mode of the pressing effect is executed.

When the first period effect setting process (C4882) is executed, first, a character is selected by referring to the character selection table 222xb on the basis of the decision result of the final variation (C8001). Then, a display command indicating the selected character is set (C8002), next a display command indicating the pressed icons 872a to 872d corresponding to the value of the pressed counter 223xa is set (C8003), and the first period flag is set. 223xe is set to ON (C8004), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 645, the contents of the second period effect setting process (C4889) will be described. FIG. 645 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second period effect setting process (C4889). In this second period effect setting process (C4889), a process for setting the effect mode corresponding to the second period, that is, the effect mode of the mission effect is executed.

When the second period effect setting process (C4889) is executed, first, the information in the use reservation information storage area 223xb is read (C8051), and it is determined whether there is winning information (C8052). Then, when it is determined that there is winning information (C8052: Yes), the effect mode indicating winning is determined as the effect result of the mission effect (C8053), the completed flag 223xd is set to ON (C8054), and determined. A display command indicating the mode of presentation is set (C8055), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C8052, if it is determined that there is no win information (C8052: No), the number of pending prize information and win/fail judgment for the prize information that has not yet been used among the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223la Information indicating the result (read-ahead result) is stored in the unused pending information storage area 223xc (C8056), the effect mode of the second period effect (mission effect) indicating the deviation is determined (C8057), and the process proceeds to C8055. , and then terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 646, the contents of the third period effect setting process (C4891) will be described. FIG. 646 is a flow chart showing the contents of the third period effect setting process (C4891). In this third period effect setting process (C4891), a process for setting the effect mode corresponding to the third period, that is, the effect mode of the result notification effect is executed.

When the third period effect setting process (C4891) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the completed flag 223xd is set to ON (C8101). If it is determined that the effect indicating winning is not executed (C8101: No), the information stored in the unused reservation information storage area 223xc is read (C8102), and the treasure box icon corresponding to the read reservation number The number of 829b is determined (C8103), and it is determined whether or not there is hit information in the information read in the process of C8102 (C8104).

In the process of C8104, if it is determined that there is winning information (C8104: Yes), a presentation mode indicating winning using the corresponding treasure box icon 829b is determined (C8105), and a display command indicating the determined presentation mode is issued. Set (C8106) and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of C8104, if it is determined that there is no winning information (C8104: No), the information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read out (C8107), and whether winning information is stored in the read information is determined. Determine (C8108).

Here, the processing contents of C8108 will be described. In this embodiment, at the start of the result notification effect, a treasure box icon 829b corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored in the unused pending information storage area 223xc is displayed, and during the result notification effect, a hit notification effect can be executed. are doing. However, the timing at which information is stored in this unused pending information storage area 223xc is the start timing of the second period. For this reason, for example, at the start of the second period, if the special figure 2 suspension has not been acquired to the upper limit number (4 pieces), after storing the information in the unused suspension information storage area 223xc, a new special FIG. 2 A case occurs when a hold is obtained.

Therefore, by the process of C8108, it is not stored in the unused reservation information storage area 223xc, and by pre-determining the winning prize information corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation stored in the winning prize information storage area 223la, at the time of the time saving end It is possible to perform hit notification during the result notification production for all acquired special figures 2 pending.

In the processing of C8108, if it is determined that there is winning information (C8108: Yes), after displaying the lost treasure box, the effect mode indicating winning is decided (C8109), and the process proceeds to the processing of C8106. Also, when it is determined that there is no hit information (C8108: No), a mode indicating a lost win is determined (C8110), and the process proceeds to C8106.

On the other hand, in the process of C8101, if it is determined that the completed flag 223xd is set to ON (C8101: Yes), the production mode for congratulating the win is determined (C8111), and the completed flag 223xd is set to OFF ( C8112), and shift to the processing of C8106.

Next, with reference to FIG. 647, the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 30 (C3157) will be described. FIG. 647 is a flow chart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 30 (C3157). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 30 (C3157), processing for setting various effects to be executed based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22) is executed.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 30 (C3157) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the flag 223xe during the first period is set to ON (C8201). (C8201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the push counter 223xa is greater than 0, that is, whether the push icons 872a to 872d are displayed (C8202).

In the process of C8202, if it is determined that the value of the press counter 223xa is greater than 0 (C8202: Yes), the target suspension is determined by referring to the target suspension selection table 222xc (C8203), and the winning of the determined target suspension A display icon is determined by referring to the display icon selection table 222xd based on the information (C8204), and the determined display icon is determined as the display mode of the pressed icon 872 corresponding to the value of the pressed counter 223xa (C8205) and displayed. The display mode of the character associated with the content of the icon is determined (C8206), the value of the press counter 223xa is decremented by 1 (C8207), the display command corresponding to the determined content is set (C8208), and this processing is executed. finish.

If it is determined in the process of C8202 that the value of the pressing counter 223xa is 0, that is, if it is determined that all the displayed pressing icons 872 are variably displayed during the pressing effect (C8202 : No), determine the effect mode for liveliness (C8209), and shift to the process of C8208. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C8201 that the flag 223xe is not set to ON during the first period (C8201: No), other processes related to frame button input are executed (C8210), and the process proceeds to the process of C8208. .

In addition, in the thirtieth embodiment, in the final variation (special figure 2 final variation) in the time saving state, a plurality of productions (final variation production, result notification production) are executed. Although it is configured so that the result is selected, it is not limited to this, and as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation executed during the time saving state, it corresponds to the special figure 2 variation other than the special figure 2 final variation Even in the variable performance (non-final variable performance), the performance mode may be variable based on the preliminary determination result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. Then, based on the performance mode of the non-final variable performance and the performance mode of the final variable performance, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of hits included in the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired. good. Specifically, when a special variable performance is executed as a non-final variable performance, if the performance result of the special variable performance is a performance result indicating winning, the special figure corresponding to the non-final variable performance When the 2 variation indicates that it is a hit variation and the performance result of the special variation performance is a performance result indicating a loss, a plurality of special symbols executed after the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the non-final variation performance. It may be configured to indicate that a plurality of wins are included in the 2 lotteries.

By configuring in this way, when the special variation performance is executed, it is possible to provide the player with a novel performance that makes the player expect that the variation is not the variation, and enhances the interest of the game. can be improved.

<31st embodiment>
Next, the thirty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 648 to 651. FIG. The thirty-first embodiment is different from the above-described thirtieth embodiment in that the method of determining the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation is different, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the thirtieth embodiment described above, at the end timing of the waiting period (start timing of the first period) in the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 final variation), depending on the number of special figures 2 pending, When the display mode (pressing icons 872a to 872d) that can be operated (pressed) is displayed during the pressing effect, and the operating means is operated during the pressing effect, any special figure 2 of the acquired special figure 2 reservation It is configured to inform the player of information for indicating the result of prefetching for the hold.

On the other hand, in the 31st embodiment, at the end timing of the waiting period (start timing of the first period) in the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 final variation), look ahead for the acquired special figure 2 hold When it is determined that there is a special figure 2 reservation to be executed and to be won, the timing of informing that there is a special figure 2 reservation to be won (hit special figure 2 reservation) is determined by lottery. There is a big difference in that

By constructing in this way, the execution timing of the performance (winning performance) for notifying the presence of the winning special figure 2 suspension, which is the performance content most desired by the player as the performance content of the time-saving final variation, is set at random. As a result, the player can be entertained with the effect of the time-saving final variation until the end.

Here, with reference to FIG. 648, the content of the time-saving final variation effect performed in the thirty-first embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the above-described thirtieth embodiment. Figure 648 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the time saving final variation (special figure 2 final variation). As shown in FIG. 648, the production of the time saving final variation executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 31st embodiment is the production of the time saving final variation executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 30th embodiment described above (see FIG. 639 ), the difference is that the period during which the operation validity period is set for determining whether the player's operation on the operation means is valid, that is, the period during which the pressing effect is executed is deleted. be. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

More specifically, in the time-saving final variation (special figure 2 final variation), the second special symbol variation for 30 seconds is executed, and in the first 5 seconds, the player is allowed to acquire the special figure 2 hold. A waiting period is set in which a waiting effect to prompt is executed, and then a first period of 20 seconds is set. During this first period, the mission effect (final variable effect) in the thirtieth embodiment described above is executed, and then the result notification effect is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the final variation effect and the result notification effect are executed as the time saving final variation effect in the same manner as in the thirtieth embodiment described above.

Then, if there is a winning special figure 2 reservation (hit special figure 2 reservation) in the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired, whether to notify that effect with the final variation production or with the result notification production is determined by lottery.

By configuring in this way, for example, at the end of the waiting period, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired up to the upper limit (4 pieces), and the special figure 2 reservation exists within the acquired special figure 2 reservation. However, it is possible to notify that effect not by the final variation effect but by the result notification effect. Therefore, for the player, until all of the multiple effects (effects that can notify the player of the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold) executed in the time-saving final variation are completed, the expectation of winning It can be made easy to maintain the feeling.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the 31st embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 649 and 650. FIG. The 31st embodiment is different from the 30th embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device is partially changed and the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially deleted, but the rest is the same. be. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, referring to FIG. 649, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 649 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 649, in the thirty-first embodiment, the character selection table 222xb, the target hold selection table 222xc, and the display icon selection table 222xd are deleted from the above-described thirtieth embodiment, and the notification period selection 31 table 222ya is displayed. are the same except for the addition of

The configuration of the RAM 223 differs from the above-described thirtieth embodiment in that the press counter 223xa, the pending use information storage area 223xb, the unused pending information storage area 223xc, and the done flag 223xd are deleted. However, since the only difference is the deletion of the configuration, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The notification period selection 31 table 222ya selects the effect (period) to notify that effect when there is a special figure 2 reservation (hit special figure 2 reservation) indicating winning in the special figure 2 reservation in the time saving final variation. It is a data table used for This notification period selection 31 table 222ya stores winning information when it is determined that it is the start timing of the first period (C8301 in FIG. 651: Yes) in the final variation effect update process 31 (see FIG. 651 in FIG. 651). When it is determined that there is hit information (special figure 2 reservation to be won) as a preliminary determination result (prefetch result) based on the read prize information (Figure 651 C8303: Yes), it is referred to select the notification period of the winning notification.

Here, the contents of the notification period selection 31 table 222ya will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 650 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the notification period selection 31 table 222ya. As shown in Figure 650, in the notification period selection 31 table 222ya, the validity determination result of the running variation (time saving final variation), the special figure 2 pending type containing the hit information, the value of the obtained production counter 223lf and , the notification target period is defined in correspondence with .

Specifically, if the result of the determination of whether or not the fluctuation during execution is "hit", and the hit information exists in the holding 1 (first special figure 2 pending), the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "0 A "first period" is defined as a period to be notified in the range of "29", and a "second period" is defined as a period to be notified in the range of "30 to 98". Also, if the hit information exists in the maintenance 2 (second special figure 2 pending), the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39" as the notification target period "first period", " 40 to 98” is defined as a “second period” as the notification target period. In addition, if the hit information exists in 3 (3rd special figure 2 pending), the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 49". A "second period" is defined as a period to be notified in the range of "50 to 98". Also, if the hit information exists in 4 (4th special figure 2 pending), the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 69". A "second period" is defined as a period to be notified in the range of "70 to 98".

On the other hand, if the validity determination result of the variation during execution is "out" and the hit information exists in the retention 1 (first special figure 2 reservation), the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "0 to 69" A "first period" is defined as the notification target period within the range of , and a "second period" is defined as the notification target period within the range of "70 to 98". Also, if the hit information exists in the maintenance 2 (second special figure 2 pending), the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 59" as the notification target period "first period", " A "second period" is defined as a period to be notified in the range of "60 to 98". In addition, if the hit information exists in 3 (3rd special figure 2 pending), the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 49". A "second period" is defined as a period to be notified in the range of "50 to 98". Also, if the hit information exists in 4 (4th special figure 2 pending), the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39". 40 to 98” is defined as a “second period” as the notification target period. In addition, if the change during execution is "out", it is configured to determine whether there are multiple hit information, and if it is determined that there are multiple hit information (when there are multiple hit information), A "first period" is defined as a notification target period for the entire range "0 to 98" that the obtained value of the effect counter 223lf can take.

In the 31st embodiment, as described above, when there is hit information (hit special figure 2 reservation) in the special figure 2 reservation, it is configured so that the notification target period is selected by lottery, and notification When the first period is selected as the target period, winning is reported in the mission effect (see FIG. 375(a)) which is the final variable effect, and when the second period is selected, the result is reported. It is configured so as to inform the winning by the effect (see FIG. 638(b)). Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the effect indicating winning is executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the 31st embodiment, the storage location of the winning special figure 2 reservation, that is, the selection of the notification target period according to the order in which the winning special figure 2 reservation is stored out of the acquired special figure 2 reservation differing proportions. Therefore, when the winning is actually notified, by determining whether it was notified during the first period or during the second period, it is predicted how many special figures 2 reservations were won. can be made easier.

In the 31st embodiment, in principle, for the acquired special figure 2 reservation, the first special figure 2 reservation (the next special figure 2 lottery is held) in order from the pre-reading process (hit special figure 2 hold or not) is executed, and if it is determined that it is a hit special figure 2 hold, it is configured not to execute the prefetching process for the special figure 2 hold after that. there is

That is, if the hit special figure 2 reservation is the first special figure 2 reservation, it is in a state where the prefetching process of the second special figure 2 reservation to the fourth special figure 2 reservation is not executed, and the hit special figure 2 If the hold is the 4th special figure 2 hold, it means that the 1st special figure 2 hold to the 3rd special figure 2 hold are "off". Therefore, based on the period in which the performance indicating winning is executed, by predicting the type of winning special figure 2 reservation (first special figure 2 reservation to fourth special figure 2 reservation), the remaining special figure 2 reservation Since it is possible to make the player feel different expectations for the winning of the winning, the player can be more interested in the performance executed during the time-saving final variation.

Furthermore, in the 31st embodiment, the notification target period is changed according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (special figure 2 final fluctuation) being executed, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed It is configured so that the notification target period that is likely to be selected differs between the case of winning and the case of losing. Specifically, if the special figure 2 fluctuation in execution is hit and won, the look-ahead result that is advantageous to the player as the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold (the special figure 2 hold that is executed early) Figure 2 pending), the second period is defined to be more likely to be selected, but if the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is out, the game as a look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold It is defined so that the first period is more likely to be selected as the prefetch result that is advantageous to the person (special figure 2 suspension to be executed early is hit special figure 2 suspension). By configuring in this way, in addition to the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation, it is possible to make the player interested in the lottery result of the variation (shortening final variation).

In addition, in the present 31st embodiment, when the predetermined condition is established, that is, only when the special figure 2 variation being executed is out, so as to execute the prefetching process for all special figures 2 pending It is configured, and when it is determined that there are multiple hit special figures 2 suspension in the special figure 2 suspension by the pre-reading process, the first period is always selected as the notification target period Configure. By configuring in this way, when the mission production executed in the first period results in a production result indicating winning, if the lottery result of the variation is out, the winning special figure 2 is held. It is possible to increase the possibility of multiple existence.

In this case, when the mission production results in a production result indicating winning, it is possible to execute a suggestive production that can suggest to the player which special 2 lottery result the production result is for. It is good to configure, at least it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that allows the player to grasp whether it is the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed or the lottery result of the acquired special figure 2 hold. .

Also, without using the above-mentioned suggestive effect, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. By displaying the small display area Dm2 and the small display area Dm2a for indicating the number of reservations of the second special symbol (number of special figures 2 reservations) on the display screen, the result of this production is the lottery result of the final fluctuation of time saving. It may be possible to use a mode in which the player can determine after the fact whether it is shown or the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation is shown.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the 31st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 651, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirty-first embodiment will be described. The content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 31st embodiment is different from the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described 30th embodiment. The difference is that the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599 in FIG. 651) is executed instead of the effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643), and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 651 is a flow chart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599). This final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599) is different from the above-described final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) in that the processing contents executed at the start timing of each period are different. are different.

When the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599) is executed, it is first determined whether it is the first period start timing (C8301), and if it is determined that it is the first period start timing (C8301: Yes) , the winning information is read from the winning information storage area 223la (C8302), and it is determined whether winning information is included in the read winning information (C8303).

Then, in the process of C8303, if it is determined that the winning information is included (C8303), the information period selection 31 table 222ya is referred to based on the determination result of the variation and the winning information, and the first The effect mode of the period and the second period is determined (C8304), and the process proceeds to C8311. Also, in the processing of C8303, if it is determined that the winning information is not included (C8303: No), it is determined whether the variation is a winning variation (C8305), and if it is a winning variation (C8305: Yes ), determines the effect mode indicating winning in the first period (C8306), and shifts to the process of C8311.

On the other hand, in the process of C8305, if it is determined that there is no hit fluctuation (C8305), the production mode indicating the loss is determined in the first period and the second period (C8307), and the process proceeds to the process of C8311.

If it is determined in the process of C8301 that it is not the start timing of the first period (C8301: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second period (C8308). If it is determined (C8308: Yes), a new special 2 hold, that is, after the first period start timing, it is determined whether a new special figure 2 hold (Special 2 hold) has been acquired (C8309), If it is determined that it has been newly acquired (C8309: Yes), the re-prefetching flag lr is set to ON (C8310), and the process proceeds to S8311. Note that the contents of the recursive reading flag lr and the contents of various processes executed based on being set to ON are the same as those of the sixteenth embodiment described above, and thus descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Also, in the process of C8308, if it is determined that it is not the second period start timing (C8308: No), or in the process of C8309, it is determined that a new special 2 hold (special figure 2 hold) has not been acquired In the case (C8309: No), skip the process of C8310 and shift to the process of C8311.

In the process of C8311, a display command for indicating the effect mode determined in the various processes described above is set (C8311), and the process ends.

As described above, in the 31st embodiment, at the end timing of the waiting period (start timing of the first period) in the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 final variation), for the acquired special figure 2 hold When it is determined that there is a special figure 2 reservation to be won by executing a look-ahead, the timing of informing that there is a special figure 2 reservation to be won (hit special figure 2 reservation) is determined by lottery. They are very different in terms of structure.

By constructing in this way, the execution timing of the performance (winning performance) for notifying the presence of the winning special figure 2 suspension, which is the performance content most desired by the player as the performance content of the time-saving final variation, is set at random. As a result, the player can be entertained with the effect of the time-saving final variation until the end.

In addition, in the time-saving final variation (special figure 2 final variation), the second special symbol variation for 30 seconds is executed, and in the first 5 seconds, there is a standby effect that prompts the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold. A waiting period is set to be performed, followed by a first period of 20 seconds. During this first period, the mission effect (final variable effect) in the thirtieth embodiment described above is executed, and then the result notification effect is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the final variation effect and the result notification effect are executed as the time saving final variation effect in the same manner as in the thirtieth embodiment described above.

Then, if there is a winning special figure 2 reservation (hit special figure 2 reservation) in the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired, whether to notify that effect with the final variation production or with the result notification production is determined by lottery.

By configuring in this way, for example, at the end of the waiting period, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired up to the upper limit (4 pieces), and the special figure 2 reservation exists within the acquired special figure 2 reservation. However, it is possible to notify that effect not by the final variation effect but by the result notification effect. Therefore, for the player, until all of the multiple effects (effects that can notify the player of the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold) executed in the time-saving final variation are completed, the expectation of winning It can be made easy to maintain the feeling.

As described above, in the thirtieth embodiment and the thirty-first embodiment described above, an example in which the variation time of the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 final variation) that is the time saving final variation is fixed to 30 seconds (Figure 639 , and see Figure 648), but without being limited to this, as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 final variation) that will be the final variation of the time saving, the variation time of different length can be selected can be In this case, for example, as the variation time of the special figure 2 final variation, it is possible to select 5 seconds and 25 seconds, and if the variation time of 5 seconds is selected, the result notification effect when the special figure 2 final variation is started is configured to be executed, and when the variation time of 25 seconds is selected, the standby production (5 seconds) is omitted when the special figure 2 final variation is started, and the final variation production is executed. good to do Thereby, even if the variation time of the special figure 2 final variation is different, since the performance using the same performance data can be executed, the performance data amount can be reduced.

In addition, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 final fluctuation, when the fluctuation time of 25 seconds to 30 seconds can be set, the length of the period during which the standby production described above is executed is executed. It should be configured to That is, as in the thirtieth embodiment and the thirty-first embodiment described above, at least, the production period including the special figure 2 final variation period is divided into a plurality of periods (first period, second period, etc.), each period If different effects can be executed for each period, priority is given to the effects that are executed for each period, and if different lengths of effect periods are set, effects with high priority It is preferable to preferentially ensure the length of the execution period and to vary the length of the period during which the low-priority effects are executed.

By configuring in this way, even when the performance periods of different lengths are set, it is possible to easily execute the performance with a high priority using the same performance period. In addition, by making it possible to execute a high-priority performance using the same performance period, it is possible to easily execute a high-priority performance using the same performance mode, so that the player can easily understand the performance. can be provided.

Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment and the thirty-first embodiment described above, the variation time of the second special symbol lottery executed after the normal state is set (the second 2 As the variable time of the special symbol lottery), it is configured to set a fixed time (see FIG. 385 (b)) as in the sixteenth embodiment described above, but not limited to this, for example, a different length It may be configured such that the variation time of the intensity is selected.

In this case, by varying the length of the specific period (for example, the waiting period) among the variable productions executed in the special figure 2 final variation, the variation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold For example, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 final fluctuation is 30 seconds, and the total time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired If it is 10 seconds, the effect period of the variable effect executed based on the start of the special figure 2 final change is set to 40 seconds, the standby effect period of 13 seconds, the final variable effect period of 20 seconds, 7 It may be configured so as to have a result notification effect period of seconds.

By configuring in this way, the production period of the fluctuation production executed based on the start of the special figure 2 final fluctuation can be the period including the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the time saving state is set for a long time. In addition, since the length of the period (final variable effect period, result notification effect period) other than the specific period (standby effect period) can be fixed, the effect using the same effect data for different effect periods can be made easier to execute.

Furthermore, by varying the length of the production period of the production (standby production) executed first among the variable productions executed based on the start of the special figure 2 final fluctuation, the second corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation 2 When the fluctuation time of the special symbol lottery is changed, the timing at which the production (final fluctuation production, result notification production) to be executed later is executed is the timing at which the time reduction state ends and shifts to the normal state. can be

By configuring in this way, for example, if the time saving state is terminated before the result notification effect is executed, that is, if the result notification effect is executed after the transition to the normal state, the result Since it is possible to make it difficult to acquire a new special figure 2 suspension during the notification effect, the effect control that changes the effect mode of the result notification effect on the way, that is, after the result notification effect is started in the effect mode indicating the deviation , A new special figure 2 reservation is acquired, and when the look-ahead result of the newly acquired special figure 2 reservation is winning, the performance mode of the result notification performance is changed to the performance mode indicating winning. Control can be made difficult to implement. Therefore, the processing load of production control can be reduced.

In the above example, the execution timing (start timing) of the result notification effect is in the normal state. It may be configured so that the variation time of the special figure 2 final variation and the variation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation can be selected so that it can be after being shifted to. In addition, instead of varying the length of the fluctuation time, the length of the production period can be changed by varying the fixed time of each special pattern fluctuation (the period during which the special pattern is stopped and displayed to indicate the lottery result). It may be configured to be different.

In addition, the total period of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 final fluctuation and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation, that is, the production of the fluctuation production that is executed with the start of the special figure 2 final fluctuation A period determining means for determining whether or not the length of the period is longer than a specific period (for example, 50 seconds) is provided, and when the period determining means determines that the period is longer than the specific period, a special performance is executed. It may be configured to set possible special periods. By configuring in this way, various periods (standby performance period, final variable performance period, result notification performance period) set in the performance period are unnecessarily long, and the performance effect is suppressed from being lowered. can be done. Also, in this case, as the variation time of the special figure 2 final variation, or the variation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation, it is better to win than if it is not won. , a configuration in which a long fluctuation time is set. As a result, since a longer performance period is set in the case of winning (winning a winning), it is possible to make it easier to execute the specific performance. degree can be increased. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the special period is set only when there are a plurality of hit winnings in the special figure 2 final fluctuation and the special figure 2 reservation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the added value of the special performance.

In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the normal game state. However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. may be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether the player is operated by tilting left or right or front and back, or a lever-shaped operation means that can be operated by the player touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means that can distinguish between them, or a wireless operating means that can distinguish that an operation has been made by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the audio lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is the audio lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be changed according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) can be set. ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so that the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. This configuration is particularly of the type that tends to increase the number of balls held as the number of special symbol lotteries increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired), especially in the variable probability state. Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the variable probability state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types. may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols are determined in advance, and a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed independently of each other are explained. However, each of the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (development control in meter control)
operation means operable by the player; effective period setting means capable of setting an effective period during which the operation of the operation means is effective; and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect in the gaming machine, the final effect among the effects that can be executed based on the operation of the operation means within the valid period. information determining means capable of determining information corresponding to a mode; and execution based on the timing at which the operating means is operated within the effective period based on the information determined by the information determining means and a setting means capable of setting setting information for determining an effect mode in which the game machine A1 is capable of.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the result of the lottery, it is proposed that an advance notice effect suggesting the result of the lottery is executed before the result of the lottery is notified by operating the operation means that the player can operate. (For example, Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-090780). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the information corresponding to the final effect mode to be executed by operating the operation means within the effective period is determined, and based on the determined information, at the timing when the operation means is operated Since the effect mode that can be executed is determined based on the above, the effect mode to be executed up to the final effect mode can be changed depending on the operation timing of the player, and the final effect mode and By combining the frequency, timing, etc., of the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to execute a plurality of effects in a variety of ways, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine A1 has update means capable of adding or subtracting numerical information based on the operation of the operation means, and the effect execution means updates the numerical information by the updating means. Based on this, an effect corresponding to the updated numerical information can be executed, and the information determining means determines the maximum value or the minimum value of the numerical information as the information. A gaming machine A2, wherein said setting means sets, as said setting information, a value that can be updated by said updating means corresponding to the timing at which said operation means is operated.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, a value that can be updated at the timing when the operation means is operated corresponding to the maximum value or the minimum value determined in advance by the information determination means is set as the setting information. Since it is set, it is possible to effectively use the effective period to update the numerical information to the maximum value or the minimum value, and it is possible to execute the performance that effectively uses the effective period, and the interest of the performance using the operation means. have the effect of improving

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the setting means is configured to be capable of setting a formula for updating the numerical information by the updating means based on time information corresponding to the timing at which the operating means is operated. A gaming machine A3, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, there is an effect that numerical information to be updated by the updating means can be easily determined by setting the formula by the setting means. .

<Characteristic group B> (repeated hit detection control in repeated button presses)
In a gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operation means, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. a performance mode selecting means capable of selecting a performance mode; , and regulating means capable of regulating the gaming machine B1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the result of the lottery, it is proposed that an advance notice effect suggesting the result of the lottery is executed before the result of the lottery is notified by operating the operation means that the player can operate. (For example, Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-090780). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine B1, when the effect is executed, the execution of the effect is restricted for a predetermined period of time. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that a new performance is started and the interest of the performance is reduced, and that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine B1 is characterized by having period setting means capable of setting period information corresponding to the effect to be executed as the predetermined period when the effect is executed by the effect executing means. Gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the period information corresponding to the effect to be executed is set as the predetermined period, so the execution of the effect is regulated during the period corresponding to the effect to be executed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the performance interval is lengthened and the interest in the game is reduced.

The game machine B1 or B2 has reporting means capable of reporting a reporting mode each time the operating means is operated, and lottery means capable of executing a predetermined lottery when the operating means is operated. The game machine B3 is characterized in that said effect execution means is configured to be able to execute said effect when the lottery result by said lottery means is a specific lottery result.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, a notification mode is notified each time the operation means is operated, and a predetermined lottery is executed each time the operation means is operated to obtain a specific prize. Since the effect is executed when the lottery result is, the player can recognize that the operating means has been operated even when the lottery result is not a specific lottery result. It can be recognized, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the interest of the game is reduced.

<Characteristic group C> (make it difficult to execute disadvantageous jackpot games during a part of the advantageous game state)
A first privilege game in which a first game state is set after the privilege game is completed based on a determination means capable of performing determination, the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, and a privilege game A gaming machine having a second privilege game in which a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after completion is set, and a privilege game executing means capable of executing the second game. The game machine has setting means capable of setting a first setting when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a state in which the state is set, and the gaming machine is configured such that when the first setting is set, the first setting is set. It is possible to make it more difficult to execute the first privilege game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being the result of the specific determination than when it is not set. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player after the end of the privilege game or a disadvantageous gaming state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player can be set according to the lottery result. (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine wins a prize when a privilege game (disadvantage privilege game) in which a disadvantageous gaming state is set after the privilege game is completed is executed by a lottery executed in a state in which an advantageous gaming state is set. If this is done, a disadvantageous privilege game is surely executed, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced. In particular, when the period during which the advantageous game state is set is short, and the player wins the prize when the disadvantageous privilege game is executed, the advantageous game state ends without receiving the benefits of the advantageous game state. , there is a problem that the player's desire to play is further reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which suppresses a decline in a player's desire to play and improves the enjoyment of the game.

Further, conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that has a game feature (so-called simultaneous variation type) in which a plurality of lotteries are executed at the same time. In a game machine having such game characteristics, when the lottery result of one lottery is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and other lottery games that are being executed are forced out. It has been proposed to terminate automatically (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-319221). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, regardless of the type of the privilege game, when the result of the lottery for executing the privilege game is stopped and displayed, the other lottery is forcibly missed and the stop display is performed. There is a problem that it makes people feel uncomfortable. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine C1, by setting the first setting, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the first privilege game. It is possible to play the game willingly without fear that the game will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining and to improve the interest in the game.

A gaming machine C2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C1, it has an informing means capable of executing an informing effect for informing that the first setting is set.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the setting state of the first setting can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the notification effect executed by the notification means. There is an effect that the determination by the determination means during the second game state can be executed willingly.

The game machine C2 has notification condition determination means capable of determining whether or not a notification condition is established when the first setting is set by the setting means, and the notification means is configured by the notification condition determination means. The game machine C3 is characterized in that the notification performance can be executed when it is determined that the notification condition is established.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the notification effect is executed when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied, so that an appropriate notification effect can be executed for the player. effective.

Any one of the game machines C1 to C3 has dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means on the display means, and the bonus game execution means is the privilege game is executed when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the identification information is the result of the specific determination; It has a stop control means capable of stopping and displaying the dynamic display being executed at the timing when the first setting is terminated, with the identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine C4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the dynamic display executed at the timing when the first setting ends is the pre-identification information indicating the determination result different from the specific determination result. Since the display can be stopped at , there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to execute the first privilege game.

In the game machine C4, as dynamic display periods of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period; dynamic display period setting means capable of setting one dynamic display period from a plurality of dynamic display periods including It is possible to discriminate at least a second determination result different from the result, and the privilege game execution means performs the first privilege game based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is the first discrimination result. The second privilege game can be executed based on the result of the determination by the determination means being the second determination result, and the dynamic display period setting means indicates the first determination result. As the dynamic display period of the identification information for showing the second determination result, the first dynamic display period can be set more easily than the dynamic display period of the identification information for showing the second determination result. A gaming machine C5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the execution of the first privilege game is more suitable for the determination result of the execution of the second privilege game. Since it is possible to easily set a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute the first privilege game than the second privilege game by the stop control means. has the effect of

<Characteristic D group> (Right-handed detection version: Even if the lottery result is the same, the production mode is different depending on the type of winning opening)
A first control means capable of executing main control related to the game, a second control means capable of executing game control based on the information output from the first control means, and a second control means capable of executing game ball entry. It has a first ball entering means and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first control means controls whether a game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. determining means capable of performing determination based on the entry of a ball; game information determining means capable of determining game information based on the result of the determination; and game information determined by the game information determining means. and a control signal output means capable of outputting a control signal for indicating, wherein the second control means has an effect execution means capable of executing an effect for indicating the determination result based on the control signal. In the machine, the first control means determines whether the control signal is based on hitting the ball in the first ball entering means or the control signal is based on hitting the ball in the second ball entering means. Identifiable identification information can be output to the second control means, and the effect executing means can execute a specific effect that is advantageous to the player during the period in which the effect is being executed based on the identification information. A game machine D1 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. In addition, by executing an effect for showing the result of the lottery, there is a game that can be played while expecting that the result of the lottery will be a win. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766). Furthermore, there is a game machine that provides a plurality of start ports as a lottery trigger for executing one lottery, and enables the lottery to be executed by various games, thereby improving the game playability. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the same effect is executed regardless of which starting hole the game ball is made to enter. there were. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which suppresses a decline in a player's desire to play and improves the enjoyment of the game.

According to the game machine D1, identification that can identify whether the control signal is based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the control signal based on the second ball entering means. Since the performance based on the information can be executed, there is an effect that the variation of the performance can be increased and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine D1, the game machine D2 is characterized in that the performance information executing means can vary the execution frequency of the specific performance based on the identification information.

According to the game machine D2, since the execution frequency of the specific performance can be changed between when the ball is entered by the first ball entering means and when the ball is entered by the second ball entering means, the specific performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which a game ball is entered by any of the ball-entering means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the main control means has privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, and the effect execution means comprises the The game machine D3 is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed when the determination result based on the control signal is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the determination result of the determining means is the specific determination result that the privilege game is executed, the specific effect can be executed. On the other hand, it is possible to play a game while anticipating that the specific effect will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D3, the effect executing means, when receiving the control signal based on the ball entering the first ball entering means, performs the specific effect only when the determination result is the specific determination result. can be executed, and when the control signal based on the second ball entering means is received, the specific effect is performed when the determination result is a determination result different from the specific determination result A gaming machine D4 characterized by being executable.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the conditions for executing the specific effect are different between when the ball is entered by the first ball entering means and when the ball is entered by the second ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict the discrimination result of the discriminating means based on the type of the ball entering means that entered the game ball.

<Feature group E> (SG time-saving final fluctuation control)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. storage means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; and identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means dynamically displayed on a display means. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner for indicating the specific discrimination result. and in a gaming machine having a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to a player by passing a game ball through a specific area during the period in which the privilege game is executed; a variable means capable of being varied between a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which ball entry is more difficult than in the first state; a first game state; a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the variable means is more easily changed from the second state to the first state than the game state; and a second game state is set by the game state setting means. When the first game state is set by the game state setting means, an effect is executed corresponding to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the execution of which is started before the end condition set by the game state setting means is satisfied. and a performance execution means capable of performing the performance, wherein the performance execution means includes the identification information corresponding to a predetermined number of the information stored in the storage means when executing the performance The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that it is constructed so that the performance can be executed over a period until the dynamic display ends.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Further, there is a configuration in which a plurality of privilege games with different degrees of advantage can be executed, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of privilege games is changed according to the set game state. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). Also, in such a gaming machine, when a specific gaming state (eg, time-saving state) is set, it becomes easier to enter a ball than when another gaming state (eg, normal state) is set. When a specific starting opening (for example, a starting opening with an electric accessory) is provided and a lottery is executed based on the game ball entering the specific starting opening, and the game ball enters another starting opening. than a privilege game with a high degree of advantage (for example, a small win) is configured to be easily executed, and furthermore, the right of the lottery executed based on the game ball entering the specific start opening is set to a predetermined There is a configuration that can be reserved and stored up to a maximum number. In the gaming machine configured as described above, when a specific game state is set, it is possible for the player to efficiently execute a lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the specific start hole. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, when the end condition of a specific game state is satisfied, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the specific start hole. However, there is a problem that the desire to play the game is reduced. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by showing the player a longer period of time during which a specific game state is set.

According to the gaming machine E1, the effect is executed over the dynamic display corresponding to the information stored in the storage means, which is executed after the end condition is satisfied. It is said that it is possible to make the player feel as if the second game state is continuously set, and to make the player feel as if the period of the second game state is set to be long, thereby improving the amusement of the game. effective.

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the predetermined number is the number of all pieces of information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the dynamic display of more identification information can be seen as if it were the dynamic display of 1, and the second game state is set. It can make you feel longer.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the information stored in the storage means can be pre-determined before the determination by the determination means based on the information is performed, and the effect execution means. and effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the effect to be executed by the effect mode setting means, the effect mode setting means, when executing the effect, the effect mode setting means for the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is possible to set an effect mode based on the result of pre-determination.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the presentation mode of the presentation executed during the second game state is pre-determined for the information that the determination is executed after the transition to the first game state. Since the setting can be made based on the result, it is possible to make the user think that the result of the determination executed during the second game state has a higher probability than the set value as the specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game during the second game.

In the gaming machine E3, the effect executing means can execute at least a first effect and a second effect to be executed after the first effect is finished as the effects, and the effect mode setting means can The gaming machine E4 is characterized by having selection means capable of selecting the number of the information used for setting the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, by varying the number of information used for setting the presentation mode of the first presentation, the discrimination result of the discriminating means becomes the specific discrimination result. can be set to notify the player by the first effect or not to notify the player. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting that the privilege game will be executed until the effect executed by the effect executing means is finished.

The gaming machine E4 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and operation valid period setting means that can set an operation valid period during which the operation to the operation means is determined to be valid, and the effect execution means As the effect, an operation effect in which the operation valid period is set can be executed before the first effect is executed, and the selection means selects an operation content for the operation means during the operation effect. The game machine E5 is characterized in that the number of the information used for setting the effect mode of the first effect can be selected based on.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, it is possible to select the number of pieces of information used when setting the presentation mode of the first presentation based on the player's operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily set the performance mode desired by the player.

In the game machine E4 or E5, the effect mode setting means can set the effect mode of the second effect based on the result of the preliminary determination for the information not selected by the selection means. Gaming machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4 or E5, the effect mode of the second effect is set based on the preliminary determination result for the information that was not used when setting the effect mode of the first effect. Therefore, even if the performance mode of the first performance is a performance mode that indicates a deviation, it is expected that the number of information used when setting the performance mode of the first performance was small, and the second performance is performed. can draw attention. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the privilege game will be executed until the effect executed by the effect executing means is finished.

Any one of the game machines E4 to E6, which has an informing means capable of informing the number of the information not used for setting the effect mode of the first effect until the second effect is started. A gaming machine E7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E3 to E6, the number of pieces of information not used for setting the rendering mode of the first rendering is reported before the second rendering is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the rest of the presentation can be properly enjoyed based on the number of pieces of information notified.

<Feature F group> (Right-handed detection version: Even if the lottery result is the same, the production mode is changed depending on the game situation)
First control means capable of executing main control related to the game; Second control means capable of executing game control based on information output from the first control means; a flow path, a second flow path configured to make it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path, and a game in which the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path has flowed down the second flow path A first ball-entering means configured to enter the ball more easily than a ball; It has ball means and detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the second flow path, and the first control means detects when a game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. determining means capable of determining information based on the result of the determination; information determining means capable of determining information based on the result of the determination; and a control signal indicating the information determined by the information determining means. and a control signal output means capable of outputting, the second control means has an effect execution means capable of executing an effect for notifying the determination result indicated by the control signal, and the effect execution means is configured to be able to execute a specific effect that is advantageous to the player based on the result of detection by the detection means during the period in which the effect is being executed. F1.

<G group> (Modification 1 of SG's time-saving final variation control (notification of unused look-ahead number))
ball entry means capable of entering a game ball; acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into said ball entry means; a storage means capable of storing an upper limit; a determination means capable of determining based on the information stored in the storage means; A dynamic display means capable of displaying, and a privilege capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner for indicating the specific determination result. a game executing means, wherein a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player by passing a game ball through a specific area during a period in which the privilege game is executed; a variable means capable of being varied between a first state in which a game ball is easily entered into the ball means and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state; a first game state; a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the variable means is more easily changed from the second state to the first state than the first game state; and a second game state by the game state setting means. is set, the first game state is executed in response to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, which is started before the end condition set by the game state setting means is established. effect execution means capable of executing, effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the information stored in the storage means based on the information pre-determination means capable of pre-determining before the determination by the determination means is executed, and the effect mode setting means performs the pre-determination on the information stored in the storage means. It is possible to set an effect mode based on at least a part of the result, and the game machine provides a suggestive effect capable of suggesting the number of the information not used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine G1 characterized by being executable.

According to the gaming machine G1, the suggestive effect can suggest the number of pieces of information that are not used for setting the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means. is expected to be executed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<H group> (Modification 2 of SG's time-saving final variation control (suggestion of hit holding position))
ball entry means capable of entering a game ball; acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into said ball entry means; a storage means capable of storing an upper limit; a determination means capable of determining based on the information stored in the storage means; A dynamic display means capable of displaying, and a privilege capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner for indicating the specific determination result. a game executing means, wherein a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player by passing a game ball through a specific area during a period in which the privilege game is executed; a variable means capable of being varied between a first state in which a game ball is easily entered into the ball means and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state; a first game state; a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the variable means is more easily changed from the second state to the first state than the first game state; and a second game state by the game state setting means. is set, the first game state is executed in response to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, which is started before the end condition set by the game state setting means is established. effect execution means capable of executing, effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the information stored in the storage means based on the information pre-determination means capable of pre-determining before the determination by the determination means is executed, and the effect mode setting means performs the pre-determination on the information stored in the storage means. The game machine H1 is characterized in that it is possible to set an effect mode in which the information whose result is the specific determination result can be identified.

According to the gaming machine H1, it is possible to predict the information that will be the specific determination result among the information stored in the storage means based on the effect mode of the effect. As a result, by grasping whether the other information stored in the storage means is discriminated before the privilege game is executed or discriminated after the privilege game is completed, the privilege game is executed after the completion of the privilege game. It is possible to predict in advance the contents of the game to be played, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic group I> (SG2)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. storage means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; and identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means dynamically displayed on a display means. a dynamic display means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner for indicating the specific determination result. and a prior determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means prior to determination by the determination means, and determination by the prior determination means It has a performance executing means capable of executing a performance based on a result, and a selection means allowing a player to select information corresponding to the performance to be executed by the performance executing means out of the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine I1 characterized by:

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to display the result of a lottery in a variable combination of symbols, etc., and then perform an effect such as stopping the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which the lottery result is determined in advance before the start of the variable display, and the prior determination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine I1, the player can select the information to be used in the performance, so that there is an effect that the player can intervene in the game more widely, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic group J> (SG3)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. storage means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; and identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means dynamically displayed on a display means. a dynamic display means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner for indicating the specific determination result. and a prior determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means prior to determination by the determination means, and determination by the prior determination means Production execution means capable of executing production based on results, and information stored in the storage means other than the information determined by the prior determination means corresponding to the production executed by the production execution means. and suggesting means capable of suggesting suggestive information for indicating the number information of the game machine J1.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to display the result of a lottery in a variable combination of symbols, etc., and then perform an effect such as stopping the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which the lottery result is determined in advance before the start of the variable display, and the prior determination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine J1, after the performance is executed, the number of information that the performance based on the determination in advance is not executed is reported, so even after the performance is executed, the information that the performance is not executed is displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to have expectations for the game and improve the amusement of the game.

<Characteristic group K> (SG4)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. storage means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; and identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means dynamically displayed on a display means. a dynamic display means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner for indicating the specific determination result. and a prior determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means prior to determination by the determination means, and determination by the prior determination means and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on a result, wherein the effect executing means is capable of executing an effect based on the result of determination by the prior determination means based on a plurality of pieces of information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to display the result of a lottery in a variable combination of symbols, etc., and then perform an effect such as stopping the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which the lottery result is determined in advance before the start of the variable display, and the prior determination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine K1, since the performance is executed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means based on a plurality of information, it is possible to diversify the performance and improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic group L> (SG5)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. storage means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; and identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means dynamically displayed on a display means. a dynamic display means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner for indicating the specific determination result. and a prior determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means prior to determination by the determination means, and determination by the prior determination means and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on a result, wherein the effect is varied based on information corresponding to the order in which the information discriminated by the preliminary discriminating means is stored. A gaming machine L1 characterized by:

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to display the result of a lottery in a variable combination of symbols, etc., and then perform an effect such as stopping the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which the lottery result is determined in advance before the start of the variable display, and the prior determination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine L1, since the performance is varied according to the order in which the information is stored, the performance can be diversified, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature A group> (Small hit possible during specific special figure fluctuation)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the dynamic display means; a second determination means; a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a result of determination by the second determination means; When the first identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game and a privilege game executing means for executing a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and the first determination is executed rather than the second determination and a second game state that makes the game easier, and the game state setting means is configured to dynamically display the first identification information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine A1 characterized in that the first game state can be set during a target display period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next big win is won after the privilege game ends according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which an advantageous gaming state is set that is advantageous to the player is changed by a lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If the next win is won immediately by the drawn lottery, the period in which the advantageous game state is set is shortened, and if the next win is not won immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is obtained. is set longer. Thus, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set to be provided to the player differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a game feature that gives a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player greatly differs. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the period during which the first determination is dynamically displayed can be set to the first game state in which the second determination is likely to be executed, so the length of the period in which the first game state is set can be preset. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the second determination means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed more than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first game state can be made more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game by desiring to set the first game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means a third ball entering means different from the means; a first state in which a game ball can be guided to the second ball entering means; and variable means that can be varied between two states, wherein the first determination means is based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The second determination means is configured to be capable of executing the second determination based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means, and in the second gaming state, The game machine A3 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be more easily variable to the first state than the first game state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute the first determination in the first game state than in the second game state. Therefore, in the state in which the first game state is set, it is possible to facilitate the game in which the third ball-entering means is allowed to enter the ball, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player. .

In the gaming machine A3, after the first privilege game is executed, the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result by the first determination can be set to a high probability higher than in normal times. A setting means is provided, and the game state setting means displays the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the first game state is set based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, dynamic display of the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result by the first determination when the high probability setting means sets the high probability. Since the first game state is set based on the start, the process until the first game state is set can be set in stages. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second privilege game is set to have fewer privileges that can be given to the player than the first privilege game. Machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second privilege game, the privilege that can be granted to the player is set smaller than in the first privilege game, so that the player is excessively rewarded during the period in which the first game state is set. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the imparting.

<Feature B Group> (Set game content and special 1 and special 2 at once)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; a first dynamic display period determination means for determining a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means; second determination means capable of executing the above; second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means; and dynamic display of the second identification information on the second display means second dynamic display means for displaying; second dynamic display period determination means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result of is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means is displayed, the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed in the gaming machine having the privilege game executing means for executing the second privilege game. Period determining means for determining a dynamic display period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means. and an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next big win is won after the privilege game ends according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which an advantageous gaming state is set that is advantageous to the player is changed by a lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If the next win is won immediately by the drawn lottery, the period in which the advantageous game state is set is shortened, and if the next win is not won immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is obtained. is set longer. Thus, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set to be provided to the player differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a game feature that gives a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player greatly differs. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine B1, the effect determination means determines the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means. To provide a player with the enjoyment of predicting a future game based on the performance to be executed, since the performance corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information can be executed in association with the dynamic display period. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine B1, the effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game contents of the first privilege game. Characterized game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, by grasping the effect executed by the effect execution means, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first privilege game It is possible to predict the contents and Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the performance, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine B1 or B2, a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. A settable game state setting means is provided, and the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. A game machine B3 characterized in that the first game state is executed during the dynamic display period.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first game state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result that the first privilege game is executed, the period until the first privilege game is executed is It is possible to perform a game aiming at the second privilege game by using. Furthermore, by grasping the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to predict the period in which the first game state is set, so that the game can be played enthusiastically during the first game state. effective.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, a normal first privilege game and a small first privilege game in which a smaller privilege is given to the player than the normal first privilege game and the first dynamic display period determining means can determine a first period and a second period longer than the first period. , the effect determination means determines whether the first small privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means and the second period is determined by the period determination means, and the normal second period is determined by the privilege game execution means. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that the same mode of presentation is determined when one privilege game is executed and when the first period is determined by the period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the two elements for determining the content of the performance by the performance determining means are different combinations of advantages, the performance determining means determines the same aspect. Since the effect is determined, by grasping the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means, the player can be made to predict a plurality of patterns of future game situations. Then, it is possible to gradually increase the accuracy of prediction according to the progress of the first game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of predicting the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine B4, the effect determining means determines a specific effect when the normal first bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means. A game machine B5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to inform the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so that there is an effect that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic group C> (rush notification)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; a first dynamic display period determination means for determining a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means; second determination means capable of executing the above; second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means; and dynamic display of the second identification information on the second display means second dynamic display means for displaying; second dynamic display period determination means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result of is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means is displayed, and a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game, in a gaming machine having a first game state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination; a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination; and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the second game state notification timing determination means for determining notification timing for notifying a notification mode for indicating to the player that the first game state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine C1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, according to the result of the lottery, an advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set during the period from the end of the privilege game until the next big win is won, and the player is notified that the game state has changed. A game machine has been proposed that executes an effect to play (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine is configured so as to execute an effect for notifying that an advantageous gaming state has been set based on the establishment of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In spite of the fact that a new lottery cannot be executed, the fact that a game state has been set is notified to the player, causing discomfort to the player. was there. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first game state in which the second determination is likely to be executed has been set can be determined based on the dynamic display state of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the notification timing for notifying that the first game state has been set.

In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A game machine C2, wherein the game state setting means sets the first game state based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state set based on the determination result of the first determination means executed separately from the second determination means is set, notification is given based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. Timing is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time are combined to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

The game machine C2 has dynamic display determination means for determining whether the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first game state is set, and the notification timing determination means determines the dynamic display. When it is determined by the display determination means that the second identification information is not dynamically displayed, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first game state is set. Game machine C3 to play.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second determination can be executed immediately after the first game state is set, the fact that the first game state has been set is immediately notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first game state for a longer time.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the notification timing determining means terminates the dynamic display of the second identification information when the dynamic display determining means determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing at which the game is played.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the first game state is set, the setting of the first game state is not notified during the period in which the second determination cannot be performed, and the second determination becomes executable. In this case, it is notified that the first game state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the second determination cannot be executed despite being notified that the first game state has been set, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine C4 has remaining period determination means for determining a period from the timing when the dynamic display of the second identification information ends until the first game state ends, based on the determination result by the remaining period determination means. and a game machine C5, further comprising notification determination means for determining whether or not the notification timing is determined by the notification timing determination means.

According to the game machine C5, it is determined whether or not to determine the notification timing based on the period during which the second determination can be executed during the first game state. When the executable period becomes extremely short, it is possible not to inform the player that the first game state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the first game state ends in a short period of time even though the player is informed that the first game state has been set. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature D group> (Simultaneous fluctuation discards the jackpot, interrupts the small hit)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying for a predetermined period, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means. 2 display means; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period; When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is played. In a gaming machine having privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game and second privilege game type setting means for setting the content of the second privilege game from a plurality of privilege contents, the second dynamic display means is configured to display the second In a state in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by 1 dynamic display means, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed, and the specific second identification information is displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the second identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed, based on the privilege content set by the second privilege game type setting means, for the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means A gaming machine D1 characterized in that it has stop control means for executing stop control.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that has a game feature (so-called simultaneous variation type) in which a plurality of lotteries are executed at the same time. In a game machine having such game characteristics, when the lottery result of one lottery is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and other lottery games that are being executed are forced out. It has been proposed to terminate automatically (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-319221). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, regardless of the type of the privilege game, when the result of the lottery for executing the privilege game is stopped and displayed, the other lottery is forcibly missed and the stop display is performed. There is a problem that it makes people feel uncomfortable. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to set the content of the stop control for the first dynamic display according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed, thereby suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means performs forced stop control for stopping and displaying the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. and a temporary stop control for stopping the measurement of the period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to set whether the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped depending on the content of the second privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the awarding of an excessive privilege to the player, and the privilege game to which a large privilege is provided is discarded by executing the privilege game to which a small privilege is provided. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second bonus game type setting means can set a first bonus game type and a second bonus game type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game type. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special game type is set by the second privilege game type setting means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second privilege type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress

In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display means is terminated, and the specific first determination is performed. It has invalidation means for invalidating the setting of the second privilege type by the second privilege game type setting means until the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine D4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the setting of the second privilege type is invalidated by the invalidation means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the second privilege type is set, thereby preventing excessive privilege from being given to the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on the determination result of the second determination means. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that it is easier to set the first privilege type than the second privilege type.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first privilege type is more likely to be set than the second privilege type, even if the second privilege game is played many times, it is possible to suppress the excessive awarding of the privilege to the player. There is

<Other ideas 1> (Possible to set latent state before and after jackpot game)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second determination means capable of executing the second determination; and a second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means; , when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, a first privilege game is executed and a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means In a gaming machine having privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the second determination is made easier to execute than the first judgment. It has game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination, and the game state setting means is a predetermined first game state. The first game state is set in a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed when the condition is satisfied, and the first privilege game is finished when a predetermined second condition is satisfied. The game machine E1 is characterized in that it sets the first game state later.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next big win is won after the privilege game ends according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which an advantageous gaming state is set that is advantageous to the player is changed by a lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If the next win is won immediately by the drawn lottery, the period in which the advantageous game state is set is shortened, and if the next win is not won immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is obtained. is set longer. Thus, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set to be provided to the player differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a game feature that gives a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player greatly differs. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, since the timing at which the first game state is set can be divided into before and after the first privilege game, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Feature G group> (Small hit RUSH during the pattern confirmation period)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means a first stop display means for stop-displaying the first identification information, a stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period for stop-displaying the first identification information by the first stop display means, and a second judgment capable of executing the second judgment means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and said first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on said first display means is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination; and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. 2 game state, the game state setting means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, during the stop display period in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed; A game machine G1 characterized by being capable of setting a first game state.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next big win is won after the privilege game ends according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which an advantageous gaming state is set that is advantageous to the player is changed by a lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If the next win is won immediately by the drawn lottery, the period in which the advantageous game state is set is shortened, and if the next win is not won immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is obtained. was set for a longer period. In other words, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set differs according to the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a game feature that gives a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player greatly differs. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be set in advance as the period during which the first game state is set, there is an effect that the period during which the first game state is executed can be appropriately managed. . In addition, since the first game state is set during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination is stopped and displayed, the game content after the first game state is completed is notified to the player in advance. can be grasped. By configuring in this way, for example, when the first game state is set in a state in which a specific determination result is displayed as the determination result of the first determination, after the first game state ends, It is possible to grasp in advance that the first privilege game will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine G1, the game machine G2 is characterized in that the stop display period setting means sets different lengths of the stop display period based on the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determination means. and the length of the stop display period are determined. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine G2, the stop display period setting means, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, displays a longer stop display than when the determination result is other than the specific first determination result. The game machine G3 is characterized in that it facilitates the setting of the period.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the stop display period is longer than when the determination result is other than the specific first determination result. is easily set, it is possible to execute the first game state in which a longer period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine G2 or G3, the stop display period setting means can set stop display periods of different lengths when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3, the length of the stop display period can be varied even in the case of the specific first determination result. Therefore, even in the case of a specific first determination result, since the period in which the first game state is set differs, the player is motivated to play the game so that the first game state is set for a longer period of time. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the second determination means determines the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A game machine G5 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed more than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first game state can be made more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game by desiring to set the first game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Feature H group> (Small hit RUSH with jackpot winning at the time of time saving end fluctuation)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination and second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. When displayed, a first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, a privilege of executing the second privilege game a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination; and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. and game state setting means capable of setting a game state, wherein the game state setting means can execute the second determination when both a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition are satisfied. The game machine H1 is characterized in that the first game state can be set during the first period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next big win is won after the privilege game ends according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, whether or not an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is set based on only one lottery result. There is a problem that the game cannot be played while being entertained. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine H1, when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied, the first game state can be set for the first period. can be reliably executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first game state is terminated without executing the second determination even though the first game state is set, and the player is dissatisfied. You can provide a game that is not.

The game machine H1 has a first determination number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times of the first determination executed by the first determination means, and the number of the first determinations measured by the first determination number measuring means is measured. The game machine H2 is characterized in that the first predetermined condition is established when the number of times reaches a predetermined number.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, when the number of times of the first determination reaches the predetermined number of times, the first predetermined condition is established, so the first determination by the first determination means is executed. As a result, the game content can be reliably progressed toward the establishment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the state in which the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when the game is played for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A gaming machine H3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second predetermined condition is established when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is established, so that the player can understand. There is an effect that an easy game can be provided.

In the game machine H2 or H3, the game state setting means sets the first game state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game state setting means , when the first game state is set based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition, the first game state is set during a second period during which it is difficult to execute the second determination. A gaming machine H4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2 or H3, when only the first predetermined condition is met, the first gaming state is set only during the second period during which it is difficult to execute the second determination. As a result, the first game state that is set when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied can be a game state disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game so that both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied.

In the gaming machine H4, when the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition, the game state setting means sets the period shorter than the first period and the first period. The game machine H5 is characterized in that the first game state is set for a third period longer than two periods.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, when only the second predetermined condition is met, the first gaming state is set during the third period, so the first gaming state is set more than the first predetermined condition. There is an effect that the game can be played with motivation to satisfy the second predetermined condition first.

<Feature I Group> (Variable RUSH rush expectation level with short time)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination and second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. When displayed, a first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, a privilege of executing the second privilege game A game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination can be set. game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means can set a third game state in which the first game state is more likely to be set than the second game state for a predetermined period of time. a third game state period setting means capable of setting a first period and a second period longer than the first period as the period for which the third game state is set; The game machine I1 is characterized in that setting the first period by period setting means makes it easier to set the first game state than setting the second period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed in which a game is performed in which a plurality of game states are shifted in stages according to the lottery result, and an advantageous game state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player can be set (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, since it is easy to set the advantageous game state in the game state (semi-advantageous game state) in which the advantageous game state is likely to be set, it aims to set the advantageous game state. There is a problem that the content of the game played becomes monotonous. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine I1, by varying the period for setting the third game state in which the first game state is likely to be set, the degree of expectation that the first game state is set in the state in which the third game state is set can be different. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player interested in the setting contents of the third game state, the player is motivated to play the game even in the game process until the first game state is set. There is an effect that it can be done.

The game machine I1 has an elapse determination means for determining elapse of the predetermined period set by the third game state period setting means, and the game state setting means determines whether the elapse of the predetermined period is determined by the elapse determination means. A game machine I2 characterized in that the first game state is set based on the satisfaction of a first setting condition that is satisfied when the determination is made.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, when the period for setting the third gaming state has passed, the first gaming state is set, so an easy-to-understand game can be provided. has the effect of

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the game state setting means, when the third game state is set and the first determination result by the first determination means is the specific first determination result, The game machine I3 is characterized in that the first game state is set based on the establishment of a second set condition to be established.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or I2, even when the third game state in which the first setting condition is difficult to be satisfied, that is, the third game state for a long period of time is set, During the third game state, the first game state can be set based on the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, depending on the period of the set third game state, it is possible to aim for different transition conditions for setting the first game state. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the third game state period setting means can set a third period longer than the second period, and the elapse of the third period is determined by the elapse determination means. A game machine I4 characterized in that it has a condition limiting means that does not satisfy the first setting condition in the case of a case.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the elapse of the third period is determined, the first set condition is not satisfied by the condition limiting means, so the first gaming state is set. can be reliably restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

Any one of the game machines I2 to I4 has a first game state period setting means for setting a period in which the first game state is set, and the first game state period setting means is determined by the progress determination means, A gaming machine characterized in that the period in which the first game state is set is set longer when it is determined that the first period has elapsed than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when it is determined that the second period has elapsed, the first period is longer than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. A game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the judgment result of the progress judging means.

<Feature J group> (Reliably small hit RUSH for a predetermined period)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and second determination capable of executing the second determination means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and said first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on said first display means is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination; and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. game state setting means capable of setting two game states; advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period during which the first game state can be continuously set by the game state setting means; and advantageous period setting means a termination means for terminating the first game state when a first termination condition satisfied when the set advantageous period elapses, or when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition is satisfied; and end restricting means for restricting the fulfillment of the second end condition when a predetermined continuation condition is fulfilled.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed in which a game is performed in which a plurality of game states are shifted in stages according to the lottery result, and an advantageous game state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player can be set (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, since the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set varies based on the result of the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is provided to the player for a predetermined period. Therefore, although the advantageous game state was set with great effort, the advantageous game state ends in a short period of time, resulting in a decrease in the player's willingness to play. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine J1, when the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the termination restriction means can restrict the satisfaction of the second termination condition. Therefore, it is possible to continuously set the first game state during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine J1, the game state setting means can set an advantageous first game state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be established and a disadvantageous first game state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be established. A game machine J2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, the game state setting means can set the advantageous first game state and the disadvantageous first game state, so the game state setting means is more advantageous. There is an effect that the game can be motivated to play so that the first game state is set.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is the specific first determination result. J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game so that the determination result of is a specific first determination result.

A game machine J4 characterized by having a notification means for notifying that the first advantageous game state is set in the game machine J2 or J3.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J2 or J3, the informing means notifies that the advantageous first gaming state is set, so it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. has the effect of

Any one of the game machines J2 to J4 has a determination means for determining that the condition for establishing the second end condition is established during the period in which the first advantageous game state is set, and the determination means A game machine J5 characterized by having a second notification means for notifying that a condition for establishing the second end condition is satisfied based on the determination result.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines J2 to J4, the second notification means that the condition for establishing the second end condition is established during the period in which the advantageous first game state is set. Therefore, if it is assumed that the first game state set this time is not the advantageous first game state but the disadvantageous first game state, whether or not the first game state has ended is determined. A player can be made to judge. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can experience the superiority of the advantageous first game state currently set.

<Characteristic K group> (In the time saving state, set a period in which the number of time saving is not subtracted)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means is dynamically displayed for a predetermined first period, and when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first determination game state setting means for setting an advantageous game state for a predetermined period of time, period measuring means for measuring the period of the advantageous game state set by the game state setting means, and the period measuring means for measuring the predetermined period. terminating means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when the period is measured; measurement limiting means for limiting measurement of the advantageous gaming state period by the period measuring means when a predetermined limiting condition is satisfied; A gaming machine K1 characterized by having:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player for the period until the next big win is won after the privilege game ends according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2012-217766). By the way, since the gaming machine described above is configured to set the period until the number of lotteries reaches a predetermined number as the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, the advantageous gaming state is not set. However, there is a problem that the period of time to be stored can be easily predicted. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine K1, since the measurement of the predetermined period during which the advantageous gaming state is set can be restricted by the measurement limiting means, the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set can be extended. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K1, second determination means capable of executing a second determination, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period; and when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means , a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means when the first privilege game is executed; wherein the second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means and when the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result, the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the second determination means is provided in the configuration capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed. is a specific second determination result, a predetermined limiting condition is established. Thereby, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state in which the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K2, the measurement limiting means controls the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is being executed by the second dynamic display means. A gaming machine K3 characterized by limiting measurement of a period.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the period of the advantageous gaming state is measured while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is executed by the second dynamic display means. is restricted. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state in which the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Any one of the game machines K1 to K3 is characterized in that it has a reporting means for reporting that the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means is restricted by the measurement limiting means. Game machine K4.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K1 to K3, the notification means notifies that the measurement of the period is restricted by the measurement restriction means, so that the game can be easily understood by the player. There is an effect of being able to provide

<Feature L group> (small hit RUSH with different end conditions)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination and second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. When displayed, a first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, a privilege of executing the second privilege game a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination; and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. and game state setting means for setting a game state, wherein the game state setting means is set when a predetermined first condition is established, or when a second condition different from the first condition is established. , the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second condition, rather than the case where the first game state is set based on the establishment of the first condition. The game machine L1 is characterized in that the setting of the game state facilitates the continuation of the first game state.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed in which a game is performed in which a plurality of game states are shifted in stages according to the lottery result, and an advantageous game state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player can be set (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, since the condition for ending the advantageous game state is single, it is not possible to vary the ease with which the set advantageous game state can be continued. There is a problem that the game provided by the player becomes monotonous and the motivation to play is lowered. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine L1, the game state setting means can set the first game state that is easy to be set continuously and the first game state that is difficult to be set continuously, so that the first game state is set. Even after being played, the player can play the game while expecting that the first game state will continue for a long period of time, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine L1, the game state setting means sets a game state different from the first game state when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the state in which the first game state is set, When the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second condition, the predetermined end is better than when the first game state is set based on the establishment of the first condition. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the conditions are difficult to be established.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, the first state is set based on the establishment of the second condition rather than the case where the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the first condition. When the game state is set, it is possible to make it more difficult to end the first game state. Therefore, the first game state that is easy to end and the first game state that is difficult to end can be set for the player. There is an effect that the player can play the game while desiring that the game state has been set, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine L2 has end condition setting means capable of setting a first end condition and a second end condition different from the first end condition as the predetermined end condition, and the second condition is established. The game machine L3 is characterized in that, when the first game state is set based on this, the first end condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L2, when the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the second condition, the first end condition is not established, so the game is difficult to end. A first game state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with motivation to satisfy the second condition.

In the game machine L3, the end condition setting means sets the second end condition when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3, the second end condition is set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result. Thus, when the first game state ends based on the establishment of the second end condition, a privilege game can be provided. Therefore, even if the first game state ends, the privilege can be given to the player.

A gaming machine L5 characterized in that the gaming machine L3 or L4 has an informing means for informing that the first gaming state has been set based on the establishment of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine L5, since the notifying means notifies that the first end condition is not satisfied, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Feature M group> (Set a special drop invalid period)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and a specific first determination on the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed, the privilege game executing means for executing the first privilege game, and when a predetermined setting condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned executed by the first determination means a game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state in which the result of the first determination is more likely to result in the specific first determination result than in the normal game state, wherein the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means. is set, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a game state transition means for transitioning the game state from the advantageous game state to the normal game state; and limiting establishment of the predetermined transition condition. and transition condition limiting means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, according to the result of the lottery, an advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set during the period until the next big win is won after the end of the privilege game, and in addition, a predetermined lottery ( A game machine has been proposed that terminates an advantageous game state when winning a drop lottery. (For example, JP-A-2013-152). By the way, since the game machine described above is configured so that the falling lottery is executed based on the execution of the game winning lottery, the player always has a sense of danger that the advantageous game state will end. There is a problem that the player cannot play the game with peace of mind. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which allows a player to play a game with peace of mind and which enhances the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine M1, the transition condition restricting means can restrict the game state from shifting from the advantageous game state to the normal game state, so that the game state shifts from the advantageous game state to the normal game state. It is possible to set a playing period not to play. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a period of time during which he/she can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine M1, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination means performs the first determination. a special judgment means capable of executing a special judgment different from No. 1 judgment, and the predetermined transition condition is established when the judgment result by the special judgment means is a specific special judgment result; Characteristic gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, when the first determination condition is satisfied, a special determination is executed, and when the determination result is a specific special determination result, a predetermined transition condition is performed. holds. Therefore, since the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the special determination means can be associated and set, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, a second privilege game different from the first privilege game is executed. a second privilege game executing means; and a variable ball entry means that variably operates to an open state in which a game ball can enter when the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means; and variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and a game ball passes through the specific area. A game machine M3 characterized in that the predetermined transition condition is established when the game machine M3 passes through.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, a predetermined transition condition is established when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, since the transition condition can be established at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination means, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the transition condition is established based on the game result of whether or not to shoot the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be enhanced.

In the game machine M3, the variable control means includes a first variable control that makes it easier for a ball that has entered the variable ball-entering means to pass through the specific region, and a second variable control that makes it harder for a ball to pass through the specific region than the first variable control. 2 variable control, and a game machine M4 characterized by being able to set.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, the variable control means provides a first variable control that makes it easy for the ball entering the variable ball-entering means to pass through the specific area and a second variable control that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area. can be set, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the transition condition is established based on the game result of whether or not to shoot the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

The gaming machine M5, which is the gaming machine M4, further comprising an informing means for informing that the second variable control is set by the variable control means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M4, the informing means notifies that the second variable control is set, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player. be.

<Feature N group> (game selection of small winning game)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and a specific first determination on the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed, special game execution means for executing the first special game, and the determination result of the first determination means is specified different from the specific first determination result a second privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, and the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means and variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means for variably operating to an open state in which a game ball can enter the game ball, and A specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and game state setting means is provided for setting a disadvantageous game state disadvantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine N1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. A gaming machine has been proposed that enables setting of an advantageous game state that is advantageous to a player when a game ball passes through a specific area during a privilege game that is advantageous to the player. 2013-152). In the gaming machine described above, when the game ball passes through the specific area, an advantageous game state is set, so that the player has to pay attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when a game ball passes through the specific area, a disadvantageous gaming state is set, so there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a novel game.

In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means includes a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball-entering means easily passes through the specific area, and a second variable control in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. 2 variable control, and a game machine N2 characterized by being able to set.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, the variable control means provides the first variable control that makes it easier for the ball entering the variable ball entering means to pass through the specific area, and the first variable control. Since either the second variable control that makes it difficult to pass through the specific area is set, it is possible for the game ball that is shot to pass through the specific area when the game ball is shot, depending on the content of the variable control that is executed. can be of different genders. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of deciding whether or not to shoot the game ball.

In the gaming machine N2, the second privilege game executed by the second privilege game executing means has an informing means capable of informing that the second variable control is set by the variable control means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the notification means notifies that the second variable control is set. can provide helpful information to Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of deciding whether or not to shoot the game ball.

Any one of the game machines N1 to N3 has detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the specific area, and invalidation means for invalidating the detection result of the detection means, and the invalidation means. is a gaming machine N4, characterized in that the detection result by the detection means is invalidated based on the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines N1 to N3, the invalidating means can invalidate the detection result by the detecting means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. has the effect of

In the gaming machine N4, measuring means for measuring the number of game balls detected by the detecting means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is disabled by the invalidating means; and measurement result reporting means for reporting information based on the measurement result.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects of the game machine N4, during the period in which the detection result by the detection means is disabled, the measurement result notification means reports the information based on the measurement result of the measurement means. The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily feel superiority.

<Feature O group> (finish time saving based on the condition that was met first among multiple conditions)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means and a privilege of executing a first privilege game when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the first display means A game executing means, a first game state in which the first determination is likely to be executed, a second game state in which the first determination is less likely to be executed than in the first game state, and a settable game state setting means. a game machine having end means for ending the first game state when a predetermined first end condition is met or when a second end condition different from the first end condition is met; wherein the ending means terminates the first game state on the basis of the ending condition that is established first out of the first ending condition and the second ending condition. O1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, since the subtraction of the period in which the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set is the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbols, the advantageous gaming state should be set to the maximum. However, there is a problem that the player is not able to play the game, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine O1, a first end condition and a second end condition are provided as conditions for ending the first game state, and when either end condition ends, the first game state ends. , the first game state can be reliably terminated.

In the gaming machine O1, second determination means capable of executing the second determination, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, wherein the privilege game execution means displays a specific second determination result on the second display means; When the second identification information is displayed, the second privilege game is executed, and while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the second dynamic display is performed. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the target display means, and the first termination condition is established by executing the first determination means, and the second determination means is executed. The game machine O2 is characterized in that the second end condition is satisfied by the above.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is established based on the first determination by the first determination means, and the second termination condition is established based on the second determination by the second determination means. holds, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. However, there is an effect that the first game state can be terminated appropriately.

In the game machine O2, a first execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the first determination means, a second execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the second determination means, and the first execution number measuring means. and the measurement result of the second execution frequency measurement means, and the execution frequency of the first determination means as a first period in which the first game state is continuously set. , a first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times obtained by adding the number of times of execution of the second determination means; and execution determination means for determining that the second determination is performed by the second determination means while the state determination means determines that the dynamic display is being executed. The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that, when the second determination is executed, the second end condition is satisfied before the second determination is executed.

According to the game O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the second end condition can be satisfied even during the dynamic display in which the first end condition can be satisfied, so the first game state can be properly established. has the effect of being able to terminate

In the gaming machine O3, the first termination condition is that after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means reaches the predetermined number, the number of executions of the first determination means reaches the predetermined number of times. A game machine O4 characterized in that it is established at any time point until the first determination corresponding to the case of exceeding a predetermined number of times is executed.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effects of the game machine O3, the first end condition is that after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means reaches a predetermined number of times, the first determination Since the first determination is executed when the number of executions of the means exceeds the predetermined number of times, the predetermined first period can be set longer. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine O4, third determination means capable of executing the third determination, third display means for displaying third identification information for indicating the determination result by the third determination means, and the third display means a third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information; a third privilege game execution means for executing a game, wherein the third determination means determines that the second game state is set when the first game state is set by the game state setting means; The game machine O5 is characterized in that it is easier to execute than when the game machine O5 is

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effects of the game machine O4, when the first game state is set, the game machine O5 has the third determination means that is likely to be executed, so the first game state is set. By lengthening the period during which the third determining means can be easily executed, it is possible to lengthen the period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Feature P group> (Special figure fluctuation during the opening period of the jackpot game)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination and second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. A first privilege game is executed based on the display, and a second privilege game is executed based on the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means. wherein the second determination means performs the second determination during a specific first period of the period in which the first privilege game is executed is executed, and the second determination is not executed during a second period different from the first period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be varied at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-described gaming machine allows the player to efficiently draw a lottery by simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols. Since the variation is not executed, there is a problem that the lottery efficiency is lowered and the willingness to play is lowered. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decline in motivation to play and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the second determination can be executed while the first privilege game is being executed, the player can be made to execute more determinations. Therefore, there is an effect that the game efficiency can be improved.

In the gaming machine P1, variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and the first privilege. variable control means for variably controlling the variable ball entry means between the first state and the second state when a game is executed, wherein the variable ball entry means is set to the second state by the variable control means; The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the period during which the period is varied to the first period.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1, the following effects are produced. That is, since the second determination is performed using the period during which the game ball cannot enter the variable ball entry means in the period during which the first privilege game is executed, the game result of the first privilege game can be understood The second determination can be performed without difficulty. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the second determination means provides, as the second determination result, an advantageous second determination result and an advantageous second privilege game that is executed based on the advantageous second determination result. Disadvantageous second discrimination result in which a disadvantageous second privilege game is executed can be discriminated, and the discrimination result of the second discrimination means executed during the first privilege game is the advantageous second discrimination. The game machine P3 is characterized by having discrimination restriction means for restricting results.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second determination executed during the first privilege game is restricted by the determination restriction means so that the determination result does not become the advantageous second determination result, the privilege is given excessively to the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an accidental situation. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine P3 is characterized by comprising variable limiting means for limiting the variable control means from changing the variable means from the second state to the first state during the second disadvantageous privilege game. Game machine P4.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable restriction means can restrict the first privilege game from being varied to the first state while the disadvantageous second privilege game is being executed based on the determination result of the second determination means. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the provision of games that are difficult to understand due to overlapping execution of a plurality of privilege games.

In the gaming machine P4, when the variable restriction means restricts the variation of the first privilege game to the first state, the first privilege game is changed to the first state. Characterized game machine P5.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P4, even if the variable restriction means restricts the first privilege game from being changed to the first state, the first status in the first privilege game Since the length of the period is not variable, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, while the second period of the first privilege game is set, there is an effect that the game can be motivated to perform the second determination until the end.

In any one of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the variable control means variably controls the variable ball entry means to be in the second state when the first privilege game is executed. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that the first period is a period from when the first privilege game is executed until the variable ball-entering means is brought into the first state.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second determination can be executed immediately after the first privilege game is executed, the second determination can be continuously executed from the period before the first privilege game is executed. As a result, there is an effect that the second determination can be executed during the first privilege game without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine P6, the second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period and the first period as the first privilege game are different. and a first privilege game setting means capable of setting a plurality of the first privilege games, wherein the privilege game imparting means imparts the first privilege game set by the first privilege game setting means. and the first privilege game setting means is at least the period for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means set by the second dynamic display setting means. A normal first privilege game in which a first period is set and a shortened first privilege game in which the first period is set shorter than a period for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means. A game machine P7 characterized by being able to set .

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effects of the game machine P6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the normal first privilege game is set by the first privilege game setting means, it becomes possible to execute the second privilege game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period, and the shortened first When a privilege game is set, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the second privilege game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player interested in the first period during which it is difficult to make the player interested in the bonus game, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. effective.

Any one of the game machines P1 to P7 has second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period, and the first privilege game is executed. A gaming machine P8, characterized in that it has a forced stop means for forcibly stop-displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means dynamically displayed when the game machine P8 is displayed.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first privilege game is executed, the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means is forcibly stopped and displayed. can be made easier to start. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide the player with the judgment by the second judgment means executed during the first period, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8 has a specific area through which a game ball can pass, and the privilege game imparting means indicates that the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The first privilege game is given when the game ball passes through the specific area in a state where the identification information for the purpose is stopped and displayed, and the second determination means determines the determination of the first determination means The period from when the identification information for indicating that the result is the specific first determination result is stop-displayed to when the game ball passes through the specific area is also within the first period, and the second period is determined. A gaming machine P9 characterized by executing determination.

<Derivation of characteristic Pa group> (small hit RUSH using special electric starting gate)
Judgment means capable of executing judgment, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, and predetermined identification information for showing a specific judgment result on the display means Based on this, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game, and based on the fact that the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, the first state is changed from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter. A variable ball entry means that is changed to a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the game ball, and after the predetermined identification information is displayed, the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state by the privilege game execution means. and a special game execution means capable of executing a special game for changing the variable ball entry means to the second state until the game machine Pa1 is changed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be varied at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-described gaming machine allows the player to efficiently perform the lottery by simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols. Since the privilege game cannot be given, there is a problem that the interest in the game is lowered. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine with improved interest in games.

According to the gaming machine Pa1, the variable ball entry means can be changed to the second state by the special game execution means before the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state by the privilege game execution means. , it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In a game machine Pa1, a ball entering means capable of entering a ball and a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter based on the ball entering the ball entering means are changed from the first state to a game ball. has a second variable ball entry means that is variable to a second state in which the ball is easy to enter, and the special game execution means is based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second variable ball entry means. A gaming machine Pa2 characterized by executing a special game.

According to the game machine Pa2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Pa1, the following effects are produced. That is, since a special game is executed by making a game ball enter the second variable ball entering means, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

The game machine Pa2 has special game setting means for setting the contents of the special game executed by the special game execution means, and the special game setting means causes the game ball to enter the second variable ball entering means. A game machine characterized in that one special game is set from among a plurality of special games having different preparation periods until the variable ball entering means changes the state to the second state. Pa3.

According to the gaming machine Pa3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the preparation period from when the game ball enters the second variable ball-entering means to when the variable ball-entering means is changed to the second state can be varied depending on the special game to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while anticipating that the special game with a short preparation period will be executed.

The game machine Pa3 has game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the special game setting means is set by the game state setting means. The game machine Pa4 is characterized in that when the first game state is set, it is easier to set the special game with the shorter preparation period than when the second game state is set.

According to the gaming machine Pa4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set, a short preparatory period is likely to be set. Therefore, a concentrated special game can be executed during the period when the first game state is set, and the game is completed. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

In the Pa4 game machine, the game state setting means sets the first game state based on the result of determination by the determination means being the specific determination result. .

According to the gaming machine Pa5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the presence or absence of the privilege game and the setting of the game state are executed based on the determination result of the determination means, so there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result of the determination means. .

The gaming machine Pa5 has waiting period setting means for setting a waiting period from when the predetermined determination result is displayed on the display means to when the privilege game is executed, and the special game setting means is , the game machine Pa6 is characterized in that, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the special game in which the preparation period shorter than the standby period is set is set.

According to the gaming machine Pa6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the special game is set with a preparation period shorter than the standby period, so that the special game can be reliably executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Feature Q group> (P group derivative)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination and second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. A first privilege game is executed based on the display, and a second privilege game is executed based on the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means. wherein the second determination means performs the second determination during a specific first period of the period during which the first privilege game is executed. The game machine Q1 is characterized in that the second determination is not executed during a second period different from the first period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be varied at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-described gaming machine allows the player to efficiently perform the lottery by simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols. Since the privilege game cannot be given, there is a problem that the interest in the game is lowered. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine with improved interest in games.

<Features R group> (The V winning rate is changed according to the fluctuation time of the special figure.)
determination means for performing determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period; A dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and a bonus game is provided based on the stop display of the identification information indicating the first determination result on the display means. A game ball is entered based on the fact that identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result as a result of determination by the privilege game imparting means and the determination means is stopped and displayed on the display means. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed from a difficult first state to a second state that is easy to enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the privilege game is provided. The means also provides the privilege game when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means sets a first period and the first period as the dynamic display period. It is possible to set a second period longer than the above, and setting the second period makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area than setting the first period. A gaming machine R1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a specific game is executed when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and a privilege game is also executed when the ball passes through the specific area during the specific game (for example, , JP-A-2012-192067). By the way, since the above-described gaming machine allows the execution of the privilege game at a plurality of opportunities, it was possible to improve the interest of the game. Since the passing ratio of the balls is variable, there is a problem that the result of the lottery greatly influences the contents of the subsequent game, and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine with improved interest in games.

According to the gaming machine R1, the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means makes it possible to vary the ease with which a game ball passes through the specific area. Instead, the player can keep his eyes on the identification information until the timing when the identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine R1, a period group storage means having a plurality of period groups defining a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set by the dynamic display period setting means, and a plurality of period group storage means stored in the period group storage means and a period group selection means for selecting one period group from among the period groups, wherein the dynamic display period setting means is defined in the one period group selected by the period group selection means. One dynamic display period is set from among a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the period group storage means corresponds to the first period group and the second period rather than the first period group. and a second period group including many dynamic display periods.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second period group, in which the second period is likely to be set, is set, the second period can be set more easily than when the first period group is set. While the group is set, there is an effect that the player can play an advantageous game without worry.

The game machine R2 has game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state as game states, and the period group selection means is configured to set the game state. A game machine R3, characterized in that the period group is selected according to the game state set by means.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the period group is set according to the game state, once the second period group advantageous to the player is set, the second period group is set until a different game state is set by the game state setting means. Two period groups will continue. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine R3, the dynamic display period setting means sets the first determination result and the second determination result as the determination results of the determining means in a state where the second period group is set. The gaming machine R4 is characterized in that a special dynamic display period can be set based on the stop display of identification information indicating a different third determination result on the display means.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display period set when the determination result of the determination means is the third determination result allows the player to understand that the currently set period group is the second period group advantageous to the player. can be made Therefore, even if the determination result of the determination means is a determination result that the privilege game cannot be executed, it is possible to make the player interested and improve the amusement of the game.

<Feature S group> (R derivation)
determination means for performing determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period; A dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and a bonus game is provided based on the stop display of the identification information indicating the first determination result on the display means. A game ball is entered based on the fact that identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result as a result of determination by the privilege game imparting means and the determination means is stopped and displayed on the display means. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed from a difficult first state to a second state that is easy to enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the privilege game is provided. The means also provides the privilege game when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means sets a first period and the first period as the dynamic display period. It is possible to set a second period longer than the above, and setting the second period makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area than setting the first period. A gaming machine S1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a specific game is executed when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and a privilege game is also executed when the ball passes through the specific area during the specific game (for example, , JP-A-2012-192067). By the way, since the above-described gaming machine allows the execution of the privilege game at a plurality of opportunities, it was possible to improve the interest of the game. Since the passing ratio of the balls is variable, there is a problem that the result of the lottery greatly influences the contents of the subsequent game, and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine with improved interest in games.

<Characteristic T group> (3 loops of 1 type and 2 types)
discrimination means for performing discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied; display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; A privilege game imparting means for imparting a privilege game advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed, a first game state after the privilege game imparted by the privilege game imparting means is finished, and a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the privilege game is more likely to be awarded than in the first game state, and a third game state in which the privilege game is less likely to be awarded than in the first game state; A period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area is set based on the fact that identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as a result of determination by the determination means. and a possible period setting means, wherein the privilege game imparting means imparts the privilege game even when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the gaming machine is in the second gaming state is set, either the first game state or the second game state is set by the game state setting means after the end of the special game, rather than the third game state. The gaming machine T1 is characterized by being easy to set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, the specific game is executed, and the privilege game is also executed when the ball passes through the specific area during the specific game, and the ball passes through the specific area. A game machine has been proposed in which a game state that is easy to play can be set (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-192067). By the way, since the above-described gaming machine allows the execution of the privilege game at a plurality of opportunities, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but there is a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area. There is a problem that the game ends immediately, and the interest in the game decreases. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine with improved interest in games.

According to the game machine T1, when the second game state is set, the third game state is not set when the next privilege game is awarded, so that the next privilege game is easily awarded. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind in a state where the privilege game is easily awarded.

In the gaming machine T1, the game state setting means increases the number of privilege games in the state in which the first game state is set more than the case in which the privilege game is provided in the state in which the second game state is set. The game machine T2 is characterized in that the third game state can be easily set after the privilege game is finished when the bonus is provided.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set, the third game state is likely to be set based on the provision of the privilege game, so that the game state advantageous to the player can be set for a long period of time. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a proper game.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the game state setting means selects, among the privilege games, a first privilege game provided based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and the specific area. The game state is set according to the type of the privilege game imparted by the privilege game imparting means among the second privilege game imparted based on the passage of the game ball. Gaming machine T3.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T2 or T3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the game state to be set can be changed in the case where the first privilege game is awarded and the case where the second privilege game is awarded, which type of privilege game is executed for the player. It can be interesting to see what has been done. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T3, when the second game state is set, the game state setting means is more advantageous to the player when the second bonus game is given than when the first bonus game is given. A gaming machine T4 characterized in that it makes it easy to set a game state.

According to the gaming machine T4, when the second game state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the second privilege game is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, when the first game state is set, the game state setting means prefers the player to be awarded the first bonus game rather than to be awarded the second bonus game. A game machine T5 characterized in that it facilitates the setting of a game state advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first privilege game is awarded. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic U group> (T group derivative)
Determination means for performing determination when a determination condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information indicating a result of determination by the determination means, and the identification information indicating a specific result of determination on the display means are stopped and displayed. In this case, after the privilege game imparting means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the privilege game imparted by the privilege game imparting means are completed, a first game state and a state higher than the first game state A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the bonus game is more likely to be given and a third game state in which the bonus game is less likely to be given than in the first game state, and a result of discrimination by the discrimination means. , the identification information indicating the second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means to change from the first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter to the second state in which it is easy to enter. and a variable ball entry means, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the privilege game imparting means is provided when the game ball passes through the specific area Also, the privilege game is given, and the game state setting means, when the privilege game is given in the state where the second game state is set, the first game after the privilege game ends The game machine U1 is characterized in that it facilitates setting of either the state or the second game state.

<Feature V group> (small hit RUSH without simultaneous fluctuation)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on the ball entering the first ball entering means, and a discrimination result by the first discrimination means are shown. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for the purpose on the display means; a second ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter; and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. Acquisition means for acquiring information based on, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a second determination result for indicating the determination result by the second determination means a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information on the display means; a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination is made by the second determination means; second privilege game imparting means for imparting execution of a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and to the second ball entering means. and when the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, at least the restriction means can be canceled. and a first privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) in which a ball is likely to enter a specific ball entrance after a privilege game ends according to a lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Gazette). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game because the ball can be easily entered into a specific ball entrance at any time during an advantageous game state. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine V1, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball-entering means only while the privilege game or the special privilege game is being imparted, so the privilege game or the special privilege game is imparted. There is an effect that it is possible to limit the storage in the storage means in a state in which the data is not stored.

In the gaming machine V1, there are a second ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first position that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a game ball entering from the first position. and a variable member that can be changed to a second position for regulating the ball, and the variable member is variably controlled when the privilege game or the special privilege game is executed, The game machine V2 is characterized in that the restriction means positions the variable member at the first position, and the restriction releasing means positions the variable member at the second position.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, according to the variable state of the variable member executed in the privilege game or the special privilege game, the ease with which the ball enters the ball entering means can be varied. A ball can be entered into a ball entering means in synchronism with a special privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the playability during the privilege game or the special privilege game.

In the gaming machine V1 or V2, it is easier for the restriction releasing means to release the restriction by the restriction means when the special privilege game is executed than when the privilege game is performed. Game machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1 or V2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the ease with which the ball enters the ball entering means can be varied according to the type of game for which the variable member is varied, the playability during the privilege game or the special privilege game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine V4 is characterized in that, in the game machine V3, the privilege game is more difficult to be executed than the special privilege game.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, although the privilege game is more difficult to execute than the special privilege game, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entering means during the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to aim for the execution of the privilege game, and the operation of the game can be enhanced.

<Features W group> (variable ease of establishment of multiple game conditions with accessory action patterns)
Determining means that can execute determination, variable means that is changed from a first state to a second state when the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result, and variable operation contents of the variable means are set. and variable control means for controlling the variable means based on the content of the variable operation set by the variable operation setting means, wherein the variable control means is controlled by the variable operation setting means. 1, when variable operation contents are set, the variable means is variably controlled so that the first privilege is more likely to be granted than the second privilege different from the first privilege, and the variable operation setting means; When a second variable operation content different from the first variable operation content is set by A gaming machine W1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a game machine that sets an advantageous game state (time-saving state) in which a specific electric accessory is easily variably operated after the end of the privilege game according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). . By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the privilege that can be granted to the player by varying the operation of the electric accessory is always the same. Since it is only possible to set a state in which it is easy to be played and a state in which it is difficult to be played, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine W1, it is possible to change the given privilege based on the contents of the movable motion set by the movable motion setting means, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable state of the variable means. has the effect of

In the gaming machine W1, end condition setting means for setting a plurality of end conditions, condition determination means for determining whether the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means are established, and the end condition by the condition determination means variable control termination means for terminating the variable control of the variable means by the variable control means when it is determined that The gaming machine W2 is characterized in that a special state is set in which the first privilege and the second privilege are likely to be granted when the variable control termination means terminates the variable control.

According to the game machine W2, in addition to the effects of the game machine W1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the specific end condition is satisfied, the special state is set, so that the player can be motivated to play the game so that the specific end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W2, a ball entry means, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means, and a result of determination by the second determination means is specified. and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the result of the second determination is obtained, wherein the first privilege is the one for which the second determination is performed.

According to the game machine W3, in addition to the effects of the game machine W2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the second determination that allows the privilege game to be executed is provided as the first privilege, the player is expected to set the first variable action content that facilitates the provision of the first privilege. You can play a game while playing. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W3, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, the game ball is changed from a first state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball to a second state in which it is easier to enter the ball than in the first state. A gaming machine W4 comprising operable variable ball-entering means, wherein the second privilege is that a game ball enters the variable ball-entering means.

According to the game machine W4, in addition to the effects of the game machine W3, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the privilege game is being executed, the game can be played while expecting that the second variable operation content that facilitates the provision of the second privilege will be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine W5 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines W2 to W4, the end condition setting means sets that the first privilege is granted as the specific end condition.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting the first privilege to be given so that the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics X group> (through pass possible during winning game)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a discrimination condition establishment means for establishing a discrimination condition based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the discrimination by the discrimination condition establishment means. Determining means capable of executing determination when a condition is satisfied; privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result; A passing means that allows the game ball to pass while the privilege game is given, a determination means that can execute determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and a determination result whose determination result is a specific determination result. A variable means that is variably controlled from a first position to a second position based on the fact that when the variable means is at the second position, more game balls enter than at the first position and a second ball entering means that makes it easier to hit the ball, and the discrimination condition establishing means establishes the discrimination condition even when the game ball enters the second ball entering means. The game machine X1 to be.

In the gaming machine X1, the gaming machine X2 is characterized in that the second ball entering means is provided at a position where a ball that has passed through the passing means can enter.

In the game machine X2, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display period for setting a period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means. setting means, wherein the dynamic display period setting means includes a first period during which a ball that has passed through the passing means can enter the second ball entering means; The gaming machine X3 is characterized in that at least a second period of difficulty can be set.

In the game machine X3, the game machine X4 is characterized in that the first period is longer than the second period.

<Characteristic group Y> (advantageous normal ending)
It has judging means for executing a judgment and period determining means for deciding a period for announcing the judgment result by the judging means, and when the notification result for indicating the specific judgment result is notified. A gaming machine that provides an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a setting means for setting a set period from the end of the advantageous state until the next determination by the determining means can be executed, wherein the setting The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that the period includes at least a first set period and a second set period that is more advantageous to the player than the first set period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. (For example, JP-A-2013-226399). By the way, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired of the game early because the period until the winning game or the like which is advantageous to the player is executed becomes long. It has been demanded that the player can enjoy the game even in the period until the winning game is executed, and to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early. To provide a game machine capable of suppressing early boredom of a game.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when an advantageous state is set, the player can expect the second set period to be set, and the problem of the player getting bored with the game early can be suppressed. effective.

The gaming machine Y1 has a first flow path through which a game ball can pass in the case of the advantageous state, and when the second set period is set, the first flow path is transferred to the first flow path. The gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that it is constructed so that the game balls flow down more easily than when one set period is set.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y1, when the second set period is set, the game ball can easily flow down to the first flow path, and the second set period can be set. There is an effect that the setting can be expected more.

In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, during the second set period, the judgment result by the judgment means next to the advantageous state becomes the specific judgment result and the advantageous state is established, so that the first flow path A gaming machine Y3 characterized in that it is set in a period during which the privilege is likely to be given when a game ball passes through.

According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, by setting the second set period, it is possible to increase the value of the next advantageous state being set, and the advantageous state is set. There is an effect that expectations for being set can be increased.

In any one of the game machines Y1 to Y3, specific ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path is possible, and for which at least a part of the privilege is given when the game ball enters and state setting means for setting a first state in which a game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means and a second state in which entry is more difficult than in the first state, and The gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that the second set period consists of a period in which the game ball can reach the specific ball entering means during the period in which the first state is set.

According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effects produced by one of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, by setting the second set period, it is easy for the game ball to reach the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to heighten expectations for the setting of the second set period.

In the gaming machine Y4, a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the game ball when the advantageous state is established, and a specific determination means for executing a specific decision based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. and period determination means for determining a variable period for varying the period until the specific ball-entering means is set to the first state based on the execution of the specific determination by the specific determination means. The gaming machine Y5 is characterized in that the period determination means is configured to be capable of determining a period that is advantageous to the player even when the second set period is not set.

According to the gaming machine Y5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y4, even when the second set period is not set by the period determining means, a period advantageous to the player is determined, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to increase the number of situations in which the player becomes bored with the game.

<Feature β group derivation> (advantageous at regular intervals per normal map)
Determination means for executing determination, period determination means for determining a period for notifying the result of determination by the determination means, and notification to the player based on the notification result for indicating the specific result of determination. Advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state until a predetermined condition is established, a first flow path through which a game ball can pass when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means, and the first flow path is set to have a high probability of being able to pass when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval. Gaming machine β1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. (For example, JP-A-2013-226399). By the way, there has been a demand for a game machine that further enhances the interest in games. To provide a game machine with improved interest in games.

According to the gaming machine β1, when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval, the probability of being able to pass through the first flow path is set high. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in the interval between the executions of the game and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine β1, there are a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position that guides the game ball to the ball entry means, and a second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball into the ball entry means. and variable means that can be varied, wherein the advantageous state setting means changes the variable means to the first position as the advantageous state.

According to the game machine β2, in addition to the effects of the game machine β2, the advantageous state is set by changing the variable means to the first position, so there is an effect that the advantageous state can be easily recognized. .

In the gaming machine β2, when the advantageous state is set, the advantageous state setting means cancels the setting of the advantageous state based on a predetermined number of game balls entering the ball entering means. and, when the setting of the advantageous state is canceled, the game ball rolling on the predetermined range of the variable means is guided to the first flow path. Machine β3.

According to the gaming machine β3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine β2, even when the advantageous state is canceled, it is possible to make the player interested in the game ball on the variable means, and the cancellation of the advantageous state is also expected. It has the effect of being able to hold

In any one of the gaming machines β1 to β3, a specific region is arranged in which the game ball guided to the first flow path can enter, and a first state in which the game ball can enter the specific region and a state variable means for setting a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the entering state; a first variable control for changing the state changing means to the second state after changing the state changing means to the first state; and variable control means for executing at least one of a second variable control that

According to the game machine β4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines β1 to β3, the second variable control can be expected to be executed by the variable control means, and the effect of improving the amusement of the game can be obtained. be.

<Feature Z group> (attacker below the normal electric)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the ball entering the ball entrance means, and a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating a specific determination result on the display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. a variable means capable of changing between a first state for facilitating entry of a game ball into said ball entry means and a second state for making entry of a game ball more difficult than in the first state; and a specific condition; variable control means for varying the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the establishment of A specific flow path in which a game ball that has flowed down by being guided by the variable means and being varied to the second state before entering the first ball entering means can enter, and the specific flow and a specific area in which the game ball that has flowed down the path can enter, and the privilege game execution means sets a ball entry state in which the game ball can enter the specific area until an end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that it executes the privilege game.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. (For example, JP-A-2013-226399). By the way, there has been a demand for a game machine that further enhances the interest in games. To provide a game machine with improved interest in games.

According to the game machine Z1, even a game ball that could not be entered by the ball entering means can be expected to enter the specific flow path by the variable means, and the game can be played. have the effect of improving

The game machine Z1 has dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period when dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determining means. As for the period, at least an advantageous dynamic display period in which a game ball is likely to enter the specific area and an unfavorable dynamic display period in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the specific area are set. Characterized game machine Z2.

According to the game machine Z2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Z1, the dynamic display period of the identification information can also make the player interested, and the game can be more interesting.

In the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the privilege game executing means is characterized in that, based on the start of execution of the privilege game, the execution of setting the ball-entered state in the specific area according to a certain rule is started. Game machine Z3.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the specific area is set to the entry state according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of the privilege game. There is an effect that the sex can be kept constant.

<Feature AA group> (Direction based on special figure 2 fluctuation)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the ball entering the ball entrance means, and a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information; dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a specific determination result to the display means. a specific ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter until a termination condition is satisfied when the identification information for indicating the identification information is stopped and displayed, wherein a ball is entered into the specific ball entry means a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down a possible flow path; and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect during the dynamic display period; A game machine AA1 characterized in that at least a part of the effect is executed based on the detection result by the game machine AA1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, when notifying the result of the lottery, the player can have a high expectation for the result of the lottery by notifying the player of the result of the lottery after executing the performance suggesting the result of the lottery for a predetermined period. A gaming machine has been proposed. (For example, JP-A-2013-226399). By the way, since the performance is executed based on the result of the predetermined lottery, there is a problem that the performance tends to be constant, the game becomes monotonous, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. To provide a game machine capable of suppressing early boredom of a player.

According to the gaming machine AA1, the detection means detects the game ball flowing down the flow path that allows the ball to enter the specific ball entry means, and at least a part of the effect executed based on the detection result is executed. Therefore, not only the dynamic display of the identification information but also the performance being executed can be executed so as to be varied according to the flow of the game ball, the interest of the game is improved, and the player gets tired of the game early. This has the effect of suppressing defects.

In the gaming machine AA1, at least a first dynamic display period set in which a game ball easily enters the specific ball entering means is set in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The game machine AA2 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes the specific effect with at least one condition that the first dynamic display period is determined.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA1, the specific effect is executed under at least one condition that the first dynamic display period that is advantageous to the player is determined. is executed, there is an effect that it is possible to expect that the first dynamic display period has been determined.

In the gaming machine AA2, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, the effect executing means executes the specific effect when the detecting means does not detect a game ball during a specific detection period. A game machine AA3 is characterized in that it executes different effects.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA2, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, if the game ball is not detected by the detection means during the specific detection period, the specific effect is not executed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the execution of the specific performance is wastefully performed and the degree of expectation for the specific performance is lowered.

In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the specific ball entry means is provided with a specific area through which the entered game ball can pass. A game machine AA4 characterized in that a setting for execution is executed.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the game ball passes through the specific area, and the privilege game is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect and improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine AA4, a variable means capable of being changed between a first state for facilitating entry of a game ball into the ball entry means and a second state for making entry of a game ball more difficult than in the first state. and variable control means for varying the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established, wherein the flow path is controlled by the variable means is in the first state, it is guided to the variable means, and is changed to the second state before entering the first ball entering means, so that the game ball that has flowed down can flow in. A gaming machine AA5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA4, by varying the variable means, even the game balls that have not entered the ball entering means can be expected to flow into the channel. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AA5 in the gaming machine AA5, characterized in that the specific ball entry means is constructed so that a game ball that has entered the flow path while flowing down can easily pass through the specific area. .

According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA5, there is an effect that the degree of expectation for passing through the specific area can be increased by flowing down the flow path, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AB group> (Public electric non-winning ball can win special electric)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a first determining means capable of performing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the first determining means. a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result on the display means for a predetermined period; a first state in which a game ball can enter; A first variable ball-entering means that can be changed to a second state in which ball-entering is difficult; a first variable control means for changing from a state to the first state; a first guideway capable of guiding a game ball to the first variable ball entering means; A ball entering means, a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a second discrimination for indicating a discrimination result by the second discrimination means. a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying information on the display means for a predetermined period; Second variable ball-entering means that can be changed to a second state in which ball-entering is difficult; a second variable control means for changing from a state to the first state, wherein the first variable ball-entering means controls the first guiding means without entering the second variable ball-entering means; A game machine AB1 characterized in that a game ball flowing down a path can enter.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. There is also a second symbol whose variable display is executed for a predetermined period of time based on the second symbol, and each symbol can be varied at the same time. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small winning) is obtained as a lottery result of the second pattern, a small privilege game (for example, a small winning game) that can give a small privilege to the player is provided. In some cases, it is possible to set a game state in which the lottery for the second symbol is likely to be executed and a game state in which it is difficult to execute the lottery. (For example, JP-A-2015-39398).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, by varying the length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol, it is possible to set a game state in which the second symbol is easily executed and a game state in which the second symbol is difficult to be executed. , Since it is configured to set a game state in which the small privilege game is easily executed and a game state in which it is difficult to be executed, for example, in a state where the second symbol lottery is easy to perform, a small privilege game is given to the player. There is a problem that detailed settings such as different privilege amounts cannot be made, and the interest in the game is lowered. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine AB, since the number of game balls reaching the first variable ball entering means can be varied according to the situation of the second variable means, the number of balls reaching the first variable ball entering means can be changed to the 2 It is possible to make adjustments according to the control contents of the variable means. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the privilege amount given to the player in the game in which the first variable ball-entering means is operated to open, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means. and a dynamic display period setting means capable of setting the dynamic display period from different periods, wherein the dynamic display period setting means is set when the first game state is set by the game state setting means Second, the game machine AB2 is characterized by making it easier to set a dynamic display period longer than when the second game state is set.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means can be varied according to the set game state. Furthermore, when the first game state is set, it is easier to set a longer dynamic display period than when the second game state is set. Therefore, the period in which the ball cannot enter the second variable ball-entering means can be lengthened, so that the ball can easily reach the first variable ball-entering means, and the interest of the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine AB2, the second variable ball entry means has at least an opening into which a game ball can enter, and an opening/closing lid member for opening and closing the opening. The upper surface of the opening/closing lid member forms a part of the first guideway when the part is closed, and the dynamic display period setting means causes the first guiding path to be set by the game state setting means. A game machine AB3 is characterized in that, when a game state is set, it is easy to set a dynamic display period longer than a passing time for a game ball to pass over the upper surface of the opening/closing cover member.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB2 described above, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set, the ball can be made to reach the first variable ball entering means without fail. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AB2 or AB3 has variable pattern setting means capable of setting a variable pattern variably controlled by the second variable control means from among a plurality of different variable patterns, and the variable pattern setting means is adapted to change the game state. When the first game state is set by the setting means, a variable pattern is set in which the period in which the second variable ball-entering means is in the second state is longer than when the second game state is set. A game machine AB4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB2 or AB3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set, a variable pattern is set in which the period in which the second variable ball entering means is in the second state is longer than when the second game state is set. 1 game state can be made a game state more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Suggests special figure 1 lottery results based on special figure 2 lottery during special figure 1 fluctuation)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means for a predetermined period; A second dynamic display that dynamically displays a first display means to be displayed, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, and second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means for a predetermined period of time. means, second display means for displaying the second identification information, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped on the first display means. privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game and executing a second privilege game on the basis of the stop display of the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means; and suggesting the determination result of the first determination means based on the fact that the determination by the second determination means is performed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. and a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect for the game machine AC1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). By the way, the above-described gaming machine executes a variable effect dedicated to the first special symbol to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and performs a variable effect dedicated to the second special symbol to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. A game using one special pattern lottery and a game using the other special pattern lottery become independent because the variable performance is executed, and both special pattern lotteries are enthusiastically executed. There was a problem that the desire to try decreased. In addition, when a plurality of special symbols are fluctuating at the same time, there is a problem that the player is notified of the lottery result of each special symbol in an incomprehensible manner. In addition, since an independent variable effect is executed for each special symbol, there is a problem that the effect without a sense of unity is executed. To provide a game machine which further enhances the interest in a game by providing a player with an easy-to-understand suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result of each special symbol in the above-described game machine.

According to the gaming machine AC1, based on the determination by the second determination means executed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the determination result of the first determination means is suggested. Since the suggestive performance for the purpose is executed, the player can be motivated to play the game to grasp the determination result of the first determination means in advance and to make the player perform the determination of the second determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC1, the suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. .

According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the suggestive effect is executed when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result, there is an effect that the effect of the suggestive effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AC2, the period from when the first determination means determines that the specific first determination result is obtained until the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed. , a gaming machine AC3, further comprising limiting means for limiting the determination result of the second determination means from becoming the specific second determination result.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the determination by the second determination means is restricted from becoming a specific second determination result by the restriction means. It is possible to suppress execution of a privilege game different from the content of the suggestive performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliability of the suggestive presentation can be enhanced and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine AC1 or AC3, the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect using the display mode of the second identification information.

According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the suggestive effect is executed using the display mode of the second identification information, the player can check the determination result of the second determination means only by looking at the display mode of the second identification information, and the first It is possible to predict the discrimination result of the discriminating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player pays attention to the second identification information, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

Aggregating means for aggregating the discrimination results of the second judging means, and Condition Satisfaction Determining Means for judging whether an execution condition is established based on the discrimination results aggregated by the aggregating means in any one of the game machines AC1 to AC4. , wherein the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect when the condition establishment determining means determines that the execution condition is established.

According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination result of the second determination means is aggregated, and when the aggregated result satisfies the execution condition, the suggestive effect is executed, so that the player is motivated to play the game in order to satisfy the execution condition. can let Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Any one of the game machines AC1 to AC5 has an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means, and the effect mode setting means includes a first suggestive mode and a second suggestive mode. A gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that it is possible to set a second suggestion mode that suggests the discrimination result of the first discriminating means in an incomprehensible manner rather than the first suggestion mode.

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, an easy-to-understand suggestive effect and a difficult-to-understand suggestive effect are executed according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the discrimination result of the first discrimination means from being easily grasped by one suggestive effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to execute the suggestive effect a plurality of times.

The game machine AC6 has a number of times measuring means for measuring the number of times of execution of the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means, and the effect mode setting means executes the suggestive effect counted by the number of times measuring means. The game machine AC7 is characterized in that it is easier to set the first suggestion mode when the number of times is a specific number of times greater than the predetermined number of times than when the number of times is a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the more suggestive performances are executed, the easier it is for the player to understand the suggestive performances.

<Characteristics BA Group> (The more consecutive first advantageous states, the easier it is to set a more advantageous second advantageous state.)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result, As game states after the end of the privilege game, a first game state, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. a first game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a game state; a second game state setting means for setting the game state to the third game state based on the specific condition, wherein the specific condition is set based on the fact that the privilege game is executed during the first game state. The second game state set based on the execution of the privilege game during the second game state is more likely to be established than the second game state set. A game machine BA1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there are some machines that are configured to be able to change the game state after the winning state ends according to the type of winning, and after the winning state ends There are also those that are trying to improve interest in Furthermore, in the above-described conventional type gaming machines, a relatively advantageous game state is set after the winning state ends, and in the comparatively advantageous game state, a specific number of times of lotteries are consecutively lost. In some cases, there are also transitions to more favorable conditions.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the transition condition from a relatively advantageous gaming state to a more advantageous gaming state is fixed regardless of the situation at the time when the relatively advantageous gaming state is reached. There is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's sense of anticipation at the time when the game state is set to an advantageous game state, and it is difficult to improve the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BA1, the determining means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determining condition and the determination result of the determining means becoming a specific determination result, the A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game, a first game state as a game state after the privilege game is completed, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the second game state. a first game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state more advantageous to the player than the game state; a second game state setting means for setting the game state to the third game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, wherein the specific condition is set during the first game state; The second game state set based on the execution of the privilege game during the second game state is better than the second game state set based on the execution of the privilege game. is configured to facilitate the establishment of

As a result, when the second game state is reached, it is more advantageous than the first game state, and the shift to the third game state is facilitated, so that the player's expectation for the third game state is improved. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA1, the specific condition is that the game after completion of the privilege game is more likely than the case where the second game state is set based on the fact that the privilege game is executed during the first game state. The game machine BA2 is characterized in that the game machine BA2 is configured such that the second game state is more likely to be established when the second game state is set continuously for a specific number of times or more.

According to the game machine BA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BA1, the specific condition is the case where the second game state is set based on the fact that the privilege game is executed during the first game state. Since the second game state is more likely to be established when the second game state is set continuously for a specific number of times or more as the game state after the end of the privilege game, the second game state is more likely to be established. Even if the privilege game is executed without the specific condition being satisfied in , the expectation for the third game state can be further improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the second game state setting means, when the second game state is set based on the fact that the privilege game is executed during the first game state, the second game state The third game state is set on the basis that the determination result of the determination means is different from the specific determination result continuously over a predetermined first number of times in the game state. The second game state setting means, when the second game state is set continuously for a specific number of times or more as the game state after the end of the privilege game, in the second game state The third game state is set on the basis that the determination result of the determination means is different from the specific determination result continuously over a second number of times smaller than the first number of times. The game machine BA3 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the second game state setting means sets the second game based on the privilege game being executed during the first game state. When the state is set, the discrimination result of the discriminating means is a discriminating result different from the specific discriminating result continuously over a predetermined first number of times in the second game state. The second game state setting means sets the second game state continuously for a specific number of times or more as the game state after the end of the privilege game. in the second game state, the discrimination result of the discriminating means is different from the specific discrimination result continuously over a second number of times smaller than the first number of times in the second game state. , the third game state is set.

As a result, in the second game state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player expects a succession of discriminative results rather than a specific discriminative result, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines BA1 to BA3, a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter; Variable means capable of changing between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the entering ball means and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a discrimination result of the discrimination means. variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the second determination result different from the specific determination result and , wherein the third game state is configured such that the variable game is more likely to be executed than the second game state.

According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, a predetermined number of ball entry means for allowing the game ball to enter and the game ball entering the ball entry means a first position at which a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means; and a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. variable game executing means for executing a variable game to be executed, and the third game state is configured so that the variable game is more likely to be executed than the second game state.

As a result, in the third game state, there are more chances for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA4, the determination means comprises a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and a second determination means for executing the above, and the determination by the second determination means has a higher probability of being the second determination result than the determination by the first determination means. The game machine BA5 is characterized in that the third game state is constructed such that the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than in other game states.

According to the game machine BA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BA4, the determination means is different from the first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the first determination condition. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, and the determination by the second determination means is higher than the determination by the first determination means. It is constructed so as to increase the probability of obtaining the second judgment result, and the third game state is constructed so that the second judgment condition is more likely to be established than in the other game states. is.

As a result, in the third game state, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the determination result of the second determination means.

In any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA5, a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, and the first ball-entering means a second variable means capable of varying between a third position where a game ball can be entered and a fourth position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position; is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second determination condition is based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means A game machine BA6 characterized in that it is established by

According to the game machine BA6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BA1 to BA5, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means , a second variable means that can be varied between a third position where a game ball can enter the first ball entering means and a fourth position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position; , wherein the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second discrimination condition is the second ball entering means. It is established based on the entry of the game ball.

As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variable position of the second variable means, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BA6, in the second game state, the second variable means is more easily changed to the third position than in the first game state and the third game state. A gaming machine BA7 characterized by:

According to the game machine BA7, in addition to the effects of the game machine BA6, the second game state is such that the second variable means is changed to the third position more than the first game state and the third game state. Since it is configured to be easy, there is an effect that the degree of advantage of the second game state can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, passing means through which the game ball can pass; passage determining means for performing determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means; and variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result, and the passage determination means is configured to determine whether the determination is performed in the second game state. , when the third determination result is obtained with a first probability, and determination is performed in the first game state and the third game state, the third determination is performed with a second probability lower than the first probability A gaming machine BA8 characterized by being a result.

According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, the passage determining means for performing determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, variable control means for varying the second variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern on the basis that the determination result of the passage determination means is a third determination result, wherein the passage determination means When the determination is performed in the second game state, the third determination result is obtained with a first probability, and when the determination is performed in the first game state and the third game state, the first probability is higher than the first probability. The third determination result is obtained with a low second probability.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the determination result of the passage determination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BB group> (The result of the dynamic display is suggested in the effect for notifying at least the content different from the result)
A first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to a player is executed based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming a specific determination result. a first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination means; and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect for indicating the result of determination by the second determining means in duplicate with the first effect, The second effect executing means, when the first effect and the second effect are executed in an overlapping manner by executing the second effect, the second effect shown by the first effect in the second effect. A gaming machine BB1 is characterized by being constructed so as to be able to execute a specific effect mode that can suggest a determination result of a first determination means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not the game is successful, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. Some perform winning games. Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). By the way, the above-described gaming machine executes a variable effect dedicated to the first special symbol to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and performs a variable effect dedicated to the second special symbol to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. A game using one special pattern lottery and a game using the other special pattern lottery become independent because the variable performance is executed, and both special pattern lotteries are enthusiastically executed. There was a problem that the desire to try decreased. In addition, when a plurality of special symbols are fluctuating at the same time, there is a problem that the player is notified of the lottery result of each special symbol in an incomprehensible manner. In addition, since an independent variable effect is executed for each special symbol, there is a problem that the effect cannot be suitably executed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BB1, a first determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming a specific determination result, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination means; and the first determination condition. can execute a second effect for indicating the result of determination by the second determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a different second determining condition, and a second effect that overlaps with the first effect. and a second effect execution means, wherein the second effect execution means executes the second effect when the first effect and the second effect are executed in duplicate by executing the second effect. In the performance, it is configured to be able to execute a specific performance mode that can suggest the determination result of the first determination means indicated by the first performance.

As a result, not only the determination result of the second determination means but also the determination result of the first determination means can be suggested by the second effect, so there is an effect that a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

In the gaming machine BB1, the second effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect mode in the second effect before the determination result of the first determination means is indicated by the first effect. A game machine BB2 characterized in that it has a

According to the game machine BB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BB1, the second effect execution means performs the second effect in the second effect before the determination result of the first determination means is indicated by the first effect. Since the specific performance mode is executable, the determination result of the first determination means can be confirmed by confirming the second performance without confirming the first performance to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

The gaming machine BB1 or BB2 comprises a first ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, wherein the first determination condition is It is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A gaming machine BB3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, it is provided with a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means. , the first determination condition is established on the basis that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the second determination condition is that the game has entered the second ball entering means. It is established based on the ball entering the ball.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means.

In any one of the game machines BB1 to BB3, variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. and privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entering means; a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on the determination result, and the second effect; The executing means is configured to be able to suggest the specific effect mode in the second effect executed based on the determination result of the second determining means becoming the second determination result. A gaming machine BB4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, there is a first state in which the game ball can be entered, and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. a variable ball entry means that can be changed to a state; a privilege giving means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means; A variable game for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is varied from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on a second determination result different from the specific determination result. and execution means, wherein the second effect execution means executes the specific effect in the second effect executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the second determination result. It is configured to be able to suggest aspects.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation that the determination result of the second determination means will be the second determination result.

In the gaming machine BB4, as game states after the end of the privilege game, there is a first game state in which discrimination by the first discriminating means is more likely to be executed, and discrimination by the second discriminating means is more likely to be executed than in the first game state. a game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state; and game state changing means for changing a state from the first game state to the second game state.

According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB4, as the game state after the end of the privilege game, the first game state in which the determination by the first determination means is likely to be executed, and the a game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which discrimination by the second discrimination means is likely to be executed; and game state changing means for changing the game state from the first game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a specific condition.

As a result, in the first game state, the game can be played in anticipation that the specific condition will be satisfied, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In a game machine BB1 or BB2, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and the variable privilege giving means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means, wherein the second determination means determines whether the game ball has entered the variable ball entering means. It is characterized in that the second effect is constituted by the effect of outputting a predetermined sound based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entering means. A game machine BB6.

According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, there are a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. variable ball entry means; and privilege granting means for awarding a predetermined privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means; It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the ball means, and the second effect is an effect of outputting a predetermined sound based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entering means. It consists of

As a result, it is possible to execute an auditory effect by means of sound, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB6, the specific effect mode includes a first effect mode and when the first effect for indicating the specific determination result is executed rather than the first effect mode. A game machine BB7 characterized by including at least a second effect mode in which the ratio of execution by the second effect execution means is high.

According to the game machine BB7, in any one of the game machines BB1 to BB6, the specific effect mode includes a first effect mode and the first effect for indicating the specific determination result rather than the first effect mode. and a second effect mode in which the ratio of execution by the second effect executing means is increased when is being executed, so that the second effect mode is executed in the second effect. You can expect more. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BB7, the specific effect mode includes a third effect mode that can be executed by the second effect executing means only when the first effect for indicating the specific determination result is being executed. A gaming machine BB8 characterized by comprising at least:

According to the gaming machine BB8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB7, in the specific performance mode, the second performance is provided only when the first performance for indicating the specific determination result is executed. Since at least the third performance mode that can be executed by the execution means is included, the player can be given greater joy when the third performance mode is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines BB1 to BB8, the second effect is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first effect, at least for a predetermined period of time. BB9.

According to the gaming machine BB9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB8, the second effect is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first effect, at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, by confirming the easily visually recognizable second effect, both the determination result of the second determination means and the determination result of the first determination means can be confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

<Characteristic BC group> (directly transition to advantageous state based on the establishment of specific conditions that are at least different from the jackpot in the disadvantageous state)
Determination means for executing determination based on establishment of a determination condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result, and a game a second game state setting means for setting a second game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of a specific set condition at least different from execution of the privilege game during the first game state disadvantageous to the player; and acquisition game execution means for executing an acquisition game in which the player can acquire a predetermined privilege each time a predetermined specific condition is established in the second game state. BC1.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there are some machines that are configured to be able to change the game state after the winning state ends according to the type of winning, and after the winning state ends There are also those that are trying to improve interest in Furthermore, in the above-described conventional type gaming machines, a relatively advantageous game state is set after the winning state ends, and in the comparatively advantageous game state, a specific number of times of lotteries are consecutively lost. In some cases, there are also transitions to more favorable conditions.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is difficult to shift to a more advantageous game state unless the game state is shifted to a relatively advantageous game state. There was a problem that it was difficult to

On the other hand, according to the game machine BC1, there is provided a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. A privilege game executing means for executing a game and a second game advantageous to the player based on establishment of a specific set condition at least different from the execution of the privilege game between a first game state disadvantageous to the player. second game state setting means for setting a state; and acquisition game execution means for executing an acquisition game in which the player can acquire a predetermined privilege each time a predetermined specific condition is established in the second game state. And prepare.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation that a specific set condition will be established in the disadvantageous first game state, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BC1, a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first position for allowing the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a game ball more difficult to enter than the first position. a variable means that can be changed to a second position; and privilege granting means that grants the predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering means, wherein the acquired game execution means is Assuming that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result that is different from the specific determination result, and as the acquisition game, the variable means is operated from the second position to the second position for a predetermined period of time as the acquisition game. A game machine BC2 characterized in that it is controlled to be variable to one position.

According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC1, the ball entering means that allows the game ball to enter, the first position that allows the game ball to enter the ball entering means, and the first position that allows the game ball to enter the ball entering means. A variable means that can be varied between a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the position, and privilege giving means for giving the predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. and, said winning game executing means determines that the determination result of said determination means is a second determination result different from said specific determination result, and determines said obtaining game as said variable means as said winning game. is controlled to vary from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

Thus, in the second game state, the game can be played while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is

In the gaming machine BC2, at least when the obtained game is executed in the second game state, the second game state is maintained even after the execution of the obtained game is finished. Game machine BC3.

According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC2, at least when the obtained game is executed in the second game state, the second gaming state is maintained even after the execution of the obtained game is finished. Since it is maintained, the degree of advantage of the second game state can be further enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BC2 or BC3 comprises a first ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, wherein the determination condition is the first ball entering means. It comprises at least a first discrimination condition established based on the game ball entering the means and a second discrimination condition established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The determination executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition has a higher probability of obtaining the second determination result than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. In the first game state, when the determination is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the determination result is less likely to be obtained than in the second game state. A gaming machine BC4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC2 or BC3, it is provided with a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means. , the determination conditions are a first determination condition established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means and a second determination condition that is satisfied, and the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is more difficult than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. It is configured to increase the probability that the second determination result is obtained, and the first game state is the second game when determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. It is configured so that the determination result is less likely to be obtained than the state.

As a result, the degree of advantage in the second game state can be further improved, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines BC1 to BC4, the second game state is maintained in the same game state at least until the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result. A game machine BC5.

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state is the same gaming state at least until the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result. Since the state is maintained, there is an effect that it is possible to realize novel game characteristics in which a specific determination result is expected in the second game state.

In the gaming machine BC5, the gaming machine BC6 is characterized in that the second gaming state has a lower probability of the specific determination result than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC5, the second gaming state has a lower probability of the specific determination result than the first gaming state, so the degree of advantage in the second gaming state There is an effect that it is possible to further increase the

The game machine BC5 or BC6 is provided with initialization means for initializing the settings of the game machine, and the second game state is configured by the game state set when the initialization is performed by the initialization means. A game machine BC7 characterized in that it has a

According to the game machine BC7, in addition to the effects of the game machine BC5 or BC6, the initialization means for initializing the settings of the game machine is provided, and the second game state is initialized by the initialization means. It consists of a game state that is set when

As a result, there is an effect that the game state set by the initialization becomes advantageous, which makes it possible to provide extremely special game characteristics that are different from general game machines.

In the gaming machine BC7, the acquisition game is executed from when the second game state is set based on the initialization by the initialization means until a predetermined specific condition is established. A gaming machine BC8 characterized by comprising a restricting means for restricting so that it is difficult for the game machine BC8 to be played.

According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC7, after the second gaming state is set based on the initialization by the initialization means, the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Since the restriction means is provided to restrict the execution of the obtained game until it is established, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming too advantageous at the time of initialization. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous after the initialization and giving a disadvantage to the hole.

In a game machine BC8, a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first position for allowing a game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a game ball more difficult to enter than the first position. a variable means that can be changed to a second position; and privilege granting means that grants the predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering means, wherein the acquired game execution means is Assuming that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result that is different from the specific determination result, and as the acquisition game, the variable means is operated from the second position to the second position for a predetermined period of time as the acquisition game. 1 position, and the limiting means has a period from when the determination result of the determining means becomes the second determination result to when the winning game is started. A gaming machine BC9 characterized in that the game machine BC9 is controlled to be longer than when no limitation is made by the limitation means.

According to the gaming machine BC9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC8, the ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter, the first position that allows the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and the first position that allows the game ball to enter the ball entry means. A variable means that can be varied between a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the position, and privilege giving means for giving the predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. and, said winning game executing means determines that the determination result of said determination means is a second determination result different from said specific determination result, and determines said obtaining game as said variable means as said winning game. is controlled to vary from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time, and the limiting means controls the acquired To control so that a period until a game is started is longer than when the restriction is not performed by the restriction means.

As a result, there is an effect that the degree of advantage of the second game state after initialization can be lowered.

<Characteristic BD group> (Different degrees of advantage between the normal state at the time of RBAM clearing and the normal state transitioned with other triggers)
a first state setting means capable of setting the game state to a predetermined first game state based on the initialization of the settings of the game machine; second state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least the first game state based on establishment of a set condition; and the first game state is set by the first state setting means. Based on the setting, a specific element related to the degree of advantage is set to a predetermined specific degree of advantage or less, and based on the setting of the first game state by the second state setting means, the specific element and specific element setting means for setting the element to be higher than the specific advantage level.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there are some machines that are configured to be able to change the game state after the winning state ends according to the type of winning, and after the winning state ends There are also those that are trying to improve interest in Furthermore, among such conventional game machines, there is a novel game that is configured to provide a game state with a lower degree of advantage than the game state (so-called normal state) set when the settings of the game machine are initialized. There are also sexual ones.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the degree of advantage of the game state after initialization is increased in an attempt to realize a novel game, the initialization will be excessively advantageous to the player. As a result, there is a risk that the game machine will be difficult to initialize for halls.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BD1, the first state setting means capable of setting the game state to a predetermined first game state based on the initialization of the game machine settings, and the power source for the game machine. second state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state based on establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition that is at least different from insertion; Based on the fact that the first game state is set by the first state setting means, a specific element relating to the degree of advantage is set below a predetermined specific degree of advantage, and the first game state is set by the second state setting means. specific factor setting means for setting the specific factor so as to be higher than the specific advantage degree based on the fact that is set.

As a result, the player is expected to set the first game state by the second state setting means rather than by the first state setting means, so that the player can express his or her interest in the game. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting means sets the specific element based on the establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition during the first game state set by the first state setting means. The game machine BD2 is characterized in that it is set to be higher than the specific advantage level.

According to the game machine BD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BD1, the specific element setting means sets a predetermined specific setting condition during the first game state set by the first state setting means. Since the specific element is set to be higher than the specific advantage degree based on the establishment, the game can be played in anticipation of the establishment of the specific setting condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In a game machine BD1 or BD2, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball that is more difficult to enter than the first position a second position, a variable means that can be changed to, a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means, and a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result. and variable game execution means, wherein the specific element setting means varies the ease with which the variable game is executed as the specific element.

According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD1 or BD2, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a privilege giving that imparts a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions; and when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result, the variable means is shifted from the second position to the second position for a predetermined period of time. and a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable to one position, and the specific element setting means varies the ease of execution of the variable game as the specific element.

As a result, in the first game state, it is possible to vary the ease with which the variable game is executed, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BD3, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means, and dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the identification information, wherein the specific element setting means determines that the first game state has been set by the first state setting means; Based on this, the dynamic display period determination means controls to easily set a period longer than the predetermined first period, and the first game state is set by the second state setting means. Based on this, the gaming machine BD4 is characterized in that control is performed so that a period shorter than the first period is easily set.

According to the game machine BD4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BD3, there is provided a display means capable of displaying identification information and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means. display means; and dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, wherein the specific element setting means is determined by the first state setting means Based on the setting of the first game state, control is performed so that a period longer than a predetermined first period is likely to be set by the dynamic display period determination means, and the second state setting is performed. Based on the setting of the first game state by the means, control is performed so that a period shorter than the first period is likely to be set.

As a result, there is an effect that the advantage degree can be changed more reliably in the first game state.

The gaming machine BD4 comprises a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, wherein the determination condition is the first ball entering means. and a second determination condition established based on the ball entering the second ball entering means. The determination means provides the specific determination result when the determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition rather than when the determination is performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The specific element setting means determines whether or not the second determination condition is established based on the fact that the first game state is set by the first state setting means. control is performed so that a period longer than the first period is easily set as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the second state setting means; Based on the setting of the state, a period shorter than the first period is set as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. A game machine BD5 characterized in that it is controlled so that it is easy to play.

According to the gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD4, it is provided with a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means. The determination conditions are a first determination condition that is established based on the ball entering the first ball entering means, a second determination condition that is established based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, and the determination means is configured to perform determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition more than when determination is performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. is configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher, and the specific element setting means detects that the first game state has been set by the first state setting means. Based on this, control is performed so that a period longer than or equal to the first period is easily set as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition, Based on the setting of the first game state by the second state setting means, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is the Control is performed so that a period shorter than one period is easily set.

As a result, there is an effect that the degree of advantage can be varied by varying the execution interval of determination by the second determination means.

In the gaming machine BD5, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined second discrimination result, and the termination of the privilege game. As a later game state, the specific element is more advantageous to the player than the first game state in which the specific element is set below the specific advantage level, and the specific element is set higher than the specific advantage level. game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state; The gaming machine BD6 is characterized in that the first game state is set when a predetermined change condition is established in a state where the game state is set as the establishment of the specific setting condition.

According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD5, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed on the basis that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined second discrimination result. A privilege game execution means, and as a game state after the privilege game is finished, the specific element is more advantageous to the player than the first game state in which the specific element is set to the specific advantage degree or less, and the specific element is game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state set higher than the specific advantage; The second state setting means sets the first game state when the specific setting condition is satisfied when a predetermined change condition is satisfied while the second game state is set.

As a result, in the second game state, the game can be played in anticipation of the establishment of the predetermined change condition, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD6, the first game state is configured such that the probability that the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result is lower than that in the second game state. A game machine BD7.

According to the game machine BD7, in addition to the effects of the game machine BD6, the first game state has a lower probability that the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result than the second game state. Therefore, it is said that the first game state can realize a novel game property that it becomes advantageous when the first game state is set by the second state setting means even though the determination result of the determination means is low. effective.

In the game machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means is configured to perform dynamic display of the identification information, which is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition, based on the setting of the second game state. The game machine BD8 is characterized in that control is performed so that a period longer than the first period is likely to be set as the target display period.

According to the game machine BD8, in addition to the effects of the game machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means executes based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the setting of the second game state. Since the dynamic display period in dynamic display of the identification information to be displayed is controlled so as to easily set a period longer than the first period, it is difficult for the second determination condition to be satisfied in the second game state. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic BE group> (Perform a specific effect between the transition to the small hit RUSH and the start of the small hit fluctuation)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Variable means that can be changed, determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result, the variable means performs the first determination for a predetermined period of time. A first game state in which the variable game is difficult to be executed based on establishment of a specific setting condition in a gaming machine comprising a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position. and a second game state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than the first game state; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the setting of the second game state by means; A game machine BE1 characterized by comprising a second effect execution means for executing a second effect in a different effect mode from the first effect based on the determination result being the specific determination result.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, game machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there is an effect mode (preparation effect mode) indicating that an advantageous situation for the player is approaching in a predetermined game state, and a When the situation becomes advantageous to the player, there is also a system capable of executing an advantageous situation effect indicating that the situation has become advantageous.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if the preparation effect mode is executed, the player only wants the advantageous situation effect to be executed as soon as possible. However, there is a problem that there is a risk of spoiling the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BE1, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball more than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter a ball, a determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a determination result of the determination means that is a specific determination result. and variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and based on establishment of a specific setting condition, One game state is set out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the variable game is difficult to be executed and a second game state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than the first game state. game state setting means, first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the setting of the second game state by the game state setting means, and the first effect by the first effect execution means is executed, a second effect execution means for executing a second effect in a different effect mode from the first effect based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result; Prepare.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BE1, a privilege game advantageous to the player is played based on the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. and a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, wherein the determination conditions are a first determination condition and the first determination and a second determination condition different from the condition. and dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the above, and the game machine is configured to be able to perform the above-mentioned first determination condition and the second determination condition, When the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of one of the determination conditions, the other determination is performed at least during the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the second determination result. A game characterized by comprising discrimination result control means for controlling such that, in the discrimination executed based on the establishment of a condition, a non-compliance discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result and the second discrimination result. Machine BE2.

According to the game machine BE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BE1, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. and dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, wherein the determination condition is , a first determination condition, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and the dynamic display means displays the identification information based on the establishment of the first determination condition. and the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the second determination condition can be performed in an overlapping manner, and the gaming machine is configured to perform the first determination Dynamic display of the identification information for indicating at least the second determination result when determination based on the establishment of one of the condition and the second determination condition results in the second determination result. During the dynamic display period in , the discrimination executed based on the satisfaction of the other discrimination condition is a discrimination that is controlled so as to produce a non-discrimination result that is different from both the specific discrimination result and the second discrimination result. A result control means is provided.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the privilege game from being performed redundantly by the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition.

In the gaming machine BE2, the second game state is configured such that determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is easier than in the first game state. The discrimination executed based on the establishment of is configured to be any one of the specific discrimination result, the second discrimination result, and the outlier discrimination result. Gaming machine BE3.

According to the game machine BE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BE2, the second game state is configured such that determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is easier than in the first game state. The determination executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is any one of the specific determination result, the second determination result, and the outlier determination result. is configured as

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to expect a specific determination result in the second game state.

The game machine BE3 is provided with game state changing means for changing the game state to the second game state based on establishment of a specific condition at least different from execution of the privilege game in the first game state. A game machine BE4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BE3, in the first gaming state, the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state based on establishment of a specific condition that is at least different from execution of the privilege game. Since the game state changing means for changing the state is provided, the game can be played in anticipation of the establishment of the specific condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BE4, the game state changing means prevents the privilege game from being executed during the period from when the first game state is set until the determination by the determination means is performed a predetermined number of times. The game machine BE5 is characterized in that the game state is changed to the second game state when the game is stopped.

According to the game machine BE5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BE4, the game state changing means executes determination by the determination means a predetermined specific number of times after the first game state is set. Since the game state is changed to the second game state when the privilege game is not executed during the period until the second game state, the game is played in the first game state with the expectation that the privilege game will not be executed. There is an effect that a playability can be realized.

In the gaming machine BE5, the first game state is configured such that the second determination result is obtained with a first probability when the determination by the determination means is executed, and the second game state is , the second determination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability when the determination by the determination means is executed, and the game state changing means is configured to obtain the first When the privilege game is not executed during the period from when the game state is set until the judgment by the judgment means is executed a predetermined number of times, the second judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means. The game machine BE6 is characterized in that the game state is changed to the second game state by changing the probability that the game will be established from the first probability to the second probability.

According to the game machine BE6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BE5, the first game state is configured to result in the second determination result with a first probability when the determination by the determination means is performed. The second game state is configured such that, when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the second discrimination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. , the game state changing means, when the privilege game is not executed during the period from when the first game state is set to when the determination by the determination means is performed a predetermined number of times, The game state is changed to the second game state by changing the probability of the second judgment result in the judgment by the judgment means from the first probability to the second probability.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game feature in which the lower the probability of obtaining the second determination result is advantageous, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines BE1 to BE6, an initialization means for initializing the settings of the game machine, and the game state is set to the second game state based on the initialization being executed by the initialization means. and in the second game state set by the initialization setting means, the variable game is less likely to be executed than in the second game state set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine BE7 characterized by comprising a limiting means for limiting to.

According to the game machine BE7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines BE1 to BE6, the initialization means for initializing the settings of the game machine and the initialization by the initialization means , initialization setting means for setting the game state to the second game state; and in the second game state set by the initialization setting means, the second game state set by the game state setting means; also includes a limiting means for limiting so that the variable game is difficult to be executed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the post-initialization from being too advantageous, and to make the same game state as the post-initialization state advantageous, thereby realizing a very special and innovative game.

<Feature BF group> (Multiple small winning RUSH states with different degrees of advantage)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed, a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means, a discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the first discrimination result; and the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from the first discrimination result. Establishment of a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the second determination result, and establishment of a predetermined setting condition. Among a plurality of states including a first state, a second state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than in the first state, and a third state that is more advantageous to the player than in the second state, based on and a state setting means capable of setting a state from 1 to 1. A gaming machine BF1 characterized by comprising:

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there are some machines that are configured to be able to change the game state after the winning state ends according to the type of winning, and after the winning state ends There are also those that are trying to improve interest in Furthermore, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, as an advantageous state, a so-called small winning game can be easily executed, and a state in which game value can be obtained even if a winning state does not occur is installed. There are also those that are trying to further improve interest.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the state shifts to an advantageous state in which a small winning game is easily executed, the subsequent game becomes monotonous in which the game value is simply continued to be acquired. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the person.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BF1, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball at the first position. a variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means; determining means for performing determination based on the determination result; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means being the first determination result; and discrimination by the determining means. The variable means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result being a second determination result different from the first determination result. game executing means, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, a first state, a second state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than in the first state, and a second state more advantageous to the player than in the second state. and state setting means capable of setting one state out of a plurality of states including three states.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation of the second state or the third state, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BF1, the state at the time when the second determination result is obtained is maintained at least even after the variable game executed based on the second determination result is finished. A gaming machine BF2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF1, the state at the time when the second determination result is obtained is the variable game executed based on the second determination result. Since it is maintained at least after the end of , the variable game can be executed multiple times in the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantage degree of the second state can be improved.

In the game machine BF1 or BF2, the game machine BF3 is characterized in that the third state is a state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than in the second state.

According to the game machine BF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BF1 or BF2, the variable game is more likely to be executed than the second state, so the degree of advantage of the third state can be further improved. effective.

In the game machine BF3, the determination means comprises a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and a second determination means for executing the above, wherein the second state is more likely to be established under the first determination condition than under the second determination condition, In the third state, the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first determination condition, and the determination by the second determination means is more likely than the determination by the first determination means. is configured to increase the probability of obtaining the second determination result.

According to the game machine BF4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BF3, the determination means is different from the first determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the first determination condition. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, wherein the second state is determined by the first determination condition rather than the second determination condition. The third state is more likely to be established under the second determination condition than under the first determination condition. Also, the discrimination by the second discriminating means has a higher probability of obtaining the second discrimination result.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the second determination condition will be satisfied.

In any one of the game machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means sets one state out of the plurality of states as a game state after the privilege game execution means finishes executing the privilege game. is possible, and the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the second state is higher than the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the third state. Characteristic game machine BF5.

According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means sets the plurality of game states as the game state after the privilege game execution means finishes executing the privilege game. One state can be set from the states, and the probability that the specific determination result is obtained in the second state is higher than the probability that the specific determination result is obtained in the third state. It is configured as follows.

Accordingly, since the third state has a lower probability of producing a specific determination result, it is possible to make it easier for the third state, which is advantageous, to continue for a longer period of time. Therefore, when the third state is set, there is an effect that the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

In the gaming machine BF5, a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, and a game ball being capable of entering the first ball-entering means. and a fourth position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position; Alternatively, the determination is executed based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the second state and the third state are different from the first state. The gaming machine BF6 is characterized in that the means is configured to be difficult to be changed to the third position.

According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF5, a first ball-entering device capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entering device different from the first ball-entering device, and the first ball-entering device a second variable means that can be varied between a third position where a game ball can be entered into the ball means and a fourth position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position; The determination means executes determination based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the second state and the third state are , the second variable means is configured to be more difficult to change to the third position than the first state.

As a result, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics in which the state in which the second variable means is difficult to change is more advantageous than the state in which the second variable means is easily changed to the third position.

In the game machine BF4, as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is finished, a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state. game state setting means for setting one game state, wherein the state setting means sets the first state based on the setting of the first game state, and sets the second game state when the second game state is set; The game machine BF7 is characterized in that either the second state or the third state is set based on this.

According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF4, the game states after the execution of the privilege game are the first game state and the second game state more advantageous than the first game state. , wherein the state setting means sets the first state based on the setting of the first game state. Then, one of the second state and the third state is set based on the setting of the second game state.

Thereby, a second game state in which the second state is set and a second game state in which the third state is set can be provided as the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of advantage is variable even though the game state is the same.

<Characteristic BG group> (The degree of advantage is variable by subtracting the number of time reductions during the execution of the jackpot variation)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result; In a gaming machine comprising: display means capable of displaying information; A first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of the setting condition of; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a degree of advantage different from that of the first game state, wherein the second setting condition is the movement of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result; A game machine BG1 characterized in that it can be established at least during execution of target display.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there are some machines that are configured to be able to change the game state after the winning state ends according to the type of winning, and after the winning state ends There are also those that are trying to improve interest in

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if an advantageous game state is set, winning a prize may cause a transition from the advantageous state to a disadvantageous state. There is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player when the player wins in the state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BG1, there is provided a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. a privilege game executing means for executing a game; a display means capable of displaying identification information; First game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition; and second game state setting means predetermined in the first game state. a second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a degree of advantage different from that of the first game state based on the establishment of the set condition, wherein the second set condition is the specific At least during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result.

As a result, even during execution of dynamic display of identification information for indicating a specific determination result, it is possible to play a game in anticipation that the second set condition will be satisfied. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

In the game machine BG1, the determination means comprises a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means. and second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the second setting condition is satisfied. while the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is performed by the first dynamic display means in the first game state, the determination is performed by the second determination means; A gaming machine BG2 characterized in that it is configured with conditions that can be established based on the above.

According to the game machine BG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BG1, the determination means is different from the first determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the first determination condition. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, wherein the dynamic display means displays the determination result of the first determination means. comprising at least a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means; The second setting condition is that while dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is being performed by the first dynamic display means in the first game state , and conditions that can be established based on the execution of the determination by the second determination means.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which discrimination is actively performed by the second discrimination means while dynamic display of identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is being executed. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is that, after the first game state is set, before the privilege game is executed, the determination is performed by the determination means a predetermined specific number of times. A game machine BG3 characterized in that it is established based on what has been done.

According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is set in advance after the first gaming state is set and before the privilege game is executed. Since it is established based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means has been executed a specific number of times, while the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specified discriminating result is being executed, the discrimination by the discriminating means a specific number of times is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the aim is to finish.

In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means displays a dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in the first gaming state for a length equal to or longer than a predetermined specific period. The dynamic display of the identification information is performed during the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means, wherein the dynamic display of the identification information in the first game state is shorter than the specific period A gaming machine BG4 characterized in that the dynamic display of the identification information is executed during a dynamic display period of length.

According to the game machine BG4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in the first game state. , the dynamic display of the identification information is executed during a dynamic display period longer than a predetermined specific period, and the second dynamic display means displays the identification information in the first game state As the dynamic display, dynamic display of the identification information is executed for a dynamic display period shorter than the specific period.

Thereby, in the first game state, when the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is executed by the first dynamic display means, the dynamic display by the second dynamic display means is more effective. Since it can be executed many times, there is an effect that it can be easily set to the second game state.

In any one of gaming machines BG1 to BG4, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball more than the first position. a second position at which it is difficult to enter a ball, a variable means that can be changed to a second position, a privilege granting means that imparts a predetermined privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball entering means, and a discriminating means; Variable game execution for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. means, wherein the second game state makes it easier for the variable game to be executed than the first game state.

According to the game machine BG5, in addition to the effects of the game machines BG1 to BG4, there are a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a privilege giving that imparts a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game is provided, and the second game state makes it easier to execute the variable game than the first game state.

As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the variable game is easily executed during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. It has the effect of being entertaining.

In any one of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5, a privilege of setting one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state and the second game state as the game state after the privilege game is finished. Post-game setting means is provided, and when the privilege game is executed in the second game state than when the privilege game is executed in the first game state, the post-game setting means determines the The game machine BG6 is characterized in that it is configured so that the second game state can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5, a plurality of game states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state are set as the gaming state after the privilege game ends. post-privilege game setting means for setting one of the game states, and when the privilege game is executed in the second game state than when the privilege game is executed in the first game state In this case, the second game state is more likely to be set by the post-privilege game setting means.

Thus, by making the transition to the second game state before the privilege game is executed, the second game state is easily set even after the privilege game is finished, so identification information for indicating a specific determination result During the execution of the dynamic display of (1), there is an effect that a novel game property can be realized in which the determination by the second determination means is performed more positively.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Projection Plate Member 620 of the Projection Unit 600 as an Example>
A light-transmitting member made of a light-transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating a side end surface of the light-transmitting member with light, wherein light is incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which the reflected light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiation means is increased. A gaming machine A1, characterized in that it comprises output increasing means for increasing output, and the output increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light-transmitting member made of a light-transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion is provided, and light irradiation means for irradiating a side end surface of the light-transmitting member is provided. A game machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflective portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of game machine, for example, by arranging the light transmission member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the display of the liquid crystal display device can be seen by the player through the light transmission member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined game state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. to emit from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or design on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it is difficult to make (display) the pattern or pattern clearly stand out. In this case, increasing the output of the light irradiation means not only increases the cost and power consumption, but also increases the amount of heat generated, which causes a problem that other members and equipment are affected by the heat.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, since it is provided with an emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in the light emitted from the light irradiation means, the light reflected by the reflecting portion It is possible to intensify the light emitted from the front of the transmissive member. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Moreover, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and accordingly, deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed.

In addition, the formation position of the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the rear surface of the light transmitting member, or may be inside the light transmitting member.

The gaming machine A2 in the gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the emission increasing means comprises an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member.

According to the game machine A2, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiation means is emitted to the side end surface of the light transmission member. Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light that is irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected by the outer edge member can be made incident from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the amount of light that is incident on the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member is reduced accordingly. Light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light reaching the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member out of the light irradiated from the light irradiation means, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member can be increased. , patterns and designs can be made to stand out (display) clearly. Moreover, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this way, the emission increasing means is provided with an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, so that when another device in the game area emits light In this case, the outer edge member blocks the light from the other device, so that the light can be suppressed from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when no light is incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the light transmitting member), light from other devices is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the display of a pattern or design on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

A game machine A3, wherein in the game machine A2, the outer edge member is arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, respectively. The light that is not directly incident on the side end face and goes off to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that goes off to the back side of the light transmitting member is reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and is made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be increased accordingly.

Furthermore, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light transmission member, even if the light emitted by other devices in the game area reaches from either the front side or the back side of the light transmission member, , the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface can block the light, so that the incident light from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member can be suppressed. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when no light is incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the light transmitting member), light from other devices is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent a pattern or design from being displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

A gaming machine A4 in the gaming machine A2 or A3, characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end face of the light transmission member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmission member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiation means can be emitted. , the light can be reflected by the overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be increased accordingly.

A game machine A5 in any one of the game machines A2 to A4, wherein the outer edge member is made of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A5, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member in the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

That is, for example, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are made of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It easily permeates to the outer edge member. The light transmitted through the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) by the outer surface of the outer edge portion (the boundary with the air), and then returns to the light transmitting member. includes not only those traveling toward the reflecting portions of the light-transmitting member, but also those traveling toward the side end surfaces of the light-transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflector is reduced. On the other hand, as in the game machine A4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a smaller refractive index than that of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is transmitted between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the boundary between and, so that the light reaching the reflecting portion can be ensured.

A gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is arranged with a predetermined gap formed between the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmission member.

According to the gaming machine A6, the outer edge member is arranged with a predetermined gap formed between the front or back surface of the light transmitting member and the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5. The light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected on the front or rear surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive indices of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, light from the side end face of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and more likely to be transmitted through the outer edge member. The light transmitted through the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) by the outer surface of the outer edge portion (the boundary with the air), and then returns to the light transmitting member. includes not only those traveling toward the reflecting portions of the light-transmitting member, but also those traveling toward the side end surfaces of the light-transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflector is reduced. On the other hand, as in the game machine A5, by arranging the outer edge member with a predetermined gap formed between the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the reflected light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the front or back (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be ensured.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A6, a rotation mechanism is provided to rotatably support the light transmission member and apply a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , a curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear that meshes with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and rotates the pinion gear. and a driving means.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape A curved rack gear is engraved on the outer edge member, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshing with the curved rack gear on the outer edge member, and a drive means for rotating the pinion gear. Rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, thereby rotating the light transmitting member together with the outer edge member. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and patterns displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member serves both to condense the light emitted from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and to transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate it. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A7, a rotation mechanism is provided to rotatably support the light transmission member and to apply a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the ring shape, and the rotating mechanism is provided with a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotary mechanism is provided with a plurality of supporting rings guided along the guide grooves, the light transmitting member is exposed to the light through the action of the guide grooves and the supporting rings. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state in which light can enter from the side end surfaces of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light-transmitting member, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member can be viewed by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can serve both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. , the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably pivoted, or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as a mode in which the support wheel is guided along the guide groove, a rotatably supported support wheel rolls or slides along the guide groove. A form in which a fixed support wheel slides along a guide groove is exemplified.

In addition, in the game machine A8 subordinate to the game machine A7, the outer edge member having the curved rack gear carved on either the front or the back of the light transmissive member, and the outer edge member having the guide groove recessed on the light transmissive member. Preferably, they are arranged on the other of the front or back, respectively. That is, by arranging the outer edge member on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member, respectively, the light emitted from the light irradiation means does not directly enter the side end surfaces of the light transmission member, This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the rear side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front side and the outer edge member on the back side, respectively, and enter from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member. In addition, by arranging the outer edge member on each of the front side and the back side of the light transmission member in this way, the light emitted by other devices in the game area reaches from either the front side or the back side of the light transmission member. Even in such a case, the light can be blocked by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, respectively, and can be suppressed from being incident from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine A8, the outer edge member is formed so that its outer peripheral side faces the front or rear surface of the light transmission member with a predetermined gap, and the opposing space between the outer edge member and the light transmission member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side faces the front or back of the light transmission member with a predetermined gap, and the outer edge member and the light transmission member are formed. Since a guide groove is provided between and facing each other, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light-transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by making one inner wall of the guide groove bear on the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, the outer edge member does not need to be formed to have a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure described above.

In addition, since the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member is directed to the front surface of the light transmission member. Alternatively, it can be made easier to reflect on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

In any one of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means has a direction in which light is irradiated from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine A10, characterized in that it is disposed so that the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means emits the light. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of the light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated from the light irradiation means. It is possible to easily reflect the light incident from the front or rear surface of the light transmission member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Irradiation Unit 650 of the Projection Unit 600 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising: a target member to be irradiated with light; and a plurality of light-emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture in which each of the light-emitting surfaces faces the target member, wherein the plurality of light-emitting means One or a plurality of elastically deformable substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined elastically deformed posture Characterized game machine B1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in a posture in which each of the irradiation surfaces faces the target member (for example, JP-A-2015 -29735). According to this game machine, by irradiating light from the light emitting means and making it enter from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting section. The light can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member from a light-transmissive material in a disc shape and forms a reflecting portion, and at the same time, arranges a plurality of light emitting means on the outer peripheral surface of the disc shape (target member). in such a manner as to surround the object member in a posture directed toward the object, and a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the object member was devised (unknown at the time of filing of the present application).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it was newly found that there is a problem that a plurality of light-emitting means must be arranged around the target member, and therefore the arrangement work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to arrange the plurality of light-emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, they are oriented in different directions), the arrangement work is also troublesome from this point of view. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, one or more substrate members on which at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and formed to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in a predetermined posture in which the substrate members are elastically deformed. Since the base member is provided, by arranging one substrate member on the base member, the work of arranging at least two or more light emitting means can be completed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the installation work of the light emitting means.

Further, when the substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is elastically deformed and held in a predetermined posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose a plurality of light-emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing the outer peripheral surface of the target member individually, the work of disposing the light-emitting means can be reduced from this point as well.

A gaming machine B2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1, a block body formed with higher rigidity than the substrate member and arranged on the substrate member is held by the base member.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is arranged on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. Also, it is possible to suppress warpage and bending of the substrate member and to easily regulate the attitude of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be restrained from being affected by the warpage or bending of the substrate member, and the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be easily maintained.

In the game machine B2, the game machine B3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, since the light emitting means is arranged in the area of the board member where the block body is arranged, the posture of the light emitting means is the same as the warp of the board member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be more easily maintained.

In the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of the blocks are arranged on the substrate member at predetermined intervals, and the substrate member positioned between the blocks is elastically deformed so that the base member can be moved. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board member at predetermined intervals, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastically arranged. Since the substrate member is held in a deformed (bent) posture by the base member, the posture of the light emitting means (the direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized compared to the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any one of game machines B2 to B4, the light-emitting means is disposed on the front surface of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is disposed on the substrate member on the side opposite to the target member. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being arranged on the back side.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is arranged on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is disposed on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

A game machine B6, wherein the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the substrate member.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front of the board member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front of the board member, so that the light emitting means can be used. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front side of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member to prevent damage due to contact with the light emitting means.

In game machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

The two screws are preferably arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. By arranging the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, it is possible to easily bring the movable member into contact with the head of the screw, and to easily protect the light emitting means.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B7, one of the base body and the block body is provided with a projection, and the other of the base body and the block body has a fitting hole into which the projection is received and fitted. A game machine B8 characterized by being recessed in the.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B2 to B7, a projection is provided on one of the base body and the block body, and a fitting that receives and fits the projection is provided. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body and the block body, by fitting the projection into the fitting hole, the block body can be arranged on the base body, and labor for the arrangement work can be reduced. . In particular, when a plurality of blocks are arranged on a substrate member, and the blocks are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture, one of the blocks is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), the substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B8, the block body has a concave portion on the side thereof arranged on the substrate member, and the concave portion of the block member accommodates the electronic components arranged on the substrate member. A gaming machine B9, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine B9, in any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body has a concave portion on the side of the substrate member, and the concave portion of the block member is arranged on the substrate member. Since the electronic parts are housed, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the movable member from coming into contact with the electronic component and being damaged.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Vertical Displacement Unit 800 as an Example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member for displacement. In the machine, an elastic member is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position under the action of gravity. In a state in which the displacement member is disposed on the base member so as to be displaced in a direction, and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. There is known a gaming machine that performs an effect by displacing a displacing member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed at a retracted position (for example, one of the first position or the second position) that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position and the second position) overhanging the game area, and the motion of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. A production that makes the person visually recognize is performed. However, in the game machine described above, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the drive means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided with an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in a direction toward position 2 and is displaced from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravitational force acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, a reciprocating displacement (approximately a single vibration ) can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the gravitational direction can be the orthographic projection of uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied to the displacement member from the driving means, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-described displacement (orthographic projection of uniform circular motion). can be increased, and variations in displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, simply by switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member, it is possible to increase the variation of the displacement, and there is no need to complicate the structure and control, thus reducing the product cost and improving the reliability. can be improved.

In the game machine C1, the displacement member is formed such that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side moves up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, one end side is rotatably pivotally supported by the base member, and the other end side is raised and lowered between the first position and the second position. When the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released and the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately single vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, such The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a combination of not only vertical linear motion but also rotational motion centered on the one end side. As a result, it is possible to make such displacement members perform interesting displacements.

In the game machine C2, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is provided, and the transmission means is a rotating member that is rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. and a connecting member whose one end is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and whose other end is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the transmission means includes a rotating member rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a connecting member whose one end is connected to the position where the displacement member is positioned and whose other end is connected to the displacement member. When the displacement member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) by force, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the posture of the connecting member can be changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the pushing/pulling direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocatingly displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed, Such a displacement member can be made to perform interesting displacements.

In the gaming machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are in balance, A gaming machine C4 characterized in that a direction connecting a connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and a connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially perpendicular to each other.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotation member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at equilibrium (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in either direction of push or pull from equilibrium. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocatingly displaced, the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically about the balanced position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member has a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position within the movable range between the first position and the second position is provided. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including A game machine C5 characterized in that, when said displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to , said protruding part faces the other of said rotating member and connecting member so as to be able to come into contact therewith.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the predetermined position of the movable range, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is positioned at the first position or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member, so the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is canceled. When the displacement member is caused to reciprocate about the balanced position (predetermined position), it is possible to avoid the occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion in the central range, thereby smoothing the reciprocation of the displacement member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, in the outer range, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member so as to be able to contact and rotate. Rattling between the member and the connecting member can be suppressed.

In the game machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range is set to include the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the protruding portion is used to suppress looseness between the rotating member and the connecting member, thereby adjusting the posture of the displacement member. While being stabilized, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position toward the second position by the driving force of the driving means, the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion can be avoided, so that the displacement member is acted upon. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is projected toward the center of the game area. , At the first position (retracted position), it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member, improve the appearance and improve durability, and suppress obstruction of the performance of other members. When displacing the from the first position toward the second position (overhanging position), it is possible to rapidly overhang (displace) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. .

In the game machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are positioned substantially on a straight line. Gaming machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially aligned. Since it is positioned on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is the direction toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction to rotate the rotating member is generated. A condition that does not occur (ie dead center) can be created. Therefore, when displacing the displacement member toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, and to displace the displacement member smoothly (quickly). After being arranged at the position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member due to the action of the dead point described above, thereby improving the appearance and improving the durability.

In any one of game machines C3 to C7, the connection member includes a contact portion formed to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion corresponds to a connection position between the displacement member and the base member and the rotation position. It is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. Game machine C8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C3 to C7, the connection member includes a contact portion formed to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion includes the displacement member and the base. Since it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. , when the displacement member rattles with respect to the base member, the abutting portion of the connecting member is brought into contact with the base member, so that the connecting portion between the rotating member and the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member are rotatable). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to the. As a result, the driving force of the drive means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the driving means comprises first driving means and second driving means. and two driving means, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. A game machine D1 characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in different manners.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and which performs an effect by displacing the displacement member. (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is arranged at a retracted position that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area. An effect is performed in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position, and the player visually recognizes the motion of the displaced member displaced toward the extended position.

However, the conventional game machine has a problem that the effect of the presentation by the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional game machine, the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, so the production by the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. As a result, it is difficult to perform an effect that surprises the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is increased or decreased, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the driving means includes the first driving means and the second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means, the effect of the presentation by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, the effect is not one pattern, and one displacement member is used in at least two ways. Since it can be displaced in the same displacement mode, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player by switching the displacement mode.

In the gaming machine D1, a first member slidably disposed on the base member and driven by the first drive means, and a first member slidably displaceably disposed on the base member and driven by the second drive means and a second member driven by a second member, wherein the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are respectively connected to the first member and the second member so as to be at least rotatable. .

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the first member slidably displaceably arranged on the base member and driven by the first drive means and the first member slidably displaceable on the base member and a second member driven by the second drive means, wherein the first and second portions of the displacement member are at least rotatably coupled to the first and second members, respectively, so that the When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the driving force of the second driving means causes the second member to slide. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the game machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by having the same rotation center and different rotation directions, but different rotation directions and different rotation centers. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, making it easier to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from either the first portion of the displacement member or the first member is provided. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first portion of the displacement member and the first member Since the connecting pin protruding from the second member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the driving force of the first driving means linearly displaces the first member or the driving force of the second driving means. Depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced by the above, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, there is no need for a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement along a curved trajectory. Therefore, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are curvedly displaced. ), for example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be utilized and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and operational reliability.

A gaming machine D4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D3, the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel. In addition to a displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (e.g., traverse) the entire displacement member. Embodiments can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, by switching the displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the game machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are made different, and the kind of displacement itself is made different. (that is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, making it easier to surprise the player.

In the game machine D4, when the first member and the second member are respectively driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, the displacement speed of the first member is different from the displacement speed of the second member. A gaming machine D5 characterized by speed.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are respectively driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed of the member is set to a different displacement speed, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be displaced (linearly moved) parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, and can also be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacing member in a displacing manner in which such rotary motion and linear motion are combined in the conventional configuration in which the displacing member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , like the present invention, it has become possible for the first time to utilize two driving means.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member is provided displaceably on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement While the second displacement member is displaced together with the member, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D5, the second displacement member is provided displaceably on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the second displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. , the device (variation) between the displacement mode by the first driving means and the displacement mode by the second driving means can be enlarged. Therefore, by switching the displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Projection Unit 5600 as an Example>
In a game machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light and light irradiation means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are displaceable. , a game machine E1 characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of them.

Here, a game comprising a displacement member displaceably formed between a first position and a second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member, and performing an effect by displacing the displacement member. machine is known (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this game machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is provided inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a translucent material is provided on the front surface (the surface facing the player) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light portion from the back side by the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (light-transmitting portion) emits light. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the light irradiating means irradiates the target member in a constant manner, there is little change in the manner in which the player visually recognizes it, and there is a problem that it is difficult to make the game interesting.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are displaceable. It is possible to change the mode of visual recognition by the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested.

Examples of the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed include a form in which the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and a form in which the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. Examples include a form in which two parts are combined, a form in which these are combined, and the like.

A gaming machine E2 in which the gaming machine E1 comprises a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member. The target wiring can be kept in a fixed state, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

The gaming machine E2 includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, allowing the player to visually recognize a part of the target member through the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated by light. It is formed in a plate shape from a transmissive material and is formed with a reflecting portion, and the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member. A game machine E3 characterized by.

Here, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or pattern.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, it is possible for the player to visually recognize different portions of the target member through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first group out of a plurality of groups constituting the reflective part can be visually recognized through the opening, and a second group, which is a group different from the first group, is the opening. When the target member is displaceable between a second position and a second position that is visible through While allowing the player to visually recognize the formed first pattern or pattern, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. , to a second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

In this case, since the target member is made of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or design visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the game machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape. Gaming machine E4 to play.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and can rotate about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape around the base member. Therefore, compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced, the target member is arranged while securing the number of patterns and patterns that are visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. can reduce the space required for

In the game machine E2, the target member is formed of a light-transmissive material in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front and has a reflecting portion, and receives the light emitted from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the target member. , the game machine E5, wherein the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E6, the target member is formed of a light-transmissive material in a circular plate shape and has a reflective portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and projected from the side end face. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and patterns displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. can.

In the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the center of rotation of the target member.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( irrespective of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily made constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

A gaming machine E7 in which the gaming machine E1 comprises a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member, so that the combination of the displacements of the two allows the light irradiation means to move the target member. It is possible to increase the variation of changes in the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the manner in which the player visually recognizes, and it is possible to make the player more interested.

In the game machine E7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace the target member is provided, and the light irradiating means contacts the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E7, it is provided with a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation means displaces the object by the driving force applied from the driving means. Since the member is displaced together with the target member when the member is brought into contact with the target member, it can be used as a drive unit for displacing the target member, and there is no need to separately provide a drive unit for displacing the light irradiation unit. can.

<Feature F group> (Free setting of countdown notice)
effect period setting means for setting one effect period out of different effect periods; specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a specific period set within the one effect period; a notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect for notifying in advance that a specific effect is to be executed; and notification effect setting means for setting a trigger for ending the notification effect based on information.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the game has been won. Then, a game configured to be able to execute a pre-notification effect (countdown effect) for informing the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect) is executed among the effects to be executed for a predetermined period. there is a machine (For example, JP-A-2013-198568).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by informing the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect is to be executed, it is possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the player's expectation for the big win. However, when it is determined that the advance notification effect is to be executed, the period for executing the advance notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set. There is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the performance. In addition, in the conventional gaming machine having the above-described configuration, while the advance notification effect is being executed, the effect mode of the advance notification effect is varied (for example, the specific effect that is the target of the advance notification effect is varied). ), and the production effect cannot be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine F1, as the execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is to be executed, the notification effect setting means sets the start opportunity based on the first information, and sets the start opportunity based on the second information. A termination trigger is set. As a result, the period for executing the information performance is set based on a plurality of different information, so that the period for executing the information performance can be freely set and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F1 has execution information determining means for determining execution information of the specific effect, and the notification effect setting means uses the execution information of the specific effect determined by the execution information determining means as the second information. The game machine F2 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the execution information for indicating that the specific production is to be executed is set as the second information, and the trigger for ending the notification production is set. You can set the notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period during which the notification performance is executed, and at the same time, it is possible to execute the notification performance corresponding to the specific performance to be executed, so that there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the execution information discriminating means discriminates at least the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the execution information for indicating that the specific production is to be executed is set as the second information, and the end timing of the notification production is set. You can set the notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the timing at which the specific performance is executed while freely setting the period during which the notification performance is executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

The gaming machine F2 or F3 has specific effect setting means for setting one specific effect out of a plurality of specific effects having different execution timings as the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A gaming machine F4 characterized by:

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2 or F3, it is possible to easily set the notification effect in accordance with the timing at which the specific effect is executed for a plurality of specific effects with different execution timings. can. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the period during which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, so there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means sets the timing for setting the start timing of the notification effect based on the first information to be different from the timing for setting the timing to start the notification effect based on the second information, and sets the timing for ending the notification effect based on the second information. A gaming machine F5, characterized in that it sets .

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the execution period of the notification performance can be set at different timings, so that the period during which the notification performance is executed can be freely set. There is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F5, the notification effect period setting means sets a trigger for ending the notification effect based on the second information while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. Characterized game machine F6.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F5, after the notification performance is executed, the timing for ending the notification performance can be set. Set the execution period. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period during which the notification effect is executed, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, when the notification effect is executed, it is not set at which timing the specific effect to be executed is targeted for the notification effect, so it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the content of the notification effect in advance. can be reliably prevented.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F6, an operation means operable by the player, an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation executed by the operation effect execution means. operation determination means for determining that the operation means is operated during the performance, and the notification performance setting means sets the performance mode of the notification performance based on the determination result of the operation determination means. A gaming machine F7 characterized by:

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines F1 to F6, the performance period of the notification performance is set based on the operation content of the operation means during the operation performance, so the player's participation in the performance is increased. It has the effect of increasing motivation.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. and at least the second notification effect period is set based on the second information.

According to the game machine F8, in any of the game machines F1 to F7, the second notification effect period can be set based on the second information in the period during which the notification effect is executed, so the notification effect period can be set freely. , it is possible to secure a period for executing an effect based on the second information, and it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine F8, the notification effect executing means executes a time-dependent effect indicating a period of time until the specific effect is executed during the second notification effect period. Machine F9.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of the game machine F8, the timing effect can be executed during the second notification effect period. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine F9, based on the length of the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means for determining the effect period of the notification effect set by the notification effect setting means and the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means, A game machine F10 characterized by comprising temporal performance period setting means for setting a period in which the temporal performance is executed.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F9, the period for executing the performance with time is executed for a certain period by the time-lapse performance period setting means based on the length of the performance period during which the notification performance is executed. As a trigger for executing performance over time, the timing obtained by subtracting a fixed period from the execution timing of the specific performance is determined, so even when a different performance period is set by the performance period setting means, the start timing of the specific performance can be accurately determined. There is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the player.

In any one of the game machines F8 to F10, the notification effect setting means sets the effect mode of the first effect to be executed during the first notification effect period based on the first information. The game machine F11 is characterized by having a first effect mode varying means for varying the first effect mode when a predetermined effect variable condition is satisfied during one notification effect period.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the performance mode of the first performance executed during the first notification performance period is established while the first performance is being executed. It is changed when a possible effect variable condition is satisfied. As a result, after the notification effect is executed, the effect mode of the notification effect can be changed, so there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F11, the game machine F12 is characterized in that the effect variable condition is satisfied when the notification effect setting means sets a trigger for ending the notification effect.

According to the gaming machine F12, when the timing for ending the notification effect is set and the effect period of the notification effect is determined, the effect mode of the first effect can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first effect corresponding to the set end timing, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine F1, an operating means operable by a player, an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect for operating the operating means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means. operation determination means for determining that the means has been operated, and the operation effect execution means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. A gaming machine F13, wherein the notification effect setting means sets the second information based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the trigger for ending the notification effect is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to change the presentation period of the notification presentation by the operation of the player, and to enhance the presentation effect.

The gaming machine F13 has specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and the notification effect setting means indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting means. A gaming machine F14 characterized in that the information for the game is the second information.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F13, a specific period during which the specific effect is executed is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect, and during the set specific period Since the effect period of the notification effect can be varied based on the above, there is an effect that the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed.

In the gaming machine F14, the specific period setting means sets one predetermined period out of a plurality of predetermined periods as the specific period, and the specific effect executing means is set by the specific period setting means. A gaming machine F15 characterized by executing the specific effect corresponding to the specific period.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F14, a specific effect corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting means is executed. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the game machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. and the operation effect execution means executes the operation effect during the first notification effect period, and sets the length of the second notification effect period to correspond to the specific period set by the specific period setting means. It has an effect period variable means for varying the effect period. A gaming machine F16 characterized by:

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effects of the game machine F15, in the notification effect set from the first notification effect period and the second notification effect period, the operation effect is executed during the first notification effect period, The length of the notification effect is varied by varying the length of the second notification effect period based on the operation contents of the operating means during the operation effect. Therefore, when the length of the notification effect is varied, it is possible to ensure the period during which the operation effect is executed, so there is an effect that the effect can be executed in which the player can easily operate the operation means.

<Characteristic G group> (Variation of HP display)
Determination means for executing determination based on performance information; Variable performance execution means for executing variable performance for varying performance values based on the determination result of the determination means; a first effect value determining means for determining a first effect value for varying the effect value, and the effect value when the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means. and a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the value of the second effect value.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won a big win. Then, as a variable production, a game machine executes a production (battle production) in which the player's character and the enemy character play against each other, and notifies the result of whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the value of each physical strength point at the end of the production. be. (For example, JP-A-2015-9075).

In such a conventional game machine, the effect of reducing the physical strength points of the own character or the enemy character is performed multiple times during the battle performance, and the decreasing physical strength points are used to determine whether the player has won the jackpot or not. By notifying the player in advance of the execution timing of the effect of (1), the variable effect can be executed while increasing the player's expectation for the big win. Furthermore, by setting in detail the physical strength points that decrease during the battle production, the number of production patterns of the battle production is increased, thereby suppressing the players from becoming bored with the battle production. However, in the conventional game machine, detailed physical strength points displayed on the display screen are managed, and the next physical strength points are set based on the managed physical strength points. There is a problem that the amount of processing for management becomes enormous. It should be noted that it is possible to simplify the reduction management of physical strength points by reducing the number of patterns in which the physical strength points are reduced during the battle production. There was a problem that I got tired of it.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the effect value is determined based on the values determined by the plurality of determining means, it is easier to increase the variations of the effect value than when the effect value is determined by one determining means. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine G1, an effect state setting means capable of setting a specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed, and when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means, the effect value is set. a production value updating means for continuously variably updating; and a first production value storage means capable of storing the first production value determined by the first production value determining means, wherein the production value updating means is A gaming machine G2, characterized in that said effect value is variably updated based on said first effect value stored in said first effect value storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, when the rendering value determined based on the first rendering value and the second rendering value is variably updated, the combined rendering value is not used. Since only one effect value is stored and the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value, the effect value actually displayed (the effect value obtained by adding the first effect value and the second effect value) is reduced. It is possible to reduce the patterns of values (first effect values) variably updated by the effect value updating means with respect to the display patterns, and to reduce the processing load.

In the gaming machine G2, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect value updating means, and an effect for displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine G3, characterized by comprising mode display means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect updating means is displayed. There is an effect that the variable amount of the effect value can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine G3, the first effect value is a part of the effect value, the second effect value is composed of a value different from the first effect value, and the first effect and the A gaming machine G4, characterized in that it has effect value summing means for calculating the effect value by summing it with a second effect value.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the first effect value, which is part of the effect value, and the second effect value, which is different from the first effect value, are added by the effect value adding means. Since the effect value is determined, there is an effect that the effect value can be diversified.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a prescribed discrimination condition is established, and a privilege is given based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. and a privilege granting means, wherein the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means when the determination by the determining means is executed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined when the determination by the determination means is executed, and the effect value changes. An effect can be executed so as to be related to the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable state of the production value, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G5, the second effect value determining means determines the second effect value based on the fact that the first effect value determining means has determined the first effect value. A game machine G6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the first rendering value is determined, the second rendering value is determined. A production value that is the sum of the values is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the effect value that is changed by the execution of the discrimination by the discriminating means.

In the game machine G5 or G6, the game machine G7 is characterized in that the first effect value determination means varies the variable amount of the first effect value based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5 or G6, the variable amount of the effect value can be changed based on the determination result of the determination means, so that the variable amount of the effect value can be changed for the player. can be made to pay attention, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determination means makes it easy to determine the first effect value so that the variable amount becomes large when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine G8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G7, the larger the variable amount of the effect value is, the easier it is to give the privilege, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable amount of the effect value. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G8, a first range or a second range different from the first range as a selection range in which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determination means can be selected. and determination value determination means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and the second effect value determination The means selects one selection range from among a plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means, and determines the second effect value. A game machine G9 characterized by.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines G1 to G8, the selection range for selecting the second effect value is varied based on whether the first effect value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. can let Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect value.

In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means stores, as the second effect value, a first selection range storing a range in which the first effect value can be increased and decreased, and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased. and a second selection range in which the second effect value determining means determines that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value as a determination result of the determined value determining means. (2) a game machine G10, wherein the second effect value is set by selecting the second selection range;

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G9, when the first effect value is less than the predetermined value, the second effect value for decreasing the first effect value is selected, so the first effect It is possible to suppress the effect value obtained by adding the value and the second effect value from becoming larger than the first effect value. As a result, for example, when a lower limit value (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it is possible to suppress the determination of a value greater than the lower limit value as the effect value, giving the player a sense of discomfort. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that causes the user to be overwhelmed.

<Characteristic group H> (Suggestion of advantageous period of falling lottery machine)
First determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is established, and privilege game execution for executing a privilege game when a first determination result by the first determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a high-probability state in which the first determination result by the first determination means is likely to be the predetermined first determination result; a probability setting means capable of setting a low-probability state in which the first determination result is unlikely to occur; The probability setting means sets the low probability state when the second determination result by the second determination means is the predetermined second determination result. A game state setting means capable of setting, as game states, a first game state in which the predetermined determination condition is likely to be established, and a second game state in which the predetermined determination condition is more difficult to be established than in the first game state. and a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for notifying the period during which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means includes: The second game state is set when the first condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set, and the period effect executing means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. and a second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect, and the first condition is set by the probability setting means. Established when both the first requirement that the low-probability game is set and the second requirement that the determination is performed a predetermined number of times by the first determination means in the state where the first game state is set are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by comprising a period effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the period effect in correspondence with the establishment information of the first requirement or the second requirement.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the game state is set to an advantageous game state (for example, a variable state in which the probability of winning is high) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the player wins. There is a gaming machine that indicates to the player whether or not the period in which the game state continues will end, depending on the result of an effect (for example, a battle effect). (For example, JP-A-2011-143197).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, if a win is made while the advantageous gaming state continues, the effect result of the win pattern in which the character wins is displayed, and if a win is made when the advantageous gaming state ends, the winning pattern is displayed. The result of the defeat pattern is displayed, and if the win is not won (when the advantageous game state is set continuously), the battle effect is displayed so that the result of the draw pattern without winning or losing is displayed. Since it is executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the battle production, and to enhance the production effect. However, if the game is executed for a long period of time in an advantageous game state without winning a win, as a result, it becomes easier to execute a battle effect in which the effect result of the draw pattern is displayed, and the player does not respond to the battle effect. There was a problem that the degree of expectation of Furthermore, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a specific variation pattern is drawn without winning a prize as a result of the lottery, the draw pattern battle effect is executed. When a specific variation pattern is continuously drawn, there is a problem that the battle performance of the draw pattern is continuously executed, and the player's expectation for the battle performance is further lowered.

According to the gaming machine H1, among the period effects executed in the state where the first game state is set, the effect mode of the second effect is set corresponding to the establishment information of the first requirement and the second requirement. Therefore, it is possible to predict whether or not the first requirement and the second requirement are met based on the presentation mode of the second presentation. Thus, even when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the player can predict the game state based on the effect mode of the second effect to be newly executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the period presentation.

In the game machine H1, the game machine H2 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has a first effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the effect mode of the first effect for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied is the effect result of the second effect, and the first condition or Since it is set based on whether or not the second requirement is satisfied, the result of whether or not the first condition is satisfied and the situation until the first condition is satisfied can be predicted according to the effect mode of the first effect. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay more attention to the effect mode of the first effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1 or H2, the effect mode of the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is based on whether or not the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to predict the situation until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the second effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period effect mode setting means sets a different effect mode when either the first requirement or the second requirement is met. Characterized game machine H4.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the effect mode of the period effect is changed by satisfying any one of the plurality of requirements for satisfying the first condition. variable. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first condition is established according to the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the period effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine H4 has a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period effect mode setting means determines the remaining period determining means when the first requirement is satisfied. The game machine H5 is characterized in that it sets an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to the determination result.

According to the game machine H5, the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thereby, the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied can be suggested by the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game while giving him/her a sense of danger, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the period effect executing means switches the period effect being executed from the second effect to the first effect when a predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied, and It is characterized in that the easiness of establishment of the performance switching condition is differentiated between when the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and when the low probability state is set. Game machine H6.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the second Since the frequency of execution of one performance can be varied, the currently set probability state can be predicted based on the frequency of execution of the first performance, and interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

The game machine H7 is characterized in that the game machine H6 has condition setting means for making it easier to satisfy the effect switching condition for a predetermined period after the first requirement is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6, it is possible to facilitate execution of the first effect during a predetermined period after the low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency with which the first effect is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the period effect execution means executes the first effect when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result. A gaming machine H8 characterized by:

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the first effect is executed even when the determination result of the first determination means is the determination result that the privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the first performance is executed, the player pays attention to the performance while being conscious of whether or not the privilege game is won or whether or not the first condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in the performance that is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8 has a number-of-time measuring means for measuring the number of times of the period effect executed while the first game state is continuously set by the game state setting means. The game machine H9 is characterized in that the second effect mode setting means sets the second effect mode based on the number of executions of the period effect counted by the frequency counting means.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the period presentation is repeatedly executed, the second presentation mode is set based on the number of repetitions. When the game state is continuously set for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the same effect mode from being repeatedly set as the second effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines H6 to H9, effect period determination means for determining a effect period after the first effect is executed by the period effect execution means; a performance regulation means for regulating execution of the first performance by the period performance execution means when the performance period determined by the performance period determination means is within a predetermined period. Characterized game machine H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the presentation switching condition is established, it is determined that the presentation period after the first presentation is executed is within a predetermined period. When it is done, the execution of the first effect is regulated by the effect regulating means. As a result, frequent execution of the first effect can be suppressed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the execution of the first effect.

In the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result is not restricted by the effect regulation means. Characteristic game machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H10, the first effect that is executed when the privilege game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the performance period determining means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress deterioration of the performance effect when executed. In addition, when the first performance is executed again within a predetermined performance period after the previous first performance is executed, the degree of expectation for execution of the privilege game can be increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced. has the effect of

<Feature J group> (Different target effects at the notification timing of expectation increase effects)
Expectation level display control means capable of displaying, on a display means, a plurality of expectation level display modes capable of suggesting in stages an expectation level indicating that a predetermined condition has been established; display mode changing means for stepwise varying an expectation level display mode; variable information setting means for setting variable information to be varied by the display mode varying means; and at least one of the plurality of expectation level display modes. variable suggestion effect execution means for executing a variable suggestion effect suggesting that the degree display mode is variable, wherein the expectation level display control means controls the expectation level of at least one of the plurality of expectation level display modes. The game machine J1 is characterized in that display modes are displayed on the display means at different timings, and that the game machine J1 has execution timing setting means for setting timings for executing the variable suggestive effects.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won a big win. Then, as the display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the effect executed for the predetermined period, there are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the degree of expectation of the big win, and the degree of expectation of the big win of this variable performance is displayed. There is a gaming machine that notifies the player by the display mode of the character that is displayed. (For example, JP-A-2013-248305).

In such a conventional game machine, the degree of expectation for a big win can be shown to the player by the display mode of the characters displayed during the variable performance, so that the player is interested in the performance contents of the variable performance to be executed. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Furthermore, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, among the plurality of display modes, a plurality of types of expectation display modes are provided in which a display mode corresponding to the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed, and the display modes of each expectation display mode are combined. Since it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win to the player by judging it realistically, it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation for the big win based on the display modes of the plurality of types of expectation degree display modes, and the effect is executed. It was possible to make the player pay attention to the contents, and to enhance the performance effect. In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a suggestion effect for suggesting the display mode of the expectation level display mode can be executed, and which display mode is to be displayed as the expectation level display mode. There is also a game machine that executes an expectation degree display mode pre-suggestion effect for making a player predict in which display mode the expectation degree display mode will be displayed as a variable effect. There is also a game machine that changes the display mode of the degree-of-expectation display mode from the display mode once displayed on the display screen.

However, in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of expectation level display modes, when an expectation level display mode prior suggestion effect corresponding to a specific expectation level display mode is executed, expectations that are not subject to the expectation level display mode prior suggestion effect This implicitly denies that the degree display mode is variable, and there is a problem that the performance effect is lowered.

According to the gaming machine J1, the variable suggestion effect execution means provides a variable suggestion effect suggesting that one of the plurality of expectation level display modes displayed on the display means at different timings will be varied. executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestive effect is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestive effect can be varied. As a result, even if the same presentation mode is used as the variable suggestion presentation, there is an effect that it is possible to make the expectation degree display mode that is the suggestion target of the variable suggestion presentation different.

In the gaming machine J1, a determination means for performing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit based on the result of determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; and wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, when a privilege is given, the expectation level display mode can easily indicate a high expectation level. I will keep an eye on the content. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the variable suggestion effect notifies variable information of an expectation level display mode that is changed in stages.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, it is possible to inform the variable information of the target expectation level display mode by the variable suggestion performance, so that the variable suggestion performance can be provided to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user pay attention and enhance the production effect.

In the game machine J3, the variable suggestive effect displays a plurality of variable amounts including at least a variable amount for indicating the extent to which the degree-of-expectation display mode is actually varied. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable amounts are displayed as the variable suggestive effect. There is an effect that the game can be played while giving expectation so that the amount becomes a real variable amount, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the game machine has a target notification means for notifying an expectation degree display mode targeted for the variable suggestion performance executed by the variable suggestion performance execution means before the variable suggestion performance ends. A gaming machine J5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, by notifying the player in advance of the target of the variable suggestive effect to be executed this time, the variable There is an effect that the suggestive performance can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

In any one of the game machines J2 to J5, an expectation class setting means for setting an expectation class based on the determination result of the discriminating means, and based on the expectation class set by the expectation class setting means and an expectation level setting means for setting an expectation level for each of the plurality of expectation level display modes, wherein the expectation level display control means comprises the plurality of expectation level display modes set by the expectation level setting means. of the expectations, the expectation level display mode for indicating at least a part of the expectations is displayed in advance, and the variable suggestion effect is set by the already displayed expectations and the expectations level setting means. A game machine J6 characterized in that a difference from the expected degree is suggested as the variable amount.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines J2 to J5, an effect is executed that suggests the difference between the already displayed expectation level and the preset expectation level as a variable amount. Therefore, even if the variable amount displayed as the variable suggestion effect is small, if the variable suggestion effect is executed for the expectation level display mode in which the high expectation level is already displayed, the benefit is given. can increase the likelihood of Therefore, not only the performance content of the variable suggestive performance but also the display mode of the current degree of expectation display mode is selected by lottery, so that there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine J2, an operation means operable by a player, an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect for causing the operation means to be operated, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. an operation determining means for determining that the means has been operated, wherein the display mode changing means varies the degree of expectation display mode according to the determination result by the operation determining means. Characterized game machine J8.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effects of the game machine J2, the degree-of-expectation display mode can be varied in response to the operation of the operation means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means. has the effect of

In the gaming machine J8, a determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result; Acquisition means for acquiring entry information when a prescribed acquisition condition is met, and storing the entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a prescribed number as an upper limit until the prescribed determination condition is met. possible storage means, preliminary discrimination means for executing preliminary discrimination based on the said entering ball information stored in the storing means, and the number of entering ball information indicating the number of said entering ball information stored in said storing means. and display means for displaying the number of entered ball information displayed by the displayed means for the number of entered ball information in response to the determination result of the operation determination means when a predetermined additional condition is met. A gaming machine J9 characterized by having additional effect executing means for executing an additional effect for changing a display mode for indicating the number of pieces of information on entering a ball.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J8, the display mode for indicating the number of entered ball information can be changed by the additional effect executed in response to the operation of the operating means. , there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

The game machine J9 has an effect condition determining means for determining whether the expectation level display mode displayed by the expectation level display control means satisfies a predetermined effect condition, and the effect condition determining means satisfies the effect condition. A gaming machine J10 characterized in that the additional condition is satisfied when it is determined that the additional condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J9, when the expectation degree display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy the predetermined rendering conditions, the additional rendering is executed. There is an effect that the relevance can be given and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J10, the effect condition determination means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when the expectation level display control means does not display a predetermined number of the expectation level display modes. Game machine J11.

According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J10, by executing additional effects, the number of effects to be executed can be complemented. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease.

<Feature K group> (Holding consecutive jackpot production)
Determining means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is established; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result; and a predetermined acquisition condition. acquisition means for acquiring entry information when the condition is satisfied; and storage means capable of storing the entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. and a pre-discrimination means for executing pre-discrimination based on the entered ball information stored in the storage means, wherein the pre-discrimination means determines that a pre-discrimination condition is satisfied at least during the privilege game. The pre-determination is executed when the pre-determination is performed, and the pre-determination means has a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode during the privilege game corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determination means. Game machine K1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, ball entry information is acquired based on a ball entering a starting hole, and holding means capable of holding the ball entry information until a lottery condition is satisfied, and a lottery condition is satisfied. A lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on ball entry information when the player wins, and an execution means for executing a winning game advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is winning. There is a game machine. Then, it has a preliminary discrimination means for discriminating in advance the entering ball information held in the holding means before the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the advance discrimination means determines that there is a winning in the holding at the time of the end of the winning game. There is a gaming machine that continues to display the display mode (the number of rounds) during a winning game when it is determined. (For example, JP-A-2014-30737).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, when a win is won again during a hold, a special effect can be executed during the second win game, and the player can be given a sense of satisfaction. However, it is configured to discriminate the winning information held at the end of the jackpot, and during the first winning game, the effect set at the time of winning is only executed. Even if the prize winning information is reserved, the performance for the first winning game cannot be changed, and the performance effect cannot be enhanced.

In addition, although the production is configured to be continuous with respect to a plurality of winning games, only the production that allows the player to easily identify the break between the first winning game and the second winning game is executed. , there is a problem that it is possible to easily predict how many winning games will be executed during the performance that is continuously executed during the winning game.

According to the gaming machine K1, the effect mode during the privilege game is set based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means executed during the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the effect mode corresponding to the preliminary determination result.

In the gaming machine K1, the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means includes a plurality of small privilege games, and the preliminary determination condition is established when the minor privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, when the small privilege game is executed, the pre-determining condition is satisfied and the effect mode during the privilege game is set, so the execution status of the small privilege game It is possible to set the effect mode of the privilege game in accordance with. Therefore, even if the effect mode of the privilege game is set during the privilege game, there is an effect that the privilege game can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

The gaming machine K2 has privilege game selection means for selecting one privilege game from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. A game machine K3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, one privilege game is selected from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed. There is an effect that variation can be provided and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the pre-determining means, when the result of the pre-determining is a predetermined result of pre-determining, the storing means includes the entering ball information for executing the privilege game. The performance mode setting means sets the performance mode during the privilege game corresponding to the number of small privilege games to be executed in the privilege game pre-determined by the preliminary discrimination means. A game machine K4 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3, the effect mode during the privilege game is set according to the number of the small privilege games determined by the preliminary determination means, so that the player can enjoy the privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user pay attention to the production mode.

In a gaming machine K3 or K4, an execution number storage means for storing the number of small privilege games of the privilege game selected by the privilege game selection means, and the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means. Among them, a small privilege game number reporting means for reporting at least a part, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means, and the small privilege reported by the small privilege game number reporting means a first difference determination means for determining a difference from the number of games; and a notification for setting the number of the small privilege games to be notified by the number of small privilege games notification means based on the determination result of the first difference determination means. and a number setting means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the number of small privilege games (round games) to be executed during the privilege game (jackpot) is partially notified, so that one privilege can be obtained. To make it difficult for a player to grasp the number of small privilege games to be executed during a game, and to play a game while expecting that more small privilege games are executed even while the privilege games are being executed. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine K5 is characterized by comprising adding means for adding the number of said small privilege games to be executed in said privilege game pre-determined by said pre-determination means to said execution number storage means. Machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, when it is determined in advance that the privilege game will be executed by the prior determination means during the privilege game (jackpot), in the privilege game determined in advance The number of small privilege games to be executed is stored in the execution number storage means by the adding means. As a result, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times at short intervals, the number of the small privilege games notified while the previous privilege game is being executed is the same as the number of the small privilege games to be executed in the later privilege game. can be set by adding the number of Therefore, by seeing the number of small privilege games notified during the privilege game by the small privilege game number reporting means, it is possible to predict whether or not the next privilege game will be executed, and one privilege game ends. There is an effect that it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game after playing.

The game machine K5 or K6 has update determination means for determining whether or not to update the number of the small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games informing means when the small privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5 or K6, the number of small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games notifying means is determined by the update determining means. Even if the number of small privilege games is set by the setting means, the number of small privilege games may not be updated. Therefore, when a new small privilege game is executed, even if the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number reporting means is not updated, when the next small privilege game is executed, It is possible to leave the possibility of updating the number of small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games informing means, and it is possible to play games while expecting that more small privilege games will be executed. effective.

In the game machine K7, a forced update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games notification means when the determination result by the first difference determination means satisfies the first condition. A game machine K8 characterized by having:

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7, when the determination result by the first difference determination means satisfies the first condition, the forced update means is notified by the small privilege game number notification means. By forcibly updating the number of small privilege games being played, there is an effect that it is possible to set a period during which the player is allowed to play the privilege game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, executed small privilege game number reporting means for reporting the number of the small privilege games already executed, the number of the small privilege games reported by the small privilege game number reporting means, Second difference determination means for determining a difference from the number of small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means, and when the determination result by the second difference determination means satisfies a second condition. and forced update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games notification means.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effect of the game machine K7 or K8, when the determination result by the second difference determination means satisfies the second condition, the forced update means notifies by the small bonus game number notification means. To prevent the number of executed minor privilege games from becoming larger than the number of minor privilege games notified by a minor privilege game number informing means in order to forcibly update the number of executed minor privilege games. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small privilege game number reporting means performs the prior determination of the entering ball information acquired by the acquisition means during a specific period of time during which the privilege game is executed. is the result of the predetermined pre-determination, the game machine K10 is characterized in that a specific number of small bonus games is notified.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines K5 to K9, among the periods during which the privilege game is being executed, the entering ball information acquired within the specific period is the privilege game as a result of the preliminary determination. , the specific small privilege game number notification is executed by the small privilege game number notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of obtaining information on entering a ball during a privilege game.

In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means and the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number reporting means a third difference determining means for determining a difference; and when the determination result of the third difference determining means satisfies a third condition in a state where the one privilege game is finished, the one privilege game is finished. and effect continuation means for continuing the effect executed during the privilege game until a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K5 to K10, when the determination result by the third difference determination means satisfies the third condition, the effect continuation means executes during the privilege game. The effect will continue to be displayed. As a result, when it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the privilege game is to be executed, an effect to be executed during the privilege game can be continuously displayed after the end of the first privilege game. be.

In the gaming machine K11, the gaming machine K12 is characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied at least until the next privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K11, during the period from the end of the first privilege game to the execution of the second privilege game by the effect continuation means, during the privilege game It is possible to reliably execute the production to be performed. Therefore, since a series of performances can be executed for a plurality of privilege games, it is possible to play the game while expecting that more small privilege games will be executed while the performance is being executed. effective.

In any one of the game machines K5 to K12, stored number determination means for determining the number of the entered ball information stored in the storage means when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result; and an effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes to be executed during a privilege game, and stored in the effect mode storage means based on the number of the entering means determined by the storage number determination means. A gaming machine K13, characterized in that it has privilege game effect mode selection means for selecting one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes.

According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines K5 to K12, in the case of a predetermined determination result, an effect mode during the privilege game is performed based on the number of entered ball information stored in the storage means. is selected, various effects can be provided to the player during the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K13, the effect mode storage means stores, as the plurality of effect modes, that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the predetermined preliminary determination result when the privilege game is started. A gaming machine K14, characterized in that it stores at least a first performance mode that can be notified to the player and a second performance mode that can be notified to the player after the privilege game is finished.

According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K13, it is notified that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the predetermined preliminary determination result by the performance mode selected by the special game performance mode selection means. Since it is possible to vary the timing of the display, the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group L> (change the production frequency with the game history)
Determining means for executing determination when a determination condition is established, effect executing means for executing an effect for indicating the determination result of the determining means, and effect for indicating a specific result of determination by the effect executing means. When a special condition is established, the corresponding game information is stored as history information. and determining means for determining, based on the history information, whether to execute a specific effect among the effects to be executed.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the game has been won. Then, there is a game machine that executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation result of the operation means that can be operated by the player, as the variable effect that is executed for a predetermined period. (For example, JP-A-2012-249877).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the presentation mode is varied based on the player's operation on the operating means, the player can be motivated to participate in the game. However, there is a problem that if the operation effect is frequently executed for a player who does not operate the operating means with enthusiasm, the player's desire to play will decrease.

According to the gaming machine L1, since execution of the specific effect is determined based on the history information, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the specific effect according to the progress of the game, etc., thereby improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine L1 has an effect selection table storage means in which a plurality of effect selection tables are set so that the selection rate of the specific effect is different, and the determination means selects the effect corresponding to the history information. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that it determines a table.

According to the game machine L2, the selection rate of the specific performance can be switched by selecting the corresponding performance selection table in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, so that the selection rate of the specific performance can be varied with easy control. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine L1 or L2 has operation means operated by a player and operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and one of the effects includes the An operation effect is set to change the effect mode when the operation determination means determines the predetermined operation, and the specific condition is at least one condition that the operation determination means determines the predetermined operation. A game machine L3 characterized by being set to the conditions of

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2, by operating the operation means in the operation presentation, not only can the presentation mode be changed, but also the specific condition can be easily established, so that the history information can be obtained. can be varied and the execution ratio of the specific performance can be affected.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L3, accumulation means capable of accumulating at least the history information, setting means capable of setting accumulation values up to a predetermined upper limit based on accumulation results of the accumulation means, and selecting means for selecting an accumulated privilege system corresponding to the set accumulation value from among a plurality of accumulated privilege systems; and accumulated privilege granting means for imparting an accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system selected by the selecting means. and, when the new accumulated value is set by the setting means, the accumulated privilege granting means gives a new accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated value privilege selected by the selecting means. and wherein the selection means selects one accumulated privilege system from among a plurality of accumulated privilege systems based on the history information stored in the storage means. F4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, an accumulated privilege system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and an accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system is awarded. As a result, based on the history information, both the setting of the frequency with which the specific effect is executed and the provision of the accumulated benefit are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L4, the accumulated privilege imparted by the accumulated privilege imparting means differs for each of the accumulated privilege systems selected by the selecting means.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L4, the accumulated benefits to be given can be varied according to the accumulated privilege system, so the enjoyment of obtaining various accumulated benefits while changing the operation contents of the operating means. can be provided to the player. Further, by changing the operation contents of the operation means, it is possible to change the performance frequency, so that there is an effect that the player can be provided with a new enjoyment for the performance to be executed.

The game machine L5 is characterized by comprising history information erasing means for erasing the history information stored in the storage means to the extent that the different accumulated privilege systems can be selected by the selection means. Game machine L6 to play.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L5, the history information can be deleted to the extent that a different accumulated privilege system can be selected. It is possible to make it easier for the accumulated privilege system to be selected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the motivation to acquire other accumulated benefits.

In addition, since the history information is partially erased by the history information erasing means, the accumulated value set by the setting means also changes (decreases). There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the value is reached and the performance effect is lowered.

A game machine L7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines L4 to L6, the game machine L7 is characterized by having guide means for guiding game contents for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L4 to L6, a specific accumulated privilege system is selected by playing a game based on the game content guided by the guidance means. Therefore, there is an effect that various accumulation benefits can be given to the player, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L7, the guiding means guides the game content for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by varying the presentation mode of the operation presentation.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of the game machine L7, since the presentation mode of the operation presentation can be varied by the guide means, a different accumulated benefit system can be selected simply by operating the operation means according to the presentation mode of the operation presentation. It will be done. Therefore, there is an effect that various benefits can be given to the player and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine L8, the guide means selects, as the effect mode of the operation effect, a notification effect mode in which the operation means is made to perform the predetermined operation, or a non-report effect mode in which no notification is made. A game machine L9 characterized in that it guides game contents by using a.

According to the gaming machine L9, as the operation effects, it is possible to execute the effect mode in which a predetermined operation is easily performed on the operation means and the effect mode in which it is difficult to perform the operation means. A different accumulated benefit system can be selected simply by operating. Therefore, there is an effect that various benefits can be given to the player and the interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines L4 to L9 has system selection means for allowing the player to select the specific accumulated privilege system corresponding to the game contents guided by the guide means from among the plurality of accumulated privilege systems. A game machine L10 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L4 to L9, it is possible to notify the game content so that the player can select the accumulated privilege system desired by the player, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature M group> (Discrimination measures when a small hit is confirmed)
A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball based on a player's operation, a ball entering means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means, and a game ball entering the ball entering means. judgment means capable of judging the case, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means and dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means is stopped. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, and a game ball enters during the period in which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball entry means that allows a ball to enter, a specific area in which the game ball entering the specific ball entry means can enter, and a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. privilege granting means for giving; privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege to be granted by the privilege granting means; and the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed. and a notification means for notifying notification information that allows a player to identify the type of the specific input when the firing by the firing means is stopped for a predetermined period or longer after the notification information is notified by the notification means. and means for making it difficult to enter a ball into the ball means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. As for the type of winning game, it is known that when the lottery result is displayed and notified by symbols or the like, it is notified in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game ball enters a specific ball entrance or a specific area during the winning game, so that the winning game is further executed, and the game set after that If the state is determined by the type of winning game executed first, it is determined whether it is a winning type that gives a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a specific ball entrance or specific area is determined. There is a possibility that the disadvantage of the game parlor may increase due to the game method in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter the game.

The gaming machine M1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming parlor side.

According to the gaming machine M1, by confirming the notification information indicating the type of privilege determined by the privilege type determining means, if the player tries to avoid being granted a specific privilege type, the other privilege type is displayed. Even in the case of , it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the specific ball-entering means, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the game parlor.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode among different dynamic display modes combining a pseudo-stop mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped. A gaming machine M2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine M2, the temporary stop in the pseudo stop mode makes it difficult to understand the final stop timing of the identification information, and when the specific privilege game is executed, the game ball is sent to the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of a game method that avoids entering a ball.

A gaming machine M3, wherein the gaming machine M1 or M2 has variable control means for varying a ball-entering rate of balls entering the specific area according to the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1 or M2, it is possible to vary the rate of entering a ball into the specific area depending on the type of privilege game to be executed, so the probability of entering a ball into the specific area is increased. can be easily controlled.

<Characteristics N group> (Direct hit production 2)
A ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the ball-entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. a specific ball entry means, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game a privilege granting means for imparting a first privilege advantageous to the player, and imparting a second privilege advantageous to the player when the second privilege game is executed, regardless of the ball entering the specific area. and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect over a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result to the time the ball enters the specific ball-entering means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by having:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the effect is only performed up to the winning game, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

The game machine N1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, an effect is executed during the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information until the ball enters the specific area. Therefore, not only the identification information indicates a specific determination result, but also the performance can make the player expect that the ball will enter the specific area, thereby suppressing the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the game machine N1, the effect executing means executes one effect based on the type of privilege game provided from a plurality of effects.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the effect executing means is characterized in that, when a game ball does not enter the specific area even after a period set in advance has passed, the effect is switched to a specific effect and executed. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, when the ball does not enter the specific area, the specific effect is switched to, so that it is possible to effectively notify the player that the ball did not enter the specific area. There is an effect that it can be notified to

<Feature P group> (A delay device is provided at the top of the V attacker to prevent Choro strikes)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In the game, a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the game ball during the period in which the privilege game is executed by the special game execution means, and a specification that the game ball entering the specific ball entry means can enter. an area, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means; a notifying means for notifying information about the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed; and adjusting means for reducing the amount of game balls guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period of time.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. As for the type of winning game, it is known that when the lottery result is displayed and notified by symbols or the like, it is notified in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game ball enters a specific ball entrance or a specific area during the winning game, so that the winning game is further executed, and the game set after that If the state is determined by the type of winning game executed first, it is determined whether it is a winning type that gives a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a specific ball entrance or specific area is determined. There is a possibility that the disadvantage of the game parlor may increase due to the game method in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter the game.

The game machine P1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the disadvantages of the game parlor.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the amount of flowing down for a predetermined period of time guided to the specific ball entry means is reduced by the adjustment means, the information notified by the notification means is discriminated to enter the game ball into the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to decide whether to hit the ball or not.

In the gaming machine P1, there are shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, shooting intensity variable means capable of varying the shooting intensity of the shooting means by the player's operation, and a third stage through which game balls can flow down. 1 flow path and a second flow path in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means adjusts the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the specific entering ball A game machine P2, characterized in that the game machine P2 is characterized in that it allocates at a predetermined ratio to a specific channel that allows a ball to enter the means and a channel that makes it difficult to enter the specific ball-entering means.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of game balls guided to the specific ball entry means among the game balls flowing down the second flow path. effective.

In the gaming machine P1, there are shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, shooting intensity variable means capable of varying the shooting intensity of the shooting means by the player's operation, and a third stage through which game balls can flow down. 1 channel and a second channel in which the game ball that has flowed down the first channel is difficult to flow down, and the adjustment means prevents the game ball that has flowed down the second channel from rolling for a predetermined period or more. A game machine P3, characterized in that it has a rolling means capable of moving and discharging a game ball to a flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more is rolled by the adjustment means. Also, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means by passing a predetermined period.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stop-displayed to when the specific ball-entering means becomes capable of entering a ball is transferred to the second channel. A gaming machine P4 characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the period from when a game ball is shot until it reaches the specific ball entering means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, it is necessary to continuously shoot the game ball in order to enter the specific ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method that does not allow the ball to be entered into the specific ball entry means in the privilege game.

<Feature Q group> (Choro strike countermeasure 2)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In the game, a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the game ball during the period in which the privilege game is executed by the special game execution means, and a specification that the game ball entering the specific ball entry means can enter. an area, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means; and adjusting means for reducing the amount of game balls that are guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period of time to a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means. Game machine Q1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, a gaming method is performed in which a game ball is not entered into a specific ball entrance or a specific area, so there is a risk of increasing the disadvantages of the game parlor. was there.

The game machine Q1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the disadvantages of the game parlor.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the amount of flowing down for a predetermined period of time guided to the specific ball entry means is reduced by the adjustment means, the information notified by the notification means is discriminated to enter the game ball into the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to decide whether to hit the ball or not.

In the gaming machine Q1, there are shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, shooting intensity variable means capable of varying the shooting intensity of the shooting means by a player's operation, and a third stage through which game balls can flow down. 1 flow path and a second flow path in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means adjusts the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the specific entering ball A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that the game machine Q2 is characterized in that it distributes at a predetermined ratio to a specific channel that allows a ball to enter the means and a channel that makes it difficult to enter the specific ball-entering means.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of game balls guided to the specific ball entry means among the game balls flowing down the second flow path. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1, there are shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, shooting intensity variable means capable of varying the shooting intensity of the shooting means by a player's operation, and a third stage through which game balls can flow down. 1 channel and a second channel in which the game ball that has flowed down the first channel is difficult to flow down, and the adjustment means prevents the game ball that has flowed down the second channel from rolling for a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by having a rolling means capable of moving and discharging a game ball to a flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more is rolled by the adjusting means. Also, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means by passing a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stop-displayed to when the specific ball-entering means becomes capable of entering a ball is transferred to the second channel. A gaming machine Q4 characterized in that the period from when a game ball is shot until it reaches the specific ball-entering means through the adjusting means is shorter than the period.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is necessary to continuously shoot the game ball in order to enter the specific ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method that does not allow the ball to be entered into the specific ball entry means in the privilege game.

<Feature R group> (Production up to V passage in small hits and direct hits)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. a specific ball entry means, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game privilege giving means for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player and, when the second privilege game is being executed, giving a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of the ball entering the specific area. and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect over a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result to the time the ball enters the specific ball-entering means. , wherein the effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting stepwise switching of the game ball shooting method before the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stop-displayed. A game machine R1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the effect is only performed up to the winning game, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

The game machine N1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, an effect is executed during the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information until the ball enters the specific area. Therefore, not only the identification information indicates a specific determination result, but also the performance can make the player expect that the ball will enter the specific area, thereby suppressing the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the game machine R1, the effect executing means executes one effect based on the type of privilege game given from a plurality of effects.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the effect execution means is characterized in that, when a game ball does not enter the specific area after a period set in advance has elapsed, the effect is switched to a specific effect and executed. Gaming machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1 or R2, when the ball does not enter the specific area, the specific effect is switched to. There is an effect that it can be notified to

<Feature S group> (Two types of control switching between small hit and pattern hit)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. a specific ball entry means, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game privilege giving means for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player and, when the second privilege game is being executed, giving a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of the ball entering the specific area. and a first state in which the guidance path for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area, and a second state in which it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. A switching means for switching, and first switching information for switching the guideway by the switching means when the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, the above and setting means for setting second switching information different from the first switching information.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. After the game is executed, depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous to the player or set to be disadvantageous to the player. There has been proposed a system in which a game ball enters an area to further give a privilege such as a winning game. (For example, JP-A-2013-9795).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

The gaming machine P1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the guideway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, it is possible to show the player different guidance modes up to the specific area, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. has the effect of

The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that the gaming machine S1 is switched to the first state by switching the guideway according to the second switching information.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, the guideway is switched to the first state by the second switching information, so that in the second privilege game, the game ball can easily enter the specific area, There is an effect that the player can be made to think that the second privilege is granted by hitting the ball in the specific area even in the second privilege game.

A gaming machine S3, wherein in the gaming machine S1 or S2, a plurality of different information are set as the first switching information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first switching information can be diversified, and the guidance state of the taxiway can be diversified.

<Feature T group> (Two types of switching 2 for small hits and pattern hits)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. a specific ball entry means, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game privilege giving means for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player and, when the second privilege game is being executed, giving a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of the ball entering the specific area. and a first state in which the guidance path for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area, and a second state in which it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. A switching means for switching, and first switching information for switching the guideway by the switching means when the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, the above and setting means for setting second switching information for switching the guideway to the first state.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. After the game is executed, depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous to the player or set to be disadvantageous to the player. There has been proposed a system in which a game ball enters an area to further give a privilege such as a winning game. (For example, JP-A-2013-9795).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

The gaming machine P1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the guideway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, it is possible to show the player different guidance modes up to the specific area, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. has the effect of

In the game machine T1, the game ball is guided to the specific area by different guide paths depending on whether the second state is switched to the first state by the second switching information or the first state is switched to the first state by the first switching information. A game machine T2 characterized in that the is induced.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effect of the game machine T1, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from becoming bored early because the player is guided to the specific area by a different guidance.

A gaming machine T3 characterized in that in the gaming machine T1 or T2, a plurality of different pieces of information are set as the first switching information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first switching information can be diversified, and there is an effect that the guidance state of the taxiway can be diversified.

<Feature group U> (Set the production mode based on the length of the period from special 2 winning to special 2 fluctuation)
a first determination means for executing the first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied; an acquisition means for acquiring the acquired information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a maximum number; second determination means for performing a second determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when a second determination condition is satisfied; and the first determination dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means, the first identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the means or the second identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the second discrimination means on the display means for a predetermined period of time; In the gaming machine, dynamic display of the second identification information is not started while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, and a period effect execution means for executing a period effect based on the dynamic display of the second identification information, and when the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. and an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode in the period effect executed by the period effect execution means based on the determination result of the period determiner. A gaming machine U1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Further, there is a game machine in which a plurality of starting ports are provided and different lotteries are executed depending on the starting port into which the game ball enters. Then, there is one that executes a suggestive effect that suggests the result of a winning lottery that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into each starting port (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, when a game ball enters the other starting opening while a winning lottery is being executed based on the entry of a game ball into one starting opening, By preventing the execution of a new lottery until the lottery is completed, it is possible to prevent the player from executing the lottery excessively.

However, the period from when a game ball enters one of the starting ports until the winning lottery (suggestion effect) based on the entering ball is executed is based on the entry of the game ball into the other starting port. Since it differs according to the status of the winning lottery to be executed, for example, after the game ball enters the starting hole, a suggestive effect for indicating the lottery result of the winning lottery executed based on the entering ball is executed. If the period until the game is extended, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which suggestive effect is being executed based on which ball entry, and the effect of the suggestive effect is reduced, resulting in a decrease in the player's willingness to play. there were. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine U1, the effect of the period effect executed by the period effect executing means based on the length of the period from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information. Since the mode can be set, even if the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is different, it is possible to execute the period performance that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is long.

The game machine U1 has a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and the period determining means determines the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means. A gaming machine U2 characterized in that the period is discriminated based on.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1, the second identification information is displayed after the predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the residual dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed by the period determination means. Since it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of is started, the accuracy of the determination result can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to execute a period effect in line with the actual game contents, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the predetermined start condition is satisfied when the obtaining means obtains the obtained information, and the period determination means determines whether the predetermined start condition is satisfied and then the relevant start condition is satisfied. The game machine U3 is characterized in that it determines the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information for which a start condition is established is started.

According to the game machine U3, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1 or U2, the period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is the period determination. Since it is discriminated by means, the accuracy of the discrimination result can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to execute a period effect in line with the actual game contents, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U3, the period effect executing means includes at least a period from when the obtaining means obtains the obtained information until dynamic display of the second identification information based on the obtained information is started. The game machine U4 is characterized in that the period effect is executed in the effect period.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine U3, as the effect period in which the period effect is executed, at least after the acquisition means acquires the acquired information, the second identification information is dynamically generated based on the acquired information. Since the period until the display is started can be set, it is possible to set the effect mode corresponding to the actual game situation in the period corresponding to the actual game situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

The game machine U1 or U2 has specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, and the period determining means is determined by the specific game execution means. It determines the period from the execution of the specific game to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information, and the period effect execution means at least, after the predetermined execution condition is established , the game machine U5, characterized in that the period effect is executed in the effect period including the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the obtained information is started.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1 or U2, it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information starts before the acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect mode for a longer period based on the determination result of the period determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the period production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U5, dynamic display determination means capable of determining whether the first identification information is dynamically displayed when the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means; and the dynamic display determination means. a second period determining means for performing determination of a second period different from the period determining means when determining that the first identification information is not dynamically displayed by The means determines a period from when the acquired information is acquired in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed until dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is started. A gaming machine U6 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U5, when the first identification information is not dynamically displayed at the timing at which the period determination means can perform determination, the second identification information is displayed at a timing different from that timing. Determination by the period determining means can be executed. Therefore, since the period from when the predetermined start condition is established until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started can be determined at a plurality of timings, the period effect in line with the actual game content can be executed. There is an effect that it can be made easier.

In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the period effect executing means may provide, as the period effects, a first period effect executed during a predetermined first period and a second period effect executed after the first period. and a second period effect executed in the period effect, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode of the second period effect.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the common first period effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the period determining means, so that the player feels uncomfortable. There is an effect that the period performance can be executed without giving.

In the gaming machine U7, the effect mode setting means selects part of the effect mode of the first period effect as the effect mode of the second period effect when the determination result by the period determining means is a specific determination result. A gaming machine U8 characterized in that it sets the

According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the first period effect can be set as the effect mode of the second period effect, whether the first period effect is being executed or the second period effect is being executed for the player. can make it difficult to understand Therefore, even when the period determining means determines that the second period is long, there is an effect that the period effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

<Feature group V> (When a predetermined condition is satisfied, execute a general pattern long opening suggestion effect)
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a game ball enters the variable ball entry means. Determination means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the ball is hit, and privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. a game machine comprising: determination means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied; an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game for a predetermined period of time that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time, and the effect executing means satisfies a predetermined effect condition. The gaming machine V1 is characterized in that, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, an effect is executed.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a first lottery is conducted to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a player receives the game. There was a case in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved to allow the game ball to enter the starting port. There are things that make it easier. In addition, there is one configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the second lottery to the player. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). In such a game machine, the lottery result of the second lottery can be suggested by the suggestive performance, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the game ball will be easily entered into the starting hole. It was possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, when the suggestive effect is executed, the player stops shooting the game ball and restarts the game based on the effect result of the suggestive effect. In that case, the game is stopped until the suggestive effect is completed, and the game is restarted in accordance with the timing when the movable member moves, or if the effect mode of the suggestive effect is highly likely to be off. , play the game until the suggestive effect is completed. During the period from when the game ball enters one of the starting ports until the winning lottery (suggestive effect) based on the entering ball is executed, the game is played to the other starting port. Because it differs depending on the situation of the winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball, for example, after the game ball enters the starting hole, the lottery result of the winning lottery executed based on the entering ball If the period until the suggestive effect for indicating is executed becomes longer, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which suggestive effect is being executed based on which ball entry, and the effect of the suggestive effect is reduced. , there is a problem that the desire to play is reduced. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine V1, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, it is possible to inform that the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to satisfy the performance condition, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine V1, as the types of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, a first type corresponding to a first specific game that is advantageous to the player and a second type that is more disadvantageous than the first specific game. It has a game type setting means capable of setting a second type corresponding to 2 specific games, and the effect executing means executes the effect when the first type is set by the game type setting means. A gaming machine V2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, when the first specific game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the presentation by the presentation executing means is performed, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. It has the effect of being able to

In a gaming machine V1 or V2, a condition determining means capable of determining whether or not the performance condition is established and specific identification information for indicating the result of the determination executed by the determining means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period of time. and display means, wherein the condition determination means determines that the performance condition is established when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Gaming machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, since the performance condition can be established when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, the player can be motivated to play a game in which the specific identification information is dynamically displayed. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine V3, information holding means capable of holding execution information indicating that the judgment has been executed by the judgment means, and judging whether the execution information held by the information holding means satisfies a valid condition. The condition determining means determines that the effect condition is established even when the effective condition determining means determines that the effective condition is satisfied. A gaming machine V4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V3, even if the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed, the effect condition can be established while the execution information satisfies the valid condition. Therefore, even if there occurs a timing when the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed in spite of the fact that a game is being played in which the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, the effect can be executed by the effect executing means. . Therefore, it is possible to stably execute an effect for a player who is actively playing a game, and to improve the interest of the game.

In either game machine V3 or V4, acquisition means capable of acquiring acquisition information when an acquisition condition is satisfied, and storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means. , wherein the determination means performs the determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied, and the condition determination means is the acquisition means performs a first condition determination based on the acquisition of the acquired information, and performs a second condition determination based on the determination being performed by the determination means, and the effect execution means, A game machine characterized in that the performance is executed when it is determined that the performance condition is satisfied in either the result of the first condition determination or the result of the second condition determination. V5.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V3 or V4, the condition determining means can determine whether the performance condition is established at a plurality of timings. Therefore, it is possible to stably execute the performance and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine V1 or V5, the effect executing means can execute, as the effect, a timing notification effect for notifying the timing at which the variable ball-entering means is in the first state. Machine V6.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V1 or V5, not only the determination result of the determination means but also the timing at which the variable ball entry means is in the first state is determined by the effect executed by the effect execution means. Since the game is notified to the player, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the effect by the effect executing means is executed, and the effect is that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V6, the effect executing means can execute a pseudo-timing notification effect for notifying a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball-entering means enters the first state when the effect condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine V7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the effect condition is not established, a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball-entering means is in the first state is notified, so that a game in which only the determination condition is established without establishing the effect condition is performed. There is an effect that the player can be made to play a disadvantageous game.

A game machine V8 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines V1 to V7, the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the performance condition.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines V1 to V7, since the determination condition is easier to satisfy than the performance condition, the player is motivated to play the game in order to satisfy the performance condition. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature group W> (Information of advantageous small winnings with a higher probability than the distribution ratio during time saving in the small winning performance during time saving)
Acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information based on satisfaction of an acquisition condition; Storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means; determining means for performing determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means; and executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the determination result of the determining means is the first determination result; and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game when the second discrimination result is different from the first discrimination result, game state setting means capable of setting a first game state after the first bonus game or the second bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means; Pre-determining means for pre-determining before the determination based on the acquired information is executed; and, the game state setting means, based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition in the state in which the first game state is set, the first game state and is to set a different second game state, and the effect execution means is based on the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the acquired information in which the determination is performed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied. A game machine W1 characterized by being capable of executing a suggestive effect.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a first lottery is conducted to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a player receives the game. There was a case in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, there is a configuration in which a plurality of privilege games with different degrees of advantage can be executed, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of privilege games is changed according to the set game state. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the soundness of the game, the ratio (so-called continuation rate) at which the game state advantageous to the player (for example, the time saving state and the probability variable state) is set after the end of the jackpot game is lowered. (For example, 65% or less) may be set to suppress the gambling aspect of the game.

In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a win (for example, a big win or a small win) is won in a state in which an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous game state is set again after the winning game ends. Since the ratio to be set is suppressed, there is a problem that it is difficult to make the player feel anticipation for the win notification effect during the advantageous game state, and the willingness to play is lowered. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play the game.

According to the gaming machine W1, a first privilege game or a second privilege game more advantageous than the first privilege game is carried out based on the result of the preliminary determination by the suggestive effect executed during the first game state. is suggested. Since the suggestion performance can be executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determination result of the determination means executed after the second game state is set, the privilege game is executed during the first game state. can make it easier to suggest Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for execution of the suggestive effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine W1, the effect execution means is configured such that the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the acquired information in which the determination is executed after the predetermined end condition is established is a pre-determination result indicating the second determination result. The game machine W1 is characterized in that it is easier to execute the suggestive effect when the article pre-discrimination result is obtained than when the pre-discrimination result for indicating the first discrimination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine W2, the pre-determination result corresponding to the acquired information in which the determination is executed after the second game state is set based on the establishment of the termination condition of the first game state indicates the second determination result. In this case, the suggestive effect by the effect executing means is more likely to be executed than in the case where the first determination result is indicated. As a result, when the suggestive effect is executed during the first game state, in addition to the determination result of the determination means executed during the first game state, the determination result of the determination means executed after the second game state is set. In the configuration in which the suggestive effect is executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determined result, it is possible to increase the ratio of execution of the second privilege game when the first suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for execution of the suggestive effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine W2 has a ratio setting means capable of setting a ratio of the first judgment result and a ratio of the second judgment result of the judgment result by the judgment means, wherein the ratio setting means is , wherein the ratio of the second determination result is set to be higher when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. Gaming machine W3.

According to the game machine W3, in addition to the effects of the game machine W1, it is possible to make it easier to obtain the second determination result during the second game state than during the first game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the rate at which the second privilege game is executed when the first suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for execution of the suggestive effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the effect executing means defines a period until the determination corresponding to the acquired information for which the preliminary determination is performed by the preliminary determination means as the effect period. A game machine W4 characterized by being capable of executing a suggestive effect.

According to W4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the suggestive effect is executed with the period until the determination corresponding to the pre-determined acquired information is executed as the effect period. has the effect of increasing

<Feature X group> (When the conditions for shifting from the time saving state to the normal state are met, the notification is executed during the time saving state to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations in the normal state)
Acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information based on satisfaction of an acquisition condition; Storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means; Determination means for performing determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means, and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. A game having execution means, a first game state in which the acquisition means can easily acquire the acquisition information, a second game state in which acquisition is more difficult than the first game state, and a settable game state setting means. In the machine, the game state setting means sets the second game state at least when a predetermined transition condition is established in the state where the first game state is set, and the storage means stores the A memory number determination means capable of determining the number of the acquired information stored, and a notification mode setting capable of setting a notification mode based on the determination result of the memory number determination means in a state where the first game state is set. means, and notification execution means capable of executing a notification operation in the notification mode set by the notification mode setting means, wherein the notification mode setting means performs at least the memory at a specific timing of the first game state. The game machine X1 is characterized in that the notification mode is set based on the determination result of the number determination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Further, there is a configuration in which a plurality of privilege games with different degrees of advantage can be executed, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of privilege games is changed according to the set game state. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). Further, in such a game machine, when a specific game state is set, a specific start opening is provided to make it easier to enter a ball than when another game state is set, and a game is played at the specific start opening. When a lottery based on the entry of a ball is executed, a privilege game with a high degree of advantage is more likely to be executed than when a game ball enters another start opening, and a specified There is a configuration in which the right of a lottery to be executed based on the entry of a game ball into a start hole can be retained and stored up to a predetermined number as an upper limit. In the gaming machine configured as described above, when a specific game state is set, it is possible for the player to efficiently execute a lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the specific start hole. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, when the end condition of a specific game state is satisfied, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the specific start hole. However, there is a problem that the desire to play the game is reduced. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine X1, it is possible to set the mode of notification executed by the notification executing means according to the number of acquired information stored in the storage means during the specific period of the first game state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play a game for varying the number of acquired information stored so that various types of notification operations are executed by the notification execution means, and the interest in the game can be improved. effective.

In the game machine X1, the notification execution means executes acquisition suggestion notification for suggesting acquisition of the acquisition information during the first game state, and the notification mode setting means is the stored number determination means. A gaming machine X2, characterized in that, when it is determined that the acquisition information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a predetermined number, a notification mode corresponding to the acquisition suggestion notification is set.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X1, when the number of acquisition information stored in the storage means in the specific period in the first gaming state is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the acquisition suggestion notification is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. Further, when the number of acquisition information stored in the storage means in the specific period in the first game state is larger than a predetermined number, for example, when the storage means stores the upper limit number of acquisition information, an acquisition suggestion is made. Since it is possible to configure such that the notification is not executed, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the contents of the notification executed by the notification execution means.

In the game machine X1 or X2, a discrimination number measuring means for measuring the number of discriminations executed by the discrimination means in a state in which the first game state is set, and based on the measurement result by the discrimination number measuring means and transition condition determination means for determining whether the transition condition is satisfied, and the notification execution means is configured until the transition condition is satisfied after it is determined by the transition condition determination means that the transition condition is satisfied. A game machine X3 characterized in that the notification effect is executed within a specified period of time.

According to the game machine X3, in addition to the effects of the game machine X2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the notification effect is executed after it is determined that the transition condition is established, the player is made to play a game for acquiring the acquisition information within a limited period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game until the last period in which the first game state is set.

The gaming machine X3 has period setting means capable of setting at least a first period and a second period set after the first period as the specific period, and the notification executing means has at least , the notification effect is executed during the first period, and the second period effect is executed during the second period based on the determination result of the memory number determination means at the end timing of the first period. and a second period effect execution means for executing the second period effect in the effect mode set by the period effect mode setting means. Characteristic game machine X4.

According to the game machine X4, in addition to the effects of the game machine X3, the effect mode of the second period effect is set based on the number of acquired information stored in the storage means after the notification effect is executed. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine X4, the number of acquired information stored in the storage means at the time the first period is set and the acquired information stored in the storage means at the end of the first period and an increase number determination means capable of determining the number of the acquired information stored in the storage means during the first period based on the number of A gaming machine X5 characterized in that the performance mode is set based on the determination result of means.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X4, the presentation mode of the second period presentation is set based on the number of acquired information stored during the first period, so the first period is set. By adjusting the number of acquired information stored at the point in time when the player changes the number of acquired information stored during the first period, it is possible to vary the presentation mode of the second period presentation. . Therefore, since different effects can be executed according to the game content executed by the player, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine X4 or X5 has pre-determination means for determining in advance the acquired information stored in the storage means before the determination based on the acquired information is executed, and the period effect mode setting means. is a gaming machine X6, wherein the performance mode is set based on the determination result of the prior determination means.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X5, it is possible to set the presentation mode of the second period presentation based on the preliminary determination result of the acquired information stored in the storage means. On the other hand, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested by the second period presentation.

In the game machine X6, the second period effect executing means is provided when the determination result of the determination means during execution is other than the specific determination result, and the determination result of the preliminary determination means is the specific determination result. In the case of indicating, the second period effect is executed until the determination result of the determination means based on the acquired information, which is the specific determination result, is notified. Game machine X7.

According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X6, when the determination result of the prior determination means is a specific determination result, the effect execution means continues until the identification information corresponding to the prior determination is stopped and displayed. A performance is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect executed during the second period.

In the gaming machine X7, the effect mode setting means sets a suggestive effect mode that suggests that the determination result of the preliminary determination means is a specific determination result before the dynamic display being executed is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine X8 characterized by being a setting.

According to the gaming machine X8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X7, the suggestive effect mode suggests that the determination result of the preliminary determination means is a specific determination result before the dynamic display being executed is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which determination resulted in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Y group> (Set multiple time-saving end conditions and grant different benefits according to the time-saving end conditions that are met)
Determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. , a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is likely to be executed, and a second game state in which the discrimination is more difficult to execute than the first game state. In the machine, the game state setting means sets the second game state based on at least the establishment of a predetermined transition condition in a state in which the first game state is set; a transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition as conditions; and when the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means is satisfied and a privilege granting means capable of granting a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the above, wherein the privilege granting means grants the first privilege when the first transition condition is satisfied, and the second privilege. A gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that a second privilege different from the first privilege is provided when a transition condition is established.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a first lottery is conducted to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a player receives the game. There was a case in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved to allow the game ball to enter the starting port. There are things that make it easier. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). In addition, in the gaming machine, when a specific game state is set, the specific game state is set by setting the fluctuation period of the second lottery to be shorter than when another game state is set. is set so that the second lottery is executed more frequently.

However, since the fluctuation period of the second lottery set during the specific game state is constant, the game becomes monotonous during the specific game state, and the player's motivation to play decreases. there were. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when the first game state in which the acquisition information is easily acquired is set, it differs depending on the established transition condition among the plurality of transition conditions for transitioning from the first game state to the second game state. Benefits can be given. Therefore, even though the first game state has been set, it is possible to make it difficult for the first game state to end without obtaining a privilege. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game for making the setting, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine Y1, the transition condition setting means sets the condition to be established based on the fact that the number of determinations by the determination means executed in the state where the first game state is set reaches a predetermined number of times. A game machine Y2 characterized in that it is set as a transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y1, it is possible to set a limit to the number of determinations performed by the determination means during the period in which the first game state is set, so that the player is not overwhelmed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the privilege is granted.

In gaming machine Y1 or Y2, variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state, and predetermined execution specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable ball entry means can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period when a condition is satisfied, and The determination is executed based on the entry of a game ball, and the first game state set by the game state setting means is a game in which the specific game is more likely to be executed than the second game state. The game machine Y3 is characterized by being in a state.

In the gaming machine Y3, the privilege granting means imparts a game state in which the specific game is more likely to be executed than the first game state as the first privilege granted when the first transition condition is established. A gaming machine Y4 characterized by:

In the game machine Y4, determination means capable of executing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination executed by the determination means for a predetermined period of time. and dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, wherein the predetermined execution condition is that the identification information is displayed in a specific manner. and the dynamic display period setting means displays a shorter dynamic display when the first privilege is granted than when the first privilege is not granted. A gaming machine Y5 characterized in that it facilitates the setting of the target display period.

In the game machine Y1 or Y5, the transition condition setting means causes the determination result of the determination means executed in the state where the first game state is set to be a special determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine Y6 characterized in that a condition that is established based on the number of times reaching a predetermined number is set as the second transition condition.

According to the game machine Y6, in addition to the effects of the game machine Y1 or Y2, the first game state changes to the second game state according to the determination result of the determination means executed during the period in which the first game state is set. , the period during which the first game state continues can be made indefinite. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the first game state will continue for a long period of time, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic AA Group> (Make it difficult for the player to understand the trigger until the jackpot game is executed)
a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition; a first determination means for executing a first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied; A second determination means for executing a second determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied; a determination means for performing determination when the determination condition is satisfied; Variable ball entry means capable of changing from a difficult first state to a second state in which a game ball is easier to enter than in the first state; a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game that causes the variable ball entering means to change to the second state for a predetermined period of time, wherein the second determination condition is that the variable ball entering means can be established based on the entry of the ball, and the privilege game execution means is a first execution condition that is established when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, or , the privilege game is executed based on the establishment of a second execution condition that can be established based on the determination result of the second determination means, and the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first Execution of an effect for notifying first information indicating that the determination result is the determination result or second information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result using the same effect mode. means, the effect executing means is configured to determine a period from execution of the effect to execution of the privilege game based on the establishment of the first execution condition, and a period from the execution of the effect to the The game machine AA1 is characterized in that the performance is executed so that the period until the privilege game is executed based on the establishment of the second execution condition is the same.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board, a first lottery is executed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and the lottery result is a win. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved to allow the game ball to enter the starting port. There are things that make it easier. A first suggestion performance for suggesting the lottery result of the first lottery to the player and a second suggestion performance for suggesting the lottery result of the second lottery to the player can be executed. (for example, JP-A-2011-115411). In such a gaming machine, by executing the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, the player can enjoy the game while having expectations for both the first lottery and the second lottery. It was possible to make it play, and it was possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, since the effect modes of the effects executed are different between the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, there is a problem that the game situation is easily determined by the player, and the player's desire to play is reduced. . It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine AA1, regardless of which execution condition is satisfied, the period from when the effect is executed by the effect executing means to when the privilege game is executed can be made the same. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to understand on which execution condition the privilege game to be executed is based. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA1, the second execution condition is met after the effect executing means executes the effect for notifying the second information indicating that the determination result of the determining means is the specific determination result. A game machine AA2 is characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect when the game machine AA2 cannot.

According to the game machine Z2, after the performance is executed by the performance executing means, the special performance can be executed when the privilege game cannot be executed, so that the player is provided with an easily understandable performance. There is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In gaming machines AA1 to AA2, a gaming machine having a game area in which game balls can flow down and a shooting means capable of varying the shooting intensity and allowing the game balls to reach the game area, The game area includes at least a first game area in which a game ball shot with one shot intensity by the shooting means can flow down, and a game ball shot with a predetermined shot intensity different from the one shot intensity. A second game area different from the first game area that can flow down, and a first ball entry means that satisfies the first determination condition when a game ball enters the first game area and a specific ball entry means that satisfies the determination condition by entering a game ball, and the bonus game is performed by the variable ball entry means and the bonus game execution means in the second game area. is executed, the specific variable ball entry means capable of changing from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which a game ball is easier to enter than in the first state is arranged. The game machine AA3 is characterized in that the effect execution means executes the effect in an effect mode including a variable discharge notification for firing the game ball with the predetermined discharge intensity.

According to the game machine AA3, since the notification for varying the firing intensity is executed based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, the timing of varying the firing intensity can also be the same. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution trigger of the specific game can be made more difficult to understand.

In the gaming machine AA3, a first period required for the game ball flowing down the second game area to reach the variable ball entry means, and a game ball flowing down the second game area to the specific variable ball entry means A gaming machine AA4 characterized in that the second period required to reach the point is different.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA3, the timing at which the ball flowing down the second game area enters the second variable ball entry means and the timing at which the ball enters the specific variable ball entry means are different. Therefore, it is possible to sequentially confirm whether the game ball flowing down the second game area enters the variable ball entering means or enters the specific variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the game ball flowing down more enjoyable.

Any one of the game machines AA1 to AA4 has dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and the privilege game execution means is the dynamic display means. When the identification information dynamically displayed by is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating the specific determination result, the privilege game is executed, and the effect execution means is the dynamic display means The gaming machine AA5 executes the presentation during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

<Characteristics AB group> (provide a period to increase the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed with one electric chew open)
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and when a predetermined execution condition is established, A specific game executing means for executing a specific game in which the variable ball entering means can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period, and a determination condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. If it is established, a determination means capable of executing determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of the identification information to be executed; and when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped in a specific display mode, and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, wherein the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means is set by the specific game. The game machine AB1 is characterized by comprising specific period setting means capable of setting a specific period in which a short dynamic display period shorter than the predetermined period during which the ball means is varied to the first state is likely to be set.

According to the gaming machine AB1, when the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, it becomes easier to set a dynamic display period shorter than the period during which one specific game is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute the discrimination by the discrimination means a plurality of times during one specific game period. It is possible to make the player play the game while anticipating that the specific period will be set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In a gaming machine AB1, a second discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined second discrimination and second identification information for indicating the result of the second discrimination executed by the second discrimination means are dynamically displayed for a prescribed period of time. Any one of a plurality of dynamic display periods can be set as a dynamic display period of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means and the second dynamic display means. and a second dynamic display period setting means, wherein the predetermined execution condition is satisfied when the result of the second determination performed by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. A first game state in which the dynamic display period of the first period can be set by the second dynamic display period setting means, and a second period longer than the first period than the first game state and a state setting means capable of setting at least a second game state in which is easily set.

According to the game machine AB2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB1, there is an effect that the number of determinations by the determination means per unit time can be increased in the first game state more than in the second game state.

In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the game state setting means sets, as the first game state, an advantageous first game state that can be set for a first period and a second period that is shorter than the advantageous first game state. A possible disadvantageous first game state can be set at least, and the execution condition is satisfied more when the advantageous first game state is set than when the disadvantageous first game state is set. The gaming machine AB3 is characterized by being easy to use.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the longer the first game state is set, the easier it is to execute the special game. Therefore, the privilege game is executed during the first game state even though the first game state is set for a long period of time. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

Any one of the game machines AB1 to AB3 has transition condition determination means capable of determining whether a predetermined transition condition is established, and the game state setting means, in a state in which the first game state is set, The second game state is set when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the execution condition is satisfied when the transition condition determining means determines that a specific transition condition is satisfied. A gaming machine AB4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a special game can be executed when a specific transition condition is satisfied and the first game state ends. There is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game until the end.

The game machine AB4 is characterized by having a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific transition condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. Gaming machine AB5.

According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, a suggestive effect suggesting that a specific transition condition is established while the first game state is set is executed. is executed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic BA group> (BGM is reset when the power is restored)
Power supply means capable of supplying a predetermined power, Notification means capable of executing notification for indicating that the power is supplied by the power supply means, and After the notification executed by the notification means is completed In a game machine having effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect and voice output means capable of outputting a sound based on voice data of a predetermined period, the voice output means is configured so that the notification is performed by the notification means. The sound is output from the start position of the sound data during the notification period to be executed, and the sound is output from the predetermined position of the sound data when the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Characterized gaming machine BA1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery. , a privilege game was executed that was advantageous to the player. Furthermore, there is a method that stops subtraction of the variable time when the power is turned off during a predetermined variable time, displays a recovery screen after the power is turned on, and restarts the subtraction of the stopped variable time (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016. -005505). In such a game machine, it was possible to inform the player that the power was turned on by displaying the recovery screen in an easy-to-understand manner. There is a problem that it is not possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the subtraction of the variable time has been restarted. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of informing a player of the gaming situation at the time of power return in a more comprehensible manner.

According to the game machine BA1, even while the notification indicating that the power is supplied is being executed, the sound output during the period during which the predetermined effect is being executed can be output. Therefore, there is an effect that the period during which the power supply is notified and the subsequent period can be associated with each other. Also, at the timing when the notification indicating that the power is supplied is finished and the predetermined effect is started, the sound based on the sound data for the predetermined period is output from the specific position of the sound data. Since it is configured, it is possible to output the sound with the content corresponding to the effect to be executed after the end of the notification indicating that the power is supplied. Therefore, there is an effect that the sound can be output without making the player feel uncomfortable.

It should be noted that, when using the gaming machine BA1 described above, a determination means for determining whether or not the special figure variation is being executed at the time the power is turned off, and the determination result during the predetermined period during which the power is turned off A storable storage means is further provided, and when it is determined that the power is turned off during the special figure fluctuation when the power is supplied, during the notification period for notifying that the power is supplied, the special It is preferable to configure so as to output BGM that is output during figure fluctuation. Thereby, while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being performed, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure variation is being performed by using the voice. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, it is preferable that the period for notifying that the power is supplied is continuously set until the start-up process for various control devices of the pachinko machine 10 is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the period for notifying that the power supply has been supplied. In addition, if the power is cut off during the special figure fluctuation, or if the special figure fluctuation is started during the period of notifying that the power supply is supplied, the period of notifying that the power supply is over , There is a possibility that the special figure fluctuation will straddle the timing of the normal display screen. In this case, determine the period from the time the normal display screen is displayed until the end of the special figure variation in progress, and set the variation effect (remaining variation time corresponding effect) based on the determination result. Good to configure. As a result, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect suggesting the lottery result of the special figure variation in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

If the determination result of the remaining fluctuation time is within a predetermined time period (for example, within 1 second), it is preferable to delay the end timing of the effect to inform that the power is supplied by a predetermined time period (1 second). . As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect corresponding to the remaining variable time only for a short period of time, which makes it difficult for the player to identify it, so that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristics BB group> (Different background change timing according to pattern change speed at the time of button operation)
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification state is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; an operation means operable by the player; and a predetermined operation on the operation means. , an effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode based on the determination result of the operation determiner, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. A variable timing setting for setting a timing for varying the presentation mode based on a dynamic display speed of the identification information when the operation determining means determines that the predetermined operation is performed. A gaming machine BB1 characterized by having means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery. , a privilege game was executed that was advantageous to the player. Furthermore, there is also a game in which operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and various effects are set based on the details of the operation performed by the player on the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a game machine, by executing the operation effect, the effect mode can be changed according to the operation result of whether or not the player operates the operation means. It was possible to make the player operate willingly, that is, to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the game. Since the number of performance modes to be executed becomes scarce, it has been desired to make it possible to set a wider variety of performance modes and to enhance the performance effect.

According to the gaming machine BB, since the performance mode can be changed according to the variation speed of the identification information at the timing when the player operates the operating means, various performances can be provided. In the gaming machine BB described above, the display mode of the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is conceivable as the effect mode variable by the effect mode changing means, for example. Thereby, the timing for variably setting the background mode can be varied according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being variably set in a state in which the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, that is, in a state immediately before the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, it is preferable to provide notification means for notifying the player of the current dynamic display speed of the identification information. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the effect mode will be changed immediately after operating the operation means in order to change the effect mode. Furthermore, if the period from when the player operates the operation means to change the effect mode to when the effect mode is changed is longer than or equal to the predetermined period, the player is informed that the effect mode will be changed after the predetermined period has elapsed. It is preferable to configure to display the comments shown in . As a result, when an operation for changing the presentation mode is executed, it is possible for the game company to easily grasp whether or not the game machine is accepting the operation.

Furthermore, when providing an interval of a predetermined period or more from operating the operation means until the effect mode is varied, for example, the timing at which the next special figure variation is executed is configured to be the predetermined period described above. good to do By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect mode in a state in which the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special figure lottery is not executed.

<Characteristic BC group> (Switching development effects according to button operation timing and number of operations)
Operation means that can be operated by a player, operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the timing at which the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed operation timing determination means capable of determining the operation timing determination means capable of measuring the number of times the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed; a determination result of the operation timing determination means; a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode based on the measurement result of the measuring means; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance in accordance with the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means. Characteristic gaming machine BC1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery. , a privilege game was executed that was advantageous to the player. Furthermore, there is also a game in which operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and various effects are set based on the details of the operation performed by the player on the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). Such a game machine is configured to set an effect mode based on the operation content or the number of times of operation on the operation means. In a game machine constructed in this way, it is difficult to set a variety of presentation modes according to the operation contents of the operating means, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. There has been a demand for a game machine that can set modes.

According to the game machine BC1, the performance mode can be changed based on both the operation timing and the number of times of operation of the operation means, so that more diverse performances can be set and the performance effect can be enhanced. .

In addition, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine BC1, it is configured to be able to execute a continuous operation effect in which the effect mode changes in response to the operation of the operation means a plurality of times, and the period during which the continuous operation effect is executed Of these, it is preferable to configure so as to set the effect mode variable timing of subsequent continuous operation effects in accordance with the operation timing of the predetermined number of times. Specifically, based on the timing of the first operation to the operation means during the period in which the continuous operation effect is executed, the easiness of changing the effect mode for the second and subsequent operations to the operation means is varied. Good to configure. With such a configuration, it is possible to set various effects modes without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the operation means for the first time, it is preferable to set the same presentation mode for the operation to the operation means for the first time. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the difference in the operation timing of the operation means for the first time.

In addition, according to the effect mode of the continuous operation effect displayed when the continuous operation effect is completed, the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect may be changed. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the continuous operation presentation. In addition, the continuous operation production can be executed based on the special figure fluctuation, and the production mode executed after the continuous operation production is set based on the production result of the continuous operation production and the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation. , and based on the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation and the operation timing of the predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) during the continuous operation effect period, the effect mode variable condition of the continuous operation effect (operation It may be configured to set the number of operations of the means, the operation method, etc.).

<Characteristic BD group> (Provide a state in which the display of the number of pending balls displayed on the liquid crystal is synchronized with the actual number of pending balls and a state in which it is not synchronized)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; determination means for performing determination when the determination condition is established based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; storage means capable of storing information up to a first predetermined number as an upper limit at least until the determination condition for the information is satisfied; effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect multiple times; and a mode display means for displaying the display mode of on the display means, wherein the mode display means indicates the number of the information stored in the storage means when a first condition is satisfied. is displayed on the display means as the display mode, and when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the effect executed by the effect executing means is displayed. A game machine BD1 characterized in that a second mode for indicating the number of games is displayed on the display means as the display mode.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, a plurality of rights to execute the lottery can be stored so that the game can be played efficiently. In some gaming machines configured to be able to store a plurality of rights (reserved) to execute a lottery, a reserved symbol is displayed to show the number of reserved rights stored to the player. (For example, JP-A-2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, since the player can easily grasp the current number of reservations, the content of the game can be determined based on the number of reservations, and the game can be played efficiently. In addition, a function of determining the lottery result in advance is given to the stored hold before the lottery is actually executed, and the stored number of holds becomes a specific number. In some cases, a series of effects (continuous effects) are executed using the period during which the lottery corresponding to the specific number of reservations is executed. In such a continuous effect, the results of pre-discrimination for multiple holds can be executed using a series of effects, so the winning is included in the target lottery rather than the effect based on the result of a single lottery. It is possible to increase the possibility and make the player pay attention to the performance. However, in the gaming machine described above, when a new hold is acquired during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed, a hold pattern corresponding to the new hold is added to the hold symbols indicating the hold targeted for the continuous effect. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to determine up to which reserved symbols are to be subjected to the continuous effect, and there is a problem that the effect of the effect is lowered. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of informing a player of reserved symbols to be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the game machine BD1, the display mode indicating the number of memories displayed on the display means may display the number of memories stored in the memory means according to the conditions established, or may display information indicating the number of times of presentation. Since it is possible to variably set when to play, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine BD1, it is preferable to provide second display means capable of always displaying the stored number stored in the storage means separately from the display means. As a result, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the number stored in the storage means, which affects the result of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-described display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to notify by the light emission mode of light emission means such as an LED. Also good.

Further, it may be configured such that the number stored in the storage means is displayed on the second display means while the information indicating the number of performances is displayed on the display means. Furthermore, it is preferable that the second display means be configured to be less conspicuous than the display means. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode displayed on the display means, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the display means displays information indicating the number of performances, the number stored in the storage means corresponding to the number of determinations executed during the performance period may be displayed. (eg, one display every 30 seconds). Also, a display indicating the number of times the third symbol is stopped (including temporary stop) during the production period may be used.

<Feature BE group> (Notice effect executed only when the background is changed)
An operation means operable by a player, an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a performance mode for varying the performance mode based on the determination result of the operation determination means. variable means, effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode changing means, and when the variable timing at which the effect mode is varied by the effect mode changing means satisfies a specific condition; , and a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there is a game machine that executes a suggestive effect to make the player play the game while expecting that the lottery result will be a win. Then, in order to increase the variation of the effect mode of the suggestive effect, there has been a configuration in which the mode in which the suggestive effect is executed can be changed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-213999). Furthermore, there is also a game that varies the mode (background) in which the suggestive effect is executed based on the player's operation of the operation means. In such a game machine, by executing a dedicated suggestive effect according to the set mode, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by providing a variety of effects to the player. However, there is a problem in that the player willingly operates the operating means after watching the special effects corresponding to each mode and loses the desire to change the mode. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of allowing a player to change modes at will.

According to the game machine BE1, since a dedicated effect can be executed when the effect mode is changed, it is possible to experience the game even if the game is played for a long time during the period when each mode is set. It is possible to execute an effect that cannot be performed at the mode switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player who wants to experience various effects to operate the operating means.

<Characteristic BF Group> (A period during which the current mode is notified and a period during which the current mode is not notified are provided, and the current mode can be grasped by button operation even during the period when the current mode is not notified.)
A mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of performance modes, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode set by the mode setting means, and set by the mode setting means. a production mode notifying means capable of informing a given production mode, an operating means operable by a player, and an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means; The effect mode notification means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation determination means during a predetermined first period or during a second period different from the first period. The game machine BF1 is characterized in that, when the game machine BF1 is set, information for indicating the performance mode set by the mode setting means is notified. According to the game machine BF1, the performance mode reporting period and the non-reporting period are set, and the performance mode can be reported based on the operation to the operation means even during the non-reporting period. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means so as to grasp the presentation mode. In this case, when the predetermined operation is not performed on the operation means during the second period, it is preferable to notify other information about the game. It is preferable to configure so as to report suggestive information suggesting the speed and the discrimination result of the discriminating means. Thus, during the second period, the game information desired by the player can be selected based on the player's operation on the operating means.

<Characteristic BG group> (Step up button vibes)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, a vibration means that can vibrate the operation means, and the vibration means a vibration amount varying means capable of varying the amount of vibration for vibrating the operation means to a different vibration amount; It has a period setting means for setting a possible variable period and a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the variable period is set by the period setting means. Game machine BG1. According to the gaming machine BG1, since the suggestive effect suggesting that the vibration amount of the operation means is varied, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

<Feature BH group> (Informs the speed of pattern change with the color of the button)
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification state is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; an operation means operable by the player; and a predetermined operation on the operation means. operation determining means capable of determining the operation determining means, operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and mode changing means capable of varying the mode of the operating means, The mode changing means changes the mode when the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means changes from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. A game machine BH1 characterized in that the . According to the game machine BH1, it is possible to grasp the dynamic display speed of the identification information depending on the mode of the operating means.

<Feature BI group> (The background changes depending on the combination of stop symbols)
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period of time; the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and when the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result, the identification information is displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode A gaming machine comprising stop display means for stop-displaying in a display mode, and privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification information is stop-displayed in the specific display mode by the stop display means, The stop display means is capable of stopping and displaying a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, and is capable of varying the performance mode based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means. A game machine BI1 characterized by comprising a variable means and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. According to the gaming machine B11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined identification information, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode. In this case, when the player stops and displays the identification information in a predetermined stop display mode, it is preferable that the stop display mode can be selected. Specifically, it is preferable that the player can select one stop display mode from a plurality of stop display modes by operating an operable operation means.

<Characteristic BJ group> (Prevention of advance in preparatory drive for character action)
display means for executing a predetermined effect display; effect display control means for causing the display means to execute the effect display based on a predetermined effect scenario; movable means for executing a predetermined effect operation; a production operation control means for causing the movable means to execute the production operation based on the production scenario; and production scenario setting means capable of setting one production scenario from a plurality of production scenarios as the production scenario; The movable means is configured to be movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position. It has an executable preparation movement control means, and the preparation movement control means executes the preparation movement before the production display is executed by the production display control means based on the production scenario. A gaming machine BJ1 characterized by: According to the gaming machine BJ1, by performing the preparatory movement in advance, it is possible to reliably execute an effect based on the effect scenario. Furthermore, since it is configured to perform the preparatory movement control separately from the production action based on the production scenario, the preparatory movement can be performed both when the production action is executed and when it is not executed. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the performance action is executed even if the movable means performs the preparatory movement.

<Feature BK group> (Replace the look-ahead result according to the action state of the character)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, determination means for executing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. In a gaming machine in which a display means capable of displaying and a privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, the information acquired by the acquisition means is at least the information corresponding to the information. storage means capable of storing up to a first predetermined number until determination is performed, and storing the information stored in the storage means until dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started pre-determining means capable of pre-determining in advance; effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of a specific effect based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determining means; and the effect set by the effect mode setting means A specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the mode at a predetermined timing, and the specific effect executing means when a specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect. and effect mode replacement means for setting a replacement effect mode different from the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by Game machine BK1 to play. According to the game machine BK1, since the performance mode set based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means can be replaced with the replacement performance mode, the performance can be executed according to the situation, and the performance effect is enhanced. be able to. In this case, as the effect mode that can be set by the effect mode setting means, the movable mode of the movable means that can move within a predetermined range is used, and the effect mode is changed by the effect mode replacement means based on the position information of the movable means. It should be configured so that it can be replaced. Specifically, when position information of the movable means indicates a position at which it is difficult to execute the movable mode, for example, position information indicating a position different from the initial position of the movable mode, the effect mode replacement means changes the movable means. It is preferable to set a rendering mode that is not used, for example, a rendering mode that uses only the display means, as a replacement rendering mode. In addition, by providing a movable control means for moving the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation of the operation means that the player can operate, and using the above-mentioned technical concept in a game machine with enhanced production effect, the production mode can be changed. The effect is more pronounced in the means.

<Characteristic BL Group> (Different setting timing of operation effective period during demonstration according to game state)
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; A first game state in which a first period is likely to be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second game state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, is likely to be set. and a waiting state for setting a waiting state when a predetermined waiting condition is satisfied in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means is not executed. State setting means, operation means that can be operated by the player, operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined operation based on the determination result of the operation determination means. Operation effect execution means capable of executing effects, and effective period setting means setting an operation effective period during which the operation determination means can effectively determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. The valid period setting means extends the valid period after the standby state is set when the second period is set by the gaming state setting means more than when the first period is set. The gaming machine BL1 is characterized in that the start timing of the valid period is set so that the period until setting is long. According to the game machine BL1, the setting timing of the operation effective period for validly determining the operation to the operation means can be changed according to the set game state, so that the operation is not executed carelessly. can be suppressed. In addition, in the case where notification means for notifying the player that the operation effective period has been set is provided, frequent notification by the notification means can be suppressed. In addition, while the second game state is being set, it is preferable to make the discrimination by the discrimination means easier to execute. As a result, the second game state can be made more advantageous than the first game state. In this case, even if the standby state is set during the second game state, the standby state can be terminated in a short period of time.

<Characteristic BM group>
Power supply means capable of supplying power to a game machine, notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means, and execution by the notification means Effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the basis of the end of the notification, and reproduction capable of reproducing predetermined audio data on the basis of the start of the power supply by the power supply means. and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproducing means, wherein the notification is performed as the reproduction start position of the audio data reproduced by the reproducing means. A game machine BM1, characterized by comprising reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of notification by said means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display an initial screen for notifying the player that the power has been turned on (for example, JP-A-2016-005505). In such a gaming machine, it has been demanded to make it easier to understand the game situation when the power is turned on. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that is easy for a player to understand.

According to the game machine BM1, power supply means capable of supplying power to the game machine, and notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. , based on the completion of the notification executed by the notification means, a predetermined effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect, and a predetermined effect based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means a reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data; and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means; A reproduction start position setting means is provided for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of notification by the notification means as the reproduction start position. As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine BM1, the reproduction start position setting means sets the reproduction start position so that the reproduction position at the end of the voice data is reproduced in accordance with the end timing of the notification. Game machine BM2.

According to the game machine BM2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BM1, there is an effect that the sound can be output more preferably.

In the game machine BM1 or BM2, the game machine BM3 is characterized in that the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the voice data at least until the predetermined effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine BM3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the reproducing means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed, so that the audio can be output more preferably. It has the effect of being able to

Any one of the game machines BM1 to BM3 is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution conditions for the predetermined performance are satisfied based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. A game machine BM4, wherein said reproducing means reproduces said voice data based on said execution determining means determining that said execution condition is established.

According to the game machine BM4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BM1 to BM3, the condition for executing the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. and the reproduction means reproduces the audio data when the execution condition is judged to be satisfied by the execution judgment means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic BN group>
determining means for executing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; privilege giving means for giving a privilege based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; operation means operable by the player; and a predetermined operation on the operation means. and a dynamic display speed of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, at least a first speed and a second speed slower than the first speed. speed setting means for setting a speed; and period shortening means for shortening a first period for dynamically displaying the identification information at the first speed when the determination result of the operation determination means is a specific determination result. and a gaming machine BN1 characterized by having:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine BN1, there are provided a determination means for executing a predetermined determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display. a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification state dynamically displayed by the execution means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; an operation means operable by the player; an operation determining means capable of determining that an operation has been performed; an effect mode changing means for varying the effect mode based on the determination result of the operation determining means; and the effect mode changed by the effect mode changing means The performance mode is varied based on the performance execution means capable of executing the corresponding performance and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. and variable timing setting means for setting timing. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine BN1 has an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and the effect execution means is controlled by the speed setting means. The gaming machine BN2 is characterized in that different effects are executed according to the set dynamic display speed of the identification information.

According to the game machine BN2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BN1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can be actively operated the operation means. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the game machine BN2, a second operation means different from the operation means, a second operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined second operation has been performed on the second operation means, and the first period and specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when the second operation is performed in a state where is set.

According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN2, the player can select whether to operate the operation means or the second operation means during the first period, and the player can play the game. It is possible to increase the willingness to participate in Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BO group>
an operation means capable of being operated by a player; an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; an operation timing determining means capable of determining the operation timing determined to have been performed; and based on the determination result of the operation timing determining means, setting an effect mode during a second period set after the first period. and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, wherein the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means. A game machine BO1 characterized in that a suggestive effect suggesting the effect mode during the second period is executed during the first period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine BO1, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the operation within a predetermined first period. an operation timing determining means capable of determining an operation timing at which the predetermined operation is determined by the determining means; and a second period set after the first period based on the determination result of the operation timing determining means. a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode during a period; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means; A suggestive effect suggesting the effect mode during the second period set by the effect mode setting means is executed during the first period. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BO1 has measuring means for measuring the number of determinations that the predetermined operation has been performed within the first period, and the effect mode setting means counts the number of determinations measured by the measuring means. game machine BO2, wherein an effect mode during the second period is set based on the operation timing at which the is a specific number of times.

According to the game machine BO2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BO1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can be actively operated the operation means. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine BO2, the effect executing means performs a predetermined number of determinations less than the specific number of times, the number of determinations measured by the measuring means is a predetermined number of times, during the second period set by the effect mode setting means The game machine BO3 is characterized by executing a unified performance that does not suggest a performance mode.

According to the gaming machine BO3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BO2, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the presentation mode set in the second period at an early stage. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic BP group>
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, determination means for performing determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination results of the determination means are specified. privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of; specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and the acquisition means storage means capable of storing the information acquired by at least up to a first predetermined number until the determination condition for the information is satisfied; display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode; As a display mode to be displayed in the display mode, a specific display mode is displayed based on the number of information items of the information stored in the storage means becoming a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. and a third predetermined number less than or equal to the second predetermined number out of the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means mode ending means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on the fact that the information of is used for determination by the determination means at least.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the game machine BP1, acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means when the discrimination condition is established, and A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result, and a specific performance for executing a specific performance for indicating the determination result of the determination means. execution means, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a first predetermined number at least until the determination condition for the information is satisfied, and display in a predetermined display mode display means, and a display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means reaching a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number; and the second predetermined number of the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means mode termination means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on the following third predetermined number of the information being used for determination by the determination means at least. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BP1, a second display control means is provided for displaying, on the display means, a number-of-times indication mode suggesting the remaining number of determinations of the determination means to be executed until the specific display mode ends. A gaming machine BP2 characterized by:

According to the game machine BP2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BP1, the display means is provided with a number-of-times suggestion mode for suggesting the number of determinations of the remaining determination means to be executed until the specific display mode ends. Since the second display control means for displaying is provided, there is an effect that a display mode that is easier for the player to understand can be realized.

In the gaming machine BP2, when the specific display mode is not displayed, the number of information suggestion mode suggesting the number of information items of the information stored in the storage means is displayed in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the number of times suggestion mode. A gaming machine BP3 characterized by comprising third display control means for displaying.

According to the gaming machine BP3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BP2, when the specific display mode is not displayed, an information number suggesting mode that suggests the number of information stored in the storage means is provided. Since the third display control means is provided for displaying in a manner indistinguishable from the number-of-times suggesting mode, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the meaning of the number-of-times suggesting mode.

In the gaming machine BP2 or BP3, the second display control means controls a predetermined specific condition when the new information is stored in the storage means while the specific display mode is being displayed. is established, the game machine BP4 increases the number of times suggested by the number of times suggestion mode.

According to the game machine BP4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BP2 or BP3, the second display control means stores the new information in the storage means while the specific display mode is being displayed. If a predetermined specific condition is established when the game is played, the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BQ group>
A discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined specific discrimination result. Execution means, specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition during execution of the specific effect. A game machine BQ1 characterized by comprising a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting a type.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine BQ1, there is provided a determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a determination result that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game; specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance for indicating the determination result of the determination means; a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting the type of the specific effect based on the above. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BQ1, the types of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means include a first specific effect in which a first effect mode is executed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect, and the specific effect. One type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a second specific performance in which a second performance mode different from the first performance mode is executed after at least the specified period has passed from the start of the performance. A gaming machine comprising type determining means, wherein said suggestive effect executing means executes said suggestive effect based on the establishment of said specific condition before said specific period elapses. BQ2.

According to the game machine BQ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BQ1, as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the first effect mode is performed after at least a specific period has passed since the start of the specific effect. A plurality including at least a first specific effect to be executed, and a second specific effect to be executed in a second effect mode different from the first effect mode after at least the specified period has passed since the start of the specific effect. The suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect based on the establishment of the specific condition before the specific period elapses. It is something to do. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

A game machine BQ3 is characterized in that the game machine BQ1 or BQ2 is provided with operation means that can be operated by the player, and the specific condition is established based on the operation of the operation means.

According to the game machine BQ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BQ1 or BQ2, it is provided with operation means that can be operated by the player, and the specific condition is established based on the fact that the operation means is operated. , the player who desires to execute the suggestive effect can be made to positively operate the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize an effect mode according to the taste of the player.

<Characteristic BR group>
A mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of performance modes, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode set by the mode setting means, and set by the mode setting means. a performance mode notifying means capable of notifying the performance mode that has been set, and a suppression period for suppressing the performance mode notification by the performance mode notifying means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. suppression period setting means; and notification control means for causing the presentation mode notification means to notify the presentation mode on the basis that a predetermined second condition is satisfied during the suppression period. A gaming machine BR1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine BR1, mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of effect modes, and effect executing means capable of executing the effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means. a performance mode notification means capable of reporting the performance mode set by the mode setting means; and suppression of notification of the performance mode by the performance mode notification means when a predetermined first condition is established. a suppression period setting means for setting a suppression period to be set; and notification control for causing the presentation mode notification means to notify the presentation mode based on establishment of a predetermined second condition during the suppression period. and means. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine BR1, as a type of effect executed by the operation means operable by the player and the effect execution means, a first operation to the operation means is detected during a specific period included in the effect period. effect type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the suppression period setting means, at least during the specific period , the suppression period is set, and the presentation mode notification means notifies the presentation mode based on detection of the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. A game machine BR2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BR2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BR1, the operating means that can be operated by the player and the type of presentation executed by the presentation executing means, during the specific period included in the presentation period. an effect type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on detection of a first operation on the operating means; The period setting means sets the suppression period for at least the specific period, and the presentation mode notification means detects the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. Based on what has been done, the effect mode is notified. As a result, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the game machine BQ2, the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is performed on the operating means.

According to the game machine BQ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BQ2, the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is performed on the operation means. There is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

<Characteristic BS group>
an operating means operable by a player; a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which an effective period for treating an operation to the operating means as effective during one effect period is set; and between the effective period. Specific control execution means for executing specific control based on the fact that the operation means is operated, and first control and second control as types of specific control executed by the specific control execution means. and a control type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least, , a first type in which the first control is likely to be executed, and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed the specific number of times than the first type. A game machine BS1 characterized by comprising a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from among the types.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the game machine BS1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in which an effective period for treating the operation to the operation means as valid is set during one effect period, Specific control execution means for executing specific control based on the fact that the operation means is operated during the valid period, and the type of specific control executed by the specific control execution means, a first control type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least control and second control; and as the type of the specific effect, a specific number of operations on the operation means during the valid period of one. and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than in the first type. and specific effect type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least . As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BS1, the specific effect is such that a correspondence relationship between the number of times the operation means is operated during the valid period and a control type that is likely to be determined by the control type determination means is set in advance for each type of the specific effect. A game machine BS2 characterized in that it is defined.

According to the game machine BS2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BS1, the specific effect is a correspondence between the number of times the operation means is operated during the valid period and the control type that is likely to be determined by the control type determination means. Since the relationship is predetermined for each type of the specific effect, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BS1 or BS2, the first control is control for vibrating the operation means with a first vibration intensity, and the second control vibrates the operation means with a vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity. A game machine BS3 characterized in that the control is for vibrating at a second vibration intensity.

According to the game machine BS3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BS1 or BS2, the first control is control for vibrating the operation means with a first vibration intensity, and the second control is a control for vibrating the operation means. Since it is a control for vibrating the means with the second vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity, it is possible to easily understand the type of the specific effect by confirming the vibration intensity of the operation means. effective.

In any one of the game machines BS1 to BS3, the specific effect is defined by a correspondence relationship between the number of times the operation means is operated during the valid period and a control type that is likely to be determined by the control type determination means. game machine BS4, which is predetermined for each type of game machine BS4.

According to the game machine BS4, in addition to the effect of any one of BS1 to BS3, the display means capable of displaying the display mode and the specific control execution during the execution period of one specific effect for the display means and display control means for displaying a history of controls executed by the means. As a result, the player can easily understand the type of the executed specific effect, so that there is an effect that the player's convenience can be improved.

<Characteristic BT group>
Operation means operable by the player, operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and predetermined operation performance can be executed based on the determination result of the operation determination means. operation effect execution means, wherein the operation effect setting means sets one of the plurality of operation effects as the operation effect to be executed by the operation effect execution means; and the operation means. wherein the mode variable means changes the mode of the operation means to a mode suggesting the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. A gaming machine BT1 characterized by:

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine BT1, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and based on the determination result of the operation determination means and an operation effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect, wherein one operation effect is set from a plurality of the operation effects as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. Setting means and mode changing means capable of varying the mode of the operating means, wherein the mode changing means changes the mode of the operating means to the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. It is variable in the suggested mode. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine BT1 is characterized in that it has light emitting means for emitting light in an area visible to the player in the operation means, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. BT2.

According to the gaming machine BT2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BT1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it has light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means varies the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. As a result, there is an effect that the current situation can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner to the player who intends to operate the operating means.

In game machine BT1 or BT2, determining means for executing predetermined determination, dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means on display means for a predetermined period, and dynamic display thereof and privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification state dynamically displayed by the executing means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and The game machine BT3 is characterized in that different operation performances can be set during the displayed period.

According to the gaming machine BT3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BT1 or BT2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a determination means for executing a predetermined determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and a dynamic and privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the displayed identification state is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, wherein the operation effect setting means is provided during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to set different operation effects for each.

As a result, different operation presentations are set during one dynamic display period, so that the player can enjoy the timing of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BU group>
A display means capable of displaying identification information, a determination means for executing a predetermined determination, and a privilege of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result. game execution means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means; A first dynamic display type in which the first mode is displayed after at least a specific period of time has passed since the display was started, and a second mode different from the first mode is displayed after the specific period of time has passed. a mode selection means for selecting one mode from among a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type, and a period from when the dynamic display of the identification information is started until the specific period elapses and a first specific effect capable of suggesting that the first mode is displayed as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. , a second specific effect capable of suggesting that the second mode is displayed, and specific effect type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least: .

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine BU1, the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the determination means for executing the predetermined determination, and the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, which is advantageous to the player. bonus game execution means for executing a special bonus game; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means; and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. As a type of, a first dynamic display type in which the first mode is displayed after at least a specific period has passed since the dynamic display was started, and the first mode after the specific period has passed a second dynamic display type in which a different second mode is displayed; mode selection means for selecting one mode from among a plurality of types including at least; Suggesting that the first mode is displayed as a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect until the period elapses and the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. a specific performance type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a possible first specific performance and a second specific performance capable of suggesting that the second mode is displayed. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BU1, the specific effect executing means is configured to display a failure effect mode showing a failure determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of one of the specific effects. The first specific effect is such that a combination of the failure effect modes displayed during the execution period of one of the specific effects is a first combination, and the second specific effect A gaming machine BU2 characterized in that a combination of said failure effect modes displayed during an execution period of said one specific effect is a second combination different from said first combination.

According to the gaming machine BU2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BU1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect executing means is configured to be able to display the failure effect mode showing the result of the determination of failure different from the result of the specific determination a plurality of times during the execution period of one of the specific effects. In the first specific effect, the combination of the failure effect modes displayed during the execution period of one specific effect is the first combination, and in the second specific effect, the combination is one The combination of the out-of-line effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect is a second combination different from the first combination. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BV group>
In a gaming machine having effect control means capable of executing effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means includes effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect, and effect mode setting means for the effect mode setting means. and output means capable of outputting effect information indicating the effect mode set by the output means, based on the effect information output by the output means, a predetermined first effect for the first effect means A first performance control means for executing a performance operation, and a second performance means different from the first performance means for executing a predetermined second performance operation based on the performance information output by the output means. and a second effect control means, wherein the first effect control means is a specific information output means capable of outputting specific information included in the effect information output by the output means to the second effect control means. A gaming machine BV1 characterized by having:

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine BV1, in the gaming machine having the effect control means capable of executing the effect control for executing the predetermined effect, the effect control means includes effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect. and an output means capable of outputting effect information indicating the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and based on the effect information output by the output means, the first effect means and a first effect control means for executing a predetermined first effect operation, and a predetermined effect for a second effect means different from the first effect means based on the effect information output by the output means. and a second effect control means for executing a second effect operation, wherein the first effect control means transmits specific information included in the effect information output by the output means to the second effect control means. It has specific information output means capable of outputting. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BV1, the effect mode setting means can set a duplicate effect mode using at least the first effect action and the second effect action, and the output means indicates the duplicate effect mode. The production information is output to the first production control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second production operation among the duplicate production modes to the second production control means as the specific information. A gaming machine BV2 characterized by:

According to the game machine BV2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BV1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect mode setting means can set a duplicate effect mode using at least the first effect action and the second effect action, and the output means outputs the effect information indicating the duplicate effect mode. to the first effect control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second effect operation among the overlapping effect modes to the second effect control means as the specific information. . As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the game machine BV2, the effect mode setting means is characterized in that the overlapping effect mode is set such that the start timing of the first effect action is earlier than the start timing of the second effect action. Game machine BV3.

According to the gaming machine BV3, the effect mode setting means sets the overlapping effect mode so that the start timing of the first effect action is earlier than the start timing of the second effect action. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BW group>
a performance period setting means capable of setting a predetermined performance period; and when a first performance condition is established while the first performance period is set by the performance period setting means, the performance period is set at least from a first position. a first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect using a effect member movable to a second position different from the first position; a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect using a display means when a second effect condition different from the effect condition is satisfied, wherein the first effect a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the effect member and the display means in a specific effect period within the effect period; a movable state determining means for determining a movable state of the effect member; a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. game machine BW1.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine BW1, when the first effect period is established by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period, and the first effect period is set by the effect period setting means, A first performance executing means capable of executing a first performance using a performance member movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position, and the first performance period are set. a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance using a display means when a second performance condition different from the first performance condition is established during the game. In the game machine, in a specific effect period within the first effect period, a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the effect member and the display means, and a movable state of the effect member are determined. and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the result of determination by the movable condition determiner is a specific result. It is. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine BW1, the movable state determination means determines the specific determination result when the effect member is not positioned at the first position.

According to the game machine BW2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BW1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable state determining means determines that the specific determination result is obtained when the effect member is not positioned at the first position. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine BW1 or BW2, the game machine BW3 is characterized in that the special effect executing means executes the special effect using the display means.

According to the gaming machine BW3, the special effect executing means executes the special effect using the display means. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Any one of the game machines BW1 to BW3 has operation means operable by the player and operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first The performance condition is satisfied when the operation determining means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed.

According to the gaming machine BW4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BW1 to BW3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has operation means that can be operated by the player, and operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BW4, valid period setting means capable of setting an operation valid period for validly determining that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation judging means; and period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set.

According to the game machine BW5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BW4, the following effects are produced. That is, it has operation means that can be operated by the player, and operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine BW4, valid period setting means capable of setting an operation valid period for validly determining that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation judging means; and period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BX group>
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; A first game state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second game state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, can be set. , standby state setting means for setting a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, operation means operable by the player, and predetermined operation means for the operation means. and an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the result of the determination by the operation determining means, wherein the operation determining means comprises the When the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed, and based on the game state set by the game state setting means, the A gaming machine BX1 characterized by having a standby condition variable setting means capable of variably setting a standby condition.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine BX1, there are provided a determination means for executing a predetermined determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means. A first game state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display executing means, and a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, are set. a game state setting means capable of setting a possible second game state; a waiting state setting means for setting a waiting state when a predetermined waiting condition is satisfied; an operating means operable by a player; an operation determining means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means; and an operation performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the determination result of the operation determining means; The operation determination means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed when the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, and is set by the game state setting means. It has standby condition variable setting means capable of variably setting the standby condition based on the game state. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BX1, the standby condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting is performed. The means variably sets the standby condition so that the standby condition is less likely to be established when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. A gaming machine BX2 characterized by:

According to the game machine BX2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BX1, the following effects are produced. That is, the standby condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting means The standby condition is variably set so that the standby condition is less likely to be established when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine BX1 or BX2, the game machine BX3 is characterized in that the second game state is more likely to be determined by the determination means than the first game state.

According to the game machine BX3, the second game state is more likely to be determined by the determination means than the first game state. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Points where the player pushes in the direction from the back to the front>
In an operation device having operation means that a player pushes in, the operation device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position in which the operation means protrudes from the first state with respect to the player. and a biasing means for biasing the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pressing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the depth side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is directed to the side.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the performance is performed in a manner that heightens the player's expectation of a big win at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operating means with high strength. In this case, there is a problem that the operation means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that a straightforward up and down linear motion is performed. By causing the slippage between the player's hand and the operating means, the momentum of pushing can be released.

Also, considering the game posture of the player, when the operation means is pushed around the shoulder or elbow,
Since it becomes difficult to apply force in the forward direction, the player can naturally weaken the force applied to the operating means.

In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about an axial rod arranged on the far side for the player, tilts up and down about the axial rod, and has the operation means. The game machine A2 is characterized by comprising a tilting means, wherein the tilting means is arranged so that the operating means faces the opposite direction of the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured in a manner to rotate, and in the second state, the operation means is arranged in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from performing an operation of hitting the operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft and tilting the hand around that position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be easily pushed in, so that a new pushing operation method that is less likely to be accelerated can be provided. , it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

The new push operation method is, for example, placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operation means with the palm up and down, and then turning the thumb side toward the operation means. A method in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft and the palm is placed facing the operation means, and then a method in which the palm is dropped toward the operation means is exemplified. be done.

A gaming machine A3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is vertical.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means in the first state is the vertical direction. It is possible to prevent breakage due to the pushing operation in the state.

In the game machine A3, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can be automatically operated, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it acts in the direction of one side and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is directed in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. can be prevented from working. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when the button is retracted and receiving a high load.

In the game machine A4, a maintenance state that maintains the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and the maintenance means is operated by the driving means. a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of phase change between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is maintained; In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintaining state is canceled is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase,
A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintained state by the same rotation.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintaining means is kept in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to release the maintained state is rotated. The movement width of the operation device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the biasing means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , a game machine A6 configured such that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so the mode of movement is limited to one way. Since it is possible to add a moving mode of moving following the maintaining means to the operating means, it is possible to increase the types of moving modes of the operating means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, light emitting means disposed inside the operation device and emitting light toward the player is provided, and the second state is more favorable than the first state. However, from a player's point of view, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is more illuminated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view than the first state. Since the irradiation range of the emitted light is expanded and the area of the operation means is reduced, the player can be made to pay attention to the light and the performance effect can be improved, and at the same time, it is difficult to press the operation means unless aiming. By adopting this mode, it is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means is changed by moving the operation means toward and away from the display means. Characterized game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operation means moves toward and away from the display means to emit light from the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from reflecting on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<The point of making the repulsive force at normal times small while making it possible to respond to repeated hits>
In an operation device having an operation means that allows a player to perform an operation up to an end position, a first state and a second state in which the range of motion of the operation up to the end position is wider than that of the first state.
a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state; and biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A game machine B1 comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation means from the first state to the second state according to the player's operation.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the force for returning the operation means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operation means is performed by the drive motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to repeat the operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. 2
By pushing back the operation means with the drive means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with repeated hitting determination means for determining whether or not a repeated hitting operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is operated based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means, so the player does not perform repeated hitting operations (for example, single pressing operation, long pressing, and so on). It is possible to prevent the second driving means from operating even when the player is performing an operation, etc., and the player feels the load of pushing back the hand.

In the gaming machine B2, terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position shifted by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. position difference detection means for detecting; and movement direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal end detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means; a game machine B3 characterized in that the second drive means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of the push-in to return to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction of returning from the end of the push to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second driving device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and placing a heavy load on the player's hand.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate the driving force for moving the operating means.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means includes a drive motor for rotating an eccentric weight and elastically supports the drive motor on the support frame. a supporting means, wherein the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state toward the position of the second state increases as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The game machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame in a state in which the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, thereby generating a driving force.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is unnecessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame based on the arrangement of the operation means at the end position. A game machine B6 characterized by.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame. By doing so, the drive motor can be moved away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in the direction away from the support frame (the direction toward the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration effect device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means, the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring the speed of the operation means from the detection interval of the detection sensors, and the measurement means threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; The driving force generated by the repulsion means increases when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the player's light operation is emphasized, the operation resistance will be low, and there is a risk that the operation means will be damaged by the player's operation. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of damage to the operating means can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases, and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold, and if it is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, it is possible to improve operability and prevent destruction by the repulsion means.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, , before the control for pushing out the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operating means is arranged at a position capable of coming into contact with the voice coil motor,
A gaming machine C2 characterized by driving the voice coil motor in advance.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means can be arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before moving, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor. While suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, the degree of braking the operation means can be gradually improved, and the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means by means of spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by means of spring elasticity. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the value measured by the threshold value determining means when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value to the case where the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a movable area of an end portion of said repulsion means opposite to a side contacting said operation means is narrowed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means, which is the end opposite to the side that contacts the operation means, is narrowed, thereby making it possible to operate the operation means. A higher velocity can increase the elastic force generated by the repulsive means.

<Damage of the driving means is prevented by interrupting the transmission of the driving force with the clutch>
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, a releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the releasing means releasing the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means through the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the operation means is automatically operated for the effect, if the operation means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the canceling means cancels the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means while the operation means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the game machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the game machine is being driven in the second direction.

Here, when whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depends on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by the player while driving the driving means in an operation direction in which transmission of the driving force cannot be released, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance is reduced when the operating means is operated to effect performance.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the unlocking direction or in the unlocking direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward. Toggles whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, two modes of button operation can be created (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both driving directions regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of action in the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

It should be noted that, as a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting with the operating direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes biasing means for biasing the driving means and the transmission means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the release means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmission means. and engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force when they are engaged with each other. A game machine D3, characterized in that the game machine D3 has a shape that tapers away from the contact surface and is inclined with respect to the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the release means applies the driving force in the engaged state on the contact surfaces of the pressing means. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the direction of movement of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are tapered away from the abutment surfaces, the engagement between the engaging teeth causes the transmission means to move from the driving means. It is possible to separate them, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied by the biasing means between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means is separated from the driving means, the biasing force acts in the direction of movement of the driving means via the engagement teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is cancelled.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means increases, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically reinstated, rather than completely de-resistance away. As a result, when the player releases the button, the button can be started to operate within a short period of time.

That is, if the player is holding the button when the button is driven "as an effect",
It goes through one phase of the button action. In addition, if the player releases his hand in the middle of the game, if the player moves from the end of the first phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes longer, and "
The player's feeling of "starting to move because the load on the player is relieved" is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operation means can be started within a short period of time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player starts to move because the load on the player is relieved.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is:
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage.
That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means move toward and away from each other, the transmission means and the release means collide with each other at this plane, and the release means is disengaged. It is possible to suppress the movement along the direction of approaching and separating from the means to be stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate early.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs between when the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction and when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one operation mode. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is the following for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D6 is similar in that the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive means is the same. Since the action after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the degree of expectation for a big win, the player is instructed to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be supervised.

In addition, since the difference in operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the degree of expectation for the big win without watching the operation of the operation means. can be done. However, the drive means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the direction of action cannot be recognized from the vibration sound. can be made to watch over the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the protrusion of the cam based on the rotation of the cam>
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; biasing means for biasing the operating means in a direction from the first position to the second position; and operating means for moving from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means. terminating means for variably forming the movement terminating end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; 1 means includes releasing load means for applying a load to the first means for releasing the engagement with the operating means, and releasing the engagement by the releasing load means and terminating the movement of the operating means in the terminating means. A game machine E characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a cam-operated and movable operating means is fixed at a first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, whereby the urging force of the urging means expands and operates. , There is a game machine that can change the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation by the termination means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation of the operation means is changed according to the phase of the cam when the fixation is released, the phase of the cam when the fixation is released varies in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation are driven by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the releasing load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means by the terminal means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used together, so the number of driving means can be reduced.

A game machine E2 characterized in that, in the game machine E1, the change in the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the position of the release load means can be changed based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detecting means such as position sensors for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method for switching the state of the load release means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the load release means is composed of a projection that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotational cycle of the cam and the projection, or , a method of desynchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection in other phases, etc.
exemplified.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means, by the load given from the first means,
A gaming machine E3 is arranged operably with respect to the transmitting means, and is characterized in that whether or not the releasing load means and the transmitting means are synchronously operated is switched by the operation of the load releasing means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not to operate synchronously with the transmission means, the synchronous state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotating shaft of the first rotating member, and the release load means includes a rotating second rotating member. A gaming machine E4 comprising members, wherein the rotation periods of the first rotating member and the second rotating member are different.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single drive means, but the rotation cycles are different, so that the second rotating means can be operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of phases of the first rotary member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of end positions when the operating means is held at the first position and then released and moved toward the second position. ,
You can expand your production range. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position away from the first position or an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device has a first position for the operation means and a second position reached by the operation means when the player performs an operation from the first position. A game machine comprising vibrating means having a vibrating portion configured to be movable between and vibrating; and receiving means arranged to be able to contact with the vibrating portion, wherein the operating means is arranged at the first position Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut against the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player and vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, regardless of whether the operation means is operated or not, when the vibration means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operation means or the frame of the game machine. Alternatively, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the game machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means,
It is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the operation means. mode), there is a problem that the vibration may not start in time before releasing the hand, and the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion contacts the receiving means is determined depending on whether the operating means is placed at the first position or is placed at the second position by being operated by the player. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pressing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the mode of operation by the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the game machine F1, the vibration means is arranged to protrude in the occupation area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operation means moves to the second position. The game machine F2 changes to the abutting state by moving the vibrating means out of the occupied area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operation means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed,
The intensity of transmitted vibrations can also be varied. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation strength can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibrating means without any particular change in the driving mode.

A game machine F3 characterized in that, in the game machines F1 or F2, the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via support means having spring elasticity.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, prevent transmission of vibration, and suppress displacement occurring in the vibrating means during vibration.

A game machine F4 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, in the contact state, the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the extension and contraction of the supporting means can give momentum when the vibrating part moves in the direction of approaching the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means has deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operation means,
A gaming machine F5 characterized in that the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means is made lower than that.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the direction in which the support means deforms can be finely set when the operation means is operated and interferes with the support means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the support means. can.

Thus, even if the amount of movement of the operating means is slightly different, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. .

As a method for differentiating the deformation resistance, in the case where the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending rubber legs along the movement direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibrating means. A method of manufacturing a rubber member by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance for each direction when it is composed of a rubber member; , and a coil spring that biases the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means.

A game machine F6 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, the portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operation means, but the vibration is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is separate from the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, thereby suppressing a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, among the frame parts of the game machine, the part near the upper tray to which the game balls are supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc. Examples include a portion that may be touched by hands, a housing portion that partially encloses the operation means, and the like.

<One-touch attachment between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured such that the operation means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means is operated by a player. and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, wherein the transmission means comprises a deformation portion that elastically deforms due to an overload. Gaming machine G1 to play.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There is a game machine provided (for example, see JP 2014-144218)
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the player holds and fixes the operation means, when the drive means generates a driving force for driving the operation means, the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operation means,
There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmission means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the drive means and the transmission means It is possible to relax the load applied to the connection part with.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deforming portion constitutes a connection portion of the cam member with the rotating shaft, and the elasticity of the deforming portion causes the cam member to move toward the rotating shaft. A game machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deforming portion plays a role of a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means, a role of a portion generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft,
Prepare. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the transmission member by sharing the functions. For example, separate securing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member has a projecting portion projecting parallel to the rotation shaft, the projecting portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion causes the cam member to On the other hand, a gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to construct the cam member and the projecting portion as one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotating shaft tilts with respect to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid relative to the cam member, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the members can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the elastic deformation resistance of the deforming portion is greater than that of the rotating shaft in comparison with the first rotating direction in which the cam member is rotated about a straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the projecting portion. A gaming machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which rotation is performed around a straight line perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the projecting portion and the extending direction of the rotation shaft. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformation portion different for each direction, the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed when viewed from the rotation axis direction is more Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the projecting tip of the projecting portion can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the projecting portion of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the projecting portion is to move, so that the elastic deformation of the deformation portion relieves the load generated between the projecting portion and the operating means. can do.

The game machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, wherein the deformation portion elastically deforms to change the posture of the cam member, The game machine G5 is characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformable portion elastically deforms, thereby changing the attitude of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member are brought into contact with each other. contact, the movement resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the gaming machine G6 comprises detection means for detecting that at least part of the cam member is tilted with respect to an axis.

Here, in a situation where an overload is applied to the operating device and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of a deviation from , it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period of time before the occurrence of the overload is detected. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting displacement deviation becomes smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the structure of the detection means and the higher the cost. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of an overload at a low cost and at an early stage.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time when the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member, without the need to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the driving means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent balls with threads. Game machine H>
In a game machine provided with a foul ball passage through which foul balls flowing back toward a launching device, among game balls shot into a game area, can pass, the foul ball passage permits passage of the falling game balls. The game machine H1 is characterized by comprising a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the movement of objects flowing backward.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, where a thread cutting blade is arranged inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the launcher, and the game ball with the thread connected is driven into the game area. There is a game machine with a function to prevent (cut the thread) (for example, JP 2015-02
4179). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth when the ball is shot, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. It may be returned to the player side as a foul ball.
For this reason, for example, a cheating tool is prepared in which game balls are connected to both ends of a string, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the string is shot with a weak firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and be returned to the player. By hitting the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the game area while gripping one of the game balls that have been drawn, the string can be removed from the guide path and passed through the foul ball passage to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which one game ball and the other game ball are connected by a string, a load is applied from the outside to the string connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the game area There is a problem that there is a possibility that it may be possible to obtain illicit profits by manipulating the

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed, the one-way obstruction means However, by interfering with the movement of the string in the reverse direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illicit profits.

A game machine H2 characterized in that the foul ball path in the game machine H1 has a bent portion for bending a downflow path of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the string guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the string can be quickly cut.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion is provided with a load means which does not apply a load to the game balls flowing down, but applies a load to the objects flowing backward, on the inner corner side of the bending.
.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, it is possible to apply a load to the backflowing object (for example, a thread-like member) by the load means.

In the game machine H3, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the load means is arranged in a concave portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed part, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H3 or H4, the gaming machine H5 comprises regulation means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the restricting means restricts the outward movement of the load means in the foul ball passage. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the on-line member from weakening due to the deformation of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, a receiving tray is provided as a tray on the front side of the front door for the foul balls to reach first, and the receiving tray is a portion for discharging the game balls paid out from the payout device. The game machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharge part is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the game balls paid out from the payout device pass in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage. To reduce the durability of the string by intentionally hitting the put out game ball to apply the load when the string guided to the game area is used to apply the load to the other game ball. be able to.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball discharge part that discharges the game balls put out from the pay-out device to the receiving tray, which is the tray where the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. , a game machine H7 characterized by being positioned below the lower end of the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, a cheating act was performed in which a string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage was used to apply a load to the other game ball. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Structure of board holder. Game machine I>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means receives the game means. A state changing means is provided for changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state, wherein the state changing means changes the gaming means to the usable state. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising an approach means for approaching the game means from the one side when setting the above.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is rotatable in a rotational direction parallel to the front surface of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame, and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a game machine provided with a fixing means for holding (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the game board is pushed into the position of the use state, if the game board is pushed in halfway, it can be pushed again. Therefore, there is a problem that the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the state changing means has a means for approaching the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means contacts the game board and adds a pushing force,
The effect is that the game board can be pushed to the position of the use state.

In the game machine I1, the state changing means displaces the game means to the one side as the game means is changed to an unusable state. .

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the game means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the game means is changed to the unusable state, so that the game means can be removed. It is effective in improving the working efficiency of the work.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the state changing means makes the game means unusable and the proximity means retreats to the outside of the game means. Gaming machine I3.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or I2, the proximity means retracts to the outside of the game means, so that it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the game means. Since this is performed along with disabling the means, the working efficiency can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I3, the game machine I4 is provided with contact means for receiving a load from the game means when the state changing means is changed to the usable state.

According to the game machine I4, since the contact means receives a load from the game means to change the state of the state changing means to the usable state, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means causes the usable state as a series of flows. can change state to

In the gaming machine I4, the game means is supported by a shaft on one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, the width dimension of the game means is used to
A load can be efficiently applied to the abutment means via the game means.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I5, there is provided closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the closing means is disabled by the state changing means making the game means unusable. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by comprising a closing regulation part that prevents the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means puts the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. You can decide whether to As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means is maintained in an unusable state.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from getting stuck. Game machine J>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means being connected to the game means. A game machine J1, characterized in that it comprises an arranging means arranged on a path that communicates with the outside, wherein the arranging means is constructed so as to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of points.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, JP-A-2016-
26573). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is only one anti-fraud section, and there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, the arranging means is arranged in the path where the piano wire is likely to be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of points. can improve the effect of

In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means includes first means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a first location, and second means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a second location,
A game machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of members from the outside by a different method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means differs in the method of suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed as compared with the case where the number of is increased.

In addition, the method of suppressing the intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of restricting entry by blocking a route, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the placement means comprises an intrusion control portion formed in a cup shape that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed in the shape of a cup, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further intrusion.

In the game machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electric wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry control section in a route from the outside to the game means. Characterized game machine J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J3, when a fraudulent act of penetrating the entry control part with high heat occurs, the change (disconnection due to heat, etc.) caused in the wiring due to the high heat is detected. It is possible to easily produce the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means arranges the members entered from the outside,
The gaming machine J5 is characterized by comprising elimination means for guiding to an elimination area far from the gaming means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the member entering from the outside is guided to the resolution area far from the game means by the arranging means. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member entering from the outside from reaching the game means.

<Structure of five decorative plates. Including fraud prevention. Game machine K>
a first means and a second means arranged oppositely along a first direction and connected by at least one side; A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, wherein the connection direction of the connecting part is set in a second direction that intersects the first direction A gaming machine K1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means arranged to face each other and connected on at least one side, and disposed between the first means and second means along the first direction There is a gaming machine comprising a third means that
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as adhesion or screwing, and when the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being hung up on the third means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the third means It is possible to reduce the load applied from Thereby, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

A game machine K2 characterized in that, in the game machine K1, the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 comprises connected means connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, wherein the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means A gaming machine K3 characterized by being connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction of approaching and fitting them to each other.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, it is provided with a connected means connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
Thereby, even if a fraudulent act of breaking the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the fraudulent act can be detected early.

In the game machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction is the same as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any one of game machines K3 to K5, light irradiation means for irradiating light toward said first means or second means side and fixed to said connected means, and one of said first means or second means a light guiding means fixed to a member of the light emitting means and capable of introducing the light emitted by the light emitting means.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent positional deviation between the first and second means and the light guide means.

A game machine K7 characterized in that a game machine K7 is characterized by comprising contact means for surface contact in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machine K6, a space corresponding to the size of the abutting means is maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means. can be done.
This prevents the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposing direction and is displaced. can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposing direction when an illegal attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Point L for utilizing curved light guiding means. As a point, unachieved>
A light guide means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in an irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projecting means arranged opposite to the light guide means and onto which the light that has passed through the light guide means is projected, The game machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means comprises a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitting light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means has the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion Department and
It is possible to change the emission intensity of the projection target means.

In the game machine L1, the projection target means is characterized in that the concave surface opposing portion is made of a light-transmissive material, and the convex surface opposing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave surface opposing portion. Gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion, the light emitted from the light guiding means is condensed at the concave facing portion. The production effect of the production by the light can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, a reverse projection means is provided on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guide means therebetween, and the light passing through the light guide means is projected. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion of the light guiding means facing the convex surface are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L2, the part of the counterprojection means arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means emit light. Since they are made of a material with substantially the same transmittance, by making the same light incident on the light guiding means, the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the means to be projected and the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the opposite projection means can be achieved. can be different from

<Arrangement structure of the bass reflex speaker. Game machine M>
first means and second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to form an internal space in the fixed state; acoustic means disposed so as to enter at least a part of the internal space; A gaming machine M1, characterized by comprising bending means for constructing a bending path in an internal space.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which speakers are arranged at the left and right ends of the front frame, and production is performed by the sound output from the speakers (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-1
6088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling toward the rear side of the speaker body is advanced to the left-right central position of the gaming machine and sent out of the gaming machine,
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is regulated by the left-right width of the game machine, where the effect of making the bass sound is likely to be performed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means constitutes a curved path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by configuring a path longer than the length of one piece, the By removing the restriction on the left-right width, it is possible to make the vibration wave travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that loads are applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is a rib-like member extending from at least one of the first means and the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2, characterized in that it has a protruding part protruding from the second means, and a protruding tip of the protruding part abuts on the other of the first means and the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, the projecting end of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means and the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the curved path.

In the game machine M1 or M2, an opening connecting the internal space and the outside is provided, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the sound means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is closed by

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the sound means, so it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls forming the internal space can be closed appropriately in a state where the passage member passes from the internal space to the outside.

The game machine M4, wherein the opening is arranged closer to the sound means than the protruding part in the game machine M3.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any one of game machines M1 to M4, support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and second means is fastened and fixed, and presentation means arranged below the support fastening means and performing presentation accompanying a game. and wherein the effect means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M1 to M4, the supporting and fastening means is supported by the effect means from below, so that the supporting and fastening means does not have to press the space used for the effect. things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, reverse rotating flower. Petals that stop on the way. Game machine N>
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; A second displacing state switchable between a non-following state displaced in a direction different from the displacing direction of the first displacing means
and a displacement means, wherein at least when the second displacement means is in the follow-up state, third displacement means displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by comprising:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates in the vicinity of the extension end. When doing so, there is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion and contraction direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the performance becomes slow and the performance effect is not sufficient. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the game machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized by comprising resistance means for generating resistance against the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Game machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means by the action of the resistance means, and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of modes of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means. be able to.

A game machine N4 characterized in that, in the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and is visually recognized by the player. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized by comprising a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, the shaft means coaxially and rotatably supporting the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means. Gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, since the shaft means functioning as the rotating shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, the first displacement means, To prevent the displacement resistance from increasing excessively because the attitude of any one of the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, and the attitudes of the other members or means also follow and change. can be done.

<Utilization of shell buttons and holes. As a point, unachieved>
In a game machine comprising first means and housing means capable of housing the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operation means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operation means from below, and that the operation means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate. See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, there is a problem that the foreign object remains inside and may induce a malfunction. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 is provided with the second opening formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the accommodation means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. game machine O2.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support part.

A gaming machine O3, in the gaming machine O1 or O2, wherein the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance portion. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of allowing a predetermined solid object to pass through and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured from a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
The solid object can be easily removed through the second opening because the opening is configured with a shape based on the shape of the solid object in the opposite direction.

A gaming machine O5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object can be visually recognized by the player when the second opening is partially blocked by the solid object. can be made As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain. .

<Points related to devising the shape of the bottom of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine comprising a first means and a first supporting means for supporting the first means, wherein the first supporting means comprises a projection-shaped portion projecting from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a glass frame (front frame) in which an operation handle is arranged is configured to be removable from an outer frame in which a game board is arranged (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, there is a risk that it may slip when the bottom surface is covered with a finger. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, the protruding shape part protruding from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a part on which a finger is hooked, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation where the first support means slips down from the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

It should be noted that the arrangement of the protruding shaped portion is not limited at all, and it is sufficient if the protruding portion protrudes outward from the first support means. For example, it may protrude in the vertical direction, or it may protrude in the front side.

In the game machine P1, the second support means for detachably supporting the first support means is provided, and the protruding shaped portion is separated from the support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. A game machine P2 characterized in that it is arranged in a row.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the projecting shaped portion is provided downwardly from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first supporting means is centrally applied as the supporting position. Therefore, it is possible to make the first support means easier to hold. This facilitates attachment and detachment of the first support means to and from the second support means.

In addition, the position away from the supporting position is not limited at all. For example, the first
It may be positioned closer to the front when the support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, or closer to the other end when the first support means is pivotally supported by the second support means at one end. It may be the position, or the position on the opposite side of the pivotal support position with reference to the plate for storing the game balls.

In the game machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed shape portion that is recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means leaves a gap between the recessed shape portion and the A game machine P3 characterized in that it is arranged opposite to the recessed shape portion.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1 or P2, the first means can Powder that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub against each other due to positional deviation (shaving powder, dust)
can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of powder and clogging of the movable portion, which causes malfunction, and the accumulation of powder in the detection portion of the detection device, resulting in erroneous detection.

In this way, the recessed shape part can be used not only during non-operation (for example, when the glass frame is opened to cancel an error, during maintenance, or when replacing the glass frame), but also during operation (for example, when playing games). It is effective even in the middle or in the game waiting state (demonstration screen display state, etc.).

The gaming machine P4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine P3, the recessed shape portion is arranged inside a range in which the projecting shape portion protrudes.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effects of the game machine P3, the portion where the recessed shape portion is formed can be prevented from becoming extremely thin compared to other portions and falling into insufficient strength. can. In addition, since the recessed portion is formed behind the projecting portion, the projecting portion can be flexed and deformed in the inward and outward directions. Cracking of the shaped portion can be suppressed.

In addition, the load applied to the projecting shaped portion includes, for example, the weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first support means, and the load applied when the first support means is moved.
An example is a load applied by a collision of objects (such as a thousand-ryo box) moved by a player or a store clerk near the support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means outside the recessed shape portion and is supported in a manner of contacting the overlapping portion that overlaps the projecting shape portion in the inward and outward directions. A game machine P5, characterized by comprising a contact means, and an operating portion positioned on the contact means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects of the game machine P4, while maintaining the effect of the recessed shape portion, it is possible to sufficiently secure the support thickness of the overlapping position that supports the abutting means. It is possible to suppress deformation of the first support means during operation.

In the gaming machine P5, the abutting means includes impact damping means that is continuously formed between the operation part and is capable of attenuating impact, and the impact damping means is located in the recessed shape part. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width that is shorter than the width.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operating portion to the contact means can be attenuated by the impact attenuation means, and in addition, the distance between the impact attenuation means and the overlapping portion is increased. Therefore, the impact can be attenuated also by the deformation (deflection) of the contact means.

Various aspects are exemplified as the impact attenuation means. For example, a mass member made of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device may be used.

In any one of the game machines P3 to P6, the concave shape portion has a first portion facing the first means and a second portion extending from the first portion, wherein the first portion The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the second portion is formed to have a greater degree of depression than the second portion.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is provided in the first part, which is expected to be given a large load, and compared with the first part. By forming the space of the second portion, which is expected to receive a small load from the bottom, to be small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the concave portion while maintaining high durability.

The degree of recess includes, for example, the depth of recess (the greater the degree of recess, the deeper) and the width of the recess (the greater the degree of recess, the wider).

In addition, when the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the portion facing the first means is smaller than that of the other portions, a concave shape corresponding to the other portions may be used. The recessed degree of the portion may be formed to be large.

Moreover, the recess shape portion may be designed based on, for example, the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence of the load, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the game parlor, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined effect state, a game state such as a specific game state). may be used as a reference.

In any one of the game machines P1 to P7, the protruding portion is formed along the front-rear direction below the bottom portion of the first support means, and the formation range becomes wider toward the front. Gaming machine P8.

According to the game machine P8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines P1 to P7, the load resistance of the front part where the load concentrates when the first support means stands alone can be improved. The first supporting means can be stored for a long period of time without the first supporting means falling even in a storage method in which the single supporting means is placed on the floor.

It should be noted that what is considered when designing the projecting shape is not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the protruding shape portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated when the first means is operated and the frequency of occurrence of the load.

The game machine P9 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines P1 to P8, the lower surface of the first support means is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined upward in a direction away from the second support means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily self-sustained by itself, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the projecting shape portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid contamination of portions other than the projecting shape portion.

<Points related to the deformation mode based on the support structure and shape of the scarf>
A gaming machine comprising operating means operable by a player, first supporting means for supporting the operating means, and second supporting means for supporting at least one of the first supporting means and the operating means, The game machine Q1 is characterized in that the first support means is deformable in a direction to narrow the gap between the operation means and the second support means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which operating means such as effect buttons are supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, countermeasures against positional deviation occurring in the area around the operating means due to the load during operation of the operating means are insufficient. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the point of view.

For example, when the player's weight is applied to the operation means and the operation means descends, the second support means also descends at the same time. At this time, the lowering distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the lowering distance of the operating means. At this time, due to the difference in the descent distance, in the front side part,
A gap may occur between the operating means and the second support means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine Q1, even if the second support means descends excessively, the deformation of the first support means suppresses the formation of a gap between the operation means and the second support means. can do. That is, since the operating means can be allowed to descend excessively (sinking),
It is possible to simplify the manner in which the operating means is supported.

Note that the operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a descending direction, an ascending direction, a pushing direction along the longitudinal direction, a rotating (turning) direction, or a combination thereof.

In addition, as a form of contact from the operation direction, various forms are exemplified other than the case where the normal line extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) in the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be moved toward the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, since the reaction force increases toward the center of the bottom, the operation means can be effectively supported. can be done systematically.

Also, a common support means for commonly supporting the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the game machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material, and includes a support portion that supports the operation means, and a game ball that can be held. A game machine Q2 characterized by comprising a game ball holding portion connected to the game machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the operation means and the game ball holding portion.

In addition, when the first support means is composed of a flexible member, or when it is connected to the operation means or the game ball holding portion in a floating structure, the vibration generated when the operation means is operated can directly affect the holding of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball held in the game ball holding part from being displaced every time the operation means is operated, thereby preventing abnormal noise from being generated.

Various aspects are exemplified as a structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, the first
Vibration transmission may be prevented in the (1) direction, while vibration transmission may be maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to deliberately generate an abnormal sound, and to execute a sound effect.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operation means includes an operation unit configured to be operable by the player,
The first support means, the farther the connection position with the game ball holding portion is from the operation portion,
A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being arranged on the front side.

In the game machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation unit, which is a position that is likely to be displaced due to operation, the connection position is moved to the back side to reduce the absolute amount of displacement. While suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the ball holding part and the first support means, the connection position is arranged on the front side (closer to the player) in the remote part of the operation part, which is a position that is difficult to shift due to the operation. , the design can be improved.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q3, the operation means includes an operation portion configured to be operable by the player, a body portion supported by the first support means, and the operation portion and the body portion. and a connecting portion for connecting, wherein the operation portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first support means is formed of a plurality of divided bodies, and is detachable in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. A gaming machine Q4 characterized in that it is configured in a manner that even the connecting portion is surrounded.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the first support means while sufficiently ensuring the size of the operating portion.

Various modes are exemplified for the method of fixing the first support means formed from the divided body.
For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, or one divided body among the plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means and another divided body may be connected to the divided body. You can let me.

Moreover, various aspects are exemplified for the fixing position and fixing manner of the divided body. For example, fitting may be used, or fastening may be used.

In the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation part, the impact generated when the operation part is operated can be distributed and received at the plurality of fixed positions. Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of displacement of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the tightening direction to a direction that intersects (for example, is perpendicular to) the operating direction of the operating portion, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operating portion can be made different from the tightening direction of the fastening screw. It is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to impact during operation.

A game machine Q5 characterized in that, in the game machine Q4, a fastening direction of a fastening means for fastening the divided body intersects with an operation direction of the operation portion.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied in the fastening direction when the operation unit is operated, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during the operation.
It is possible to prevent the separation of the divided body from being released.

Various modes are exemplified as the direction that intersects with the operation direction. For example, if the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction that intersects the operation direction is a direction that intersects a plane perpendicular to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined rotation axis). direction along the axis of rotation) is exemplified.

Further, for example, when the operation direction is a direction along a predetermined straight line (in the case of a push-in operation or a pull-out operation), the direction intersecting the operation direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. direction is exemplified.

In this case, when a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction with a high proportion (frequency) of operations) are assumed during the game, at least The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or in a direction that intersects a plurality of planes, that is, a direction that intersects any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the divided body has a plurality of fastening points, and a first plane including one fastening point and a second plane including other fastening points are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even when a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), the other fastening points are simultaneously subjected to a large load. Therefore, it is possible to prevent simultaneous displacement of the split bodies and loosening of the fastening at both fastening points.

Note that the fastening portion of the divided body may be arranged at a portion where a load concentrates when the operating portion is operated. In this case as well, separate fastening points are arranged on a plane different from the plane on which the load is concentrated, so that it is possible to prevent the position of the divided body from being displaced or the fastening to be loosened due to the load during operation. can be prevented.

In any one of game machines Q4 to Q6, the operation means includes detection means configured to be capable of detecting a predetermined operation of the operation section, and the detection means is arranged at a position away from the division position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the split position, and when the operation part is moved along with the operation of the operation part at the split position, the operation part and the divided body may rub against each other and powder (such as dust) may be generated. can do. As a result, occurrence of erroneous detection can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means is an interference means for interfering with the divided body on the side of the divided body that separates in the dividing direction (approaching and separating direction) when the game is possible. A gaming machine Q8 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the displacement of the operating means with respect to the divided body in the dividing direction.

The interfering means may interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but may be formed so as not to interfere with the operating means before entering the assembled state, for example, during assembly work. For example, if the split body is made of a flexible material, the split body can be bent during assembly work, so that interference with the interfering means can be easily avoided, and ease of assembly can be maintained. can do.

Further, for example, even if the divided body is made of a hard material, it may be constructed so as not to interfere with the interfering means in the process of assembling. That is, they may be formed in a shape that does not interfere with each other when viewed from the direction of assembly (for example, viewed from the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer together for assembly) before fastening. In this case, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the divided body when the game is possible while securing the ease of assembly.

A gaming machine Q9 in any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, wherein the second supporting means comprises a recessed receiving portion that is recessed to receive the first supporting means.

According to the game machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q8, the first support means is received in the receiving concave portion, so that the first support means is displaced under the influence of the positional deviation of the operation means. Even if they are displaced, the operating means and the first supporting means can be quickly returned to their original positions by the repulsive force from the receiving recessed portion.

A game machine according to any one of game machines Q1 to Q9, wherein said first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle having a center of curvature radius arranged on the operation portion side of said operation means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, it is possible to secure a large area in which the operation section can be arranged, and in addition, when the player grips the operation section, it feels cramped. can prevent you from feeling As a result, it is possible to improve the design of the operating section and improve the operability of the operating section.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes streak-like portions processed into streaks for reinforcement, and the extending directions of the streak-like portions are formed in different directions for each region. A gaming machine Q11 characterized in that:

According to the game machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streaky portion is different for each region, so that the first support means having an anisotropic rigidity is provided. can be configured.

In addition, the design standard of the extending direction of the streak is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be designed as an extension direction with a good yield, or if the load generated during the operation of the operation means acts in different manners for each region, the best way to deal with the load is. As the direction, the extending direction of the streak may be designed.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the substrate>
vibrating means; light emitting means arranged at a position to which the vibration is transmitted and capable of emitting light;
, wherein the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers and light-emitting elements are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-16088). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effects.

More specifically, in the above-described conventional game machine, light-emitting elements (LEDs, fluorescent lamps, discharge tubes, etc.) are arranged behind the speakers in order to prevent the board from receiving the vibrations of the speakers. In the place where it is, it becomes dark because the light emission effect cannot be performed. in this case,
In the front area where the game machine is likely to be visually recognized, the area that can be gorgeously produced is narrowed. In the first place, the size of game machines represented by pachinko machines is generally determined by standards, so
Securing a light emission production area is recognized as an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can receive the vibration of the vibrating device. can be brought closer to As a result, the front area can be visually recognized brightly regardless of the vibrating portion of the vibrating means.

In addition, the mode of the vibration means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an acoustic device capable of outputting sound, or an operation device having a built-in vibration device. Further, the means is not limited to the means capable of actively vibrating, and means configured to be able to vibrate (passively vibrate) against the load of an external force may be used.

Various modes are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, the diaphragm that the speaker has,
For example, an exhaust port for discharging the back pressure of vibration of the speaker seen in a bass reflex type speaker, and a path connected from the vibrating portion to the exhaust port are exemplified.

The vibrating device may be a rotationally driven vibrating device (for example, a vibrator),
A vibrating device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear driving may be used.

The mode of close arrangement is not limited at all, and any mode may be used as long as the player can visually recognize the light from the light emitting means. For example, the vibrating means may be laminated with the light emitting means,
In this case, the stacking direction may be the front-rear direction, may be a direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or may be a direction inclined leftward and rightward inward from the left and right ends.

A game machine R2 comprising a plurality of said vibrating means, a light emitting substrate on which said light emitting means are arranged, and said light emitting substrate being stacked on said plurality of said vibrating means in said gaming machine R1. .

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, the light-emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, displacement, etc.) due to the vibration generated when the vibrating means outputs sound. Since it is possible to change the presentation mode of the light emitting means, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be varied by changing the vibrating means for outputting the sound. ) can be increased.

In addition, the number of light-emitting substrates may be one, or plural. When there are a plurality of substrates, at least one substrate for light emission should be laminated on a plurality of vibrating means. In this case, it is possible to provide a combination of a light-emitting substrate that is displaced by vibration generated by the vibrating means and a light-emitting substrate that is not displaced, so that it is possible to further increase the types of changes in the presentation mode of the light-emitting means.

In the game machine R2, holding means for holding the vibrating means is provided, the light-emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means moves the light-emitting device along the stacking direction. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that it is constructed so as to generate a load in a direction that suppresses the displacement of the game board.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of the game machine R2, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light-emitting substrate and the holding means.

Note that the non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light-emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light-emitting substrate and the holding means are connected with screws, if the fastening force does not act (for example, simply preventing them from coming off), it can be said that they are not fixed.

Moreover, the expression "unfixed" does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front and rear positions of the light emitting substrate to the holding means, the front and rear positions of the light emitting substrate are defined (the front and rear positions are stabilized and small vibrations are allowed), and the shape of the light emitting substrate determines the position of the light emitting substrate. By enclosing the direction orthogonal to the front and rear directions with a slightly larger frame-shaped frame member, it is possible to suppress displacement in directions (up, down, left, and right) different from the front and rear directions.

As a result, compared to the case where the light emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means like the vibrating means, the influence of the vibration generated by the vibrating means on the light emitting substrate can be reduced. can increase

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member arranged on both sides of the light-emitting substrate in the stacking direction, fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, a regulating means for regulating moving directions of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, wherein the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. A game machine R4 characterized by.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effects of the game machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the direction in which the fixing means advances, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the direction of movement is restricted, even if the fixing by the fixing means is loosened (even if some of the fixing means are loosened), the displacement of the fixing means is relatively small. can reduce the displacement of the first member and the second member.

This makes it easier to maintain the positional relationship between the first member and the second member. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from separating or coming closer than expected.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect to progress. For example, a rod-like member may be inserted through the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any one of the game machines R2 to R4, the light-emitting substrate includes a first displacement area configured to be displaceable and a second displacement area whose displacement is suppressed compared to the first displacement area. A gaming machine R5 characterized by:

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emission mode when the light emission substrate is displaced due to the vibration of the vibration means is changed for each area of the light emission substrate. can be made

Thus, by designing the mode of the light emitting effect in the first displacement area and the mode of the light emitting effect in the second displacement area in a different manner, an excellent effect can be achieved. For example, as the first refracting means for receiving and refracting the light emitted from the first displacement area, a surface emitting means for performing uniform light emission effect by surface emission is arranged, while receiving and refracting the light emitted from the second displacement area. As the second refracting means, an edge light emitting means is arranged to show the player a high-intensity light by totally reflecting the light incident from one edge and emitting it from the other edge. With this, it is possible to perform a novel light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting mode (for example, luminance) differs for each region.

In addition, the aspect of suppressing displacement is not limited at all. For example, the suppression mode may be defined by the positional relationship between the light-emitting substrate and the plurality of vibrating means, or the mode may be defined by the holding mode of the light-emitting substrate.

For example, regarding the positional relationship between a plurality of vibrating means and the light-emitting substrate, in an area that is equidistant from each vibrating means, the influence of one vibrating means is offset by the influence of the other vibrating means. , the displacement may be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing and a facing portion arranged opposite to the head of the fastening screw are provided, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the head of the fastening screw is provided. A gaming machine R6 characterized in that the portion and the facing portion are arranged so as to be able to abut against each other.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R1 to R5, by regulating the progress of the fastening screw by the opposing portion, when the fastening screw is loosened, the fastening relationship is further deteriorated. can be prevented.

Various aspects are exemplified as to how to deal with loosening of the fastening screw. For example, when a fastening screw is loosened, it may be configured so that the looseness can be detected electrically. It may be configured so that when it is vibrated, an abnormal noise is generated and the looseness can be noticed, or the looseness can be repaired by regular maintenance without providing a special notification.

In any one of the game machines R1 to R6, comprising a first member and a second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate, and connecting means fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member,
The connecting means is configured in such a manner that deformation in a direction intersecting the connecting direction occurs more easily than deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. Characterized game machine R7.

Here, if the connecting means is constructed in a manner that allows deformation in the connecting direction to occur easily, the interval between the connecting positions will change in both directions, such as extending and contracting, and the advantageous and disadvantageous effects will occur in cycles. This is undesirable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in the direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that the interval between the connecting positions is changed only to the side that shrinks. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in a direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other.

As a result, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the connecting means is deformed (for example, when a load is applied to the connecting means). While the load in the facing direction of the member and the second member is set low, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light-emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration of the vibrating means. Suppression of shaking of the substrate can be achieved.

It should be noted that the manner in which deformation occurs easily in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed so that the thickness differs in each direction, or the size of the load applied to the connecting means may change in each direction.

Moreover, the mode of switching the load in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a drive device may be provided to displace either the first member or the second member. According to this, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other can be changed at any timing by controlling the driving device.

In any one of game machines R1 to R7, the vibrating means is configured to change the direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction crossing the first direction. Characterized game machine R8.

According to the game machine R8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R1 to R7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of effects of the vibration of the vibration means on the light emitting means.

<Technical concept of side light emitting means. Edge light travels to the side and back of the member>
Light emitting means configured to be capable of emitting light, and light guiding means capable of guiding light, wherein the light guiding means guides light emitted from the light emitting means in a first mode. A gaming machine S1 comprising light guiding means and second light guiding means for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from the first mode.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured so that LED light is incident from the end of a plate-shaped member and emitted from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, JP-A-2015-
159875). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the lighting effect.

More specifically, as in the above-described conventional game machine, when the LED board formed from a flat plate is used to perform the lighting effect, the board can be made cheaper, which helps to reduce the cost. It was difficult to achieve both

That is, a difference in light emission mode (brightness, intensity, luminance, etc.) occurs between a position closer to the LED and a position farther from the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect will increase with respect to the area of the LED substrate, resulting in hindrance to cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to choose between improvement in performance effect and cost reduction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S1, since the light guide means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different, the presentation effect is lowered. (change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the production effect of the lighting production while reducing the cost.

Various modes are exemplified as modes of the light guiding means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform manner like frosted glass, or a member formed by hardening a milky-white resin or the like. It may be a white member that is transparent, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji, a member that projects (projects) a display on the member itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or others. The member of the mode may be used.

A gaming machine S2 in the gaming machine S1, characterized in that the light guide means is constructed so that the way of lighting changes step by step according to the difference in the distance from the light emitting means.

According to the game machine S2, in addition to the effects of the game machine S1, even when the substrate on which the light guide means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light guide means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. when
It is possible to execute an effect in which the curved surface is uniformly (uniformly) illuminated.

The game machine S1 or S2 includes housing means for housing the light emitting means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, the housing means supporting the light emitting substrate and the light guiding means. is fixed at least at a first position; and shielding means configured to be able to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A game machine S3 characterized in that it is arranged in the direction of the game machine S3.

In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still assembled, so the position of the light guiding means relative to the supporting means can be easily adjusted. can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the misalignment between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintainability can be improved.

The mode of shielding by the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, while shielding the light guide means so that the player cannot touch it, it may be configured so that it can be seen, or it may be configured so that the player cannot touch or see the light guide means. You can

In addition, when the first positions are formed at a plurality of positions, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outline of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions may It may be arranged outside the outline of the shielding means.

In the gaming machine S3, the light-emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 characterized by being arranged at an end in the longitudinal direction.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effects of the game machine S3, the light guide means is formed into a long plate shape,
Since the first position is arranged at the end in the longitudinal direction, it is possible to easily correct misalignment of the light guide means by loosening the fixation of the first position and applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guide means. .

Specifically, the correction of the positional deviation of the light guide means is supplemented by deformation of the light guide means in the lateral direction,
By compensating for slippage by applying a strong load, the position of the light guide means can be adjusted even if only one end in the longitudinal direction is loosened and the other end is kept fixed. Misalignment can be easily repaired.

In addition, in the case of the support mode in which the light guide means presses the light emitting substrate against the support means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate by the support means can be weakened as the light guide means bends and deforms.
Therefore, even if the light guide means is not removed from the support means, by loosening the fixing at the first position and bending and deforming the light guide means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be weakened, and the light emitting substrate is loaded in this state. By providing , it is possible to correct the positional deviation of the light-emitting substrate.

In addition, the adjustment width of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, it is based on a design that is mechanically regulated so that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means does not completely deviate from the outer shape of the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate when viewed from the irradiation direction. The adjustment width may be enough to correct the positional deviation in (small adjustment width). The position of the light guiding means may be adjustable to a position where it is completely removed by sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, it is possible to change the aspect of the luminous effect visually recognized during the same effect while the light emitting means and the light guiding means have the same structure. In this case, for example, when a game machine with the same configuration is prepared so that it can be played with a different game feature (for example, when configuring a game machine with different specifications),
It is possible to change the mode of light emitting performance by adjusting the position of the light guide means without greatly changing the mechanical structure of each part, so that the burden (for example, cost) associated with the manufacture of the game machine can be reduced.

In addition, the non-fixing mode is not limited at all. For example, a mode other than the case of being fixed by a fixture such as a fastening screw may generally be expressed as non-fixed. Also, the term "edge" is used to express the intention of avoiding being limited to the edge. In other words, the first position may be arranged at a position including the periphery of the ends in the longitudinal direction.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guiding means and the shielding means are configured to reduce relative positional deviation as the distance between them is shortened. A game machine S5, characterized in that it comprises a portion, and the positional deviation prevention portion comprises a fixing portion with respect to the support means.

Here, since it is necessary to connect electrical wiring to the light-emitting substrate, misalignment or chipping of the wiring directly affects malfunction of the light-emitting means. It is preferable that the substrate and the supporting means are configured so as not to be easily misaligned.

Considering the presentation effect, it is preferable that the position of the light guide means should be easy to align with the light emitting substrate, on the premise that it is not easily misaligned with the light emitting substrate. , it is also considered to be better to hold on the side of the support means. On the other hand, if there is a positional deviation between the light guiding means and the shielding means, the light guiding means and the shielding means may collide with each other, resulting in a poor appearance.

Since the shielding means is a portion that can be touched by the player, it is preferable to fix it to the supporting means as a base in consideration of strength. In this way, there were various forms of support expected for each means.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S3 or S4, the positional deviation preventing portion facilitates the mutual positioning of the light guiding means and the shielding means during assembly without directly fixing them. In addition, it is possible to easily maintain the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means during the game.

In addition, the mode of the positional deviation prevention portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be concavo-convex that has the same shape and can be fitted, or the concavo-convex that can be fitted may be one whose shape along the assembly direction does not change, or a convex that tapers closer to the mating member. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any one of the game machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to a body portion, a separate extension portion extending from the body portion to a side away from the light emitting means, and an outer shape of the extension portion. and a facing extending portion extending toward the light emitting means with a cross-sectional shape of the A game machine S6 characterized by comprising a part.

According to the game machine S6, since it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light-emitting portion from entering the portions other than the opposing extending portion, the separating extending portion and the opposing extending portion and the other portion can be suppressed. The boundary between the two can be clarified, and an effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) can be performed at the boundary of a short width.

Note that the mode of total reflection is not limited at all. For example, the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guiding means,
and a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guide means includes a covering portion that covers the light-emitting substrate and an outer shape of the covering portion, and is formed in a frame shape similar to the outer shape of the light-emitting substrate. A gaming machine S7, characterized in that it comprises a frame portion that is connected to the frame portion, wherein the facing extending portion extends from the covering portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S6, light can be incident on the frame from the connecting portion, so that the effect of the light emitting presentation of the frame can be improved, and the opposing extension portion can be By functioning as reinforcing ribs, the strength of the light guiding means can be improved.

According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect in which the side opposite to the emission direction is illuminated.

In the game machine S7, the opposing extension part is formed in an elongated shape along the covering part, is connected to the frame part at one end in the longitudinal direction, and extends from the frame part at the other end. A game machine S8 characterized in that it is spaced apart.

According to the game machine S8, in addition to the effects of the game machine S7, based on the design of the facing extension part,
Since it is possible to form an end portion that allows light to enter the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and an end portion that restricts the incidence of light, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing light emission effects using the frame portion.

In any one of the gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at the projection position of the facing extension portion and the separated extension portion, and the tip shape of the separated extension portion has an inclination angle with respect to the light irradiation direction. The gaming machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the ends of the cross-sectional shapes of the opposed extension portion and the separated extension portion.

According to the game machine S9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the separating extension part is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emission intensity of the light emitting means is increased. is kept uniform, the light emitting performance can be performed without giving the player a feeling of discomfort. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separated extending portion can be illuminated to the same extent.

<Technical concept of top lighting means. Points for changing the lighting method according to the distance from the light source>
a light-emitting means capable of emitting light, and a light-receiving means capable of receiving light, wherein the light-receiving means receives the light emitted from the light-emitting means in a first mode; A gaming machine T1 comprising a second light-receiving means for receiving the light emitted from the light-emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, LED light is made to enter from the edge of a planar member,
There is a game machine configured to emit light from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015
-159875). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the lighting effect.

More specifically, as in the above-described conventional game machine, when the LED board formed from a flat plate is used to perform the lighting effect, the board can be made cheaper, which helps to reduce the cost. It was difficult to achieve both

That is, a difference in light emission mode (brightness, intensity, luminance, etc.) occurs between a position closer to the LED and a position farther from the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect will increase with respect to the area of the LED substrate, resulting in hindrance to cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to choose between improvement in performance effect and cost reduction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in different manners, so even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different, the performance effect is reduced (change ) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the production effect of the lighting production while reducing the cost.

Various modes are exemplified as modes of the light receiving means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform manner like frosted glass, or a member formed by hardening a milky-white resin or the like. It may be a white member that is transparent, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji, a member that projects (projects) a display on the member itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or others. The member of the mode may be used.

In game machine T1, game machine T2 is characterized in that the light-receiving means is constructed so that the way of lighting changes in stages according to the difference in the distance from the light-emitting means.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effects of the game machine T1, even when the board on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. to the
It is possible to execute an effect in which the curved surface is uniformly (uniformly) illuminated.

The game machine T1 or T2 includes housing means for housing the light emitting means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, and the housing means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine T3, characterized in that it comprises partitioning means for partitioning an area defined by said partitioning means, and said light-receiving means is constructed so as to change how to illuminate each area partitioned by said partitioning means.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effects of the game machine T1 or T2, the frame of the dividing means is arranged at the boundary where the lighting of the light receiving means changes, so that the lighting of the light receiving means can be changed rapidly. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when the player is allowed to do so. As a result, even when the number of light-emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light-emitting performance using the light-emitting substrates.

In the game machine T3, the game machine T4 is characterized in that the light-emitting substrate is supported by the partitioning means in a direction opposed to the biasing force applied to the light-emitting substrate so that the light-emitting substrate is aligned.

According to the game machine T4, in addition to the effects of the game machine T3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work by facilitating the alignment of the light emitting substrate and the partitioning means. and the partitioning means can be suppressed from being misaligned.

In the game machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means has a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion disposed on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is an insertion through the through hole. A gaming machine T5 characterized by comprising a part.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the size of the dividing means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion portion can be reduced. Total reflection is facilitated, and reduction in the intensity of light emitted from the light emitting means can be prevented.

In the game machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-insertion through-hole that is bored corresponding to the shape of the light-emitting portion arranged on the light-emitting substrate and does not receive the insertion portion, and the non-insertion through-hole is ,
A gaming machine T6 characterized in that the opening is formed in such a manner that it expands as it separates from the light emitting substrate, and is brought into contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting substrate.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effects of the game machine T5, the through-hole through which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as means for emitting light emitted from the light-emitting portion at a wide angle, and in addition, the light-receiving means Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the .

In any one of game machines T1 to T6, a game machine characterized in that the light receiving means has a larger cross-sectional outline on a side farther from the light emitting means than on a side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the game machine T7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines T1 to T6, the area where the player visually recognizes the light through the light receiving means can be made larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. can be done.

In the gaming machine T7, the light-receiving means includes a light-conducting portion extending from the light-emitting means side, and a cut-out boundary surface portion intersecting with the light-conducting portion. The gaming machine T8 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position where the front-rear direction surface portion in the extending direction is shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the game machine T8, in addition to the effects of the game machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in a manner in which the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger as it goes forward, it is possible to form the punched boundary surface portion. Even so, the thickness of the light-conducting portion can be easily made uniform. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain total reflection over the extending direction of the light-conducting portion.

In the game machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means has a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including the base end portion of the insertion portion. Characterized game machine T9.

According to the game machine T9, in addition to the effects of the game machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized as linear light (light in which light from a point light source is mixed). Therefore, the feeling of a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs arranged.

<Point composed of two directions in which the fastening direction is inclined>
A gaming machine comprising first means and second means fixed to the first means by fixing means, wherein the fixing means includes first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction; and a second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction that is inclined with respect to the direction.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a front frame is configured by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws that are inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). . However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the shape of the structure is regulated by the arrangement of the fixing means, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the structure is reduced.

For example, when a fastening screw that is inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted through the fixing means, a light-emitting member such as an LED cannot be arranged at a position that interferes with the fastening screw in a front view in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. That is, since the area where the fixing means can be arranged practically coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

In other words, the shape of the supporting plate that supports the light-emitting substrate from the back side must be larger than the light-emitting substrate by the size of the fixing means. This limits the size of the light-emitting substrate.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U1, since the insertion direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction that are inclined to each other, all the fixing means are aligned along the front-rear direction. As compared with the case where it is inserted, it is possible to ensure a wider performance area on the side that the player visually recognizes.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that the external surface is provided with a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction. Game machine U2
.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effects of the game machine 1, since the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is provided. A force can be generated, and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

A gaming machine U3 characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in fixing force in at least one fixing portion of the fixing means in the gaming machine U1 or U2.

Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are composed of resin molded products, and that the drawing direction of the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction inclined to each other and the drawing direction are different. Since it is inclined, there is a possibility that the fixing force of the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side may be weakened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U3, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1 or U2, the reduction of the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means can be used as a common part. can do.

In addition, the structure of the said suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be loosening preventing means for preventing loosening of fixation, or loosening restricting means for restricting further loosening when fixing loosening occurs.

In the game machine U3, the game machine U4 is characterized in that the suppressing means is provided with an informing means capable of informing of the fixation failure of the fixing means.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effects of the game machine U3, the notifying means notifies the fixation failure of the fixing means.

Note that the configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically notifying such as a detecting means such as a sensor, or a structural means for inducing a change in appearance.
Structural means include, for example, transmission change means for changing the transmission intensity of vibration generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, light effect change means for blocking light emitted from the inside and generating a shadow that can be seen from the outside, Vibration notification means for making the player aware of it by contacting the vibrating portion of the vibrating device to generate an abnormal sound or strengthen the vibration may be exemplified.

In any one of the game machines U2 to U4, a third means disposed between the first means and the second means is provided, and the third means is a player between the first surface and the second surface. A gaming machine U5 characterized in that it is disposed between.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U2 to U4, the directions in which the first means and the second means can generate the resistance force as the component directions of the fixing force of the fixing means are set to a plurality of directions. Therefore, it is possible to easily hold the third means safely.

Note that the configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured to allow the player to visually recognize the first means but not to visually recognize the second means. In this case, by setting the widening side between the first surface and the second surface to the first means side and the narrowing side to the second means side, a wide area to be visually recognized by the player is secured while the side not to be visually recognized is secured. The area occupied by the configuration can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 is characterized by comprising a fourth means disposed on the opposite side of the third means with the first surface interposed therebetween, wherein the first surface is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. game machine U
6.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U5, interference between the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in a front view can be achieved. , a large area can be secured for placement.

A game machine U7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs with a predetermined space therebetween.

According to the game machine U7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set with a predetermined space therebetween. It is possible to avoid deformation along the direction in which the fixing force is generated from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, it is possible to suppress the deformation in the direction intersecting with the direction in which the fixing force is generated, so it is possible to avoid loosening of the fixing means.

<The rigidity of the game board assists the decrease in rigidity due to the notch (through hole) on the side of the back case>
In a game machine comprising a game board and facing means having edges facing the game board, the facing means has adjacent parts arranged close to the game board on the left and right edges of the game board. , and a gaming machine ZA1 characterized in that the forming aspect of the adjacent portion is left-right asymmetrical.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a game board that forms a game area and a back case in which movable units and the like are arranged (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77627). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the internal space of the back case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the game board and the back case, so it is difficult to secure a sufficient space for arranging the movable units and the like. There was a problem of difficulty.

In particular, in a right-handed machine that performs a right-handed game in a variable probability state (high probability state) or a jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight is often concentrated on the right side of the game area. It has been required to secure an internal space of the back case on the back side of the channel (the channel on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the hit game ball flows down.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZA1, by making the form of the proximity part left-right asymmetrical,
Since the arrangement of the left and right edges of the facing means with respect to the game board can be left-right asymmetrical, instead of sacrificing the internal area of one of the left and right facing means, the internal area of the other of the left and right facing means is secured. can be made easier. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the facing means with respect to the game board, to ensure sufficient space for arranging the movable units, etc., and to improve the degree of freedom in performance that is visually recognized by the player through the game board. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the edge of the game board (for example, the right-handed channel) can be illuminated by the light-emitting means of the moving accessory, or by the light emitted from the liquid crystal display device.

In addition, the form of formation of the proximity part is not limited at all. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, may be arranged away from the game board, or may be a combination thereof.

In addition, the formation mode of the proximity part is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the connection portion (contact portion) used for connection with the game board is not formed,
The connection portion (contact portion) may be arranged after suppressing the area occupied by the connection portion (contact portion).

Moreover, the aspect of left-right asymmetry is not limited at all. For example, the area in which the proximal portion is formed may be asymmetrical, the direction of formation of the proximal portion may be left-right asymmetrical, and the functional portion provided in the proximal portion (the female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened and fixed may be The formation position, the formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or another direction) or the number of formations of the fastening portion to be formed, etc., may be left-right asymmetric.

In the game machine ZA1, the facing means includes an arrangement section in which the proximity section is formed at the end on the game board side and arranged to face each other in the left-right direction, and the proximity section is formed in the left-right direction with respect to the arrangement section. A gaming machine ZA2 characterized by being asymmetrically configured.

According to the game machine ZA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement portions can be configured asymmetrically with respect to the game board. In addition, the form in which the formation direction is left-right asymmetrical is not limited at all. For example, the forming direction may be opposite to the left-right symmetrical direction (same direction for both left and right), or the forming direction may be a direction intersecting left and right (for example, a direction perpendicular to each other).

Examples of the direction of formation include the direction in which the plate-shaped portion extends (the direction in which it is provided) and the direction in which the recessed portion is recessed (cutting direction) as a notch.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximity portion includes a facing surface that faces the game board and a facing side that faces the game board, and is compared to the left side of the game board. The game machine ZA3 is characterized in that the portion of the game board facing the right side has a larger proportion of the facing side than the facing surface.

According to the game machine ZA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA1 or ZA2, the lateral width occupied by the proximity portion can be narrowed on the right side of the game board compared to the left side of the game board.

A game machine ZA4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3, the game machine ZA4 is characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing displacement of the game board or the opposing means in the opposing direction.

According to the game machine ZA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. In addition, arrangement|positioning of a suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be disposed at a position away from the game board (including a position in contact with the facing means) or at a position away from the facing means (including a position in contact with the game board). However, it may be arranged at a position between the game board and the opposing means (including a position in contact with at least one of the game board or the opposing means).

A gaming machine ZA5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZA4, the suppressing means is arranged on the gaming board side.

According to the game machine ZA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the game unit as a whole without providing a special member for the opposing means.

A gaming machine ZA6 in the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, wherein the suppressing means includes an overlapping portion that overlaps the outermost side surface of the opposing means in a front view.

According to the game machine ZA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the degree of freedom in designing the inside of the game board. It is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the game unit as a whole.

In any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA6, the facing means includes a non-contact portion that does not contact the game board at the edge of the outermost side in the predetermined direction on the game board side. Characteristic game machine ZA7.

According to the game machine ZA7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the game board and the non-contact part can be used as a location for the driving device of the variable winning opening, and the driving device It can be effectively used as a path for wiring connected to a winning sensor or a light-emitting device, or as a location for arranging a light-emitting device.

In any one of game machines ZA1 to ZA7, the game board is made of a resin material,
A game machine characterized in that the facing means includes effect means disposed between the game board and a front end of the effect means arranged forward of the front end of the facing means. ZA8
.

According to the game machine ZA8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA7, the arrangement space of the effect means can be extended to the front side.

<Various lighting modes for movable accessories>
light emitting means for irradiating a predetermined light emitting region with light; displacement means configured such that a first position at least partially overlapping the light emitting region when viewed from a predetermined direction is included in at least a portion of a displacement section;
, wherein the light-emitting area includes a possible area configured to be visible in a plurality of types of light-emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that a light emitting means and a displacement means overlap when viewed from the front (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that the light emitting means and the displacing means are visually recognized individually, and the presentation effect using the overlap is insufficient. That is, the displacement means is arranged in front of the light emitting means so that the light emitting means is hidden by the displacement means,
There was a problem that the production effect was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZB1, since the light emitting means is configured to be visually recognizable in different light emitting modes depending on the mode of the displacement means, it is possible to diversify the presentation modes.

The mode of the displacement means includes, for example, an arrangement mode of the displacement means, a displacement mode of the displacement means, an orientation (orientation) mode of the displacement means, a light emission mode of the light emitting means provided in the displacement means, and the like. exemplified. Examples of the mode of arrangement of the displacement means include a case where the displacement means partially overlaps the light emitting means, a case where the displacement means entirely overlaps the light emitting means, and the like. As the displacement mode of the displacement means,
Examples include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means and a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means. The orientation (orientation) of the displacing means includes a case where the front surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, a case where the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, a case where the surface between them faces the light emitting means side, and the like. exemplified.

The light emission mode of the light emitting means includes a mode in which the light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means lights, blinks, or goes out, and a mode that the light emitting means that emits light toward the side away from the displacement means lights, blinks, or goes out. are exemplified.

In the game machine ZB1, the possible area is a first state in which the displacement means is arranged at the first position and a second state in which the displacement means is arranged at a second position different from the first position, The game machine ZB2 is characterized in that it is possible to configure a case where the light emission modes viewed from the predetermined direction are different.

According to the game machine ZB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB1, the light emission mode can be changed by changing the position of the displacement means. can change suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting means includes a substrate on which a light emitting portion is arranged, and a refracting means arranged to refract the light emitted from the light emitting portion, and the substrate A game machine ZB3, wherein the refraction means includes a first refraction section which is arranged outside the possible area when viewed in a direction, and which overlaps the possible area when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of the light visually recognized through the first refraction unit is changed by combining the light emitted from the light emitting unit and the color and brightness based on the displacement means. can be expressed by

Further, by narrowing the formation range of the substrate, it is possible to secure a region for arranging other components such as a driving device for generating the driving force of the displacement means and a space for displacing the displacement means.

In game machine ZB3, game machine ZB4 is characterized in that the displacement means has a larger displacement at a position overlapping with the possible area when viewed from the predetermined direction than displacement at other positions.

According to the game machine ZB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at the position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at the position where the space occupied by the light emitting means is small. Therefore, the degree of freedom of displacement of the displacement means can be maximized while reducing the space occupied by the light emitting means and the displacement means.

It should be noted that the magnitude of the displacement is not limited at all. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, the positive and negative values may be set in opposite directions for comparison, the displacement in a predetermined direction (component) of the displacement means may be compared, The comparison may include the number of members configured in the displacement means to be displaced.

In any one of game machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes second light emitting means for emitting light in a manner visible from the predetermined direction, and transmitting means for transmitting light emitted from the second light emitting means. The gaming machine ZB5 is characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which a width in a direction intersecting the direction of displacement of the displacement means changes along the displacement direction of the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZB5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines ZB1 to ZB4, the width of the light of the second light emitting means visually recognized through the possible area is determined by the position of the displacement section where the displacement means is arranged. can be changed by

A gaming machine ZB6 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the possible area is arranged on the center side of a window that opens so that the liquid crystal display area can be visually recognized.

According to the game machine ZB6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the lighting mode of the possible area can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display area.

Note that the manner of arranging the possible regions is not limited at all, and various manners are exemplified.
For example, it may be scattered around the window (including the case where the possible area is one place),
A circular (arc) shape surrounding the window may also be used.

In any one of game machines ZB1 to ZB6, comprising a substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged,
The game machine ZB7 is characterized in that the board has no fastening means for fastening at the end on the possible area side.

According to the gaming machine ZB7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the light emitting means on the side of the possible area, and to prevent the shadow of the fastening means from occurring in the possible area. can be avoided.

A gaming machine ZB8, wherein the gaming machine ZB7 is characterized by comprising a covering means covering a space between the possible area and the board when viewed from the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZB8, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB7, the covering means hides the boundary position between the possible area and the board, so that the visibility of light is not deteriorated near the edge of the board. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

A gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8 comprising board holding means for holding the board, the board holding means comprising a gap forming portion for forming a gap for facilitating assembly of the board,
The game machine ZB9 is characterized in that the gap forming portion is closed in the assembled state.

According to the game machine ZB9, in addition to the effect of the game machine ZB7 or ZB8, the gap forming part can facilitate the assembly of the board, while avoiding problems such as light leakage from the gap forming part. . Also, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with another member and utilized for positioning of the other member.

In any one of game machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board is provided with a connector section to which wiring is connected, and the connector section is arranged at a position away from the end on the possible area side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the game machine ZB10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZB7 to ZB9, by applying a load to the wiring connected to the connector part, a moment originating from the end on the possible area side can be generated. Therefore, even if the substrate cannot be taken out directly, the substrate can be easily taken out.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and interruption>
Displacing means configured to be displaceable, driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacing means, and driving force generated by the driving means is configured to be able to be transmitted to the displacement means in a predetermined state. and transmission means, wherein the transmission means comprises a transmission part for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined transmitted part of the displacement means, and in a driving state of the driving means, the transmission part A gaming machine ZC1 characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed when it is not in contact with the part.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided by a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion corresponds to the posture of the displacement member (for example, See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine,
Since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by the support by the columnar portion, there is a problem that it is difficult to perform other effects using the columnar portion while the posture of the displacement member is maintained.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZC1, since the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed even when the transmission part is in the non-contact state, the transmission part can be changed to another effect while the posture of the displacement means is maintained. can be used.

In addition, the aspect of a transmission means is not limited at all. For example, a single gear or a plurality of gears arranged between the displacement means and the driving means may be used, or a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members interact with each other may be used.

It should be noted that the manner in which displacement can be suppressed is not limited at all. For example, it may be biased by gravity or an elastic force based on a spring member, it may be locked (engaged) by a claw-like member, or it may be restrained by coming into contact with a member functioning as a stopper. A mode in which the In addition, as suppressable, a mode of reducing the displacement of the displacement means, a mode of preventing (restricting) the displacement of the displacement means, and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmission means includes a formation portion formed along the movement locus of the transmission portion, and the formation portion is such that the transmission portion is non-uniform with respect to the displacement means in the movement direction of the displacement means. The game machine ZC2 is configured to be able to abut against the displacement means in a state of abutment.

According to the game machine ZC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming portion and the displacement means, so that the stability of the arrangement of the displacement means against external force is improved. be able to.

In the game machine ZC2, the formation portion extends from the transmission portion along the displacement direction of the transmission means, and the distance from the displacement means is longer than the distance between the transmission portion and the displacement means. A game machine ZC3 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the game machine ZC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC2, in the direction in which the displacement means and the transmission means face each other, the part where the load is generated when the driving force is transmitted and the part where the load is generated when the displacement is suppressed are divided. can be shifted.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means includes a one-side functional part formed on one side of the transmitted part in the moving direction of the displacement means, and a moving direction other side of the displacement means on the transmitted part. The one-side functional part is formed on the same plane as the movement locus of the forming part, and the other-side functional part is arranged outwardly of the movement locus of the forming part. A gaming machine ZC4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZC3, the moving direction in which the movement is suppressed by the formation unit can be set to one side direction.

In any one of game machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means comprises first displacement means and second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means comprises the first displacement means and the second displacement means. A gaming machine ZC5 characterized in that the transmission mode to the displacement means is configured to be changeable for each operation section.

Note that the method of switching the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means and the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be interrupted. It is also possible to change the ratio of the applied driving force.

According to the game machine ZC5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZC1 to ZC4, one transmission means can displace a plurality of displacement means in different displacement modes.

In the game machine ZC5, the first displacement means is arranged on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is arranged on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the game machine ZC6, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the combinations of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In addition, the combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include the timing at which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are synchronously displaced. It may be one that does not displace.

Moreover, in the case where the timing of synchronous displacement is included, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

A gaming machine ZC7, wherein in the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the direction of displacement of the first displacement means and the direction of displacement of the second displacement means are set opposite to each other.

According to the game machine ZC7, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be visually recognized in the common area. Effective performance can be executed even when the performance area displaced by the means is narrow.

In addition, the aspect of a 1st displacement means and a 2nd displacement means is not limited at all. for example,
A plurality of displacement means that are stacked in front and behind may be projected into a common area at different timings, or the initial arrangement may be configured such that while stacking front and back, they pass through a common range during movement of a plurality of movable members. can be

<Displacement of the stop position is prevented by the load generating part catching up and making contact>
In a gaming machine comprising first displacement means configured to be displaceable and second displacement means configured to be displaceable by displacing the first displacement means in a predetermined direction, the second displacement means comprises:
a load generating section that applies a load along the predetermined direction to displace the first displacement means; the first displacement means includes a loaded section that receives the load from the load generating section; The portion is separated from the loaded portion during displacement along the predetermined direction, and is configured to contact a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion of the first displacement means. ZD1
.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided by a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion corresponds to the posture of the displacement member (for example, See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine,
If the cylindrical portion moves excessively due to a problem with the drive transmission, the position of the displacement member is displaced from the end of the movement, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZD1, the load generating portion separates from the load receiving portion during displacement and is brought into contact with a predetermined portion different from the load receiving portion, thereby causing excessive displacement of the second displacement means. However, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means from being placed in an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating section applies a load directed from the other side in the predetermined direction to the one side in a state where the first displacement means is arranged at one end of the displaceable section. A game machine ZD2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to grant to.

According to the game machine ZD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, the load generating section moves the first displacement means in the predetermined direction. Since a load is applied in a direction from the other side to the one side, the first displacement means can be pressed against the end portion on the one side in the predetermined direction.

In the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, a drive means configured to drive the second displacement means is provided, and the load generating part is arranged on the other side of the load receiving part in the predetermined direction to move the first position.
A gaming machine ZD3 characterized by coming into contact with displacement means.

According to the game machine ZD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generating part and the first displacement means, so that the driving force can be stopped. Even if the accuracy of the timing is low, the end positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be easily kept constant. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means from the end position while setting the stop of the first displacement means and the second displacement means abruptly.

In addition, the part that takes measures against the rarely occurring phenomenon that the second displacement means moves excessively is
By providing it at a location different from the loaded portion that receives the load in each driving force transmission, even if the loaded portion is deformed, the fail-safe function can be exhibited without any problem.

A game machine ZD4 characterized in that in any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, the game machine ZD4 is characterized by comprising a restricting means capable of restricting the first displacement means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, while the first displacement means is regulated at one end in the predetermined direction by the regulating means, the second displacement means is the second displacement means. It can be displaced independently with respect to one displacing means.

In addition, the aspect of a control means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a claw-shaped member that moves in and out in a direction that intersects the displacement direction of the first displacement means and engages, or may be restricted by the biasing force of gravity or an elastic member, or part of the second displacement means. It may be configured by

In any one of game machines ZD1 to ZD4, a detection means configured to detect that the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, wherein the first displacement means
The gaming machine ZD5 is characterized in that the detecting means comprises a detected part whose position is detected, and the load generating part is in contact with the detected part.

According to the game machine ZD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD4, it is possible to limit the portion damaged by the load at the time of contact to the detected portion.

By linking the life that can be calculated from the number of times of displacement (the number of times of driving) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, it is possible to determine a detection failure due to breakage of the detection piece. It is possible to grasp the replacement timing (maintenance timing) of the displacement means.

In any one of game machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the predetermined section intersects the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the load receiving section. A gaming machine ZD6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the first
A plurality of directions of movement of the displacement means can be provided.

A gaming machine ZD7 in any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, wherein the load-bearing portion and the predetermined portion are disposed apart from each other by a predetermined distance in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.
.

According to the game machine ZD7, in any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at the same position when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction.
The area required for arranging the load receiving portion and the predetermined portion can be narrowed.

<Technical concept of holding by using flexibility of follow-up means>
In a game machine comprising displacement means configured to be capable of displacing a predetermined area and follow-up means for following the displacement of the displacement means, prevention of preventing a predetermined part of the follow-up means from entering the predetermined area side A game machine ZE1 characterized by comprising means.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of the displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474).
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, by setting the length of the wire in comparison with the displacement means, there is an advantage that the wire is less likely to bend when the displacement means is displaced. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to form a temporary fixing portion for temporarily fixing the wiring so that the wiring is not relatively displaced at various places on the displacement means. It is normal to take a long time to assemble because it is assembled by hand.
As a result, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design and assembly efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZE1, the following means such as wiring is prevented from being displaced to the predetermined area side by the preventing means, so that the following means is prevented from rubbing against the displacement means and being damaged. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing portions on the displacement means, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means and improving the assembly efficiency.

In the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means supports the following means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a distance from the displacing means changes with displacement of the displacing means.

According to the game machine ZE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the following means in a manner displaceable in a direction in which the distance between the prevention means and the displacement means changes as the displacement means is displaced. , the load applied to the following means can be reduced as compared with the case where the position of the following means is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band.

In addition, the aspect of a prevention means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar portion around which the following means may be wound, or may be a claw-like portion capable of sandwiching the following means. Further, when the prevention means is formed as a columnar portion, for example, the columnar portion may be formed as a fastening portion used for fastening and fixing members together, or may be used for alignment when assembling members together. It may be formed as a positioning portion.

Also, the form of the follower means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or a belt-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is visually recognized by the player. It may be a band-like effect member that assists the effect, or an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates an urging force that assists the displacement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine ZE3 in the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, wherein the following means is configured to be capable of supplying electricity to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, it is possible to favorably supply electricity to the displacement means.

In any one of game machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the following means is configured to surround the prevention means. A gaming machine ZE4.

According to the game machine ZE4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the following means protrudes greatly to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be arranged on both sides of the preventing means, the area where it is necessary to avoid interference between the following means and other members can be limited to the range around the preventing means. .

Further, it is possible to eliminate the need to construct a relief portion for allowing the following means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. Thereby, the displacement means can be arranged in a space-saving manner.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, the game machine is characterized by comprising shielding means for shielding at least part of the displacement means, wherein the following means is connected to the displacement means at a position inside the shielding means. Gaming machine ZE5.

According to the game machine ZE5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE4, the shielding means can prevent the connecting portion between the following means and the displacement means from being visually recognized by the player. The term "inward" as used herein means an inward direction when the outer shape is an edge portion in a front view.

In the game machine ZE5, the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is arranged at the outer edge of the shield means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE5, while keeping the following means out of the player's field of vision, the amount of protrusion of the displacement means from the outer shape (outer edge) of the shielding means is secured. be able to.

In the game machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is arranged on a straight line that equally divides the rotatable angle of the displacement means about the first axis and that passes through the first axis. A game machine ZE7 characterized by.

According to the game machine ZE7, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means can be suppressed.

The game machine ZE8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE7, the displacement means comprises a guide part for guiding the follow-up means in a direction away from the displacement trajectory.

According to the game machine ZE8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent rubbing against the displacement means and improve the durability of the following means.

A gaming machine ZE9 in the gaming machine ZE8, wherein the guide portion extends in a direction orthogonal to the outer shape of the predetermined area.

According to the game machine ZE9, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE8, the area occupied by the follower means can be narrowed in the vicinity of the displacement means, and the gap area through which the follower means can pass can be narrowed. The rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means can be improved compared to when the gap is large.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the follower means is formed in a string-like or belt-like shape, one end of which is connected to the displacement means, the other end of which is connected to the game machine, and is directed to both ends. A game machine ZE10 characterized in that the game machine ZE10 is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the game machine ZE10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE9, a load in a pulling direction can be applied from one side of the predetermined area at both ends of the follow-up means. As a result, the follower means as a whole can be balanced with the load applied from the guide section.

In any one of game machines ZE1 to ZE10, the follower means is configured to be wound around the preventive means in a loosening direction when the displacement means is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. Machine ZE11.

According to the game machine ZE11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE10,
By absorbing the displacement of the displacement means by the slackness of the follower means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessive load on the follower means.

In any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE11, an arranging means for arranging the follower means between the displacement means and a positioning unit for aligning the arranging means is provided, and the aligning unit comprises the above-mentioned A gaming machine Z characterized in that it is arranged outside the movement trajectory of the following means
E12.

According to the game machine ZE12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE11,
Since it is possible to avoid the aligning portion from encroaching on the displacement space of the follower means, the load applied to the follower means due to the displacement of the displacer means can be minimized.

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means, and the following means has a first displacement portion (weak displacement portion) and a larger displacement than the first displacement portion. and a second displacement portion (strong displacement portion), wherein the first displacement portion is arranged between the second displacement portion and the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the locations where the following means are likely to be damaged by coming into contact with the arranging means. As a result, it is possible to limit the locations where reinforcement is required, so that durability can be improved at low cost.

In addition, the aspect of comparison of the magnitude of the displacement of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is not limited at all. For example, a linear distance between positions before and after displacement may be compared, or when displacement occurs in a plurality of directions, comparison may be limited to displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined plane).

In the game machine ZE12 or ZE13, the game machine ZE14 is characterized in that the prevention means comprises a protruding part protruding from the arrangement means, and the following means is wound around the protruding part.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled to the arranging means from above while supporting the following means that hangs down by its own weight with the arranging means. and the fixing means can be assembled easily.

<Technical concept that changes the displacement mode (transmission mode) in forward and reverse rotation>
A game machine comprising: driving means; displacement means configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the driving means; and transmission means configured to transmit the driving force generated by the driving means to the displacement means, The driving means includes a first driving mode for generating a driving force in a first direction;
and a second driving mode for generating a driving force in a second direction different from the driving direction, wherein the displacement means is driven in the first driving mode and in the second driving mode A gaming machine ZF1 characterized by being configured to be displaceable in a driven second displacement mode.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a first displacement means and a second displacement means that are displaced by the driving force of a common driving device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the driving direction of the driving device. There is a game machine configured as
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the first
Only the displacement modes of the displacement means and the second displacement means change, and even if the driving direction of the driving device is reversed, both the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced. For this reason, there is a problem that the degree of improvement in performance effect due to the adoption of a device that can be driven in forward and reverse directions as the drive device is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZF1, by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed. The production effect used can be sufficiently improved.

The gaming machine ZF1 is characterized by comprising light emitting means for emitting light toward the displacement means, wherein the displacement means is configured to be displaceable so as to pass through the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means. A game machine ZF2.

According to the game machine ZF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZF1, the position at which the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means. can perform a gorgeous production that changes with the passage of time.

In game machine ZF1 or ZF2, displacement suppression means for suppressing displacement of at least a part of said transmission means is provided, and said transmission means, in at least one of said first drive mode and said second drive mode, A game machine ZF3, comprising a suppression area in which transmission of driving force is suppressed, wherein the displacement suppression means is configured to be capable of suppressing a predetermined displacement in the suppression area.

According to the game machine ZF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZF1 or ZF2, the displacement suppression means unintentionally displaces the transmission means when the transmission of the driving force is suppressed, thereby displacing in an unintended displacement mode. Displacement of the means can be prevented.

Further, compared to the case where the displacement means is stopped by directly contacting the displacement means with another member, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained at a high level. Therefore, it is possible to configure the displacement means of an appropriate displacement mode so that it is easy for the player to see.

Note that the mode of the displacement suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an engagement device that produces viscous resistance represented by a damper device, or a resistance device that produces resistance due to its own weight. If the direction is along the horizontal direction), the idling motion cannot be suppressed by the force of gravity.

In the game machine ZF3, detection means configured to be capable of detecting displacement of the displacement suppression means is provided, and the displacement suppression means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression area is lower than a predetermined speed. the resistance is suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means detects the portion to be detected of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates the resistance. A gaming machine ZF4 characterized in that it is arranged so as to be able to detect the .

According to the game machine ZF4, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZF3, whether the detection means functions well to detect the stop position of the displacement suppression means and to suppress the displacement in the suppression area of the transmission means in the displacement suppression means. can be used both for detection of

In any one of game machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means comprises first displacement means for rotationally displacing around a first axis and second displacement means for rotationally displacing the outside of the first displacement means around the first axis. A gaming machine ZF5 comprising displacement means, wherein displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the first
In the drive mode or the second drive mode, the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed. Therefore, in this suppressed state, the second displacement means is arranged between the player and the first displacement means and the field of view is increased. and the case where the second displacement means is arranged outside between the player and the first displacement means and does not block the field of view.In addition, the second displacement means Since displacement is possible even in a drive mode in which the displacement of is not suppressed, an effect by the displacement means can be configured in a total of three different displacement modes.

Game machine ZF6 according to any one of the game machines ZF1 to ZF5, wherein the transmission means comprises light transmission means formed of a light transmission material on the side of the connection position with the displacement means.
.

According to the game machine ZF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZF1 to ZF5, the effect of facilitating the assembly of the displacement means by the light transmitting means and the light emitting performance by conducting light toward the displacement means. It is possible to achieve the effect of enabling

In any one of the game machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes first displacement means for rotationally displacing about a first axis, and transmission means for the first displacement means for rotationally displacing about the first axis. and a second displacement means connected to the transmission means outside the connection position of the second displacement means, wherein the second displacement means overlaps the first displacement means when viewed in the first axial direction. Characterized game machine ZF7.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the second
The displacement means can be retained by the first displacement means. This eliminates the need to dispose a separate retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 Policy 1)>
A first operating means configured to be operable by the player, a second operating means arranged at a position different from the first operating means and configured to be operable by the player, and the first operating means. and said second
A game machine ZG1, further comprising a load generating means disposed on the operating means side and capable of generating a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a plurality of operating devices and a driving device for producing an effect of driving the operating devices (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159).
178). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, each operation device is provided with a vibrating device, so the space required for arranging each operation device increases, and the number of possible operation devices tends to be limited. In addition, there is a problem that the cost becomes high due to an increase in the number of driving devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, since the load generation means is arranged on the second operation means side with respect to the first operation means, the load generation means is arranged on the first operation means and the second operation means (that is, , a plurality of operating means). This makes it possible to reduce the space required for arranging the first operation means and the second operation means, and raise the upper limit of the number of operation means that can be arranged. In addition, since the number of load generating means can also be reduced, the cost for constructing the game machine can be suppressed.

Note that the form of the load generating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be means configured to vibrate (high-speed repeated displacement), means such as a pump that generates a load at a predetermined cycle, or means composed of an arm member that changes its posture by displacement of a cam. good. Moreover, the mode of load is not limited at all. For example, it may be a load that is mechanically transmitted in a contact state, or a load that is transmitted in a non-contact state (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.).

In the game machine ZG1, the load generation means is arranged between the first operation means and the second operation means.

According to the game machine ZG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZG1, the load can be transmitted to both the first operation means and the second operation means to the same extent.

In the game machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operation means is operated to shoot game balls toward the game area, and the load generation means is a cover that at least partially covers the first operation means from a predetermined direction. A game machine ZG3, characterized in that it is arranged in the installation means.

According to the game machine ZG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is arranged at a position where the fingers of the player operating the first operation means are sandwiched between the first operation means and the first operation means. Therefore, the load generated by the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the fingers of the player.

For example, the covering means is arranged at a position where the player's fingers can easily pass through in the process of moving the player's fingers by bringing the fingers close to the first operating means and then removing the fingers from the first operating means after completing the operation. By arranging the covering means so as to cover it from the direction where it is likely to interfere with the fingers, it is possible to make it possible to easily transmit the load of the load generating means to the player, especially while the fingers are moving.

In addition, for example, by arranging the covering means at a position where the finger touches with a high probability when the player operates the first operating means, the load of the load generating means is reduced during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that is easy to convey to the player.

This idea is different from the idea of arranging the load generating means in the first operating means.
That is, since the load generating means is arranged on the side of the second operating means with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is arranged at a position different from that of the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, intervening means interposed between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means, and configured to transmit a load to the first operating means and the second operating means and the intervening means is configured so that the strength of vibration transmission to the first operation means is higher than the strength of vibration transmission to the second operation means.
4.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG3, the load transmission can be concentrated on the side of the first operating means.

In game machine ZG4, game machine ZG5 is characterized in that the intervening means is configured to change the intensity of load transmission by displacing the load generating means as the load generating means is driven.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG4, the intensity of the load transmitted through the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven compared to when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, while suppressing the degree of interlocking operation (vibration) between the first operation means and the second operation means due to the load or the like applied to the pachinko machine by the player, the first
It is possible to execute an effect of strongly operating (vibrating) the operating means and the second operating means.

A gaming machine ZG6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines ZG1 to ZG5, holding means for holding the load generating means displaceably is provided, and the holding means is provided with a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the load generating means. .

According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the safety of the player can be ensured by defining the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as the unintentional collision of the displaced member displaced by the vibration of the load generating means with the player.

In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generating means itself, if it is guided in the desired direction, the load generating means can be displaced in the desired direction. The degree of freedom of means can be improved.

In the game machine ZG6, the holding means is configured to allow displacement of the load generating means in a direction that intersects the direction guided by the guide portion.
G7.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the crossing direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state. , the load generating means can be displaced in different manners. As a result, the performance effect of the load generation means can be improved.

Various modes are exemplified as modes for allowing the displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided, and the guiding direction of the second holding means may intersect the guiding direction of the guide portion. It may be configured to interpose a flexible member, and the displacement may be caused by deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibration means for covering means (P9 policy 2)>
frame means configured in a frame shape; covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side; means is
A gaming machine ZH1 comprising an allowance portion for allowing displacement, and configured to be able to transmit the vibration of the vibrating means via the allowance portion.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a front frame and vibration means arranged in front of the front frame (see, for example, JP-A-2015-159837). but,
In the above-described conventional game machine, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibration means to the extent that vibration exceeding a predetermined strength is not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of vibration performance. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZH1, the vibrating means is arranged in the covering means, and the displacement of the covering means is allowed, so that the vibration can be transmitted to the player through the covering means. On the other hand, by absorbing the vibration by displacing the covering means, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the vibration to the side of the frame means.
As a result, the allowable degree of vibration strength of the vibrating means can be increased.

In addition, the mode of the allowance part is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode assuming displacement of slides, rings, gears, etc., and displacement may occur when the slides, links, gears, etc. operate. It may be configured flexibly, and displacement may occur when an overload is applied.

In the game machine ZH1, the covering means is configured so that the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the allowable amount of displacement in the horizontal direction.
.

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZH1, while maintaining the effect of the allowable portion in the horizontal displacement, the player can move the covering means in the direction of gravity, such as by placing his/her hand on the covering means. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the covering means from being displaced excessively and disturbing the posture of the player. That is, by reducing the permissible amount of displacement in the vertical direction, the structure of the product can be stabilized.

In game machine ZH1 or ZH2, game machine ZH3 is characterized in that said covering means is configured in the shape of a bag with said frame means side opened.

According to the game machine ZH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the side of the frame means is configured in the form of a bag that is open, the edges of the bag and the frame means are arranged to face each other.
It is possible to reduce the contact area between the covering means and the frame means which are in contact with each other to transmit vibration. As a result, it is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the frame means side, so that it is possible to avoid transmitting the vibration to the main substrates, ball passages, and main electrical components arranged on the frame means side.

In any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibrating means includes an arrangement portion arranged on the side of the frame means, the frame means comprises a support portion for supporting the arrangement portion, and the arrangement Department is
A game machine ZH4 characterized in that the deformation resistance is lower than that of the supporting portion.

According to the game machine ZH4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibration means is limited while suppressing the transmission of vibration to the frame means side, and furthermore, the arrangement portion is Compared to a rigid configuration, it is possible to make use of the fact that deformation resistance is low, so that biting can be generated, and a large absolute value of the amount of displacement of the vibrating means toward the frame means can be ensured. Thereby, it is possible to easily displace the covering means in which the vibrating means is disposed.

In any one of game machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering section and a second covering section having a lower deformation resistance than the first covering section, and the vibrating means includes , and a contact portion connected to the first covering portion and the second covering portion and capable of locally contacting the first covering portion.

According to the game machine ZH5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH4, by locally contacting the first covering portion with high deformation resistance and the contact portion, the contact position can be changed. can be used as a fixed point (reference point) of vibration. That is, it is possible to increase the absolute value of the displacement of the vibrating means and the second covering portion with respect to the contact position.

In any one of game machines ZH1 to ZH5, a ball shooting operation means operated to shoot game balls toward a game area is provided, and the covering means has at least a space between the ball shooting operation means and the ball shooting operation means. A game machine ZH6 characterized by interposing a predetermined member.

According to the game machine ZH6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH5, it is possible to suppress the vibration transmission to the ball shooting operation means.

<The point that is characterized by blocking the light itself by the displacement of the character>
In a gaming machine comprising a light emitting means and an illuminated means to which the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted, changing the appearance of the illuminated means while leaving the outer shape of the illuminated means when viewed from a predetermined direction. Characterized game machine ZI1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a light-emitting means configured to be mounted on a movable accessory and capable of executing a light-emitting effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208360).
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is no displaceable member disposed so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emitting effect. However, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the method of realizing the lighting effect because the data capacity is compressed and the board becomes large due to the control.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacement of the displacement means may interfere with the light emitted from the light emitting means. By configuring so as to be able to do so, it is possible to switch the mode of the light emitting effect by displacing the displacing means. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the lighting performance without controlling the light emitting means, and it is possible to reduce the size of the substrate by eliminating the need for data for control and the circuit for control. can. As a result, it is possible to improve the technique for realizing the lighting effect.

In addition, the mode of displacement is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a rotation, a linear slide, or a displacement along a predetermined curve. When the displacement mode of the displacement means is a linear slide, the displacement means is more effective when the direction of the slide coincides with the predetermined direction than when the direction of the slide intersects the predetermined direction. Maintaining the outer shape can be facilitated.

In addition, the aspect of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate on a rotation axis that intersects the optical axis, and the projected area may change depending on the difference in posture, or even if there is no change in posture, the member may be configured to protrude from the inside and be scaled. The displacement may change the relative projected area.

The aspect of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be constructed so as to be rotationally displaced around the irradiated means, or may slide on a plane to enter the side of the irradiated means (between the light emitting means).

In addition, the mode in which the outer shape of the displacement means is left is not limited at all.
For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as if it is stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be smaller than that of the irradiated means, so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. Any form is fine.

Also, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The aspect of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, the position may be fixed, or may be displaceable. In the displaceable state, the light emitting means may be arranged in the displacement means, or the light emitting means and the displacement means may be displaced separately (independently). Also, the irradiation direction may be fixed, or the irradiation direction may be variable.

As for the mode of displacement of the light emitting means, the light emitting means may be slid in such a manner that the optical axis is directed toward the means to be irradiated and move toward and away from the means to be irradiated, or the means to be irradiated may be moved around the means to be irradiated while the optical axis is directed to the means to be irradiated. It may be something that rotates.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that always maintains a lighting state, or one that can be switched between lighting and extinguishing.

In game machine ZI1, game machine ZI2 is characterized in that the difference in appearance of said means to be illuminated is caused by said means to be illuminated reflecting light emitted from said light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZI1, it is possible to immediately recognize the difference in the means to be irradiated when the light emitting means emits light, so it is possible to improve attention to the timing of light irradiation. . According to this, even if the means to be irradiated is displaceable,
A non-displaceable means may be used.

A gaming machine ZI3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in appearance of said means to be irradiated changes based on the displacement of said means to be irradiated.

According to the game machine ZI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZI1 or ZI2, it is possible to improve the attention to the means to be irradiated.

Note that the mode of displacement that is the basis for the difference in appearance of the means to be irradiated is not limited at all. For example, constant (periodic) displacement continuing at a constant speed or irregular displacement may be used. Also, the displacement may be instantaneous, or may be slow (so slow that it is difficult for the player to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm/min]).

A gaming machine ZI4 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the illuminated means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the game machine ZI4, in any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI3, while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means, the light reflected through the irradiated means can illuminate and make the area stand out.

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI3, game machine ZI5 is characterized in that the direction of light reflected by said means to be irradiated is the same, but at least one of light quantity and color of light is different. .

According to the game machine ZI5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to improve the attention to the light emitting mode of the means to be irradiated.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI5, the optical axis is configured to be able to irradiate the means to be irradiated with light in an irradiation mode in which the optical axis does not interfere with the movement trajectory of the displacement means arranged around the means to be irradiated. A gaming machine ZI6 characterized by comprising shielding light emitting means.

According to the game machine ZI6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating the light from the non-shielding light emitting means, the light can be applied to the irradiated means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. , it is possible to prevent the irradiated means from being seen darker than necessary.

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiated means includes first irradiated means;
a second irradiation means configured to be arranged at a shielding position capable of shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the first irradiation means, wherein the first irradiation means is the light emitting means; is smaller when the second irradiated means is placed at the shielding position than when the second irradiated means is not placed at the shielding position. A gaming machine ZI7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the first
It is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the means to be irradiated. That is, the effect of shielding light can be improved. It should be noted that the change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when the light is emitted from the light emitting means.

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate the means to be irradiated with light from a plurality of optical axes, and the means to be irradiated can intersect the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 characterized by:

According to the game machine ZI8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the means to be irradiated is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, by increasing the number of LEDs). can be made

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI8, drive means configured to be capable of synchronously driving the irradiated means and displacement means disposed around the irradiated means, the irradiated means being displaced A gaming machine ZI9 is characterized in that a predetermined first surface faces the same side, and the displacement means is configured to cyclically displace the first position and the second position.
.

According to the game machine ZI9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI8, while suppressing a large change in the visibility of the irradiated means, the light emitting mode ( For example, the switching timing of light/darkness can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

In addition, the displacement mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, sliding displacement or rotational displacement may be used. The rotational displacement may be, for example, rotational displacement occurring along a rotational axis along the display surface of the display device, or rotational displacement occurring along a rotational axis orthogonal to the display surface of the display area.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means and the irradiated means has a surface on the light emitting means side, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. A game machine ZI10 is characterized in that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed to the side of the player accordingly.

According to the game machine ZI10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI9, the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted depending on whether the displacement means is arranged at the first position or the second position. It is possible to increase the difference in the extent to which the light traveling toward the player side.

<Characteristic AA group> (Lever UP control)
An operation means that can be operated by a player at least in a first direction from a predetermined first position, and an effect execution means that can execute an effect corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means. and a notification means capable of notifying an operation suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated in the first direction; a specific effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect when the operating means is not positioned at a specific position.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There was something for the players to enjoy. Further, in the above-described game machine, there is a game machine that allows the player to operate the operating means in a state in which it is moved from the initial position in order to further enhance the performance effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a game machine, when the player does not operate the operating means even though the operating means is moved from the initial position, the operating means in the movable state is initialized regardless of the player's operation. There is a problem that it is necessary to execute the control to return to the position, and the performance effect is lowered and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AA1, when the operation means is not positioned at the specific position in the state where the cancellation condition is established, the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means, so the operation means is not positioned at the specific position. It is possible to provide the player with an effect that would otherwise be possible. Therefore, even if the operation means is not operated after the operation means is moved, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the game machine AA1, it is possible to have biasing means for always biasing the operating means toward the specific position, and to move the operating means from the specific position to the first position different from the specific position. and the operation means is positioned at the specific position by being operated in the first direction from the first position.

According to the gaming machine AA2, the player can move the operating means to the specific position by operating the operating means positioned at the first position. , and the act of moving the operation means to a specific position can be executed simultaneously. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation presentation can be performed smoothly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The game machine AA2 has a second operating means operable by the player different from the operating means, and the specific effect includes at least a suggestion mode suggesting that the second operating means is operated. A gaming machine AA3 characterized by:

According to the game machine AA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA2, a specific effect including a suggestive mode suggesting the operation of the second operating means is executed, thereby facilitating the operation of the second operating means. becomes possible. Therefore, the player can release the operation means and can easily move the operation means to the specific position by the biasing means, so that the operation means can be easily positioned at the predetermined position, and the operation presentation can be performed. There is an effect that the execution can be facilitated.

A gaming machine AA4 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the gaming machine AA4 has a fixing means for fixing the operating means at the specific position so as to make it difficult to operate.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, when the operation means is positioned at a specific position, the movement of the operation means is restricted by the fixing means. It is possible to suppress that the operation means is operated regardless. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress unnecessary operation of the operating means, which may cause a failure.

Any one of the game machines AA1 to AA4 has a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on the player's operation, and the specific effect includes a mode for prompting the player to shoot the game balls. A game machine AA5, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, a mode for prompting the player to shoot the game ball is included as the specific effect, so when the specific effect is executed, A player can be actively encouraged to shoot a game ball. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it easier for the player to let go of the operating means, so that the operating means can be easily moved to a specific position, so that the operating means can be easily positioned at a predetermined position. This has the effect of making it easier to execute the operation effect.

<Characteristics AB group> (Combined control of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and identification patterns corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification pattern display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation capable of executing an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. an effect execution means; an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the displayed identification symbol by operating the operation means; a regulating means for regulating execution of the identification symbol performance in a period overlapping with the identification symbol performance.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There was something for the players to enjoy. (For example, JP-A-2013-090780). In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there is a game machine in which a plurality of conditions for executing operation effects are provided in order to further enhance the effects of the effects. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation presentations are executed in duplicate, resulting in presentations that are difficult for the player to understand, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine AB1, since it is possible to regulate the execution of the operation performance and the identification symbol performance in the overlapping period by the regulating means, it is possible to prevent a plurality of operation performances from being executed redundantly. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, the regulating means is configured to set a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed for regulating the execution of the operation presentation mode, and to execute the identification symbol presentation within that period. The game machine AB2 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1, during the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed, the regulation means sets a period for regulating the execution of the operation presentation mode, and identification is performed within that period. Since the symbol effect is executed, it is possible to smoothly execute a plurality of operation effects. Therefore, there is an effect that a plurality of operation presentations can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine AB1 or AB2, during the period in which the operation performance is executed, the mode variable performance in which the mode of the identification pattern is changed and displayed without the operation means being operated can be executed. A gaming machine AB3 characterized by:

According to the game machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AB1 or AB2, since the variable mode effect can be executed during the period in which the operation effect is executed, it is identified whether the variable mode effect is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the symbol presentation is to be executed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Electric support end control by falling)
A variable that can be changed between a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second state in which the ball entry is more difficult than in the first state. a member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by means of display means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and for indicating the specific determination result of the display means When the identification information is displayed, a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player, a first probability as a probability of being determined as the specific determination result, and a second probability higher than the first probability a probability setting means capable of setting a probability, a determination means capable of executing a determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means, and a specific determination result determined by the determination means. probability control means for setting the first probability based on; setting means capable of setting a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be varied from the second state to the first state than in a normal game state; and end condition determination means for determining whether an end condition for setting the normal game state is established when the special game state is set by the setting means, wherein the setting means determines that the second probability is It is configured to be able to set the special game state when it is set, and the end condition determination means determines the second probability in a state where a predetermined period has elapsed after the special game state is set. to the first probability, the game machine AC1 determines that the termination condition is established.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. In order to make it possible to set a high-probability state in which it is easy to win and a low-probability state in which it is difficult to win as a game state, and to shift the game state to a low-probability state when the high-probability state is set. There was a lottery (so-called drop lottery). Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, there is a configuration in which it is possible to set a specific game state in which the lottery of the game is likely to be executed and a normal game state in which it is difficult to execute the game. (For example, JP-A-2010-269007). However, in the above game machine, there is no relationship between the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state and the timing of transition from the specific game state to the normal game state, and the player can understand the transition state of each game state. There is a problem that it becomes difficult and the interest in the game is reduced. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AC1, when the probability control means sets the first probability, the normal game state is set. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the transition state of the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine AC1, the determination means executes the determination when a determination condition for the determination means to perform the determination is satisfied.

According to the game machine AC2, since it is possible to cause the determination means to perform determination when the determination condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress excessive determination by the determination means when the second probability is set. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AC2, the determination means executes determination before dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Machine AC3.

According to the game machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AC2, since the determination by the determination means is executed before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the determination is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. Dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the result of the determination made can be executed based on the determination result of the determining means. Thus, when the determination means determines that the determination result is a specific determination result, determination by the determination means, which is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition that triggered the determination, can be performed with the first probability. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

In any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, the probability control means sets the first probability before starting the dynamic display of the identification information when the determination means determines that the specific determination result is obtained. A game machine AC4 characterized in that it is set.

According to the game machine AC4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started by the probability control means. A first probability is set before . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information based on the second probability from being executed after a specific determination result is determined, so that a proper game can be provided to the player. effective.

In any one of the game machines AC1 to AC4, the setting means sets the normal game state based on the fact that the special game state is set and the specific determination result is determined. A gaming machine AC5 characterized by:

According to the game machine AC5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC4, even when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the normal game state is set by the setting means. When the normal game state is set by the means, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result or whether the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. It can provide predictable fun. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AD group> (Burst interruption effect)
In a game machine having a performance executing means capable of executing a performance and a performance period determining means for determining the execution period of the performance executed by the performance executing means, the period during which the performance is executed by the performance executing means. a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect by interrupting at least a part of the effect being executed by the effect executing means; A game machine AD1, characterized in that it has a setting means capable of changing and setting the effect to be interrupted corresponding to the state of the effect.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, there is a game machine that further enhances the effect of suggestive effects by executing various effects as suggestive effects at various timings (for example, JP-A-2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even when one suggestive effect is being executed, another suggestive effect can be executed, so the effect is that the types of effects to be executed can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. be. However, in the gaming machine described above, since it is configured to execute another suggestive effect regardless of the effect situation of the one suggestive effect being executed, the suggestive effect to be executed is suddenly switched, However, there is a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect being executed indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), switching the suggestive effect causes the predetermined process change mode to end in the middle. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is more confused. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by executing various suggestive effects without confusing the player.

According to the game machine AD1, since the setting means can change the aspect of the performance interrupted by the execution of the specific performance, it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the performance being interrupted during execution. can be suppressed. Therefore, in a gaming machine capable of overlapping and executing a plurality of effects, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine AD1, the effect executed by the effect execution means includes a sound effect, and the setting means interrupts the sound effect depending on the state of the effect, The game machine AD2 is characterized in that it sets a case where the performance by sound is not interrupted.

According to the game machine AD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD1, when the effect is interrupted, it is possible to set whether only the sound is continued or the sound is also interrupted. It is possible to change the mode of interrupting the performance according to the contents of the performance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player's degree of interest in the interrupted presentation different, and to enhance the presentation effect.

In this case, it may be determined whether or not to interrupt the output of the sound based on the effect mode of the specific effect and the effect mode of the interrupted effect, and the sound set as the effect mode of the specific effect When the type and the sound type set as the effect mode of the effect to be interrupted are the same sound type, the output of the sound may be interrupted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation where the sound of the interrupted performance is output and confused with the sound set as the performance mode of the specific performance, resulting in the provision of an incomprehensible performance.

Further, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not to interrupt the output of the sound according to the interruption timing of the presentation. In this case, if the remaining period of the effect to be interrupted is a predetermined period or less (for example, one second or less), even if the effect is interrupted, only the sound can be output to the end. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the performance has been interrupted.

In the game machine AD1 or AD2, a display means for dynamically displaying a plurality of identification symbols as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, and a case where the identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination on the display means. and a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, wherein the setting means dynamically displays one of the plurality of identification symbols while the other identification symbols are displayed. The game machine AD3 is characterized in that the effect to be interrupted is changed and set depending on whether or not the ready-to-win display mode displayed in the combination that can be the specific combination is displayed. .

According to the game machine AD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD1 or AD2, the effect can be changed depending on whether the effect to be interrupted is before or after the ready-to-win display. That is, it is possible to change the aspect of the effect set by the setting means based on the timing of interrupting the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the interruption of the performance.

In the game machine AD3, the setting means interrupts the effect by the voice when the effect executed by the effect matter means is interrupted before the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, and the ready-to-win display mode is displayed. The game machine AD4 is characterized in that the presentation is set so as not to interrupt the presentation by the voice when the presentation is interrupted after is displayed.

According to the game machine AD4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD3, if the production is interrupted before the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, the sound is interrupted, and if the production is interrupted after the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, It is possible to prevent audio from being interrupted. Therefore, even if the effect is interrupted after the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, the voice can be output continuously, so that the player is puzzled that the ready-to-win display mode has been canceled in the middle. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that it will be lost.

<Characteristic AE group> (Button repeated hitting sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player and an effect execution means for changing an effect based on the operation of the operation means, a first operation is performed each time the operation means is operated. A game machine AE1 is characterized by having voice control means capable of alternately outputting a sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There is something that entertains players (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). Further, in the game machine described above, when the player operates the operating means, there are some that output an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly accepted. In such a game machine, it was possible to easily determine whether or not the player could operate the operation means by the output operation sound, but it took a long time until the output of one operation sound was completed. When the next operation is performed during the period, that is, when the continuous hitting operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if only one operation sound is output. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by making it easier for the player to hear the output operation sound and by outputting the operation sound rich in variations.

According to the gaming machine AE1, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times, the first operation sound and the second operation sound are alternately output. There is an effect that it is possible to output operation sounds that are rich in variations. In addition, since different operation sounds are output alternately, even when the operation means are operated at short intervals (intervals shorter than the output period of one operation sound), the player cannot operate the operation means. can be easily discriminated by the operation sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AE1, the sound control means causes the first operation sound to be output during the first period, and before the first period elapses, an operation to output the first operation sound is performed. In this case, the gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that the first operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the first operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE1, when the next first operation sound is output within the first period in which the first operation sound is output, the first operation sound being output is is stopped and a new first operation sound is output, there is an effect that the execution of a new operation can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine AE1 or AE2, the sound control means causes the second operation sound to be output during the second period, and before the second period elapses, an operation to output the second operation sound is performed. The game machine E3 is characterized in that, when the second operation sound is output, the second operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the second operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, when the next second operation sound is output within the second period in which the second operation sound is output, the second operation sound being output is Since the operation sound is stopped and a new second operation sound is output, there is an effect that the execution of the new operation can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any one of the game machines AE1 to AE3, the effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing a continuous operation effect in which the mode of effect is varied in response to successively operating the operation means a plurality of times. A gaming machine AE4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AE4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the continuous operation presentation is executed in response to the continuous operation of the operating means a plurality of times, thereby changing the presentation state. The player can be notified that the operating means has been operated by . This makes it possible to determine from the operation sound and the effect that the operation to the operating means has been accepted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic AF group> (Holding notice)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and identification patterns corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification pattern display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation capable of executing an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. a performance executing means; and an identification pattern performance execution means capable of executing an identification pattern performance capable of varying a mode of the displayed identification pattern by operating the operation means, The identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect for two or more identification symbols when a plurality of identification symbols are displayed on the display means. .

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that variably displays symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and informs a player of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. Further, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball into the starting prize winning slot can be held and stored a plurality of times, and the held patterns corresponding to the number of reserved memories are displayed, and the displayed reserved patterns are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can notify information about the corresponding lottery in advance by using it (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the above-described gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbols, by suggesting the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbols will be a big hit, the game can be played before the variable display is started. It made it possible to raise people's expectations. However, there is a problem that when the suspension notice performance is generated, it becomes difficult for the player to have expectations for the suspension symbols that are not subject to the suspension notice, and the player's desire to play is lowered. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine AF1, as one identification symbol effect, the identification symbol effect is executed for two or more identification symbols. It is possible to reduce the number of identification patterns that are not targeted for design performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AF1, there is pre-determination means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the identification symbol effect execution means The gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that the aspect of the identification pattern is varied based on the result of discrimination by a pre-discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1, the aspect of the identification symbol can be changed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, so that the player is interested in the performance result of the identification symbol performance. can have Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the identification symbol effect executing means changes the mode of the two or more identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition by operating the operating means. Characteristic game machine AF3.

According to the game machine AF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF1 or AF2, the aspect of two or more identification symbols can be changed based on the operation of the operation means, so that the effect executed for the player There is an effect that it can increase the willingness to participate in

In any one of the game machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the identification symbol effect is executed, the game machine AF4 has regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period during which the operation of the operating means is not valid.

According to the game machine AF4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect is executed over the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and furthermore, the identification symbol effect is executed. A restriction period is provided during the execution period during which the operation to the operating means is not determined to be valid. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player at which timing to operate the operating means, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A game machine AF5, characterized in that a specific effect is executed in a period other than the regulation period in a period during which the identification symbol effect is executed in the game machine AF4.

According to the gaming machine AF5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF4, by executing the specific performance, during the identification symbol performance, the game can be determined whether or not it is currently in the regulation period in which the operation of the operation means is not valid. Since the player can easily distinguish between them, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<Characteristic AG group> (Probable fall with small winning)
A variable that can be changed between a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second state in which the ball entry is more difficult than in the first state. a member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by means of display means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and for indicating the specific determination result of the display means When the identification information is displayed, a privilege giving means capable of giving an advantageous privilege to the player, a first probability as a discrimination probability of being discriminated from the specific discrimination result, and a second probability higher than the first probability a probability setting means capable of setting 2 probabilities, a normal game state as game states, and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be varied from the second state to the first state than in the normal game state. and setting means capable of setting, wherein the probability setting means sets the first probability when a first transition condition is established in a state where the second probability is set. The setting means sets the normal game state when the second transition condition is established in the state where the specific game state is set, and the first transition condition and the second transition condition. and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine AG1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. In order to make it possible to set a high-probability state in which it is easy to win and a low-probability state in which it is difficult to win as a game state, and to shift the game state to a low-probability state when the high-probability state is set. There was a lottery (so-called drop lottery). Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, there is a configuration in which it is possible to set a specific game state in which the lottery of the game is likely to be executed and a normal game state in which it is difficult to execute the game. (For example, JP-A-2010-269007). However, in the above game machine, there is no relationship between the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state and the timing of transition from the specific game state to the normal game state, and the player can understand the transition state of each game state. There is a problem that it becomes difficult and the interest in the game is reduced. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine AG1, since the performance is executed in different performance modes based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, the current game situation is predicted based on the details of the performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine AG1, the determination means can determine the special determination result different from the specific determination result, and the second transition condition is that the determination result of the determination means is the special determination result. The game machine AG2 is characterized by being established based on the following.

According to the game machine AG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG1, the second transition condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the determination means. , and cases in which the judgment results are disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result of the determination means, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AG2 has counting means capable of counting the number of times the determination result of the determination means becomes the special determination result in the state in which the specific game state is set, and the second transition condition is the counting The gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the second transition condition is established when the result of the counting by means is a predetermined counting result.

According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG2, the second transition condition is established when the number of times the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the special discrimination result reaches a predetermined number of times. By discriminating that the result is a special discrimination result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the period until the second transition condition is established, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any one of the game machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means and the game state set by the setting means. A gaming machine AG4 characterized in that it sets the .

According to the game machine AG4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode is set based on the set discrimination probability and the game state. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the current game situation, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AG4, the effect mode setting means sets the first probability by the probability setting means, the first game state in which the normal game state is set by the setting means, and the normal game state by the probability setting means. The game machine AG5 is characterized in that the second probability is set, and the same effect mode is set in the second game state in which the normal game state is set by the setting means.

According to the game machine AG5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG4, the first probability is set and the normal game state is set, and the second probability is set and the normal game state is set. Since the same effect mode is set in the second game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first game state and the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the current game situation, and to improve the interest in the game.

The game machine AG5 has a determination means capable of executing a determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means, and the determination means has a determination for the determination means to perform the determination. The game machine AC6 is characterized in that the determination is executed when the condition is satisfied, and the first transition condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. .

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG5, the determination by the determination means can be executed when the determination condition is satisfied. Execution of determination can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

In the game machine AG5 or AG6, the performance mode setting means suggests the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means when a predetermined period of time has passed after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means. The game machine AC7 is characterized in that it sets a suggestive effect mode for the game.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the suggestive effect mode is set when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, so that the first game state is set. Alternatively, when the second game state is set, the player can be made aware of the current game state based on the contents of the suggestive effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue the game until the predetermined period elapses, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AH group> (Composite control development of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and identification patterns corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification pattern display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means operable by a player and an operation capable of executing an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. an effect execution means; an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the displayed identification symbol by operating the operation means; a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the operation of the operation means during the overlapping period when the identification pattern effect is executed in the overlapping period. A gaming machine AH1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There was something for the players to enjoy. (For example, JP-A-2013-090780). In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there is a game machine in which a plurality of conditions for executing operation effects are provided in order to further enhance the effects of the effects. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation presentations are executed in duplicate, resulting in presentations that are difficult for the player to understand, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AH1, when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in a period in which the operation effect and the identification symbol effect overlap, the specific effect is executed. It is possible to execute an easy-to-understand production. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AH1 has setting means for setting the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be varied when the operation means is operated in the overlapping period, and the specific effect includes the operation AH2 is characterized in that it includes a suggestion mode indicating the operation effect or the identification pattern effect that is to be changed by operating means.

According to the gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AH1, it is possible to suggest to the player the production to be changed when the operation means is operated by the effect specific production produced by the gaming machine AH. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, in the overlapping period, the number of operations for varying the operation performance or the identification symbol performance is set differently based on the operation of the operation means. A game machine AH3 characterized by

According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the number of operations to be varied differs depending on whether the operation presentation or the variable operation presentation is executed alone or overlapped. It becomes possible to Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the specific production can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation performance and the identification symbol performance are executed in overlapping periods, at least one of them is changed by operating the operation means a plurality of times. A game machine AH4 characterized in that it has a switching setting means for setting as follows.

According to the game machine AH4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation performance and the identification symbol performance are executed in overlapping periods, at least the number of operations corresponding to one of the operation performances. can be increased, it is possible to easily comprehend that the specific effect is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the specific effect from ending in a short period of time and the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

In the game machine AH4, the game machine AH5 is characterized in that the specific effect includes one in which an execution period of the operation effect mode after being varied is set longer than a normal time.

According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AH4, during the specific performance, the execution period of the operation performance mode is set longer than during the normal time, so the specific performance is executed for the player. Since the fact can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AI group> (Pending notice development)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and identification patterns corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification pattern display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation capable of executing an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. a performance execution means, an identification pattern performance execution means capable of executing an identification pattern performance capable of varying the mode of the identification pattern being displayed by operating the operation means, and executing the identification pattern performance. an effect mode changing means for varying the effect mode of the identification symbol effect being executed based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition during the period in which the identification symbol effect is being executed. A gaming machine AI1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that variably displays symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and informs a player of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. Further, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball into the starting prize winning slot can be held and stored a plurality of times, and the held patterns corresponding to the number of reserved memories are displayed, and the displayed reserved patterns are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can notify information about the corresponding lottery in advance by using it (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the above-described gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbols, by suggesting the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbols will be a big hit, the game can be played before the variable display is started. It made it possible to raise people's expectations. However, since the content of the pending notice effect cannot be made to correspond to the change in the game situation after the pending notice effect has occurred, the player may have expectations for the content of the pending notice effect. There is a problem that it becomes difficult and lowers the desire to play. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine AI1, when the change condition is satisfied during execution of the identification symbol performance, the performance mode of the identification symbol performance being executed can be changed, so that the performance effect of the identification symbol performance can be enhanced. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in desire to play and improve the interest in the game.

In the game machine AI1, the change condition is established based on the fact that the new information is stored in the storage means during the period in which the identification symbol effect is executed. AI2.

According to the game machine AI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the production mode of the identification symbol production can be varied based on the fact that new information is stored in the storage means. Also in the above, there is an effect that the player can play the game with motivation to store new information in the storage means, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AI2, there is pre-determination means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the identification symbol effect execution means The game machine AI3 is characterized in that the mode of the identification pattern is varied based on the result of discrimination by a pre-discrimination means.

According to the game machine AI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI2, the mode of the identification pattern is varied based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, so that the identification pattern performance to be executed is made interesting. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect.

In the game machine AI3, the effect mode varying means varies the effect mode based on the determination result of the prior determination means for the information that triggers the establishment of the change condition. Machine AI4.

According to the game machine AI4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI3, it is possible to vary the production mode of the identification symbol production based on the result of pre-determination of the newly stored information. Identification patterns in a wider range than the range of identification patterns indicated by the identification pattern presentation in . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily make the player feel a sense of expectation for the identification symbol performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the identification symbol effect A game machine AI5, characterized in that it has regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period in which the operation of the operation means is not valid during a period in which is being executed.

According to the gaming machine AI5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol performance is executed over the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and furthermore, the identification symbol performance is performed. A restriction period is provided during the execution period during which the operation to the operating means is not determined to be valid. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player at which timing to operate the operating means, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A game machine AI6 characterized in that, in the game machine AI5, a specific effect is executed in a period other than the regulation period in a period during which the identification symbol effect is executed.

According to the game machine AI 6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI 5, by executing the specific effect, during the identification pattern effect, the game can be determined whether it is currently in the regulation period in which the operation of the operation means is not valid. Since the player can easily distinguish between them, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Button repeated tapping sound control)
In a game machine having an operation means operable by a player and an effect execution means for changing an effect based on the operation of the operation means, an operation sound is generated each time the operation means is operated. a sound control means capable of outputting at least a first operation sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound; and a type of the operation sound output by the sound control means can be set. a sound setting means; and a sound discrimination means capable of discriminating the type of the operation sound output by the sound control means, wherein the sound setting means determines the The gaming machine AJ1 is characterized in that it sets the type of operation sound.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There is something that entertains players (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). Further, in the game machine described above, when the player operates the operating means, there are some that output an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly accepted. In such a game machine, it was possible to easily determine whether or not the player could operate the operation means by the output operation sound, but it took a long time until the output of one operation sound was completed. When the next operation is performed during the period, that is, when the continuous hitting operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if only one operation sound is output. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by making it easier for the player to hear the output operation sound and by outputting the operation sound rich in variations.

According to the gaming machine AJ1, it is possible to set a new type of operation sound based on the type of operation sound that is actually being output, so that an operation sound that is easy for the player to understand can be output, thereby improving the game. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

The game machine AJ2 in the game machine AJ1 is characterized in that the sound setting means sets the operation sound of a type different from the type of the operation sound determined by the sound determination means.

According to the game machine AJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ1, it is possible to set an operation sound of a type different from the type of operation sound that is actually output, so various operation sounds are output. By doing so, it is possible to execute a production rich in variations, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, the sound setting means sets the first operation sound when the sound determination means determines that the operation sound is not output. Machine AJ3.

According to the game machine AJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, the first operation sound is set by the sound setting means when the operation sound is not output. Therefore, it is possible to output an operation sound with a predetermined regularity to the operation of the operation means, and to enhance the presentation effect.

Any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3 has an operation status determination means capable of determining an interval between the operations performed on the operation means, and the voice setting means determines whether the determination result of the operation status determination means is The game machine AJ4 is characterized in that it is possible to set a third operation sound different from the first operation sound and the second operation sound when a specific situation determination result is obtained.

According to the game machine AJ4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AJ1 to AJ3, the third operation sound can be set based on the determination result of the operation status determination means. The fun of operating the means can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AJ4, the operation status determination means determines the specific status determination result when an interval between the operations performed on the operation means is shorter than a predetermined period. Amusement machine AJ5.

According to the game machine AJ5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ4, when the interval between the operations performed on the operation means is shorter than the predetermined period, the third operation sound is output. There is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines AJ1 to AJ5, the effect executing means executes the effect during a predetermined effect period, based on the determination result of the sound determining means when the effect period has elapsed. and a pseudo-sound setting means capable of setting a pseudo-sound after the performance period elapses, and the sound control means being capable of outputting the pseudo-sound set by the pseudo-sound setting means. A game machine AJ6 characterized by

According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, a pseudo sound can be output based on the type of operation sound output when the presentation period elapses, so that the presentation period ends. There is an effect that the output control of the sound can be terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable regardless of the type of the operation sound being output at the time.

In the game machine AJ6, the pseudo-sound setting means sets a pseudo-sound corresponding to the second operation sound when the sound discrimination means determines a type of the operation sound different from the second operation sound. A gaming machine AJ7 characterized by:

According to the game machine AJ7, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ6, when the type of the operation sound output when the presentation period elapses is other than the second operation sound, the second operation sound is responded to by a pseudo sound. Since the sound is output, the end sound of the sound output by the sound control means can be standardized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine AJ7, a determination means capable of performing determination when a determination condition is satisfied, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a predetermined identification information on the display means. dynamic display means for dynamic display for a period of time, and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the performance period is set during a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display, The pseudo-sound setting means, when the identification information dynamically displayed while the effect is being executed is statically displayed in the specific display mode, is more sensitive than when it is not statically displayed in the specific display mode. , a game machine AJ8 characterized in that it facilitates the setting of the pseudo voice.

According to the game machine AJ8, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ7, a pseudo sound is produced during the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. Since it is made easy to output, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the end content of the voice output by the voice control means.

<Characteristic AK group> (pattern voice)
A game machine having a performance execution means capable of executing a performance and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the specified performance is executed by the performance execution means, wherein the performance is executed. audio control means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the first effect executed by means; audio information determination means for determining the audio information output by the audio output means from a plurality of audio information; a regulating means capable of regulating the type of audio information determined by the audio information determining means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. In the case of announcing the result of the lottery, there has been proposed a configuration in which a plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed and the result of the lottery is notified by a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed (for example, JP-A-2013. -090780). Further, in the game machine described above, when a plurality of symbol rows that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed, a sound effect is output to add sharpness to the effect of notifying the lottery result. . However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to the repetition of monotonous sound effects, and the player gets bored with the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game by suppressing repeated output of a monotonous effect sound in the above game machine.

According to the game machine AK1, the type of voice information determined by the voice information determination means is regulated, so that the type of voice information can be easily determined as intended at the time of design, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This has the effect of suppressing defects.

The gaming machine AK1 has storage means capable of storing the voice information determined by the voice information determination means as history information, and the restriction means stores the history information corresponding to the history information stored in the storage means. A game machine AK2, wherein the type of the voice information determined by the voice information determining means is regulated.

According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AK1, the determined voice information is stored as the history information in the storage means, and the voice determined by the voice information determination means corresponding to the stored history information. By regulating the type of information, it is possible to control the audio information determined in correspondence with the history information, and it is possible to optimize the type of the determined audio information.

In the game machine AK2, the regulation means regulates determination of the same type as the type of the voice information stored a predetermined number of times before.
According to the game machine AK3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AK2, it is possible to prevent the same type of voice information from being determined continuously, and to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the gaming machine AK4 is characterized in that the regulating means regulates the determination of the type of the voice information that has been determined a specific number of times or more in a predetermined period.

According to the game machine AK4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AK1 or AK2, it is possible to suppress the problem that the type of the same voice information is excessively determined in a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous. has the effect of

In any one of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes a symbol effect in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed, and the first effect is a dynamic display of the plurality of identification symbols. The game machine AK5 is characterized in that one of the identification symbols among the symbols is stopped and displayed.

According to the game machine AK5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AK1 to AK4, various sounds are output when the identification symbols are stopped and displayed, so that various effects can be provided when the identification symbols are stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from quickly getting bored with the game.

In any one of game machines AK1 to AK5, a determination means capable of executing determination, and a benefit granting means capable of granting advantageous benefits to a player based on the result of determination by the determination means being a specific determination result. , wherein the voice information determination means is capable of determining the voice information based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the game machine AK6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AK1 to AK5, it is possible to identify the determination result by the sound output in response to the first effect. There is an effect that the game can be played with interest in the kind.

The gaming machine AK6 has acquisition means capable of acquiring information, and information storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means stores the information stored in the information storage means. The game machine has prior determination means for performing preliminary determination prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means, and The game machine AK7 is characterized in that the sound information determination means is configured to be able to determine the sound information based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination means.

According to the game machine AK7, in addition to the effects of the game machine AK6, the result of the preliminary determination can be identified by the type of the output sound, so that the type of the output sound can be made interesting. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic AL group> (image quality control)
display information determination means for determining display information in a display mode to be displayed by the display means from a plurality of display information; and data amount of at least two of the display information determined by the display information determination means A data amount discriminating means for discriminating corresponding information, and a variable control means for varying and controlling a display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the discrimination result discriminated by the data amount discriminating means. A gaming machine AL1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery results, there has been proposed a configuration in which various images and moving images are displayed on a display device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there is a problem that the display of the preview display mode at random results in an excessive amount of image data to be displayed, increasing the load on display control and the like. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game capable of reducing the control load.

According to the game machine AL1, the display mode displayed is varied and controlled based on the result determined by the data amount determining means, so display control can be performed in accordance with the amount of data, and the control load can be reduced. There is an effect that it can be reduced.

In the gaming machine AL1, the data amount determination means determines whether or not a specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode to be displayed in a predetermined first period. A game machine AL2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AL1, it is determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the data amount of the display mode to be displayed in the predetermined first period. It is possible to suppress the problem that the control load increases in.

In the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, when a determination means capable of executing a determination, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, and a privilege granting means for imparting an advantageous privilege to the player, wherein the display information determining means determines a display mode to be displayed in the effect executed by the effect executing means. A game machine AL3.

According to the game machine AL3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AL1 or AL2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the performance notified by the determination result cannot be stably executed due to an increase in the amount of data.

In any one of the gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the display mode displayed by the display mode determining means is set with status information corresponding to the data amount as information corresponding to the data amount. The game machine AL4, wherein the data amount discriminating means discriminates whether or not the total value obtained by adding the status information is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

According to the game machine AL4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AL1 to AL3, status information corresponding to the data amount is set, so that the data amount can be easily determined. be.

In any one of the game machines AL1 to AL4, the variable control means corresponds to the display information determined by the display information determination means such that the total amount of data in the display mode displayed on the display means is reduced. A game machine AL5 characterized in that the display mode to be displayed is variable.

According to the game machine AL5, in addition to the effects of the game machines AL1 to AL4, the amount of data is suppressed, so there is an effect that the control load can be reduced. In the gaming machine AL5, the variable control means sets a display mode in which the number of pixels of the display mode corresponding to at least one of the display information determined by the display information determination means is reduced. Gaming machine AL6.

According to the game machine AL6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AL5, the amount of data can be suppressed by setting a smaller number of pixels in the existing display mode, and the problem of excessive display data can be suppressed. There is

<Characteristic AM group> (Multiple pressing effects)
discrimination means capable of performing discrimination; display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means; and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the An operational dynamic display mode is set in which the display mode is changed by operating means, and when the operational dynamic display mode is set, a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid is set. Effective period setting means for setting, and specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the remaining period of the set effective period when the operating means is operated within the effective period. and a gaming machine AM1 characterized by having:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the result of the lottery, it has been proposed that the player can directly participate in the game by changing the effect by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). However, since the method of operating the operating means, such as the timing of operating the operating means and the period of operation, etc., is not fixed by the player, there is a problem that the interest in executing the effect is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in the gaming machine described above.

According to the game machine AM1, when the operating means is operated, a specific effect can be executed based on the remaining period of the valid period, so that the valid period is set long to allow a wide range of games to be played. Even when the player is configured to be able to operate the operation means, since the specific performance is executed based on the remaining period of the effective period, it is possible to execute various performances, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine AM1, a suggestive mode setting means for setting a suggestive mode suggesting that the operation means is operated a plurality of times within the valid period set by the valid period setting means, and setting by the suggestive mode setting means. an effect period setting means for setting a predetermined effect period within the valid period for the suggestive mode corresponding to one operation performed; and a remaining period of the effect period set by the effect period setting means. and an informing means capable of informing of the remaining period mode indicating the game machine AM2.

According to the game machine AM2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AM1, it is possible to make the player think that the effective period is set for each of the multiple operations, so that the multiple operations can be performed. There is an effect that the execution can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, the identification information is configured by combining a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the plurality of identification symbols to indicate the determination result. The plurality of identification patterns are stopped by combination, and the dynamic display mode is displayed in a specific mode by operating the operating means for at least some of the plurality of identification patterns. When the remaining period of time is equal to or longer than a predetermined period of time as the specific effect, the specific effect executing means executes the identification information that is displayed dynamically. The game machine AM3 is characterized by executing an effect corresponding to the information reflected during the dynamic display of the identification information whose dynamic display is started.

According to the game machine AM3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AM1 or AM2, by operating the operating means so that the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the effect is reflected during the dynamic display after the dynamic display in question. There is an effect that it is possible to motivate the user to operate the operation means in a short period of time by executing the effect.

<Characteristic AN group> (Cosmo Up)
acquisition means capable of acquiring information; storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored by the storage means; display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the display means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and dynamic display means for dynamic display by the dynamic display means A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having privilege granting means for granting, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect during a period in which the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, and the specific effect executed by the effect executing means. a specific information storage means for storing specific information based on the specified information; and a special effect determination means for determining a special effect as at least a part of the game machine AN1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a notice effect suggesting the lottery result in advance is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in the gaming machine described above.

According to the game machine AN1, since the special performance is determined based on the specific information stored when the specific performance is executed, the performance to be executed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific performance. There is an effect that a different game can be provided for each player and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AN1, suggesting means for suggesting a suggestive mode corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, and the special effect determined by the special effect determining means are executed. and suggestion mode changing means for varying the suggestion mode, and when the suggestion mode is a predetermined mode, the residual dynamic display period of the identification information is configured to be longer than or equal to the predetermined period. The game machine AN2 is characterized by being a game machine AN2.

According to the game machine AN2, it is possible to discriminate that the identification information is not displayed in a mode for indicating the determination result by the suggestion mode, and it is possible to suppress the problem of overlooking the determination result.

The game machine AN1 or AN2 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effects determined by the special effect determination means are composed of operation effects that change the effect mode by operating the operation means. and wherein the number of times the operation performance is executed is set according to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

According to the game machine AN3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AN1 or AN2, the number of times the operation effect is executed is set by the stored specific information, so the number of times the player can operate the operation means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of misunderstanding.

<Characteristic AO group> (3 times operation)
It has operation means that can be operated by a player, and operation effect setting means that can set an operation effect to be executed based on the operation of the operation means, and the operation effect setting means is set. A plurality of operation effects are set for the operation effects that can be performed, in which a specific operation effect is executed corresponding to a plurality of operations. The game machine AO1 is characterized in that a number of suggestion modes corresponding to the number of operations set in the operation presentation are displayed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the result of the lottery, it has been proposed that the player can directly participate in the game by changing the effect by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). However, there is a problem that the interest is reduced in executing the performance based on the operation of the operating means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AO1, when a multi-operation effect is set, the number of suggestion modes corresponding to the number of operations is displayed, thereby providing an easy-to-understand game and enhancing the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine AO1, valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid when the multiple operation effect is set, and within the valid period set by the valid period setting means and variable display means for setting a variable display mode to be variably displayed corresponding to the decrease of the effective period for each of the suggested modes.

According to the gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AO1, the variable display mode makes it seem as if the effective period is set for each suggestive mode, and the timing of each operation is variably displayed. There is an effect that the operation can be performed according to the mode, and the timing at which the operation effect is displayed can be suitably set.

In the game machine AO1 or AO2, the game machine AO3 is characterized in that the multiple operation effect is set in advance to be executed according to the number of times the operation means is operated.

According to the game machine AO3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AO1 or AO2, there is an effect that it is not necessary to individually set the operation effect for multiple times, and the control for multiple operations can be easily performed.

<Characteristic AP Group> (Burst Challenge)
Operation means operable by a player, effective period setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operation means is effective, and operation effect can be executed based on the operation of the operation means within the effective period. and operation effect execution means, wherein information determination means determines information corresponding to the operation effect that can be executed during a predetermined period of the effective period, and operation means is operated within the predetermined period. and operation mode determination means for determining the mode of the operation performance to be executed based on the remaining period of the predetermined period when the game machine AP1 is executed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a notice effect suggesting the lottery result in advance is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in the gaming machine described above.

According to the game machine AP1, the information corresponding to the operational performance that can be executed in a predetermined period within the valid period is determined in advance, and the mode of the operational performance is determined based on the remaining period, so that the operation means is operated. Even if there is a difference in frequency, interval, etc. between players, by executing operation presentations matching the operation of the players and notifying information, the effective period can be effectively used and the interest in the game can be improved. There is

In the gaming machine AP1, the operation effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing the operation effect each time the operating means operates within the predetermined period, and the information determining means is executed within the predetermined period. A gaming machine AP2 characterized in that information corresponding to the mode of the final operation presentation that can be performed is determined.

According to the game machine AP2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AP1, the final operation performance is determined in advance, so that every time the operation means is operated, the process until the final operation performance is executed is enjoyed. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, when a specific operation effect is executed, a benefit that is advantageous to the player is given. A process operation effect corresponding to a process until the specific operation effect is displayed is set, and the operation mode determining means determines, when the remaining period of the predetermined period is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, the specific operation effect. A game machine AP3 is characterized in that an operation presentation is determined, and when the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, the process operation presentation corresponding to the remaining period is determined.

According to the gaming machine AP3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, the process operation presentation makes it possible for the player to recognize that the operation presentation will gradually become the final operation presentation, thereby increasing the interest of the player. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine AP3 has updating means for updating the effect numerical value based on the operation of the operating means, and the updating means updates the effect numerical value to the remaining period of the predetermined period which is currently set. The operation mode determining means determines the mode of the operation effect corresponding to the effect numerical value updated by the updating means. A gaming machine AP4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AP3, it is possible to easily determine the mode of the operation presentation based on the presentation numerical value, and to reduce the control load.

<Characteristic AQ Group> (Derived from Cosmo Up)
acquisition means capable of acquiring information; storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored by the storage means; display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the display means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and dynamic display means for dynamic display by the dynamic display means A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having privilege granting means for granting, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect during a period in which the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, and the specific effect executed by the effect executing means. a specific information storage means for storing specific information based on the above, and based on the specific information stored in the specific storage means, a special performance is determined as at least a part of the performance executed by the performance execution means. A game machine AQ1 characterized by comprising a special performance determining means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a notice effect suggesting the lottery result in advance is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in the gaming machine described above.

According to the game machine AQ1, the special effect is determined based on the specific information stored when the specific effect is executed, so the effect to be executed after that is variable by executing the specific effect. There is an effect that a different game can be provided for each player and the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AR group> (Derived from Burst Challenge)
Operation means operable by a player, effective period setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operation means is effective, and operation effect can be executed based on the operation of the operation means within the effective period. In a gaming machine having operation effect execution means, information determination means for determining information corresponding to the operation effect executable within the valid period; and when the operation means is operated within the predetermined period, and operation mode determination means for determining the mode of the operation performance to be executed based on the remaining period of the valid period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a notice effect suggesting the lottery result in advance is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in the gaming machine described above.

According to the game machine AR1, the information corresponding to the operation effects that can be executed within the effective period is determined in advance, and the mode of the operation effects is determined based on the remaining period. Even if there is a difference between players, etc., by executing an operation presentation in accordance with the operation of the player and notifying the information, there is an effect that the valid period can be effectively used and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BA group> (Playability that is advantageous if no holding group occurs)
A first ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a first direction can easily enter, and first discrimination information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. A first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring, a first discrimination means for performing a first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and a direction different from the first direction A second ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a second direction can easily enter, and second discrimination information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. Second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring; second discrimination means for performing second discrimination based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means; and second discrimination information acquisition means After the second determination information is acquired by, until the second determination based on the acquired second determination information is performed, the second determination information is stored with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit a first state in which a game ball launched in the second direction is placed at a position where the game ball can easily enter, and a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. variable ball entry means that can be changed to the second state, privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the first determination means, or Variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed to the first state for a predetermined number of times based on the result of the determination by the second determining means, and the variable game execution. One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as a game state after execution of the variable game by means is completed. and a game state setting means for setting a game state, wherein the game state setting means determines the specific determination result by the second determination means rather than the specific determination result by the first determination means. The game machine BA1 is characterized in that the ratio of setting the first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is finished is higher when the game state is set.

According to the gaming machine BA1, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is likely to enter, and the game ball enters the first ball entering means. First discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means. The first determination is performed by the first determination means based on the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction is likely to enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Then, the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means. After the second determination information is acquired by the second determination information acquisition means, until the second determination based on the acquired second determination information is executed, the second determination information is stored by the determination information storage means. A predetermined number of pieces of information is stored as an upper limit. A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state is provided so that a game ball launched in a second direction enters. placed in an easy-to-reach position. A predetermined privilege is given by a privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. The variable game execution means executes a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. . Among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, as a game state after execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is completed. 1 game state is set by the game state setting means. The specific determination result by the second determination means is the first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed by the game state setting means rather than the specific determination result by the first determination means. setting is higher.

Thus, when the game ball is shot in the second direction to obtain a predetermined privilege during execution of the variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entering means and the second discrimination information is stored. . When a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information, the ratio of setting to the first game state having a lower advantage than the second game state is high, so it is stored during the execution of the variable game. A player can play a game in anticipation that a specific determination result will not be obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information. Therefore, there is an effect that novel game characteristics can be realized.

In the gaming machine BA1, a plurality of variable patterns of the variable ball-entering means include at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball-entering means than the first variable pattern. variable pattern setting means for setting any one of the variable patterns, the variable pattern setting means, when the determination by the first determination means results in the specific determination result, the variable pattern is set to the second variable pattern rather than the second variable pattern The ratio of setting the first variable pattern increases, and the ratio of setting the second variable pattern becomes higher than the first variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the second determination means. A game machine BA2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the variable pattern of the variable ball-entering means, any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball-entering means than the first variable pattern. is set by the variable pattern setting means. When the determination by the first determination means results in a specific determination result, the ratio of setting the first variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than the first variable pattern.

As a result, when the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result, the second variable pattern in which the game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entry means is likely to be set, so that the variable game is being executed. The second determination based on the second determination information stored in .

In the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entering means, a first variable pattern and a game ball to the variable ball entering means rather than the first variable pattern. variable pattern setting means for setting any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter, and the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern is set so that the game ball is It is composed of a period that is at least longer than the period until the second identification information of the predetermined number of pieces of information is obtained by the second identification information obtaining means when the ejection is continued in the second direction. A gaming machine BA3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the start of the variable game, the variable pattern of the variable ball-entering means is a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball-entering means than the first variable pattern. Any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern, when the game ball continues to be shot in the second direction, the second discrimination information acquisition means acquires a predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information. It consists of a period that is at least longer than the period until

As a result, during the execution of the variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, if the player continues to shoot the game ball in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined benefit, the second variable pattern of at least the predetermined number of pieces of information or more is acquired. Therefore, the second determination of the upper limit number of times is executed each time after the end of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in anticipation that the second discrimination of the upper limit number of times will not all result in a specific discrimination result.

In any one of the game machines BA1 to BA3, the second determination by the second determination means is executed with priority over the first determination by the first determination means. Game machine BA4.

According to the game machine BA4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines BA1 to BA3, the second determination by the second determination means is executed with priority over the first determination by the first determination means. Execution of the first discrimination can be suppressed even if a game ball enters the first ball entering means in a state where the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to attract attention by the second determination.

In any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA4, the game ball launched in the second direction is placed at a position that can be reached, and the game ball that has reached the first flow path provided with the second ball entering means is provided. and a second channel provided with the variable ball entry means.

According to the game machine BA5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines BA1 to BA4, the first channel provided with the second ball entry means and the second channel provided with the variable ball entry means Distributing means for distributing the game balls to the second direction is arranged at a position where the game balls shot in the second direction can reach, so that the flow direction of the game balls shot in the second direction is biased. There is an effect that it can be prevented.

In the game machine BA5, the distribution means alternately distributes the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the game machine BA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BA5, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means. A ball can be alternately entered into the second ball entering means and the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game ball launched in the second direction from being unevenly entered into the second ball entering means or the variable ball entering means.

In any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA6, a first position at which a game ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means compared to the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to hit the ball, and a variable control means that controls the variable operation of the variable means. The second game state is characterized in that the variable means is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first game state. Game machine BA7.

According to the gaming machine BA7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA6, the first position where the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means, and the first position compared to the first position The variable means is changed to the second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. A variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first game state, the variable means is less likely to be varied to the first position by the variable control means, and in the second game state, the variable means is more likely to be varied to the first position by the variable control means than in the first game state. .

Thereby, in the first game state, the variable means is easily changed to the first position, so that the game ball is easily entered into the first ball entering means. Therefore, in the first game state, the game can be played more efficiently, so that there is an effect that the game can be played with a higher expectation of the first game state.

In any one of the game machines BA1 to BA7, the first game state is such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means and the second determination means is set to the first probability. In the second game state, the probability that the specific discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination by the first discriminating means and the second discriminating means is set to a second probability lower than the first probability. A gaming machine BA8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first game state, the probability that the determination by the first determination means and the second determination means will result in a specific determination result is set to the first probability. On the other hand, in the second game state, the probability that the determination by the first determination means and the second determination means will result in a specific determination result is set to a second probability lower than the first probability.

Thus, in the first game state, the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is higher than in the second game state, so that after the variable game ends, the variable game can be easily executed again with a relatively small number of determinations. Therefore, in the first game state, it can be expected that a greater number of predetermined benefits will be obtained in a relatively short period of time, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Characteristic BB group> (Executing a specific effect using the jackpot ending period and the pending digestion period)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means, and the privilege. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as game states after execution of the privilege game by the game execution means is completed. game state setting means for setting one game state out of the states; dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the result of discrimination by the discrimination means; Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a period until the end of the privilege game and a period until the dynamic display of one or more of the identification information executed after the end of the privilege game is completed. and a specific performance executing means for executing a specific performance, wherein the specific performance is a performance capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the game state after the specific performance is finished is the second game state. A gaming machine BB1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BB1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. carried out by means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as game states after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. One game state out of the states is set by the game state setting means. Identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A dynamic display of one or a plurality of identification information executed after the end of the privilege game and the period until the end of the privilege game based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during the execution of the privilege game. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means during the period until the end of . The specific effect is composed of an effect capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the game state after the specific effect is finished is the second game state.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed over the period from the establishment of the specific condition to the end of dynamic display of one or a plurality of pieces of identification information, so the period until the end of the privilege game can be executed. , or in the case where the specific effect is executed during the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of one piece of identification information, the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine BB1, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect based on the establishment of the specific condition when the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the second game state. A gaming machine BB2 characterized in that it executes

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB1, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the second gaming state, the specific performance is generated based on the establishment of the specific condition. is executed by the specific effect executing means, the second game state is suggested in the specific effect unless a specific determination result is obtained during execution of the specific effect and the game state is shifted to the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that a specific determination result will not be obtained during execution of a specific effect.

In the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, based on a predetermined specific trigger, a discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means; discrimination information storage means that can store a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit until the discrimination condition for the acquired discrimination information is satisfied; determination means for determining whether or not the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result is included in the determination information stored therein; and a performance mode determination means, wherein the specific performance execution means executes a specific performance of the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means.

According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on a predetermined specific trigger, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discriminating means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used as discrimination against the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the predetermined number of pieces of information is stored by the determination information storage means as the upper limit. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the determination means determines whether or not the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes determination information corresponding to the specific determination result. An effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the effect mode determination means based on the determination result by the determination means. A specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is executed by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, the result of determination by the determination means can be determined in advance, so there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode that is in line with the result of determination actually performed by the determination means.

In the gaming machine BB3, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a first privilege game in which the game state after execution is set to the first game state by the game state setting means; a type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a second privilege game whose game state after execution is set to the second game state; is for determining whether the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, and the production mode determining means determines whether the discrimination information Based on the fact that the means determines that the identification information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, a performance mode is provided that suggests that the game state after the specific performance is completed is the first game state. A gaming machine BB4 characterized in that it determines.

According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and the first privilege game after the execution is completed One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of privilege game types including at least a second privilege game in which the game state is set to the second game state. The determining means determines whether or not the determining information stored in the determining information storing means includes the determining information corresponding to the first privilege game. Based on the determination by the determination means that the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, a performance mode suggesting that the game state after the end of the specific performance is the first game state is rendered. Determined by mode determination means.

As a result, it is possible to provide novel game characteristics such that the game is played with the expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines BB1 to BB4, the game machine BB5 is characterized in that a predetermined specific period is set as the performance period as the performance period regardless of the performance mode.

According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB4, a predetermined specific period is set as the performance period of the specific performance regardless of the performance mode, so that the performance period is lengthened. Therefore, it becomes difficult to predict the result of the specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the result of the specific effect until the end.

In the game machine BB5, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means, wherein the specific period is set after the specific condition is satisfied and the bonus game is determined by the dynamic display period determination means when all determinations by the determination means for a predetermined specific number of times result in deviation determination results different from the specific determination result. A game machine BB6 characterized in that it is the sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means. A dynamic display time in dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the determination result of the determination means. A dynamic display period is determined when the period from the establishment of a specific condition to the end of the privilege game and the determination result by the determination means for a predetermined specific number of times are all different from the specific determination result. A sum of a specific number of dynamic display periods determined by means is set as the specific period.

As a result, the specific effect can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for the specific number of times ends, so there is an effect that the specific effect can be ended neatly.

In the gaming machine BB6, the dynamic display period determination means, after the end of the privilege game, when the discrimination by the discrimination means within the specified number of times results in a specific determination result, at least until the specified period ends. A gaming machine BB7 is characterized in that a period equal to or longer than the remaining period of is determined as the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine BB7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB6, after the end of the privilege game, if the determination by the determination means within a specific number of times results in a specific determination result, at least the remainder until the end of the specific period Since a period equal to or longer than the period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, when a specific determination result is obtained in determination within a specific number of times, the privilege game is played before the end of the specific period. can be suppressed from being started. Therefore, by starting the privilege game before the end of the specific performance, it is possible to prevent the result of the specific performance from being known in advance, so that there is an effect that the specific performance can draw the player's attention.

Any one of the game machines BB1 to BB7 is provided with an expectation degree suggesting effect execution means for executing an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the second game state being suggested by the specific effect during execution of the privilege game. A game machine BB8 characterized by.

According to the game machine BB8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines BB1 to BB7, the expectation level suggesting effect executing means provides an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the fact that the second game state is suggested by the specific effect during execution of the privilege game. Therefore, the player can have the impression that the performance mode during execution of the privilege game and the specific performance are a series of performances. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved during execution of the privilege game.

<Characteristic BC group> (Makes it difficult to determine from the actions of the attacker whether or not a holding series will occur)
A privilege ball entry means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball, a first position where the game ball can enter the privilege ball entry means, and a game from the first position. Variable means for changing to a second position where it is difficult for the ball to enter, determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and determination by the determination means based on the first determination result. a first variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary in a first variable mode; and a second determination result different from the first determination result obtained by determination by the determination means a game state setting means capable of setting a game state different from the game state at the time when the determination was performed; A second variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode that is executed the specific number of times when all determinations by the determination means result in the first determination result, and a second variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable.

According to the gaming machine BC1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball, and the first position where the game ball can be entered into the privilege ball entry means; The variable means is variable to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable means is varied in the first variable mode based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. controlled by It is distinguished from the first variable mode executed a specific number of times when all the determinations by the determination means for a specific number of times result in the first determination result based on the fact that the determination by the determination means has resulted in the second determination result. In a second variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult, the variable means is controlled to be variable by the second variable control means.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the first determination result or the second determination result is obtained from the variable mode of the variable means. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for a person to discriminate.

In the gaming machine BC1, the game state setting means can set one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more disadvantageous than the first game state. When the determination by the determination means results in the second determination result, the rate of setting the second game state is set higher than the rate of setting the first game state. A gaming machine BC2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one game state is set by the game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more disadvantageous than the first game state. A rate of setting the second game state by the game state setting means is set higher than a rate of setting the first game state when the determination by the determination means results in a second determination result.

As a result, when the second determination result is obtained, the disadvantageous second game state is likely to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the first determination result.

A gaming machine BC3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, a rate of the first discrimination result in discrimination by the discrimination means is set higher than a rate of other discrimination results.

According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the ratio of the first judgment result in the judgment by the judgment means is set higher than the ratio of the other judgment results. The possibility of obtaining the first determination result continuously over the number of times increases. Therefore, even when the second determination result is obtained and the variable means is controlled in the second variable mode, it is possible to make the user think that the first determination result may have continued for a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not a different game state has been set.

In any one of the game machines BC1 to BC3, the determination means executes determination when either a first determination condition or a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. , the game state setting means sets a high percentage of setting the first game state when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the second determination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that a ratio of setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state is set higher when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on establishment. BC4.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means when either the first determination condition or the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. When the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition results in the second determination result, the ratio of setting the first game state by the game state setting means is set high. On the other hand, when the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition results in the second determination result, the ratio of setting the second game state, which is more disadvantageous than the first game state, is set high.

Thus, when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first game state having a higher degree of advantage than the second game state is likely to be set. A game can be played in anticipation of success. Therefore, there is an effect that, when the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means, the type of the discrimination condition that triggered the execution of the discrimination can be focused on.

In the gaming machine BC4, when the determination by the determination means results in the second determination result, and the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the bonus ball entry means is selected rather than the second variable mode. A game machine BC5 comprising a third variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary in a third variable mode in which a game ball is likely to enter.

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC4, the determination by the determination means results in the second determination result, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the Since the variable means is controlled by the third variable control means so as to vary in the third variable mode in which the game ball easily enters the bonus ball entry means, the second determination is made based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The resulting advantage can be made higher. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game expecting that the first determination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine BC4 or BC5, a first ball-entering device arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction is likely to enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. a second ball-entering means arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball-entering means; The second determination condition is established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and the privilege entering means has entered the game ball launched in the second direction. A gaming machine BC6 characterized by being provided at a position where it is easy to hit a ball.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC4 or BC5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball-entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction is likely to enter, while the second ball-entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction is likely to enter. A ball-entering means and a privilege-ball-entering means are provided. The first discrimination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, whereas the second discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. holds.

Thus, when the privilege ball entering means is changed to the first position and the game is launched in the second direction to obtain a predetermined privilege, the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is likely to be executed after the privilege ball-entering means is changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine BC6, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means a determination information storage means capable of storing at least the determination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until determination by the determination means is executed.

According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is Up to a predetermined number of pieces of information are stored at least by the determination information storage means until determination is performed by the determination means.

Thus, when a ball entering the second ball entering means is detected in a situation in which the discrimination by the discrimination means cannot be started, the discrimination information used for discrimination can be stored in the discrimination information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball entering the second ball entering means from being wasted.

In any one of the game machines BC4 to BC7, the determination executed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition is executed with priority over the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. A gaming machine BC8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines BC4 to BC7, the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition is more than the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. is executed with priority, there is an effect that when a determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is executed, attention can be paid to the result of the determination.

<Characteristic BD group> (A special 2 start winning prize is likely to occur during the jackpot, and is unlikely to occur normally)
A first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and the first determination a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by means or the second determination means; and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. Type determination for determining the type of one privilege game from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. setting a first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be established based on a specific determination result obtained by determination by means, the first determination means or the second determination means, and performing the privilege game; state setting means for setting a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state, based on the satisfaction of the termination condition; A ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the first determination means results in the specific determination result than when the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result. Characteristic game machine BD1.

According to the game machine BD1, determination is performed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. be done. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the scoring game execution means based on a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game executing means, a category is selected from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. The type of one privilege game is determined by the determining means. The state setting means sets a first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. On the other hand, the state setting means sets a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state based on the fact that the condition for ending the privilege game is satisfied. The type determining means is arranged so that the ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the first determining means results in a specific determination result than when the determination by the second determining means results in a specific determination result. It is configured.

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the second determination condition from being established in a state other than during execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to limit the chances of executing the first privilege game with a low degree of advantage.

In the gaming machine BD1, a discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means. is stored up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

According to the game machine BD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BD1, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the determination information acquisition means acquires determination information to be used for determination by the second determination means. Until the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, the discrimination information storage means stores a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit.

Thereby, when the second determination condition is satisfied a plurality of times before the determination by the second determination means is executed, the plurality of determination information acquired according to the satisfaction of the second determination condition for the plurality of times. is stored by the discrimination information storage means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the discrimination is not executed even though the second discrimination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine BD2, the second determination means acquires by the determination information acquisition means during execution of the privilege game, based on the determination information stored in the determination information storage means, after the privilege game ends A gaming machine BD3 characterized in that it executes discrimination.

According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD2, the privilege is obtained by the second discrimination device based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition device during execution of the privilege game and stored in the discrimination information storage device. Since the determination is performed after the game is finished, the chances of performing the determination by the second determination means can be concentrated after the privilege game is finished. Therefore, after the end of the privilege game, the player can play the game expecting that the determination by the second determining means will not result in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines BD1 to BD3, a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball, and a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. , a second position at which a game ball is easier to enter than the first position; Specific determining means for determining whether to vary to the second position, and the variable means varies to the second position based on determination by the specific determining means that the first position should be varied to the second position. wherein the variable control means controls the specific determination means in the second state more than the case where the specific determination means determines that the variable means is to be varied in the second state. A game machine BD4 characterized in that the period during which said variable means is varied to said second position is longer when it is determined that said variable means is varied by said variable means.

According to the game machine BD4, in addition to the effects of the game machines BD1 to BD3, the following effects are produced. That is, a first position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means where the second determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball, and a game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is varied to the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific determination condition, the specific determination means determines whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. The variable control means controls the variable means to be variable to the second position based on the determination by the specific determination means that the first position should be varied to the second position. The variable means is at the second position when the specific determining means determines to vary the variable means in the second state than when the specific determining means determines to vary the variable means in the second state. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes long.

Thereby, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the ball entering means in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, in the first state, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be established more easily than in the second state.

In any one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD4, a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of a game ball, and a first position that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means. , a second position at which a game ball is easier to enter than the first position; Specific determining means for determining whether to vary to the second position, and the variable means varies to the second position based on determination by the specific determining means that the first position should be varied to the second position. The period from the start to the end of the discrimination of 1 by the specific discriminating means tends to be shorter in the first state than in the second state. A gaming machine BD5 characterized by:

According to the game machine BD5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines BD1 to BD4, the following effects are produced. That is, a first position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means where the second determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball, and a game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is varied to the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific determination condition, the specific determination means determines whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. The variable control means controls the variable means to be variable to the second position based on the determination by the specific determination means that the first position should be varied to the second position. In the first state, the period from the start to the end of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means is more likely to be shorter than in the second state.

As a result, in the first state, the period required for the specific determination means to perform the same number of determinations is shorter than in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the opportunity to change the variable means to the second position more times, so that there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered in the first state.

In any one of the game machines BD1 to BD3, a ball entry means provided in a specific flow path and satisfying the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball, and a game ball difficult to flow down the specific flow path. and an open state in which the game ball can flow down, and the opening and closing means are set to the open state based on the first state. and opening/closing control means for setting the game machine to the closed state when the game machine BD6 is in the second state.

According to the game machine BD6, in addition to the effects of the game machines BD1 to BD3, the following effects are produced. That is, the specific channel is provided with ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of a game ball. The opening/closing means is variable between a closed state in which the specific channel is closed so that the game ball cannot easily flow down, and an open state in which the game ball can flow down. The opening/closing means is set to the open state by the opening/closing control means based on the first state, and the opening/closing means is set to the closed state by the opening/closing control means based on the second state. .

Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the second determination condition from being satisfied in the second state.

In the gaming machine BD6, the opening/closing means is configured to be able to park a specific number of game balls upstream of the opening/closing means when set to the closed state. Machine BD7.

According to the game machine BD7, in addition to the effects of the game machine BD6, when the opening/closing means is set in the closed state, a specific number of game balls can be parked upstream of the opening/closing means. Therefore, when the open state is set, the parked game ball can enter the ball entering means. Therefore, in the first state in which the open state is set, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily established.

<Characteristic BE group> (Including information according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the specific effect in the fluctuation pattern command from the main to the sub)
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a performance mode, main control means for performing main control relating to a game, and slave control means for performing control relating to a game based on a command output from the main control means The main control means includes determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of determination by the determining means becoming a specific determination result. A privilege game execution means, a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means, and a dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. dynamic display time determination means for determining a target display time; information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means; and command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least information to the slave control means, wherein the slave control means receives the dynamic display time command output by the command output means. dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time based on the dynamic display time command being received by the command receiving means; and a predetermined specific condition being satisfied. Based on this, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect executable over one or more of the dynamic display times on the display means, and the specific information included in the dynamic display time command Based on, the specific effect end determination means for determining whether or not to end the specific effect, and the specific effect end determination means determined to end the specific effect, used for the determination a specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect until the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command ends. Gaming machine BE1 to play.

According to the gaming machine BE1, in the main control means, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition, and when the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, the game is advantageous to the player. A privilege game is executed by a privilege game executing means. The dynamic display executing means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determining means. A dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A dynamic display time command including at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is output by the command output means. It is output to the slave control means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display time command output by the command output means is received by the command receiving means, and based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means, the dynamic display time is set dynamically. It is specified by the display time specifying means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, a specific effect that can be executed over one or more dynamic display times is executed on the display means by the specific effect executing means. Based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, the specific effect end determining means determines whether or not to end the specific effect. The dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination ends when the specific effect end determining means determines to end the specific effect. The specific effect is terminated by the specific effect main hot water amount means until the specified effect is completed.

As a result, there is an effect that the specific effect can be terminated favorably.

In the gaming machine BE1, when it is determined by the specific effect end determining means that the specific effect is to end, the specific effect is determined based on the information according to the determination result by the determining means included in the dynamic display time command. The game machine BE2 is characterized by comprising a performance mode determination means for determining a performance mode until the specified performance is terminated by the performance end means.

According to the game machine BE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BE1, when it is determined by the specific effect end determining means that the specific effect is to end, the game machine BE2 responds to the determination result by the determining means included in the dynamic display time command. Based on the information, the performance mode determining means determines the performance mode until the specific performance ending means terminates the specific performance, so that the performance mode can be determined in consideration of the determination result by the determining means. . Therefore, there is an effect that the effect mode of the specific effect can be preferably set.

In the game machine BE1 or BE2, the sub-control means includes an input determination means for determining power-on to the game machine, and a dynamic display time command included in the dynamic display time command when the power-on is determined by the power-on determination means. cut-off determination means for discriminating whether or not the specific performance was being executed at the time when the power of the game machine was cut off based on the specific information received; and execution of the specific performance by the cut-off determination means. A gaming machine BE3, further comprising post-throwing effect execution means for executing the specific effect based on the fact that it is determined to be in the middle.

According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, the power-on of the gaming machine is determined by the power-on determination means in the slave control means, and the power-on is determined by the power-on determination means. Secondly, based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, the cut-off time discriminating means discriminates whether or not the specific effect was being executed at the time when the power of the gaming machine was cut off. The specific performance is executed by the post-throwing performance executing means based on the determination that the specific performance was being executed by the shut-off determination means.

Thus, even if the power supply is cut off during execution of the specific performance, the specific performance can be restarted, so that the player is prevented from being puzzled by the different performance modes before and after the power cutoff. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine BE4 in the gaming machine BE3 is characterized in that the specific effect ending means terminates the specific effect executed by the post-throwing effect executing means.

According to the game machine BE4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BE3, the specific effect executed by the effect executing means after the input is terminated by the specific effect ending means, so that the power of the game machine is turned off during execution of the specific effect. There is an effect that the specific effect can be terminated favorably even when it is interrupted.

The game machine BE5 in the game machine BE4 is characterized in that the specific effect executing means sets a predetermined specific period as the effect period of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BE5, a specific period predetermined by the specific production execution means is set as the production period of the specific production, so that a simple process is performed when setting the specific production. There is an effect that it can be set by

In any one of the game machines BE1 to BE5, the main control means acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and acquisition by the discrimination information acquisition means. determination information storage means capable of storing at least a predetermined number of pieces of the determined determination information until they are used for determination by the determination means; and the command output means stores the determined determination information in the determination information storage means. and outputting to the sub-control means an information number command including information corresponding to the number of pieces of information of the identification information that is stored, and the specific effect executing means outputs the number of pieces of information of the identification information included in the information number command. The game machine BE6 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times equal to or less than the number of pieces of information.

According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BE1 to BE5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is stored in the determination information storage means at least until the determination information is used for determination by the determination means, with a predetermined number of pieces of information being the upper limit. An information number command including information corresponding to the number of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is output to the slave control means by the command output means. The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect over the dynamic display of the identification information for the number of times equal to or less than the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information included in the number-of-information command.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed within a range equal to or less than the number of identification information stored in the identification information storage means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the continuation of the presentation.

In the game machine BE6, the information corresponding to the number of pieces of information of the identification information is stored until all identifications based on the identification information stored in the identification information storage means are completed after the specific condition is established. The game machine BE7 is characterized in that it is composed of information corresponding to the number of information of the remaining identification information stored in the identification information storage means.

According to the game machine BE7, in addition to the effects of the game machine BE6, the information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after the specific condition is established. Since it is composed of information corresponding to the number of information of the remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means until the end of, the specific performance is more surely stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that it can be executed within a range equal to or less than the number of pieces of discrimination information.

<Characteristic BF group> (Depending on the winning pattern, the ease of execution of the special drawing lottery on the disadvantageous side is changed)
A first ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a first direction can easily enter, and first discrimination information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. First determination information acquisition means to be acquired, first determination means for performing first determination using the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means, and the first direction Second discriminating information based on a second ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a different second direction can easily enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means to obtain a second discrimination that is likely to result in a discrimination result that is more disadvantageous than the first discrimination. a second determination means for executing; a determination information storage means capable of storing the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information; the first determination means; or As a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result in the discrimination by the second discrimination means, and a privilege game type executed by the privilege game execution means a first privilege game in which it is more advantageous to shoot a game ball in the first direction than in the second direction for at least a predetermined period; and a game ball to shoot in the second direction rather than the first direction during the predetermined period. a game machine BF1 comprising a type determining means for determining one type of the privilege game from among a plurality of types including a second privilege game which tends to be more advantageous to launch.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines have advantages such as changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have different degrees. However, it has been desired to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the winning type.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BF1, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is likely to enter. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first discrimination information acquired by the first information acquiring means is used. , a first determination is performed by the first determination means. A second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction is likely to enter. The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Using the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means, the second determination is performed by the second determination means, which tends to result in a more disadvantageous determination result than the first determination. The second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as the upper limit. Based on a specific determination result obtained by determination by the first determination means or the second determination means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. As the types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a first privilege game in which it is more advantageous to shoot the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction at least during a predetermined period, and a first privilege game in which the game ball is more likely to be shot in the first direction than in the first direction during the predetermined period One privilege game category is determined by a category determining means from among a plurality of categories including a second privilege game in which shooting a game ball in the second direction tends to be more advantageous.

As a result, the first privilege game, which is advantageous by shooting the game ball in the first direction, is difficult to execute the second discrimination, which tends to result in a disadvantageous discrimination result, so that the first privilege game and the second privilege. It is possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage from the game. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, so that when a specific determination result is obtained, the effect is that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of the privilege game. There is

In the gaming machine BF1, a first ball is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, and can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter. A variable ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction is easy to enter, and is variable between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter. 2 variable ball entry means, and privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, In the first privilege game, the first variable ball entry means is more likely to be changed to a state where the ball can be entered than the second variable ball entry means, and the second privilege game is the first privilege. The gaming machine BF2 is characterized in that the second variable ball-entering means is more likely to be changed to a ball-enterable state than the game.

According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which a game ball can be entered and a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can easily enter. It is A second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which a game ball can be entered and a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can easily enter. there is A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. The first privilege game is more likely to be changed to a state in which the first variable ball-entering means can enter the ball than the second variable ball-entering means. In the second privilege game, the second variable ball-entering means is more likely to be changed to the state in which the ball can be entered than in the first privilege game.

As a result, during execution of the privilege game, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to whether the shot game ball enters the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. be.

In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the bonus game is completed. game state setting means for setting the game state, and the first game state is set after the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result in the determination by the second determination means is completed. The game machine BF3 is characterized in that the ratio set as the later game state is higher than the second game state.

According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the game state after the end of the privilege game, one game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. It is set by the setting means. In the first game state, a ratio set as the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result in the determination by the second determination means is higher than that in the second game state. is configured to be

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game feature in which a game is played in anticipation that a specific determination result will not be obtained when the determination by the second determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BF3, the game state setting means sets the first game state at a ratio of setting the second game state as the game state after the first privilege game or the second privilege game is completed. A game machine BF4 characterized in that the ratio is higher than that of the game machine BF4.

According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF3, the ratio of setting the second game state as the game state after the first privilege game or the second privilege game is completed is Since it is configured to be higher than the set ratio, the second determination executed based on the shooting of the game ball in the second direction in the predetermined period results in a specific determination result, and the first game state The player can be made to think that he/she wants to avoid that is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the second determination will not result in a specific determination result after the second privilege game is finished.

In any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting a determination result by the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means, and the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means. As an effect, either a first suggested effect or a second suggested effect different from the first suggested effect is determined when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, and the type determining means determines A game machine BF5, further comprising a suggestive effect determining means for determining the first suggestive effect when the second privilege game is determined.

According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect suggesting the result of determination by the first determining means or the second determining means. As the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means, either a first suggestive effect or a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect is suggested when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. It is determined by the performance determining means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, the first suggestive effect is determined by the suggestive effect determining means.

As a result, when the second suggestive performance is executed, it is confirmed that the first privilege game is played, so that the game can be played in anticipation of the execution of the second suggestive performance as the suggestive performance. has the effect of Further, since the first suggesting effect may be executed even in the first privilege game, it is possible to play the game expecting that the first suggesting effect is the first privilege game when the first suggesting effect is executed. has the effect of

In the gaming machine BF5, when the suggestive effect executing means executes the first suggestive effect based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determining means, after the first suggestive effect is completed, the A gaming machine BF6 characterized by executing a second suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF5, when the first suggestive effect is executed based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determining means, after the first suggestive effect is completed, Since the second suggestive performance is executed by the suggestive performance executing means, the game is played with the expectation that the second suggestive performance will be executed after the first suggestive performance is finished when the first suggestive performance is executed. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF6, the predetermined period of time, when the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction, is determined by the second determination information acquisition means to obtain the second information of at least the predetermined number of information or more. A game machine BF7 characterized by a period of a length in which the discrimination information is acquired.

According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF6, when the second privilege game is played and game balls are continuously shot in the second direction for a predetermined period, the discrimination information storage means Since the second determination information of the predetermined number of information, which is the upper limit, is stored, there is an effect that the second determination can be executed the number of times corresponding to the upper limit number after the second privilege game is finished.

In the gaming machine BF7, the game ball is arranged at a position where the game ball shot in the second direction can easily enter, and can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter. second variable ball entry means; variable control means for changing the state of the second variable ball entry means to the first state in the predetermined period; and a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the hitting of the ball, and the second ball-entering means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can reach, and receiving the game ball that has reached the game ball. A game machine BF8, characterized in that it comprises a sorting means for sorting either the first flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means or the second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine BF8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF7, the following effects are exhibited. Second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can easily enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot easily enter. are placed. The state of the second variable ball entering means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period by the variable control means. A predetermined privilege is imparted by the privilege imparting means based on the entry of the game ball into the second variable ball entering means. A first flow path provided with a second ball entry means and a second flow path provided with a second variable ball entry means to place a game ball at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can reach. and distribution means for distributing to either.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the flow direction of the game ball shot in the second direction from becoming biased.

In the game machine BF8, the game machine BF9 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine BF9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF8, the game ball launched in the second direction during the predetermined period in the second privilege game is transferred to the second ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. You can enter the ball alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the game ball shot in the second direction from being unevenly entered into the second ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means.

<Characteristic BG group> (Notify the jackpot type based on the V winning)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means, and a game ball. a ball-entering means capable of entering a ball, a first position allowing a game ball to enter the ball-entering means, and a second position more difficult to enter than the first position. means, variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during execution of the privilege game, and when the privilege game is completed. As a later game state, a first game state advantageous to the player is set when a game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the privilege game, and the ball enters during the execution of the privilege game. A game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball does not enter the means, and a privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. A type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the type determining means. When at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined, a suggestive effect suggesting the type of the determined privilege game is generated when the game ball enters the ball entering means. and a suggestion performance executing means that can be executed based on the game machine BG1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886). In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that do not notify the game state after winning at the time of winning, but execute an effect that suggests the game state after winning during the winning state. Are known. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the rest of the winning game becomes monotonous after the effect suggesting the game state after the end of winning is executed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and when the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, the privilege game execution means A privilege game advantageous to is executed. The variable means is varied between a first position at which a game ball can be entered into a ball entry means, and a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by the variable control means for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the predetermined condition during execution of the privilege game. As a game state after the end of the privilege game, a first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game, the game state setting means sets a second game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. Determined by the type determining means. When at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, the performance suggesting the determined type of the privilege game is suggested, and the game ball enters the entering means by the performance executing means. executed on the basis of

As a result, even after the game ball enters the ball-entering means and the setting of the advantageous first game state is determined, attention is paid to the type of privilege game suggested by the suggestive performance executed by the suggestive performance executing means. You can play games by Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous after the game ball is entered into the ball entering means.

In the gaming machine BG1, the determining means comprises first determining means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determining condition as the determining condition, and second determining means different from the first determining condition. and a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a condition, wherein the type determination means obtains the specific determination result in the first determination by the first determination means. As the type of the privilege game to be executed based on, one type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the second by the second determination means As the type of the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result in the determination of the above, the first privilege game, and the second privilege game during execution of the privilege game said entering means One type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a third privilege game in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game is the privilege game rather than the second privilege game. A game machine BG2 characterized in that the second determination is likely to be executed in a predetermined period after the end of the game machine BG2.

According to the game machine BG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BG1, the first determination is performed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition in the determination means. A second discrimination is performed by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. A plurality of bonus games including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game are selected by the type determining means as the classification of the bonus game to be executed based on the specific identification result obtained in the first identification by the first identification means. One type is determined from among the types. On the other hand, as the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the second determination by the second determination means, during the execution of the privilege game rather than the first privilege game and the second privilege game One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the third privilege game that is difficult to enter into the ball-entering means. In the first privilege game, the second discrimination is more likely to be executed in a predetermined period after the completion of the privilege game than in the second privilege game.

As a result, when the first privilege game ends, the disadvantageous second discrimination is more likely to be executed in a predetermined period, so it is strongly expected that the second privilege game will be decided when a specific discrimination result is obtained. can be made Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of privilege game.

In the game machine BG1 or BG2, a specific effect execution for executing a specific effect during a period from when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is started until at least the game ball enters the ball entering means. means, wherein the suggesting effect executing means executes an effect suggesting the type of the privilege game as a result of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, the following effects are exhibited. During a period from when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is started until at least the game ball enters the ball entering means, the specified performance executing means executes the specified performance. As a result of the specific effect, the suggesting effect executing means executes an effect suggesting the type of privilege game.

As a result, it is possible to show a series of effects with the specific effect and the effect suggesting the type of the privilege game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display means for displaying a dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means in the display means, and the dynamic display means Identification information capable of determining one identification information from a plurality of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information, as the identification information dynamically displayed by and a determination means, wherein the identification information determination means is the specific determination result in determination by the determination means, and the first identification information when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means is determined, and the first identification information or the second identification information is determined when the second privilege game is determined.

According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed by the dynamic display means. As the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one identification information is identification information among a plurality of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information. Determined by a determining means. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determination means when the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result and the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined by the identification information determining means.

As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information can be confirmed in anticipation that the second identification information that is determined only by the advantageous second privilege game will be displayed. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the first identification information can be displayed even in the case of the second privilege game, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the second privilege game when the first identification information is displayed. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine BG4, the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, The types of the suggestive effect include a first suggestive effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and a first suggestive effect in which the first identification information is displayed as the first identification information. The game machine BG5 is characterized by being provided with at least a second suggestive effect variable in the identification information.

According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, the suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect. The types of suggestion effects include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information is changed to the second identification information. At least a second suggestion effect is provided.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation that the second suggestion effect will be executed when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information.

The gaming machine BG5 comprises suggestive effect execution determination means for determining whether or not the suggestive effect is to be executed when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, The identification information determining means determines the first identification information based on the fact that the suggestive effect execution determining means determines that the suggestive effect is to be executed, and the suggestive effect executing means is the type determining means. The first privilege game is determined by, the first suggestion performance is executed when it is determined that the suggestion performance is executed by the suggestion performance execution determination means, and the second privilege game is determined by the type determination device. A game machine BG6, characterized in that said second suggestive effect is executed when said suggestive effect execution determination means determines that said suggestive effect is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the type determining means determines the first privilege game or the second privilege game, the suggestive effect execution determination means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the determination by the suggestive effect execution determination means that the suggestive effect is to be executed. When the first identification information is determined by the type determining means and the suggestive effect execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect, the first suggestive effect is executed by the suggestive effect executing means. On the other hand, when the type determining means determines the second privilege game and the suggestive effect execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect executing means executes the second suggestive effect.

As a result, the second suggestive effect is executed only when the second privilege game is determined, so there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the execution of the second suggestive effect.

In the gaming machine BG6, the suggestive effect execution determining means executes the suggestive effect more when the second privilege game is determined than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine BG7 characterized in that the rate of discrimination is high.

According to the gaming machine BG7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG6, the suggestive effect executing means is more effective when the second privilege game is determined than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. Since the ratio of determination increases when the suggestive effect is executed, there is an effect that the sense of expectation for the second privilege game can be improved when the suggestive effect is started.

In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means in the display means, and dynamic display thereof Over a period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result executed by the execution means and a period from when the privilege game is started until at least the variable means is varied to the first position. and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect as a result of the specific effect, wherein the suggestive effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting the type of the privilege game as a result of the specific effect. Gaming machine BG8.

According to the gaming machine BG8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the period from the start of the privilege game until at least the variable means is biased to the first position. A specific effect is executed by a specific effect executing means over a period of time. As a result of the specific effect, a suggestive effect suggesting the type of privilege game is executed by the suggestive effect executing means.

As a result, it is possible to show a series of effects with the specific effect and the effect suggesting the type of the privilege game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature BH group> (Depending on the type of jackpot, the ease of predicting the presence or absence of holding consecutive occurrences is changed)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; Bonus game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means; As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game executing means, one category is determined from a plurality of categories including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. means, a variable means capable of being varied in a predetermined variable mode, and a first variable mode and a first variable mode based on the determination by the determination means that a result of determination is different from the specific determination result. A first variable control means for varying the variable means in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a second variable mode different from the mode, and determination by the determination means result in the specific determination result. second variable control means for varying the variable means in a third variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that makes it difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode, and the first privilege game is completed. until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first variable control means sets the first variable state in which the variable means is easily variable in the first variable mode, and the second privilege game is performed. variable state setting means for setting a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be varied in the second variable mode than the first variable state during a period from the end of the process until the specific condition is satisfied; A gaming machine BH1 characterized by comprising:

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a win is achieved, the win is reported, and the type of win is also reported. In some cases, the game becomes monotonous because the work is just to digest the hits. In addition, in conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to distinguish whether a winning state or a small winning state, which is a type of loss, is made based on the performance mode or the opening and closing operation of a specific winning port. A configured game machine is also known, and there is also known a game machine that allows the user to expect that the winning game has been completed even after the winning game is over. However, in such a gaming machine, it takes too much time to grasp whether a win or a small win has occurred, and there is a risk that the player's interest in the game may be lost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BH1, determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game executing means, one category is selected by the category determination device from a plurality of categories including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. It is determined. A plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode, based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means resulted in an outlier discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. In one of the variable modes, the variable means is varied by the first variable control means. In a third variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode, the variable means is controlled by the second variable control means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. variable. During the period from the end of the first privilege game to the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the variable state setting means sets a first variable state in which the variable means is likely to be varied in the first variable mode by the first variable control means. set. On the other hand, the variable state setting means sets a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be varied in the second variable mode than the first variable state during the period from the end of the second privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition. be done.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish the appearance of the variable mode of the variable means between the case of the failure determination result after the end of the first privilege game and the case of the specific determination result, so that at least the specific condition is satisfied. Until then, it can be difficult to identify whether or not the privilege game is executed from the variable mode of the variable means. On the other hand, when the result of determination is lost after the end of the second privilege game, the second variable mode is set. becomes easier. Therefore, it is possible to change the easiness of distinguishing the result of determination until the specific condition is established according to the type of privilege game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BH1, a game ball can enter a ball-entering means, and the variable means has a first position where a game ball can enter the ball-entering means, is variable from the second position to the second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and in the first variable mode, the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period and the second variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the elapse of a second period different from the first period. A gaming machine BH2 characterized by:

According to the game machine BH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BH1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period, and the second variable mode is a second variable mode different from the first period. The variable means is configured in a variable mode in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the lapse of the period.

As a result, the player can easily distinguish between the first variable mode and the second variable mode by confirming the interval until the variable means is varied to the first position. There is

In the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, the determination means comprises a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and a second determination means for executing a second determination based on establishment, and the first variable control means, based on the result of the determination by the first determination means as the result of the determination of the deviation, the first variable control means The variable means is varied in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least the first variable mode and the second variable mode, and the second variable control means comprises the first determination means. A gaming machine BH3, characterized in that the variable means is varied in the third variable mode based on the specific determination result obtained in the determination by BH3.

According to the game machine BH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BH1 or BH2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. A second discrimination is performed by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. The first variable control is performed in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode, based on the result of determination by the first determination means as a result of determination. The variable means is varied by the means. The variable means is varied in the third variable mode by the second variable control means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination means.

As a result, the variable mode of the variable means is changed in accordance with the type of privilege game when the result of determination by the first determination means is a failure determination result. There is an effect that the player can play the game while paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means each time the determination by is executed.

In the gaming machine BH3, the type determination means determines the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result obtained in the second determination by the second determination means. A game machine BH4 characterized by.

According to the game machine BH4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BH3, the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result obtained in the second determination by the second determination means is determined by the type determination means. Since it is determined, when the second determination by the second determination means is executed, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether the first privilege game is determined or the second privilege game is determined. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine BH3 or BH4, the first determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second determination condition during the period from the completion of the privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied. A game machine BH5.

According to the gaming machine BH5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BH3 or BH4, the first determination condition is satisfied more than the second determination condition during the period from the end of the privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied. Since it becomes easier, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying more attention to the variable mode of the variable means until the specific condition is established.

In any one of gaming machines BH3 to BH5, a first ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball can enter; and the state of the privilege ball entry means is changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the start of the privilege game. a variable control means for changing a predetermined number of times to a possible second state, wherein the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means; The gaming machine BH6 is characterized in that the second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine BH6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BH3 to BH5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball-entering means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a second ball-entering means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. 2 ball entry means are provided. At a position where the game ball shot in the first direction is likely to enter, there is provided a privilege ball entry means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball. The state of the bonus ball entry means is changed by the variable control means a predetermined number of times from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball can be entered based on the start of the bonus game. The first discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. is established.

Thus, by shooting a game ball aiming at the privilege ball entering means during execution of the privilege game, the game ball can enter the first ball entering means as well. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination condition can be easily established when the privilege game is executed.

In the gaming machine BH6, first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means; 1 discrimination information storage means capable of storing the first discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the specific condition is the discrimination information at the end of the privilege game A game machine BH7 characterized in that the game machine BH7 is established based on execution of determination based on all the first determination information stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine BH7, in addition to the effects of the game machine BH6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means is acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. The first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means is stored by the determination information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. A specific condition is established based on execution of determination based on all the first determination information stored in the determination information storage means at the end of the privilege game.

As a result, the first determination information acquired during execution of the privilege game is stored in the determination information storage means, so that the first determination can be efficiently executed.

In the gaming machine BH7, as the game state after the privilege game ends, a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. game state determination means for determining one game state, wherein the type determination means determines the game state as a type of privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the first determination; a first type determination means in which a rate of determining a third privilege game for which the first game state is determined by the determination means is higher than a rate of determining the type of other privilege games; A second type that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game as the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the determination result of and a determination means, wherein the game state determination means sets the second game state as a game state after the end of the privilege game when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is played. A gaming machine BH8 characterized in that it determines.

According to the gaming machine BH8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BH7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the game state after the privilege game is finished, one game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. is determined by the game state determining means. As the type of privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the first determination, the third privilege game in which the first game state is determined by the game state determination means is determined by the first type determination means. The percentage of winning is higher than the percentage of determining the type of other privilege games. As the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the second determination, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game. It is determined by the two-type determining means. When the first privilege game or the second privilege game is played, the second game state is determined by the game state determining means as the game state after the privilege game ends.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first determination, the first determination stored in the determination information storage means during execution of the privilege game is highly likely to be determined after the privilege game is completed. Based on the information, it is possible to play the game hoping that all the first determinations executed after the end of the privilege game will result in a false determination result. Therefore, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that make the player want to avoid a specific determination result, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature BI group> (Different susceptibility to occurrence of holding series depending on the type of jackpot)
a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition; a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition; A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means, and the privilege game execution means As the type of the privilege game to be executed, the first privilege game and the determination by the second determination means between the completion of the privilege game and the establishment of the specific condition rather than the first privilege game a second privilege game that tends to result in a specific determination result; and game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the first game state, the first bonus game and the second bonus game. The game machine BI1 is characterized in that, as a game state after the privilege game is finished, the set ratio of the first game state is higher than that of the second game state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines have advantages such as changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have different degrees. However, it has been desired to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the winning type.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BI1, determination is executed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and a second determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. 2 The determination is performed by the determination means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game and the discrimination by the second discrimination means between the end of the privilege game and the establishment of the specific condition rather than the first privilege game The type determination means determines the type of one privilege game out of a plurality of types including at least the second privilege game that tends to result in a specific determination result. A game state setting means sets one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state as a game state after the privilege game is finished. . In both the first privilege game and the second privilege game, the set ratio of the second game state is higher than that of the second game state as the game state after the privilege game is finished.

Thus, depending on whether the first privilege game is played or the second privilege game is played, the possibility that the determination by the second determination means will result in a specific determination result before the specific condition is satisfied differs. There is an effect that a game can be played while paying more attention to the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means.

In the game BI1, the type determining means includes at least the first privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the other privilege game types. The type of the privilege game from 1 is determined, and the third privilege game is determined by the second determination means rather than the first determination means. When the specific determination result is obtained A gaming machine BI2 characterized in that the rate determined by the type determining means is high.

According to the gaming machine BI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BI1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the type determination means selects one privilege game type from among a plurality of at least a first privilege game, a second privilege game, and a third privilege game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the other privilege game types. determined by When the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result, the third privilege game is determined by the type determination means at a higher rate than the determination by the first determination means.

Thus, when the discrimination by the second discriminating means results in a specific discrimination result, the rate of determining the disadvantageous third privilege game increases, so that it is hoped that the discrimination by the second discriminating means will not result in a specific discrimination result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that it will be the first privilege game rather than the second privilege game that tends to result in a specific discrimination result in the discrimination by the second discriminating means.

In the gaming machine BI1 or BI2, the first game state is such that the probability of the specific determination result when the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means is executed is the second game state. During the period from the end of the second privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition, the second judgment condition is more likely to be established than the first judgment condition. A gaming machine BI3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BI1 or BI2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first game state is configured such that the probability of obtaining a specific determination result when the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means is executed is higher than that in the second game state. . During the period from the end of the second privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition, the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first determination condition.

Thus, in the first game state, the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is higher than in the second game state, so that the privilege game is likely to be played continuously at relatively short intervals. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved when the first game state is entered.

In any one of the game machines BI1 to BI3, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. A discrimination information storage means capable of storing discrimination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, and one discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means. and erasing means for erasing the one discrimination information from the discrimination information storage means, wherein the specific condition is that the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes zero. A game machine BI4 characterized by being established based on.

According to the gaming machine BI4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. The determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is stored in the determination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as the upper limit. Based on the fact that the piece of identification information stored in the identification information storage means is used for identification by the second identification unit, the piece of identification information is erased from the identification information storage unit by the erasing means. A specific condition is established when the number of pieces of identification information stored in the identification information storage means becomes zero.

Thus, until the information number of discrimination information becomes 0, discrimination by the second discrimination means tends to result in a specific discrimination result, so that the game is played while paying attention to the number of information stored in the discrimination information storage means. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI4, a first ball-entering means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. a second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball can enter, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The second determination condition is established based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second privilege game is when the privilege game is started. The game machine BI5 is characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction for at least a predetermined period afterward.

According to the gaming machine BI5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. The first determination condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, while the second determination condition is that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. Established on the basis of In the second privilege game, it is easier for the player to shoot the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction for at least a predetermined period after the privilege game is started.

As a result, when the second privilege game is entered, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entering means by shooting the game ball in the second direction for a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied after the privilege game is finished.

In the gaming machine BI5, a first apparatus is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can be entered, and can be changed between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball is difficult to enter. A variable ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can be entered, and is variable between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball is difficult to enter. 2 variable ball entry means; and privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means; 2. The game machine BI6 is characterized in that the variable ball entry means changes the state in which a game ball can be entered for at least the predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game.

According to the gaming machine BI6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BI5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter. It is A second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can enter. there is A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. The second variable ball entry means is changed to a state in which a game ball can be entered during at least a predetermined period of time during execution of the second scoring game.

As a result, during the predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game, the game ball can be shot in the second direction to the player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be entered into the second ball entering means during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine BI6, the first variable ball entry means changes the state in which the game ball can be entered at least during the predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game. Game machine BI7.

According to the game machine BI7, in addition to the effects of the game machine BI6, during execution of the first scoring game, the first variable ball entry means changes the state in which the game ball can be entered for at least a predetermined period of time. Therefore, during the predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game, the game ball can be shot in the first direction to the player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second ball entering means during the predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game.

a discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discriminating means based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entering means in any of the gaming machines BI5 to BI7; a determination information storage means capable of storing the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction during the predetermined period. In this case, the game machine BI8 is a period of a length in which at least the predetermined number of pieces of information or more of the second discrimination information are acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means.

According to the gaming machine BI8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BI5 to BI7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the discrimination information acquisition means acquires the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means. The determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is stored by the determination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as the upper limit. The predetermined period is constituted by a length in which at least a predetermined number of pieces of second identification information or more are acquired by the identification information storage means when the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction.

As a result, when the second privilege game is played, there is an effect that the determination information can be reliably stored in the determination information storage means up to the upper limit of the number of pieces of information.

In the gaming machine BI8, the game ball launched in the second direction is passed through the first channel provided with the second ball entering means and the second channel provided with the second variable ball entering means. A game machine BI9 characterized by comprising a sorting means capable of sorting either to or from.

According to the game machine BI9, in addition to the effects of the game machine BI8, the game ball launched in the second direction passes through the first flow path provided with the second ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. Since it is distributed by the distribution means to either the provided second flow path, the game ball fired in the second direction is biased toward the second ball entry means, or conversely, the second ball There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball from being unevenly entered into the variable ball entering means.

<Characteristic BJ group> (As the state of playing a game in Special 1, a state in which it is easy to give time reduction and a state in which it is difficult to give time reduction are provided)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed, a first variable pattern based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than the first variable pattern. A variable control means for varying the game ball with one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a variable pattern, a determination means for performing determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the determination means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based at least on a specific determination result in determination, and a game state after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. , a first game state, a second game state different from the first game state, and a third game state different from both the first game state and the second game state. and game state setting means for setting a game state, wherein the first game state and the second game state are set by the variable control means in the first variable pattern rather than the third game state. A gaming machine BJ1 characterized in that the rate at which is varied is low.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are those that are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous game state is not set at the end of the winning state, the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered, and it is easy for the player to quit the game. There was a problem.

In particular, in a game machine of a type that does not have a so-called probability variation function and only two types of game states, a time-saving game state and a normal game state, are provided, the normal game state is set after the time-saving game state. In that case, the player may be satisfied with the game because he/she was able to play the game in the time-saving game state, and it may become difficult to persuade the player to continue the game in the normal game state after that.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BJ1, there is a first position at which a game ball can be entered into a ball entry means into which a game ball can be entered, and a game ball is more difficult to enter than at the first position. A variable means is configured to be variable between the second position and the second position. The variable means generates a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball-entering means than the first variable pattern by the variable control means based on the establishment of a specific variable condition. It is varied in one variable pattern out of a plurality of at least. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means at least based on a specific determination result in determination by the determination means executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. be done. As a game state after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed, a first game state, a second game state different from the first game state, and both the first game state and the second game state One of a plurality of game states including at least a different third game state is set by the game state setting means. The first game state and the second game state are configured such that the rate at which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than that in the third game state.

This makes it difficult to distinguish between the first game state and the second game state from the variable ratio of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BJ1, the first game state and the second game state are characterized in that the probability that the specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the determination means is a common specific probability. Machine BJ2.

According to the game machine BJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BJ1, the first game state and the second game state are set so that the probability of obtaining a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means is a common specific probability. Since it is configured, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to distinguish between the first game state and the second game state.

In the game machine BJ1 or BJ2, a second ball entering means different from the ball entering means, a second determination means for performing a determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the determination by the second determination means having the specific determination result, wherein the first game state is determined by the second determination means; When the determination results in the specific determination result, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a first ratio, and the second game state is determined by the second determination means. A game machine BJ3 characterized in that, when the specific determination result is obtained in the game state setting means, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate. .

According to the gaming machine BJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ1 or BJ2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the second determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means different from the ball entry means. The privilege game is executed by the second privilege game executing means based on the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means resulting in a specific discrimination result. When a specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the second determination means in the first game state, the game state setting means sets the third game state at the first rate, while the second game state is set in the second game state. When the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a second rate higher than the first rate.

As a result, in the second game state, it is easier to set the third game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, in the second game state than in the first game state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of what will happen.

In the gaming machine BJ3, the third game state is set at a third rate higher than the first rate by the game state setting means when the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine BJ4 characterized by:

According to the game machine BJ4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BJ3, when the privilege game is executed in the third game state, the game state setting means sets the third rate higher than the first rate. Therefore, when the third game state is reached, the privilege game and the third game state are likely to be repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when the third game state is entered.

In the game machine BJ4, a game of shifting the game state to the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition different from at least the specific determination result in the second game state. State transition means is provided, and the third game state is set to either the second game state or the third game state by the game state setting means when the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine BJ5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BJ5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second game state, the game state is shifted to the first game state by the game state shift means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition different from at least a specific determination result. When the privilege game is executed in the third game state, either the second game state or the third game state is set by the game state setting means.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in the third game state, the first game state is not set. Until the transition from the second game state to the first game state, the player can be made to think about continuing the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the game machine BJ5, the game state transition means, as the specific condition, based on the fact that the judgment by the judgment means has continuously produced a deviation judgment result different from the specific judgment result for a predetermined number of times, A game machine BJ6 characterized in that it shifts from the second game state to the first game state.

According to the gaming machine BJ6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ5, as a specific condition, based on the fact that the determination by the determination means continuously gives a different determination result different from the specific determination result for a predetermined number of times. Since the second game state is shifted to the first game state by the game state shifting means, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of consecutive times of the result of determination of failure. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BJ6, as the type of the second game state set by the game state setting means, the game state transition is made based on the result of the determination of the first number of times by the determination means. Based on the fact that the result of determination is out of the first type of transition to the first game state by the means and the determination of the second number of times that is larger than the first number of times, the game state transition means performs the first game state. A game machine BJ7 characterized by comprising a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a second type to be shifted to one game state.

According to the game machine BJ7, in addition to the effects of the game machine BJ6, as the type of the second game state set by the game state setting means, the discriminating result of the first number of discriminations by the discriminating means is a result of discriminating. Based on the first type that is shifted to the first game state by the game state transition means based on the above, and the second number of times that is larger than the first number of times, the game state transition means based on the result of discriminating out. Since one type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the second type to be shifted to the first game state, the second game state can be continued over a larger number of determinations. can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In a game machine BJ7, display means capable of displaying an effect mode, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the display means can display the first effect mode. When the second game state is set by the first display control means and the game state setting means, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode can be displayed on the display means. The first effect mode is displayed during the period from when the second game state is set by the second display control means and the game state setting means to when the result of the determination is obtained over the second number of times. A game machine BJ8 characterized by comprising a limiting means for limiting the.

According to the gaming machine BJ8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first presentation mode is displayed on the display means by the first display control means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is displayed on the display means by the second display control means. The restriction means restricts the display of the first performance mode from when the second game state is set by the game state setting means until the result of the determination of failure is obtained over the second number of times.

As a result, even if the result of determination is out of reach for the first number of times after the second game state is set, the first effect mode is not displayed until the second number of times. It becomes difficult to identify whether it is the second game state of one type or the second game state of the second type. Therefore, regardless of the type of the second game state, it is possible to make the player think that the game should be continued at least until the determination is made the second number of times, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. be.

In the game machine BJ8, a third game machine for displaying the first effect mode based on the second game state being set to the second game state by the game state setting means and the second game state being determined to be out of the second game state. A gaming machine BJ9 characterized by comprising display control means.

According to the game machine BJ9, in addition to the effects of the game machine BJ8, the third display is performed based on the fact that the second game state is set by the game state setting means and the second game state is set, and the second game state is determined to be out of the second number of times. Since the first effect mode is displayed by the control means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the period during which it is unclear whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state from becoming too long.

A gaming machine BJ10 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines BJ4 to BJ9, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the game machine BJ10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BJ4 to BJ9, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio. There is an effect that it can be made to expect more strongly to become.

<Characteristic BK group> (Configuration that makes it difficult for special 2 to turn during time saving)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, a first game state, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. a game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of at least including; a ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter; A variable means that can be changed between a position and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a variable operation of the variable means is changed to the ball entering means in the first game state. Control by the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter, in the second game state, control by the second control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, and in the third game state, A gaming machine BK1 characterized by comprising: variable control means for controlling by third control that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first control and the second control.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are those that are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous game state is not set at the end of the winning state, the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered, and it is easy for the player to quit the game. There was a problem.

In particular, in a game machine of a type that does not have a so-called probability variation function and only two types of game states, a time-saving game state and a normal game state, are provided, the normal game state is set after the time-saving game state. In that case, the player may be satisfied with the game because he/she was able to play the game in the time-saving game state, and it may become difficult to persuade the player to continue the game in the normal game state after that.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, a first game state, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the second game state are based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition. The game state setting means sets one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state more advantageous to the player than the third game state. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. there is The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means under the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means in the first game state, and the game ball enters the ball entering means in the second game state. is controlled by the variable control means in the second control that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and in the third game state, the variable control means controls the game ball in the third control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means.

As a result, the degree of advantage is differentiated between the first game state in which the ball is hardly entered into the ball-entering means and the second game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine BK1, the gaming machine BK2 is characterized in that the second control makes it easier for the variable means to be arranged at the first position than the first control.

According to the game machine 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BK1, the second control is configured to make it easier for the variable means to be arranged at the first position than in the first control. Although the variable means is more likely to be placed at the first position than the first control, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel operation in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball-entering means as in the first control.

The game machine BK2 includes passing means through which a game ball can pass, and determination means for performing determination based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means, wherein the variable control means determines by the determination means. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the specific determination result obtained in step 1, and the first game state is determined by the determination by the determination means. The specific determination result is obtained with a probability of 1, and the second game state and the third game state are determined by the determination means with a second probability higher than the first probability. A game machine BK3 characterized in that it provides a specific determination result.

According to the game machine BK3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BK2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the determining means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means through which the game ball can pass. The variable control means causes the variable means to be varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. In the first game state, determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result with a first probability. A probability of 2 results in a specific determination result.

As a result, although the second game state and the third game state have the same probability of obtaining a specific determination result, it is possible to realize a novel operation in which the easiness of entering the ball into the ball-entering means is different. has the effect of

In the gaming machine BK3, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls at a shooting interval equal to or greater than a predetermined interval is provided, and the second game state is determined by the determining means after the specific determination result is obtained, and the variable means is changed to the A period until the variable means is changed to the first position is set as the first period, and a period from when the variable means is changed to the first position until it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passing game ball reaches the ball entering means tends to be shorter than the first period, and 1 The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the game ball fired by the shooting means at the predetermined interval next to the passing game ball reaches the variable means is The gaming machine BK4 is characterized in that it tends to be longer than the sum of one period and the second period.

According to the game machine BK4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BK3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, game balls are shot by the shooting means at a shooting interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. In the second game state, the first period is set to the period from when the determining means obtains a specific determination result to when the variable means is varied to the first position, and the variable means is variable to the first position. The second period is set to the period from when it is changed to when it is changed to the second position. A period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means tends to be shorter than the first period. The period from when one game ball passes through the passing means until the game ball fired by the shooting means at a predetermined interval next to the passing game ball reaches the variable means is the first period and the second period. It tends to be longer than the sum of the two periods.

Thereby, even if the game balls are continuously shot to the passing means in the second game state, the game balls are allowed to reach the ball entering means while the variable means is changed to the first position. can make it difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the second game state can be made into a special state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means although the variable means is likely to be changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine BK4, the third game state is defined as a period from when the determining means determines the specific determination result to when the variable means is varied to the first position, which is longer than the first period. is set to a long third period, and the period from when the variable means is varied to the first position to when it is varied to the second position is set to the second period; The period from when the game ball passes through the means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means is longer than the third period, and the third period and the second period A game machine BK5 characterized in that it is likely to be shorter than the sum of .

According to the gaming machine BK5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the third game state, a period from when the determining means obtains a specific determination result to when the variable means is varied to the first position is set to a third period longer than the first period, A period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means is longer than the third period, and is the sum of the third period and the second period. It becomes easier to be shorter than

Thus, in the third game state, when a specific determination result is obtained in the determination executed based on passing through the passing means, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is directly entered into the ball-entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the third game state can be progressed efficiently.

In any one of the game machines BK1 to BK5, a second ball entering means different from the above ball entering means and capable of entering a game ball, and based on the game ball entering the above ball entering means A first determination means for executing a first determination, a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means, and the first determination means a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination or the result of the determination by the second determination means resulting in a predetermined first determination result, wherein the game state The setting means sets the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the first game state at a first rate. 3 game states are set, and the first game state is set as the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the second game state. A game machine BK6 characterized in that the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the rate.

According to the gaming machine BK6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first determination is performed by the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means different from the ball entry means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on a predetermined first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the discrimination by the second discrimination means. The third game state is set at a first rate by the game state setting means as the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the first game state. set. A game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate as a game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the second game state. A third game state is set by means.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained during the second game state.

In the gaming machine BK6, the game state setting means sets the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the third game state. , a game machine BK7 characterized in that the third game state is determined by a third ratio higher than the first ratio.

According to the gaming machine BK7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK6, as a game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the first determination in the third game state Since the third game state is determined by the game state setting means at the third rate higher than the first rate, the third game state is likely to reappear after the privilege game is finished in the third game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when the third game state is entered.

A gaming machine BK8 characterized in that, in the gaming machine BK7, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the game machine BK8, in addition to the effects of the game machine BK7, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, so that the first determination result is obtained in the second game state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of .

<Characteristic BL Group> (A mechanism that allows a game to be played with a game method that facilitates alternate distribution to two routes by the distribution means and a game method that facilitates distribution to one route)
An operating means operable by a player, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball according to the operation content of the operating means, a first passage through which the game ball shot by the shooting means can pass, While the second flow path different from the first flow path and the first condition that can be established by performing the operation of the first operation content on the operating means are satisfied, the game ball that has reached the first condition is held. A second condition is established that can be established by performing an operation of a second operation content different from the operation of the first operation content. A game machine BL1, characterized by comprising a distribution means that makes it easier to distribute the arriving game balls to the first flow path while the first condition is established.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a distribution member for distributing game balls to one of two types of flow paths provided on the board surface. In such a conventional game machine, game balls that reach the distribution member are distributed one by one to two types of flow paths, thereby making it possible to cause game balls to flow down the two types of flow paths in a well-balanced manner. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231902).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the game balls that reach the distribution member are alternately distributed to two types of flow paths regardless of the game method of the player, so there is room for the skill of the player to intervene. There is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BL1, a game ball is shot by the shooting means according to the operation contents of the operation means that the player can operate. A first flow path through which a game ball shot by the shooting means can pass, and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided. While the first condition that can be established by performing the operation of the first operation content on the operating means is satisfied, the state of the sorting means divides the arrived game balls into the first flow path and the second flow path. It becomes a state in which it is easy to distribute alternately to the flow path. While a second condition that can be satisfied by performing an operation with a second operation content different from the first operation content is satisfied, the state of the sorting means is higher than that while the first condition is satisfied. A game ball that has reached the first flow path is easily distributed to the first flow path.

As a result, the manner in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution means can be varied according to the operation content of the player, so there is an effect that the operation of the operation means can be devised.

In the game machine BL1, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, game balls are shot by the shooting means at a first shooting interval, and the operation of the second operation content is performed. By doing so, the game ball is shot by the shooting means at a second shooting interval longer than the first shooting interval.

According to the gaming machine BL2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, the game ball is shot at the first shooting interval by the shooting means. When the operation of the second operation content is executed, the game ball is shot by the shooting means at a second shooting interval longer than the first shooting interval. As a result, it is possible to easily change how the game balls are distributed by the distribution means by simply changing the shooting interval, so that there is an effect that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine BL2, the sorting means has at least a first movable range in which the reached game ball is easily sorted to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the game ball is easily sorted to the second flow path. It is configured to be able to move a specific movable range including, the distribution means, by distributing the game ball to the first flow path in a state arranged in the first movable range, the second It is configured to be easily movable within the movable range, and to be easily movable within the first movable range by distributing the game balls to the second flow path while being arranged in the second movable range. A gaming machine BL3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BL3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the distributing means can move a specific movable range including at least a first movable range in which the arriving game ball is easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path. do. By distributing the game balls to the first flow path in the state of being arranged in the first movable range, the distributing means can be easily moved to the second movable range. Further, by distributing the game balls to the second flow path while being arranged in the second movable range, the distributing means can be easily moved to the first movable range.

As a result, it is possible to realize an operation of alternately distributing the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path by continuously reaching the distributing means.

In the game machine BL3, when the game ball is distributed to the first flow path and moved to the second movable range, the distribution means is shorter than the length of the second shooting interval and game machine BL4, characterized in that it can move up to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the firing interval.

According to the game machine BL4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BL3, when the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and the distribution means moves to the second movable range, the length of the second firing interval is shorter. In addition, since the sorting means moves up to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the first shooting interval, when the game balls are continuously shot at the shooting interval longer than the second shooting interval, the sorting means can be distributed. There is an effect that the movable range of the means can be reliably set to the first movable range.

In the game machine BL4, the distributing means is easily movable from the first movable range to the second movable range by the mass of the game balls distributed to the first flow path, and the distribution means distributes the ball to the second flow path. The gaming machine BL5 is characterized in that it is easily movable from the second movable range to the first movable range by the mass of the game ball.

According to the game machine BL5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BL4, the mass of the game balls distributed to the first flow path makes it easier for the distribution means to move from the first movable range to the second movable range, The mass of the game balls distributed to the two flow paths facilitates the movement of the distributing means from the second movable range to the first movable range, thereby eliminating the need for a power source for moving the distributing means. has the effect of

In the game machine BL4 or BL5, the distribution means is configured so that a predetermined position in the first movable range is the initial arrangement, and when the game ball does not reach the predetermined period, it returns to the predetermined position. A gaming machine BL6 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the game machine BL6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BL4 or BL5, the distribution means is configured so that a predetermined position in the first movable range is the initial arrangement, and game balls are distributed to the distribution means. On the other hand, since the distribution means is configured to return to the predetermined position when the game ball is not reached for the predetermined period, the distribution means is maintained within the first movable range unless the game ball is distributed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball that reaches the sorting means first can be surely sorted to the first flow path.

In any one of the game machines BL1 to BL6, passing means provided at a position through which the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass, the game balls flowing down the first flow path, and the second A ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the flow path can enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a position before the first position a second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the entering ball means; variable control means for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a specific determination result obtained in the determination by the game machine BL7.

According to the gaming machine BL7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BL1 to BL6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the passing means is provided at a position through which the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down through the first flow path and a game ball that has flowed down through the second flow path can enter. A variable means is configured to be variable between a first position at which a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter into the ball entering means than at the first position. It is Determination by the determining means is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means. The variable control means causes the variable means to be varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the result of discrimination by the discriminating means, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BL7, a first game state, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and more advantageous to the player than the second game state based on establishment of a predetermined set condition. a game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state; The variable means is controlled to be variable in a first variable mode in which it is difficult for the ball to enter, and in the second game state, the second variable mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means is performed. The variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the third game state, the game ball is easier to enter the ball entering means than the first variable mode and the second variable mode. A gaming machine BL8 characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be variable.

According to the gaming machine BL8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, a first game state, a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state. One game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a game state is set by the game state setting means. In the first game state, the variable control means controls so that the variable means is variable in the first variable mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means. In the second game state, the variable control means controls the variable means to vary in the second variable mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means. In the third game state, the variable control means controls the variable means to vary in the third variable mode in which the game ball enters the ball-entering means more easily than in the first variable mode and the second variable mode.

As a result, since a plurality of game states with different easiness of entering the ball into the ball entering means are provided, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine BL8, the first game state is the specific determination result with a first probability by the determination means, and the second game state is determined by the determination means with a higher probability than the first probability. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific determination result is obtained with a high second probability, and the three game states are those that result in the specific determination result with the second probability by the determination means. BL9.

According to the gaming machine BL9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first game state, the discrimination means produces a specific discrimination result with a first probability. In the second game state, the determination means provides a specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability. In the third game state, the determination means provides a specific determination result with a second probability.

As a result, although the second game state and the third game state have the same probability of obtaining a specific determination result, a novel operation is realized in which the easiness of entering the ball into the ball entering means is made different. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic BM group> (It is advantageous to get out of time saving)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player at least based on a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means, and One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state as a game state after execution of the bonus game by the bonus game executing means is completed. game state setting means for setting the game state, and in a state in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a specific transition condition different from at least the end of execution of the privilege game is established. and game state transition means for shifting from the first game state to the second game state based on.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are those that are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the normal game state is set at the end of the winning state, the disadvantageous state continues at least until the next winning state. However, there is a problem that it is impossible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, in addition to the normal game state and the advantageous game state, there is provided a third game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state and more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state. After the winning state ends, either the advantageous game state or the third game state is set, so that the game can be continued at least until the third game state ends. There are also things that can make people think. However, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined number of lotteries are completed in the third game state, it is normal to shift from the third game state to the normal game state. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player after the game has ended.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BM1, a privilege advantageous to the player is given by the privilege game execution means at least based on the fact that the determination by the determination means executed based on the establishment of the determination condition resulted in a specific determination result. A game is executed. One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state as a game state after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. A game state is set by the game state setting means. In a state in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first game state is changed to the second game state based on establishment of a specific transition condition that is at least different from the end of execution of the privilege game. The transition is made by the game state transition means.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation that the specific transition condition will be satisfied in the first game state, so there is an effect that the game in the first game state can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine BM1, the specific transition condition is a predetermined specific number of determination results different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means executed after the first game state is set. The game machine BM2 is characterized in that it is established when .

According to the game machine BM2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BM1, in the determination by the determination means executed after being set to the first game state, a predetermined specific number of times, the deviation determination different from the specific determination result Since a specific transition condition is established when a result is obtained, a novel game property can be realized in which, in the first game state, a failure determination result can be expected every time determination is performed by the determination means. has the effect of

In a game machine BM1 or BM2, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a position from the first position to the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter, and a first variable control that makes it easier for the variable means to be changed to the first position in the first game state, and the first variable control is performed. 2 variable control execution means for executing a second variable control in which the variable means is less likely to be varied to the first position than in the first game state in a game state, wherein the determination condition is the ball entering means; A game machine BM3 characterized in that it is established based on the entry of a game ball.

According to the game machine BM3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BM1 or BM2, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is variable between the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the second position where the game ball enters the ball entering means more difficult than the first position. In the first game state, the variable control executing means executes the first variable control that makes it easier to change the variable means to the first position, and in the second game state, the variable means is more variable to the first position than in the first game state. The second variable control, which is difficult to perform, is executed by the variable control execution means. A determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entering means.

As a result, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that the variable means will be varied to the first position.

In the gaming machine BM3, the game state setting means selects one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state, the second game state, and a third game state more advantageous than the second game state. 1 game state is set, and the variable control execution means makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable control and the second variable control in the third game state. A game machine BM4 characterized by executing a third variable control.

According to the gaming machine BM4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state more advantageous than the second game state is set by the game state setting means. . In the third game state, the variable control executing means executes the third variable control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable control and the second variable control.

As a result, in the third game state, determination by the determination means is facilitated, so that the game can be played efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the third game state.

In the gaming machine BM4, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a first rate as the game state after the privilege game ends when the specific determination result is obtained in the first game state. is set, and when the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate Game machine BM5.

According to the gaming machine BM5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM4, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the gaming state after the privilege game ends is set to the first ratio by the gaming state setting means. While the third game state is set in the second game state, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second game state, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate, so the second The third game state is more likely to be set as the game state after the end of the privilege game when a specific determination result is obtained in the game state. Therefore, in the first game state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in anticipation of the establishment of a specific transition condition rather than a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine BM5, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a third rate higher than the first rate as a game state after the privilege game executed in the third game state is finished. A game machine BM6 characterized in that it is set.

According to the gaming machine BM6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM5, the game state setting means sets the third rate higher than the first rate as the game state after the end of the privilege game executed in the third game state. Since the third game state is set, in the third game state, it becomes easy to enter the third game state again after the privilege game ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction by entering the third game state.

In any one of the gaming machines BM1 to BM6, there is a ball entry area into which a game ball can enter, and a second bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game based on the game ball entering the ball entry area. and a gaming machine BM7 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine BM7, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines BM1 to BM6, the second privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the game ball entering the ball entry area. , the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature BN group> (If you win during a short time, the small hit is likely to be disadvantageous after the small hit ends)
Determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and first advantageous game execution for executing a first advantageous game advantageous to the player based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. means, and as the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. and a type determination means for determining the type of the game, and a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game based on the second determination result different from the first determination result in the determination by the determination means. A second advantageous game executing means for executing a second advantageous game, and a first game state as a game state after execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game executing means, and the first game state. is a different second game state, and a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of at least including; game state termination means for terminating the first game state if a predetermined specific condition is established when a determination result of Compared to the case where the first determination result is obtained and the first type is determined by the type determination unit, the determination by the determination unit results in the first determination result, and the type determination unit determines the first determination result. The gaming machine BN1 is characterized in that it is structured such that it is easier to establish when two types are determined.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance into which a ball can be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entrance. A game ball that enters the interior of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed based on the There has been proposed a pachinko machine capable of providing a privilege game (such as a jackpot game) that is advantageous to a player by passing through the machine (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if a small winning game is executed, the bonus game is not executed unless the game ball can enter the V winning device. There is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be lost if the ball cannot be entered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BN1, the first advantageous game advantageous to the player is selected based on the first determination result in the determination by the determination means executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. Executed by advantageous game executing means. As the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type is selected by the type determining means. A type is determined. A second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game executing means based on the fact that the judgment by the judging means results in a second judgment result different from the first judgment result. be. As a game state after execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed, a game is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. One game state is set by the state setting means. When a determination result other than the second determination result is obtained in determination by the determination means executed in the first game state, if a predetermined specific condition is established, the first game state is terminated by the game state ending means. is terminated by Compared to the case where the discrimination by the discrimination means yields the first discrimination result and the discrimination by the discrimination means determines the first classification, the discrimination by the discrimination means yields the first discrimination result, and the discrimination by the discrimination means determines the second classification. is determined, the specific condition is more likely to be established.

As a result, when the first determination result is obtained, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the determination of the first type.

In the gaming machine BN1, the second game state is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state ending means, if the specific condition is satisfied, A game machine BN2 characterized in that it shifts from the game state to the second game state.

According to the game machine BN2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BN1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first game state. If the specific condition is established, the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state by the game state ending means.

As a result, the game can be played in the first game state in anticipation of the establishment of the specific condition, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BN1 or BN2 has a ball entry area in which a game ball can be entered based on the execution of the first advantageous game, and the second advantageous game executing means moves the game ball into the ball entry area. The second advantageous game is executed based on the entry of a ball, and the game state ending means performs the first advantageous game of the first type for the first number of times in the first game state of 1. The first game state is terminated based on the execution, and the first advantageous game of the second type is executed a second number of times less than the first number of times in the first game state of 1. game machine BN3, characterized in that the game machine BN3 terminates the first game state.

According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN1 or BN2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game executing means based on the game ball entering the ball entry area that becomes possible to enter the ball based on the execution of the first advantageous game. . While the first game state is terminated by the game state termination means based on the first number of executions of the first advantageous game of the first type in the one first game state, the first game state is terminated in the one first game state. The first game state is terminated by the game state termination means based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the two types is executed a second number of times smaller than the first number of times.

As a result, during the execution of the first advantageous game, the game ball is entered into the ball entry area and the second advantageous game is executed, or the specific condition is established without entering the ball into the ball entry area. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a playability that allows the user to choose whether to expect it.

In the gaming machine BN3, the game state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. game machine BN4, wherein the first game state is determined as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game when the second advantageous game is finished.

According to the gaming machine BN4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN3, the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. In this case, since the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the second advantageous game is completed, it is determined whether the first advantageous game is the first type or the second type. Select whether to make a more serious prediction and execute the second advantageous game by entering the game ball into the ball entry area, or to expect that the specific condition is established without entering the ball into the ball entry area. can be made Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BN4, the game state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. The game machine BN5 is characterized in that the second game state is set as the game state after the second advantageous game is finished when the second advantageous game is finished.

According to the gaming machine BN5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN4, the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. In this case, the game state setting means sets the second game state as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game, so if the first advantageous game is of the first type, the ball is not allowed to enter the ball entry area. While there is a possibility that the specific condition is satisfied and the game state shifts to the second game state, if it is the second type, the second advantageous game is executed by entering the ball into the ball entering area, and furthermore, the second game state is executed. 2 It shifts to a game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of the first advantageous game can be predicted more seriously.

In the gaming machine BN5, a common specific performance is executed regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determination means based on the first determination result determined by the determination means. A game machine BN6 characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a game.

According to the game machine BN6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BN5, based on the first determination result in the determination by the determination means, regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determination means Since the common specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, it becomes difficult to distinguish from the effect whether it is the first type or the second type. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more seriously predict whether it is the first type or the second type.

In any one of the game machines BN1 to BN6, the game state setting means is configured to set the first game state, the second game state, and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state. 1 game state is set from among a plurality of game states including at least 3 game states, and the game state setting means sets the game state after the second advantageous game executed in the first game state is completed. As a state, the third game state is set at a first rate, and as a game state after the second advantageous game executed in the second game state is completed, a second rate higher than the first rate is set. A game machine BN7 characterized in that the third game state is set at a ratio of .

According to the gaming machine BN7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BN1 to BN6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state setting means selects one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state. A game state is set. As a game state after the second advantageous game executed in the first game state is completed, the game state setting means sets the third game state at the first ratio, while the game state is executed in the second game state. As a game state after the second advantageous game ends, a third game state is set by the game state setting means at a second rate higher than the first rate.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the second advantageous game will be executed in the second game state.

In the gaming machine BN7, the game state setting means sets the third rate higher than the first rate as the game state after the second advantageous game executed in the third game state ends. 3. A game machine BN8 characterized in that it sets three game states.

According to the gaming machine BN8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN7, as the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state is finished, the gaming state setting means sets the second rate higher than the first rate. Since the third game state is set at a ratio of 3, when the third game state is reached, the second advantageous game and the third game state are likely to be repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction when the third game state is entered.

A game machine BN9 characterized in that, in the game machine BN8, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the game machine BN9, in addition to the effects of the game machine BN8, the second ratio tooth is configured at a higher ratio than the third ratio, so when the second game state is entered, the second advantageous game There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the will be executed.

<Characteristic CA group> (invincible zone for fall lottery)
acquisition means capable of acquiring information; storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means; a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by means of a display means; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; state setting means capable of setting at least one of a game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state; and pre-determining means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the game machine, the game machine having effect execution means capable of executing effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, The effect execution means is configured to be capable of executing a period effect corresponding to a specific period in which the second game state is continuously set in accordance with the result of the determination by the preliminary determination means. A gaming machine CA1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. By setting a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as increasing the lottery probability, interest in switching to a game state that is advantageous to the player, and that the advantageous game state is continuously set. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, by utilizing the configuration in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, the game state advantageous to the player is continuously set at an accurate and early timing by the player, or the game state is disadvantageous. There has been a demand for a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of a game by suggesting information regarding whether to switch to a game state. In order to solve the above-described problems, the present invention first determines a period in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, and executes an effect based on information regarding the determination result, thereby improving the game. To provide a game machine capable of improving interest.

According to the gaming machine CA1, the period performance corresponding to the specific period is executed according to the determination result of the preliminary determination means, so the period during which the second game state is set in which the player is favored by the period performance to be executed is set. can be identified, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine CA1, the period effect is executed corresponding to the period during which the identification information of 1 is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine CA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CA1, the period effect is executed corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information of 1, so the period of dynamic display of the identification information of 1 is The contents of the period production are valid (for example, when the period production that suggests that the setting of the second game state is continued is executed, the identification information being executed is displayed dynamically until the end of the period , the fact that the second game state will continue to be set can be recognized at an early stage).

In the gaming machine CA1 or CA2, the state setting means, when the second game state is set, is based on the determination result of the determination means, before dynamic display of the identification information is started. The game machine CA3 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to set the first game state to .

In the gaming machine CA3, the second game state is set before the dynamic display of the identification information is started. There is an effect that it can make people interested in.

<Characteristic CB group> (New game characteristics with the number of normal map counts)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and first information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. and second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and acquired storage means for respectively storing the first information and the second information; performing a first determination based on the first information stored in the storage means; A first privilege can be given based on a determination means capable of performing determination and the result of the first determination by the determination means is a specific first determination result, and the result of the second determination is a specific A special entry ball into which a game ball can be entered in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting the second privilege different from the first privilege based on the second determination result. means, and channel switching means capable of switching a channel through which game balls flow down according to the number of game balls entering the specific ball entering means, wherein the channel switching means is A first guidance state for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering means and a second guidance state for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering means can be set by switching the flow path. A gaming machine CB1 characterized in that it has a

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. A game machine is provided with a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter on the surface of the game board, and in which the ball entrances are differentiated according to the flow path through which the game balls flow down, thereby improving the interest of the game. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2013-233181). In such a game machine, there is a problem that the flow path through which the game ball flows is likely to be constant, and the game becomes monotonous. In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, by switching the flow path through which the game ball flows down according to the conditions, the ball entrance into which the game ball enters is switched, so that the entering game ball can be diversified. To provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from becoming bored with a game early by suppressing a game from becoming monotonous by making a ball enter a ball opening.

According to the gaming machine CB1, since the first induction state and the second induction state are switched according to the number of game balls that enter the specific ball entering means, the induction state is determined according to the number of game balls that enter the specific ball entering means. can be arbitrarily switched to control the ball-entering means for entering the ball, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine CB1, a variable means capable of changing between an open state in which a game ball easily enters a specific ball entering means and a closed state in which a game ball enters more difficultly than in the open state, and the variable means are provided. and variable control means for varying the state from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the variable control means is configured to change the state during a period in which a first number or more of balls can be entered into the specific ball entry means. A first opening that changes the means to the open state and a second opening that changes the variable means to the open state in a period in which it is difficult for the first number to enter the ball are configured to be switched and executed. A game machine CB2 characterized in that the game machine CB2 is

According to the gaming machine CB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CB1, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first number or more of balls can be entered and a state in which it is difficult to enter. There is an effect that the number can be controlled.

In the game machine CB2, the variable control means executes the first opening when the second induction state is set.

According to the gaming machine CB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CB2, when the second guidance state is set, it is possible to cause the specific ball-entering means to enter the first number or more of balls, and the player can There is an effect that it is possible to intentionally switch the induced state easily.

<Characteristic CC group> (General figure count number control)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and first information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. and second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and acquired storage means for respectively storing the first information and the second information; performing a first determination based on the first information stored in the storage means; A first privilege can be given based on a determination means capable of performing determination and the result of the first determination by the determination means is a specific first determination result, and the result of the second determination is a specific A special entry ball into which a game ball can be entered in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting the second privilege different from the first privilege based on the second determination result. and means for varying the acquisition rate for varying the acquisition rate between the first information and the second information according to the number of game balls that have entered the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine CC1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. A game machine is provided with a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter on the surface of the game board, and in which the ball entrances are differentiated according to the flow path through which the game balls flow down, thereby improving the interest of the game. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2013-233181). In such a game machine, there is a problem that the flow path through which the game ball flows is likely to be constant, and the game becomes monotonous. In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, by switching the flow path through which the game ball flows down according to the conditions, the ball entrance into which the game ball enters is switched, so that the entering game ball can be diversified. To provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from becoming bored with a game early by suppressing a game from becoming monotonous by making a ball enter a ball opening.

According to the gaming machine CC1, the acquisition ratio of the first information and the second information can be varied depending on the number of game balls that have entered the specific ball-entering means, so there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine CC1, a variable means capable of changing between an open state in which a game ball is easily entered into a specific ball entry means and a closed state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state, and the variable means are provided. and variable control means for varying the state from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the variable control means is configured to change the state during a period in which a first number or more of balls can be entered into the specific ball entry means. A first opening that changes the means to the open state and a second opening that changes the variable means to the open state in a period in which it is difficult for the first number to enter the ball are configured to be switched and executed. A game machine CC2 characterized in that it is a game machine CC2.

According to the gaming machine CC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CC1, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first number or more of balls can be entered and a state in which it is difficult to enter. There is an effect that the number can be controlled.

In the gaming machine CC2, the variable means also regulates entry of game balls into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means when the variable means is in the open state. Game machine CC3.

According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CC2, when the variable means is in the open state, entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the specific ball entering means and the game ball from entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means at the same time, thereby preventing the game from being difficult to understand. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic CD group> (notice development control when the pattern stops)
In order to indicate a specific determination result by means of determination means capable of executing a predetermined determination, display control means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means and then stopping the display, and display control means. and a privilege imparting means for imparting an advantageous privilege to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed, wherein the display control means dynamically changes a plurality of display modes as the identification information. an audio control means capable of outputting a sound based on the stop display of the display mode by the display control means; voice information determination means for determining the voice information output by the voice output means from a plurality of voice information; and regulation means capable of regulating the type of voice information determined by the voice information determination means. A gaming machine CD1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. In the case of announcing the result of the lottery, there has been proposed a configuration in which a plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed and the result of the lottery is notified by a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed (for example, JP-A-2013. -090780). Further, in the game machine described above, when a plurality of symbol rows that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed, a sound effect is output to add sharpness to the effect of notifying the lottery result. . However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to the repetition of monotonous sound effects, and the player gets bored with the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game by suppressing repeated output of a monotonous effect sound in the above game machine.

According to the game machine CD1, the type of voice information determined by the voice information determining means is regulated, so that the type of voice information can be easily determined as intended at the time of design, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This has the effect of suppressing defects.

The gaming machine CD1 has storage means capable of storing the voice information determined by the voice information determination means as history information, and the regulation means stores the history information corresponding to the history information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine CD2, characterized in that it regulates the type of the audio information determined by the audio information determining means.

According to the gaming machine CD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CD1, the determined voice information is stored in the storage means as history information, and the voice determined by the voice information determination means corresponding to the stored history information. By regulating the type of information, it is possible to control the audio information determined in correspondence with the history information, and it is possible to optimize the type of the determined audio information.

In the gaming machine CD2, the regulating means regulates the determination of the same type as the type of the voice information stored a predetermined number of times before.

According to the gaming machine CD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CD2, it is possible to prevent the type of the same voice information from being determined continuously, thereby suppressing the problem that the game becomes monotonous.

In the gaming machine CD1 or CD2, the gaming machine CD4 is characterized in that the regulating means regulates that the type of the voice information determined more than a specific number of times in a predetermined period is determined.

According to the gaming machine CD4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CD1 or CD2, it is possible to suppress the problem that the type of the same voice information is excessively determined in a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous. has the effect of

In any one of the game machines CD1 to CD4, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes a symbol effect in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed, and the first effect is a dynamic display of the plurality of identification symbols. The game machine CD5 is characterized in that one of the identification symbols among the symbols is stopped and displayed.

According to the game machine CD5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines CD1 to CD4, various sounds are output when the identification symbols are stopped and displayed, so that various effects can be provided when the identification symbols are stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from quickly getting bored with the game.

In any one of the game machines CD1 to CD5, there are judging means capable of executing judgment, and privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the fact that the judgment result by the judging means is a specific judgment result. , wherein the voice information determination means is capable of determining the voice information based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the game machine CD6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines CD1 to CD5, it is possible to identify the determination result by the sound output in response to the first effect. There is an effect that the game can be played with interest in the kind.

The game machine CD 6 has acquisition means capable of acquiring information, and information storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means stores the information stored in the information storage means. The game machine has prior determination means for performing preliminary determination prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means, and The game machine CD7 is characterized in that the voice information determination means is configured to be able to determine the voice information based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination means.

According to the game machine CD7, in addition to the effects of the game machine CD6, the result of the preliminary determination can be identified by the type of the output sound, so that the type of the output sound can be made interesting. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic CE group> (Pixel number switching control according to display content)
display information determination means for determining display information in a display mode to be displayed by the display means from a plurality of display information; and data amount of at least two of the display information determined by the display information determination means data amount determination means for determining corresponding information; and variable control means for varying and controlling a display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the determination result determined by the data amount determination means; The game machine CE1 is characterized in that the display information determining means determines the display information at least at two or more timings.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery results, there has been proposed a configuration in which various images and moving images are displayed on a display device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there is a problem that the display of the preview display mode at random results in an excessive amount of image data to be displayed, increasing the load on display control and the like. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game capable of reducing the control load.

According to the game machine CE1, the display mode displayed is varied and controlled based on the result determined by the data amount determining means, so that the display control can be performed in accordance with the data amount, and the control load can be reduced. There is an effect that it can be reduced.

In the game machine CE1, the data amount determination means determines whether or not a specific condition is established based on the total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in a predetermined first period. A gaming machine CE2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine CE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CE1, it is determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the data amount of the display mode to be displayed in the predetermined first period. It is possible to suppress the problem that the control load increases in.

In the gaming machine CE1 or CE2, when a determination means capable of executing a determination, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, and a privilege granting means for imparting an advantageous privilege to the player, wherein the display information determining means determines a display mode to be displayed in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Gaming machine CE3.

According to the game machine CE3, in addition to the effect of the game machine CE1 or CE2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the performance notified by the determination result cannot be stably executed due to an increase in the amount of data.

In any one of the gaming machines CE1 to CE3, the display mode displayed by the display mode determining means is set with status information corresponding to the data amount as information corresponding to the data amount. The game machine CE4 is characterized in that the data amount discriminating means discriminates whether or not the total value obtained by adding the status information is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

According to the game machine CE4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines CE1 to CE3, status information corresponding to the data amount is set, so that the data amount can be easily determined. be.

In any one of the game machines CE1 to CE4, the variable control means corresponds to the display information determined by the display information determination means such that the total amount of data in the display mode displayed on the display means is reduced. A game machine CE5 characterized in that the display mode to be displayed is variable.

According to the game machine CE5, in addition to the effects of the game machines CE1 to CE4, the amount of data is suppressed, so there is an effect that the control load can be reduced. In the gaming machine CE5, the variable control means sets a display mode in which the number of pixels of the display mode corresponding to at least one of the display information determined by the display information determination means is reduced. Gaming machine CE6.

According to the gaming machine CE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CE5, the amount of data can be suppressed by setting a smaller number of pixels in the existing display mode, and the problem of excessive display data can be suppressed. There is

<Feature CF group> (Variable production at the timing of pressing the button)
discrimination means capable of performing discrimination; display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means; and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the an effective period setting means for setting an effective period during which an operation to the operating means is valid, wherein an operational dynamic display mode in which a display mode is changed by operating means is set; A gaming machine CF1 characterized by having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the remaining period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the result of the lottery, it has been proposed that the player can directly participate in the game by changing the effect by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). However, since the method of operating the operating means, such as the timing of operating the operating means and the period of operation, etc., is not fixed by the player, there is a problem that the interest in executing the effect is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in the gaming machine described above.

According to the game machine CF1, when the operation means is operated, a specific effect can be executed based on the remaining period of the valid period, so that the valid period is set long to allow a wide range of games to be played. Even when the player is configured to be able to operate the operation means, since the specific performance is executed based on the remaining period of the effective period, it is possible to execute various performances, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine CF1, suggestion mode setting means for setting a suggestion mode suggesting that the operating means is operated a plurality of times within the valid period set by the valid period setting means, and setting by the suggestion mode setting means. an effect period setting means for setting a predetermined effect period within the valid period for the suggestive mode corresponding to one operation performed; and a remaining period of the effect period set by the effect period setting means. and an informing means capable of informing of the remaining period mode indicating the game machine CF2.

According to the gaming machine CF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CF1, it is possible to make the player feel as if the effective period is set for each of the multiple operations, so that the multiple operations can be performed. There is an effect that the execution can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine CF1 or CF2, the identification information is configured by combining a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the plurality of identification symbols to indicate the determination result. The plurality of identification patterns are stopped by combination, and the dynamic display mode is displayed in a specific mode by operating the operating means for at least some of the plurality of identification patterns. When the remaining period of time is equal to or longer than a predetermined period of time as the specific effect, the specific effect executing means executes the identification information that is displayed dynamically. The gaming machine CF3 is characterized by executing an effect corresponding to the information reflected during the dynamic display of the identification information whose dynamic display is started.

According to the game machine CF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine CF1 or CF2, by operating the operation means so that the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the effects are reflected during the dynamic display after the dynamic display in question. There is an effect that it is possible to motivate the user to operate the operation means in a short period of time by executing the effect.

<Characteristic CG group> (3 times operation)
It has operation means that can be operated by a player, and operation effect setting means that can set an operation effect that changes the effect mode based on the operation of the operation means, and is set by the operation effect setting means. A plurality of operation presentations are set for the operation presentations that can be performed, in which the presentation mode is varied in accordance with the number of operations of the operation means, and when the plurality of operation presentations are set, A game machine CG1 characterized in that a number of suggestion modes corresponding to the number of operations set in the operation presentation are displayed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the result of the lottery, it has been proposed that the player can directly participate in the game by changing the effect by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). However, there is a problem that the interest is reduced in executing the performance based on the operation of the operating means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine CG1, when a multi-operation presentation is set, the number of suggestion modes corresponding to the number of operations is displayed, thereby providing an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine CG1, valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid when the multiple operation effect is set, and within the valid period set by the valid period setting means and variable display means for setting a variable display mode that is variably displayed corresponding to the decrease of the effective period for each of the suggested modes.

According to the game machine CG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine CG1, the variable display mode makes it seem as if the effective period is set for each suggestive mode, and the timing of each operation is variably displayed. There is an effect that the operation can be performed according to the mode, and the timing at which the operation effect is displayed can be suitably set.

In the game machine CG1 or CG2, the game machine CG3 is characterized in that the multiple operation effect is set in advance to be executed according to the number of times the operation means is operated.

According to the game machine CG3, in addition to the effect of the game machine CG1 or CG2, there is an effect that it is not necessary to individually set the operation effect for multiple times, and the control for multiple operations can be easily performed.

<Characteristic CH group> (Cosmo up)
acquisition means capable of acquiring information; storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored by the storage means; display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the display means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and dynamic display means for dynamic display by the dynamic display means A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. and privilege giving means for granting, effect executing means capable of executing a effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and specific information based on the specific effect executed by the effect executing means. A game machine CH1, characterized by having a specific information storage means for storing and a special effect determination means for determining a special effect based on the specific information stored in the specific storage means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a notice effect suggesting the lottery result in advance is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in the gaming machine described above.

According to the game machine CH1, since the special performance is determined based on the specific information stored when the specific performance is executed, the performance to be executed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific performance. There is an effect that a different game can be provided for each player and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine CH1, suggesting means for suggesting a suggestive mode corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, and the special effect determined by the special effect determining means are executed. and suggestion mode changing means for varying the suggestion mode, and when the suggestion mode is a predetermined mode, the residual dynamic display period of the identification information is configured to be longer than or equal to the predetermined period. The gaming machine CH2 is characterized in that the game machine CH2 is

According to the gaming machine CH2, it is possible to discriminate that the identification information is not displayed in the mode for indicating the determination result by the suggestive mode, and it is possible to suppress the problem of overlooking the determination result.

The game machine CH1 or CH2 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effects determined by the special effect determination means are composed of operation effects that change the effect mode by operating the operation means. and wherein the number of times the operation effect is executed is set according to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

According to the game machine CH3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine CH1 or CH2, the number of times the operation effect is executed is set by the stored specific information, so the number of times the player can operate the operation means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of misunderstanding.

<Characteristic CI group> (Pseudo light guide plate effect)
In a game machine having display means and display control means capable of displaying a first display mode to a second display mode different from the first display mode, the second display mode is the first display mode. On the other hand, it is configured in a display mode in which the focus position is variable, and the display control means is configured to be able to display the first display mode and the second display mode in an overlapping manner. A gaming machine CI1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. After the patterns for showing the lottery results are variably displayed on the display means, the combinations of the patterns showing the lottery results are stop-displayed, and during the variably displayed, an advance notice performance or the like suggesting the lottery results is executed. have been proposed (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). In such a game machine, there has been proposed a game machine in which a driving object or a light-emitting device such as an LED is arranged on a game board or the like and operated in association with a display mode to further enhance the interest of the game. With such a configuration, the cost of the gaming machine becomes excessive, and there is a need for a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game while reducing the cost. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in order to solve the above-described problems.

According to the game machine CI1, the display mode with the variable focal position is superimposed and displayed, so that the player can see the display mode with a sense of perspective, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In the game machine CI1, the game machine CI2 is characterized in that the second display mode includes a mode in which the display object displayed in the first display mode is out of focus.

According to the game machine CI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine CI1, a mode in which the displayed object is out of focus is included. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a performance with a sense of perspective.

In the game machine CI1 or CI2, the display control means displays the first display mode for a first period, and then displays the second display mode a plurality of times on the front side of the first display mode. A gaming machine CI3 characterized by being configured to be able to repeatedly display a second state of non-display.

According to the game machine CI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine CI1 or CI2, the display and non-display of the second display mode on the front side of the first display mode are repeated in a short period of time, resulting in an afterimage and the first display mode. By combining the above, there is an effect that it is possible to make it seem as if the first display mode protrudes further toward the front side.

<Characteristic CJ group> (control of production using pending information and internal information)
acquisition means capable of acquiring information; storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means; display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by means of display means; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a first display means based on the determination result state setting means capable of setting at least one of a game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state; a preliminary determination means capable of executing a preliminary determination based on the information stored in a game machine, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means; and group switching means for switching the effect mode group selected by the effect selecting means. , the game machine CJ1, wherein the group switching means determines the type of the effect mode group based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, it is possible to set a game state in which winning is likely to occur and a game state in which it is difficult to win in a win/fail lottery, and to provide the player with a game with a different degree of expectation for winning according to the set game state. something is proposed. (For example, JP-A-2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, by executing an effect for making it difficult for the player to understand the currently set game state, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the game state to be advantageous to the player. However, in this case, even if a game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the player believes that a game state that is unfavorable to the player is set. I had a problem with losing motivation. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by executing an effect that can appropriately suggest a set game state.

According to the gaming machine CJ1, the effect mode group is switched based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, and the effect is executed by the effect execution means based on the switched effect mode group. Therefore, it becomes possible to predict the subsequent game situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine CJ1, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes a suggestive effect suggesting that the two game states are set, and the group switching means is the pre-determining means. It is determined whether the second game state can be switched to the first game state by the preliminary determination by, and the performance mode group in which the suggestive performance corresponding to the determination result can be selected is determined. A gaming machine CJ2 characterized by:

According to the game machine CJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine CJ1, based on the effect mode group corresponding to the determination by the advance determination means that the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state. Since an effect can be executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to predict the currently set game state or the game state to be set later based on the effect mode of the effect to be executed. . In addition, since the effect mode group is switched based on the advance determination information indicating that the game state is actually changed, highly reliable effect can be executed for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect to be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine CJ1 or CJ2, the state setting means switches and sets to the first game state at the start of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the specific determination result. Machine CJ3.

According to the game machine CJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine CJ1 or CJ2, the state setting means sets the switching from the second game state to the first game state at the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the switching timing of the state.

In any of the game machines CJ1 to CJ3, based on the setting of the second game state, the identification information for indicating the discrimination result is displayed at least a predetermined number of times until the discrimination result is displayed, Advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period that is advantageous to the player, and the suggestive mode is a game state set by the state setting means at the time when the period until the determination of the predetermined number of times is displayed has passed. A gaming machine CJ4 characterized by suggesting

According to the game machine CJ4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines CJ1 to CJ3, the suggestion mode is displayed based on the progress of the set advantageous period. Display of the mode can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play the game from dropping immediately, and to improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic CK group> (Meter sound control)
In a gaming machine having operation means operable by a player and operation effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect based on the operation of the operation means, the operation effect execution means operates during a specific period of time. and, when the operation means is operated, a specific operation effect can be executed, and the specific operation effect corresponds to the period during which the operation means is operated during the specific period. A game machine CK1 characterized in that it is configured to execute different modes by

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There was something for the players to enjoy. Further, in the game machine described above, there is a game machine that allows the player to operate the operation means in order to further enhance the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a game machine, the same operation effect is executed regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine CK1, when the operation means is operated, the specific operation effect can be executed in a different mode corresponding to the period during which the operation means is operated. There is an effect that the variation of performance can be increased and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CK1, the specific operation effect is at least a display effect in which the display mode is changed in stages corresponding to the period during which the operation means is operated, and an audio effect corresponding to the changed display effect. A game machine CK2 characterized in that it is configured.

According to the game machine CK2, in addition to the effects of the game machine CK1, a display effect in which the display mode is changed in stages as the specific operation effect and a sound effect corresponding to the changed display effect are executed. There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine CK2, the sound presentation is such that when the operation means is operated, a reproduction process is executed in which reproduction of corresponding sound data is started. The reproduction is continued for a predetermined reproduction period, or the reproduction of the audio data is stopped or the audio is stopped when a predetermined operation is performed by the operation means before the reproduction period is continued. A game machine CK3 characterized in that a process of stopping the output of is executed.

According to the gaming machine CK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CK2, the audio effect of reproducing the audio data is stopped when the operation means is operated in advance. It is possible to execute an effect with a sense of unity, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CK3, after the processing of stopping the reproduction of the audio data or stopping the output of the audio is executed, the reproduction is stopped or the output of the audio is stopped based on the operation of the operation means. A gaming machine CK4 characterized in that the reproduction is started or the voice is output from the position where the player was playing.

According to the gaming machine CK4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CK3, the stopped reproduction of the audio data can be resumed based on the operation of the operation means, so that the display effect and the audio effect can be combined to create a sense of unity. There is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect with a feeling and improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic CL group> (fluctuation straddling voice control)
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating determination results of the determination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and A dynamic display period determination means dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a privilege capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. game execution means, a display effect execution means capable of executing a display effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a display effect execution means during a period in which the display effect is executed an audio effect executing means capable of executing an audio effect, wherein the display effect executing means performs one display effect during a period until the identification information indicating the determination result of a predetermined number of times is stopped and displayed. A specific display effect to be executed can be executed, and the audio effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing a specific audio effect corresponding to a period during which the specific display effect is executed, and the specific audio effect can be executed. When executed, the reproduction of the specific sound effect is stopped based on the stop display of the identification information, and the processing of restarting in correspondence with the start of the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. A gaming machine CL1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. (For example, JP-A-2013-090780). Furthermore, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is one that is configured to be able to execute a specific effect in a specific period until a predetermined number of win-or-fail lotteries are executed. is provided to the player to enhance the production effect. However, in the above-described gaming machine, there are cases where the winning lottery is executed without interruption during the specific period, and there are cases where the winning lottery is interrupted during the specific period. There is a problem that it is impossible to give a sense of unity with the performance executed in the first stage, and it is impossible to enhance the performance effect. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving interest by enhancing the performance effect in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine CL1, the specific sound effect executed during the period in which the specific display effect is executed is stopped based on the stop display of the identification information, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started. , it is possible to give a sense of unity between the specific display effect and the specific sound effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine CL1, the sound effect executing means is configured to output a special sound when stopping the reproduction of the specific sound effect. According to the game machine CL2, in addition to the effects of the game machine CL1, when stopping the specific sound effect, a special sound is output. When the period until the start is short, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the specific sound effect is interrupted, and the effect of enhancing the effect of the effect can be obtained.

It is preferable that the special sound output by the sound effect executing means is at least one that continues to be output until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the identification information was stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily think that the specific sound effect is continuously executed across the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times.

In the game machine CL1 or CL2, the game machine CL3 is characterized in that the specific display effect is a preset effect corresponding to the end of the dynamic display period of the identification information of one.

According to the game machine CL3, in addition to the effects of the game machine CL1 or CL2, an effect corresponding to the end of the dynamic display period of the identification information 1 is set in advance as the specific display effect. There is an effect that the production corresponding to the end can be surely executed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines CL1 to CL3, the display effect executing means displays the specific display effect based on the suspension of the dynamic display of the identification information during the period in which the specific display effect is executed. A gaming machine CL4 characterized in that it interrupts.

According to the gaming machine CL4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines CL1 to CL3, the display of the specific display effect can be interrupted based on the suspension of the dynamic display of the identification information. It is possible to execute an effect with a sense of unity between the effect and the specific sound effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery based on winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a winning. Among such gaming machines, there are those that are capable of executing a plurality of games with different degrees of advantage for the player, and are intended to increase the interest of the player in the game by allowing the player to play a game aiming at winning in various games. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2001-038007).
However, further enhancement of interest is required.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 includes ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, and acquisition means for acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means. a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; and determination by the determination means Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result on a display means; a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means prior to determination by the determination means. and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the determination result of the preliminary determining means, and the effect executing means is based on a plurality of pieces of information stored in the storage means. It is configured to be able to execute an effect based on the determination result by the pre-article determination means.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, there is provided a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, and the acquisition means. Storage means capable of storing information acquired by the means; Discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means; and To indicate discrimination results by the discrimination means dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and a privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game, and pre-determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the result of determination by the preliminary determination means, wherein the effect execution means is the preliminary determination means based on a plurality of pieces of information stored in the storage means. It is configured to be able to execute an effect based on the determination result.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)

Claims (1)

a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area;
a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means;
Acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is satisfied;
a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A game machine having a determination means capable of performing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied,
means capable of generating a specific game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result;
a second ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means and different from the first ball-entering means;
A first position that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a second position that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the first position. a displacement means displaceable between
a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position; and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the first position to the second position. displacement control, and displacement control means capable of at least
The displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and the displacement means is positioned at the first position by the first displacement control. configured to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation where the
The game machine is
A predetermined value is awarded to a player when a game ball enters at least the first ball entering means,
A first mode based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific game state, and a third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that at least

Images